Dodge Charger PDF

GROUP TAB LOCATOR
Introduction
0 Lubrication & Maintenance
2 Suspension
3 Differential & Driveline
4 Vehicle Quick Reference
5 Brakes
7 Cooling
8A Audio/Video
8B Chime/Buzzer
8C Clock
8E Electronic Control Modules
8F Engine Systems
8G Heated Systems
8H Horn
8I Ignition Control
8J Instrument Cluster
8L Lamps
8M Message Systems
8N Power Systems
8O Restraints
8P Speed Control
8Q Vehicle Theft Security
8R Wipers/Washers
8T Navigation/Telecommunication
8W Wiring
9 Engine
11 Exhaust System
13 Frame & Bumpers
14 Fuel System
19 Steering
21 Automatic Transmission
22 Tires/Wheels
23 Body
24 Heating & Air Conditioning
25 Emissions Control
Component and System Index
DTC Index
Service Manual Comment Forms (Rear of Manual)

LX INTRODUCTION 1
INTRODUCTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
BODY CODE PLATE METRIC SYSTEM

DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
FASTENER IDENTIFICATION TORQUE REFERENCES
FASTENER USAGE VECI LABEL
DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
INTERNATIONAL SYMBOLS VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL
MANUFACTURE PLATE
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2 INTRODUCTION LX
BODY CODE PLATE

DESCRIPTION
LOCATION AND DECODING
The Body Code Plate is located in the engine com-

partment on the front right side shock tower mounting
front panel.
BODY CODE PLATE
1 - PRIMARY PAINT
2 - SECONDARY PAINT
3 - VINYL ROOF
4 - VEHICLE ORDER NUMBER
5 - CAR LINE SHELL
6 - PAINT PROCEDURE
7 - ENGINE
8 - TRIM
9 - TRANSMISSION
10 - MARKET
11 - VIN
BODY CODE PLATE LINE 3

There are seven lines of information on the body code
plate. Lines 4, 5, 6, and 7 are not used to define ser-
vice information. Information reads from left to right,
starting with line 3 in the center of the plate to line 1
at the bottom of the plate.
DIGITS 1, 2, AND 3
Paint procedure
DIGIT 4
Open Space
DIGITS 5 THROUGH 7
Primary Paint
DIGIT 8 AND 9
Open Space
LX INTRODUCTION 3
DIGITS 10 THROUGH 12
Secondary Paint
DIGIT 13 AND 14
Open Space
DIGITS 15 THROUGH 18
Interior Trim Code
DIGIT 19
Open Space
DIGITS 20, 21, AND 22
Engine Code
EER = 2.7 L, V-6 Cylinder, 24 Valve, DOHC, Gasoline, Aluminum Block (MPI)
EGG = 3.5 L, V -6 Cylinder, 24 Valve, High Output, Gasoline, Aluminum Block (MPI)
ESF = 6.1 L, V-8 Cylinder, HEMI, Gasoline (SMPI)
EZB = 5.7 L, V-8 Cylinder, HEMI, Multi-Displacement, Gasoline,
DIGIT 23
Open Space

DIGITS 1 THROUGH 12
Vehicle Order Number
DIGITS 13, THROUGH 15
Vinyl Roof Code
DIGITS 16 AND 17
Open space
DIGITS 18 AND 19
Vehicle Shell Line

LX
DIGITS 20
Carline
C = Chrysler
D = Dodge
DIGIT 21
Price Class
E = Economy
H = High Line
L = Low Line
M = Medium
4 INTRODUCTION LX
P = Premium
S = Sport
X = Special
DIGITS 22 AND 23
Body Type
48 = Four Door Sedan Tall
49 =Hatchback Tall

DIGITS 1, 2, AND 3
Transmission Codes
DG6 = 4-Speed Electronic Automatic Transmission
DGJ = 5-Speed Automatic Transmission
DIGIT 4
Open Space
DIGIT 5
Market Code
C = Canada
B = International
M = Mexico
U = United States
DIGIT 6
Open Space
DIGITS 7 THROUGH 23
Vehicle Identification Number

(Refer to VEHICLE DATA/VEHICLE INFORMATION/VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER - DESCRIPTION)
for proper breakdown of VIN code.
IF TWO BODY CODE PLATES ARE REQUIRED

The last code shown on either plate will be followed by END. When two plates are required, the last code space on
the first plate will indicate (CTD)
When a second plate is required, the first four spaces of each line will not be used due to overlap of the plates.
LX INTRODUCTION 5
FASTENER IDENTIFICATION
DESCRIPTION
The SAE bolt strength grades range from grade 2 to grade 8. The higher the grade number, the greater the bolt
strength. Identification is determined by the line marks on the top of each bolt head. The actual bolt strength grade
corresponds to the number of line marks plus 2. The most commonly used metric bolt strength classes are 9.8 and
10.9. The metric strength class identification number is imprinted on the head of the bolt. The higher the class
number, the greater the bolt strength. Some metric nuts are imprinted with a single-digit strength class on the nut
face. Refer to the Fastener Identification and Fastener Strength Charts.
Bolt Markings and Torques - Metric
Bolt Markings 8.8/8.9 10.9 12.9

Bolt Dia. Nm Ft. Lbs. Nm Ft. Lbs. Nm Ft. Lbs.
6 12 105* 14 120* 16 12
8 25 250* 32 23 38 28
10 54 40 60 45 74 55
12 95 70 108 80 135 100
14 155 115 175 130 216 160
16 243 180 324 210 324 240
* Inch Lbs.
Bolt Markings and Torques - U. S. Customary
Bolt Markings Grade 5 Grade 8

Bolt Dia. Nm Ft. Lbs Nm Ft. Lbs
1/4 - 20 10 95* 14 125*
1/4 - 28 10 95* 17 150*
5/16 - 18 22 200* 30 270*
5/16 - 24 26 240* 33 300*
3/8 - 16 40 30 55 40
3/8 - 24 47 35 60 45
7/16 - 14 68 50 88 65
7/16 - 20 74 55 95 70
1/2 - 13 101 75 135 100
1/2 -20 115 85 150 110
9/16 - 12 135 105 182 135
9/16 - 18 155 115 202 150
5/8 - 11 202 150 263 195
5/8 - 18 215 160 284 210
3/4 - 10 230 170 297 220
3/4 - 16 236 175 304 225
7/8 - 14 405 300 540 400
* Inch Lbs.
6 INTRODUCTION LX
LX INTRODUCTION 7
FASTENER USAGE
DESCRIPTION
DESCRIPTION
WARNING: Use of an incorrect fastener may result in component damage or personal injury.
Fasteners and torque specifications references in this Service Manual are identified in metric and SAE format.
During any maintenance or repair procedures, it is important to salvage all fasteners (nuts, bolts, etc.) for reassem-
bly. If the fastener is not salvageable, a fastener of equivalent specification must be used.
DESCRIPTION
Most stripped threaded holes can be repaired using a HelicoilT. Follow the vehicle or HelicoilT recommendations for
application and repair procedures.
8 INTRODUCTION LX
INTERNATIONAL SYMBOLS
DESCRIPTION
The graphic symbols illustrated in the following International Control and Display Symbols Chart are used to identify
various instrument controls. The symbols correspond to the controls and displays that are located on the instrument
panel.
LX INTRODUCTION 9
MANUFACTURE PLATE
DESCRIPTION
The Manufacturer Plate is located in the engine com-
partment on the passenger side rear corner of the
hood. The plate contains five lines of information:
1. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
2. Gross Vehicle Mass (GVM)
3. Gross Train Mass (GTM)
4. Gross Front Axle Rating (GFAR)
5. Gross Rear Axle Rating (GRAR)
10 INTRODUCTION LX
METRIC SYSTEM
DESCRIPTION
LX INTRODUCTION 11
The metric system is based on quantities of one, ten, one hundred, one thousand and one million.
The following chart will assist in converting metric units to equivalent English and SAE units, or vise versa.
CONVERSION FORMULAS AND EQUIVALENT VALUES
MULTIPLY BY TO GET MULTIPLY BY TO GET

in-lbs x = Newton Meters Nm x 8.851 = in-lbs
0.11298 (Nm)
ft-lbs x = Newton Meters Nm x = ft-lbs
1.3558 (Nm) 0.7376
Inches Hg (60 F) x 3.377 = Kilopascals (kPa) kPa x = Inches Hg
0.2961
psi x 6.895 = Kilopascals (kPa) kPa x 0.145 = psi
Inches x 25.4 = Millimeters (mm) mm x = Inches
0.03937
Feet x = Meters (M) M x 3.281 = Feet
0.3048
Yards x = Meters M x = Yards
0.9144 1.0936
mph x = Kilometers/Hr. Km/h x = mph
1.6093 (Km/h) 0.6214
Feet/Sec x = Meters/Sec (M/S) M/S x 3.281 = Feet/Sec
0.3048
mph x = Meters/Sec (M/S) M/S x 2.237 = mph
0.4470
Kilometers/Hr. (Km/h) x = Meters/Sec (M/S) M/S x 3.600 Kilometers/Hr. (Km/h)
0.27778
COMMON METRIC EQUIVALENTS
1 inch = 25 Millimeters 1 Cubic Inch = 16 Cubic Centimeters

1 Foot = 0.3 Meter 1 Cubic Foot = 0.03 Cubic Meter
1 Yard = 0.9 Meter 1 Cubic Yard = 0.8 Cubic Meter
1 Mile = 1.6 Kilometers
Refer to the Metric Conversion Chart to convert torque values listed in metric Newton- meters (Nm). Also, use the
chart to convert between millimeters (mm) and inches (in.).
12 INTRODUCTION LX
TORQUE REFERENCES
DESCRIPTION
Individual Torque Charts appear within many or the Groups. Refer to the Standard Torque Specifications Chart for
torque references not listed in the individual torque charts.
LX INTRODUCTION 13
VECI LABEL
DESCRIPTION
All vehicles are equipped with a combined VECI label. This label is located in the engine compartment.
The VECI label contains the following:
Engine family and displacement
Evaporative family
Emission control system schematic
Certification application
Engine timing specifications (if adjustable)
Idle speeds (if adjustable)
Spark plug and gap
The label also contains an engine vacuum schematic. There are unique labels for vehicles built for sale in the state
of California and the country of Canada. Canadian labels are written in both the English and French languages.
These labels are permanently attached and cannot be removed without defacing information and destroying label.
14 INTRODUCTION LX
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

DESCRIPTION
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) plate is
attached to the top left side of the instrument panel.
The VIN contains 17 characters that provide data con-
cerning the vehicle. Refer to the decoding chart to
determine the identification of a vehicle.
To protect the consumer from theft and possible fraud
the manufacturer is required to include a Check Digit
at the ninth position of the Vehicle Identification Num-
ber. The check digit is used by the manufacturer and
government agencies to verify the authenticity of the
vehicle and official documentation. The formula to use
the check digit is not released to the general public.
VIN DECODING INFORMATION
POSITION INTERPRETATION CODE = DESCRIPTION
1 = Manufactured by
1 Country of Origin
DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc.
A = Chrysler (Hatchback)
2 Make B = Dodge (Sedan)

C = Chrysler (Sedan)
D = Dodge (Hatchback)
3 = Passenger Car
4 = Multipurpose Passenger Vehicle

Without Side Air Bags Sales Code
3 Vehicle Type (CGS) (Hatchback)
With Side Air Bags Sales Code
(CGS) (Hatchback)
LX INTRODUCTION 15
H = Restraint System Air bags

Front Next Generation Multi-Stage
Sales Code (CG1) Witht Side Air
Bags Sales Code (CGS)
J = Restraint System Air Bags Front

Next Generation Multi Stage Sales
Code (CG1) Without Side Air Bags
Sales Code (CGS)
K = Restraint System Advanced
Multistages Front Air Bags Sales
Restraint System Code (CG3) With Side Air Bags
Sales Code (CGS)
L = Restraint System Advanced
4 Multistage Front Air Bags Sales
Code (CG3) With Side Air Bags
Sales Code (CGS)
Without Side Air Bags Sales Code
(CGS) (Hatchback)
8= Multipurpose Passenger Vehicle
With Side Air Bags Sales Code
(CGS) (Hatchback)
E = 3001- 4000 lbs. (1361- 1814)

KG (Hatchback)
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
F = 4001- 5000 lbs. (1815 - 2267)
KG (Hatchback)
A = 300 / 300C / SRT-8/ Charger

(RWD) (LWD)
K = 300 / 300C (AWD) (LWD)

5 Vehicle Line
R = 300C/ SRT-8 (RWD) (RHD)
V = 300 Touring / Magnum (RWD)
Z = 300 Touring Magnum (AWD)
4 - H High Line
5 = P Premium
6 = S Sport
7 = X Special
6 Series B = 4 Speed Automatic, Sales
Code (DG6)
B = 4 Speed Automatic VLP, Sales
Code (DGV)
E = 5 Speed Automatic, Sales
Code (DGJ)
3 = 4 Door Sedan Tall

7 Body Style
7 = Hatchback Tall
16 INTRODUCTION LX
D = 3.0L V-6 cyl. Turbo Diesel

Sales Code (EXL)
G = 3.5L V-6 cyl. High Output 24

Valve MPI Gasoline Sales Code
(EGG)
H = 5.7L V-8 cyl. HEMI Multiple
Displacement Gasoline Sales Code
(EZB)
M = 3.0L V6 CYL 24 Valve Turbo
Diesel Sales Code (EXL)
(Hatchback)
R = 2.7L V6 Cyl. 24V DOHC
Gasoline (MPI) Sales Code (EER)
8 Engine T = 2.7L V6 CYL 24 ValveDOHC
Gasoline MPI Sales Code (EER)
(Hatchback)
V = 3.5l V6 CYL 24 Valve High
Output Gasoline, Sales Code (EZB)
(Hatchback)
W= 6.1L V8 CYL SRT HEMI
Gasoline SMPI, Sales Code (ESF)
2 = 5.7L V8 CYL HEMI Multiple
Displacement Gasoline Sales Code
( EZB) (Hatchback)
3 = 6.1L V8 CYL SRT HEMI
Gasoline SMPI, Sales Code (ESF)
(Hatchback)
9 Check Digit 0 through 9 or X
10 Model Year 6 = 2006
11 Assembly Plant H = Brampton Assembly
Six Digit Number Assigned By

12 Through 17 Vehicle Build Sequence
Assembly Plant
LX INTRODUCTION 17
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL

DESCRIPTION
A vehicle certification label is attached to every
DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicle. The label certi-
fies that the vehicle conforms to all applicable Federal
Motor Vehicle Standards. The label also lists:
Month and year of vehicle manufacture.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The gross
front and rear axle weight ratings (GAWRs) are
based on a minimum rim size and maximum cold
tire inflation pressure.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
Type of vehicle.
Type of rear wheels.
Bar code.
Month, Day and Hour (MDH) of final assembly.
Paint and Trim codes.
Country of origin.
The label is located on the driver-side door shut-face.
LX LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE 0-1
LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
INTERNATIONAL SYMBOLS FLUID CAPACITIES

DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 SPECIFICATIONS - FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . 10
PARTS AND LUBRICANT RECOMMENDATIONS FLUID FILL AND CHECK LOCATIONS
DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
LUBRICANT RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 LUBRICATION POINTS
FLUID TYPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
FLUID TYPES MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID . . . . . . . . . . . 5 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
AXLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 HOISTING
ENGINE OIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 STANDARD PROCEDURE - HOISTING . . . . . . . . . 20
ENGINE COOLANT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 JUMP STARTING
TRANSFER CASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 STANDARD PROCEDURE
BRAKE FLUID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 JUMP STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
POWER STEERING FLUID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 TOWING
OPERATION - AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION STANDARD PROCEDURE - TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . 24
FLUID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
0-2 LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE LX
INTERNATIONAL SYMBOLS
DESCRIPTION
DaimlerChrysler Corporation uses international sym-
bols to identify engine compartment lubricant and fluid
inspection and fill locations.
PARTS AND LUBRICANT RECOMMENDATIONS

DESCRIPTION
LUBRICANT RECOMMENDATIONS
SPECIALIZED LUBRICANTS AND OILS
Some maintenance or repair procedures may require the use of specialized lubricants or oils. Consult the appro-
priate sections in this manual for the correct application of these lubricants.
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Steering Gear & Linkage, Ball MoparT Multi-Purpose Lubricant NLGI Grade 2 EP, GC-LB
Joints, Prop Shafts & Yokes,
Wheel Bearings
Body
Component Fluid, Lubricant, and Genuine Part

Hinges:
Door & Hood MoparT Engine Oil
Swing Gate MoparT Multi-Purpose Lube NLGI Grade 2 EP, GC-LB
Latches: Door, Hood/Safety MoparT Multi-Purpose Lube NLGI Grade 2 EP, GC-LB
Catch, Swing Gate
Seat Regulator & Track MoparT Multi-Purpose Lube NLGI Grade 2 EP, GC-LB
Lock Cylinders MoparT Lock Cylinder Lube
FLUID TYPES
When service is required, DaimlerChrysler Corporation recommends that only MoparT brand parts, lubricants and
chemicals be used. MoparT provides the best engineered products for servicing DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehi-
cles.
Only lubricants bearing designations defined by the following organization should be used to service a Chrysler
Corporation vehicle.
Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE)
American Petroleum Institute (API)
National Lubricating Grease Institute (NLGI)
API QUALITY CLASSIFICATION

This symbol on the front of an oil container means
that the oil has been certified by the American Petro-
leum Institute (API) to meet all the lubrication require-
ments specified by DaimlerChrysler Corporation.
GEAR LUBRICANTS
SAE ratings also apply to multigrade gear lubricants. In addition, API classification defines the lubricants usage.
Such as API GL-5 and SAE 75W-90.
FLUID TYPES
DESCRIPTION
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID
NOTE: Refer to Service Procedures in this group for fluid level checking procedures.
MoparT ATF +4, Automatic Transmission Fluid is the recommended fluid for DaimlerChrysler automatic transmis-
sions.
Dexron II fluid IS NOT recommended. Clutch chatter can result from the use of improper fluid.
MoparT ATF +4, Automatic Transmission Fluid when new is red in color. The ATF is dyed red so it can be identified
from other fluids used in the vehicle such as engine oil or antifreeze. The red color is not permanent and is not an
indicator of fluid condition. As the vehicle is driven, the ATF will begin to look darker in color and may eventually
become brown. This is normal. ATF+4 also has a unique odor that may change with age. Consequently, odor and
color cannot be used to indicate the fluid condition or the need for a fluid change.
FLUID ADDITIVES
DaimlerChrysler strongly recommends against the addition of any fluids to the transmission, other than those auto-
matic transmission fluids listed above. Exceptions to this policy are the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid
leaks.
Various special additives and supplements exist that claim to improve shift feel and/or quality. These additives and
others also claim to improve converter clutch operation and inhibit overheating, oxidation, varnish, and sludge.
These claims have not been supported to the satisfaction of DaimlerChrysler and these additives must not be
used. The use of transmission sealers should also be avoided, since they may adversely affect the integrity of
transmission seals.
AXLE
NOTE: DaimlerChrysler recommends the use of MoparT lubricants. Fluid additives are not required for these
axles.
FRONT AXLE
175MM FIA - MoparT Synthetic Gear & Axle Lubricant 75W-90
REAR AXLE
198MM RII - MoparT Synthetic Gear & Axle Lubricant 75W-140
210MM RII - MoparT Synthetic Gear & Axle Lubricant 75W-140
ENGINE OIL
WARNING: New or used engine oil can be irritating to the skin. Avoid prolonged or repeated skin contact
with engine oil. Contaminants in used engine oil, caused by internal combustion, can be hazardous to your
health. Thoroughly wash exposed skin with soap and water. Do not wash skin with gasoline, diesel fuel,
thinner, or solvents, health problems can result. Do not pollute, dispose of used engine oil properly. Contact
your dealer or government agency for location of collection center in your area.
When service is required, DaimlerChrysler Corporation recommends that only MoparT brand parts, lubricants and
chemicals be used. MoparT provides the best engineered products for servicing DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehi-
cles.
Only lubricants bearing designations defined by the following organization should be used.
Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE)
American Petroleum Institute (API)
National Lubricating Grease Institute (NLGI)
Association des Constructeurs Europens d Automobiles (European Automobile Manufacturers Association)

(ACEA)
API SERVICE GRADE CERTIFIED

Use an engine oil that is API Certified. MoparT pro-
vides engine oils, meeting Material Standard
MS-6395, that meet or exceed this requirement.
SAE VISCOSITY
SAE 5W-30 engine oils are recomended for the
2.7L and 3.5L engines, for all operating tempera-
tures. These engine oils improve low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy. The recom-
mended engine oil viscosity for vehicles equipped
with the 5.7L engine is SAE 5W-20. Vehicles with
5.7L engines equipped with Multiple Displacement
System (MDS) must use SAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to
do so may result in improper operation of the Mul-
tiple Displacement System (MDS). Refer to Multi
Displacement System under Starting and Operat-
ing for details. Refer to the engine oil filler cap for
the recommened engine oil viscosity for each
vehicle. An SAE viscosity grade is used to specify the
viscosity of engine oil. Use only engine oils with multiple viscosities such as 5W-20 or 5W-30. These are specified
with a dual SAE viscosity grade which indicates the cold-to-hot temperature viscosity range.
NOTE: For 5.7L INTERNATIONAL APPLICATIONS ONLY: SAE 5W30 may be substituted for the recom-
mended SAE 5W20 if the 5W20 viscosity is not available in the region.
NOTE: For 6.1L only Use API rated SL/CF full syn-
thetic engine oil, such as Mobil 1T. SAE 0W-40 is
recommended. Refer to the engine oil viscosity
chart for the correct SAE grade meeting
DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS-10725.
ACEA Categories
For countries that use the ACEA European Oil Categories for Service Fill Oils, use engine oils that meet the require-
ments of ACEA A1/B1, A2/B2, or A3/B3.
ENERGY CONSERVING OIL

An Energy Conserving type oil is recommended for gasoline engines. The designation of ENERGY CONSERVING
is located on the label of an engine oil container.
CONTAINER IDENTIFICATION
Standard engine oil identification notations have been

adopted to aid in the proper selection of engine oil.
The identifying notations are located on the front label
of engine oil plastic bottles and the top of engine oil
cans.
This symbol means that the oil has been certified by
the American Petroleum Institute (API). Diamler-
Chrysler only recommend API Certified engine oils
that meet the requirements of Material Standard
MS-6395. Use MoparT or an equivalent oil meeting
the specification MS-6395.
SYNTHETIC ENGINE OILS

There are a number of engine oils being promoted as
either synthetic or semi-synthetic. If you chose to use
such a product, use only those oils that meet the
American Petroleum Institute (API) and SAE viscosity
standard. Follow the service schedule that describes
your driving type.
ENGINE OIL ADDITIVES/SUPPLEMENTS

The manufacturer does not recommend the addition of any engine oil additives/supplements to the specified
engine oil. Engine oil additives/supplements should not be used to enhance engine oil performance. Engine oil addi-
tives/supplements should not be used to extend engine oil change intervals. No additive is known to be safe for
engine durability and can degrade emission components. Additives can contain undesirable materials that harm the
long term durability of engines by:
Doubling the level of Phosphorus in the engine oil. The ILSAC (International Lubricant Standard Approval
Committee) GF-2 and GF-3 standards require that engine oil contain no more than 0.10% Phosphorus to pro-
tect the vehicles emissions performance. Addition of engine oil additives/supplements can poison, from the
added sulfur and phosphorus, catalysts and hinder efforts to guarantee emissions performance to 80,000
miles.
Altering the viscosity characteristics of the engine oil so that it no longer meets the requirements of the spec-
ified viscosity grade.
Creating potential for an undesirable additive compatibility interaction in the engine crankcase. Generally it is
not desirable to mix additive packages from different suppliers in the crankcase; there have been reports of
low temperature engine failures caused by additive package incompatibility with such mixtures.
ENGINE COOLANT
WARNING: ANTIFREEZE IS AN ETHYLENE GLYCOL BASE COOLANT AND IS HARMFUL IF SWALLOWED OR
INHALED. IF SWALLOWED, DRINK TWO GLASSES OF WATER AND INDUCE VOMITING. IF INHALED, MOVE
TO FRESH AIR AREA. SEEK MEDICAL ATTENTION IMMEDIATELY. DO NOT STORE IN OPEN OR UNMARKED
CONTAINERS. WASH SKIN AND CLOTHING THOROUGHLY AFTER COMING IN CONTACT WITH ETHYLENE
GLYCOL. KEEP OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN. DISPOSE OF GLYCOL BASE COOLANT PROPERLY, CON-
TACT YOUR DEALER OR GOVERNMENT AGENCY FOR LOCATION OF COLLECTION CENTER IN YOUR
AREA.
WARNING: DO NOT OPEN A COOLING SYSTEM WHEN THE ENGINE IS AT OPERATING TEMPERATURE OR
HOT UNDER PRESSURE, PERSONAL INJURY CAN RESULT. AVOID RADIATOR COOLING FAN WHEN
ENGINE COMPARTMENT RELATED SERVICE IS PERFORMED, PERSONAL INJURY CAN RESULT.
CAUTION: Use of Propylene Glycol based coolants is not recommended, as they provide less freeze pro-
tection and less corrosion protection.
The cooling system is designed around the coolant. The coolant must accept heat from engine metal, in the cylinder
head area near the exhaust valves and engine block. Then coolant carries the heat to the radiator where the tube/
fin radiator can transfer the heat to the air.
The use of aluminum cylinder blocks, cylinder heads, and water pumps requires special corrosion protection.
MoparT Antifreeze/Coolant, 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula (MS-9769), or the equivalent ethylene glycol base coolant
with organic corrosion inhibitors (called HOAT, for Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) is recommended. This cool-
ant offers the best engine cooling without corrosion when mixed with 50% Ethylene Glycol and 50% distilled water
to obtain a freeze point of -37C (-35F). If it loses color or becomes contaminated, drain, flush, and replace with
fresh properly mixed coolant solution.
CAUTION: Do not use coolant additives that are claimed to improve engine cooling.
CAUTION: MoparT Antifreeze/Coolant, 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula (MS-9769) may not be mixed with any
other type of antifreeze. Mixing of coolants other than specified non-HOAT or other HOAT coolant, may
result in engine damage that may not be covered under the new vehicle warranty, and decreased corrosion
protection.
COOLANT PERFORMANCE
The required ethylene-glycol (antifreeze) and distilled water mixture depends upon climate and vehicle operating
conditions. The coolant performance of various mixtures follows:
Pure Distilled Water - Distilled water can absorb more heat than a mixture of water and ethylene-glycol. This is for
purpose of heat transfer only. Water also freezes at a higher temperature and allows corrosion.
100 percent Ethylene-Glycol - The corrosion inhibiting additives in ethylene-glycol need the presence of distilled
water to dissolve. Without water, additives form deposits in system. These act as insulation causing temperature to
rise to as high as 149C (300F). This temperature is hot enough to melt plastic and soften solder. The increased
temperature can result in engine detonation. In addition, 100 percent ethylene-glycol freezes at -22C (-8F).
50/50 Ethylene-Glycol and Distilled Water - Is the recommended mixture, it provides protection against freezing to
-37C (-34F). The antifreeze concentration must always be a minimum of 44 percent, year-round in all climates. If
percentage is lower, engine parts may be eroded by cavitation. Maximum protection against freezing is provided
with a 68 percent antifreeze concentration, which prevents freezing down to -67.7C (-90F). A higher percentage
will freeze at a warmer temperature. Also, a higher percentage of antifreeze can cause the engine to overheat
because specific heat of antifreeze is lower than that of water.
CAUTION: Richer antifreeze mixtures cannot be measured with normal field equipment and can cause prob-
lems associated with 100 percent ethylene-glycol.
TRANSFER CASE
Recommended lubricant for the MS140 transfer case is MoparT Transfer Case Lubricant - LX.
BRAKE FLUID
The brake fluid used in this vehicle must conform to DOT 3 specifications and SAE J1703 standards. No other type
of brake fluid is recommended or approved for usage in the vehicle brake system. Use only MoparT Brake Fluid or
equivalent from a tightly sealed container.
CAUTION: Never use reclaimed brake fluid or fluid from an container which has been left open. An open
container of brake fluid will absorb moisture from the air and contaminate the fluid.
CAUTION: Never use any type of a petroleum-based fluid in the brake hydraulic system. Use of such type
fluids will result in seal damage of the vehicle brake hydraulic system causing a failure of the vehicle brake
system. Petroleum based fluids would be items such as engine oil, transmission fluid, power steering fluid,
etc.
POWER STEERING FLUID

The recommended fluid for the power steering system is MoparT Power Steering fluid + 4 or MoparT ATF+4 Auto-
matic Transmission Fluid. Both Fluids have the same material standard specifications (MS-9602).
MoparT ATF+4 (and MoparT Power Steering fluid + 4), when new, is red in color. ATF+4 is dyed red so it can be
identified from other fluids used in the vehicle such as engine oil or antifreeze. The red color is not permanent and
is not an indicator of fluid condition. As the vehicle is driven, ATF+4 will begin to look darker in color and may
eventually become brown. THIS IS NORMAL. ATF+4 also has a unique odor that may change with age. Conse-
quently, odor and color cannot be used to indicate the fluid condition or the need for a fluid change.
The power steering system is filled-for-life at the factory and requires no regular maintenance. Although not required
at specific intervals, the fluid level may be checked periodically. Check the fluid level anytime there is a system
noise or fluid leak suspected. (Refer to 19 - STEERING/PUMP/FLUID - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
OPERATION - AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID

The automatic transmission fluid is selected based upon several qualities. The fluid must provide a high level of
protection for the internal components by providing a lubricating film between adjacent metal components. The fluid
must also be thermally stable so that it can maintain a consistent viscosity through a large temperature range. If the
viscosity stays constant through the temperature range of operation, transmission operation and shift feel will remain
consistent. Transmission fluid must also be a good conductor of heat. The fluid must absorb heat from the internal
transmission components and transfer that heat to the transmission case.
0 - 10 LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE LX
FLUID CAPACITIES
SPECIFICATIONS - FLUID CAPACITIES
DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION
Fuel Tank - V6 Engine 68 L (18 gal.)
Fuel Tank - V8 Engine 72 L (19 gal.)
Engine Oil* - 2.7L 5.7L (6.0 qts.)
Engine Oil* - 3.5L 5.7L (6.0 qts.)
Engine Oil* - 5.7L 6.6 L (7.0 qts.)
Engine Oil* - 6.1L 6.6 L (7.0 qts.)
Cooling System - 2.7L** 9.2 L (9.7 qts.)
*(includes filter)
**(includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Service Fill - NAG1 5.0 L (10.6 pts.)
Overhaul Fill - NAG1 7.7 L (16.3 pts.)L
Service Fill - 42RLE 3.8L (4.0 qts)
Overhaul Fill - 42RLE 8.3L (17.6 pts)L
LDry fill capacity. Depending on type and size of internal cooler, length and inside diameter of cooler lines, or use
of an auxiliary cooler, these figures may vary. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/AUTOMATIC/FLUID - STANDARD
PROCEDURE)
TRANSFER CASE
MS140 0.6L (1.3 pts.)
AXLE - FRONT
175MM FIA Axle 600 ml (0.63 qts)
AXLE - REAR
198 MM RII Axle 1.4L (1.5 qts.)
210 MM RII Axle 1.6L (1.7 qts.)
LX LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE 0 - 11
FLUID FILL AND CHECK LOCATIONS

DESCRIPTION
The fluid check/fill points and lubrication locations are located in each applicable Sections.
LUBRICATION POINTS
DESCRIPTION
Lubrication point locations are located in each applicable Sections.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
DESCRIPTION
For 2.7L engines with Federal Certified Emission Control Systems, and all 6.1L engines, follow Maintenance
Schedule A from 0 to 102,000 miles, or Schedule B from 0 to 105,000 miles.
For 2.7L engines with California Certified Emission Control Systems, and all 3.5L and 5.7L engines follow
Maintenance Schedule A or B from 0120,000 miles.
There are two maintenance schedules that show the required service for your vehicle.
First is Schedule B. It is for vehicles that are operated under the conditions that are listed below and at the
beginning of the schedule. Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter every 60,000 miles (96 000 km) if the
vehicle is usually operated under one or more of the conditions marked with an L.
Day or night temperatures are below 32 F (0 C).
Stop and go driving.
Extensive engine idling.
Driving in dusty conditions.
Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather, above 90 F (32 C).
Trailer towing.L
Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial service).L
Off-road or desert operation.
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first and follow schedule B of the (Maintenance Schedules( section of this manual.
NOTE: IF ANY of these apply to you then flush and replace the engine coolant every 102,000 miles (170,000
km) or 60 months, whichever comes first, and follow schedule B of the (Maintenance Schedules( section of
this manual.
NOTE: Most vehicles are operated under the conditions listed for Schedule (B(.
Second is Schedule A. It is for vehicles that are not operated under any of the conditions listed under Schedule
9B9.
Use the schedule that best describes your driving conditions. Where time and mileage are listed, follow the interval
that occurs first.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months
whichever comes first.
CAUTION: Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle.
At Each Stop for Fuel

Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while
the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the level is
at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required.
Once a Month
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage.
Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required.
Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake master cylinder, and transmission and add as needed.
Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct operation.
Check rubber seals on each side of the radiator for proper fit.
At Each Oil Change

Change the engine oil filter.
Inspect the exhaust system.
Inspect the brake hoses.
Inspect the CV joints and front and rear suspension components.
Check the coolant level, hoses, and clamps.
SCHEDULE B
Follow schedule B if you usually operate your vehicle under one or more of the following conditions. Change the
automatic transmission fluid and filter every 60,000 miles (96 000 km) if the vehicle is usually operated under one
or more of the conditions marked with an L.
Short trips of less than 10 miles (16.2 km).
Trailer towing.L
Taxi, police or delivery service (commercial services).L
If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol) fuel.
this manual.
Miles 3,000 6,000 9,000 12,000 15,000 18,000

(Kilometers) (5 000) (10 000) (15 000) (20 000) (25 000) (30 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if X X X X X X
not replaced at 3 months.
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace X X X X X
if required.*
Replace the air cleaner filter. X
Inspect the front and rear brake linings X
and rotors.
Replace the air conditioning filter. X
Rotate the tires. X X X
Miles 21,000 24,000 27,000 30,000 33,000 36,000

(Kilometers) (35 000) (40 000) (45 000) (50 000) (55 000) (60 000)
if required.*
Miles 21,000 24,000 27,000 30,000 33,000 36,000

(Kilometers) (35 000) (40 000) (45 000) (50 000) (55 000) (60 000)
Replace the spark plugs. 5.7L Engine. X
Inspect the front and rear brake linings X X
and rotors.
Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV X
valve.*
Replace the air conditioning filter. X X
Miles 39,000 42,000 45,000 48,000 51,000 54,000

(Kilometers) (65 000) (70 000) (75 000) (80 000) (85 000) (90 000)
if required.*
and rotors.
Change the rear axle fluid. X
Change the Transfer Case Fluid - All X
Wheel Drive (AWD) only
Miles 57,000 60,000 63,000 66,000 69,000 72,000

(Kilometers) (95 000) (100 000) (105 000) (110 000) (115 000) (120 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, X X X X X X
if not replaced at 3 months.
Inspect the air cleaner filter and X X X X X
replace if required.*
Replace the spark plugs. 5.7L X
Engine.
and rotors.
Check and Inspect the accessory drive X
belt and tensioner. Replace if required.
Check and replace, if necessary, the X
PCV valve.*
Change the automatic transmission X
fluid and filter.
Flush and replace engine coolant at X
60 months if not done at 102,000
miles.
Miles 75,000 78,000 81,000 84,000 87,000 90,000

(Kilometers) (125 000) (130 000) (135 000) (140 000) (145 000) (150 000)
Inspect the air cleaner filter and X X X X
Replace the air cleaner filter. X X
Engine.
and rotors.
PCV valve.*
Miles 93,000 96,000 99,000 102,000 105,000

(Kilometers) (155 000) (160 000) (165 000) (170 000) (175 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not X X X X X
replaced at 3 months.
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if X X X X
required.*
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and X
rotors.
Replace the engine timing belt 3.5L X
Engine.
Replace the spark plugs. 2.7L, 3.5L X
Engines.
Check and Inspect the accessory drive belt X
and tensioner. Replace if required.
Change the Transfer Case Fluid - All Wheel X
Drive (AWD) only
Flush and replace engine coolant at 102,000 X
miles if not done at 60 months.
Rotate the tires. X X
Miles 108,000 111,000 114,000 117,000 120,000

(Kilometers) (180 000) (185 000) (190 000) (195 000) (200 000)
required.*
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and X X
rotors.
Replace the spark plugs. 5.7L Engines. X
Miles 108,000 111,000 114,000 117,000 120,000

(Kilometers) (180 000) (185 000) (190 000) (195 000) (200 000)
valve.*
Change the automatic transmission fluid and X
filter.
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 120 X
months, if not replaced at 102,000 miles.
* This maintenance is recommended by the manufacture to the owner but is not required to maintain the emissions
warranty.
This maintenance is not required if previously replaced.
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all
receipts.
SCHEDULE A
Miles 6,000 12,000 18,000 24,000 30,000 36,000

(Kilometers) (10 000) (20 000) (30 000) (40 000) (50 000) (60 000)
[Months] [6] [12] [18] [24] [30] [36]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X X X
if required.*
and rotors.
Replace the air conditioning filter. X X X
Rotate the tires. X X X X X X
Miles 42,000 48,000 54,000 60,000 66,000 72,000

(Kilometers) (70 000) (80 000) (90 000) (100 000) (110 000) (120 000)
[Months] [42] [48] [54] [60] [66] [72]
Change engine oil and engine oil X X X X X X
filter.
Inspect the front and rear brake X X
linings and rotors.
Engine.
Check and Inspect the accessory X
drive belt and tensioner. Replace if
required.
miles.
Miles 42,000 48,000 54,000 60,000 66,000 72,000

(Kilometers) (70 000) (80 000) (90 000) (100 000) (110 000) (120 000)
[Months] [42] [48] [54] [60] [66] [72]
PCV valve. *
Miles 78,000 84,000 90,000 96,000 102,000

(Kilometers) (130 000) (140 000) (150 000) (160 000) (170 000)
[Months] [78] [84] [90] [96] [102]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X X
required.*
rotors.
Replace the spark plugs. 2.7L, 3.5L Engines. X
valve.*
Replace the engine timing belt 3.5L Engine. X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at X
102,000 miles if not done at 60 months.
Rotate the tires. X X X X X
Miles 108,000 114,000 120,000

(Kilometers) (180 000) (190 000) (200 000)
[Months] [108] [114] [120]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if required.* X X
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and rotors. X
Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV valve.* X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 120 months, if not X
replaced at 102,000 miles.
* This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer to the owner but is not required to maintain the emissions
warranty.
receipts.
WARNING:
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
HOISTING
STANDARD PROCEDURE - HOISTING
The lifting points for the sedan.
Refer to Owners Manual provided with vehicle for
proper emergency jacking procedures.
WARNING: THE HOISTING AND JACK LIFTING

POINTS PROVIDED ARE FOR A COMPLETE VEHI-
CLE. WHEN THE ENGINE OR REAR SUSPENSION
IS REMOVED FROM A VEHICLE, THE CENTER OF
GRAVITY IS ALTERED MAKING SOME HOISTING
CONDITIONS UNSTABLE. PROPERLY SUPPORT
OR SECURE VEHICLE TO HOISTING DEVICE
WHEN THESE CONDITIONS EXIST.
CAUTION: Do not position hoisting device on any

suspension component, including the front or rear
suspension crossmembers. Do not hoist on the
front and rear bumpers, the lower liftgate cross-
member, the lower radiator crossmember, or the
front engine mount.
1 - DRIVE ON LIFT
2 - SAE HOISTING SYMBOLS
2 - FRAME CONTACT LIFT (SINGLE POST)
2 - CHASSIS LIFT (DUAL LIFT)
2 - OUTBOARD LIFT (DUAL LIFT)
2 - FLOOR JACK
3 - HOISTING PADS
3 - FLOOR JACK
The lifting points for the wagon.
1 - DRIVE ON LIFT
2 - SAE HOISTING SYMBOLS
2 - FLOOR JACK
3 - HOISTING PADS
3 - FLOOR JACK
JUMP STARTING
STANDARD PROCEDURE
JUMP STARTING
WARNING: REVIEW ALL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND WARNINGS IN THE BATTERY SYSTEM SECTION OF
THE SERVICE MANUAL. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM/BATTERY - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is on. You can be hurt by the fan.
DO NOT JUMP START A FROZEN BATTERY, PERSONAL INJURY CAN RESULT.
IF EQUIPPED, DO NOT JUMP START WHEN MAINTENANCE FREE BATTERY INDICATOR DOT IS YELLOW
OR BRIGHT COLOR.
DO NOT JUMP START A VEHICLE WHEN THE BATTERY FLUID IS BELOW THE TOP OF LEAD PLATES.
DO NOT ALLOW JUMPER CABLE CLAMPS TO TOUCH EACH OTHER WHEN CONNECTED TO A
BOOSTER SOURCE.
DO NOT USE OPEN FLAME NEAR BATTERY.
REMOVE METALLIC JEWELRY WORN ON HANDS OR WRISTS TO AVOID INJURY BY ACCIDENTAL ARC-
ING OF BATTERY CURRENT.
WHEN USING A HIGH OUTPUT BOOSTING DEVICE, DO NOT ALLOW BATTERY VOLTAGE TO EXCEED 16
VOLTS. REFER TO INSTRUCTIONS PROVIDED WITH DEVICE BEING USED.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous
if done improperly, so follow this procedure carefully.
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin or clothing. Dont
lean over battery when attaching clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other. If acid splashes in eyes
or on skin, flush contaminated area immediately with large quantities of water.
A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or spark away from the
vent holes. Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output that exceeds 12
volts.
FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
CAUTION: When using another vehicle as a booster, do not allow vehicles to touch. Electrical systems can
be damaged on either vehicle.
NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the
engine compartment for jump starting.
NOTE: The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
TO JUMP START A DISABLED VEHICLE:
Wear eye protection and remove any metal jew-

elry such as watch bands or bracelets that might
make an inadvertent electrical contact.
When boost is provided by a battery in another
vehicle, park that vehicle within booster cable
reach and without letting the vehicles touch. Set
the parking brake, place the automatic transmis-
sion in PARK and turn the ignition switch to the
OFF (or LOCK) position for both vehicles.
Turn off the heater, radio and all unnecessary
electrical loads.
Connect one end of the jumper cable RED clamp
to the remote jump start positive battery post in
the engine compartment of the disabled vehicle.
Connect the other end of the jumper cable RED
clamp to the positive terminal of the booster bat-
tery.
Connect the jumper cable BLACK clamp, first to
the negative terminal of the booster battery and
then connect the other end of the jumper cable BLACK clamp to a suitable engine ground on the disabled
vehicle battery. Make sure you have a good contact on the engine ground.
DISCONNECT CABLE CLAMPS AS FOLLOWS:

Disconnect BLACK cable clamp from engine ground on disabled vehicle.
When using a booster vehicle, disconnect BLACK cable clamp from battery negative terminal. Disconnect RED
cable clamp from battery positive terminal.
Disconnect RED cable clamp from battery positive terminal on disabled vehicle.
TOWING
STANDARD PROCEDURE - TOWING
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not allow towing attachment devices to contact the fuel tank or lines, fuel leak can result.
Do not lift or tow vehicle by front or rear bumper.
Do not go under a lifted vehicle if not supported properly on safety stands.
Do not allow passengers to ride in a towed vehicle.
Use a safety chain that is independent from the towing attachment device.
CAUTION: Do not damage brake lines, exhaust system, shock absorbers, sway bars, or any other under
vehicle components when attaching towing device to vehicle.
Do not secure vehicle to towing device by the use of front or rear suspension or steering components.
Remove or secure loose or protruding objects from a damaged vehicle before towing.
Refer to state and local rules and regulations before towing a vehicle.
Do not allow weight of towed vehicle to bear on lower fascia, air dams, or spoilers.
RECOMMENDED TOWING EQUIPMENT

RWD vehicles, a flat bed towing device is recom-
mended.
AWD vehicles, a flat bed towing device is recom-
mended.
CAUTION:
Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front
with sling type towing equipment. Damage to
the front fascia and air dams will result.
The only approved method of towing is with a
flat bed truck.
Do not tow the vehicle from the rear. Damage to
the rear sheet metal, liftgate and fascia will
occur.
Do not push or tow this vehicle with another vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and transmission
may result.
GROUND CLEARANCE
CAUTION: If vehicle is towed with wheels removed, install lug nuts to retain brake drums or rotors.
be sure the has at least 100 mm (4 in.) ground clearance. If minimum ground clearance cannot be reached, use a
towing dolly. If a flat bed device is used, the approach angle should not exceed 15 degrees.
If using a wheel lift towing device, the disabled vehicle should be raised until the lifted wheels are a minimum 100
mm (4 in.) from the ground. Be sure there is at least 100 mm (4 in.) clearance between the tail pipe and the ground.
If necessary, remove the wheels from the front end of the vehicle and lower the front end closer to the ground, to
increase the ground clearance at the rear of the vehicle. Install lug nuts on wheel attaching studs to retain brake
rotors.
LOCKED VEHICLE TOWING

When a locked vehicle must be towed with the front wheels on the ground, use a towing dolly or flat bed hauler.
FLAT BED TOWING TIE DOWNS

CAUTION: Do not tie vehicle down by attaching chains or cables to suspension components or engine
mounts, damage to vehicle can result.
The vehicle can be tied to a flat bed device using the pair of front transportation slots on the bottom surface of the
rails, behind the front wheels. The rear transportation slots are on the bottom of the left bumper extension and in the
bracket extending inboard of the right bumper extension.
WITHOUT THE IGNITION KEY

Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK position. The only approved
method of towing with out the ignition key is with a flat bed truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent
damage to the vehicle.
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE (Flat towing with all four wheels on
the ground)
Your vehicle may be towed under the following conditions: The gear selector must be in NEUTRAL, the distance to
be traveled must not exceed 48 km (30) miles, and the towing speed must not exceed 48 km/h (30 mph). Exceed-
ing these towing limits may cause a transmission geartrain failure. If the transmission is not operative, or if the
vehicle is to be towed more than 48 km (30) miles, the vehicle must be transported using a flat bed or the drive
shaft disconnected at the rear axle drive flange.
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE WITH A TOW DOLLEY

The manufacture does not recommend that you tow this vehicle on a tow dolley. Vehicle damage may occur.
LX SUSPENSION 2-1
SUSPENSION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
SUSPENSION FRONT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
STANDARD PROCEDURE REAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
LUBRICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 WHEEL ALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
2-2 SUSPENSION LX
SUSPENSION
STANDARD PROCEDURE
LUBRICATION
There are no serviceable lubrication points on the front or rear suspension. The ball joints are sealed-for-life and
require no maintenance.
LX FRONT 2-3
FRONT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
FRONT ARM - LOWER CONTROL - AWD

DESCRIPTION REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
FRONT SUSPENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
FRONT SUSPENSION - SRT8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 ARM - LOWER CONTROL - RWD
SPECIFICATIONS REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
FRONT SUSPENSION FASTENER TORQUE . . . 5 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
SPECIAL TOOLS SHOCK ASSEMBLY
FRONT SUSPENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 REMOVAL
HUB AND BEARING AWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 RWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
HUB AND BEARING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
REMOVAL INSTALLATION
AWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 AWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
RWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 RWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
INSTALLATION BAR - STABILIZER
AWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 REMOVAL
RWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 AWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
KNUCKLE - AWD RWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 AWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
KNUCKLE - RWD RWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 STRUT - TENSION
DISASSEMBLY - BALL JOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
ASSEMBLY - BALL JOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 BALL JOINT - UPPER
BALL JOINT - LOWER DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING UPPER BALL JOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
LOWER BALL JOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 ARM - UPPER CONTROL
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
2-4 FRONT LX
FRONT
DESCRIPTION
FRONT SUSPENSION
The front suspension for both All-Wheel-Drive (AWD) and Rear-Wheel-Drive (RWD) vehicles is a long and short arm
design.
Each side of the AWD front suspension includes the
following components:
Hub And Bearing
Knuckle (4)
Lower Control Arm (4)
Shock Assembly (2)
Stabilizer Bar and Link (2)
Upper Control Arm (1)
Each side of the RWD front suspension includes the

following components:
Hub And Bearing
Knuckle (3)
Lower Control Arm (5)
Shock Assembly (1)
Stabilizer Bar (6) and Link (7)
Tension Strut (4)
Upper Control Arm (2)
FRONT SUSPENSION - SRT8

The SRT8 front suspension is very similar to the standard RWD front suspension but some components have been
modified for better handling and durability. Most component bushings are increased rate bushings. Service of all
front suspension components remain the same as the standard RWD components. When components differ, be
sure to use only SRT8 components on SRT8 vehicles.
LX FRONT 2-5
The front knuckle (8) for the SRT8 is different from the
standard RWD knuckle. Although similar in appear-
ance, the knuckle has been modified to accept the
larger 20 inch tire and wheel assembly. Also, the
mounting bosses for the disc brake caliper have been
moved downward to allow for mounting of the Brembo
four-piston disc brake caliper (2).
Although serviced the same, the components of the SRT8 shock assembly are unique to this vehicle. The front
shock absorber is manufactured by BilsteinT. It can be easily identified by its color. It is painted yellow. Because the
shock absorber is a mono-tube design, it is important to handle it with care and not support the shock by it tubular
housing.
The front stabilizer bar diameter has been increased for the SRT8 to the size of that used on Export vehicles, 30
mm. It is serviced in the same manner as the standard RWD bar.
SPECIFICATIONS
FRONT SUSPENSION FASTENER TORQUE
DESCRIPTION Nm Ft. Lbs. In. Lbs.

ENGINE CRADLE MOUNTING BOLTS 185 136
HUB NUT - AWD 212 157
HUB NUT - RWD 250 184
KNUCKLE DUST SHIELD SCREWS 10 7 89
LOWER CONTROL ARM CRADLE NUT 176 130
LOWER CONTROL ARM BALL JOINT 122 90
NUT - AWD
LOWER CONTROL ARM BALL JOINT 68 + 90 TURN 50 + 90 TURN
NUT - RWD
TENSION STRUT CRADLE NUT 176 130
TENSION STRUT BALL JOINT NUT 68 + 90 TURN 50 + 90 TURN
SHOCK ABSORBER CLEVIS BRACKET 174 128
LOWER BOLT - AWD
SHOCK ABSORBER CLEVIS BRACKET 61 45
PINCH BOLT - AWD
SHOCK ABSORBER LOWER 174 128
MOUNTING BOLT - RWD
SHOCK ABSORBER UPPER 27 20 239
MOUNTING NUTS
SHOCK ABSORBER SHAFT NUT 95 70
STABILIZER BAR LINK UPPER 128 95
(SHOCK) NUT
2-6 FRONT LX

STABILIZER BAR LINK LOWER NUT 128 95
STABILIZER BAR ISOLATOR RETAINER 60 44
BOLTS
STABILIZER BAR HEAT SHIELD 7 5 62
SCREWS
UPPER CONTROL ARM BALL JOINT 47 + 90 TURN 35 + 90 TURN
NUT
UPPER CONTROL ARM BODY NUTS 75 55
OUTER TIE ROD BALL JOINT NUT 85 63
TIE ROD JAM NUT 75 55
LX FRONT 2-7
SPECIAL TOOLS
FRONT SUSPENSION
Remover/Installer, Ball Joint 9320
Remover, Ball Stud 9360
Wrench, Shock Nut 9362

2-8 FRONT LX
HUB AND BEARING

DESCRIPTION
The front wheel bearing and wheel hub of this vehicle are a one piece sealed unit or hub and bearing unit type
assembly.
On All-Wheel-Drive (AWD) vehicles, the hub and bear-
ing (1) is mounted to the knuckle using four mounting
bolts and to the axle half shaft using a retaining nut.
The center of the AWD hub and bearing is splined to
match the outer joint of the axle half shaft.
On Rear-Wheel-Drive (RWD) vehicles, the hub and

bearing (1) is mounted to the center of the spindle
using a retaining nut.
All front hub and bearings have five wheel mounting
studs (3) on the hub flange for mounting the wheel to
the vehicle. The wheel mounting studs are the only
replaceable components of the hub and bearing. Oth-
erwise, the hub and bearing is serviced only as a
complete assembly.
On RWD vehicles, a magnetic encoder (2) for the
wheel speed sensor is pressed onto the hub and
bearing. A magnetic encoder is not located on the
AWD hub and bearing. It is pressed onto the axle half
shaft outer joint.
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING

HUB AND BEARING
NOTE: The hub and bearing is designed for the life of the vehicle and should require no maintenance.
With wheel and brake rotor removed, rotate flanged outer ring of hub. Excessive roughness, lateral play or resis-
tance to rotation may indicate dirt intrusion or bearing failure. If the rear wheel bearings exhibit these conditions
during inspection, the hub and bearing assembly should be replaced.
Damaged bearing seals and resulting excessive grease loss may also require bearing replacement. Moderate
grease loss from bearing is considered normal and should not require replacement of the hub and bearing assem-
bly.
LX FRONT 2-9
REMOVAL
AWD
1. Raise and support vehicle. (Refer to LUBRICATION & MAINTENANCE/HOISTING - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
2. Remove wheel mounting nuts (3), then tire and
wheel assembly (1).
3. While a helper applies brakes to keep hub from

rotating, remove hub nut (1) from the axle half
shaft (2).
4. Access and remove front brake rotor. (Refer to 5 -
BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/ROTOR -
REMOVAL)
2 - 10 FRONT LX
5. Remove four bolts (3) fastening hub and bearing

(2) to knuckle.
6. Slide hub and bearing (2) off axle half shaft (1) and
knuckle.
RWD
wheel assembly (1).
REMOVAL)
LX FRONT 2 - 11
4. Remove dust cap (2). When doing this, avoid dam-

aging internal bore of hub to preserve seal integrity.
5. Remove hub nut (1).
6. Slide hub and bearing off knuckle spindle.
INSTALLATION
AWD
NOTE: Before installing hub and bearing on end of
axle half shaft, ensure isolation washer is present
on end of half shaft. Inspect washer making sure it
is not worn or damaged. Washer can be installed
in either direction on shaft.
2 - 12 FRONT LX
1. Slide hub and bearing (2) onto axle half shaft (1).
Position hub and bearing onto knuckle, lining up
mounting bolt holes.
2. Install four bolts (3) fastening hub and bearing in
place. Tighten mounting bolts to 68 Nm (50 ft. lbs.)
torque.
3. Install brake rotor, then disc brake caliper and
adapter assembly. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAU-
LIC/MECHANICAL/ROTOR - INSTALLATION)
4. Install hub nut (1) on end of axle half shaft (2).

While a helper applies brakes to keep hub from
turning, tighten hub nut to 213 Nm (157 ft. lbs.)
torque.
5. Install tire and wheel assembly (1) (Refer to 22 -

TIRES/WHEELS - INSTALLATION). Tighten wheel
mounting nuts (3) to 150 Nm (110 ft. lbs.) torque.
6. Lower vehicle.
LX FRONT 2 - 13
7. Pump brake pedal several times to ensure vehicle

has a firm brake pedal before moving vehicle.
8. Check and adjust brake fluid level in reservoir (1)
as necessary.
9. Road test vehicle and make several stops to wear
off any foreign material on brakes and to seat
brake pads.
RWD
NOTE: Prior to installation, inspect magnetic
encoder (for wheel speed sensor) (2) for any dam-
age and make sure any metal debris sticking to it
is removed.
1. Slide hub and bearing onto knuckle spindle.

2 - 14 FRONT LX
2. Install hub nut (1) on end of spindle. Tighten hub

nut to 250 Nm (184 ft. lbs.) torque.
NOTE: Install a new dust cap to preserve seal

integrity.
4. Install NEW dust cap (2) on hub and bearing.

6. Lower vehicle.

as necessary.
brake pads.
LX FRONT 2 - 15
KNUCKLE - AWD
REMOVAL

wheel assembly (1).

rotating, remove hub nut (1) from axle half shaft
(2).
2 - 16 FRONT LX
4. Remove clip (3) fastening wheel speed sensor (2)

to knuckle (4).
5. Remove screw (1) fastening wheel speed sensor
(2) to knuckle (4). Pull sensor head (4) out of
knuckle.
REMOVAL)
7. Remove nut (1) from outer tie rod end (2) stud.
8. Using Puller (2), Special Tool 9360, separate tie

rod stud (1) from knuckle.
LX FRONT 2 - 17
9. Loosen nut (4) attaching lower control arm ball joint

stud to knuckle (3). Back nut off until nut is even
with end of stud. Keeping nut on at this location
will help keep end of stud from distorting while
using Puller in next step.
CAUTION: In following step, use care not to dam-

age ball joint seal boot while sliding Puller, Special
Tool 9360, into place past seal boot.
10. Using Puller (2), Special Tool 9360, separate ball

joint stud from knuckle.
11. Remove tool.
12. Remove nut (1) from end of ball joint stud.
13. Loosen nut (4) attaching upper ball joint stud (1)
to knuckle. Back nut off until nut is even with end
of stud. Keeping nut on at this location will
help keep end of stud from distorting while
2 - 18 FRONT LX

14. Using Puller (2), Special Tool 9360, separate

upper ball joint stud (1) from knuckle.
15. Remove tool.
16. Remove nut (1) from end of upper ball joint stud.
17. Slide knuckle (3) off half shaft (1) and remove
from vehicle.
18. If hub and bearing and dust shield need to be

removed:
a. Remove four bolts (3) fastening hub and bear-
ing (2) to knuckle.
b. Slide hub and bearing out of knuckle along
with shield.
LX FRONT 2 - 19
INSTALLATION
1. If hub and bearing and dust shield needs to be
installed on knuckle, perform following:
a. Slide shield onto rear of hub and bearing.
b. Slide hub and bearing into knuckle, lining up
mounting holes in hub and bearing with those
in shield and knuckle
c. Install four bolts (3) fastening hub and bearing
in place. Tighten mounting bolts to 68 Nm (50
ft. lbs.) torque.

2 - 20 FRONT LX
2. Place knuckle (3) over lower ball joint stud and

guide hub and bearing (2) onto axle half shaft (1).
3. Start NEW nut (4) on lower ball joint stud. Do not
tighten at this time.
CAUTION: It is important to tighten nut as

described in following step to avoid damaging ball
stud joint.
4. Place upper ball joint stud (1) through hole in top of

knuckle and install nut (4). Tighten nut by holding
ball joint stud with a hex wrench while turning nut
with a wrench. Tighten nut using crow foot wrench
on torque wrench to 47 Nm + 90 turn (35 ft. lbs. +
90 turn) torque.

stud joint.
5. Tighten lower ball joint nut (4) by holding ball joint

stud with a hex wrench while turning nut with a
wrench. Tighten nut using crow foot wrench on
torque wrench to 68 Nm + 90 turn (50 ft. lbs. +
90 turn) torque.
LX FRONT 2 - 21

stud joint.
6. Place outer tie rod stud through hole in knuckle (3)

and install nut (1). Tighten nut by holding stud with
a wrench while turning nut with another wrench.
Tighten nut using crow foot wrench on torque
wrench to 85 Nm (63 ft. lbs.) torque.

torque.
9. Install wheel speed sensor (2) head into knuckle

(4) and install mounting screw (1). Tighten screw to
11 Nm (95 in. lbs.) torque.
10. Attach wheel speed sensor cable routing clip (3)
at knuckle (4).
2 - 22 FRONT LX

12. Lower vehicle.

as necessary.
15. Perform wheel alignment. (Refer to 2 - SUSPEN-
SION/WHEEL ALIGNMENT - STANDARD
PROCEDURE)
LX FRONT 2 - 23
KNUCKLE - RWD
REMOVAL

wheel assembly (1).
3. Remove screw (3) fastening wheel speed sensor to

knuckle (1). Pull sensor head (4) out of knuckle.
4. Remove wheel speed sensor cable routing clip (2)
from brake flex hose routing bracket (5).
2 - 24 FRONT LX
5. Remove screw (3) fastening brake flex hose rout-

ing bracket (2) to knuckle (4).
REMOVAL)
7. Remove nut (1) from outer tie rod end stud.
8. Using Puller (2), Special Tool 9360, separate tie

rod stud (1) from knuckle.
LX FRONT 2 - 25
9. Loosen nut (4) attaching upper ball joint stud (1) to

knuckle. Back nut off until nut is even with end of
stud. Keeping nut on at this location will help
keep end of stud from distorting while using
Puller in next step.


11. Remove nut (4) from end of upper ball joint stud
(1).
2 - 26 FRONT LX
12. Loosen nut (3) attaching tension strut (2) ball joint
stud to knuckle. Back nut off until nut is even with
end of stud. Keeping nut on at this location will

13. Using Puller (1), Special Tool 9360, separate ten-

sion strut ball joint stud (2) from knuckle.
14. Remove nut (3) from end of tension strut (2) ball
joint stud.
15. Loosen nut (5) attaching ball joint stud to lower
control arm (4). Back nut off until nut is even with
LX FRONT 2 - 27


joint stud (2) from lower control arm.
17. Remove nut (5) from end of ball joint stud attach-
ing lower control arm to knuckle.
18. Remove knuckle from vehicle.
19. If hub and bearing needs to be removed, perform

the following:
a. Remove dust cap (2). When doing this, avoid
damaging internal bore of hub to preserve seal
integrity.
b. Remove hub nut (1).
c. Slide hub and bearing off knuckle spindle.
20. If shield needs to be removed from knuckle,
remove 3 mounting screws, then shield.
21. If lower control arm ball joint needs to be removed
from knuckle, (Refer to 2 - SUSPENSION/
FRONT/KNUCKLE - DISASSEMBLY).
2 - 28 FRONT LX
DISASSEMBLY - BALL JOINT

NOTE: To perform this procedure it works best to
mount Press (3), Special Tool C-4212F, in a vise
and hold the component in your hands.
1. Place Receiver (1), Special Tool 9320-5, into cup

area of Press (3), Special Tool C-4212F, as shown
and tighten set screw.
2. Place Remover (2), Special Tool 9320-3, onto end
of screw-drive of Press (3), Special Tool C-4212F,
as shown.
3. Using a pair of snap-ring pliers (2), remove snap-

ring (3) from bottom of ball joint (1).
LX FRONT 2 - 29
4. Install halves of Support Clamp (1), Special Tool

9320-1, over ball joint (2) and around knuckle sur-
face (3) as shown. Install and snug Support Clamp
(1) screws from underside.
5. Position knuckle (1) over tools guiding top of ball

joint inside of Receiver (6), then hand tighten Press
screw-drive (4) until Remover (3) comes into con-
tact with bottom of ball joint (2).
NOTE: When positioning knuckle over tools, make

sure Receiver, Special Tool 9320-5, sets into
recessed area (4) of Support Clamp, Special Tool
9320-1.
2 - 30 FRONT LX
6. Tighten Press screw-drive (4) forcing ball joint out

of knuckle (1) and into Receiver (6).
7. Loosen screw-drive (4) and remove knuckle (1)
from Press. Remove ball joint from Receiver (6).
8. Remove Support Clamp (1) from knuckle (3).

LX FRONT 2 - 31
ASSEMBLY - BALL JOINT

NOTE: To perform this procedure it works best to
mount Press (3), Special Tool C-4212F, in a vise
and hold the component in your hands.
1. Place Installer (1), Special Tool 9320-4, into cup

area of Press (3), Special Tool C-4212F, as shown
and tighten set screw.
2. Place Remover (2), Special Tool 9320-3, onto end
of screw-drive of Press (3), Special Tool C-4212F,
as shown.Note: This is the reverse of how
Remover is installed on screw-drive for
removal.
3. Start NEW ball joint (1) into bore of knuckle (2).

2 - 32 FRONT LX
4. Position knuckle (1) over tools guiding top of ball

joint inside of Installer (5) until outside flange of ball
joint (4) comes into contact with Installer, then hand
tighten Press screw-drive (3) until Remover (2)
comes into contact with bottom of knuckle (1).
5. Using hand tools, tighten screw-drive (3), pressing
ball joint into knuckle until flange (4) comes to a
stop against the knuckle.
6. Loosen screw-drive and remove knuckle from
Press.
7. Install snap-ring (3) into groove on bottom of ball

joint.
8. Inspect ball joint for proper fit. Make sure seal boot
is uniform and wire rings are in place.
9. Install knuckle on vehicle. (Refer to 2 - SUSPENSION/FRONT/KNUCKLE - INSTALLATION)
INSTALLATION
1. If shield needs to be installed on knuckle, place shield in place and attach to knuckle using 3 screws. Tighten
screws to 10 Nm (89 in. lbs.) torque.
LX FRONT 2 - 33
2. If hub and bearing needs to be installed on

knuckle, perform the following:
a. Slide hub and bearing onto knuckle spindle.
b. Install hub nut (1) on end of spindle. Tighten
hub nut to 250 Nm (184 ft. lbs.) torque.
c. Install NEW dust cap (2).
NOTE: Install a new dust cap to preserve seal

integrity.
CAUTION: Before installing knuckle on lower con-

trol arm, measure height of ball joint seal boot (1)
mounted on knuckle. If seal boot height is above
25.5 mm, any air inside seal boot must be
expelled. To do so, follow these steps.
Tip ball joint stud completely to one side.
Using thumb and index finger, gently squeeze
seal boot together at center expelling any air.
Do not allow grease to be release.
Push down very top of seal boot.
Return ball joint stud to original centered
position.
Measure ball joint seal boot height (1) making
sure it is within specification.
Wipe any grease from ball joint stud.
3. Place knuckle (1) over lower ball joint studs on

vehicle and loosely install NEW nuts by hand.
CAUTION: It is important to tighten nuts as

described in following steps to avoid damaging
ball stud joints.
4. Completely install NEW nut (5) on ball joint stud

attaching lower control arm (4) to knuckle (1).
Tighten nut by holding ball joint stud with a hex
wrench while turning nut with a wrench. Tighten nut
using crow foot wrench on torque wrench to 68
Nm + 90 turn (50 ft. lbs. + 90 turn) torque.
attaching tension strut (2) to knuckle (1). Tighten
nut by holding ball joint stud with a hex wrench
while turning nut with a wrench. Tighten nut using
crow foot wrench on torque wrench to 68 Nm +
90 turn (50 ft. lbs. + 90 turn) torque.
2 - 34 FRONT LX

stud joint.

90 turn) torque.

stud joint.
7. Place outer tie rod stud through hole in knuckle (2)

and install nut (1). Tighten nut by holding stud with
a wrench while turning nut with another wrench.
9. Install screw (3) fastening brake flex hose routing

bracket (2) to knuckle (4). Tighten screw to 12 Nm
(106 in. lbs.) torque.
LX FRONT 2 - 35
10. Install wheel speed sensor head (4) into knuckle

and install mounting screw (3). Tighten screw to
11. Attach wheel speed sensor cable and routing clip
(2) to brake flex hose routing bracket (5).

13. Lower vehicle.

as necessary.
PROCEDURE)
2 - 36 FRONT LX
BALL JOINT - LOWER

DESCRIPTION
AWD
The ball joint for the lower control arm is pressed into the lower control arm. The ball joint is a sealed for life
component and cannot be maintenance lubricated. The ball joint is lubricated for life at the time of assembly. No
attempt should be made to ever add any lubrication to these ball joints.
Neither the ball joint, nor the seal boot for the lower control arm can be serviced as a separate component. They
entire arm must be replaced if either are damaged.
RWD
There are two lower ball joints on the RWD version of this vehicle. One in for the lower control arm and the other
for the tension strut. The ball joint for the lower control arm is pressed into the knuckle and the ball joint for the
tension strut is part of the tension strut. The ball joints are both sealed for life components and cannot be main-
tenance lubricated. These ball joints are lubricated for life at the time of assembly. No attempt should be made to
ever add any lubrication to these ball joints.
The ball joint for the lower control arm is a ball joint and seal boot cartridge type and can be replaced as a separate
component of the knuckle. The boot cannot be serviced separately. To service this ball joint, (Refer to 2 - SUS-
PENSION/FRONT/KNUCKLE - DISASSEMBLY).
Neither the ball joint, nor the seal boot for the tension strut can be serviced as a separate component. They entire
tension strut must be replaced if either are damaged.
The ball joint connection to the lower control arm and the ball joint connection at the knuckle is achieved by an
interference fit created by the tapered stud of the ball joint and a tapered hole in the steering knuckle. The ball joint
stud is retained in the steering knuckle using a locking nut.

LOWER BALL JOINT
1. Raise vehicle on a drive-on hoist.
NOTE: If a drive-on hoist is not available, use wooden blocks with jack stands to support the lower control
arm in the ball joint area. Place the jack stands appropriately and lower the hoist placing weight on the
lower control arm. The lower control arms should now be supporting the vehicle weight.
2. Using a jack, lift the front end off the hoist and position a wooden block underneath lower control arm supporting
that corner of the vehicles weight.
3. Remove tire and wheel assembly. (Refer to 22 - TIRES/WHEELS - REMOVAL)
4. Attach a dial indicator as follows:
a. AWD Lower Control Arm Attach a dial indicator to base of lower control arm, then align dial indicators
contact pointer with direction of stud axis and touch machined flat on knuckle near ball joint. Zero dial indi-
cator.
b. RWD Tension Strut Attach a dial indicator to base of tension strut, then align dial indicators contact pointer
with direction of stud axis and touch machined flat on knuckle near ball joint. Zero dial indicator.
c. RWD Lower Control Arm Attach a dial indicator to base of lower control arm, then align dial indicators
contact pointer with direction of stud axis and touch machined flat on knuckle near ball joint. Zero dial indi-
cator.
NOTE: Use care when applying the load to the knuckle so as to not damage components of the suspension.
5. Insert a pry bar and rest it against lower control arm or tension strut (depending on which is being tested) and
use lever principle to push knuckle upward until dial indicator no longer moves.
LX FRONT 2 - 37
6. Record any ball joint movement. If movement in the lower control arm exceeds 1.5 mm (.059 in.), the ball joint
is faulty.
7. If the lower ball joint for an All-Wheel-Drive vehicle needs replaced, the lower control arm needs to be replaced.
(Refer to 2 - SUSPENSION/FRONT/LOWER CONTROL ARM - REMOVAL)
8. If the ball joint for the lower control arm on a Rear-Wheel-Drive vehicle needs replaced, it can be serviced sep-
arately. (Refer to 2 - SUSPENSION/FRONT/KNUCKLE - DISASSEMBLY)
9. If the tension strut ball joint (RWD vehicle) needs replaced, the entire tension strut needs to be replaced. (Refer
to 2 - SUSPENSION/FRONT/TENSION STRUT - REMOVAL)
REMOVAL
To service the lower ball joint for the lower control arm on RWD vehicles, the knuckle must be removed from the
vehicle, then the ball joint can be removed. (Refer to 2 - SUSPENSION/FRONT/KNUCKLE - REMOVAL) (Refer to
2 - SUSPENSION/FRONT/KNUCKLE - DISASSEMBLY)
INSTALLATION
To install the ball joint for the lower control arm on RWD vehicles, refer to the following information. (Refer to 2 -
SUSPENSION/FRONT/KNUCKLE - ASSEMBLY)
2 - 38 FRONT LX
ARM - LOWER CONTROL - AWD

REMOVAL

wheel assembly (1).

rotating, remove hub nut (1) from the axle half
shaft (2).
4. Remove belly pan. (Refer to 23 - BODY/EXTERI-
OR/BELLY PAN - REMOVAL)
LX FRONT 2 - 39
5. Loosen nut (4) attaching lower control arm ball joint

stud to knuckle (3). Back nut off until nut is even
with end of stud. Keeping nut on at this location
will help keep end of stud from distorting while


joint stud from knuckle.
7. Remove tool.
8. Remove nut (1) from end of ball joint stud.
9. Back off nut (3) from bolt (1) attaching shock clevis
bracket (2) to lower control arm (7) until it is flush
with end of bolt.
10. Using a brass drift punch, tap the bolt out of the
clevis bracket until bolt serrations clear bracket.
11. Remove nut (3) and bolt (1) for clevis bracket and
control arm.
2 - 40 FRONT LX
12. Remove mounting screws, then heat shields (3)

above both inner tie rod bellows (2).
CAUTION: While steering gear bolts are removed,

it important to avoid putting downward force on
steering gear.
13. Remove steering gear mounting bolts as listed:

a. Left side arm Remove bolts (3) and (4).
Loosen, but do not remove, bolt (2). It is impor-
tant leave bolt (2) installed to avoid dropping
gear too far, putting excessive force on steer-
ing coupling.
b. Right side arm Remove bolts (2) and (3).
Loosen, but do not remove, bolt (4). It is impor-
tant to leave bolt (4) installed to avoid dropping
gear too far, putting excessive force on steer-
ing coupling.
CAUTION: If the lower control arm bolt at the

engine cradle has a lengthwise grooved shaft (2),
it is a special wheel alignment adjustment bolt and
the bolt head (1) must not be rotated in the vehicle
or damage to the bolt and engine cradle will
result. While holding the bolt in place with a
wrench, remove the nut, then slide the bolt out of
the bushing and cradle taking note of bolt posi-
tioning in engine cradle for reassembly purposes.
The bolt needs to be installed in the same position
as removed to make sure wheel camber and
caster return to adjusted position.
LX FRONT 2 - 41
14. Remove bolt (3) and nut securing forward end of

lower control arm (1) to engine cradle (2). If bolt
has a lengthwise grooved shaft (see above note),
remove bolt and nut by holding bolt stationary
with a wrench, removing nut, then sliding bolt out
of bushing and cradle while taking note of bolt
positioning in engine cradle for reassembly pur-
poses.
15. Remove bolt and nut (4) securing rearward end of
lower control arm (1) to engine cradle (2). If bolt
has a lengthwise grooved shaft (see above note),
remove bolt and nut by holding bolt stationary
with a wrench, removing nut, then sliding bolt out
of bushing and cradle while taking note of bolt
positioning in engine cradle for reassembly pur-
poses.
16. Slide lower control arm (1) from engine cradle (2)
and knuckle, and remove from vehicle.
INSTALLATION
NOTE: If installing a lower control arm engine cra-
dle bolt that is a wheel alignment adjustment bolt
(1) (identifying lengthwise grooved shaft (2)), make
sure to install it in the same position which it was
in upon removal. For more details on installation
of this special bolt, (Refer to 2 - SUSPENSION/
WHEEL ALIGNMENT - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
1. Slide lower control arm (1) into position in engine

cradle (2) and place ball joint stem into mounting
hole in knuckle.
NOTE: When installing lower control arm engine

cradle bolts, it important to note that the forward
bolt is installed front-to-rear and the rearward bolt
is installed rear-to-front.
2. Install lower control arm mounting bolts and nuts (3

and 4). Do not tighten bolts at this time.
2 - 42 FRONT LX
3. Raise steering gear to mounted position and install

lower mounting bolts (2 and 3). Install upper
mounting bolt (4) and nut. Tighten all mounting
bolts to 122 Nm (90 ft. lbs.) torque.
4. Install heat shields (3) above both inner tie rod bel-
lows (2). Tighten mounting screws to 7 Nm (62 in.
lbs.) torque.
5. Pull downward on control arm and guide ball joint

stud into knuckle (3). Install NEW nut (4) on ball
joint stud. Tighten nut by holding ball joint stud with
a hex wrench while turning nut with a wrench.
LX FRONT 2 - 43
6. Align shock clevis bracket (2) with lower control

arm (7) bushing and install mounting bolt (1) and
nut (3). Do not tighten nut at this time.

torque.

9. Lower vehicle.
10. Position vehicle on an alignment rack/drive-on lift.
2 - 44 FRONT LX
NOTE: When tightening lower shock clevis mount-

ing bolt, do not attempt rotating bolt. Bolt shaft is
serrated. Turn nut only.
11. Tighten lower shock clevis bracket bolt nut (3) to

174 Nm (128 ft. lbs.) torque.
PROCEDURE)
CAUTION: If lower control arm engine cradle bolt

is a wheel alignment adjustment bolt (lengthwise
grooved shaft (2)), be sure to only tighten nut. Do
not rotate bolt or damage to cradle will occur.
13. Once camber is found to be within specifications,

tighten lower control arm cradle bolt nuts to 176
Nm (130 ft. lbs.) torque while holding the bolts
stationary.
14. install belly pan. (Refer to 23 - BODY/EXTERIOR/BELLY PAN - INSTALLATION)

LX FRONT 2 - 45
ARM - LOWER CONTROL - RWD

REMOVAL

wheel assembly (1).
4. Remove screws (1) fastening stabilizer bar heat

shield (3) on side of control arm repair.
2 - 46 FRONT LX
5. Remove bolts (2) fastening stabilizer bar bushing

retainer (1) in place on side of control arm repair.
6. Remove retainer halves (1)(2) from around stabi-

lizer bar bushing (3).
7. Utilizing slit, remove bushing (1) from stabilizer bar

(2).
LX FRONT 2 - 47
NOTE: In the following step, the lower control arm

cradle bolt (3) is accessed through the opening (2)
created by removal of the bushing from the stabi-
lizer bar (4).
CAUTION: If the lower control arm bolt at the

engine cradle has a lengthwise grooved shaft (2),
it is a special wheel alignment adjustment bolt and
the bolt head (1) must not be rotated in the vehicle
or damage to the bolt and engine cradle will
result. While holding the bolt in place with a
wrench, remove the nut, then slide the bolt out of
the bushing and cradle taking note of bolt posi-
tioning in engine cradle for reassembly purposes.
The bolt needs to be installed in the same position
as removed to make sure wheel camber and
caster return to adjusted position.
8. Remove bolt and nut (1) securing lower control arm

(2) to engine cradle. If bolt has a lengthwise
grooved shaft (see above note), remove bolt and
nut by holding the bolt in place with a wrench,
removing nut, then sliding bolt out of bushing and
cradle while taking note of bolt positioning in lower
control arm bushing for reassembly purposes.
2 - 48 FRONT LX
9. Remove bolt (3) securing shock assembly (1) to

lower control arm (4).

to knuckle (1). Pull sensor head (4) out of
knuckle.
from brake flex hose routing bracket (5).
12. Loosen nut (5) attaching ball joint stud to lower

control arm (4). Back nut off until nut is even with
LX FRONT 2 - 49


joint stud (2) from lower control arm.
14. Remove nut (5) from end of ball joint stud attach-
ing lower control arm to knuckle.
15. Pry knuckle downward and slide ball joint stud out
of lower control arm. Position knuckle outward,
away from lower control arm.
16. Slide lower control arm out of engine cradle and
remove from vehicle.
INSTALLATION
NOTE: If installing a lower control arm engine cra-
dle bolt that is a wheel alignment adjustment bolt
(1) (lengthwise grooved shaft (2)), make sure to
install it in the same position which it was in upon
removal. For more details on installation of this
special bolt, (Refer to 2 - SUSPENSION/WHEEL
ALIGNMENT - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
2 - 50 FRONT LX
1. Slide lower control arm (4) into position in engine

cradle and install mounting bolt from rear.
2. Install nut (1) on lower control arm cradle bolt, but

do not tighten at this time.
CAUTION: Before installing knuckle to lower con-

trol arm, measure height of ball joint seal boot (1)
mounted on knuckle. If seal boot height is above
25.5 mm, any air inside seal boot must be
expelled. To do so, follow these steps.
Tip ball joint stud completely to one side.
Using thumb and index finger, gently squeeze
seal boot together at center expelling any air.
Do not allow grease to be release.
Push down very top of seal boot.
Return ball joint stud to original centered
position.
Measure ball joint seal boot height (1) making
sure it is within specification.
Wipe any grease from ball joint stud.
LX FRONT 2 - 51
3. Pull knuckle (1) downward and position lower con-

trol arm (4) over ball joint stud. Release knuckle,
guiding stud into lower control arm. Install NEW nut
(5) on ball joint stud attaching lower control arm (4)
to knuckle (1). Tighten nut by holding ball joint stud
with a hex wrench while turning nut with a wrench.
wrench to 68 Nm + 90 turn (50 ft. lbs. + 90 turn)
torque.

and install mounting screw (3). Tighten screw to 11
Nm (95 in. lbs.) torque.
(2) to brake flex hose routing bracket (5).
6. Install lower shock mounting bolt (3) attaching

shock assembly (1) to lower control arm (4). Do
not tighten bolt at this time.
2 - 52 FRONT LX

8. Lower vehicle.
CAUTION: Because stabilizer bar is disconnected

at cradle it is important to use extra care while
moving vehicle to alignment rack/drive-on lift.

10. Tighten lower shock mounting bolt (3) to 174 Nm
(128 ft. lbs.) torque.

SION/WHEEL ALIGNMENT - STANDARD PRO-
CEDURE)
CAUTION: If the control arm engine cradle bolt is

a wheel alignment adjustment bolt (lengthwise
grooved shaft (2)), be sure to only tighten the nut.
Do not rotate the bolt head (1) or damage to the
bushing will occur.
12. Once camber is found to be within specifications,

using a crowfoot wrench, tighten lower control
arm cradle bolt nut (1) to 176 Nm (130 ft. lbs.)
torque while holding the bolt stationary.
LX FRONT 2 - 53
CAUTION: Because of stabilizer bushing outer

shape, it is very important to install bushings in
position discussed in following step.
13. Utilizing slit in bushing, install stabilizer bar bush-

ing (1) against locating collar on stabilizer bar (2)
as shown. Make sure slit in bushing is positioned
toward rear of vehicle.
14. Install stabilizer bar bushing retainer halves (1)(2)

around bushing (3).
15. Install bolts (2) securing stabilizer bar bushing

retainer halves (2) to cradle. Tighten bolts (2) to
2 - 54 FRONT LX
16. Install stabilizer bar heat shield (3) over stabilizer

bar bushing retainer. Install mounting screws (1).
17. Install belly pan. (Refer to 23 - BODY/EXTERIOR/
BELLY PAN - REMOVAL)
LX FRONT 2 - 55
SHOCK ASSEMBLY
REMOVAL
AWD

wheel assembly (1).
3. While holding link ball joint stem from rotating,

remove nut (2) fastening stabilizer link (1) to shock
clevis bracket (3). Slide link ball joint stem from cle-
vis bracket.
2 - 56 FRONT LX
4. Remove nut and pinch bolt (1) fastening clevis

bracket (3) to bottom of shock assembly (2).
5. Remove nut (3) and bolt (1) attaching shock clevis

bracket (2) to lower control arm (7).
6. Pull lower end of clevis bracket outward away from
lower control arm bushing, then slide it off shock
assembly. It may be necessary to use an appropri-
ate prying tool to spread clamp area of clevis
bracket allowing removal from shock assembly.
7. Lower vehicle just enough to access upper shock

assembly mounting nuts (2).
8. If equipped, remove shock tower cap (1) from top
of shock assembly (4).
9. Remove three nuts (2) fastening shock assembly
(4) to shock tower (3).
10. Remove shock assembly from vehicle.
LX FRONT 2 - 57
RWD
1. If equipped, remove front shock tower cap (1) from
top of shock assembly (4).
3. Raise and support vehicle. (Refer to LUBRICATION
& MAINTENANCE/HOISTING - STANDARD
PROCEDURE)

wheel assembly (1).
2 - 58 FRONT LX
5. Remove nut (2) fastening stabilizer link (3) to shock

assembly (1). Slide link ball joint stem from shock
assembly.
6. Remove bolt (3) securing shock assembly (1) to

7. Disconnect wheel speed sensor cable routing clip

(2) at brake tube bracket (3).
LX FRONT 2 - 59


9. Using Puller (2), Special Tool 9360, separate upper

ball joint stud (1) from knuckle.
(1).
11. Tip top of knuckle outward using care not to over-
extend bake flex hose.
12. Remove shock assembly from vehicle.
2 - 60 FRONT LX
DISASSEMBLY
The shock assembly must be removed from vehicle for it to be disassembled and assembled.
For shock assembly disassembly and assembly, use of shock Spring Compressor, Pentastar Service Equipment
(PSE) tool W-7200, or equivalent, is recommended to compress coil spring. Follow manufacturers instructions
closely.
WARNING: Do not remove shock shaft nut before coil spring is compressed. Coil spring is held under pres-
sure and must be compressed, removing spring tension from upper and lower mounts, before shock
removal.
1. Position shock assembly coil spring (1) on hooks

(2) of Compressor following manufacturers instruc-
tions. Install clamp securing shock to lower spring
coil.
2. Position Compressor upper hooks (1) on upper coil

spring (2) following manufacturers instructions. To
ease installation, rotate shock as necessary posi-
tioning shock in compressor so that upper spring
coil ends (step in upper mount) at straight outward
position from Compressor.
3. Compress coil spring until all spring tension is
removed from upper mount.
LX FRONT 2 - 61
4. Position Wrench (2), Special Tool 9362, on shock

shaft retaining nut. Next, insert 8 mm socket
though Wrench onto hex located on end of shock
shaft. While holding shock shaft from turning,
remove nut from shock shaft using Wrench.
5. Remove clamp from bottom of coil spring and
remove shock and lower isolator out through bot-
tom of coil spring.
NOTE: If upper mount or coil spring needs to be serviced, proceed with next step, otherwise, proceed with
step 8.
6. Remove upper mount (1) from shock shaft and coil

spring.
NOTE: Prior to removing spring from compressor,

note location of lower spring coil end in relation-
ship to compressor to ease assembly of compo-
nents later.
7. Back off Compressor drive, releasing tension from

coil spring. Push back compressor upper hooks
and remove coil spring from Compressor.
2 - 62 FRONT LX
8. Remove jounce bumper (4) from shock shaft by

pulling straight up and off.
9. Remove lower isolator (2) from shock body by pull-
ing straight up and off shock shaft.
10. Inspect shock assembly components for following
and replace as necessary:
Inspect shock (3) for any condition of shaft bind-
ing over full stroke of shaft.
Inspect upper mount (5) for cracks and distortion
and its retaining studs for any sign of damage.
Inspect upper spring isolator (5) for severe dete-
rioration.
Inspect lower spring isolator (2) for severe dete-
rioration.
Inspect dust shield for tears and deterioration.
Inspect coil spring (1) for cracks in the coating
and corrosion.
Inspect jounce bumper (4) for cracks and signs of deterioration.
ASSEMBLY
CAUTION: Use care not to damage coil spring coating during spring assembly. Damage to coating will jeop-
ardize its corrosion protection.
NOTE: Left and right springs must not be interchanged.
NOTE: If coil spring has been removed from spring compressor, proceed with next step, otherwise, proceed
with step 4.
1. Place coil spring (part number tag end upward)

in compressor lower hooks following manufacturers
instructions. To ease shock reassembly, rotate coil
spring around until upper coil (1) ends at straight
outward position from Compressor. Proper orienta-
tion of spring to upper mount (once installed) is
necessary.
2. Position compressor upper hooks over coil spring
following manufacturers instructions.
3. Compress coil spring far enough to allow shock
installation.
LX FRONT 2 - 63
4. If separated, install upper mount (1) onto coil

spring (2). Match step in upper isolator to end of
spring coil.
5. Install lower spring isolator (2) on shock body (3).

6. Install jounce bumper (4) on shock shaft, small end
first.
7. Install shock through bottom of coil spring until

lower spring isolator (on shock) contacts lower end
of coil spring. Match step built into isolator (1) to
lower coil end (2). Once in this position, stabilizer
bar bracket, or clevis key on AWD models, should
point straight inward toward Compressor body. If
not, rotate isolator on shock body until alignment is
achieved when isolator is correctly positioned with
lower spring coil.
8. Install clamp to hold shock and coil spring together.
2 - 64 FRONT LX
9. Install retaining nut (1) on shock shaft (2) as far as

possible by hand. Make sure nut is installed far
enough for 8 mm socket to grasp hex (2) on end of
shaft for tightening.
10. Install Wrench (on end of a torque wrench), Spe-

cial Tool 9362, on shock shaft retaining nut. Next,
insert 8 mm socket though Wrench onto hex
located on end of shock shaft. While holding
shock shaft from turning, tighten nut using Wrench
to 90 Nm (66 ft. lbs.) torque.
11. Slowly release tension from coil spring by backing
off Compressor drive fully. As tension is relieved,
make sure shock components are properly in
place.
12. Remove clamp from lower end of coil spring and
shock. Push back spring compressor upper and
lower hooks, then remove shock assembly from
spring compressor.
13. Install shock assembly on vehicle. (Refer to 2 -
SUSPENSION/FRONT/SHOCK - INSTALLATION)
LX FRONT 2 - 65
INSTALLATION
AWD
1. Guide shock assembly up into shock tower (3) and
into mounting holes.
2. Install three nuts (2) fastening shock assembly (4)
to shock tower (3). Tighten nuts to 27 Nm (20 ft.
lbs.) torque.
3. If equipped, align shock tower cap (1) with shock
mounting nuts (2) and snap into place.
4. Raise and support vehicle.

5. Pull lower end of shock assembly outward, then
slide clevis bracket (3) onto lower end. Slide clevis
bracket onto shock assembly until bracket contacts
collar on shock housing (2).
6. Install pinch bolt and nut (1) fastening clevis
bracket (3) to bottom of shock assembly (2). Install
pinch bolt from rear. Do not tighten at this time.
2 - 66 FRONT LX
7. Slide clevis bracket (2) over bushing mounted in

8. Install bolt (1) and nut (3) attaching shock clevis
bracket (2) to lower control arm (7). Do not tighten
at this time.
9. Tighten pinch bolt (1) attaching clevis bracket to

shock assembly to 61 Nm (45 ft. lbs.) torque.
10. Slide stabilizer link ball joint stem into clevis

bracket. Install nut (2) fastening link to clevis
bracket (3). Tighten nut by holding ball joint stud
while turning nut. Tighten nut using crow foot
wrench on torque wrench to 128 Nm (95 ft. lbs.)
torque.
LX FRONT 2 - 67

12. Lower vehicle.


2 - 68 FRONT LX
RWD
1. Place shock assembly into front suspension using
reverse direction in which it was removed.

stud joint.

90 turn) torque.
3. Connect wheel speed sensor cable routing clip (2)

at brake tube bracket (3).
LX FRONT 2 - 69
4. Install lower shock mounting bolt (3) attaching

shock assembly (1) to lower control arm (4). Do
5. Slide stabilizer link (3) ball joint stem into shock

assembly from front. Install nut fastening link (3) to
shock assembly (1). Tighten nut by holding ball
joint stud while turning nut. Tighten nut using crow
foot wrench on torque wrench to 128 Nm (95 ft.
lbs.) torque.

7. Lower vehicle.
2 - 70 FRONT LX

lbs.) torque.
LX FRONT 2 - 71
BAR - STABILIZER
REMOVAL
AWD
2. Remove belly pan. (Refer to 23 - BODY/EXTERIOR/BELLY PAN - REMOVAL)
3. On each side of vehicle, remove nut (5) fastening
stabilizer link (3) to stabilizer bar (4). Slide link ball
joint stem (1) from bar.
4. On each side of vehicle, remove bolts (2) fastening

stabilizer bar isolator retainer (3) in place.
5. Remove stabilizer bar with isolators and retainers
from vehicle.
6. On each side of bar, remove retainers (3) from
around stabilizer bar isolators (1).
7. Utilizing slit, remove each isolator (1) from stabi-
lizer bar (2).
RWD
2. Remove belly pan. (Refer to 23 - BODY/EXTERIOR/BELLY PAN - REMOVAL)
2 - 72 FRONT LX
3. On each side of vehicle, remove screws (1) fasten-

ing stabilizer bar heat shield (3). Remove heat
shield.
4. On each side of vehicle, remove bolts (2) fastening

stabilizer bar isolator retainer (1) in place.
5. On each side of vehicle, remove retainer halves

(1)(2) from around stabilizer bar isolator (3).
LX FRONT 2 - 73
6. Utilizing slit, remove each isolator (1) from stabi-

lizer bar (2).
7. On each side of vehicle, remove nut (5) fastening

stabilizer link (3) to stabilizer bar (4). Slide link ball
joint stem (1) from bar, then remove bar from
vehicle.
INSTALLATION
AWD
1. Utilizing slit in isolator, install each stabilizer bar isolator on bar. Make sure slit in isolator is positioned toward
rear of vehicle once installed on vehicle.
2. Install stabilizer bar isolator retainer over each isolator.
2 - 74 FRONT LX
NOTE: When attaching stabilizer link to stabilizer

bar, make sure link ball joint stem is pointed
inboard toward engine cradle.
3. Install stabilizer bar ends (4) to each stabilizer link

(3). Slide link ball joint stem (1) through mounting
hole in bar. Loosely install nuts (5) at this time.
4. Raise stabilizer bar to engine cradle, placing bush-

ings (1) into mounted position.
5. Install bolts (2) securing each stabilizer bar isolator
retainer (3) to cradle. Tighten bolts to 60 Nm (44
ft. lbs.) torque.
6. While holding stem from rotating at hex (1) or flat

(2) tighten stabilizer link nuts at each end of stabi-
lizer bar (4) to 128 Nm (95 ft. lbs.) torque.
LX FRONT 2 - 75
7. Install belly pan. (Refer to 23 - BODY/EXTERIOR/BELLY PAN - REMOVAL)

8. Lower vehicle.
RWD
NOTE: When attaching stabilizer link to stabilizer
bar, make sure link ball joint stem is pointed
inboard toward engine cradle.
1. On each side of vehicle, raise stabilizer bar (4) to

stabilizer link (3) and slide link ball joint stem (1)
through mounting hole in bar. Loosely install nut (5)
at this time.
CAUTION: Because of stabilizer isolator outer

shape, it is very important to install isolators in
position discussed in following step.
2. Utilizing slit in isolator, install each stabilizer bar

isolator (1) on bar resting against locating collar (2)
as shown. Make sure slit in isolator is positioned
toward rear of vehicle.
2 - 76 FRONT LX
3. On each side of vehicle, install stabilizer bar isola-

tor retainer halves (1)(2) around isolator (3).
4. On each side of vehicle, install bolts (2) securing

stabilizer bar isolator retainer halves (2) to cradle.
Tighten bolts (2) to 60 Nm (44 ft. lbs.) torque.
5. On each side of vehicle, install stabilizer bar heat

shield (3) over stabilizer bar isolator retainer. Install
mounting screws (1).
LX FRONT 2 - 77
6. While holding stem from rotating at hex (1) or flat

(2) tighten stabilizer link nuts at each end of stabi-
lizer bar (4) to 128 Nm (95 ft. lbs.) torque.
7. Install belly pan. (Refer to 23 - BODY/EXTERIOR/BELLY PAN - REMOVAL)

8. Lower vehicle.
2 - 78 FRONT LX
STRUT - TENSION
REMOVAL

wheel assembly (1).
4. Loosen nut (3) attaching tension strut (2) ball joint

stud to knuckle. Back nut off until nut is even with
LX FRONT 2 - 79

5. Using Puller (1), Special Tool 9360, separate ten-

sion strut ball joint stud (2) from knuckle.
6. Remove nut (3) from end of tension strut (2) ball

joint stud.
7. Rotate knuckle outward and push ball joint upward,
out of knuckle.
CAUTION: If the tension strut bolt at the engine

cradle has a lengthwise grooved shaft (2), it is a
special wheel alignment adjustment bolt and the
bolt head (1) must not be rotated in the vehicle or
damage to the bolt and engine cradle will result.
While holding the bolt in place with a wrench,
remove the nut, then slide the bolt out of the
bushing and cradle taking note of bolt positioning
in engine cradle for reassembly purposes. The
bolt needs to be installed in the same position as
removed to make sure wheel camber and caster
return to adjusted position.
2 - 80 FRONT LX
8. Remove nut and bolt (2) securing tension strut (1)

to engine cradle (3).
9. Slide tension strut out of cradle bracket and
INSTALLATION
NOTE: If installing a tension strut engine cradle
bolt that is a wheel alignment adjustment bolt
(lengthwise grooved shaft (2)), make sure to install
it in the same position which it was in upon
removal. For more details on installation of this
special bolt, (Refer to 2 - SUSPENSION/WHEEL
ALIGNMENT - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
1. Slide bushing end of tension strut (1) into cradle

bracket (3).
2. Install mounting bolt (2) from front through cradle
and bushing.
3. Install nut (2), but do not tighten at this time.
LX FRONT 2 - 81
4. Insert tension strut (2) ball joint stud downward,

into knuckle hole.
attaching tension strut (2) to knuckle (1). Tighten
nut by holding ball joint stud with a hex wrench
while turning nut with a wrench. Tighten nut using
crow foot wrench on torque wrench to 68 Nm +
90 turn (50 ft. lbs. + 90 turn) torque.
6. Install tire and wheel assembly (1) (Refer to 22 - TIRES/WHEELS - INSTALLATION). Tighten wheel mounting
nuts (3) to 150 Nm (110 ft. lbs.) torque.
7. Lower vehicle.

SION/WHEEL ALIGNMENT - STANDARD PROCE-
DURE)
CAUTION: If the tension strut engine cradle bolt is

a wheel alignment adjustment bolt (lengthwise
grooved shaft (2)), be sure to only tighten the nut.
Do not rotate the bolt head (1) or damage to the
bushing will occur.
2 - 82 FRONT LX
10. Once alignment is found to be within specifica-

tions, using a crowfoot wrench, tighten tension
strut cradle bolt nut (2) to 176 Nm (130 ft. lbs.)
torque while holding the bolt stationary.
11. Install belly pan. (Refer to 23 - BODY/EXTERIOR/
BELLY PAN - REMOVAL)
LX FRONT 2 - 83
BALL JOINT - UPPER

DESCRIPTION
The upper ball joint is pressed into the upper control arm. The ball joint is a sealed for life component and cannot
be maintenance lubricated. This ball joint is lubricated for life at the time of assembly. No attempt should be made
to ever add any lubrication to this ball joint.
Neither the upper ball joint, nor the seal boot can be serviced as a separate component. The entire upper control
arm must be replaced if either are damaged.
The ball joint connection at the knuckle is achieved by an interference fit created by the tapered stud of the ball joint
and a tapered hole in the steering knuckle. The ball joint stud is retained in the steering knuckle using a locking nut.

UPPER BALL JOINT
1. Raise vehicle on a drive-on hoist.
NOTE: If a drive-on hoist is not available, use wooden blocks with jack stands to support the lower control
arm in the ball joint area. Place the jack stands appropriately and lower the hoist placing weight on the
lower control arm. The lower control arms should now be supporting the vehicle weight.
2. Using a jack, lift the front end off the hoist and position a wooden block underneath lower control arm supporting
that corner of the vehicles weight.
3. Remove tire and wheel assembly. (Refer to 22 - TIRES/WHEELS - REMOVAL)
4. Attach a dial indicator to body of upper control arm, then align dial indicators contact pointer with direction of
stud axis and touch machined flat on end of knuckle near ball joint. Zero dial indicator.
NOTE: Use care when applying the load to the knuckle so as to not damage components of suspension.
5. Insert a pry bar and rest it against bottom of upper control arm and use lever principle to push arm upward until
dial indicator no longer moves.
6. Record any ball joint movement. If movement in the control arm exceeds 1.5 mm (.059 in.), the ball joint is faulty.
7. If the ball joint needs replaced, the entire upper control arm needs to be replaced. (Refer to 2 - SUSPENSION/
FRONT/UPPER CONTROL ARM - REMOVAL)
2 - 84 FRONT LX
ARM - UPPER CONTROL

REMOVAL
1. If removing left upper control arm, remove and reposition coolant recovery container. (Refer to 7 - COOLING/
ENGINE/COOLANT RECOVERY CONTAINER - REMOVAL)
2. If removing right upper control arm, remove IPM from mount and reposition. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER
DISTRIBUTION/INTEGRATED POWER MODULE - REMOVAL)
3. If equipped, remove front shock tower cap (1) from
top of shock assembly (4).
5. Remove nuts (2) from upper control arm mounting

bolts (1).
PROCEDURE)
LX FRONT 2 - 85

wheel assembly (1).
8. Disconnect wheel speed sensor cable routing clip

(2) at brake tube bracket (3).

2 - 86 FRONT LX


(1).
12. Pull shock assembly (3) downward until studs
clear shock tower (2), then pull it outward allowing
access to upper control arm mounting bolts.
13. Export Only If servicing right upper control arm,

disconnect headlamp leveling sensor (2) link at
upper control arm (1).
LX FRONT 2 - 87
14. Remove upper control arm mounting (flag) bolts

(1).
15. Remove upper control arm (2) from bracket (3) in
shock tower (4).
INSTALLATION
NOTE: Although AWD and RWD upper control arms are similar in appearance, they are not interchangeable.
1. Slide upper control arm (2) into bracket (3) located

in shock tower (4).
2. Install upper control arm mounting (flag) bolts (1)
through bracket, arm and tower. Position flags on
bolt heads outward, toward wheel opening.
2 - 88 FRONT LX
3. Export Only If servicing right upper control arm,

connect headlamp leveling sensor (2) link at upper
control arm (1).
4. Move shock assembly (3) allowing studs to be

inserted through shock tower (2) mounting holes.
90 turn) torque.
6. Connect wheel speed sensor cable routing clip (2)

at brake tube bracket (3).
LX FRONT 2 - 89

8. Lower vehicle to curb position.
9. Install nuts (2) on upper control arm body mounting

bolts (1). Tighten nuts to 75 Nm (55 ft. lbs.) torque.

lbs.) torque.
2 - 90 FRONT LX
12. If installing left upper control arm, install coolant recovery container. (Refer to 7 - COOLING/ENGINE/COOLANT
RECOVERY CONTAINER - INSTALLATION)
13. If installing right upper control arm, install IPM. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER DISTRIBUTION/INTE-
GRATED POWER MODULE - INSTALLATION)
LX REAR 2 - 91
REAR
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
REAR SPRING LINK

DESCRIPTION REMOVAL
REAR SUSPENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 SPRING LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
REAR SUSPENSION - SRT8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 SPRING LINK - SRT8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
SPECIFICATIONS INSTALLATION
REAR SUSPENSION FASTENER TORQUE . . . . 93 SPRING LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
SPECIAL TOOLS SPRING LINK - SRT8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
REAR SUSPENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 TENSION LINK
HUB AND BEARING REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING TOE LINK
HUB AND BEARING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 REMOVAL
REMOVAL LEFT LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
HUB AND BEARING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 RIGHT LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
HUB AND BEARING - SRT8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION LEFT LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
HUB AND BEARING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 RIGHT LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
HUB AND BEARING - SRT8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 SHOCK ABSORBER
KNUCKLE DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
REMOVAL REMOVAL
KNUCKLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 STANDARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
KNUCKLE - SRT8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 LOAD-LEVELING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
INSTALLATION INSTALLATION
KNUCKLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 STANDARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
KNUCKLE - SRT8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 LOAD-LEVELING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
CAMBER LINK SPRING
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
COMPRESSION LINK BAR - STABILIZER
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
2 - 92 REAR LX
REAR
DESCRIPTION
REAR SUSPENSION
This vehicle utilizes a five-link rear suspension includ-
ing the following major components:
Camber Link (1)
Compression Link (5)
Spring Link (2)
Tension Link (6)
Toe Link (3)
Coil Spring
Crossmember
Hub And Bearing
Knuckle (4)
Shock Absorber
Stabilizer Bar
The knuckle, camber link, compression link and ten-
sion link are aluminum castings. Extra care needs to
be taken when servicing these components.
Service Procedures for the crossmember can be
found in Frame And Bumpers. (Refer to 13 - FRAME & BUMPERS/FRAME/REAR CROSSMEMBER - REMOVAL)
REAR SUSPENSION - SRT8

The SRT8 rear suspension is very similar to the standard RWD front suspension but some components have been
modified for better handling and durability. Most component bushings are increased rate bushings. Service of all
rear suspension components remain the same as the standard RWD components. When components differ, be sure
to use only SRT8 components on SRT8 vehicles.
The rear knuckle for the SRT8 is different from the standard RWD knuckle. Although similar in appearance and in
service, the mounting bosses for the disc brake caliper have been moved downward to allow mounting of the
Brembo four-piston brake caliper. Due to this change, an updated special tool is needed to remove the sleeve that
retains the lower control arm ball joint to the knuckle.
The rear shock absorber used on this vehicle is a
load-leveling shock (2). This shock absorber appears
the same as the one used on the standard LX, but
has been specially calibrated for this vehicle. It can be
easily identified by an identification tag on its side (1).
This shock absorber is serviced the same as the stan-
dard load-leveling shock absorber.
LX REAR 2 - 93
The rear stabilizer bar diameter has been increased for the SRT8 to the size of that used on Export vehicles, 15
mm. It is serviced in the same manner as the standard RWD bar.
SPECIFICATIONS
REAR SUSPENSION FASTENER TORQUE

Brake Caliper Adapter Knuckle Bolts 119 88
Camber Link Crossmember Bolt 85 63
Camber Link Knuckle Bolt 98 72
Compression Link Crossmember Bolt 85 63
Compression Link Knuckle Bolt 81 60
Crossmember Mounting Bolts 180 133
Hub And Bearing Mounting Bolts 68 50
Hub Nut 213 157
Parking Brake Cable Knuckle Screw 8 71
Shock Absorber Mounting Bolts - Upper 52 38
Shock Absorber Mounting Bolt Nut - Lower 72 53
Spring Link Crossmember Bolt 108 80
Spring Link Knuckle Nut 138 102
Stabilizer Bar Isolator Retainer Bolts 61 45
Stabilizer Link Nuts 61 45
Tension Link Crossmember Bolt 85 63
Tension Link Knuckle Bolt 98 72
Toe Link Crossmember Nut 108 80
Toe Link Knuckle Bolt 81 60
2 - 94 REAR LX
SPECIAL TOOLS
REAR SUSPENSION
Remover/Installer, Sleeve 9361
Remover/Installer, Sleeve 9361-UPD

LX REAR 2 - 95
HUB AND BEARING

DESCRIPTION
The rear wheel bearing and wheel hub of this vehicle
are a one piece sealed unit or hub and bearing unit
type assembly. The hub and bearing (1) is mounted to
the center of the knuckle using 4 bolts. It has five
wheel mounting studs (2) on the hub flange.
The center of the hub and bearing is splined to match
the axle half shaft.
The wheel mounting studs used to mount the tire and
wheel to the vehicle are the only replaceable compo-
nents of the hub and bearing. Otherwise, the hub and
bearing is serviced only as a complete assembly.

HUB AND BEARING
NOTE: The hub and bearing is designed for the life of the vehicle and should require no maintenance.
With wheel and brake rotor removed, rotate flanged outer ring of hub. Excessive roughness, lateral play or resis-
tance to rotation may indicate dirt intrusion or bearing failure. If the rear wheel bearings exhibit these conditions
during inspection, the hub and bearing assembly should be replaced.
Damaged bearing seals and resulting excessive grease loss may also require bearing replacement. Moderate
grease loss from bearing is considered normal and should not require replacement of the hub and bearing assem-
bly.
REMOVAL
HUB AND BEARING
2 - 96 REAR LX

wheel assembly (1).

rotating, remove hub nut (1) from the half shaft (2).
NOTE: In some cases, it may be necessary to

retract caliper piston in its bore a small amount in
order to provide sufficient clearance between
shoes and rotor to easily remove caliper from
knuckle. This can usually be accomplished before
guide pin bolts are removed, by grasping rear of
caliper and pulling outward working with guide
pins, thus retracting piston. Never push on piston
directly as it may get damaged.
4. Remove two bolts (1) securing disc brake caliper

adapter (3) to knuckle (2).
5. Remove disc brake caliper and adapter (3) from
knuckle as an assembly. Hang assembly out of
way using wire or a bungee cord. Use care not to
overextend brake hose when doing this.
LX REAR 2 - 97
6. Remove any clips (2) retaining brake rotor (3) to

wheel mounting studs.
7. Slide brake rotor (3) off hub and bearing (1).
8. Loosen each hub and bearing mounting bolt (2) a

turn or two at a time while pulling outward on hub
and bearing to avoid bolt contact with half shaft
outer joint. Once removed from threads in hub and
bearing (but not knuckle), allow bolts to stay in and
protrude through knuckle and brake support plate
to keep brake support plate in place when hub and
bearing is removed.
9. Slide hub and bearing off knuckle and half shaft.
HUB AND BEARING - SRT8

2 - 98 REAR LX

wheel assembly (1).

rotating, remove hub nut (1) from the half shaft (2).
CAUTION: When pushing pistons back into caliper bores, use only a trim stick as shown or other suitable
soft tool. Never use a screwdriver or other metal pry bar due to potential damage to braking surface of
rotor, caliper, pistons or dust boots.
LX REAR 2 - 99
4. Place trim stick (4) between brake pad (2) and

outer edge of rotor (3).
5. Using trim stick, slowly apply pressure against
brake pad (2) until both pistons (on that side of cal-
iper) are completely bottomed in bores of caliper
half.
NOTE: Repeat above procedure to opposite brake

pad (1) and pistons as necessary.
6. Support spring link (1) using a transmission jack (5)

or other appropriate jack. Raise spring link just
enough to access brake caliper lower mounting bolt
(4) from above compression link (2).
7. Remove the lower and upper caliper mounting

bolts (1).
8. Remove brake caliper (2) with pads from knuckle
and brake rotor. Hang assembly out of way using
wire or a bungee cord. Use care not to overextend
brake hose when doing this.
2 - 100 REAR LX

11. Push inward on end of half shaft (2) until C/V

joints bottom. This is necessary to give as much
access to hub and bearing mounting bolts as
possible.
NOTE: It is important to keep suspension jacked

up as requested in Step 6 to ease access to lower
hub and bearing mounting bolts.
NOTE: Use a 3/8 inch drive wobble extension

along with a TorxT socket to access and remove
two top and lower front mounting bolt. Use a stan-
dard 3/8 inch drive universal joint along with a
TorxT socket to access and remove lower rear
mounting bolt.
12. Loosen each (of the four) hub and bearing mount-
ing bolt a turn or two at a time while pulling out-
ward on hub and bearing to avoid bolt contact
with half shaft outer joint. Once removed from
threads in hub and bearing (but not knuckle),
allow bolts to stay in and protrude through
knuckle and parking brake adapter to keep brake
LX REAR 2 - 101
adapter in place while hub and bearing is off vehicle.

13. Slide hub and bearing out of knuckle and off half shaft.
INSTALLATION
HUB AND BEARING
1. Position hub and bearing bolts though rear of knuckle and parking brake support just enough to hold support in
place as hub and bearing is installed.
2. Slide hub and bearing onto half shaft. Place hub and bearing through brake support, onto knuckle, lining up
mounting bolt holes with bolts.
3. Install four bolts (2) fastening hub and bearing in
place. Tighten mounting bolts to 68 Nm (50 ft. lbs.)
torque.
2 - 102 REAR LX
NOTE: Inspect disc brake pads and parking brake

shoes before brake rotor installation. (Refer to 5 -
BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/BRAKE PADS/
SHOES - INSPECTION)
4. Install brake rotor (3) over wheel mounting studs

and onto hub (1).
5. Install disc brake caliper and adapter assembly (3)

over brake rotor.
6. Install mounting bolts (1) securing caliper adapter
(3) to knuckle (2). Tighten bolts to 95 Nm (70 ft.
lbs.) torque.
7. Install hub nut (1) on end of half shaft (2). While a

helper applies brakes to keep hub from turning,
tighten hub nut to 213 Nm (157 ft. lbs.) torque.
8. Verify proper adjustment of the parking brake
shoes and adjust as necessary. (Refer to 5 -
BRAKES/PARKING BRAKE/SHOES -
ADJUSTMENT)
LX REAR 2 - 103

10. Lower vehicle.

as necessary.
brake pads.
2 - 104 REAR LX
HUB AND BEARING - SRT8

axle half shaft, ensure isolation washer (1) is
present on end of half shaft. Inspect washer mak-
ing sure it is not worn or damaged. Washer can be
installed in either direction on shaft.
NOTE: To help upon installation, make sure that

hub and bearing mounting bolts (1) extend
through knuckle (3) and parking brake adapter (2)
to hold adapter in place during hub and bearing
installation.
1. Position hub and bearing mounting bolts (1) though

rear of knuckle (3) and parking brake adapter (2)
just enough to hold adapter in place.
LX REAR 2 - 105
NOTE: Hub and bearing mounting bolt holes are

not evenly spaced. Upper mounting holes (2) are
not as far apart as lower mounting holes (1). Make
note of this before installing hub and bearing.
2. Slide hub and bearing onto half shaft. Insert hub

and bearing through parking brake adapter and
knuckle, lining up mounting bolt holes with bolts.
NOTE: Make sure suspension is jacked up as

requested during removal to ease access to lower
hub and bearing mounting bolts.
NOTE: Use a 3/8 inch drive wobble extension

along with a TorxT socket to slip past half shaft
outer C/V joint and install two top and lower front
mounting bolts. Use a standard 3/8 inch drive uni-
versal joint along with a TorxT socket to install
lower rear mounting bolt.
3. Carefully start all four mounting bolts into hub and

bearing. Using a cross pattern, tighten each hub
and bearing mounting bolt a turn or two at a time,
slowly drawing hub and bearing into mounted posi-
tion. Periodically, push in on end of half shaft to
give as much room as possible for tools on mount-
ing bolts. Tighten mounting bolts to 68 Nm (50 ft.
lbs.) torque.
NOTE: Inspect disc brake pads and parking brake shoes before brake rotor installation. (Refer to 5 -
BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/BRAKE PADS/SHOES - INSPECTION)
2 - 106 REAR LX
4. Clean hub face (1) to remove any dirt or corrosion

where rotor mounts.
5. Install brake rotor (2) over studs on hub and bear-
ing (1).
6. Slide caliper with pads (2) over brake rotor and

align with knuckle.
7. Install caliper mounting bolts (1). Tighten bolts to
8. Remove jack from under spring link.
9. Install hub nut (1) on end of half shaft (2). While a

helper applies brakes to keep hub from turning,
tighten hub nut to 213 Nm (157 ft. lbs.) torque.
10. Verify proper adjustment of the parking brake
shoes and adjust as necessary. (Refer to 5 -
ADJUSTMENT)
LX REAR 2 - 107

12. Lower vehicle.

as necessary.
brake pads.
2 - 108 REAR LX
KNUCKLE
REMOVAL
KNUCKLE
2. Unclip wheel speed sensor cable at rear brake
rotor shield (1).
3. Remove screw (2) fastening sensor head (3) to
rear knuckle.
4. Remove wheel speed sensor head from knuckle.
5. Access and remove rear hub and bearing. (Refer
to 2 - SUSPENSION/REAR/HUB / BEARING -
REMOVAL)
6. Remove parking brake shoes. (Refer to 5 -
BRAKES/PARKING BRAKE/SHOES - REMOVAL)
7. If not removed, remove parking brake shoe actua-

tor lever (1) from end of cable (2).
8. Remove shoe support from knuckle.
LX REAR 2 - 109
9. Remove parking brake cable screw (2) at knuckle

(3) and pull cable (1) out of knuckle.
10. Position under-hoist utility jack or jack stand under
spring link. Raise jack head to contact spring link
at shock mount secure in place.
11. Remove spring link-to-knuckle nut and bolt (2).
CAUTION: It important to use Guide (2) , Special

Tool 9361-2, when tapping sleeve in knuckle to
help keep Tap (1) , Special Tool 9361-1, straight
during use or damage to Tap may occur.
12. Place Guide 9361-2 (2) against sleeve (3) in

knuckle to keep Tap 9361-1 (1) straight. Using
Tap with an appropriate handle, cut threads
approximately halfway through bushing (or about
six complete threads). It is important to back
tap out, clean out burrs and lubricate Tap
often during process.
2 - 110 REAR LX
NOTE: Prior to using Special Tool 9361, lubricate

Bolt (1) threads to provide ease of use and pro-
mote tool longevity.
13. Assemble Remover, Special Tool 9361, as shown.

(1) Bolt 9361-3
(2) Nut
(3) Spherical Washer
(4) Thrust Bearing
(5) Sleeve 9361-4 (RWD)
(5) Sleeve 9361-5 (AWD Left Side)
(5) Sleeve 9361-6 (AWD Right Side)
NOTE: When installing thrust bearing on Remover,

be sure to place hardened side against nut. Place
bearing outer cage against stationary component.
NOTE: It is important to use appropriate Sleeve on

Remover to provide proper Tool-to-Knuckle contact. RWD sleeve can be used on either side while AWD
knuckles require specific left or right side Sleeves.
14. Thread Remover Bolt 9361-3 (1) into tapped

knuckle sleeve.
15. Rotate Nut down, matching Sleeve angled end
with angled face of knuckle.
16. Continue to rotate Nut until knuckle sleeve is
removed from knuckle. Discard knuckle sleeve;
replace it with new upon installation.
LX REAR 2 - 111
17. Remove bolt and nut fastening compression link

(5) to knuckle (4).
18. Remove bolt fastening toe link (3) to knuckle (4).
19. Remove nut and bolt fastening stabilizer link to
knuckle (4).
20. Remove nut and bolt fastening tension link (6) to
knuckle (4).
21. Remove nut and bolt fastening camber link (1) to
knuckle (4).
22. Remove knuckle (4).
23. Remove hub mounting bolts from knuckle.
KNUCKLE - SRT8
2. Unclip wheel speed sensor cable at rear brake
rotor shield (1).
rear knuckle.
4. Remove wheel speed sensor head from knuckle.
5. Access and remove rear hub and bearing. (Refer
to 2 - SUSPENSION/REAR/HUB / BEARING -
REMOVAL)
6. Remove parking brake shoes. (Refer to 5 -
BRAKES/PARKING BRAKE/SHOES - REMOVAL)
7. If not removed, remove parking brake shoe actua-

tor lever (1) from end of cable (2).
8. Remove shoe support from knuckle.
2 - 112 REAR LX
9. Remove parking brake cable screw (2) at knuckle

(3) and pull cable (1) out of knuckle.
spring link. Raise jack head to contact spring link
at shock mount secure in place.
CAUTION: It important to use Guide (2), Special


knuckle to keep Tap 9361-1 (1) straight. Using
Tap with an appropriate handle, cut threads
approximately halfway through bushing (or about
six complete threads). It is important to back
tap out, clean out burrs and lubricate Tap
often during process.
LX REAR 2 - 113


(1) Bolt 9361-3
(2) Nut
(3) Thrust Bearing
(5) Sleeve 9361-9 (Left Side - Shown in figure)
(5) Sleeve 9361-10 (Right Side)
NOTE: When installing thrust bearing (3) on

Remover, be sure to place hardened side against
nut (2). Place bearing outer cage against station-
ary component.
NOTE: It is important to use appropriate Sleeve

(9361-9 or 9361-10) on Remover to provide proper Tool-to-Knuckle contact.

knuckle sleeve.
15. Rotate Nut down, matching Sleeve (9361-9 or
9361-10) angled end with angled face of knuckle
(1). Make sure foot on Sleeve (3) is inserted
behind machined brake caliper mounting
boss.
17. Remove bolt and nut fastening compression link

(5) to knuckle (4).
18. Remove bolt fastening toe link (3) to knuckle (4).
19. Remove nut and bolt fastening stabilizer link to
knuckle (4).
20. Remove nut and bolt fastening tension link (6) to
knuckle (4).
21. Remove nut and bolt fastening camber link (1) to
knuckle (4).
22. Remove knuckle (4).
23. Remove hub mounting bolts from knuckle.
2 - 114 REAR LX
INSTALLATION
KNUCKLE
1. Install four hub mounting bolts through knuckle from inboard side allowing ends to protrude from opposite side.
2. Position knuckle on vehicle and install bolt and nut
fastening camber link (1) to knuckle (4) as shown.
Do not tighten bolt at this time.
3. Install bolt and nut fastening tension link (6) to
knuckle (4) as shown. Do not tighten bolt at this
time.
4. Install bolt and nut fastening stabilizer link to
knuckle (4). Do not tighten bolt at this time.
5. Install bolt fastening toe link (3) to knuckle (4). Do
6. Install bolt and nut fastening compression link (5)
to knuckle (4). Do not tighten bolt at this time.
NOTE: If a new knuckle sleeve is not installed in knuckle, perform Step 7 through Step 11.

bolt (1) threads to provide ease of use and pro-
7. Place NEW knuckle sleeve (2) onto Installer Bolt

9361-7 (1), and slide it up to Bolts head.
LX REAR 2 - 115
8. Starting from knuckle forward end, slide Bolt

9361-7 (1) with sleeve (5) through knuckle (2) and
spring link ball joint (3).
9. Install thrust bearing and nut (4) on end of Bolt.
When installing thrust bearing on Installer, be
sure to place hardened side against nut. Place
bearing outer cage against stationary compo-
nent.
10. While holding Bolt head (1) stationary, rotate Nut
(4) (using hand tools) installing sleeve in knuckle.
Install sleeve until Nut stops turning. Do not over-
tighten Nut.
11. Remove special tool.
12. Install spring link-to-knuckle bolt (2) front-to-rear

through knuckle and link, then install nut. While
holding bolt head stationary, tighten nut to 138
Nm (102 ft. lbs.) torque.
13. Remove under-hoist utility jack or jack stand from
under spring link.
14. Insert end of cable (1) through rear knuckle (3)

15. Install parking brake shoe support over hub and
bearing mounting screws and onto face of
knuckle.
2 - 116 REAR LX
16. Install shoe actuator lever (1) on end of parking

brake cable (2). Make sure actuator lever is posi-
tioned with word UP facing outward.
17. Install parking brake shoes as well as all compo-
nents necessary to access them. (Refer to 5 -
INSTALLATION)

18. Install hub and bearing as well as all components

necessary to access it. (Refer to 2 - SUSPEN-
SION/REAR/HUB / BEARING - INSTALLATION)
19. Insert wheel speed sensor head (3) into mounting

hole in rear of knuckle.
20. Install screw (2) fastening sensor head (3) to rear
knuckle. Tighten Screw to 11 Nm (97 in. lbs.)
torque.
21. Install sensor cable at rear brake rotor shield (1).
22. Lower vehicle.
23. Adjust parking brake shoes as necessary. (Refer
to 5 - BRAKES/PARKING BRAKE/SHOES -
ADJUSTMENTS)
24. Position vehicle on alignment rack/drive-on hoist.
Raise vehicle as necessary to access mounting
bolts.
LX REAR 2 - 117
25. Tighten fasteners at knuckle (vehicle at curb

height) as follows:
Camber Link (1) 98 Nm (72 ft. lbs.) torque.
Compression Link (5) 81 Nm (60 ft. lbs.)
torque.
Stabilizer Link 61 Nm (45 ft. lbs.) torque.
Tension Link (6) 98 Nm (72 ft. lbs.) torque.
Toe Link (3) 81 Nm (60 ft. lbs.) torque.
CEDURE)
KNUCKLE - SRT8
1. Install four hub mounting bolts through knuckle from inboard side allowing ends to protrude from opposite side.
2. Position knuckle on vehicle and install bolt and nut
fastening camber link (1) to knuckle (4) as shown.
3. Install bolt and nut fastening tension link (6) to
knuckle (4) as shown. Do not tighten bolt at this
time.
4. Install bolt and nut fastening stabilizer link to
knuckle (4). Do not tighten bolt at this time.
5. Install bolt fastening toe link (3) to knuckle (4). Do
6. Install bolt and nut fastening compression link (5)
to knuckle (4). Do not tighten bolt at this time.
NOTE: If a new knuckle sleeve is not installed in knuckle, perform Step 7 through Step 11.
2 - 118 REAR LX



9. Install Installation Thrust Bearing (around 3/8 inch
thick) and special flange nut (4) on end of Bolt.
nent.
tighten Nut.

holding bolt head stationary, tighten nut to 138
under spring link.
LX REAR 2 - 119
14. Insert end of cable (1) through rear knuckle (3)

15. Install parking brake shoe support over hub and
bearing mounting screws and onto face of
knuckle.

INSTALLATION)

18. Install hub and bearing as well as all components

necessary to access it. (Refer to 2 - SUSPEN-
SION/REAR/HUB / BEARING - INSTALLATION)
2 - 120 REAR LX

torque.
22. Lower vehicle.
23. Adjust parking brake shoes as necessary. (Refer
to 5 - BRAKES/PARKING BRAKE/SHOES -
ADJUSTMENTS)
bolts.
25. Tighten fasteners at knuckle (vehicle at curb

height) as follows:
Camber Link (1) 98 Nm (72 ft. lbs.) torque.
Compression Link (5) 81 Nm (60 ft. lbs.)
torque.
Stabilizer Link 61 Nm (45 ft. lbs.) torque.
Tension Link (6) 98 Nm (72 ft. lbs.) torque.
Toe Link (3) 81 Nm (60 ft. lbs.) torque.
CEDURE)
LX REAR 2 - 121
CAMBER LINK
REMOVAL
2. On both sides of vehicle, remove wheel mounting

nuts (3), then rear tire and wheel assembly (1).
WARNING: Before opening fuel system, review all

Warnings and Cautions.
3. If servicing left side, remove fuel filler tube. (Refer

to 14 - FUEL SYSTEM/FUEL DELIVERY/FUEL
TANK FILLER TUBE - REMOVAL)
4. Position an extra pair of jack stands under and
support forward end of engine cradle to help stabi-
lize vehicle during rear suspension removal/installa-
tion.
5. Perform following if vehicle is equipped with dual-
exhaust or are servicing right side on vehicle with
single exhaust.
a. Position under-hoist utility jack or stand several
inches below exhaust at muffler.
b. Disconnect exhaust isolators at muffler and
resonators hangers.
c. Lower exhaust down to rest upon top of jack or
stand placed below muffler.
2 - 122 REAR LX
6. Position under-hoist utility jack or transmission jack

(3) under center of rear axle differential (1). Raise
jack head to contact differential and secure in
place. When securing crossmember to jack, be
sure not to secure stabilizer bar.
7. Remove shock absorber (1) upper mounting

screws (2).
8. Remove shock absorber (1) lower mounting bolt (2)

and nut (4).
LX REAR 2 - 123
NOTE: If equipped with AWD, when removing

crossmember mounting bolts in following step, be
sure to not to misplace spacers (1) between cross-
member mounts (2) and body.
CAUTION: When removing crossmember mounting

bolts (2 and 3) it is important NOT to loosen or
remove crossmember mounting bolts on opposite
side of vehicle. Doing so will require rear wheel
alignment following reinstallation to ensure proper
thrust angle.
9. Remove both front and rear crossmember mount-

ing bolts (2 and 3) on repair-side of vehicle.
CAUTION: To avoid damaging other components

of vehicle, do not lower crossmember (1) any fur-
ther than necessary to remove shock absorber.
10. Slowly lower jack allowing repair-side of cross-

member to drop. Do not lower jack at a fast
rate. Lower jack just enough to allow top of shock
absorber to clear body flange.
11. Remove shock absorber (3) by tipping top out-

ward and lifting lower end out of pocket in spring
link (4).
2 - 124 REAR LX
NOTE: Do not lower repair-side of crossmember

any further than necessary to gain access to link
mounting bolts at crossmember.
12. Remove nut and bolt (2) mounting link to knuckle

(3).
13. Remove nut and bolt (2) mounting link to cross-
member (1).
14. Remove link.
INSTALLATION
NOTE: When installing link (1), ensure following to
avoid mis-installation:
Heavier, thicker end goes toward crossmember.
Fore-or-aft bow faces forward (curves around
coil spring).
Up-or-down bow faces downward.
LX REAR 2 - 125
1. Place link in bracket on crossmember (1). Install

bolt and nut (2) at crossmember (1) as shown. Do
2. Install bolt and nut (2) mounting link to knuckle (3)
as shown. Do not tighten bolt at this time.
3. Install shock absorber (3) by setting lower end into

pocket in spring link (4), then tipping top inward
until aligned with upper mounting holes.
4. Install lower shock mounting bolt and nut. Do not

2 - 126 REAR LX
5. If vehicle is equipped with AWD, make sure spac-

ers (1) on top of crossmember mount bushings (2)
on side of repair are in position.
6. Carefully raise jack, guiding coil spring and upper

end of shock absorber (4) into mounted positions.
7. Install shock absorber upper mounting screws (2).
Tighten upper mounting screws to 52 Nm (38 ft.
lbs.) torque.
NOTE: Rear crossmember mounting bolts (2) are

longer than front mounting bolts (3). Do not inter-
change mounting bolts.
8. Install crossmember mounting bolts (2 and 3).

Snug, but do not fully tighten bolts at this time.
LX REAR 2 - 127
9. Measure distance (1) between from tension link (2)

to body weld flange (3) directly in front of it, just
outboard of front mount bushing (4). This distance
must be at least 12 mm to allow proper clear-
ance for suspension movement. If distance is
less than 12 mm, shift that side of rear crossmem-
ber directly rearward until distance is 12 mm or
greater. To do so, loosen 3 mounting bolts slightly,
leaving one on opposite side of shift snugged to
pivot off of. Shift crossmember rearward and snug
loosened bolts. Measure opposite side to be sure it
also maintains minimum 12 mm distance.
10. Tighten all crossmember mounting bolts (2 and 3)

11. Remove jack (3) from under rear axle differential.

12. If previously lowered, raise rear exhaust back to
mounted position and connect exhaust isolators at
muffler and resonators hangers. Remove jack or
stand below exhaust muffler.
2 - 128 REAR LX
13. If removed, install fuel filler tube. (Refer to 14 -

FUEL SYSTEM/FUEL DELIVERY/FUEL TANK
FILLER TUBE - INSTALLATION)
14. Lower vehicle until front tires contact floor but rear
is still suspended. Place jack stands under each
rear suspension spring link. Place an appropriate
wooden block between stand and link to avoid
damaging spring link, then lower vehicle until full
vehicle weight is supported by suspension.
15. Tighten camber link fasteners (2) to:

Bolt at crossmember 85 Nm (63 ft. lbs.)
torque.
Bolt nut at knuckle 98 Nm (72 ft. lbs.) torque.
LX REAR 2 - 129
16. Tighten shock absorber lower mounting bolt nut

(4) to 72 Nm (53 ft. lbs.) torque.
17. Raise vehicle and remove jack stands (3).
18. Install tire and wheel assemblies (1). Tighten

wheel mounting nuts (3) to 150 Nm (110 ft. lbs.)
torque. (Refer to 22 - TIRES/WHEELS - INSTAL-
LATION)
19. Lower vehicle.
CEDURE)
2 - 130 REAR LX
COMPRESSION LINK
REMOVAL
2. Remove wheel mounting nuts (3), then rear tire

and wheel assembly (1).
3. Remove bolt and nut (2) mounting link (3) at

knuckle.
4. Remove bolt and nut (1) mounting link (3) at cross-
member.
5. Remove link (3).
INSTALLATION
NOTE: Although the compression link is different end-to-end, there is no top and bottom.
LX REAR 2 - 131
1. Position link and install bolt and nut (1) mounting

link (3) at crossmember. Do not tighten bolt at
this time.
2. Install bolt and nut (2) mounting link (3) at knuckle.
3. Install tire and wheel assembly (1). Tighten wheel

(Refer to 22 - TIRES/WHEELS - INSTALLATION)
4. Lower vehicle.
5. Position vehicle on alignment rack/drive-on lift.
Raise vehicle as necessary to access link fasten-
ers.
6. Tighten compression link fasteners to:
Bolt at crossmember 85 Nm (63 ft. lbs.)
torque.
Bolt at knuckle 81 Nm (60 ft. lbs.) torque.
PROCEDURE)
2 - 132 REAR LX
SPRING LINK
REMOVAL
SPRING LINK
2. Access and remove rear spring. (Refer to 2 - SUSPENSION/REAR/SPRING - REMOVAL)
3. Export Only If servicing right spring link, discon-
nect headlamp leveling sensor (1) link at spring link
(3).

LX REAR 2 - 133


knuckle to keep Tap 9361-1 (1) straight. Using Tap
with an appropriate handle, cut threads approxi-
mately halfway through bushing (or about six com-
plete threads). It is important to back tap out,
clean out burrs and lubricate Tap often during
process.


(1) Bolt 9361-3
(2) Nut
(4) Thrust Bearing
(5) Sleeve 9361-4 (RWD)
(5) Sleeve 9361-5 (AWD Left Side)
(5) Sleeve 9361-6 (AWD Right Side)
NOTE: When installing thrust bearing on Remover,

be sure to place hardened side against nut. Place
bearing outer cage against stationary component.
NOTE: It is important to use appropriate Sleeve on

Remover to provide proper Tool-to-Knuckle contact. RWD sleeve can be used on either side while AWD
knuckles require specific left or right side Sleeves.
2 - 134 REAR LX

knuckle sleeve.
8. Rotate Nut down, matching Sleeve angled end with
angled face of knuckle.
10. Remove bolt and nut (1) fastening spring link (4)
to crossmember.
11. Remove spring link (4).
SPRING LINK - SRT8

1. Access and remove rear brake rotor on side of repair. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/RO-
TOR - REMOVAL)
2. Access and remove rear spring on side of repair. (Refer to 2 - SUSPENSION/REAR/SPRING - REMOVAL)
LX REAR 2 - 135


knuckle to keep Tap 9361-1 (1) straight. Using Tap
with an appropriate handle, cut threads approxi-
mately halfway through bushing (or about six com-
plete threads). It is important to back tap out,
clean out burrs and lubricate Tap often during
process.


(1) Bolt 9361-3
(2) Nut
(3) Thrust Bearing
(5) Sleeve 9361-9 (Left Side - Shown in figure)
(5) Sleeve 9361-10 (Right Side)
NOTE: When installing thrust bearing (3) on

Remover, be sure to place hardened side against
nut (2). Place bearing outer cage against station-
ary component.
2 - 136 REAR LX
NOTE: It is important to use appropriate Sleeve (9361-9 or 9361-10) on Remover to provide proper Tool-to-
Knuckle contact.

knuckle sleeve.
7. Rotate Nut down, matching Sleeve (9361-9 or
9361-10) angled end with angled face of knuckle
(1). Make sure foot on Sleeve (3) is inserted
behind machined brake caliper mounting boss.
9. Remove bolt and nut (1) fastening spring link (4) to

crossmember.
10. Remove spring link (4).
LX REAR 2 - 137
INSTALLATION
SPRING LINK
1. Guide ball joint end of spring link (4) into mounting
pocket of knuckle, then swing opposite end up to
bushing in crossmember and install bolt and nut (1)
fastening spring link (4) to crossmember. Do not
tighten bolt at this time.


2 - 138 REAR LX

4. Install thrust bearing and nut (4) on end of Bolt.
nent.
tighten Nut.

holding bolt head stationary, tighten nut to 138 Nm
8. Export Only If servicing right spring link, connect

headlamp leveling sensor (1) link at spring link (3).
9. Install rear spring as well as all components neces-
sary to access it. (Refer to 2 - SUSPENSION/
REAR/SPRING - INSTALLATION)
10. Lower vehicle.
bolt.
12. Tighten spring link bolt at crossmember to 108
PROCEDURE)
LX REAR 2 - 139
SPRING LINK - SRT8

1. Guide ball joint end of spring link (4) into mounting
pocket of knuckle, then swing opposite end up to
bushing in crossmember and install bolt and nut (1)
fastening spring link (4) to crossmember. Do not
tighten bolt at this time.


2 - 140 REAR LX

4. Install Installation Thrust Bearing (around 3/8 inch
thick) and special flange nut (4) on end of Bolt.
nent.
tighten Nut.

holding bolt head stationary, tighten nut to 138 Nm
8. Install rear spring and all components necessary to
access it, except rear tire and wheel assembly on
side of repair. (Refer to 2 - SUSPENSION/REAR/
SPRING - INSTALLATION)
9. Install rear brake rotor and components necessary
to access it. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/
MECHANICAL/ROTOR - INSTALLATION)
10. Lower vehicle.
12. Position vehicle on alignment rack/drive-on lift. Raise vehicle as necessary to access mounting bolt.
13. Tighten spring link bolt at crossmember to 108 Nm (80 ft. lbs.) torque.
14. Tighten shock absorber lower mounting bolt nut to 72 Nm (53 ft. lbs.) torque.
15. Perform wheel alignment. (Refer to 2 - SUSPENSION/WHEEL ALIGNMENT - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
LX REAR 2 - 141
TENSION LINK
REMOVAL


3. If servicing left side, remove fuel filler tube. (Refer

to 14 - FUEL SYSTEM/FUEL DELIVERY/FUEL
TANK FILLER TUBE - REMOVAL)
tion.
single exhaust.
resonators hangers.
2 - 142 REAR LX


screws (2).

and nut (4).
LX REAR 2 - 143


thrust angle.




link (4).
2 - 144 REAR LX
NOTE: Do not lower repair-side of crossmember

any further than necessary to gain access to link
mounting bolts at crossmember.
12. Remove nut and bolt (4) mounting link to knuckle

(3).
13. Remove nut and bolt (4) mounting link to cross-
member (1).
14. Remove link.
INSTALLATION
NOTE: When installing tension link, although link
(6) is same end-to-end, make sure that center bow
is facing downward.
LX REAR 2 - 145
1. Place link in bracket on crossmember (1). Install

bolt and nut (4) at crossmember (1) as shown. Do
2. Install bolt and nut (4) mounting link to knuckle (3)
as shown. Do not tighten bolt at this time.


2 - 146 REAR LX


lbs.) torque.


LX REAR 2 - 147



2 - 148 REAR LX

14. Lower vehicle until front tires contact floor but rear
is still suspended. Place jack stands under each
rear suspension spring link. Place an appropriate
wooden block between stand and link to avoid
damaging spring link, then lower vehicle until full
vehicle weight is supported by suspension.
15. Tighten tension link fasteners (4) to:

Bolt nut at crossmember 85 Nm (63 ft. lbs.)
torque.
LX REAR 2 - 149

17. Raise vehicle and remove jack stands (3).

LATION)
19. Lower vehicle.
CEDURE)
2 - 150 REAR LX
TOE LINK
REMOVAL
LEFT LINK


3. Remove fuel filler tube. (Refer to 14 - FUEL SYS-

TEM/FUEL DELIVERY/FUEL TANK FILLER TUBE
- REMOVAL)
tion.
exhaust.
resonators hangers.
LX REAR 2 - 151

place.

and nut (4).

thrust angle.

ing bolts (2 and 3) on repair-side of vehicle. If
equipped with AWD, be sure to not to misplace
spacers between crossmember mounts and
body.


member to drop. Do not lower jack at a fast rate.
2 - 152 REAR LX
Lower jack just enough to allow toe link mounting bolt at crossmember.
10. If equipped, remove wheel speed sensor cable (2)

from toe link.
11. While holding toe adjustment cam bolt from rotat-

ing, remove nut (3) securing toe link at crossmem-
ber (1).
LX REAR 2 - 153
12. Slide cam bolt (2) rearward out of crossmember

and link (1).
13. Remove mounting bolt (3) and nut at knuckle.
14. Remove toe link (1).
RIGHT LINK
2. Remove wheel mounting nuts (3), then rear tire

and wheel assembly (1).
2 - 154 REAR LX
3. If equipped, remove wheel speed sensor cable (2)

from toe link.
4. While holding toe adjustment cam bolt from rotat-

ing, remove nut (3) securing toe link at crossmem-
ber (1).
5. Slide cam bolt (2) rearward out of crossmember

and link (1).
6. Remove mounting bolt (3) and nut at knuckle.
7. Remove toe link (1).
LX REAR 2 - 155
INSTALLATION
LEFT LINK
1. Slide crossmember end of toe link (1) into box
bracket on crossmember. Slide cam bolt (2)
through bracket and link from rear.
2. Install bolt (3) and nut securing link to knuckle. Do
3. While holding toe adjustment cam bolt from rotating

(cam facing upward), Install cam washer (2) and
nut (3) securing toe link at crossmember (1). Do
not tighten nut at this time.
2 - 156 REAR LX
4. If equipped, Attach wheel speed sensor cable (2) to

toe link.
5. Carefully raise jack, guiding coil spring and lower

6. When lower shock mounting bolt holes line up
install bolt (2) and nut (4). Do not tighten at this
time.

7. Continue to raise crossmember in not already in

mounted position, then install crossmember mount-
ing bolts (2 and 3). Snug, but do not fully tighten
bolts at this time.
LX REAR 2 - 157



2 - 158 REAR LX
12. Install fuel filler tube. (Refer to 14 - FUEL SYS-

- INSTALLATION)

LATION)
14. Lower vehicle.
bolts.

LX REAR 2 - 159
17. Tighten toe link (1) fasteners to:

Nut at crossmember 108 Nm (80 ft. lbs.)
torque (This nut may be tightened after rear
wheel alignment toe is set. Do not tighten from
bolt head end.).
CEDURE)
RIGHT LINK
1. Slide crossmember end of toe link (1) into box
bracket on crossmember. Slide cam bolt (2)
through bracket and link from rear of vehicle.
2. Install bolt (3) and nut securing link to knuckle. Do
2 - 160 REAR LX
3. While holding toe adjustment cam bolt from rotating

(cam facing upward), Install cam washer (2) and
nut (3) securing toe link at crossmember (1). Do
not tighten nut at this time.
4. If equipped, Attach wheel speed sensor cable (2) to

toe link.
5. Raise rear exhaust back to mounted position and
connect exhaust isolators at muffler and resonators
hangers. Remove jack or stand below exhaust
muffler.

7. Lower vehicle.
bolts.
LX REAR 2 - 161
9. Tighten toe link (1) fasteners to:

Nut at crossmember 108 Nm (80 ft. lbs.)
torque (This nut may be tightened after rear
wheel alignment toe is set. Do not tighten from
bolt head end.).
CEDURE)
2 - 162 REAR LX
SHOCK ABSORBER
DESCRIPTION
This vehicle is available with either standard gas-
charged shock absorbers or Nivomat load-leveling
shock absorbers for the rear suspension. Depending
on options, the load-leveling shock absorbers may
either be standard or optional equipment.
On the exterior, the load-leveling shock absorbers (1)
are larger in diameter than the standard shock absorb-
ers. Each load-leveling shock absorber is a self-con-
tained vehicle leveling system and shock absorber
combined. It does not require any external compres-
sor, hoses, or height leveling sensors. When cargo or
passengers are added, the load-leveling shock
absorbers use normal ride motions during driving,
even on smooth roads, to raise the rear of the vehicle
automatically to the unloaded (or curb) height. When
the load is removed, the vehicle maintains this rear
ride height.
The rear shock absorber used on the SRT8 is a load-

leveling shock (2). This shock absorber appears the
same as the standard load-leveling shock, but has
been specially calibrated for this vehicle. It can be
identified by an identification tag on its side (1). This
shock absorber is serviced the same as the standard
load-leveling shock absorber.
REMOVAL
STANDARD
LX REAR 2 - 163

wheel assembly (1).
outer spring link adding just enough support to
keep suspension from going into full-rebound when
shock absorber mounting bolts are removed.

and nut (4).
5. Remove shock absorber (1) upper mounting bolts

(2).
6. Remove shock absorber (4).
2 - 164 REAR LX
LOAD-LEVELING


3. If servicing left side shock absorber, remove fuel

filler tube. (Refer to 14 - FUEL SYSTEM/FUEL
DELIVERY/FUEL TANK FILLER TUBE -
REMOVAL)
tion.
single exhaust.
resonators hangers.
c. Lower exhaust down to rest upon top of jack or stand placed below muffler.
LX REAR 2 - 165


screws (2).

and nut (4).
2 - 166 REAR LX


thrust angle.




link (4).
LX REAR 2 - 167
INSTALLATION
STANDARD
1. Insert lower end of shock absorber (3) into well of
spring link (4).
2. Raise upper end of shock absorber (4) up into

mounted position on body (1) and install upper
mounting screws (2). Tighten upper mounting
screws to 52 Nm (38 ft. lbs.) torque.
2 - 168 REAR LX
3. Install lower shock mounting bolt (2) and nut (4).

Do not tighten at this time.
under spring link.

6. Lower vehicle.
Raise vehicle as necessary to access lower mount-
ing bolt.
8. Tighten shock absorber lower mounting bolt nut (4)

LX REAR 2 - 169
LOAD-LEVELING

2 - 170 REAR LX


lbs.) torque.


LX REAR 2 - 171



2 - 172 REAR LX


LATION)
13. Lower vehicle.
Raise lift as necessary to access lower mounting
bolt.

LX REAR 2 - 173
SPRING
REMOVAL


3. If servicing left side shock absorber, remove fuel

filler tube. (Refer to 14 - FUEL SYSTEM/FUEL
DELIVERY/FUEL TANK FILLER TUBE -
REMOVAL)
tion.
single exhaust.
resonators hangers.
c. Lower exhaust down to rest upon top of jack or stand placed below muffler.
2 - 174 REAR LX


screws (2).

and nut (4).
LX REAR 2 - 175


thrust angle.




link (4).
12. Disconnect brake hose at bracket mounted to
body to allow to avoid overextending hose, dam-
aging it, during following step.
13. Slowly lower jack until crossmember is low
enough to remove coil spring. Do not lower jack
any further than necessary to remove spring.
14. Remove coil spring and isolators (1, 2 and 5).
2 - 176 REAR LX
INSTALLATION
NOTE: Rear coil springs are interchangeable.
1. Install upper (1) and lower (5) isolators on coil

spring (2).
NOTE: Before installing coil spring, make sure iso-

lators (1 and 5) are completely installed on ends of
spring.
2. Install coil spring with isolators into spring pocket of

spring link (1) fitting lower isolator (2) to shape of
pocket, then align top of spring with body mount.
LX REAR 2 - 177



2 - 178 REAR LX

lbs.) torque.



LX REAR 2 - 179



- INSTALLATION)
2 - 180 REAR LX

LATION)
15. Lower vehicle.
Raise lift as necessary to access lower mounting
bolt.

LX REAR 2 - 181
BAR - STABILIZER
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect and isolate battery negative cable (2)
from battery post.
3. On each side of vehicle rear, remove wheel mount-

ing nuts (3), then tire and wheel assembly (1).
2 - 182 REAR LX
4. Remove rear exhaust system (2) (dual-outlet

exhaust shown in figure). (Refer to 11 - EXHAUST
SYSTEM - REMOVAL)
5. Apply alignment index marks (3) to the propeller

shaft rubber coupler (1) and axle flange (2).
6. Remove three (four if equipped with 215 MM axle)

propeller shaft coupler-to-axle flange bolts and
nuts.
LX REAR 2 - 183
7. Support propeller shaft (2) using a bungee cord (1).

Attach ends of cord to fuel tank straps as shown.
NOTE: Due to short travel and low spring tension,

it is not necessary to lock-out parking brake lever
to service parking brake components.
8. Disconnect front parking brake cable (5) at connec-

tor (3) to right rear parking brake cable (4).
2 - 184 REAR LX
9. Remove front parking brake cable (3) from equal-

izer (2).
10. Remove screw (2) fastening front parking brake

cable (1) routing bracket to rear crossmember
front flange (3).
LX REAR 2 - 185
11. If equipped with standard or premium disc brakes,

on each rear disc brake:
a. While holding guide pins from turning, remove
disc brake caliper guide pin bolts (2).
b. Remove brake caliper (1) from brake adapter
(3) and pads.
c. Guide brake caliper up through suspension, fol-
lowing brake hose path. Support caliper above
rear suspension using with bungee cord or wire
to keep caliper from overextending brake hose
when crossmember is lowered.
CAUTION: When pushing pistons back into caliper

bores, use only a trim stick as shown or other
suitable soft tool. Never use a screwdriver or other
metal pry bar due to potential damage to braking
surface of rotor, caliper, pistons or dust boots.
12. If equipped with SRT8 disc brakes, on each rear

disc brake, place trim stick (4) between brake pad
(2) and outer edge of rotor (3).
disc brake, using trim stick, slowly apply pressure
against brake pad (2) until both pistons (on that
side of caliper) are completely bottomed in bores
of caliper half.


disc brake, support spring link (1) using a trans-
mission jack (5) or other appropriate jack. Raise
spring link just enough to access brake caliper
lower mounting bolt (4) from above compression
link (2).
2 - 186 REAR LX

disc brake, remove the lower and upper caliper
mounting bolts (1).
disc brake, remove brake caliper (2) with pads
from knuckle and brake rotor. Hang assembly out
of way using wire or a bungee cord. Use care not
to overextend brake hose when doing this.
17. If equipped with SRT8 disc brakes, remove jack
from under spring link.
NOTE: To remove wheel speed sensor connector

from body wiring harness connector, move retain-
ing clip (2) and pull sensor connector outward.
18. Remove wheel speed sensor connectors (3 and

4) from body wiring harness connector (1) located
in luggage compartment floor pan (2).
LX REAR 2 - 187
19. Unclip left wheel speed sensor cable (3) from

routing clip (1) near body connector.
20. On each side of vehicle, remove shock absorber

(1) lower mounting bolt (2) and nut (4).
21. Carefully mark location of rear crossmember on

body at all four mount (bushing) locations using a
marker or crayon. Do not use a scratch awl to
mark location.
2 - 188 REAR LX
22. Position an extra pair of jack stands under and support forward end of engine cradle to help stabilize vehicle
during rear suspension removal/installation.
23. Position under-hoist utility jack or transmission
jack (3) under center of rear axle differential (1).
Raise jack head to contact differential and secure
in place. When securing crossmember to jack,
be sure not to secure stabilizer bar.

24. Remove fuel filler tube. (Refer to 14 - FUEL SYS-

- REMOVAL)
LX REAR 2 - 189

25. Remove both front (3) and both rear (2) mounting
bolts fastening crossmember (1) in place.
26. Slowly lower crossmember using jack. Do not lower jack at a fast rate. Lower just enough to allow propeller
shaft removal from rear axle differential. Do not lower jack any further than necessary. Slide propeller shaft
out of rear axle differential and allow bungee cord previously installed to support.
27. Continue to lower jack until crossmember is at a comfortable working level to access stabilizer bar fasteners.
2 - 190 REAR LX
28. On each end, remove bolt (3) and nut fastening

stabilizer bar (4) to stabilizer link (2).
29. Remove bolts (1) fastening each stabilizer bar iso-
lator retainer to crossmember.
30. Remove stabilizer bar (4) with isolators and
retainers.
31. Remove retainers from isolators.
32. Remove isolators from stabilizer bar utilizing slits
in bushings.
INSTALLATION
1. Install isolators on stabilizer bar utilizing slits in
bushings. Install each isolator so its slit faces for-
ward and flat side is positioned toward crossmem-
ber once installed.
2. Install retainers on isolators.
3. Install stabilizer bar (4) with isolators and retainers
on crossmember.
4. Install isolator retainer mounting bolts (1). Do not
5. Install bolt (3) and nut fastening stabilizer bar ends
to each stabilizer links (2). Do not tighten at this
time.
6. Tighten isolator retainer mounting bolts (1) to 61
LX REAR 2 - 191
7. Remove coil springs (2) with isolators (1 and 5)

from spring links (4).
8. Raise crossmember to body mounting points. As crossmember is raised, slide propeller shaft onto rear axle dif-
ferential flange and align shocks with pockets in spring links.
NOTE: There are four crossmember mounting

bolts. Rear mounting bolts (2) are longer than
front mounting bolts (3). Do not interchange
mounting bolts.
9. Continue to raise crossmember (1) with jack until

crossmember mounting bolts (2 and 3) can be
installed. Install left side crossmember mounting
bolts, but not the right side bolts. It is not neces-
sary to tighten bolts at this point.
2 - 192 REAR LX

of vehicle, do not lower crossmember any further
than necessary to install coil spring (2).
10. Slowly lower jack allowing right side of cross-

rate. Lower jack just enough to allow spring (2)
Installation. Do not lower jack any further than
necessary.

spring.
11. Install coil spring (2) with isolators into spring

pocket of spring link fitting the lower isolator to the
shape of the pocket, then align top of spring with
body mount.

Once shock absorber (1) lower mounting hole
lines up with hole in spring link (3), stop jacking.
14. If vehicle is equipped with AWD, insert spacers (1)

on top of right crossmember mount bushings (2)
before crossmember is raised into place.
LX REAR 2 - 193

mounting bolts.
15. Raise right side of crossmember (1) into mounted

position. Install right side crossmember mounting
bolts (2 and 3). Snug, but do not fully tighten
bolts at this time.
ing bolts (2 and 3) on left side of vehicle.

of vehicle, do not lower crossmember any further
than necessary to install coil spring (2).
17. Slowly lower jack allowing left side of crossmem-

ber to drop. Do not lower jack at a fast rate.
Lower jack just enough to allow spring (2) Instal-
lation. Do not lower jack any further than nec-
essary.

spring.
18. Install coil spring (2) with isolators into spring

pocket of spring link fitting the lower isolator to the
shape of the pocket, then align top of spring with
body mount.

Once shock absorber (1) lower mounting hole
lines up with hole in spring link (3), stop jacking.
2 - 194 REAR LX
21. If vehicle is equipped with AWD, insert spacers (1)

on top of left crossmember mount bushings (2)
before crossmember is raised into place.

mounting bolts.
22. Raise left side of crossmember (1) into mounted

position. Install left side crossmember mounting
bolts (2 and 3). Snug, but do not fully tighten
bolts at this time.
23. Shift crossmember as necessary to line up

mounts (3) with location marks drawn on body (1)
before removal.
LX REAR 2 - 195
24. Once mounts are lined up with location marks, on

both sides of vehicle, measure distance (1)
between the tension link (2) and weld flange (3)
on body directly in front of it, just outboard of the
front mount bushing (4). This distance must be
at least 12 mm to allow proper clearance for
suspension movement. If distance is less than
12 mm on either side of vehicle, shift that side of
rear crossmember directly rearward until distance
is 12 mm or greater. To do so, loosen 3 mounting
bolts slightly, leaving one on opposite side of shift
snugged to pivot off of. Shift crossmember rear-
ward and snug loosened bolts. Remeasure oppo-
site side to be sure it still maintains minimum 12
mm distance.
25. Tighten all four crossmember mounting bolts (2

and 3) to 180 Nm (133 ft. lbs.) torque.

2 - 196 REAR LX
27. Remove bungee cord (1) supporting propeller

shaft (2).
28. Align propeller shaft index marks (3) placed upon

removal. Install propeller shaft rear coupler-to-axle
flange bolts and nuts by hand. Tighten propeller
shaft rear coupler-to-axle flange bolts to 81 Nm

- INSTALLATION)
LX REAR 2 - 197
30. Clip left rear wheel speed sensor cable (3) to

routing clip (1) near body connector.
31. Match left rear wheel speed sensor connector (4)

to right sensor connector (3) to make one connec-
tor.
32. Insert speed sensor connectors (3 and 4) into
body wiring harness connector (1) located in lug-
gage compartment floor pan (2). When installing
connector, make sure retaining clip on body con-
nector is properly in place and sensor connector
cannot be pulled out.
CAUTION: Extreme caution should be taken not to

cross-thread caliper guide pin bolts (2) when they
are installed.
33. If equipped with standard or premium disc brakes,

on each rear disc brake:
a. Push caliper guide pins into caliper adapter to
clear caliper mounting bosses when installing.
b. Guide caliper and brake hose down through
rear suspension, then slide caliper over brake
pads and onto caliper adapter (3).
c. Align caliper mounting holes with guide pins,
then install guide pin bolts (2). While holding
guide pins from turning, tighten bolts to 31 Nm
d. Make sure brake hose is properly routed and
will not come in contact with suspension
components.
2 - 198 REAR LX
34. If equipped with SRT8 disc brakes, at each rear disc brake, support spring link using a transmission jack or
other appropriate jack as indicated in removal procedure. (Refer to 2 - SUSPENSION/REAR/STABILIZER BAR
- REMOVAL)
disc brake, slide caliper with pads (2) over brake
rotor and align with knuckle.
disc brake, install caliper mounting bolts (1).
Tighten bolts to 130 Nm (96 ft. lbs.) torque.
disc brake, remove jack from under spring link.
38. Insert routing front parking brake cable bracket

locating pin in front flange of crossmember (3),
then install screw (2) fastening cable (1) routing
bracket to rear crossmember.
LX REAR 2 - 199
39. Route parking brake cable above rear crossmem-

ber, then slide cable (1, 3) through equalizer (2)
above rear axle differential.

40. Connect front parking brake cable (5) at connec-

tor (3) to right rear parking brake cable (4).
2 - 200 REAR LX
41. Install rear exhaust system (2) (dual-outlet

exhaust shown in figure). (Refer to 11 - EXHAUST
SYSTEM - INSTALLATION)

LATION)
43. Lower vehicle until rear wheels are just above
floor level.
44. Apply parking brake lever. Release lever, then
reapply.
45. Check to make sure rear wheels will not rotate
with lever applied.
46. Lower vehicle.
47. Connect battery negative cable (2) to battery post.

It is important that this is performed properly.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
bolts.
LX REAR 2 - 201
50. Tighten shock absorber lower mounting bolt nuts

51. Tighten stabilizer link fasteners (3) to 61 Nm (45

ft. lbs.) torque.
52. Perform wheel alignment, paying special attention
to thrust angle. If rear crossmember needs to be
shifted to align thrust angle, try to avoid compro-
mising tension link clearance (Refer to Step 24).
(Refer to 2 - SUSPENSION/WHEEL ALIGNMENT
- STANDARD PROCEDURE)
2 - 202 WHEEL ALIGNMENT LX
WHEEL ALIGNMENT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
WHEEL ALIGNMENT STANDARD PROCEDURE

DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 WHEEL ALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING CURB HEIGHT MEASUREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
SUSPENSION AND STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE LEAD/PULL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 WHEEL ALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
LX WHEEL ALIGNMENT 2 - 203
WHEEL ALIGNMENT
DESCRIPTION
Vehicle wheel alignment is the positioning of all interrelated front and rear suspension angles. These angles affect
the handling and steering of the vehicle when it is in motion. Proper wheel alignment is essential for efficient steer-
ing, good directional stability, and proper tire wear.
The method of checking a vehicles front and rear wheel alignment varies depending on the manufacturer and type
of equipment used. The manufacturers instructions should always be followed to ensure accuracy of the alignment,
except when DaimlerChrysler Corporations wheel alignment specifications differ.
On this vehicle, the suspension angles that can be adjusted are as follows:
FRONT:
Camber (with cradle shift/service adjustment bolt package)
Caster (with cradle shift/service adjustment bolt package)
Toe
REAR:
Toe
Check the wheel alignment and make all wheel alignment adjustments with the vehicle standing at its proper curb
height specification. Curb height is the normal riding height of the vehicle. It is measured from a certain point on the
vehicle to the ground or a designated area while the vehicle is sitting on a flat, level surface. Refer to Curb Height
Measurement in this section for additional information.
Typical wheel alignment angles and measurements are described in the following paragraphs.
CAMBER
Camber is the inward or outward tilt of the top of the
tire and wheel assembly. Inward tilt (2) is negative
camber. Outward tilt (1) is positive camber. Camber is
measured in degrees of angle relative to a true verti-
cal line. Camber is a tire wearing angle.
Excessive negative camber will cause tread wear
at the inside of the tire.
Excessive positive camber will cause tread wear
on the outside of the tire.
CROSS CAMBER
Cross camber is the difference between left and right
camber. To achieve the cross camber reading, sub-
tract the right side camber reading from the left. For
example, if the left camber is +0.3 and the right cam-
ber is 0.0, the cross camber would be +0.3.
CASTER
Caster is the forward or rearward tilt of the steering

knuckle in reference to the position of the upper and
lower ball joints. Caster is measured in degrees of
angle relative to a true vertical center line. This line is
viewed from the side of the tire and wheel assembly.
Forward tilt (upper ball joint ahead of lower)
results in a negative caster angle.
Rearward tilt (upper ball joint trailing lower)
results in a positive caster angle.
Although caster does not affect tire wear, a caster
imbalance between the two front wheels may cause
the vehicle to lead to the side with the least positive
caster.
CROSS CASTER
Cross caster is the difference between left and right
caster.
TOE
Toe is the inward or outward angle of the wheels as

viewed from above the vehicle.
Toe-in (1) is produced when the front edges of
the wheels on the same axle are closer together
than the rear edges.
Toe-out (2) is produced when the front edges of
the wheels on the same axle are farther apart
than the rear edges.
Toe-in and toe-out can occur at the front wheels and
the rear wheels.
Toe is measured in degrees or inches. The measure-
ment identifies the amount that the front of the wheels
point inward (toe-in) or outward (toe-out). Toe is mea-
sured at the spindle height. Zero toe means the front
and rear edges of the wheels on the same axle are
equally distant.
TOE-OUT ON TURNS
Toe-out on turns is the relative positioning of the front
wheels while steering through a turn. This compen-
sates for each front wheels turning radius. As the
vehicle encounters a turn, the outboard wheel must
travel in a larger radius circle than the inboard wheel.
The steering system is designed to make each wheel
follow its particular radius circle. To accomplish this,
the front wheels must progressively toe outward as
the steering is turned from center. This eliminates tire
scrubbing and undue tire wear when steering a vehi-
cle through a turn.
DYNAMIC TOE PATTERN

Dynamic toe pattern is the inward and outward toe movement of the front and rear tires through the suspensions
jounce and rebound travel. As the vehicles suspension moves up and down, the toe pattern varies. Toe pattern is
critical in controlling the directional stability of the vehicle while in motion. Front and rear dynamic toe pattern is
preset by the factory at the time the vehicle is assembled.
It is not necessary to check or adjust front or rear dynamic toe pattern when doing a normal wheel alignment. The
only time dynamic toe pattern needs to be checked or adjusted is if the frame of the vehicle has been damaged.
STEERING AXIS INCLINATION (S. A. I.)

Steering axis inclination is the angle between a true
vertical line starting at the center of the tire at the road
contact point and a line drawn through the center of
the upper ball joint (or strut) and the lower ball joint
(1). S.A.I. is built into the vehicle and is not an adjust-
able angle. If S.A.I. is not within specifications, a bent
or damaged suspension component may be the
cause.
INCLUDED ANGLE (I. A.)

Included angle (3) is the sum of the S.A.I. angle (1)
plus or minus the camber angle (2), depending on
whether or not the wheel has positive or negative
camber. If camber is positive (2), add the camber
angle to the S.A.I. angle. If camber is negative, sub-
tract the camber angle from the S.A.I. angle. Included
angle is not adjustable, but can be used to diagnose a
frame misalignment or bent suspension component
(spindle, strut).
THRUST ANGLE
Thrust angle is the averaged direction the rear wheels
are pointing in relation to the vehicles center line. The
presence of negative or positive thrust angle causes
the rear tires to track improperly to the left or right of
the front tires (dog tracking).
Negative thrust angle means the rear tires are
tracking to the left of the front tires.
Positive thrust angle means the rear tires are
tracking to the right of the front tires.
Improper tracking can cause undue tire wear, a lead
or pull and a crooked steering wheel. Excessive thrust
angle can usually be corrected by adjusting the rear
wheel toe so that each wheel has one-half of the total
toe measurement.

SUSPENSION AND STEERING
CONDITION POSSIBLE CAUSES CORRECTION
Front End Whine On Turns 1. Defective wheel bearing 1. Replace wheel bearing
2. Incorrect wheel alignment 2. Check and reset wheel alignment
3. Worn tires 3. Replace tires
Front End Growl Or 1. Defective wheel bearing 1. Replace wheel bearing

Grinding On Turns
2. Engine mount grounding 2. Check for motor mount hitting frame
rail and reposition engine as required
3. AWD - Worn or broken C/V joint 3. Replace C/V joint
4. Loose wheel lug nuts 4. Verify wheel lug nut torque
Front End Clunk Or Snap 1. Loose lug nuts 1. Tighten wheel lug nuts to
On Turns specifications
2. Worn or loose tie rod 2. Tighten or replace tie rod end
3. Worn or loose ball joint 3. Tighten or replace ball joint
4. Worn/loose control arm bushing 4. Replace control arm or bushing
5. Loose control arm fasteners 5. Tighten control arm fasteners to
specified torque
6. Loose stabilizer bar 6. Tighten stabilizer bar fasteners to
specified torque
7. Loose crossmember bolts 7. Tighten crossmember bolts to
specified torque
Front End Whine With 1. Defective wheel bearing 1. Replace hub and bearing assembly
Vehicle Going Straight At A
Constant Speed
Front End Growl Or 1. Engine mount grounding 1. Reposition engine/mount as required

Grinding With Vehicle
Going Straight At A
Constant Speed
Front End Clunk When 1. Worn or broken engine mount 1. Replace engine mount
Accelerating Or
Decelerating
2. Loose lug nuts 2. Tighten wheel lug nuts to specified
torque
3. Worn or loose ball joint 3. Replace ball joint/control arm
4. Worn or loose control arm bushing 4. Replace control arm or bushing
5. Loose control arm fasteners 5. Tighten fasteners to specified torque
6. Loose crossmember bolts 6. Tighten crossmember bolts to
specified torque
7. Worn tie rod end 7. Replace tie rod end
Road Wander 1. Incorrect tire pressure 1. Inflate tires to recommended pressure

2. Incorrect front or rear wheel toe 2. Check and reset wheel toe
3. Worn wheel bearing 3. Replace hub and bearing
4. Worn control arm bushings 4. Replace control arm or bushing
5. Excessive friction in steering gear 5. Replace steering gear
6. Excessive friction in steering shaft 6. Replace steering intermediate
coupling shaft/coupler
Lateral Pull 1. Unequal tire pressure 1. Inflate all tires to recommended

pressure
2. Radial tire lead 2. Perform lead correction procedure
3. Incorrect front wheel camber 3. Check and reset front wheel camber
4. Power steering gear imbalance 4. Replace power steering gear
5. Wheel braking 5. Correct braking condition causing
lateral pull
Excessive Steering Free 1. Incorrect Steering Gear Adjustment 1. Replace Steering Gear
Play
2. Worn or loose tie rod ends 2. Replace tie rod ends
3. Loose steering gear mounting bolts 3. Tighten steering gear mounting bolts
to specified torque
4. Loose or worn steering shaft coupler 4. Replace steering intermediate
shaft/coupler
Excessive Steering Effort 1. Low tire pressure 1. Inflate all tires to recommended
pressure
2. Lack of lubricant in steering gear 2. Replace steering gear
3. Low power steering fluid level 3. Fill power steering fluid reservoir to
correct level. Bleed as necessary
4. Loose drive belt 4. Replace adjuster or drive belt
5. Lack of lubricant in ball joints 5. Replace ball joints
6. Steering gear malfunction 6. Replace steering gear
7. Lack of lubricant in steering shaft 7. Replace steering intermediate
coupler shaft/coupler
VEHICLE LEAD/PULL
To assure correct diagnosis, it is important to follow the steps outlined below in the order shown. Road test the
vehicle before and after each step to verify that the lead condition has been corrected. When evaluating a vehicle,
always drive the same road in both directions to get a feel for the effect of road crown and cross wind. A neutral
vehicle will exhibit a small amount of drift on both right and left crowned roads (normal crown sensitivity). A vehicle
with pronounced lead/pull may have one or more of the following conditions:
1. UNEQUAL TIRE PRESSURE. Adjust tire pressure to the pressure stated on door placard. Make sure the tire
pressure is equal on all four tires and evaluate the car. Also verify that the tire size and type are correct and
match each other. If the car still has a lead condition go to step (2).
2. TIRE CONICITY. Excessive tire conicity is one of the more frequent causes of vehicle lead. Cross-switch the
front tires and evaluate the car. If the car still leads in the same direction or gets worse, return the front tires to
their original position, then go to step (3).
3. SUSPENSION ALIGNMENT. Check and record the wheel alignment settings. Non-symmetrical front caster or
camber can sometimes cause a lead condition or can be used to fix a lead condition. Adjust the wheel alignment
as necessary to preferred settings (Refer to 2 - SUSPENSION/WHEEL ALIGNMENT - STANDARD PROCE-
DURE). If the car still leads, go to step (4).
4. STEERING GEAR VALVE IMBALANCE. Steering gear valve imbalance can sometimes cause a vehicle lead.
Although there is no quick test or measurement that can be performed to verify a good or bad steering gear
valve, generally the steering efforts will feel much lighter in the lead direction and heavier in the opposite direc-
tion with an unbalanced valve. Replace the steering gear only as a 9last resort9 to solve the problem. To replace
the steering gear, (Refer to 19 - STEERING/GEAR - REMOVAL).
STANDARD PROCEDURE
WHEEL ALIGNMENT
PRE-WHEEL ALIGNMENT INSPECTION
Before any attempt is made to change or correct the wheel alignment, the following inspection and necessary cor-
rections must be made to ensure proper alignment.
1. Verify that the fuel tank is full of fuel. If the tank is not full, the reduction in weight will affect the curb height of
the vehicle and the alignment angles.
2. The vehicles passenger and luggage compartments should be free of any load that is not factory equipment.
3. Check the tires on the vehicle. All tires must be the same size and in good condition with approximately the
same amount of tread wear. Inflate all the tires to the recommended air pressure.
4. Check the wheel and tire assemblies for excessive radial runout.
5. Inspect lower ball joints and all steering linkage for looseness, binding, wear or damage. Repair as necessary.
6. Check suspension fasteners for proper torque and tighten as necessary.
7. Inspect all suspension component rubber bushings for signs of wear or deterioration. Replace any faulty bush-
ings or components before aligning the vehicle.
8. Check the vehicles curb height to verify it is within specifications. (Refer to 2 - SUSPENSION/WHEEL ALIGN-
MENT - STANDARD PROCEDURE - CURB HEIGHT MEASUREMENT)
WHEEL ALIGNMENT SETUP

1. Position the vehicle on an alignment rack.
2. Install all required alignment equipment on the vehicle per the alignment equipment manufacturers instructions.
On this vehicle, a four-wheel alignment is recommended.
NOTE: Prior to reading the vehicles alignment readouts, the front and rear of vehicle should be jounced
(suspension compressed/released). Induce jounce (rear first, then front) by grasping the center of the
bumper and jouncing each end of vehicle an equal number of times. The bumper should always be released
when vehicle is at the bottom of the jounce cycle.
3. Read the vehicles current front and rear alignment settings. Compare the vehicles current alignment settings to
the vehicle specifications for camber, caster and toe-in. (Refer to 2 - SUSPENSION/WHEEL ALIGNMENT -
SPECIFICATIONS)
4. If front camber and caster are not within specifications, proceed to CAMBER AND CASTER below. If caster and
camber are within specifications, proceed to TOE which can be found following CAMBER AND CASTER. Rear
camber and caster are not adjustable. If found not to be within specifications, reinspect for damaged suspension
or body components and replace as necessary. If rear toe is not within specifications, adjust rear toe before
proceeding to adjust front toe.
CAMBER AND CASTER

Camber and caster settings on this vehicle are determined at the time the vehicle is designed, by the location of the
vehicles suspension components. This is referred to as NET BUILD. The result is no required adjustment of camber
and caster after the vehicle is built or when servicing the suspension components. Thus, when performing a wheel
alignment, caster and camber are not normally considered adjustable angles. Camber and caster should be
checked to ensure they meet vehicle specifications.
If individual front camber or caster is found not to meet alignment specifications, each can be adjusted by shifting
the engine cradle if cross-camber and cross-caster are within specifications, or by using an available service adjust-
ment bolt package. Always try to shift the cradle first (if camber and caster are off slightly) to correct the mis-
alignment before installing an adjustment bolt package. If an adjustment bolt package installation is necessary,
inspect the suspension components for any signs of damage or bending first.
CAUTION: Do not attempt to adjust the vehicles wheel alignment by heating, bending or by performing any
other modification to the vehicles front suspension components or body.
ADJUSTMENT BY SHIFTING CRADLE
CAUTION: Always use care when shifting cradle to avoid damaging other components on the vehicle.
1. Loosen the four bolts (1) fastening the engine cra-

dle (2) to the frame just enough to allow movement
of the cradle.
2. Shift cradle as necessary to bring camber or caster
into specifications. When shifting cradle, use care
not to move other angles (camber or caster) that
are within specifications, out of specifications.
3. Tighten the four bolts (1) fastening the engine cra-
dle (2) to the frame to specifications.
4. Jounce the rear, then front of the vehicle an equal
amount of times.
5. Measure camber and caster. If camber and caster
are within specifications, proceed to TOE. If cam-
ber or caster cannot be brought into specifications,
perform the ADJUSTMENT BOLT PACKAGE
INSTALLATION below.
ADJUSTMENT BOLT PACKAGE INSTALLATION - AWD
NOTE: Adjustment bolts for AWD and RWD are not

interchangeable.
The adjustment bolt package contains 2 special bolts

(1). These bolts can be identified by the offset grooves
cut into the thread section (2). These bolts are
designed to replace the inboard mounting bolts of the
lower control arm at the engine cradle. Each bolt
allows approximately 0.3 degrees of movement. To
adjust camber only, use both bolts, one at each leg of
the control arm. To adjust caster only, use one bolt at
the front leg only.
1. Raise the vehicle by the frame until the tires are not supporting the weight of the vehicle.
2. Remove the belly pan as necessary. (Refer to 23 - BODY/EXTERIOR/BELLY PAN - REMOVAL)
3. Lower control arm rear bolt only:
a. Remove the screws fastening the heat shields covering the steering gear inner tie rod boots. Remove the
heat shields.
b. Loosen (do not remove) the steering gear mounting bolt furthest from the side of adjustment bolt installation.
c. Remove the two remaining steering gear mounting bolts and allow steering gear to relax on the side of
adjustment bolt installation, giving access to the lower control arm rear mounting bolt.
CAUTION: Wheel alignment adjustment bolts have

offset grooves cut into the length of the bolt (2). If
removing or installing lower control arm or ten-
sion strut mounting bolts that have these grooves,
DO NOT ROTATE THE BOLT. To remove the bolt,
hold the bolt head stationary and rotate the nut,
then slide the bolt straight out of the bushing.
This is necessary to avoid damaging the bat wings
in the bushing inner metal or cradle.
4. Hold the head of the control arm or tension strut mounting bolt stationary and remove the nut. Slide the bolt
straight out of the bushing and discard.
CAUTION: When installing an adjustment bolt, be sure to install it in the correct direction. Lower control
arm rear mounting bolts must be installed from the rear-forward and lower control arm front mounting bolts
must be installed from the front-rearward.
NOTE: The grooves on the adjustment bolts are off-center forcing the bolt to be installed in one of two
ways depending on whether more positive or negative camber or caster is necessary. The Bolts must be
rotated 180 to achieve either more positive or negative camber or caster. DO NOT force the adjustment
bolt.
NOTE: The original (non-grooved) mounting bolt

(3) lies through the center of the hole (1), between
the bat wings as shown in (c).
5. Camber Adjustment The adjustment bolts are

designed to work in conjunction with bat wing
holes that are formed into the engine cradle (1)
allowing for lower control arm movement approxi-
mately 0.3 in either direction.
To achieve more positive camber, refer to (a) in
the figure. Move the control arm in the desired
direction, then insert the adjustment bolt (2) with
a washer installed through the bat wing hole in
the engine cradle (1) and round hole in the bush-
ing inner metal.
To achieve more negative camber, refer to (b) in
the figure. Move the control arm in the desired
the engine cradle (1) and round hole in the bush-
ing inner metal.

the bat wings as shown in (c).
6. Caster Adjustment The adjustment bolts are

designed to work in conjunction with bat wings
that are formed into the engine cradle (1) allowing
for lower control arm movement approximately 0.3
in either direction.
To achieve more positive caster, refer to (a) in
the figure. Move the lower control arm in the
desired direction, then insert the adjustment bolt
(2) with a washer installed through the bat wing
hole in the engine cradle (1) and the round hole
in the bushing inner metal.
To achieve more negative caster, refer to (b) in
the figure. Move the lower control arm in the
desired direction, then insert the adjustment bolt
(2) with a washer installed through the bat wing
hole in engine cradle (1) and round hole in the
bushing inner metal.
7. Start a NEW nut on the end of the mounting bolt by hand, then while holding the head of the bolt stationary,
install the nut. Do not tighten the nut at this time.
8. Rear adjustment bolt only Reinstall the steering gear and heat shields. (Refer to 19 - STEERING/GEAR -
INSTALLATION)
9. Lower the vehicle to curb position. Jounce the rear, then the front of the vehicle an equal amount of times.
10. Using a crowfoot wrench, tighten the adjustment bolt nut to 176 Nm (130 ft. lbs.) torque while holding the bolt
stationary. A socket on the end of a breaker bar works well for holding the rear bolt stationary with the steering
gear is installed.
11. Measure camber and caster. If camber and caster are not within specifications, inspect the suspension compo-
nents for any signs of damage or bending. If camber and caster (and cross-camber and cross-caster) are within
specifications, proceed with TOE to check and adjust toe.
12. Install the belly pan. (Refer to 23 - BODY/EXTERIOR/BELLY PAN - INSTALLATION)
ADJUSTMENT BOLT PACKAGE INSTALLATION - RWD
NOTE: Adjustment bolts for AWD and RWD are not

interchangeable.
The adjustment bolt package contains 2 special bolts

(1). These bolts can be identified by the offset grooves
cut into the thread section (2). These bolts are
designed to replace the inboard mounting bolts of the
lower control arm and tension strut. Each bolt allows
approximately 0.3 degrees of movement. To adjust
camber only, use both bolts, one at the tension strut
and the other at the lower control arm. To adjust
caster only, use one bolt at the tension strut only.
1. Raise the vehicle by the frame until the tires are not supporting the weight of the vehicle.
2. Remove the belly pan as necessary. (Refer to 23 - BODY/EXTERIOR/BELLY PAN - REMOVAL)

3. Lower control arm bolt only:
a. Remove the screws fastening the heat shields covering the stabilizer bar bushing retainers to the cradle.
Remove the heat shields.
b. Remove the four bolts (two each) fastening the stabilizer bar bushing retainers to the cradle.
c. Swing the stabilizer bar rearward and down out of the way of the control arm mounting bolts.
CAUTION: Wheel alignment adjustment bolts have

offset grooves cut into the length of the bolt (2). If
removing or installing lower control arm or ten-
sion strut mounting bolts that have these grooves,
DO NOT ROTATE THE BOLT. To remove the bolt,
hold the bolt head stationary and rotate the nut,
then slide the bolt straight out of the bushing.
This is necessary to avoid damaging the bat wings
in the bushing inner metal or cradle.
4. Hold the head of the control arm or tension strut mounting bolt stationary and remove the nut. Slide the bolt
straight out of the bushing and discard.
CAUTION: When installing an adjustment bolt, be sure to install it in the correct direction. Lower control
arm bolts must be installed from the rear-forward to avoid contact with the stabilizer bar upon installation.
Tension strut bolts must be installed from the front-rearward.
NOTE: The grooves on the adjustment bolts are off-center forcing the bolt to be installed in one of two
ways depending on whether more positive or negative camber or caster is necessary. The Bolts must be
rotated 180 to achieve either more positive or negative camber or caster. DO NOT force the adjustment
bolt.

the bat wings (c).
5. Camber Adjustment The adjustment bolts are

designed to work in conjunction with bat wing
holes that are formed into the inner metal of the
lower control arm bushing (1) allowing for lower
control arm movement approximately 0.3 in either
direction.
To achieve more positive camber, refer to (a) in
the figure. Move the control arm or tension strut
in the desired direction, then insert the adjust-
ment bolt (2) with a washer installed through the
round hole in the engine cradle and bat wing
hole (1) in the bushing inner metal.
To achieve more negative camber, refer to (b) in
the figure. Move the control arm or tension strut
in the desired direction, then insert the adjust-
ment bolt (2) with a washer installed through the
round hole in the engine cradle and bat wing
hole (1) in the bushing inner metal.

the bat wings (c).
6. Caster Adjustment The adjustment bolts are

designed to work in conjunction with bat wings
that are formed into the engine cradle (1) allowing
for tension strut movement approximately 0.3 in
either direction.
To achieve more positive caster, refer to (a) in
the figure. Move the tension strut in the desired
the engine cradle (1) and the round hole in the
To achieve more negative caster, refer to (b) in
the figure. Move the tension strut in the desired
the engine cradle (1) and the round hole in the
7. Start a NEW nut and a washer (on RWD vehicles) on the end of the mounting bolt by hand, then while holding
the head of the bolt stationary, install the nut. Do not tighten the nut at this time.
8. Lower the vehicle to curb position. Jounce the rear, then the front of the vehicle an equal amount of times.
9. Using a crowfoot wrench, tighten the adjustment bolt nut to 176 Nm (130 ft. lbs.) torque while holding the bolt
stationary.
10. Lower control arm adjustment bolt only Reinstall the stabilizer bar and heat shields.
11. Measure camber and caster. If camber and caster are not within specifications, inspect the suspension compo-
nents for any signs of damage or bending. If camber and caster (and cross-camber and cross-caster) are within
specifications, proceed with TOE to check and adjust toe.
12. Install the belly pan. (Refer to 23 - BODY/EXTERIOR/BELLY PAN - INSTALLATION)
TOE
CAUTION: If the steering wheel is excessively off-center while driving, outside of Chassis specifications,
inadvertent ESP activations may occur on a vehicle so equipped.
1. Center the steering wheel and lock in place using a steering wheel clamp.
NOTE: When performing the toe adjustment procedure, set rear toe to specifications before setting front
toe.
2. If rear toe is not within specifications, perform the REAR TOE procedure below.
3. If front toe is not within specifications, perform the FRONT TOE procedure below.
4. Remove the steering wheel clamp.
5. Remove the alignment equipment.
6. Road test the vehicle to verify the steering wheel is straight and the vehicle does not wander or pull.
REAR TOE
NOTE: Perform the following procedure to each side of the vehicle as necessary.
1. Loosen the cam bolt nut securing the toe link to the
rear crossmember (front of rear crossmember) just
enough to rotate the cam bolt (1).
NOTE: When adjusting rear toe, the eccentric

lobes on the toe adjustment cam bolts and wash-
ers are not to be facing downward. The lobes
should only be facing upward or up to 90 to one
side or the other from the 12 Oclock position.
2. Rotate the cam bolt head on the opposite side

(rear) of the crossmember in either direction until
the preferred specification is obtained. (Refer to 2 -
SUSPENSION/WHEEL ALIGNMENT - SPECIFICA-
TIONS)
3. While holding the cam bolt (1) from turning, tighten
the cam bolt nut to specifications.
4. Adjust rear toe on opposite side of vehicle using
above procedure as necessary.
5. Once rear toe is set, proceed to FRONT TOE to set the vehicles front toe.
FRONT TOE
NOTE: Perform the following procedure to each side of the vehicle as necessary.
CAUTION: Do not twist the inner tie rod-to-steer-

ing gear boots during front wheel Toe adjustment.
Remove the boot clamps (2) at the inner tie rods
and make sure the boots move freely on the inner
tie rods.
1. AWD Loosen the jam nut (1) at the inner-to-outer

tie rod (3-4) connection.
2. RWD Loosen the jam nut (3) at the inner-to-outer

tie rod (4-5) connection.
3. Grasp the inner tie rod at the hex and rotate as

necessary to adjust front toe to the preferred toe
specification. (Refer to 2 - SUSPENSION/WHEEL
ALIGNMENT - SPECIFICATIONS)
4. AWD Tighten the tie rod jam nut (3) to 75 Nm

(55 ft. lbs.) torque using care not to lose
adjustment.
5. RWD Tighten the tie rod jam nut (3) to 75 Nm

(55 ft. lbs.) torque using care not to lose adjust-
ment.
6. Make sure the inner tie rod-to-steering gear boot is
not twisted, then reinstall the boot clamp at the
inner tie rod.
7. Adjust front toe on opposite side of vehicle using
the above procedure as necessary.
CURB HEIGHT MEASUREMENT

The wheel alignment is to be checked and all alignment adjustments made with the vehicle at its required curb
height specification.
Vehicle height is to be checked with the vehicle on a flat, level surface, preferably a vehicle alignment rack. The
tires are to be inflated to the recommended pressure. All tires are to be the same size as standard equipment.
Vehicle height is checked with the fuel tank full of fuel, and no passenger or luggage compartment load.
Vehicle height is not adjustable. If the measurement is not within specifications, inspect the vehicle for bent or weak
suspension components. Compare the parts tag on the suspect coil spring(s) to the parts book and the vehicle
sales code, checking for a match. Once removed from the vehicle, compare the coil spring height to a correct new
or known good coil spring. The heights should vary if the suspect spring is weak.
NOTE: When measuring, the maximum left-to-right differential is not to exceed 12.5 mm (0.5 in.).
1. Front On each side of the vehicle, measure the

distance (2) from the frame rail just behind the
engine cradle rear mount (1) to the floor or align-
ment rack/lift runway surface. It may be necessary
to measure to the bottom of a straight edge, placed
from lift runway to runway, to get an accurate
measurement.
2. Rear On each side of the vehicle, measure the

distance (2) from the travel limiter (1) attached to
the front rear crossmember mount bushing to the
floor or alignment rack/lift runway surface. It may
be necessary to measure to the bottom of a
straight edge, placed from lift runway to runway, to
get an accurate measurement.
3. Compare the measurements to the specifications listed in the following Curb Height Specifications chart.
CURB HEIGHT SPECIFICATIONS
MODEL FRONT REAR

352 mm 10 mm 308 mm 10 mm
ALL-WHEEL-DRIVE
13.85 in. 0.39 in 12.13 in. 0.39 in.
328 mm 10 mm 296 mm 10 mm
REAR-WHEEL-DRIVE
12.91 in. 0.39 in 11.65 in. 0.39 in.
321 mm 12 mm 290 mm 12 mm
SRT8
12.64 in. 0.47 in 11.42 in. 0.47 in.
345 mm 10 mm 315 mm 10 mm
POLICE PACKAGE (Without Equipment*)
13.58 in. 0.39 in 12.40 in. 0.39 in
* NOTE:
Police Package height specifications given are for settled vehicles without additional standard police equipment
added. Once police equipment is added, estimated at 520 lbs. (400 lbs. for Magnum with 5.7L), vehicles should
meet normal REAR-WHEEL-DRIVE specifications as listed above.
SPECIFICATIONS
WHEEL ALIGNMENT
NOTE: All specifications are given in degrees.
NOTE: All wheel alignments are to be set at curb height. (Refer to 2 - SUSPENSION/WHEEL ALIGNMENT -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
ALL-WHEEL-DRIVE
FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT PREFERRED SETTING ACCEPTABLE RANGE

CAMBER - LEFT 0.00 20.50 to +0.50
CAMBER - RIGHT 20.30 20.80 to +0.20
CROSS-CAMBER (Maximum side-to-side 0.30 20.25 to +1.00
difference)
CASTER - LEFT +4.50 +3.50 to +5.50

CASTER - RIGHT +5.10 +4.10 to +6.10
CROSS-CASTER (Maximum side-to-side
20.60 21.20 to 0.00
difference)
TOE - INDIVIDUAL 0.00 20.05 to +0.05
TOE - TOTAL** 0.00 20.10 to +0.10
Maximum side-to-side difference 0.00 0.06
REAR WHEEL ALIGNMENT PREFERRED SETTING ACCEPTABLE RANGE
CAMBER* 20.75 21.25 to 20.05
CROSS-CAMBER (Maximum side-to-side 20.80 to +0.80
0.00
difference)
TOE - INDIVIDUAL LEFT +0.17 +0.02 to +0.32
TOE - INDIVIDUAL RIGHT +0.03 20.12 to +0.18
THRUST ANGLE +0.07 20.08 to +0.22
Notes:
* For reference only. These are nonadjustable angles.
** TOTAL TOE is the sum of both left and right wheel toe settings. TOTAL TOE must be equally split between
each wheel on the same axle to ensure the steering wheel is centered after setting toe. Positive toe is toe-in and
negative toe is toe-out
REAR-WHEEL-DRIVE

CAMBER - LEFT 0.00 20.50 to +0.50
CAMBER - RIGHT 20.30 20.80 to +0.20
difference)
CASTER - LEFT +9.40 +8.40 to +10.40
CASTER - RIGHT +10.40 +9.40 to +11.40
21.00 21.60 to 20.40
difference)
TOE - TOTAL** 0.00 20.10 to +0.10
CAMBER* 20.75 21.25 to 20.05
CROSS-CAMBER (Maximum side-to-side
0.00 20.80 to +0.80
difference)
THRUST ANGLE +0.07 20.08 to +0.22
Notes:
RIGHT-HAND-DRIVE

CAMBER - LEFT 20.20 20.70 to +0.30
CAMBER - RIGHT 0.10 20.40 to +0.60
difference)
CASTER - LEFT +10.30 +9.30 to +11.30
CASTER - RIGHT +9.50 +8.50 to +10.50
0.80 0.20 to 1.40
difference)
TOE - TOTAL** 0.00 20.10 to +0.10
CAMBER* 20.75 21.25 to 20.05
0.00 20.80 to +0.80
difference)
THRUST ANGLE +0.07 20.08 to +0.22
Notes:
SRT8

CAMBER - LEFT 20.05 20.55 to +0.45
CAMBER - RIGHT 20.35 20.85 to +0.15
difference)
CASTER - LEFT +9.70 +8.40 to +11.00
CASTER - RIGHT +10.30 +8.40 to +11.00
20.60 21.20 to 0.00
difference)
TOE - TOTAL** +0.20 0.00 to +0.40
CAMBER* 20.75 21.25 to 20.05
0.00 20.80 to +0.80
difference)
THRUST ANGLE 0.07 20.08 to +0.22
Notes:
LX DIFFERENTIAL & DRIVELINE 3-1
DIFFERENTIAL & DRIVELINE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
SHAFT-PROPELLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 FRONT AXLE - 175 FIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

SHAFT-HALF (FRONT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 REAR AXLE - 198RII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
SHAFT-HALF (REAR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 REAR AXLE - 210RII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
SHAFT-INTERMEDIATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 REAR AXLE - 215RII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
SHAFT-PROPELLER
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
SHAFT-PROPELLER INSTALLATION - REAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 SPECIFICATIONS PROPELLER SHAFT . . . . . . . 13
REMOVAL SPECIAL TOOLS PROPELLER SHAFT . . . . . . . . 14
REMOVAL - FRONT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 BEARING-CENTER
REMOVAL - REAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
INSTALLATION INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
INSTALLATION - FRONT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3-2 SHAFT-PROPELLER LX
SHAFT-PROPELLER
DESCRIPTION
REAR
WARNING: Due to propeller shaft imbalance concerns, rear propeller shaft service is limited to center sup-
port bearing and coupler replacement only. The rear segment single-cardan universal joint is not service-
able.
Both RWD and AWD models utilize a two-piece rear propeller shaft design to transmit torque to the rear axle
assembly. This two-piece design consists of:
Front and rear shaft segments
Center support bearing/bracket assembly
Single-Cardan u-joint at rear segment/bearing interface
Rubber couplers at transmission and rear axle flanges
Fore-mounted vibration damper (V6 Models)
Rear Propeller Shaft Assembly (V8 System Shown)
1 - FRONT COUPLER
2 - FRONT SEGMENT
3 - BEARING/BRACKET ASSEMBLY
4 - SINGLE-CARDAN U-JOINT
5 - REAR COUPLER
6 - REAR SEGMENT
The front shaft segment is designed with a collapsing feature, consisting of two concentric tubes secured by shear
pins. This feature allows the tubes to telescope up to 200 mm (8 in.) during certain impacts.
The flexible rubber couplers at the transmission and axle flanges absorb vibration. The low-travel Single-Cardan
universal joint permits the minimal axial and angular variations that occur with independant rear suspension.
Additionally, models equipped with the V6 engine utilize a vibration damper which is designed to absorb and isolate
driveline vibrations and harmonics. This damper is mounted to the front segment, sandwiched between the coupler
and propeller shaft.
LX SHAFT-PROPELLER 3-3
FRONT
Front Propeller Shaft Assembly
1 - FRONT PROPELLER SHAFT ASSEMBLY
WARNING: Due to propeller shaft imbalance concerns, front propeller shaft service is limited to rubber cou-
pler and entire shaft replacement. The single-cardan universal joints are not serviceable.
AWD models utilize a two-piece front propeller shaft design to transmit torque to the front axle assembly. This
two-piece design consists of:
Front and rear shaft segments
Single-Cardan u-joints at end flanges
Rubber boot at front/rear segment interface
REMOVAL
REMOVAL - FRONT
1. Place gearshift lever in NEUTRAL and raise vehicle
on hoist.
2. Remove propeller shaft heat shield.
3. Apply alignment index marks on the propeller shaft and front axle flanges.
4. Remove and discard four (4) front propeller shaft-to-axle flange bolts (2).
5. Apply alignment index marks on the propeller shaft and transfer case flanges.
6. Remove and discard four (4) front propeller shaft-to-transfer case flange bolts(2).
7. Remove propeller shaft assembly (1).
REMOVAL - REAR
CAUTION: Propeller shaft removal is a two-man operation. Never allow propeller shaft to hang from the cen-
ter bearing, or while only connected to the transmission or rear axle flanges. A helper is required. If a pro-
peller shaft section is hung unsupported, damage may occur to the shaft, coupler, and/or center bearing
from over-angulation. This may result in driveline vibrations and/or component failure.
1. With vehicle in neutral, position on hoist.

2. Apply alignment index marks (3) on the transmis-
sion and axle flanges (2) and rubber couplers (1).
3. Remove crossmember (1).

4. Remove rear exhaust system (2).
5. Remove heat shield (1).
6. Remove propeller shaft front coupler-to-flange

bolts.
7. Remove propeller shaft rear coupler-to-flange bolts.
8. Remove center bearing (1) mounting bolts.

9. With the aid of a helper, remove propeller shaft
assembly.
COUPLER/DAMPER SERVICE
1. Remove three coupler-to-propeller shaft bolt/nuts.

2. Separate coupler (1) and damper (3) (if equipped)
from propeller shaft. Note orientation and direction
of components. It is imperative that they are prop-
erly reinstalled.
INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION - FRONT
1. Install propeller shaft (1) into position.

2. Starting at transfer case end, align index marks placed upon removal and loose-install new propeller shaft-to-
transfer case flange bolts.
3. Align index marks at front axle end of shaft, and loose-install new propeller shaft-to-front axle flange bolts.
4. Torque propeller shaft-to-transfer case and axle flange bolts (2) to 61 Nm (45 ft. lbs.).
5. Install propeller shaft heat shield.

6. Lower vehicle.
INSTALLATION - REAR
CAUTION: Propeller shaft installation is a two-man operation. Never allow propeller shaft to hang from the
center bearing, or while only connected to the transmission or rear axle flanges. A helper is required. If a
propeller shaft section is hung unsupported, damage may occur to the shaft, coupler, and/or center bearing
from over-angulation. This may result in driveline vibrations and/or component failure.
COUPLER/DAMPER SERVICE
1. If coupler and/or damper (V6 Models) were
removed, align index marks and reinstall. Make
sure protruding sleeve (2) is properly seated
into propshaft or damper counterbores.
2. Install three bolts with washers and nuts and
torque to 58 Nm (43 ft. lbs.) torque.
3 - 10 SHAFT-PROPELLER LX
1. Obtain helper and install propeller shaft into posi-

tion at axle. Align index marks (3) placed upon
removal. Install propeller shaft rear coupler-to-axle
flange bolt/nuts by hand. Do not torque at this time.
2. Install propeller shaft into position at transmission

flange. Align index marks placed upon removal.
Install propeller shaft front coupler-to-transmission
flange bolt/nuts by hand. Do not torque at this time.
3. Loosely install center bearing-to-body bolts. Do not

torque at this time.
LX SHAFT-PROPELLER 3 - 11
4. Torque propeller shaft front coupler-to-transmission

flange bolt/nuts to 58 Nm (43 ft. lbs.)
5. Torque propeller shaft rear coupler-to-axle flange

bolt/nuts to 58 Nm (43 ft. lbs.)
NOTE: Note: It is necessary to compress rear sus-

pension to ride height before securing center
bearing to body. Failure to compress suspension
may result in objectionable noise and premature
bearing wear.
6. Compress rear suspension with suitable jack

stands (2).
7. Torque center bearing-to-body bolts to 27 Nm (20

ft. lbs.).
8. Install heat shield (1).
9. Install rear exhaust system (2)

10. Install crossmember (1).
SPECIFICATIONS PROPELLER SHAFT

TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

BOLT/NUT - SHAFT
COUPLER-TO- 58 43
TRANSMISSION
BOLT/NUT - SHAFT
COUPLER-TO-REAR 58 43
AXLE ASSEMBLY
BOLT/NUT - COUPLER/
DAMPER-TO-
58 43
PROPELLER SHAFT
(REAR)
BOLT - CENTER
BEARING-TO-BODY 27 20
(REAR)
BOLT - FRONT
PROPELLER SHAFT TO
61 45
AXLE/TRANSFER CASE
FLANGE
SPECIAL TOOLS PROPELLER SHAFT
Bearing Splitter, 1130
Installer C-4735-1
BEARING-CENTER
REMOVAL
1. Remove propeller shaft from vehicle.
NOTE: To address propeller shaft imbalance con-

cerns, the propeller shaft spline interface has a
skip-tooth design allowing only one possible
assembly orientation. Install reference marks only
to aid in assembly.
2. Mark front and rear shaft segments (2,3) with

installation reference marks (1).
3. Separate propeller shaft front and rear segments at

bearing and remove boot (1)
4. Press center bearing (1) off of rear shaft segment

using arbor press and Bearing Splitter 1130 (2).
INSTALLATION
1. Install propeller shaft rear segment into press, sup-
ported on joint yoke (3).
2. Install bearing assembly as shown (2).
3. Using Tool C-4735-1 (1), press bearing assembly
(2) onto shaft.
4. Remove propeller shaft from press.

5. Install boot (1) to rear shaft segment.
NOTE: To address propeller shaft imbalance con-

cerns, the propeller shaft spline interface has a
skip-tooth design allowing only one possible
assembly orientation.
6. Align index marks placed upon disassembly and

install front segment (1) to rear segment.
7. Install boot (2) to front segment, seating boot into
groove (3).
8. Install propeller shaft into vehicle.
3 - 18 SHAFT-HALF (FRONT) LX
SHAFT-HALF (FRONT)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
SHAFT-HALF (FRONT) BOOT-CV INNER

DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - HALF SHAFT . . . . . . 19 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 BOOT-CV OUTER
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
SPECIFICATIONS - HALFSHAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
SPECIAL TOOLS
HALFSHAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
LX SHAFT-HALF (FRONT) 3 - 19
SHAFT-HALF (FRONT)
DESCRIPTION
The inner joints of both half shaft assemblies are
cross-groove joints. The outer joints of both assem-
blies are Rzeppa Joints. The cross-groove joints are
true constant velocity (CV) joint assemblies, which
allow for the changes in half shaft length through the
jounce and rebound travel of the rear suspension.
Left Halfshaft and Intermediate Shaft
The inner cross-groove joint of the left halfshaft

assembly is splined to the intermediate shaft and
retained with a snap ring. The right halfshaft is splined
to the front axle assembly and retained with a snap
ring. The outer CV joint has a stub shaft that is splined
into the wheel hub and retained by a steel hub nut.
Right Halfshaft Assembly
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - HALF SHAFT

VEHICLE INSPECTION
1. Check for grease in the vicinity of both the inboard and outboard joints. This is a sign of inner or outer joint seal
boot or seal boot clamp damage.
NOISE AND/OR VIBRATION IN TURNS

A clicking noise and/or a vibration in turns could be caused by one of the following conditions:
Damaged outer CV or inner cross-groove joint seal boot or seal boot clamps. This will result in the loss and/or
contamination of the joint grease, resulting in inadequate lubrication of the joint.
Noise may also be caused by another component of the vehicle coming in contact with the half shafts.
CLUNKING NOISE DURING ACCELERATION

This noise may be a result of one of the following conditions:
A torn seal boot on the inner or outer joint of the half shaft assembly.
A loose or missing clamp on the inner or outer joint of the half shaft assembly.
A damaged or worn half shaft CV joint.
A worn intermediate shaft bearing (AWD Models).
SHUDDER OR VIBRATION DURING ACCELERATION

This problem could be a result of:
A worn or damaged half shaft inner cross-groove joint.
Improper wheel alignment. (Refer to 2 - SUSPENSION/WHEEL ALIGNMENT - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
VIBRATION AT HIGHWAY SPEEDS

Foreign material (mud, etc.) packed on the backside of the wheel(s).
Out of balance tires or wheels. (Refer to 22 - TIRES/WHEELS - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
Improper tire and/or wheel runout. (Refer to 22 - TIRES/WHEELS - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
REMOVAL
& MAINTENANCE/HOISTING - STANDARD PRO-
CEDURE)
wheel assembly (1).
3. While holding link ball joint stem from rotating,

remove nut (2) fastening stabilizer link (1) to shock
clevis bracket (3). Slide link ball joint stem from cle-
vis bracket.
4. Remove nut and pinch bolt (1) fastening clevis

5. Remove nut (3) and bolt (1) attaching shock clevis

bracket (2) to lower control arm (7).
6. Pull lower end of clevis bracket outward away from
lower control arm bushing, then slide it off shock
assembly. It may be necessary to use an appropri-
ate prying tool to spread clamp area of clevis
bracket allowing removal from shock assembly.

rotating, remove hub nut (1) from axle half shaft
(2).
NOTE: In some cases, it may be necessary to retract caliper piston in its bore a small amount in order to
provide sufficient clearance between shoes and rotor to easily remove caliper from knuckle. This can usu-
ally be accomplished before mounting bolts are removed, by grasping rear of caliper and pulling outward
working with guide pins, thus retracting piston. Never push on piston directly as it may get damaged.

and adapter (2) to knuckle (3).
knuckle (3) as an assembly. Hang assembly out of

wheel studs.


13. Remove tool.
14. Remove nut (1) from end of upper ball joint stud.
15. Remove clip (3) fastening wheel speed sensor (2)

to knuckle (4).
16. Disengage right halfshaft (1) from axle and

Right Halfshaft Removal/Installation
17. Remove left halfshaft (1) from vehicle.
INTERMEDIATE SHAFT ASSEMBLY

NOTE: The intermediate shaft assembly is serviced only as an assembly.
1. Remove four (4) intermediate shaft assembly-to-oil

pan bolts.
2. Remove intermediate shaft assembly (2) from
engine oil pan.
INSTALLATION
1. If previously removed, install intermediate shaft
assembly (2). Install four intermediate shaft-to-oil
pan bolts and torque to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.).
2. Install left halfshaft assembly (1).
3. Using Tool C-4193-A (1), install new axle seal.
4. Install right halfshaft assembly (1).
Right Halfshaft Removal/Installation
5. Install halfshaft (1) into hub/bearing assembly (2).

6. Loosely install halfshaft hub nut (1), and do not


stud joint.

90 turn) torque.
NOTE: Inspect brake shoes (pads) before installation. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/

BRAKE PADS/SHOES - INSPECTION)

where rotor mounts.
9. Install brake rotor (2) over studs on hub and
bearing.
10. Install disc brake caliper and adapter assembly

(2) over brake rotor.
(2) to knuckle (3). Tighten bolts to 169 Nm (125
ft. lbs.) torque.
12. Pull lower end of shock assembly outward, then

slide clevis bracket (3) onto lower end. Slide cle-
vis bracket onto shock assembly until bracket
contacts collar on shock housing (2).
13. Install pinch bolt and nut (1) fastening clevis
Install pinch bolt from rear. Do not tighten at this
time.
14. Slide clevis bracket (2) over bushing mounted in

15. Install bolt (1) and nut (3) attaching shock clevis
bracket (2) to lower control arm (7). Do not
16. Tighten pinch bolt (1) attaching clevis bracket to

shock assembly to 61 Nm (45 ft. lbs.) torque.
17. Slide stabilizer link ball joint stem into clevis

bracket. Install nut (2) fastening link to clevis
bracket (3). Tighten nut by holding ball joint stud
while turning nut. Tighten nut using crow foot
wrench on torque wrench to 146 Nm (108 ft. lbs.)
torque.
18. Attach wheel speed sensor cable routing clip (3)

at knuckle (4).
torque.

21. Lower vehicle.


SPECIFICATIONS - HALFSHAFT

Nut, Halfshaft Hub 213 157
Bolt, Intermediate
25 18
Shaft-to-Oil Pan
SPECIAL TOOLS
HALFSHAFT
Seal Installer C-4193A
Clamp, C-4975-A
Remover, Ball Stud 9360

BOOT-CV INNER
REMOVAL
1. Remove large boot clamp which retains inner tripod
joint sealing boot to tripod joint housing and dis-
card. Remove small clamp which retains inner tri-
pod joint sealing boot to interconnecting shaft and
discard. Remove the sealing boot (3) from the tri-
pod housing and slide it down the interconnecting
shaft.
CAUTION: When removing the tripod joint housing

from the spider assembly, hold the bearings in
place on the spider trunions to prevent the bear-
ings from falling away.
2. Slide the tripod joint housing (1) off the spider

assembly and the interconnecting shaft.
3. Remove snap ring (3) which retains spider assem-

bly to interconnecting shaft (1). Do not hit the
outer tripod bearings in an attempt to remove
spider assembly from interconnecting shaft.
4. Remove the spider assembly (1) from interconnect-

ing shaft (4). If spider assembly will not come off
interconnecting shaft by hand, it can be removed
by tapping spider assembly with a brass drift (3).
5. Slide sealing boot off interconnecting shaft.
6. Thoroughly clean and inspect spider assembly, tri-
pod joint housing, and interconnecting shaft for any
signs of excessive wear. If any parts show signs
of excessive wear, the driveshaft assembly will
require replacement. Component parts of these
driveshaft assemblies are not serviceable.
INSTALLATION
1. Slide inner tripod joint seal boot retaining clamp,
onto interconnecting shaft. Then, slide the replace-
ment inner tripod joint sealing boot (1) onto the
interconnecting shaft. Inner tripod joint seal boot
MUST be positioned on interconnecting shaft,
so the raised bead on the inside of the seal
boot is in groove (3) on interconnecting shaft
(4).
2. Install spider assembly (1) onto interconnecting

shaft (2). Spider assembly must be installed on
interconnecting shaft far enough to fully install spi-
der retaining snap ring.
3. If spider assembly (2) will not fully install on inter-

connecting shaft by hand, it can be installed by
tapping the spider body with a brass drift (4). Do
not hit the outer tripod bearings in an attempt
to install spider assembly on interconnecting
shaft.
4. Install the spider assembly to interconnecting shaft

retaining snap ring (3) into groove on end of inter-
connecting shaft. Be sure the snap ring is fully
seated into groove on interconnecting shaft.
5. Distribute 1/2 the amount of grease provided in the

seal boot service package (DO NOT USE ANY
OTHER TYPE OF GREASE) into tripod housing.
Put the remaining amount into the sealing boot.
6. Align tripod housing (1) with spider assembly (2)
and then slide tripod housing over spider assembly
and interconnecting shaft.
7. Install inner tripod joint seal boot to interconnecting

shaft clamp evenly on sealing boot.
8. Clamp sealing boot (4) onto interconnecting shaft
(3) using crimper, Special Tool C-4975-A and the
following procedure. Place crimping tool C-4975-A
over bridge of clamp. Tighten nut on crimping tool
C-4975-A until jaws on tool (2) are closed com-
pletely together, face to face.
CAUTION: Seal must not be dimpled, stretched or out of shape in any way. If seal is NOT shaped correctly,
equalize pressure in seal and shape it by hand.
9. Position sealing boot into the tripod housing retaining groove. Install seal boot retaining clamp evenly on sealing
boot.
CAUTION: The following positioning procedure determines the correct air pressure inside the inner tripod
joint assembly prior to clamping the sealing boot to inner tripod joint housing. If this procedure is not done
prior to clamping sealing boot to tripod joint housing sealing boot durability can be adversely affected.
CAUTION: When venting the inner tripod joint assembly, use care so inner tripod sealing boot does not get
punctured, or in any other way damaged. If sealing boot is punctured, or damaged in any way while being
vented, the sealing boot can not be used.
10. Insert a trim stick (4) between the tripod joint (3)
and the sealing boot (2) to vent inner tripod joint
assembly. When inserting trim stick between
tripod housing and sealing boot ensure trim
stick is held flat and firmly against the tripod
housing. If this is not done damage to the
sealing boot can occur. If inner tripod joint has a
Hytrel (hard plastic) sealing boot, be sure trim
stick is inserted between soft rubber insert and tri-
pod housing not the hard plastic sealing boot and
soft rubber insert.
11. With trim stick inserted between sealing boot and

tripod joint housing, position the interconnecting
shaft so it is at the center of its travel in the tripod
joint housing. Remove the trim stick from between
the sealing boot and the tripod joint housing. This
procedure will equalize the air pressure in the
tripod joint, preventing premature sealing boot
failure.
12. Position trilobal boot to interface with the tripod
housing. The lobes of the boot must be properly
aligned with the recesss of the tripod housing.
13. Clamp tripod joint sealing boot to tripod joint,
using required procedure for type of boot clamp
application.
CRIMP TYPE BOOT CLAMP

1. Clamp sealing boot onto tripod housing using
Crimper, Special Tool C-4975-A (3).
2. Place crimping tool C-4975-A over bridge of clamp.
3. Tighten nut on crimping tool C-4975-A (3) until jaws

on tool are closed completely together, face to face
(4).
LATCHING TYPE BOOT CLAMP

1. Clamp sealing boot (3) onto tripod housing using
clamp locking tool, Snap-On YA3050 (2) or an
equivalent.
2. Place prongs of clamp locking tool in the holes of
the clamp (1).
3. Squeeze tool together until top band of clamp is

latched behind the two tabs on lower band of
clamp (2).
BOOT-CV OUTER
REMOVAL
1. Remove large boot clamp (4) retaining C/V joint
sealing boot to C/V joint housing and discard.
Remove small clamp (1) that retains outer C/V joint
sealing boot to interconnecting shaft and discard.
Remove sealing boot from outer C/V joint housing
and slide it down interconnecting shaft.
2. Wipe away grease to expose outer C/V joint and
interconnecting shaft.
3. Remove outer C/V joint from interconnecting shaft

using the following procedure: Support intercon-
necting shaft in a vise equipped with protective
caps on jaws of vise to prevent damage to
interconnecting shaft. Then, using a softfaced
hammer, sharply hit the end of the C/V joint hous-
ing to dislodge housing from internal circlip on
interconnecting shaft. Then slide outer C/V joint off
end of interconnecting shaft, joint may have to be
tapped off shaft using a softfaced hammer.
4. Remove large circlip from the interconnecting shaft

(3) before attempting to remove outer C/V joint
sealing boot.
5. Slide failed sealing boot off interconnecting shaft.
6. Thoroughly clean and inspect outer C/V joint
assembly and interconnecting joint for any signs of
excessive wear. If any parts show signs of
excessive wear, the driveshaft assembly will
require replacement. Component parts of these
driveshaft assemblies are not serviceable.
INSTALLATION
1. Slide new sealing boot (1) to interconnecting shaft
retaining clamp onto interconnecting shaft. Slide
the outer C/V joint assembly sealing boot onto the
interconnecting shaft. Seal boot MUST be posi-
tioned on interconnecting shaft so the raised
bead on the inside of the seal boot is in groove
on interconnecting shaft.
2. Align splines on interconnecting shaft with splines

on cross of outer C/V joint assembly and start
outer C/V joint onto interconnecting shaft.
3. Install outer C/V joint assembly onto interconnect-
ing shaft by using a softfaced hammer (1) and
tapping end of stub axle (with nut installed) until
outer C/V joint is fully seated on interconnecting
shaft.
4. Outer C/V joint assembly must be installed on

interconnecting shaft until cross of outer C/V joint
assembly is seated against circlip on interconnect-
ing shaft (1).
5. Distribute 1/2 the amount of grease provided in

seal boot service package (DO NOT USE ANY
OTHER TYPE OF GREASE) into outer C/V joint
assembly housing. Put the remaining amount into
the sealing boot.
6. Install outer C/V joint sealing boot to interconnect-
ing shaft clamp evenly on sealing boot.
7. Clamp sealing boot onto interconnecting shaft
using crimper, Special Tool C-4975-A and the fol-
lowing procedure. Place crimping tool C-4975-A
C-4975-A until jaws on tool are closed completely
together, face to face (2).
CAUTION: Seal must not be dimpled, stretched, or

outofshape in any way. If seal is NOT shaped
correctly, equalize pressure in seal and shape it by
hand.
8. Position outer C/V joint sealing boot into its retain-

ing groove on outer C/V joint housing. Install seal-
ing boot to outer C/V joint retaining clamp evenly
on sealing boot.
9. Clamp sealing boot onto outer C/V joint housing
using Crimper, Special Tool C-4975-A (3) and the
following procedure. Place crimping tool C-4975-A
C-4975-A until jaws on tool are closed completely
together, face to face (2).
LX SHAFT-HALF (REAR) 3 - 41
SHAFT-HALF (REAR)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
SHAFT-HALF (REAR) INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 SPECIFICATIONS - TORQUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - HALF SHAFT . . . . . . 42 SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
3 - 42 SHAFT-HALF (REAR) LX
SHAFT-HALF (REAR)
DESCRIPTION
The inner joints of both half shaft assemblies are cross-groove joints and are splined to the differential side gears.
The outer joints of both assemblies are Rzeppa Joints. The cross-groove joints are true constant velocity (CV) joint
assemblies, which allow for the changes in half shaft length through the jounce and rebound travel of the rear sus-
pension.
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - HALF SHAFT

VEHICLE INSPECTION
1. Check for grease in the vicinity of both the inboard and outboard joints. This is a sign of inner or outer joint seal
boot or seal boot clamp damage.
NOISE AND/OR VIBRATION IN TURNS

A clicking noise and/or a vibration in turns could be caused by one of the following conditions:
Damaged outer CV or inner cross-groove joint seal boot or seal boot clamps. This will result in the loss and/or
contamination of the joint grease, resulting in inadequate lubrication of the joint.
Noise may also be caused by another component of the vehicle coming in contact with the half shafts.
CLUNKING NOISE DURING ACCELERATION

This noise may be a result of one of the following conditions:
A torn seal boot on the inner or outer joint of the half shaft assembly.
A loose or missing clamp on the inner or outer joint of the half shaft assembly.
A damaged or worn half shaft CV joint.
SHUDDER OR VIBRATION DURING ACCELERATION

A worn or damaged half shaft inner cross-groove joint.
Improper wheel alignment. (Refer to 2 - SUSPENSION/WHEEL ALIGNMENT - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
VIBRATION AT HIGHWAY SPEEDS

Foreign material (mud, etc.) packed on the backside of the wheel(s).
Out of balance tires or wheels. (Refer to 22 - TIRES/WHEELS - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
Improper tire and/or wheel runout. (Refer to 22 - TIRES/WHEELS - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
REMOVAL
NOTE: This procedure requires the compression of the rear suspension to ride height. A drive-on hoist
should be used. If a drive-on hoist is not used, screw-style under-hoist jack stands are required to com-
press the rear suspension, facilitating rear halfshaft removal.
NOTE: Halfshaft inner and outer boots are not serviceable separately. Boot replacement requires entire
shaft assembly replacement.
CAUTION: Unequal-length halfshafts are used. The left halfshaft is shorter than the right, and it is necessary
to identify and tag halfshafts upon removal to ensure proper installation.
CAUTION: Never grasp halfshaft assembly by the inner or outer boots. Doing so may cause the boot to
pucker or crease, reducing the service life of the boot and joint. Avoid over angulating or stroking the C/V
joints when handling the halfshaft.
1. With vehicle in neutral, position and raise vehicle

on hoist.
2. Using 14mm hex, remove axle drain plug (1) and
drain rear axle fluid into container suitable for fluid
reuse.
3. Install drain plug (1) and torque to:
198 Axle: 60 Nm (44 ft. lbs.)
210 Axle: 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.)
4. Remove rear exhaust system (2) on V8-equipped

models.
5. Remove wheel/tire assembly (1) from sides that

shaft is to be removed.
6. Remove wheel hub nut (1) and discard.

8. Remove three (3) propeller shaft coupler-to-axle

flange bolt/nuts.
9. Using suitable screwdriver (1), partially disengage

halfshaft(s) (2) from axle assembly.
10. If a drive-on hoist is used, position transmission

jack(1) to rear axle assembly. If a drive-on hoist is
not used, compress rear suspension using screw-
style under-hoist jack stands (2), then position
transmission jack to rear axle assembly.
11. Remove rear axle forward mount isolator (1) bolt/

nut (2).
CAUTION: Access to rear axle-to-crossmember

bolts is best achieved by use of short socket and
a flexible-head ratchet.
12. Remove two rear axle-to-crossmember bolts (1).
13. Carefully lower rear axle. While lowering axle,

separate propeller shaft from axle and support
with suitable rope or wire (1).
CAUTION: Unequal-length halfshafts are used. The

left halfshaft is shorter than the right, and it is
necessary to identify and tag halfshafts upon
removal to ensure proper installation.
14. Lower axle just enough to remove halfshafts one

at a time. Shift axle assembly in one direction,
compressing one halfshaft while removing the
other (1). Use caution to protect axle seal and
journal.
CAUTION: Never grasp halfshaft assembly by the

inner or outer boots. Doing so may cause the boot
to pucker or crease, reducing the service life of
the boot and joint. Avoid over angulating or strok-
ing the C/V joints when handling the halfshaft.
CAUTION: Use care while handling/storing half-

shaft assembly. Damage to the slinger can result
from improper handling. If slinger gets bent or
damaged, straighten slinger to avoid contact with
axle seal assembly.
15. Remove halfshaft from hub. Remove and inspect

rubber isolation washer (1). Discard washer if rub-
ber surfaces are worn away. Repeat on other side
if necessary.
16. Remove axle seals (2) using suitable screwdriver.
INSTALLATION
NOTE: Halfshaft inner and outer boots are not serviceable separately. Boot replacement requires entire
shaft assembly replacement.
CAUTION: Unequal-length halfshafts are used. The left halfshaft is shorter than the right, and it is necessary
to identify and tag halfshafts upon removal to ensure proper installation.
1. Install new axle seal(s) (1) using Tool 9223 (2).

2. Install halfshaft isolation washer (1). Washer is bi-

directional, and can be installed in either direction.
3. Install halfshaft (2) to wheel hub/knuckle assembly.

Install new hub nut (1) by hand.
NOTE: Inspect slinger(s) for handling damage.

Straighten as necessary to avoid contact with axle
seal.
NOTE: Use care when installing halfshaft to axle

assembly. The halfshaft installation angle should
be minimized to avoid damage to seal upon instal-
lation.
4. Lubricate halfshaft inner joint bearing journal (3)

with MoparT Gear and Axle Lubricant (75W-140).
Using new circlip(s), install halfshaft (1) to rear axle
assembly. Use care not to damage axle seals (2).
Verify proper installation by pulling outward on joint
by hand.
5. Raise rear axle assembly into position. Align pro-

peller shaft index marks (3) and start propeller
shaft coupler-to-axle bolt/nuts by hand.
6. Install two rear axle-to-crossmember bolts (1) and

torque to 220 Nm (162 ft. lbs.).
7. Install rear axle front mount isolator (1) as shown

and torque bolt/nut to 65 Nm (48 ft. lbs.).
8. Again verify halfshaft inner joints are fully engaged

to axle assembly.
9. Remove transmission jack (1).
10. If used, remove screw-type under-hoist jack
stands (2).
11. Torque propeller shaft coupler-to-axle flange bolt/

nuts to 58 Nm (43 ft. lbs.).
12. Using a 14mm hex, remove rear axle fill plug (1).
Fill axle with MoparT 75W-140 Synthetic Gear &
Axle Lubricant in the following quantities:
198 Axle: 1.4L (1.5 qts.)
210 Axle: 1.6L (1.7 qts.)
13. Install and torque fill plug (1) to:

198 Axle: 60 Nm (44 ft. lbs.)
210 Axle: 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.)
14. V8 Models: Install exhaust system. Tighten band

clamps (1) to 61 Nm (45 ft. lbs.).
15. Lower vehicle. Torque halfshaft hub nut (1) to 213

Nm (157 ft. lbs.). Install wheel center cap.
16. Install wheel/tire assembly (1) and torque lug nuts

to 150 Nm (110 ft. lbs.).
SPECIFICATIONS - TORQUE

Bolt, Axle Housing-to-
220 162
Crossmember
Bolt/Nut, Axle Front
65 48
Isolator
Clamp, Exhaust System
61 45
Band
Nut, Axle Hub 213 157
SPECIAL TOOLS
Installer, 9223
LX SHAFT-INTERMEDIATE 3 - 55
SHAFT-INTERMEDIATE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
SHAFT-INTERMEDIATE INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
3 - 56 SHAFT-INTERMEDIATE LX
SHAFT-INTERMEDIATE
REMOVAL
NOTE: The intermediate shaft is serviced only as a
complete assembly.
1. Remove left halfshaft assembly (2). (Refer to 3 -

DIFFERENTIAL & DRIVELINE/HALF SHAFT -
REMOVAL)
2. Remove four intermediate shaft-to-oil pan bolts(1).
Remove assembly (3) from engine
INSTALLATION
1. Install intermediate shaft assembly (3). Install and
torque four intermediate shaft-to-oil pan bolts (1) to
25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.).
2. Install left halfshaft assembly (2).
LX FRONT AXLE - 175 FIA 3 - 57
FRONT AXLE - 175 FIA
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
FRONT AXLE - 175 FIA REMOVAL LEFT AXLE SEAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 INSTALLATION
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 INSTALLATION - RIGHT AXLE SEAL . . . . . . . . . 100
DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 INSTALLATION - LEFT AXLE SEAL . . . . . . . . . . 100
ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 FLUID
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 STANDARD PROCEDURE - FLUID FILL . . . . . . . 102
ADJUSTMENTS SEAL-PINION
ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
SPECIFICATIONS - 175MM FIA FRONT AXLE . . . 96 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
SPECIAL TOOLS - 175MM FIA FRONT AXLE . . . . 97
SEAL-AXLE SHAFT
REMOVAL
REMOVAL - RIGHT AXLE SEAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
3 - 58 FRONT AXLE - 175 FIA LX
FRONT AXLE - 175 FIA

DESCRIPTION
175MM FIA Axle Section View
1 - PINION HOUSING ASSEMBLY 7 - RING GEAR

2 - SHIM, PINION DEPTH 8 - COVER, AXLE
3 - O-RING SEAL, PINION HOUSING 9 - BEARING, DIFFERENTIAL SIDE (SMALL)
4 - BEARING, DIFFERENTIAL SIDE (LARGE) 10 - GEAR, PINION
5 - SHIM, SELECT 11 - BEARING, PINION HEAD
6 - DIFFERENTIAL ASSEMBLY 12 - BEARING, PINION TAIL
The 175MM FIA (Front Independent Aluminum) is an independent assembly with an aluminum housing and cast iron
differential. The 175MM FIA uses an open differential which is supported by two tapered roller bearings located on
either side of the case. Differential bearing preload and ring gear backlash are controlled with select shims located
on the outside of the differential bearing cups. Pinion height is set with a select shim sandwiched between the
pinion housing assembly and the axle housing.
The 175MM FIA Axle is available only in All-Wheel Drive models, and only in a 3:07:1 ratio.
175MM FIA Front Axle Exploded View
1 - NUT, PINION FLANGE1 15 - BAFFLE, VENT

2 - FLANGE, PINION 16 - SEAL, AXLE
3 - SEAL, PINION 17 - SHIM, PRELOAD
4 - BEARING, PINION TAIL 18 - BEARING, DIFFERENTIAL SIDE
5 - BOLT, PINION HOUSING 19 - ASSEMBLY, RING GEAR/DIFFERENTIAL
6 - HOUSING, PINION 20 - BEARING, DIFFERENTIAL SIDE
7 - SPACER, SELECT 21 - SEAL, AXLE COVER O-RING
8 - BEARING, PINION HEAD 22 - SHIM, BEARING PRELOAD
9 - SEAL, PINION HOUSING O-RING 23 - COVER, AXLE HOUSING
10 - GEAR, PINION 24 - BOLT, AXLE HOUSING COVER
11 - SHIM, PINION DEPTH (SELECT) 25 - SEAL, AXLE
12 - HOUSING, AXLE 26 - PLUG, AXLE FILL
13 - VENT, HOUSING 27 - SHAFT, DIFFERENTIAL PINION
14 - HOUSING, AXLE
REMOVAL
2. Remove both front halfshafts. (Refer to 3 - DIFFERENTIAL & DRIVELINE/HALF SHAFT - REMOVAL)
3. Remove front intermediate shaft assembly. (Refer to 3 - DIFFERENTIAL & DRIVELINE/INTERMEDIATE SHAFT
- REMOVAL)
4. Remove front propeller shaft. (Refer to 3 - DIFFERENTIAL & DRIVELINE/PROPELLER SHAFT - REMOVAL)
5. Remove RH catalytic converter/exhaust pipe assembly. (Refer to 11 - EXHAUST SYSTEM/CATALYTIC CON-
VERTER - REMOVAL)
6. Separate power steering return line (3) from cradle

by unfastening clips (1).
7. Remove front axle housing support bracket (1).
8. Remove seven front axle assembly-to-oil pan bolts.

Remove axle assembly (1) from vehicle.
DISASSEMBLY

14 - HOUSING, AXLE
1. Remove pinion housing assembly (4).

2. Remove pinion flange nut: Install Tool 6958 (1) as
shown.
3. Using suitable socket (1) remove pinion flange nut.
4. Using puller 1026 (1), remove pinion flange.
5. Using suitable screwdriver, remove pinion seal (1).

6. Remove pinion housing assembly bolts (1)
7. Remove pinion depth shim (1).
8. Remove pinion housing o-ring seal (1).

9. Measure pinion housing assembly rotating torque.

Rotating torque should be 130-250 Ncm (12-22 in.
lbs.). If rotating torque is outside of this range,
bearing replacement is required. Refer to Pinion
Housing Disassembly.
10. Measure differential rotating torque with Tool

C-4995-A. Rotating torque should be within 190-
260 Ncm (1723 in. lbs). Measurements recorded
out of this range require differential side bearing
replacement and/or side bearing preload
adjustment.
11. Remove axle housing cover (5). Remove differential assembly (3) and inboard axle seal (2).
12. Remove axle housing cover o-ring (1).
PINION HOUSING DISASSEMBLY
1. Press pinion gear/shaft (2) out of housing. Use

suitable adapter (1) to protect end of shaft
2. Remove pinion bearing spacer (1)

Using splitter 1130 or equivalent (2), press off pinion

head bearing (1).
3. Using a suitable punch, remove pinion tail bearing

cup (1).
4. Using suitable punch, remove pinion head bearing

cup (1).
DIFFERENTIAL DISASSEMBLY
NOTE: The differential ring gear is welded to the differential case and is not serviceable separately.
1. Rotate differential side gears about case and

remove side gears (2) and thrust washers (1).
2. Using suitable punch, drive pinion shaft roll pin (1)

into case until it bottoms.
3. Remove pinion shaft (1), pinion gears (3) and

thrust washers (2). Drive out and discard pinion
shaft roll pin.
4. Using Tool 9676 (1) and Tool 1130 (3), press differ-
ential side bearing (2) off of ring gear side and
discard.
5. Using Tool 9676 (1) and Tool 1130 (3), press differ-
ential side bearing (2) off of opposite side and
discard.
AXLE HOUSING
1. Remove differential side bearing cup from axle

housing cover. Install Tool 6514 (1) as shown.
2. Remove differential side bearing cup with Tool

6514 (1).
NOTE: Side bearing preload shims affect adjust

differential bearing preload and ring gear backlash
and must not be mixed up. Measure and tag side
bearing preload shims upon removal.
3. Remove side bearing preload shim (1).
4. Measure preload shim (1) to identify for

replacement.
5. Using Tool 9664 (1) and Slide Hammer C-637 (2),

remove and discard inboard differential side bear-
ing cup.
6. Remove side bearing preload shim from housing

(1).

replacement.
ASSEMBLY

14 - HOUSING, AXLE
DIFFERENTIAL/RING GEAR ASSEMBLY

1. Install pinion shaft (1), pinion gears (3) and thrust
washers (2) as shown.
2. Using suitable punch, install new roll pin and install

flush to differential case (1).
3. Install differential side gears and thrust washers

(1,2). Rotate into position.
4. Using Tool 9666 (1), install new differential side

bearing (ring gear side).
5. Using Tool 9665 (1), install new differential side

bearing (opposite side).
PINION HOUSING ASSEMBLY

1. Using Tools C-4171 (2) and D-129 (1), press new
pinion head bearing cup (3) into pinion gear
housing.
2. Using Tools C-4171 (1) and D-130 (2), press new

pinion tail bearing cup into pinion gear housing.
3. Using Tool L-4507, install new pinion head bearing.
4. Install pinion bearing select spacer (1) removed

upon dissasembly. Spacer thickness will be mea-
sured/verified at end of assembly.
5. Install pinion gear/bearing assembly into pinion

housing. Using Tool L-4507 (1) , press new pinion
tail bearing (2) onto shaft.
6. Usint Tool 9677 (1), install new pinion seal.
7. Using Tool L-4507 (1), install pinion flange (2) until

it bottoms.
8. Using Tool 6958 (2), install pinion flange nut and

9. Measure pinion housing assembly rotating torque

(1). Rotating torque should be within 130-260 Ncm
(12-23 in. lbs.).
10. If rotating torque is lower than this range, disas-

semble pinion housing, measure and install a
slightly thicker spacer (1), reassemble and
reverify. If rotating torque is higher than this
range, disassemble pinion housing, install a
slightly thinner spacer, reassemble and reverify
rotating torque.
AXLE HOUSING ASSEMBLY

1. Using Tool L-4507, install new axle seal (inner) into housing.
2. Install side bearing preload shim into axle housing.
3. Using Tools C-4171 and D-145, press new side bearing cup into housing until it bottoms.
4. Install differential side bearing preload shim (1) into
axle housing cover (2).
5. Using Tools C-4171 and D-129 (1), press new side

bearing cup into cover until it bottoms. Use suitable
cup (3) to support and protect cover.
6. Install differential/ring gear assembly (3), new cover o-ring seal (4), and cover (5).
7. Install and torque cover-to-housing bolts to:
M10x40 65 Nm (48 ft. lbs.)
M8x25 34 Nm (25 ft. lbs.)
8. Using Tool C-4995 (1), measure differential side
bearing rotating torque (preload). Rotating torque
should be within 190-260 Ncm (17-23 in. lbs.).
9. If rotating torque is below this range, disassemble

housing, measure and install slightly thicker pre-
load shims (1). Add thickness equally to both sides.
If rotating torque is above this range, disassembe
housing, measure and install slightly thinner pre-
load shims. Remove thickness equally from both
sides.
10. Install new pinion housing o-ring seal (1).
11. Install pinion housing assembly into axle housing

with proper pinion depth shim (1). (Refer to 3 -
DIFFERENTIAL & DRIVELINE/FRONT AXLE -
ADJUSTMENTS)
12. Install and torque pinion housing-to-axle housing

bolts (1) to 34 Nm (25 ft. lbs.)
13. Measure and adjust ring gear backlash. Backlash
should be within 0.05-0.11mm (0.002-0.004 in.).
(Refer to 3 - DIFFERENTIAL & DRIVELINE/
FRONT AXLE - ADJUSTMENTS)
INSTALLATION
1. Install front axle assembly (1) into position. Install
and torque seven bolts to 65 Nm (48 ft. lbs.).
2. Install power steering return line to cradle by fas-

tening clips (1) as shown.
3. Install axle assembly support bracket (1) and

torque bolts to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.).
4. Install RH catalytic converter/exhaust pipe assembly. (Refer to 11 - EXHAUST SYSTEM/CATALYTIC CON-

VERTER - INSTALLATION)
5. Install front propeller shaft. (Refer to 3 - DIFFERENTIAL & DRIVELINE/PROPELLER SHAFT - INSTALLATION)
6. Install intermediate shaft. (Refer to 3 - DIFFERENTIAL & DRIVELINE/INTERMEDIATE SHAFT - INSTALLATION)
7. Install both front halfshafts. (Refer to 3 - DIFFERENTIAL & DRIVELINE/HALF SHAFT - INSTALLATION)
8. Fill axle with 600ml (0.64 qts.) of MoparT 75W-90

Synthetic Gear Lubricant. Fluid level should be at
or near bottom of fill hole. Torque fill plug (1) to 30
Nm (22 ft. lbs.).
9. Lower vehicle.
ADJUSTMENTS
ADJUSTMENT
PINION BEARING PRELOAD
NOTE: Pinion bearing preload is controlled and adjusted by means of a select-thickness spacer sandwiched
between the pinion head and tail bearing cones.
1. Remove pinion housing assembly from axle

housing.
2. Using a dial-type torque wrench (1), measure pin-

ion housing rotating torque. Rotating torque
should be within 130-260 Ncm (12-23 in. lbs.). If
rotating torque is below this range, disassemble
pinion housing, measure and install a slightly
thicker spacer (1), reassemble and reverify. If rotat-
ing torque is above this range, disassemble pinion
housing, install a slightly thinner spacer, reassem-
ble and reverify rotating torque.
3. Using Tool 6958 (2), remove pinion flange nut.
4. Using Puller 1026 (1), remove pinion flange.

5. Press pinion gear (2) out of housing.
6. Remove pinion bearing preload spacer (1).
7. Measure spacer (1) and correct per rotating torque

measurement.
8. Install proper pinion bearing preload spacer (1).
9. Install pinion gear/bearing assembly to housing.

Using Tool L-4507 (1), press pinion tail bearing (2)
onto shaft until it bottoms.
10. Using Tool L-4507 (1), press on pinion flange (2).

11. Install and torque pinion flange nut to 475 Nm

(350 ft. lbs.).
12. Install pinion housing assembly and depth shim to

axle assembly.
bolts (1) to 34 Nm (25 ft. lbs.).
DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING PRELOAD

NOTE: Differential side bearing preload is controlled and adjusted by means of select-thickness shims
sandwiched between the side bearing cups and the housing/cover.
NOTE: For accurate results, differential side bearing preload must only be measured when the pinion hous-
ing assembly is removed from the axle.
1. Remove pinion housing-to-axle housing bolts (1).
2. Remove pinion housing and depth shim (1) from

axle assembly.
3. Install Tool C-4995 (1) to differential housing as

shown. Measure and record differential rotating
torque. Differential rotating torque should be
within 190-260 Ncm (17-23 in. lbs.). If rotating
torque is below this range, disassemble housing,
measure and install slightly thicker preload shims
(1). Add thickness equally to both sides. If rotating
torque is above this range, disassembe housing,
measure and install slightly thinner preload shims.
Remove thickness equally from both sides.
4. Remove axle housing cover and differential assembly.

5. Remove differential side bearing cup from axle
housing cover. Install Tool 6514 (1) as shown.
6. Remove differential side bearing cup with Tool

6514 (1).
7. Remove side bearing preload shim (1).

replacement.
9. Install new differential side bearing preload shim (1)

into axle housing cover (2).
10. Using Tools C-4171 and D-129 (1), press new

side bearing cup into cover until it bottoms. Use
suitable cup (3) to support and protect cover.
11. Using Tool 9664 (1) and Slide Hammer C-637 (2)
, remove differential side bearing (inboard) cup
12. Measure preload shim (1) to identify for replace-

ment.
13. Install new differential side bearing preload shim
(1) into axle housing.
14. Using Tools C-4171 and D-145, press differential
side bearing cup into housing until it bottoms.
15. Install differential/ring gear assembly (3), new cover o-ring seal (4), and cover (5).
M10x40 65 Nm (48 ft. lbs.)
M8x25 34 Nm (25 ft. lbs.)
17. Re-verify rotating torque measurement. Repeat

adjustment procedure until proper rotating torque
is obtained.
18. Install pinion housing assembly and depth shim

(1). Use new o-ring on housing.

bolts (1) to 34 Nm (25 ft. lbs.)
SPECIFICATIONS - 175MM FIA FRONT AXLE

SPECIFICATIONS
Axle Ratio 3.07
Ring Gear Diameter 175 mm (6.9 in.)
Ring Gear Backlash 0.05-0.11 mm (0.002-0.004 in.)
Differential Torque-to-Rotate 190-260 Ncm (17-23 in. lbs.)
Pinion Housing Torque-to-Rotate 130-260 Ncm (12-23 in. lbs.)
1.15-2.11mm (0.045-0.083 in.) Available in 0.04 mm
Pinion Depth Shim Size
(0.0015 in.) increments
9.60-10.59mm (0.378-0.417 in.) Available in 0.03 mm
Pinion Bearing Preload Spacer Size
1.31-2.51 mm (0.051-0.099 in.) Available in 0.04 mm
Differential Bearing Preload Shim Size
1.34-2.98 mm (0.053-0.117 in.) Available in 0.04 mm
Differential Backlash Shim Size

Bolt, Axle Cover-to-
65 48
Housing (M10x40)
Bolt, Axle Cover-to-
34 25
Housing (M8x25)
65 48
Engine
Bolt, Intermediate
25 19
Shaft-to-Engine
Bolt, Pinion Housing-to-
34 25
Axle Housing
Nut, Pinion Flange 475 350
Plug, Axle Housing Fill 30 22
SPECIAL TOOLS - 175MM FIA FRONT

AXLE
Installer, D-130
Handle, Driver - C-4171
Installer, D-145
Seal Installer C-4193A
Installer L-4507
Torque Tool, C-4995
Puller, 1026
Installer, D-129
Bearing Splitter, 1130

Bearing Remover, 6514
Plug, 9676
Wrench, Spanner - 6958
Installer, 9677
Remover, 9664
Installer, 9665
Installer, 9666
SEAL-AXLE SHAFT
REMOVAL
REMOVAL - RIGHT AXLE SEAL
1. Remove right halfshaft assembly. (Refer to 3 - DIF-
FERENTIAL & DRIVELINE/HALF SHAFT -
REMOVAL)
2. Using suitable screwdriver, remove axle seal (1).
REMOVAL LEFT AXLE SEAL

NOTE: Inboard (Left) axle seal replacement requires removal and disassembly of the axle assembly.
1. Remove front axle assembly. (Refer to 3 - DIFFERENTIAL & DRIVELINE/FRONT AXLE - REMOVAL)
2. Drain axle lubricant by turning housing on its side and draining out of left output bore.
3. Remove differential cover (5) and differential (3). Remove and discard o-ring seal.
4. Using Tool 9664 and Slide Hammer C-637, remove left axle seal.
INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION - RIGHT AXLE SEAL
1. Using Tool C-4193-A (1), install new axle shaft
seal.
2. Install right halfshaft assembly. (Refer to 3 - DIF-
FERENTIAL & DRIVELINE/HALF SHAFT -
INSTALLATION)
INSTALLATION - LEFT AXLE SEAL
1. Using Tool L-4507, install left (inboard) axle seal (2).

2. Install differential (3). Install cover (5) with new o-ring seal (4).
M10x40 65 Nm (48 ft. lbs.)
M8x25 34 Nm (25 ft. lbs.)
4. Install axle assembly into vehicle. (Refer to 3 - DIF-

FERENTIAL & DRIVELINE/FRONT AXLE -
INSTALLATION)
5. Fill axle with 600ml (0.64 qts.) MoparT 75W-90
Synthetic Gear Lubricant. Torque fill plug (1) to 30
Nm (22 ft. lbs.)
FLUID
STANDARD PROCEDURE - FLUID FILL
NOTE: The 175MM FIA Front Axle assembly is designed for fill for life and is not manufactured with a fluid
drain plug.

CEDURE)
2. Remove axle fill plug (1).
3. Fill axle with 600ml (0.64 qts.) of MoparT 75W-90
Synthetic Gear Lubricant. Fluid should be within
3/16 of bottom of fill hole.
SEAL-PINION
REMOVAL
1. Remove propeller shaft and heat shield. (Refer to 3 - DIFFERENTIAL & DRIVELINE/PROPELLER SHAFT -
REMOVAL)
2. Using Tool 6958 (2), remove pinion flange nut.
3. Using Puller 1026 (1), remove pinion flange.

4. Remove pinion flange seal (1) with suitable screw-

driver and discard.
INSTALLATION
1. Using Tool 9677 (1), install new pinion flange seal.
2. Using Tool L-4507 (1) , lightly tap pinion flange (2)

onto shaft, just enough to start flange nut by hand.
3. Install pinion flange nut and torque to 475 Nm

(350 ft. lbs.).
4. Install propeller shaft and heat shield. (Refer to 3 - DIFFERENTIAL & DRIVELINE/PROPELLER SHAFT -
INSTALLATION)
3 - 106 REAR AXLE - 198RII LX
REAR AXLE - 198RII
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
REAR AXLE - 198RII INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 DIFFERENTIAL
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
STANDARD PROCEDURE - FLUID DRAIN AND DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
FILL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 BEARING-DIFFERENTIAL CASE
ADJUSTMENTS REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
ADJUSTMENT - PINION DEPTH . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
ADJUSTMENT - SIDE BEARING PRELOAD COVER-DIFFERENTIAL
AND RING GEAR BACKLASH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
SPECIFICATIONS - 198 RII AXLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
SPECIAL TOOLS - 198 RII AXLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 GEAR-PINION/RING
SEAL-AXLE SHAFT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
SEAL-PINION FLANGE
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
LX REAR AXLE - 198RII 3 - 107
REAR AXLE - 198RII

DESCRIPTION
198/210 MM RII Axle Section View
1 - BEARING, PINION TAIL 6 - DIFFERENTIAL

2 - SHIM, PINION DEPTH 7 - RING, SNAP
3 - BEARING, PINION HEAD 8 - COVER, AXLE
4 - GEAR/SHAFT, PINION 9 - GEAR, RING
5 - BEARING, DIFFERENTIAL SIDE
The 198 MM RII (Rear-Independent-Iron) axle is an independent assembly with a cast iron housing and differential.
The 198 MM RII uses an open differential which is supported by two tapered roller bearings located on either side
of the case. Differential bearing preload and ring gear backlash are controlled with select snap-rings located on the
outside of the differential bearing cups. Pinion height is set with a select shim located under the rear pinion bearing
cup.
The 198 axle is available only in all-wheel-drive (AWD) models, and in V-6 engine-equipped rear-wheel-drive (RWD)
models, and is available in three gear ratios: 3.07 3.64 & 3.90:1.
198/210 Axle Components
1 - NUT, PINION FLANGE 11 - SHIM, PINION DEPTH

2 - FLANGE, PINION 12 - WASHER (2)
3 - SEAL, PINION 13 - SPACER, COLLAPSIBLE
4 - CONE, PINION TAIL BEARING 14 - GEAR, RING
5 - CUP, PINION TAIL BEARING 15 - CONE, DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING
6 - CUP, DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING 16 - DIFFERENTIAL
7 - HOUSING, AXLE 17 - SEAL, AXLE
8 - GEAR/SHAFT, PINION 18 - RING, SNAP
9 - CONE, PINION HEAD BEARING 19 - CUP, DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING
10 - CUP, PINION HEAD BEARING 20 - COVER, AXLE HOUSING
AXLE IDENTIFICATION
The 198 MM axle utilizes a barcoded label (1) which

is adhered to the top of the axle housing as shown.
The following information is found on the identification
label:
Traceability Code (Plant Use)
Axle Part Number
Axle Gear Ratio
198 Axle Identification Label

GEAR NOISE
Axle gear noise can be caused by insufficient lubricant, incorrect backlash, incorrect pinion depth, tooth contact,
worn/damaged gears, or the carrier housing not having the proper offset and squareness.
Gear noise usually happens at a specific speed range. The noise can also occur during a specific type of driving
condition. These conditions are acceleration, deceleration, coast, or constant load.
When road testing, first warm-up the axle fluid by driving the vehicle at least 5 miles and then accelerate the vehicle
to the speed range where the noise is the greatest. Shift out-of-gear and coast through the peak-noise range. If the
noise stops or changes greatly:
Check for insufficient lubricant.
Incorrect ring gear backlash.
Gear damage.
Differential side gears and pinions can be checked by turning the vehicle. They usually do not cause noise during
straight-ahead driving when the gears are unloaded. The side gears are loaded during vehicle turns. A worn pinion
shaft can also cause a snapping or a knocking noise.
BEARING NOISE
The differential and pinion bearings can produce noise when worn or damaged. Bearing noise can be either a whin-
ing, or a growling sound.
Pinion bearings have a constant-pitch noise. This noise changes only with vehicle speed. Pinion bearing noise will
be higher pitched because it rotates at a faster rate. Drive the vehicle and load the differential. If bearing noise
occurs, the rear pinion bearing is the source of the noise. If the bearing noise is heard during a coast, the front
pinion bearing is the source.
Worn or damaged differential bearings usually produce a low pitch noise. Differential bearing noise is similar to
pinion bearing noise. The pitch of differential bearing noise is also constant and varies only with vehicle speed.
Wheel hub bearings produce noise and vibration when worn or damaged. The noise generally changes when the
bearings are loaded. Road test the vehicle. Turn the vehicle sharply to the left and to the right. This will load the
bearings and change the noise level. Where axle bearing damage is slight, the noise is usually not noticeable at
speeds above 30 mph.
LOW SPEED KNOCK

Low speed knock is generally caused by a worn U-joint or by worn side-gear thrust washers. A worn pinion shaft
bore will also cause low speed knock.
VIBRATION
Vibration at the rear of the vehicle is usually caused by a:
Damaged propeller shaft.
Missing propeller shaft balance weight(s).
Worn or out-of-balance wheels.
Loose wheel lug nuts.
Worn U-joints or CV joints.
Loose/broken springs.
Damaged axle shaft bearing(s).
Loose pinion gear nut.
Excessive pinion yoke run out.
Bent halfshaft(s).
Check for loose or damaged front-end components or engine/transmission mounts. These components can contrib-
ute to what appears to be a rearend vibration. Do not overlook engine accessories, brackets and drive belts.
All driveline components should be examined before starting any repair.
DRIVELINE SNAP
A snap or clunk noise when the vehicle is shifted into gear, can be caused by:
High engine idle speed.
Transmission shift operation.
Loose engine/transmission/transfer case mounts.
Worn or broken axle mount isolators.
Loose pinion gear nut and yoke.
Excessive ring gear backlash.
Excessive side gear to case clearance.
The source of a snap or a clunk noise can be determined with the assistance of a helper. Raise the vehicle on a
hoist with the wheels free to rotate. Instruct the helper to shift the transmission into gear. Listen for the noise, a
mechanics stethoscope is helpful in isolating the source of a noise.
DIAGNOSTIC CHART
CONDITION POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTION
Wheel Noise 1. Wheel loose. 1. Tighten loose nuts.
2. Faulty, brinelled wheel bearing. 2. Replace bearing.
Differential Cracked 1. Improper differential side bearing 1. Replace case and inspect gears
preload. and bearings for further damage.
Set differential bearing preload
properly.
2. Excessive ring gear backlash. 2. Replace case and inspect gears
and bearings for further damage.
Set ring gear backlash properly.
3. Vehicle overloaded. 3. Replace case and inspect gears
Avoid excessive vehicle weight.
Differential Gears Scored 1. Insufficient lubrication. 1. Replace scored gears. Fill

differential with the correct fluid type
and quantity.
2. Improper grade of lubricant. 2. Replace scored gears. Fill

differential with the proper fluid type
and quantity.
3. Excessive spinning of one 3. Replace scored gears. Inspect all
wheel/tire. gears, pinion bores, and shaft for
damage. Service as necessary.
Loss Of Lubricant 1. Lubricant level too high. 1. Drain lubricant to the correct
level.
2. Worn axle shaft seals. 2. Replace seals.

3. Cracked axle housing. 3. Repair as necessary.
4. Worn pinion seal. 4. Replace seal.
5. Worn/scored pinion flange 5. Replace pinion flange and seal.
journal.
6. Axle cover not properly sealed. 6. Remove, clean, and re-seal
cover.
Axle Overheating 1. Lubricant level low. 1. Fill differential to correct level.
2. Improper grade of lubricant. 2. Fill differential with the correct

fluid type and quantity.
3. Bearing preload too high. 3. Readjust bearing pre-load.
4. Insufficient ring gear backlash. 4. Re-adjust ring gear backlash.
Gear Teeth Broke 1. Overloading. 1. Replace gears. Examine other

gears and bearings for possible
damage.
2. Ice-spotted pavement. 2. Replace gears and examine

remaining parts for damage.
3. Improper adjustments. 3. Replace gears and examine
remaining parts for damage. Ensure
ring gear backlash is correct.
Axle Noise 1. Insufficient lubricant. 1. Fill axle with the correct fluid type
and quantity.
2. Improper ring gear and pinion 2. Check ring gear and pinion
adjustment. contact pattern. Adjust backlash or
pinion depth.
3. Unmatched ring gear and pinion. 3. Replace gears with a matched
ring gear and pinion.
4. Worn teeth on ring gear and/or 4. Replace ring gear and pinion.
pinion.
5. Loose pinion bearings. 5. Adjust pinion bearing pre-load.
6. Loose differential bearings. 6. Adjust differential bearing preload.
7. Misaligned or sprung ring gear. 7. Measure ring gear run-out.
Replace components as necessary.
8. Housing not machined properly. 8. Replace housing.
STANDARD PROCEDURE - FLUID DRAIN AND FILL

NOTE: Note: The fluid required for use in this axle is MoparT Synthetic Gear and Axle Lubricant 75W-140.
1. Drive the vehicle until the differential lubricant is at

the normal operating temperature.
on hoist.
3. Remove rear axle drain plug and drain lubricant
completely from the axle.
4. Install drain plug and tighten to 60 Nm (44 ft lbs).
5. Remove fill plug (1) and fill rear axle with 1.4 L (1.5
qts.) MoparT Synthetic Gear & Axle Lubricant 75W-
140.
6. Install fill plug and tighten to 60 Nm (44 ft lbs).
REMOVAL

on hoist.
reuse.
3. Install drain plug (1) and torque to 60 Nm (44 ft.
lbs.) torque.
4. Remove rear exhaust system (2) on dual-outlet

exhaust models, otherwise, lower exhaust system
at rear hanger(s) to provide adequate clearance.


flange bolt/nuts.



nut (2).

12. Lower axle just enough to remove both halfshafts

one at a time. Shift axle assembly in one direc-
tion, compressing one halfshaft while removing
the other (1). Use caution to protect axle seal and
journal.
13. Remove axle assembly from vehicle and transfer

to bench.
14. Using suitable screwdriver, remove axle seals and
discard.
INSTALLATION

lation.
2. Using new circlip(s), install halfshaft (1) to rear axle

assembly. Use care not to damage axle seals (2).
by hand.




to axle assembly.
8. If used, remove screw-type under-hoist jack stands
(2).

Fill axle with 1.4L (1.5 qts.) of MoparT 75W-140
Synthetic Gear & Axle Lubricant. Install fill plug
and torque to 60 Nm (44 ft. lbs.).
ADJUSTMENTS
ADJUSTMENT - PINION DEPTH
PINION DEPTH VARIANCE
Ring gear and pinion are supplied as matched sets.
Identifying numbers for the ring gear and pinion are
painted onto the pinion gear shaft and the side of the
ring gear. A plus (+) number, minus () number or zero
(0) along with the gear set sequence number (01 to
99) is on each gear. The pinion depth variance (1) is
the amount the depth varies from the standard depth
setting of a pinion marked with a (0). The remaining
numbers (2) are the sequence number of the gear set.
The standard depth provides the best gear tooth con-
tact pattern.
Compensation for pinion depth variance is achieved

with select shims (3). The shims are sandwiched
between the pinion head bearing cup (4) and axle
housing.
If installing a new gear, note the depth variance number of the original and replacement pinion. Add or subtract this
number from the original depth shim to compensate for the difference in the depth variances. The numbers repre-
sent deviation from the standard in microns. If the number is negative, add that value to the required thickness of
the depth shims. If the number is positive, subtract that value from the thickness of the depth shim.
PINION GEAR DEPTH VARIANCE
Original Pinion
Gear Depth Replacement Pinion Gear Depth Variance
Variance
24 23 22 21 0 +1 +2 +3 +4
+4 +0.08 +0.07 +0.06 +0.05 +0.04 +0.03 +0.02 +0.01 0
+3 +0.07 +0.06 +0.05 +0.04 +0.03 +0.02 +0.01 0 20.01
+2 +0.06 +0.05 +0.04 +0.03 +0.02 +0.01 0 20.01 20.02
+1 +0.05 +0.04 +0.03 +0.02 +0.01 0 20.01 20.02 20.03
0 +0.04 +0.03 +0.02 +0.01 0 20.01 20.02 20.03 20.04
21 +0.03 +0.02 +0.01 0 20.01 20.02 20.03 20.04 20.05
22 +0.02 +0.01 0 20.01 20.02 20.03 20.04 20.05 20.06
23 +0.01 0 20.01 20.02 20.03 20.04 20.05 20.06 20.07
24 0 20.01 20.02 20.03 20.04 20.05 20.06 20.07 20.08
PINION DEPTH MEASUREMENT

Pinion depth measurement is taken with the pinion head and tail bearing cups pressed into the axle housing without
the shim.
1. Press pinion head bearing cup into housing using
Tools C-4171 (1) and C-4310 (2).
2. Press pinion tail bearing cup into housing using

Tools C-4171 (1) and D-146 (2).
3. Install Pinion Height Block 6739 (3), Pinion Gage

Block 9227 (2), and pinion head bearing cone (1)
onto Screw 6741. Install assembly into axle hous-
ing and through bearing cups.
4. Install pinion tail bearing and Cone 6740 (4).

Tighten Cone 6740 by hand until 3.4 Nm (30 in.
lbs.) of rotating torque is measured at Screw 6741
(5).
5. Install Arbor Discs 9228 (1).

6. Install Arbor Bar D-115-3 (1).
7. Verify pinion depth setup is a shown.
8. Install Dial Indicator 9524 (1) to Scooter Block

D-115-2A (2). Secure with set-screw (3).
9. Install Indicator/Block assembly to top of Height

Block 6739 (1). Zero indicator on top surface.
10. Slide indicator probe off of height block and onto

Arbor Bar D-115-3 (2). As indicator contacts Arbor
Bar (2), indicator needle will rotate clockwise.
Continue moving indicator probe to the crest of
the arbor bar and record the highest reading.
11. Select a shim equal to the dial indicator reading

plus the drive pinion gear depth variance number
(1) written on the side of the pinion shaft. For
example, if the depth variance is 1, subtract 0.01
mm (0.0004 in.) from dial indicator reading.
ADJUSTMENT - SIDE BEARING PRELOAD AND RING GEAR BACKLASH

DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING PRELOAD MEASUREMENT/CORRECTION
Differential side bearing preload should be measured and adjusted after the following scenarios:
Differential case replacement
Differential side bearing replacement
Axle housing replacement
Loss or replacement of side bearing snap rings
If none of these situations apply, refer to Adjustment Ring Gear Backlash
1. Install Spreader Adapter Plates 9226 (1) as shown
2. Mount axle housing to Spreader W-129-B (1).

3. Set up Dial Indicator Set C-3339-A as shown to

measure axle housing spread:
a. Clamp SP-5426 (1)
b. Post SP-5425-B (2)
c. Metric Dial Indicator 9524 (3)
4. If differential side bearing cups and snap rings are

removed at this point, skip to Step 8. Otherwise,
expand spreader to spread axle housing no more
than 0.30 mm (0.012 in.).
5. Remove both differential side bearing snap rings

(1). Tag snap ring to ensure replacement to original
position.
6. Measure and record snap ring (2) thickness for

later use.
7. Relax spreader (1) to relieve tension on axle

housing.
8. Install right (pinion) side bearing cup and snap ring

(1).
9. Zero dial indicator.

10. Expand spreader (1) to spread axle housing no
more than 0.30 mm (0.012 in.).
11. Install left (ring gear) side bearing cup and snap
ring (1).

housing.
13. Measurement showing on indicator is the axle

housing retained spread. Proper differential side
bearing preload is achieved with an axle housing
retained spread of 0.18-0.23 mm (0.007-0.009
in.).
14. If retained spread is less than 0.18 mm (0.007
in.), increase snap ring thickness at each side in
equal increments.
15. If retained spread is greater than 0.23 mm (0.009
in.), decrease snap ring thickness at each side in
equal increments.
RING GEAR BACKLASH MEASUREMENT/CORRECTION

Differential Ring Gear Backlash should be measured and adjusted after the following scenarios:
1. Ring and pinion gear replacement
2. Pinion head bearing replacement
3. Pinion depth (shim) adjustment
4. Differential case replacement
5. Differential side bearing replacement
6. Axle housing replacement
NOTE: If Spreader W-129-B is installed, make sure tension on axle housing is relieved.

measure ring gear backlash:
b. Post SP-5425-B (2)
8. Rotate ring gear one direction to take up clearance
to pinion. Verify indicator tip is in contact with ring
gear and zero indicator. Rotate ring gear back and
forth and record measurement. Ring gear backlash
should be 0.13-0.18 mm (0.005-0.007 in.). Verify
back lash measurement in four (4) positions.
9. If backlash measurement is less than 0.13 mm

(0.005 in.), it is necessary to decrease the snap
ring thickness on the ring gear (left) side, and
increase the thickness on the pinion (right) side.
10. If backlash measurement is greater than 0.18 mm
(0.007 in.), it is necessary to increase the snap
ring thickness on the ring gear (right) side, and
decrease the thickness on the pinion (left) side.
GEAR CONTACT PATTERN

The ring gear and pinion teeth contact patterns will show if the pinion depth is correct in the housing. It will also
show if the ring gear backlash has been adjusted correctly. The backlash can be adjusted within specifications to
achieve desired tooth contact patterns.
1. Apply a thin coat of hydrated ferric oxide or equivalent to the drive and coast side of the ring gear teeth.
2. Wrap, twist, and hold a shop towel around the pinion yoke to increase the turning resistance of the pinion. This
will provide a more distinct contact pattern.
3. With a boxed end wrench on a ring gear bolt, rotate the differential case one complete revolution in both direc-
tions while a load is being applied from shop towel.
The areas on the ring gear teeth with the greatest degree of contact against the pinion teeth will squeegee the
compound to the areas with the least amount of contact. Note and compare patterns on the ring gear teeth to Gear
Tooth Contact Patterns chart and adjust pinion depth and gear backlash as necessary.
Gear Tooth Contact Patterns

SPECIFICATIONS - 198 RII AXLE

SPECIFICATIONS
Axle Ratios 3.07, 3.64, 3.90
Side Bearing Preload 6000-8000 N
Axle Housing Retained Spread 0.18 mm to 0.23 mm (0.007 in. to 0.009 in.)
Select Snap Ring Size 3.60-4.68 mm (0.14-0.18 in.) In 0.02mm (0.0007 in.)
increments
Select Pinion Shim Size 1.40-2.50mm (0.05-0.10 in.) In 0.01mm (0.0004 in.)
increments
Pinion Torque To Rotate 2.25Nm (20 in. lbs.)
Total Torque To Rotate (Approx.) 3.38Nm (30 in. lbs.)

Plug, Rear Axle Drain/Fill 60 44
Bolt, Differential Cover 30 +45 22 + 45
Bolt, Ring Gear-to- 85 63
Differential Case
220 162
Crossmember
Bolt/Nut, Axle Front Mount
65 48
Isolator
SPECIAL TOOLS - 198 RII AXLE
Puller, 1026
Spreader Adapters, 9226
Installer, 6448A
Pinion Height Gage, 9227
Remover, 9084
Arbor Discs, 9228
Installer, 9223
Installer, 9231A Mounting Plate, 9630
Removal/Installation Arbor, 9522 Fixture, 9631
Puller Press, C-293-PA
Installer, 9523
Adapters, C-293-37
Dial Indicator, 9524

Installer, C-3095-A Installer, D-146
Flange Wrench, C-3281
Remover, D-149
Dial Indicator Set, C-3339-A
Adapter, SP-3289
Handle, C-4171 Spreader, W-129-B
Installer, C-4310
SEAL-AXLE SHAFT
REMOVAL
1. Remove halfshaft(s). (Refer to 3 - DIFFERENTIAL
& DRIVELINE/HALF SHAFT - REMOVAL)
2. Using suitable screwdriver (1), remove axle shaft
seal (2).
3. Visually inspect halfshaft seal journal for damage
(excessive seal groove, nicks, scratches, etc.
Replace halfshaft if necessary.
INSTALLATION
1. Using Tool 9223 (2), install NEW axle shaft seal
(1). Lubricate the inside diameter with MoparT
Gear and Axle Lubricant 75W-140 to protect seal
during halfshaft installation.
2. Install halfshaft(s). (Refer to 3 - DIFFERENTIAL &
DRIVELINE/HALF SHAFT - INSTALLATION)
3. Remove fill plug (1) to check and adjust rear axle

fluid level. Top off axle with MoparT Gear and Axle
Lubricant 75W-140. Reinstall fill plug torque to 60
SEAL-PINION FLANGE
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear axle assembly from vehicle. Refer to
Rear Axle Removal.
2. Measure axle assembly rotating torque and record
measurement for reuse on assembly.
3. Using flange holder C-3281(1) and 41mm socket,

remove pinion flange nut and discard.
NOTE: Due to axle imbalance concerns, it is nec-

essary to make sure pinion flange-to-shaft orienta-
tion is maintained. If alignment marks are not
visible, apply appropriate marks before removing
pinion flange.
4. Using puller 1026 (1), remove pinion flange (2)

from pinion shaft.
5. Using suitable tool (1), remove pinion seal (2) and

discard.
INSTALLATION
1. Apply light coating of gear lubricant to the lip of the
pinion seal.
2. Using Tool 9231A (1), install pinion seal until tool
bottoms on carrier.
3. Install pinion flange into position. Align index marks

to maintain assembly balance.
4. Using Installer 6448A (1), lightly tap on pinion
flange (2) until adequate pinion shaft threads are
exposed.
5. Install new pinion flange nut. Using flange holder

tool C-3281(1) and 41mm socket, torque nut to 136
Nm (100 ft. lbs.).
6. Measure assembly turning torque. Axle assembly

rotating torque must be should be equal to the
reading recorded upon seal/flange removal.
7. If rotating torque is low, increase pinion flange nut

torque in 7 Nm (5 ft. lbs.) increments. Repeat until
proper rotating torque is received.
8. Stake pinion flange nut (1) as shown.

9. Install rear axle assembly. Refer to Rear Axle
Installation.
DIFFERENTIAL
REMOVAL
1. Clamp rear axle assembly into bench vise (1).
2. Remove drain plug (1) and drain fluid into container

suitable for reuse.
3. Install drain plug and torque to 60 Nm (44 ft. lbs.).
4. Using suitable torque wrench (1), measure and

record rear axle assembly total turning torque.
5. Using suitable screwdriver (1), remove both axle

seals (2).
6. Remove twelve axle cover-to-housing bolts (1) and

remove cover (2).
7. Install spreader adapters (1), Tool 9226, as shown.

Adapters contain two hole patterns and are labeled
accordingly.
8. Install spreader, Tool W-129-B (1), as shown.
9. Set up Dial Indicator Set C-3339-A to measure

housing spread as shown.

b. Post SP-5425-B (2)
10. Spread axle housing no more than 0.30 mm
(0.012 in.).
NOTE: The differential side bearing snap rings are

select-fit, and control ring gear backlash and dif-
ferential side bearing preload. It is important to
return original snap rings to their original position.
11. Using suitable snap ring pliers (2), compress and

remove differential side bearing snap rings (1).
Identify and tag for proper reuse.
12. Back off W-129-B spreader (1) to relax tension on

housing.
13. Measure snap ring thickness and record for future
use.
14. Install Tool 9522 (1) into one side of housing and
push inward to release differential side bearing
cup (2) from opposite side. Repeat for other
bearing.
15. Remove differential assembly from axle housing.
NOTE: Note: If difficulty removing differential is

encountered due to interference with W-129-B
spreader and adapter plates, remove spreader and
adapter plates to facilitate removal.
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove differential ring gear-to-case bolts (1).
2. Using brass drift (1), remove ring gear (2).

3. Remove bearings (2) from the differential case (3)

with Puller/Press C-293-PA (5), Adapters C-293-37
(1) and Plug SP-3289 (4).
4. Drive out pinion shaft-to-case roll pin using ham-

mer and suitable punch.
5. Using brass drift (2), drive out pinion shaft (1).
6. Install Tool 9631 (1) into differential side gear.
7. Rotate Tool 9631 (1) to gain access to and remove

pinion gears and thrust washers.
8. Remove differential side gears (4) and thrust wash-

ers (5).
ASSEMBLY
1. Lubricate all differential components with hypoid
gear lubricant.
2. Install differential side gears (2) and thrust washers
to Tools 9631 (1) as shown in illustration.
3. Install differential pinion gears (1) and thrust wash-

ers into position across from each other.
4. Rotate pinion gears into place using Tool 9631 and

line up gear centers with pinion shaft bore.
5. Using a brass hammer, drive pinion shaft (3) into

differential case (1), making sure to line up roll pin
bores.
6. Using suitable punch (2), drive new roll pin into
position.
7. Measure differential gear rotating torque as shown.

Differential gear rotating torque should be 5-30 Nm
(44-266 in. lbs.) Rotating torque is adjusted using
select side gear thrust washers. Refer to the follow-
ing chart.
Available Side Gear Thrust Washer Thicknesses

1.25 mm (0.049 in.)
1.30 mm (0.051 in.)
1.35 mm (0.053 in.)
1.40 mm (0.055 in.)
1.45 mm (0.057 in.)
1.50 mm (0.059 in.)
1.55 mm (0.061 in.)
1.60 mm (0.063 in.)
1.65 mm (0.065 in.)
8. Remove differential case from Tool 9630 (2).

9. Install ring gear to case. Lightly tap ring gear into

position to facilitate starting of bolts.
10. Install new ring gear-to-case bolts and torque to
85 Nm (63 ft. lbs.).
11. Using Tool 9523 (2) and Handle C-4171 (1), press
new differential side bearings (3) onto differential
case.
INSTALLATION
NOTE: If replacement differential side bearings or differential case are being installed, it is necessary to
measure and adjust Differential Side Bearing Preload and Gear Backlash. Refer to Adjustments Differen-
tial Side Bearing Preload and Gear Backlash to determine proper snap ring selection.
1. Install differential assembly (1) into axle housing.
2. Install differential side bearing cups (2).
3. Use Tool 9522 (1) to aid in seating side bearing

cups (2).

housing spread as shown:
b. Post SP-5425-B (2)
5. Expand spreader W-129-B (1) to spread axle hous-

ing no more than 0.30 mm (0.012 in.).
NOTE: The differential side bearing snap rings are select-fit, and control ring gear backlash and differential
side bearing preload. It is necessary to return snap rings to their original position. If replacement differential
side bearings or differential case are being installed, refer to Adjustments Differential Side Bearing Pre-
load and Gear Backlash to determine proper snap ring selection.
6. Using suitable snap ring pliers (2), install differential

side bearing snap rings (1).

housing.
8. Install axle seals (1) using Tool 9223 (2).

9. Remove spreader W-129-B and adapter plates

9226 (1).
10. Apply 4mm (0.157 in.) bead (2) of MoparT Axle

RTV to axle housing cover (1) as shown.
11. Install cover to axle housing. Install and torque

cover-to-housing bolts to 30 Nm (22 ft. lbs.) +
90.
BEARING-DIFFERENTIAL CASE
REMOVAL
1. Remove differential assembly from axle. Refer to
Differential Removal.

(1) and Plug SP-3289 (4).
INSTALLATION
1. Using Tool 9523 and Handle C-4171, press differ-
ential side bearings onto differential case.
2. Install differential and reassemble axle assembly.

COVER-DIFFERENTIAL
REMOVAL
1. Remove axle assembly from vehicle. (Refer to 3 -
DIFFERENTIAL & DRIVELINE/REAR AXLE -
198MM - REMOVAL)
2. Remove axle housing cover bolts (1).
3. Using suitable screwdriver, remove axle housing
cover (1).
INSTALLATION
1. After thoroughly cleaning axle housing cover (1),
apply a 4 mm (0.157 in.) bead (2) of MoparT Axle
RTV as shown.
2. Immediately install cover (2) to axle housing. Install

and torque axle housing cover bolts (1) to 30 Nm
(22 ft. lbs.) + 45.
3. Install axle assembly to vehicle. (Refer to 3 - DIF-
FERENTIAL & DRIVELINE/REAR AXLE - 198MM -
INSTALLATION)
GEAR-PINION/RING
REMOVAL
1. Remove differential assembly. (Refer to 3 - DIF-
FERENTIAL & DRIVELINE/REAR AXLE - 198MM/
DIFFERENTIAL - REMOVAL)
2. Place differential case in a soft-jawwed vise and
remove ring gear-to-case bolts.
3. Remove ring gear from differential case with a

brass drift and hammer.
4. Using 41mm socket and flange wrench Tool

C-3281 (1), remove pinion nut and discard.
5. Using puller Tool 1026 (1), remove pinion flange

(2).
6. Using a suitable screwdriver, remove and discard

the pinion seal.
7. Remove pinion tail bearing cone.
8. Move axle housing to press and press out pinion

shaft (1) as shown.
9. Remove collapsible spacer (1) and washers (2).

Discard collapsible spacer.
10. Remove pinion head bearing (2) with Puller

C-293-PA (1) and Adapters C-293-37 (3,4).
11. Using driver handle C-4171(2) and remover Tool

9084 (1), drive out pinion head bearing cup.
12. Remove pinion head shim. Measure and record

shim thickness.
13. Using driver handle C-4171 (2) and remover Tool

D-149 (1), drive out pinion tail bearing cup.
INSTALLATION
1. Install selected pinion depth shim (1) into housing.

Tools C-4171 (1) and C-4310 (2).

Tools C-4171 (1) and D-146 (2).
4. Press new pinion head bearing (2) onto pinion

shaft using Tool C-3095-A (1).
5. Install washers (2) and new collapsible spacer (1)

to pinion shaft.
6. Install pinion shaft (1) into housing and support on

press table atop Tool 8255 (2). Ensure pinion
gear face is centered atop Tool 8255.
7. Using Tool C-3095-A (1), press on new pinion tail

bearing (2).
8. Install new pinion seal into position.

9. Press pinion seal into housing using Tool 9231A
(1).
10. Lightly lubricate pinion flange seal with axle lubri-

cant for flange installation.
11. Align index marks and press pinion flange (2) on
using Tool C-3095-A (1).
12. Install new pinion flange nut by hand.

13. Hold pinion flange with Tool C-3281 (1). Using a
deep 41 mm socket, tighten pinion flange nut to
an initial torque of 203 Nm (150 ft. lbs.).
14. Rotate pinion flange to ensure bearing is properly

seated.
15. Measure pinion rotating torque using suitable
torque wrench (1). Pinion rotating torque
should be 215-245 N. cm (19-22 in. lbs.).
16. If pinion rotating torque exceeds the specified
range, the pinion shaft must be removed and the
crush sleeve replaced.
17. If pinion rotating torque is below the specified

range, increase nut torque by 7 Nm (5 ft. lbs.)
increments and recheck turning torque until rotat-
ing torque is within range.
18. Stake pinion flange nut (1) using hammer and

suitable punch.
19. Install ring gear to differential case. Loosely install

new ring-gear-to-differential case bolts.
20. Torque all ring gear-to-case bolts to 85 Nm (64 ft.
lbs.)

(Refer to 3 - DIFFERENTIAL & DRIVELINE/REAR
AXLE - 198MM/DIFFERENTIAL - INSTALLATION)
REAR AXLE - 210RII
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
REAR AXLE - 210RII SEAL-PINION FLANGE

DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
STANDARD PROCEDURE - FLUID DRAIN AND DIFFERENTIAL
FILL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
ADJUSTMENTS INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
ADJUSTMENT - PINION DEPTH BEARING-DIFFERENTIAL CASE
MEASUREMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
ADJUSTMENT SIDE BEARING PRELOAD INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
AND RING GEAR BACKLASH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 COVER-DIFFERENTIAL
SPECIFICATIONS - 210 MM RII AXLE . . . . . . . . . 202 REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
SPECIAL TOOLS - 210 RII AXLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
SEAL-AXLE SHAFT GEAR-PINION/RING
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
REAR AXLE - 210RII

DESCRIPTION
198/210 MM RII Axle Section View
1 - BEARING, PINION TAIL 6 - DIFFERENTIAL

2 - SHIM, PINION DEPTH 7 - RING, SNAP
3 - BEARING, PINION HEAD 8 - COVER, AXLE
4 - GEAR/SHAFT, PINION 9 - GEAR, RING
5 - BEARING, DIFFERENTIAL SIDE
cup.
The 210 MM axle is available only in V8 engine-equipped models with a 2.82:1 gear ratio.
198/210 MM Axle Components
1 - NUT, PINION FLANGE 11 - SHIM, PINION DEPTH

2 - FLANGE, PINION 12 - WASHER (2)
3 - SEAL, PINION 13 - SPACER, COLLAPSIBLE
4 - CONE, PINION TAIL BEARING 14 - GEAR, RING
5 - CUP, PINION TAIL BEARING 15 - CONE, DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING
6 - CUP, DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING 16 - DIFFERENTIAL
7 - HOUSING, AXLE 17 - SEAL, AXLE
8 - GEAR/SHAFT, PINION 18 - RING, SNAP
9 - CONE, PINION HEAD BEARING 19 - CUP, DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING
10 - CUP, PINION HEAD BEARING 20 - COVER, AXLE HOUSING
AXLE IDENTIFICATION
The 210 MM axle utilizes a barcoded label which is adhered to the top of the axle housing as shown. The following
information is found on the identification label:
Axle Part Number
Axle Gear Ratio

GEAR NOISE
Axle gear noise can be caused by insufficient lubri-
cant, incorrect backlash, incorrect pinion depth, tooth
contact, worn/damaged gears, or the carrier housing
not having the proper offset and squareness.
Gear noise usually happens at a specific speed range.
The noise can also occur during a specific type of
driving condition. These conditions are acceleration,
deceleration, coast, or constant load.
When road testing, first warm-up the axle fluid by driv-
ing the vehicle at least 5 miles and then accelerate
the vehicle to the speed range where the noise is the
greatest. Shift out-of-gear and coast through the peak-
noise range. If the noise stops or changes greatly:
210 MM Axle Identification Tag
Gear damage.
BEARING NOISE
LOW SPEED KNOCK

VIBRATION
Bent halfshaft(s).
DRIVELINE SNAP
DIAGNOSTIC CHART
properly.

and quantity.

and quantity.
level.

journal.
cover.


damage.

and quantity.
pinion depth.
pinion.

NOTE: The fluid required for use in this axle is MoparT Synthetic Gear and Axle Lubricant 75W-140.

on hoist.
3. Remove rear axle drain plug (1) and drain lubricant
140.
REMOVAL

on hoist.
reuse.
lbs.) torque.

at rear hanger(s).


flange bolt/nuts.



nut (2).


journal.

to bench.
discard.
INSTALLATION

lation.

assembly. Use care not to damage axle seals(2).
by hand.




to axle assembly.
(2).

ADJUSTMENTS
ADJUSTMENT - PINION DEPTH MEASUREMENT
PINION DEPTH VARIANCE
Ring gear and pinion are supplied as matched sets.
Identifying numbers for the ring gear and pinion are
etched into the pinion gear face. A plus (+) number,
minus () number or zero (0) along with the gear set
sequence number (01 to 99) is on each gear. The pin-
ion depth variance (1) is the amount the depth varies
from the standard depth setting of a pinion marked
with a zero. The remaining numbers are the sequence
number of the gear set. The standard depth provides
the best gear tooth contact pattern.
Compensation for pinion depth variance is achieved

with select shims. The shims (3) are sandwiched
between the pinion head bearing cup and axle
housing.
Pinion Depth Shim and Collapsible Washer
If installing a new gear, note the depth variance number of the original and replacement pinion. Add or subtract this
number from the original depth shim to compensate for the difference in the depth variances. The numbers repre-
sent deviation from the standard in microns. If the number is negative, add that value to the required thickness of
the depth shims. If the number is positive, subtract that value from the thickness of the depth shim.
PINION GEAR DEPTH VARIANCE
Original Pinion
Gear Depth Replacement Pinion Gear Depth Variance
Variance
204 203 -02 201 00 +01 +02 +03 +04
+04 +0.08 +0.07 +0.06 +0.05 +0.04 +0.03 +0.02 +0.01 0
+03 +0.07 +0.06 +0.05 +0.04 +0.03 +0.02 +0.01 0 -0.01
+02 +0.06 +0.05 +0.04 +0.03 +0.02 +0.01 0 -0.01 -0.02
+01 +0.05 +0.04 +0.03 +0.02 +0.01 0 -0.01 -0.02 -0.03
00 +0.04 +0.03 +0.02 +0.01 0 -0.01 -0.02 -0.03 -0.04
201 +0.03 +0.02 +0.01 0 -0.01 -0.02 -0.03 -0.04 -0.05
202 +0.02 +0.01 0 -0.01 -0.02 -0.03 -0.04 -0.05 -20.06
203 +0.01 0 -0.01 -0.02 -0.03 -0.04 -0.05 -0.06 -0.07
204 0 0.01 -0.02 -0.03 -0.04 -0.05 -0.06 -0.07 -0.08
PINION DEPTH MEASUREMENT

Pinion depth measurement is taken with the pinion head and tail bearing cups pressed into the axle housing without
the shim.
Tools C-4171 (1) and C-4310 (2).

Tools C-4171 (1) and D-146 (2).
3. Install Pinion Height Block 6739 (3), Pinion Gage

Block 9085 (2), and pinion head bearing cone (1)
onto Screw 6741. Install assembly into axle hous-
ing and through bearing cups.
4. Install pinion tail bearing and Cone 6740 (4).

Tighten Cone 6740 by hand until 3.4 Nm (30 in.
lbs.) of rotating torque is measured at Screw 6741
(5).
5. Install Arbor Discs 9083 (1).

6. Install Arbor Bar D-115-3 (1).
7. Verify pinion depth setup is a shown.
8. Install Dial Indicator 9524 (1) to Scooter Block

D-115-2A (2). Secure with set-screw (3).
9. Install Indicator/Block assembly to top of Height

Block 6739 (1). Zero indicator on top surface.
10. Slide indicator probe off of height block and onto

Arbor Bar D-115-3 (2). As indicator contacts Arbor
Bar (2), indicator needle will rotate clockwise.
Continue moving indicator probe to the crest of
the arbor bar and record the highest reading.
11. Select a shim equal to the dial indicator reading

plus the drive pinion gear depth variance number
etched into the pinion face (1). For example, if the
depth variance is 01, subtract 0.01mm (0.0004
in.) from dial indicator reading.
12. Using Tool C-4171 (2) and Remover 9084 (1),

drive out pinion head bearing cup and insert spec-
ified shim.
ADJUSTMENT SIDE BEARING PRELOAD AND RING GEAR BACKLASH

DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING PRELOAD MEASUREMENT/CORRECTION
Differential side bearing preload should be measured and adjusted after the following scenarios:
Differential case replacement
Differential side bearing replacement
Axle housing replacement
Loss or replacement of side bearing snap rings
If none of these situations apply, refer to Adjustment Ring Gear Backlash
1. Install Spreader Adapter Plates 9226 (1).
2. Mount axle housing to Spreader W-129-B (1)

measure axle housing spread:
b. Post SP-5425-B (2)
4. If differential side bearing cups and snap rings are

already removed at this point, skip to Step 8. Oth-
erwise, expand spreader (1) to spread axle housing
no more than 0.30 mm (0.012 in.).
5. Remove both differential side bearing snap rings

(1). Tag snap ring to ensure replacement to original
position.
6. Measure and record snap ring (2) thickness for

later use.

housing.
8. Install right (pinion) side bearing cup and snap ring

(1).
9. Zero dial indicator.

10. Expand spreader (1) to spread axle housing no
more than 0.30 mm (0.012 in.).
11. Install left (ring gear) side bearing cup and snap
ring (1).

housing.
13. Measurement showing on indicator (3) is the axle

housing retained spread. Proper differential side
bearing preload is achieved with an axle housing
retained spread of 0.11-0.17 mm (0.004-0.007 in.).
14. If retained spread is less than 0.11 mm (0.004
in.), increase snap ring thickness at each side in
equal increments.
15. If retained spread is greater than 0.17 mm (0.007
in.), decrease snap ring thickness at each side in
equal increments.
RING GEAR BACKLASH MEASUREMENT/CORRECTION

Differential Ring Gear Backlash should be measured and adjusted after the following scenarios:
1. Ring and pinion gear replacement
2. Pinion head bearing replacement
3. Pinion depth (shim) adjustment
4. Differential case replacement
5. Differential side bearing replacement
6. Axle housing replacement
NOTE: If Spreader W-129-B is installed, make sure

tension on axle housing is relieved.

measure ring gear backlash:
b. Post SP-5425-B (2)
8. Rotate ring gear one direction to take up clearance
to pinion. Verify indicator tip is in contact with ring
gear and zero indicator. Rotate ring gear back and
forth and record measurement. Ring gear backlash
should be 0.10-0.16 mm (0.004-0.006 in.). Verify
back lash measurement in four (4) positions.
9. If backlash measurement is less than 0.10 mm

(0.004 in.), it is necessary to decrease the snap
ring thickness on the ring gear (left) side, and
increase the thickness on the pinion (right) side.
10. If backlash measurement is greater than 0.16 mm
(0.006 in.), it is necessary to increase the snap
ring thickness on the ring gear (right) side, and
decrease the thickness on the pinion (left) side.
GEAR CONTACT PATTERN

The ring gear and pinion teeth contact patterns will show if the pinion depth is correct in the housing. It will also
show if the ring gear backlash has been adjusted correctly. The backlash can be adjusted within specifications to
achieve desired tooth contact patterns.
1. Apply a thin coat of hydrated ferric oxide or equivalent to the drive and coast side of the ring gear teeth.
2. Wrap, twist, and hold a shop towel around the pinion yoke to increase the turning resistance of the pinion. This
will provide a more distinct contact pattern.
3. With a boxed end wrench on a ring gear bolt, rotate the differential case one complete revolution in both direc-
tions while a load is being applied from shop towel.
The areas on the ring gear teeth with the greatest degree of contact against the pinion teeth will squeegee the
compound to the areas with the least amount of contact. Note and compare patterns on the ring gear teeth to Gear
Tooth Contact Patterns chart and adjust pinion depth and gear backlash as necessary.
GEAR TOOTH CONTACT PATTERNS

SPECIFICATIONS - 210 MM RII AXLE

SPECIFICATIONS
Axle Ratios 2.82
Side Bearing Preload 6-8000 N
Axle Housing Retained Spread 0.11 mm to 0.17 mm (0.004 in. to 0.007 in.)
Select Snap Ring Size 3.60-4.50mm (0.14-0.17 in.) In 0.02mm (0.0007 in.)
increments
Select Pinion Shim Size 1.40-2.50mm (0.05-0.10 in.) In 0.01mm (0.0004 in.)
increments
Pinion Torque To Rotate 2.25Nm (20 in. lbs.)
Total Torque To Rotate (Approx.) 3.38Nm (30 in. lbs.)

Plug, Rear Axle Drain/Fill 50 37
Bolt, Differential Cover 50 37
Bolt, Ring Gear-to- 85 63
Differential Case
220 162
Crossmember
Bolt/Nut, Axle Front Mount
65 48
Isolator
SPECIAL TOOLS - 210 RII AXLE
Puller 1026
Pinion Height Gage, 9085
Installer, 6448A
Installer, 9223
Arbor Discs, 9083
Spreader Adapters, 9226
Remover, 9084
Installer, 9231
Mounting Plate, 9630
Removal/Installation Arbor, 9522 Fixture, 9631
Puller Press, C-293-PA
Installer, 9523
Adapters, C-293-37
Dial Indicator, 9524

Installer, C-3095-A Installer, D-146
Flange Wrench, C-3281
Remover, D-149
Dial Indicator Set, C-3339-A
Adapter, SP-3289
Handle, C-4171 Spreader, W-129-B
Installer, C-4310
SEAL-AXLE SHAFT
REMOVAL
seal (2).
INSTALLATION

Lubricant 75W-140. Reinstall fill plug and torque to
SEAL-PINION FLANGE
REMOVAL
Rear Axle Removal.


pinion flange.

from pinion shaft.

discard.
INSTALLATION
pinion seal.
2. Using Tool 9231A (1), install pinion seal until tool
bottoms on carrier.

exposed.

Nm (100 ft. lbs.).



Installation.
DIFFERENTIAL
REMOVAL
1. Remove drain plug (1) and drain fluid into container
suitable for reuse.
2. Install drain plug and torque to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.).
3. Remove twelve axle cover-to-housing bolts (1) and

remove cover (2) with a suitable screwdriver.
4. Install spreader adapters (1), Tool 9226, as shown.

Adapters contain two hole patterns and are labeled
accordingly.
5. Mount spreader Tool W-129-B (1) into bench vise.

Install axle assembly to spreader and secure with
nuts 9226-2.
6. Using suitable torque wrench (1), measure and

record rear axle assembly total turning torque.
7. Using suitable screwdriver (1), remove both axle

seals (2).
8. Set up dial indicator C-3339-A to measure housing

spread as shown.
9. Spread axle housing no more than 0.30 mm (0.012

in.).
NOTE: The differential side bearing snap rings are

select-fit, and control ring gear backlash and dif-
ferential side bearing preload. It is important to
return original snap rings to their original position.
10. Using suitable snap ring pliers (2), compress and

remove differential side bearing snap rings (1).
Identify and tag for proper reuse.

housing.
12. Measure snap ring thickness and record for future

use.
13. Install Tool 9522 (1) into one side of housing and
push inward to release differential side bearing
cup (2) from opposite side. Repeat for other
bearing.
14. Remove differential assembly from axle housing.
NOTE: Note: If difficulty removing differential is

encountered due to interference with W-129-B
spreader and adapter plates, remove axle from
spreader and adapter plates from axle to facilitate
removal.
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove differential ring gear-to-case bolts (1).
2. Using brass drift (1), remove ring gear (2).


(1) and Plug SP-3289 (4).
4. Drive out pinion shaft-to-case roll pin using ham-

mer and suitable punch.
5. Using brass drift (2), drive out pinion shaft (1).
6. Install Tool 9631 (1) into differential side gear.
7. Rotate Tool 9631 (1) to gain access to and remove

pinion gears and thrust washers.
8. Remove differential side gears (4) and thrust wash-

ers (5).
ASSEMBLY
1. Lubricate all differential components with hypoid
gear lubricant.
2. Install differential side gears (2) and thrust washers
to Tools 9631 (1) as shown in illustration.
3. Install differential pinion gears (1) and thrust wash-

ers into position across from each other.
4. Rotate pinion gears into place using Tool 9631 and

line up gear centers with pinion shaft bore.
5. Using a brass hammer, drive pinion shaft (3) into

differential case (1), making sure to line up roll pin
bores.
6. Using suitable punch (2), drive new roll pin into
position.
7. Measure differential gear rotating torque as shown.

Differential gear rotating torque should be 5-30 Nm
(44-266 in. lbs.) Rotating torque is adjusted using
select side gear thrust washers. Refer to the follow-
ing chart.
Available Side Gear Thrust Washer Thicknesses

1.25 mm (0.049 in.)
1.30 mm (0.051 in.)
1.35 mm (0.053 in.)
1.40 mm (0.055 in.)
1.45 mm (0.057 in.)
1.50 mm (0.059 in.)
1.55 mm (0.061 in.)
1.60 mm (0.063 in.)
1.65 mm (0.065 in.)
8. Remove differential case from Tool 9630 (2).

9. Install ring gear to case. Lightly tap ring gear into

position to facilitate starting of bolts.
10. Install new ring gear-to-case bolts and torque to
85 Nm (63 ft. lbs.).
11. Using Tool 9523 (2) and Handle C-4171 (1), press
new differential side bearings (3) onto differential
case.
INSTALLATION
NOTE: If replacement differential side bearings or differential case are being installed, it is necessary to
measure and adjust Differential Side Bearing Preload and Gear Backlash. Refer to Adjustments Differen-
tial Side Bearing Preload and Gear Backlash to determine proper snap ring selection.
1. Install differential assembly (1) into axle housing.

Note: If difficulty installing differential is
encountered due to interference with spreader
and plates, remove axle housing from spreader,
plates from housing, and install differential.
Return assembly to the spreader.
2. Install differential side bearing cups (2). Use tool

9522 (1) to aid in differential alignment.
3. Use Tool 9522 (1) to aid in seating side bearing

cups (2).

housing spread as shown:
b. Post SP-5425-B (2)
5. Expand spreader W-129-B (1) to spread axle hous-

ing no more than 0.30 mm (0.012 in.).
NOTE: The differential side bearing snap rings are select-fit, and control ring gear backlash and differential
side bearing preload. It is necessary to return snap rings to their original position. If replacement differential
side bearings, differential case, or axle housing are being installed, refer to Adjustments Differential Side
Bearing Preload and Gear Backlash to determine proper snap ring selection.
6. Using suitable snap ring pliers (2), install differential

side bearing snap rings (1).

housing.
8. Remove axle assembly from spreader. Remove

plates (1).
9. Apply 4mm (0.157 in.) bead (2) of MoparT Axle

RTV to axle housing cover (1) as shown.
10. Install cover (2) to axle housing. Install and torque

cover-to-housing bolts (1) to 30 Nm (22 ft. lbs.) +
90.
11. Install axle seals (1) using Tool 9223 (2).

BEARING-DIFFERENTIAL CASE
REMOVAL
1. Remove differential assembly from axle. Refer to
Differential Removal.

(1) and Plug SP-3289 (4).
INSTALLATION
1. Using Tool 9523 and Handle C-4171, press differ-
ential side bearings onto differential case.

COVER-DIFFERENTIAL
REMOVAL
1. Remove axle assembly from vehicle. (Refer to 3 -
DIFFERENTIAL & DRIVELINE/REAR AXLE -
210MM - REMOVAL)
2. Remove axle housing cover bolts (1). Using suit-
able screwdriver, pry cover (2) from housing.
INSTALLATION
1. Thoroughly clean cover and install a 4 mm (0.157
in.) bead of MoparT AXLE RTV (2) as shown.
2. Immediately install cover. Install and torque bolts

(1) to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.).
3. Install axle assembly to vehicle. (Refer to 3 - DIF-
FERENTIAL & DRIVELINE/REAR AXLE - 210MM -
INSTALLATION)
GEAR-PINION/RING
REMOVAL
1. Remove differential assembly. (Refer to 3 - DIF-
FERENTIAL & DRIVELINE/REAR AXLE - 210MM/
DIFFERENTIAL - REMOVAL)
2. Place differential case in a soft-jawwed vise and

remove ring gear-to-case bolts (1).
3. Remove ring gear from differential case with a

brass drift (1) and hammer.
4. Using 41mm socket and flange wrench Tool

C-3281 (1), remove pinion nut and discard.
5. Using puller Tool 1026 (1), remove pinion flange

(2).
6. Using a suitable screwdriver, remove and discard

the pinion seal.
7. Remove pinion tail bearing cone.
8. Move axle housing to press and press out pinion

shaft (1) as shown.
9. Remove collapsible spacer (1) and washers (2).

Discard collapsible spacer.
10. Remove pinion head bearing (2) with Puller

C-293-PA (1) and Adapters C-293-37 (3,4).
11. Using driver handle C-4171(2) and remover Tool

9084 (1), drive out pinion head bearing cup.
12. Remove pinion head shim. Measure and record

shim thickness.
13. Using driver handle C-4171 (2) and remover Tool

D-149 (1), drive out pinion tail bearing cup.
INSTALLATION
1. Install selected pinion depth shim into housing.

Tools C-4171 (1) and C-4310 (2).

Tools C-4171 (1) and D-146 (2).
4. Press new pinion head bearing (2) onto pinion

shaft using Tool C-3095-A (1).
5. Install washers (2) and new collapsible spacer (1)

to pinion shaft.
6. Install pinion shaft (1) into housing and support on

press table atop Tool 8255 (2). Ensure pinion
gear face is centered atop Tool 8255.
7. Using Tool C-3095-A (1), press on new pinion tail

bearing (2).
8. Install new pinion seal (1) into position.

9. Press pinion seal into housing using Tool 9231A

(1).
10. Lightly lubricate pinion flange seal with axle lubri-

cant for flange installation.
11. Align index marks and press pinion flange (2) on
using Tool C-3095-A (1).
12. Install new pinion flange nut by hand.

13. Hold pinion flange with Tool C-3281 (1). Using a
deep 41 mm socket, tighten pinion flange nut to
an initial torque of 203 Nm (150 ft. lbs.).
14. Rotate pinion flange to ensure bearing is properly

seated.
15. Measure pinion rotating torque using suitable
torque wrench (1). Pinion rotating torque
should be 215-245 N. cm (19-22 in. lbs.).
16. If pinion rotating torque exceeds the specified
range, the pinion shaft must be removed and the
crush sleeve replaced.
17. If pinion rotating torque is below the specified

range, increase nut torque by 7 Nm (5 ft. lbs.)
increments and recheck turning torque until rotat-
ing torque is within range.
18. Stake pinion flange nut (1) using hammer and

suitable punch.
19. Install ring gear to differential case. Loosely install

new ring-gear-to-differential case bolts.
20. Torque all ring gear-to-case bolts to 85 Nm (64 ft.
lbs.)

(Refer to 3 - DIFFERENTIAL & DRIVELINE/REAR
AXLE - 210MM/DIFFERENTIAL - INSTALLATION)
REAR AXLE - 215RII
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
REAR AXLE - 215RII SPECIAL TOOLS215 MM RII AXLE . . . . . . . . . . . 260

DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 SEAL - PINION FLANGE
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
STANDARD PROCEDURE - FLUID DRAIN AND INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
FILL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 SEAL - AXLE SHAFT
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
REAR AXLE - 215RII

DESCRIPTION
cup.
AXLE IDENTIFICATION
The 215 MM axle utilizes a barcoded label which is adhered to the top of the axle housing as shown. The following
information is found on the identification label:
Axle Part Number
Axle Gear Ratio

GEAR NOISE
Axle gear noise can be caused by insufficient lubri-
cant, incorrect backlash, incorrect pinion depth, tooth
contact, worn/damaged gears, or the carrier housing
not having the proper offset and squareness.
Gear noise usually happens at a specific speed range.
The noise can also occur during a specific type of
driving condition. These conditions are acceleration,
deceleration, coast, or constant load.
When road testing, first warm-up the axle fluid by driv-
ing the vehicle at least 5 miles and then accelerate
the vehicle to the speed range where the noise is the
greatest. Shift out-of-gear and coast through the peak-
noise range. If the noise stops or changes greatly:
Gear damage.
BEARING NOISE
LOW SPEED KNOCK

VIBRATION
Bent halfshaft(s).
DRIVELINE SNAP
DIAGNOSTIC CHART
properly.

and quantity.

and quantity.
level.

journal.
cover.


damage.

and quantity.
pinion depth.
pinion.

NOTE: The fluid required for use in this axle is MoparT Synthetic Gear and Axle Lubricant 75W-140.

on hoist.
3. Remove rear axle drain plug (1) and drain lubricant
140.
REMOVAL

on hoist.
reuse.
lbs.) torque.

at rear hanger(s).


flange bolt/nuts.



nut (2).


journal.

to bench.
discard.
INSTALLATION

lation.

assembly. Use care not to damage axle seals(2).
by hand.




to axle assembly.
(2).

SPECIAL TOOLS215 MM RII AXLE
Installer, 9754
Installer, 9755
SEAL - PINION FLANGE

REMOVAL
Rear Axle Removal.


pinion flange.

from pinion shaft.

discard.
INSTALLATION
pinion seal.
2. Using Tool 9754 (1), install pinion seal until tool
bottoms on carrier.

exposed.

Nm (100 ft. lbs.).



Installation.
SEAL - AXLE SHAFT

REMOVAL
seal (2).
INSTALLATION

Lubricant 75W-140. Reinstall fill plug and torque to
LX VEHICLE QUICK REFERENCE 4-1
VEHICLE QUICK REFERENCE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
FLUID - CAPACITIES & RECOMMENDED REPLACEMENT BULBS

SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS - INTERIOR . . . 15
AND GENUINE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS - EXTERIOR . . 15
FUSE LOCATIONS & TYPES TRAILER TOWING
SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS
Power Distribution Centers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
DESCRIPTION
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
4-2 VEHICLE QUICK REFERENCE LX
FLUID - CAPACITIES & RECOMMENDED

SPECIFICATIONS
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
ENGINE
Component Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts

Engine Coolant Mopar T Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology)
Engine Oil (2.7 Liter) Use API Certified engine oil. SAE 5W-20 is recommended. Refer to the
engine oil fill cap for the correct SAE grade meeting DaimlerChrysler Material
Standard MS-6395.
engine oil viscosity chart for the correct SAE grade meeting DaimlerChrysler
Material Standard MS-6395.
engine oil fill cap for the correct SAE grade meeting DaimlerChrysler Material
Standard MS-6395.
Spark Plugs Refer to the Vehicle Emission Control Information label in the engine
compartment.
Oil Filter (2.7 Liter) Mopar T 05281090 or equivalent.
Fuel Selection (2.7 87 Octane
Liter)
Liter)
Liter)
CHASSIS
Component Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts

Automatic Transmission Mopar T ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent.
Brake Master Cylinder Mopa T DOT 3 and SAE J1703 or equivalent should be used. Use only
recommended brake fluids.
Front Axle API Certified GL-5 SAE 75W90 Gear Lubricant or equivalent.
Power Steering Mopar T Power Steering Fluid + 4,
Reservoir Mopar T ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent.
Rear Axle API Certified GL-5 SAE 75W140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent.
Transfer Case Mopar T Transfer Case Lubricant LX, P/N 05170055EA, or equivalent.
CAPACITIES
DESCRIPTION U.S. Metric

Fuel (approximate)
2.7 Liter Engines (87 Octane) 18 gallons 68 liters
Engine Oil-With Filter
2.7 Liter Engines (SAE 5W-20, API 6.0 qts. 5.7 liters
Certified)
Certified)
Certified)
Cooling System *
2.7 Liter Engines (Mopar T 9.7 qts 9.2 liters
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000
Mile Formula) or equivalent.
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
FUSE LOCATIONS & TYPES

SPECIFICATIONS
Power Distribution Centers
Front Power Distribution Center Fuses
A power distribution center is located in the engine compartment. This center contains fuses and relays.
CAUTION:
When installing the Power Distribution Center cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly posi-
tioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get into the Power Distribution Center, and
possibly result in a electrical system failure.
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
Cavity Fuse Circuits

1 20 Amp Left High Beam Headlight
Yellow
2 20 Amp Right High Beam Headlight
Yellow
3 15 Amp Adjustable Pedal
Dk. Blue
4 20 Amp Horn
Yellow
5 25 Amp Headlamp Washer If Equipped
Clear
6 15 Amp Front Control Module (FCM)
Dk. Blue
7 20 Amp Fog Lamp
Yellow
8 15 Amp Park Lamp
Dk. Blue
9 15 Amp Non ABS Brakes
Dk. Blue
10 5 Amp Starter
Orange
11 20 Amp Auto Shutdown/Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
Yellow
12
13
14 25 Amp Powertrain Control Module
Clear
15 20 Amp Injectors, Ignition Coils
Yellow
16 15 Amp Powertrain Control Module
Dk. Blue
17 30 Amp Antilock Brake System (ABS) Valves
Pink
18 30 Amp Windshield Wiper/Washer
Pink

19 50 Amp Radiator Fan
Red
20 20 Amp Starter
Lt. Blue
21 50 Amp Red ABS Pump Motor
22 40 Amp Radiator Fan High/Low
Green
23 50 Amp High Intensity Lighting
Red
24
25 30 Amp Lighting Left High Beam/Right Low Beam
Pink
26 20 Amp Transmission
Lt. Blue
27 30 Amp Lighting Left Low Beam/Right High Beam
Pink
Rear Power Distribution Center Fuses

There is also a power distribution center located in the trunk under the spare tire access panel. This center contains
fuses and relays.
CAUTION:
When installing the Power Distribution Center cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly posi-
tioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get into the Power Distribution Center, and
possibly result in a electrical system failure.
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.

1 60 Amp Ignition Off Draw
Clear
2 40 Amp Battery
Green
3
4 40 Amp Battery
Green
5 30 Amp Heated Seat/Steering Column
Pink
6 20 Amp Fuel Pump
Yellow
7
8 15 Amp Ignition Start/Run - Start
Dk. Blue
9 20 Amp Console Power Outlet
Yellow
10 10 Amp Rear Fog Lamp If Equipped
Red
11 25 Amp C/BRKR Memory Module/Door Locks
12 25 Amp C/BRKR Passenger Power Seat

13 30 Amp C/BRKR Door Module Run/Acc/Delay
14 10 Amp Sentry Key/Remote Keyless Entry/Cluster
Red
15 20 Amp Brake Light (5.7L)
Yellow
16 20 Amp Power Outlet Trunk - if equipped
Yellow
17
18 20 Amp Selectable Power Outlet
Yellow
19 10 Amp Red Stop Lamp
20 20 Amp Rear Wiper If Equipped
Yellow
21
22
23
24
25
26
27 10 Amp Airbag/Occupant Classification Module
Red
28 10 Amp Curtain Airbag - if equipped
Red
29 5 Amp Sentry Key/Remote Keyless Entry/Powertrain
Orange Control Module Ignition Feed
30 10 Amp Steering Column Module/Power Mirrors - if
Red equipped
31
32
33
34
35 5 Amp Power Antenna/Garage Door Opener/Ignition Delay
Orange
36 20 Amp Radio/Navigation
Yellow
37 15 Amp Transmission
Dk. Blue
38 5 Amp Analog Clock/Garage Door Opener
Orange
39 10 Amp Heated Mirror
Red
40 5 Amp Power Mirror
Orange
41 10 Amp Climate Control Module/Headlamp Leveling if
Red equipped/Rear Park Assist if equipped/Tire
Pressure Monitoring if equipped
42 30 Amp Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Blower Motor
Pink

43 30 Amp Rear Defroster
Pink
44 20 Amp Audio Amplifier
Lt. Blue
DESCRIPTION
For 2.7L engines with Federal Certified Emission Control Systems, and all 6.1L engines, follow Maintenance
Schedule A from 0 to 102,000 miles, or Schedule B from 0 to 105,000 miles.
For 2.7L engines with California Certified Emission Control Systems, and all 3.5L and 5.7L engines follow
Maintenance Schedule A or B from 0120,000 miles.
There are two maintenance schedules that show the required service for your vehicle.
First is Schedule B. It is for vehicles that are operated under the conditions that are listed below and at the
beginning of the schedule. Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter every 60,000 miles (96 000 km) if the
vehicle is usually operated under one or more of the conditions marked with an L.
Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
Trailer towing.L
Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial service).L
this manual.
NOTE: Most vehicles are operated under the conditions listed for Schedule (B(.
Second is Schedule A. It is for vehicles that are not operated under any of the conditions listed under Schedule
9B9.
Use the schedule that best describes your driving conditions. Where time and mileage are listed, follow the interval
that occurs first.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months
whichever comes first.
CAUTION: Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle.
At Each Stop for Fuel

Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while
the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the level is
at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required.
Once a Month
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage.
Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required.
Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake master cylinder, and transmission and add as needed.
Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct operation.
Check rubber seals on each side of the radiator for proper fit.
At Each Oil Change

Change the engine oil filter.
Inspect the exhaust system.
Inspect the brake hoses.
Inspect the CV joints and front and rear suspension components.
Check the coolant level, hoses, and clamps.
SCHEDULE B
Follow schedule B if you usually operate your vehicle under one or more of the following conditions. Change the
automatic transmission fluid and filter every 60,000 miles (96 000 km) if the vehicle is usually operated under one
or more of the conditions marked with an L.
Short trips of less than 10 miles (16.2 km).
Trailer towing.L
Taxi, police or delivery service (commercial services).L
If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol) fuel.
this manual.
Miles 3,000 6,000 9,000 12,000 15,000 18,000

(Kilometers) (5 000) (10 000) (15 000) (20 000) (25 000) (30 000)
if required.*
and rotors.
Miles 21,000 24,000 27,000 30,000 33,000 36,000

(Kilometers) (35 000) (40 000) (45 000) (50 000) (55 000) (60 000)
if required.*
4 - 10 VEHICLE QUICK REFERENCE LX
Miles 21,000 24,000 27,000 30,000 33,000 36,000

(Kilometers) (35 000) (40 000) (45 000) (50 000) (55 000) (60 000)
and rotors.
valve.*
Miles 39,000 42,000 45,000 48,000 51,000 54,000

(Kilometers) (65 000) (70 000) (75 000) (80 000) (85 000) (90 000)
if required.*
and rotors.
Change the Transfer Case Fluid - All X
Wheel Drive (AWD) only
Miles 57,000 60,000 63,000 66,000 69,000 72,000

(Kilometers) (95 000) (100 000) (105 000) (110 000) (115 000) (120 000)
Engine.
and rotors.
Check and Inspect the accessory drive X
belt and tensioner. Replace if required.
PCV valve.*
Change the automatic transmission X
fluid and filter.
miles.
LX VEHICLE QUICK REFERENCE 4 - 11
Miles 75,000 78,000 81,000 84,000 87,000 90,000

(Kilometers) (125 000) (130 000) (135 000) (140 000) (145 000) (150 000)
Inspect the air cleaner filter and X X X X
Replace the air cleaner filter. X X
Engine.
and rotors.
PCV valve.*
Miles 93,000 96,000 99,000 102,000 105,000

(Kilometers) (155 000) (160 000) (165 000) (170 000) (175 000)
required.*
rotors.
Engine.
Engines.
Change the Transfer Case Fluid - All Wheel X
Drive (AWD) only
Flush and replace engine coolant at 102,000 X
miles if not done at 60 months.
Rotate the tires. X X
Miles 108,000 111,000 114,000 117,000 120,000

(Kilometers) (180 000) (185 000) (190 000) (195 000) (200 000)
required.*
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and X X
rotors.
Replace the spark plugs. 5.7L Engines. X
Miles 108,000 111,000 114,000 117,000 120,000

(Kilometers) (180 000) (185 000) (190 000) (195 000) (200 000)
valve.*
Change the automatic transmission fluid and X
filter.
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 120 X
months, if not replaced at 102,000 miles.
* This maintenance is recommended by the manufacture to the owner but is not required to maintain the emissions
warranty.
receipts.
SCHEDULE A
Miles 6,000 12,000 18,000 24,000 30,000 36,000

(Kilometers) (10 000) (20 000) (30 000) (40 000) (50 000) (60 000)
[Months] [6] [12] [18] [24] [30] [36]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X X X
if required.*
and rotors.
Miles 42,000 48,000 54,000 60,000 66,000 72,000

(Kilometers) (70 000) (80 000) (90 000) (100 000) (110 000) (120 000)
[Months] [42] [48] [54] [60] [66] [72]
Change engine oil and engine oil X X X X X X
filter.
Inspect the front and rear brake X X
linings and rotors.
Engine.
Check and Inspect the accessory X
drive belt and tensioner. Replace if
required.
miles.
Miles 42,000 48,000 54,000 60,000 66,000 72,000

(Kilometers) (70 000) (80 000) (90 000) (100 000) (110 000) (120 000)
[Months] [42] [48] [54] [60] [66] [72]
PCV valve. *
Miles 78,000 84,000 90,000 96,000 102,000

(Kilometers) (130 000) (140 000) (150 000) (160 000) (170 000)
[Months] [78] [84] [90] [96] [102]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X X
required.*
rotors.
Engines.
valve.*
Engine.
Flush and replace the engine coolant at X
102,000 miles if not done at 60 months.
Rotate the tires. X X X X X
Miles 108,000 114,000 120,000

(Kilometers) (180 000) (190 000) (200 000)
[Months] [108] [114] [120]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if required.* X X
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and rotors. X
Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV valve.* X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 120 months, if not X
replaced at 102,000 miles.
* This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer to the owner but is not required to maintain the emissions
warranty.
receipts.
WARNING:
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
SPECIFICATIONS
REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS - INTERIOR
LIGHT BULBS Interior Bulb Number

Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights W5W
Rear Compartment (Trunk) Light 579
Overhead Console Reading Lights 578
Visor Vanity Lights A6220
Glove Box Light 194
Door Courtesy 562
Shift Indicator Light JKLE14140
NOTE: For lighted switches, see your dealer for replacement instructions.
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and
should not be used for replacement.
REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS - EXTERIOR
LIGHT BULBS Exterior (300, 300 Touring Models) Bulb Number

Low Beam Headlamp 9006
High Beam Headlamp 9005
Front Park/Turn Lamp 3757AK
Front Inner Park Lamp 194NA
Front Outer Park Lamp 194NA
Front Fog LampIf Equipped 9145/H10 (Serviced at Dealer)
Front Sidemarker W5W (Serviced at Dealer)
Tail/Stop/Turn Lamp 3057
Rear Sidemarker 168
Backup Lamp 3057
Center High Mount Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED
License 168
LIGHT BULBS Exterior (300C Models) Bulb Number

Low Beam Headlamp (Standard Halogen) 9006XS
Low Beam Headlamp High Intensity Discharge (HID) D1S (Serviced at Dealer)
Front Park/Turn Lamp 3157AK
Front Fog Lamp 9145/H10 (Serviced at Dealer)
Front Sidemarker W5W (Serviced at Dealer)
Tail/Stop Lamp 3057
Tail Lamp 3057
Turn Signal Lamp 3057
Backup Lamp 3057
Center High Mount Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED
LIGHT BULBS Exterior (300C Models) Bulb Number

License W5W
TRAILER TOWING
SPECIFICATIONS
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with
your vehicle. Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
possible.
Common Towing Definitions

The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight.
The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The gross trailer weight (GTW) is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and equipment
(permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its 9loaded and ready for operation9 condition. The recom-
mended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer
must be supported by the scale.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR.
WARNING:
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less than 10% or more
than 15% of the trailer load. You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The maximum height and maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some
other connecting point of the vehicle. These kind of hitches are the most popular on the market today and theyre
commonly used to tow small- and medium-sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing hitch includes a receiver attached to the tow vehicle, plus a removable hitch head and spring
bar assembly that fits into the receiver opening and hook up brackets that connect the spring bars to the trailer
frame.
Trailer Hitch Classification

Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 2,000 lbs (907 kg) with the optional
Trailer Tow Prep Package. See your dealer for package content.
The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow
and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition. Refer to the
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) chart for the Max. GTW towable for your given drivetrain.
Trailer Hitch Classification

Class Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.)
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2268 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4540 kg)
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)

The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/Transmission Frontal Area Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Max. Tongue Wt.
Wt.)
2.7L Automatic 22 SQ. FT. (2.04 square Up to 2 persons & 100 lbs (45 kg)
meters) Luggage 1,000 lbs (454
kg)
22 SQ. FT. (2.04 square Up to 3 persons & 100 lbs (45 kg)
kg)
kg)
22 SQ. FT. (2.04 square Up to 5 persons & NO 100 lbs (45 kg)
kg)
3.5L & 5.7L Automatic 32 SQ. FT. (2.97 square Up to 2 persons & 200 lbs (91 kg)
kg)
kg)
kg)
32 SQ. FT. (2.97 square Up to 5 persons & NO 100 lbs (45 kg)
meters) Luggage 1,000lbs (454
kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and
cargo, and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
Trailer and Tongue Weight

Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the Gross
Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can
cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer. Failure to
load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents.
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
The tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or equip-
ment put in or on your vehicle.
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on

the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also,
additional factory-installed options, or dealer-in-
stalled options, must be considered as part of the
total load on your vehicle. Refer to the Tire and
Loading Information placard in the Tire Safety
Information Section of this manual for the maxi-
mum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch are recommended for Tongue Weights
(TW) above 150 lbs (68 kg) and required for Tongue Weights above 300 lbs (136 kg).
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended:
CAUTION:
Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles (805 km) of vehicle operation. Doing so may damage your
vehicle.
During the first 500 miles (805 km) of trailer towing, limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h).
When towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR, or GCWR, ratings.
WARNING:
Improper towing can lead to an injury accident. Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe
as possible:
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel. When trailering cargo that
is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control. You could
lose control of your vehicle and have an accident.
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a loss of
control, poor performance or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis
structure or tires.
Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the frame
or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for
turning corners.
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow
vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in P for Park. Always, block or 9chock9 the trailer wheels.
GCWR must not be exceeded.
Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
GVWR
GTW
GAWR
Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized (This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the
10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight).
Towing Requirements - Tires

Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire.
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
Also, check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer. Refer to the (Refer to 22 - TIRES/
WHEELS/TIRES - DESCRIPTION) section of this manual on Tread Wear Indicators for the proper inspection pro-
cedure.
When replacing tires refer to (Refer to 22 - TIRES/WHEELS/TIRES - DESCRIPTION) section of this manual on
Replacement Tires for proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity
will not increase the vehicles GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements - Trailer Brakes

Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer. This
could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury.
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated
brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic brake con-
troller is not required.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000
lbs (907 kg).
CAUTION:
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should be
of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
effort, and longer stopping distances.
WARNING:
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicles hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake system and
cause it to fail. You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance. When towing you should allow for additional space
between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
Towing Requirements - Trailer Lights & Wiring

Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size, stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4 and 7 pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and
connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy
traffic.
Towing Tips - Automatic Transmission
The D range can be selected when towing. However,

if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, the 3
range should be selected.Using the 3 range while
operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions
will improve performance and extend transmission life
by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up. This
action will also provide better engine braking.
The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be
changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more
than 45 minutes of continuous operation. See Sched-
ule B in section 8 of this manual for transmission
fluid change intervals.
NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid

level before towing.
Towing Tips - Electronic Speed Control (If

Equipped)
Dont use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
When using the speed control, if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency.
Towing Tips - Autostick (If Equipped)

For vehicles equipped with Autostick. By using the Autostick modes, and selecting a specific gear range, fre-
quent shifting can be avoided. The highest gear range should be selected that allows for adequate performance.
For example, choose 4 if the desired speed can be maintained. Choose 3 or 2 if needed to maintain the
desired speed.
Extended driving at high RPM should be avoided to prevent excess heat generation. A reduction in vehicle
speed may be required to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to a higher gear range or vehicle speed
when road conditions and RPM level allows.
Towing Tips - Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:
City Driving - When stopped for short periods of time, put transmission in neutral and increase engine idle
speed.
Highway Driving - Reduce speed.
Air Conditioning - Turn off temporarily.
refer to Cooling System Operating information in the Maintenance section of this manual for more information.
LX BRAKES 5-1
BRAKES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
BRAKES - BASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 BRAKES - ABS SERVICE INFORMATION . . . . . . 385

BRAKES - ABS ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS . . . 173
BRAKES - BASE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
BRAKES - BASE CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

DESCRIPTION - BASE BRAKES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
CAUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 CALIPER - FRONT SINGLE PISTON DISC
STANDARD PROCEDURE BRAKE
BASE BRAKE BLEEDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
BASE BRAKE BLEEDING - SRT8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
SPECIFICATIONS CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
BRAKE FASTENER TORQUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
SPECIAL TOOLS ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
BASE BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
SWITCH-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS CALIPER - FRONT TWIN PISTON DISC BRAKE
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 REMOVAL
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 AWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 RWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
SENSOR - BRAKE FLUID LEVEL DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
DESCRIPTION INSTALLATION
DISC BRAKES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 AWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
DISC BRAKES - SRT8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 RWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
PADS - FRONT BRAKE CALIPER - FRONT DISC BRAKE - SRT8
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 CALIPER - REAR DISC BRAKE
PADS - REAR BRAKE DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
PADS - FRONT/REAR BRAKE - SRT8 CALIPER - REAR DISC BRAKE - SRT8
STANDARD PROCEDURE REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
BRAKE PAD BURNISHING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
5-2 BRAKES - BASE LX
FLUID BOOSTER - RHD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING VALVE - PROPORTIONING
BRAKE FLUID CONTAMINATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
STANDARD PROCEDURE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL CHECKING . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 ROTOR
SPECIFICATIONS DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
BRAKE FLUID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 BRAKE ROTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
RESERVOIR - MASTER CYLINDER FLUID STANDARD PROCEDURE
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 BRAKE ROTOR MACHINING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 REMOVAL
JUNCTION BLOCK FRONT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 REAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 FRONT - SRT8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 REAR - SRT8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 INSTALLATION
MASTER CYLINDER FRONT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 REAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
STANDARD PROCEDURE FRONT - SRT8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
MASTER CYLINDER BLEEDING - MK25 . . . . . . 84 REAR - SRT8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
MASTER CYLINDER BLEEDING - MK25E . . . . . 85 SPECIFICATIONS
REMOVAL BRAKE ROTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
MASTER CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 TUBES/HOSES
MASTER CYLINDER - RHD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 PARKING BRAKE
INSTALLATION DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
MASTER CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 CABLE - PARKING BRAKE FRONT
MASTER CYLINDER - RHD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
PEDAL INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
REMOVAL CABLE - PARKING BRAKE REAR
PEDAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
PEDAL - RHD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
INSTALLATION LEVER - PARKING BRAKE
PEDAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 REMOVAL
PEDAL - RHD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 LEVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
PEDAL - ADJUSTABLE BRAKE LEVER - RHD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
STANDARD PROCEDURE INSTALLATION
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SYCHRONIZATION . . 107 LEVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 LEVER - RHD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 SHOE AND LINING - PARKING BRAKE
BOOSTER - POWER BRAKE REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
REMOVAL INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
BOOSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 ADJUSTMENTS
BOOSTER - RHD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 PARKING BRAKE SHOE ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . 171
INSTALLATION
BOOSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
LX BRAKES - BASE 5-3
BRAKES - BASE
DESCRIPTION - BASE BRAKES
The base brake system consists of the following components:
Brake pedal
Master cylinder
Power brake booster
Brake tubes and hoses
Proportioning valve (non-ABS only)
Disc brakes (front and rear)
Brake lamp switch
Brake fluid level sensor
Parking brake
All brakes are power assist type through the use of a vacuum operated power brake booster.
The hydraulic brake system is front/rear split on both the non-antilock and antilock braking systems. This means the
front brakes are on one hydraulic circuit from the master cylinder and the rear brakes are on the other.
Front disc brakes control the braking of the front wheels; rear braking is controlled by rear disc brakes.
Some vehicles are equipped with an optional antilock brake system (ABS) with traction control. This system shares
most base brake hardware used on vehicles without ABS. An Electronic Stability Program (ESP) is also available.
All components differing from the base brake hardware are described in detail in the Antilock Brake System section.
The parking brake on this vehicle is pedal-operated.
For more information on the description of any individual base brake component, refer to that component elsewhere
in this section. For information on the brake lamp switch, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/LAMPS/LIGHTING - EXTERI-
OR/BRAKE LAMP SWITCH - DESCRIPTION)
WARNING
WARNING: Dust and dirt accumulating on brake parts during normal use may contain asbestos fibers from
production or aftermarket brake linings. Breathing excessive concentrations of asbestos fibers can cause
serious bodily harm. Exercise care when servicing brake parts. Do not sand or grind brake lining unless
equipment used is designed to contain the dust residue. Do not clean brake parts with compressed air or
by dry brushing. Cleaning should be done by dampening the brake components with a fine mist of water,
then wiping the brake components clean with a dampened cloth. Dispose of cloth and all residue containing
asbestos fibers in an impermeable container with the appropriate label. Follow practices prescribed by the
Occupational Safety And Health Administration (OSHA) and the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) for
the handling, processing, and disposing of dust or debris that may contain asbestos fibers.
CAUTION
CAUTION: Use only MoparT brake fluid or an equivalent from a tightly sealed container. Brake fluid must
conform to DOT 3 specifications. Do not use petroleum-based fluid because seal damage in the brake sys-
tem will result.
CAUTION: Brake fluid will damage painted surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled on any painted surfaces, wash
it off immediately with water.
CAUTION: Never use gasoline, kerosene, alcohol, motor oil, transmission fluid, or any fluid containing min-
eral oil to clean system components. These fluids damage rubber cups and seals.
CAUTION: During service procedures, grease or any other foreign material must be kept off the caliper
assembly, brake linings, brake rotor and external surfaces of the hub.
CAUTION: Disc brake calipers are made of aluminum. They are anodized and appear black in color. When
handling the calipers or brake rotors, be careful to avoid damaging them, and avoid scratching or nicking
the brake pad lining.
CAUTION: Anytime the battery has been disconnected and is reconnected it is important that this be per-
formed properly. The vehicle may be equipped with systems that require special calibration processes.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
STANDARD PROCEDURE
BASE BRAKE BLEEDING
CAUTION: Before removing the master cylinder cover, wipe it clean to prevent dirt and other foreign matter
from dropping into the master cylinder.
CAUTION: Use only MoparT brake fluid or an equivalent from a fresh, tightly sealed container. Brake fluid
must conform to DOT 3 specifications.
NOTE: For bleeding the antilock brake hydraulic system, (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
NOTE: Do not pump the brake pedal at any time while having a bleeder screw open during the bleeding
process. This will only increase the amount of air in the system and make additional bleeding necessary.
NOTE: Do not allow the master cylinder reservoir to run out of brake fluid while bleeding the system. An
empty reservoir will allow additional air into the brake system. Check the fluid level frequently and add fluid
as needed.
The following wheel circuit sequence for bleeding the brake hydraulic system should be used to ensure adequate
removal of all trapped air from the brake hydraulic system.
Right rear wheel
Left rear wheel
Right front wheel
Left front wheel
NOTE: Pressure bleeding is highly recommended to bleed this brake system to ensure all air is removed
from system. Manual bleeding may also be used, but additional time is needed to remove all air from sys-
tem.
The base brake system can be bled using the pressure method or the manual method. Both methods are presented
in this text.
PRESSURE BLEEDING METHOD

NOTE: Follow pressure bleeder manufacturers instructions for use of pressure bleeding equipment.
1. Remove filler cap from the top of fluid reservoir (2)

on master cylinder.
2. Install Adapter (1), Special Tool 6921, in the caps
place on the reservoir (2).
3. Attach Bleeder Tank, Special Tool C-3496-B, or
equivalent, to Adapter 6921 (1). Pressurize the sys-
tem following the pressure bleeder manufacturers
instructions.
NOTE: To ensure all air is bled from the ICU or

junction block in a timely manner, it is recom-
mended to raise the rear of the vehicle approxi-
mately 5 higher than the front or approximately
1012 inches as measured at the rear bumper (1).
4. Raise and support vehicle placing rear of vehicle

approximately 5 higher than the front or if mea-
sured at the rear bumper (1), approximately 1012
inches above level. It will be necessary to add
extra support stands under vehicle to support this
angle.
5. If installed, remove rubber dust caps from all four

bleeder screws on calipers.
6. Starting at the first wheel circuit as listed earlier,
attach a clear hose (1) to the bleeder screw at that
wheels brake caliper and feed the other end of
hose into a clear jar (2) containing enough fresh
brake fluid to submerge the end of the hose.
CAUTION: Open the bleeder screw at least one full

turn when instructed. Some air may be trapped in
the brake lines or valves far upstream, as far as
ten feet or more from the bleeder screw. If the
bleeder screw is not opened sufficiently, fluid flow
is restricted causing a slow, weak fluid discharge.
This will NOT get all the air out. Therefore, it is
essential to open the bleeder screw at least one
full turn to allow a fast, large volume discharge of
brake fluid.
7. Open bleeder screw at least one full turn or more to obtain an adequate flow of brake fluid.
8. After 4 to 8 ounces of brake fluid has been bled through the brake hydraulic circuit, and an air-free flow (no
bubbles) is maintained in the clear plastic hose (1) and jar (2), close the bleeder screw.
9. Bleed the remaining wheel circuits in the same manner until all air is removed from the brake hydraulic system.
10. Check brake pedal travel. If pedal travel is excessive or has not improved, some air may still be trapped in the
hydraulic system. Rebleed the brake system as necessary.
11. If equipped with antilock brakes, the hydraulic control unit may need to be bled, then rebleed base brakes.
(Refer to 5 - BRAKES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
12. Reinstall all 4 bleeder screw dust caps.
13. Test drive vehicle to ensure brakes are operating properly and pedal feel is correct.
MANUAL BLEEDING METHOD

NOTE: To bleed the base brake system manually, an assistants help is required.


angle.
2. Remove rubber duct caps from all 4 bleeder

screws.
3. Attach a clear hose (1) to the bleeder screw at one
wheel and feed the other end of the hose into a
clear jar (2) containing fresh brake fluid.
4. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal three or
four times and hold it down before the bleeder
screw is opened.

full turn to allow a fast, large volume discharge of brake fluid.
5. While the pedal is being held down, open the bleeder screw at least 1 full turn. When the bleeder screw opens
the brake pedal will drop all the way to the floor. Continue to hold the pedal all the way down.
6. Once the brake pedal has dropped, close the bleeder screw. The pedal can then be released.
7. Repeat steps One through Five until all trapped air is removed from that wheel circuit (usually four or five times).
This should pass a sufficient amount of fluid to expel all the trapped air from the brakes hydraulic system. Be
sure to monitor brake fluid level in master cylinder fluid reservoir making sure it stays at a proper level. This will
ensure air does not reenter brake hydraulic system through master cylinder.
NOTE: Monitor the brake fluid level in the fluid reservoir periodically to make sure it does not go too low.
This will ensure that air does not reenter the brake hydraulic system.
8. Bleed the remaining wheel circuits in the same manner until all air is removed from the brake hydraulic system.
9. Check brake pedal travel. If pedal travel is excessive or has not improved, some air may still be trapped in the
hydraulic system. Rebleed the brake system as necessary.
10. If equipped with antilock brakes, the hydraulic control unit may need to be bled, then rebleed base brakes.
(Refer to 5 - BRAKES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
11. Reinstall all 4 bleeder screw dust caps.
BASE BRAKE BLEEDING - SRT8

Use the following procedure to bleed the rear brake calipers of this vehicle. The front brake calipers may be bled
using the same procedure as the standard model.
CAUTION: Before removing the master cylinder cover, wipe it clean to prevent dirt and other foreign matter
from dropping into the master cylinder.
CAUTION: Use only MoparT brake fluid or an equivalent from a fresh, tightly sealed container. Brake fluid
must conform to DOT 3 specifications.
NOTE: For bleeding the antilock brake hydraulic system, (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
NOTE: Do not pump the brake pedal at any time while having a bleeder screw open during the bleeding
process. This will only increase the amount of air in the system and make additional bleeding necessary.
NOTE: Do not allow the master cylinder reservoir to run out of brake fluid while bleeding the system. An
empty reservoir will allow additional air into the brake system. Check the fluid level frequently and add fluid
as needed.
NOTE: Pressure bleeding is highly recommended to bleed this brake system to ensure all air is removed
from system. Manual bleeding may also be used, but additional time is needed to remove all air from sys-
tem.
Although it is recommended that the base brake system be bled using the pressure method, the manual method
can also be performed. Both methods are presented in this text.
PRESSURE BLEEDING METHOD

NOTE: Follow pressure bleeder manufacturers instructions for use of pressure bleeding equipment.
1. Remove filler cap from the top of fluid reservoir (2)

on master cylinder.
2. Install Adapter (1), Special Tool 6921, in the caps
place on the reservoir (2).
3. Attach Bleeder Tank, Special Tool C-3496-B, or
equivalent, to Adapter 6921 (1). Pressurize the sys-
tem following the pressure bleeder manufacturers
instructions.


angle.
NOTE: The following wheel circuit sequence for bleeding the brake hydraulic system should be used to
ensure adequate removal of all trapped air from the brake hydraulic system.
Right rear wheel
Left rear wheel
Right front wheel
Left front wheel
REAR BRAKES
1. If installed, remove rubber dust caps from both

bleeder screws on each caliper.
2. Starting at the first wheel circuit that needs to be
bled (See list in above note), attach a clear hose
(3) to the inboard bleeder screw (2) at that wheels
brake caliper and feed the other end of hose into a
clear jar (4) containing enough fresh brake fluid to
submerge the end of the hose.

brake fluid.
3. Open inboard bleeder screw (2) at least one full turn or more to obtain an adequate flow of brake fluid.
bubbles) is maintained in the clear plastic hose (3) and jar (4), close the bleeder screw (2).
5. Remove clear hose and install bleeder screw dust cap.
6. Attach a clear hose (5) to the outboard bleeder
screw (1) at that same wheels brake caliper and
feed the other end of hose into a clear jar (4) con-
taining enough fresh brake fluid to submerge the
end of the hose.

brake fluid.
7. Open outboard bleeder screw (1) at least one full

turn or more to obtain an adequate flow of brake
fluid.
bubbles) is maintained in the clear plastic hose (5) and jar (4), close the bleeder screw (1).
10. Bleed opposite rear brake wheel circuits as necessary in the same manner until all air is removed from the
brake hydraulic system, then proceed to the front brakes.
5 - 10 BRAKES - BASE LX
FRONT BRAKES
1. If installed, remove rubber dust cap from bleeder

screw on each front brake caliper.
(1) to the bleeder screw at that wheels brake cali-
per and feed the other end of hose into a clear jar
(2) containing enough fresh brake fluid to sub-
merge the end of the hose.

full turn to allow a fast, large volume discharge of brake fluid.
3. Open bleeder screw at least one full turn or more to obtain an adequate flow of brake fluid.
bubbles) is maintained in the clear plastic hose (1) and jar (2), close the bleeder screw.
5. Install bleeder screw dust cap.
6. Bleed opposite front brake wheel circuit as necessary in the same manner until all air is removed from the brake
hydraulic system.
5. If equipped with antilock brakes, the hydraulic control unit may need to be bled, then rebleed base brakes. (Refer
to 5 - BRAKES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
6. Once all brakes are bled, check brake pedal travel. If pedal travel is excessive or has not improved, some air
may still be trapped in the hydraulic system. Rebleed the brake system as necessary.
MANUAL BLEEDING METHOD

NOTE: To bleed the base brake system manually, an assistants help is required.


angle.
LX BRAKES - BASE 5 - 11
NOTE: The following wheel circuit sequence for bleeding the brake hydraulic system should be used to
ensure adequate removal of all trapped air from the brake hydraulic system.
Right rear wheel
Left rear wheel
Right front wheel
Left front wheel
REAR BRAKES
1. If installed, remove rubber dust caps from both
bleeder screws on each caliper.
(3) to the inboard bleeder screw (2) at that wheels
brake caliper and feed the other end of hose into a
clear jar (4) containing enough fresh brake fluid to
submerge the end of the hose.
four times, then hold it down before the bleeder
screw is opened.

essential to open the bleeder screw at least one full turn to allow a fast, large volume discharge of brake
fluid.
4. While the pedal is being held down, open the inboard bleeder screw (2) at least one full turn. When the bleeder
screw opens the brake pedal will drop all the way to the floor. Continue to hold the pedal all the way down.
6. Repeat the above three steps until all trapped air is removed from that wheel circuit (usually four or five times).
sure to monitor brake fluid level in master cylinder fluid reservoir making sure it stays at a proper level.
This will ensure air does not reenter brake hydraulic system through master cylinder.

8. Attach a clear hose (5) to the outboard bleeder

screw (1) at that same wheels brake caliper and
feed the other end of hose into a clear jar (4) con-
taining enough fresh brake fluid to submerge the
end of the hose.
four times, then hold it down before the bleeder
screw is opened.

brake fluid.
10. While the pedal is being held down, open the outboard bleeder screw (2) at least one full turn. When the
bleeder screw opens the brake pedal will drop all the way to the floor. Continue to hold the pedal all the way
down.
12. Repeat the above three steps until all trapped air is removed from that wheel circuit (usually four or five times).
sure to monitor brake fluid level in master cylinder fluid reservoir making sure it stays at a proper level.
This will ensure air does not reenter brake hydraulic system through master cylinder.
14. Bleed opposite rear brake wheel circuits as necessary in the same manner until all air is removed from the
brake hydraulic system, then proceed to the front brakes.
FRONT BRAKES
1. If installed, remove rubber dust cap from bleeder
screw on each front brake caliper.
(1) to the bleeder screw at one wheel and feed the
other end of the hose into a clear jar (2) containing
fresh brake fluid.
four times and hold it down before the bleeder
screw is opened.

is restricted causing a slow, weak fluid discharge. This will NOT get all the air out. Therefore, it is essential
to open the bleeder screw at least one full turn to allow a fast, large volume discharge of brake fluid.
4. While the pedal is being held down, open the bleeder screw at least one full turn. When the bleeder screw opens
the brake pedal will drop all the way to the floor. Continue to hold the pedal all the way down.
6. Repeat steps One through Five until all trapped air is removed from that wheel circuit (usually four or five times).
sure to monitor brake fluid level in master cylinder fluid reservoir making sure it stays at a proper level. This will
ensure air does not reenter brake hydraulic system through master cylinder.
7. Install bleeder screw dust cap.

8. Bleed opposite front brake wheel circuit as necessary in the same manner until all air is removed from the brake
hydraulic system.
2. If equipped with antilock brakes, the hydraulic control unit may need to be bled, then rebleed base brakes. (Refer
3. Once all brakes are bled, check brake pedal travel. If pedal travel is excessive or has not improved, some air
may still be trapped in the hydraulic system. Rebleed the brake system as necessary.
SPECIFICATIONS
BRAKE FASTENER TORQUE

ABS ICU Mounting Bolts To Bracket 11 8 97
ABS ABM-To-HCU Mounting Screws 2 17
ABS Wheel Speed Sensor Head Mounting Screw - Front 11 8 97
ABS Wheel Speed Sensor Head Mounting Screw - Rear 11 8 97
Adjustable Pedal Position Sensor Mounting Screws 7.5 5.5 66
Brake Pedal Mounting Nuts 25 18 221
Brake Tube Nuts 20 15 177
Brake Hose-to-Front knuckle Bracket Screw 11 8 97
Brake Hose Caliper Banjo Bolt 50 37
Brake Hose Caliper Banjo Bolt - SRT8 33 24 __
Disc Brake Caliper Adapter Mounting Bolts - Front 95 70
Disc Brake Caliper Adapter Mounting Bolts - Rear 115 85
Disc Brake Caliper Guide Pin Bolts - Front 60 44
Disc Brake Caliper Guide Pin Bolts - Rear 31 23 275
Disc Brake Caliper Mounting Bolts - Front - SRT8 190 140
Disc Brake Caliper Mounting Bolts - Rear - SRT8 130 96
Disc Brake Caliper Bleeder Screw 11 8 97
Master Cylinder Mounting Nuts - MK25 25 18 221
Master Cylinder Mounting Nuts - MK25E 15 11 133
Power Brake Booster Mounting Nuts 25 18 221
Parking Brake Cable Knuckle Mounting Screw 8 6 71
Parking Brake Lever (Pedal) Mounting Bolt And Nuts 26 19 230
Wheel Mounting (Lug) Nuts 150 110
SPECIAL TOOLS
BASE BRAKE SYSTEM
Adapter, Master Cylinder Pressure Bleed Cap 6921 Installer, Dust Boot 9315
Adapters, Master Cylinder 9748

Tubes, Master Cylinder Bleed 8358
Adapters, Master Cylinder 8822 Dial Indicator C-3339A
Handle, Universal C4171

Installer, Dust Boot 9314
SWITCH-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS
DESCRIPTION
The adjustable pedals switch is located on the left
side trim of the drivers seat cushion. Fore and Aft
movement of the paddle-type switch allows front-to-
rear travel of the adjustable pedals, up to approxi-
mately 76 mm (3 inches) total movement. Pushing the
paddle forward moves the peddles away from the
driver and vice-versa. Movement stops when the
switch is released.
The switch actuates the electric motor-driven adjust-
able pedals mechanism through the memory seat
module (MSM). MSM logic prevents pedal adjustment
while the speed control is set and when the transmis-
sion is in Reverse.
REMOVAL
1. Move drivers seat to full-forward, full-upward position.
2. Disconnect battery negative cable from battery post and isolate.
3. Remove seat belt shield from drivers seat cushion left side trim.
4. Remove three screws fastening seat cushion side trim in place.
5. Lift side trim from seat and utilizing slack in seat belt, turn trim over.
6. Disconnect wiring connector (2) from adjustable
pedals switch (3).
7. Remove two mounting screws (1) and remove
switch (3).
INSTALLATION
1. Position switch (3) connector-side-down on the
inside of the drivers seat cushion side trim.
2. Install two screws (1) fastening switch in place.
3. Connect wiring connector (2) to adjustable pedals
switch (3).
4. Position side trim on drivers seat cushion left side
and install three screws fastening side trim in
place.
5. Install seat belt shield on drivers seat cushion left
side trim.
6. Connect negative battery cable to battery post.
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
7. Check operation of adjustable pedals.
8. If vehicle is equipped with memory seats, the sys-
tem will need to be initialized. Refer to appropriate
diagnostic information.
SENSOR - BRAKE FLUID LEVEL

REMOVAL
The brake fluid level sensor (2) is an integral part of
the master cylinder fluid reservoir (1). (Refer to 5 -
BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/FLUID RESER-
VOIR - REMOVAL)
INSTALLATION
The brake fluid level sensor (2) is an integral part of
the master cylinder fluid reservoir (1). (Refer to 5 -
BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/FLUID RESER-
VOIR - INSTALLATION)
HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL
DESCRIPTION
DISC BRAKES
Four-wheel disc brakes are standard on this vehicle. There are two four-wheel disc brake systems available, a stan-
dard and a premium. The standard disc brake system is referred to as Seventeen-Inch. The premium disc brake
system is referred to as Eighteen-Inch.
Seventeen-inch four-wheel disc brakes (so called
because they are designed to fit inside 17-inch
wheels) are standard on rear-wheel drive models with
V6 engines. They feature single-piston aluminum cali-
pers (2) and vented rotors (1) in the front and single-
piston aluminum calipers (4) with solid rotors (3) in the
rear.
Eighteen-inch four-wheel disc brakes (so called

because they are designed to fit inside 18-inch
wheels) are standard on Chrysler 300 Hemi C and all
international models, and optional on other models.
They feature twin-piston aluminum calipers (1) and
vented rotors (2) in the front and single-piston alumi-
num calipers (4) with vented rotors (3) in the rear.
Although the rear calipers appear the same as the
17-inch system, the rear calipers used with this sys-
tem feature a wider jaw to compensate for the wider,
vented brake rotors used.
Although the twin-piston caliper used is the same,
Rear-Wheel-Drive (RWD) models mount the caliper to
the rear (trailing end) of the knuckle while All-Wheel-
Drive (AWD) models mount the caliper to the front
(leading end) of the knuckle.
Vehicles equipped with the Police Package have heavy-duty brakes. Special brake linings are used front and rear.
The front brake calipers and rotors are the same as the premium Eighteen-inch brakes, but the rear brakes are
somewhat different. The rear brake caliper is similar, using the same diameter piston and seals, but is larger to
accommodate a larger brake rotor. The rear brake rotor is a thicker (4 mm thicker than premium), larger diameter
(350 mm) vented unit. The hat section of the rotor remains the same as premium to allow use of the standard
parking brake system. The rear brake caliper adapter (anchor) is different to allow for the larger brake rotor. All
components are serviced the same as premium brakes.
All calipers are aluminum construction and are the low-drag type. New-technology caliper construction allows min-
imal drag of the pads on the discs with low clearance to the rotors to maintain maximum pedal feel and respon-
siveness.
All calipers are anodized, giving them an off-black appearance. This coating offers corrosion protection and a long-
term neat appearance.
Phenolic pistons are used in all calipers. The premium twin caliper pistons have stainless steel caps for protection
against damage due to contact with the brake pads.
All brake rotors are fully coated with Geomet, a water-soluble, environmental friendly corrosion preventive. Both
the friction surfaces and the vents are coated. During initial brake applications of a new rotor, the brake pads scrub
the coating off the friction surfaces, ensuring that the remainder will be rust free. Coating the vents also ensures that
there will not be a loss of heat capacity over time.
DISC BRAKES - SRT8

SRT8 models utilize four-wheel disc brakes. All brake
calipers (2) are four-piston opposed fixed design man-
ufactured by Brembo. While identical in all other ways,
Chrysler SRT8 calipers are silver in color while Dodge
SRT8 calipers are red.
All brake rotors (3) are the internal vented type. There
are no dust shields behind the front brake rotors.
Each front brake caliper features four 42 mm pistons, two in each outer half of the caliper. The two outer halves of
this caliper connect hydraulically using internal passageways. These calipers are not serviceable. Do not attempt
disassembly.
Each rear brake caliper features four pistons also, two in each half of the caliper. Each half has one 28 mm and one
32 mm piston. When mounted, the smaller size (28 mm) piston is located at the top while the larger size (32 mm)
piston is located at the bottom. The two halves of the caliper are connected hydraulically by means of an external
brake tube located on the bottom of the caliper assembly. Each caliper half has its own bleeder screw at the top
and must be bled individually when bleeding is required. These calipers are not serviceable. Do not attempt disas-
sembly.
All SRT8 calipers mount directly to the knuckle. They do not use brake caliper adapters.
The SRT8 rear brake rotors have integrated parking brake drums like the standard rear disc brake system.
PADS - FRONT BRAKE

REMOVAL
NOTE: Before proceeding, (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - WARNING) (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - CAUTION).
NOTE: Perform steps 2 through 6 on each side of the vehicle.

wheel assembly (1).
ally be accomplished before guide pin bolts are removed by grasping rear of caliper and pulling outward
3. Remove Lower caliper guide pin bolt. To do so,

hold the guide pin (3) stationary while turning bolt
(1).
4. Rotate caliper upward (1), exposing brake pads (2

and 5). Use care not to overextend brake hose
when doing this or damage may occur.
5. Remove inboard (2) and outboard (5) brake pads
from caliper adapter (4).
6. If necessary, remove anti-rattle clips (3) from upper
and lower abutments of adapter (4).
CLEANING
occupational Safety And Health Administration (OSHA) and the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) for
INSPECTION
Visually inspect brake pads for uneven lining wear. Also inspect for excessive lining deterioration. Check the clear-
ance between the tips of the wear indicators (if equipped) on the pads and the brake rotors.
If a visual inspection does not adequately determine the condition of the lining, remove the disc brake pads from the
calipers and perform a physical check.
NOTE: It is important to inspect both front and rear brake pads during the same inspection. Typically, front
and rear brake pads wear out at the same time.
When servicing, replace both disc brake pads (inboard and outboard) for each caliper. It is necessary to replace the
pads on the opposite side of the vehicle as well as the pads failing inspection.
If the brake pads do not require replacement, be sure to reinstall the brake pads in the original position they were
removed from.
INSTALLATION
1. Completely retract caliper piston(s) back into bore(s) of caliper. To do so:

a. Remove fluid reservoir cap.
b. Use hand pressure or a C-clamp may be used to retract piston, first placing a wood block over piston(s)
before installing C-clamp to avoid damaging piston(s).
c. Install fluid reservoir cap.
2. If removed, attach anti-rattle clips (3) to upper and

lower abutments of adapter (4).
3. Install NEW inboard (2) and outboard (5) brake
pads on caliper adapter (4). NEW Inboard and out-
board pads are interchangeable.
4. Push caliper guide pins into caliper adapter to clear
caliper mounting bosses when installing.
5. Rotate caliper downward, aligning upper mounting
boss with lower guide pin.
6. Install Upper caliper guide pin bolt (1). While hold-

ing guide pin (3) stationary tighten bolt to 60 Nm

8. Lower vehicle.
9. Pump brake pedal several times to set pads to cal-
iper and brake rotor.
10. Check and adjust brake fluid level in reservoir (1).

(Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANI-
CAL/FLUID - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
CAUTION: When NEW brake pads have been

installed, keep in mind that braking effectiveness
might be somewhat reduced during the first brake
applications following installation.
11. Road test vehicle making several stops to wear off

any foreign material on brakes and to seat brake
shoes.
PADS - REAR BRAKE

REMOVAL

wheel assembly (1).
ally be accomplished before guide pin bolts are removed by grasping rear of caliper and pulling outward
3. Remove Upper caliper guide pin bolt (1). To do so,

hold the guide pin (3) stationary while turning bolt.
4. Rotate caliper downward (5), exposing brake pads

(2 and 3). Use care not to overextend brake
hose when doing this or damage may occur.
5. Remove inboard (2) and outboard (3) brake pads
from caliper adapter (4).
6. If necessary, remove anti-rattle clips (1) from upper
and lower abutments of adapter (4).
CLEANING
INSPECTION
removed from.
INSTALLATION
1. Completely retract caliper piston back into bore of caliper. To do so:

a. Remove fluid reservoir cap.
b. Use hand pressure or a C-clamp may be used to retract piston, first placing a wood block over piston before
installing C-clamp to avoid damaging piston.
c. Install fluid reservoir cap.
2. If removed, attach anti-rattle clips (1) to upper and

lower abutments of adapter (4).
3. Install NEW inboard (2) and outboard (3) brake
pads on caliper adapter (4). NEW Inboard and out-
board pads are interchangeable.
4. Push caliper guide pins into caliper adapter to clear
caliper mounting bosses when installing.
5. Rotate caliper upward, aligning upper mounting
boss with upper guide pin.
6. Install Upper caliper guide pin bolt (1). While hold-

ing guide pin (3) stationary tighten bolt to 31 Nm

8. Lower vehicle.
9. Pump brake pedal several times to set pads to cal-
iper and brake rotor.

CAUTION: When NEW brake pads have been


shoes.
PADS - FRONT/REAR BRAKE - SRT8

STANDARD PROCEDURE
BRAKE PAD BURNISHING
CAUTION: After installing NEW brake pads, keep in mind that braking effectiveness might be somewhat
reduced during the first brake applications.
When NEW brake pads are installed on a vehicle, this procedure must be used to correctly burnish (seat) the brake
linings to the brake rotor discs.
1. Accelerate the vehicle to a steady speed of about 40 mph (65 km/h).
2. Using light brake pedal pressure, slow the vehicle from 40 mph to 0 mph in approximately 6 seconds.
3. Accelerate back up to 40 mph for approximately one minute to allow the brakes to cool down.
4. Repeat this procedure 15 to 20 times to correctly seat the brake lining material.
REMOVAL
NOTE: Review all Warnings and Cautions. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - WARNING)
NOTE: Perform Step 2 through Step 8 on each side of vehicle to complete pad set removal.

wheel assembly (1).
3. Using hammer (4) and pin punch (3) on outboard

end, tap lower brake pad support pin (2) out of cal-
iper (1).
4. Remove brake pad spring clip (2) out from under

the upper support pin (1) still in caliper.
5. Using pin punch (3) and hammer (4), remove

upper brake pad support pin (2) in same manner
used on lower support pin.
CAUTION: When pushing pistons back into caliper bores, if hand pressure is not sufficient, use only a trim
stick as shown or other suitable soft tool to do so. Never use a screwdriver or other metal pry bar due to
potential damage to braking surface of rotor or pads.
6. Using hand pressure, pull pads back to seat caliper

pistons into bores if possible. If not possible, per-
form the following to do this correctly without dam-
aging the caliper, pistons, dust boots or brake rotor
disc.
a. Place trim stick (3) between inboard brake pad
and outer edge of rotor (1).
b. Using trim stick (3), apply pressure against the
inboard brake pad until both pistons are com-
pletely bottomed in bores of inboard caliper
half. Leave trim stick in place to hold pistons in
place.
c. Place second trim stick between outboard
brake pad and rotor, then repeat above step on
outboard pad and pistons.
7. Remove inboard brake pad (2) through opening in

caliper (1). Remove outboard brake pad in same
manner.
8. Once brake pads are removed from caliper (1),

inspect all four caliper pistons (3) and dust boots
(2) for evidence of brake fluid leakage. Also inspect
dust boots on all caliper pistons for any cuts, tears
or heat cracks and brake pad supports (4) (if
equipped) for excess wear or damage. If caliper
fails inspection, it should be replaced.
CLEANING
INSPECTION
remove from.
INSTALLATION
NOTE: Perform Step 1 through Step 10 on each side of vehicle to complete pad set installation before pro-
ceeding with Step 11.
1. Make sure all caliper pistons are fully seated (bottomed) in bores.
2. Slide NEW inboard (2) and outboard brake pads

into opening (1) in disc brake caliper. If installing
rear brake pads, make sure beveled end of
each pad lining is directed against the direction
the rotor is rotating in when vehicle is moving
forward, in other words, the rear pads need to
have beveled end facing upward.
3. From inboard side, slide upper brake pad support

pin (2) through caliper (3) and upper holes in both
brake pads (1). Ensure that small end of support
pin is in hole (4) in outboard half of caliper.
4. Install upper end of brake pad spring clip (2) under

upper brake pad support pin (1).
5. Press on lower end of spring clip (5) until it touches

brake rotor.
6. Slide lower brake pad support pin (2) through cali-
per (1) and lower holes in both brake pads (3) in
the same manner the upper pin was installed.
Ensure small end of support pin is in hole (4) in
outboard half of caliper.
7. Release the spring clip allowing it to engage lower
support pin.
8. From inboard side, seat upper and lower support

pins (4) into caliper (3) using pin punch (1) and
hammer (2). Support pins must be driven into cali-
per until support pin retaining rings are locked into
place.
9. Once support pins are fully installed into caliper,

inspect assembled caliper to make sure spring clip
(2) is centered in opening (1) of caliper, correctly
engaging upper and lower support pins, and is
resting against both brake pads (3).

11. Lower vehicle.
12. Pump brake pedal several times to set pads to
caliper and brake rotor.

CAUTION: When NEW brake pads have been installed, keep in mind that braking effectiveness might be
somewhat reduced during the first brake applications following installation.
NOTE: When NEW brake pads are installed, they must be burnished (seated) to the rotor. This must be done
to ensure the proper performance of the replacement brake pads.
14. Road test vehicle making several stops to wear off any foreign material on brakes and to seat brake pad lin-
ings. NEW brake pads need to be burnished properly. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/
BRAKE PADS/SHOES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
CALIPER - FRONT SINGLE PISTON DISC BRAKE

REMOVAL

from battery post.
2. Using a brake pedal holding tool, depress brake
pedal past its first inch of travel and hold it in this
position. Holding pedal in this position will isolate
master cylinder from hydraulic brake system and
will not allow brake fluid to drain out of brake fluid
reservoir while brake lines are open.
PROCEDURE)

wheel assembly (1).
5. Remove banjo bolt (6) connecting flexible brake

hose (1) to caliper (5). There are two sealing wash-
ers (7) (one one each side of hose fitting) that will
come off when bolt is removed. Discard these
washers; install NEW washers on installation.
6. While holding guide pins from turning, remove cal-

iper guide pin bolts (2).
7. Remove brake caliper (1) from brake adapter (3)
and pads.
DISASSEMBLY
NOTE: Before disassembling brake caliper, clean and inspect it. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/ME-
CHANICAL/DISC BRAKE CALIPER - CLEANING) (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/DISC
BRAKE CALIPER - INSPECTION)
WARNING: Under no condition should high pressure air ever be used to remove a piston from a caliper
bore. Personal injury could result from such a practice.
CAUTION: Do not use excessive force when clamping caliper in vise. Excessive vise pressure will cause
bore distortion.
1. Drain brake fluid from caliper.

2. Mount caliper in a vise equipped with protective

jaws.
3. Place a wooden block (2) (padded with approxi-
mately one-inch thickness of shop towels) in front
of caliper (1) piston as shown. Padded block
should be sized to allow piston to push out of bore
far enough to be removed by hand after being
loosened by air pressure, yet large enough to keep
piston from coming completely out. This will cush-
ion and protect caliper piston during removal.
WARNING: Do not place face or hands near caliper

and piston if using compressed air pressure to
remove piston. Do not use high pressure.
4. Apply low pressure compressed air to caliper fluid

inlet in short spurts to ease piston out of bore.
5. Remove piston from caliper (1).
CAUTION: When working on disc brake caliper,

always use care and suitable tools to avoid dam-
aging the aluminum housing.
6. Using a suitable tool (1), carefully remove dust

boot (2) and discard it.
CAUTION: Do not use a screw driver or other

metal tool for seal removal. Using such tools can
scratch bore or leave burrs on seal groove edges.
7. Using a soft tool such as a plastic trim stick (2),

work piston seal (1) out of its groove in caliper pis-
ton bore. Discard used seal.
8. Remove caliper bleeder screw (1) from caliper

housing (2).
9. Clean piston bore and drilled passage ways with
alcohol or a suitable solvent. Wipe it dry using only
a lint-free cloth.
10. Inspect both piston and bore for scoring or pitting.
NOTE: It is not recommended to hone caliper

bore. The anodized coating would be
compromised.
CLEANING
To clean or flush the internal passages of the brake caliper, use fresh brake fluid or MoparT Non-Chlorinated Brake
Parts Cleaner. Never use gasoline, kerosene, alcohol, oil, transmission fluid or any fluid containing mineral oil to
clean the caliper. These fluids will damage rubber cups and seals.
INSPECTION
Inspect the disc brake caliper for the following:
Cracked or damaged housing
Brake fluid leaks in and around boot area
Ruptures, brittleness or damage to the piston dust boot
If caliper fails inspection, disassemble and recondition caliper, replacing the seals and dust boots or replace caliper.
ASSEMBLY
CAUTION: Dirt, oil, and solvents can damage caliper seals. Ensure assembly area is clean and dry.
NOTE: Always use new, clean MoparT DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid or equivalent when assembling
brake caliper.
NOTE: Never use used or old piston seals or boots for reassembly.
1. Lubricate caliper piston, piston seal (1) and piston

bore (2) with clean, fresh brake fluid.
2. Install NEW piston seal (1) in groove of caliper
bore (2). Seal should be started at one area of
groove and gently worked around and into the
groove using only your clean fingers to seat it.
3. Install NEW dust boot (1) on piston (2) and work

boot lip into groove at top of piston. Stretch boot
downward, straightening boot folds, then move
boot back upward as necessary until folds snap
uniformly into place.
4. Install piston (1) into caliper piston (2) bore, press-

ing piston down to bottom of bore using hand-pres-
sure. Using a piece of wood or wooden hammer
handle may also suffice as long as piston and boot
damage can be avoided. The dust boot will not
seat at this time. Refer to following step.
5. Seat dust boot (3) in caliper counterbore using

Installer (2), Special Tool 9315, with Handle (1),
Special Tool C-4171. Install dust boot until it bot-
toms. Do not over-seat dust boot or damage will
occur.
6. Install bleeder screw in correct threaded hole. Cal-

iper housing is not side-specific, so it is important
to install bleeder screw in threaded hole that will be
uppermost once caliper is installed on vehicle.
Tighten bleeder screw to 15 Nm (125 in. lbs.)
torque.
7. Install caliper on vehicle. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HY-
DRAULIC/MECHANICAL/DISC BRAKE CALIPER -
INSTALLATION)
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Always inspect brake pads before installing disc brake caliper and replace as necessary. (Refer
to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/BRAKE PADS/SHOES - INSPECTION)
1. Completely retract caliper piston back into bore of caliper. Use hand pressure or a C-clamp may be used to
retract piston, first placing a wood block over piston before installing C-clamp to avoid damaging piston.
CAUTION: Use care when installing caliper onto disc brake adapter to avoid damaging boots on caliper
guide pins.
2. Push caliper guide pins into caliper adapter to clear caliper mounting bosses when installing.
3. Slide caliper over brake pads and onto caliper

adapter (3).

crossthread caliper guide pin bolts (2) when they
are installed.
4. Align caliper mounting holes with guide pins, then

install guide pin bolts (2). While holding guide pins
from turning, tighten bolts to 60 Nm (44 ft. lbs.)
torque.
5. Install banjo bolt (6) attaching brake hose (1) to

caliper (5). Install NEW washers (7) on each side
of hose fitting as banjo bolt is placed through fit-
ting. Thread banjo bolt into caliper and tighten to

7. Lower vehicle.
8. Remove brake pedal holding tool.

It is important that this is performed properly. (Refer
to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM - STAN-
DARD PROCEDURE)
10. Bleed (1) base brake hydraulic system as neces-

sary. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - STANDARD PRO-
CEDURE)
shoes.
CALIPER - FRONT TWIN PISTON DISC BRAKE

REMOVAL
AWD

from battery post.
PROCEDURE)

wheel assembly (1).


and pads.
RWD

from battery post.
PROCEDURE)

wheel assembly (1).


and pads.
DISASSEMBLY
NOTE: Before disassembling the brake caliper, clean and inspect it. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/ME-
bore. Personal injury could result from such practice.
CAUTION: Do not use excessive force when

clamping caliper (2) in vise. Caliper housing is
made of aluminum. Excessive vise pressure will
cause bore distortion.
2. Mount caliper (2) in vise equipped with protective

jaws.
3. C-clamp (1) a block of wood (3) over one piston.
4. Take another block of wood and pad it with one-

inch thickness of shop towels. Padded block should
be sized to allow piston to push out of bore far
enough to be removed by hand after being loos-
ened by air pressure, yet large enough to keep pis-
ton from coming completely out.
5. Place the padded block of wood (1) in outboard
shoe side of caliper (2) in front of exposed piston
(3). This will cushion and protect caliper piston dur-
ing removal.

and piston if using compressed air to remove pis-
ton. Do not use high pressure.
WARNING: Never attempt to catch piston as it

leaves bore. This could result in personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not blow piston out of bore with sustained air pressure. This could result in a cracked piston.
Use only short spurts of air.
6. Apply short spurts of low pressure air with a rubber tipped blow gun through caliper brake hose port. Use only
enough air pressure to ease piston out of bore.
8. Remove C-clamp and block of wood.
9. C-clamp (1) the block of wood (3) over dust boot of
first piston removed. This will seal empty piston
bore.
10. Move padded piece of wood (1) in front of piston

(2) yet to be removed.
11. Remove second piston using same procedure with
short spurts of low pressure air.
12. Remove C-clamp and block of wood from caliper.
13. Remove piston dust boots (1) (over each bore)

with an appropriate pry tool (2). Use care not to
damage aluminum housing.
CAUTION: Use an appropriate tool (1) to remove

piston seals (2) to avoid scratching piston bore.
Do not use a screwdriver or other metal tool to
remove seals.

remove piston seals (2) from caliper bores.

housing (1).
alcohol or a suitable solvent. Wipe it dry using
only a lint-free cloth.

compromised.
CLEANING
INSPECTION
ASSEMBLY
NOTE: Always use new, clean MoparT DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid when assembling brake caliper.
NOTE: Never use old or used piston seals or boots for assembly.
1. Lubricate caliper pistons, piston seals (1) and pis-

ton bores (2) with clean, fresh brake fluid.
2. Install NEW piston seal (1) into groove of each cal-
iper piston bore (2).
NOTE: Make sure seal is fully seated and not

twisted in groove.
3. Install NEW boot (1) on each piston (2) and work

rearward straightening boot folds, then move boot
forward as necessary until folds snap uniformly into
place.
4. Install each piston (1), one at a time, into its caliper

piston (2) bore, pressing piston down to bottom of
bore using hand-pressure. Using a piece of wood
or wooden hammer handle may also suffice as
long as piston and boot damage is avoided.
CAUTION: When seating dust boots in following

step, use care not to over-install boots or damage
will occur. Each boot (2) will bottom in the coun-
terbore before the top of the boot reaches the sur-
face of the caliper. The boot will bottom with
approximately 2 mm (1/16 inch) (3) of boot still
showing above caliper housing.
5. Seat dust boots (3) in caliper counterbores using

Installer (2), Special Tool 9315, with Handle (1),
Special Tool C-4171. Install each dust boot until it
bottoms. Do not over-seat dust boot or damage will
occur.
6. Install caliper bleeder screw (2) in caliper housing

(1). Tighten bleeder screw to 15 Nm (125 in. lbs.)
torque.
INSTALLATION)
INSTALLATION
AWD
1. Completely retract caliper pistons back into bores of caliper. Use hand pressure or a C-clamp may also be used
to retract pistons, first placing a wood block over piston before installing C-clamp to avoid damaging piston.
guide pins.
3. Slide caliper (3) over brake pads and onto caliper
adapter (2).

are installed.

torque.


7. Lower vehicle.

DARD PROCEDURE)

CEDURE)
shoes.
RWD
to retract pistons, first placing a wood block over piston before installing C-clamp to avoid damaging piston.
guide pins.
adapter (3).

are installed.

torque.


7. Lower vehicle.

DARD PROCEDURE)

CEDURE)
shoes.
CALIPER - FRONT DISC BRAKE - SRT8

REMOVAL

from battery post.
PROCEDURE)

wheel assembly (1).

ers (2, 3) (one one each side of hose fitting) that
will come off when bolt is removed. Discard these
washers; use NEW washers upon installation.

half.

8. Remove caliper mounting bolts (1).

(3) and brake rotor (3).
10. If brake pads need to be removed from caliper,
CAL/BRAKE PADS/SHOES - REMOVAL).
NOTE: These calipers are not serviceable. Do not attempt disassembly.
INSTALLATION
to retract pistons, first placing a wood block or used brake pad (not to be reused) over pistons before installing
C-clamp to avoid damaging piston.
2. If brake pads need to be installed in caliper before installation, (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANI-
CAL/BRAKE PADS/SHOES - INSTALLATION).
3. Slide caliper with pads (2) over brake rotor (3) and
align with knuckle (8).

caliper (1). Install NEW washers (2, 3) on each
side of hose fitting as banjo bolt is placed through
banjo fitting. Thread banjo bolt into caliper and
tighten to 33 Nm (24 ft. lbs.) torque.

7. Lower vehicle.

DARD PROCEDURE)

CEDURE)
CAUTION: If NEW brake pads have been installed,

keep in mind that braking effectiveness might be
somewhat reduced during the first brake applica-
tions.

pads. If NEW brake pads are installed, they need
to be properly burnished. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/
HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/BRAKE PADS/
SHOES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
CALIPER - REAR DISC BRAKE

REMOVAL

from battery post.
PROCEDURE)

wheel assembly (1).


and pads.
DISASSEMBLY
NOTE: Before disassembling brake caliper, clean and inspect it. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/ME-
bore. Personal injury could result from such a practice.
CAUTION: Do not use excessive force when clamping caliper in vise. Excessive vise pressure will cause
bore distortion.

2. Mount caliper in a vise equipped with protective

jaws.
3. Place a wooden block (2) (padded with approxi-
mately one-inch thickness of shop towels) in front
of caliper (1) piston as shown. Padded block
should be sized to allow piston to push out of bore
far enough to be removed by hand after being
loosened by air pressure, yet large enough to keep
piston from coming completely out. This will cush-
ion and protect caliper piston during removal.

and piston if using compressed air pressure to
remove piston. Do not use high pressure.
4. Apply low pressure compressed air to caliper fluid

inlet in short spurts to ease piston out of bore.
CAUTION: When working on disc brake caliper,

always use care and suitable tools to avoid dam-
aging the aluminum housing.
6. Using a suitable tool (1), carefully remove dust

boot (2) and discard it.
CAUTION: Do not use a screw driver or other

metal tool for seal removal. Using such tools can
scratch bore or leave burrs on seal groove edges.

work piston seal (1) out of its groove in caliper pis-
ton bore. Discard used seal.

housing (2).
alcohol or a suitable solvent. Wipe it dry using only
a lint-free cloth.

compromised.
CLEANING
INSPECTION
ASSEMBLY
NOTE: Always use new, clean MoparT DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid or equivalent when assembling
brake caliper.
NOTE: Never use used or old piston seals or boots for reassembly.
1. Lubricate caliper piston, piston seal (1) and piston

bore (2) with clean, fresh brake fluid.
2. Install NEW piston seal (1) in groove of caliper
bore (2). Seal should be started at one area of
groove and gently worked around and into the
groove using only your clean fingers to seat it.
3. Install NEW dust boot (1) on piston (2) and work

downward, straightening boot folds, then move
boot back upward as necessary until folds snap
uniformly into place.
4. Install piston (1) into caliper piston (2) bore, press-

ing piston down to bottom of bore using hand-pres-
sure. Using a piece of wood or wooden hammer
handle may also suffice as long as piston and boot
damage can be avoided.
CAUTION: When installing dust boot in following

step, use care not to over-install boot or damage
will occur. The boot (3) will bottom in the counter-
bore before the top of the boot reaches the sur-
face of the caliper. The boot will bottom with
approximately 2 mm (1/16 inch) (2) of boot still
showing above caliper housing.
5. Seat dust boot (3) in caliper counterbore using

Installer, Special Tool 9314, with Handle, Special
Tool C-4171. Install dust boot until it bottoms. Do
not over-seat dust boot or damage will occur.
6. Install bleeder screw in correct threaded hole. Cal-

iper housing is not side-specific, so it is important
to install bleeder screw in threaded hole that will be
uppermost once caliper is installed on vehicle.
Tighten bleeder screw to 15 Nm (125 in. lbs.)
torque.
INSTALLATION)
INSTALLATION
1. Completely retract caliper piston back into bore of caliper. Use hand pressure or a C-clamp may be used to
retract piston, first placing a wood block over piston before installing C-clamp to avoid damaging piston.
guide pins.
adapter (3).

are installed.

torque.


7. Lower vehicle.

DARD PROCEDURE)

CEDURE)
shoes.
CALIPER - REAR DISC BRAKE - SRT8

REMOVAL

from battery post.
PROCEDURE)

wheel assembly (1).

ers (2, 3) (one one each side of hose fitting) that
will come off when bolt is removed. Discard these

half.



bolts (1).
and brake rotor.
11. If brake pads need to be removed from caliper,
CAL/BRAKE PADS/SHOES - REMOVAL).
NOTE: These calipers are not serviceable. Do not attempt disassembly.
INSTALLATION
to retract pistons, first placing a wood block or used brake pad (not to be reused) over piston before installing
C-clamp to avoid damaging piston.
2. If brake pads need to be installed in caliper before installation, (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANI-
CAL/BRAKE PADS/SHOES - INSTALLATION).

align with knuckle.

caliper (4). Install NEW washers (2, 3) on each
side of hose fitting as banjo bolt is placed through
banjo fitting. Thread banjo bolt into caliper and
tighten to 33 Nm (24 ft. lbs.) torque.

8. Lower vehicle.

STANDARD PROCEDURE)

CEDURE)
CAUTION: If NEW brake pads have been installed,

keep in mind that braking effectiveness might be
somewhat reduced during the first brake applica-
tions.
12. Road test vehicle making several stops to wear

brake pads. If NEW brake pads are installed, they
need to be properly burnished. (Refer to 5 -
BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/BRAKE
PADS/SHOES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
FLUID
BRAKE FLUID CONTAMINATION
Indications of fluid contamination are swollen or deteriorated rubber parts.
Swollen rubber parts indicate the presence of petroleum in the brake fluid.
To test for contamination, put a small amount of drained brake fluid in clear glass jar. If fluid separates into layers,
there is mineral oil or other fluid contamination of the brake fluid.
If brake fluid is contaminated, drain and thoroughly flush system. Replace master cylinder, proportioning valve, cal-
iper seals, wheel cylinder seals, Antilock Brake hydraulic unit and all hydraulic fluid hoses.
STANDARD PROCEDURE
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL CHECKING
Check master cylinder reservoir fluid level a minimum
of twice annually.
Fluid reservoirs (1) are marked with the words MAX
and MIN to indicate proper brake fluid fill level of the
master cylinder.
If necessary, add brake fluid to bring the level to the
bottom of the MAX mark on the side of the master cyl-
inder fluid reservoir (1).
Use only MoparT brake fluid or equivalent from a
sealed container. Brake fluid must conform to DOT 3
specifications (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/ME-
CHANICAL/FLUID - SPECIFICATIONS).
DO NOT use brake fluid with a lower boiling point, as brake failure could result during prolonged hard braking.
Use only brake fluid that was stored in a tightly-sealed container.
DO NOT use petroleum-based fluid because seal damage will result. Petroleum based fluids would be items such
as engine oil, transmission fluid, power steering fluid etc.
SPECIFICATIONS
BRAKE FLUID
The brake fluid used in this vehicle must conform to DOT 3 specifications and SAE J1703 standards. No other type
of brake fluid is recommended or approved for usage in the vehicle brake system. Use only MoparT Brake Fluid or
equivalent from a tightly sealed container.
CAUTION: Never use reclaimed brake fluid or fluid from an container which has been left open. An open
container of brake fluid will absorb moisture from the air and contaminate the fluid.
CAUTION: Never use any type of a petroleum-based fluid in the brake hydraulic system. Use of such type
fluids will result in seal damage of the vehicle brake hydraulic system causing a failure of the vehicle brake
system. Petroleum based fluids would be items such as engine oil, transmission fluid, power steering fluid,
etc.
RESERVOIR - MASTER CYLINDER FLUID

REMOVAL
1. Remove access panel (1) in cowl area to expose
master cylinder (2).
2. Thoroughly clean all surfaces of brake fluid reser-
voir and master cylinder. Use only MoparT Brake
Parts Cleaner or equivalent.
3. Disconnect wiring harness connector (4) from

brake fluid level sensor (2) in master cylinder brake
fluid reservoir (1).
4. Remove brake fluid reservoir cap (1). Using a

clean syringe or equivalent type tool, empty as
much brake fluid as possible from the reservoir.
CAUTION: When removing fluid reservoir from the

master cylinder, do not pry off using any type of
tool. This can damage the fluid reservoir or master
cylinder housing.
5. Remove screw (3) fastening fluid reservoir to mas-

ter cylinder housing.
6. Rock the brake fluid reservoir side-to-side while
pulling up to remove it from seal grommets in mas-
7. Remove two brake fluid reservoir seal grommets

(2) from master cylinder housing (1).
INSTALLATION
1. Install NEW brake fluid reservoir sealing grommets
(2) in master cylinder housing (1).
2. Lubricate reservoir mounting area with fresh clean

brake fluid. Place reservoir in position over sealing
grommets. Seat reservoir into sealing grommets
using a rocking motion while firmly pressing down
on fluid reservoir. Once installed, make sure fluid
reservoir is touching the top of both sealing grom-
mets (2) or reservoir is not properly installed.
3. Install fluid reservoir mounting screw (3). Tighten
screw to 28 Nm (250 in. lbs.) torque.
4. Connect wiring harness connector (4) to brake fluid

level sensor (2) mounted in brake fluid reservoir
(1).
5. Fill master cylinder fluid reservoir (1) with clean,

fresh MoparT Brake Fluid or equivalent.
6. Install access panel in cowl area.
WARNING: Be certain a firm brake pedal is

achieved prior to attempting vehicle operation. If a
firm brake pedal cannot be achieved, bleed entire
brake hydraulic system and check for leaks. (refer
to 5 - brakes - standard procedure)
7. Road test vehicle to ensure proper operation of

brakes.
JUNCTION BLOCK
DESCRIPTION
A junction block is used on vehicles that are not equipped with antilock brakes (ABS) allowing use of the same
brake tubes on all applications. The junction block is located in the engine compartment, in front of the right wheel
well. The junction block mounts in the same location as the ABS integrated control unit (ICU) does on vehicles with
ABS.
It has six threaded ports to which the brake tubes connect. Two are for the brake tubes coming from the master
cylinder. The remaining four ports are for the brake tubes going to each wheel brake assembly.
The junction block contains a proportioning valve. The proportioning valve is not serviced separately from the junc-
tion block. For more information on the proportioning valve, (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/
PROPORTIONING VALVE - DESCRIPTION)
OPERATION
The junction block distributes the brake fluid coming from the master cylinder primary and secondary ports to the
four brake tubes leading to the wheel brakes. Since the junction block mounts in the same location as the ABS
integrated control unit (ICU), it allows for the common use of brake tubes on the vehicle whether it is equipped with
or without ABS.
The junction block includes a rear brake proportioning valve. Placed in the fluid flow passages leading to the rear
brake tube ports, it balances front-to-rear braking. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - BASE/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/PRO-
PORTIONING VALVE - OPERATION)
REMOVAL

from battery post.
3. Remove brake tubes (1, 2, 3 and 10) at junction

block (5).
4. Remove remaining brake tubes (1 and 3) at junc-

tion block (5).
5. Pull up on junction block (5) and remove from

mounting grommets (8).
INSTALLATION
1. Install junction block (5), pushing mounting bracket
down into mounting grommets (8) located in body
of vehicle.
2. Install brake tubes to rear (1 and 3) at hydraulic

control unit. Tighten tube nuts to 20 Nm (177 in.
lbs.) torque.
3. Install brake tubes (1, 2, 3 and 10) at junction block

(5). Tighten tube nuts to 20 Nm (177 in. lbs.)
torque.

DARD PROCEDURE)
6. Fill and bleed (1) base brake hydraulic system.

(Refer to 5 - BRAKES - STANDARD PROCE-
DURE)
7. Road test vehicle to verify proper operation of
brakes.
MASTER CYLINDER
DESCRIPTION
There are two different master cylinder designs used depending on whether the vehicle is an early build vehicle or
a later build vehicle. To simplify the differentiation between early and later brake systems, for this service information
they are referred to as the MK25 master cylinder and the MK25E master cylinder. This is because the master cyl-
inders change when the availability of the antilock brake systems change. Early build vehicles use MK25 ABS and
later build vehicles use MK25E ABS. Be aware that these type master cylinders are also used on vehicles that are
not equipped with antilock brakes.
Although similar in function and appearance, the
MK25E master cylinder does not have a pressure
switch located on the bottom and it has larger outlet
ports with SAE flares. The primary port (1) is designed
for 5/16 inch (8 mm) tubing and the secondary port (2)
is designed for 1/4 inch (6.25 mm) tubing.
Both standard MK25 and MK25E master cylinders have 25.4 mm bores. Although appearing and serviced the same,
the master cylinder used on SRT8 and Police vehicles has a larger 27 mm bore. The SRT8 and Police Package
master cylinder can be identified by a green dot placed on the body of the master cylinder.
On SRT8 vehicles with the MK25 ABS system, the
brake pressure sensor (3) which normally mounts to
the bottom of the master cylinder is mounted to the
primary brake tube (3) near the master cylinder (1).
STANDARD PROCEDURE
MASTER CYLINDER BLEEDING - MK25
NOTE: Vehicles that are not equipped with ABS also use this master cylinder, but in an effort to simplify the
differentiation between early and late brake systems it is being referred to as the MK25 master cylinder.
CAUTION: When clamping master cylinder in vise, only clamp master cylinder by its mounting flange. Do
not clamp master cylinder piston rod, reservoir, seal or body.
1. Clamp master cylinder in a vise.

2. Attach special tools for bleeding master cylinder in
the following fashion:
a. Thread one Adapter (3), Special Tool 88222,
in each outlet port. Tighten Adapters to 14 Nm
b. Thread a Bleeder Tube (1), Special Tool
83581, into each Adapter. Tighten each tube
to 14 Nm (124 in. lbs.) torque. Flex each
bleeder tube and place open end into mouth of
fluid reservoir as far down as possible.
NOTE: Make sure open ends of bleeder tubes stay

below surface of brake fluid once reservoir is filled
to proper level.
3. Fill brake fluid reservoir (1) to the MAX level with

MoparT brake fluid or equivalent conforming to
DOT 3 specifications. Make sure fluid level is
above tips of bleeder tubes in reservoir to ensure
no air is ingested during bleeding.
4. Using a wooden dowel as a pushrod (2), slowly

depress master cylinder pistons, then release pres-
sure, allowing pistons to return to released position.
Repeat several times until all air bubbles are
expelled. Make sure fluid level stays above tips of
bleeder tubes in reservoir while bleeding.
5. Remove bleeder tubes (1) and adapters (3) from
master cylinder outlet ports, then plug outlet ports
and install fill cap on reservoir.
6. Remove master cylinder from vise.
7. Install master cylinder on vehicle. (Refer to 5 -
BRAKES - BASE/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/
MASTER CYLINDER - INSTALLATION)
MASTER CYLINDER BLEEDING - MK25E

NOTE: Vehicles that are not equipped with ABS also use this master cylinder, but in an effort to simplify the
differentiation between early and late brake systems it is being referred to as the MK25E master cylinder.
CAUTION: When clamping master cylinder in vise, only clamp master cylinder by its mounting flange. Do
not clamp master cylinder piston rod, reservoir, seal or body.
1. Clamp master cylinder in a vise.
CAUTION: When installing Adapters in master cyl-

inder, do not overtighten. Damage to master cylin-
der could occur.
NOTE: Adapters 9748-1 and 9748-2 are not inter-

changeable. To avoid mix-up of Adapters, 97481
is silver while 97482 is black.
2. Attach special tools for bleeding master cylinder in

following fashion:
a. Thread Adapter (3), Special Tool 97482, into
primary outlet port. Tighten Adapter to 14 Nm
(124 in. lbs.).
b. Thread Adapter (4), Special Tool 97481, into
secondary outlet port. Tighten Adapter to 14
Nm (124 in. lbs.).
c. Thread a Bleeder Tube (2), Special Tool
83581, into each Adapter. Tighten each tube
to 14 Nm (124 in. lbs.). Flex each bleeder tube and place open end into mouth of fluid reservoir as far down
as possible.
NOTE: Make sure open ends of bleeder tubes stay

below surface of brake fluid once reservoir is filled
to proper level.
3. Fill brake fluid reservoir (1) to the MAX level with

MoparT brake fluid or equivalent conforming to
DOT 3 specifications. Make sure fluid level is
above tips of bleeder tubes in reservoir to ensure
no air is ingested during bleeding.
4. Using a wooden dowel as a pushrod (1), slowly

depress master cylinder pistons, then release pres-
sure, allowing pistons to return to released position.
Repeat several times until all air bubbles are
expelled. Make sure fluid level stays above tips of
bleeder tubes in reservoir while bleeding.
5. Remove bleeder tubes (2) and adapters (3, 4) from
master cylinder outlet ports, then plug outlet ports
and install fill cap on reservoir.
6. Remove master cylinder from vise.
7. Install master cylinder on vehicle. (Refer to 5 -
BRAKES - BASE/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/
MASTER CYLINDER - INSTALLATION)
REMOVAL
MASTER CYLINDER
CAUTION: Vacuum in power brake booster must be pumped down (removed) before removing master cyl-
inder from power brake booster. This is necessary to prevent power brake booster from sucking in any
contamination as master cylinder is removed. This can be done simply by pumping brake pedal, with vehi-
cles engine not running, until a firm feeling brake pedal is achieved.
1. With engine not running, pump brake pedal until a firm pedal is achieved (4-5 strokes).

from battery post.


NOTE: SRT8 vehicles with MK25 ABS are not

equipped with a master cylinder mounted pressure
switch for the Electronic Stability Program. The
switch is located in the primary brake tube.
6. If equipped with MK25 ABS and Electronic Stability

Program (non-SRT8), disconnect wiring harness (6)
connector from pressure switch (5).
7. Disconnect primary (3) and secondary (2) brake

tubes from master cylinder (4). Install sealing plugs
in open brake tube outlet ports.
CAUTION: Before removing master cylinder from

power brake vacuum booster, master cylinder and
vacuum booster must be thoroughly cleaned. This
must be done to prevent dirt particles from falling
into power brake vacuum booster. Use only
MoparT Brake Parts Cleaner or equivalent.
8. Remove two nuts (2) attaching master cylinder (3)

to power brake booster (1).
9. Slide master cylinder (3) straight out of power
brake booster (1).
CAUTION: Vacuum seal (1) on rear of master cyl-

inder (2) is used to allow vacuum ability in power
brake vacuum booster. Vacuum seal MUST be
replaced whenever master cylinder is removed
from power brake vacuum booster.
10. Remove vacuum seal (1) located on mounting

flange of master cylinder (2). Vacuum seal is
removed by carefully pulling it off rear of master
cylinder. Do not attempt to pry seal off master
cylinder by inserting a sharp tool between seal
and master cylinder casting. Damage can
occur.
MASTER CYLINDER - RHD

from battery post.

master cylinder.
5. Remove purge solenoid (1) from mount (2) and

move it to side leaving hoses and wiring
connected.

7. Remove primary (3) and secondary (2) brake tubes

from master cylinder (4). Install sealing plugs in
open brake tube outlet ports.


brake booster (1).
CAUTION: Vacuum seal (1) on rear of master cyl-

inder (2) is used to allow vacuum ability in power
brake vacuum booster. Vacuum seal MUST be
replaced whenever master cylinder is removed
from power brake vacuum booster.
10. Remove vacuum seal (1) located on mounting

flange of master cylinder (2). Vacuum seal is
removed by carefully pulling it off rear of master
cylinder. Do not attempt to pry seal off master
cylinder by inserting a sharp tool between seal
and master cylinder casting. Damage can
occur.
DISASSEMBLY
1. Clean master cylinder housing and brake fluid res-
ervoir. Use only MoparT Brake Parts Cleaner or
equivalent.
2. If equipped, remove pressure switch on bottom of
3. Remove brake fluid reservoir cap (1). Using a

syringe or equivalent type tool, empty as much
brake fluid as possible from the reservoir.
CAUTION: When removing fluid reservoir from the

master cylinder, do not pry off using any type of
tool. This can damage the fluid reservoir or master
cylinder housing.
4. Remove screw (3) fastening fluid reservoir to mas-

5. Rock the brake fluid reservoir side-to-side while
pulling up to remove it from seal grommets in mas-
6. Remove two brake fluid reservoir seal grommets

(2) from master cylinder housing (1).
ASSEMBLY
1. Install NEW brake fluid reservoir sealing grommets
(2) in master cylinder housing (1).
2. Lubricate reservoir mounting area with fresh clean

brake fluid. Place reservoir in position over sealing
grommets. Seat reservoir into sealing grommets
using a rocking motion while firmly pressing down
on fluid reservoir. Once installed, make sure fluid
reservoir is touching the top of both sealing grom-
mets (2) or reservoir is not properly installed.
3. Install fluid reservoir mounting screw (3). Tighten
4. If equipped, install pressure switch (1) on bottom of

master cylinder. Tighten switch to 28 Nm (250 in.
lbs.) torque.
5. Thoroughly bleed master cylinder before installing it
on vehicle. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/
MECHANICAL/MASTER CYLINDER - STANDARD
PROCEDURE)
6. Install master cylinder on power brake booster.
Upon installation, vacuum seal (2) on rear of mas-
ter cylinder must be replaced. (Refer to 5 -
BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/MASTER
CYLINDER - INSTALLATION)
INSTALLATION
MASTER CYLINDER
1. Thoroughly bleed master cylinder before installing it on vehicle. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANI-
CAL/MASTER CYLINDER - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
CAUTION: When replacing master cylinder on

vehicle, a NEW vacuum seal (2) MUST be installed
on master cylinder.
2. Install NEW vacuum seal (1) on rear of master cyl-

inder (2) making sure seal fits squarely in mounting
groove.
3. Position master cylinder (3) on studs of power

brake booster, aligning booster push rod with mas-
ter cylinder piston.
NOTE: In an effort to simplify the differentiation

between early and late brake systems the master
cylinders are being referred to MK25 or MK25E
master cylinders. Vehicles that are not equipped
with ABS use the same master cylinder as the
ABS system available at that build date.
4. Install two master cylinder mounting nuts (1).

Tighten mounting nuts as follows:
MK25 master cylinder Tighten mounting nuts to
25 Nm (221 in. lbs.).
MK25E master cylinder Tighten mounting nuts
to 15 Nm (133 in. lbs.).
5. Thread primary (3) and secondary (2) brake tubes

into master cylinder primary and secondary ports.
Tighten tube nuts to 20 Nm (177 in. lbs.).
NOTE: SRT8 vehicles with MK25 ABS are not

equipped with a master cylinder mounted pressure
switch for the Electronic Stability Program. The
switch is located in the primary brake tube.
6. If equipped with MK25 ABS and Electronic Stability

Program (non-SRT8), connect wiring harness (6)
connector to pressure switch (5).

(1).

DARD PROCEDURE)


brake hydraulic system and check for leaks. (Refer

brakes.
MASTER CYLINDER - RHD

1. Thoroughly bleed master cylinder before installing it on vehicle. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANI-
CAL/MASTER CYLINDER - STANDARD PROCEDURE)

on master cylinder.

groove.

Tighten mounting nuts to 15 Nm (133 in. lbs.).


(1).
7. Install purge solenoid (1) on mount (2).

DARD PROCEDURE)


brake hydraulic system and check for leaks. (Refer

brakes.
PEDAL
REMOVAL
PEDAL
from battery post.
2. Remove driver side silencer under instrument
panel. (Refer to 23 - BODY/INSTRUMENT PANEL/
INSTRUMENT PANEL SILENCER - INSTALLA-
TION)
3. Remove steering column opening cover. (Refer to
23 - BODY/INSTRUMENT PANEL/STEERING
COLUMN OPENING COVER - INSTALLATION)
4. Remove brake lamp switch. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRI-

CAL/LAMPS/LIGHTING - EXTERIOR/BRAKE
LAMP SWITCH - REMOVAL)
5. Remove booster push rod from pin on brake pedal.
To do so:
a. Position small screwdriver between center tang
on power brake booster brake pedal pin retain-
ing clip (3).
b. Rotate screwdriver enough to allow retaining
clip center tang to pass over end of brake
pedal pin, then slide retaining clip off brake
pedal pin.
c. Discard retaining clip (3). It is not to be
reused. Install NEW retaining clip when
assembling.
6. Slide booster push rod (5) off brake pedal pin (4).
7. Remove four power brake booster (3) mounting

nuts (1).
8. Remove two nuts (1) fastening pedal bracket to
upper dash panel (2).
9. Push power brake booster (3) forward into engine
compartment as far as possible by hand. Do not
force it.
10. Remove brake pedal (4).
PEDAL - RHD
1. Move drivers seat to full rearward position.
from battery post.
3. Remove driver side silencer under instrument
panel. (Refer to 23 - BODY/INSTRUMENT PANEL/
INSTRUMENT PANEL SILENCER - INSTALLA-
TION)
4. Remove steering column opening cover. (Refer to
5. Remove stop lamp switch (2). (Refer to 8 - ELEC-

TRICAL/LAMPS/LIGHTING - EXTERIOR/BRAKE
CAUTION: When removing booster push rod from

brake pedal pin, be careful not to damage rubber
O-ring on pin.

To do so:
a. Position small screwdriver (1) between center
tang on power brake booster brake pedal pin
retaining clip (4).
pedal pin (3), then slide retaining clip off brake
pedal pin.
c. Discard retaining clip. It is not to be reused.
Install NEW retaining clip when assembling.
8. Remove two lower (2) and one upper mounting

screw fastening the radio amplifier/transmission
control module assembly (1) in place.
9. Disconnect four wiring connectors and remove
radio amplifier/transmission control module assem-
bly (1).
10. Remove four power brake booster (2) mounting

nuts (5).
force it.
13. Remove brake pedal (1).
INSTALLATION
PEDAL
1. Install adjustable brake pedal assembly (4) under
instrument panel and slide over booster push rod.
2. From engine compartment side, push power brake
booster (3) mounting studs back through dash
panel (2) and brake pedal bracket.
3. Install two upper mounting nuts (1) fastening pedal
bracket to upper dash panel (2). Do not tighten at
this time.
4. Install four power brake booster mounting nuts (1).
Tighten nuts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.) torque.
5. Tighten two upper mounting nuts (1) to 25 Nm (18
ft. lbs.) torque.
6. Slide booster push rod (5) onto brake pedal pin (4).
Install NEW retaining clip (3) securing push rod to
brake pedal.
7. Install and adjust brake lamp switch (2). (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/LAMPS/LIGHTING - EXTERIOR/
BRAKE LAMP SWITCH - INSTALLATION)
8. Install steering column opening cover. (Refer to 23 - BODY/INSTRUMENT PANEL/STEERING COLUMN OPEN-
ING COVER - INSTALLATION)
9. Install driver side silencer under instrument panel. (Refer to 23 - BODY/INSTRUMENT PANEL/INSTRUMENT
PANEL SILENCER - INSTALLATION)
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
11. Road test vehicle testing operation of brakes.
PEDAL - RHD
1. Install brake pedal assembly (4) under instrument
panel and slide over booster push rod.
3. Install two upper mounting nuts (4) fastening pedal
bracket to dash panel (3). Do not tighten at this
time.
Tighten nuts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.).
ft. lbs.).
CAUTION: When installing booster push rod on brake pedal pin, be careful not to damage rubber O-ring on
pin.
6. Slide booster push rod onto brake pedal pin. Install NEW retaining clip securing push rod to brake pedal.
8. Connect four wiring connectors to radio amplifier/

transmission control module assembly (1).
9. Place radio amplifier/transmission control module
assembly (1) in mounted position. Install one upper
and two lower (2) mounting screws.
10. Install steering column opening cover. (Refer to
11. Install driver side silencer under instrument panel.
(Refer to 23 - BODY/INSTRUMENT PANEL/IN-
STRUMENT PANEL SILENCER - INSTALLATION)

STANDARD PROCEDURE)
13. Road test vehicle testing operation of brakes.
PEDAL - ADJUSTABLE BRAKE

STANDARD PROCEDURE
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SYCHRONIZATION
NOTE: Although the pedals can be synchronized at either the full-forward or full-rearward positions (both
pedals must be in the same position), it is recommended to do so with the pedals positioned in the full-
forward position due to service part positioning from the factory.
1. Disconnect the adjuster cable (1) running between

the accelerator pedal module and the brake pedal
assembly at the adjuster motor (2).
2. Using the switch, position the accelerator pedal (2)

in the full-forward position. The pin on the pedal (1)
will line up with the adjustment line (2) at this point.
3. Using a drill motor, or other suitable device, rotate

the adjuster cable strand (2) from the accelerator
pedal end to position the brake pedal (1) toward
the full-forward position.
4. Rotate the adjuster cable strand until the brake

pedal (4) gear drive block (1) lines up with the full-
forward adjustment line (3) as shown. If equipped,
fine adjustments can be made by turning the
adjustment knob (2) by hand to line up the compo-
nents.
5. Reconnect the adjuster cable to the adjuster motor.
If the cable resists connection, if equipped, turn the
adjustment knob (2) by hand until the cable drops
into place. If not equipped with the adjustment
knob, wiggle the cable around until the cable drops
into place.
6. Verify proper operation of the adjustable pedals.
REMOVAL

from battery post.
3. Disconnect adjuster cable (1) at accelerator

adjuster motor (2).

To do so:
ing clip (3).
pedal pin.
assembling.
7. Disconnect wiring connector (2) at brake pedal

position sensor (3).
8. Remove four power brake booster mounting nuts

(4).
force it.
11. Remove adjustable brake pedal assembly (3).
12. Remove adjuster cable at brake pedal gear drive.
INSTALLATION
1. Attach cable to brake pedal gear drive.
2. Install adjustable brake pedal assembly (3) under

instrument panel and slide over booster push rod.
4. Install two nuts (5) fastening pedal bracket to upper
dash panel (2). Do not tighten at this time.
ft. lbs.) torque.
7. Connect wiring connector (2) at brake pedal posi-

tion sensor (3).
brake pedal.

STANDARD PROCEDURE)
11. Synchronize brake pedal to accelerator pedal,

then connect adjuster cable (1) to adjuster motor
(2). (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHAN-
ICAL/PEDAL - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
12. If vehicle is equipped with memory seats, the sys-
tem will need to be initialized. Refer to appropriate
13. Test operation of adjustable pedals.
14. Road test vehicle testing operation of brakes and
accelerator.
BOOSTER - POWER BRAKE

REMOVAL
BOOSTER
from battery post.
3. Remove windshield wiper module. (Refer to 8 -
ELECTRICAL/WIPERS/WASHERS/WIPER MOD-
ULE - REMOVAL)
4. Remove master cylinder. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/
HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/MASTER CYLINDER -
REMOVAL)
5. If equipped with MK25 and Electronic Stability Pro-

gram (ESP), disconnect wiring harness (6) connec-
tor at pedal travel sensor (7) on power brake
booster (3).
6. If equipped with MK25 and ESP, disconnect wiring
harness (6) connector at active brake booster sole-
noid (4).
7. Disconnect vacuum hose (3) from check valve (2)

on face of booster (1). Do not remove check
valve from booster.

To do so:
ing clip (3).
pedal pin.
assembling.

(4).
12. Slide power brake booster forward out of dash
panel and remove through opening between
cross-brace and windshield.
BOOSTER - RHD
from battery post.
3. Remove windshield wiper module. (Refer to 8 -
ULE - REMOVAL)


from master cylinder (4). Install sealing plugs in
open brake tube outlet ports.


brake booster (1).
8. Disconnect vacuum hose (1) from check valve on

face of booster (2). Do not remove check valve
from booster.
9. Remove driver side silencer under instrument panel. (Refer to 23 - BODY/INSTRUMENT PANEL/INSTRUMENT
10. Remove steering column opening cover. (Refer to 23 - BODY/INSTRUMENT PANEL/STEERING COLUMN
OPENING COVER - INSTALLATION)
11. Remove stop lamp switch (2). (Refer to 8 - ELEC-
TRICAL/LAMPS/LIGHTING - EXTERIOR/BRAKE
CAUTION: When removing booster push rod from

brake pedal pin, be careful not to damage rubber
O-ring on pin.
12. Remove booster push rod from pin on brake

pedal. To do so:
a. Position small screwdriver (1) between center
tang on power brake booster brake pedal pin
retaining clip (4).
pedal pin (3), then slide retaining clip off brake
pedal pin.
c. Discard retaining clip. It is not to be reused.
Install NEW retaining clip when assembling.

(5).
15. Slide power brake booster forward out of dash
panel and remove through opening between
cross-brace and windshield.
INSTALLATION
BOOSTER
NOTE: Before installing booster, make sure there
is a NEW booster seal (2) placed over push rod
and mounting studs on rear of booster (1).
1. Install power brake booster through opening

between cross-brace and windshield. Guide
booster (1) push rod and mounting studs through
dash panel (2).
NOTE: Be sure to tighten all four booster mount-

ing nuts to specifications or a vacuum leak can
result.

brake pedal.
5. Connect vacuum hose (3) to check valve (2) on

face of booster (1). Do not remove check valve
from booster.
6. If equipped with MK25 and Electronic Stability Pro-

gram (ESP), connect wiring harness (6) connector
at pedal travel sensor (7) on power brake booster
(3).
7. If equipped with MK25 and ESP, connect wiring
harness (6) connector at active brake booster sole-
noid (4).
8. Install master cylinder (1). (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/
HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/MASTER CYLINDER -
INSTALLATION)
9. Install windshield wiper module and components
removed to access. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/
WIPERS/WASHERS/WIPER MODULE -
INSTALLATION)

STANDARD PROCEDURE)
11. Fill and bleed brakes as necessary.
brakes.
BOOSTER - RHD
NOTE: Before installing booster, make sure there
is a NEW booster seal (2) placed over push rod
and mounting studs on rear of booster (1).
1. Install power brake booster through opening

between cross-brace and windshield. Guide
booster (2) push rod and mounting studs through
dash panel (3).
NOTE: Be sure to evenly tighten all four booster

mounting nuts to specifications or a vacuum leak
can result.

Tighten nuts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.).
CAUTION: When installing booster push rod on brake pedal pin, be careful not to damage rubber O-ring on
pin.
3. Slide booster push rod onto brake pedal pin. Install NEW retaining clip securing push rod to brake pedal.

5. Install steering column opening cover. (Refer to 23 - BODY/INSTRUMENT PANEL/STEERING COLUMN OPEN-
ING COVER - INSTALLATION)
7. Connect vacuum hose (1) to check valve on face
of booster (2). Do not remove check valve from
booster.

on master cylinder.

groove.

Tighten mounting nuts to 15 Nm (133 in. lbs.).

12. Connect wiring harness connector (4) to brake

fluid level sensor (2) mounted in brake fluid reser-
voir (1).
13. Install windshield wiper module and components removed to access. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/WIPERS/
WASHERS/WIPER MODULE - INSTALLATION)
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
15. Fill and bleed brakes as necessary.
brakes.
VALVE - PROPORTIONING
DESCRIPTION
A proportioning valve is used on each vehicle without antilock brakes. One valve is used for both rear brake hydrau-
lic circuits. The proportioning valve is located in the junction block (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - BASE/HYDRAULIC/
MECHANICAL/JUNCTION BLOCK - DESCRIPTION). The valve is not serviceable and must be replaced as part of
the junction block.
OPERATION
Proportioning valves balance front to rear braking by controlling (at a given ratio) brake hydraulic pressure to the
rear brakes above a preset level (split point). On light pedal applications equal brake pressure is transmitted to both
the front and rear brakes. On heavier pedal applications, through the use of proportioning valves, the pressure
transmitted to the rear will be lower than the front brakes. This prevents premature rear wheel skid.
ROTOR
BRAKE ROTOR
Any servicing of the rotor requires extreme care to maintain the rotor within service tolerances to ensure proper
brake action.
Excessive runout or wobble in a rotor can increase pedal travel due to piston knock-back. This increases guide pin
sleeve wear due to the tendency of the caliper to follow the rotor wobble.
When diagnosing a brake noise or pulsation, the machined disc braking surface should be inspected.
BRAKING SURFACE INSPECTION

Light braking surface scoring and wear is acceptable. If heavy scoring or warping is evident, the rotor must be
refaced or replaced. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/ROTORS - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
Excessive wear and scoring of the rotor can cause improper lining contact on the rotors braking surface. If the
ridges on the rotor are not removed before new brake shoes are installed, improper wear of the shoes will result.
If a vehicle has not been driven for a period of time, the rotors braking surface will rust in the areas not covered by
the brake shoes at that time. Once the vehicle is driven, noise and chatter from the disc brakes can result when the
brakes are applied.
Some discoloration or wear of the rotor surface is normal and does not require resurfacing when linings are
replaced. If cracks or burned spots are evident, the rotor must be replaced.
ROTOR MINIMUM THICKNESS

Measure rotor thickness (1) at the center of the brake
shoe contact surface. Replace the rotor if it is worn
below minimum thickness or if machining the rotor will
cause its thickness to fall below specifications.
CAUTION: Do not machine the rotor if it will cause the rotor to fall below minimum thickness.
Most minimum thickness specifications (1) are cast

into the rotors unmachined surface (2). Some brake
rotors have the minimum thickness specification
located elsewhere. Refer to the following paragraph.
Limits can also be found in this components specifi-
cation table. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/ME-
CHANICAL/ROTOR - SPECIFICATIONS)
SRT8 vehicles have the minimum thickness specifica-

tion stamped into the outer diameter edge (1) (along
vented end) of the disc.
ROTOR THICKNESS VARIATION

Thickness variation in a rotors braking surface can
result in pedal pulsation, chatter and surge. This can
also be caused by excessive runout in the rotor or the
hub.
Rotor thickness variation measurements should be
made in conjunction with measuring runout. Measure
thickness of the brake rotor (2) at 12 equal points
around the rotor braking surface with a micrometer (1)
at a radius approximately 25 mm (1 inch) from edge of
rotor. If thickness measurements vary beyond the
specification listed in the specification table (Refer to 5
- BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/ROTOR -
SPECIFICATIONS), the rotor should be refaced or
replaced. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/ME-
CHANICAL/ROTOR - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
ROTOR RUNOUT
On-vehicle rotor runout is the combination of the indi-
vidual runout of the hub face and the runout of the
brake rotor (hub runout can be measured separately).
To measure rotor runout on the vehicle:
CEDURE)
2. Remove tire and wheel assembly. (Refer to 22 -
TIRES/WHEELS - REMOVAL)
3. Install standard wheel mounting nuts, flat side to
rotor, on all studs (2). Progressively tighten nuts to
4. Mount Dial Indicator (1), Special Tool C-3339A,
with Wheel, Special Tool 25w, or equivalent, to
knuckle. Position Dial Indicator Wheel to contact
rotor braking surface approximately ten millimeters
from outer edge of rotor (3).
5. Slowly rotate brake rotor checking lateral runout,
marking the low and high spots. Record these
measurements.
6. Check and record runout of opposite side of rotor in same fashion, marking the low and high spots.
7. Compare runout measurement to specifications. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/ROTOR -
SPECIFICATIONS)
If runout is in excess of specifications, check the lat-
eral runout of the hub face. Before removing the rotor
from the hub, place a chalk mark across both the rotor
(1) and the one wheel stud (2) closest to where the
high runout measurement was taken. This way, the
original mounting spot of the rotor on the hub is
indexed.
8. Remove the rotor from the hub. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/ROTORS - REMOVAL)
NOTE: Before measuring hub runout, clean the

hub face surface with an appropriate cleaner. This
provides a clean surface to get an accurate indica-
tor reading.
9. Mount Dial Indicator (2), Special Tool C-3339A, to

the knuckle. Position Dial Indicator stem so it con-
tacts hub face (1) near outer diameter. Care must
be taken to position stem outside of stud circle, but
inside of chamfer on the hub rim.
10. Slowly rotate hub measuring runout. Hub runout
should not exceed 0.01 mm (0.0004 inch). If
runout exceeds this specification, the hub must be
replaced. (Refer to 2 - SUSPENSION/FRONT/
HUB / BEARING - REMOVAL) (Refer to 2 - SUS-
PENSION/REAR/HUB / BEARING - REMOVAL)
11. If hub runout does not exceed this specification,

install original rotor back on hub, aligning chalk
mark on rotor (2) with a wheel mounting stud, two studs apart from original stud (1).
12. Install standard wheel mounting nuts, flat side to
rotor, on all studs (2). Progressively tighten nuts
13. Mount Dial Indicator (1) and remeasure runout on
both sides of the brake rotor as explained in ear-
lier steps to see if runout is now within specifica-
tions. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/
MECHANICAL/ROTOR - SPECIFICATIONS)
14. If runout is still not within specifications, reface or
replace brake rotor. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HY-
DRAULIC/MECHANICAL/ROTORS - STANDARD
PROCEDURE)
STANDARD PROCEDURE
BRAKE ROTOR MACHINING
NOTE: Refacing the rotor is not required each time the brake pads are replaced, only when the need is
foreseen.
Any servicing of the rotor requires extreme care to maintain the rotor within service tolerances to ensure proper
brake action.
If the rotor surface is deeply scored or warped, or
there is a complaint of brake roughness or brake
pedal pulsation, the rotor should be refaced using a
hub-mounted on-car brake lathe (1), or replaced.
The use of a hub-mounted on-car brake lathe (1) is
highly recommended to eliminate the possibility of
excessive runout. It trues the brake rotor to the vehi-
cles hub and bearing.
Minimum allowable thickness is the minimum thickness which the brake rotor machined surface may be cut to.
CAUTION: Do not machine the rotor if it will cause the rotor to fall below minimum thickness.
NOTE: Most brake rotors (2) have markings for

minimum allowable thickness specification cast
into an unmachined surface of the rotor or
stamped into the hat section (1). Some brake
rotors have the minimum thickness specification
located elsewhere. Refer to the following para-
graph. Minimum thickness specifications can also
be found in this components specification table.
(Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/
ROTOR - SPECIFICATIONS)
NOTE: SRT8 vehicles have the minimum thickness

specification stamped into the outer diameter edge
(1) (along vented end) of the disc.
Before lathe installation, verify the brake rotor face and the hub adapters are free of any chips, rust, or contami-
nation.
When mounting and using the brake lathe, strict attention to the brake lathe manufacturers operating instructions is
required.
Machine both sides of the brake rotor at the same time. Cutting both sides at the same time minimizes the possi-
bility of a tapered or uneven cut.
When refacing a rotor, the required TIR (Total Indicator Reading) and thickness variation limits MUST BE MAIN-
TAINED. Extreme care in the operation of rotor turning equipment is required. Specifications for brake rotor machin-
ing can be found in this sections specification table. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/ROTOR -
SPECIFICATIONS)
REMOVAL
FRONT
2. Remove wheel mounting nuts(3), then tire and

wheel assembly (1).
ally be accomplished before mounting bolts are removed, by grasping rear of caliper and pulling outward
3. AWD Remove two bolts (1) securing disc brake

caliper and adapter (2) to knuckle (3).
4. AWD Remove disc brake caliper and adapter (2)
from knuckle (3) as an assembly. Hang assembly
out of way using wire or a bungee cord. Use care
not to overextend brake hose when doing this.
5. RWD Remove two bolts (2) securing disc brake

caliper and adapter (3) to knuckle (1).
6. RWD Remove disc brake caliper and adapter (3)
from knuckle (1) as an assembly. Hang assembly
out of way using wire or a bungee cord. Use care
not to overextend brake hose when doing this.

wheel studs.
REAR

wheel assembly (1).
ally be accomplished before guide pin bolts are removed, by grasping rear of caliper and pulling outward

adapter (3) to knuckle (2).
knuckle as an assembly. Hang assembly out of

FRONT - SRT8

wheel assembly (1).

half.

5. Remove caliper mounting bolts (1).

(8) and brake rotor (3). Hang assembly out of way
using wire or a bungee cord. Use care not to over-
extend brake hose when doing this.
wheel studs.
REAR - SRT8

wheel assembly (1).

half.



bolts (1).
and brake rotor. Hang assembly out of way using
wire or a bungee cord. Use care not to overextend
brake hose when doing this.

INSTALLATION
FRONT
NOTE: Inspect brake pads before installation. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/BRAKE
PADS/SHOES - INSPECTION)

where rotor mounts.
2. Install brake rotor (2) over studs on hub and
bearing.
3. AWD Install disc brake caliper and adapter

assembly (2) over brake rotor.
4. AWD Install mounting bolts (1) securing caliper
adapter (2) to knuckle (3). Tighten bolts to 95 Nm
5. RWD Install disc brake caliper and adapter

assembly (3) over brake rotor.
6. RWD Install mounting bolts (2) securing caliper
adapter (3) to knuckle (1). Tighten bolts to 95 Nm

8. Lower vehicle.

as necessary.
CAUTION: If NEW brake rotors or pads have been


brake shoes.
REAR
NOTE: Inspect disc brake pads and parking brake shoes before installation. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAU-
LIC/MECHANICAL/BRAKE PADS/SHOES - INSPECTION)
1. Clean hub face to remove any dirt or corrosion

where brake rotor mounts (1).
2. Install brake rotor (3) over wheel mounting studs
and onto hub (1).
3. Install disc brake caliper and adapter assembly (3)

over brake rotor.
(3) to knuckle (2). Tighten bolts to 115 Nm (85 ft.
lbs.) torque.

6. Lower vehicle.

as necessary.


brake shoes.
FRONT - SRT8
NOTE: Inspect brake pads before installation. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/BRAKE
PADS/SHOES - INSPECTION)

where rotor mounts.

ing (7).
3. Slide caliper with pads (2) over brake rotor (3) and
align with knuckle (8).

6. Lower vehicle.

as necessary.


pads. If NEW brake pads are installed, they need
to be properly burnished. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/
HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/BRAKE PADS/SHOES
- STANDARD PROCEDURE)
REAR - SRT8
NOTE: Inspect brake pads and parking brake shoes before installation. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/
MECHANICAL/BRAKE PADS/SHOES - INSPECTION)

where rotor mounts.
ing (1).

align with knuckle.

7. Lower vehicle.

as necessary.

10. Road test vehicle making several stops to wear

brake pads. If NEW brake pads are installed, they
need to be properly burnished. (Refer to 5 -
BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/BRAKE
PADS/SHOES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
SPECIFICATIONS
BRAKE ROTOR
NOTE: When refacing a rotor, the required TIR (Total Indicator Reading) and thickness variation limits MUST
BE MAINTAINED. Extreme care in the operation of rotor turning (machining) equipment is required.
LIMITS/SPECIFICATIONS - 17 INCH BRAKES (BASE)
Rotor
Minimum Rotor
Brake Rotor Rotor Thickness Thickness Rotor Runout *
Thickness
Variation
27.87-28.13 mm 26.5 mm 0.010 mm 0.035 mm
Front
1.097-1.107 in. 1.040 in. 0.0004 in. 0.0014 in.
9.87-10.13 mm 8.5 mm 0.010 mm 0.035 mm
Rear
0.389-0.399 in. 0.335 in. 0.0004 in. 0.0014 in.
* TIR Total Indicator Reading (Measured On Vehicle)
LIMITS/SPECIFICATIONS - 18 INCH BRAKES (PREMIUM)
Rotor
Minimum Rotor
Thickness
Variation
27.87-28.13 mm 26.5 mm 0.010 mm 0.035 mm
Front
1.097-1.107 in. 1.040 in. 0.0004 in. 0.0014 in.
21.87-22.13 mm 20.5 mm 0.010 mm 0.035 mm
Rear
0.861-0.871 in. 0.807 in. 0.0004 in. 0.0014 in.
LIMITS/SPECIFICATIONS - SRT8 BRAKES
Rotor
Minimum Rotor
Thickness
Variation
31.90-32.10 mm 30.00 mm 0.040 mm 0.030 mm
Front
1.256-1.264 in. 1.181 in. 0.0016 in. 0.0012 in.
27.90-28.10 mm 26.00 mm 0.040 mm 0.030 mm
Rear
1.098-1.106 in. 1.024 in. 0.0016 in. 0.0012 in.
LIMITS/SPECIFICATIONS - POLICE PACKAGE BRAKES
Rotor
Minimum Rotor
Thickness
Variation
27.87-28.13 mm 26.5 mm 0.010 mm 0.035 mm
Front
1.097-1.107 in. 1.040 in. 0.0004 in. 0.0014 in.
25.87-26.13 mm 24.5 mm 0.008 mm 0.025 mm
Rear
1.019-1.029 in. 0.965 in. 0.0003 in. 0.0010 in.
TUBES/HOSES
DESCRIPTION
The brake tubes are steel with a corrosion-resistant nylon coating applied to the external surfaces.
The flex hoses used at each wheel brake are made of reinforced rubber with fittings at each end. The fitting at each
brake caliper is the banjo-type and requires a special banjo bolt and copper washers.
INSPECTION
Brake tubing should be inspected periodically for evidence of physical damage or contact with moving or hot com-
ponents.
Flexible rubber hose is used at both the front and rear wheel brakes. Inspection of the flexible brake hoses should
be performed whenever the brake system is serviced and every 7,500 miles or 12 months, whichever comes first.
Inspect hydraulic brake hoses for surface cracking, scuffing, or worn spots. If the fabric casing of the hose becomes
exposed due to cracks or abrasions in the hose cover, the hose should be replaced immediately. Eventual deteri-
oration of the hose can take place with possible burst failure. Faulty installation can cause twisting, resulting in
wheel, tire, or chassis interference.
PARKING BRAKE
DESCRIPTION
This vehicle uses drum-in-hat style parking brakes at each rear wheel. The system is actuated using a foot-operated
mechanism and three parking brake cables.
The SRT8 uses the same parking brake system as other models. The rear parking brake cables (and the knuckle)
have been modified at the knuckle mounting bracket to clear the larger rear axle half shaft.
CABLE - PARKING BRAKE FRONT

REMOVAL


tor (3) to right rear parking brake cable (4) above
axle differential (not shown).
3. Remove front cable (3) from equalizer (2).

4. Remove screw (2) fastening cable (1) routing

bracket to rear crossmember front flange (3).
5. Remove nuts (1), bolt (2) and push-pins (4), secur-

ing lower rear wheelhouse shield (3) to body of
vehicle. Remove lower rear wheelhouse shield.
6. Remove screw (6) and routing clip (4) nuts fastening cable (7) to underside of body (3).
7. Lower vehicle.
8. Remove driver door opening sill scuff plate and cowl side trim.
9. Remove clip and roll back carpet away from front cable.
10. Disconnect front parking brake cable strand (3) at
lever connector (2).
11. Place 13 mm 12-point box wrench (2) over cable

retainer (1) at lever bracket as shown to collapse
retainer fingers. Pull cable from bracket.
12. Remove parking brake cable grommet (2) from floor pan (3).
13. Remove parking brake cable (7) through hole in floor pan.
INSTALLATION
1. Guide parking brake cable (7) down through hole in floor pan.
2. Install parking brake cable grommet (2) in hole of floor pan (3).
3. Guide cable end (3) up through lever bracket and

press cable housing retainer (7) into bracket allow-
ing retainer fingers to lock cable in place.
4. Connect front parking brake cable strand (3) at
5. Lay carpet back into place and install retaining clip.
6. Install driver door opening sill scuff plate and cowl
side trim.
8. Install screw (6) and routing clip (4) nuts fastening cable (7) to underside of body (3).
9. Route cable above rear crossmember, then slide

cable end (1) (shown with connector) and housing
(3) through equalizer (2) above rear axle
differential.


tor (3) to right rear parking brake cable (4) (axle
differential not shown).
11. Install screw (2) fastening cable (1) routing

bracket to rear crossmember front flange (3).
12. Position lower rear wheelhouse shield (3) onto

body of vehicle. Install nuts (1), bolt (2) and push-
pins (4) securing lower rear wheelhouse shield to
body. Tighten nuts and bolt securely.
13. Lower vehicle until rear wheels are just above floor level.
14. Apply parking brake lever. Release lever, then reapply.
15. Check to make sure rear wheels will not rotate with lever applied.
16. Release parking brake lever, then check to make sure rear wheels rotate without excessive drag.
17. Apply parking brake lever.
18. Lower vehicle.
CABLE - PARKING BRAKE REAR

REMOVAL

2. Disconnect rear parking brake cable near front

cable as follows:
If removing left rear cable, disconnect cable (1)
at equalizer (2) above rear axle differential (not
shown) and rear crossmember (6).
If removing right rear cable, disconnect cable (4)
at connector (3) above rear axle differential (not
3. Remove parking brake shoes on side of cable service. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/PARKING BRAKE/SHOES -
REMOVAL)
4. Remove shoe actuator lever (1) from end of cable
(2) and support.
5. Remove screw (4) fastening cable (2) to knuckle

(3). Remove cable from knuckle.
6. Remove cable (2) from routing guide (1).

strand and completely onto cable retainer (3) as
shown at crossmember bracket (1 - left)(2 - right).
It may be necessary to wiggle wrench around
somewhat to collapse retainer fingers. With wrench
in place, pull cable from bracket.
8. Remove parking brake cable from vehicle.
INSTALLATION
1. Route leading end of rear parking brake cable (2)
up through cable guide (1) on crossmember.
2. Guide cable leading end through crossmember

bracket (1 - left)(2 - right) near equalizer and press
cable housing retainer into bracket allowing retainer
fingers to lock cable in place.
3. Insert opposite end of cable (2) through rear

knuckle (3) and install mounting screw (4). Tighten

INSTALLATION)

it is not necessary to lock out parking brake lever
6. Connect rear parking brake cable at equalizer/front

cable as follows:
If installing left rear cable, connect cable (1) at
equalizer (2) above rear axle differential (not
If installing right rear cable, connect cable (4) at
connector (3) above rear axle differential (not
7. Lower vehicle until rear wheels are just above floor level.
8. Apply parking brake lever. Release lever, then reapply.
9. Check to make sure rear wheels will not rotate with lever applied.
10. Release parking brake lever, then check to make sure rear wheels rotate without excessive drag.
11. Adjust parking brake shoes as necessary. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/PARKING BRAKE/SHOES - ADJUSTMENT)
12. Lower vehicle.
LEVER - PARKING BRAKE

REMOVAL
LEVER


tor (3) to right rear parking brake cable.
3. Lower vehicle.
4. Remove fasteners (6) securing steering column opening cover (1) in place.
5. Disconnect wiring connector (3) at decklid release switch.
6. Disconnect parking brake release cable (4) at lever (5) and remove steering column opening cover (1).
7. Disconnect wiring connector (7) at parking brake
switch (1).

10. Remove bolt (4) and two nuts (2) mounting park-
ing brake lever (3) to body (5).
11. Remove parking brake lever (3).
LEVER - RHD


tor (2) to right rear parking brake cable.
3. Lower vehicle.
4. Remove driver side silencer under instrument panel. (Refer to 23 - BODY/INSTRUMENT PANEL/INSTRUMENT
5. Remove steering column opening cover. (Refer to 23 - BODY/INSTRUMENT PANEL/STEERING COLUMN
6. Remove foot rest. (Refer to 23 - BODY/INTERIOR/FRONT FLOOR FOOT REST - REMOVAL)
7. Roll back carpet at center console to access lever mounting nuts.
8. Disconnect wiring connector at parking brake

switch on lever.

11. Loosen nut (5) mounting parking brake lever (7) to

body.
12. Remove nuts (8) mounting parking brake lever (7)
to body.
13. Remove parking brake lever (7).
INSTALLATION
LEVER
1. Install parking brake lever (3) over mounting studs
(1).
2. Install bolt (4) and two nuts (2) mounting parking
brake lever to body (5). Tighten bolt and nuts to 26
3. Connect wiring connector (7) at parking brake

switch (1).
4. Guide cable end (3) up through lever bracket and
press cable housing retainer (7) into bracket allow-
ing retainer fingers to lock cable in place.
5. Connect front parking brake cable strand (3) at
6. If installing new lever, remove pin locking out auto-
matic tensioning spring.
7. Connect parking brake release cable (4) at handle (5) in steering column opening cover (1).
8. Connect wiring connector (3) at decklid release switch.
9. Position steering column opening cover (1) and install fasteners (6) securing it in place.

11. Connect front parking brake cable (5) at connector

(3) to right rear parking brake cable (4).
floor level.
13. Apply parking brake lever. Release lever to test
release cable and handle. Reapply lever. While
doing this, check to make sure the red indicator
lamp in the cluster turns on and off properly.
with lever applied.
15. Release parking brake lever, then check to make
sure rear wheels rotate without excessive drag.
17. Lower vehicle.
LEVER - RHD
1. Install parking brake lever (7) over mounting studs
(2, 3).
2. Install two nuts (8) mounting left side of parking
brake lever to body. Tighten nuts to 26 Nm (19 ft.
lbs.).
3. Tighten nut (5) left on stud (3) to 26 Nm (19 ft. lbs.).

4. Connect wiring connector at parking brake switch.
5. Guide front parking brake cable strand (3) up
through lever bracket and press cable housing
retainer (4) into bracket allowing retainer fingers to
lock cable in place.
6. Connect parking brake cable strand (3) at lever
connector (2).
7. If installing new lever, remove pin locking out auto-
matic tensioning spring.
8. Reposition carpet back to original position at center console.

9. Install foot rest. (Refer to 23 - BODY/INTERIOR/FRONT FLOOR FOOT REST - INSTALLATION)
10. Install steering column opening cover. (Refer to 23 - BODY/INSTRUMENT PANEL/STEERING COLUMN


tor (2) to left rear parking brake cable (1).
floor level.
15. Apply parking brake lever. Release lever to test
release cable and handle. Reapply lever. While
doing this, check to make sure the red indicator
lamp in the cluster turns on and off properly.
with lever applied.
17. Release parking brake lever, then check to make
sure rear wheels rotate without excessive drag.
19. Lower vehicle.
SHOE AND LINING - PARKING BRAKE

REMOVAL
NOTE: The following procedure may be used to remove shoes on either side of the vehicle.
2. Access and remove rear hub and bearing. (Refer to 2 - SUSPENSION/REAR/HUB / BEARING - REMOVAL)
3. Completely back off parking brake shoe adjustment
(8).
4. Remove parking brake shoe adjuster spring (3).
5. Remove shoe adjuster (8).
6. Remove upper brake shoe hold-down clip and pin
(7).
7. Remove upper shoe (6) from return spring (4) and
shoe actuator lever (1).
8. Remove return spring (4) from lower shoe (6).
9. Remove shoe actuator lever (1) from end of cable

(2).
10. Remove lower brake shoe hold-down clip and pin

(7).
11. Remove lower shoe (6).
12. Inspect springs, adjuster, lever and aluminum
shoe anchor pin for wear or damage. Replace as
necessary.
INSTALLATION
NOTE: The following procedure may be used to install shoes on either side of the vehicle.
NOTE: Inspect springs, adjuster, lever and aluminum shoe anchor pin for wear or damage prior to installa-
tion. Replace as necessary.
1. Install lower brake shoe hold-down pin (7) through

rear of support (2).
2. Install lower shoe (6) against support plate (2).
3. Install lower brake shoe hold-down clip (7).

5. Install return spring (4) to lower shoe (6).

6. Install upper shoe (6) against support plate and
onto shoe actuator lever.
7. Install upper brake shoe hold-down pin (7) through
rear of support and upper shoe.
8. Install upper brake shoe hold-down clip (7).
9. Attach return spring (4) to upper shoe (6).
10. Install shoe adjuster (8). Place end of adjuster
with star wheel upward.
11. Install parking brake shoe adjuster spring (3).
12. Using Brake Shoe Gauge, Special Tool C-3919, or

equivalent, measure inside diameter of parking
brake drum portion of rotor. Set gauge.
13. Place Gauge (1) over parking brake shoes at wid-

est point.
14. Using adjuster star wheel (2), adjust parking
brake shoes until linings on both park brake
shoes just touch jaws on gauge. This will give a
good preliminary adjustment of parking brake
shoes, before a final adjustment is made at end of
this procedure.
15. Install hub and bearing with wheel speed sensor
as well as all components necessary to access it.
(Refer to 2 - SUSPENSION/REAR/HUB / BEAR-
ING - INSTALLATION)
16. Lower vehicle.
17. Perform final adjustment of parking brake shoes.
(Refer to 5 - BRAKES/PARKING BRAKE/SHOES
- ADJUSTMENT)
ADJUSTMENTS
PARKING BRAKE SHOE ADJUSTMENT
1. Place parking brake lever in full released position.
3. Remove plug in parking brake shoe support to
access adjuster star-wheel (1).
NOTE: Through the access hole (2), rotate the

adjuster star wheel (1) in the following direction to
expand the shoes outward against the drum.
Left brake Rotate star-wheel toward rear of
vehicle.
Right brake Rotate star-wheel toward front of
vehicle.
4. Using an appropriate tool, turn adjuster star wheel

(1) until wheel will not rotate (dead lock).
5. Back off adjuster six detents (teeth).
6. Rotate wheel, checking for light drag. If drag is too
heavy, continue to back off adjuster one detent at a
time until light drag is present. Do not back off
star-wheel more than 17 detents from wheel lock.
7. Install access plug.

8. Adjust opposite wheel parking brake shoes using same method.
9. Lower vehicle.
10. Apply and release parking brake lever once to ensure proper operation of parking brakes.
LX BRAKES - ABS ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 5 - 173
BRAKES - ABS ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
BRAKES - ABS ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS C1042-RIGHT FRONT TONE WHEEL

DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
APS-INTERMITTENT CONDITION . . . . . . . . . . . 176 C1043-LEFT REAR TONE WHEEL
B1D4F-ADJUSTABLE PEDAL INHIBIT PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 C1044-RIGHT REAR TONE WHEEL
B1D50-ADJUSTABLE PEDAL INHIBIT PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 C1046LEFT FRONT WHEEL PRESSURE
B1D51-ADJUSTABLE PEDAL INHIBIT PHASE MONITORING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 C1047-RIGHT FRONT WHEEL PRESSURE
B1D56ADJUSTABLE PEDAL SENSOR PHASE MONITORING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 C1048-LEFT REAR WHEEL PRESSURE
B1D57ADJUSTABLE PEDAL SENSOR PHASE MONITORING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 C1049-RIGHT REAR WHEEL PRESSURE
B1D5BADJUSTABLE PEDAL SWITCH PHASE MONITORING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 C1073-ABS PUMP MOTOR CONTROL
B1D5CADJUSTABLE PEDAL SWITCH CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
CIRCUIT STUCK FORWARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 C1078TIRE REVOLUTIONS RANGE
B1D5DADJUSTABLE PEDAL SWITCH PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
CIRCUIT STUCK REARWARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 C107CBRAKE PEDAL SWITCH 1/2 STUCK . . 282
B1D67ADJUSTABLE PEDAL CONTROL C107D-BRAKE PEDAL SWITCH 1/2
CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 CORRELATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
ABS INTERMITTENT CONDITION . . . . . . . . . . . 208 C1210G SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT
C100ALEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
SENSOR CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 C1219-STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
C1011-LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED ERRATIC PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
SENSOR SIGNAL ERRATIC C121ASTEERING ANGLE SENSOR NOT
PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 INITIALIZED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
C1014-LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED C121CTORQUE REQUEST SIGNAL
COMPARATIVE PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . 219 DENIED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
C1015RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED C121D-BRAKE PRESSURE SENSOR
SENSOR CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
C101C-RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED C121E-BRAKE PRESSURE SENSOR
SENSOR SIGNAL ERRATIC COMPARATIVE PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . 300
PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 C1231DRIVE TEST: STEERING ANGLE
C101F-RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
COMPARATIVE PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . 232 C1232DRIVE TEST: PRESSURE SENSOR . . 303
C1020LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED C1234DRIVE TEST: SENSOR CLUSTER
SENSOR CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
C1027-LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR C1238-DRIVE TEST: UNSUCCESSFUL . . . . . . 305
SIGNAL ERRATIC PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . 241 C1239EMISSIONS ROLLS TEST ACTIVE . . . 305
C102A-LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED C123A-ESP SYSTEM SENSORS
COMPARATIVE PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . 245 CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
C102BRIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED C123B-ESP SYSTEM CONTROL TOO LONG . 308
SENSOR CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 C123C-DYNAMICS SENSOR MOUNTING/
C1032-RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED INSTALLATION PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . 310
SENSOR SIGNAL ERRATIC C123FSTEERING ANGLE SENSOR
PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 COMPARATIVE PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . 313
C1035-RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED C1240STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
COMPARATIVE PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . 258 OVERTRAVEL PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
C1041-LEFT FRONT TONE WHEEL C1242G SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL
PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
5 - 174 BRAKES - ABS ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS LX
C1243G SENSOR NOT INITIALIZED . . . . . . . . 320 U0125LOST COMMUNICATION WITH

C2100-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 DYNAMICS SENSOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
C2101-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . 323 U0126LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
C2111-SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE CIRCUIT STEERING ANGLE SENSOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
LOW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 U0141LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
C2112-SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE CIRCUIT FRONT CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 U0146LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
C2114-DYNAMICS SENSOR SUPPLY CENTRAL GATEWAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
VOLTAGE LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 U0401IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED
C2115-DYNAMICS SENSOR SUPPLY FROM ECM/PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
VOLTAGE HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 U0429IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED
C2116-ABS PUMP MOTOR SUPPLY LOW FROM SCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
VOLTAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 U1003ESP CAN C BUS PERFORMANCE . . . 368
C2200-ANTI-LOCK BRAKE MODULE U1104CAN C BUS CRC PERFORMANCE . . . 372
INTERNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 U140EIMPLAUSIBLE VEHICLE
C2202-ORIGINAL VIN MISMATCH/MISSING . . 341 CONFIGURATION DATA RECEIVED . . . . . . . . 376
C2204-DYNAMICS SENSOR INTERNAL . . . . . 342 U1501IMPLAUSIBLE MESSAGE DATA
C2205-STEERING ANGLE SENSOR LENGTH RECEIVED FROM ECM/PCM. . . . . . 378
INTERNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 U1502IMPLAUSIBLE MESSAGE DATA
C2206-VEHICLE CONFIGURATION LENGTH RECEIVED FROM TCM. . . . . . . . . . . 380
MISMATCH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 U1503IMPLAUSIBLE MESSAGE DATA
U0002CAN C BUS OFF PERFORMANCE . . . 348 LENGTH RECEIVED FROM FCM. . . . . . . . . . . 382
U0100LOST COMMUNICATION WITH STANDARD PROCEDURE
ECM/PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 APS VERIFICATION TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
U0101LOST COMMUNICATION WITH TCM . 354 ABS VERIFICATION TEST VER 1 . . . . . . . . . 384
BRAKES - ABS ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS

APS-INTERMITTENT CONDITION
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
Diagnostic Test
1.
WARNING: When the engine is operating, do not stand in direct line with the fan. Do not put your hands
near the pulleys, belts, or fan. Do not wear loose clothing. Failure to follow these instructions can result in
personal injury or death.
The DTC is not active at this time. The following list may help to identify an intermittent condition:
1. Refer to any Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) that may apply.
2. Use DTC environmental data to try to duplicate the conditions in which the DTC was set.
3. Turn the ignition off.
4. Inspect the related wiring harness and connectors. Look for any chafed, pierced, pinched, partially broken wires,
or broken, bent, pushed out, or corroded terminals.
5. Perform a voltage drop test on the circuits between the component and the applicable module.
6. If multiple DTCs are set, use a wiring schematic and inspect any common ground or supply circuits.
7. Inspect and clean all ground circuits that are related to the most current DTC.
8. Use the scan tool to perform a System Test or Actuation, if one applies to the component.
9. Perform a wiggle test on the related wiring and connectors while monitoring the scan tool. Look for the DTC to
reset or data to change during the test.
10. A co-pilot, data recorder, and/or lab scope should be used to diagnose an intermittent condition.
Were any problems found during the above inspection?
Yes >> Repair as necessary.
Perform APS VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No >> Test Complete.
B1D4F-ADJUSTABLE PEDAL INHIBIT CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
With the ignition on.
Set Condition:
When the Front Control Module detects low voltage on the Adjustable Pedals Relay control circuit.
Possible Causes
WIRING HARNESS CONNECTOR/TERMINALS

ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY
FRONT CONTROL MODULE
INTEGRATED POWER MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. DTC IS ACTIVE
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, select view DTCs. Record DTC and DTC Environmental data.
With the scan tool, clear stored DTCs.
Cycle the ignition switch off then on.
WARNING: Apply the parking brake. The vehicle may roll when the Transmission is shifted out of Park.
Shift into Reverse for at least 5 seconds, then move the shifter back into Park.
With the scan tool, select view DTCs.
Is the status active for this DTC?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Refer to the Adjustable Pedal System intermittent condition test. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - DIAGNOSIS
AND TESTING)
2. WIRING HARNESS CONNECTOR/TERMINALS

Turn the ignition off.
Remove the Adjustable Pedals Relay from the IPM.
Remove the Front Control Module from the IPM.
Visually inspect the connector terminals for damage or corrosion.
Were any problems found?
No >> Go To 3
3. FUSED B+ CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE (IPM)

Using a 12volt test light connect to ground, check the internal Fused
B(+) circuits at the Adjustable Pedals Relay connector of the IPM.
NOTE: The test light should be illuminated and bright. Compare
the brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery.
Is the test light illuminated and bright for both circuits?
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Remove and inspect Fuse in the IPM. If the fuse is open,
test the circuit for a short to ground. Repair as necessary. If
the fuse is OK, replace the Integrated Power Module in
accordance with the Service Information.
Perform ABS VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 5 -
BRAKES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
4. (P201) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE (IPM)
Connect a jumper wire between the (P201) Adjustable Pedals Relay
Control circuit and ground at the FCM connector of the IPM.
Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, check the (P201)
Adjustable Pedals Relay Control circuit at the Adjustable Pedals Relay
connector of the IPM.
NOTE: Remove the jumper wire before proceeding to the next test.
Is the test light illuminated and bright?
Yes >> Go To 5
No >> Replace the Integrated Power Module in accordance with
the Service Information.
5. (P201) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND (IPM)

Measure the resistance between ground and the (P201) Adjustable
Pedals Relay Control circuit at the Adjustable Pedals Relay connector of
the IPM.
Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?
Yes >> Replace the Integrated Power Module in accordance with
No >> Go To 6
6. ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY

Reconnect all components.
With the scan tool, actuate the Adjustable Pedals Relay.
Measure the voltage of the (P201) Adjustable Pedals Relay Control cir-
cuit at the Adjustable Pedals Relay connector of the IPM.
NOTE: With the Relay actuated ON, the circuit voltage should be 0
volts.
NOTE: With the Relay actuated OFF, the circuit voltage should be
approximately 2.5 volts.
Does the circuit voltage display as described during the actua-
tion test?
Yes >> Replace the Adjustable Pedals Relay in accordance with the
Service Information.
No >> Replace the Front Control Module in accordance with the Service Information.
Perform ABS VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
B1D50-ADJUSTABLE PEDAL INHIBIT CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When the Front Control Module detects high voltage on the Adjustable Pedals Relay control circuit.
Possible Causes
TERMINAL/CONNECTOR DAMAGE OR CORROSION

Diagnostic Test
1. DTC IS ACTIVE
Start the engine.
WARNING: Apply the brakes. The vehicle may roll when the Transmission is shifted out of Park.
With the scan tool, select view DTCs..
Yes >> Go To 2
AND TESTING)

No >> Go To 3
3. (P201) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE (IPM)

Measure the voltage of the (P201) Adjustable Pedals Relay Control cir-
cuit at the Adjustable Pedals Relay connector of the IPM.
Is there any voltage present?
Yes >> Replace the Integrated Power Module in accordance with
No >> Go To 4
Yes >> Go To 5

Measure the voltage of the (P201) Adjustable Pedals Relay Control circuit at the Adjustable Pedals Relay connector
of the IPM.
NOTE: With the Relay actuated ON, the circuit voltage should be 0 volts.
NOTE: With the Relay actuated OFF, the circuit voltage should be approximately 2.5 volts.
Does the circuit voltage display as described during the actuation test?
Yes >> Replace the Adjustable Pedals Relay in accordance with the Service Information.
B1D51-ADJUSTABLE PEDAL INHIBIT CIRCUIT OPEN

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When the Front Control Module fails the Adjustable Pedal Inhibit Relay circuit.
Possible Causes
TERMINAL/CONNECTOR DAMAGE OR CORROSION

Diagnostic Test
1. DTC IS ACTIVE
WARNING: Apply the parking brake. The vehicle may roll when the Transmission is shifted out of Park.
With the scan tool, select view DTCs..
Yes >> Go To 2
AND TESTING)

No >> Go To 3
3. FUSED B+ CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE (IPM)

Using a 12volt test light connect to ground, check the internal Fused
B(+) circuits at the Adjustable Pedals Relay connector of the IPM.
Is the test light illuminated and bright for both circuits?
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Remove and inspect Fuse 3 in the IPM. If the fuse is open,
test the circuit for a short to ground. Repair as necessary. If
the fuse is OK, replace the Integrated Power Module in
accordance with the Service Information.
Yes >> Go To 5

Measure the voltage of the (P201) Adjustable Pedals Relay Control circuit at the Adjustable Pedals Relay connector
of the IPM.
NOTE: With the Relay actuated ON, the circuit voltage should be 0 volts.
NOTE: With the Relay actuated OFF, the circuit voltage should be approximately 2.5 volts.
Does the circuit voltage display as described during the actuation test?
Yes >> Replace the Adjustable Pedals Relay in accordance with the Service Information.
B1D56ADJUSTABLE PEDAL SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
The Adjustable Pedal Motor is in active operation.
Set Condition:
The Memory Seat Module detects a low signal circuit voltage that is not within voltage specification from the
Adjustable Pedal Sensor.
Possible Causes

(G13) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND OR OPEN/HIGH RESISTANCE
(G14) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUNDOR OPEN/HIGH RESISTANCE
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR DTC B1D56ADJUSTABLE PEDAL SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW

NOTE: This DTC must be active for the results of this test to be valid.
With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs.
Cycle the ignition switch from off to on.
Cycle the Adjustable Pedals Switch forward and rearward.
With the scan tool, read DTCs.
Does the scan tool display: B1D56ADJUSTABLE PEDAL SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2
AND TESTING)
2. CHECK CONNECTOR/TERMINAL FOR DAMAGE

NOTE: Check all terminals for broken, bent, pushed out, or corroded terminals.
Inspect the Seat Memory Module harness connector, Adjustable Pedals Sensor, and Adjustable Pedals Sensor har-
ness connector.
Is the Adjustable Pedals Sensor or any of the connectors/terminals damaged?
No >> Go To 3
3. (G13) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT VOLTAGE

Disconnect the Seat Memory Module harness connector.
Disconnect the Adjustable Pedals Sensor harness connector.
Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, probe the (G13) Adjust-
able Pedals Sensor Supply circuit at the Memory Seat Module C1 har-
ness connector.
Does the test light illuminate brightly?
Yes >> Repair the (G13) Adjustable Pedals Sensor Supply circuit
for a short to ground.
Perform APS VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 5 -
No >> Go To 4
4. (G13) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Connect a jumper wire between the (G13) Adjustable Pedals Sensor
Supply circuit and ground at the Adjustable Pedal Sensor harness con-
nector.
able Pedals Sensor Supply circuit at the Memory Seat Module C1 har-
ness connector.
Does the test light illuminate brightly
Yes >> Go To 5
No >> Repair the (G13) Adjustable Pedals Sensor Supply circuit
for an open.
5. (G14) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT OPEN

able Pedals Sensor Signal circuit at the Memory Seat Module C1 har-
ness connector.
Yes >> Repair the (G14) Adjustable Pedals Sensor Signal circuit for
a short to ground.
No >> Go To 6
6. (G14) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Connect a jumper wire between the (G14) Adjustable Pedals Sensor
Signal circuit and ground at the Adjustable Pedal Sensor harness con-
nector.
able Pedals Sensor Signal circuit at the Memory Seat Module C1 har-
ness connector.
Yes >> Go To 7
No >> Repair the (G14) Adjustable Pedals Sensor Signal circuit for
an open.
7. (G13) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Measure the voltage between the (G13) Adjustable Pedals Sensor Sup-
ply circuit and ground at the Adjustable Pedal Sensor harness connec-
tor.
Is the voltage between 4.0 and 5.0 volts?
Yes >> Go To 8
No >> Replace and reprogram the Seat Memory Module in accor-
dance with the Service Information.
8. (G14) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT VOLTAGE

Reconnect Adjustable Pedal Sensor harness connector.
Turn ignition on.
Measure the voltage of the (G14) Adjustable Pedals Sensor Signal cir-
cuit in the Seat Memory Module C1 harness connector.
Is the voltage above 0.5 volts?
Yes >> Replace the Seat Memory Module in accordance with the
No >> Replace the Adjustable Pedals Sensor in accordance with
B1D57ADJUSTABLE PEDAL SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
The Adjustable Pedal Motor is in active operation.
Set Condition:
The Memory Seat Module detects a high signal circuit voltage that is not within voltage specification from the
Adjustable Pedal Sensor.
Possible Causes

(G13) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
(G14) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. DTC IS ACTIVE
With the scan tool, select view DTCs. Record all DTC information.
Move the Adjustable Pedals Switch forward and rearward several times.
Yes >> Go To 2
AND TESTING)

Disconnect the Memory Seat Module harness connector.
Inspect the wiring harness, connectors and terminals.
Perform APS VERIFICATION TEST. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No >> Go To 3
3. (G13) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage of the (G13) Adjustable Pedals Sensor Supply cir-
cuit and ground at the Memory Seat Module C1 harness connector.
Yes >> Repair the (G13) Adjustable Pedals Sensor Supply circuit
for a short to voltage.
Perform APS VERIFICATION TEST. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES
- STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No >> Go To 4
4. (G14) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

cuit and ground at the Memory Seat Module C1 harness connector.
Yes >> Repair the (G14) Adjustable Pedals Sensor Signal circuit
No >> Go To 5
5. (G14) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT VOLTAGE

Reconnect all connectors.
cuit at the Memory Seat Module C1 harness connector.
Is the voltage below 4.0 volts?
Yes >> Replace and reprogram the Memory Seat Module in accor-
No >> Replace the Adjustable Pedals Sensor in accordance with
B1D5BADJUSTABLE PEDAL SWITCH CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
The Adjustable Pedals Switch is in active operation.
Set Condition:
The Memory Seat Module detects an activation of both pedal switches at the same time.
Possible Causes

(Q103) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SWITCH REARWARD CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(Q102) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SWITCH FORWARD CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(Q103) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SWITCH REARWARD CIRCUIT SHORT TO THE (Q102) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS
SWITCH FORWARD CIRCUIT
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SWITCH
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. DTC IS ACTIVE
Yes >> Go To 2
AND TESTING)

Disconnect the Adjustable Pedals Switch harness connector.
No >> Go To 3
3. (Q103) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SWITCH REARWARD CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, probe the (Q103)
Adjustable Pedals Switch Rearward circuit at the Memory Seat Module
C5 harness connector.
Yes >> Repair the (Q103) Adjustable Pedals Switch Rearward cir-
cuit for a short to ground.
Perform APS VERIFICATION TEST. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No >> Go To 4
4. (Q102) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SWITCH FORWARD CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, probe the (Q102)
Adjustable Pedals Switch Rearward circuit at the Memory Seat Module
Yes >> Repair the (Q102) Adjustable Pedals Switch Forward circuit
No >> Go To 5
5. (Q103) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SWITCH REARWARD CIRCUIT SHORT TO THE (Q102) ADJUSTABLE
PEDALS SWITCH FORWARD CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (Q103) Adjustable Pedals Switch
Rearward circuit and the (Q102) Adjustable Pedals Switch Forward cir-
cuit at the Memory Seat Module C5 harness connector.
cuit for a short to the (Q102) Adjustable Pedals Switch For-
ward circuit.
No >> Go To 6
6. ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SWITCH

Measure the resistance between the (Q103) Adjustable Pedals Switch Rearward circuit and (Q102) Adjustable Ped-
als Switch Forward circuit at the terminals of the Adjustable Pedals Switch harness connector.
Yes >> Replace the Adjustable Pedals Switch in accordance with the Service Information.
No >> Replace the Memory Seat Module in accordance with the Service Information.
B1D5CADJUSTABLE PEDAL SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK FORWARD

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Memory Seat Module detects that the Adjustable Pedals Switch has been activated in the forward position
for more than 50 seconds.
Possible Causes

(Q102) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SWITCH FORWARD CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(Q102) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SWITCH FORWARD CIRCUIT SHORT TO (Q101) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS
SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. DTC IS ACTIVE
Yes >> Go To 2
AND TESTING)

Wait approximately 10 seconds.
Does the status remain active for this DTC?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Replace the Adjustable Pedals Switch in accordance with the Service Information.

Inspect the Adjustable Pedals Sensor and Memory Seat Module wiring harness, connectors and terminals.
No >> Go To 4
4. (Q102) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SWITCH FORWARD CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (Q102) Adjustable
Pedals Switch Forward circuit.
No >> Go To 5
5. (Q102) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SWITCH FORWARD CIRCUIT SHORT TO (Q101) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS
Measure the resistance between the (Q102) Adjustable Pedals Switch
Forward circuit and the (Q101) Adjustable Pedals Switch Ground circuit.
for a short to the (Q101) Adjustable Pedals Switch Ground
circuit.
No >> Replace the Memory Seat Module in accordance with the
B1D5DADJUSTABLE PEDAL SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK REARWARD

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Memory Seat Module detects that the Adjustable Pedals Switch has been activated in the rearward posi-
tion for more than 50 seconds.
Possible Causes

(Q103) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SWITCH REARWARD CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(Q103) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SWITCH REARWARD CIRCUIT SHORT TO (Q101) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. DTC IS ACTIVE
With the scan tool, select view DTCs. Record all DTC and DTC Environmental data.
Yes >> Go To 2
AND TESTING)

Wait approximately 10 seconds.
Does the status remain active for this DTC?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Replace the Adjustable Pedals Switch in accordance with the Service Information.

Inspect the Adjustable Pedals Switch and Memory Seat Module wiring harness, connectors and terminals.
No >> Go To 4
4. (Q103) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SWITCH REARWARD CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (Q103) Adjustable
Pedals Switch Rearward circuit.
No >> Go To 5
5. (Q103) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SWITCH REARWARD CIRCUIT SHORT TO (Q101) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS
Measure the resistance between the (Q103) Adjustable Pedals Switch Rearward circuit and the (Q101) Adjustable
Pedals Switch Ground circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (Q103) Adjustable Pedals Switch Rearward circuit for a short to the (Q101) Adjustable Ped-
als Switch Ground circuit.
No >> Replace the Memory Seat Module in accordance with the Service Information.
B1D67ADJUSTABLE PEDAL CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
The Adjustable Pedals Motor is in active operation.
Set Condition:
The Memory Seat Module detects that the Adjustable Pedals Motor has been activated for a time period and
has not spun with three motor direction commands.
Possible Causes

(P205) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD CIRCUIT OPEN
(P206) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR REARWARD CIRCUIT OPEN
(G914) RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS ASSEMBLY
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. DTC IS ACTIVE
With the scan tool, select view DTCs. Record all DTC and DTC Environmental data.
Yes >> Go To 2
AND TESTING)

Disconnect the Adjustable Pedals Motor harness connector.
No >> Go To 3
3. ADJUSTABLE PEDALS ASSEMBLY

Inspect the Adjustable Pedals Assembly for a condition that would cause the motor to stick or stall.
Yes >> Replace the Adjustable Pedals Assembly in accordance with the Service Information.
No >> Go To 4
4. (P205) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE

Connect a jumper wire between the (P205) Adjustable Pedals Motor
Forward circuit and ground at the Adjustable Pedals Motor harness
connector.
Adjustable Pedals Motor Forward circuit at the Memory Seat Module
harness connector.
Yes >> Go To 5
No >> Repair the (P205) Adjustable Pedals Motor Forward circuit
for an open circuit or high resistance.
5. (P206) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR REARWARD CIRCUIT OPEN CIRCUIT OR HIGH RESISTANCE
Connect the jumper wire between the (P206) Adjustable Pedals Motor
Rearward circuit and ground at the Adjustable Pedals Motor harness
connector.
Adjustable Pedals Motor Rearward circuit at the Memory Seat Module
harness connector.
Yes >> Go To 6
No >> Repair the (P206) Adjustable Pedals Motor Rearward circuit
for an open.
6. (G914) SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE

Connect the jumper wire between the (G914) Sensor Return circuit and
ground at the Adjustable Pedals Motor harness connector.
Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, check the (G914) Sen-
sor Return circuit at the Memory Seat Module harness connector.
Yes >> Go To 7
No >> Repair the (G914) Sensor Return circuit for an open.
7. ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR

Disconnect the Adjustable Pedals Motor harness connector.
Measure the resistance between the (P205) Adjustable Pedals Motor
Forward circuit and the (P206) Adjustable Pedals Motor Rearward cir-
cuit at the terminals of the Adjustable Pedals Motor.
Yes >> Replace and reprogram the Memory Seat Module in accor-
No >> Replace the Adjustable Pedals Motor in accordance with
ABS INTERMITTENT CONDITION

Diagnostic Test
1. PERFORM ABS INTERMITTENT CONDITION TEST

NOTE: The conditions that set the DTC are not present at this time. The following list may help in identi-
fying the intermittent condition.
Refer to any Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) that may apply.
Review the scan tool Environmental Data (EV Data). If possible, try to duplicate the conditions under which the DTC
set.
Visually inspect the related wire harness. Disconnect all the related harness connectors. Look for any chafed,
pierced, pinched, partially broken wires and broken, bent, pushed out, or corroded terminals.
Wiggle the wires while checking for shorts and open circuits.
Perform a voltage drop test on the related circuits between the suspected faulty component and the Anti-Lock Brake
Module.
Inspect and clean all PCM, ABS, engine, and chassis grounds that are related to the most current DTC.
If numerous trouble codes were set, use a wire schematic and look for any common ground or supply circuits
For any Relay DTCs, actuate the Relay with the scan tool and wiggle the related wire harness to try to interrupt the
actuation.
Use the scan tool to perform a System Test if one applies to failing component.
A co-pilot, data recorder, and/or lab scope should be used to help diagnose intermittent conditions.
Were any problems found during the above inspections?
Yes >> Perform the necessary repairs.
C100ALEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When the Left Front Wheel Speed Sensor circuit fails the diagnostic test.
Possible Causes
WIRING HARNESS, TERMINAL, CONNECTOR DAMAGE

(B9) LEFT FRONT WSS 12 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE, GROUND, OR OPEN
(B8) LEFT FRONT WSS SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE, GROUND, OR OPEN
(B8) LEFT FRONT WSS SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (B9) LEFT FRONT WSS 12 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT
LEFT FRONT WSS
ANTI-LOCK BRAKES MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR DTC C100ALEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT

NOTE: The Anti-Lock Brake Module must sense ALL 4 wheels at 12 km/h (7.5 mph) before it will extinguish
the ABS indicators.
Does the scan tool display: C100ALEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Refer to the INTERMITTENT CONDITION diagnostic procedure.

Inspect the Anti-Lock Brake Module harness connector, Left Front WSS, and Left Front WSS harness connector.
Is the Left Front WSS or any of the connectors/terminals damaged?
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK (B9) LEFT FRONT WSS 12 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT VOLTAGE

Disconnect the Left Front WSS harness connector.
Measure the voltage of the (B9) Left Front WSS 12 Volt Supply circuit.
Yes >> Go To 6
No >> Go To 4
4. CHECK (B9) LEFT FRONT WSS SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Disconnect the Left Front WSS harness connector.
Disconnect the Anti-Lock Brake Module harness connector.
Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, probe the (B9) Left
Front WSS Supply circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (B9) Left Front WSS Supply circuit for a short to
ground.
No >> Go To 5
5. CHECK (B9) LEFT FRONT WSS SUPPLY CIRCUIT OPEN

Connect a jumper wire between ground and the (B9) Left Front WSS
Supply circuit in the Anti-Lock Brakes Module harness connector.
Yes >> Replace the Anti-Lock Brakes Module in accordance with
No >> Repair the (B9) Left Front WSS Supply circuit for an open.
6. CHECK (B8) LEFT FRONT WSS SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Front WSS Signal circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (B8) Left Front WSS Signal circuit for a short to
ground.
No >> Go To 7
7. CHECK (B8) LEFT FRONT WSS SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN

Connect a jumper wire between ground and the (B8) Left Front WSS
Signal circuit in the Anti-Lock Brakes Module harness connector.
Yes >> Go To 8
No >> Repair the (B8) Left Front WSS Signal circuit for an open.
8. CHECK (B8) LEFT FRONT WSS SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Remove all jumper wires.
Measure the voltage between the (B8) Left Front WSS Signal circuit
and ground.
Is the voltage above one volt?
Yes >> Repair the (B8) Left Front WSS Signal circuit for a short to
voltage.
No >> Go To 9
9. CHECK (B8) LEFT FRONT WSS SIGNAL CIRCUIT AND (B9) LEFT FRONT WSS SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORT
TOGETHER
Measure the resistance between the (B8) Left Front WSS Signal circuit
and the (B9) Left Front WSS Supply circuit.
Is the resistance above 5.0 ohms?
Yes >> Go To 10
No >> Repair the (B8) Left Front WSS Signal circuit and the (B9)
Left Front WSS Supply circuit for a short together.
10. LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR

Replace the Left Front Wheel Speed Sensor in accordance with the Service Information.
CAUTION: Ensure brake capability is available before road testing.
Road test the vehicle over 40 km/h (25 m.p.h.).
NOTE: Vehicle must be driven above 40 km/h (25 m.p.h.) for set conditions to be meet.
With the scan tool, read ABS DTCs.
the ABS indicators.
Did DTC C100ALEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT reset?
Yes >> Replace the Anti-Lock Brakes Module in accordance with the Service Information.
C1011-LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL ERRATIC PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When the Left Front WSS Signal is intermittently missing a vehicle speed above 40 kph (25 mph) or erratic
wheel speed signal during acceleration or sensed wheel speed is different from other wheels.
Possible Causes
LEFT FRONT WSS LOOSE B8, B9 CIRCUITS/CONNECTOR/TERMINAL DAMAGE

LEFT FRONT TONE WHEEL DAMAGE
LEFT FRONT WHEEL BEARING DAMAGE
IMPROPER LEFT FRONT TIRE PRESSURE/MISMATCHED TIRES
LEFT FRONT WSS
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR DTC C1011-LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL ERRATIC PERFORMANCE
NOTE: If DTC C100A Left Front Wheel Speed Sensor Circuit is present it must be repaired before continu-
ing.
the ABS indicators.
Does the scan tool display: C1011-LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL ERRATIC PERFOR-
MANCE?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 2
2. CHECK WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNALS

With the scan tool, monitor and graph ALL the WSS speeds and compare graph while an assistant drives the vehi-
cle.
NOTE: If graph shows periodic dropouts pay close attention to the tone wheel.
Slowly accelerate as straight as possible from a stop to 40 km/h (25 m.p.h.).
Is the Left Front WSS speed showing 0 km/h (0 m.p.h.) or not matching other wheel speeds?
Yes >> Go To 3
3. CHECK FOR IMPROPER LEFT FRONT TIRE PRESSURE/MISMATCHED TIRES

Check and adjust the Left Front Tire pressure.
Check and adjust all other tire pressures.
Inspect for mismatched tires on vehicle.
Is the Left Front Tire improperly inflated or mismatched tires on vehicle?
Yes >> Repair as necessary
No >> Go To 4
4. CHECK LEFT FRONT WSS LOOSENESS, INSPECT B8, B9 CIRCUITS/TERMINALS FOR DAMAGE
NOTE: Check all terminals for broken, bent, pushed out, or corroded terminals
Inspect the Anti-Lock Brake Module harness connector, Left Front WSS, and Left Front WSS harness connector
Inspect the Left Front WSS for looseness, excessive corrosion and not properly fastened.
Inspect the (B8) Left Front WSS Signal and (B9) Left Front WSS Supply circuits between the Left Front WSS and
Anti-Lock Brake Module for damage.
Is the Left Front WSS loose or any of the wiring/connectors/terminals damaged?
No >> Go To 5
5. CHECK LEFT FRONT TONE WHEEL FOR DAMAGE

Inspect the Left Front Tone Wheel for damage, missing teeth, cracks, or looseness.
NOTE: The Tone Wheel teeth should be perfectly square, not bent, or nicked.
Is the Left Front Tone Wheel damaged?
No >> Go To 6
6. CHECK LEFT FRONT WHEEL BEARING FOR DAMAGE

Inspect the Left Front wheel bearing for excessive runout or clearance.
NOTE: Refer to the appropriate service information, if necessary, for procedures or specifications.
Is the Left Front Wheel Bearing Damaged?
No >> Go To 7

the ABS indicators.
Did DTC C1011-LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL ERRATIC PERFORMANCE reset?
C1014-LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED COMPARATIVE PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When the Left Front WSS reading is different from the readings received from the other WSSs at a vehicle
speed above 40 kph (25 mph). The Anti-Lock Brake Module compares WSS readings from side-to-side on an
axle and front-to-rear.
Possible Causes
LEFT FRONT WSS LOOSE B8, B9 CIRCUITS/CONNECTOR/TERMINAL DAMAGE

IMPROPER LEFT FRONT TIRE PRESSURE/MISMATCHED TIRES
LEFT FRONT TONE WHEEL/BEARING DAMAGE
LEFT FRONT WSS
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR DTC C1014-LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED COMPARATIVE PERFORMANCE

the ABS indicators.
Does the scan tool display: C1014-LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED COMPARATIVE PERFORMANCE?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 2

cle.
Is the Left Front WSS speed showing 0 km/h (0 m.p.h.) or not matching other wheel speeds?
Yes >> Go To 3
3. CHECK FOR IMPROPER LEFT FRONT TIRE PRESSURE/MISMATCHED TIRES

Check and adjust the Left Front Tire pressure.
Is the Left Front Tire improperly inflated or mismatched tires on vehicle?
No >> Go To 4
4. CHECK LEFT FRONT WSS LOOSENESS, INSPECT B8, B9 CIRCUITS/TERMINALS FOR DAMAGE
Inspect the Anti-Lock Brake Module harness connector, Left Front WSS, and Left Front WSS harness connector
Inspect the Left Front WSS for looseness, excessive corrosion and not properly fastened.
Inspect the (B8) Left Front WSS Signal and (B9) Left Front WSS Supply circuits between the Left Front WSS and
Is the Left Front WSS loose or any of the wiring/connectors/terminals damaged?
No >> Go To 5
5. CHECK LEFT FRONT TONE WHEEL FOR DAMAGE

Inspect the Left Front Tone Wheel for damage, missing teeth, cracks, or looseness.
Is the Left Front Tone Wheel damaged?
No >> Go To 6

the ABS indicators.
Did DTC C1011-LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL ERRATIC PERFORMANCE reset?
C1015RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If the Right Front Wheel Speed Sensor circuit fails the diagnostic test.
Possible Causes

(B7) RIGHT FRONT WSS 12 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE, GROUND, OR OPEN
(B6) RIGHT FRONT WSS SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE, GROUND, OR OPEN
(B6) RIGHT FRONT WSS SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (B7) RIGHT FRONT WSS 12 VOLT SUPPLY
CIRCUIT
RIGHT FRONT WSS
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR DTC C1015RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT

the ABS indicators.
Does the scan tool display: C1015RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT?
Yes >> Go To 2

Inspect the Anti-Lock Brake Module harness connector, Right Front WSS, and Right Front WSS harness connector.
Is the Right Front WSS or any of the connectors/terminals damaged?
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK (B7) RIGHT FRONT WSS 12 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT VOLTAGE

Disconnect the Right Front WSS harness connector.
Measure the voltage of the (B7) Right Front WSS 12 Volt Supply circuit.
Yes >> Go To 6
No >> Go To 4
4. CHECK (B7) RIGHT FRONT WSS 12 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect the Right Front WSS harness connector.
Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, probe the (B7) Right
Yes >> Repair the (B7) Right Front WSS Supply circuit for a short
to ground.
No >> Go To 5
5. CHECK (B7) RIGHT FRONT WSS 12 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Connect a jumper wire between ground and the (B7) Right Front WSS
No >> Repair the (B7) Right Front WSS Supply circuit for an
open.
6. CHECK (B6) RIGHT FRONT WSS SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Yes >> Repair the (B6) Right Front WSS Signal circuit for a short
to ground.
No >> Go To 7
7. CHECK (B6) RIGHT FRONT WSS SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN

Connect a jumper wire between ground and the (B6) Right Front WSS
Yes >> Go To 8
No >> Repair the (B6) Right Front WSS Signal circuit for an open.
8. CHECK (B6) RIGHT FRONT WSS SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Measure the voltage between the (B6) Right Front WSS Signal circuit
and ground.
Yes >> Repair the (B6) Right Front WSS Signal circuit for a short
to voltage.
No >> Go To 9
9. CHECK (B6) RIGHT FRONT WSS SIGNAL CIRCUIT AND (B7) RIGHT FRONT WSS 12 VOLT SUPPLY
CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER
Measure the resistance between the (B6) Right Front WSS Signal cir-
cuit and the (B7) Right Front WSS Supply circuit.
Yes >> Go To 10
No >> Repair the (B6) Right Front WSS Signal circuit and the (B7)
Right Front WSS Supply circuit for a short together.
10. RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR

Replace the Right Front Wheel Speed Sensor in accordance with the Service Information.
the ABS indicators.
Did DTC C1015RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT reset?
C101C-RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL ERRATIC PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When the Right Front WSS Signal is intermittently missing a vehicle speed above 25mph (40 kph) or erratic
Possible Causes
RIGHT FRONT WSS LOOSE B6, B7 CIRCUITS/CONNECTOR/TERMINAL DAMAGE

RIGHT FRONT TONE WHEEL DAMAGE
RIGHT FRONT WHEEL BEARING DAMAGE
IMPROPER RIGHT FRONT TIRE PRESSURE/MISMATCHED TIRES
RIGHT FRONT WSS
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR DTC C101C-RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL ERRATIC PERFORMANCE
NOTE: If DTC C1015Right Front Wheel Speed Sensor Circuit is present it must be repaired before continu-
ing.
the ABS indicators.
Does the scan tool display: C101C-RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL ERRATIC PERFOR-
MANCE?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 2

cle.
Is the Right Front WSS speed showing 0 km/h (0 m.p.h.) or not matching other wheel speeds?
Yes >> Go To 3
3. CHECK FOR IMPROPER RIGHT FRONT TIRE PRESSURE/MISMATCHED TIRES

Check and adjust the Right Front Tire pressure.
Is the Right Front Tire improperly inflated or mismatched tires on vehicle?
No >> Go To 4
4. CHECK RIGHT FRONT WSS LOOSENESS, INSPECT B6, B7 CIRCUITS/TERMINALS FOR DAMAGE
Inspect the Anti-Lock Brake Module harness connector, Right Front WSS, and Right Front WSS harness connector
Inspect the Right Front WSS for looseness, excessive corrosion and not properly fastened.
Inspect the (B6) Right Front WSS Signal and (B7) Right Front WSS Supply circuits between the Right Front WSS
and Anti-Lock Brake Module for damage.
Is the Right Front WSS loose or any of the wiring/connectors/terminals damaged?
No >> Go To 5
5. CHECK RIGHT FRONT TONE WHEEL FOR DAMAGE

Inspect the Right Front Tone Wheel for damage, missing teeth, cracks, or looseness.
Is the Right Front Tone Wheel damaged?
No >> Go To 6
6. CHECK RIGHT FRONT WHEEL BEARING FOR DAMAGE

Inspect the Right Front wheel bearing for excessive runout or clearance.
Is the Right Front Wheel Bearing Damaged?
No >> Go To 7

the ABS indicators.
Did DTC C101C-RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL ERRATIC PERFORMANCE reset?
C101F-RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED COMPARATIVE PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When the Right Front WSS reading is different from the readings received from the other WSSs at a vehicle
Possible Causes
RIGHT FRONT WSS LOOSE B6, B7 CIRCUITS/CONNECTOR/TERMINAL DAMAGE

IMPROPER RIGHT FRONT TIRE PRESSURE/MISMATCHED TIRES
RIGHT FRONT TONE WHEEL/BEARING DAMAGE
RIGHT FRONT WSS
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR DTC C101F-RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED COMPARATIVE PERFORMANCE

the ABS indicators.
Does the scan tool display: C101F-RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED COMPARATIVE PERFORMANCE?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 2

cle.
Is the Right Front WSS speed showing 0 km/h (0 m.p.h.) or not matching other wheel speeds?
Yes >> Go To 3
3. CHECK FOR IMPROPER RIGHT FRONT TIRE PRESSURE/MISMATCHED TIRES

Check and adjust the Right Front Tire pressure.
Is the Right Front Tire improperly inflated or mismatched tires on vehicle?
No >> Go To 4
4. CHECK RIGHT FRONT WSS LOOSENESS, INSPECT B6, B7 CIRCUITS/TERMINALS FOR DAMAGE
Inspect the Anti-Lock Brake Module harness connector, Right Front WSS, and Right Front WSS harness connector
Inspect the Right Front WSS for looseness, excessive corrosion and not properly fastened.
Inspect the (B6) Right Front WSS Signal and (B7) Right Front WSS Supply circuits between the Right Front WSS
Is the Right Front WSS loose or any of the wiring/connectors/terminals damaged?
No >> Go To 5
5. CHECK RIGHT FRONT TONE WHEEL FOR DAMAGE

Inspect the Right Front Tone Wheel for damage, missing teeth, cracks, or looseness.
Is the Right Front Tone Wheel damaged?
No >> Go To 6

the ABS indicators.
Did DTC C101F-RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED COMPARATIVE PERFORMANCE reset?
C1020LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If the Left Rear Wheel Speed Sensor circuit fails the diagnostic test.
Possible Causes

(B4) LEFT REAR WSS 12 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE, GROUND, OR OPEN
(B3) LEFT REAR WSS SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE, GROUND, OR OPEN
(B3) LEFT REAR WSS SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (B4) LEFT REAR WSS 12 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT
LEFT REAR WSS
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR DTC C1020LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT

the ABS indicators.
Does the scan tool display: C1020LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT?
Yes >> Go To 2

Inspect the Anti-Lock Brake Module harness connector, Left Rear WSS, and Left Rear WSS harness connector.
Is the Left Rear WSS or any of the connectors/terminals damaged?
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK (B4) LEFT REAR WSS 12 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT VOLTAGE

Disconnect the Left Rear WSS harness connector.
Measure the voltage of the (B4) Left Rear WSS 12 Volt Supply circuit.
Yes >> Go To 6
No >> Go To 4
4. CHECK (B4) LEFT REAR WSS 12 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect the Left Rear WSS harness connector.
Rear WSS Supply circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (B4) Left Rear WSS Supply circuit for a short to
ground.
No >> Go To 5
5. CHECK (B4) LEFT REAR WSS 12 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Connect a jumper wire between ground and the (B4) Left Rear WSS
No >> Repair the (B4) Left Rear WSS Supply circuit for an open.
6. CHECK (B3) LEFT REAR WSS SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Rear WSS Signal circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (B3) Left Rear WSS Signal circuit for a short to
ground.
No >> Go To 7
7. CHECK (B3) LEFT REAR WSS SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Connect a jumper wire between ground and the (B3) Left Rear WSS
Yes >> Go To 8
No >> Repair the (B3) Left Rear WSS Signal circuit for an open.
8. CHECK (B3) LEFT REAR WSS SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage between the (B3) Left Rear WSS Signal circuit
and ground.
Yes >> Repair the (B3) Left Rear WSS Signal circuit for a short to
voltage.
No >> Go To 9
9. CHECK (B3) LEFT REAR WSS SIGNAL CIRCUIT AND (B4) LEFT REAR WSS 12 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT
SHORTED TOGETHER
Measure the resistance between the (B3) Left Rear WSS Signal circuit
and the (B4) Left Rear WSS Supply circuit.
Yes >> Go To 10
No >> Repair the (B3) Left Rear WSS Signal circuit and the (B4)
Left Rear WSS Supply circuit for a short together.
10. LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR

Replace the Left Rear Wheel Speed Sensor in accordance with the Service Information.
the ABS indicators.
Did DTC C1020LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT reset?
C1027-LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL ERRATIC PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When the Left Rear WSS Signal is intermittently missing a vehicle speed above 25mph (40 kph) or erratic
Possible Causes
LEFT REAR WSS AIR GAP FAULT

LEFT REAR WSS LOOSE B3, B4 CIRCUITS/CONNECTOR/TERMINAL DAMAGE
LEFT REAR TONE WHEEL DAMAGE
LEFT REAR WHEEL BEARING DAMAGE
IMPROPER LEFT REAR TIRE PRESSURE/MISMATCHED TIRES
LEFT REAR WSS
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR DTC C1027-LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL ERRATIC PERFORMANCE
the ABS indicators.
Does the scan tool display: C1027-LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL ERRATIC PERFOR-
MANCE?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 2
2. CHECK LEFT REAR WSS AIR GAP

Using a feeler gauge, measure the Left Rear WSS air gap.
Is the Left Rear WSS air gap within specifications?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Repair as necessary.

cle.
Is the Left Rear WSS speed showing 0 km/h (0 m.p.h.) or not matching other wheel speeds?
Yes >> Go To 4
4. CHECK FOR IMPROPER LEFT REAR TIRE PRESSURE/MISMATCHED TIRES

Check and adjust the Left Rear Tire pressure.
Is the Left Rear Tire improperly inflated or mismatched tires on vehicle?
No >> Go To 5
5. CHECK LEFT REAR WSS LOOSENESS, INSPECT B4, B5 CIRCUITS/TERMINALS FOR DAMAGE
Inspect the Anti-Lock Brake Module harness connector, Left Rear WSS, and Left Rear WSS harness connector
Inspect the Left Rear WSS for looseness, excessive corrosion and not properly fastened.
Inspect the (B3) Left Rear WSS Signal and (B4) Left Rear WSS Supply circuits between the Left Rear WSS and
Is the Left Rear WSS loose or any of the wiring/connectors/terminals damaged?
No >> Go To 6
6. CHECK LEFT REAR TONE WHEEL FOR DAMAGE

Inspect the Left Rear Tone Wheel for damage, missing teeth, cracks, or looseness.
Is the Left Rear Tone Wheel damaged?
No >> Go To 7
7. CHECK LEFT REAR WHEEL BEARING FOR DAMAGE

Inspect the Left Rear wheel bearing for excessive runout or clearance.
Is the Left Rear Wheel Bearing Damaged?
No >> Go To 8

the ABS indicators.
Did DTC C1027-LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL ERRATIC PERFORMANCE reset?
C102A-LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED COMPARATIVE PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When the Left Rear WSS reading is different from the readings received from the other WSSs at a vehicle
Possible Causes
LEFT REAR WSS LOOSE B3, B4 CIRCUITS/CONNECTOR/TERMINAL DAMAGE

IMPROPER LEFT REAR TIRE PRESSURE/MISMATCHED TIRES
LEFT REAR TONE WHEEL DAMAGE
LEFT REAR WSS
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR DTC C102A-LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED COMPARATIVE PERFORMANCE

the ABS indicators.
Does the scan tool display: C102A-LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED COMPARATIVE PERFORMANCE?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 2

cle.
Is the Left Rear WSS speed showing 0 km/h (0 m.p.h.) or not matching other wheel speeds?
Yes >> Go To 3
3. CHECK FOR IMPROPER LEFT REAR TIRE PRESSURE/MISMATCHED TIRES

Check and adjust the Left Rear Tire pressure.
Is the Left Rear Tire improperly inflated or mismatched tires on vehicle?
No >> Go To 4
4. CHECK LEFT REAR WSS LOOSENESS, INSPECT B3, B4 CIRCUITS/TERMINALS FOR DAMAGE
Inspect the Anti-Lock Brake Module harness connector, Left Rear WSS, and Left Rear WSS harness connector
Inspect the Left Rear WSS for looseness, excessive corrosion and not properly fastened.
Inspect the (B3) Left Rear WSS Signal and (B4) Left Rear WSS Supply circuits between the Left Rear WSS and
Is the Left Rear WSS loose or any of the wiring/connectors/terminals damaged?
No >> Go To 5
5. CHECK LEFT REAR TONE WHEEL FOR DAMAGE

Inspect the Left Rear Tone Wheel for damage, missing teeth, cracks, or looseness.
Is the Left Rear Tone Wheel damaged?
No >> Go To 6

the ABS indicators.
Did DTC C102A-LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED COMPARATIVE PERFORMANCE reset?
C102BRIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If the Right Rear Wheel Speed Sensor circuit fails the diagnostic test.
Possible Causes

(B2) RIGHT REAR WSS 12 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE, GROUND, OR OPEN
(B1) RIGHT REAR WSS SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE, GROUND, OR OPEN
(B1) RIGHT REAR WSS SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (B2) RIGHT REAR WSS 12 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT
RIGHT REAR WSS
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR DTC C102BRIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT

the ABS indicators.
Does the scan tool display: C102BRIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT?
Yes >> Go To 2

Inspect the Anti-Lock Brake Module harness connector, Right Rear WSS, and Right Rear WSS harness connector.
Is the Right Rear WSS or any of the connectors/terminals damaged?
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK (B2) RIGHT REAR WSS 12 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT VOLTAGE

Disconnect the Right Rear WSS harness connector.
Measure the voltage of the (B2) Right Rear WSS 12 Volt Supply circuit.
Yes >> Go To 6
No >> Go To 4
4. CHECK (B2) RIGHT REAR WSS 12 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect the Right Rear WSS harness connector.
Yes >> Repair the (B2) Right Rear WSS Supply circuit for a short
to ground.
No >> Go To 5
5. CHECK (B2) RIGHT REAR WSS 12 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Connect a jumper wire between ground and the (B2) Right Rear WSS
No >> Repair the (B2) Right Rear WSS Supply circuit for an open.
6. CHECK (B1) RIGHT REAR WSS SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Yes >> Repair the (B1) Right Rear WSS Signal circuit for a short to
ground.
No >> Go To 7
7. CHECK (B1) RIGHT REAR WSS SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Connect a jumper wire between ground and the (B1) Right Rear WSS
Yes >> Go To 8
No >> Repair the (B1) Right Rear WSS Signal circuit for an open.
8. CHECK (B1) RIGHT REAR WSS SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage between the (B1) Right Rear WSS Signal circuit
and ground.
Yes >> Repair the (B1) Right Rear WSS Signal circuit for a short to
voltage.
No >> Go To 9
9. CHECK (B1) RIGHT REAR WSS SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO (B2) RIGHT REAR WSS 12 VOLT
SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (B1) Right Rear WSS Signal cir-
cuit and the (B2) Right Rear WSS Supply circuit.
Yes >> Go To 10
No >> Repair the (B1) Right Rear WSS Signal circuit and the (B2)
Right Rear WSS Supply circuit for a short together.
10. RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR

Replace the Right Rear Wheel Speed Sensor in accordance with the Service Information.
the ABS indicators.
Did DTC C102BRIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT reset?
C1032-RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL ERRATIC PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When the Right Rear WSS Signal is intermittently missing a vehicle speed above 25mph (40 kph) or erratic
Possible Causes
RIGHT REAR WSS AIR GAP FAULT

RIGHT REAR WSS LOOSE B1, B2 CIRCUITS/CONNECTOR/TERMINAL DAMAGE
RIGHT REAR TONE WHEEL DAMAGE
RIGHT REAR WHEEL BEARING DAMAGE
IMPROPER RIGHT REAR TIRE PRESSURE/MISMATCHED TIRES
RIGHT REAR WSS
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR DTC C1032-RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL ERRATIC PERFORMANCE
the ABS indicators.
Does the scan tool display: C1032-RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL ERRATIC PERFOR-
MANCE?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECK RIGHT REAR WSS AIR GAP

Using a feeler gauge, measure the Right Rear WSS air gap.
Is the Right Rear WSS air gap within specifications?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Repair as necessary.

cle.
Is the Right Rear WSS speed showing 0 km/h (0 m.p.h.) or not matching other wheel speeds?
Yes >> Go To 4
4. CHECK FOR IMPROPER RIGHT REAR TIRE PRESSURE/MISMATCHED TIRES

Check and adjust the Right Rear Tire pressure.
Is the Right Rear Tire improperly inflated or mismatched tires on vehicle?
No >> Go To 5
5. CHECK RIGHT REAR WSS LOOSENESS, INSPECT B1, B2 CIRCUITS/TERMINALS FOR DAMAGE
Inspect the Anti-Lock Brake Module harness connector, Right Rear WSS, and Right Rear WSS harness connector
Inspect the Right Rear WSS for looseness, excessive corrosion and not properly fastened.
Inspect the (B1) Right Rear WSS Signal and (B2) Right Rear WSS Supply circuits between the Right Rear WSS
Is the Right Rear WSS loose or any of the wiring/connectors/terminals damaged?
No >> Go To 6
6. CHECK RIGHT REAR TONE WHEEL FOR DAMAGE

Inspect the Right Rear Tone Wheel for damage, missing teeth, cracks, or looseness.
Is the Right Rear Tone Wheel damaged?
No >> Go To 7
7. CHECK RIGHT REAR WHEEL BEARING FOR DAMAGE

Inspect the Right Rear wheel bearing for excessive runout or clearance.
Is the Right Rear Wheel Bearing Damaged?
No >> Go To 8

the ABS indicators.
Did DTC C1032-RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL ERRATIC PERFORMANCE reset?
C1035-RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED COMPARATIVE PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When the Right Rear WSS reading is different from the readings received from the other WSSs at a vehicle
Possible Causes
RIGHT REAR WSS LOOSE B1, B2 CIRCUITS/CONNECTOR/TERMINAL DAMAGE

IMPROPER RIGHT REAR TIRE PRESSURE/MISMATCHED TIRES
RIGHT REAR TONE WHEEL DAMAGE
RIGHT REAR WSS
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR DTC C1035-RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED COMPARATIVE PERFORMANCE

the ABS indicators.
Does the scan tool display: C1035-RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED COMPARATIVE PERFORMANCE?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 2

cle.
Is the Right Rear WSS speed showing 0 km/h (0 m.p.h.) or not matching other wheel speeds?
Yes >> Go To 3
3. CHECK FOR IMPROPER RIGHT REAR TIRE PRESSURE/MISMATCHED TIRES

Check and adjust the Right Rear Tire pressure.
Is the Right Rear Tire improperly inflated or mismatched tires on vehicle?
No >> Go To 4
4. CHECK RIGHT REAR WSS LOOSENESS, INSPECT B1, B2 CIRCUITS/TERMINALS FOR DAMAGE
Inspect the Anti-Lock Brake Module harness connector, Right Rear WSS, and Right Rear WSS harness connector
Inspect the Right Rear WSS for looseness, excessive corrosion and not properly fastened.
Inspect the (B1) Right Rear WSS Signal and (B2) Right Rear WSS Supply circuits between the Right Rear WSS
Is the Right Rear WSS loose or any of the wiring/connectors/terminals damaged?
No >> Go To 5
5. CHECK RIGHT REAR TONE WHEEL FOR DAMAGE

Inspect the Right Rear Tone Wheel for damage, missing teeth, cracks, or looseness.
Is the Right Rear Tone Wheel damaged?
No >> Go To 6

the ABS indicators.
Did DTC C1035-RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED COMPARATIVE PERFORMANCE reset?
C1041-LEFT FRONT TONE WHEEL PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When the Anti-Lock Brake Module detects periodic drops of a WSS signal.
Possible Causes
LEFT FRONT TONE WHEEL
DIRTY TONE WHEEL/SENSOR
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR A DTC C1041-LEFT FRONT TONE WHEEL PERFORMANCE

Record DTC and Freeze Frame information.
With the scan tool, erase DTCs.
Test drive the vehicle in a straight line to 40 km/h (25 mph).
Does the scan tool display: C1041-LEFT FRONT TONE WHEEL PERFORMANCE?
Yes >> Replace the Left Front Tone Wheel in accordance with the Service Information.
C1042-RIGHT FRONT TONE WHEEL PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
RIGHT FRONT TONE WHEEL/BEARING DAMAGE
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR A DTC C1042-RIGHT FRONT TONE WHEEL PERFORMANCE

Test drive the vehicle in a straight line to 40 Km/h (25 mph).
Does the scan tool display: C1042-RIGHT FRONT TONE WHEEL PERFORMANCE?
Yes >> Replace the Right Front Tone Wheel in accordance with the Service Information.
C1043-LEFT REAR TONE WHEEL PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
LEFT REAR TONE WHEEL/BEARING DAMAGE
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR A DTC C1043-LEFT REAR TONE WHEEL PERFORMANCE

Does the scan tool display: C1043-LEFT REAR TONE WHEEL PERFORMANCE?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECK THE LEFT REAR TONE WHEEL FOR DAMAGE

NOTE: Check the tone wheel teeth for missing teeth, cracks, or looseness. Teeth should be perfectly
square, not bent, or nicked.
Check the Left Rear Tone Wheel for damage.
Check the Left Rear Tone Wheel for dirt.
Was the tone wheel dirty?
Yes >> Clean tone wheel and sensor. Clear codes and retest.
No >> Replace the Left Rear Tone Wheel in accordance with the Service Information.
C1044-RIGHT REAR TONE WHEEL PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
RIGHT REAR TONE WHEEL/BEARING DAMAGE
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR A DTC C1044-RIGHT REAR TONE WHEEL PERFORMANCE

Does the scan tool display: C1044-RIGHT REAR TONE WHEEL PERFORMANCE?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECK THE RIGHT REAR TONE WHEEL FOR DAMAGE

NOTE: Check the tone wheel teeth for missing teeth, cracks, or looseness. Teeth should be perfectly
square, not bent, or nicked.
Check the Right Rear Tone Wheel for damage.
Check the Right Rear Tone Wheel for dirt.
Was the tone wheel dirty?
Yes >> Clean tone wheel and sensor. Clear codes and retest.
No >> Replace the Right Rear Tone Wheel in accordance with the Service Information.
C1046LEFT FRONT WHEEL PRESSURE PHASE MONITORING

When Monitored:
During active ABS control.
Set Condition:
If the Anti-Lock Brakes Module detects a pressure reduction phase and the following pressure hold phase is
too long.
Possible Causes
LEFT FRONT TONE WHEEL/BEARING DAMAGED

WHEEL SPEED SIGNALS SWAPPED
LEFT FRONT WSS
Diagnostic Test
1. COMPARE WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNALS

WARNING: Ensure brake capability is available before road testing.
With the scan tool, monitor ALL the WSS speeds while an assistant drives the vehicle.
Does the Left Front WSS speed differ from the other WSS speeds by 8 km/h (5 m.p.h.) or show NO
speed?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Perform the ABS Intermittent Condition diagnostic procedure in this Section.
2. INSPECT TONE WHEEL/BEARING

Visually inspect the tone wheel and bearing for damage.
Check the tone wheel teeth for missing teeth, cracks, and looseness. The teeth must be perfectly square, not
bent, or nicked. Check the wheel bearing for worn/looseness.
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK WHEEL SPEED SENSOR WIRING

Check the Anti-Lock Brakes Module and Wheel Speed Sensors harness connectors for incorrectly wired connectors.
No >> Go To 4

the ABS indicators.
Did DTC C1046LEFT FRONT WHEEL PRESSURE PHASE MONITORING reset?
C1047-RIGHT FRONT WHEEL PRESSURE PHASE MONITORING

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
too long.
Possible Causes
RIGHT FRONT TONE WHEEL DAMAGED

RIGHT FRONT WSS
Diagnostic Test

Does the Right Front WSS speed differ from the other WSS speeds by 8 km/h (5 m.p.h.) or show NO
speed?
Yes >> Go To 2

No >> Go To 3

No >> Go To 4

the ABS indicators.
Did DTC C1047RIGHT FRONT WHEEL PRESSURE PHASE MONITORING reset?
C1048-LEFT REAR WHEEL PRESSURE PHASE MONITORING

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
too long.
Possible Causes
LEFT REAR TONE WHEEL/WHEEL BEARING

LEFT REAR WSS
Diagnostic Test

Does the Left Rear WSS speed differ from the other WSS speeds by 8 km/h (5 m.p.h.) or show NO
speed?
Yes >> Go To 2

No >> Go To 3

No >> Go To 4

the ABS indicators.
Did DTC C1048LEFT REAR WHEEL PRESSURE PHASE MONITORING reset?
C1049-RIGHT REAR WHEEL PRESSURE PHASE MONITORING

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When the Anti-Lock Brakes Module detects a pressure reduction phase and the following pressure hold phase
is too long.
Possible Causes
RIGHT REAR TONE WHEEL DAMAGED

RIGHT REAR WSS
Diagnostic Test

Does the Right Rear WSS speed from the other WSS speeds by 8 km/h (5 m.p.h.) or show NO speed?
Yes >> Go To 2

No >> Go To 3

No >> Go To 4

the ABS indicators.
Did DTC C1049RIGHT REAR WHEEL PRESSURE PHASE MONITORING reset?
C1073-ABS PUMP MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT

When Monitored:
When the ABS Pump Motor is activated.
Set Condition:
The ABM detects low pump motor feedback voltage with actuation of the pump motor relay.
Possible Causes
BLOWN PUMP FUSE

(A107) HIGH RESISTANCE IN B+ CIRCUITS
(Z903) HIGH RESISTANCE IN GROUND CIRCUITS
INTEGRATED CONTROL UNIT
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR A DTC C1073-ABS PUMP MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT

the ABS indicators.
Does the scan tool display: C1073-ABS PUMP MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. INSPECT RELATED WIRING HARNESS, TERMINALS, & CONNECTORS

Visually inspect the related wiring harness. Look for any pinched, chafed, pierced, and partially broken wires.
Visually inspect the related wiring harness connectors. Look for broken, bent, pushed out, and corroded terminals.
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK THE ABS PUMP MOTOR FUSED B+ FOR AN OPEN

Remove and visually inspect the ABS Pump Motor B+ fuse.
Is the ABS Pump Motor B+ fuse open?
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Go To 6
4. CHECK THE (A107) FUSED B(+) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Using a 12volt test light connected to 12volts, probe the (A107)
Fused B+ circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (A921) Fused B(+) circuit for a short to ground.
Perform ABS VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1 (Refer to 5 -
No >> Go To 5
5. CHECK THE (A107) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT

Visually inspect the (A107) Fused B(+) circuit in the wiring harness.
Look for any signs of intermittent short to ground.
Is the wiring harness OK?
Yes >> Go To 6
No >> Repair the (A921) Fused B(+) circuit for a short to ground.
Perform ABS VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1 (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
6. CHECK THE VOLTAGE ON THE (A107) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT

Measure the voltage of the (A107) Fused B(+) circuit in the Anti-Lock
Brake Module harness connector.
Is the voltage above 10 volts?
Yes >> Go To 7
No >> Repair the (A107) Fused B(+) circuit for an open.
7. CHECK THE (Z903) AND (Z107) GROUND CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (Z903) Ground circuit between the Anti-
Lock Brake Module harness connector and ground
Yes >> Replace the ICU per service information.
No >> Repair the high resistance in the affected circuit.
C1078TIRE REVOLUTIONS RANGE PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
A comparison between the tire circumference value contained in the EEPROM and the tire circumference
value received on the CAN bus. Programmed value for tire size is not within acceptable range.
Possible Causes
INCORRECT VALUE PROGRAMMED INTO FCM
Diagnostic Test
1. VERIFY FCM IS PROGRAMMED WITH CORRECT TIRE/WHEEL INFORMATION

Verify the correct Tire/wheel information is programmed in the FCM.
Is the correct value programmed in the FCM?
Yes >> Replace the Front Control Module in accordance with service information.
No >> Program the correct Tire/Wheel information in the FCM.
C107CBRAKE PEDAL SWITCH 1/2 STUCK

When Monitored:
With the ignition on, but not during first run.
Or, with low supply voltage.
Or, if a Pressure Sensor fault is active.
Set Condition:
If the Anti-Lock Brakes Module detects a mismatch between the Brake Test Signal (BTS) from the Pressure
Sensor and the (B15) Secondary Brake Switch Signal circuit (Diesel) or the (B15) Brake Switch No. 1 Signal
circuit (Gas).
Possible Causes

STOP LAMP RELATED DTCs OR SYMPTOMS PRESENT
MISADJUSTED PEDAL SWITCH
PRESSURE SENSOR OR VOLTAGE RELATED DTCs PRESENT
(B15) BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
(B15) BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
STOP LAMP SWITCH
Diagnostic Test
1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE

NOTE: Diagnose and repair all Pressure Sensor and Voltage related DTCs and all Stop Lamp related DTCs
and symptoms before diagnosing this DTC.
With the scan tool, read and record ABS DTCs.
With the scan tool, read and record Environmental Data (EV Data).
With the scan tool, erase ABS DTCs.
Cycle the ignition switch.
Press and release the brake pedal several times.
Does this DTC reset?
Yes >> Go To 2

No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK (B15) BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FUNCTION WHILE DEPRESSING & RELEASING
THE BRAKE PEDAL
Disconnect the Anti-Lock Brakes Module harness connector.
Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12 volts, probe the (B15) Brake
Switch No. 1 Signal circuit in the Anti-Lock Brakes Module harness con-
nector.
Depress and release the brake pedal.
Does the test light illumination toggle from off to on?
Yes >> Go To 7
No >> Go To 4
4. CHECK (B15) BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Disconnect the Stop Lamp Switch harness connector.
Measure the resistance of the (B15) Brake Switch No. 1 Signal circuit
between the Anti-Lock Brakes Module harness connector and the Stop
Lamp Switch harness connector.
Yes >> Go To 5
No >> Repair the (B15) Brake Switch No. 1 Signal circuit for an
open.
5. CHECK (B15) BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
between ground and the Anti-Lock Brakes Module harness connector.
Is the resistance below 10k ohms?
Yes >> Repair the (B15) Brake Switch No. 1 Signal circuit for a
short to ground.
No >> Go To 6
6. CHECK (B15) BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT (GAS) FOR A OPEN GROUND
Measure the resistance on the (Z940) Ground circuit and ground in the
Stop Lamp Switch harness connector.
Is the resistance below 5 ohms?
Yes >> Replace the Stop Lamp Switch in accordance with the Ser-
vice Information.
No >> Repair the open in the (Z940) Ground circuit.
7. CHECK BRAKE PEDAL ADJUSTMENT

Reconnect the Stop Lamp Switch harness connector.
Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12 volts, backprobe the (B15)
Brake Switch No. 1 Signal circuit in the Stop Lamp Switch harness con-
nector.
Does the test light illumination toggle from off to on within 45
mm of brake pedal travel?
Yes >> Replace the Anti-Lock Bakes Module in accordance with the
No >> Replace the Stop Lamp Switch in accordance with the Ser-
vice Information.
C107D-BRAKE PEDAL SWITCH 1/2 CORRELATION

When Monitored:
When the vehicle is driven.
Set Condition:
If the Anti-Lock Brakes Module detects an implausible signal from the Stop Lamp Switch.
Possible Causes

STOP LAMP RELATED DTCs OR SYMPTOMS PRESENT (F942 CIRCUIT/FUSE OPEN)
MISADJUSTED PEDAL SWITCH
(B15) BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(B15) BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
STOP LAMP SWITCH
Diagnostic Test

NOTE: Diagnose and repair all Pressure Sensor and Voltage related DTCs and all Stop Lamp related DTCs
and symptoms before diagnosing this DTC.
Test drive the vehicle as follows: Drive for more than 6 minutes at a speed greater than 40 km/h (25 m.p.h.) and
accelerate to a speed greater than 40 km/h (25 m.p.h.) and then decelerate to a speed lower than 3 km/h (2 m.p.h.)
five consecutive times.
Park the vehicle.
Yes >> Go To 2

No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK (B15) BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FUNCTION WHILE DEPRESSING & RELEASING
THE BRAKE PEDAL
Brake Switch No. 1 Signal circuit in the Anti-Lock Brakes Module har-
ness connector.
Does the test light illumination toggle from off to on?
Yes >> Go To 7
No >> Go To 4
4. CHECK (B15) BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
between ground and the Anti-Lock Brakes Module harness connector.
Yes >> Repair the (B15) Brake Switch No. 1 Signal circuit for a
short to ground.
No >> Go To 5
5. CHECK (B15) BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

between the Anti-Lock Brakes Module harness connector and the Stop
Lamp Switch harness connector.
Yes >> Go To 6
No >> Repair the (B15) Brake Switch No. 1 Signal circuit for an
open.
6. CHECK
Measure the (B15) BRAKE
resistance onSWITCH NO.
the (Z912) 1 SIGNAL
Ground CIRCUIT
circuit FOR AinOPEN
and ground GROUND
the Stop Lamp Switch harness
connector.
Yes >> Replace the Stop Lamp Switch in accordance with the Ser-
vice Information.
No >> Repair the open in the (Z912) Ground circuit.
7. CHECK BRAKE PEDAL ADJUSTMENT

Reconnect the Stop Lamp Switch harness connector.
Brake Switch No. 1 Signal circuit in the Stop Lamp Switch harness con-
nector.
urn the ignition on.
Does the test light illumination toggle from off to on within 45
mm of brake pedal travel?
Yes >> Replace the Anti-Lock Bakes Module in accordance with the
No >> Replace the Stop Lamp Switch in accordance with the Ser-
vice Information.
C1210G SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Continuously, with ignition on, until vehicle speed exceeds 20 km/h (12.4 m.p.h.) for the first time, but not if the
sensor voltage is out of range.
Or, during diagnostic mode.
Or, if the monitoring was inhibited by a corresponding diagnostics command.
Set Condition:
If the measured acceleration signal is higher than 0.8 g for longer than the specified detection time.
Possible Causes

(G4) DYNAMICS SENSOR SUPPLY HIGH RESISTANCE
(G94) GROUND CIRCUIT HIGH RESISTANCE
DYNAMICS SENSOR INSTALLATION
DYNAMICS SENSOR
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR A DTC C1210G SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE

With the scan tool, read and record DTCs.
With the scan tool, read and record Freeze Frame information.
Does the scan tool display: C1210G SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECK THE TERMINALS/CONNECTORS/WIRING HARNESS FOR DAMAGE

Check the Steering Angle Sensor installation.
Check all related wiring for bruised, chafed, pierced, or partially broken wires.
Check all related connectors for broken, bent, pushed out, or corroded terminals.
No >> Go To 3
3. (G4) DYNAMICS SENSOR SUPPLY HIGH RESISTANCE

Disconnect the Dynamics Sensor harness connector.
Measure the resistance of the (G4) Dynamics Sensor Supply circuit
between the Dynamics Sensor harness connector and the Anti-Lock
Brakes Module harness connector.
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Repair the (G4) Dynamics Sensor Supply circuit for high
resistance.
4. (G94) GROUND CIRCUIT HIGH RESISTANCE

Measure the resistance between the (G94) Ground circuit and ground.
Yes >> Go To 5
No >> Repair the (G94) Ground circuit for high resistance.
5. CHECK THE DYNAMICS SENSOR INSTALLATION

NOTE: Dynamics Sensor installation and mounting bolt torque is crucial for proper operation.
Check the Dynamics Sensor for damaged, modified, and bent mounting brackets.
Check the Dynamics Sensor mounting bolts for a loose or over tightened condition.
No >> Replace the Dynamics Sensor in accordance with the Service Information.
C1219-STEERING ANGLE SENSOR ERRATIC PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If the Anti-Lock Brake Module detects that the calculated steering wheel angle exceeds what is physically pos-
sible.
Possible Causes
VEHICLE DAMAGE
STEERING COLUMN / INTERMEDIATE SHAFT DAMAGE
STEERING WHEEL ALIGNMENT
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR LOOSE
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR IMPROPERLY INSTALLED (WRONG MOUNTING POSITION)
(A913) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) CIRCUIT HIGH RESISTANCE
(Z910) GROUND CIRCUIT HIGH RESISTANCE
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
Diagnostic Test
1. PERFORM TEST DRIVE & VERIFY DTC IS STILL ACTIVE

Test drive the vehicle by turning the vehicle left or right in a curving manner at a velocity between 10 and 25 km/hr
(6 and 15 m.p.h.).
Park the vehicle.
Yes >> Go To 2
2. INSPECT VEHICLE, STEERING COLUMN, & INTERMEDIATE SHAFT FOR DAMAGE

NOTE: If possible, check vehicle repair history for collision damage.
Inspect the vehicle for damage causing tracking problems or steering wheel misalignment.
Inspect the steering column and intermediate shaft for damage.
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK STEERING ANGLE SENSOR OUTPUT

Start the engine.
Turn the steering wheel so wheels point in a straight ahead position.
With the scan tool, read the Steering Angle Sensor Position.
Is the Steering Angle Sensor Position within 15 degrees?
Yes >> Go To 8
No >> Go To 4
4. CHECK STEERING ANGLE SENSOR INSTALLATION

WARNING: To avoid personal injury or death, on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental
restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, occupant classification sys-
tem, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect
and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge
before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental
restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment.
NOTE: Proper Steering Angle Sensor installation is crucial for proper operation.
Verify that the Steering Angle Sensor are properly installed.
Is the Steering Angle Sensor properly installed?
Yes >> Go To 5
No >> Repair as necessary and clear offsets by initializing ECU with wheels pointing straight ahead.

NOTE: A low voltage condition at the Steering Angle Sensor will cause this DTC to set.
Check all related wiring for pinched, chafed, pierced, and partially broken wires.
Check all related connectors for broken, bent, pushed out, and corroded terminals.
No >> Go To 6
6. CHECK (A913) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE
Disconnect the Steering Angle Sensor harness connector.
Measure the voltage of the (A913) Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-
ACC) circuit.
Yes >> Go To 7
No >> Repair the (A913) Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-ACC)
circuit for high resistance.
7. CHECK (Z910) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE

Measure the resistance of the (Z910) Ground circuit between ground
and the Steering Angle Sensor harness connector.
Yes >> Replace the Steering Angle Sensor in accordance with the
Service Information and clear offsets by initializing ECU
with wheels pointing straight ahead. Refer to ABS VERIFI-
CATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - STAN-
DARD PROCEDURE).
No >> Repair the (Z910) Ground circuit for high resistance.
8. CHECK STEERING ANGLE SENSOR OUTPUT WHILE ROTATING THE STEERING WHEEL
With the scan tool, read the Steering Angle Sensor Position while rotating the steering wheel to the right and then
to the left. The Steering Angle Sensor Position should decrease when rotating the steering wheel to the right and
increase when rotating the steering wheel to the left.
Did the steering angle change accordingly?
Yes >> Replace the Anti-Lock Brake Module in accordance with the Service Information.
No >> Replace the Steering Angle Sensor in accordance with the Service Information and clear offsets by ini-
tializing ECU with wheels pointing straight ahead.
C121ASTEERING ANGLE SENSOR NOT INITIALIZED

When Monitored:
During the Drive Test.
Set Condition:
This DTC may set with DTC C1231DRIVE TEST: STEERING ANGLE SENSOR due to cycling of ignition
several times or entering and exiting diagnostics several times.
Refer to C1231DRIVE TEST: STEERING ANGLE SENSOR in this Section for the diagnostic test procedure.
C121CTORQUE REQUEST SIGNAL DENIED

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When the Anti-Lock Brake Module indicates if engine management relevant for Automatic Yaw Control/Traction
Control System control can be accomplished.
Possible Causes

POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR A DTC C121C-TORQUE REQUEST SIGNAL DENIED

NOTE: This DTC must be active for the results of this test to be valid and this DTC may set while driving
under severe load conditions.
Start Engine.
Does the scan tool display: C121C-TORQUE REQUEST SIGNAL DENIED?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECK THE POWERTRAIN DTCs

With the scan tool, read and record Powertrain DTCs.
Were any Powertrain ESP related DTCs found?
Yes >> Replace the Powertrain Module in accordance with the Service Information.
Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. (Refer to 9 - ENGINE - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No >> Replace the Anti-Lock Brake Module in accordance with the Service Information.
C121D-BRAKE PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When the Anti-Lock Brake Module indicates that the Brake Pressure Sensor Signal is out of range.
Possible Causes

INTEGRATED CONTROL MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR A DTC C121D-BRAKE PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT

Start the engine.
Does the scan tool display: C121D-BRAKE PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. RECHECK FOR A DTC C121D-BRAKE PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT

With the scan tool, read and record Freeze Fame information.
Start the engine.
Yes >> Replace the ICU in accordance with the Service Information.
No >> Test complete
C121E-BRAKE PRESSURE SENSOR COMPARATIVE PERFORMANCE

For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR A DTC C121D-BRAKE PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT

Start the engine.
Yes >> Go To 2
2. RECHECK FOR A DTC C121D-BRAKE PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT

Start the engine.
Yes >> Replace the ICU in accordance with the Service Information.
No >> Test complete
C1231DRIVE TEST: STEERING ANGLE SENSOR

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If the Anti-Lock Brakes Module detects implausible Steering Angle Sensor data.
Possible Causes
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR INSTALLATION

Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR A DTC C1231DRIVE TEST: STEERING ANGLE SENSOR

NOTE: If any of the following DTCs are present they must be repaired before continuing.
DTC C1219-STEERING ANGLE SENSOR ERRATIC PERFORMANCE
DTC C121A-STEERING ANGLE SENSOR NOT INITIALIZED
DTC C123F-STEERING ANGLE SENSOR COMPARATIVE PERFORMANCE
DTC C1240-STEERING ANGLE SENSOR ANGLE OVERTRAVEL PERFORMANCE
Perform ECU initialization with drive test. Refer to Perform ABS VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 5 -
Start the engine.
Does the scan tool display: C1231DRIVE TEST: STEERING ANGLE SENSOR?
Yes >> Go To 2
Refer to the ABS-INTERMITTENT CONDITION TEST. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - DIAGNOSIS AND TEST-
ING)
2. VERIFY THAT THE STEERING ANGLE SENSOR IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

With the scan tool, select ECU View.
Verify that the Steering Angle Sensor is active on the bus.
Is the Steering Angle Sensor active on the bus?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for No
Response related diagnostic procedures.
3. CHECK STEERING ANGLE

Turn steering wheel so wheels point in a straight ahead position.
With scan tool check steering angle.
Is the Steering Angle reading within 15 degrees?
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Go To 5
4. CHECK STEERING ANGLE CHANGE

With scan tool check steering angle.
Rotate steering wheel to the right and the degrees will decrease and rotating steering wheel to the left the degrees
will increase.
Perform ABS VERIFICATION TEST. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).

Verify that the Steering Angle Sensor is properly installed. Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/RESTRAINTS/CLOCKSPRING
- INSTALLATION.
C1232DRIVE TEST: PRESSURE SENSOR

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If the Pressure Sensor fails to activate.
Possible Causes
HYDRAULIC / BRAKE SYSTEM COMPONENT INSTALLATION

INTEGRATED CONTROL UNIT
PRESSURE SENSOR (HYDRAULIC CONTROL UNIT)
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR A DTC C1232DRIVE TEST: PRESSURE SENSOR

Perform ECU initialization with drive test. Refer to ABS VERIFICATION TEST. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - STANDARD
PROCEDURE).
Start the engine.
Does the scan tool display: C1232DRIVE TEST: PRESSURE SENSOR?
Yes >> Go To 2
ING)
2. CHECK HYDRAULIC SYSTEM & BRAKE SYSTEM COMPONENT INSTALLATION & FUNCTION
Verify that the Anti-Lock Brakes Module and Hydraulic Control Unit are properly installed.
Verify that the hydraulic system is properly filled and bled.
Verify that the brake system components are installed and functioning properly.
No >> Clean contacts in HCU first if problem reoccurs replace the Integrated Control Unit in accordance with
C1234DRIVE TEST: SENSOR CLUSTER INSTALLATION

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If the Anti-Lock Brakes Module detects implausible Dynamics Sensor data.
Possible Causes

DYNAMICS SENSOR
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR A DTC C1234DRIVE TEST: SENSOR CLUSTER INSTALLATION

Perform ECU initialization with drive test. Refer to ABS VERIFICATION TEST. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - STANDARD
PROCEDURE).
Start the engine.
Does the scan tool display: C1234DRIVE TEST: SENSOR CLUSTER INSTALLATION?
Yes >> Go To 2
ING)

C1238-DRIVE TEST: UNSUCCESSFUL

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If the Anti-Lock Brakes Module detects a fault with the Steering Angle Sensor, the Pressure Sensor, or the
Dynamics Sensor.
Possible Causes

PRESSURE SENSOR
DYNAMICS SENSOR
Diagnostic Test
1. DIAGNOSE & REPAIR ALL DTCs
Repair
Diagnose and repair all DTCs.
C1239EMISSIONS ROLLS TEST ACTIVE

Theory of Operation
The functional effects are that the output signal for all wheel speeds mimic the wheel with the highest wheel speed.
This DTC sets when the Emissions Rolls Test is active.
Close out the Emissions Rolls Test though the FCM.
C123A-ESP SYSTEM SENSORS CALIBRATION

When Monitored:
Once per ignition cycle.
Set Condition:
If the calculated checksum does not match the stored checksum.
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1. INITIALIZE ANTI-LOCK BRAKES MODULE

Initialize ECU refer to ABS VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No >> Test complete.
C123B-ESP SYSTEM CONTROL TOO LONG

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When the Anti-Lock Brake Module indicates ESP control lasting longer the 15 seconds.
Possible Causes
HYDRAULIC/BRAKE ISSUE
DYNAMICS SENSOR
INTEGRATED CONTROL MODULE
Diagnostic Test

NOTE: If other DTCs are set they must be repaired before continuing. This DTC must be active for the
results of this test to be valid and this DTC may set while driving under excessive driving conditions.
(6 and 12 m.p.h.).
Park the vehicle.
Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECK HYDRAULIC SYSTEM & BRAKE SYSTEM COMPONENT INSTALLATION & FUNCTION
Verify that the Anti-Lock Brakes Module and Hydraulic Control Unit are properly installed.
Verify that the hydraulic system is properly filled and bled.
Verify that the brake system components are installed and functioning properly.
C123C-DYNAMICS SENSOR MOUNTING/INSTALLATION PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
With vehicle speed above 11 km/h (7 m.p.h.), but not if the sensor signal is invalid.
Or, during skidding.
Or, when driving in reverse.
Set Condition:
If the Anti-Lock Brakes Module detects implausible Dynamics Sensor values.
Possible Causes

DYNAMICS SENSOR
Diagnostic Test

NOTE: If present, diagnose and repair DTC C2114DYNAMICS SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE LOW or DTC
C2115DYNAMICS SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE HIGH before diagnosing this DTC.
(6 and 12 m.p.h.).
Park the vehicle.
Yes >> Go To 2

No >> Go To 3

C123FSTEERING ANGLE SENSOR COMPARATIVE PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
With ignition on, but not if a checksum failure of the stored offset values is detected.
Or, a CAN time-out failure is detected.
Or, a failure is detected by the Steering Angle Sensor.
Set Condition:
If the Anti-Lock Brakes Module detects that either the calculated steering wheel angle offset or the steering
wheel angle signal measured output is out of range.
Possible Causes
VEHICLE DAMAGE
Diagnostic Test

(6 and 15 m.p.h.).
Park the vehicle.
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Perform ABS VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).

No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK STEERING ANGLE SENSOR OUTPUT

Start the engine.
Turn the steering wheel so wheels point in a straight ahead position.
With the scan tool, read the Steering Angle Sensor Position.
Is the Steering Angle Sensor Position within 15 degrees?
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Go To 5

Verify that the Steering Angle Sensor are properly installed.
Yes >> Go To 5
5. CHECK STEERING ANGLE SENSOR OUTPUT WHILE ROTATING THE STEERING WHEEL
With the scan tool, read the Steering Angle Sensor Position while rotating the steering wheel to the right and then
to the left. The Steering Angle Sensor Position should decrease when rotating the steering wheel to the right and
increase when rotating the steering wheel to the left.
Perform the ABS VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
C1240STEERING ANGLE SENSOR OVERTRAVEL PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
With ignition on, but not if a CAN time out failure is detected.
Or, if a fault is detected by the Steering Angle Sensor.
Set Condition:
If the Anti-Lock Brakes Module detects that the absolute value of the measured steering wheel angle is greater
than 720 degrees.
Possible Causes
VEHICLE DAMAGE
Diagnostic Test

(6 and 15 m.p.h.).
Park the vehicle.
Yes >> Go To 2

No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK STEERING ANGLE CHANGE

With scan tool check steering angle if reading travels to 720 degrees whiling rotating wheel from lock to lock.
NOTE: Sensor damage can occur if wheel is turned over 720 degrees.
Rotate steering wheel to the right and the degrees will decrease and rotating steering wheel to the left the degrees
will increase.
Did the steering angle change accordingly and display less the 720 degrees from lock to lock?
Yes >> Go To 4

Verify that the Steering Angle Sensor are properly installed. Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/RESTRAINTS/CLOCK-
SPRING - INSTALLATION.
Yes >> Replace the Steering Angle Sensor and clear offsets by initializing ECU with wheels pointing straight
ahead, in accordance with the Service Information.
C1242G SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
sensor voltage is out of range,
Or, if the vehicle speed has exceeded 20 km/h (12.4 m.p.h.) during the actual ignition cycle.
Or, if at least one over spinning wheel is detected.
Or, if one of the control functions is active.
Set Condition:
If the measured acceleration signal is higher than 0.8 g and longer than the specified detection time.
Possible Causes

DYNAMICS SENSOR OR ANTI-LOCK BRAKE MODULE
Diagnostic Test

(6 and 12 m.p.h.).
Park the vehicle.
Yes >> Go To 2
ING)

No >>
NOTE: Vehicles without a Dynamics Sensor replace Anti-Lock Brake Module.
Replace the Dynamics Sensor or Anti-Lock Brake Module in accordance with the Service Information.
C1243G SENSOR NOT INITIALIZED

When Monitored:
Once after ignition on.
Set Condition:
If the stored zero point calibration value of the longitudinal acceleration sensor is invalid.
Possible Causes
DYNAMICS SENSOR NOT CALIBRATED

DYNAMICS SENSOR
Diagnostic Test
1. PERFORM ECU INITIALIZATION

Perform ECU initialization with drive test refer to ABS VERIFICATION TEST. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - STANDARD
PROCEDURE).
NOTE: The ECU Initialization process must include driving the vehicle into a 90 turn.
Park the vehicle.
>> Go To 2
2. VERIFY IF DTC IS STILL ACTIVE

(6 and 15 m.p.h.).
Park the vehicle.
Yes >>
NOTE: Vehicles without a Dynamics Sensor replace Anti-Lock Brake Module.
Replace the Dynamics Sensor or Anti-Lock Brake Module in accordance with the Service Information.
ING)
C2100-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If the Anti-Lock Brakes Module detects system voltage is below 7.5 volts.
Possible Causes
ECM OR PCM DTCs PRESENT

VEHICLE BATTERY / CHARGING SYSTEM
Diagnostic Test
1. DTCS IN THE PCM

With the scan tool, read and record DTCs from the PCM.
Start the engine.
With the scan tool read DTCs from the PCM.
Are any charging system codes present?
Yes >> Repair the charging system DTC in the PCM.
No >> Go To 2
2. CHARGING SYSTEM FAILURE

Start the engine.
Connect voltmeter to vehicle battery.
Is the vehicle battery voltage under 8.2 volts?
No >> Go To 3
Yes >> Repair the charging system per service information.
3. CHARGING POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE

With a scan tool read Power Supply Voltage.
Is Power Supply Voltage under 8.2 volts?
No >> Refer to the INTERMITTENT CONDITION Diagnostic Procedure.
C2101-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If the Anti-Lock Brakes Module detects system voltage is above 17 volts.
Possible Causes
ECM/PCM DTCs PRESENT

VEHICLE BATTERY / CHARGING SYSTEM
Diagnostic Test
1.
With the scan tool, read and record DTCs from the ECM/PCM.
Start the engine.
With the scan tool read DTCs from the PCM.
Are any charging system codes present?
Yes >> Repair the charging system DTC in the ECM/PCM.
Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. (Refer to 9 - ENGINE - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No >> Go To 2
2. CHARGING SYSTEM FAILURE

Start the engine.
Connect voltmeter to vehicle battery.
Is the vehicle battery voltage over 16.8 volts?
No >> Go To 3
Yes >> Repair the charging system per service information.
3. CHARGING POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE

With a scan tool read Power Supply Voltage.
Is Power Supply Voltage over 16.8 volts?
C2111-SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If the Anti-Lock Brakes Module detects that the supply voltage for external analog sensors is out of range.
Possible Causes

Diagnostic Test
1. REPLACE ANTI-LOCK BRAKES MODULE & VERIFY IF DTC IS STILL ACTIVE

Replace the Anti-Lock Brakes Module in accordance with the Service Information. Perform ABS VERIFICATION
TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
Yes >> Replace the Hydraulic Control Unit in accordance with the Service Information.
C2112-SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If the Anti-Lock Brakes Module detects that the supply voltage for external analog sensors is out of range.
Possible Causes

Diagnostic Test

Replace the Anti-Lock Brakes Module in accordance with the Service Information. Perform ABS VERIFICATION
TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
C2114-DYNAMICS SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE LOW

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If the Dynamics Sensor status changes from initialized to not initialized due to low voltage on the (G4) Dynam-
ics Sensor Supply circuit.
Possible Causes

(G4) DYNAMICS SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT HIGH RESISTANCE
(G94) DYNAMICS SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT HIGH RESISTANCE
(G4) DYNAMICS SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO OTHER ABS CIRCUITS
DYNAMICS SENSOR

Yes >> Go To 2

No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK (G4) DYNAMICS SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT & (G94) DYNAMICS SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Measure the voltage between the (G4) Dynamics Sensor Supply Circuit
and the (G94) Dynamics Sensor Ground Circuit.
Yes >> Replace the Dynamics Sensor in accordance with the Ser-
vice Information.
No >> Go To 4
4. CHECK (G4) DYNAMICS SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE

Measure the resistance of the (G4) Dynamics Sensor Supply circuit
Yes >> Go To 5
No >> Repair the (G4) Dynamics Sensor Supply circuit for high
resistance.
5. CHECK (G94) DYNAMICS SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE

Measure the resistance of the (G94) Dynamics Sensor Ground circuit
Yes >> Go To 6
No >> Repair the (G94) Dynamics Sensor Ground circuit for high
resistance.
6. CHECK (G4) DYNAMICS SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO OTHER ABS CIRCUITS
Measure the resistance between the (G4) Dynamics Sensor Supply cir-
cuit and the B46, B15, D21, D65, D64, Z127, D52, D51, G94, B6, B7,
B4. B3, B1, B2, B9, B8, and Z107 circuit in the Anti-Lock Brakes Mod-
ule harness connector.
Is the resistance below 10k ohms on any of the circuits?
Yes >> Repair all circuits with a resistance below 10k ohms for a
short to the (G4) Dynamics Sensor Supply circuit.
No >> Replace the Anti-Lock Brakes Module in accordance with
C2115-DYNAMICS SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE HIGH

When Monitored:
Upon ignition on, prior to switching the (G4) Dynamics Sensor Supply circuit power on.
Set Condition:
If the Anti-Lock Brakes Module detects voltage on the (G4) Dynamics Sensor Supply circuit when the circuits
power is turned off.
Possible Causes

(G4) DYNAMICS SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE

Yes >> Go To 2

No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK (G4) DYNAMICS SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Measure the voltage of the (G4) Dynamics Sensor Supply Circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (G4) Dynamics Sensor Supply Circuit for a short
to voltage.
No >> Replace the Anti-Lock Brakes Module in accordance with
C2116-ABS PUMP MOTOR SUPPLY LOW VOLTAGE

When Monitored:
With the ignition on and the ABS Pump Motor deactivated, but not if supply voltage faults are detected.
Or, if the control is switched off.
Set Condition:
If the Anti-Lock Brakes Module detects either a low voltage condition when the ABS Pump Motor is activated
or deactivated or a high voltage condition when the ABS Pump Motor is deactivated.
Possible Causes

ABS PUMP MOTOR FUSE OPEN
(A107) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND, OPEN, OR HIGH RESISTANCE
(Z903) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN, OR HIGH RESISTANCE
PUMP MOTOR (HYDRAULIC CONTROL UNIT)
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR A DTC C2116ABS PUMP MOTOR SUPPLY LOW VOLTAGE

Does the scan tool display: C2116ABS PUMP MOTOR SUPPLY LOW VOLTAGE?
Yes >> Go To 2
Perform ABS VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - STANDARD PROCEDURE). Diag-
nostic Test

Visually inspect the Anti-Lock Brakes Module harness connector and wiring harness for damage.
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK ABS PUMP MOTOR FUSE

Remove and visually inspect the ABS Pump Motor fuse.
Is the fuse open?
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Go To 5
4. CHECK (A107) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance of the (A107) Fused B(+) circuit between
ground and the Anti-Lock Brakes Module harness connector.
Yes >> Repair the (A107) Fused B(+) circuit for a short to ground.
No >> Go To 5
5. CHECK (A107) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE

Replace the ABS Pump Motor fuse.
Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, probe the (A107) Fused
B(+) circuit.
NOTE: The test light should illuminate brightly. Compare the
brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery.
Yes >> Go To 6
No >> Repair the (A107) Fused B(+) circuit for an open or high
resistance.
6. CHECK (Z903) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE

Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12 volts, probe the (Z903)
Ground circuit.
NOTE: The test light should illuminate brightly. Compare the
brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery.
Does the test light illuminate brightly on both circuits?
Yes >> Go To 7
No >> Repair (Z903) circuit for an open or high resistance.

Replace the Anti-Lock Brakes Module in accordance with the Service Information.
C2200-ANTI-LOCK BRAKE MODULE INTERNAL

When Monitored:
Ignition on. The Anti-Lock Brake Module monitors its internal microprocessors for correct operation.
Set Condition:
If the Anti-lock brake module detects an internal fault, the DTC is set.
Possible Causes
ABM - INTERNAL FAULT
Diagnostic Test
1. ABM INTERNAL FAILURE DTC PRESENT

Does the scan tool display ANTI-LOCK BRAKE MODULE INTERNAL FAILURE?
C2202-ORIGINAL VIN MISMATCH/MISSING

When Monitored:
At power up, VIN is read off the CAN bus.
Set Condition:
The VIN stored in the ABM does not match the VIN read off of the CAN bus.
Possible Causes
ABM MOVED FROM DIFFERENT VEHICLE
WRONG VIN PROGRAMMED INTO VEHICLE
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR A DTC C2202-ORIGINAL VIN MISMATCH/MISSING

Perform ECU initialization with drive test. Refer to ABS VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES -
Start the engine.
Does the scan tool display: C2202-ORIGINAL VIN MISMATCH/MISSING?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. WRONG VIN PROGRAMMED INTO VEHICLE

Is the correct VIN programmed into the vehicle?
No >> Reprogram the VIN per service information.
C2204-DYNAMICS SENSOR INTERNAL

When Monitored:
sensor voltage is out of range.
Or, if the vehicle speed has exceeded 20 km/h (12.4 m.p.h.) during the actual ignition cycle.
Or, if at least one over spinning wheel is detected.
Or, if one of the control functions is active.
Set Condition:
If the Anti-Lock Brakes Module detects that the Lateral Sensor signal is out of range.
Possible Causes

DYNAMICS SENSOR
Diagnostic Test

(6 and 12 m.p.h.).
Park the vehicle.
Yes >> Go To 2

No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK DYNAMICS SENSOR OUTPUT

CAUTION: All previously removed connectors must be connected before test driving the vehicle.
Connect all previously disconnected components and connectors.
Monitor Dynamics Sensor operation while an assistant drives the vehicle.
Is Lateral Sensor output between 0.02 G to 0.16 G and Yaw Sensor output between 1.30 to 5.70
C2205-STEERING ANGLE SENSOR INTERNAL

When Monitored:
With ignition on, but not if supply voltage faults are detected.
Set Condition:
If the Anti-Lock Brakes Module detects that the Steering Angle Sensor is either not calibrated, or not initialized,
or its status changes from initialized to not initialized, or if the sensor sends an internal failure message.
Possible Causes
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR NOT INITIALIZED

Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR A DTC C2205-STEERING ANGLE SENSOR INTERNAL

(6 and 15 m.p.h.).
Park the vehicle.
Does the scan tool display: C2205-STEERING ANGLE SENSOR INTERNAL?
C2206-VEHICLE CONFIGURATION MISMATCH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When the Anti-Lock Brake Module detects the signal from the gateway module relevant for vehicle character-
istic is missing or does not match for a period greater than the specified fault duration.
Possible Causes
FCM / PCM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY

Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR A DTC C2206-VEHICLE CONFIGURATION MISMATCH

NOTE: This DTC will be active when a new module is installed until initialization is performed.
Perform ECU initialization with drive test on ABM. Refer to ABS VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 5 -
Does the scan tool display: C2206-VEHICLE CONFIGURATION MISMATCH?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. VERIFY THAT THE FCM/PCM IS CONFIGURED CORRECTLY

Check the following data to ensure the FCM/PCM is configured correctly. Engine Displacement (PCM), XWD 4x2,
4x4, all Wheel Drive, (FCM), Axle ratio (FCM), Vehicle Line (FCM), Brake type 0= ABS 1=ESP (FCM).
NOTE: The DTC will be active when a new controller is installed until initialization is performed.
Was the FCM/PCM configured correctly?
No >> Reprogram the appropriate module.
Perform ABS or PCM VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - STANDARD
PROCEDURE).
U0002CAN C BUS OFF PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The FCM detects a short in either CAN C Bus circuit.
Possible Causes
(D65) CAN C BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

(D64) CAN C BUS (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(D65) CAN C BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
(D64) CAN C BUS (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
(D65) CAN C BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (D64) CAN C BUS (-) CIRCUIT
ANTILOCK BRAKE MODULE
SHIFTER LEVER ASSEMBLY (NAG1 ONLY)
TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (NAG1 ONLY)
STEERING CONTROL MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION

With the scan tool, record and erase FCM DTCs.
Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times.
With the scan tool, read active FCM DTCs.
Does the scan tool display U0002-CAN C BUS OFF PERFORMANCE as active?
Yes >> Go To 2
ING)
2. ANTILOCK BRAKE MODULE INTERNAL SHORT

Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage or shorted circuits. If ok, replace the Antilock Brake Mod-
ule in accordance with the service information.
3. POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE INTERNAL SHORT

Disconnect the Powertrain Control Module C1 harness connector.
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage or shorted circuits. If ok, replace and program the Pow-
ertrain Control Module in accordance with the service information.
Perform (NGC) POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST VER - 5.
4. SHIFTER LEVER ASSEMBLY (NAG1 ONLY) INTERNAL SHORT

NOTE: If the vehicle is not equipped with a NAG1 controller then skip this step.
Disconnect the Shifter Lever Assembly harness connector.
Yes >> Go To 5
No >> Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage or shorted circuits. If ok, replace and program the Shifter
Lever Assembly in accordance with the service information.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
5. TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (NAG1 ONLY) INTERNAL SHORT

Disconnect the Transmission Control Module C2 harness connector.
Yes >> Go To 6
No >> Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage or shorted circuits. If ok, replace and program the Trans-
mission Control Module in accordance with the service information.
6. STEERING CONTROL MODULE INTERNAL SHORT

Disconnect the Steering Control Module harness connector.
Yes >> Go To 7
No >> Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage or shorted circuits. If ok, replace and program the Steer-
ing Control Module in accordance with the service information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
7. (D65) CAN C BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE

Disconnect the Front Control Module C1 harness connector.
Measure the voltage between the (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit and ground.
Yes >> Repair the (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit for a short to voltage.
No >> Go To 8
8. (D64) CAN C BUS (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage between the (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit and ground.
Yes >> Repair the (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit for a short to voltage.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
No >> Go To 9
9. (D65) CAN C BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit.
Is any resistance present?
Yes >> Repair the (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit for a short to ground.
No >> Go To 10
10. (D64) CAN C BUS (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit for a short to ground.
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)..
No >> Go To 11
11. (D65) CAN C BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (D64) CAN C BUS (-) CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit and the (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit for a short to the (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit.
No >> Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage or shorted circuits. If ok, replace and program the Front
Control Module in accordance with the service information.
U0100LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ECM/PCM

When Monitored:
With the ignition on
Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
If the Anti-Lock Brakes Module fails to receive bus messages from the ECM or PCM for approximately 500 ms.
Possible Causes
DTCs RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES

CAN C BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED
ECM OR PCM POWER AND GROUND
ECM OR PCM
Diagnostic Test

NOTE: Ensure the IOD fuse is installed and battery voltage is between 10 and 16 volts before proceeding.
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Perform the Stored Lost Communication test procedure. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).
2. CHECK FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING ACTIVE DTCs

With the scan tool, read all active DTCs from all CAN C Bus modules.
NOTE: Check for CAN C hardware electrical, VIN Missing/Mismatch, battery or ignition related DTCs.
Does the scan tool display any active DTCs related to the conditions listed above?
Yes >> Diagnose and repair the DTC(s). Refer to the Table of Contents in the applicable Section.
No >> Go To 3
3. VERIFY THAT THE ECM OR PCM IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

Verify that the ECM or PCM is active on the bus.
Is the ECM or PCM active on the bus?
Yes >> Go To 4
4. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL COMMUNICATION RELATED DTCs

With the scan tool, select Network View and select Advanced.
Is there more than one module with active DTCs Logged Against the ECM or PCM?
Yes >> Replace/update the ECM or PCM in accordance with the service information.
Perform POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to 9 - ENGINE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING.
No >> Replace the Anti-Lock Brakes Module in accordance with the service information.
U0101LOST COMMUNICATION WITH TCM

When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
If the Anti-Lock Brakes Module fails to receive bus messages from the TCM for approximately 500 ms.
Possible Causes

TCM POWER AND GROUND
PCM DTCs PRESENT
TCM
Diagnostic Test

NOTE: If present, diagnose and repair DTC U0002CAN C BUS OFF PERFORMANCE, DTC U0146LOST
COMMUNICATION WITH CENTRAL GATEWAY, or DTC U1502IMPLAUSIBLE MESSAGE DATA LENGTH
RECEIVED FROM FCM / BCM before diagnosing this DTC.
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Perform the Stored Lost Communication test procedure. Refer to the table of contents in this section.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1. (Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1).

No >> Go To 3
3. VERIFY THAT THE TCM IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

Verify that the TCM is active on the bus.
Is the TCM active on the bus?
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Refer to the Table of Contents located in this section for a no response test procedure.

Is there more than one module with active DTCs Logged Against the TCM?
Yes >> Replace/update the TCM in accordance with the service information.
U0125LOST COMMUNICATION WITH DYNAMICS SENSOR

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If the Anti-Lock Brakes Module fails to receive bus messages from the Dynamics Sensor.
Possible Causes

(D52) DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND, SHORTED TO VOLTAGE, OR
OPEN
(D51) DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND, SHORTED TO VOLTAGE, OR
OPEN
DYNAMICS SENSOR
Diagnostic Test

NOTE: If present, diagnose and repair DTC C2114DYNAMICS SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE LOW or DTC
C2115DYNAMICS SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE HIGH before proceeding.
Yes >> Go To 2

No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK THE (D52) DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Measure the voltage of the (D52) Dynamics Sensor High Data Link cir-
cuit.
Yes >> Repair the (D52) Dynamics Sensor High Data Link circuit
No >> Go To 4
4. CHECK THE (D52) DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance of the (D52) Dynamics Sensor High Data Link
circuit between ground and the Dynamics Sensor harness connector.
No >> Go To 5
5. CHECK THE (D52) DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
circuit between the Dynamics Sensor harness connector and the Anti-
Lock Brakes Module harness connector.
Yes >> Go To 6
No >> Repair the (D52) Dynamics Sensor High Data Link circuit
for an open.
6. CHECK THE (D51) DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Measure the voltage of the (D51) Dynamics Sensor Low Data Link cir-
cuit.
Yes >> Repair the (D51) Dynamics Sensor Low Data Link circuit for
a short to voltage.
No >> Go To 7
7. CHECK THE (D51) DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance of the (D51) Dynamics Sensor Low Data Link
a short to ground.
No >> Go To 8
8. CHECK THE (D51) DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
vice Information.
No >> Repair the (D51) Dynamics Sensor Low Data Link circuit for
an open.
U0126LOST COMMUNICATION WITH STEERING ANGLE SENSOR

When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
If the Anti-Lock Brakes Module fails to receive bus messages from the Steering Angle Sensor for approxi-
mately 500 ms.
Possible Causes

STEERING ANGLE SENSOR POWER AND GROUND
Diagnostic Test

Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Refer to the Stored Lost Communication test procedure. Refer to the table of contents in this section.

No >> Go To 3
3. VERIFY THAT THE STEERING ANGLE SENSOR IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

Verify that the Steering Angle Sensor is active on the bus.
Is the Steering Angle Sensor active on the bus?
Yes >> Go To 4

Is there more than one module with active DTCs Logged Against the STEERING ANGLE SENSOR?
Yes >> Replace/update the Steering Angle Sensor in accordance with the service information.
U0141LOST COMMUNICATION WITH FRONT CONTROL MODULE

When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
FCM is configured correctly
Set Condition:
Bus messages not received from the Front Control Module for approximately 2 to 5 seconds.
Possible Causes
DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES

FCM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY
FRONT CONTROL MODULES POWER AND GROUND
MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC
Diagnostic Test

With the scan tool, read active DTCs.
Is this DTC active?
Yes >> Go To 2
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1.
2. CHECK FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING ACTIVE DTCS

With the scan tool, read all active DTCs from all modules.
NOTE: Check for FCM configuration, CAN B or C hardware electrical, VIN Missing/Mismatch, battery or igni-
tion related DTCs.
Does the scan tool display any active DTCs to the conditions listed above?
Yes >> Diagnose and repair the DTC. Refer to the Table of Contents for a complete list of the symptoms.
No >> Go To 3
3. VERIFY THAT THE FCM IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics.
Verify that the FCM is active on the bus.
Is the FCM active on the bus?
Yes >> Go To 4
Response diagnostic procedures.
4. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL COMMUNICATION RELATED DTCS

With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics.
Is there more than one module with active DTCs Logged Against the FCM?
Yes >> Replace/update the Front Control Module in accordance with the service information.
No >> Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the service information
U0146LOST COMMUNICATION WITH CENTRAL GATEWAY

When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
If the Anti-Lock Brakes Module either fails to receive bus messages from the Front Control Module (FCM) for
approximately 500 ms, or it receives invalid messages from the FCM, or it detects messages from the FCM
are of improper data length.
Possible Causes

FCM POWER AND GROUND
FCM
Diagnostic Test

Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Perform the Stored Lost Communication test procedure. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).

No >> Go To 3

Yes >> Go To 4

Yes >> Replace/update the FCM in accordance with the service information.
U0401IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM ECM/PCM

When Monitored:
Continuously with the ignition on, one valid CAN message received at least once, and no U0002-CAN C Bus
Off Performance DTC present.
Set Condition:
When the Anti-Lock Brake Module detects an incorrect CAN message from the Engine Control Module (ECM).
Possible Causes
ABM CAN BUS DTCS

ENGINE DTCS
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR DTC U0401-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM ECM/PCM

Does the scan tool display: U0401-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM ECM/PCM?
Yes >> Go To 2
Perform ABS VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - STANDARD PROCEDURE). Diag-
nostic Test
2. CHECK IF FCM CAN BUS DTCs ARE PRESENT

With the scan tool, read FCM DTCs.
Are there any FCM CAN BUS DTCs present?
Yes >> Refer to 8-ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and diag-
nose the appropriate symptom.
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK IF ENGINE DTCs ARE PRESENT

With the scan tool, read Engine DTCs.
Are there any Engine DTCs present?
Yes >> Refer to the 9 - ENGINE ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS and diagnose the appropriate symptom.
No >> Using the schematics as a guide, check the Anti-Lock Brake Module pins, terminals, and connectors for
corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no
problems are found, replace the Anti-Lock Brake Module per the Service Information.
U0429IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM SCM

When Monitored:
With ignition on, but not if low voltage is detected.
Or, if a CAN Bus off event is detected.
Set Condition:
If the Anti-Lock Brakes Module detects either the sequence or integrity of the Steering Angle Sensor messages
is invalid.
Possible Causes
CAN C BUS CIRCUIT(S) SHORTED

LOAD TOO HIGH ON CAN C BUS
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR DTCs PRESENT
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK IF COMMUNICATION RELATED DTCs ARE PRESENT

Are any Communication related DTCs present?
Yes >> Diagnose and repair the DTC(s). Refer to the Table of Contents in this Section for a complete list of
symptoms.
No >> Go To 2
2. CHECK IF OTHER STEERING ANGLE SENSOR RELATED DTCs ARE PRESENT

Are any other STEERING ANGLE SENSOR DTCs present?
Yes >> Diagnose and repair the DTC(s). Refer to the Table of Contents in this Section for a complete list of
symptoms.
No >> Replace the Steering Angle Sensor in accordance with the Service Information.
U1003ESP CAN C BUS PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If the Anti-Lock Brakes Module detects too many CAN Bus off events on the Dynamics Sensor Data Link cir-
cuits.
Possible Causes

(D52) DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND, VOLTAGE, OR OPEN
(D51) DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND, VOLTAGE, OR OPEN
DYNAMICS SENSOR
Diagnostic Test

Yes >> Go To 2

No >> Go To 3
cuit.
No >> Go To 4
No >> Go To 5
Yes >> Go To 6
for an open.
cuit.
a short to voltage.
No >> Go To 7
a short to ground.
No >> Go To 8
vice Information.
an open.
U1104CAN C BUS CRC PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If the Anti-Lock Brakes Module detects an invalid CAN message from the Dynamics Sensor.
Possible Causes

(D52) DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND, VOLTAGE, OR OPEN
(D51) DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND, VOLTAGE, OR OPEN
DYNAMICS SENSOR
Diagnostic Test

Yes >> Go To 2

No >> Go To 3
cuit.
No >> Go To 4
No >> Go To 5
Yes >> Go To 6
for an open.
cuit.
a short to voltage.
No >> Go To 7
a short to ground.
No >> Go To 8
vice Information.
an open.
U140EIMPLAUSIBLE VEHICLE CONFIGURATION DATA RECEIVED

When Monitored:
Once per ignition cycle, but not during cranking.
Or, if low supply voltage faults are detected.
Set Condition:
If the Anti-Lock Brakes Module either fails to receive vehicle configuration data from the Engine Control Module
(ECM) or Powertrain Control Module (PCM) or the configuration data it receives from the ECM or PCM is
different than that received during the previous ignition cycle.
Possible Causes

ECM OR PCM NOT PROGRAMMED OR PROGRAMMED WITH INCORRECT VIN
ECM OR PCM
Diagnostic Test

Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Using the schematics as a guide, check the Anti-Lock Brakes Module and the ECM or PCM pins, ter-
minals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, and terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all
Communication circuits.

No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK IF ECM OR PCM DTCs ARE PRESENT

With the scan tool, read ECM or PCM DTCs.
Are any DTCs present?
Yes >> Diagnose and repair the DTC(s). Refer to 9 - ENGINE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING.
No >> Go To 4
4. VERIFY CORRECT ECM OR PCM IS INSTALLED IN THE VEHICLE

With the scan tool, verify that the ECM or PCM part number is correct for the vehicle.
Is the correct ECM or PCM installed in the vehicle?
Yes >> Replace and program the ECM or PCM in accordance with the Service Information.
No >> Go To 5
5. VERIFY ECM OR PCM IS PROGRAMMED WITH CORRECT VIN

With the scan tool, verify that the ECM or PCM is programmed with the correct VIN.
Is the ECM or PCM programmed with the correct VIN?
Yes >> Using the scan tool, perform PCM Replaced to update the VIN in the PCM.
No >> Go To 6

No >> Using the schematics as a guide, check the Anti-Lock Brakes Module pins, terminals, and connectors
for corrosion, damage, and terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all Communication circuits. If
no problems are found, replace the Anti-Lock Brakes Module in accordance with the Service Informa-
tion.
U1501IMPLAUSIBLE MESSAGE DATA LENGTH RECEIVED FROM ECM/PCM

When Monitored:
Continuously, with ignition on.
Set Condition:
If the Anti-Lock Brakes Module detects bus messages from the Engine Control Module (ECM) or Powertrain
Control Module (PCM) are of improper data length.
Possible Causes

ECM OR PCM
Diagnostic Test

Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Using the schematics as a guide, check the Anti-Lock Brakes Module and the ECM or PCM pins, ter-
minals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, and terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all

No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK IF ECM OR PCM DTCs ARE PRESENT

With the scan tool, read ECM or PCM DTCs.
Are any DTCs present?
Yes >> Diagnose and repair the DTC(s). Refer to 9 - ENGINE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING.
No >> Go To 4

tion.
U1502IMPLAUSIBLE MESSAGE DATA LENGTH RECEIVED FROM TCM

When Monitored:
Continuously, with ignition on.
Set Condition:
If the Anti-Lock Brakes Module detects bus messages from the Transmission Control Module (TCM) are of
improper data length.
Possible Causes

TCM DTCs PRESENT
TCM
Diagnostic Test

Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Using the schematics as a guide, check the Anti-Lock Brakes Module, the BCM, and the TCM pins,
terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, and terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all

No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK IF TCM DTCs ARE PRESENT

With the scan tool, read TCM DTCs.
Are any TCM DTCs present?
Yes >> Diagnose and repair the DTC(s).
Perform TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
tion.
U1503IMPLAUSIBLE MESSAGE DATA LENGTH RECEIVED FROM FCM

When Monitored:
Continuously with the ignition on.
Set Condition:
When the Anti-Lock Brake Module detects an incorrect CAN message from the Front Control Module (FCM).
Possible Causes
FCM CAN BUS DTCS
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK IF FCM CAN BUS DTCs ARE PRESENT

Are there any FCM CAN BUS DTCs present?
Yes >> Refer to 8-ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and diag-
nose the appropriate symptom.
No >> Replace the Anti-Lock Brakes Module in accordance with the Service Information.
STANDARD PROCEDURE
APS VERIFICATION TEST

APS VERIFICATION TEST
1.
1. Make sure that all accessories are turned off and the battery is fully charged.
2. Make sure that all wiring and components are connected.
3. If the module or the pedal assembly was replaced, reprogram the Adjustable Pedals hard stop.
Move the Adjustable Pedals to full forward and continue to apply the switch for 10 seconds to learn the hard
stop.
Repeat for the rearward direction.
4. Verify that the Adjustable Pedals System is disabled with the shifter in reverse and with the speed control
engaged.
5. With the scan tool, clear DTCs in all modules.
6. Move the Adjustable Pedals Switch forward and rearward several times.
7. Turn the ignition off for 5 seconds, then turn the ignition on.
8. Using the scan tool, select view DTCs in all modules.
Are there any DTCs present?
Yes >> The repair is not complete. Refer to the symptom list and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.
ABS VERIFICATION TEST VER 1
1. ABS VERIFICATION TEST VER 1

WARNING: Ensure braking capability is available before road testing.
NOTE: If the ABM (Anti-Lock Brake Module), SAS (Steering Angle Sensor), Dynamics Sensor was replaced,
it must be initialized using the scan tool. If not initialized, the ABS indicator will flash continuously with no
DTCs. To initialize the ABM and clear offsets have wheels pointing straight ahead and follow the directions
on the scan tool. The drive test requires a 90 turn. If the Dynamics Sensor was replaced, test drive the
vehicle by turning the vehicle left or right in a curving manner at a velocity between 10 and 25 km/hr (6 and
15 m.p.h.).
1. Turn the ignition off.
2. Connect all previously disconnected components and connectors.
3. Ensure all accessories are turned off and the battery is fully charged.
4. Ensure that the ignition is on, with the scan tool, erase all Diagnostic Trouble Codes from All modules. Start the
engine and allow it to run for 2 minutes and fully operate the system that was malfunctioning.
5. Turn the ignition off and wait 5 seconds. Turn the ignition on and using the scan tool, read DTCs from all mod-
ules.
6. If any Diagnostic Trouble Codes are present, return to symptom list and trouble shoot new or recurring symptom.
NOTE: For Sensor Signal and Pump Motor faults, the ABM must sense all 4 wheels at 12 km/h (7.5 mph)
before it will extinguish the ABS indicator.
7. If there are no DTCs present after turning ignition on, road test the vehicle for at least 5 minutes. Perform several
anti-lock braking stops.
8. Again, with the scan tool read DTCs. If any DTCs are present, refer to the Table of Contents in the applicable
Section for the diagnostic test procedure and troubleshoot the new or recurring symptom.
9. If there are no Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) present, and the customers concern can no longer be dupli-
cated, the repair is complete.
Are any DTCs present or is the original concern still present?
Yes >> Repair is not complete, refer to appropriate symptom.
No >> Repair is complete.
LX BRAKES - ABS SERVICE INFORMATION 5 - 385
BRAKES - ABS SERVICE INFORMATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
BRAKES - ABS SERVICE INFORMATION INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

DESCRIPTION SENSOR-FRONT WHEEL SPEED
ANTILOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
TRACTION CONTROL - MK25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 REMOVAL
ANTILOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH AWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
TRACTION CONTROL - MK25E . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 RWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM - MK25 . 387 INSTALLATION
ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM - AWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
MK25E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 RWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
ELECTRONIC VARIABLE BRAKE SENSOR-REAR WHEEL SPEED
PROPORTIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
OPERATION REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
ANTILOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
TRACTION CONTROL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 SWITCH-ESP
ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM - MK25 . 390 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM - REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
MK25E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
ELECTRONIC VARIABLE BRAKE SWITCH-TRACTION CONTROL/ASR
PROPORTIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
STANDARD PROCEDURE REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
ANTILOCK BRAKE SYSTEM BLEEDING . . . . . 391 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
SPECIFICATIONS BOOSTER-ACTIVE BRAKE - MK25
ABS FASTENER TORQUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
SENSOR-DYNAMICS (ESP) HYDRAULIC CONTROL UNIT
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 INTEGRATED CONTROL UNIT - MK25
SENSOR-BRAKE PRESSURE - MK25 REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
REMOVAL DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
BRAKE PRESSURE SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
BRAKE PRESSURE SENSOR - SRT8 . . . . . . . . 397 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
INSTALLATION INTEGRATED CONTROL UNIT - MK25E
BRAKE PRESSURE SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
BRAKE PRESSURE SENSOR - SRT8 . . . . . . . . 399 REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
SENSOR-TRAVEL - MK25 DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
SENSOR-STEERING ANGLE
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
5 - 386 BRAKES - ABS SERVICE INFORMATION LX
BRAKES - ABS SERVICE INFORMATION

DESCRIPTION
ANTILOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH TRACTION CONTROL - MK25
Early launch vehicles use the MK25 Antilock braking
system (ABS). This system, a combined ABS and
Traction Control system is standard on some vehicles
and optional on others.
This antilock brake system uses components of the
base brake system, but also features the following
components:
Integrated Control Unit (ICU) - Includes Hydraulic
Control Unit (HCU) (2) and Antilock Brake Mod-
ule (ABM) (3)
Wheel Speed Sensors (WSS) - Four sensors
(one at each wheel)
ABS
The purpose of the antilock brake system (ABS) is to prevent wheel lockup under braking conditions on virtually any
type of road surface. Antilock braking is desirable because a vehicle that is stopped without locking the wheels
retains directional stability and some steering capability. This allows the driver to retain greater control of the vehicle
during braking.
ALL-SPEED TRACTION CONTROL

The traction control system is an all-speed traction control. All-Speed Traction Control enhances mobility and pre-
vents wheel slip when accelerating on slippery surfaces. Depending on how slippery, an automatically activated
Winter Mode feature will select lower transmission up-shift speeds. It also provides a measure of directional stability
control. Using the wheel-speed sensors, it can detect excessive yaw and help keep the car on the intended course,
as for instance, when accelerating around a curve.
With rear-wheel drive, All-Speed Traction Control is effective up to 85 mph (137 km/h); with AWD, All-Speed Traction
Control is effective up to 45 mph (72 km/h), which is common among competitive AWD vehicles with traction control.
ANTILOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH TRACTION CONTROL - MK25E

Later launch vehicles uses the MK25E Antilock brak-
ing system (ABS). This system, a combined ABS and
Traction Control system is standard on some vehicles
and optional on others.
This antilock brake system uses components of the
base brake system, but also features the following
components:
Integrated Control Unit (ICU) - Includes Hydraulic
Control Unit (HCU) (2) and Antilock Brake Mod-
ule (ABM) (1)
Wheel Speed Sensors (WSS) - Four sensors
(one at each wheel)
ABS
The purpose of the antilock brake system (ABS) is to prevent wheel lockup under braking conditions on virtually any
type of road surface. Antilock braking is desirable because a vehicle that is stopped without locking the wheels
retains directional stability and some steering capability. This allows the driver to retain greater control of the vehicle
during braking.

The traction control system is an all-speed traction control. All-Speed Traction Control enhances mobility and pre-
vents wheel slip when accelerating on slippery surfaces. Depending on how slippery, an automatically activated
Winter Mode feature will select lower transmission up-shift speeds. It also provides a measure of directional stability
control. Using the wheel-speed sensors, it can detect excessive yaw and help keep the car on the intended course,
as for instance, when accelerating around a curve.
With rear-wheel drive, All-Speed Traction Control is effective up to 85 mph (137 km/h); with AWD, All-Speed Traction
Control is effective up to 45 mph (72 km/h), which is common among competitive AWD vehicles with traction control.
ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM - MK25

ESPT (Electronic Stability Program), which includes a Brake Assist feature, is standard on some models and
optional on others. ESP aids the driver in maintaining vehicle directional stability. ESP will do whatever can be done,
within the limits of available traction, to keep the car on course.
ESP uses the ABS with Traction Control along with the following components to operate:
Active Brake Booster
Brake Pressure Switch
Dynamics (ESP) Sensor
Travel Sensor
Steering Angle Sensor (SAS)
The Active Brake Booster is part of the Power Brake Booster. The Brake Pressure Switch is mounted to the bottom
of the Master Cylinder. The Dynamics Sensor that is mounted under the center console, which is near the center of
gravity of the car for effective sensing. The Travel Sensor is mounted in the Power Brake Booster. The Steering
Angle Sensor is located in the steering column.
ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM - MK25E

ESPT (Electronic Stability Program), which includes a Brake Assist feature, is standard on some models and
optional on others. ESP aids the driver in maintaining vehicle directional stability. ESP will do whatever can be done,
within the limits of available traction, to keep the car on course.
ESP uses the ABS with Traction Control (MK25E) along with the following components to operate:
Dynamics (ESP) Sensor
Steering Angle Sensor (SAS)
The Dynamics Sensor that is mounted under the center console, which is near the center of gravity of the car for
effective sensing. The Steering Angle Sensor is located in the steering column.
NOTE: Some components that were necessary with earlier ESP systems are not necessary on vehicles
equipped with the MK25E system.
ESP can be turned off by using the ESP Off switch. When the ESP Off switch is depressed and released, turning
ESP off, it does not completely turn the system off. The ESP system reduces torque management to a lesser
amount, but ESP function can still occur if the system perceives the need.
SRT8 (with MK25E ABS) and Police Package equipped vehicles have what is known as three-mode ESP. When the
ESP Off switch is depressed and quickly released, the system turns off ESP like any other model, but if the switch
is held down for a period of five seconds or longer before releasing, the ESP system further reduces the amount of
torque management provided. The system can be returned to normal by briefly pressing and releasing the ESP Off
switch.
ELECTRONIC VARIABLE BRAKE PROPORTIONING

Vehicles equipped with ABS use electronic variable brake proportioning (EVBP) to balance front-to-rear braking. The
EVBP is used in place of a rear proportioning valve. The EVBP system uses the ABS system to control the slip of
the rear wheels in partial braking range. The braking force of the rear wheels is controlled electronically by using the
inlet and outlet valves located in the integrated control unit (ICU).
EVBP activation is invisible to the customer since there is no pump motor noise or brake pedal feedback.
OPERATION
ANTILOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH TRACTION CONTROL
ABS
There are a few performance characteristics of the Antilock Brake System (ABS) that may at first seem abnormal,
but in fact are normal. These characteristics are described below.
NORMAL BRAKING
Under normal braking conditions, the ABS functions the same as a standard base brake system with a diagonally
split master cylinder and conventional vacuum assist.
ABS BRAKING
ABS operation is available at all vehicle speeds above 35 mph. If a wheel locking tendency is detected during a
brake application, the brake system enters the ABS mode. During ABS braking, hydraulic pressure in the four wheel
circuits is modulated to prevent any wheel from locking. Each wheel circuit is designed with a set of electric sole-
noids to allow modulation, although for vehicle stability, both rear wheel solenoids receive the same electrical signal.
Wheel lockup may be perceived at the very end of an ABS stop and is considered normal.
During an ABS event, the integrated control unit (ICU) regulates hydraulic pressure at all four of the vehicles
wheels.
The hydraulic pressure at each front wheel is controlled independently (relative to the amount of slip at each wheel)
in order to maximize the braking force generated by the front brakes. The rear wheels are controlled such that the
hydraulic pressure at either rear wheel does not exceed that of the highest slip rear wheel in order to maintain
vehicle stability.
The system can build and release pressure at each wheel, depending on signals generated by the wheel speed
sensors (WSS) at each wheel and received at the Antilock Brake Module (ABM).
NOISE AND BRAKE PEDAL FEEL
During ABS braking, some brake pedal movement may be felt. In addition, ABS braking will create ticking, popping,
or groaning noises heard by the driver. This is normal and is due to pressurized fluid being transferred between the
master cylinder and the brakes. If ABS operation occurs during hard braking, some pulsation may be felt in the
vehicle body due to fore and aft movement of the suspension as brake pressures are modulated.
At the end of an ABS stop, ABS is turned off when the vehicle is slowed to a speed of 34 mph. There may be a
slight brake pedal drop anytime that the ABS is deactivated, such as at the end of the stop when the vehicle speed
is less than 3 mph or during an ABS stop where ABS is no longer required. These conditions exist when a vehicle
is being stopped on a road surface with patches of ice, loose gravel, or sand on it. Also, stopping a vehicle on a
bumpy road surface activates ABS because of the wheel hop caused by the bumps.
TIRE NOISE AND MARKS
Although the ABS system prevents complete wheel lockup, some wheel slip is desired in order to achieve optimum
braking performance. Wheel slip is defined as follows: 0 percent slip means the wheel is rolling freely and 100
percent slip means the wheel is fully locked. During brake pressure modulation, wheel slip is allowed to reach up to
2530 percent. This means that the wheel rolling velocity is 2530 percent less than that of a free rolling wheel at
a given vehicle speed. This slip may result in some tire chirping, depending on the road surface. This sound should
not be interpreted as total wheel lockup.
Complete wheel lockup normally leaves black tire marks on dry pavement. The ABS will not leave dark black tire
marks since the wheel never reaches a fully locked condition. However, tire marks may be noticeable as light
patched marks.
START-UP AND DRIVE-OFF CYCLES
When the ignition is turned on, a popping sound and a slight brake pedal movement may be noticed. The ABS
warning lamp will also be on for up to 5 seconds after the ignition is turned on.
When the vehicle is first driven off, a humming may be heard or felt by the driver at approximately 1225 mph
(2040 km/h). All of these conditions are a normal function of ABS as the system is performing a diagnosis check.
PREMATURE ABS CYCLING
Symptoms of premature ABS cycling include: clicking sounds from the solenoid valves; pump/motor running; and
pulsations in the brake pedal. Premature ABS cycling can occur at any braking rate of the vehicle and on any type
of road surface. Neither the red BRAKE indicator lamp, nor the amber ABS indicator lamp, illuminate and no faults
are stored in the ABM.
Premature ABS cycling is a condition that needs to be correctly assessed when diagnosing problems with the
antilock brake system. It may be necessary to use a scan tool to detect and verify premature ABS cycling.
Check the following common causes when diagnosing premature ABS cycling: damaged wheel bearings (causing
tone wheel issues); damaged wheel bearing housings where wheel speed sensors mount; and loose wheel speed
sensor mounting bolts.
After diagnosing the defective component, repair or replace it as required. When the component repair or replace-
ment is completed, test drive the vehicle to verify that premature ABS cycling has been corrected.

Traction control systems sense impending wheel spin based on a model of the rate of change of wheel speed under
normal traction conditions. The All-Speed Traction Control uses signals from the same wheel speed sensors as ABS
to determine when to apply the brakes to one or more wheels and when to reduce engine torque output using the
electronic throttle control (ETC) to prevent wheel slip during acceleration. Throttle control makes the vehicle less
reliant on brake application alone to maintain traction, increasing the operating speed range and more closely mod-
ulates speed, resulting in smoother operation. With All-Speed Traction Control reducing engine torque as well as
applying the brakes, it is possible to achieve almost seamless torque application at the wheels.
If the wheel slip is severe enough to require throttle intervention, All-Speed Traction Control will reduce engine
torque and sometimes upshift the transmission to avoid the condition. In milliseconds, All-Speed Traction Control
interrogates the engine control system to determine the current torque output, determines how much the torque
output the current conditions will allow, and signals this requirement to the engine control system, which reduces the
torque by partially closing the throttle. With execution of the torque reduction, the brake system reduces brake pres-
sure to make the transition smooth, while maintaining forward progress. By reducing engine power, braking effec-
tiveness is maintained and the system can operate throughout the normal vehicle speed range. That is why the
system is identified as providing all-speed traction control.
With AWD, where front-wheel slip can occur, the degree of throttle intervention is relatively less than with rear-wheel
drive. The difference in speed capability and the degree of throttle intervention between rear-wheel drive and all-
wheel drive is due to the fact that non-driven front wheels on a rear-wheel drive vehicle give the system an accurate
vehicle speed reference on which to base responses. With AWD, the possibility that the front wheels may also be
slipping makes appropriate corrective action more difficult to determine, thus limiting the effective speed range. Off-
setting this is the fact that loss of traction is less likely with AWD because torque is transmitted through all four
wheels to begin with. In actual driving situations on snow or ice, the rear-wheel drive and AWD systems respond in
essentially the same way up to the 45 mph (72 km/h) limit of the AWD system.
When severe wheel slippage is detected (as on snow-covered roads), the Winter Mode feature of All-Speed Traction
Control causes the transmission to up-shift to higher gears at lower speeds than normal. Once a slippery launch
condition is detected, the transmission will remain in Winter Mode for a minimum of three minutes. After that, if the
road is providing normal traction, the system returns to providing normal up-shifts.
ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM - MK25

To determine whether the car is responding properly to cornering commands, ESP uses steering wheel angle, yaw
(turning) rate and lateral acceleration sensors (combined into Dynamics Sensor). Using signals from these sensors,
in addition to individual wheel speed sensor signals, the system determines appropriate brake and throttle actions.
Once initiated, ESP operates much like All-Speed Traction Control, except that the goal is directional stability. If the
vehicle yaw response, or rate of turning, is inconsistent with the steering angle and vehicle speed indications, the
ESP system applies the brakes and, if necessary closes the throttle, to restore control. This occurs whether the
vehicle is turning too rapidly (oversteering) or not rapidly enough (understeering).
ESP notifies the active brake booster electronically of the need for maximum output. A solenoid opens a valve in the
booster that immediately applies maximum boost to the master cylinder. A travel sensor in the booster detects the
rate and travel of the brake pedal. Above the threshold of an extreme brake application, ESP activates the sole-
noid, thus applying maximum available hydraulic pressure to the brakes. In this type of situation, stopping distance
is determined by the ABS system based on available traction, rather than the amount of force that the driver can
exert on the brake pedal. This becomes the deciding factor in how quickly the vehicle will stop.
ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM - MK25E

To determine whether the car is responding properly to cornering commands, ESP uses steering wheel angle, yaw
(turning) rate and lateral acceleration sensors (combined into Dynamics Sensor). Using signals from these sensors,
in addition to individual wheel speed sensor signals, the system determines appropriate brake and throttle actions.
Once initiated, ESP operates much like All-Speed Traction Control, except that the goal is directional stability. If the
vehicle yaw response, or rate of turning, is inconsistent with the steering angle and vehicle speed indications, the
ESP system applies the brakes and, if necessary closes the throttle, to restore control. This occurs whether the
vehicle is turning too rapidly (oversteering) or not rapidly enough (understeering).
ELECTRONIC VARIABLE BRAKE PROPORTIONING

Upon entry into EVBP the inlet valve for the rear brake circuit is switched ON so that the fluid supply from the
master cylinder is shut off. In order to decrease the rear brake pressure, the outlet valve for the rear brake circuit
is pulsed. This allows fluid to enter the low pressure accumulator (LPA) in the Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) resulting
in a drop in fluid pressure to the rear brakes. In order to increase the rear brake pressure, the outlet valve is
switched off and the inlet valve is pulsed. This increases the pressure to the rear brakes. This back-and-forth pro-
cess will continue until the required slip difference is obtained. At the end of EVBP braking (brakes released) the
fluid in the LPA drains back to the master cylinder by switching on the outlet valve and draining through the inlet
valve check valve. At the same time the inlet valve is switched on in case of another brake application.
The EVBP will remain functional during many ABS fault modes. If both the red BRAKE and amber ABS warning
indicators are illuminated, the EVBP may not be functioning.
STANDARD PROCEDURE
ANTILOCK BRAKE SYSTEM BLEEDING
The base brakes hydraulic system must be bled anytime air enters the hydraulic system. The ABS must always be
bled anytime it is suspected that the HCU has ingested air.
Brake systems with ABS must be bled as two independent braking systems. The non-ABS portion of the brake
system with ABS is to be bled the same as any non-ABS system.
The ABS portion of the brake system must be bled separately. Use the following procedure to properly bleed the
brake hydraulic system including the ABS.
NOTE: During the brake bleeding procedure, be sure the brake fluid level remains close to the FULL level in
the master cylinder fluid reservoir. Check the fluid level periodically during the bleeding procedure and add
MoparT DOT 3 brake fluid as required.
BLEEDING
When bleeding the ABS system, the following bleeding sequence must be followed to insure complete and adequate
bleeding.
1. Make sure all hydraulic fluid lines are installed and properly torqued.
2. Connect the scan tool to the diagnostics connector. The diagnostic connector is located under the lower steering
column cover to the left of the steering column.
3. Using the scan tool, check to make sure the ABM does not have any fault codes stored. If it does, clear them.
WARNING: When bleeding the brake system wear

safety glasses. A clear bleed tube (1) must be
attached to the bleeder screws and submerged in
a clear container filled part way with clean brake
fluid (2). Direct the flow of brake fluid away from
yourself and the painted surfaces of the vehicle.
Brake fluid at high pressure may come out of the
bleeder screws when opened.
NOTE: Pressure bleeding is recommended to bleed the base brake system to ensure all air is removed from
system. Manual bleeding may also be used, but additional time is needed to remove all air from system.
4. Bleed the base brake system. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - BASE - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
5. Using the scan tool, select ECU VIEW, followed by ABS MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS to access bleeding.
Follow the instructions displayed. When finished, disconnect the scan tool and proceed.
6. Bleed the base brake system a second time. Check brake fluid level in the reservoir periodically to prevent emp-
tying, causing air to enter the hydraulic system.
7. Fill the master cylinder fluid reservoir (1) to the

MAX level.
8. Test drive the vehicle to be sure the brakes are
operating correctly and that the brake pedal does
not feel spongy.
SPECIFICATIONS
ABS FASTENER TORQUE
(Refer to 5 - BRAKES - BASE - SPECIFICATIONS - BRAKE FASTENER TORQUE)
SENSOR-DYNAMICS (ESP)
DESCRIPTION
The Yaw Rate and Lateral Acceleration Sensors are
housed into one unit known as the Dynamics Sensor.
The sensor is used to measure side-to-side (Lateral)
motion and vehicle rotational sensing (how fast the
vehicle is turning - Yaw).
Yaw and Lateral Acceleration Sensors cannot be ser-
viced separately. The entire Dynamics Sensor must be
replaced when necessary.
REMOVAL
from battery post.
2. Remove floor console. (Refer to 23 - BODY/INTE-
RIOR/FLOOR CONSOLE - REMOVAL)
3. Disconnect wiring harness (1) connector at sensor

(3).
4. Remove nuts (2) mounting sensor (3) to floor pan
tunnel (4).
5. Remove dynamics sensor (3) from vehicle.
INSTALLATION
1. Install dynamics sensor (3) over studs mounted to
floor pan tunnel (4).
2. Install mounting nuts (2). Tighten nuts to 12 Nm
3. Connect wiring harness (1) connector to module
(3).
4. Install floor console. (Refer to 23 - BODY/INTERI-
OR/FLOOR CONSOLE - INSTALLATION)

DARD PROCEDURE)
6. Perform Verification Test and clear any faults.
(Refer to 5 - BRAKES - DIAGNOSIS AND
TESTING)
SENSOR-BRAKE PRESSURE - MK25

REMOVAL
BRAKE PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Disconnect wiring harness (6) connector from pres-
sure sensor (5).
2. Remove pressure sensor (1) on bottom of master

cylinder.
BRAKE PRESSURE SENSOR - SRT8

1. Disconnect wiring harness connector (4) from pres-
sure sensor (3) below master cylinder (1).
2. Remove pressure sensor (3) from fitting in primary
brake tube (2).
INSTALLATION
BRAKE PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Install pressure sensor (1) on bottom of master cyl-
inder. Tighten sensor to 28 Nm (250 in. lbs.)
torque.
2. Connect wiring harness (6) connector to pressure

switch (5).

TESTING)
BRAKE PRESSURE SENSOR - SRT8

1. Install pressure sensor (3) into fitting on primary
brake tube (2) below master cylinder (1). Tighten
switch to 28 Nm (250 in. lbs.) torque.
2. Connect wiring harness connector (4) to pressure
sensor (3).

TESTING)
SENSOR-TRAVEL - MK25
REMOVAL
from battery post.
3. Disconnect wiring harness (6) connector at pedal

travel sensor (7) on power brake booster (3).
4. Using a small screwdriver, remove sensor retaining

ring (1).
5. Pull travel sensor straight out of booster.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Before installing new pedal travel sen-
sor, replace O-ring (2) inside booster opening.
Sparingly lubricate NEW O-ring with brake fluid.
Use care not to lose O-ring inside booster.
1. Install NEW sensor retaining ring (1) in groove on

booster.
2. Align sensor keyway with notch in top of sensor

mount on booster housing, then install pedal travel
sensor (2). The sensor will snap into place past the
retaining ring (1).
3. Connect wiring harness (6) connector to pedal

travel sensor (7).

DARD PROCEDURE)
5. Perform Verification Test and clear any faults. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
6. Start vehicle and check for vacuum leaks around sensor. Correct as necessary.
SENSOR-STEERING ANGLE
REMOVAL
WARNING: BEFORE SERVICING THE STEERING COLUMN THE AIRBAG SYSTEM MUST BE DISARMED.
REFER TO ELECTRICAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM FOR SERVICE PROCEDURES. FAILURE TO DO SO MAY
RESULT IN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT OF THE AIRBAG AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
CAUTION: All fasteners must be torqued to specification to ensure proper operation of the steering column.
1. Position the front wheels straight ahead.

2. Fully extend or pull out adjustable steering column.
3. Disconnect the negative (ground) cable from the battery.
4. Remove the airbag (3) from the steering wheel (1).
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/RESTRAINTS/DRIVER
AIRBAG - REMOVAL).
5. Remove the steering wheel mounting bolt (2) then

remove the steering wheel (1).
6. Remove the clock spring screws (1), (Refer to 8 -

ELECTRICAL/RESTRAINTS/CLOCKSPRING -
REMOVAL).
7. Remove the steering angle sensor (3) screws.
8. Remove the steering angle sensor (1) from the col-

umn (2).
INSTALLATION
1. Install the steering angle sensor (1) to the SCCM
(2).
2. Tighten the screws securing the steering angle

sensor (3) to the SCCM.
3. Install the clockspring and tighten the screws (1).

(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/RESTRAINTS/CLOCK-
SPRING - REMOVAL)
4. Align the spline on the steering wheel hub to the

steering column shaft.
5. Slide the steering wheel (1) onto the shaft and
install a new mounting bolt (2). Tighten the bolt to
61 Nm (45 ft. lbs.).
6. Install the airbag (3) on the steering wheel (1).

(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/RESTRAINTS/DRIVER
AIRBAG - INSTALLATION)

DARD PROCEDURE)
(Refer to 5 - BRAKES - DIAGNOSIS AND TEST-
ING)
9. Test the operation of the horn, lights and any other
functions that are steering column operated.
SENSOR-FRONT WHEEL SPEED

DESCRIPTION
One wheel speed sensor is mounted to each knuckle.
The wheel speed sensor, using a tone wheel attached
to the hub and bearing (RWD) or front half shaft
(AWD) as a trigger mechanism, communicates with
the Antilock Brake Module, informing it of that wheels
speed.
The head of the front wheel speed sensor used on
Rear-Wheel-Drive (RWD) vehicles mounts to the
inside of the knuckle.
The head of the front wheel speed sensor used on All-

Wheel-Drive (AWD) vehicles mounts to the rear of the
knuckle.
Vehicles without antilock brakes are equipped with
one front wheel speed sensor. It is attached to the
right front knuckle and is used to provide wheel speed
sense to various vehicle systems.
REMOVAL
AWD
2. Remove sensor cable routing clip (2) from brake

hose bracket (3).
NOTE: To release sensor connector from body wir-

ing harness connector (1) in following step, move
retaining clip (2) as indicated here, then pull sen-
sor connector (3) outward.
3. Remove sensor connector (1) from body wiring

harness connector (4).

(2) to knuckle (4). Pull sensor head out of knuckle.
from knuckle (4).
6. Remove wheel speed sensor (2).
RWD
2. Remove sensor cable routing clip (2) from brake

hose bracket (3).

3. Remove sensor connector (1) from body wiring

harness connector (4).
4. Remove screw (3) fastening wheel speed sensor to

knuckle (1). Pull sensor head (4) out of knuckle.
from brake hose routing bracket (5).
INSTALLATION
AWD
1. Install wheel speed sensor (2) head into knuckle
(4) and install mounting screw (1). Tighten screw to
(3) to knuckle (4).
3. Attach sensor cable routing clip (2) to brake hose

bracket (3).
4. Connect sensor connector (1) to body wiring har-
ness connector (4). When installing connector,
make sure retaining clip on body connector is prop-
erly in place and sensor connect cannot be pulled
out.
5. Lower vehicle.
TESTING)
RWD
(2) to brake hose routing bracket (5).
3. Attach sensor cable routing clip (2) to brake hose

bracket (3).
4. Connect sensor connector (1) to body wiring har-
ness connector (4). When installing connector,
erly in place and sensor connect cannot be pulled
out.
5. Lower vehicle.
TESTING)
SENSOR-REAR WHEEL SPEED

DESCRIPTION
One wheel speed sensor (3) is mounted to the rear of
each rear knuckle. The wheel speed sensor, using a
tone wheel attached to the rear axle half shaft as a
trigger mechanism, communicates with the Antilock
Brake Module, informing it of that wheels speed.
REMOVAL

2. Remove sensor connectors (3 and 4) from body

wiring harness connector (1) located in luggage
compartment floor pan (2).
3. Separate left sensor connector (4) from right sen-
sor connector (3).
4. If removing left sensor, unclip sensor cable (3) from

routing clip near body connector (1).

routing clips (2) along rear of crossmember near
rear differential (3).

routing clip (1) above toe link mount on rear cross-
member.
7. Unclip sensor cable (2) from routing clips (3) along
toe link.
8. Unclip sensor cable at rear brake rotor shield (1).

rear knuckle.
10. Remove wheel speed sensor.
INSTALLATION
torque.
4. Clip sensor cable (2) to routing clips (3) along toe

link.
5. If installing left sensor, clip sensor cable (2) to rout-
ing clip (1) above toe link mount on rear
crossmember.

ing clips (2) along rear of crossmember near rear
differential (3).

ing clip near body connector (1).
8. Match left sensor connector (4) to right sensor con-

nector (3) to make one connector.
9. Insert sensor connectors (3 and 4) into body wiring
harness connector (1) located in luggage compart-
ment floor pan (2). When installing connector,
erly in place and sensor connector cannot be
pulled out.
SWITCH-ESP
DESCRIPTION
The ESP Off Switch is located in the Instrument Panel
Switch Pod in the center of the instrument panel. The
ESP Off switch turns the Electronic Stability Program
off whenever the switch is depressed. Depressing the
switch a second time turns the ESP back on. The
switch resets itself each time the ignition is cycled.
When the ESP Off switch is depressed and released,
turning ESP off, it does not completely turn the system
off. The ESP system reduces torque management to a
lesser amount, but ESP function can still occur if the
system perceives the need.
SRT8 (with MK25E ABS) and Police Package
equipped vehicles have what is known as three-mode
ESP. When the ESP Off switch is depressed and
quickly released, the system turns off ESP like any
other model, but if the switch is held down for a period
of five seconds or longer before releasing, the ESP
system further reduces the amount of torque manage-
ment provided. The system can be returned to nor-
mal by briefly pressing and releasing the ESP Off switch.
The ESP Off switch is serviced as part of the Instrument Panel Switch Pod.
REMOVAL
The ESP Off switch is serviced as part of the Instrument Panel Switch Pod. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/INSTRU-
MENT CLUSTER/INSTRUMENT PANEL SWITCH POD - REMOVAL)
INSTALLATION
The ESP Off switch is serviced as part of the Instrument Panel Switch Pod. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/INSTRU-
MENT CLUSTER/INSTRUMENT PANEL SWITCH POD - INSTALLATION)
SWITCH-TRACTION CONTROL/ASR
DESCRIPTION
The Traction Control Off Switch (TCS OFF or ASR
OFF on Export vehicles) is part of the Instrument
Panel Switch Pod located in the center of the instru-
ment panel. The traction control Off switch turns the
traction control off whenever the switch is depressed.
Depressing the switch a second time turns the traction
control back on. The switch resets itself each time the
ignition is cycled.
The traction control Off switch is serviced as part of
the Instrument Panel Switch Pod.
REMOVAL
The traction control Off switch is serviced as part of the Instrument Panel Switch Pod. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER/INSTRUMENT PANEL SWITCH POD - REMOVAL)
INSTALLATION
The traction control Off switch is serviced as part of the Instrument Panel Switch Pod. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER/INSTRUMENT PANEL SWITCH POD - INSTALLATION)
BOOSTER-ACTIVE BRAKE - MK25

DESCRIPTION
The active brake booster is part of the Electronic Stability Program (ESP). It is serviced as part of the power brake
booster. For more information on ESP, (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - DESCRIPTION).
HYDRAULIC CONTROL UNIT

REMOVAL
To remove the HCU, the ICU must be removed and disassembled. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHAN-
ICAL/ICU (INTEGRATED CONTROL UNIT) - REMOVAL) (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/ICU
(INTEGRATED CONTROL UNIT) - DISASSEMBLY)
INSTALLATION
To install the HCU, assemble and install the ICU. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/ICU (INTE-
GRATED CONTROL UNIT) - ASSEMBLY) (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/ICU (INTEGRATED
CONTROL UNIT) - INSTALLATION)
INTEGRATED CONTROL UNIT - MK25

REMOVAL

from battery post.
3. Remove brake tubes (1, 2, 3 and 10) at hydraulic

control unit (5).
4. Remove remaining brake tubes (1 and 3) at

hydraulic control unit.
5. Disconnect 47-way wiring connector (5) at antilock
brake module (ABM) (6).
6. Pull up on unit (5) and remove from mounting

grommets (8).
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove two screws attaching mounting bracket to HCU. Remove bracket.
2. Remove three screws (2) attaching ABM (1).
3. Remove ABM (1) from HCU (3).

ASSEMBLY
1. Align ABM solenoids and pump/motor wiring con-
nector (4) with HCU valves (2) and connector pas-
sage. Slide ABM (1) onto HCU (3).
2. Install three screws (2) attaching ABM (1). Tighten

screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.) torque.
3. Attach mounting bracket to HCU. Install two mount-
ing bracket attaching screws and tighten to 11 Nm
4. Install ICU in vehicle. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HY-
DRAULIC/MECHANICAL/ICU (INTEGRATED CON-
TROL UNIT) - INSTALLATION)
INSTALLATION
1. Install unit (5), pushing mounting bracket down into
mounting grommets (8) located in body of vehicle.
2. Connect 47-way wiring connector (5) at antilock

brake module (ABM) (6).
3. Install brake tubes to rear (1 and 3) at hydraulic
control unit. Tighten tube nuts to 20 Nm (177 in.
lbs.) torque.
4. Install brake tubes (1, 2, 3 and 10) at hydraulic

control unit (5). Tighten tube nuts to 20 Nm (177
in. lbs.) torque.

DARD PROCEDURE)
7. Fill and bleed (1) base brake hydraulic system and

ABS. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - STANDARD PROCE-
DURE)
TESTING)
INTEGRATED CONTROL UNIT - MK25E

DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Later launch vehicles use the MK25E
Antilock Braking System (ABS). The MK25E ICU
can be easily identified by the brake tube ports on
two sides as shown instead of on one side as
used on previous systems.
The Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) (2) and the Antilock

Brake Module (ABM) (1) used with this antilock brake
system are combined (integrated) into one unit, which
is called the Integrated Control Unit (ICU).
The ICU (1) is located in the engine compartment,

mounted to a bracket that is attached to the right side
rail through the use of isolation grommets (2).
The ABS with traction control ICU consists of the following components: the ABM, eight (build/decay) solenoid
valves (four inlet valves and four outlet valves), two traction control solenoid valves, two hydraulic shuttle valves,
valve block, fluid accumulators, a pump, and an electric pump/motor.
The replaceable components of the ICU are the HCU and the ABM. No attempt should be made to service any
components of the HCU or ABM.
For additional information on the ABM, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES/ANTILOCK
BRAKE MODULE - DESCRIPTION).
REMOVAL

from battery post.

(from master cylinder) at hydraulic control unit (7).
4. Remove remaining brake tubes (2, 3, 5, 6) at
hydraulic control unit (7).
NOTE: Use this figure in the following step to

release the ABM harness connector cover. It
shows the location of the release tabs.
5. Disconnect ABM harness connector from antilock

brake module (ABM). To do so:
a. Depress tabs on each side of connector cover,
then
b. Pull outward and upward on lower half of cover
until it locks into position pointing straight out-
ward (2). Connector can then be pulled straight
outward off ABM (1).
6. Pull up on unit (1) and remove from mounting

grommets (2) in body side rail.
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove two screws attaching the mounting bracket to the HCU. Remove the bracket.
2. Remove four screws (1) attaching ABM (2) to HCU.
3. Separate ABM (1) from HCU (2).
ASSEMBLY
1. Clean any debris off the mating surfaces of the HCU and ABM.
CAUTION: When installing new O-rings or solenoid valve stem seals, do not use any type of lubricant.
2. If the seals (1) on the solenoid valve stems (2) are

not new, replace them all. Each of the solenoid
valve stem seals must be new to keep out moisture
and debris; do not reuse solenoid valve stem
seals.
3. Replace the pump/motor connector O-ring (1) if it is

not new. Be sure the O-ring is properly seated in
the mounting groove (2).
4. Align components and install the ABM (1) on the

HCU (2).
5. Install the four screws (1) attaching the ABM (2) to

the HCU. Tighten the mounting screws to 2 Nm
(17 in. lbs.).
6. Attach the mounting bracket to the HCU. Install two mounting bracket attaching screws and tighten to 11 Nm (97
in. lbs.).
7. Install the ICU in the vehicle. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/ICU (INTEGRATED CONTROL
UNIT) - INSTALLATION)
INSTALLATION
1. Install unit (1), pushing mounting bracket down into
mounting grommets (2) located in body side rail.
CAUTION: Before installing the ABM harness con-

nector (2) on the ABM (1), be sure the seal is prop-
erly installed in the connector.
2. Insert ABM harness connector (2) into socket of

ABM (1) and close cover, locking connector in
place.
3. Install left (2) and right (1) rear brake tubes at

hydraulic control unit (4). Tighten tube nuts to 20
4. Install left (2) and right (3) brake tubes at hydraulic

control unit (4). Tighten tube nuts to 20 Nm (177
in. lbs.) torque.
5. Install primary (4) and secondary (1) brake tubes

at hydraulic control unit (7). Tighten tube nuts to 20

DARD PROCEDURE)
8. Fill and bleed (1) base brake hydraulic system and

ABS. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - STANDARD PROCE-
DURE)
9. Perform Diagnostic Verification Test and clear any
faults. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - DIAGNOSIS AND
TESTING)
LX COOLING 7-1
COOLING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
COOLING ADDING ADDITIONAL COOLANT . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

DESCRIPTION COOLANT LEVEL CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 DRAINING COOLING SYSTEM - ALL
3.0L DIESEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 ENGINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 COOLING SYSTEM CLEANING/REVERSE
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING FLUSHING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTICS (OBD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 SPECIFICATIONS
COOLING SYSTEM - TESTING FOR LEAKS . . . . 7 TORQUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
PRELIMINARY CHECKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 FILL VOLUMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
STANDARD PROCEDURE SPECIAL TOOLS
DRAINING COOLING SYSTEM - ALL COOLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
ENGINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 ACCESSORY DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
COOLING SYSTEM FILLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
REFILLING COOLING SYSTEM - 3.0L TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
DIESEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
7-2 COOLING LX
COOLING
DESCRIPTION
DESCRIPTION
The cooling system consists of :
Radiator
Electric Cooling fan
Hydraulic Cooling Fan (Diesel Engine)
Fan shroud
Radiator pressure cap
Thermostat
Coolant reserve/overflow system
EGR Cooler (Diesel Engine)
Transmission oil cooler (if equipped with an automatic transmission)
Coolant
Water pump
Hoses and hose clamps
3.0L DIESEL
COOLING FLOW - 3.0L DIESEL

The cooling system regulates engine operating temperature. It allows the engine to reach normal operating temper-
ature as quickly as possible, maintains normal operating temperature and prevents overheating.
LX COOLING 7-3
The cooling system also provides a means of heating the passenger compartment. The cooling system is pressur-
ized and uses a centrifugal water pump to circulate coolant throughout the system. A separate and remotely
mounted, pressurized coolant tank using a pressure/vent cap is used.
COOLING SYSTEM COMPONENTS

The cooling system consists of:
Charge Air Cooler
Hydraulic Cooling Fans
A aluminum-core radiator with plastic side tanks
A separate pressurized coolant bottle
A pressure/vent cap on the coolant bottle
Thermostat
Coolant
Coolant temperature gauge
Water pump
Hoses and hose clamps
OPERATION
COOLING FLOW - 2.7L ENGINE
1 - RADIATOR
2 - COOLANT RECOVERY BOTTLE
3 - HEATER CORE
4 - CYLINDER HEAD
5 - CYLINDER BLOCK
6 - WATER PUMP
7 - THERMOSTAT
7-4 COOLING LX
COOLING FLOW - 3.5L W/ENGINE OIL COOLER ENGINE
1 - RADIATOR
2 - HOT BOTTLE/COOLANT RECOVERY BOTTLE
3 - HEATER CORE
4 - CYLINDER HEAD
5 - CYLINDER BLOCK
6 - WATER PUMP
7 - ENGINE OIL COOLER
8 - THERMOSTAT
LX COOLING 7-5
COOLING FLOW - 5.7L/6.1L ENGINE
1 - HOT BOTTLE/COOLANT RECOVERY BOTTLE

CHARGE AIR COOLER - DIESEL ENGINE
2 - HEATER CORE
3 - CYLINDER HEAD
4 - CYLINDER BLOCK
5 - WATER PUMP
6 - THERMOSTAT
7 - RADIATOR
7-6 COOLING LX
COOLING FLOW - 3.0L DIESEL

The cooling system regulates engine operating temperature. It allows the engine to reach normal operating temper-
ature as quickly as possible. It also maintains normal operating temperature and prevents overheating.
The cooling system also provides a means of heating the passenger compartment and cooling the automatic trans-
mission fluid (if equipped). The cooling system is pressurized and uses a centrifugal water pump to circulate coolant
throughout the system.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTICS (OBD)
COOLING SYSTEM RELATED DIAGNOSTICS
The powertrain control module (PCM) has been programmed to monitor certain cooling system components:
If the engine has remained cool for too long a period, such as with a stuck open thermostat, a Diagnostic
Trouble Code (DTC) can be set.
If an open or shorted condition has developed in the relay circuit controlling the electric radiator fan, a Diag-
nostic Trouble Code (DTC) can be set.
If the problem is sensed in a monitored circuit often enough to indicated an actual problem, a DTC is stored. The
DTC will be stored in the PCM memory for eventual display to the service technician. (Refer to 25 - EMISSIONS
CONTROL - DESCRIPTION).
ACCESSING DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES

To read DTCs and to obtain cooling system data, (Refer to 25 - EMISSIONS CONTROL - DESCRIPTION).
ERASING TROUBLE CODES

After the problem has been repaired, use the scan tool to erase a DTC. Refer to the appropriate Powertrain Diag-
nostic Procedures service information for operation of the scan tool.
LX COOLING 7-7
COOLING SYSTEM - TESTING FOR LEAKS

ULTRAVIOLET LIGHT METHOD
A leak detection additive is available through the parts
department that can be added to cooling system. The
additive is highly visible under ultraviolet light (black
light) (1). Pour one ounce of additive into cooling sys-
tem. Place heater control unit in HEAT position. Start
and operate engine until the radiator upper hose is
warm to touch. Aim the commercially available black
light tool at components to be checked. If leaks are
present, black light will cause the additive to glow a
bright green color.
The black light can be used in conjunction with a pres-
sure tester to determine if any external leaks exist.
PRESSURE TESTER METHOD

The engine should be at normal operating tempera-
ture. Recheck the system cold if the cause of coolant
loss is not located during the warm engine examina-
tion.
WARNING: Hot, pressurized coolant can cause

injury by scalding.
Carefully remove the radiator pressure cap from the

filler neck and check coolant level. Push down on cap
to disengage it from the stop tabs. Wipe the inside of
filler neck and examine the lower inside sealing seat
for nicks, cracks, paint, dirt and solder residue. Inspect
the radiator-to- reserve/overflow tank hose for internal
obstructions. Insert a wire through the hose to be sure
it is not obstructed.
Inspect cams on the outside of filler neck. If the cams
are damaged, seating of the pressure cap valve and
tester seal will be affected.
Attach pressure tester (7700 or an equivalent) (1) to
radiator filler neck.
Operate tester pump to apply 124.1 kPa (18 psi) pres-
sure to system. If hoses enlarge excessively or bulge while testing, replace as necessary. Observe the gauge
pointer and determine the condition of the cooling system according to the following criteria:
Holds Steady: If the pointer remains steady for two minutes, serious coolant leaks are not present in system. How-
ever, there could be an internal leak that does not appear with normal system test pressure. If it is certain that
coolant is being lost and leaks cannot be detected, inspect for interior leakage or perform Internal Leakage Test.
Refer to INTERNAL LEAKAGE INSPECTION .
7-8 COOLING LX
Drops Slowly: Indicates a small leak or seepage is occurring. Examine all connections for seepage or slight leak-
age with a flashlight. Inspect radiator, hoses, gasket edges and heater. Seal small leak holes with a Sealer Lubricant
(or equivalent). Repair leak holes and inspect system again with pressure applied.
Drops Quickly: Indicates that serious leakage is occurring. Examine system for external leakage. If leaks are not
visible, inspect for internal leakage. Large radiator leak holes should be repaired by a reputable radiator repair shop.
INTERNAL LEAKAGE INSPECTION

Remove engine oil pan drain plug and drain a small amount of engine oil. If coolant is present in the pan, it will
drain first because it is heavier than oil. An alternative method is to operate engine for a short period to churn the
oil. After this is done, remove engine dipstick and inspect for water globules. Also inspect the transmission dipstick
for water globules and the transmission fluid cooler for leakage.
WARNING: With radiator pressure tester tool installed on radiator, do not allow pressure to exceed 145 kpa
(21 psi). Pressure will build up quickly if a combustion leak is present. To release pressure, rock tester from
side to side. When removing tester, do not turn tester more than 1/2 turn if system is under pressure.
Operate the engine without the pressure cap on the radiator until the thermostat opens. Attach a Pressure Tester to
filler neck. If pressure builds up quickly it indicates a combustion leak exists. This is usually the result of a cylinder
head gasket leak or crack in engine. Repair as necessary.
If there is not an immediate pressure increase, pump the Pressure Tester. Do this until indicated pressure is within
system range of 124.1 kPa (18 psi). Fluctuation of gauge pointer indicates compression or combustion leakage into
cooling system.
Because the vehicle is equipped with a catalytic converter, do not remove spark plug cables or short out cylinders
to isolate compression leak.
If the needle on the dial of pressure tester does not fluctuate, race engine a few times to check for an abnormal
amount of coolant or steam. This would be emitting from exhaust pipe. Coolant or steam from exhaust pipe may
indicate a faulty cylinder head gasket, cracked engine cylinder block or cylinder head.
A convenient check for exhaust gas leakage into cooling system is provided by a commercially available Block Leak
Check tool. Follow manufacturers instructions when using this product.
COMBUSTION LEAKAGE TEST - WITHOUT PRESSURE TESTER

DO NOT WASTE reusable coolant. If the solution is clean, drain the coolant into a clean container for reuse.
WARNING: Do not remove cylinder block drain plugs or loosen radiator draincock with system hot and
under pressure. Serious burns from coolant can occur.
Drain sufficient coolant to allow thermostat removal (Refer to 7 - COOLING/ENGINE/ENGINE COOLANT THER-
MOSTAT - REMOVAL) for 2.7L/3.5L engine, (Refer to 7 - COOLING/ENGINE/ENGINE COOLANT THERMOSTAT -
REMOVAL) for 5.7L engine. Remove accessory drive belt (Refer to 7 - COOLING/ACCESSORY DRIVE/DRIVE
BELTS - REMOVAL).
Add coolant to radiator to bring level to within 6.3 mm (1/4 in) of the top of the thermostat housing.
CAUTION: Avoid overheating. Do not operate engine for an excessive period of time. Open draincock imme-
diately after test to eliminate boil over.
Start engine and accelerate rapidly three times, to approximately 3000 rpm while observing coolant. If internal
engine combustion gases are leaking into cooling system, bubbles will appear in coolant. If bubbles do not appear,
internal combustion gas leakage is not present.
PRELIMINARY CHECKS
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM OVERHEATING
Establish what driving conditions caused the complaint. Abnormal loads on the cooling system such as the following
may be the cause:
Prolonged idle
Very high ambient temperature
LX COOLING 7-9
Slight tail wind at idle

Slow traffic
Traffic jams
High speed or steep grades
Driving techniques that avoid overheating are:
Idle with A/C off when temperature gauge is at end of normal range.
Increasing engine speed for more air flow is recommended.
TRAILER TOWING:
Consult Trailer Towing section of owners manual. Do not exceed limits.
RECENT SERVICE OR ACCIDENT REPAIR:
Determine if any recent service has been performed on vehicle that may effect cooling system. This may be:
Engine adjustments (incorrect timing)
Slipping engine accessory drive belt(s)
Brakes (possibly dragging)
Changed parts. Incorrect water pump or pump rotating in wrong direction due to belt not correctly routed
Reconditioned radiator or cooling system refilling (possibly under filled or air trapped in system).
NOTE: If investigation reveals none of the previous items as a cause for an engine overheating complaint,
refer to COOLING SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS CHART BELOW.
These charts are to be used as a quick-reference only. Refer to COOLING SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS CHART
7 - 10 COOLING LX
COOLING SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS CHART
TEMPERATURE GAUGE READS 1. Has a Diagnostic Trouble Code 1. (Refer to 25 - EMISSIONS

LOW (DTC) been set indicating a stuck CONTROL - DESCRIPTION).
open thermostat? Replace thermostat if necessary.
2. Is the temperature sending unit 2. Check the temperature sensor

connected? connector. (Refer to 8 -
ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER - DIAGNOSIS AND
TESTING). Repair connector if
necessary.
3. Is the temperature gauge 3. Check gauge operation. (Refer to
operating OK? 8 - ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER/ENGINE
TEMPERATURE GAUGE -
DESCRIPTION) . Repair as
necessary.
4. Coolant level low in cold ambient 4. Check coolant level in the coolant
temperatures accompanied with reserve/overflow tank or degas
poor heater performance. bottle and the radiator. Inspect
system for leaks. Repair leaks as
necessary. Refer to the Coolant
section of the manual text for
WARNINGS and CAUTIONS
associated with removing the
radiator cap.
5. Improper operation of internal 5. Inspect heater and repair as
heater doors or heater controls. necessary. (Refer to 24 - HEATING
& AIR CONDITIONING -
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).
LX COOLING 7 - 11
TEMPERATURE GAUGE READS 1. Trailer is being towed, a steep 1. This may be a temporary
HIGH OR THE COOLANT hill is being climbed, vehicle is condition and repair is not
WARNING LAMP ILLUMINATES. operated in slow moving traffic, or necessary. Turn off the air
COOLANT MAY OR MAY NOT BE engine is being idled with very high conditioning and attempt to drive the
LOST OR LEAKING FROM THE ambient (outside) temperatures and vehicle without any of the previous
COOLING SYSTEM the air conditioning is on. Higher conditions. Observe the temperature
altitudes could aggravate these gauge. The gauge should return to
conditions. the normal range. If the gauge does
not return to the normal range,
determine the cause for overheating
and repair. Refer to Possible
Causes (2-18).
2. Is the temperature gauge reading 2. Check gauge. (Refer to 8 -

correctly? ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER - DIAGNOSIS AND
TESTING). Repair as necessary.
3. Is the temperature warning 3. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/
illuminating unnecessarily? INSTRUMENT CLUSTER -
4. Coolant low in coolant reserve/ 4. Check for coolant leaks and
overflow tank and radiator? repair as necessary. (Refer to 7 -
COOLING - DIAGNOSIS AND
TESTING).
5. Pressure cap not installed tightly. 5. Tighten cap
If cap is loose, boiling point of
coolant will be lowered. Also refer
to the following Step 6.
6. Poor seals at the radiator cap. 6. (a) Check condition of cap and
cap seals. Refer to Radiator Cap.
Replace cap if necessary.
(b) Check condition of radiator filler
neck or degas bottle. If neck is bent
or damaged, replace radiator or
degas bottle.
7. Coolant level low in radiator but 7. (a) Check condition of radiator
not in coolant reserve/overflow tank. cap and cap seals. Refer to
This means the radiator is not Radiator Cap in this Group. Replace
drawing coolant from the coolant cap if necessary.
reserve/overflow tank as the engine (b) Check condition of radiator filler
cools neck. If neck is bent or damaged,
replace radiator.
(c) Check condition of the hose from
the radiator to the coolant tank. It
should fit tight at both ends without
any kinks or tears. Replace hose if
necessary.
(d) Check coolant reserve/overflow
tank and tanks hoses for blockage.
Repair as necessary.
8. Incorrect coolant concentration 8. Check coolant. (Refer to
LUBRICATION & MAINTENANCE/
FLUID TYPES - DESCRIPTION)
7 - 12 COOLING LX
9. Coolant not flowing through 9. Check for coolant flow at radiator

system filler neck with some coolant
removed, engine warm and
thermostat open. Coolant should be
observed flowing through radiator. If
flow is not observed, determine
area of obstruction and repair as
necessary.
10. Radiator or A/C condenser fins 10. Remove insects and debris.
are dirty or clogged. (Refer to 7 - COOLING -
11. Radiator core is corroded or 11. Have radiator re-cored or
plugged. replaced.
12. Dragging brakes 12. Check and correct as necessary.
(Refer to 5 - BRAKES -
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
13. Fuel or ignition system 13. Refer to 14 - Fuel System or 8 -
problems. Electrical for diagnosis and testing
procedures.
14. Bug screen or cardboard is 14. Remove bug screen or
being , reducing airflow. cardboard.
15. Thermostat partially or 15. Check thermostat operation and
completely shut. replace as necessary. (Refer to 7 -
COOLING/ENGINE/ENGINE
COOLANT THERMOSTAT -
REMOVAL).
16. Cooling fan(s) not operating 16. Check cooling fan drive
properly. operation. Refer to appropriate
Diagnostic Information.
17. Cylinder head gasket leaking. 17. Check for cylinder head gasket
leaks. (Refer to 7 - COOLING -
18. Heater core leaking. 18. Check heater core for leaks.
(Refer to 24 - HEATING & AIR
CONDITIONING - DIAGNOSIS AND
TESTING) . Repair as necessary.
LX COOLING 7 - 13
TEMPERATURE GAUGE READING 1. During cold weather operation, 1. During cold weather operation,
IS INCONSISTENT (FLUCTUATES, with the heater in the high position, with the heater in the high position,
CYCLES, OR IS ERRATIC the gauge reading may drop the gauge reading may drop slightly.
slightly.
2. Temperature gauge or engine 2. Check operation of gauge and

mounted gauge sensor defective or repair if necessary. (Refer to 8 -
shorted. Also, corroded or loose ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT
wiring in this circuit. CLUSTER - DIAGNOSIS AND
TESTING).
3. Gauge reading rises when 3. A normal condition. No correction
vehicle is brought to a stop after is necessary. Gauge should return
heavy use (engine still running) to normal range after vehicle is
driven.
4. Gauge reading high after 4. A normal condition. No correction
re-starting a warmed up (hot) is necessary. The gauge should
engine. return to normal range after a few
minutes of engine operation.
5. Coolant level low in radiator (air 5. Check and correct coolant leaks.
will build up in the cooling system (Refer to 7 - COOLING -
causing the thermostat to open DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).
late).
6. Cylinder head gasket leaking 6. (a) Check for cylinder head
allowing exhaust gas to enter gasket leaks. (Refer to 7 -
cooling system causing a COOLING - DIAGNOSIS AND
thermostat to open late. TESTING).
(b) Check for coolant in the engine
oil. Inspect for white steam emitting
from the exhaust system. Repair as
necessary.
7. Water pump impeller loose on 7. Check water pump and replace
shaft. as necessary. (Refer to 7 -
COOLING/ENGINE/WATER PUMP -
REMOVAL).
8. Loose accessory drive belt. 8. Check and correct as necessary.
(water pump slipping) (Refer to 7 - COOLING/
ACCESSORY DRIVE/DRIVE BELTS
- DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
9. Air leak on the suction side of the 9. Locate leak and repair as
water pump allows air to build up in necessary.
cooling system causing thermostat
to open late.
PRESSURE CAP IS BLOWING 1. Pressure relief valve in radiator 1. Check condition of radiator cap
OFF STEAM AND/OR COOLANT cap is defective. and cap seals. (Refer to 7 -
TO COOLANT TANK. COOLING/ENGINE/RADIATOR
TEMPERATURE GAUGE READING PRESSURE CAP - DIAGNOSIS
MAY BE ABOVE NORMAL BUT AND TESTING). Replace cap as
NOT HIGH. COOLANT LEVEL MAY necessary.
BE HIGH IN COOLANT RESERVE/
OVERFLOW TANK
7 - 14 COOLING LX
COOLANT LOSS TO THE 1. Coolant leaks in radiator, cooling 1. Pressure test and repair as
GROUND WITHOUT PRESSURE system hoses, water pump or necessary. (Refer to 7 - COOLING -
CAP BLOWOFF. GAUGE READING engine. DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).
HIGH OR HOT
DETONATION OR PRE-IGNITION 1. Engine overheating. 1. Check reason for overheating

(NOT CAUSED BY IGNITION and repair as necessary.
SYSTEM). GAUGE MAY OR MAY
NOT BE READING HIGH 2. Freeze point of coolant not 2. Check coolant concentration.
correct. Mixture is too rich or too (Refer to LUBRICATION &
lean. MAINTENANCE/FLUID TYPES -
DESCRIPTION).
HOSE OR HOSES COLLAPSE 1. Vacuum created in cooling 1. (a) Radiator cap relief valve
WHILE ENGINE IS RUNNING system on engine cool-down is not stuck. (Refer to 7 - COOLING/
being relieved through coolant ENGINE/RADIATOR PRESSURE
reserve/overflow system. CAP - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).
Replace if necessary
(b) Hose between coolant

reserve/overflow tank and radiator is
kinked. Repair as necessary.
(c) Vent at coolant reserve/overflow
tank is plugged. Clean vent and
repair as necessary.
(d) Reserve/overflow tank is
internally blocked or plugged. Check
for blockage and repair as
necessary.
NOISY COOLING FAN 1. Fan blades loose. 1. Replace fan blade assembly
(Refer to 7 - COOLING/ENGINE/
RADIATOR FAN - REMOVAL).
2. Fan blades striking a surrounding 2. Locate point of fan blade contact

object. and repair as necessary.
3. Air obstructions at radiator or air 3. Remove obstructions and/or
conditioning condenser. clean debris or insects from radiator
or A/C condenser.
LX COOLING 7 - 15
INADEQUATE HEATER 1. Has a Diagnostic trouble Code 1. (Refer to 25 - EMISSIONS

PERFORMANCE. THERMOSTAT (DTC) been set? CONTROL - DESCRIPTION) for
FAILED IN OPEN POSITION correct procedures and replace
thermostat if necessary
2. Coolant level low 2. (Refer to 7 - COOLING -

3. Obstructions in heater hose/ 3. Remove heater hoses at both
fittings ends and check for obstructions
4. Heater hose kinked 4. Locate kinked area and repair as
necessary
5. Water pump is not pumping 5. (Refer to 7 - COOLING/ENGINE/
water to/through the heater core. WATER PUMP - REMOVAL) for
When the engine is fully warmed 2.7L engine, (Refer to 7 -
up, both heater hoses should be COOLING/ENGINE/WATER PUMP -
hot to the touch. If only one of the REMOVAL) for 3.5L engine, (Refer
hoses is hot, the water pump may to 7 - COOLING/ENGINE/WATER
not be operating correctly or the PUMP - REMOVAL) for 5.7L/6.1L
heater core may be plugged. engine. If a slipping belt is detected,
Accessory drive belt may be (Refer to 7 - COOLING/
slipping causing poor water pump ACCESSORY DRIVE/DRIVE BELTS
operation. - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING). If
heater core obstruction is detected,
(Refer to 24 - HEATING & AIR
CONDITIONING/PLUMBING/
HEATER CORE - REMOVAL).
STEAM IS COMING FROM THE 1. During wet weather, moisture 1. Occasional steam emitting from
FRONT OF VEHICLE NEAR THE (snow, ice or rain condensation) on this area is normal. No repair is
GRILL AREA WHEN WEATHER IS the radiator will evaporate when the necessary.
WET, ENGINE IS WARMED UP thermostat opens. This opening
AND RUNNING, AND VEHICLE IS allows heated water into the
STATIONARY. TEMPERATURE radiator. When the moisture
GAUGE IS IN NORMAL RANGE contacts the hot radiator, steam
may be emitted. This usually occurs
in cold weather with no fan or
airflow to blow it away.
COOLANT COLOR 1. Coolant color is not necessarily 1. (Refer to LUBRICATION &

an indication of adequate corrosion MAINTENANCE/FLUID TYPES -
or temperature protection. Do not DESCRIPTION) Adjust coolant
rely on coolant color for determining mixture as necessary.
condition of coolant.
COOLANT LEVEL CHANGES IN 1. Level changes are to be 1. A normal condition. No repair is

COOLANT RESERVE/OVERFLOW expected as coolant volume necessary.
TANK. TEMPERATURE GAUGE IS fluctuates with engine temperature.
IN NORMAL RANGE If the level in the tank was between
the MIN. and MAX. marks at normal
operating temperature, the level
should return to within that range
after operation at elevated
temperatures.
7 - 16 COOLING LX
STANDARD PROCEDURE
DRAINING COOLING SYSTEM - ALL ENGINES
WARNING: Do not remove cylinder block drain
plugs or loosen radiator draincock with system
hot and under pressure. Serious burns from cool-
ant can occur.
NOTE: Typical drain plug shown in illustration.
DO NOT WASTE reusable coolant. If solution is clean,

drain coolant into a clean container for reuse.
1. Remove radiator pressure cap.
2. Loosen radiator petcock.
3. Remove drain plug (1).
COOLING SYSTEM FILLING
The use of aluminum cylinder blocks, cylinder heads and water pumps requires special corrosion protection. In
order to maintain the required protection for these components and cooling system performance, only use the
appropriate fluid (Refer to LUBRICATION & MAINTENANCE/FLUID TYPES - DESCRIPTION) when servicing the
vehicle. This coolant offers the best engine cooling without corrosion when mixed with 50% distilled water to obtain
a freeze point of -37 C (-35 F). If it loses color or becomes contaminated, drain, flush, and replace with fresh
properly mixed coolant solution.
WARNING: Make sure engine cooling system is cool before removing pressure cap or any hose. severe
personal injury may result from escaping hot coolant. The cooling system is pressurized when hot.
LX COOLING 7 - 17
NOTE: Cooling system fill procedure is critical to overall cooling system performance.
1. Close radiator draincock. Hand tighten only.

2. Install engine block drain plugs, if removed. Coat the threads with MoparT Thread Sealant with Teflon.
WARNING: When installing drain hose to air bleed valve, route hose away from accessory drive belts,
accessory drive pulleys, and electric cooling fan motors.
NOTE: It may be necessary to install a bleed fitting on the 5.7L engine.
3. Attach a 1.5 - 2 m (4 - 6 ft.) long 6.35 mm (1/4 inch.) ID clear hose to bleeder fitting
Bleed Valve Location (2.7L): Located on the water outlet connector at the front of engine.
Bleed Valve Location (3.5L): Located on the lower intake manifold, left of center and below the upper intake
plenum.
Plug Location (5.7L/6.1L): Located on the front of the water outlet housing at the front of engine.
4. Route hose (2) away from the accessory drive belt, drive pulleys and electric cooling fan. Place the other end of
hose (2) into a clean container. The hose will prevent coolant from contacting the accessory drive belt when
bleeding the system during the refilling operation.
NOTE: It is imperative that the cooling system air bleed valve be opened before any coolant is added to the
cooling system. Failure to open the bleed valve first will result in an incomplete fill of the system.
5. 5.7L/6.1L ENGINE - Install a threaded and barbed fitting (1/4 - 18 npt) into water pump housing.
6. Attach Tool 8195, Filling Aid Funnel to pressure bottle filler neck.
7. Using hose pinch-off pliers, pinch overflow hose (3) that connects between the two chambers of the coolant
bottle (2).
8. Open bleed fitting.
CAUTION: Do not mix coolants. If coolant is used other than specified, a reduction in corrosion protection
will occur.
9. Pour the antifreeze mixture (Refer to LUBRICATION & MAINTENANCE/FLUID TYPES - DESCRIPTION) into the
larger section of Filling Aid Funnel (the smaller section of funnel is to allow air to escape). For system capacity,
(Refer to 7 - COOLING - SPECIFICATIONS).
10. Slowly fill the cooling system until a steady stream of coolant flows from the hose attached to the bleed valve.
11. Close the bleed valve and continue filling system to the top of the Tool 8195, Filling Aid Funnel.
12. Remove pinch-off pliers from overflow hose.
13. Allow the coolant in Filling Funnel to drain into overflow chamber of the pressure bottle.
14. Remove Tool 8195, Filling Aid Funnel. Install cap on coolant pressure bottle.
15. Remove hose from bleed valve.
16. 5.7L/6.1L ENGINE - Install fitting into thermostat housing. Coat the threads with MoparT Thread Sealant with
Teflon.
17. Start engine and run at 1500 - 2000 RPM for 30 minutes.
NOTE: The engine cooling system will push any remaining air into the coolant bottle within about an hour
of normal driving. As a result, a drop in coolant level in the pressure bottle may occur. If the engine cooling
system overheats and pushes coolant into the overflow side of the coolant bottle, this coolant will be
sucked back into the cooling system ONLY IF THE PRESSURE CAP IS LEFT ON THE BOTTLE. Removing
the pressure cap breaks the vacuum path between the two bottle sections and the coolant will not return to
cooling system.
18. Shut off engine allow it to cool down for 30 minutes. This permits coolant to be drawn into the pressure cham-
ber.
19. With engine COLD, observe coolant level in pressure chamber. Coolant level should be within MIN and MAX
marks. Adjust coolant level as necessary.
7 - 18 COOLING LX
NOTE: The coolant bottle has two chambers. Coolant will normally only be in the inboard of the two. The
outboard chamber is only to recover coolant in the event of an overheat or after a recent service fill.
REFILLING COOLING SYSTEM - 3.0L DIESEL

1. Tighten the radiator draincock and the cylinder block drain plug(s) (if removed).
2. Remove thermostat housing bleed hose from two
clips.
3. Hold the thermostat housing bleed hose up so that
air can flow up to bottle.
CAUTION: Failure to purge air from the cooling

system can result in an overheating condition and
severe engine damage.
4. Fill cooling system with the antifreeze mixture

(Refer to LUBRICATION & MAINTENANCE/FLUID
TYPES - DESCRIPTION). Fill pressure bottle to
service line and install cap.
NOTE: The engine cooling system will push any

remaining air into the coolant bottle within about
an hour of normal driving. As a result, a drop in
coolant level in the pressure bottle may occur. If
the engine cooling system overheats and pushes
coolant into the overflow side of the coolant bot-
tle, this coolant will be sucked back into the cool-
ing system ONLY IF THE PRESSURE CAP IS LEFT
ON THE BOTTLE. Removing the pressure cap
breaks the vacuum path between the two bottle
sections and the coolant will not return to cooling
system.
5. With heater control unit in the HEAT position, oper-

ate engine with pressure bottle cap in place.
6. Add coolant to pressure bottle as necessary. Only
add coolant to the pressure bottle when the
engine is cold. Coolant level in a warm engine
will be higher due to thermal expansion.
7. Reinstall the thermostat housing bleed hose in the
two clips.
ADDING ADDITIONAL COOLANT

The use of aluminum cylinder blocks, cylinder heads
and water pumps requires special corrosion protection. Only MoparT Antifreeze/Coolant, 5 Year/100,000 Mile For-
mula (glycol base coolant with corrosion inhibitors called HOAT, for Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) is recom-
mended. This coolant offers the best engine cooling without corrosion when mixed with 50% distilled water to obtain
to obtain a freeze point of -37C (-35F). If it loses color or becomes contaminated, drain, flush, and replace with
LX COOLING 7 - 19
COOLANT LEVEL CHECK

NOTE: Do not remove radiator cap for routine
coolant level inspections. The coolant level can be
checked at coolant recovery bottle (2).
The coolant reserve/overflow system provides a quick

method for determining coolant level. With engine not
running, the coolant level should be between MIN and
MAX marks (3). If the coolant level is at or below the
MIN mark, fill the recovery bottle with a 50/50 mixture
of antifreeze and water ONE QUART AT A TIME.
Repeat this procedure until the coolant level is at the
FULL mark.
DRAINING COOLING SYSTEM - ALL ENGINES

WARNING: Do not remove cylinder block drain
plugs or loosen radiator draincock with system
hot and under pressure. Serious burns from cool-
ant can occur.
NOTE: Typical drain plug shown in illustration.
DO NOT WASTE reusable coolant. If solution is clean,

drain coolant into a clean container for reuse.
1. Remove radiator pressure cap.
2. Loosen radiator petcock.
3. Remove drain plug (1).
COOLING SYSTEM CLEANING/REVERSE FLUSHING

CLEANING
Drain cooling system and refill with water. Run engine with radiator cap installed until upper radiator hose is hot.
Stop engine and drain water from system. If water is dirty, fill system with water, run engine and drain system.
Repeat until water drains clean.
REVERSE FLUSHING
Reverse flushing of cooling system is the forcing of water through the cooling system. This is done using air pres-
sure in the opposite direction of normal coolant flow. It is usually only necessary with very dirty systems with evi-
dence of partial plugging.
7 - 20 COOLING LX
REVERSE FLUSHING RADIATOR

Disconnect radiator hoses from radiator inlet and outlet. Attach a section of radiator hose to radiator bottom outlet
fitting and insert flushing gun. Connect a water supply hose and air supply hose to flushing gun.
CAUTION: Internal radiator pressure must not exceed 138 kPa (20 psi) as damage to radiator may result.
Allow radiator to fill with water. When radiator is filled, apply air in short blasts. Allow radiator to refill between blasts.
Continue this reverse flushing until clean water flows out through rear of radiator cooling tube passages. Have radi-
ator cleaned more extensively by a radiator repair shop.
REVERSE FLUSHING ENGINE

Drain cooling system. Remove thermostat housing and thermostat. Install thermostat housing. Disconnect radiator
upper hose from radiator and attach flushing gun to hose. Disconnect radiator lower hose from water pump and
attach a lead-away hose to water pump inlet fitting.
CAUTION: On vehicles equipped with a heater water control valve, be sure heater control valve is closed
(heat off). This will prevent coolant flow with scale and other deposits from entering heater core.
Connect water supply hose and air supply hose to flushing gun. Allow engine to fill with water. When engine is filled,
apply air in short blasts, allowing system to fill between air blasts. Continue until clean water flows through the lead
away hose.
Remove lead away hose, flushing gun, water supply hose and air supply hose. Remove thermostat housing and
install thermostat. Install thermostat housing with a replacement gasket. Refer to Thermostat Replacement. Connect
radiator hoses. Refill cooling system with correct antifreeze/water mixture. Refer to Refilling the Cooling System.
CHEMICAL CLEANING
In some instances, use a radiator cleaner (Mopar Radiator Kleen or equivalent) before flushing. This will soften
scale and other deposits and aid flushing operation.
CAUTION: Follow manufacturers instructions when using these products.
SPECIFICATIONS
TORQUE

Automatic Belt Tensioner to Block - Bolts 54 40 -
3.0L Diesel
Block Heater - Bolt 2 - 17
Generator/Compressor Mounting Bracket - Bolts -
No. 1 and No.2 54 40 -
No. 3 40 30 -
Fan Shroud Mounting - Bolts 6 - 50
Fan Blade to Fan Motor - Bolts 23 17 -
Idler Pulley - Bolt - 5.7L/6.1L 54 40 -
Idler Pulley - Bolt - 2.7L/3.5L 28 - 250
Radiator to Support Bracket - Bolts 12 - 106
Thermostat Housing - Bolts - 2.7L/3.5L 11.8 - 105
Housing - Coolant Outlet - 2.7L 11.8 - 105
Housing - Coolant - 3.0L Diesel 11.8 - 105
Heater Supply Tube 3.4 - 30
LX COOLING 7 - 21

Thermostat Housing - Bolts - 5.7L/6.1L 13 - 112
Upper Radiator Closure Panel - Bolts 10 - 90
Water Pump - Bolts - 2.7L/3.5L 11.8 - 105
Water Pump - Bolts - 5.7L/6.1L 28 20 -
Transmission Cooler Lines at Transmission 20 18
Transmission Cooler lines at thermal bypass valve 20 28
Transmission Cooler lines at thermal bypass valve 20 18
FILL VOLUMES
SPECIFICATIONS
Metric Standard
2.7L 9.2 9.7
3.5L 10.0 10.6
5.7L 13.8 14.6
6.1L 14.0 14.8
3.0L Diesel 14.0 14.8
7 - 22 COOLING LX
SPECIAL TOOLS
COOLING
COOLANT REFRACTOMETER 8286
PLIERS 6094
PRESSURE TESTER 7700
RELEASE TOOL 8875A
FILLING AID FUNNEL 8195

LX ACCESSORY DRIVE 7 - 23
ACCESSORY DRIVE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
BELT TENSIONER 5.7L/6.1L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 3.0L DIESEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 INSTALLATION
REMOVAL 2.7L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
2.7L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 3.5L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3.5L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 5.7L/6.1L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
5.7L/6.1L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 3.0L DIESEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
3.0L DIESEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 IDLER PULLEY
INSTALLATION REMOVAL
2.7L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 2.7L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
3.5L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 3.5L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
5.7L/6.1L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 5.7L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3.0L DIESEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 3.0L Diesel Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
DRIVE BELT INSTALLATION
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING 2.7L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 3.5L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
REMOVAL 5.7L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
2.7L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
3.5L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
7 - 24 ACCESSORY DRIVE LX
BELT TENSIONER
DESCRIPTION
Correct drive belt tension is required to ensure opti-
mum performance of the belt (1) driven engine acces-
sories. If specified tension is not maintained, belt
slippage may cause; engine overheating, lack of
power steering assist, loss of air conditioning capacity,
reduced generator output rate, and greatly reduced
belt life.
It is not necessary to adjust belt tension on the 2.7L/
3.5L or 5.7L/6.1L engines. These engines are
equipped with an automatic belt tensioner (2). The
tensioner maintains correct belt tension at all times.
Due to use of this belt tensioner (2), do not attempt to
use a belt tension gauge on these engines.
OPERATION
The automatic belt tensioner maintains belt tension by using internal spring pressure, a pivoting arm and pulley to
apply force against the drive belt.
REMOVAL
2.7L ENGINE
On all engines, the tensioner (1) is equipped with
an indexing tang on back of tensioner and an
indexing stop on tensioner housing. If a new belt
is being installed, tang must be within approxi-
mately 6 - 8mm (0.24 - 0.32 in.) of indexing stop
(i.e. tang is approximately between the two index-
ing stops). Belt is considered new if it has been
used 15 minutes or less.
If the above specification cannot be met, check for:
The wrong belt being installed (incorrect length/
width)
Worn bearings on an engine accessory (A/C
compressor, power steering pump, water pump,
idler pulley or generator)
Belt is not installed in pulley grooves
A pulley on an engine accessory being loose
Misalignment of an engine accessory
Belt incorrectly routed.
NOTE: A used belt should be replaced if tensioner indexing arrow has moved to the minimum tension indi-
cator. Tensioner travel stops at this point.
1. Remove accessory drive belt (Refer to 7 - COOLING/ACCESSORY DRIVE/DRIVE BELTS - REMOVAL).

WARNING: Because of high spring pressure, do not attempt to disassemble automatic tensioner. Unit is
serviced as an assembly except for pulley on tensioner.
2. Remove tensioner assembly bolt (2).

3. Remove tensioner assembly (1) from mounting bracket.
3.5L ENGINE
width)

5.7L/6.1L ENGINE
width)

3.0L DIESEL
1. Disconnect negative battery cable.
2. Remove accessory drive belt (Refer to 7 - COOL-
ING/ACCESSORY DRIVE/DRIVE BELTS -
REMOVAL).
3. Remove belt tensioner retaining bolt and remove
tensioner (5) from bracket.
INSTALLATION
2.7L ENGINE
1. Install tensioner bolt (2) to tensioner (1). Tighten
bolt to 34 Nm (40 ft. lbs.) torque.
2. Install accessory drive belt (Refer to 7 - COOLING/
ACCESSORY DRIVE/DRIVE BELTS - INSTALLA-
TION).
3. Check belt indexing marks.
3.5L ENGINE
TION).
5.7L/6.1L ENGINE
TION).
3.0L DIESEL
1. Install belt tensioner (5) on bracket. Torque retain-
ing bolt to 47 Nm.
TION).
3. Connect negative battery cable.
DRIVE BELT
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT
VISUAL DIAGNOSIS
When diagnosing serpentine accessory drive belts,
small cracks (1) that run across the ribbed surface of
the belt from rib to rib , are considered normal. These
are not a reason to replace the belt. However, cracks
(2) running along a rib (not across) are not normal.
Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be
replaced. Also replace the belt if it has excessive
wear, frayed cords, severe glazing or chunking.
Any belt with bumps, surface coming apart, or any
other uneven indications along the flat surface of the
belt must be remove and inspected and replaced if
necessary.
Refer to ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT DIAGNOSIS
CHART for further belt diagnosis.
NOISE DIAGNOSIS
Noises generated by the accessory drive belt are most noticeable at idle. Before replacing a belt to resolve a noise
condition, inspect all of the accessory drive pulleys for alignment, glazing, or excessive end play.
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT DIAGNOSIS CHART
RIB CHUNKING (One or more ribs 1. Foreign objects imbedded in 1. Remove foreign objects from
has separated from belt body) pulley grooves. pulley grooves. Replace belt.
2. Installation damage 2. Replace belt
RIB OR BELT WEAR 1. Pulley misaligned 1. Align pulley(s)
2. Abrasive environment 2. Clean pulley(s). Replace belt if

necessary
3. Rusted pulley(s) 3. Clean rust from pulley(s)
4. Sharp or jagged pulley groove 4. Replace pulley. Inspect belt.
tips
5. Belt rubber deteriorated 5. Replace belt
BELT SLIPS 1. Belt slipping because of 1. Inspect/Replace tensioner if

insufficient tension necessary
2. Belt or pulley exposed to 2. Replace belt and clean pulleys

substance that has reduced friction
(belt dressing, oil, ethylene glycol)
3. Driven component bearing failure 3. Replace faulty component or
(seizure) bearing
4. Belt glazed or hardened from 4. Replace belt.
heat and excessive slippage
LONGITUDINAL BELT CRACKING 1. Belt has mis-tracked from pulley 1. Replace belt
groove
2. Pulley groove tip has worn away 2. Replace belt

rubber to tensile member
9GROOVE JUMPING9 1. Incorrect belt tension 1. Inspect/Replace tensioner if

(Belt does not maintain correct necessary
position on pulley)
2. Pulley(s) not within design 2. Replace pulley(s)
tolerance
3. Foreign object(s) in grooves 3. Remove foreign objects from
grooves
4. Pulley misalignment 4. Align component
5. Belt cord line is broken 5. Replace belt
BELT BROKEN 1. Incorrect belt tension 1. Replace Inspect/Replace

(Note: Identify and correct problem tensioner if necessary
before new belt is installed)
2. Tensile member damaged during 2. Replace belt
belt installation
3. Severe misalignment 3. Align pulley(s)
4. Bracket, pulley, or bearing failure 4. Replace defective component
and belt
NOISE 1. Incorrect belt tension 1. Inspect/Replace tensioner if

(Objectionable squeal, squeak, or necessary
rumble is heard or felt while drive
belt is in operation) 2. Bearing noise 2. Locate and repair
3. Belt misalignment 3. Align belt/pulley(s)
4. Belt to pulley mismatch 4. Install correct belt
5. Driven component induced 5. Locate defective driven
vibration component and repair
6. Belt flat surface coming apart 6. Replace belt
TENSION SHEETING FABRIC 1. Tension sheeting contacting 1. Correct rubbing condition

FAILURE stationary object
(Woven fabric on outside,
circumference of belt has cracked or 2. Excessive heat causing woven 2. Replace belt
separated from body of belt) fabric to age
3. Tension sheeting splice has 3. Replace belt
fractured
CORD EDGE FAILURE 1. Incorrect belt tension 1. Inspect/Replace tensioner if

(Tensile member exposed at edges necessary
of belt or separated from belt body) 2. Belt contacting stationary object 2. Replace belt
3. Pulley(s) out of tolerance 3. Replace pulley
4. Insufficient adhesion between 4. Replace belt
tensile member and rubber matrix
REMOVAL
2.7L ENGINE
CAUTION: Do not let tensioner arm snap back to
the freearm position, sever damage may occur to
the tensioner.
Belt tension is not adjustable. Belt adjustment is main-

tained by an automatic, spring loaded belt tensioner.
1. Disconnect negative battery cable from battery.
2. Rotate belt tensioner (5) counterclockwise until it
contacts its stop. Remove belt, then slowly rotate
the tensioner into the freearm position.
3.5L ENGINE
the tensioner.

5.7L/6.1L ENGINE
the tensioner.

3.0L DIESEL
NOTE: The belt routing schematics are published
from the latest information available at the time of
publication. If anything differs between these
schematics and the Belt Routing Label, use the
schematics on Belt Routing Label. This label is
located in the engine compartment.

the freearm position, severe damage may occur to
the tensioner.

tained by an automatic, spring loaded belt tensioner
(5).
2. Rotate belt tensioner (5) until it contacts its stop.
Remove belt, then slowly rotate the tensioner (5)
into the freearm position.
INSTALLATION
2.7L ENGINE
tained by an automatic ( spring load ) belt tensioner.
1. Check condition of all pulleys.
CAUTION: When installing the serpentine acces-

sory drive belt, the belt MUST be routed correctly.
If not, the engine may overheat due to the water
pump rotating in the wrong direction.
2. Install new belt. Route the belt around all pulleys

except the idler pulley. Rotate the tensioner arm
until it contacts its stop position. Route the belt
around the idler and slowly let the tensioner rotate
into the belt. Make sure the belt is seated onto all
pulleys.
ON all engines, the tensioner (5) is equipped with
mately 6 - 8mm (0.24 - 0.32 in.) of indexing stop (i.e. tang is approximately between the two indexing stops).
Belt is considered new if it has been used 15 minutes or less.
3. With the drive belt installed, inspect the belt wear indicator.
3.5L ENGINE


pulleys.
5.7L/6.1L ENGINE


pulleys.
3.0L DIESEL

tained by an automatic ( spring load ) belt tensioner
(5).

2. Install new belt (3). Route the belt around all pul-
leys except the idler pulley. Rotate the tensioner
arm until it contacts its stop position. Route the belt around the idler and slowly let the tensioner rotate into the
belt. Make sure the belt (3) is seated onto all pulleys.
IDLER PULLEY
REMOVAL
2.7L ENGINE
REMOVAL).
2. Remove cover (3).
3. Remove bolt (2) and idler pulley (1).
3.5L ENGINE
REMOVAL).
5.7L ENGINE
ING/ACCESSORY DRIVE/BELT TENSIONERS -
REMOVAL).
3.0L Diesel Engine

REMOVAL).
2. Remove cover.
3. Remove bolt (5) and idler pulley.
INSTALLATION
2.7L ENGINE
1. Position idler pulley (1).
2. Tighten bolt (2) to 28 Nm (250 in. lbs.).
3. Install cover (3).
TION)
3.5L ENGINE
2. Tighten bolt to (2) 28 Nm (250 in. lbs.).
TION).
5.7L ENGINE
2. Tighten bolt (2) to 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.).
TION).
INSTALLATION


2. Install new belt (3). Route the belt around all pul-
leys except the idler pulley. Rotate the tensioner
arm until it contacts its stop position. Route the belt
around the idler and slowly let the tensioner rotate into the belt. Make sure the belt (3) is seated onto all pulleys.
LX ENGINE 7 - 39
ENGINE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
COOLANT 3.5L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

DESCRIPTION 5.7L/6.1L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
ENGINE COOLANT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 3.0L DIESEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
HOAT COOLANT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 INSTALLATION
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 2.7L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING 3.5L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
COOLANT CONCENTRATION TESTING . . . . . . 42 5.7L/6.1L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
HOUSING-COOLANT OUTLET 3.0L DIESEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
REMOVAL HEATER SUPPLY TUBE
2.7L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 REMOVAL
3.0L Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 3.5L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
INSTALLATION 5.7L/6.1L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
2.7L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 INSTALLATION
3.0L Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 3.5L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
COOLANT RECOVERY CONTAINER 5.7L/6.1L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 RADIATOR
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING RADIATOR PRESSURE CAP
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
REMOVAL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
5.7L/6.1L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 RADIATOR CAP-TO-FILLER NECK SEAL . . . . . . 65
INSTALLATION RADIATOR CAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
5.7L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
ENGINE COOLANT TEMP SENSOR WATER PUMP
REMOVAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
2.7L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 REMOVAL
3.5L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 2.7L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
3.0L DIESEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 5.7L/6.1L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
INSTALLATION 3.0L DIESEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
2.7L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 INSPECTION - 2.7L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
3.5L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 INSTALLATION
3.0L DIESEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 3.5L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
ENGINE COOLANT THERMOSTAT 5.7L/6.1L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 3.0L DIESEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
OPERATION FAN-RADIATOR
GAS ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
ENGINE COOLANT THERMOSTAT . . . . . . . . . . . 55
REMOVAL
2.7L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
7 - 40 ENGINE LX
COOLANT
DESCRIPTION
ENGINE COOLANT
ETHYLENE-GLYCOL MIXTURES
The use of aluminum cylinder blocks, cylinder heads and water pumps requires special corrosion protection. Only
MoparT Antifreeze/Coolant, 5 year/100,000 Mile Formula (ethylene-glycol base coolant with corrosion inhibitors
called HOAT, for Hybrid Additive Technology) is recommended. This coolant offers the best engine cooling without
corrosion when mixed with 50% distilled water to obtain a freeze point of -37 C (-35 F).
The required ethylene-glycol (antifreeze) and water mixture depends upon the climate and vehicle operating condi-
tions. The antifreeze concentration must always be a minimum of 44 percent, year-round in all climates. If per-
centage is lower than 44 percent, engine parts may be eroded by cavitation, and cooling system
components may be severely damaged by corrosion. Maximum protection against freezing is provided with a
68% antifreeze concentration, which prevents freezing down to -67.7 C (-90 F). A higher percentage will freeze at
a warmer temperature. Also, a higher percentage of antifreeze can cause the engine to overheat because the spe-
cific heat of antifreeze is lower than that of water.
Use of 100 percent ethylene-glycol will cause formation of additive deposits in the system, as the corrosion inhibitive
additives in ethylene-glycol require the presence of water to dissolve. The deposits act as insulation, causing tem-
peratures to rise to as high as 149 C (300 F). This temperature is hot enough to melt plastic and soften solder.
The increased temperature can result in engine detonation. In addition, 100 percent ethylene-glycol freezes at 22
C (-8 F ).
PROPYLENE-GLYCOL MIXTURES
Its overall effective temperature range is smaller than that of ethylene-glycol. The freeze point of 50/50 propylene-
glycol and water is -32 C (-26 F). 5 C higher than ethylene-glycols freeze point. The boiling point (protection
against summer boil-over) of propylene-glycol is 125 C (257 F ) at 96.5 kPa (14 psi), compared to 128 C (263
F) for ethylene-glycol. Use of propylene-glycol can result in boil-over or freeze-up on a cooling system designed for
ethylene-glycol. Propylene glycol also has poorer heat transfer characteristics than ethylene glycol. This can
increase cylinder head temperatures under certain conditions.
Propylene-glycol/ethylene-glycol Mixtures can cause the destabilization of various corrosion inhibitors, causing dam-
age to the various cooling system components. Also, once ethylene-glycol and propylene-glycol based coolants are
mixed in the vehicle, conventional methods of determining freeze point will not be accurate. Both the refractive index
and specific gravity differ between ethylene glycol and propylene glycol.
HOAT COOLANT
WARNING: Antifreeze is an ethylene-glycol base coolant and is harmful if swallowed or inhaled. If swal-
lowed, drink two glasses of water and induce vomiting. If inhaled, move to fresh air area. Seek medical
attention immediately. Do not store in open or unmarked containers. Wash skin and clothing thoroughly
after coming in contact with ethylene-glycol. Keep out of reach of children. Dispose of glycol base coolant
properly, contact your dealer or government agency for location of collection center in your area. Do not
open a cooling system when the engine is at operating temperature or hot under pressure, personal injury
can result. Avoid radiator cooling fan when engine compartment related service is performed, personal
injury can result.
CAUTION: Use of Propylene-Glycol based coolants is not recommended, as they provide less freeze pro-
tection and less corrosion protection.
LX ENGINE 7 - 41
The cooling system is designed around the coolant. The coolant must accept heat from engine metal, in the cylinder
head area near the exhaust valves and engine block. Then coolant carries the heat to the radiator where the tube/
fin radiator can transfer the heat to the air.
The use of aluminum cylinder blocks, cylinder heads, and water pumps requires special corrosion protection.
MoparT Antifreeze/Coolant, 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula (MS-9769), or the equivalent ethylene-glycol base coolant
with organic corrosion inhibitors (called HOAT, for Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) is recommended. This cool-
ant offers the best engine cooling without corrosion when mixed with 50% ethylene-glycol and 50% distilled water to
obtain a freeze point of -37 C (-35 F). If it loses color or becomes contaminated, drain, flush, and replace with
CAUTION: MoparT Antifreeze/Coolant, 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula (MS-9769) may not be mixed with any
other type of antifreeze. Mixing of coolants other than specified (non-HOAT or other HOAT), may result in
engine damage that may not be covered under the new vehicle warranty, and decreased corrosion protec-
tion.
COOLANT PERFORMANCE
The required ethylene-glycol (antifreeze) and water mixture depends upon climate and vehicle operating conditions.
The coolant performance of various mixtures follows:
Pure Water-Water can absorb more heat than a mixture of water and ethylene-glycol. This is for purpose of heat
transfer only. Water also freezes at a higher temperature and allows corrosion.
100 percent Ethylene-Glycol-The corrosion inhibiting additives in ethylene-glycol need the presence of water to
dissolve. Without water, additives form deposits in system. These act as insulation causing temperature to rise to as
high as 149 C (300 F). This temperature is hot enough to melt plastic and soften solder. The increased temper-
ature can result in engine detonation. In addition, 100 percent ethylene-glycol freezes at -22 C (-8 F).
50/50 Ethylene-Glycol and Water-Is the recommended mixture, it provides protection against freezing to -37 C
(-34 F). The antifreeze concentration must always be a minimum of 44 percent, year-round in all climates. If per-
centage is lower, engine parts may be eroded by cavitation. Maximum protection against freezing is provided with a
68 percent antifreeze concentration, which prevents freezing down to -67.7 C (-90 F). A higher percentage will
freeze at a warmer temperature. Also, a higher percentage of antifreeze can cause the engine to overheat because
specific heat of antifreeze is lower than that of water.
COOLANT SELECTION AND ADDITIVES

The use of aluminum cylinder blocks, cylinder heads and water pumps requires special corrosion protection. Only
MoparT Antifreeze/Coolant, 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula (glycol base coolant with corrosion inhibitors called HOAT,
for Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) is recommended. This coolant offers the best engine cooling without cor-
rosion when mixed with 50% distilled water to obtain a freeze point of -37 C (-35 F). If it loses color or becomes
contaminated, drain, flush, and replace with fresh properly mixed coolant solution.
OPERATION
Coolant flows through the engine block absorbing the heat from the engine, then flows to the radiator where the
cooling fins in the radiator transfers the heat from the coolant to the atmosphere. During cold weather the ethylene-
glycol or propylene-glycol coolant prevents water present in the cooling system from freezing within temperatures
indicated by mixture ratio of coolant to water.
7 - 42 ENGINE LX

COOLANT CONCENTRATION TESTING
Coolant concentration should be checked when any additional coolant was added to system or after a coolant drain,
flush and refill. The coolant mixture offers optimum engine cooling and protection against corrosion when mixed to
a freeze point of -37C (-34F) to -46C (-50F). The use of a hydrometer or a refractometer can be used to test
coolant concentration.
A hydrometer will test the amount of glycol in a mixture by measuring the specific gravity of the mixture. The higher
the concentration of ethylene glycol, the larger the number of balls that will float, and higher the freeze protection
(up to a maximum of 60% by volume glycol).
A refractometer Tool 8286 (Refer to 7 - COOLING - SPECIAL TOOLS) will test the amount of glycol in a coolant
mixture by measuring the amount a beam of light bends as it passes through the fluid.
Some coolant manufactures use other types of glycols into their coolant formulations. Propylene glycol is the most
common new coolant. However, propylene glycol based coolants do not provide the same freezing protection and
corrosion protection and is not recommended.
CAUTION: Do not mix types of coolant - corrosion protection will be severely reduced.
LX ENGINE 7 - 43
HOUSING-COOLANT OUTLET
REMOVAL
2.7L ENGINE
WARNING: Do not remove pressure cap with the
system hot and under pressure because serious
burns from coolant can occur.
1. Drain cooling system (Refer to 7 - COOLING -

2. Remove radiator (Refer to 7 - COOLING/ENGINE/
RADIATOR - REMOVAL).
3. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor con-
nector.
4. Remove radiator upper hose at tube (3).
5. Remove heater hose from heater tube at rear of
engine.
6. Disconnect heater tube from retaining clip at rear of
engine.
7. Disconnect electrical connector from coolant tem-
perature sensor.
8. Remove screws (2) attaching Water housing outlet
tube (3) to outlet connector (1).
9. Disengage Water housing outlet tube (3) from out-
let connector (1). To remove heater tube, move for-
ward until the tube (3) clears cylinder heads.
3.0L Diesel
1. Drain cooling system (Refer to 7 - COOLING - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
2. Remove heater return tube.
3. Remove lower radiator hose from coolant outlet housing.
4. Remove coolant outlet housing bolts and remove housing.
7 - 44 ENGINE LX
INSTALLATION
2.7L ENGINE
1. Inspect heater tube O-ring (4). Replace as neces-
sary.
2. Lubricate O-ring (4) with a silicone type grease
such as MoparT Dielectric Grease.
3. Install the Water housing Outlet with tube (3) by
inserting tube in-between cylinder heads. Insert
tube into outlet connector (1).
4. Attach Water housing Outlet tube (3) to the retain-
ing clip at rear of engine.
5. Install attaching screws and tighten to 3 Nm (30 in.
lbs.).
6. Install radiator (Refer to 7 - COOLING/ENGINE/
RADIATOR - INSTALLATION).
7. Fill cooling system (Refer to 7 - COOLING - STAN-
DARD PROCEDURE).
8. Operate engine until it reaches normal operating
temperature. Check cooling system for correct fluid
levels.
3.0L Diesel
1. Position the Water Outlet Housing on the cylinder block.
2. Install mounting nuts and tighten to 11.8 Nm (105 in. lbs.).
3. Fill cooling system (Refer to 7 - COOLING - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
4. Operate engine until it reaches normal operating temperature. Check cooling system for correct fluid levels.
LX ENGINE 7 - 45
COOLANT RECOVERY CONTAINER

REMOVAL
1. Remove coolant recovery container pressure cap
(3).
2. Remove and plug coolant recovery tube (1).
3. Remove mounting nuts (2).
4. Remove coolant recovery container (3) from
vehicle.
INSTALLATION
1. Position coolant recovery container (3).
2. Install mounting nuts (2). Tighten to 10 Nm (89 in.
lbs.).
3. Install coolant recovery tube (1).
DARD PROCEDURE).
5. Install coolant recovery container pressure cap (4).
7 - 46 ENGINE LX
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER

DESCRIPTION
The engine block heater (1) is mounted in the cylinder
block (2), near the right rear corner. The block heater
is a dry cylinder type design and is powered by 110
volt AC. The power cord must be secured in its
retainer clips, and not positioned so it could con-
tact linkages or exhaust manifolds and become
damaged.
The engine block heater (1) is mounted in the cylinder

block, near the left rear corner. The block heater is a
dry cylinder type design and is powered by 110 volt
AC. The power cord must be secured in its
retainer clips, and not positioned so it could con-
tact linkages or exhaust manifolds and become
damaged.
OPERATION
When power is applied (110 volt AC) to the block heater, the heating element transfers heat through the aluminum
engine block and into the coolant without directly penetrating the cooling system.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER
If unit does not operate, trouble can be in either the power cord or the heater element. Test power cord for conti-
nuity with a 110-volt voltmeter or 110-volt test light; test heater element continuity with an ohmmeter or 12-volt test
light.
LX ENGINE 7 - 47
REMOVAL
REMOVAL
1. Raise vehicle on hoist.
2. Detach power cord plug from block heater (1).
3. Remove block heater attaching screw located
below heater terminals.
4. Remove block heater from cylinder block (2).
5.7L/6.1L ENGINE
1. Raise vehicle.
2. Remove power cord from block heater.
3. Remove bolt on block heater. Remove heater
assembly.
INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION
1. Thoroughly clean cylinder block heater cavity.
2. Insert heater assembly (1) into block (2) with
mounting hole is located below heater terminals.
3. Install mounting screw and tighten to 12 Nm (105
in. lbs.).
4. Attach power cord to heater.
CAUTION: To prevent damage, the power cord

must be secured in its retainer clips, and not posi-
tioned so it could contact linkages or exhaust
manifolds.
7 - 48 ENGINE LX
5. Lower vehicle.
5.7L ENGINE
1. Thoroughly clean cylinder block core hole and
block heater seat.
2. Insert block heater assembly into the block.
3. With block heater fully seated, tighten bolt to 2 Nm
LX ENGINE 7 - 49
ENGINE COOLANT TEMP SENSOR

REMOVAL
2.7L ENGINE
2. Partially drain cooling system (Refer to 7 - COOL-
ING - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
3. Disconnect the electrical connector (2).
4. Remove engine coolant sensor (1) from coolant
outlet tube (3).
3.5L ENGINE
3. With the engine cold, disconnect coolant sensor
electrical connector.
4. Remove sensor (2).
7 - 50 ENGINE LX
5.7L/6.1L ENGINE
The Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor (3) on
the 5.7L/6.1L engine is located under the air condition-
ing compressor. It is installed into a water jacket at the
front of the cylinder block .
WARNING: Hot, pressurized coolant can cause

injury by scalding. Cooling system must be par-
tially drained before removing the coolant temper-
ature sensor.
1. Partially drain the cooling system (Refer to 7 -

COOLING - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
REMOVAL).
3. Carefully unbolt air conditioning compressor from
front of engine. Do not disconnect any A/C hoses
from compressor. Temporarily support compressor
to gain access to ECT sensor (3).
4. Disconnect electrical connector (2) from sensor (3).
5. Remove sensor (3) from cylinder block.
3.0L DIESEL
WARNING: Risk of injury to skin and eyes from
scalding with hot coolant. Risk of poisoning from
swallowing coolant. Do not open cooling system
unless coolant temperature is below 90C. Open
cap slowly to release pressure. Store coolant in
suitable and appropriately marked container. Wear
protective gloves, clothes and eye wear.

2. Remove engine cover (Refer to 9 - ENGINE -
REMOVAL).
3. Partially drain coolant system (Refer to 7 - COOL-
4. Unplug coolant temperature sensor electrical con-
nector.
NOTE: Capture any residual coolant that may flow.
5. Remove coolant temperature sensor (2).

LX ENGINE 7 - 51
INSTALLATION
2.7L ENGINE
1. Apply thread sealant to sensor threads.
2. Install engine coolant temperature sensor (1) into
coolant outlet tube (3).
3. Tighten sensor to 28 Nm (20 ft. lbs.) torque.
4. Connect electrical connector (2) to engine coolant
temperature sensor (1).
3.5L ENGINE
1. Install engine coolant temperature sensor (2).
Tighten sensor to 28 Nm (20 ft. lbs.) torque.
2. Attach electrical connector to sensor.
7 - 52 ENGINE LX
5.7L/6.1L ENGINE
1. Apply thread sealant to sensor threads.
2. Install ECT sensor (3) to engine.
3. Tighten sensor to 11 Nm (97.3 in. lbs.) torque.
4. Connect electrical connector (2) to ECT sensor (3).
5. Fill the cooling system (Refer to 7 - COOLING -
3.0L DIESEL
unless coolant temperature is below 90C (194f).
Open cap slowly to release pressure. Store cool-
ant in suitable and appropriately marked container.
Wear protective gloves, clothes and eye wear.
1. Position and install coolant temperature sensor.

2. Connect coolant temperature sensor electrical con-
nector.
3. Refill coolant system to proper level with proper
mixture of coolant (Refer to 7 - COOLING - STAN-
DARD PROCEDURE).
4. Install engine cover (Refer to 9 - ENGINE -
INSTALLATION).
WARNING: Use extreme caution when engine is

operating. Do not stand in a direct line with fan. Do not put your hands near pulleys, belts or fan. Do not
wear loose clothes.
6. Start engine and inspect for leaks.

LX ENGINE 7 - 53
ENGINE COOLANT THERMOSTAT

DESCRIPTION
The engine cooling thermostats are a wax pellet driven, reverse poppet choke type. The thermostats have an air
bleed located in the thermostat flange. The air bleed allows internal trapped air during cooling system filling to be
released. The thermostat on the 2.7L and 3.5L engines are located on the lower left side of engine, near the front.
The thermostat on both engines are on the inlet side of the water pump.
The thermostat on the 5.7L/6.1L gas powered engine is located beneath the thermostat housing (1) at the front of
the intake manifold.
The thermostat on the 3.0L Diesel engine is integrated
into the thermostat housing located at the front of the
right intake manifold and is serviced as an assembly.
A rubber seal is used to seal the thermostat housing
to the intake manifold. The thermostat contains the fol-
lowing components:
Main Valve (4) - Controls coolant flow through
the radiator
Bypass Valve (2) - Controls coolant flow through
the bypass passage to the inlet side of the water
pump
Vent Valve (1) - Vents the cooling system via a
ball valve when it is filled and when the engine is
running
Thermostat Housing Seal (3)
OPERATION
GAS ENGINE
The engine cooling thermostat is a wax pellet driven, reverse poppet choke type. The thermostat is designed to
provide the fastest warm up possible by preventing leakage through it and to guarantee a minimum engine oper-
ating temperature of 88 to 93 C (192 to 199 F). The thermostat also will automatically reach wide open so it will
not restrict flow to the radiator as temperature of the coolant rises in hot weather to around 104 C (220 F). Above
this temperature the coolant temperature is controlled by the radiator, fan, and ambient temperature, not the ther-
mostat.
The thermostat is operated by a wax filled container (pellet) which is sealed. When heated coolant reaches a pre-
determined temperature, the wax expands enough to overcome the closing spring and water pump pressure, which
forces the valve to open.
7 - 54 ENGINE LX
3.0L DIESEL ENGINE

WARM-UP PHASE
Up to a coolant temperature of approximately 87 C

(189 F), the main valve is closed and the bypass
valve fully open. The flow through the radiator is inter-
rupted and coolant flows through the bypass passage
directly to the inlet side of the water pump.
PARTIAL-LOAD PHASE
The main valve begins to open at a coolant tempera-

ture of 86 C (189 F), and a small amount of coolant
flows through the radiator. As the engine temperature
increases, the main valve opens further and the
bypass valve gradually closes. More coolant flows
through the radiator and less coolant flows through the
bypass passage.
LX ENGINE 7 - 55
FULL-LOAD PHASE
The main valve is fully open at a coolant temperature

above 102 C (216 F). The bypass plate seals off the
bypass passage. The entire quantity of coolant flows
through the radiator.

ENGINE COOLANT THERMOSTAT
The thermostat is operated by a wax filled chamber (pellet) which is sealed. When heated coolant reaches a pre-
determined temperature the wax pellet expands enough to overcome the closing spring and water pump pressure,
which forces the valve to open. Coolant leakage into the pellet will cause a thermostat to fail open. Do not attempt
to free up a thermostat with a screwdriver.
Thermostat diagnostics is included in powertrain control modules (PCM) programing for on-board diagnosis. The
malfunction indicator light (MIL) will illuminate and a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) will be set when an open too
soon condition occurs. Do not change a thermostat for lack of heater performance or temperature gauge position,
unless a DTC is present. For other probable causes, (Refer to 7 - COOLING - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING). Ther-
mostat failing shut is the normal long term mode of failure, and normally, only on high mileage vehicles. The tem-
perature gauge will indicate this (Refer to 7 - COOLING - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).
7 - 56 ENGINE LX
REMOVAL
2.7L ENGINE
1. Disconnect negative cable.


3. Remove radiator lower hose from thermostat hous-
ing (1).
4. Remove nuts (3) from heater tube flange studs.
5. Loosen starter bolt at heater tube bracket.
6. Pull heater tube out of thermostat housing and
position out of the way.
7. Remove bolt (3) and two studs.
8. Remove thermostat housing (1), O-ring (2) and

thermostat (4).
LX ENGINE 7 - 57
3.5L ENGINE
1. Disconnect negative cable.


4. Disconnect electrical connectors from engine oil
and power steering pressure switches.
5. Disconnect radiator and heater hoses from thermo-
stat housing.
6. Remove thermostat housing bolts.
7. Remove housing, thermostat, and gasket.
NOTE: The OEM thermostat is staked in place at

the factory. To ensure proper seating of replace-
ment thermostat, carefully remove the bulged
metal from the thermostat housing using a suitable hand held grinder. It is not necessary to restake the
replacement thermostat into the thermostat housing.
5.7L/6.1L ENGINE
1. Disconnect negative battery cable at battery.
3. Remove radiator hose at thermostat housing (1).
NOTE: Thermostat o-ring is part of thermostat (2)

and is not serviced separately.
4. Remove thermostat housing mounting bolts (3),

thermostat housing (1) and thermostat (2).
3.0L DIESEL
WARNING: Risk of injury to skin and eyes from scalding with hot coolant. Risk of poisoning from swallow-
ing coolant. Do not open cooling system unless coolant temperature is below 90 C (194 F). Open cap
slowly to release pressure. Store coolant in suitable and appropriately marked container. Wear protective
gloves, clothes and eye wear.
NOTE: Inspect condition of all clamps and hoses, replace as necessary.

2. Remove engine cover (Refer to 9 - ENGINE - REMOVAL).
7 - 58 ENGINE LX
3. Drain engine coolant (Refer to 7 - COOLING/ENGINE/COOLANT - STANDARD PROCEDURE).

4. Remove bracket for fuel line.
5. Remove coolant hoses and thermostat housing.
6. Remove thermostat housing.
7. Clean all sealing surfaces.
INSTALLATION
2.7L ENGINE
1. Clean gasket sealing surfaces.
NOTE: Install thermostat with the bleed valve

located at the 12 oclock position, between tabs on
seal.
2. Install thermostat (4) and O-Ring (2) into thermo-

stat housing (1).
3. If removed, install two studs (3).
4. Install thermostat (4) , thermostat housing (1),
O-ring (2) and bolt. Tighten attaching bolts to 12
Nm (105 in. lbs.).
5. Lubricate new heater return tube O-ring with cool-

ant.
6. Position heater return tube flange over two studs.
Install nuts (3). Tighten retaining nuts (3) to 6 Nm
(53 in. lbs.).
7. Tighten starter bolt to 54.3 Nm (40 ft. lbs.).
8. Connect the lower radiator hose to the thermostat
housing (1). Install hose clamps.
9. Refill cooling system (Refer to 7 - COOLING -
10. Connect negative cable.
3.5L ENGINE
1. Position gasket on thermostat and housing.
2. Install thermostat housing, gasket and mounting bolts onto block. Tighten attaching bolts to 12 Nm (105 in. lbs.).
3. Install radiator hose.
4. Install bypass hose.
LX ENGINE 7 - 59
5.7L/6.1L ENGINE
1. Clean mating areas of timing chain cover and ther-
mostat housing (1).
NOTE: Install thermostat with the bleed valve

located at the 12 oclock position.
2. Install thermostat (2) (spring side down) into

recessed machined groove on timing chain cover
with bleed valve located at the 12 oclock position.
3. Position thermostat housing (1) on timing chain
cover.
4. Install two housing-to-timing chain cover bolts (3).
Tighten bolts to 13 Nm (112 in. lbs.) torque.
CAUTION: Thermostat housing must be tightened

evenly and thermostat (2) must be centered into
recessed groove in timing chain cover. If not, it
may result in a cracked thermostat housing (1),
damaged timing chain cover threads or coolant
leaks.
5. Install lower radiator hose on thermostat housing.

6. Lower vehicle.
8. Connect negative battery cable to battery.
9. Start and warm the engine. Check for leaks.
3.0L DIESEL
2. Position and install thermostat housing Tighten bolts to 9 Nm (80 lbs.in.).
NOTE: Inspect condition of all clamps and hoses, replace as necessary.
3. Connect coolant hoses,

4. Install bracket for fuel line.
5. Close coolant drain.
6. Install engine cover (Refer to 9 - ENGINE - INSTALLATION).
8. Fill coolant system to proper level with appropriate coolant mixture (Refer to 7 - COOLING/ENGINE/COOLANT
WARNING: Use extreme caution when engine is operating. Do not stand in direct line with fan. Do not put
your hands near pulleys, belts or fan. Do not wear loose clothes.

7 - 60 ENGINE LX
HEATER SUPPLY TUBE

REMOVAL
3.5L ENGINE
WARNING: Do not remove pressure cap with sys-
tem hot and under pressure because serious

2. Remove upper and lower intake manifold (Refer to
9 - ENGINE/MANIFOLDS/INTAKE MANIFOLD -
UPPER - REMOVAL) and (Refer to 9 - ENGINE/
MANIFOLDS/INTAKE MANIFOLD - LOWER -
REMOVAL).
3. Position lower intake manifold upside down on
bench and remove the tube retaining bolt (5).
4. Remove heater supply tube (4) from manifold and
discard O-ring (2).
5.7L/6.1L ENGINE
3. Remove intake manifold (Refer to 9 - ENGINE/
MANIFOLDS/INTAKE MANIFOLD - REMOVAL).
4. Remove heater hoses from heater tubes.
5. Remove heater tube mounting bolts.
6. Remove heater tubes from water pump housing
and remove from vehicle.
LX ENGINE 7 - 61
INSTALLATION
3.5L ENGINE
1. Clean heater tube sealing surfaces.
2. Inspect heater tube O-ring (2). Replace as neces-
sary.
3. Lubricate O-ring (2) with a silicone type grease
such as MoparT Dielectric Grease.
4. Install O-ring (2) on heater supply tube (4).
5. Install heater tube (4) on manifold.
6. Install retaining bolts. Tighten bolts to 12 Nm (105
in. lbs.).
7. Install lower and upper intake manifolds (Refer to 9
- ENGINE/MANIFOLDS/INTAKE MANIFOLD -
INSTALLATION - Lower) and (Refer to 9 -
ENGINE/MANIFOLDS/INTAKE MANIFOLD -
INSTALLATION - Upper).
8. Refill cooling system (Refer to 7 - COOLING -
temperature. Check cooling system for correct fluid
levels.
5.7L/6.1L ENGINE
1. Position heater tubes into water pump housing.
2. Install mounting bolts. Tighten bolts to 10 Nm (88
in. lbs.).
3. Install heater hose onto heater tubes.
4. Install intake manifold (Refer to 9 - ENGINE/MAN-
IFOLDS/INTAKE MANIFOLD - INSTALLATION).
DARD PROCEDURE).
7. Start vehicle and check for cooling system leaks.
7 - 62 ENGINE LX
RADIATOR
REMOVAL
1. DIsconnect negative battery cable.
3. Remove upper radiator hose (2).
4. Remove upper radiator closure panels (1).
5. Remove radiator fan assembly (4) (Refer to 7 -
COOLING/ENGINE/RADIATOR FAN - REMOVAL).
6. Raise vehicle.
7. Remove lower splash shield.
8. Remove lower radiator hose (1).
9. Remove lower condenser mount bolts.
LX ENGINE 7 - 63
10. Lower vehicle.

11. Remove upper radiator hose.
CAUTION: Bolts have a tread locker on them, use

hand tools to remove the upper radiator mounting
bolts.
12. Remove upper radiator mounting brackets (1) and

bolts (2).
13. Remove upper condenser mounting bolts.
14. Separate condenser assembly from radiator.
15. Tilt radiator toward engine and remove radiator
from vehicle.
CLEANING
Clean radiator fins are necessary for good heat transfer. The radiator and air conditioning fins should be cleaned
when an accumulation of debris has occurred. With the engine cold, apply cold water and compressed air to the
back (engine side) of the radiator to flush the radiator and/or A/C condenser of debris.
INSPECTION
Inspect the radiator tanks for cracks, broken or missing fittings also inspect the joint where the tanks seam up to the
radiator core for signs of leakage and/or deteriorating seals.
Inspect radiator core for corroded, bent or missing cooling fins. Inspect the core for bent or damaged cooling tubes.
INSTALLATION
1. Position radiator into engine compartment. Seat the
radiator assembly lower rubber isolators into the
mounting holes in radiator lower support.
2. Install radiator mounting bracket (1) and bolts (2).
Tighten to 12 Nm (106 in. lbs.).
3. Position condenser on radiator and install upper
mounting bolts. Tighten bolts to 6 Nm (50 in. lbs.).
4. Raise vehicle.
7 - 64 ENGINE LX
5. Install lower condenser mounting bolts. Tighten

bolts to 10 Nm (88 in. lbs.)
6. Install lower radiator hose (1) and clamp.
7. Lower vehicle.
8. Install the radiator fan (Refer to 7 - COOLING/EN-

GINE/RADIATOR FAN - INSTALLATION).
9. Install upper radiator upper hose. Align hose so it
does not interfere with the accessory drive belt or
engine. Position hose clamp so it will not interfere
with the hood.
10. Install upper radiator closure panels.
11. Connect negative cable.
12. Fill cooling system with coolant (Refer to 7 -
COOLING - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
temperature. Check cooling system and automatic
transmission for correct fluid levels.
LX ENGINE 7 - 65
RADIATOR PRESSURE CAP

DESCRIPTION
All cooling systems are equipped with a pressure cap
on the radiator. This cap releases pressure at some
point within a range of 110-138 kPa (16-20 psi). The
pressure relief point (in pounds) is engraved on top of
the cap (3).
The cooling system will operate at pressures slightly
above atmospheric pressure. This results in a higher
coolant boiling point allowing increased radiator cool-
ing capacity. The cap contains a spring-loaded pres-
sure relief valve (4). This valve opens when system
pressure reaches the release range of 110-138 kPa
(16-20 psi).
A rubber gasket (2) seals the radiator filler neck. This
is done to maintain vacuum during coolant cool-down
and to prevent leakage when system is under
pressure.
OPERATION
A vent valve in the center of the cap will remain shut as long as the cooling system is pressurized. As the coolant
cools, it contracts and creates a vacuum in cooling system. This causes the vacuum valve to open and coolant in
reserve/overflow tank to be drawn through connecting hose into radiator. If the vacuum valve is stuck shut, or over-
flow hose is kinked, radiator hoses will collapse on cool-down.

RADIATOR CAP-TO-FILLER NECK SEAL
The pressure cap upper gasket (seal) pressure relief can be tested by removing overflow hose from radiator filler
neck nipple. Attach hose of pressure tester tool 7700 (or equivalent) to nipple. It will be necessary to disconnect
hose from its adapter for filler neck. Pump air into radiator. The pressure cap upper gasket should relieve at 124
kPa (18 psi) and hold pressure at a minimum of 110 kPa (186psi).
WARNING: The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on radiator pressure cap, are a safety precaution.
When hot, pressure builds up in cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, radiator cap should not be
removed while system is hot and/or under pressure.
Do not remove radiator cap at any time except for the following purposes:
1. Check and adjust antifreeze freeze point.
2. Refill system with new antifreeze.
3. Conducting service procedures.
4. Checking for vacuum leaks.
7 - 66 ENGINE LX
WARNING: If vehicle has been run recently, wait at least 15 minutes before removing radiator cap. With a
rag, squeeze radiator upper hose to check if system is under pressure. Place a rag over cap and without
pushing cap down, rotate it counter-clockwise to first stop. Allow fluid to escape through the coolant
reserve/overflow hose into reserve/overflow tank. Squeeze radiator upper hose to determine when pressure
has been released. When coolant and steam stop being pushed into tank and system pressure drops,
remove radiator cap completely.
RADIATOR CAP
Remove cap (1) from radiator. Be sure that sealing
surfaces are clean. Moisten rubber gasket with water
and install cap (1) on pressure tester 7700 (2) or an
equivalent.
Operate tester pump to bring pressure to 124 kPa (18
psi) on gauge. If pressure cap (1) fails to hold pres-
sure of at least 110 kPa (16 psi) replace cap. Refer to
the following CAUTION.
The pressure cap may test properly while positioned
on tool 7700 (or equivalent). It may not hold pressure
or vacuum when installed on radiator. If so, inspect
radiator filler neck and caps top gasket for damage.
Also inspect for dirt or distortion that may prevent cap
from sealing properly.
CAUTION: Radiator pressure testing tools are very

sensitive to small air leaks, which will not cause
cooling system problems. A pressure cap that
does not have a history of coolant loss should not
be replaced just because it leaks slowly when
tested with this tool. Add water to tool. Turn tool
upside down and recheck pressure cap to confirm
that cap needs replacement.
CLEANING
Use only a mild soap and water to clean the radiator cap. Using any type solvent may cause damage to the seal
in the radiator cap.
INSPECTION
Hold cap at eye level, right side up. The vent valve at bottom of cap should open. If rubber gasket has swollen and
prevents vent valve from opening, replace cap.
Hold cap at eye level, upside down. If any light can be seen between vent valve and rubber gasket, replace cap. Do
not use a replacement cap that has a spring to hold vent shut. A replacement cap must be the type designed
for a coolant reserve/overflow system with a completely sealed diaphragm spring and a rubber gasket. This gasket
is used to seal to radiator filler neck top surface. Use of proper cap will allow coolant return to radiator.
LX ENGINE 7 - 67
WATER PUMP
DESCRIPTION
The 2.7L and 3.5L pumps have a die cast aluminum
housing and a plastic swept vane impeller. The 2.7L
water pump bolts directly to the cylinder block, behind
the timing chain cover and is driven by the engine pri-
mary timing chain.
The 3.5L water pump bolts directly to the rear timing

belt cover using a press-in-place gasket for sealing.
The water pump is driven by the engine timing belt.
7 - 68 ENGINE LX
REMOVAL
2.7L ENGINE
system hot and pressurized. Serious burns from
coolant can result.

2. Remove radiator fan assembly (Refer to 7 - COOL-
ING/ENGINE/RADIATOR FAN - REMOVAL).
REMOVAL).
NOTE: The water pump is driven by the primary

timing chain.
4. Remove the timing chain and all chain guides

(Refer to 9 - ENGINE/VALVE TIMING/TIMING
BELT/CHAIN AND SPROCKETS - REMOVAL).
5. Remove bolts (2 and 3) attaching water pump (1)
to block.
6. Remove water pump (1) and gasket.
3.5L ENGINE
The water pump on all models can be replaced with-
out discharging the air conditioning system.


2. Remove accessory drive belts (Refer to 7 - COOL-
REMOVAL).
NOTE: The water pump is driven by the timing

belt.
3. Remove engine timing belt (Refer to 9 - ENGINE/

VALVE TIMING/TIMING BELT/CHAIN AND SPROCKETS - REMOVAL).
4. Remove water pump mounting bolts (1). Note position of longer bolts for proper re-installation.
5. Remove water pump body (2) from engine.
LX ENGINE 7 - 69
5.7L/6.1L ENGINE
3. Remove radiator fan assembly (Refer to 7 - COOL-
ING/ENGINE/RADIATOR FAN - REMOVAL).
REMOVAL)
5. Remove termostat (Refer to 7 - COOLING/EN-
GINE/ENGINE COOLANT THERMOSTAT -
REMOVAL)
NOTE: The water pump mounting bolts (2) are dif-

ferent lengths. Note the location of the water
pump mounting bolts (2).
6. Remove water pump mounting bolts (2) and

remove water pump (1).
3.0L DIESEL
unless coolant temperature is below 90C (194F).
Open cap slowly to release pressure. Store cool-
ant in suitable and appropriately marked container.
Wear protective gloves, clothes and eye wear.

2. Remove engine cover (Refer to 9 - ENGINE -
REMOVAL).
3. Drain engine coolant (Refer to 7 - COOLING -
REMOVAL)
5. Disconnect coolant hoses at water pump.
6. Remove idler pulley (Refer to 7 - COOLING/AC-
CESSORY DRIVE/IDLER PULLEY - REMOVAL).
7. Remove water pump and clean sealing surfaces.
7 - 70 ENGINE LX
INSPECTION - 2.7L ENGINE

Inspect and replace the water pump if it has any of
the following defects:
1. Damage or cracks on the pump body.
2. Coolant leaks: If the shaft seal is leaking, this will

be evident by traces of thick deposits of dried gly-
col running down from the pump primary weep
passage. A thin black stain below the pump primary
weep hole/passage is considered normal operation.
3. Coolant leaks: If the pump primary weep passage

is plugged, coolant may come from the secondary
weep passage and collect in the valley of the
engine. The coolant will eventually run out the back
side of the engine. Leakage from the secondary
weep passage may give false indications that core
plug(s) may be leaking on the back side of the
engine block. If this condition is found, clean the
primary weep passage of debris.
4. Impeller rubs inside of cylinder block.
5. Excessively loose or rough turning bearing.
LX ENGINE 7 - 71
NOTE: It is normal for the water pump to weep a small amount of coolant from the primary weep hole (black
stain at weep passage). Do not replace the water pump if this condition exists. Replace the water pump if
a heavy deposit or a steady flow of engine coolant is evident from the primary weep passage. This indicates
a shaft seal failure and pump must be replaced. Coolant may leak from the secondary weep passage and fill
the valley of the engine. If this condition is found, clean the primary weep passage of debris. Be sure to
perform a thorough analysis before replacing water pump.
INSTALLATION
2.7L ENGINE
2. Install water pump (1) and gasket. Tighten mount-
ing bolts to 12 Nm (105 in. lbs.).
3. Install timing chain guides and timing chain (Refer
to 9 - ENGINE/VALVE TIMING/TIMING BELT/
CHAIN AND SPROCKETS - INSTALLATION).
4. Install the accessory drive belts (Refer to 7 -
COOLING/ACCESSORY DRIVE/DRIVE BELTS -
INSTALLATION).
5. Install the radiator fan assembly (Refer to 7 -
COOLING/ENGINE/RADIATOR FAN - INSTALLA-
TION).
DARD PROCEDURE).
3.5L ENGINE
1. Clean all O-ring surfaces on front cover.
2. Position water pump (3) and O-ring to engine.
3. Install mounting bolts. Tighten to 12 Nm (105 in.
lbs.).
4. Install timing belt (Refer to 9 - ENGINE/VALVE
TIMING/TIMING BELT/CHAIN AND SPROCKETS -
INSTALLATION).
5. Install accessory drive belts (Refer to 7 - COOL-
ING/ACCESSORY DRIVE/DRIVE BELTS - INSTAL-
LATION).
DARD PROCEDURE).
7 - 72 ENGINE LX
5.7L/6.1L ENGINE
1. Install water pump and mounting bolts (2). Tighten
mounting bolts to 28 Nm (20 ft. lbs.).
2. Make sure double ended bolt (3) is in the proper
location. Tighten double ended bolt to 28 Nm (20
ft. lbs.).
3. Install thermostat (Refer to 7 - COOLING/ENGINE/
ENGINE COOLANT THERMOSTAT - INSTALLA-
TION).
TION).
5. Install the radiator fan assembly (Refer to 7 -
COOLING/ENGINE/RADIATOR FAN - INSTALLA-
TION).
DARD PROCEDURE).
8. Pressure test cooling system (Refer to 7 - COOL-
ING - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).
3.0L DIESEL
2. Position and install water pump. Tighten M6 bolts
to 14 Nm (124 lbs. in.) and M8 bolts to 20 Nm
(177 lbs. in.).
3. Install idler pulley. Tighten bolt to 35 Nm (26 lbs.
ft.).
4. Install coolant hoses.
TION).
6. Close coolant drain.
7. Install engine cover (Refer to 9 - ENGINE -
INSTALLATION).
9. Fill coolant system to proper level with the appro-
priate coolant mixture (Refer to 7 - COOLING/EN-
GINE/COOLANT - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
WARNING: Use extreme caution when engine is operating. Do not put your hands near pulleys, belts or fan.
Do not wear loose clothes.

LX ENGINE 7 - 73
FAN-RADIATOR
REMOVAL
3. Remove upper radiator hose (3).
4. Disconnect cooling fan electrical connector (2).
5. Remove cooling fan mounting bolts.
6. Remove radiator cooling fan assembly (1) from
vehicle.
INSTALLATION
1. Position radiator cooling fan assembly (1) in vehi-
cle.
2. Install cooling fan mounting bolts. Tighten to 6 Nm
(50 in. lbs.)
3. Connect cooling fan electrical connector (2).
4. Install upper radiator hose (3).
DARD PROCEDURE).
temperature. Check cooling system and automatic
transmission for correct fluid levels.
7 - 74 TRANSMISSION LX
TRANSMISSION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
TRANSMISSION TRANSMISSION COOLER

STANDARD PROCEDURE DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
TRANSMISSION COOLER LINE QUICK TRANSMISSION COOLER LINES
CONNECT FITTING DISASSEMBLY/ REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
ASSEMBLY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
LX TRANSMISSION 7 - 75
TRANSMISSION
STANDARD PROCEDURE
TRANSMISSION COOLER LINE QUICK CONNECT FITTING DISASSEMBLY/
ASSEMBLY
DISCONNECT
1. Remove dust cap by pulling it straight back off of
quick connect fitting.
2. Place disconnect tool 8875A onto transmission
cooler line with the fingers of the tool facing the
quick connect fitting.
3. Slide disconnect tool down the transmission line
and engage the fingers of the tool into the retaining
clip. When properly engaged in the clip, the tool
will fit flush against the quick connect fitting.
4. Rotate the disconnect tool 60 to expand the
retaining clip.
5. While holding the disconnect tool against the quick
connect fitting, pull back on the transmission cooler
line to remove.
CONNECT
1. Align transmission cooler line with quick connect fit-

ting while pushing straight into the fitting.
2. Push in on transmission cooler line until a click is
heard or felt.
3. Slide dust cap down the transmission cooler line
and snap it over the quick connect fitting until it is
fully seated and rotates freely. Dust cap will only
snap over quick connect fitting when the transmis-
sion cooler line is properly installed.
NOTE: If dust cap will not snap into place, repeat

assembly step #2.
LX TRANSMISSION 7 - 77
TRANSMISSION COOLER
DESCRIPTION
The automatic transmission cooler (2) is located in the
front of the radiator and behind the front fascia and is
combined with the A/C condenser. The transmission
cooler is a heat exchanger that allows heat in the
transmission fluid to be transferred to the air passing
over the cooler fins.
The Transmission oil cooler/A/C condenser assembly
is equipped with quick connect fitting for the transmis-
sion oil cooler lines, a tapping block (3) for the receiv-
er/drier (4) and mounting provisions for the power
steering cooler (5).
The transmission oil cooler/AC condenser is service
as an assembly. For removal (Refer to 24 - HEATING
& AIR CONDITIONING/PLUMBING/A/C CONDENSER
- REMOVAL) and installation (Refer to 24 - HEATING
& AIR CONDITIONING/PLUMBING/A/C CONDENSER
- INSTALLATION).
TRANSMISSION COOLER LINES

REMOVAL
1. Remove upper radiator closure panels
2. Using Release Tool 8875A, remove transmission cooler lines from transmission cooler (Refer to 7 - COOLING/
TRANSMISSION - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
4. Remove front transmission cooler lines from the thermal bypass valve block.
5. Remove rear transmission cooler lines from the thermal bypass valve block
6. Remove the transmission cooler lines from the transmission.
INSTALLATION
1. Install rear transmission cooler lines at transmission. Tighten fittings to 20 Nm (18 ft. lbs.).
2. Install rear transmission cooler lines to thermal bypass valve. Tighten fittings to 20 Nm (18 ft. lbs.).
3. Install front transmission cooler lines to thermal bypass valve. Tighten fittings to 20 Nm (18 ft. lbs.).
4. Install front transmission cooler lines into transmission cooler (Refer to 7 - COOLING/TRANSMISSION - STAN-
DARD PROCEDURE).
5. Lower vehicle.
6. Check transmission fluid level (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE/FLUID -
LX AUDIO/VIDEO 8A - 1
AUDIO/VIDEO
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
AUDIO - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS. . . . . . . . . . . 1 AUDIO/VIDEO - SERVICE INFORMATION. . . . . . 131
AUDIO - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
AUDIO - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS B146F-CHANNEL 4 AUDIO SPEAKER

DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING OUTPUT CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . 46
B210D-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 B1470-CHANNEL 4 AUDIO SPEAKER
B210E-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
B221F-AMPLIFIER INTERNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 B1471-CHANNEL 4 AUDIO SPEAKER
B1488CABIN EQ MISMATCH OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 B1472-CHANNEL 4 AUDIO SPEAKER
B1460-CHANNEL 1 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
OUTPUT CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . 9 B1473-CHANNEL 4 AUDIO SPEAKER
B1461-CHANNEL 1 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER . . . 55
OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 B1474-CHANNEL 5 AUDIO SPEAKER
B1462-CHANNEL 1 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . 57
OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 B1475-CHANNEL 5 AUDIO SPEAKER
B1463-CHANNEL 1 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 B1476-CHANNEL 5 AUDIO SPEAKER
B1464-CHANNEL 1 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
OUTPUT CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER . . . 19 B1477-CHANNEL 5 AUDIO SPEAKER
B1465-CHANNEL 2 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
OUTPUT CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . 22 B1478-CHANNEL 5 AUDIO SPEAKER
B1466-CHANNEL 2 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER . . . 66
OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 B1479-CHANNEL 6 AUDIO SPEAKER
B1467-CHANNEL 2 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . 68
OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 B147A-CHANNEL 6 AUDIO SPEAKER
B1468-CHANNEL 2 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 B147B-CHANNEL 6 AUDIO SPEAKER
B1469-CHANNEL 2 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
OUTPUT CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER . . . 32 B147C-CHANNEL 6 AUDIO SPEAKER
B146A-CHANNEL 3 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
OUTPUT CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . 35 B147D-CHANNEL 6 AUDIO SPEAKER
B146B-CHANNEL 3 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER . . . 77
OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 B147E-CHANNEL 7 AUDIO SPEAKER
B146C-CHANNEL 3 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . 79
OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 B147F-CHANNEL 7 AUDIO SPEAKER
B146D-CHANNEL 3 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 B1480-CHANNEL 7 AUDIO SPEAKER
B146E-CHANNEL 3 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
OUTPUT CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER . . . 44
8A - 2 AUDIO - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS LX
B1481-CHANNEL 7 AUDIO SPEAKER B140A-REAR LEFT AUDIO SPEAKER

OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
B1482-CHANNEL 7 AUDIO SPEAKER B140B-REAR LEFT AUDIO SPEAKER
OUTPUT CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER . . . 88 OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
U0019CAN B BUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 B140D-REAR RIGHT AUDIO SPEAKER
U0020-CAN B BUS OFF PERFORMANCE . . . . . 93 OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
U0141LOST COMMUNICATION WITH B140E-REAR RIGHT AUDIO SPEAKER
FRONT CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
B1401-FRONT LEFT AUDIO SPEAKER B140F-REAR RIGHT AUDIO SPEAKER
OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
B1402-FRONT LEFT AUDIO SPEAKER B1421-AUDIO CD READ ERROR/
OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 INOPERABLE DISC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
B1403-FRONT LEFT AUDIO SPEAKER B1422-AUDIO DVD READ ERROR/
OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 INOPERABLE DISC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
B1405-FRONT RIGHT AUDIO SPEAKER B1429-RADIO DISPLAY HIGH
OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 TEMPERATURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
B1406-FRONT RIGHT AUDIO SPEAKER B142A-RADIO UNIT HIGH TEMPERATURE . . . 127
OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 B142D-AUDIO ANTENNA NOT CONNECTED . 128
B1407-FRONT RIGHT AUDIO SPEAKER B142E-GPS ANTENNA NOT CONNECTED . . . 129
OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 B221E-RADIO INTERNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
B1409-REAR LEFT AUDIO SPEAKER
OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
LX AUDIO - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8A - 3
AUDIO - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS

B210D-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If the module detects that the battery voltage is less than 9.0 volts for 1 second.
Possible Causes
VEHICLE CHARGING SYSTEM
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT CONDITION

Turn the ignition on, then off, and then on again.
With the scan tool, read Amplifier DTCs.
Does the scan tool display active: B210D-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER-1.
2. CHECK THE BATTERY VOLTAGE TO THE AMPLIFIER

With the scan tool in Data Display, read Amplifier battery voltage.
Is the battery voltage less than 9.0 volts?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Replace the Amplifier in accordance with the Service Information.
Perform OCS VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
3. CHECK FOR CHARGING SYSTEM RELATED DTCs IN THE POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM)
With the scan tool in ECU View, select PCM and check for any Charging System related DTCs.
Does the scan tool display any Charging System related DTCs?
Yes >> Diagnose and repair the DTCs. Refer to (Refer to 9 - ENGINE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).
B210E-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If the module detects that the battery voltage is greater 16.5 volts for 1 second.
Possible Causes
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test

Does the scan tool display active: B210E-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECK THE BATTERY VOLTAGE TO THE AMPLIFIER

With the scan tool in Data Display, read Amplifier battery voltage.
Is the battery voltage greater than 16.5 volts?
Yes >> Go To 3
B221F-AMPLIFIER INTERNAL
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Amplifier detects a software checksum test failure.
Possible Causes
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test
1. REPLACE THE AMPLIFIER

When this code is set, the Amplifier must be replaced.
Repair
Replace the Amplifier in accordance with the Service Information.
Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST-VER 1.
B1488CABIN EQ MISMATCH PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If the cabin EQ message is incompatible with the EQs stored in the amplifier for 10 consecutive cycles, then
the amplifier will set this DTC.
POSSIBLE CAUSES
NO COMMUNICATION WITH FRONT CONTROL MODULE

ACTIVE FCM DTCs
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test

Turn the radio on.
With the scan tool, erase Amplifier DTCs.
With the scan tool, reset the amplifier.
Does the scan tool display active: B1488CABIN EQ MISMATCH PERFORMANCE?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECK AMPLIFIER BUSSED INPUTS/OUTPUTS

With the scan tool in Amplifier Data Display, read the Cabin EQ# settings in the Bussed Inputs and Bussed Outputs
Sections.
NOTE: The Cabin EQ# settings in the Inputs/Outputs section should match one another. The Cabin EQ# in
the Inputs section is the information that is received form the FCM. The Cabin EQ# in the Outputs section
is the information that is Stored in the Amplifiers memory.
The Cabin EQ# settings are as follows:
$51: HB Premium 1 (w/o Subwoofer)
$52: HB Premium 2 (with Subwoofer)
Do the Cabin EQ# settings match one another?
Yes >> Replace the Amplifier in accordance to the service information.
Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST-VER 1.
No >> Go To 3
3. VERIFY COMMUNICATION WITH FRONT CONTROL MODULE

With the scan tool in ECU VIEW, read active modules on the bus.
Does the scan tool show the Front Control Module active on the bus?
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Refer to the Communication category for the related symptoms.
Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1.
4. CHECK FRONT CONTROL MODULE FOR ACTIVE DTCs

With the scan tool, erase FCM DTCs.
Turn the ignition off. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
Are any active DTCs present?
Yes >> Refer to symptom list for problems related to the Front Control Module.
Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST-VER.1
B1460-CHANNEL 1 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
This DTC will set if a DC offset occurs on the output channel, the amplifier shall set a DTC after a maturity
rate of 5 1 sec.
Possible Causes
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test

Does the scan tool display active: B1460-CHANNEL 1 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT PERFOR-
MANCE?
Yes >> Replace the Amplifier in accordance with the service information.
B1461-CHANNEL 1 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Amplifier detects a shorted to ground condition on the speaker output circuit.
Possible Causes
(X209) AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT I/P SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(X299) AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT I/P SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
LEFT FRONT I/P SPEAKER
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test

Does the scan tool display active: B1461-CHANNEL 1 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECK THE (X209) AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT I/P SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect the Amplifier C2 harness connector.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (X209) Amplified Left
Front I/P Speaker (+) circuit.
Is the resistance below 10K ohms?
Yes >> Repair the (X209) Amplified Left Front I/P Speaker (+) cir-
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK THE (X299) AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT I/P SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the (X299) Amplified Left
Front I/P Speaker (-) circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (X299) Amplified Left Front I/P Speaker (-) for a
short to ground.
No >> Go To 4
4. CHECK OPERATION OF THE AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT I/P SPEAKER

Reconnect and reinstall the Left Front I/P Speaker.
Measure the resistance of the speaker circuit between the Amplifier C2
harness connector and ground.
Yes >> Replace the Left Front I/P Speaker in accordance with the
service information.
No >> Replace the Amplifier in accordance with the service infor-
mation.
B1462-CHANNEL 1 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Amplifier detects a short to battery condition on the output circuit.
Possible Causes
(X209) AMPLIFIED LEFT I/P SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

(X299) AMPLIFIED LEFT I/P SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test

Does the scan tool display active: B1462-CHANNEL 1 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECK FOR VOLTAGE ON THE (X209) AMPLIFIED LEFT I/P SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT
Disconnect the Amplified Left I/P Speaker harness connector.
Measure for voltage on the (X209) Amplified Left I/P Speaker (+) circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (X209) Amplified Left I/P Speaker (+) circuit for a
short to voltage.
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK FOR VOLTAGE ON THE (X299) AMPLIFIED LEFT I/P SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT
Measure for voltage on the (X299) Amplified Left I/P Speaker (-) circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (X299) Amplified Left I/P Speaker (-) circuit for a
short to voltage.
mation.
B1463-CHANNEL 1 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN

When Monitored:
Amplifier Bus wake-up. Amplifier reset with scan tool.
Set Condition:
The Amplifier detects an open condition on the speaker output circuit.
Possible Causes
(X209) AMPLIFIED LEFT I/P SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT OPEN

(X299) AMPLIFIED LEFT I/P SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT OPEN
LEFT FRONT I/P SPEAKER
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test

Turn the radio on.
Does the scan tool display active: B1463-CHANNEL 1 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE LEFT FRONT I/P SPEAKER

Disconnect the Left I/P Speaker harness connector.
Turn the radio on and turn the volume to mid level.
With a voltmeter set to read in A/C voltage, measure the voltage of the
Amplified Left I/P Speaker circuits in the Amplified Left I/P Speaker har-
ness connector.
Is the voltage present greater than 1 volt?
Yes >> Replace the Amplified Left I/P Speaker in accordance with
the service information.
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK THE (X209) AMPLIFIED LEFT I/P SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (X209) Amplified Left I/P Speaker (+) cir-
cuit between the Amplifier C2 harness connector and the Amplified Left
I/P Speaker harness connector.
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Repair the (X209) Amplified Left I/P Speaker (+) circuit for
an open.
4. CHECK THE (X299) AMPLIFIED LEFT I/P SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (X299) Amplified Left I/P Speaker (-) cir-
cuit between the Amplifier C2 harness connector and the Amplified Left
I/P Speaker harness connector.
Yes >> Replace the Amplifier in accordance with the service infor-
mation.
No >> Repair the (X299) Amplified Left I/P Speaker (-) circuit for
an open.
B1464-CHANNEL 1 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER

When Monitored:
With the ignition on. Radio volume at 25 or higher.
Set Condition:
The amplifier detects that the output circuits are shorted together.
Possible Causes
(X209) AMPLIFIED LEFT I/P SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (X299) AMPLIFIED LEFT I/P SPEAKER
(-) CIRCUIT
AMPLIFIED LEFT I/P SPEAKER
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test

Turn the radio on.
Turn the volume level to 25.
Does the scan tool display active: B1464-CHANNEL 1 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT SHORTED
TOGETHER?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE AMPLIFIED LEFT I/P SPEAKER

Disconnect the Amplified Left I/P Speaker.
Measure the resistance of the speaker between the two terminals.
Is the resistance of the speaker less than 1 ohm?
Yes >> Replace the Amplified Left I/P Speaker in accordance with the service information.
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK THE (X209) AMPLIFIED LEFT I/P SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT, AND THE (X299) AMPLIFIED LEFT I/P
SPEAKER (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
Measure the resistance between the (X209) Amplified Left I/P Speaker
(+) circuit, and the (X299) Amplified Left I/P Speaker (-) circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (X209) Amplified Left I/P Speaker (+) circuit, and
the (X299) Amplified Left I/P Speaker (-) circuit for a short
together.
mation.

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
rate of 5 1 sec.
Possible Causes
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test

MANCE?

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(X208) AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT I/P SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(X298) AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT I/P SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
RIGHT FRONT I/P SPEAKER
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test

Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECK THE (X208) AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT I/P SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the (X208) Amplified Right
Front I/P Speaker (+) circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (X208) Amplified Right Front I/P Speaker (+) cir-
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK THE (X298) AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT I/P SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the (X298) Amplified Right
Front I/P Speaker (-) circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (X298) Amplified Right Front I/P Speaker (-) for
a short to ground.
No >> Go To 4
4. CHECK OPERATION OF THE AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT I/P SPEAKER

Reconnect and reinstall the Right Front I/P Speaker.
Measure the resistance of the speaker circuit between the Amplifier C2
harness connector and ground..
Yes >> Replace the Right Front I/P Speaker in accordance with the
mation.

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(X208) AMPLIFIED RIGHT I/P SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

(X298) AMPLIFIED RIGHT I/P SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test

Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECK FOR VOLTAGE ON THE (X208) AMPLIFIED RIGHT I/P SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT
Disconnect the Amplified Right I/P Speaker harness connector.
Measure for voltage on the (X208) Amplified Right I/P Speaker (+) cir-
cuit.
Yes >> Repair the (X208) Amplified Right I/P Speaker (+) circuit for
a short to voltage.
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK FOR VOLTAGE ON THE (X298) AMPLIFIED RIGHT I/P SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT
Measure for voltage on the (X298) Amplified Right I/P Speaker (-) cir-
cuit.
Yes >> Repair the (X298) Amplified Right I/P Speaker (-) circuit for
a short to voltage.
mation.

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(X208) AMPLIFIED RIGHT I/P SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT OPEN

(X298) AMPLIFIED RIGHT I/P SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT OPEN
RIGHT I/P SPEAKER
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test

Turn the radio on.
Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE RIGHT FRONT I/P SPEAKER

Disconnect the Right I/P Speaker harness connector.
With a voltmeter set to read in A/C voltage, measure the voltage of the
Amplified Right I/P Speaker circuits in the Amplified Right I/P Speaker
harness connector.
Yes >> Replace the Amplified Right I/P Speaker in accordance with
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK THE (X208) AMPLIFIED RIGHT I/P SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (X208) Amplified Right I/P Speaker (+)
circuit between the Amplifier C2 harness connector and the Amplified
Right I/P Speaker harness connector.
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Repair the (X208) Amplified Right I/P Speaker (+) circuit for
an open.
4. CHECK THE (X298) AMPLIFIED RIGHT I/P SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (X298) Amplified Right I/P Speaker (-)
circuit between the Amplifier C2 harness connector and the Amplified
Right I/P Speaker harness connector.
Yes >> Replace the Amplifier in accordance with the service infor-
mation.
No >> Repair the (X298) Amplified Right I/P Speaker (-) circuit for
an open.

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(X208) AMPLIFIED RIGHT I/P SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (X298) AMPLIFIED RIGHT I/P
SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT
AMPLIFIED RIGHT I/P SPEAKER
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test

Turn the radio on.
TOGETHER?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE AMPLIFIED RIGHT I/P SPEAKER

Disconnect the Amplified Right I/P Speaker.
Yes >> Replace the Amplified Right I/P Speaker in accordance with the service information.
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK THE (X208) AMPLIFIED RIGHT I/P SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT, AND THE (X298) AMPLIFIED RIGHT I/P
SPEAKER (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
Measure the resistance between the (X208) Amplified Right I/P Speaker
(+) circuit, and the (X298) Amplified Right I/P Speaker (-) circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (X208) Amplified Right I/P Speaker (+) circuit,
and the (X298) Amplified Right I/P Speaker (-) circuit for a
short together.
mation.
B146A-CHANNEL 3 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
rate of 5 1 sec.
Possible Causes
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test

Does the scan tool display active: B146A-CHANNEL 3 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT PERFOR-
MANCE?
B146B-CHANNEL 3 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(X201) AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(X291) AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test

Does the scan tool display active: B146B-CHANNEL 3 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECK THE (X201) AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the (X201) Amplified Left Front Door Speaker (+) circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (X201) Amplified Left Front Door Speaker (+) circuit for a short to ground.
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK THE (X291) AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the (X291) Amplified Left Front Door Speaker (-) circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (X291) Amplified Left Front Door Speaker (-) for a short to ground.
No >> Go To 4
4. CHECK OPERATION OF THE AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER

Reconnect and reinstall the Left Front Door Speaker.
Measure the resistance of the speaker circuit between the Amplifier C1 harness connector and ground..
Yes >> Replace the Left Front Door Speaker in accordance with the service information.
No >> Replace the Amplifier in accordance with the service information.
B146C-CHANNEL 3 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(X201) AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
(X291) AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test

Does the scan tool display active: B146C-CHANNEL 3 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECK FOR VOLTAGE ON THE (X201) AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT
Disconnect the Amplified Left Front Door Speaker harness connector.
Measure for voltage on the (X201) Amplified Left Front Door Speaker (+) circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (X201) Amplified Left Front Door Speaker (+) circuit for a short to voltage.
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK FOR VOLTAGE ON THE (X291) AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT
Measure for voltage on the (X291) Amplified Left Front Door Speaker (-) circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (X291) Amplified Left Front Door Speaker (-) circuit for a short to voltage.
B146D-CHANNEL 3 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(X201) AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT OPEN

(X291) AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT OPEN
LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test

Turn the radio on.
Does the scan tool display active: B146D-CHANNEL 3 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER

Disconnect the Left Rear Door Speaker harness connector.
With a voltmeter set to read in A/C voltage, measure the voltage of the Amplified Left Rear Door Speaker circuits in
the Amplified Left Rear Door Speaker harness connector.
Yes >> Replace the Amplified Left Rear Door Speaker in accordance with the service information.
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK THE (X201) AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (X201) Amplified Left Rear Door Speaker (+) circuit between the Amplifier C1 harness
connector and the Amplified Left Rear Door Speaker harness connector.
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Repair the (X201) Amplified Left Rear Door Speaker (+) circuit for an open.
4. CHECK THE (X291) AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (X291) Amplified Left Rear Door Speaker (-) circuit between the Amplifier C1 harness
No >> Repair the (X291) Amplified Left Rear Door Speaker (-) circuit for an open.
B146E-CHANNEL 3 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(X201) AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (X291) AMPLIFIED LEFT
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT
AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test

Turn the radio on.
Does the scan tool display active: B146E-CHANNEL 3 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT SHORTED
TOGETHER?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER

Disconnect the Amplified Left Front Door Speaker.
Yes >> Replace the Amplified Left Front Door Speaker in accordance with the service information.
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK THE (X201) AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT, AND THE (X291) AMPLIFIED
LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
Measure the resistance between the (X201) Amplified Left Front Door Speaker (+) circuit, and the (X291) Amplified
Left Front Door Speaker (-) circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (X201) Amplified Left Front Door Speaker (+) circuit, and the (X291) Amplified Left Front
Door Speaker (-) circuit for a short together.
B146F-CHANNEL 4 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
rate of 5 1 sec.
Possible Causes
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test

Does the scan tool display active: B146F-CHANNEL 4 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT PERFOR-
MANCE?

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(X202) AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(X292) AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test

Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECK THE (X202) AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO
GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the (X202) Amplified Right Front Door Speaker (+) circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (X202) Amplified Left Front Door Speaker (+) circuit for a short to ground.
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK THE (X292) AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the (X292) Amplified Right Front Door Speaker (-) circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (X292) Amplified Right Front Door Speaker (-) for a short to ground.
No >> Go To 4
4. CHECK OPERATION OF THE AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER

Reconnect and reinstall the Right Front Door Speaker.
Yes >> Replace the Right Front Door Speaker in accordance with the service information.

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(X202) AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
(X292) AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test

Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECK FOR VOLTAGE ON THE (X202) AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT
Disconnect the Amplified Right Front Door Speaker harness connector.
Measure for voltage on the (X202) Amplified Right Front Door Speaker (+) circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (X202) Amplified Right Front Door Speaker (+) circuit for a short to voltage.
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK FOR VOLTAGE ON THE (X292) AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT
Measure for voltage on the (X292) Amplified Right Front Door Speaker (-) circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (X292) Amplified Right Front Door Speaker (-) circuit for a short to voltage.

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(X202) AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT OPEN

(X292) AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT OPEN
RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test

Turn the radio on.
Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER

Disconnect the Right Front Door Speaker harness connector.
With a voltmeter set to read in A/C voltage, measure the voltage of the Amplified Right Front Door Speaker circuits
in the Amplified Right Front Door Speaker harness connector.
Yes >> Replace the Amplified Right Front Door Speaker in accordance with the service information.
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK THE (X202) AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (X202) Amplified Right Front Door Speaker (+) circuit between the Amplifier C1 har-
ness connector and the Amplified Right Front Door Speaker harness connector.
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Repair the (X202) Amplified Right Front Door Speaker (+) circuit for an open.
4. CHECK THE (X292) AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (X292) Amplified Right Front Door Speaker (-) circuit between the Amplifier C1 har-
ness connector and the Amplified Right Front Door Speaker harness connector.
No >> Repair the (X292) Amplified Right Front Door Speaker (-) circuit for an open.

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(X202) AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (X292) AMPLIFIED
RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT
AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test

Turn the radio on.
TOGETHER?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER

Disconnect the Amplified Right Front Door Speaker.
Yes >> Replace the Amplified Right Front Door Speaker in accordance with the service information.
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK THE (X202) AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT, AND THE (X292)
AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
Measure the resistance between the (X202) Amplified Right Front Door Speaker (+) circuit, and the (X292) Amplified
Right Front Door Speaker (-) circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (X202) Amplified Right Front Door Speaker (+) circuit, and the (X292) Amplified Right Front

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
rate of 5 1 sec.
Possible Causes
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test

MANCE?

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(X393) AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(X303) AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test

Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECK THE (X393) AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the (X393) Amplified Left Rear Door Speaker (+) circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (X393) Amplified Left Rear Door Speaker (+) circuit for a short to ground.
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK THE (X303) AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the (X303) Amplified Left Rear Door Speaker (-) circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (X303) Amplified Left Rear Door Speaker (-) for a short to ground.
No >> Go To 4
4. CHECK OPERATION OF THE AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER

Reconnect and reinstall the Left Rear Door Speaker.
Yes >> Replace the Left Rear Door Speaker in accordance with the service information.

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(X393) AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
(X303) AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test

Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECK FOR VOLTAGE ON THE (X393) AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT
Disconnect the Amplified Left Rear Door Speaker harness connector.
Measure for voltage on the (X393) Amplified Left Rear Door Speaker (+) circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (X393) Amplified Left Rear Door Speaker (+) circuit for a short to voltage.
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK FOR VOLTAGE ON THE (X303) AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT
Measure for voltage on the (X303) Amplified Left Rear Door Speaker (-) circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (X303) Amplified Left Rear Door Speaker (-) circuit for a short to voltage.

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(X393) AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT OPEN

(X303) AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT OPEN
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test

Turn the radio on.
Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER

Disconnect the Left Rear Door Speaker harness connector.
With a voltmeter set to read in A/C voltage, measure the voltage of the Amplified Left Rear Door Speaker circuits in
the Amplified Left Rear Door Speaker harness connector.
Yes >> Replace the Amplified Left I/P Speaker in accordance with the service information.
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK THE (X393) AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (X393) Amplified Left Rear Door Speaker (+) circuit between the Amplifier C1 harness
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Repair the (X393) Amplified Left Rear Door Speaker (+) circuit for an open.
4. CHECK THE (X303) AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (X303) Amplified Left Rear Door Speaker (-) circuit between the Amplifier C1 harness
No >> Repair the (X303) Amplified Left Rear Door Speaker (-) circuit for an open.

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(X393) AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (X303) AMPLIFIED LEFT
REAR DOOR SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT
AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test

Turn the radio on.
TOGETHER?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER

Disconnect the Amplified Left Rear Door Speaker.
Yes >> Replace the Amplified Left Rear Door Speaker in accordance with the service information.
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK THE (X393) AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT, AND THE (X303) AMPLIFIED
LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
Measure the resistance between the (X393) Amplified Left Rear Door Speaker (+) circuit, and the (X303) Amplified
Left Rear Door Speaker (-) circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (X393) Amplified Left Rear Door Speaker (+) circuit, and the (X303) Amplified Left Rear Door
Speaker (-) circuit for a short together.

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
rate of 5 1 sec.
Possible Causes
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test

MANCE?
B147A-CHANNEL 6 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(X304) AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(X394) AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test

Does the scan tool display active: B147A-CHANNEL 6 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECK THE (X304) AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the (X304) Amplified Right Rear Door Speaker (+) circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (X304) Amplified Right Rear Door Speaker (+) circuit for a short to ground.
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK THE (X394) AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the (X394) Amplified Right Rear Door Speaker (-) circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (X394) Amplified Right Rear Door Speaker (-) for a short to ground.
No >> Go To 4
4. CHECK OPERATION OF THE AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER

Reconnect and reinstall the Right Rear Door Speaker.
Yes >> Replace the Right Rear Door Speaker in accordance with the service information.
B147B-CHANNEL 6 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(X304) AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
(X394) AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test

Does the scan tool display active: B147B-CHANNEL 6 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECK FOR VOLTAGE ON THE (X304) AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT
Disconnect the Amplified Right Rear Door Speaker harness connector.
Measure for voltage on the (X304) Amplified Right Rear Door Speaker (+) circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (X304) Amplified Right Rear Door Speaker (+) circuit for a short to voltage.
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK FOR VOLTAGE ON THE (X394) AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR SPEAKER SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT
Measure for voltage on the (X394) Amplified Right Rear Door Speaker (-) circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (X394) Amplified Right Rear Door Speaker (-) circuit for a short to voltage.
B147C-CHANNEL 6 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(X304) AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT OPEN

(X394) AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT OPEN
RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test

Turn the radio on.
Does the scan tool display active: B147C-CHANNEL 6 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER

Disconnect the Right Rear Door Speaker harness connector.
With a voltmeter set to read in A/C voltage, measure the voltage of the Amplified Right Rear Door Speaker circuits
in the Amplified Right Rear Door Speaker harness connector.
Yes >> Replace the Amplified Right Rear Door Speaker in accordance with the service information.
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK THE (X304) AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (X304) Amplified Right Rear Door Speaker (+) circuit between the Amplifier C1 har-
ness connector and the Amplified Right Rear Door Speaker harness connector.
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Repair the (X304) Amplified Right Rear Door Speaker (+) circuit for an open.
4. CHECK THE (X394) AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (X394) Amplified Right Rear Door Speaker (-) circuit between the Amplifier C1 har-
ness connector and the Amplified Right Rear Door Speaker harness connector.
No >> Repair the (X394) Amplified Right Rear Door Speaker (-) circuit for an open.
B147D-CHANNEL 6 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(X304) AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (X394) AMPLIFIED RIGHT
REAR DOOR SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT
AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test

Turn the radio on.
Does the scan tool display active: B147D-CHANNEL 6 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT SHORTED
TOGETHER?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER

Disconnect the Amplified Right Rear Door Speaker.
Yes >> Replace the Amplified Right Rear Door Speaker in accordance with the service information.
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK THE (X304) AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT, AND THE (X394) AMPLIFIED
RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
Measure the resistance between the (X304) Amplified Right Rear Door Speaker (+) circuit, and the (X394) Amplified
Right Rear Door Speaker (-) circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (X304) Amplified Right Rear Door Speaker (+) circuit, and the (X394) Amplified Right Rear
B147E-CHANNEL 7 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
rate of 5 1 sec.
Possible Causes
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test

Does the scan tool display active: B147E-CHANNEL 7 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT PERFOR-
MANCE?
B147F-CHANNEL 7 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(X300) AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 1(+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

(X390) AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 1 (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
SUBWOOFER
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test

Does the scan tool display active: B147F-CHANNEL 7 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECK THE (X300) AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 1 (+) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the (X300) Amplified Subwoofer 1 (+) circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (X300) Amplified Subwoofer 1 (+) circuit for a short to ground.
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK THE (X390) AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 1 (-) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the (X390) Amplified Subwoofer 1 (-) circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (X390) Amplified Subwoofer 1 (-) for a short to ground.
No >> Go To 4
4. CHECK OPERATION OF THE AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER

Reconnect the Subwoofer harness connector.
Yes >> Replace the Subwoofer 1 in accordance with the service information.

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(X300) AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 1 (+) CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

(X390) AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 1 (-) CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test

Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECK FOR VOLTAGE ON THE (X300) AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 1 (+) CIRCUIT

Disconnect the Amplified Subwoofer 1 harness connector.
Measure for voltage on the (X300) Amplified Subwoofer 1 (+) circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (X300) Amplified Subwoofer 1 (+) circuit for a short to voltage.
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK FOR VOLTAGE ON THE (X390) AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 1 (-) CIRCUIT

Measure for voltage on the (X390) Amplified Subwoofer 1 (-) circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (X390) Amplified Subwoofer 1 (-) circuit for a short to voltage.

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(X300) AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 1 (+) CIRCUIT OPEN

(X299) AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 1 (-) CIRCUIT OPEN
SUBWOOFER
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test

Turn the radio on.
Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE SUBWOOFER

Disconnect the Subwoofer harness connector.
With a voltmeter set to read in A/C voltage, measure the voltage of the Amplified Subwoofer 1 circuits in the Ampli-
fied Subwoofer harness connector.
Yes >> Replace the Amplified Subwoofer in accordance with the service information.
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK THE (X300) AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 1 (+) CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (X300) Amplified Subwoofer 1 (+) circuit between the Amplifier C1 harness connector
and the Amplified Subwoofer harness connector.
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Repair the (X300) Amplified Subwoofer 1 (+) circuit for an open.
4. CHECK THE (X390) AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 1 (-) CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (X390) Amplified Subwoofer 1 (-) circuit between the Amplifier C1 harness connector
and the Amplified Subwoofer harness connector.
No >> Repair the (X390) Amplified Subwoofer 1 (-) circuit for an open.

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(X300) AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 1 (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (X390) AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 1 (-)
CIRCUIT
AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 1
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test

Turn the radio on.
TOGETHER?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 1

Disconnect the Amplified Subwoofer 1.
Yes >> Replace the Amplified Subwoofer 1 in accordance with the service information.
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK THE (X300) AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 1 (+) CIRCUIT, AND THE (X390) AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER
1 (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
Measure the resistance between the (X300) Amplified Subwoofer 1 (+) circuit, and the (X390) Amplified Subwoofer
1 (-) circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (X300) Amplified Subwoofer 1 (+) circuit, and the (X390) Amplified Subwoofer 1 (-) circuit for
a short together.
U0019CAN B BUS

When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
Whenever the Can B Bus (+) or B Bus () circuit is open, shorted to voltage or shorted to ground, this code
will set.
Possible Causes
CAN B BUS DTCs IN FRONT CONTROL MODULE

(D54) CAN B BUS () CIRCUIT OPEN
(D55) CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT OPEN
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test

With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs
Does the scan tool display U0019CAN B BUS CIRCUIT?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECK FRONT CONTROL MODULE DTCs

With the scan tool, read Front Control Module DTCs
Does the scan tool display any CAN B BUS DTCs ACTIVE?
Yes >> Refer to the symptom list for problems related to Communication in the ELECTRICAL. ELECTRONIC
CONTROL MODULES ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSES section.
No >> Go to 3
3. CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT OPEN

Disconnect the Amplifier harness connector.
Measure the resistance of the (D55) Can B Bus (+) circuit between the Front Control Module C1 harness connector
and the Amplifier harness connector.
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Repair the Can B Bus (+) circuit for an open.
4. CAN B BUS () CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (D54) Can B Bus () circuit between the Front Control Module C1 harness connector
Yes >> Replace the Amplifier in accordance with the service information..
No >> Repair the Can B Bus () circuit for an open.
U0020-CAN B BUS OFF PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
will set.
Possible Causes

AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test

Does the scan tool display U0020-CAN B BUS OFF PERFORMANCE?
Yes >> Go To 2

No >> Go to 3

Disconnect the Amplifier harness connector.
Yes >> Go To 4

Yes >> Replace the Amplifier in accordance with the service information..

(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the diagnostic
test procedure.
B1401-FRONT LEFT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
With the Radio on.
Set Condition:
When the Output circuit is LOW for more than 3 seconds.
Possible Causes
SPEAKER
(X201) (X291) LEFT FRONT SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Test
1. INTERMITTENT CONDITION
With the Scan Tool, clear all Audio DTCs.
Turn the Radio on.
With the Scan Tool, read the DTC information.
Does the Scan Tool read: B1401-FRONT LEFT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The condition that caused the symptom is currently not present. Inspect the related wiring for a possible
intermittent condition. Look for any chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires.
2. (X201) (X291) SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUITS.

Disconnect the Radio C1 harness connector.
Disconnect the Front Left Audio Speaker connector.
Measure the resistance between ground and each speaker (X201)(+) and (X291)(-) circuit.
Is the resistance below 1000.0 ohms for each circuit?
Yes >> Repair the applicable Speaker (+) or (-) Output circuit for a short to ground condition.
No >> Go To 3
3. SPEAKER
Disconnect the Front Left Audio Speaker.
Turn the Radio on.
Does the Scan Tool read: B1401-FRONT LEFT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Replace the Speaker in accordance with the service information.
B1402-FRONT LEFT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH

Possible Causes
SPEAKER
(X201) SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT (+)
(X291) SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT (-)
Diagnostic Test
With the scan tool, read Radio DTCs.
Does the scan tool display active: B1402-FRONT LEFT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECK FOR VOLTAGE ON THE (X201) SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT

Disconnect the Left Front Speaker harness connector.
Measure for voltage on the (X201) Speaker (+) circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (X201) Speaker (+) circuit for a short to voltage.
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK FOR VOLTAGE ON THE (X291) SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT

Measure for voltage on the (X291) Speaker (-) circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (X291) Speaker (-) circuit for a short to voltage.
No >> Replace the Radio in accordance with the service informa-
tion.
B1403-FRONT LEFT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN

When Monitored:
With the Radio on.
Set Condition:
When the Output circuit is open for more than 3 seconds. The Radio will not set the fault if the radio confirms
an amplifier is on the BUS.
Possible Causes
SPEAKER
(X201) (X291) LEFT FRONT SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Test
Turn the Radio on.
Does the Scan Tool read: B1403-FRONT LEFT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes >> Go To 2

Disconnect the Front Left Audio Speaker connector.
Measure the resistance of each speaker (X201)(+) and (X291)(-) circuit between the Radio and the Speaker.
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Repair the applicable Output Speaker circuit for an open condition.
3. SPEAKER
Disconnect the Front Left Audio Speaker.
Turn the Radio on.
Does the Scan Tool read: B1403-FRONT LEFT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN?
B1405-FRONT RIGHT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
With the Radio on.
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
SPEAKER
(X202) (X292) RIGHT FRONT SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Test
Turn the Radio on.
Does the Scan Tool read: B1405-FRONT RIGHT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2

Disconnect the Front Right Audio Speaker connector.
No >> Go To 3
3. SPEAKER
Disconnect the Front Right Audio Speaker.
Turn the Radio on.
Does the Scan Tool read: B1405-FRONT RIGHT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW?
B1406-FRONT RIGHT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH

Possible Causes
SPEAKER
Diagnostic Test
Does the scan tool display active: B1406-FRONT RIGHT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 2

Disconnect the Right Rear Speaker harness connector.
No >> Go To 3

tion.
B1407-FRONT RIGHT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN

When Monitored:
With the Radio on.
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
SPEAKER
(X202) (X292) RIGHT FRONT SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Test
Turn the Radio on.
Does the Scan Tool read: B1407-FRONT RIGHT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. (X202) (X292) Speaker Output circuits.

Disconnect the Front Right Audio Speaker connector.
Yes >> Go To 3
3. Speaker
Disconnect the Front Right Audio Speaker.
Turn the Radio on.
Does the Scan Tool read: B1407-FRONT RIGHT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN?
B1409-REAR LEFT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
With the Radio on.
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
SPEAKER
(X303) (X393) LEFT REAR SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Test
Turn the Radio on.
Does the Scan Tool read: B1409-REAR LEFT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2

Disconnect the Rear Left Audio Speaker connector.
No >> Go To 3
3. SPEAKER
Disconnect the Rear Left Audio Speaker.
Turn the Radio on.
Does the Scan Tool read: B1409-REAR LEFT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW?
B140A-REAR LEFT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH

Possible Causes
SPEAKER
Diagnostic Test
Does the scan tool display active: B140A-REAR LEFT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 2

Disconnect the Left Rear Speaker harness connector.
No >> Go To 3

tion.
B140B-REAR LEFT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN

When Monitored:
With the Radio on.
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
SPEAKER
(X303) (X393) LEFT REAR SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Test
1. Intermittent Condition
Turn the Radio on.
Does the Scan Tool read: B140B-REAR LEFT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes >> Go To 2

Disconnect the Rear Left Audio Speaker connector.
Yes >> Go To 3
3. Speaker
Disconnect the Rear Left Audio Speaker.
Turn the Radio on.
Does the Scan Tool read: B140B-REAR LEFT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN?
B140D-REAR RIGHT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
With the Radio on.
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
SPEAKER
(X304) (X394) RIGHT REAR SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Test
Turn the Radio on.
Does the Scan Tool read: B140D-REAR RIGHT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2

Disconnect the Rear Right Audio Speaker connector.
No >> Go To 3
3. Speaker
Disconnect the Rear Right Audio Speaker.
Turn the Radio on.
Does the Scan Tool read: B140D-REAR RIGHT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW?
B140E-REAR RIGHT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH

Possible Causes
SPEAKER
Diagnostic Test
Does the scan tool display active: B140E-REAR RIGHT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 2

Disconnect the Right Rear Speaker harness connector.
No >> Go To 3

tion.
B140F-REAR RIGHT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN

When Monitored:
With the Radio on.
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
SPEAKER
(X304) (X394) RIGHT REAR SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Test
Turn the Radio on.
Does the Scan Tool read: B140F-REAR RIGHT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes >> Go To 2

Disconnect the Rear Right Audio Speaker connector.
Yes >> Go To 3
3. Speaker
Disconnect the Rear Right Audio Speaker.
Turn the Radio on.
Does the Scan Tool read: B140F-REAR RIGHT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN?
B1421-AUDIO CD READ ERROR/INOPERABLE DISC

When Monitored:
Continuously with the ignition on and the radio CD player turned on.
Set Condition:
The code will set if a CD that is not formatted as a music CD is installed in the radio CD player.
Possible Causes
CD READ FAILURE
Diagnostic Test
1. RADIO
Replace the problem CD with a good, clean,unscratched, music CD.
Turn the radio CD player on.
With the Scan Tool, read DTCs.
Does the Scan Tool display: B1421 Audio CD Read Error/Inoperable Disc?
Yes >> Eject the inoperative CD and replace the CD in accordance with the service information.
B1422-AUDIO DVD READ ERROR/INOPERABLE DISC

When Monitored:
Continuously with the ignition on and the DVD player turned on.
Set Condition:
The code will set if a DVD that is not formatted as a DVD is installed in the DVD player.
Possible Causes
DVD READ FAILURE
Diagnostic Test
1. DVD PLAYER
Replace the problem DVD with a good, clean,unscratched DVD.
Turn the DVD player on.
With the Scan Tool, read DTCs.
Does the Scan Tool display: B1422 Audio DVD Read Error/Inoperable Disc?
Yes >> Eject the inoperative DVD and replace the DVD in accordance with the service information.
B1429-RADIO DISPLAY HIGH TEMPERATURE

When Monitored:
Continuously with the ignition and Navigation Radio on.
Set Condition:
The code will set if the temperature inside the display exceeds 158F
Possible Causes
HIGH TEMPERATURE FAILURE
Diagnostic Test
1. VERIFY THAT DTC B1429RADIO DISPLAY HIGH TEMPERATURE IS ACTIVE.

With the Scan Tool, erase the Audio DTCs.
Start the engine and allow the engine to reach normal operating temperature.
If the vehicle has been in the hot sunlight or extreme cold, move the vehicle indoors and open the doors to allow
the inside temperature to stabilize.
The radio display should operate to 158F.
With the Scan Tool, read the DTCs.
Does the Scan Tool display, B1429 Radio Display High Temperature?
Yes >> Replace the Radio in accordance with the service information.
B142A-RADIO UNIT HIGH TEMPERATURE

When Monitored:
Continuously with the ignition and Radio on
Set Condition:
The code will set if the temperature inside the radio is above +65C ( +145F )
Possible Causes
HIGH TEMPERATURE FAILURE
Diagnostic Test
1. VERIFY THAT DTC B142ARADIO UNIT HIGH TEMPERATURE IS ACTIVE.

With the Scan Tool, erase the Audio DTCs.
Start the engine and allow the engine to reach normal operating temperature.
If the vehicle has been in the hot sunlight or extreme cold, move the vehicle indoors and open the doors to allow
the inside temperature to stabilize.
The Radio should operate between 23C and 65C ( 10F and +145F ).
Does the Scan Tool display, B142A Radio Unit High Temperature?
Yes >> Replace the Radio in accordance with the service information.
B142D-AUDIO ANTENNA NOT CONNECTED

When Monitored:
With the ignition on and the radio in seek mode.
Set Condition:
With the radio in seek mode for two loops around the band. The radio does not detect an antenna connection
or does not receive a radio station signal.
Possible Causes
BAD ANTENNA CONNECTION
RADIO
Diagnostic Test
1. Test Antenna
Disconnect the Radio Antenna connector.
Inspect the Radio Antenna connection.
Was the Antenna connection clean and secure?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Repair the Antenna connection as needed.
Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER1.
2. ANTENNA
Refer to the Audio System in the service information and test the antenna in accordance with the service procedure.
Is the Antenna ok?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Repair or replace the Antenna assembly as necessary.
3. RADIO
NOTE: Reconnect all previously disconnected components.
NOTE: Move vehicle outside approximately 30ft from any structure.
Turn the ignition and radio on.
With the Scan Tool, erase the audio DTCs, put the radio in seek up and down mode for 2 loops around the band
cycle before proceeding.
With the Scan Tool, read the audio DTCs.
Did this DTC reset?
Yes >> Replace the radio in accordance with the service information.
Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST-VER1.
B142E-GPS ANTENNA NOT CONNECTED

When Monitored:
With the ignition on and the radio in navigation mode.
Set Condition:
With the radio does not detect GPS antenna connection.
Possible Causes
BAD ANTENNA CONNECTION
RADIO
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding.
Diagnostic Test
1. TEST ANTENNA
Disconnect the GPS Antenna connector.
Inspect the GPS Antenna connection.
Was the Antenna connection clean and secure?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Repair the Antenna connection as needed.
2. ANTENNA
Refer to the Audio System in the service information and test the antenna in accordance with the service procedure.
Is the Antenna ok?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Repair or replace the Antenna assembly as necessary.
3. RADIO
NOTE: Reconnect all previously disconnected components.
NOTE: Move vehicle outside approximately 30ft from any structure.
Turn the ignition and radio on.
With the Scan Tool, erase the audio DTCs and operate the navigation system.
With the Scan Tool, read the audio DTCs.
Did this DTC reset?
Yes >> Replace the radio in accordance with the service information.
B221E-RADIO INTERNAL
When Monotored:
Continuously with the ignition on and radio turned on
Set Condition:
The code will set if the radio detects a radio internal failure
Possible Causes
RADIO INTERNAL FAILURE
Diagnostic Test
1. Verify DTC B221E-RADIO INTERNAL IS ACTIVE

NOTE: If a DTC is set, erase the DTC and attempt to reset the DTC. If the DTC resets, follow test.
This is an internal radio failure
View repair
Does the DTC reset and read B221E-Radio Internal?
Repair
Replace the Radio in accordance with the service information.
LX AUDIO/VIDEO - SERVICE INFORMATION 8A - 131
AUDIO/VIDEO - SERVICE INFORMATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
AUDIO/VIDEO - SERVICE INFORMATION MODULE-ANTENNA

DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
AUDIO/VIDEO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
AMPLIFIER ANTENNA MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING NOISE SUPPRESSION COMPONENTS-RADIO
AMPLIFIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 RADIO
ANTENNA - SATELLITE RADIO DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
ANTENNA - NAVIGATION RECEIVER-SATELLITE
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
ANTENNA-REAR GLASS INTEGRAL SPEAKER
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING SPEAKER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
REAR GLASS INTEGRAL ANTENNA . . . . . . . . . 140 REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
ANTENNA CABLE INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
ANTENNA CABLE-INSTRUMENT PANEL REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
8A - 132 AUDIO/VIDEO - SERVICE INFORMATION LX
AUDIO/VIDEO - SERVICE INFORMATION

DESCRIPTION
Several radios are offered. The audio system uses a CAN B bus Ignition ON message so that the system will only
operate when the ignition switch is in the RUN or ACCESSORY/ACCESSORY DELAY positions.
The audio system includes the following components:
Amplifier
Antenna (Radio, Navigation, Satellite)
Radio noise suppression components
Radio
Speakers
Certain functions and features of the audio/video system rely upon resources shared with other electronic modules
in the vehicle over the CAN bus network. For diagnosis of the CAN bus network, the use of a scan tool and the
proper Diagnostic Procedures information is recommended.
For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information.

AUDIO/VIDEO
Any diagnosis of the Audio system should begin with the use of scan tool. For information on the use of
the scan tool, refer to the appropriate Diagnostic Service information.
WARNING: ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH AIRBAGS, REFER TO ELECTRICAL, RESTRAINTS BEFORE

ATTEMPTING ANY STEERING WHEEL, STEERING COLUMN, OR INSTRUMENT PANEL COMPONENT DIAG-
NOSIS OR SERVICE. FAILURE TO TAKE THE PROPER PRECAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN ACCIDENTAL AIR-
BAG DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
AUDIO SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS

NO AUDIO. 1. FUSE INOPERATIVE. 1. CHECK RADIO FUSES IN INTEGRATED POWER MODULE
(IPM). REPLACE FUSES, IF REQUIRED.
2. RADIO CONNECTOR 2. CHECK FOR LOOSE OR CORRODED RADIO CONNECTOR.
DAMAGED. REPAIR, IF REQUIRED.
3. WIRING DAMAGED. 3. CHECK FOR BATTERY VOLTAGE AT RADIO CONNECTOR.
REPAIR WIRING, IF REQUIRED.
4. GROUND DAMAGED. 4. CHECK FOR CONTINUITY BETWEEN RADIO CHASSIS AND
A KNOWN GOOD GROUND. THERE SHOULD BE
CONTINUITY. REPAIR GROUND, IF REQUIRED.
5. RADIO 5. EXCHANGE OR REPLACE RADIO, IF REQUIRED.
INOPERATIVE.
6. AMPLIFIER 6. PERFORM DIAGNOSIS ON AMPLIFIER. REPLACE AS
INOPERATIVE. NECESSARY.
NO DISPLAY. 1. FUSE INOPERATIVE. 1. CHECK RADIO FUSES. REPLACE FUSES, IF REQUIRED.

INOPERATIVE.
NO MEMORY. 1. FUSE INOPERATIVE. 1. CHECK IGNITION-OFF DRAW FUSE. REPLACE FUSE, IF
REQUIRED.

INOPERATIVE.
POOR RADIO 1. ANTENNA OR CABLE 1. REFER TO ANTENNA DIAGNOSIS. REPAIR OR REPLACE
RECEPTION. DAMAGED OR ANTENNA, IF REQUIRED.
INOPERATIVE.
INOPERATIVE.
4. POOR ANTENNA 4. VERIFY PROPER CONNECTION.
CONNECTION AT
RADIO OR IN LINE.
SOUND 1. DOOR TRIM PANEL 1. INSPECT DOOR TRIM PANEL AND CORRECT AS
DISTORTION LOOSE OR MISSING NECESSARY. REPLACE ANY MISSING FASTENERS.
(VIBRATION FASTENERS.
FROM SPEAKER
AREA, BUZZING
- HUMMING
2. WATER SHIELD 2. INSPECT WATER SHIELD AND ADJUST AS REQUIRED.
LOOSE OR
MISALIGNED.
3. ITEMS PLACED IN 3. REMOVE ITEMS FROM DOOR TRIM PANEL. ENSURE THAT
DOOR TRIM PANEL VIBRATION IS NO LONGER PRESENT.
MAP POCKETS
VIBRATING OR
MOVING FROM SIDE
TO SIDE.
NO/POOR TAPE 1. TAPE DAMAGED. 1. INSERT KNOWN GOOD TAPE AND TEST OPERATION.
OPERATION.
2. FOREIGN OBJECTS 2. REMOVE FOREIGN OBJECTS AND TEST OPERATION.
BEHIND TAPE DOOR.
3. DIRTY CASSETTE 3. CLEAN HEAD WITH MOPAR CASSETTE HEAD CLEANER.
TAPE HEAD.
INOPERATIVE.

NO COMPACT 1. CD DAMAGED. 1. INSERT KNOWN GOOD CD AND TEST OPERATION. AVOID
DISC THE USE OF 9HOME MAID9 CDS WITH ADHESIVE LABELS.
OPERATION THE LABELS MAY CAUSE DISC TO BECOME JAMMED IN THE
RADIO.
2. FOREIGN MATERIAL 2. CLEAN CD AND TEST OPERATION.
ON CD.
3. CONDENSATION ON 3. ALLOW TEMPERATURE OF VEHICLE INTERIOR TO
CD OR OPTICS. STABILIZE AND TEST OPERATION.
INOPERATIVE.
AMPLIFIER
DESCRIPTION
The amplifier (2) is available in two ratings: 288 watt
(RD7), and 380 watt (RDF). The amplifier is mounted
to the left of the steering column under the instrument
panel.
OPERATION
The amplifier receives fused battery current from a fuse in the rear Power Distribution Center (PDC) at all times.
The internal circuitry of the amplifier switches the amplifier ON based upon a CAN bus message that is received
from the radio receiver whenever the radio is turned on. The amplifier receives the sound signal inputs from the left
and right rear outputs of the radio, then sends the amplified speaker outputs for each of those channels to the
speakers.

AMPLIFIER
Any diagnosis of the Audio system should begin with the use of a scan tool and the appropriate Diagnostic
Service information.
Refer to the appropriate wiring information.
The amplifier unit should be checked if there is no sound output noted from the speakers. For diagnosis of the
power amplifier, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/AUDIO/SPEAKER - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).
REMOVAL
NOTE: A battery reconnect procedure must be per-
formed anytime the battery has been discon-
nected. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY
SYSTEM - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
1. Disconnect and isolate battery negative cable.

2. Remove the instrument panel silencer.
3. Disconnect electrical harness connectors.
4. Remove the mounting fasteners (1).

5. Remove the amplifier (2).
INSTALLATION
1. Position amplifier (2) into place.

2. Install mounting fasteners (1).
3. Connect electrical harness connectors.

4. Install instrument panel silencer.
5. Connect battery negative cable.
ANTENNA - SATELLITE RADIO

REMOVAL
1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable.

2. Lower the rear portion of the headliner as neces-
sary to access underside of antenna
3. Disconnect the wire harness connectors from the
antenna.
4. Remove the mounting fastener.

5. From inside the vehicle, and using a flat bladed
tool, depress one of the retaining tabs on the
antenna. Push up the one side of the antenna con-
nector through the roof panel. Depress the other
side of the connector and remove the antenna.
INSTALLATION
1. Insert wire harness through hole in roof panel.

Press antenna into position until both retainers
engage into position.
2. Install and tighten mounting fastener.
3. Connect wire harness connectors to antenna.

4. Install headliner.
ANTENNA - NAVIGATION
REMOVAL
1. Remove the radio (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/AU-
DIO/RADIO - REMOVAL).
2. Remove the instrument cluster (Refer to 8 - ELEC-
TRICAL/INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - REMOVAL).
3. Remove the navigation antenna fasteners (1).
4. Remove the navigation antenna (2) from the vehi-
cle.
INSTALLATION
1. Install the navigation antenna (2) into the vehicle.
2. Install the navigation antenna fasteners (1).
3. Install the instrument cluster (Refer to 8 - ELEC-
TRICAL/INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - INSTALLA-
TION).
4. Install the radio (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/AUDIO/
RADIO - INSTALLATION).
ANTENNA-REAR GLASS INTEGRAL

DESCRIPTION
The integral antenna element is bonded to the rear glass and is replaced with the glass assembly only.
OPERATION
The integral antenna receives radio frequencies and sends them to the antenna module for amplification.

REAR GLASS INTEGRAL ANTENNA
The antenna grid pattern is located above the EBL grid.
For circuit descriptions and diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. To detect breaks in the integral
antenna elements, the following procedure is required:
1. Disconnect the antenna module connector from the antenna terminals on the glass.
2. Using an ohmmeter, place a lead on one of the terminals and check each end of the grid pattern connected to
this terminal for continuity. If continuity is present, move one lead through the grid in progression starting at the
terminal with the other lead on the terminal until continuity is lost. Repeat procedure for the other terminal. A
break in the antenna grid can be repaired using a Mopar Rear Window Defogger Repair Kit or equivalent.
ANTENNA CABLE
REMOVAL
NOTE: A battery reconnect procedure must be performed anytime the battery has been disconnected. (Refer
to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
1. Disconnect and isolate battery negative cable.

2. Remove right side cowl trim panel (Refer to 23 - BODY/INTERIOR/COWL TRIM COVER - REMOVAL).
3. Disconnect antenna cable from instrument panel antenna cable.
4. Remove right side front and rear door scuff plates (Refer to 23 - BODY/INTERIOR/DOOR SILL SCUFF PLATE
- REMOVAL).
5. Remove right side C-pillar trim panel (Refer to 23 - BODY/INTERIOR/C-PILLAR TRIM - REMOVAL).
6. Disconnect antenna cable from antenna module.
7. Move floor carpet aside.
8. Remove antenna cable.
INSTALLATION
1. Position antenna cable and secure to wire harness.

2. Connect antenna cable to antenna module.
3. Connect antenna cable to instrument panel antenna cable.
4. Install right side C-pillar trim panel (Refer to 23 - BODY/INTERIOR/C-PILLAR TRIM - INSTALLATION).
5. Install right side front and rear door scuff plates (Refer to 23 - BODY/INTERIOR/DOOR SILL SCUFF PLATE -
INSTALLATION).
6. Install right side cowl trim panel (Refer to 23 - BODY/INTERIOR/COWL TRIM COVER - INSTALLATION).
ANTENNA CABLE-INSTRUMENT PANEL

REMOVAL

2. Remove the radio (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/AU-
DIO/RADIO - REMOVAL).
3. Remove the glove box (Refer to 23 - BODY/IN-
STRUMENT PANEL/GLOVE BOX - REMOVAL).
4. Remove the right side cowl trim (Refer to 23 -
BODY/INTERIOR/COWL TRIM COVER -
REMOVAL).
5. Disconnect antenna cable at right side cowl area.
6. Remove cable from instrument panel.
INSTALLATION
1. Install cable to instrument panel.

2. Connect antenna cable at right side cowl area.
3. Install the right side cowl trim (Refer to 23 - BODY/
INTERIOR/COWL TRIM COVER - INSTALLA-
TION).
4. Install the glove box (Refer to 23 - BODY/INSTRU-
MENT PANEL/GLOVE BOX - INSTALLATION).
5. Install the radio (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/AUDIO/
RADIO - INSTALLATION).
6. Connect the battery negative cable.
MODULE-ANTENNA
DESCRIPTION
The antenna module is an electronic circuit component designed to capture and enhance RF (Radio Frequency)
signals in both the AM and FM broadcast bands. The antenna module is mounted to the right C-pillar (sedan) or
rear liftgate (wagon). The module is grounded through the mounting bracket and fastener. The module has a two
wire electrical connector that connects to the integral radio antenna and EBL grid, located on the rear window. There
is also an electrical connector for battery voltage and a coax cable connector.
OPERATION
The antenna module receives both AM and FM radio signals supplied by the rear window integral radio antenna and
selectively amplifies them. The amplified signal is then sent through the body length coax cable to the radio input.

ANTENNA MODULE
NO AM RECEPTION, 1. Antenna module to antenna 1. Repair open or reconnect

WEAK FM RECEPTION connector open or disconnected. antenna module connector to
glass mounted antenna.
2. Cable open or disconnected. 2. Replace antenna cable or,
reconnect cable.
3. No battery power at antenna 3. Check fuse. If okay, repair
module. open in battery voltage circuit.
4. Antenna module disconnected 4. Connect module connector to
from glass. glass.
NO AM OR FM 1. Coax disconnected at radio. 1. Reconnect coax.

RECEPTION
2. Coax shorted to ground. 2. Repair or Replace coax
WEAK OR NO AM/FM 1. Antenna Module inoperative. 1. Replace antenna module.

RECEPTION
REMOVAL
SEDAN
2. Remove C-pillar upper trim.
3. Disconnect wire harness connectors and antenna
cable.
4. Remove mounting fasteners and antenna module.
WAGON


2. Remove the liftgate trim.
3. Disconnect wire harness connectors and antenna
cable.
4. Remove mounting fasteners and antenna module.
INSTALLATION
SEDAN
1. Position module into place.

2. Install and tighten mounting fasteners.
3. Connect wire harness connectors and antenna
cable to antenna module.
4. Install C-pillar upper trim.
WAGON

3. Connect wire harness connectors and antenna
cable to antenna module.
4. Install the liftgate trim.
NOISE SUPPRESSION COMPONENTS-RADIO

DESCRIPTION
Radio noise suppression devices are installed on this vehicle. Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) and ElectroMag-
netic Interference (EMI) can be produced by any on-board or external source of electromagnetic energy. These elec-
tromagnetic energy sources can radiate electromagnetic signals through the air, or conduct them through the vehicle
electrical system.
When the audio system converts RFI or EMI to an audible acoustic wave form, it is referred to as radio noise. This
undesirable radio noise is generally manifested in the form of buzzing, hissing, popping, clicking, crackling,
and/or whirring sounds. In most cases, RFI and EMI radio noise can be suppressed using a combination of vehicle
and component grounding, filtering and shielding techniques. This vehicle is equipped with radio noise suppression
devices that were designed to minimize exposure to typical sources of RFI and EMI; thereby, minimizing radio noise
complaints.
Radio noise suppression is accomplished primarily through circuitry or devices that are integral to the radios, audio
power amplifiers and other on-board electrical components such as generators, wiper motors, blower motors, and
fuel pumps that have been found to be potential sources of RFI or EMI. External radio noise suppression devices
that are used on this vehicle to control RFI or EMI, and can be serviced, include the following:
Engine-to-frame ground strap - This length of braided ground strap has an eyelet terminal connector crimped
to each end. One end is secured to the engine cylinder heads. The other is secured to the frame.
Resistor-type spark plugs - This type of spark plug has an internal resistor connected in series between the
spark plug terminal and the center electrode to help reduce the production of electromagnetic radiation that
can result in radio noise.
Exhaust-to-frame ground strap - This length of braided ground strap has an eyelet terminal connector
crimped to each end. One end is secured to the exhaust pipe. The other is secured to the frame.
OPERATION
There are two common strategies that can be used to suppress Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) and Electro-
Magnetic Interference (EMI) radio noise. The first suppression strategy involves preventing the production of RFI
and EMI electromagnetic signals at their sources. The second suppression strategy involves preventing the recep-
tion of RFI and EMI electromagnetic signals by the audio system components.
The use of braided ground straps in key locations is part of the RFI and EMI prevention strategy. These ground
straps ensure adequate ground paths, particularly for high current components such as many of those found in the
starting, charging, ignition, engine control and transmission control systems. An insufficient ground path for any of
these high current components may result in radio noise caused by induced voltages created as the high current
seeks alternative ground paths through components or circuits intended for use by, or in close proximity to the audio
system components or circuits.
Preventing the reception of RFI and EMI is accomplished by ensuring that the audio system components are cor-
rectly installed in the vehicle. Loose, corroded or improperly soldered wire harness connections, improperly routed
wiring and inadequate audio system component grounding can all contribute to the reception of RFI and EMI. A
properly grounded antenna body and radio chassis, as well as a shielded antenna coaxial cable with clean and tight
connections will each help reduce the potential for reception of RFI and EMI.
RADIO
DESCRIPTION
Available radios include:
AM/FM/MP3/6 disc CD with full screen naviga-
tion (REC sales code)
AM/FM/MP3/6 disc CD (RAQ sales code)
AM/FM/cassette/6 disc CD/MP3 (RAK sales
code)
AM/FM/CD with changer control (REF sales
code)
AM/FM/6 disc CD/RDS (RAR sales code) -
export only
AM/FM/CD/RDS (REG sales code) - export only
AM/FM with integrated display (REJ sales code)
- export only
REMOVAL

2. Remove instrument panel center bezel (Refer to 23
- BODY/INSTRUMENT PANEL/INSTRUMENT
PANEL CENTER BEZEL - REMOVAL).
3. Remove mounting fasteners.
CAUTION: Pulling the antenna cable straight out

of the radio without pulling on the locking antenna
connector could damage the cable or radio.
4. Disconnect the antenna cable (3) by pulling the

locking antenna connector (2) away from the radio
(1).
5. Disconnect the electrical harness connector and
remove radio.
INSTALLATION
1. Connect the electrical harness and antenna cable

(3) to radio (1).
2. Position radio and install mounting fasteners.

3. Install instrument panel center bezel (Refer to 23 -
BODY/INSTRUMENT PANEL/INSTRUMENT
PANEL CENTER BEZEL - INSTALLATION).
RECEIVER-SATELLITE
REMOVAL
NOTE:
If the owners satellite service was active before the satellite receiver was replaced the new satellite receiver
will have to be activated. The existing satellite receiver will have to be deactivated before the replacement
satellite receiver can be activated.
To activate Sirius satellite radio service, call Sirius at their toll-free number. Please have the following infor-
mation available when activating a system:
Electronic Serial Number / Sirius Identification Number (ESN/SID) of the unit to be replaced
ESN/SID of the replacement receiver
Vehicle Owners name and address
VIN
The ESN/SID number can be obtained through the radio display by following the steps in the satellite
radio owners manual.
The vehicle must be outside with the audio system powered on, in the satellite radio mode, to receive the
activation signal.
SEDAN

2. Remove left side trunk trim.
3. Disconnect electrical harness connector (3).
4. Disconnect antenna harness connectors.
5. Remove mounting bracket fasteners (1).
6. Remove module to mounting bracket fasteners (2).
WAGON
NOTE:
VIN
activation signal.


2. Remove the left rear quarter trim panel.
3. Disconnect electrical harness connector.
4. Disconnect antenna harness connectors.
5. Remove mounting bracket fasteners
.
6. Remove module to mounting bracket fasteners (2).
INSTALLATION
SEDAN
NOTE:
VIN
activation signal.

1. Install and tighten module to mounting bracket fas-

teners (2).
3. Install and tighten mounting bracket fasteners (1).
4. Connect antenna harness connectors.
5. Connect electrical harness connectors (3).
6. Install left side trunk trim.
WAGON
NOTE:
VIN
activation signal.

1. Install and tighten module to mounting bracket fas-

teners (2).
3. Install and tighten mounting bracket fasteners.
4. Connect antenna harness connectors.

6. Install left rear quarter trim panel.
SPEAKER
DESCRIPTION
FOUR SPEAKER
The four speaker system includes four speakers in four locations. One 15.2 X 23 centimeter (6 X 9 inch) diameter
speaker is located in each front door. There is also one 15.2 X 23 centimeter (6 X 9 inch) diameter speaker located
on each side of the rear shelf.
SIX SPEAKER
The six speaker system features six speakers in six locations. One 15.2 X 23 centimeter (6 X 9 inch) diameter
speaker is located in each front door. One 15.2 X 23 centimeter (6 X 9 inch) diameter speaker located on each side
of the rear shelf. Two 8.9 centimeter (3.5 inch) speakers are located on the top portion of the instrument panel.
SIX SPEAKER - BOSTON ACOUSTICS

The six speaker system features six speakers in six locations. One 15.2 X 23 centimeter (6 X 9 inch) diameter
of the rear shelf. Two 8.9 centimeter (3.5 inch) speakers are located on the top portion of the instrument panel. This
speaker system also includes an amplifier. The total available power of the speaker system is 288 watts.
EIGHT SPEAKER - BOSTON ACOUSTICS

The eight speaker system features eight speakers in eight locations. One 16.5 centimeter (6 X 9 inch) diameter
of the rear shelf. A subwoofer is located on the rear shelf (sedan only). Three 8.9 centimeter (3.5 inch) speakers are
located on the top portion of the instrument panel. This speaker system also includes an amplifier. The total avail-
able power of the speaker system is 380 watts.

SPEAKER
Any diagnosis of the Audio system should begin with the use of a scan tool and the appropriate Diagnostic
Service information.
WARNING: DISABLE THE AIRBAG SYSTEM BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY STEERING WHEEL, STEERING
COLUMN, SEAT BELT TENSIONER, SIDE AIRBAG, OR INSTRUMENT PANEL COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS OR
SERVICE. DISCONNECT AND ISOLATE THE BATTERY NEGATIVE (GROUND) CABLE, THEN WAIT TWO MIN-
UTES FOR THE AIRBAG SYSTEM CAPACITOR TO DISCHARGE BEFORE PERFORMING FURTHER DIAGNO-
SIS OR SERVICE. THIS IS THE ONLY SURE WAY TO DISABLE THE AIRBAG SYSTEM. FAILURE TO TAKE
THE PROPER PRECAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN ACCIDENTAL AIRBAG DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE
PERSONAL INJURY.
CAUTION: The speaker output of the radio is a floating ground system. Do not allow any speaker lead to
short to ground, as damage to the radio may result.
1. If all speakers are inoperative, check the radio fuses in the junction block. If OK, go to Step 2. If not OK, repair
the shorted circuit or component as required and replace the faulty fuse.
2. Check the amplifier fuse (if equipped) in the junction block. If OK, go to Step 3. If not OK, repair the shorted
circuit or component as required and replace the faulty fuse.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Turn the radio receiver ON. Adjust the balance and fader control
controls to check the performance of each individual speaker. Note the speaker locations that are not performing
correctly. Go to Step 4.
4. Turn the radio OFF. Turn the ignition OFF. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. If vehicle is not
equipped with a amplifier, remove the radio receiver. If the vehicle is equipped with an amplifier, disconnect the
wire harness connectors. There are two connectors. The one on the body harness has body speakers only. The
other on the instrument panel harness has the instrument panel speakers, battery, ground, and CAN. Go to Step
5.
5. Check both the speaker feed (+) circuit and return (-) circuit cavities for the inoperative speaker at the wire har-
ness connector for continuity to ground. There should be no continuity. If OK, go to Step 6. If not OK, repair the
shorted speaker feed (+) and/or return (-) circuits(s) to the speaker as required.
6. Disconnect wire harness connector at the inoperative speaker. Check for continuity between the speaker feed (+)
circuit cavities of the radio receiver wire harness connector or if equipped, the amplifier wire harness connector
and the speaker wire harness connector. Repeat the check between the speaker return (-) circuit cavities of the
radio receiver wire harness connector and the speaker wire harness connector. In each case, there should be
continuity. If OK, replace the faulty speaker. If not OK, repair the open speaker feed (+) and/or return (-) cir-
cuits(s) as required.
REMOVAL
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER

2. Remove front door trim panel (Refer to 23 - BODY/
DOOR - FRONT/TRIM PANEL - REMOVAL).
4. Disconnect electrical harness connector and
remove speaker.
INSTRUMENT PANEL SIDE SPEAKER


2. Remove speaker cover from instrument panel.
remove speaker.
INSTRUMENT PANEL CENTER SPEAKER


2. Remove speaker cover from instrument panel.
remove speaker.
REAR SPEAKER - SEDAN


2. Remove upper C-pillar trim (Refer to 23 - BODY/
INTERIOR/C-PILLAR TRIM - REMOVAL).
3. Remove the lower C-pillar trim (Refer to 23 -
BODY/INTERIOR/C-PILLAR TRIM - REMOVAL).
4. Remove the rear shelf trim (Refer to 23 - BODY/
INTERIOR/REAR SHELF TRIM PANEL -
REMOVAL).
5. Remove the mounting fasteners.
remove speaker.
REAR SPEAKER - WAGON


2. Remove the quarter trim speaker cover (Refer to
23 - BODY/INTERIOR/SPEAKER BOX TRIM
COVER - REMOVAL).
remove speaker.
SUBWOOFER


2. Remove upper C-pillar trim (Refer to 23 - BODY/
INTERIOR/C-PILLAR TRIM - REMOVAL).
3. Remove the lower C-pillar trim (Refer to 23 -
4. Remove the rear shelf trim (Refer to 23 - BODY/
INTERIOR/REAR SHELF TRIM PANEL -
REMOVAL).
remove subwoofer.
INSTALLATION
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
1. Connect electrical harness connector and position

speaker.
3. Install front door trim panel (Refer to 23 - BODY/
DOOR - FRONT/TRIM PANEL - INSTALLATION).
INSTRUMENT PANEL SIDE SPEAKER


speaker.
3. Install speaker cover to instrument panel.
INSTRUMENT PANEL CENTER SPEAKER


speaker.
3. Install speaker cover to instrument panel.
REAR SPEAKER - SEDAN


speaker.
3. Install the rear shelf trim (Refer to 23 - BODY/IN-
TERIOR/REAR SHELF TRIM PANEL - INSTALLA-
TION).
4. Install the lower C-pillar trim (Refer to 23 - BODY/
INTERIOR/C-PILLAR TRIM - INSTALLATION).
5. Install the upper C-pillar trim (Refer to 23 - BODY/
REAR SPEAKER - WAGON


speaker.
3. Install the speaker grille trim (Refer to 23 - BODY/
INTERIOR/SPEAKER BOX TRIM COVER -
INSTALLATION).
SUBWOOFER

subwoofer.
TION).
4. Install the lower C-pillar trim (Refer to 23 - BODY/
5. Install the upper C-pillar trim (Refer to 23 - BODY/
SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO
DESCRIPTION
Four rocker-type switches are mounted on the front of
the steering wheel spokes.
The left switches control the following functions:
SCROLL - Controls the radio station seek
up/down, CD change track, tape change side,
satellite radio change channel, trip functions,
navigation, system status messages, and per-
sonal settings
FUNCTION SELECT - Controls the radio preset
advance or disc change (in audio mode), reset or
trip functions and scroll through warning mes-
sages, and personal feature selection (only when
vehicle is in Park).
AUDIO SYSTEM HOT KEY - Controls mode
selection: AM, FM, Tape, CD, Satellite Radio
The right switches control the following:
MENU - Controls trip functions, navigation, system status, personal settings, and telephone
C/T - Compass/Temperature hot key
AUDIO SYSTEM VOLUME - Controls the system volume level
REMOVAL

2. Remove the driver airbag (Refer to 8 - ELECTRI-
CAL/RESTRAINTS/DRIVER AIRBAG - REMOVAL).
3. Using a trim stick, gently pry switch from steering
wheel at locations shown.
4. Disconnect electrical connector.
5. Remove switch from steering wheel.
INSTALLATION
1. Connect electrical harness connector to switch.

2. Position switch and press into place.
3. Install the driver airbag (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/
RESTRAINTS/DRIVER AIRBAG - INSTALLATION).
LX CHIME/BUZZER 8B - 1
CHIME/BUZZER
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
CHIME/BUZZER - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS . . . 1 CHIME/BUZZER - SERVICE INFORMATION . . . . . 59
CHIME/BUZZER - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
CHIME/BUZZER - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS U1002-PTS DISPLAY COMMUNICATION

DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
B122C-PTS SENSOR 7 CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . 4 U1101-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH PTS
B122E-PTS SENSOR 7 RING TIME TOO DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
SHORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 U0141LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B122F-PTS SENSOR 7 RING TIME TOO FRONT CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
LONG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 U0151-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B1231-PTS SENSOR 8 CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . 11 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER . . . . . 55
B1233-PTS SENSOR 8 RING TIME TOO U0154-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
SHORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE . . . . . 56
B1234-PTS SENSOR 8 RING TIME TOO U0155-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
LONG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 CLUSTER/CCN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
B1236-PTS SENSOR 9 CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . 18 U0159-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B1238-PTS SENSOR 9 RING TIME TOO PARKING ASSIST CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . 56
SHORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 U0164-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HVAC
B1239-PTS SENSOR 9 RING TIME TOO CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
LONG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 U0167-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B123B-PTS SENSOR 10 CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . 24 INTRUSION TRANSCEIVER CONTROL
B123D-PTS SENSOR 10 RING TIME TOO MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
SHORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 U0168-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B123E-PTS SENSOR 10 RING TIME TOO VEHICLE SECURITY CONTROL MODULE
LONG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 (SKREEM/WCM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
B210D-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 U0169-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B210E-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 SUNROOF CONTROL MODULE. . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
B2126-SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE LOW . . . . . 32 U0184-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B2127-SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE HIGH . . . . . 36 RADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
B212A-PTS DISPLAY SUPPLY VOLTAGE U0186-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 AUDIO AMPLIFIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
B222A-VEHICLE LINE MISMATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 U0195-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B2232-(PTS) PARKTRONICS INTERNAL . . . . . . 43 SDARS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
B2234-(PTS) PARKTRONICS REAR DISPLAY U0196-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
INTERNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 VEHICLE ENTERTAINMENT CONTROL
U0423-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
FROM CLUSTER/CCN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 U0197-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
U0431-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED HANDS FREE PHONE MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
FROM FCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 U0199-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
DRIVER DOOR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
8B - 2 CHIME/BUZZER - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS LX
U0200-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH U0231-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH RAIN

PASSENGER DOOR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 SENSING MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
U0208-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH U0241-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH AUTO
HEATED SEAT CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . 57 HIGHBEAM HEADLAMP CONTROL
U0209-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
MEMORY SEAT CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . 57
U0212-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
SCCM-CAN-B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
LX CHIME/BUZZER - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8B - 3
CHIME/BUZZER - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS

B122C-PTS SENSOR 7 CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
With the ignition in Run/Start, and the PRNDL in R, N, or D. (Late build vehicles will disable the Park Assist
System in Neutral)
Set Condition:
Sensor ring down time is too short (700 secs).
Possible Causes
(D700) PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 7 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (X750) PARK ASSIST SENSOR
GROUND CIRCUIT
(D700) PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 7 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (Z171) PARK ASSIST DISPLAY
GROUND CIRCUIT
(D700) PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 7 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (Z914) PARK ASSIST MODULE
GROUND CIRCUIT
(D700) PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 7 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 7
PARK ASSIST MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC: B122C-PTS SENSOR 7 CIRCUIT LOW

Apply the vehicle park brake.
Shift the transmission into reverse.
With the scan tool, record and erase Park Assist Module DTCs.
Wait 30 seconds.
With the scan tool, read Park Assist Module DTCs.
Is DTC: B122C-PTS SENSOR 7 CIRCUIT LOW active?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The condition that caused this code to set is not present at this time. Check for an intermittent condition
by inspecting the related wiring harness for chaffed, pierced, pinched, and partially broken wires. Also
inspect the related connectors for broken, bent, pushed out, spread, corroded, or contaminated termi-
nals.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1).
2. CHECK PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 7 FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Shift the transmission into park.
Disconnect Park Assist Sensor No. 7.
Does the scan tool display: B122C-PTS SENSOR 7 CIRCUIT
LOW?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Replace Park Assist Sensor No. 7 in accordance with the
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to
BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1).
3. CHECK THE (D700) PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 7 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO (X750) PARK
ASSIST SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
Disconnect the Park Assist Module harness connector.
Measure the resistance between the (D700) Park Assist Sensor No. 7
Signal circuit and the (X750) Park Assist Sensor Ground circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (D700) Park Assist Sensor No. 7 Signal circuit
for a short to the (X750) Park Assist Sensor Ground circuit.
No >> Go To 4
4. CHECK THE (D700) PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 7 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO (Z171) PARK
ASSIST DISPLAY GROUND CIRCUIT
Signal circuit and the (Z171) Park Assist Display Ground circuit.
for a short to the (Z171) Park Assist Display Ground circuit.
No >> Go To 5
ASSIST MODULE GROUND CIRCUIT
Signal circuit and the (Z914) Park Assist Module Ground circuit.
for a short to the (Z914) Park Assist Module Ground circuit.
No >> Go To 6
6. CHECK THE (D700) PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 7 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the (D700) Park Assist
Sensor No. 7 Signal circuit.
No >> Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with the ser-
vice information.
B122E-PTS SENSOR 7 RING TIME TOO SHORT

When Monitored:
With the ignition on, transmission in reverse or neutral (Late build vehicles will disable the Park Assist System
in Neutral).
Set Condition:
Sensor ring down time exceeds limit (greater than 1450 secs).
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC: B122E-PTS SENSOR 7 RING TIME TOO SHORT
Wait 30 seconds.
Is DTC: B122E-PTS SENSOR 7 RING TIME TOO SHORT active?
Yes >> Go To 2
nals.
2. REPLACE PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 7
View Repair
Repair
Replace Park Assist Sensor No. 7 in accordance with the service information.
B122F-PTS SENSOR 7 RING TIME TOO LONG

When Monitored:
in Neutral).
Set Condition:
Data line stuck at 0.
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC: B122F-PTS SENSOR 7 RING TIME TOO LONG
Wait 30 seconds.
Is DTC: B122F-PTS SENSOR 7 RING TIME TOO LONG active?
Yes >> Go To 2
nals.
2. REPLACE PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO 7.
View Repair
Repair
B1231-PTS SENSOR 8 CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
With the ignition in Run/Start, and the PRNDL in R, N, or D (Late build vehicles will disable the Park Assist
System in Neutral).
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
GROUND CIRCUIT
GROUND CIRCUIT
GROUND CIRCUIT
PARK ASSIST MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC: B1231-PTS SENSOR 8 CIRCUIT LOW

Wait 30 seconds.
Is DTC: B1231-PTS SENSOR 8 CIRCUIT LOW active?
Yes >> Go To 2
nals.

Does the scan tool display: B1231-PTS SENSOR 8 CIRCUIT
LOW?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 4
No >> Go To 5
No >> Go To 6
vice information.
B1233-PTS SENSOR 8 RING TIME TOO SHORT

When Monitored:
in Neutral).
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC: B1233-PTS SENSOR 8 RING TIME TOO SHORT
Shift the transmission into Reverse.
Wait 30 seconds.
Is DTC: B1233-PTS SENSOR 8 RING TIME TOO SHORT active?
Yes >> Go To 2
nals.
View Repair
Repair
B1234-PTS SENSOR 8 RING TIME TOO LONG

When Monitored:
in neutral).
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC: B1234-PTS SENSOR 8 RING TIME TOO LONG
Wait 30 seconds.
Is DTC: B1234-PTS SENSOR 8 RING TIME TOO LONG active?
Yes >> Go To 2
nals.
View Repair
Repair
B1236-PTS SENSOR 9 CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
System in neutral).
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
GROUND CIRCUIT
GROUND CIRCUIT
GROUND CIRCUIT
PARK ASSIST MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC: B1236-PTS SENSOR 9 CIRCUIT LOW

Wait 30 seconds.
Is DTC: B1236-PTS SENSOR 9 CIRCUIT LOW active?
Yes >> Go To 2
nals.

Does the scan tool display: B1236-PTS SENSOR 9 CIRCUIT
LOW?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 4
No >> Go To 5
No >> Go To 6
vice information.
B1238-PTS SENSOR 9 RING TIME TOO SHORT

When Monitored:
in neutral).
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC: B1238-PTS SENSOR 9 RING TIME TOO SHORT
Wait 30 seconds.
Is DTC: B1238-PTS SENSOR 9 RING TIME TOO SHORT active?
Yes >> Go To 2
nals.
View Repair
Repair
B1239-PTS SENSOR 9 RING TIME TOO LONG

When Monitored:
in neutral).
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
PARK ASSIST SENSOR N0. 9
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC: B1239-PTS SENSOR 9 RING TIME TOO LONG
Wait 30 seconds.
Is DTC: B1239-PTS SENSOR 9 RING TIME TOO LONG active?
Yes >> Go To 2
nals.
View Repair
Repair
B123B-PTS SENSOR 10 CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
With the ignition in Run/Start, and PRNDL in R, N, or D (Late build vehicles will disable the Park Assist System
in neutral).
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
GROUND CIRCUIT
GROUND CIRCUIT
GROUND CIRCUIT
PARK ASSIST MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC: B123B-PTS SENSOR 10 CIRCUIT LOW

Wait 30 seconds.
Is DTC: B123B-PTS SENSOR 10 CIRCUIT LOW active?
Yes >> Go To 2
nals.

Does the scan tool display: B123B-PTS SENSOR 10 CIRCUIT
LOW?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 4
No >> Go To 5
No >> Go To 6
Sensor No. 10 Signal circuit and ground.
vice information.
B123D-PTS SENSOR 10 RING TIME TOO SHORT

When Monitored:
in neutral).
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC: B123D-PTS SENSOR 10 RING TIME TOO SHORT
Wait 30 seconds.
Is DTC: B123D-PTS SENSOR 10 RING TIME TOO SHORT active?
Yes >> Go To 2
nals.
2. REPLACE THE PARK ASSIST SENSOR N0. 10
View Repair
Repair
B123E-PTS SENSOR 10 RING TIME TOO LONG

When Monitored:
in neutral).
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC: B123E-PTS SENSOR 10 RING TIME TOO LONG
Wait 30 seconds.
Is DTC B123E-PTS SENSOR 10 RING TIME TOO LONG active?
Yes >> Go To 2
nals.
View Repair
Repair

When Monitored:
in neutral).
Set Condition:
Park Assist Module supply voltage less than 9.0 volts.
Possible Causes
PARK ASSIST MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC: B210D-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW

Wait 30 seconds.
Is DTC: B210D-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW active?
Yes >> Go To 2
nals.
2. VERIFY OPERATION OF THE VEHICLE CHARGING SYSTEM

NOTE: Troubleshoot any PCM charging/cranking DTCs before proceeding.
NOTE: Ensure the battery is fully charged.
Are any charging system DTCs present?
Yes >> (Refer to 9 - ENGINE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the diagnostic test procedures.
No >> Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with the service information.

When Monitored:
With the ignition on, and the transmission in reverse or neutral (Late build vehicles will disable the Park Assist
System in neutral).
Set Condition:
Park Assist Module supply voltage greater than 16.0 volts.
Possible Causes
PARK ASSIST MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC: B210E-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH

Wait 30 seconds.
Is DTC: B210E-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH active?
Yes >> Go To 2
nals.

Yes >> (Refer to 9 - ENGINE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the diagnostic test procedures.
No >> Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with the service information.
B2126-SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE LOW

When Monitored:
System in neutral).
Set Condition:
Park assist Sensor supply voltage less than 7.2 volts.
Possible Causes
(X700) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (X750) PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND
CIRCUIT
(X700) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (Z171) PARK ASSIST DISPLAY GROUND
CIRCUIT
(X700) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (Z914) PARK ASSIST MODULE GROUND
CIRCUIT
(X700) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
PARK ASSIST SENSOR
PARK ASSIST MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR AN ACTIVE DTC

Apply the park brake.
Wait 30 seconds.
Is the DTC active?
Yes >> Go To 2
nals.
2. CHECK EACH PARK ASSIST SENSOR FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Disconnect one Park Assist Sensor.
With the scan tool, read Park Assist Module DTCs. If DTC B2126 is still
active, repeat this procedure by disconnecting another park assist sen-
sor. However, if DTC B2126 changes from active to stored, or if all four
sensors have been disconnected, proceed as follows:
Is B2126-SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE LOW still active?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Replace the Park Assist Sensor that caused DTC B2126 to
change from active to stored after disconnecting it in accor-
dance with the service information.
3. CHECK THE (X700) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO (X750) PARK ASSIST
SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
NOTE: Perform this test with all Park Assist Sensors discon-
nected.
Measure the resistance between the (X700) Park Assist Sensor Supply
circuit and the (X750) Park Assist Sensor Ground circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (X700) Park Assist Sensor Supply circuit for a
short to the (X750) Park Assist Sensor Ground circuit.
No >> Go To 4
4. CHECK THE (X700) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO (Z171) PARK ASSIST
DISPLAY GROUND CIRCUIT
nected.
circuit and the (Z171) Park Assist Display Ground circuit.
short to the (Z171) Park Assist Display Ground circuit.
No >> Go To 5
5. CHECK THE (X700) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO (Z914) PARK ASSIST
MODULE GROUND CIRCUIT
nected.
circuit and the (Z914) Park Assist Module Ground circuit.
short to the (Z914) Park Assist Module Ground circuit.
No >> Go To 6
6. CHECK THE (X700) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
nected.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (X700) Park Assist
Sensor Supply circuit.
short to ground.
vice information.
B2127-SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE HIGH

When Monitored:
With the ignition in Run/Start, PRNDL in R, N, or D; vehicle speed less than 40 mph (Late build vehicles will
disable the Park Assist System in neutral).
Set Condition:
Park Assist Sensor supply voltage greater than 9.2 volts.
Possible Causes
(X700) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
PARK ASSIST MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC: B2127-SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE HIGH

Wait 30 seconds.
Is DTC: B2127-SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE HIGH active?
Yes >> Go To 2
nals.
2. CHECK THE (X700) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Measure the voltage on the (X700) Park Assist Sensor Supply circuit.
short to voltage.
vice information.
B212A-PTS DISPLAY SUPPLY VOLTAGE LOW

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Park Assist Sensor Display voltage less than 8.0 volts.
Possible Causes
(X777) PARK ASSIST DISPLAY SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

(X777) PARK ASSIST DISPLAY SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORT TO (Z171) PARK ASSIST DISPLAY GROUND
CIRCUIT
(X777) PARK ASSIST DISPLAY SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORT TO (Z914) PARK ASSIST MODULE GROUND
CIRCUIT
(X777) PARK ASSIST DISPLAY SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORT TO (X750) PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND
CIRCUIT
PARK ASSIST DISPLAY
PARK ASSIST MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC: B212A-PTS DISPLAY SUPPLY VOLTAGE LOW

Wait 30 seconds.
Is DTC: B212A-PTS DISPLAY SUPPLY VOLTAGE LOW active?
Yes >> Go To 2
nals.
2. CHECK PARK ASSIST MODULE FOR AN INTERNAL SHORT TO GROUND

Display Supply circuit.
Yes >> Go To 3
vice information.
3. CHECK THE (X777) PARK ASSIST DISPLAY SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (Z171) PARK
Disconnect the Park Assist Display harness connector.
Measure the resistance between the (X777) Park Assist Display Supply
Yes >> Repair the (X777) Park Assist Display Supply circuit for a
No >> Go To 4
4. CHECK THE (X777) PARK ASSIST DISPLAY SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (Z914) PARK
short to the (Z914) Park Assist Module Ground circuit.
No >> Go To 5
5. CHECK THE (X777) PARK ASSIST DISPLAY SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (X750) PARK
No >> Go To 6
6. CHECK THE (X777) PARK ASSIST DISPLAY SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Display Supply circuit.
short to ground.
No >> Replace the Park Assist Display in accordance with the ser-
vice information.
B222A-VEHICLE LINE MISMATCH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If the Vehicle Line data transmitted on the CAN B bus doesnt correspond with the data stored in the Park
Assist Module.
Possible Causes
PARK ASSIST MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK VEHICLE LINE IN THE PCM

With the scan tool, compare the vehicle line that is programmed in to the PCM to the vehicle line of the vehicle.
Does the vehicle line programmed into the PCM match the vehicle?
Yes >> Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with the service information.
nals.
Perform (NGC) POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST VER 5. (Refer to 9 - ENGINE - DIAGNOSIS AND
TESTING)
B2232-(PTS) PARKTRONICS INTERNAL

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Park Assist Module detects an internal failure.
Possible Causes
PARK ASSIST MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. REPLACE THE PARK ASSIST MODULE

View Repair
Repair
Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with the Service Information.
B2234-(PTS) PARKTRONICS REAR DISPLAY INTERNAL

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Park Assist Module detects an internal Park Assist Display failure.
Possible Causes
PARK ASSIST DISPLAY
Diagnostic Test
1. REPLACE THE PARK ASSIST DISPLAY
View Repair
Repair
Replace the Park Assist Display in accordance with the Service Information.
U0423-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM CLUSTER/CCN

When Monitored:
Park Assist Module supply voltage between 916 volts. Ignition in Run/Start.
Set Condition:
Ignition status = 7h
Possible Causes
NO COMMUNICATION WITH INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

DTCS STORED OR ACTIVE IN THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
ACTIVE DTCS IN THE FCM
PARK ASSIST MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC: U0423-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM CLUSTER/CCN

Wait 30 seconds.
Is DTC: U0423-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM CLUSTER/CCN active?
Yes >> Go To 2
nals.
2. INSTRUMENT CLUSTER IS ACTIVE ON THE CAN B BUS

Verify that the Instrument Cluster is active on the bus.
Is the Instrument Cluster active on the bus?
Yes >> Go To 3
Response diagnostic procedures.
3. DTCS STORED OR ACTIVE IN THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

Check for Ignition Switch DTCs in the Instrument Cluster.
Are any DTCs active or stored in the Instrument Cluster?
Yes >> Refer to the appropriate section and perform the diagnostics for the DTCs.
No >> Go to 4
4. ACTIVE DTCS IN THE FCM

With the scan tool, select ECU View and select FCM.
Are any Communication DTCs active in the FCM Park Assist System?
Yes >> Refer to the appropriate section and perform the diagnostics for the DTCs.
No >> Replace and program the Park Assist Module in accordance with the Service Information.
U0431-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM FCM

When Monitored:
Park Assist Module supply voltage between 916 volts. Ignition in Run/Start.
Set Condition:
PRNDL = 7h, or vehicle speed greater than 511 km/hr.
Possible Causes
CAN B OPEN OR SHORTED

PARK ASSIST MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. U0431-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM FCM

Wait 30 seconds.
Is DTC: U0423-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM CLUSTER/CCN active?
Yes >> Go To 2
nals.
2. U0019-NO COMMUNICATION ON THE CAN B BUS CIRCUIT ALSO ACTIVE

With a scan tool check for DTCs in the FCM.
Is the U0019-NO COMMUNICATION ON THE CAN B BUS CIRCUIT active at this time?
Yes >> Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING for the
U0019-NO COMMUNICATION ON THE CAN B BUS CIRCUIT diagnostic procedures.
No >> Replace and program the Park Assist Module according to the Service Information.
U1002-PTS DISPLAY COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Display data line low.
Possible Causes
(D777) PARK ASSIST DISPLAY SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO THE (Z171) PARK ASSIST DISPLAY GROUND
CIRCUIT
(D777) PARK ASSIST DISPLAY SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO THE (X750) PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND
CIRCUIT
(D777) PARK ASSIST DISPLAY SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO THE (Z914) PARK ASSIST MODULE GROUND
CIRCUIT
(D777) PARK ASSIST DISPLAY SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
PARK ASSIST DISPLAY
PARK ASSIST MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC: U1002-PTS DISPLAY COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT LOW

Wait 30 seconds.
Is DTC: U1002-PTS DISPLAY COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT LOW active?
Yes >> Go To 2
nals.
2. CHECK PARK ASSIST MODULE FOR AN INTERNAL SHORT TO GROUND

Display Signal circuit.
Yes >> Go To 3
vice information.
3. CHECK THE (D777) PARK ASSIST DISPLAY SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (Z171) PARK
Disconnect the Park Assist Display harness connector.
Measure the resistance between the (D777) Park Assist Display Signal
Yes >> Repair the (D777) Park Assist Display Signal circuit for a
No >> Go To 4
4. CHECK THE (D777) PARK ASSIST DISPLAY SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (X750) PARK
No >> Go To 5
5. CHECK THE (D777) PARK ASSIST DISPLAY SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (Z914) PARK
short to the(Z914) Park Assist Module Ground circuit.
No >> Go To 6
6. CHECK THE (D777) PARK ASSIST DISPLAY SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Display Signal circuit.
short to ground.
No >> Replace the Park Assist Display in accordance with the ser-
vice information.
U1101-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH PTS DISPLAY

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Data display line open.
Possible Causes
(D777) PARK ASSIST DISPLAY SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN

(X777) PARK ASSIST DISPLAY SUPPLY CIRCUIT OPEN
(Z171) PARK ASSIST DISPLAY GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
PARK ASSIST DISPLAY
PARK ASSIST MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC: U1101-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH PTS DISPLAY

Wait 30 seconds.
Is DTC: U1101-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH PTS DISPLAY active?
Yes >> Go To 2
nals.
2. CHECK THE (D777) PARK ASSIST DISPLAY SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect the Park Assist Display Module harness connector.
Measure the resistance of the (D777) Park Assist Display Signal circuit
between the Park Assist Module harness connector and the Park Assist
Display harness connector.
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Repair the (D777) Park Assist Display Signal circuit for an
open.
3. CHECK THE (X777) PARK ASSIST DISPLAY SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (X777) Park Assist Display Supply circuit
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Repair the (X777) Park Assist Display Supply circuit for an
open.
4. CHECK THE (Z171) PARK ASSIST DISPLAY GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (Z171) Park Assist Display Ground circuit
Yes >> Go To 5
No >> Repair the (Z171) Park Assist Display Ground circuit for an
open.
5. CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE PARK ASSIST DISPLAY

Replace the Park Assist Display in accordance with the service infor-
mation.
Reconnect the Park Assist Module harness connector.
Does the scan tool display U1101-LOST COMMUNICATION
WITH PTS DISPLAY?
Yes >> Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with the ser-
vice information.

test procedure.
U0151-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER

test procedure.
U0154-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE

test procedure.
U0155-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH CLUSTER/CCN

test procedure.
U0159-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH PARKING ASSIST CONTROL MODULE

test procedure.
U0164-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HVAC CONTROL MODULE

test procedure.
U0167-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH INTRUSION TRANSCEIVER CONTROL

MODULE
test procedure.
U0168-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH VEHICLE SECURITY CONTROL MODULE

(SKREEM/WCM)
test procedure.
U0169-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH SUNROOF CONTROL MODULE

test procedure.
U0184-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH RADIO

test procedure.
U0186-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH AUDIO AMPLIFIER

test procedure.
U0195-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH SDARS

test procedure.
U0196-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH VEHICLE ENTERTAINMENT CONTROL

MODULE
test procedure.
U0197-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HANDS FREE PHONE MODULE

test procedure.
U0199-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH DRIVER DOOR MODULE

test procedure.
U0200-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH PASSENGER DOOR MODULE

test procedure.
U0208-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HEATED SEAT CONTROL MODULE

test procedure.
U0209-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH MEMORY SEAT CONTROL MODULE

test procedure.
U0212-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH SCCM-CAN-B

test procedure.
U0231-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH RAIN SENSING MODULE

test procedure.
U0241-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH AUTO HIGHBEAM HEADLAMP CONTROL

MODULE
test procedure.
LX CHIME/BUZZER - SERVICE INFORMATION 8B - 59
CHIME/BUZZER - SERVICE INFORMATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
CHIME/BUZZER - SERVICE INFORMATION OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

MODULE-PARK ASSIST DISPLAY-FRONT PARK ASSIST SENSOR
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
PARK ASSIST MODULE
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
8B - 60 CHIME/BUZZER - SERVICE INFORMATION LX
CHIME/BUZZER - SERVICE INFORMATION

DESCRIPTION
CHIME WARNING SYSTEM
The chime warning system uses an electromechanical transducer and an electromechanical relay that are soldered
onto the electronic circuit board inside of the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) to provide audible indi-
cations of various vehicle conditions that may require the attention of the vehicle operator or occupants. The EMIC
also includes the hardware and software necessary to serve as the electronic body control module and is some-
times referred to as the Cab Compartment Node or CCN.
The electromechanical transducer generates beep tones and chime tones, while the electromechanical relay gen-
erates click tones to emulate the sounds associated with conventional turn signal and hazard warning flasher oper-
ation. The microprocessor-based EMIC utilizes electronic chime request messages received from other modules in
the vehicle over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus along with hard wired inputs to monitor many sensors
and switches throughout the vehicle. In response to those inputs, the circuitry and programming of the EMIC allow
it to control the audible outputs that are produced through its on-board transducer and relay.
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM

The Park Assist System is an electronic parking aid that alerts the driver to obstacles which are located immediately
behind the vehicle. Objects are sensed using ultrasonic sound waves. When an object is detected, the system will
give the driver visual and audible warnings. The system is customer programmable through the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) but will be enabled from the factory as a default.
The major components of the park assist system are:
Park Assist Module - supplies voltage to the object detection sensors and park assist display. It triggers the
sensors, analyzes the echo delay times and calculates obstacle distances. It sends display information to the
park assist display, performs system diagnostics, and communicates via the Programmable Communication
Interface (PCI) date bus network.
Park Assist Sensors - there are four sensors located in the rear bumper that generate ultrasonic pulses when
triggered by the park assist module. The sensors signal the park assist module when reflected ultrasonic
pulses are received.
Park Assist Display - there are sixteen Light Emitting Diode (LED) indicators which provide indication of rel-
ative distance to obstacles. When the system is engaged and no obstacles are detected, the two outermost
yellow LEDs are lit at reduced brightness to show the system is working. As the distance to a detected obsta-
cle decreases, more yellow LEDs towards the center of the display illuminate.
For diagnosis and testing of the park assist system, use a scan tool and the appropriate body diagnostic informa-
tion.
OPERATION
CHIME WARNING SYSTEM
The chime warning system operates on battery voltage received through a fuse in the Junction Block (JB) on a
non-switched fused B(+) circuit so that the system may operate regardless of the ignition switch position. The chime
warning system also monitors the ignition switch position so that some chime features are functional only with the
ignition switch in the On position, while others are functional regardless of the ignition switch position.
The chime warning system provides an audible indication to the vehicle operator or occupants under the following
conditions:
Airbag Indicator Warning - The ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) transducer will generate one
short chime when the ignition switch is in the On position, and an electronic message is received over the
Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus from the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) requesting Airbag
indicator illumination. This warning will only occur following completion of the Airbag indicator bulb test, and
will only occur once during any ignition cycle.
Compass Mini-Trip Computer Global Reset - The EMIC transducer will generate one short chime when the
ignition switch is in the On position, and an electronic message is received over the CAN data bus from the
optional Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) requesting that the CMTC average fuel economy, trip odometer
and distance to empty data be reset. The CMTC monitors hard wired inputs from the U.S./Metric and Reset
button switches to determine the proper reset messages to send to the EMIC.
Door Ajar Indicator Warning - The EMIC transducer will generate one short chime when the ignition switch
is in the On position, a hard wired input is received indicating that the status of any door ajar switch has
changed, and an electronic message is received over the CAN data bus indicating that the vehicle is moving.
Fasten Seat Belt Indicator Warning - The EMIC transducer will generate repetitive chimes at a slow rate to
announce that a hard wired input from the seat belt switch indicates that the driver side front seat belt is not
fastened with the ignition switch in the On position. The chime warning system also supports the enhanced
seat belt reminder (beltminder) when this feature is enabled.
Gate Ajar Indicator Warning - The EMIC transducer will generate one short chime when the ignition switch is
in the On position, a hard wired input is received indicating that the status of the liftgate ajar switch has
changed, and an electronic message is received over the CAN data bus indicating that the vehicle is moving.
Head/Park Lamps-On Warning - The EMIC transducer will generate repetitive chimes at a fast rate to indi-
cate that hard wired inputs from the driver door ajar switch, the headlamp switch, and the ignition switch indi-
cate that the exterior lamps are turned On with the driver side front door opened and the ignition switch in the
Off position. The chimes will continue to sound until the exterior lamps are turned Off, the driver side front door
is closed, or the ignition switch is turned to the On position, whichever occurs first.
Key-In-Ignition Warning - The EMIC transducer will generate repetitive chimes at a fast rate to indicate that
hard wired inputs from the driver door ajar switch, the ignition switch, and the key-in ignition switch circuitry of
the ignition switch indicate that the key is in the ignition lock cylinder with the driver side front door open and
the ignition switch in the Off position. The chimes will continue to sound until the key is removed from the
ignition lock cylinder, the driver side front door is closed, or the ignition switch is turned to the On position,
whichever occurs first.
Low Fuel Indicator Warning - The EMIC transducer will generate one short chime when the low fuel indicator
is illuminated by the instrument cluster circuitry. This chime will only occur once during any ignition cycle.
Low Wash Indicator Warning - The EMIC transducer will generate one short chime when the low washer
fluid indicator is illuminated by the instrument cluster circuitry. This chime will only occur once during any igni-
tion cycle.
Overspeed Warning - The EMIC transducer will generate repetitive chimes at a slow rate to indicate that the
vehicle speed is over a pre-programmed speed value. The EMIC monitors electronic vehicle speed messages
received over the CAN data bus. This feature is only enabled on an EMIC that has been programmed with a
Middle East Gulf Coast Country (GCC) code.
Park Brake Reminder - The EMIC transducer will generate one short chime to announce that the hard wired
input from the park brake switch and a vehicle speed message input received over the CAN data bus indicate
that the park brake is applied and the vehicle is moving. This chime will repeat each time the input conditions
are met.
Sentry Key Customer Learn Mode Announcement - The EMIC transducer will generate one short chime
to confirm that an electronic Customer Learn mode message has been received over the CAN data bus to
indicate that the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM) is prepared for programming additional sentry
key transponders. This chime feature is only active on vehicles equipped with the optional Sentry Key system,
and sold in a market where Customer Learn programming is an allowed feature.
Trans Overtemp Indicator Warning - The EMIC transducer will generate repetitive chimes at a slow rate
when the transmission overtemp indicator is illuminated by the instrument cluster for a high or critical trans-
mission fluid temperature condition. This chime will repeat each time the trans overtemp indicator is cycled
from Off to On.
Turn Signal/Hazard Warning Flasher Emulation - The EMIC relay will generate repetitive clicks at a slow
rate to emulate an electromechanical flasher when the turn signal or hazard warning system are operating.
The EMIC relay will generate repetitive clicks at a fast rate to indicate that the right or left turn signal are
operating with one or more bulbs inoperative. In either case, the clicks will continue until the turn signal and
hazard warning systems are turned off.
Turn Signal On Warning - The EMIC transducer will generate repetitive chimes at a slow rate to indicate that
a turn signal has been active continuously for 1.6 kilometers (1 mile) with the vehicle speed greater than 22
kilometers-per-hour (15 miles-per hour). Vehicles built for markets other than the United States and Canada
have a revised distance threshold of 4 kilometers for this feature. The chime will continue until the turn signal
input becomes inactive or until the vehicle speed message indicates that the speed is less than 22 kilometers-
per-hour (15 miles-per-hour), whichever occurs first. The hazard warning flashers will not activate this chime
feature.
Warning Indicator Announcement - The EMIC transducer will generate one short chime each time the check
gauges indicator is illuminated by the instrument cluster circuitry. The check gauges indicator may be illumi-
nated when any critical engine or transmission systems are operating outside of their normal parameters. The
instrument cluster monitors electronic messages received over the CAN data bus to determine when to illumi-
nate the check gauges indicator.
The EMIC provides chime service for all available features in the chime warning system. The EMIC relies upon its
internal programming, numerous hard wired inputs, and electronic message inputs received from other modules
over the CAN data bus network to provide the chime warning system features. The internal programming of the
EMIC determines the priority of each chime request input that is received, as well as the rate and duration of each
chime that is to be generated.
The hard wired chime warning system inputs to the EMIC may be diagnosed and tested using conventional diag-
nostic tools and procedures. However, conventional diagnostic methods may not prove conclusive in the diagnosis
of the EMIC, the CAN data bus, or the electronic messages received by the EMIC from other modules. The most
reliable, efficient and accurate means to diagnose the EMIC, the CAN data bus, or the electronic message inputs
used for the chime warning system requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic
information.
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM

The Park Assist System display activates an audible tone that changes from intermittent to continuous as the final
two Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) are illuminated on one side or both sides of the display.
The system detection length from the rear of the vehicle is 0.3 meters to 1.5 meters. This area extends around the
rear side of the vehicle. The system detection height from the ground is 0.2 meters to about 1.5 meters. The radio
mutes when the system activates its audible tone.
When the driver selects Reverse, the system scans for objects behind the vehicle using four sensors located in the
rear bumper. A warning display above the rear window provides both visible and audible warnings indicating the
range of the object.
The system is active only when the transmission gear selector is in reverse for vehicle speeds less than 16 Km/h
(10 mph). If the vehicles Parking/Emergency Brake is applied, the system is deactivated.
The display contains two sets of yellow and red Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) that the driver can see as they look
over their shoulder while backing up. Each side of the vehicle has its own warning LEDs. The system provides a
visual warning by illuminating one or more yellow LEDs as the vehicle gets closer to the object. As the vehicle
continues to approach the object, one red LED is illuminated and the system emits a series of short beeps. The
tone will remain constant and both red LEDs are illuminated once the vehicle is within 12 inches (30.5 cm) of the
object.
The system can be turned ON or OFF through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) when the vehicle is
in PARK. If the park assist system is turned OFF, a single chime will sound and the EVIC will display the following
message REAR PARK ASSIST OFF, when the vehicle is in reverse.
Ensure that the rear bumper is free of dirt and debris to keep the system operating properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could affect the performance of the system.
Ensure that the parking brake is not applied.
If Service Park Assist System appears in the EVIC after making sure the rear bumper is clean, proceed to diag-
nose the system using a scan tool and the appropriate diagnostic information.
MODULE-PARK ASSIST DISPLAY-FRONT

DESCRIPTION
The Park Assist Display is a molded plastic unit, hous-
ing Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) and a chime
module.
The Park Assist Display is located in the rear of vehi-

cle, over the rear window in the headliner. Located in
the rear of the vehicle for easy visual reference when
the driver is backing up.
The display is used to alert the driver of any obstacles
detected in the rear of the vehicle. The chime or audi-
ble signal also comes from the display unit.
OPERATION
When the ignition is put in the RUN position, all the
Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) will illuminate for
approximately one second. This will be interrupted if
the system senses an obstacle.
The ready status will be sensed by the outermost two
yellow LEDs (1) being illuminated. As the obstacle is
sensed, the yellow LEDs will start illuminating inward
(6) until the object in approximately 40 cm (16 in.)
away and then the inner red LED will light (3).
The display is sensitive to which side of the rear of the
vehicle that the object is detected. If on the left rear, the left segments will light and the same for the right side of
the vehicle.
CORRELATION OF LED SEGMENTS TO DISTANCE
DISTANCE
DISPLAY LED LED COLOR AUDIBLE SIGNAL
REAR CORNERS REAR CENTER
1st LED 150 cm (59 in.) Yellow None
2nd LED 120 cm (47 in.) Yellow None
3rd LED 100 cm (39 in.) Yellow None
4th LED 80 cm (31.5 in.) 80 cm (31.5 in.) Yellow None
5th LED 65 cm (25.5 in.) 65 cm (25.5 in.) Yellow None
6th LED 50 cm (20 in.) 50 cm (20 in.) Yellow None
30 cm (12 in.)
7th LED 40 cm (16 in.) 40 cm (16 in.) Red
Intermittant
20 cm (8 in.)
8th LED 15 cm (6 in.) 30 cm (12 in.) Red
Continuous
There will be an audible tone when the object gets within 40 cm (16 in.) from the rear of the vehicle.
To diagnose and test the Park Assist System, use a scan tool and the appropriate diagnostic information.
REMOVAL
2. Lower the headliner (3) in the rear of the vehicle in
the liftgate opening. Follow the headliner removal
procedure for the rear of the headliner (Refer to 23
- BODY/INTERIOR/HEADLINER - REMOVAL).
3. Bend the retaining tabs (2) upwards to allow the
park assist display (1) to drop out of the headliner
(3) opening.
4. Disconnect the display electrical connector (4) and
remove display (1) from vehicle.
INSTALLATION
1. Position the Park Assist Display (1) in headliner (3)
opening and connect the display electrical connec-
tor (4).
2. Bend the retaining tabs (2) down behind the head-
liner (3).
3. Raise the headliner in the rear of the vehicle in the
liftgate opening (Refer to 23 - BODY/INTERIOR/
HEADLINER - INSTALLATION).
PARK ASSIST MODULE

DESCRIPTION
The Park Assist Module has a molded plastic housing
which housing internal circuitry and two electrical con-
nectors. There are four mounting tabs that affix the
module to the right inner quarter trim panel with four
screws.
The Park Assist Module (2) is located on the right side

of the vehicle, in the trunk compartment, behind the
trunk carpet.
The module (2) has a number of functions:
Supply voltage to the sensors and display.
Disconnection of the display with bus idle and
over voltage Vmax.
Triggering the sensors.
Analyze echo delay times and calculate obstacle
distances.
Bi-directional data communication to the display
for diagnosis.
System diagnostics - diagnosis and error han-
dling (sensors, display, module).
Data exchange over the Controller Area Network
(CAN) data bus.
OPERATION
The system detection length from the rear of the vehicle is 0.3 meters to 1.5 meters. This area extends around the
rear side of the vehicle. The system detection height from the ground is 0.2 meters to about 1.5 meters. The radio
mutes when the system activates its audible tone.
When the driver selects Reverse, the system scans for objects behind the vehicle using four sensors located in the
rear bumper. Objects can be detected from up to 1.5 meters. A warning display above the rear window provides
both visible and audible warnings indicating the range of the object.
The system is active only when the vehicle is in reverse for vehicle speeds less than 16 Km/h (10 mph). If the
vehicles Parking/Emergency Brake is applied, the system is deactivated.
The display contains two sets of yellow and red Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) that the driver can see as they look
over their shoulder while backing up. Each side of the vehicle has its own warning LEDs. The system provides a
visual warning by illuminating one or more yellow LEDs as the vehicle gets closer to the object. As the vehicle
continues to approach the object, one red LED is illuminated and the system emits a series of short beeps. The
tone will remain constant and both red LEDs are illuminated once the vehicle is within 12 inches (30.5 cm) of the
object.
The system can be turned ON or OFF through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) when the vehicle is
in PARK. If the park assist system is turned OFF, a single chime will sound and the EVIC will display the following
message REAR PARK ASSIST OFF, when the vehicle is in reverse.
Ensure that the rear bumper is free of dirt and debris to keep the system operating properly.
To diagnose the Park Assist Module, use a scan tool and the appropriate body diagnostic information.
REMOVAL
2. Peel back the right inner trunk carpet to expose the
Park Assist Module (2).
3. Remove the two attaching screws (1) and separate
the module (2) from the vehicle.
4. On the wagon, the module will be behind the right

side D-pillar trim and is attached the same as the
sedan.
5. Disconnect the Park Assist Module (2) electrical

connector (1).
INSTALLATION
1. Connect the Park Assist Module electrical
connector.
2. Position the Park Assist Module (2) and install the

two attaching screws (1). Torque screws to 3.5 Nm
(30 in. lbs.).
3. Reposition the trunk carpet.
PARK ASSIST SENSOR

DESCRIPTION
The Park Assist Sensors generate ultrasonic pulses
when triggered by the park assist module when an
obstacle is detected. The sensors then signal the
module when reflected ultrasonic pulses are received.
The Park Assist Sensors are located in the rear

bumper fascia mounted equally apart. The sensors
detect objects with an ultrasonic pulse that reflects off
the object and then is sent to the module to determine
the distance of the object.
OPERATION
The Park Assist Sensors:
Generate ultrasonic pulses when triggered by the Park Assist Module.
Reception/filtering of ultrasonic energy received.
Signalling the module of received ultrasonic pulses that meet threshold criteria.
The sensors are supplied power by the module. The sensor supply is enabled when the sensor function is neces-
sary.
The sensors detection length from the rear of the vehicle is 0.3 meters to 1.5 meters. This area extends around the
rear side of the vehicle. The sensor detection height from the ground is 0.2 meters to about 1.5 meters.
Ensure that the rear bumper (sensors) is free of dirt and debris to keep the system operating properly.
REMOVAL
2. Remove rear fascia (Refer to 13 - FRAME &
BUMPERS/BUMPERS/REAR FASCIA -
REMOVAL).
3. Unsnap Park Assist Sensor from the retaining
housing and remove from fascia.
INSTALLATION
1. Position the Park Assist Sensor over the retaining
housing and firmly snap into housing in rear fascia.
2. Install the rear fascia (Refer to 13 - FRAME &
BUMPERS/BUMPERS/REAR FASCIA - INSTALLA-
TION).
LX CLOCK 8C - 1
CLOCK
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
CLOCK - SERVICE INFORMATION REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
8C - 2 CLOCK LX
CLOCK - SERVICE INFORMATION

DESCRIPTION
Some models include an analog clock. The time can
be adjusted by pushing the set button until it reaches
the desired time.
The analog clock is located in the instrument panel

center bezel, between the air distribution outlets. It
has one adjustment button for setting and no second
hand.
OPERATION
The analog clock is fed power through the M1 fuse. When installed, the clock, along with other noncritical options,
will be functional.
To set the analog clock, press and hold the adjustment button until desired time is reached.
LX CLOCK 8C - 3
REMOVAL
2. Remove the Instrument Panel Center Bezel (Refer
to 23 - BODY/INSTRUMENT PANEL/INSTRU-
MENT PANEL CENTER BEZEL - REMOVAL).
3. Remove the two retaining screws (1) holding the

clock to the rear of the I/P Center Bezel.
8C - 4 CLOCK LX
4. To replace the clock illumination lamps (1), turn

sockets (1) counterclockwise to remove lamp and
socket (1).
INSTALLATION
1. Place lamp and sockets (1) into opening and turn
clockwise till detent is felt.
LX CLOCK 8C - 5
2. Place the clock into bezel opening and then install

the two retaining screws (1).
3. Install the Instrument Panel Center Bezel (Refer to

23 - BODY/INSTRUMENT PANEL/INSTRUMENT
5. Adjust clock to proper time.
LX ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES 8E - 1
ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - SERVICE

ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - ELECTRICAL

DIAGNOSTICS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - U0159-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH PARK

ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS ASSIST CONTROL MODULE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING U0164-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HVAC
B210D-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
B210E-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 U0167-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B2112-5 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . 6 INTRUSION TRANSCEIVER CONTROL
B2113-5 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . 8 MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
B2206-CURRENT VIN MISSING/MISMATCH . . . 10 U0168-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B2215-FRONT CONTROL MODULE VEHICLE SECURITY CONTROL MODULE
INTERNAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 (SKREEM/WCM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
B222C-VEHICLE CONFIGURATION NOT U0169-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
PROGRAMMED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 SUNROOF CONTROL MODULE. . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
U0001-CAN C BUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 U0181-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
U0019-CAN B BUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 HEADLAMP LEVELING TRANSLATOR . . . . . . . 69
U0100-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH U0184-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
ECM/PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 RADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
U0101-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH TCM . . . 27 U0186-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
U0103-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH AUDIO AMPLIFIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
ELECTRIC GEAR SHIFT MODULE . . . . . . . . . . 30 U0193-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
U0121-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH TRAFFIC INFORMATION RECEIVER
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
U0141LOST COMMUNICATION WITH U0195-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
FRONT CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 SDARS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
MULTI-PURPOSE MODULE (POLICE AND VEHICLE ENTERTAINMENT CONTROL
TAXI INTERFACE MODULE) (PTIM) . . . . . . . . . 39 MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
U0151LOST COMMUNICATION WITH U0197-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER HANDS FREE PHONE MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
(ORC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 U0199-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
U0154LOST COMMUNICATION WITH DRIVER DOOR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE . . . . . 45 U0200-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
U0155-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH PASSENGER DOOR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
CLUSTER/CCN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 U0208-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
U0156LOST COMMUNICATION WITH EOM . . 51 HEATED SEAT CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . 96
8E - 2 ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS LX
U0209-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH *NO RESPONSE FROM HSM (HEATED

MEMORY SEAT CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . 99 SEAT MODULE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
U0212-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH *NO RESPONSE FROM HVAC (HEAT
SCCM - CAN B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 VENTILATION AND A/C) (ATC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
U0231-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH RAIN *NO RESPONSE FROM ITM (INTRUSION
SENSING MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 TRANSCEIVER MODULE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
U1105-CAN B SIGNAL MISSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 *NO RESPONSE FROM LRSM (LIGHT/RAIN
U1106-CAN C SIGNAL MISSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 SENSOR MODULE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
U1107-ECU IN SINGLE-WIRE MODE . . . . . . . . . 117 *NO RESPONSE FROM MULTI-PURPOSE
U1108-ADDITIONAL CAN B ECU DETECTED . 122 MODULE (POLICE AND TAXI INTERFACE
U110A-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH MODULE-PTIM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
SCCM - CAN C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 *NO RESPONSE FROM MSMD (MEMORY
*STORED LOST COMMUNICATION DTCS . . . 126 SEAT MODULE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
*CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (+) AND/OR CAN C *NO RESPONSE FROM OCM (OCCUPANT
DIAGNOSTIC (-) CIRCUITS HIGH . . . . . . . . . . 129 CLASSIFICATION MODULE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
*CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (+) CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . 131 *NO RESPONSE FROM ORC (OCCUPANT
*CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (-) CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . 133 RESTRAINT CONTROLLER MODULE). . . . . . 204
*CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (+) SHORTED TO *NO RESPONSE FROM PCM
CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (-) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 (POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE) . . . . . . . 208
*CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (-) CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . 137 *NO RESPONSE FROM PDM (PASSENGER
*CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (+) CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . 139 DOOR MODULE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
*BOTH CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (+) AND CAN C *NO RESPONSE FROM PTS (PARK ASSIST
DIAGNOSTIC (-) CIRCUITS OPEN. . . . . . . . . . 141 MODULE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
*NO RESPONSE FROM ABS (ANTILOCK *NO RESPONSE FROM RADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
BRAKE MODULE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 *NO RESPONSE FROM SDAR (SATELLITE
*NO RESPONSE FROM AMP (AMPLIFIER) . . . 148 RECEIVER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
*NO RESPONSE FROM CCN (CLUSTER) . . . . 151 *NO RESPONSE FROM SCM (STEERING
*NO RESPONSE FROM DDM (DRIVER CONTROL MODULE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
DOOR MODULE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 *NO RESPONSE FROM SUNR (SUNROOF
*NO RESPONSE FROM ECM (ENGINE MOTOR/MODULE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
CONTROL MODULE) - DIESEL. . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 *NO RESPONSE FROM TCM
*NO RESPONSE FROM EOM (ELECTRONIC (TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE) -
OVERHEAD MODULE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 NAG1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
*NO RESPONSE FROM ESM (ELECTRONIC *NO RESPONSE FROM TCM
SHIFT MODULE) (SHIFTER LEVER (TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE)
ASSEMBLY) - NAG1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 NGC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
*NO RESPONSE FROM ESM (ELECTRONIC *NO RESPONSE FROM VES (MONITOR/
SHIFT MODULE) - (COLUMN NAG1) . . . . . . . 168 DVD MEDIA SYSTEM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
*NO RESPONSE FROM FCM (FRONT *NO RESPONSE FROM WCM (WIRELESS
CONTROL MODULE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 CONTROL MODULE) (SENTRY KEY
*NO RESPONSE FROM HFM (HANDS FREE REMOTE ENTRY MODULE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
MODULE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
*NO RESPONSE FROM HIDT (HEADLAMP
LEVELING MODULE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
LX ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8E - 3
ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS


When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Battery voltage less than 9 volts for approximately 5 to 6 seconds.
Possible Causes
RESISTANCE IN THE BATTERY POSITIVE CIRCUIT

RESISTANCE IN THE GENERATOR CASE GROUND
GENERATOR OPERATION
(K20) GENERATOR FIELD CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN
(K20) GENERATOR FIELD CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR ANY POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULES DTCS
NOTE: Make sure the Battery is in good condition. Using the Midtronics Battery Tester, test the Battery
before continuing.
NOTE: Inspect the vehicle for after market accessories that may exceed the Generator System output.
NOTE: Make sure the generator drive belt is in good operating condition.
NOTE: Inspect the fuses in the IPM. If an open fuse is found, use the wire diagram/schematic as a guide,
inspect the wiring and connectors for damage.
With the scan tool, read active PCM DTCs.
Does the scan tool display any active PCM DTCs?
Yes >> (Refer to 9 - ENGINE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the diagnostic test procedure.
No >> Check the above conditions that can cause a low voltage condition. Repair as necessary.

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Battery voltage greater than 16 volts for approximately 5 to 6 seconds.
Possible Causes
(K20) GENERATOR FIELD CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE

GENERATOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR ANY POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULES DTCS

NOTE: Make sure the Battery is in good condition. Using the Midtronics Battery Tester, test the Battery
before continuing.
NOTE: Inspect the vehicle for after market accessories that may exceed the Generator System output.
NOTE: Make sure the generator drive belt is in good operating condition.
NOTE: Inspect the fuses in the IPM. If an open fuse is found, use the wire diagram/schematic as a guide,
inspect the wiring and connectors for damage.
With the scan tool, read active PCM DTCs.
Does the scan tool display any active PCM DTCs?
Yes >> (Refer to 9 - ENGINE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the diagnostic test procedure.
No >> Check the above conditions that can cause a high voltage condition. Repair as necessary.
B2112-5 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Front Control Module detects the (F891) 5 volt supply circuit voltage below 4 volts.
Possible Causes
(F891) 5 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

A/C PRESSURE TRANSDUCER
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC

With the scan tool, read the active DTCs.
Cycle the ignition switch from off to on, leaving the ignition on for a minimum of 90 seconds.
Does the scan tool display this DTC as active?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> If the DTC is stored, check for an intermittent condition. Visually inspect the related wiring harness con-
nectors. Look for broken, bent, pushed out, or corroded terminals.
2. A/C PRESSURE TRANSDUCER

Disconnect the A/C Pressure Transducer harness connector.
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Replace the A/C Pressure Transducer in accordance with the service information.
3. (F891) 5 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

Disconnect the FCM C1 harness connector.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (F891) 5 Volt Supply
circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (F891) 5 Volt Supply circuit for a short to
ground.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1. (Refer to
BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1).
No >> Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage or shorted
circuits. If ok, replace and program the Front Control Mod-
B2113-5 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Front Control Module detects the (F891) 5 volt supply circuit voltage above 5.0 volts.
Possible Causes
(F891) 5 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE

A/C PRESSURE TRANSDUCER
Diagnostic Test

Yes >> Go To 2
2. A/C PRESSURE TRANSDUCER

Disconnect the A/C Pressure Transducer harness connector.
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Replace the A/C Pressure Transducer in accordance with the service information.
3. (F891) 5 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage of the (F891) 5 Volt Supply circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (F891) 5 Volt Supply circuit for a short to volt-
age.
B2206-CURRENT VIN MISSING/MISMATCH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Front Control Module will receive and monitor the VIN message from the PCM and record the VIN if
different from the last VIN.
Possible Causes
INCORRECT VIN PROGRAMMED IN PCM
Diagnostic Test

Cycle the ignition switch from off to on at least 5 times, leaving the ignition on for a minimum of 90 seconds per
cycle.
Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECK VIN IN PCM

With the scan tool compare the VIN that is programmed into the PCM to the VIN on the vehicle.
Does the VIN programmed into the PCM match the vehicles VIN?
Yes >> Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage or shorted circuits. If ok, replace and program the Front
No >> Program the correct VIN in the PCM and retest.
B2215-FRONT CONTROL MODULE INTERNAL

When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
The Front Control Module detects an internal fault.
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1. REPLACE THE FRONT CONTROL MODULE IF DTC IS ACTIVE

With the scan tool, read the active FCM DTCs.
Yes >> Replace and program the Front Control Module in accordance with the service information.
B222C-VEHICLE CONFIGURATION NOT PROGRAMMED

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Front Control Module is not configured correctly to the vehicle.
Possible Causes
FRONT CONTROL MODULE NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY
Diagnostic Test

cycle.
Yes >> Go To 2
2. CONFIGURE THE FCM TO THE VEHICLE

With the scan tool enter program network configuration and program the FCM to the vehicle configuration.
With the scan tool, erase FCM DTCs.
cycle.
Yes >> Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage or shorted circuits. If ok, replace and program the Front
U0001-CAN C BUS

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes

ELECTRONIC SHIFT MODULE (COLUMN NAG1)
ENGINE CONTROL MODULE (DIESEL)
Diagnostic Test

Does the scan tool display U0001CAN C BUS as active?
Yes >> Go To 2

Disconnect the Antilock Brake Module harness connector.
Yes >> Go To 3
Perform ABS VERIFICATION TEST VER 1.

Yes, with Floor Shift
Go To 4
Yes, with Column Shift
Go To 5
4. SHIFTER LEVER ASSEMBLY (NAG1 ONLY) INTERNAL SHORT

Yes >> Go To 6
5. ELECTRONIC SHIFT MODULE (COLUMN NAG1) INTERNAL SHORT

Disconnect the Electronic Shift Module harness connector.
Yes >> Go To 6
No >> Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage or shorted circuits. If ok, replace and program the Elec-
tronic Shift Module in accordance with the service information.

Yes >> Go To 7
7. ENGINE CONTROL MODULE (DIESEL) INTERNAL SHORT

Disconnect the Engine Control Module C2 harness connector.
Yes >> Go To 8
No >> Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage or shorted circuits. If ok, replace and program the Engine
Perform the ECM VERIFICATION TEST.

Remove the Steering Control Module.
Yes >> Go To 9

Measure the voltage between the (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit and
ground.
Yes >> Repair the (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit for a short to volt-
age.
No >> Go To 10

Measure the voltage between the (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit and
ground.
Yes >> Repair the (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit for a short to volt-
age.
No >> Go To 11

Measure the resistance between ground and the (D65) CAN C Bus (+)
circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit for a short to
ground.
No >> Go To 12

Measure the resistance between ground and the (D64) CAN C Bus (-)
circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit for a short to
ground.
No >> Go To 13
Measure the resistance between the (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit and
the (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit for a short to the
(D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit.
U0019-CAN B BUS

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The FCM detects an open, a short high, a short low or a short together in either of the CAN B Bus circuits.
Possible Causes

(D54) CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT OPEN
(D55) CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
(D54) CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
(D55) CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(D54) CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(D55) CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (D54) CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT
ANY CAN B BUS MODULE
Diagnostic Test

Yes >> Go To 2
2. MEASURE VOLTAGE AT FCM

Gain access to the Front Control Module C1 harness connector, but do not disconnect.
Backprobe and measure the voltage on both the (D55) CAN B Bus (+) and the (D54) CAN B (-) circuits.
Does the voltage read approximately 4.65 - 4.98 volts on the (D54) CAN B Bus (-) and 0.39 - 0.46 volts
on the (D55) CAN B (+) circuits?
Yes >> Go To 3
No - Voltage Between 0.3 - 0.7 Volts on Both Circuits
Go To 9
No - Voltage Reads 0 Volts on Either Circuit
Go To 7
No - Voltage Above 10 Volts on Either Circuit
Go To 5
3. (D55) CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT OPEN

With the scan tool select ECU View.
Using a fused jumper wire, connect one end to ground and with the
other end backprobe the (D54) CAN B Bus (-) circuit at the FCM C1
harness connector.
NOTE: A red X will appear next to modules that can no longer
communicate on the Bus.
Did a red X appear next to any modules on the scan tool?
Yes >> Using the Wiring Diagrams to further isolate the open in the
circuit, repair the (D55) CAN B Bus (+) circuit for an open.
Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1. (Refer
to BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1).
No >> Go To 4
4. (D54) CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT OPEN

With the scan tool select ECU View.
Using a fused jumper wire, connect one end to ground and with the
other end backprobe the (D55) CAN B Bus (+) circuit at the FCM C1
harness connector.
NOTE: A red X will appear next to modules that can no longer
communicate on the Bus.
Did a red X appear next to any modules on the scan tool?
Yes >> Using the Wiring Diagrams to further isolate the open in the
circuit, repair the (D54) CAN B Bus (-) circuit for an open.
No >> Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage. If ok, replace
and program the Front Control Module in accordance with
the service information. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION
TEST VER 1. (Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST
VER 1).
5. (D55) CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage between the (D55) CAN B Bus (+) circuit and
ground.
Yes >> Disconnect each CAN B Bus module one at a time while
observing the voltage to determine if the short is caused by
an internal short within a module. Replace the module, in
accordance with the service information, that when discon-
nected eliminates the short to voltage. If the short condition
is still present with all CAN B Bus modules disconnected
use the Wiring Diagrams to help isolate and repair the
(D55) CAN B Bus (+) circuit for a short to voltage.
Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1. (Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1).
No >> Go To 6
6. (D54) CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage between the (D54) CAN B Bus (-) circuit and
ground.
observing the voltage to determine if the short is caused by
an internal short within a module. Replace the module, in
accordance with the service information, that when discon-
nected eliminates the short to voltage. If the short condition
is still present with all CAN B Bus modules disconnected
use the Wiring Diagrams to help isolate and repair the
(D54) CAN B Bus (-) circuit for a short to voltage.
No >> Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage. If ok,
replace and program the Front Control Module in accor-
dance with the service information. Perform the BODY
VERIFICATION TEST VER 1. (Refer to BODY VERIFICA-
TION TEST VER 1).
7. (D55) CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (D55) CAN B Bus (+)
circuit.
Yes >> Go To 8
No >> Disconnect each CAN B Bus module one at a time while
observing the resistance to determine if the short is caused
by an internal short within a module. Replace the module,
in accordance with the service information, that when dis-
connected eliminates the short to ground. If the short con-
dition is still present with all CAN B Bus modules
disconnected use the Wiring Diagrams to help isolate and
repair the (D55) CAN B Bus (+) circuit for a short to
ground.
8. (D54) CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (D54) CAN B Bus (-)
circuit.
Yes >> Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage. If ok,
replace and program the Front Control Module in accor-
dance with the service information. Perform the BODY
VERIFICATION TEST VER 1. (Refer to BODY VERIFICA-
TION TEST VER 1).
No >> Disconnect each CAN B Bus module one at a time while observing the resistance to determine if the
short is caused by an internal short within a module. Replace the module, in accordance with the ser-
vice information, that when disconnected eliminates the short to ground. If the short condition is still
present with all CAN B Bus modules disconnected use the Wiring Diagrams to help isolate and repair
the (D54) CAN B Bus (-) circuit for a short to ground.
Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1. (Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1).
9. (D55) CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (D54) CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (D55) CAN B Bus (+) circuit and
(D54) CAN B Bus (-) circuit.
observing the resistance to determine if the short is caused
by an internal short within a module. Replace the module,
in accordance with the service information, that when dis-
connected eliminates the short between the two circuits. If
the short condition is still present with all CAN B Bus mod-
ules disconnected use the Wiring Diagrams to help isolate
and repair the (D55) CAN B Bus (+) circuit for a short to
the (D54) CAN B Bus (-) circuit.
No >> Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage. If ok, replace and program the Front Control Module in
accordance with the service information. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1. (Refer to
U0100-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ECM/PCM

When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
Bus messages not received from the ECM/PCM for approximately 500ms.
Possible Causes
CAN B OR CAN C BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED

ECM/PCM
ECM/PCM POWER AND GROUND
Diagnostic Test

Is this DTC active?
Yes >> Go To 2

tion related DTCs.
No >> Go To 3
3. VERIFY THAT THE ECM/PCM IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

Verify that the ECM/PCM is active on the bus.
Is the ECM/PCM active on the bus?
Yes >> Go To 4

Is there more than one module with active DTCs Logged Against the ECM/PCM?
Yes >> Replace/update the ECM/PCM in accordance with the service information.
No >> Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the service information.
U0101-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH TCM

When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
Bus messages not received from the TCM for approximately 500ms.
Possible Causes

TCM
TCM POWER AND GROUND
Diagnostic Test

Is this DTC active?
Yes >> Go To 2

tion related DTCs.
No >> Go To 3
3. VERIFY THAT THE TCM IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

Verify that the TCM is active on the bus.
Is the TCM active on the bus?
Yes >> Go To 4

Is there more than one module with active DTCs Logged Against the TCM?
Yes >> Replace/update the TCM in accordance with the service information.
U0103-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ELECTRIC GEAR SHIFT MODULE

When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
Bus messages not received from the Electric Gear Shift Module (shifter lever assembly) for approximately
500ms.
Possible Causes

SHIFTER LEVER ASSEMBLY (NAG1 ONLY) POWER AND GROUND
ELECTRONIC SHIFT MODULE (COLUMN NAG1) POWER AND GROUND
Diagnostic Test

Is this DTC active?
Yes >> Go To 2

tion related DTCs.
No >> Go To 3
3. VERIFY THAT THE SHIFTER LEVER ASSEMBLY (NAG 1 ONLY) OR IF APPLICABLE THE ELECTRONIC
SHIFT MODULE (COLUMN NAG 1) IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS
Verify that the Shifter Lever Assembly (NAG 1 Only) or if applicable the Electronic Shift Module (Column NAG 1) is
active on the bus.
Is the Shifter Lever Assembly (NAG 1 Only) or if applicable the Electronic Shift Module (Column NAG
1) active on the bus?
Yes >> Go To 4

Is there more than one module with active DTCs Logged Against the Shifter Lever Assembly (NAG 1
Only) or if applicable the Electronic Shift Module (Column NAG 1)?
Yes >> Replace/update the Shifter Lever Assembly (NAG 1 Only) or if applicable the Electronic Shift Module
(Column NAG 1) in accordance with the service information.
U0121-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ANTI-LOCK BRAKE MODULE

When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
Bus messages not received from the Antilock Brake Module for approximately 500ms.
Possible Causes

ANTILOCK BRAKE MODULE POWER AND GROUND
Diagnostic Test

Is this DTC active?
Yes >> Go To 2

tion related DTCs.
No >> Go To 3
3. VERIFY THAT THE ABS IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

Verify that the ABS is active on the bus.
Is the ABS active on the bus?
Yes >> Go To 4

Is there more than one module with active DTCs Logged Against the ABS?
Yes >> Replace/update the Antilock Brake Module in accordance with the service information.

When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
Bus messages not received from the Front Control Module for approximately 2 to 5 seconds.
Possible Causes
CAN B BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED

FRONT CONTROL MODULES POWER AND GROUND
Diagnostic Test

Is this DTC active?
Yes >> Go To 2

tion related DTCs.
No >> Go To 3

Yes >> Go To 4

Yes >> Replace/update the Front Control Module in accordance with the service information.
U0143-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH MULTI-PURPOSE MODULE (POLICE AND

TAXI INTERFACE MODULE) (PTIM)

When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
Bus messages not received from the MPM (PTIM) for approximately 2 to 5 seconds.
Possible Causes

MULTI-PURPOSE MODULE (PTIM)
MULTI-PURPOSE MODULE (PTIM) POWER AND GROUND
Diagnostic Test

Is this DTC active?
Yes >> Go To 2

With the scan tool, read active DTCs from all modules.
tion related DTCs.
No >> Go To 3
3. VERIFY THAT THE MPM (PTIM) IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

Verify that the MPM (PTIM) is active on the bus.
Is the MPM (PTIM) active on the bus?
Yes >> Go To 4

Is there more than one module with active DTCs Logged Against the MPM (PTIM)?
Yes >> Replace/update the Multi-Purpose Module (PTIM) in accordance with the service information.
U0151LOST COMMUNICATION WITH OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER

(ORC)

When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
Bus messages not received from the Occupant Restraint Controller for approximately 2 to 5 seconds.
Possible Causes

OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER POWER AND GROUND
Diagnostic Test

Is this DTC active?
Yes >> Go To 2

tion related DTCs.
No >> Go To 3
3. VERIFY THAT THE ORC IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

Verify that the ORC is active on the bus.
Is the ORC active on the bus?
Yes >> Go To 4

Is there more than one module with active DTCs Logged Against the ORC?
Yes >> Replace/update the Occupant Restraint Controller in accordance with the service information.
Perform AIRBAG VERIFICATION TEST VER 1.
U0154LOST COMMUNICATION WITH OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE

When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
Bus messages not received from the Occupant Classification Module for approximately 2 to 5 seconds.
Possible Causes

OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE
OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE POWER AND GROUND
Diagnostic Test

Is this DTC active?
Yes >> Go To 2

tion related DTCs.
No >> Go To 3
3. VERIFY THAT THE OCM IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

Verify that the OCM is active on the bus.
Is the OCM active on the bus?
Yes >> Go To 4

Is there more than one module with active DTCs Logged Against the OCM?
Yes >> Replace/update the Occupant Classification Module in accordance with the service information.
Perform AIRBAG VERIFICATION TEST VER 1.

When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
Bus messages not received from the Cluster/CCN for approximately 2 to 5 seconds.
Possible Causes

CLUSTER/CCN
CLUSTER/CCN POWER AND GROUND
MODULE THAT SET THE DTC
Diagnostic Test

Is this DTC active?
Yes >> Go To 2

tion related DTCs.
No >> Go To 3
3. VERIFY THAT THE CCN IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

Verify that the CCN is active on the bus.
Is the CCN active on the bus?
Yes >> Go To 4

Is there more than one module with active DTCs Logged Against the CCN?
Yes >> Replace/update the Cluster (CCN) in accordance with the service information.
U0156LOST COMMUNICATION WITH EOM

When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
Bus messages not received from the Electronic Overhead Module (EOM) for approximately 2 to 5 seconds.
Possible Causes

ELECTRONIC OVERHEAD MODULE POWER OR GROUND
ELECTRONIC OVERHEAD MODULE
Diagnostic Test

Is this DTC active?
Yes >> Go To 2

tion related DTCs.
No >> Go To 3
3. VERIFY THAT THE EOM IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

Verify that the EOM is active on the bus.
Is the EOM active on the bus?
Yes >> Go To 4

Is there more than one module with active DTCs Logged Against the EOM?
Yes >> Replace/update the Electronic Overhead Module (EOM) in accordance with the service information.
U0159-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH PARK ASSIST CONTROL MODULE

When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
Bus messages not received from the Park Assist Module (PTS) for approximately 2 to 5 seconds.
Possible Causes

PARK ASSIST MODULE
PARK ASSIST MODULE POWER OR GROUND
Diagnostic Test

Is this DTC active?
Yes >> Go To 2

tion related DTCs.
No >> Go To 3
3. VERIFY THAT THE PTS IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

Verify that the PTS is active on the bus.
Is the PTS active on the bus?
Yes >> Go To 4

Is there more than one module with active DTCs Logged Against the PTS?
Yes >> Replace/update the Park Assist Module (PTS) in accordance with the service information.

When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
Bus messages not received from the A/C Heater Control (HVAC) for approximately 2 to 5 seconds.
Possible Causes

A/C HEATER CONTROL
A/C HEATER CONTROL POWER AND GROUND
Diagnostic Test

Is this DTC active?
Yes >> Go To 2

tion related DTCs.
No >> Go To 3
3. VERIFY THAT THE HVAC IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

Verify that the HVAC is active on the bus.
Is the HVAC active on the bus?
Yes >> Go To 4

Is there more than one module with active DTCs Logged Against the HVAC?
Yes >> Replace/update the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the service information.
No >> Replace/update the module that set the DTC in accordance with the service information

MODULE

When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
Bus messages not received from the Intrusion Transceiver Control Module (ITM) for approximately 2 to 5 sec-
onds.
Possible Causes

INTRUSION TRANSCEIVER CONTROL MODULE POWER AND GROUND
INTRUSION TRANSCEIVER CONTROL MODULE
Diagnostic Test

Is this DTC active?
Yes >> Go To 2

tion related DTCs.
Yes >> Diagnose and repair the DTC. Refer to the Index for a complete list of the symptoms.
No >> Go To 3
3. VERIFY THAT THE ITM IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

Verify that the ITM is active on the bus.
Is the ITM active on the bus?
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Refer to the No Response test procedure. Refer to the table of contents in this section.

Is there more than one module with active DTCs Logged Against the ITM?
Yes >> Replace/update the Intrusion Transceiver Control Module in accordance with the service information.
Perform the appropriate VERIFICATION TEST.

(SKREEM/WCM)

When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
Bus messages not received from the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (WCM) for approximately 2 to 5 sec-
onds.
Possible Causes

SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY MODULE
SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY MODULE POWER AND GROUND
Diagnostic Test

Is this DTC active?
Yes >> Go To 2

tion related DTCs.
No >> Go To 3
3. VERIFY THAT THE WCM IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

Verify that the WCM is active on the bus.
Is the WCM active on the bus?
Yes >> Go To 4

Is there more than one module with active DTCs Logged Against the WCM?
Yes >> Replace/update the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module in accordance with the service information.

When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
Bus messages not received from the Sunroof Control Module (SUNR) for approximately 2 to 5 seconds.
Possible Causes

SUNROOF CONTROL MODULE
SUNROOF CONTROL MODULE POWER AND GROUND
Diagnostic Test

Is this DTC active?
Yes >> Go To 2

tion related DTCs.
No >> Go To 3
3. VERIFY THAT THE SUNR IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

Verify that the SUNR is active on the bus.
Is the SUNR active on the bus?
Yes >> Go To 4

Is there more than one module with active DTCs Logged Against the SUNR?
Yes >> Replace/update the Sunroof Control Module in accordance with the service information.
U0181-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HEADLAMP LEVELING TRANSLATOR

When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
Bus messages not received from the Headlamp Leveling Module for approximately 2 to 5 seconds.
Possible Causes

HEADLAMP LEVELING MODULE
HEADLAMP LEVELING MODULE POWER AND GROUND
Diagnostic Test

Is this DTC active?
Yes >> Go To 2

tion related DTCs.
No >> Go To 3
3. VERIFY THAT THE HIDT IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

Verify that the HIDT is active on the bus.
Is the HIDT active on the bus?
Yes >> Go To 4

Is there more than one module with active DTCs Logged Against the HIDT?
Yes >> Replace/update the Headlamp Leveling Module in accordance with the service information.

When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
Bus messages not received from the Radio for approximately 2 to 5 seconds.
Possible Causes

RADIO
RADIO POWER AND GROUND
Diagnostic Test

Is this DTC active?
Yes >> Go To 2

tion related DTCs.
No >> Go To 3
3. VERIFY THAT THE RADIO IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

Verify that the Radio is active on the bus.
Is the Radio active on the bus?
Yes >> Go To 4

Is there more than one module with active DTCs Logged Against the Radio?
Yes >> Replace/update the Radio in accordance with the service information.

When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
Bus messages not received from the Amplifier for approximately 2 to 5 seconds.
Possible Causes

AMPLIFIER
AMPLIFIER POWER AND GROUND
Diagnostic Test

Is this DTC active?
Yes >> Go To 2

tion related DTCs.
No >> Go To 3
3. VERIFY THAT THE AMPLIFIER IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

Verify that the Amplifier is active on the bus.
Is the Amplifier active on the bus?
Yes >> Go To 4

Is there more than one module with active DTCs Logged Against the Amplifier?
Yes >> Replace/update the Amplifier in accordance with the service information.
U0193-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH TRAFFIC INFORMATION RECEIVER MODULE

When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
Bus messages not received from the Traffic Information Receiver Module (TIRM) for approximately 2 to 5 sec-
onds.
Possible Causes
CAN B BUS CIRCUITS OPEN

(A300) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED
(Z909) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
TRAFFIC INFORMATION RECEIVER MODULE (TIRM)
Diagnostic Test

Is this DTC active?
Yes >> Go To 2

tion related DTCs.
Yes >> Diagnose and repair the DTC. Refer to the Index for a complete list of the symptoms.
No >> Go To 3
3. VERIFY THAT THE TIRM IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

NOTE: A red X will be next to the module that is not communicating, indicating that the module is not active
on the Bus network. A green check indicates that the module is active on the Bus network.
Verify that the TIRM is active on the bus.
Is the TIRM active on the bus?
Yes >> Replace and program the Front Control Module in accordance with the service information.
No >> Go To 4
4. (A300) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT OPEN

Disconnect the Traffic Information Receiver Module harness connector.
Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check the (A300) Fused
B(+) circuit.
Yes >> Go To 5
No >> Repair the (A300) Fused B(+) circuit for an open or short.
5. (Z909) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN

Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, check the (Z909)
ground circuit.
Yes >> Go To 6
No >> Repair the (Z909) ground circuit for an open.
6. (D55) AND (D54) CAN B BUS CIRCUITS OPEN

NOTE: One open circuit will not cause this condition.
ground.
ground.
Is there any voltage present on either circuit?
Yes >> Replace the Traffic Information Receiver Module in accor-
No >> Repair the (D55) and (D54) CAN B Bus circuits for an open.
Inspect the connector for damage.

When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
Bus messages not received from the Satellite Receiver (SDAR) for approximately 2 to 5 seconds.
Possible Causes

SATELLITE RECEIVER
SATELLITE RECEIVER POWER AND GROUND
Diagnostic Test

Is this DTC active?
Yes >> Go To 2

tion related DTCs.
No >> Go To 3
3. VERIFY THAT THE SATELLITE RECEIVER IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

Verify that the SDARS is active on the bus.
Is the SDARS active on the bus?
Yes >> Go To 4

Is there more than one module with active DTCs Logged Against the SDARS?
Yes >> Replace/update the Satellite Receiver in accordance with the service information.

MODULE

When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
Bus messages not received from the vehicle entertainment system (DVD player) for approximately 2 to 5 sec-
onds.
Possible Causes

MONITOR/DVD MEDIA SYSTEM
MONITOR/DVD MEDIA SYSTEM POWER AND GROUND
Diagnostic Test

Is this DTC active?
Yes >> Go To 2

tion related DTCs.
No >> Go To 3
3. VERIFY THAT THE VES IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

Verify that the VES is active on the bus.
Is the VES active on the bus?
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Refer to the No Response test procedure. Refer to the table of contents in this section.

Is there more than one module with active DTCs Logged Against the VES?
Yes >> Replace/update the Monitor/DVD Media System in accordance with the service information.

When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
Bus messages not received from the HFM for approximately 2 to 5 seconds.
Possible Causes

HANDS FREE MODULE
HANDS FREE MODULE POWER AND GROUND
Diagnostic Test

Is this DTC active?
Yes >> Go To 2

tion related DTCs.
No >> Go To 3
3. VERIFY THAT THE HFM IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

Verify that the HFM is active on the bus.
Is the HFM active on the bus?
Yes >> Go To 4

Is there more than one module with active DTCs Logged Against the HFM?
Yes >> Replace/update the Hands Free Module in accordance with the service information.

When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
Bus messages not received from the DDM for approximately 2 to 5 seconds.
Possible Causes

DRIVER DOOR MODULE
DRIVER DOOR MODULE POWER AND GROUND
MODULE THAT SET THE DTC
Diagnostic Test

Is this DTC active?
Yes >> Go To 2

tion related DTCs.
No >> Go To 3
3. VERIFY THAT THE DDM IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

Verify that the DDM is active on the bus.
Is the DDM active on the bus?
Yes >> Go To 4

Is there more than one module with active DTCs Logged Against the DDM?
Yes >> Replace/update the Driver Door Module in accordance with the service information.

When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
Bus messages not received from the PDM for approximately 2 to 5 seconds.
Possible Causes

PASSENGER DOOR MODULE
PASSENGER DOOR MODULE POWER AND GROUND
Diagnostic Test

Is this DTC active?
Yes >> Go To 2

tion related DTCs.
No >> Go To 3
3. VERIFY THAT THE PDM IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

Verify that the PDM is active on the bus.
Is the PDM active on the bus?
Yes >> Go To 4

Is there more than one module with active DTCs Logged Against the PDM?
Yes >> Replace/update the Passenger Door Module in accordance with the service information.

When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
Bus messages not received from the HSM for approximately 2 to 5 seconds.
Possible Causes

HEATED SEAT MODULE
HEATED SEAT MODULE POWER AND GROUND
Diagnostic Test

Is this DTC active?
Yes >> Go To 2

tion related DTCs.
No >> Go To 3
3. VERIFY THAT THE HSM IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

Verify that the HSM is active on the bus.
Is the HSM active on the bus?
Yes >> Go To 4

Is there more than one module with active DTCs Logged Against the HSM?
Yes >> Replace/update the Heated Seat Module in accordance with the service information.

When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
Bus messages not received from the MSMD for approximately 2 to 5 seconds.
Possible Causes

MEMORY SEAT MODULE
MEMORY SEAT MODULE POWER AND GROUND
Diagnostic Test

Is this DTC active?
Yes >> Go To 2

tion related DTCs.
No >> Go To 3
3. VERIFY THAT THE MSMD IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

Verify that the MSMD is active on the bus.
Is the MSMD active on the bus?
Yes >> Go To 4

Is there more than one module with active DTCs Logged Against the MSMD?
Yes >> Replace/update the Memory Seat Module in accordance with the service information.
U0212-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH SCCM - CAN B

When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
Bus messages not received from the SCM (CAN B) for approximately 2 to 5 seconds.
Possible Causes

STEERING CONTROL MODULE POWER AND GROUND
Diagnostic Test

Is this DTC active?
Yes >> Go To 2

tion related DTCs.
No >> Go To 3
3. VERIFY THAT THE SCM IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

Verify that the SCM is active on the bus.
Is the SCM active on the bus?
Yes >> Go To 4

Is there more than one module with active DTCs Logged Against the SCM?
Yes >> Replace/update the Steering Control Module in accordance with the service information.

When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
Bus messages not received from the rain sensor (LRSM) for approximately 2 to 5 seconds.
Possible Causes

RAIN SENSOR
RAIN SENSOR POWER AND GROUND
Diagnostic Test

Is this DTC active?
Yes >> Go To 2

tion related DTCs.
No >> Go To 3
3. VERIFY THAT THE LRSM IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

Verify that the LRSM is active on the bus.
Is the LRSM active on the bus?
Yes >> Go To 4

Is there more than one module with active DTCs Logged Against the LRSM?
Yes >> Replace/update the Rain Sensor in accordance with the service information.
U1105-CAN B SIGNAL MISSING

When Monitored:
Continuously
Set Condition:
When the CAN B Bus messages are not received within 2 seconds.
Possible Causes
OTHER CAN B BUS DTCs SET IN FRONT CONTROL MODULE

Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTCS

cycle.
Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECK FRONT CONTROL MODULE FOR U0019 DTC

With the scan tool, read Front Control Module active DTCs
Does the scan tool display U0019 CAN B BUS ACTIVE?
Yes >> Refer to the table of contents in this section and perform the U0019 diagnostic procedure.
No >> Go To 3

Disconnect the Front Control Module C1 connector.
Measure the voltage of the (D55) CAN B Bus (+) circuit.
Is any voltage present on this circuit?
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Repair the (D55) CAN B Bus (+) circuit for an open.
4. (D54) CAN B BUS () CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the voltage of the (D54) CAN B Bus (-) circuit.
Is any voltage present on this circuit?
Yes >> Replace the Front Control Module in accordance with the
No >> Repair the (D54) CAN B Bus () circuit for an open.
U1106-CAN C SIGNAL MISSING

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes

ENGINE CONTROL MODULE (DIESEL)
Diagnostic Test

Does the scan tool display U1106CAN C SIGNAL MISSING as active?
Yes >> Go To 2

Yes >> Go To 3
Perform ABS VERIFICATION TEST VER 1.

Yes >> Go To 4
4. SHIFTER LEVER ASSEMBLY (NAG1 ONLY) OR ELECTRONIC SHIFT MODULE (COLUMN NAG1)
INTERNAL SHORT
Disconnect the Shifter Lever Assembly or Electronic Shift Module harness connector.
Yes >> Go To 5

Yes >> Go To 7
6. ENGINE CONTROL MODULE (DIESEL) INTERNAL SHORT

Disconnect the Engine Control Module C2 harness connector.
Yes >> Go To 7
No >> Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage or shorted circuits. If ok, replace and program the Engine

Disconnect the Steering Control Module harness connector.
Yes >> Go To 8

Measure the voltage between the (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit and
ground.
Yes >> Repair the (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit for a short to volt-
age.
No >> Go To 9

Measure the voltage between the (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit and
ground.
Yes >> Repair the (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit for a short to volt-
age.
No >> Go To 10

Measure the resistance between ground and the (D65) CAN C Bus (+)
circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit for a short to
ground.
No >> Go To 11

Measure the resistance between ground and the (D64) CAN C Bus (-)
circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit for a short to
ground.
No >> Go To 12
Measure the resistance between the (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit and
the (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit for a short to the
(D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit.
U1107-ECU IN SINGLE-WIRE MODE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The FCM detects an open, a short high, a short low or a short together in either of the CAN B Bus circuits.
Possible Causes
(D55) CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

(D54) CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(D55) CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
(D54) CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
(D55) CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (D54) CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT
ANY CAN B BUS MODULE
Diagnostic Test

Yes >> Go To 2
2. ANY CAN B BUS MODULE INTERNAL FAULT

With the scan tool, monitor the active FCM DTCs.
While monitoring the scan tool, disconnect each CAN B Bus module one at a time.
NOTE: When performing the above step, turn the ignition off (wait one minute) before disconnecting any
module. When the module is disconnected turn the ignition on.
NOTE: This is to determine if the fault is internal within a module.
Check for this DTC to become active after disconnecting each CAN B Bus module the vehicle is equipped with.
NOTE: If the DTC becomes stored when a particular CAN B Bus module is disconnected, that module is
causing the DTC to set.
With all the CAN B Bus modules disconnected did the FCM still set this DTC as active?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Replace the module that when disconnected the DTC became stored.
3. (D55) CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE

NOTE: Ensure each CAN B Bus module is disconnected at this
time.
ground.
Yes >> Repair the (D55) CAN B Bus (+) circuit for a short to volt-
age.
No >> Go To 4
4. (D54) CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE

time.
ground.
Yes >> Repair the (D54) CAN B Bus (-) circuit for a short to volt-
age.
No >> Go To 5
5. (D55) CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

time.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (D55) CAN B Bus (+)
circuit.
Yes >> Go To 6
No >> Repair the (D55) CAN B Bus (+) circuit for a short to
ground.
6. (D54) CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

time.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (D54) CAN B Bus (-)
circuit.
Yes >> Go To 7
No >> Repair the (D54) CAN B Bus (-) circuit for a short to
ground.
7. (D55) CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (D54) CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (D55) CAN B Bus (+) circuit and
time.
Yes >> Repair the (D55) CAN B Bus (+) circuit for a short to the
No >> Go To 8

Measure the resistance of the (D55) CAN B Bus (+) circuit between the
FCM connector and the Cluster connector.
Yes >> Repair the (D55) CAN B Bus (+) circuit for an open or high
resistance.
No >> Go To 9

Measure the resistance of the (D54) CAN B Bus (-) circuit between the
FCM connector and the Cluster connector.
Yes >> Repair the (D54) CAN B Bus (-) circuit for an open or high
resistance.
No >> Replace and program the Front Control Module in accor-
U1108-ADDITIONAL CAN B ECU DETECTED

When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
The Front Control Module detects an additional CAN B module and requires a re-configuration.
Possible Causes
ADDITIONAL MODULE ADDED/REMOVED FROM THE CAN B BUS NETWORK
Diagnostic Test
1. RECONFIGURE THE FRONT CONTROL MODULE

With the scan tool, select network view and press the gateway button. This will list the CAN modules on the vehicle.
Read and record the listed modules.
With the scan tool, select FCM, miscellaneous functions then add/remove ECUs.
With the scan tool, add or remove the module that was not configured in the FCM.
Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times and read the active FCM DTCs.
Yes >> Retest system and attempt to reconfigure the FCM.
U110A-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH SCCM - CAN C

When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
Bus messages not received from the SCM (CAN C) for approximately 200ms.
Possible Causes

STEERING CONTROL MODULE POWER AND GROUND
Diagnostic Test

Is this DTC active?
Yes >> Go To 2

tion related DTCs.
No >> Go To 3
3. VERIFY THAT THE SCM IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

Verify that the SCM is active on the bus.
Is the SCM active on the bus?
Yes >> Go To 4

Is there more than one module with active DTCs Logged Against the SCM?
Yes >> Replace/update the Steering Control Module in accordance with the service information.
*STORED LOST COMMUNICATION DTCS

When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
Bus messages not received for approximately 2 to 5 seconds.
Possible Causes

POWER OR GROUND FROM THE REPORTING MODULE
PREVIOUS SERVICE PERFORMED WITHIN THE LAST 100 KEY CYCLES (FUSE/RELAYS REMOVED, WIRING
SERVICE, BATTERY DISCONNECT)
LOW BATTERY/JUMP START CONDITION
IOD FUSE WAS REMOVED DURING SHIPPING
CHECK FOR RELATED TSBS
Diagnostic Test
1. VERIFY DTC IS STORED

NOTE: Stored faults may indicate a customer perceived intermittent condition.
With the scan tool, read stored DTCs.
Is this DTC stored?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Diagnose the active DTC. Refer to the table of contents for a list of the symptoms.
2. CHECK THE ENVIRONMENTAL DATA

With the scan tool, read the loss of communication environmental data.
Does the loss of communication environmental odometer data match up to any of the previous service
procedures listed in the possible causes or are there any stored CAN B or C hardware electrical, bat-
tery, ignition voltage, VIN missing/mismatch, FCM configuration DTCs present with match environmental
data?
Yes >> These DTCs may have been the result of other service procedures performed. Clear DTCs.
No >> Go To 3
3. VERIFY INTERMITTENT LOST COMMUNICATION DTC-WIRING CONCERNS

Is there more than one ECU with stored DTCs Logged Against the module and one or more lost
communication DTCs stored in the offending module?
Yes >> Verify if the vehicle was recently in for this type of service. Otherwise, visually inspect the related wiring
harness for chafed, pierced, pinched, and partially broken wires and the wiring harness connectors for
broken, bent, pushed out, and corroded terminals. Repair as necessary.
No >> Go To 4
4. VERIFY INTERMITTENT LOST COMMUNICATION DTC-OFFENDING MODULE

Is there more than one ECU with stored DTCs Logged Against the module and NO lost communica-
tion DTCs stored in the offending module?
Yes >> Check for TSB related to this offending module.
No >> Go To 5
5. VERIFY INTERMITTENT LOST COMMUNICATION DTC-REPORTING MODULE

Is there ONLY ONE ECU with stored DTCs Logged Against the module?
Yes >> Check for TSB related to the module that set this DTC.
No >> Verify if the vehicle was recently in for this type of service. Otherwise, visually inspect the related wiring
harness for chafed, pierced, pinched, and partially broken wires and the wiring harness connectors for
broken, bent, pushed out, and corroded terminals. Repair as necessary.
*CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (+) AND/OR CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (-) CIRCUITS HIGH

When Monitored:
When the scan tool queries the FCM.
Set Condition:
The scan tool has detected a shorted high condition on either or both CAN C Diagnostic circuits.
Possible Causes
(D72) CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE

(D71) CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK THE STATUS OF THE ERROR MESSAGE

NOTE: Ensure the vehicle being tested is a CAN BUS VEHICLE. If not, false error messages may be dis-
played.
NOTE: Ensure the scan tool is updated to the latest software.
With the scan tool, record the error message.
Disconnect the scan tool from the DLC.
Does the scan tool display this same error message?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The conditions that caused this error message to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring dia-
gram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
2. CAN C DIAGNOSTIC CIRCUITS SHORTED TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage of the CAN C Diagnostic circuits.
Is the voltage above 6.0 volts for either circuit?
Yes >> Repair the CAN C Diagnostic circuits for a short to voltage.
circuits. If ok, replace the Front Control Module in accor-
*CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (+) CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The scan tool has detected a shorted low condition on the (D72) CAN C Diagnostic (+) circuit.
Possible Causes
(D72) CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
Diagnostic Test

played.
Yes >> Go To 2
2. (D72) CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (D72) CAN C Diag-
nostic (+) circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (D72) CAN C Diagnostic (+) circuit for a short to
ground.
*CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (-) CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The scan tool has detected a shorted low condition on the (D71) CAN C Diagnostic (-) circuit.
Possible Causes
(D71) CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
Diagnostic Test

played.
Yes >> Go To 2
2. (D71) CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (D71) CAN C Diag-
nostic (-) circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (D71) CAN C Diagnostic (-) circuit for a short to
ground.
*CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (+) SHORTED TO CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (-)

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The scan tool has detected a shorted together condition on the CAN C Diagnostic circuits.
Possible Causes
(D72) CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (D71) CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (-) CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Test

played.
Yes >> Go To 2
2. (D72) CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (D71) CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (-) CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (D72) CAN C Diagnostic (+) circuit
and the (D71) CAN C Diagnostic (-) circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (D72) CAN C Diagnostic (+) circuit for a short to
the (D71) CAN C Diagnostic (-) circuit.
*CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (-) CIRCUIT OPEN

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The scan tool has detected an open condition on the (D71) CAN C Diagnostic (-) circuit.
Possible Causes
(D71) CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (-) CIRCUIT OPEN
Diagnostic Test

played.
Yes >> Go To 2
2. (D71) CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (-) CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (D71) CAN C Diagnostic (-) circuit
between the FCM connector and the DLC.
Yes >> Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage or shorted
No >> Repair the (D71) CAN C Diagnostic (-) circuit for an open.
*CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (+) CIRCUIT OPEN

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The scan tool has detected an open condition on the (D72) CAN C Diagnostic (+) circuit.
Possible Causes
(D72) CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (+) CIRCUIT OPEN
Diagnostic Test

played.
Yes >> Go To 2
2. (D72) CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (+) CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (D72) CAN C Diagnostic (+) circuit
No >> Repair the (D72) CAN C Diagnostic (+) circuit for an open.
*BOTH CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (+) AND CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (-) CIRCUITS OPEN

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The scan tool has detected an open condition on both CAN C Diagnostic circuits.
Possible Causes
(D72) CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (+) CIRCUIT OPEN

(D71) CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (-) CIRCUIT OPEN
Diagnostic Test

played.
Yes >> Go To 2
2. (D72) CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (+) CIRCUIT OPEN

NOTE: Check the connectors at both the DLC and the FCM.
Measure the resistance of the (D72) CAN C Diagnostic (+) circuit
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Repair the (D72) CAN C Diagnostic (+) circuit for an open.
3. (D71) CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (-) CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (D71) CAN C Diagnostic (-) circuit
No >> Repair the (D71) CAN C Diagnostic (-) circuit for an open.
*NO RESPONSE FROM ABS (ANTILOCK BRAKE MODULE)

Possible Causes
(A107) (A111) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED

(F202) FUSED IGNITION SW OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED
(D65) CAN C BUS (+) CIRCUIT OPEN
(D64) CAN C BUS (-) CIRCUIT OPEN
Diagnostic Test

NOTE: Ensure the IOD fuse is installed and battery voltage is between 10.0 and 16.0 volts.
NOTE: Check the FCM for any active CAN C hardware DTCs, perform DTC before proceeding.
Does the scan tool display a red X next to the module?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The no response condition is not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide,
inspect the wiring for chafed, pierced, pinched, and partially broken wires and the wiring harness con-
nectors for broken, bent, pushed out, and corroded terminals.
2. (A107) (A111) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED

Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check each (A107) and
(A111) Fused B(+) circuit.
Does the test light illuminate brightly for each circuit?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Repair the Fused B(+) circuit for an open or short.
Perform ABS VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.

ground circuit.
Yes >> Go To 4
4. (F202) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED

Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check the (F202) Fused
Ignition Switch Output circuit.
Yes >> Go To 5
No >> Repair the (F202) Fused Ignition Switch Output circuit for
an open or short.
5. (D65) CAN C BUS (+) CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit between the
FCM connector and the Antilock Brake Module connector.
Is resistance below 5.0 ohms?
Yes >> Go To 6
No >> Repair the (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit for an open.
6. (D64) CAN C BUS (-) CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit between the
FCM connector and the Antilock Brake Module connector.
Yes >> Replace the Antilock Brake Module in accordance with the
No >> Repair the (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit for an open.
*NO RESPONSE FROM AMP (AMPLIFIER)

Possible Causes
(X13) FUSED B (+) CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED

(D55) AND (D54) CAN B BUS CIRCUITS OPEN
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test

Yes >> Go To 2
2. (X13) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED

Disconnect the Radio Amplifier C2 harness connector.
Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check each (X13) Fused
B(+) circuit.
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Repair the (X13) Fused B(+) circuit for an open or short.

Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, check each (Z910)
ground circuit.
Yes >> Go To 4

ground.
ground.
Yes >> Replace the Radio Amplifier in accordance with the service
information.
No >> Repair the (D55) and (D54) CAN B Bus circuits for an
open. Inspect the connector for damage.
*NO RESPONSE FROM CCN (CLUSTER)

Possible Causes
(A917) (A23) (A110) FUSED B(+) CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED

(Z910) (Z210) GROUND CIRCUITS OPEN
(F202) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED
CLUSTER (CCN)
Diagnostic Test

Yes >> Go To 2
2. (A917) (A23) (A110) FUSED B(+) CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED

Disconnect the Cluster harness connectors.
Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check each (A917) (A23)
(A110) Fused B(+) circuit.
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Repair the (A917) (A23) (A110) Fused B(+) circuit for an
open or short.
3. (Z910) (Z210) GROUND CIRCUITS OPEN

(Z210) ground circuit.
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Repair the (Z910) (Z210) ground circuit for an open.

Yes >> Go To 5
an open or short.

ground.
ground.
Yes >> Replace the Cluster in accordance with the service informa-
tion.
*NO RESPONSE FROM DDM (DRIVER DOOR MODULE)

Possible Causes
(A913) FUSED B (+) CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED

DRIVER DOOR MODULE
Diagnostic Test

Yes >> Go To 2
2. (A913) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED

Disconnect the Driver Door Module harness connectors.
B(+) circuit.
Yes >> Go To 3

ground circuit.
Yes >> Go To 4

ground.
ground.
Yes >> Replace the Driver Door Module in accordance with the
*NO RESPONSE FROM ECM (ENGINE CONTROL MODULE) - DIESEL

Possible Causes
ENGINE CONTROL MODULE POWER AND GROUND

ENGINE CONTROL MODULE
Diagnostic Test

NOTE: Check the FCM for any active CAN C hardware and any ignition related DTCs, perform DTCs before
proceeding.
Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECK ECM POWER AND GROUND

Check the ECM power and ground circuits. Refer to 9 - ENGINE ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS - DIESEL for the
diagnostic test procedure.
No >> Go To 3

Disconnect the ECM C2 harness connector.
FCM connector and the ECM connector.
Yes >> Go To 4

FCM connector and the ECM connector.
Yes >> Replace and program the Engine Control Module in accor-
*NO RESPONSE FROM EOM (ELECTRONIC OVERHEAD MODULE)

Possible Causes

Diagnostic Test

Yes >> Go To 2

Disconnect the Electronic Overhead Module harness connector.
B(+) circuit.
Yes >> Go To 3

ground circuit.
Yes >> Go To 4

ground.
ground.
Yes >> Replace the Electronic Overhead Module (EOM) in accor-
*NO RESPONSE FROM ESM (ELECTRONIC SHIFT MODULE) (SHIFTER LEVER

ASSEMBLY) - NAG1
Possible Causes
(Z911) OR (Z912) GROUND CIRCUITS OPEN

(F902) IGNITION UNLOCK-RUN-START CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED
SHIFTER LEVER ASSEMBLY (ELECTRONIC SHIFT MODULE)
Diagnostic Test

proceeding.
Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECK THE (Z911) OR (Z912) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, check the (Z911) or
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Repair the (Z911) or (Z912) ground circuit for an open.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
3. (F902) IGNITION UNLOCKRUNSTART CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED

Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check the (F902) Ignition
UnlockRunStart circuit.
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Repair the (F902) Ignition UnlockRunStart circuit for an
open or short.
VER 1.

FCM connector and the Shifter Lever Assembly connector.
Yes >> Go To 5
VER 1.

FCM connector and the Shifter Lever Assembly connector.
Yes >> Replace the Shifter Lever Assembly in accordance with the
VER 1.
VER 1.
*NO RESPONSE FROM ESM (ELECTRONIC SHIFT MODULE) - (COLUMN NAG1)

Possible Causes
(Z910) GROUND CIRCUITS OPEN

(F902) IGNITION UNLOCK-RUN-START CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED
ELECTRONIC SHIFT MODULE
Diagnostic Test

proceeding.
Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECK THE (Z910) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Disconnect the Electronic Shift Module harness connector.
ground circuit.
Yes >> Go To 3
VER 1.
3. (F902) IGNITION UNLOCKRUNSTART CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED

Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check the (F902) Ignition
UnlockRunStart circuit.
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Repair the (F902) Ignition UnlockRunStart circuit for an
open or short.
VER 1.

FCM connector and the Electronic Shift Module connector.
Yes >> Go To 5
VER 1.

FCM connector and the Electronic Shift Module connector.
Yes >> Replace the Electronic Shift Module in accordance with the
VER 1.
VER 1.
*NO RESPONSE FROM FCM (FRONT CONTROL MODULE)

Possible Causes
(A106) FUSED B (+) CIRCUIT OPEN AT DLC

(Z910) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN AT DLC
GROUND CIRCUITS OPEN AT FCM
FUSED B+ CIRCUITS OPEN AT FCM
Diagnostic Test

NOTE: If the scan tool displays any error messages involving the CAN C Diagnostic circuits, diagnose and
repair the error message before proceeding. Refer to the Table of Contents.
NOTE: A loss of communication with the FCM can cause the ECU View button on the scan tool to be inop-
erative (not highlighted).
With the scan tool, attempt to select ECU View.
Can the scan tool communicate with the FCM?
Yes >> The no response condition is not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide,
No >> Go To 2
2. (A106) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT OPEN AT DLC

B(+) circuit.
Yes >> Go To 3
3. (Z910) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN AT DLC

ground circuit.
Yes >> Go To 4
4. GROUND CIRCUITS OPEN AT FCM C1 CONNECTOR

Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, check each ground cir-
cuit.
Yes >> Go To 5
No >> Repair the ground circuit for an open. Inspect the connector
for damage.
5. GROUND CIRCUITS OPEN AT FCM PDM CONNECTOR

Remove the FCM from the PDM.
Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, check each ground cir-
cuit.
Yes >> Go To 6
No >> Repair the ground circuit for an open. Inspect the connector
for damage.
6. FUSED B(+) CIRCUITS OPEN AT FCM PDM CONNECTOR

Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check each Fused B(+)
circuit.
Yes >> Replace and program the Front Control Module in accor-
No >> Repair the Fused B(+) circuit for an open. Inspect the con-
nector for damage.
*NO RESPONSE FROM HFM (HANDS FREE MODULE)

Possible Causes

HANDS FREE MODULE
Diagnostic Test

Yes >> Go To 2

Disconnect the Hands Free Module harness connector.
B(+) circuit.
Yes >> Go To 3

ground circuit.
Yes >> Go To 4

ground.
ground.
Yes >> Replace the Hands Free Module in accordance with the
*NO RESPONSE FROM HIDT (HEADLAMP LEVELING MODULE)

Possible Causes
(F500) FUSED RUN RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED

HEADLAMP LEVELING MODULE
Diagnostic Test

Yes >> Go To 2
2. (F500) FUSED RUN RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED

NOTE: Check the FCM for any ignition related DTCs before pro-
ceeding. If set (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/IGNITION CONTROL -
Disconnect the Headlamp Leveling Module harness connector.
Run Relay Output circuit.
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Repair the (F500) Fused Run Relay Output circuit for an
open or short.

ground circuit.
Yes >> Go To 4

ground.
ground.
Yes >> Replace the Headlamp Leveling Module in accordance with
*NO RESPONSE FROM HSM (HEATED SEAT MODULE)

Possible Causes

HEATED SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test

Yes >> Go To 2

Disconnect the Heated Seat Module harness connector.
B(+) circuit.
Yes >> Go To 3

ground circuit.
Yes >> Go To 4

ground.
ground.
Yes >> Replace the Heated Seat Module in accordance with the
*NO RESPONSE FROM HVAC (HEAT VENTILATION AND A/C) (ATC)

Possible Causes

HEAT VENTILATION AND A/C CONTROL (A/C HEATER CONTROL)
Diagnostic Test

Yes >> Go To 2

Disconnect the A/C Heater Control C1 harness connector.
B(+) circuit.
Yes >> Go To 3

ground circuit.
Yes >> Go To 4

ground.
ground.
Yes >> Replace the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the ser-
vice information.
*NO RESPONSE FROM ITM (INTRUSION TRANSCEIVER MODULE)

Possible Causes

INTRUSION TRANSCEIVER MODULE
Diagnostic Test

Yes >> Go To 2

Disconnect the Intrusion Transceiver Module harness connector.
B(+) circuit.
Yes >> Go To 3

ground circuit.
Yes >> Go To 4

ground.
ground.
Yes >> Replace the Intrusion Transceiver Module in accordance
with the service information.
*NO RESPONSE FROM LRSM (LIGHT/RAIN SENSOR MODULE)

Possible Causes
(F880) FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED

LIGHT/RAIN SENSOR MODULE
Diagnostic Test

Yes >> Go To 2
2. (F880) FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED

Disconnect the Light/Rain Sensor harness connector.
Accessory Delay Relay Output circuit.
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Repair the (F880) Fused Accessory Delay Relay Output cir-
cuit for an open or short.

ground circuit.
Yes >> Go To 4

ground.
ground.
Yes >> Replace the Light/Rain Sensor in accordance with the ser-
vice information.
*NO RESPONSE FROM MULTI-PURPOSE MODULE (POLICE AND TAXI INTERFACE

MODULE-PTIM)
Possible Causes

MULTI-PURPOSE MODULE (POLICE AND TAXI INTERFACE MODULE-PTIM)
Diagnostic Test

Yes >> Go To 2

Disconnect the C1 Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface
Module-PTIM) harness connector.
B(+) circuit.
Yes >> Go To 3

ground circuit.
Yes >> Go To 4

ground.
ground.
Yes >> Replace the Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Inter-
face Module-PTIM) in accordance with the service informa-
tion.
*NO RESPONSE FROM MSMD (MEMORY SEAT MODULE)

Possible Causes

MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test

Yes >> Go To 2

Disconnect the Memory Seat Module C1 harness connector.
B(+) circuit.
Yes >> Go To 3

ground circuit.
Yes >> Go To 4

ground.
ground.
Yes >> Replace the Memory Seat Module in accordance with the
*NO RESPONSE FROM OCM (OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE)

Possible Causes

(R263) SEAT POSITION SENSOR VOLTAGE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
(R701) SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 5 VOLTS CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Diagnostic Test

Yes >> Go To 2

WARNING: To avoid personal injury or death, turn the ignition off,
disconnect the battery and wait two minutes before proceeding.
Disconnect the Occupant Classification Module C1 harness connector.
WARNING: To avoid personal injury or death, turn the ignition on,
then reconnect the battery.
B(+) circuit.
Yes >> Go To 3
Perform the OCS VERIFICATION TEST-VER 1.

ground circuit.
Yes >> Go To 4

Yes >> Go To 5
an open or short.

WARNING: If the Occupant Classification Module is dropped at
any time, it must be replaced. Failure to take the proper precau-
tions could result in accidental airbag deployment and personal
injury or death.
ground.
ground.
Yes >> Go To 6
6. CHECK (R263) SEAT POSITION SENSOR VOLTAGE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the (R263) Seat Position Sensor Voltage circuit.
Yes >>
NOTE: Do not attempt to repair the Seat Harness. Replace the Seat Harness if the condition inspecting or
testing for is present in the Seat Harness.
Replace the OCM and Driver Seat Position Sensor Harness in accordance with the service information.
No >> Go To 7
7. CHECK (R701) SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 5 VOLTS CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect the Occupant Classification Module C2 harness connector.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (R701) Seat Weight Sensor 5 volt circuit.
Yes >>
Replace the OCM and Driver Seat Position Sensor Harness in accordance with the service information.
No >> Replace the Occupant Classification Module in accordance with the service information.
*NO RESPONSE FROM ORC (OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER MODULE)

Possible Causes

(F201) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN/START) CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER MODULE
Diagnostic Test

Yes >> Go To 2

Disconnect the Occupant Restraint Controller Module harness connec-
tors.
Connect the appropriate Load Tool ACM Adaptor to the ORC connector.
ground circuit.
Yes >> Go To 3
Perform AIRBAG VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.

Yes >> Go To 4
open or short.
4. (F201) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN/START) CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED

Ignition Switch Output (RUN/START) circuit.
Yes >> Go To 5
No >> Repair the (F201) Fused Ignition Switch Output (RUN/
START) circuit for an open or short.

WARNING: If the Occupant Restraint Controller is dropped at any
time, it must be replaced. Failure to take the proper precautions
could result in accidental airbag deployment and personal injury
or death.
ground.
Measure the voltage between the (D55) CAN B Bus (+) circuit and ground.
Yes >> Replace the Occupant Restraint Controller Module in accordance with the service information.
No >> Repair the (D55) and (D54) CAN B Bus circuits for an open. Inspect the connector for damage.
*NO RESPONSE FROM PCM (POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE)

Possible Causes

Diagnostic Test

Yes >> Go To 2

Disconnect the PCM C1 harness connector.
CAUTION: Do not probe the PCM harness connectors. Probing the
PCM harness connectors will damage the PCM terminals resulting
in poor terminal to pin connection. Install Miller Special Tool #8815
to perform diagnosis.
B(+) circuit.
Yes >> Go To 3
Perform (NGC) POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST VER
- 5.

ground circuit.
Yes >> Go To 4
- 5.

Yes >> Go To 5
an open or short.
- 5.

FCM connector and the appropriate terminal of the special tool #8815.
Yes >> Go To 6
- 5.

FCM connector and the appropriate terminal of the special tool #8815.
Yes >> Replace and program the Powertrain Control Module in
accordance with the service information.
- 5.
- 5.
*NO RESPONSE FROM PDM (PASSENGER DOOR MODULE)

Possible Causes

Diagnostic Test

Yes >> Go To 2

Disconnect the Passenger Door Module harness connectors.
B(+) circuit.
Yes >> Go To 3

ground circuit.
Yes >> Go To 4

ground.
ground.
Yes >> Replace the Passenger Door Module in accordance with
*NO RESPONSE FROM PTS (PARK ASSIST MODULE)

Possible Causes

PARK ASSIST MODULE
Diagnostic Test

Yes >> Go To 2

Yes >> Go To 3
open or short.

ground circuit.
Yes >> Go To 4

ground.
ground.
Yes >> Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with the ser-
vice information.
*NO RESPONSE FROM RADIO

Possible Causes

RADIO
Diagnostic Test

Yes >> Go To 2

Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check each (A300)
Fused B(+) circuit.
Yes >> Go To 3

ground circuit.
Yes >> Go To 4

ground.
ground.
Yes >> Replace the Radio in accordance with the service informa-
tion.
*NO RESPONSE FROM SDAR (SATELLITE RECEIVER)

Possible Causes

SATELLITE RECEIVER
Diagnostic Test

Yes >> Go To 2

Disconnect the Satellite Receiver harness connector.
B(+) circuit.
Yes >> Go To 3

ground circuit.
Yes >> Go To 4

ground.
ground.
Yes >> Replace the Satellite Receiver in accordance with the ser-
vice information.
*NO RESPONSE FROM SCM (STEERING CONTROL MODULE)

Possible Causes

Diagnostic Test

Yes >> Go To 2

Disconnect/remove the Steering Control Module harness connector.
B(+) circuit.
Yes >> Go To 3

ground circuit.
Yes >> Go To 4

ground.
ground.
Yes >> Replace the Steering Control Module in accordance with
*NO RESPONSE FROM SUNR (SUNROOF MOTOR/MODULE)

Possible Causes
(X13) FUSED B (+) CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED

SUNROOF MOTOR/MODULE
Diagnostic Test

Yes >> Go To 2
2. (X13) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED

Disconnect the Sunroof Motor/Module harness connector.
Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check the (X13) Fused
B(+) circuit.
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Repair the (X13) Fused B(+) circuit for an open or short.

ground circuit.
Yes >> Go To 4

ground.
ground.
Yes >> Replace the Sunroof Motor/Module in accordance with the
*NO RESPONSE FROM TCM (TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE) - NAG1

Possible Causes
(Z910) or (Z912) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN

(F942) FUSED TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORT
TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE
Diagnostic Test

proceeding.
Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECK THE (Z910) OR (Z912) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, check the (Z910) or
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Repair the (Z910) or (Z912) ground circuit for an open.
VER 1.
3. (F942) FUSED TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED

Transmission Relay Output circuit.
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Repair the (F942) Fused Transmission Relay Output circuit
for an open or short.
VER 1.

Disconnect the TCM C2 harness connector.
FCM connector and the TCM connector.
Yes >> Go To 5
VER 1.

FCM connector and the TCM connector.
Yes >> Replace the Transmission Control Module in accordance
VER 1.
VER 1.
*NO RESPONSE FROM TCM (TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE) NGC

Possible Causes

Diagnostic Test

Yes >> Go To 2
2. ATTEMPT TO COMMUNICATE WITH THE PCM

With the scan tool in ECU view, observe the status of the PCM.
Does the scan tool display a red X next to the PCM?
Yes >> Refer to the No Response From PCM test procedure. Refer to the table of contents in this section.
No >> Go To 3

Disconnect the PCM C4 harness connector.
ground circuit.
Yes >> Replace and program the Powertrain Control Module in
accordance with the service information.
Perform the appropriate TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION
TEST.
*NO RESPONSE FROM VES (MONITOR/DVD MEDIA SYSTEM)

Possible Causes

MONITOR/DVD MEDIA SYSTEM
Diagnostic Test

Yes >> Go To 2

Disconnect the Monitor/DVD Media System harness connector.
B(+) circuit.
Yes >> Go To 3

ground circuit.
Yes >> Go To 4

ground.
ground.
Yes >> Replace the Monitor/DVD Media System in accordance with
*NO RESPONSE FROM WCM (WIRELESS CONTROL MODULE) (SENTRY KEY

REMOTE ENTRY MODULE)
Possible Causes
(A23), OR (A917) (RHD) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED

Diagnostic Test

Yes >> Go To 2

Disconnect the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module harness connector.
Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check the (A23) or
(A917) (RHD) Fused B(+) circuit.
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Repair the (A23) or (A917) (RHD) Fused B(+) circuit for an
open or short.
Perform SKREEM VERIFICATION TEST.

ground circuit.
Yes >> Go To 4

Yes >> Go To 5
an open or short.

ground.
ground.
Yes >> Replace the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module in accor-
8E - 242 ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - SERVICE INFORMATION LX
ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - SERVICE

INFORMATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - SERVICE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

INFORMATION MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL
STANDARD PROCEDURE DESCRIPTION
PCM/SKREEM PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 DESCRIPTION - PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
MODULE-ANTILOCK BRAKE - MK25 MODES OF OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 5 VOLT SUPPLIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 IGNITION CIRCUIT SENSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 POWER GROUNDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 SENSOR RETURN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
MODULE-ANTILOCK BRAKE - MK25E OPERATION
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 OPERATION - PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 5 VOLT SUPPLIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 OPERATION - IGNITION CIRCUIT SENSE . . . . 284
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
COMMUNICATION NGC POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 VER - 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 NGC POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST
MODULE-DOOR VER - 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 NGC POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 VER - 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 NGC POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 VER - 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
MODULE-ENGINE CONTROL NGC POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 VER - 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 NGC POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST
STANDARD PROCEDURE - ECM/SKIM VER - 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
PROGRAMMING - DIESEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 STANDARD PROCEDURE
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 TCM QUICK LEARN - 42RLE Only . . . . . . . . . . . 291
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 TCM ADAPTATION - NAG1 Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
MODULE-FRONT CONTROL REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING DESCRIPTION
BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1 . . . . . . . . 272 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE -
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 42RLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE -
MODULE-SEAT MEMORY NAG1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 OPERATION
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE -
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING 42RLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
MEMORY SEAT MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE -
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 NAG1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 STANDARD PROCEDURE
MODULE-STEERING CONTROL TCM QUICK LEARN - 42RLE Only . . . . . . . . . . . 303
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 TCM ADAPTATION - NAG1 Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
LX ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - SERVICE INFORMATION 8E - 243
ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - SERVICE INFORMATION

STANDARD PROCEDURE
PCM/SKREEM PROGRAMMING
NOTE: Before replacing the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), be certain to check the related component/
circuit integrity for failures not detected due to a double fault in the circuit. Most PCM driver/control circuit
failures are caused by internal component failures (i.e. relays and solenoids) and shorted circuits (i.e. pull-
ups, drivers, and switched circuits). These failures are difficult to detect when a double fault has occurred
and only one Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) has been set.
NOTE: After a SKREEM/WCM is replaced, the ignition/transponder keys need to be programmed to the new
SKREEM/WCM. Follow the directions on the diagnostic scan tool. The transponder key for the SKREES/
SKIM and the RKE will both be programmed during this operation. There is no need to program the fob of
the key for RKE functionality once the transponder key is programmed to the new SKREEM/WCM.
NOTE: When a PCM and the SKREEM/WCM are replaced at the same time, perform the following steps in
order:
Program the new PCM.

Program the new SKREEM/WCM.
Program all ignition/transponder keys to the new SKREEM/WCM.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE - PCM/SKREEM
PROGRAMMING).
PROGRAMMING THE PCM/SKREEM

The SKIS Secret Key is an ID code that is unique to each SKREEM/WCM. This code is programmed and stored in
the SKREEM/WCM, the PCM, and each ignition key transponder chip. When the PCM or SKREEM/WCM is
replaced, it is necessary to program the Secret Key into the new module using a diagnostic scan tool. Follow the
programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for PCM Replaced or WCM Replaced under Miscella-
neous Functions for the WCM/Wireless Control Module menu item as appropriate.
NOTE: Be certain to enter the correct country code for the SKREEM/WCM. If the incorrect country code is
programmed into the SKREEM/WCM, it cannot be changed and the SKREEM/WCM must be replaced.
NOTE: If the PCM and the SKREEM/WCM are replaced at the same time, all vehicle ignition keys will need
to be programmed into the new SKREEM/WCM.
NOTE: Programming the PCM or SKREEM/WCM is done using a diagnostic scan tool and a PIN to enter
secure access mode. If three attempts are made to enter secure access mode using an incorrect PIN,
secure access mode will be locked out for one hour. To exit this lockout mode, turn the ignition to the RUN
position for one hour then enter the correct PIN. (Ensure all accessories are turned OFF. Also monitor the
battery state and connect a battery charger if necessary).
PROGRAMMING IGNITION KEYS TO THE SKREEM/WCM

Each ignition key transponder also has a unique ID code that is assigned at the time the key is manufactured.
When a key is programmed into the SKREEM/WCM, the transponder ID code is learned by the module and the
transponder acquires the unique Secret Key ID code from the SKREEM/WCM. To program ignition keys into the
SKREEM/WCM, follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for Program Ignition Keys or Key
FOBs under Miscellaneous Functions for the WCM/Wireless Control Module menu item.
NOTE: A maximum of eight keys can be learned to each SKREEM/WCM. Once a key is learned to a
SKREEM/WCM, that key has acquired the Secret Key for that SKREEM/WCM and cannot be used on any
other vehicle at the same time.
If ignition key programming is unsuccessful, the scan tool will display one of the following error messages:
Programming Not Attempted - The scan tool attempts to read the programmed key status and there are no
keys programmed into SKREEM memory.
Programming Key Failed (Possible Used Key From Wrong Vehicle) - SKREEM/WCM is unable to program
an ignition key transponder due to one of the following:
The ignition key transponder is faulty.
The ignition key transponder is or has been already programmed to another vehicle.
8 Keys Already Learned, Programming Not Done - The SKREEM/FCM transponder ID memory is full.
Learned Key In Ignition - The ID for the ignition key transponder currently in the ignition lock cylinder is
already programmed into SKREEM/WCM memory.
MODULE-ANTILOCK BRAKE - MK25

DESCRIPTION
The Antilock Brake Module (ABM) is a microproces-
sor-based device which monitors the Antilock Brake
System (ABS) during normal braking and controls it
when the vehicle is in an ABS stop. The ABM also
monitors the Electronic Stability Program (ESP) if so
equipped.
The ABM (3) is mounted to the HCU (2) as part of the
Integrated Control Unit (ICU). The ABM uses a
47-Way connector on the vehicle wiring harness. The
power source for the ABM is through the ignition
switch in the RUN or ON position. The ABM is on the
CAN-C bus.
OPERATION
The primary functions of the Antilock Brake Module (ABM) are to:
Monitor the Antilock Brake System (ABS) and Electronic Stability Program (ESP) for proper operation.
Detect wheel locking or wheel slipping tendencies by monitoring the speed of all four wheels of the vehicle.
Control fluid modulation to the wheel brakes while the system is in ABS or traction control mode.
Modulates fluid pressure to the wheel brakes to control vehicle yaw rate in ESP mode.
Store diagnostic information.
Provide communication to the scan tool while in diagnostic mode.
Illuminate the amber TCS/ESP indicator in the instrument cluster.
The ABM constantly monitors the ABS and ESP (if equipped) for proper operation. If the ABM detects a fault, it will
turn on the amber TCS/ESP indicator and disable the ABS or ESP if so equipped. The normal base braking system
will remain operational at that time.
The ABM continuously monitors the speed of each wheel through the signals generated by the wheel speed sensors
to determine if any wheel is beginning to lock. When a wheel locking tendency is detected, the ABM commands the
ABM solenoid coils to actuate. The coils then open and close the valves in the HCU that modulate brake fluid
pressure in some or all of the hydraulic circuits. The ABM continues to control pressure in individual hydraulic cir-
cuits until a locking tendency is no longer present.
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect negative (-) battery cable (2) from bat-
tery post and isolate.
2. Disconnect 47-Way wiring connector (5) at ABM

(6).
3. Unclip brake tubes (1, 2 and 10) from two routing

clips (6) along upper radiator support.
4. Unclip brake tube (3) from routing clip (4) below
Fuse And Relay Center.
5. Lift up on entire assembly (5) from mounting grom-
mets (8) and move inboard allowing access to ABM
attaching screws. Do not force brake tubes.
Move assembly just enough to access mount-
ing screws.
6. Remove three screws (2) attaching ABM (1).
7. Slide ABM (1) off HCU (3).

INSTALLATION
1. Align ABM solenoids and pump/motor wiring con-
nector (4) with HCU valves (2) and connector pas-
sage. Slide ABM (1) onto HCU (3).
2. Install three screws (2) attaching ABM (1) to HCU.

Tighten screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.) torque.
3. Position assembly (5) above mounting grommets

(8) and press mounting bracket into place.
4. Clip brake tube (3) to routing clip (4) below Fuse
And Relay Center.
5. Clip brake tubes (1, 2 and 10) to two routing clips
(6) along upper radiator support.
6. Connect 47-way wiring connector (5) at ABM (6).

DARD PROCEDURE)
TESTING)
MODULE-ANTILOCK BRAKE - MK25E

DESCRIPTION
The Antilock Brake Module (ABM) is a microproces-
sor-based device which monitors the Antilock Brake
System (ABS) during normal braking and controls it
when the vehicle is in an ABS stop. The ABM also
monitors the Electronic Stability Program (ESP) if so
equipped.
The ABM (1) is mounted to the HCU (2) as part of the
Integrated Control Unit (ICU). The ABM uses a
47-Way connector on the vehicle wiring harness. The
power source for the ABM is through the ignition
switch in the RUN or ON position. The ABM is on the
CAN-C bus.
OPERATION
The primary functions of the Antilock Brake Module (ABM) are to:
Monitor the Antilock Brake System (ABS) and Electronic Stability Program (ESP) for proper operation.
Detect wheel locking or wheel slipping tendencies by monitoring the speed of all four wheels of the vehicle.
Control fluid modulation to the wheel brakes while the system is in ABS or traction control mode.
Modulates fluid pressure to the wheel brakes to control vehicle yaw rate in ESP mode.
Store diagnostic information.
Provide communication to the scan tool while in diagnostic mode.
Illuminate the amber TCS/ESP indicator in the instrument cluster.
The ABM constantly monitors the ABS and ESP (if equipped) for proper operation. If the ABM detects a fault, it will
turn on the amber TCS/ESP indicator and disable the ABS or ESP if so equipped. The normal base braking system
will remain operational at that time.
The ABM continuously monitors the speed of each wheel through the signals generated by the wheel speed sensors
to determine if any wheel is beginning to lock. When a wheel locking tendency is detected, the ABM commands the
ABM solenoid coils to actuate. The coils then open and close the valves in the HCU that modulate brake fluid
pressure in some or all of the hydraulic circuits. The ABM continues to control pressure in individual hydraulic cir-
cuits until a locking tendency is no longer present.
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect negative (-) battery cable (2) from bat-
tery post and isolate.
NOTE: Use this figure in the following step to

release the ABM harness connector cover. It
shows the location of the release tabs.
2. Disconnect ABM harness connector from antilock

brake module (ABM). To do so:
a. Depress tabs on each side of connector cover,
then
b. Pull outward and upward on lower half of cover
until it locks into position pointing straight out-
ward (2). Connector can then be pulled straight
outward off ABM (1).
3. Unclip all brake tubes from two routing clips (1)

along upper radiator support.
4. Unclip right front brake tube (3) from routing clip on
bracket below Fuse And Relay Center.
5. Unclip rear brake tubes (1, 2) from routing clip (3)

on bracket below Fuse And Relay Center.
6. Lift ICU (1) from mounting grommets (2) and move

inboard allowing access to ABM attaching screws.
Do not force brake tubes. Move assembly just
enough to access mounting screws.
7. Remove four screws (1) attaching ABM (2) to HCU.
8. Slide ABM (1) off HCU (2).

INSTALLATION
1. Clean any debris off the mating surfaces of the HCU and ABM.
CAUTION: When installing new O-rings or solenoid valve stem seals, do not use any type of lubricant.
2. If the seals (1) on the solenoid valve stems (2) are

not new, replace them all. Each of the solenoid
valve stem seals must be new to keep out moisture
and debris; do not reuse solenoid valve stem
seals.
3. Replace the pump/motor connector O-ring (1) if it is

not new. Be sure the O-ring is properly seated in
the mounting groove (2).
4. Align components and install the ABM (1) on the

HCU (2).
5. Install the four screws (1) attaching the ABM (2) to

the HCU. Tighten the mounting screws to 2 Nm
(17 in. lbs.).
6. Position ICU (1) above mounting grommets (2)

located in body side rail and press mounting
bracket into place.
7. Clip rear brake tubes (1, 2) to routing clip (3) on

8. Clip right front brake tube (3) to routing clip on

9. Clip brake tubes to two routing clips (1) along
upper radiator support.
CAUTION: Before installing the ABM harness con-

nector (2) on the ABM (1), be sure the seal is prop-
erly installed in the connector.
10. Insert ABM harness connector (2) into socket of

ABM (1) and close cover, locking connector in
place.

STANDARD PROCEDURE)
TESTING)
COMMUNICATION
DESCRIPTION
The primary on-board communication network between microprocessor-based electronic control modules in this
vehicle is the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus system. A data bus network minimizes redundant wiring con-
nections; and, at the same time, reduces wire harness complexity, sensor current loads and controller hardware by
allowing each sensing device to be connected to only one module (also referred to as a node). Each node reads,
then broadcasts its sensor data over the bus for use by all other nodes requiring that data. Each node ignores the
messages on the bus that it cannot use.
The CAN bus is a two-wire multiplex system. Multiplexing is any system that enables the transmission of multiple
messages over a single channel or circuit. The CAN bus is used for communication between all vehicle nodes.
However, in addition to the CAN bus network, certain nodes may also be equipped with a dedicated Serial Con-
troller Interface (SCI) or a K-Line serial link bus to provide direct communication between that node and certain
sensor inputs.
There are actually three separate CAN bus systems used in the vehicle. They are designated: the CAN-B, the
CAN-C and the Diagnostic CAN-C. The CAN-B and CAN-C systems provide on-board communication between all
nodes in the vehicle. The CAN-C is the faster of the two systems providing near real-time communication (500
Kbps), but is less fault tolerant than the CAN-B system. The CAN-C is used exclusively for communications
between critical powertrain and chassis nodes. The slower (83.3 Kbps), but more fault tolerant CAN-B system is
used for communications between body and interior nodes. The CAN-B fault tolerance comes from its ability to
revert to a single wire communication mode if there is a fault in the bus wiring.
The added speed of the CAN data bus is many times faster than previous data bus systems. This added speed
facilitates the addition of more electronic control modules or nodes and the incorporation of many new electrical and
electronic features in the vehicle. The Diagnostic CAN-C bus is also capable of 500 Kbps communication, and is
sometimes informally referred to as the CAN-D system to differentiate it from the other high speed CAN-C bus. The
Diagnostic CAN-C is used exclusively for the transmission of diagnostic information between the Front Control Mod-
ule/Central GateWay (FCM or FCMCGW) and a diagnostic scan tool connected to the industry-standard 16-way
Data Link Connector (DLC) located beneath the instrument panel on the driver side of the vehicle.
The FCM is located on the Integrated Power Module (IPM), which is located in the engine compartment near the
battery. The central CAN gateway or hub module integral to the FCM is connected to all three CAN buses. This
gateway physically and electrically isolates the CAN buses from each other and coordinates the bi-directional trans-
fer of messages between them.
OPERATION
The Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus allows all electronic modules or nodes connected to the bus to share
information with each other. Regardless of whether a message originates from a module on the low speed CAN-B
bus or on the high speed CAN-C or CAN-D bus, the message structure and layout is similar, which allows the Front
Control Module/Central GateWay (FCM or FCMCGW) to process and transfer messages between the buses. The
FCM also stores a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for certain bus network faults.
All modules (also referred to as nodes) transmit and receive messages over one of these buses. Data exchange
between nodes is achieved by serial transmission of encoded data messages. Each node can both send and
receive serial data simultaneously. Bus messages are carried over the data bus in the form of Variable Pulse Width
Modulated (VPWM) signals which, when the high and low voltage pulses are strung together, form a message. Each
node uses arbitration to sort the message priority if two competing messages are attempting to be broadcast at the
same time.
The voltage network used to transmit messages requires biasing and termination. Each module on the bus network
provides its own biasing and termination. Each node terminates the bus through a terminating resistor and a ter-
minating capacitor. There are two types of nodes on the bus. The dominant node terminates the bus through a 1
KW resistor and a 3300 pF capacitor, typically resulting in about a 3300 ohm termination resistance. However, this
resistance value may vary somewhat by application. The FCM (or FCMCGW) is the only dominant node in this
network. A non-dominant (or recessive) node terminates the bus through an 11 KW resistor and a 330 pF capacitor,
typically resulting in about a 10800 ohm termination resistance.
The communication protocol being used for the CAN data bus is a non-proprietary, open standard adopted from the
Bosch CAN Specification 2.0b. The CAN-C is the faster of the two primary buses in the CAN bus system, providing
near real-time communication (500 Kbps).
The CAN bus nodes are connected in parallel to the two-wire bus using a twisted pair, where the wires are wrapped
around each other to provide shielding from unwanted electromagnetic induction, thus preventing interference with
the relatively low voltage signals being carried through them. The twisted pairs have between 33 and 50 twists per
meter. While the CAN bus is operating (active), one of the bus wires will carry a higher voltage and is referred to as
the CAN High or CAN bus (+) wire, while the other bus wire will carry a lower voltage and is referred to as the CAN
Low or CAN bus () wire. Refer to the CAN Bus Voltages table.
CAN Bus Voltages (Normal Operation)

Recessive Dominant CAN-L CAN-H CAN-L CAN-H CAN-H
CAN-C Bus
Sleep (Bus (Bus Short to Short to Short to Short to Short to
Circuits
Idle) Active) Ground Ground Battery Battery CAN-L
Battery
2.4 - 2.5 1.3 - 2.3 0.3 - Battery Voltage
CAN-L () 0V 0V 2.45 V
V V 0.5V Voltage Less 0.75
V
Battery
2.4 - 2.5 2.6 - 3.5 Voltage Battery
CAN-H (+) 0V 0.02 V 0V 2.45 V
V V Less 0.75 Voltage
V
Key-On CAN-L CAN-H CAN-L CAN-H CAN-H
CAN-B Bus
Key-Off (Bus Asleep) (Bus Short to Short to Short to Short to Short to
Circuits
Active) Ground Ground Battery Battery CAN-L
4.65 - 4.5 - 4.7 Battery 4.5 - 4.7 0.3 - 0.7
CAN-L () 10.99 V 0V
4.98 V V Voltage V V
0.39 - 0.3 - 0.7 0.3 - 0.7 Battery 0.3 - 0.7
CAN-H (+) 0.0 V 0V
0.46 V V V Voltage V
Notes
All measurements taken between node ground and CAN terminal with a standard DVOM.
DVOM will display average network voltage.
Total resistance of CAN-C network can also be measured (60 ohms). Cannot measure total resistance of CAN-B
network.
In order to minimize the potential effects of Ignition-Off Draw (IOD), the CAN-B network employs a sleep strategy.
However, a network sleep strategy should not be confused with the sleep strategy of the individual nodes on that
network, as they may differ. For example: The CAN-C bus network is awake only when the ignition switch is in the
ON or START positions; however, the FCM, which is on the CAN-C bus, may still be awake with the ignition switch
in the ACCESSORY or UNLOCK positions. The integrated circuitry of an individual node may be capable of pro-
cessing certain sensor inputs and outputs without the need to utilize network resources.
The CAN-B bus network remains active until all nodes on that network are ready for sleep. This is determined by
the network using tokens in a manner similar to polling. When the last node that is active on the network is ready
for sleep, and it has already received a token indicating that all other nodes on the bus are ready for sleep, it
broadcasts a bus sleep acknowledgment message that causes the network to sleep. Once the CAN-B bus net-
work is asleep, any node on the bus can awaken it by transmitting a message on the network. The FCM will keep
either the CAN-B or the CAN-C bus awake for a timed interval after it receives a diagnostic message for that bus
over the Diagnostic CAN-C bus.
In the CAN system, available options are configured into the FCM at the assembly plant, but additional options can
be added in the field using the diagnostic scan tool. The configuration settings are stored in non-volatile memory.
The FCM also has two 64-bit registers, which track each of the as-built and currently responding nodes on the
CAN-B and CAN-C buses. The FCM stores a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) in one of two caches for any detected
active or stored faults in the order in which they occur. One cache stores powertrain (P-Code), chassis (C-Code)
and body (B-Code) DTCs, while the second cache is dedicated to storing network (U-Code) DTCs.
If there are intermittent or active faults in the CAN network, a diagnostic scan tool connected to the Diagnostic
CAN-C bus through the 16-way Data Link Connector (DLC) may only be able to communicate with the FCM. To aid
in CAN network diagnosis, the FCM will provide CAN-B and CAN-C network status information to the scan tool
using certain diagnostic signals. In addition, the transceiver in each node on the CAN-C bus will identify a bus off
hardware failure, while the transceiver in each node on the CAN-B bus will identify a general bus hardware fail-
ure. The transceivers for some CAN-B nodes will also identify certain failures for both CAN-B bus signal wires.
MODULE-DOOR
DESCRIPTION
The door modules control the express up and down
feature as well as normal window functions. It is used
only on vehicles equipped with the express up feature.
If equipped with memory system, the door module
controls the memory mirror. The modules are attached
to each front door trim panel.
OPERATION
If the vehicle is equipped with the Express Up power window feature there will be a door module on each front door
trim panel. The power window switches and motors are directly wired to the modules. If the vehicle is equipped with
the Memory System, the exterior power mirrors and switches are also directly wired to the modules along with the
rear door window switches. The modules are wired to the accessory delay relay which allows the operation of the
windows and mirrors for a given period of time after the ignition is turned off and providing the doors are not
opened. The modules communicate with each other and other modules on the vehicle via the CAN-B bus circuit.
There are several Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) the modules will store if there are problems with the power
window system or the memory power mirror system.
ANTI-PINCH
The 9Anti-Pinch9 function is a safety feature that senses obstacles at the top of the glass and anywhere on the seal
where it meets the glass to close during the window closing operation. When a front window switch is pressed to
the 9Auto-Up9 position and the closing window traps an object and the sense current passes its limit, the module will
stop the motor and drive the window down approximately 200 millimeters. The pinch force is speed dependent
which means that if the vehicle is going over 2km per hour the pinch force will be higher than if the vehicle is
stopped.
PANIC MODE
If the window switch is held in the 9Auto-Up9 position and the closing window traps an object, the module will stop
the motor and when the switch is released will drive the window in the opposite direction approximately 10 millime-
ters. If within 8 seconds after the switch was released to the neutral position, the switch is held again to the 9Auto-
Up9 position, the module will enter the second panic mode. During the second panic mode, the module will drive the
motor with full (stall) force and stop. If within 8 seconds after the switch is released again to the neutral position, the
switch is held again to the 9Auto-Up9 position, the module will drive the motor again with full (stall) force and stop.
REMOVAL

2. Remove front door trim panel (Refer to 23 - BODY/
3. Disconnect electrical harness connectors.
4. Remove mounting fasteners and module.
INSTALLATION
1. Position module.
4. Install door trim panel (Refer to 23 - BODY/DOOR
- FRONT/TRIM PANEL - INSTALLATION).
MODULE-ENGINE CONTROL
DESCRIPTION
The ECM is located in the left side of engine compart-
ment attached to the left inner fender behind the bat-
tery.
The electrical circuits at the ECM are split into two
separate wiring harnesses (vehicle and engine wiring
harness). The 58-pin connector is used for the vehicle
wiring harness. The 96-pin connector is for the engine
wiring harness.
The ECM connectors use slide locks. To remove the
ECM connectors, pull the slide locks sideways to the
end of their travel and lift the connectors.
A 32-bit microprocessor uses control algorithms to process the input signals and calculates the injected fuel based
on stored maps. The microprocessor triggers the driver stages for switching the output components. The ECM con-
tains the following data storage elements:
1. Flash EPROMstores engine-specific curves, engine-management maps, and variant coding (engine and equip-
ment options).
2. EEPROMstores immobilizer data, calibration and manufacturing data, adaptation values, operational faults and
variant coding.
3. RAMstores variable data such as calculations data and input values.
OPERATION
The ECM has been programmed to monitor different
circuits of the diesel fuel injection system. This moni-
toring is called on-board diagnostics. Certain criteria
must be met for a diagnostic trouble code to be
entered into the ECM memory. The criteria may be a
range of: engine rpm, engine temperature, time or
other input signals to the ECM. If all of the criteria for
monitoring a system or circuit are met, and a problem
is sensed, then a DTC will be stored in the ECM
memory. It is possible that a DTC for a monitored cir-
cuit may not be entered into the ECM memory, even
though a malfunction has occurred. This may happen
when the monitoring criteria have not been met. The
ECM compares input signal voltages from each input
device with specifications (the established high and
low limits of the input range) that are programmed into
it for that device. If the input voltage is not within the
specifications and other trouble code criteria are met,
a DTC will be stored in the ECM memory.
ECM OPERATING MODES

As input signals to the ECM change, the ECM adjusts its response to the output devices. For example, the ECM
must calculate a different fuel quantity and fuel timing for engine idle condition than it would for a wide open throttle
condition. There are several different modes of operation that determine how the ECM responds to the various input
signals.
Ignition Switch On (Engine Off)
When the ignition is turned on, the ECM activates the glow plug relay for a time period that is determined by engine
coolant temperature, atmospheric temperature and battery voltage.
Engine Start-Up Mode
The ECM uses the engine temperature sensor and the crankshaft position sensor (engine speed) inputs to deter-
mine fuel injection quantity.
Normal Driving Modes
Engine idle, warm-up, acceleration, deceleration and wide open throttle modes are controlled based on all of the
sensor inputs to the ECM. The ECM uses these sensor inputs to adjust fuel quantity and fuel injector timing.
Limp-In Mode
If there is a fault detected with the accelerator pedal position sensor, the ECM will set the engine speed at 1100
RPM.
Overspeed Detection Mode
If the ECM detects engine RPM that exceeds 5200 RPM, the ECM will set a DTC in memory and illuminate the MIL
until the DTC is cleared.
After-Run Mode
The ECM transfers RAM information to ROM and performs an Input/Output state check.
MONITORED CIRCUITS
The ECM is able to monitor and identify most driveability related trouble conditions. Some circuits are directly mon-
itored through ECM feedback circuitry. In addition, the ECM monitors the voltage state of some circuits and com-
pares those states with expected values. Other systems are monitored indirectly when the ECM conducts a
rationality test to identify problems. Although most subsytems of the engine control module are either directly or
indirectly monitored, there may be occasions when diagnostic trouble codes are not immediately identified. For a
trouble code to set, a specific set of conditions must occur and unless these conditions occur, a DTC will not set.
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES

Each diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is diagnosed by following a specific procedure. The diagnostic test procedure
contains step-by-step instruction for determining the cause of the DTC as well as no trouble code problems. Refer
to the appropriate Diesel Powertrain Diagnostic Manual for more information.
HARD CODE
A DTC that comes back within one cycle of the ignition key is a hard code. This means that the problem is current
every time the ECM/SKIM checks that circuit or function. Procedures in this manual verify if the DTC is a hard code
at the beginning of each test. When the fault is not a hard code, an intermittent test must be performed. NOTE: If
the DRBIIIT displays faults for multiple components (i.e. ECT, VSS, IAT sensors) identify and check the shared cir-
cuits for possible problems before continuing (i.e. sensor grounds or 5-volt supply circuits). Refer to the appropriate
schematic to identify shared circuits. Refer to the appropriate Diesel Powertrain Diagnostic Manual for more infor-
mation.
INTERMITTENT CODE
A DTC that is not current every time the ECM/SKIM checks the circuit or function is an intermittent code. Most
intermittent DTCs are caused by wiring or connector problems. Problems that come and go like this are the most
difficult to diagnose; they must be looked for under specific conditions that cause them. NOTE: Electromagnetic
(radio) interference can cause an intermittent system malfunction. This interference can interrupt communica-
tion between the ignition key transponder and the SKIM. The following checks may assist you in identifying a pos-
sible intermittent problem:
Visually inspect the related wire harness connectors. Look for broken, bent, pushed out or corroded terminals.
Visually inspect the related wire harness. Look for chafed, pierced or partially broken wire.
Refer to hotlines or technical service bulletins that may apply.
Refer to the appropriate Diesel Powertrain Diagnostic Manual for more information.
ECM DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES
IMPORTANT NOTE: Before replacing the ECM for a failed driver, control circuit or ground circuit, be sure to check
the related component/circuit integrity for failures not detected due to a double fault in the circuit. Most ECM driver/
control circuit failures are caused by internal failures to components (i.e. relays and solenoids) and shorted circuits
(i.e. sensor pull-ups, drivers and ground circuits). These faults are difficult to detect when a double fault has
occurred and only one DTC has set. If the DRBIIIT displays faults for multiple components (i.e.VSS, ECT, Batt
Temp, etc.) identify and check the shared circuits for possible problems before continuing (i.e. sensor grounds or
5-volt supply circuits). Refer to the appropriate wiring diagrams to identify shared circuits. Refer to the appropriate
Diesel Powertrain Diagnostic Manual for more information.
STANDARD PROCEDURE - ECM/SKIM PROGRAMMING - DIESEL

NOTE: Before replacing the ECM for a failed driver, control circuit or ground circuit, be sure to check the
related component/circuit integrity for failures not detected due to a double fault in the circuit. Most ECM
driver/control circuit failures are caused by internal component failures (i.e. relay and solenoids) and
shorted circuits (i.e. pull-ups, drivers and switched circuits). These failures are difficult to detect when a
double fault has occurred and only one DTC has set.
ECM/SKIM PROGRAMMING
When a ECM and the SKIM are replaced at the same time perform the following steps in order:
1. Program the new ECM.
2. Program the new SKIM.
3. Replace all ignition keys and program them to the new SKIM.
ECM/SKIM PROGRAMMING
When an ECM and the SKIM are replaced at the same time perform the following steps in order:
1. Program the new SKIM.
2. Program the new ECM.
PROGRAMMING THE ECM (Bosch)

1. To program the VIN, connect the scan tool and turn the ignition on.
2. Select Engine from the main menu. The scan tool will require the VIN to be entered before continuing.
3. Select ENTER to update the VIN. The scan tool will display the updated VIN.
4. If the engine is equipped with air conditioning, the ECM A/C function must be enabled. Enable the ECM A/C
function as follows:
Using the scan tool select ENGINE, MISCELLANEOUS, then ENABLE/DISABLE A/C
Push 1 to enable A/C, the scan tool screen should display A/C Activated.
PROGRAMMING THE SKIM

1. Turn the ignition switch on (transmission in park/neutral).
2. Use the scan tool and select THEFT ALARM, SKIM then MISCELLANEOUS.
3. Select ECM REPLACED (DIESEL ENGINE).
4. Program the vehicle four-digit PIN into SKIM.
5. Select COUNTRY CODE and enter the correct country.
NOTE: Be sure to enter the correct country code. If the incorrect country code is programmed into SKIM,
the SKIM must be replaced.
6. Select YES to update VIN (the SKIM will learn the VIN from the PCM).
7. Press ENTER to transfer the secret key (the PCM will send the secret key to the SKIM).
8. Program ignition keys to SKIM.
NOTE: If the ECM and the SKIM are replaced at the same time, all vehicle keys will need to be replaced and
programmed to the new SKIM.
PROGRAMMING IGNITION KEYS TO THE SKIM

1. Turn the ignition switch on (transmission in park/neutral).
2. Use the scan tool and select THEFT ALARM, SKIM then MISCELLANEOUS.
3. Select PROGRAM IGNITION KEYS.
4. Enter secured access mode by entering the vehicle four-digit PIN.
NOTE: A maximum of eight keys can be learned to each SKIM. Once a key is learned to a SKIM it (the key)
cannot be transferred to another vehicle.
If ignition key programming is unsuccessful, the scan tool will display one of the following messages:
Programming Not Attempted - The scan tool attempts to read the programmed key status and there are no keys
programmed into SKIM memory.
Programming Key Failed (Possible Used Key From Wrong Vehicle) - SKIM is unable to program key due to one of
the following:
faulty ignition key transponder
ignition key is programmed to another vehicle.
8 Keys Already Learned, Programming Not Done - SKIM transponder ID memory is full.
5. Obtain ignition keys to be programmed from customer (8 keys maximum).
6. Using the scan tool, erase all ignition keys by selecting MISCELLANEOUS and ERASE ALL CURRENT IGN.
KEYS.
7. Program all ignition keys.
Learned Key In Ignition - Ignition key transponder ID is currently programmed in SKIM memory.
REMOVAL
2. Disconnect ECM electrical connectors (1).
3. Remove ECM bracket to inner fender retaining nuts
(5).
4. Remove ECM and bracket assembly from vehicle.
5. Separate ECM from bracket.
INSTALLATION
1. Install ECM on bracket (3).
2. Position ECM and bracket assembly in vehicle.
3. Install ECM bracket to inner fender retaining nuts
(5).
4. Connect ECM electrical connectors (1).
MODULE-FRONT CONTROL
DESCRIPTION
The Front Control Module (FCM) is a micro controller
based module located in the right front corner of the
engine compartment. The front control module mates
to the power distribution center to form the Integrated
Power Module (IPM). The IPM connects directly to the
battery and provides the primary means of circuit pro-
tection and power distribution for all vehicle electrical
systems. The FCM controls power to some of these
vehicle systems electrical and electromechanical loads
based on inputs received from hard wired switch
inputs and data received on the CAN bus circuit.
OPERATION
As messages are sent over the CAN bus circuit, the Front Control Module (FCM) reads these messages and con-
trols power to some of the vehicles electrical systems by completing the circuit to ground (low side driver) or com-
pleting the circuit to 12 volt power (high side driver). The following functions are controlled by the FCM:
Air conditioning condenser cooling fan
Daytime running lamps - if equipped
Fog Lamps
Front and rear hazard warning lamps
Front turn signals
Headlamps
Horn
Radiator fans
Rear window defroster power and timing
Stop, turn signal and tail lamps
Windshield and liftgate wiper and washer systems
The FCM provides the following features for the above function:
Acts as a link between the CAN bus network for critical powertrain, anti-lock brake systems, electronic stability
program systems and the network for body and interior modules.
Controls the wipers based on messages on the CAN B bus from the rain sensor module (if equipped).
Controls the adjustable pedal motor on non-memory equipped vehicles.
Controls back-up lamps.
Flashes lamps in response to turn signal, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) and Vehicle Theft Security System
(VTSS) inputs.
Illuminated approach feature that turns the headlamps on when the vehicle is unlocked with the Remote Key-
less Entry (RKE) transmitter.
Minimizes voltage variations to the headlamps to extend bulb life and to equalize the light output from the
lamps, which might otherwise differ due to variations in wiring resistance.
Monitors battery voltage and turns off non-essential functions such as the fog lamps, rear window defogger,
and heated seats if necessary to conserve battery power.
Operates the high-beam headlamps at reduced intensity by pulse-width modulation of the power supply to pro-
vide the daytime running lamps.
Protects the battery from discharge if the headlamps are left on, by automatically turning them off after eight
minutes.
Provides ambient temperature sensor information.

Provides A/C pressure transducer information.
Provides brake fluid level information.
Provides washer fluid level information.
Provides the variable delay intermittent windshield and liftgate wiper time delay features, and the vehicle speed
sensitive windshield wiper delay variation.
Sounds the horn in response to RKE and VTSS inputs.
Turns off the horn in the event of excessively long operation that could otherwise damage the horn.
Turns off the windshield washer motor after 10 seconds of continuous operation to protect the motor.
Controls headlamp washers (if equipped).
Provides wheel speed information on non-ABS equipped vehicles.
Stores vehicle configuration data.

BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1

Diagnostic Test
1. Perform Body Verification Test

1. Disconnect all jumper wires and reconnect all previously disconnected components and connectors.
2. Ensure that all accessories are turned off.
3. Ensure that the battery is fully charged. If the battery was disconnected for any reason, refer to (Refer to 8 -
ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM - STANDARD PROCEDURE - BATTERY RECONNECTION) for accessory cal-
ibration procedures.
4. If the FCM has been replaced, the Pinion Factor MUST be programmed into the FCM. Refer to the scan tool
for program procedure.
5. Turn the ignition on.
6. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs from all modules.
7. (Export only) If the Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) and/or Siren was replaced, select ITM from the from
the scan tool ECU view menu then Misc. Functions and perform the applicable replacement procedure.
8. Perform this step only if diagnosing faults related to the HVAC system.
The Manual Temperature Control (MTC) is not on the Bus and not addressable with a scan tool.
Perform the following to clear DTCs from the MTC: 1. Turn the blower control on. 2. Press the A/C
mode switch down, turn the blower control to off, wait until both LEDs illuminate (approximately 5
seconds) and then release the A/C mode switch. 3. When the A/C status indicator begins flashing
DTCs, set the Mode switch to the floor position, simultaneously press the A/C mode switch and the
EBL mode switch down until both LEDs start flashing (approximately 5 seconds) and then release the
mode switches.
For vehicles equipped with Automatic Temperature Control (ATC), if repairs were made to any of the
HVAC doors, linkage, door actuators, or door actuator circuits, run the actuator calibration function by
selecting the following from the scan tool menu: select HVAC, More Options, System Tests, Actuator
Calibration Test, and Start. Follow the directions displayed by the scan tool. Allow the test to run to
completion before proceeding.
For vehicles equipped with MTC, if repairs were made to any of the HVAC doors, linkage, door actua-
tors, or door actuator circuits, run the door calibration function by performing the following: 1. Turn the
ignition on. 2. Turn the blower control to off. 3. Press the EBL mode switch down, turn the blower
control on, wait until the EBL LED starts flashing (approximately 5 seconds) and then release the
mode switch. Wait approximately 90 seconds for the calibration process to run to completion before
proceeding.
9. Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, and then turn the ignition on.
10. Operate all functions of the system that caused the original concern. If a repair or module replacement was
done to the power windows, operate the motor fully down and then to the full up position and stall it for 2 sec-
onds.
11. With the scan tool, select ECU View and check for DTCs in the modules.
12. Perform this step only if diagnosing faults related to the MTC HVAC system.
NOTE: The A/C status indicator displays active DTCs when the EBL status indictor is not illuminated and
stored DTCs when the EBL status indicator is illuminated.
Perform the following to read DTCs from the MTC: 1. Turn the blower control on. 2. Press the A/C
mode switch down, turn the blower control to off, wait until both LEDs illuminate (approximately 5
seconds) and then release the A/C mode switch. 3. Read the DTCs from the flashing A/C status
indicator.
Are DTCs present in any of the modules or is the original condition still present?
Yes >> The repair is not complete. Refer to the related category for the DTC or symptom that is still present.
No >> The repair is complete.
REMOVAL
formed anytime the battery has been disconnected.
3. Disconnect electrical connectors and remove Front
Control Module (FCM).
INSTALLATION
formed anytime the battery has been disconnected.
1. Position Front Control Module (FCM) and connect
electrical connectors.
MODULE-SEAT MEMORY
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: The scan tool standardization process
must be performed on the Memory Seat Module
(MSM) any time a new module is installed or the
existing module is reflashed.
The Memory Seat Module (MSM) is located under-

neath the driver seat, towards the front and on the
outboard side. It is used in conjunction with the other
modules in the memory system to recall the driver
seat to one of two preset seat positions (horizontal,
vertical, and recliner). The switch for the memory seat
programming and selection mounts on the driver door
trim panel. The memory system is able to store and
recall all driver side power seat positions, outside mir-
ror positions, power tilt/telescopic steering column
positions and power adjustable pedal position. The
system can be set for two different drivers. On vehi-
cles with a factory installed radio connected to the
Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus network, the memory system is also able to store and recall up to twelve
radio station presets (six AM and six FM), also for two drivers. The memory system will also store and recall the last
station listened to for each driver, even if it is not one of the twelve preset stations.
The memory system will automatically recall all of these settings when a button of the memory switch is depressed,
or when the doors are unlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter (if the RKE Linked to Memory
feature is enabled). If the vehicle has more than two drivers the RKE transmitter recall of memory features can be
disabled. This is a customer programmable feature of the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).
OPERATION
The Memory Seat Module (MSM) receives battery current through a 25 amp circuit breaker in the Power Distribution
Center (PDC) so that the memory system remains operational, regardless of the ignition switch position. When the
driver memory switch button is pushed, a resistance signal is sent to the MSM via the Controller Area Network
(CAN) bus circuit. The MSM is responsible for the 12v battery feed and ground path to the power seat adjuster
motor and other memory system components.
The MSM receives memory set/position switch input through the CAN bus circuit. The MSM also receives hard
wired input from the hall effect sensors, mounted on each of the driver power seat adjuster motors and the driver
side view mirror motor. The programmed software in the module allows it to know where the seat, adjustable ped-
als, and steering column tilt/telescope are located in its designed travel by a pulse count generated from the hall
effect sensors. This way, when the memory switch is depressed the module will power these components until the
correct preset location is achieved. The module will prevent the seat memory recall function from being initiated, if
the transmission gear selector lever is not in the Park position, or if the vehicle is moving. These inputs are mon-
itored over the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit by the MSM.
A memory setting is saved by pressing the set button, then pressing either the memory 1 or 2 button within 5
seconds of pressing the set button.
A memory setting is recalled by pressing either the memory 1 or 2 button, or by pressing the unlock button on
a linked Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
For driver safety, memorized settings can not be recalled if the transmission is in a position other than Park or the
seat belt is latched.
The MSM performs the following functions:
Positions the driver power seat (vertical, horizontal, and recliner positions).
Positions the power adjustable pedals.
Positions the power tilt/telescopic steering column positions.
Sends the memory save or recall (#1 or #2) command over the CAN data bus circuit to the other memory
system components, radio station pre-sets and power mirror positions.
Provides for linking the key FOBs to memory.
Provides for the easy entry/exit feature.
Provides the tilt mirrors in reverse feature.
When a memory button is pressed (#1 or #2) on the memory switch, the Driver Door Module (DDM) sends a recall
message to the MSM. The MSM will then position the memory system components to the preprogrammed location/
setting. When the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter button is pressed, depending on which transmitter (#1
or #2), the SKREEM (RKE Receiver) sends the recall request and FOB number (#1 or #2) data message. This RKE
transmitter function depends on if the MSM is programmed to trigger the recall (linked FOBs).
For driver safety, memorized settings can not be recalled if the transmission is in any position other than park or the
A key FOB is linked to a memory setting by pressing the set button and then pressing either the memory 1 or
2 button within 5 seconds of pressing the set button, and then, with the key removed from the cylinder, pressing
the lock button on the selected key FOB.
The memory system Easy Entry and Exit feature provides the driver with more room to enter or exit the vehicle.
This is a customer programmable feature of the overhead console. When the seat is in a memorized position, it will
move rearward 55 millimeters or to the end of its travel, whichever occurs first, when the key is removed from the
ignition switch lock cylinder. A lock out zone of 60 millimeters has been established to protect rear passengers from
injury. If the memorized seat position is within the lock out zone the Easy Exit/Entry seat glide feature is disabled.
The seat will return to the memory position when the driver turns the vehicles ignition switch out of the LOCK
position.
The memory system 9Tilt in Reverse9 feature tilts the outside mirrors down a fixed, incremental angle when the
vehicle is shifted into REVERSE with the ignition switch in the RUN position. This feature provides the customer
with a better view of the ground and vehicle in the area of the rear tires when backing up. The mirrors move back
to their previous position when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE.
The memory system learns the seat and adjustable pedal motor maximum end positions when the motor reaches
the limit of travel in any direction and stalls. Subsequently, movement will stop just short of that position to avoid
extra stress on the motors and mechanisms. If the system learned a maximum position as a result of an obstruction,
as for instance if a large object was placed on the floor behind the seat, the system can relearn the true maximum
position through manually operating the power seat after the obstruction is removed.
NOTE: It is normal for the power accessories contained in the memory system to stop at the maximum
learned position and then continue to the true maximum position when the control switch is released
and then applied in the same direction a second time.
Certain functions and features of the memory system rely upon resources shared with other electronic modules in
the vehicle over the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus. The CAN bus allows the sharing of sensor information.
This helps to reduce wire harness complexity, internal controller hardware, and component sensor current loads. At
the same time, this system provides increased reliability, enhanced diagnostics, and allows the addition of many
new feature capabilities. For diagnosis of these electronic modules or of the CAN bus, the use of a scan tool and
the proper diagnostic information are needed.

MEMORY SEAT MODULE
In order to obtain conclusive testing of the memory system, the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus, and all of
the electronic modules that provide inputs to, or receive outputs from the memory system components must be
checked. Any diagnosis of the memory system/module should begin with, the use of a scan tool and the
appropriate diagnostic service information.
Refer to the appropriate wiring information for complete circuit schematic or connector pin-out information.
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with the memory/heated seat option utilize a low voltage cut-off feature. This fea-
ture turns off the 12v power to the power seat system anytime vehicle voltage is below 11.7v. Be certain to
check the vehicle electrical system for proper voltage anytime the power seat system appears inoperative.
Before any testing of the power seat system is attempted, the battery should be fully-charged.
REMOVAL
2. Remove the driver seat cushion/cover (2) (Refer to
23 - BODY/SEATS/SEAT CUSHION COVER -
REMOVAL).
3. Pivot the module upward and disconnect the elec-
trical connectors (1).
4. Unsnap the memory seat module (4) from the side
brackets.
5. Pull the module rearward to remove it from the
front of the seat frame (3).
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: The Memory Seat Module (MSM) mounting tabs can be damaged during module installation. Use
care to properly align tabs to prevent binding that could result in tab breakage.
1. Place the Memory Seat Module (MSM) (4) into

position making sure the mounting tabs are prop-
erly aligned with the front bracket.
2. Push down on the rear of the MSM (4) snapping
the retaining clips into place in the side brackets.
3. Connect the MSM rear harness connectors (1).
4. Connect the MSM front harness connectors.
5. Install the driver seat cushion/cover (2) (Refer to 23
- BODY/SEATS/SEAT CUSHION COVER -
INSTALLATION).
7. Using an appropriate scan tool go to the MSM mis-
cellaneous functions and perform the standardiza-
tion routine.
8. Verify system and vehicle operation.
MODULE-STEERING CONTROL
DESCRIPTION
The Steering Control Module (SCM) is the module
located in the bottom of the Steering Column Control
Module (SCCM), retained by three screws, and is the
mating point for all the switches (remote radio
switches, horn, speed control, steering angle sensor,
tilt/telescopic switch, multi-function switch, clockspring)
located in the SCCM. The SCM is screwed directly to
the bottom of the multi-function switch. All the other
switches are mounted on top of the multi-function
switch.
OPERATION
The Steering Control Module (SCM) communicates via the Local Interconnect Network (LIN) serial data bus. This is
an ultra-low voltage serial data bus that allows the following components to communicate with the Controller Area
Network (CAN) B and C data buses.
Steering Wheel Switches
Horn
Speed Control Switch
Multi-function Switch
Tilt/Telescoping Switch (if equipped)
Steering Angle Sensor (if equipped with Electronic Stability Program (ESP))
Steering Control Module (SCM)
The SCM changes the LIN communication to CAN communication and also stores Diagnostic Trouble Codes
(DTCs) for the switches within the SCCM.
For removal and installation, disassembly and assembly of the SCCM, refer to the following:
NOTE: For Steering Column Module (SCM) removal and installation, refer to the disassembly and assembly
procedures for the Steering Column Control Module (SCCM).
Removal of SCCM (Refer to 19 - STEERING/COLUMN/STEERING COLUMN CONTROL MODULE -

REMOVAL).
Disassembly of SCCM (Refer to 19 - STEERING/COLUMN/STEERING COLUMN CONTROL MODULE - DIS-
ASSEMBLY).
Assembly of SCCM (Refer to 19 - STEERING/COLUMN/STEERING COLUMN CONTROL MODULE - ASSEM-
BLY).
Installation of the SCCM (Refer to 19 - STEERING/COLUMN/STEERING COLUMN CONTROL MODULE -
INSTALLATION).
The SCM is not serviceable and if found faulty, it must be replaced as a unit.
MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL
DESCRIPTION
DESCRIPTION - PCM
The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) is located in
the engine compartment. The PCM is referred to as
NGC.
MODES OF OPERATION
As input signals to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) change, the PCM adjusts its response to the output
devices. For example, the PCM must calculate different injector pulse width and ignition timing for idle than it does
for wide open throttle (WOT).
The PCM will operate in two different modes: Open Loop and Closed Loop.
During Open Loop modes, the PCM receives input signals and responds only according to preset PCM program-
ming. Input from the oxygen (O2S) sensors is not monitored during Open Loop modes.
During Closed Loop modes, the PCM will monitor the oxygen (O2S) sensors input. This input indicates to the PCM
whether or not the calculated injector pulse width results in the ideal air-fuel ratio. This ratio is 14.7 parts air-to-1
part fuel. By monitoring the exhaust oxygen content through the O2S sensor, the PCM can fine tune the injector
pulse width. This is done to achieve optimum fuel economy combined with low emission engine performance.
The fuel injection system has the following modes of operation:
Ignition switch ON
Engine start-up (crank)
Engine warm-up
Idle
Cruise
Acceleration
Deceleration
Wide open throttle (WOT)
Ignition switch OFF
The ignition switch On, engine start-up (crank), engine warm-up, acceleration, deceleration and wide open throttle
modes are Open Loop modes. The idle and cruise modes, (with the engine at operating temperature) are Closed
Loop modes.
IGNITION SWITCH (KEY-ON) MODE

This is an Open Loop mode. When the fuel system is activated by the ignition switch, the following actions occur:
The PCM determines atmospheric air pressure from the MAP sensor input to determine basic fuel strategy.
The PCM monitors the engine coolant temperature sensor input. The PCM modifies fuel strategy based on this
input.
Intake manifold air temperature sensor input is monitored.
Throttle position sensor (TPS) is monitored.
The auto shutdown (ASD) relay is energized by the PCM for approximately three seconds.
The fuel pump is energized through the fuel pump relay by the PCM. The fuel pump will operate for approx-
imately three seconds unless the engine is operating or the starter motor is engaged.
The O2S sensor heater element is energized via the O2S relays. The O2S sensor input is not used by the
PCM to calibrate air-fuel ratio during this mode of operation.
ENGINE START-UP MODE

This is an Open Loop mode. The following actions occur when the starter motor is engaged.
The PCM receives inputs from:
Battery voltage
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Crankshaft position sensor
Intake manifold air temperature sensor
Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor
Throttle position sensor (TPS)
Starter motor relay
Camshaft position sensor signal
The PCM monitors the crankshaft position sensor. If the PCM does not receive a crankshaft position sensor signal
within approximately 3 seconds of cranking the engine, it will shut down the fuel injection system.
The fuel pump is activated by the PCM through the fuel pump relay.
Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then control the injection
sequence and injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off.
The PCM determines the proper ignition timing according to input received from the crankshaft position sensor.
ENGINE WARM-UP MODE

This is an Open Loop mode. During engine warm-up, the PCM receives inputs from:
Battery voltage
Park/neutral switch (gear indicator signalauto. trans. only)
Air conditioning select signal (if equipped)
Air conditioning request signal (if equipped)
Based on these inputs the following occurs:
The PCM adjusts engine idle speed through the idle air control (IAC) motor and adjusts ignition timing.
The PCM operates the A/C compressor clutch through the clutch relay. This is done if A/C has been selected
by the vehicle operator and requested by the A/C thermostat.
When engine has reached operating temperature, the PCM will begin monitoring O2S sensor input. The sys-
tem will then leave the warm-up mode and go into closed loop operation.
IDLE MODE
When the engine is at operating temperature, this is a Closed Loop mode. At idle speed, the PCM receives inputs
from:
Battery voltage
Battery voltage
Oxygen sensors
Based on these inputs, the following occurs:
Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then control injection
The PCM monitors the O2S sensor input and adjusts air-fuel ratio by varying injector pulse width. It also
adjusts engine idle speed through the idle air control (IAC) motor.
The PCM adjusts ignition timing by increasing and decreasing spark advance.
The PCM operates the A/C compressor clutch through the clutch relay. This happens if A/C has been selected
CRUISE MODE
When the engine is at operating temperature, this is a Closed Loop mode. At cruising speed, the PCM receives
inputs from:
Battery voltage
Oxygen (O2S) sensors
Based on these inputs, the following occurs:
Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then adjust the injector
pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off.
The PCM monitors the O2S sensor input and adjusts air-fuel ratio.
The PCM adjusts ignition timing by turning the ground path to the coils on and off.
The PCM operates the A/C compressor clutch through the clutch relay. This happens if A/C has been selected
ACCELERATION MODE
This is an Open Loop mode. The PCM recognizes an abrupt increase in throttle position or MAP pressure as a
demand for increased engine output and vehicle acceleration. The PCM increases injector pulse width in response
to increased throttle opening.
DECELERATION MODE
When the engine is at operating temperature, this is an Open Loop mode. During hard deceleration, the PCM
receives the following inputs.
Battery voltage
Vehicle speed
If the vehicle is under hard deceleration with the proper rpm and closed throttle conditions, the PCM will ignore the
oxygen sensor input signal. The PCM will enter a fuel cut-off strategy in which it will not supply a ground to the
injectors. If a hard deceleration does not exist, the PCM will determine the proper injector pulse width and continue
injection.
The PCM adjusts ignition timing by turning the ground path to the coils on and off.
WIDE OPEN THROTTLE MODE

This is an Open Loop mode. During wide open throttle operation, the PCM receives the following inputs.
Battery voltage
During wide open throttle conditions, the following occurs:
sequence and injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off. The PCM
ignores the oxygen sensor input signal and provides a predetermined amount of additional fuel. This is done
by adjusting injector pulse width.
The PCM adjusts ignition timing by turning the ground path to the coil on and off.
IGNITION SWITCH OFF MODE

When ignition switch is turned to OFF position, the PCM stops operating the injectors, ignition coil, ASD relay and
fuel pump relay.
5 VOLT SUPPLIES
Two different Powertrain Control Module (PCM) five volt supply circuits are used; primary and secondary.
IGNITION CIRCUIT SENSE

This circuit ties the ignition switch to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM).
POWER GROUNDS
The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) has 2 main grounds. Both of these grounds are referred to as power
grounds. All of the high-current, noisy, electrical devices are connected to these grounds as well as all of the sensor
returns. The sensor return comes into the sensor return circuit, passes through noise suppression, and is then con-
nected to the power ground.
The power ground is used to control ground circuits for the following PCM loads:
Generator field winding
Fuel injectors
Ignition coil(s)
Certain relays/solenoids
Certain sensors
SENSOR RETURN
The Sensor Return circuits are internal to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM).
Sensor Return provides a lownoise ground reference for all engine control system sensors. Refer to Power
Grounds for more information.
OPERATION
OPERATION - PCM
1. Also refer to Modes of Operation.
The PCM operates the fuel system. The PCM is a pre-programmed, triple microprocessor digital computer. It reg-
ulates ignition timing, air-fuel ratio, emission control devices, charging system, certain transmission features, speed
control, air conditioning compressor clutch engagement and idle speed. The PCM can adapt its programming to
meet changing operating conditions.
The PCM receives input signals from various switches and sensors. Based on these inputs, the PCM regulates
various engine and vehicle operations through different system components. These components are referred to as
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Outputs. The sensors and switches that provide inputs to the PCM are consid-
ered Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Inputs.
The PCM adjusts ignition timing based upon inputs it receives from sensors that react to: engine rpm, manifold
absolute pressure, engine coolant temperature, throttle position, transmission gear selection (automatic transmis-
sion), vehicle speed and the brake switch.
The PCM adjusts idle speed based on inputs it receives from sensors that react to: throttle position, vehicle speed,
transmission gear selection, engine coolant temperature and from inputs it receives from the air conditioning clutch
switch and brake switch.
Based on inputs that it receives, the PCM adjusts ignition coil dwell. The PCM also adjusts the generator charge
rate through control of the generator field and provides speed control operation.
NOTE: PCM Inputs:
A/C request
Auto shutdown (ASD) sense
Battery temperature
Battery voltage
Brake switch
J1850 bus circuits
Data link connections for scan tool
Five volts (primary)
Five volts (secondary)
Fuel level
Generator (battery voltage) output
Ignition circuit sense (ignition switch in on/off/crank/run position)
Leak detection pump (switch) sense (if equipped)

Oil pressure
Overdrive/override switch
Oxygen sensors
Park/neutral switch (auto. trans. only)
Power ground
Sensor return
Signal ground
Speed control multiplexed single wire input
Throttle position sensor
Transmission governor pressure sensor
Transmission temperature sensor
Vehicle speed (from ABS module)
NOTE: PCM Outputs:
A/C clutch relay

Auto shutdown (ASD) relay
J1850 (+/-) circuits for: speedometer, voltmeter, fuel gauge, oil pressure gauge/lamp, engine temp. gauge and
speed control warn. lamp
Data link connection for scan tool
EGR valve control solenoid (if equipped)
EVAP canister purge solenoid
Fuel injectors
Fuel pump relay
Generator field driver (-)
Generator field driver (+)
Generator lamp (if equipped)
Ignition coil
Natural Vacuum Leak detection Switch
Malfunction indicator lamp (Check engine lamp). Driven through J1850 circuits.
Overdrive indicator lamp (if equipped). Driven through J1850 circuits.
Oxygen sensor heater relays (if equipped).
Radiator cooling fan relay (pulse width modulated)
Speed control source
Speed control vacuum solenoid
Speed control vent solenoid
Tachometer (if equipped). Driven through J1850 circuits.
Transmission convertor clutch circuit
Transmission 34 shift solenoid
Transmission relay
Transmission temperature lamp (if equipped)
Transmission variable force solenoid
5 VOLT SUPPLIES
Primary 5-volt supply:
supplies the required 5 volt power source to the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor.
supplies the required 5 volt power source to the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor.
supplies a reference voltage for the Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor.
supplies a reference voltage for the Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) sensor.
Secondary 5-volt supply:
supplies the required 5 volt power source to the oil pressure sensor.
supplies the required 5 volt power source for the Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) (if equipped).
supplies the 5 volt power source to the transmission pressure sensor (if equipped with an RE automatic trans-
mission).
OPERATION - IGNITION CIRCUIT SENSE

The ignition circuit sense input tells the PCM the ignition switch has energized the ignition circuit.
Battery voltage is also supplied to the PCM through the ignition switch when the ignition is in the RUN or START
position. This is referred to as the 9ignition sense9 circuit and is used to 9wake up9 the PCM.

NGC POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST VER - 1

For the Engine circuit diagram (Refer to 9 - ENGINE - SCHEMATICS AND DIAGRAMS).
Diagnostic Test
1. NGC POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST VER - 1

NOTE: 1. If this vehicle is equipped with an Electron Throttle Control system, and the APP Sensors, PCM, or
Throttle Body Assembly have been replaced, use a scan tool to perform the ETC RELEARN function.
NOTE: 2. If the PCM or FCM have been replaced, the Pinion Factor MUST be programmed into the FCM.
While programming the Pinion Factor into the FCM the scan tool will send the Pinion Factor information to
the PCM at the same time. Refer to the scan tool for program procedure.
NOTE: 3. If the PCM has been replaced and the correct VIN and mileage have not been programmed, a DTC
will set in the ABS Module, Airbag Module and the SKIM.
NOTE: 4. If the vehicle is equipped with a Sentry Key Immobilizer System, Secret Key data must be updated.
Refer to the Service Information for the PCM, SKIM and the Transponder (ignition key) for programming
information.
5. Inspect the vehicle to ensure that all components related to the repair are properly installed and connected.
6. Inspect the engine oil for fuel contamination. Replace the oil and filter as necessary.
7. Attempt to start the engine.
8. If the No Start condition is still present, refer to the Engine Electrical Diagnostic list and perform the diagnostic
testing as necessary, refer to any Technical Service Bulletins that may apply.
9. Run the engine for one warm-up cycle to verify operation.
10. With the scan tool, confirm that no DTCs are present and that all components are functioning properly.
NOTE: The PCM can detect and compensate for variances in the engine and its components. To learn these
variations, the PCM uses the input of the actual crankshaft rotation pattern and ideal crankshaft rotation
pattern that has been calibrated into the PCM. The PCM then compares the two patterns. The variation
between the two values is the Adaptive Numerator. If the Adaptive Numerator is not learned by the PCM, the
misfire monitor will not run and the Multi-Cylinder Displacement System (MDS) will not operate. Without
MDS operation, the customer will experience decreased fuel economy. If the customer experiences decrease
fuel economy or after any repair use the scan tool to ensure that the Adaptive Numerator is learned.
Are any DTCs or symptoms remaining?
Yes >> Check for any related Technical Service Bulletins and/or refer to the appropriate Diagnostic Procedure.

Diagnostic Test

NOTE: 1. If this vehicle is equipped with a Electronic Throttle Control system, and the APP Sensors, PCM,
or Throttle Body Assembly have been replaced, use a scan tool to perform the ETC RELEARN function.
NOTE: 2. If the PCM or FCM have been replaced, the Pinion Factor MUST be programmed into the FCM.
While programming the Pinion Factor into the FCM the scan tool will send the Pinion Factor information to
the PCM at the same time. Refer to the scan tool for program procedure.
information.
5. Inspect the vehicle to make sure that all components related to the repair are properly installed and connected.
6. With a scan tool, clear DTCs and Reset Memory all engine values.
7. Run the engine for one warm-up cycle to verify proper operation.
8. Road test the vehicle. Use all accessories that may be related to this repair.
9. With the scan tool, confirm that no DTCs are present and that all components are functioning properly.
10. If this test is being performed after a No Trouble Code test, verify the symptom is no longer present.
Yes >> Check for any related Technical Service Bulletins and/or refer to the appropriate Diagnostic Procedure.

Diagnostic Test

1. If this vehicle is equipped with an Electronic Throttle Control system, and the APP Sensors, PCM, or Throttle
Body Assembly has been replaced use a scan tool to perform the ETC RELEARN function.
NOTE: 2. After completing the Powertrain Verification Test the Transmission Verification Test must be per-
formed.
information.
5. Inspect the vehicle to make sure that all components related to the repair are properly installed and connected.
6. With the scan tool, clear DTCs.
7. Perform generator output test. Refer to the appropriate service information as necessary.
8. Start the engine and set engine speed to 2000 RPM for at least thirty seconds.
9. Cycle the ignition key off and on.
10. With the scan tool, read the DTCs.
Yes >> Check for any Technical Service Bulletins and/or refer to the appropriate Diagnostic Procedure.

Diagnostic Test

NOTE: If this vehicle is equipped with an Electronic Throttle Control system, and the APP Sensors, PCM, or
Throttle Body Assembly have been replaced, use the scan tool to perform the ETC RELEARN function.
formed.
information.
5. Inspect the vehicle to make sure that all engine components are properly installed and connected.
6. Connect the scan tool to the data link connector and erase all codes.
7. Turn the speed control ON (if equipped, cruise light will be on).
8. Depress and release the SET Switch when the vehicle speed is greater than 35 MPH. The speed control should
engage and hold the selected speed.
9. Press and hold the RESUME/ACCEL Switch. The vehicle speed should increase by at least 2 MPH.
10. Press and hold the COAST switch. The vehicle speed should decrease.
11. Using caution, press and release the brake pedal. The speed control should disengage.
12. Bring the vehicle speed back up to 35 MPH.
13. Press the RESUME/ACCEL switch. The speed control should resume the previously set speed.
14. Hold down the SET switch. The vehicle should decelerate.
15. Make sure vehicle speed is greater than 35 mph and release the SET Switch. The vehicle should adjust and set
a new vehicle speed.
16. Press and release the CANCEL switch. The speed control should disengage.
17. Bring the vehicle speed back up above 35 mph and engage speed control.
18. Turn the Speed Control Off. (Cruise light will be off). The speed control should disengage.
NOTE: OVERSHOOT/UNDERSHOOT FOLLOWING SPEED CONTROL SET.
20. If the vehicle operator repeatedly presses and releases the SET button with their foot off of the accelerator
(referred to as 9lift foot set9), the vehicle may accelerate and exceed the desired set speed by up to 5 mph (8 km/h).
21. It may also decelerate to less than the desired set speed, before finally achieving the desired set speed.
22. The Speed Control System has an adaptive strategy that compensates for vehicle-to-vehicle variations in speed
control cable lengths.
23. When the speed control is set with the vehicles operators foot off of the accelerator pedal, the speed control
thinks there is excessive speed control cable slack and adapts accordingly.
24. If the 9lift foot sets9 are continually used, a speed control overshoot/undershoot condition will develop.
25. To 9unlearn9 the overshoot/undershoot condition, the vehicle operator has to press and release the set button
while maintaining the desired set speed using the accelerator pedal (not decelerating or accelerating).
26. Then turn the cruise control switch to the OFF position (or press the CANCEL button if equipped) after waiting
10 seconds.
27. This procedure must be performed approximately 10-15 times to completely unlearn the overshoot/undershoot
condition.
Did the Speed Control pass the above test?
Yes >> Repair is complete.
No >> Check for any related Technical Service Bulletins and/or refer to the appropriate Diagnostic Procedure.

Diagnostic Test

formed.
information.
NOTE: 4. If this vehicle is equipped with an Electronic Throttle Control system, and the APP Sensors, PCM,
or Throttle Body Assembly have been replaced, use the scan tool to perform the ETC RELEARN function.
NOTE: 5. When replacing an O2 Sensor, the PCM RAM memory must be cleared, either by disconnecting the
PCM C-1 connector or momentarily disconnecting the Battery negative terminal.
6. The NGC learns the characteristics of each O2 heater element and these old values should be cleared when
installing a new O2 sensor. The customer may experience driveability issues if this is not performed.
7. Inspect the vehicle to ensure that all engine components are properly installed and connected. Reassemble and
reconnect components as necessary.
8. Connect the scan tool to the data link connector.
9. Make sure the fuel tank has at least a quarter tank of fuel. Turn off all accessories.
10. If the Catalyst was replaced, with the scan tool go to the Miscellaneous Menu Option 9Catalyst Replaced9 and
press enter.
11. If a Comprehensive Component DTC was repaired, perform steps 12 - 14. If a Major OBDII Monitor DTC was
repaired skip those steps and continue verification.
12. After the ignition has been off for at least 10 seconds, restart the vehicle and run 2 minutes.
13. With the scan tool, monitor the appropriate pre-test enabling conditions until all conditions have been met. Once
the conditions have been met, switch screen to the appropriate OBDII monitor, (Audible beeps when the monitor is
running).
14. If the repaired OBDII trouble code has reset or was seen in the monitor while on the road test, the repair is not
complete. Check for any related technical service bulletins or flash updates and return to Engine Electrical Diag-
nostic List.
15. If the conditions cannot be duplicated, erase all DTCs with the Scan Tool.
16. If another DTC has set, return to the Engine Electrical Diagnostic List and follow the path specified for that DTC.
Did the OBDII Monitor run successfully and has the Good Trip Counter changed to one or more?
Yes >> Repair is complete.
No >> Check for any related Technical Service Bulletins and/or refer to the appropriate Diagnostic Procedure.

Diagnostic Test

1. Install the Miller Tool #8404 Evaporative Emission Leak Detector (EELD) according to the instructions in the pre-
vious DTC table.
2. Set the smoke/air control switch to AIR.
3. Insert the testers AIR supply tip (clear hose) into the appropriate calibration orifice on the testers control panel
(based on DTC leak size).
4. Press the remote smoke/air start button.
5. Position the red flag on the air flow meter so it is aligned with the indicator ball.
6. When the calibration is complete, release the remote button. The EELD flow meter is now calibrated in liters per
minute to the size of leak indicated by the DTC set in the PCM.
7. Install the service port adapter #8404-14 on the vehicles service port.
8. Connect the Air supply hose from the EELD to the vehicle.
9. Press the remote button to activate AIR flow.
NOTE: 10. Larger volume fuel tanks, lower fuel levels or if the vehicle is equipped with a Flow Management
Valve may indicate high flow and will require 4 to 5 minutes to fill.
11. Compare the flow meter indicator ball reading to the red flag.
12. ABOVE the red flag indicates a leak present.
13. BELOW the red flag indicates a sealed system.
NOTE: If this vehicle is equipped with an Electronic Throttle Control system, and the APP Sensors, PCM, or
Throttle Body Assembly have been replaced, use the scan tool to perform the ETC RELEARN function.
15. If the indicator ball shows a leak present, perform the smoke test indicated in the previous test and identify the
leak and repair. Perform this verification test when the repair is complete.
Did the indicator ball indicate the a leak is present?
Yes >> Repeat the DTC test to identify the leak and repair.
STANDARD PROCEDURE
TCM QUICK LEARN - 42RLE Only
The quick learn procedure requires the use of the appropriate scan tool.
This program allows the electronic transmission system to recalibrate itself. This will provide the proper transmission
operation. The quick learn procedure should be performed if any of the following procedures are performed:
Transmission Assembly Replacement
Transmission Control Module Replacement
Solenoid Pack Replacement
Clutch Plate and/or Seal Replacement
Valve Body Replacement or Recondition
To perform the Quick Learn Procedure, the following conditions must be met:
The brakes must be applied

The engine speed must be above 500 rpm
The throttle angle (TPS) must be less than 3 degrees
The shift lever position must stay in PARK until prompted to shift to overdrive
The shift lever position must stay in overdrive after the Shift to Overdrive prompt until the scan tool indicates
the procedure is complete.
The calculated oil temperature must be above 60 and below 200
TCM ADAPTATION - NAG1 Only

The adaptation procedure requires the use of the appropriate scan tool. This program allows the electronic trans-
mission system to re-calibrate itself. This will provide the proper baseline transmission operation. The adaptation
procedure should be performed if any of the following procedures are performed:
Electrohydraulic Unit Replacement or Recondition
1. With the scan tool, reset the Transmission adaptives. Resetting the adaptives will set the adaptives to factory
settings.
NOTE: Perform the Coast Down Adaptations first. The Transmission Temperature must be greater than 60C
(140F) and less than 70C (158F). Failure to stay within these temperature ranges will void the procedure.
2. Drive the vehicle until the transmission temperature is in the specified range.
3. Perform 4 to 5 coast downs from 5th to 4th gear and then 4th to 3rd gear.
NOTE: For Upshift adaptation, the Transmission temperature must be greater than 60C (140F) and less
than 100C (212F). Failure to stay within these temperature ranges will void this procedure.
4. From a stop, moderately accelerate the vehicle and obtain all forward gear ranges while keeping the Engine
RPM below 1800 RPM. Repeat this procedure 4 to 5 times.
5. Obtaining 5th gear may be difficult at 1800 RPM. Allow the transmission to shift into 5th gear at a higher RPM
then lower the RPM to 1800 and perform manual shifts between 4th and 5th gears using the shift lever.
6. The TCM will store the adaptives every 10 minutes. After completion of the adaptation procedure make sure the
vehicle stays running for at least 10 minutes.
7. It is possible to manually store the adaptives under the 10 minute time frame using the scan tool Store Adaptives
procedure.
REMOVAL
USE THE SCAN TOOL TO REPROGRAM THE NEW POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) WITH THE
VEHICLES ORIGINAL IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) AND THE VEHICLES ORIGINAL MILEAGE. IF THIS
STEP IS NOT DONE, A DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) MAY BE SET.
To avoid possible voltage spike damage to PCM, ignition key must be off, and negative battery cable must be dis-
connected before unplugging PCM connectors.
2. Remove PCM bracket-to-body mounting bolt.

3. Remove assembly from vehicle.
4. Unlock and disconnect the electrical connectors
from PCM.
5. Remove bracket from PCM.

6. Remove the rubber bumper from PCM.
INSTALLATION
USE THE SCAN TOOL TO REPROGRAM THE NEW POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) WITH THE
VEHICLES ORIGINAL IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) AND THE VEHICLES ORIGINAL MILEAGE. IF THIS
STEP IS NOT DONE, A DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) MAY BE SET.
1. Install rubber bumper to PCM back.
2. Check pins in electrical connectors for damage.
Repair as necessary.
3. Install electrical connectors to PCM.
4. Install mounting bracket to PCM.
5. Install assembly to body. Install bolt and tighten 9

6. Connect negative cable to battery.

7. Use the scan tool to reprogram new PCM with vehicles original Identification Number (VIN) and original vehicle
mileage.
MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL
DESCRIPTION
TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE - 42RLE
The Transmission Control Module (TCM) is a sub-
module within the Powertrain Control Module (PCM).
The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) is located in
the right rear of the engine compartment, just in front
of the windshield.
TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE - NAG1

The electronic control system consists of various com-
ponents providing inputs to the transmission control
module (TCM). The TCM monitors transmission sen-
sors, shift lever position, and bus messages to deter-
mine transmission shift strategy. After shift strategies
are determined, the TCM controls the actuation of
transmission solenoids, which controls the routing of
hydraulic fluid within the transmission, by moving a
sequence of four valves to make a shift occur.
The NAG1 electronic transmission has a fully adaptive
control system. The system performs its functions
based on continuous real-time sensor feedback infor-
mation. In addition the TCM receives information from
the PCM (engine management) and ABS (chassis sys-
tems) controllers over the CAN bus. The CAN bus is a
high-speed communication bus that allows real time
control capability between various controllers. Most
messages are sent every 20 milliseconds. This means
critical information can be shared between the trans-
mission, engine, and ABS controllers. The CAN bus is
a two wire bus with a CAN Bus (+) circuit and a CAN
Bus (-) circuit. These circuits are twisted pairs in the
harness to reduce the potential of radio and noise interference.
The transmission control system automatically adapts to changes in engine performance, vehicle speed, and trans-
mission temperature variations to provide consistent shift quality. The control system ensures that clutch operation
during up-shifting and downshifting is more responsive without increased harshness. The TCM activates the sole-
noid valves and moves valves in the valve body to achieve the necessary gear changes. The required pressure
level is calculated from the load condition, engine speed. Vehicle speed (from ABS module) and transmission oil
temperature, matched to the torque to be transmitted. The TCM is located under the left side of the instrument panel
for left hand drive vehicles. For right hand drive vehicles, the TCM is located in the mirrored location under the right
side of the instrument panel.
OPERATION
TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE - 42RLE
The Transmission Control Module (TCM) controls all electronic operations of the transmission. The TCM receives
information regarding vehicle operation from both direct and indirect inputs, and selects the operational mode of the
transmission. Direct inputs are hard wired to, and used specifically by the TCM. Indirect inputs are shared with the
TCM via the vehicle communication bus.
Some examples of direct inputs to the TCM are:
Battery (B+) voltage
Ignition ON voltage
Transmission Control Relay (Switched B+)
Throttle Position Sensor
Crankshaft Position Sensor
Transmission Range Sensor
Pressure Switches
Transmission Temperature Sensor
Input Shaft Speed Sensor
Output Shaft Speed Sensor
Line Pressure Sensor
Some examples of indirect inputs to the TCM are:
Engine/Body Identification
Manifold Pressure
Target Idle
Torque Reduction Confirmation
Engine Coolant Temperature
Ambient/Battery Temperature
Scan Tool Communication
Based on the information received from these various inputs, the TCM determines the appropriate shift schedule
and shift points, depending on the present operating conditions and driver demand. This is possible through the
control of various direct and indirect outputs.
Some examples of TCM direct outputs are:
Transmission Control Relay
Solenoids
Torque Reduction Request
Some examples of TCM indirect outputs are:
Transmission Temperature (to PCM)
PRNDL Position (to cluster/CCN)
In addition to monitoring inputs and controlling outputs, the TCM has other important responsibilities and functions:
Storing and maintaining Clutch Volume Indexes (CVI)
Storing and selecting appropriate Shift Schedules
System self-diagnostics
Diagnostic capabilities (with scan tool)
NOTE: If the TCM has been replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. (Refer to 8 - ELEC-
TRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES/TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE - STANDARD PROCE-
DURE)
BATTERY FEED
A fused, direct battery feed to the TCM is used for continuous power. This battery voltage is necessary to retain
memory in the TCM. When the battery (B+) is disconnected, this memory is lost. When the battery (B+) is restored,
this memory loss is detected by the TCM and a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) is set.
CLUTCH VOLUME INDEXES (CVI)

An important function of the TCM is to monitor Clutch
Volume Indexes (CVI). CVIs represent the volume of
fluid needed to compress a clutch pack.
The TCM monitors gear ratio changes by monitoring
the Input and Output Speed Sensors. The Input, or
Turbine Speed Sensor sends an electrical signal to
the TCM that represents input shaft rpm. The Output
Speed Sensor provides the TCM with output shaft
speed information.
By comparing the two inputs, the TCM can determine
transmission gear position. This is important to the
CVI calculation because the TCM determines CVIs by
monitoring how long it takes for a gear change to
occur.
Gear ratios can be determined by using the Scan Tool
and reading the Input/Output Speed Sensor values in
the Monitors display. Gear ratio can be obtained by
dividing the Input Speed Sensor value by the Output
Speed Sensor value.
For example, if the input shaft is rotating at 1000 rpm
and the output shaft is rotating at 500 rpm, then the
TCM can determine that the gear ratio is 2:1. In direct drive (3rd gear), the gear ratio changes to 1:1. The gear ratio
changes as clutches are applied and released. By monitoring the length of time it takes for the gear ratio to change
following a shift request, the TCM can determine the volume of fluid used to apply or release a friction element.
The volume of transmission fluid needed to apply the friction elements are continuously updated for adaptive con-
trols. As friction material wears, the volume of fluid need to apply the element increases.
Certain mechanical problems within the input clutch assembly can cause inadequate or out-of-range element vol-
umes. Also, defective Input/Output Speed Sensors and wiring can cause these conditions. The following chart iden-
tifies the appropriate clutch volumes and when they are monitored/updated:
CLUTCH VOLUMES
Clutch When Updated Proper Clutch Volume
L/R 2-1 or 3-1 downshift 45 to 134
2C 3-2 kickdown shift 25 to 85
OD 2-3 upshift 30 to 100
4C 3-4 upshift 30 to 85
UD 4-3 kickdown shift 30 to 100
SHIFT SCHEDULES
As mentioned earlier, the TCM has programming that allows it to select a variety of shift schedules. Shift schedule
selection is dependent on the following:
Shift lever position
Throttle position
Engine load
Fluid temperature
Software level
As driving conditions change, the TCM appropriately adjusts the shift schedule. Refer to the following chart to deter-
mine the appropriate operation expected, depending on driving conditions.
Schedule Condition Expected Operation

Extreme Cold Oil temperature below -16 F -Park, Reverse, Neutral and 1st and
3rd gear only in D position, 2nd
gear only in Manual 2 or L
-No EMCC
Super Cold Oil temperature between -12 F and - Delayed 2-3 upshift
10 F - Delayed 3-4 upshift
- Early 4-3 coastdown shift
- High speed 4-2, 3-2, 2-1 kickdown
shifts are prevented
-Shifts at high throttle openings willl
be early.
- No EMCC
Cold Oil temperature between 10 F and -Shift schedule is the same as
36 F Super Cold except that the 2-3
upshifts are not delayed.
Warm Oil temperature between 40 F and - Normal operation (upshift,
80 F kickdowns, and coastdowns)
- No EMCC
Hot Oil temperature between 80 F and - Normal operation (upshift,
240 F kickdowns, and coastdowns)
- Normal EMCC operation
Overheat Oil temperature above 240 F or - Delayed 2-3 upshift
engine coolant temperature above - Delayed 3-4 upshift
244 F
- 3rd gear FEMCC from 30-48 mph
- 3rd gear PEMCC above 35 mph
- Above 25 mph the torque
converter will not unlock unless the
throttle is closed or if a wide open
throttle 2nd PEMCC to 1 kickdown
is made
TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE - NAG1

The transmission control module (TCM) determines the current operating conditions of the vehicle and controls the
shifting process for shift comfort and driving situations. It receives this operating data from sensors and broadcast
messages from other modules.
The TCM uses inputs from several sensors that are directly hardwired to the controller and it uses several indirect
inputs that are used to control shifts. This information is used to actuate the proper solenoids in the valve body to
achieve the desired gear.
The shift lever assembly (SLA) has sensors that are monitored by the TCM to calculate shift lever position. The
reverse light switch, an integral part of the SLA, controls the reverse light relay control circuit. The Brake/Transmis-
sion Shift Interlock (BTSI) solenoid and the park lockout solenoid (also part of the SLA) are controlled by the TCM.
The PCM and ABS broadcast messages over the controller area network (CAN) bus for use by the TCM. The TCM
uses this information, with other inputs, to determine the transmission operating conditions.
The TCM:
determines the momentary operating conditions of the vehicle.
controls all shift processes.
considers shift comfort and the driving situation.

The TCM controls the solenoid valves for modulating shift pressures and gear changes. Relative to the torque being
transmitted, the required pressures are calculated from load conditions, engine rpm, vehicle speed, and ATF tem-
perature.
The following functions are contained in the TCM:
Shift Program
Downshift Safety
Torque Converter Lock-Up Clutch.
Adaptation.
The TCM continuously checks for electrical problems, mechanical problems, and some hydraulic problems. When a
problem is sensed, the TCM stores a diagnostic trouble code (DTC). Some of these codes cause the transmission
to go into 9Limp-In9 or 9default9 mode. Some DTCs cause permanent Limp-In and others cause temporary Limp-In.
The NAG1 defaults in the current gear position if a DTC is detected, then after a key cycle the transmission will go
into Limp-in, which is mechanical 2nd gear. Some DTCs may allow the transmission to resume normal operation
(recover) if the detected problem goes away. A permanent Limp-In DTC will recover when the key is cycled, but if
the same DTC is detected for three key cycles the system will not recover and the DTC must be cleared from the
TCM with the appropriate scan tool.
NOTE: If the TCM has been replaced, the TCM Adaptation Procedure must be performed. (Refer to 8 -
ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES/TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE - STANDARD PRO-
CEDURE)
TCM SIGNALS
The TCM registers one part of the input signals by direct inputs, the other part by CAN bus. In addition to the direct
control of the actuators, the TCM sends various output signals by CAN bus to other control modules.
Selector Lever Position
A series of sensors in the SLA inform the TCM of the position of the selector lever.
The TCM monitors the SLA for all shift lever positions through five position circuits. The SLA provides a low-current
12-volt signal to the TCM. The TCM compares the on/off signals to programmed combinations to determine the
exact position of the shift lever.
ATF Temperature Sensor
The ATF temperature sensor is a positive temperature co-efficient (PTC) thermistor. It measures the temperature of
the transmission fluid and is a direct input signal for the TCM. The temperature of the ATF has an influence on the
shifttime and resulting shift quality. As the temperature rises, resistance rises, and therefore, the probing voltage is
decreasing. Because of its registration, the shifting process can be optimized in all temperature ranges.
The ATF temperature sensor is wired in series with the park/neutral contact. The temperature signal is transmitted
to the TCM only when the reed contact of the park/neutral contact is closed because the TCM only reads ATF
temperature while in any forward gear, or REVERSE. When the transmission is in PARK or NEUTRAL, the TCM will
substitute the engine temperature for the ATF temperature.
Starter Interlock
The TCM monitors a contact switch wired in series with the transmission temperature sensor to determine PARK
and NEUTRAL positions. The contact switch is open in PARK and NEUTRAL. The TCM senses transmission tem-
perature as high (switch supply voltage), confirming switch status as open. The TCM then broadcasts a message
over CAN bus to confirm switch status. The PCM receives this information and allows operation of the starter circuit.
N2 and N3 Speed Sensors
The N2 and N3 Input Speed Sensors are two Hall-effect speed sensors that are mounted internally in the trans-
mission and are used by the TCM to calculate the transmissions input speed. Since the input speed cannot be
measured directly, two of the drive elements are measured. Two input speed sensors were required because both
drive elements are not active in all gears.
CAN Bus Indirect Input Signals
A 2.5-volt bias (operating voltage) is present on the CAN bus any time the ignition switch is in the RUN position.
Both the TCM and the ABS apply this bias. On this vehicle, the CAN bus is used for module data exchange only.
The indirect inputs used on the NAG1 electronic control system are:
Wheel Speed Sensors.
Transfer Case Switch Status.
Brake Switch.
Engine RPM.
Engine Temperature.
Cruise Control Status.
Gear Limit Request.
Throttle Position - 0% at idle, 100% at WOT. If open, TCM assumes idle (0% throttle opening).
Odometer Mileage
Maximum Effective Torque.
Engine in Limp-In Mode/Mileage Where DTC Was Set.
BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK (BTSI)

The BTSI solenoid prevents shifting out of the PARK position until the ignition key is in the RUN position and the
brake pedal is pressed. The TCM controls the ground while the ignition switch supplies power to the BTSI solenoid.
The PCM monitors the brake switch and broadcasts brake switch status messages over the CAN C bus. If the park
brake is depressed and there is power (Run/Start) to SLA, the BTSI solenoid deactivates. The TCM monitors this for
the SLA because the SLA does not communicate on the CAN bus.
SHIFT SCHEDULES
The basic shift schedule includes up and downshifts for all five gears. The TCM adapts the shift program according
to driving style, accelerator pedal position and deviation of vehicle speed. Influencing factors are:
Road Conditions.
Incline, Decline and Altitude.
Trailer Operation, Loading.
Engine Coolant Temperature.
Cruise Control Operation.
Sporty Driving Style.
Low and High ATF Temperature.
Upshift To: 1-2 2-3 3-4 4-5

Activated By 1-2/4-5 2-3 3-4 1-2/4-5
Solenoid:
Shift Point (at 29 km/h (18 mph) 48 km/h (30 mph) 68 km/h (42 mph) 85 km/h (53 mph)
35.2% of throttle)
Downshift From: 5-4 4-3 3-2 2-1

Activated By 1-2/4-5 3-4 2-3 1-2/4-5
Solenoid:
Shift Point 55.7 km/h (34.61 40.5 km/h (25.17 24.4 km/h (15.16 15.1 km/h (9.38
mph) mph) mph) mph)
DOWNSHIFT SAFETY
Selector lever downshifts are not performed if inadmissible high engine rpm is sensed.
ADAPTATION
To equalize tolerances and wear, an automatic adaptation takes place for:
Shift Time.
Clutch Filling Time.
Clutch Filling Pressure.
Torque Converter Lock-Up Control.
Adaptation data may be stored permanently and to some extent, can be diagnosed.
Driving Style Adaptation
The shift point is modified in steps based on the information from the inputs. The control module looks at inputs
such as:
vehicle acceleration and deceleration (calculated by the TCM).
rate of change as well as the position of the throttle pedal (fuel injection information from the PCM).
lateral acceleration (calculated by the TCM).
gear change frequency (how often the shift occurs).
Based on how aggressive the driver is, the TCM moves up the shift so that the present gear is held a little longer
before the next upshift. If the driving style is still aggressive, the shift point is modified up to ten steps. If the driving
returns to normal, then the shift point modification also returns to the base position.
This adaptation has no memory. The adaptation to driving style is nothing more than a shift point modification meant
to assist an aggressive driver. The shift points are adjusted for the moment and return to base position as soon as
the inputs are controlled in a more normal manner.
CONTROLLER MODES OF OPERATION

Permanent Limp-In Mode
When the TCM determines there is a non-recoverable condition present that does not allow proper transmission
operation, it places the transmission in permanent Limp-In Mode. When the condition occurs the TCM turns off all
solenoids as well as the solenoid supply output circuit. If this occurs while the vehicle is moving, the transmission
remains in the current gear position until the ignition is turned off or the shifter is placed in the 9P9 position. When
the shifter has been placed in 9P,9 the transmission only allows 2nd gear operation. If this occurs while the vehicle
is not moving, the transmission only allows operation in 2nd gear.
Temporary Limp-In Mode
This mode is the same as the permanent Limp-In Mode except if the condition is no longer present, the system
resumes normal operation.
Under Voltage Limp-In Mode
When the TCM detects that system voltage has dropped below 8.5 volts, it disables voltage-dependant diagnostics
and places the transmission in the temporary Limp-In Mode. When the TCM senses that the voltage has risen
above 9.0 volts, normal transmission operation is resumed.
Hardware Error Mode
When the TCM detects a major internal error, the transmission is placed in the permanent Limp-In Mode and
ceases all communication over the CAN bus. When the TCM has entered this mode normal transmission operation
does not resume until all DTCs are cleared from the TCM.
Loss of Drive
If the TCM detects a situation that has resulted or may result in a catastrophic engine or transmission problem, the
transmission is placed in the neutral position. Improper Ratio, Input Sensor Overspeed or Engine Overspeed DTCs
cause the loss of drive.
Controlled Limp-in Mode
When a failure does not require the TCM to shut down the solenoid supply, but the failure is severe enough that the
TCM places the transmission into a predefined gear, there are several shift performance concerns. For instance, if
the transmission is slipping, the controller tries to place the transmission into 3rd gear and maintain 3rd gear for all
forward drive conditions.
STANDARD PROCEDURE
TCM QUICK LEARN - 42RLE Only
The quick learn procedure requires the use of the appropriate scan tool.
This program allows the electronic transmission system to recalibrate itself. This will provide the proper transmission
operation. The quick learn procedure should be performed if any of the following procedures are performed:
Solenoid Pack Replacement
Valve Body Replacement or Recondition
To perform the Quick Learn Procedure, the following conditions must be met:
The brakes must be applied
The engine speed must be above 500 rpm
The throttle angle (TPS) must be less than 3 degrees
The shift lever position must stay in PARK until prompted to shift to overdrive
The shift lever position must stay in overdrive after the Shift to Overdrive prompt until the scan tool indicates
the procedure is complete.
The calculated oil temperature must be above 60 and below 200
TCM ADAPTATION - NAG1 Only

The adaptation procedure requires the use of the appropriate scan tool. This program allows the electronic trans-
mission system to re-calibrate itself. This will provide the proper baseline transmission operation. The adaptation
procedure should be performed if any of the following procedures are performed:
Electrohydraulic Unit Replacement or Recondition
1. With the scan tool, reset the Transmission adaptives. Resetting the adaptives will set the adaptives to factory
settings.
NOTE: Perform the Coast Down Adaptations first. The Transmission Temperature must be greater than 60C
(140F) and less than 70C (158F). Failure to stay within these temperature ranges will void the procedure.
2. Drive the vehicle until the transmission temperature is in the specified range.
3. Perform 4 to 5 coast downs from 5th to 4th gear and then 4th to 3rd gear.
NOTE: For Upshift adaptation, the Transmission temperature must be greater than 60C (140F) and less
than 100C (212F). Failure to stay within these temperature ranges will void this procedure.
4. From a stop, moderately accelerate the vehicle and obtain all forward gear ranges while keeping the Engine
RPM below 1800 RPM. Repeat this procedure 4 to 5 times.
5. Obtaining 5th gear may be difficult at 1800 RPM. Allow the transmission to shift into 5th gear at a higher RPM
then lower the RPM to 1800 and perform manual shifts between 4th and 5th gears using the shift lever.
6. The TCM will store the adaptives every 10 minutes. After completion of the adaptation procedure make sure the
vehicle stays running for at least 10 minutes.
7. It is possible to manually store the adaptives under the 10 minute time frame using the scan tool Store Adaptives
procedure.
LX ENGINE SYSTEMS 8F - 1
ENGINE SYSTEMS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
BATTERY SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

CHARGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
BATTERY SYSTEM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
BATTERY SYSTEM USING MICRO 420 BATTERY TESTER . . . . . . . 12

DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 OPEN-CIRCUIT VOLTAGE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 IGNITION-OFF DRAW TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
BATTERY SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
STANDARD PROCEDURE BATTERY HOLDDOWN
BATTERY RECONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 BATTERY CABLES
SPECIFICATIONS DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
BATTERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
SPECIAL TOOLS DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
BATTERY SYSTEM SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . 8 BATTERY CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
BATTERY REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 BATTERY TRAY
BATTERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
STANDARD PROCEDURE
BATTERY CHARGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
8F - 2 BATTERY SYSTEM LX
BATTERY SYSTEM
DESCRIPTION
This vehicle is equipped with a single 12-volt battery located in the rear floor area near the spare tire. The battery
system for this vehicle covers the following related components:
Battery - The storage battery provides a reliable
means of storing a renewable source of electrical
energy within the vehicle.
Battery Cables - The battery cables connect the
positive and negatively charged battery terminal
posts to the vehicle electrical system.
Battery Holddown - The battery holddown hard-
ware secures the battery in the battery tray.
Battery Retention Strap - The battery retention
strap securely holds the battery in place in the
event of a rear impact collision.
Battery Tray - The battery tray provides a
secure mounting location in the vehicle for the
battery and an anchor point for the battery hold-
down hardware.
For battery system maintenance schedules (Refer to LUBRICATION & MAINTENANCE/MAINTENANCE SCHED-
ULES - DESCRIPTION). (Refer to LUBRICATION & MAINTENANCE/JUMP STARTING - STANDARD PROCE-
DURE) for the proper jump starting procedure. The battery must be fully-charged before any battery system
diagnosis or testing procedures can be performed.
OPERATION
The battery system is designed to provide a safe, efficient, reliable and mobile means of delivering and storing
electrical energy. This electrical energy is required to operate the engine starting system, as well as many of the
other vehicle accessory systems for limited durations while the engine and/or the charging system are not operating.
The battery system is also designed to provide a reserve of electrical energy to supplement the charging system for
short durations while the engine is running and the electrical current demands of the vehicle exceed the output of
the charging system. In addition to delivering, and storing electrical energy for the vehicle, the battery system serves
as a capacitor and voltage stabilizer for the vehicle electrical system. It absorbs most abnormal or transient voltages
caused by the switching of any of the electrical components or circuits in the vehicle.

BATTERY SYSTEM
The battery, starting, and charging systems in the vehicle operate with one another and must be tested as a com-
plete system. In order for the engine to start and the battery to maintain its charge properly, all of the components
that are used in these systems must perform within specifications. It is important that the battery, starting, and
charging systems be thoroughly tested and inspected any time a battery needs to be charged or replaced. The
cause of abnormal battery discharge, overcharging or early battery failure must be diagnosed and corrected before
a battery is replaced and before a vehicle is returned to service. The service information for these systems has
been separated within this service manual to make it easier to locate the specific information you are seeking. How-
ever, when attempting to diagnose any of these systems, it is important that you keep their interdependency in
mind.
The diagnostic procedures used for the battery, starting, and charging systems include the most basic conventional
diagnostic methods, to the more sophisticated On-Board Diagnostics (OBD) built into the Powertrain Control Module
(PCM). Use of an induction-type milliampere ammeter, a volt/ohmmeter, a battery charger, a carbon pile rheostat
(load tester) and a 12-volt test lamp may be required. All OBD-sensed systems are monitored by the PCM. Each
LX BATTERY SYSTEM 8F - 3
monitored circuit is assigned a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC). The PCM will store a DTC in electronic memory for
any inoperative system it detects. (Refer to 9 - ENGINE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the proper charging
system on-board diagnostic test procedures.
MICRO 420 BATTERY TESTER

The Micro 420 automotive battery system tester is designed to help the dealership technicians diagnose the cause
of a defective battery. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM/BATTERY - STANDARD PROCEDURE) for
directions on using the Micro 420 battery tester.
BATTERY SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS
THE BATTERY SEEMS 1. The electrical system 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY

WEAK OR DEAD WHEN ignition-off draw is excessive. SYSTEM/BATTERY - STANDARD PROCEDURE
ATTEMPTING TO START - IGNITION-OFF DRAW TEST) for the proper test
THE ENGINE. procedures. Repair the excessive ignition-off
draw, as required.
2. The charging system is 2. Determine if the charging system is performing

faulty. to specifications. Repair the faulty charging
system, as required.
3. The battery is discharged. 3. Determine the battery state-of-charge using the
Micro 420 battery tester, (Refer to 8 -
ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM/BATTERY -
STANDARD PROCEDURE). Charge the faulty
battery as required.
4. The battery terminal 4. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY
connections are loose or SYSTEM/CABLES - DIAGNOSIS AND
corroded. TESTING). Clean and tighten the battery terminal
connections, as required.
5. The battery has an 5. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM
incorrect size or rating for - SPECIFICATIONS) for the proper size and
this vehicle. rating. Replace an incorrect battery, as required.
6. The battery is faulty. 6. Determine the battery cranking capacity using
the Micro 420 battery tester, (Refer to 8 -
ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM/BATTERY -
STANDARD PROCEDURE). Replace the faulty
battery, as required.
7. The starting system is 7. Determine if the starting system is performing
faulty. to specifications. Repair the faulty starting
8. The battery is physically 8. Inspect the battery for loose terminal posts or a
damaged. cracked and leaking case. Replace the damaged
battery, as required.
BATTERY SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS
THE BATTERY STATE OF 1. The battery has an 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM

CHARGE CANNOT BE incorrect size or rating for - SPECIFICATIONS) for the proper size and
MAINTAINED. this vehicle. rating. Replace an incorrect battery, as required.
2. The battery terminal 2. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY

connections are loose or SYSTEM/CABLES - DIAGNOSIS AND
corroded. TESTING). Clean and tighten the battery terminal
connections, as required.
3. The electrical system 3. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY
ignition-off draw is excessive. SYSTEM/BATTERY - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
for the proper test procedures. Repair the faulty
electrical system, as required.
4. The battery is faulty. 4. Test the battery using the Micro 420 battery
tester, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY
SYSTEM/BATTERY - STANDARD
PROCEDURE). Replace the faulty battery, as
required.
5. The starting system is 5. Determine if the starting system is performing
faulty. to specifications. Repair the faulty starting
6. The charging system is 6. Determine if the charging system is performing
faulty. to specifications. Repair the faulty charging
7. Electrical loads exceed the 7. Inspect the vehicle for aftermarket electrical
output of the charging equipment which might cause excessive electrical
system. loads.
8. Slow driving or prolonged 8. Advise the vehicle operator, as required.
idling with high-amperage
draw systems in use.
THE BATTERY WILL NOT 1. The battery is faulty. 1. Test the battery using the Micro 420 battery
ACCEPT A CHARGE. tester, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY
SYSTEM/BATTERY - STANDARD
PROCEDURE). Replace the faulty battery, as
required.
STANDARD PROCEDURE
BATTERY RECONNECTION
NOTE: This reconnection procedure is to be performed anytime the battery has been disconnected.
1. Connect the battery negative cable (2) to the bat-

tery post and tighten the clamp nut.
2. Install the rear compartment floor trim panel.
CAUTION: Once the battery has been connected,

review and perform the following information as
applicable.
AUTO UP FRONT WINDOW

If the vehicle is equipped with the auto-up front window feature, once the battery is reconnected the door module
needs to be calibrated. The door module requires calibration anytime the battery or door module has been discon-
nected for any length of time. To calibrate, perform the following:
1. Turn the Ignition to the Run position.
2. Regardless of current window position, move the driver side front window upward until the window stalls in the
full up position. Allow the window motor to stall for at least 2 seconds before releasing the switch.
3. Move the driver side front window downward until the window stalls in the full down position. Allow the window
motor to stall for at least 2 seconds before releasing the switch.
4. Move the driver side front window upward until the window stalls in the full up position. Allow the window motor
to stall for at least 2 second before releasing the switch.
5. Repeat steps 2, 3 and 4 for the passenger side front window.
6. Verify the windows are properly calibrated by operating the express down and up features on the windows.
Repeat this procedure if the calibration failed. If unable to properly calibrate after the second attempt, check the
Drivers Door Module (DDM) and Passengers Door Module (PDM) for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and
correct as required.
ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM (ESP)

If the vehicle is equipped with ESP, once the battery is reconnected, the Steering Angle Sensor (SAS) needs to be
calibrated. The SAS requires calibration anytime the battery or an ABS (ESP) component has been disconnected for
any length of time. If the SAS is not calibrated following battery reconnection, the ESP/BAS indicator lamp is
illuminated following 5 ignition cycles indicating the need for calibration.
To calibrate, perform the following:
1. Start the engine.
2. Center the steering wheel.
3. Turn the steering wheel all the way to the left until the internal stop in the steering gear is met, then turn the
wheel all the way to the right until the opposite internal stop in the steering gear is met.
4. Center the steering wheel.
5. Stop the engine.
CLEANING
The following information details the recommended cleaning procedures for the battery and related components. In
addition to the maintenance schedules found in this service manual, (Refer to LUBRICATION & MAINTENANCE/
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES - DESCRIPTION) it is recommended that these procedures be performed any time
the battery or related components must be removed for vehicle service.
1. Clean the battery cable terminal clamps (2) of all
corrosion. Remove any corrosion using a wire
brush or cleaning tool (1), and a sodium bicarbon-
ate (baking soda) and warm water cleaning
solution.
2. Clean the battery tray and battery holddown hardware using a stiff bristle parts cleaning brush and a sodium
bicarbonate (baking soda) and warm water cleaning solution.
3. If the removed battery is to be reinstalled, clean the
outside of the battery case and the top cover (3)
with a sodium bicarbonate (baking soda) and warm
water cleaning solution (2) using a stiff bristle parts
cleaning brush (1) to remove any acid film. Rinse
the battery with clean water. Ensure that the clean-
ing solution does not enter the battery cells through
the vent holes. If the battery is being replaced,
SPECIFICATIONS) for the factory-installed battery
specifications. Confirm that the replacement battery
is the correct size and has the correct ratings for
the vehicle.
4. Clean any corrosion from the battery terminals with

a wire brush or terminal cleaner (1), and a sodium
bicarbonate (baking soda) and warm water clean-
ing solution.
INSPECTION
The following information details the recommended inspection procedures for the battery and related components. In
addition to the maintenance schedules, (Refer to LUBRICATION & MAINTENANCE/MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES -
DESCRIPTION), it is recommended that these procedures be performed any time the battery or related components
are removed for vehicle service.
1. Inspect the battery cable terminals for damage. Replace any battery cable that has a damaged or deformed
terminal.
2. Inspect the battery tray and battery holddown hardware for damage. Replace any damaged parts.
3. Inspect the battery case for cracks or other damage that could result in electrolyte leaks. Also, check the battery
terminals for looseness. Batteries with damaged cases or loose terminals must be replaced.
4. Inspect the battery built-in test indicator sight glass (if equipped) for an indication of the battery condition. If the
battery is discharged, charge as required, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM/BATTERY - STAN-
DARD PROCEDURE - BATTERY CHARGING).
SPECIFICATIONS
BATTERY
The battery Group Size number, the Cold Cranking Amperage (CCA) rating, and the Reserve Capacity (RC) rating
or Ampere-Hours (AH) rating can be found on the original equipment battery label. Be certain that a replacement
battery has the correct Group Size number, as well as CCA, and RC or AH ratings that equal or exceed the original
equipment specification for the vehicle being serviced. Battery sizes and ratings are discussed in more detail below.
Group Size - The outside dimensions and terminal placement of the battery conform to standards established
by the Battery Council International (BCI). Each battery is assigned a BCI Group Size number to help identify
a correctly-sized replacement.
Cold Cranking Amperage - The Cold Cranking Amperage (CCA) rating specifies how much current (in
amperes) the battery can deliver for thirty seconds at -18 C (0 F). Terminal voltage must not fall below 7.2
volts during or after the thirty second discharge period. The CCA required is generally higher as engine dis-
placement increases, depending also upon the starter current draw requirements.
Reserve Capacity - The Reserve Capacity (RC) rating specifies the time (in minutes) it takes for battery ter-
minal voltage to fall below 10.5 volts, at a discharge rate of 25 amperes. RC is determined with the battery
fully-charged at 26.7 C (80 F). This rating estimates how long the battery might last after a charging system
failure, under minimum electrical load.
Ampere-Hours - The Ampere-Hours (AH) rating specifies the current (in amperes) that a battery can deliver
steadily for twenty hours, with the voltage in the battery not falling below 10.5 volts. This rating is also some-
times identified as the twenty-hour discharge rating.
BATTERY CLASSIFICATIONS & RATINGS

BCI Group Size Cold Cranking Reserve Ampere - Load Test
Part Number
Classification Amperage Capacity Hours Amperage
04608719AC H7 730 140 Minutes 72 250
SPECIAL TOOLS
BATTERY SYSTEM SPECIAL TOOLS
BATTERY
DESCRIPTION
This vehicle is equipped with a single, 12-volt, mainte-
nance-free battery located in the rear floor area near
the spare tire. The battery is comprised of the follow-
ing components:
Positive Post (1)
Vent (2)
Cell Cap (3)
Vent (4)
Cell Cap (5)
Vent (6)
Negative Post (7)
Indicator Eye (8) if equipped
Electrolyte Level (9)
Plate Groups (10)
Maintenance Free Battery assembly (11)
This battery is designed to provide a safe, efficient and reliable means of storing electrical energy in a chemical
form. This means of energy storage allows the battery to produce the electrical energy required to operate the
engine starting system, as well as to operate many of the other vehicle accessory systems for limited durations
while the engine and/or the charging system are not operating. The battery is made up of six individual cells that are
connected in series. Each cell contains positively charged plate groups that are connected with lead straps to the
positive terminal post, and negatively charged plate groups that are connected with lead straps to the negative ter-
minal post. Each plate consists of a stiff mesh framework or grid coated with lead dioxide (positive plate) or sponge
lead (negative plate). Insulators or plate separators made of a non-conductive material are inserted between the
positive and negative plates to prevent them from contacting or shorting against one another. These dissimilar metal
plates are submerged in a sulfuric acid and water solution called an electrolyte.
The battery Group Size number, the Cold Cranking Amperage (CCA) rating, and the Reserve Capacity (RC) rating
or Ampere-Hours (AH) rating can be found on the original equipment battery label. Be certain that a replacement
battery has the correct Group Size number, as well as CCA, and RC or AH ratings that equal or exceed the original
equipment specification for the vehicle being serviced. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM - SPECIFI-
CATIONS) for the proper factory-installed battery specifications.
OPERATION
The battery is designed to store electrical energy in a chemical form. When an electrical load is applied to the
terminals of the battery, an electrochemical reaction occurs. This reaction causes the battery to discharge electrical
current from its terminals. As the battery discharges, a gradual chemical change takes place within each cell. The
sulfuric acid in the electrolyte combines with the plate materials, causing both plates to slowly change to lead sul-
fate. At the same time, oxygen from the positive plate material combines with hydrogen from the sulfuric acid, caus-
ing the electrolyte to become mainly water. The chemical changes within the battery are caused by the movement
of excess or free electrons between the positive and negative plate groups. This movement of electrons produces
a flow of electrical current through the load device attached to the battery terminals.
As the plate materials become more similar chemically, and the electrolyte becomes less acid, the voltage potential
of each cell is reduced. However, by charging the battery with a voltage higher than that of the battery itself, the
battery discharging process is reversed. Charging the battery gradually changes the sulfated lead plates back into
sponge lead and lead dioxide, and the water back into sulfuric acid. This action restores the difference in the elec-
tron charges deposited on the plates, and the voltage potential of the battery cells. For a battery to remain useful,
it must be able to produce high-amperage current over an extended period. A battery must also be able to accept
a charge, so that its voltage potential may be restored.
The battery is vented to release excess hydrogen gas that is created when the battery is being charged or dis-
charged. However, even with these vents, hydrogen gas can collect in or around the battery. If hydrogen gas is
exposed to flame or sparks, it may ignite. If the electrolyte level is low, the battery may arc internally and explode.
If the battery cell caps cannot be removed, the battery must be replaced if the electrolyte level becomes low.

BATTERY
The battery must be completely charged and the terminals should be properly cleaned and inspected before diag-
nostic procedures are performed. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM - CLEANING) and (Refer to 8 -
ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM - INSPECTION) for the proper battery cleaning and inspection procedures. (Refer
to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM/BATTERY - STANDARD PROCEDURE - BATTERY CHARGING) for the
proper battery charging procedures.
MICRO 420 BATTERY TESTER

The Micro 420 automotive battery tester is designed to help the dealership technicians diagnose the cause of an
inoperative battery. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM/BATTERY - STANDARD PROCEDURE - USING
MICRO 420 BATTERY TESTER) for instructions on the use of the Micro 420 battery tester.
WARNING: IF THE BATTERY SHOWS SIGNS OF FREEZING, LEAKING OR LOOSE POSTS, DO NOT TEST,
ASSIST-BOOST, OR CHARGE. THE BATTERY MAY ARC INTERNALLY AND EXPLODE. PERSONAL INJURY
AND/OR VEHICLE DAMAGE MAY RESULT.
WARNING: EXPLOSIVE HYDROGEN GAS FORMS IN AND AROUND THE BATTERY. DO NOT SMOKE, USE
FLAME, OR CREATE SPARKS NEAR THE BATTERY. PERSONAL INJURY AND/OR VEHICLE DAMAGE MAY
RESULT.
WARNING: THE BATTERY CONTAINS SULFURIC ACID, WHICH IS POISONOUS AND CAUSTIC. AVOID CON-
TACT WITH THE SKIN, EYES, OR CLOTHING. IN THE EVENT OF CONTACT, FLUSH WITH WATER AND CALL
A PHYSICIAN IMMEDIATELY. KEEP OUT OF THE REACH OF CHILDREN.
A battery that will not accept a charge is inoperative, and must be replaced. Further testing is not required. A fully-
charged battery must be load tested to determine its cranking capacity. A battery that is fully-charged, but does not
pass the load test, is inoperative and must be replaced.
NOTE: Completely discharged batteries may take several hours to accept a charge. Refer to Standard Pro-
cedures for the proper battery charging procedures.
STANDARD PROCEDURE
BATTERY CHARGING
Battery charging is the means by which the battery can be restored to its full voltage potential. A battery is fully-
charged when:
Micro 420 electrical system tester indicates battery is OK.
All of the battery cells are gassing freely during battery charging.
Open-circuit voltage of the battery is 12.65 volts or above.
WARNING: NEVER EXCEED TWENTY AMPERES WHEN CHARGING A COLD (-1 C [30 F] OR LOWER) BAT-
TERY. THE BATTERY MAY ARC INTERNALLY AND EXPLODE. PERSONAL INJURY AND/OR VEHICLE DAM-
AGE MAY RESULT.
WARNING: IF THE BATTERY SHOWS SIGNS OF FREEZING, LEAKING, LOOSE POSTS, DO NOT TEST,
ASSIST-BOOST, OR CHARGE. THE BATTERY MAY ARC INTERNALLY AND EXPLODE. PERSONAL INJURY
AND/OR VEHICLE DAMAGE MAY RESULT.
WARNING: EXPLOSIVE HYDROGEN GAS FORMS IN AND AROUND THE BATTERY. DO NOT SMOKE, USE
FLAME, OR CREATE SPARKS NEAR THE BATTERY. PERSONAL INJURY AND/OR VEHICLE DAMAGE MAY
RESULT.
WARNING: THE BATTERY CONTAINS SULFURIC ACID, WHICH IS POISONOUS AND CAUSTIC. AVOID CON-
TACT WITH THE SKIN, EYES, OR CLOTHING. IN THE EVENT OF CONTACT, FLUSH WITH WATER AND CALL
A PHYSICIAN IMMEDIATELY. KEEP OUT OF THE REACH OF CHILDREN.
WARNING: IF THE BATTERY IS EQUIPPED WITH REMOVABLE CELL CAPS, BE CERTAIN THAT EACH OF
THE CELL CAPS IS IN PLACE AND TIGHT BEFORE THE BATTERY IS RETURNED TO SERVICE. PERSONAL
INJURY AND/OR VEHICLE DAMAGE MAY RESULT FROM LOOSE OR MISSING CELL CAPS.
CAUTION: Always disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable before charging a battery. Do not
exceed sixteen volts while charging a battery. Damage to the vehicle electrical system components may
result.
CAUTION: Battery electrolyte will bubble inside the battery case during normal battery charging. Electrolyte
boiling or being discharged from the battery vents indicates a battery overcharging condition. Immediately
reduce the charging rate or turn off the charger to evaluate the battery condition. Damage to the battery
may result from overcharging.
CAUTION: The battery should not be hot to the touch. If the battery feels hot to the touch, turn off the
charger and let the battery cool before continuing the charging operation. Damage to the battery may result.
After the battery has been charged to 12.65 volts or greater, perform a load test to determine the battery cranking
capacity, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM/BATTERY - STANDARD PROCEDURE - USING MICRO
420 BATTERY TESTER) for the proper battery load test procedures. If the battery will endure a load test, return the
battery to service. If the battery will not endure a load test, it is inoperative and must be replaced.
Clean and inspect the battery hold downs, tray, terminals, posts, and top before completing battery service. (Refer
to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM - CLEANING) and (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM -
INSPECTION) for the proper battery system cleaning and inspection procedures.
CHARGING A COMPLETELY DISCHARGED BATTERY

The following procedure should be used to recharge a completely discharged battery. Unless this procedure is prop-
erly followed, a good battery may be needlessly replaced.
1. Measure the voltage at the battery posts with a voltmeter, accurate to 1/10 (0.10) volt. If the reading is below ten
volts, the battery charging current will be low. It could take some time before the battery accepts a current
greater than a few milliamperes. Such low current may not be detectable on the ammeters built into many battery
chargers.
2. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Connect the battery charger leads. Some battery chargers are
equipped with polarity-sensing circuitry. This circuitry protects the battery charger and the battery from being
damaged if they are improperly connected. If the battery state-of-charge is too low for the polarity-sensing cir-
cuitry to detect, the battery charger will not operate. This makes it appear that the battery will not accept charg-
ing current. See the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the battery charger for details on how to bypass
the polarity-sensing circuitry.
3. Battery chargers vary in the amount of voltage and current they provide. The amount of time required for a bat-
tery to accept measurable charging current at various voltages is shown in the Charge Rate Table. If the charg-
ing current is still not measurable at the end of the charging time, the battery is inoperative and must be
replaced. If the charging current is measurable during the charging time, the battery may be good and the charg-
ing should be completed in the normal manner.
CHARGE RATE TABLE

Voltage Hours
16.0 volts maximum up to 4 hours
14.0 to 15.9 volts up to 8 hours
13.9 volts or less up to 16 hours
CHARGING TIME REQUIRED

The time required to charge a battery will vary, depending upon the following factors:
Battery Capacity - A completely discharged heavy-duty battery requires twice the charging time of a small
capacity battery.
Temperature - A longer time will be needed to charge a battery at -18 C (0 F) than at 27 C (80 F). When
a fast battery charger is connected to a cold battery, the current accepted by the battery will be very low at
first. As the battery warms, it will accept a higher charging current rate (amperage).
Charger Capacity - A battery charger that supplies only five amperes will require a longer charging time. A
battery charger that supplies twenty amperes or more will require a shorter charging time.
State-Of-Charge - A completely discharged battery requires more charging time than a partially discharged
battery. Electrolyte is nearly pure water in a completely discharged battery. At first, the charging current
(amperage) will be low. As the battery charges, the specific gravity of the electrolyte will gradually rise.
The Battery Charging Time Table gives an indication of the time required to charge a typical battery at room tem-
perature based upon the battery state-of-charge and the charger capacity.
BATTERY CHARGING TIME TABLE

Charging 10
5 Amps 20 Amps
Amperage Amps
Open Circuit
Hours Charging @ 21 C (70 F)
Voltage
12.25 to 12.49 6 hours 3 hours 1.5
hours
12.00 to 12.24 10 hours 5 hours 2.5
hours
10.00 to 11.99 14 hours 7 hours 3.5
hours
Below 10.00 18 hours 9 hours 4.5
hours
USING MICRO 420 BATTERY TESTER

Always use the Micro 420 Instruction Manual that was
supplied with the tester as a reference. If the Instruc-
tion Manual is not available the following procedure
can be used:
WARNING: ALWAYS WEAR APPROPRIATE EYE

PROTECTION AND USE EXTREME CAUTION
WHEN WORKING WITH BATTERIES.
BATTERY TESTING
1. If testing the battery OUT-OF-VEHICLE, clean the battery terminals with a wire brush before testing, (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM - CLEANING).
2. If testing the battery IN-THE-VEHICLE, make certain all of the vehicle accessory loads are OFF, including the
ignition. The preferred test position is at the battery terminals. If the battery is not accessible, you may test
using both the positive and negative jumper posts. Select TESTING AT JUMPER POST when connecting to that
location.
3. Connect the tester to the battery or jumper posts, the red clamp to positive (+) and the black clamp to negative
().
NOTE: Multiple batteries connected in parallel must have the ground cable disconnected to perform a bat-
tery test. Failure to disconnect may result in false battery test readings.
4. Using the ARROW key select in or out of vehicle testing and press ENTER to make a selection.
5. If not selected, choose the Cold Cranking Amp (CCA) battery rating. Or select the appropriate battery rating for
your area (see menu). The tester will then run its self programmed test of the battery and display the results.
Refer to the test result table noted below.
CAUTION: If REPLACE BATTERY is the result of the test, this may mean a poor connection between the
vehicles cables and battery exists. After disconnecting the vehicles battery cables from the battery, retest
the battery using the OUT-OF-VEHICLE test before replacing.
6. While viewing the battery test result, press the CODE button and the tester will prompt you for the last 4 digits
of the VIN. Use the UP/DOWN arrow buttons to scroll to the correct character; then press ENTER to select and
move to the next digit. Then press the ENTER button to view the SERVICE CODE. Pressing the CODE button
a second time will return you to the test results.
BATTERY TEST RESULTS

GOOD BATTERY Return to service
GOOD - RECHARGE Fully charge battery and return to service
CHARGE & RETEST Fully charge battery and retest battery
REPLACE BATTERY Replace the battery and retest complete system
BAD-CELL REPLACE Replace the battery and retest complete system
NOTE: The SERVICE CODE is required on every warranty claim submitted for battery replacement.
OPEN-CIRCUIT VOLTAGE TEST

A battery open-circuit voltage (no load) test will show the approximate state-of-charge of a battery. This test can be
used in place of the hydrometer test when a hydrometer is not available, or for maintenance-free batteries with
non-removable cell caps.
Before proceeding with this test, completely charge the battery, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM/
BATTERY - STANDARD PROCEDURE - BATTERY CHARGING).
1. Before measuring the open-circuit voltage, the surface charge must be removed from the battery. Turn on the
headlamps for fifteen seconds, then allow up to five minutes for the battery voltage to stabilize.
2. Disconnect and isolate both battery cables, negative cable first.
3. Using a voltmeter connected to the battery posts,

measure the open-circuit voltage.
See the Open-Circuit Voltage Table. This voltage reading will indicate the battery state-of-charge, but will not reveal
its cranking capacity. If a battery has an open-circuit voltage reading of 12.4 volts or greater, it may be load tested
to reveal its cranking capacity, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM/BATTERY - STANDARD PROCE-
DURE - USING MICRO 420 BATTERY TESTER).
OPEN CIRCUIT VOLTAGE TABLE

Open Circuit Voltage Charge Percentage
11.7 volts or less 0%
12.0 volts 25%
12.3 volts 50%
12.6 volts 75%
12.8 volts or more 100%
IGNITION-OFF DRAW TEST

The term Ignition-Off Draw (IOD) identifies a normal condition where power is being drained from the battery with
the ignition switch in the Off position. A normal vehicle electrical system will draw from five to thirty-five milliamperes
(0.005 to 0.035 ampere) with the ignition switch in the Off position, and all non-ignition controlled circuits in proper
working order. Up to thirty-five milliamperes are needed to enable the memory functions for the Powertrain Control
Module (PCM), digital clock, electronically tuned radio, and other modules which may vary with the vehicle equip-
ment.
A vehicle that has not been operated for approximately twenty days, may discharge the battery to an inadequate
level. When a vehicle will not be used for twenty days or more (stored), remove the IOD fuse from the Junction
Block (JB). This will reduce battery discharging.
Excessive IOD can be caused by:
Electrical items left on.
Inoperative or improperly adjusted switches.
Inoperative or shorted electronic modules and components.
An internally shorted generator.
Intermittent shorts in the wiring.
If the IOD is over thirty-five milliamperes, the problem must be found and corrected before replacing a battery. In
most cases, the battery can be charged and returned to service after the excessive IOD condition has been cor-
rected.
1. Verify that all electrical accessories are off. Turn off all lamps, remove the ignition key, and close all doors. If the
vehicle is equipped with an illuminated entry system or an electronically tuned radio, allow the electronic timer
function of these systems to automatically shut off (time out). This may take up to three minutes. See the Elec-
tronic Module Ignition-Off Draw Table for more information.
ELECTRONIC MODULE IGNITION-OFF DRAW (IOD) TABLE

Time Out? IOD After Time
Module IOD
(If Yes, Interval And Wake-Up Input) Out
1 to 3
Radio No N/A
milliamperes
Audio Power up to 1
No N/A
Amplifier milliampere
4.75
Central Timer Module
No milliamperes N/A
(CTM)
(max.)
Powertrain Control
No 0.95 milliampere N/A
Module (PCM)
ElectroMechanical
Instrument Cluster No 0.44 milliampere N/A
(EMIC)
Combination Flasher No 0.08 milliampere N/A
2. Determine that the underhood lamp is operating properly, then disconnect the lamp wire harness connector or
remove the lamp bulb.
3. Disconnect the battery negative cable.
4. Set an electronic digital multi-meter to its highest amperage scale. Connect the multi-meter between the discon-
nected battery negative cable terminal clamp and the battery negative terminal post. Make sure that the doors
remain closed so that the illuminated entry system is not activated. The multi-meter amperage reading may
remain high for up to three minutes, or may not give any reading at all while set in the highest amperage scale,
depending upon the electrical equipment in the vehicle. The multi-meter leads must be securely clamped to the
battery negative cable terminal clamp and the battery negative terminal post. If continuity between the battery
negative terminal post and the negative cable terminal clamp is lost during any part of the IOD test, the elec-
tronic timer function will be activated and all of the tests will have to be repeated.
5. After about three minutes, the high-amperage IOD reading on the multi-meter should become very low or non-
existent, depending upon the electrical equipment in the vehicle. If the amperage reading remains high, remove
and replace each fuse or circuit breaker in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) and then in the Junction Block
(JB), one at a time until the amperage reading becomes very low, or nonexistent. Refer to the appropriate wiring
information for complete PDC and JB fuse, circuit breaker, and circuit identification. This will isolate each circuit
and identify the circuit that is the source of the high-amperage IOD. If the amperage reading remains high after
removing and replacing each fuse and circuit breaker, disconnect the wire harness from the generator. If the
amperage reading now becomes very low or nonexistent, diagnose and repair the Charging System as neces-
sary. After the high-amperage IOD has been corrected, switch the multi-meter to progressively lower amperage
scales and, if necessary, repeat the fuse and circuit breaker remove-and-replace process to identify and correct
all sources of excessive IOD. It is now safe to select the lowest milliampere scale of the multi-meter to check the
low-amperage IOD.
CAUTION: Do not open any doors, or turn on any electrical accessories with the lowest milliampere scale
selected, or the multi-meter may be damaged.
6. Observe the multi-meter reading. The low-amperage IOD should not exceed thirty-five milliamperes (0.035
ampere). If the current draw exceeds thirty-five milliamperes, isolate each circuit using the fuse and circuit
breaker remove-and-replace process in Step 5. The multi-meter reading will drop to within the acceptable limit
when the source of the excessive current draw is disconnected. Repair this circuit as required; whether a wiring
short, incorrect switch adjustment, or an inoperative component is the cause.
REMOVAL
WARNING: A SUITABLE PAIR OF HEAVY DUTY RUBBER GLOVES AND SAFETY GLASSES SHOULD BE
WORN WHEN REMOVING OR SERVICING A BATTERY.
WARNING: REMOVE METALLIC JEWELRY TO AVOID INJURY BY ACCIDENTAL ARCING OF BATTERY CUR-
RENT.
1. Make sure ignition switch is in OFF position and all accessories are turned OFF.
2. Remove the rear compartment floor, trim panel to gain access to the battery.
3. Disconnect the battery negative cable (2) from the
battery terminal.
4. Disconnect the battery positive cable (1) from the
battery terminal.
5. Unlatch the battery retention strap (4).
CAUTION: Use care when disconnecting the bat-

tery vent tube from the battery. The vent tube nip-
ple is made of plastic and is easily damaged if not
disconnected properly.
6. Gently disconnect the battery vent tube from the

battery nipple.
7. Remove the battery hold down clamp and remove

the battery from the vehicle.
INSTALLATION
WARNING: A SUITABLE PAIR OF HEAVY DUTY RUBBER GLOVES AND SAFETY GLASSES SHOULD BE
WORN WHEN REMOVING OR SERVICING A BATTERY.
WARNING: REMOVE METALLIC JEWELRY TO AVOID INJURY BY ACCIDENTAL ARCING OF BATTERY CUR-
RENT.
1. Position the battery in the battery tray.
2. Install the battery hold down clamp and bolt.

Torque the bolt to 4 Nm (35 in. lbs.).
CAUTION: Use care when connecting the battery

vent tube to the battery. The vent tube nipple is
made of plastic and is easily damaged if not con-
nected properly.
3. Gently connect the battery vent tube to the battery

nipple.
4. Latch the battery retention strap (4).

5. Connect the battery positive cable (1).
6. Connect the battery negative cable (2).
BATTERY HOLDDOWN
REMOVAL
1. Verify that the ignition switch and all accessories
are OFF.
2. Remove the rear compartment floor, trim panel to
gain access to the battery.
4. Remove the bolt from the battery hold down and
remove the hold down.
INSTALLATION
1. Install the battery hold down clamp and bolt.
Torque the bolt to 4 Nm (35 in. lbs.).
BATTERY CABLES
DESCRIPTION
The battery cables (1) and (2) are large gauge,
stranded copper wires sheathed within a heavy plastic
or synthetic rubber insulating jacket. The wire used in
the battery cables combines excellent flexibility and
reliability with high electrical current carrying capacity.
The battery cables feature a stamped brass clamping
type female battery terminal crimped onto one end of
the battery cable wire and then solder-dipped. A
square headed pinch-bolt and hex nut are installed at
the open end of the female battery terminal clamp.
Large eyelet type terminals are crimped onto the
opposite end of the battery cable wire and then sol-
der-dipped. The battery positive cable wires (1) have a
red insulating jacket to provide visual identification and
feature a larger female battery terminal clamp to allow
connection to the larger battery positive terminal post.
The battery negative cable wires (2) have a black
insulating jacket and a smaller female battery terminal
clamp.
The battery cables cannot be repaired and, if damaged or faulty they must be replaced. Both the battery positive
and negative cables are available for service replacement only as a unit with the battery wire harness, which may
include portions of the wiring circuits for the generator and other components on some models. Refer to the appro-
priate wiring information for the location of the proper battery cable wire harness diagrams. The wiring information
also includes proper wire and connector repair procedures, further details on wire harness routing and retention, as
well as pin-out and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds.
OPERATION
The battery cables connect the battery terminal posts to the vehicle electrical system. These cables also provide a
path back to the battery for electrical current generated by the charging system for restoring the voltage potential of
the battery. The female battery terminal clamps on the ends of the battery cable wires provide a strong and reliable
connection of the battery cable to the battery terminal posts. The terminal pinch bolts allow the female terminal
clamps to be tightened around the male terminal posts on the top of the battery. The eyelet terminals secured to the
opposite ends of the battery cable wires from the female battery terminal clamps provide secure and reliable con-
nection of the battery cables to the vehicle electrical system.

BATTERY CABLES
A voltage drop test will determine if there is excessive resistance in the battery cable terminal connections or the
battery cable. If excessive resistance is found in the battery cable connections, the connection point should be dis-
assembled, cleaned of all corrosion or foreign material, then reassembled. Following reassembly, check the voltage
drop for the battery cable connection and the battery cable again to confirm repair.
When performing the voltage drop test, it is important to remember that the voltage drop is giving an indication of
the resistance between the two points at which the voltmeter probes are attached. EXAMPLE: When testing the
resistance of the battery positive cable, touch the voltmeter leads to the battery positive cable terminal clamp and to
the battery positive cable eyelet terminal at the starter solenoid B(+) terminal stud. If you probe the battery positive
terminal post and the battery positive cable eyelet terminal at the starter solenoid B(+) terminal stud, you are read-
ing the combined voltage drop in the battery positive cable terminal clamp-to-terminal post connection and the bat-
tery positive cable.
VOLTAGE DROP TEST

The following operation will require a voltmeter accurate to 1/10 (0.10) volt. Before performing this test, be certain
that the following procedures are accomplished:
The battery is fully-charged, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM/BATTERY - STANDARD PROCE-

DURE - BATTERY CHARGING) for the proper battery charging procedure.
The battery has successfully passed a load test, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM/BATTERY -
STANDARD PROCEDURE - USING MICRO 420 BATTERY TESTER) for the proper load test procedure.
Fully engage the parking brake.
If the vehicle is equipped with an automatic transmission, place the gearshift selector lever in the Park position.
If the vehicle is equipped with a manual transmission, place the gearshift selector lever in the Neutral position
and block the clutch pedal in the fully depressed position.
Verify that all lamps and accessories are turned off.
To prevent the engine from starting, remove the Automatic Shut Down (ASD) relay. The ASD relay is located
in the Power Distribution Center (PDC), in the engine compartment. See the fuse and relay layout label affixed
to the underside of the PDC cover for ASD relay identification and location.
1. Remove the spare tire cover to gain access to the
battery. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter
to the battery negative terminal post. Connect the
negative lead of the voltmeter to the battery nega-
tive cable terminal clamp. Rotate and hold the igni-
tion switch in the Start position. Observe the
voltmeter. If voltage is detected, correct the poor
connection between the battery negative cable ter-
minal clamp and the battery negative terminal post.
2. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the

battery positive terminal post. Connect the negative
lead of the voltmeter to the battery positive cable
terminal clamp. Rotate and hold the ignition switch
in the Start position. Observe the voltmeter. If volt-
age is detected, correct the poor connection
between the battery positive cable terminal clamp and the battery positive terminal post.
3. Using a suitable jumper wire, connect the voltmeter
to measure between the battery negative cable ter-
minal clamp and a good clean ground on the
engine block. Rotate and hold the ignition switch in
the Start position. Observe the voltmeter. If the
reading is above 0.2 volt, clean and tighten the bat-
tery negative cable eyelet terminal connection at
the transmission housing. Repeat the test. If the
reading is still above 0.2 volt, perform Step 4 and
Step 5.
4. Connect the voltmeter to measure between the bat-

tery negative cable terminal clamp and the battery
negative cable eyelet terminal connection at the
vehicle body. Rotate and hold the ignition switch in
the vehicle body. Repeat the test. If the reading is
still above 0.2 volt, replace the battery rear nega-
tive cable, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM/CABLES - REMOVAL).

5. Connect the voltmeter to measure between the bat-
the right front strut tower and the battery negative
cable eyelet terminal connection at the transmis-
sion housing. Rotate and hold the ignition switch in
the right front strut tower. Repeat the test. If the
reading is still above 0.2 volt, replace the battery
front negative cable, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM/CABLES - REMOVAL).

6. Using a suitable jumper wire, connect the voltmeter
to measure between the battery positive cable ter-
minal clamp and the starter solenoid B(+) terminal
stud. Rotate and hold the ignition switch in the
Start position. Observe the voltmeter. If the reading
is above 0.2 volt, clean and tighten the battery pos-
itive cable eyelet terminal connection at the starter
solenoid B(+) terminal stud. Repeat the test. If the
reading is still above 0.2 volt, perform Step 7 and
Step 8.
7. Remove the right front wheelhouse splash shield to

gain access to the battery positive cable bulkhead
outside terminal, (Refer to 23 - BODY/EXTERI-
OR/RF WHEELHOUSE SPLASH SHIELD -
REMOVAL). Connect the voltmeter to measure
between the battery positive cable bulkhead out-
side terminal and the starter solenoid B(+) terminal
stud. Rotate and hold the ignition switch in the
Start position. Observe the voltmeter. If the reading
is above 0.2 volt, clean and tighten the battery pos-
itive cable bulkhead outside terminal connection.
Repeat the test. If the reading is still above 0.2
volt, replace the battery front positive cable, (Refer
to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM/CABLES - REMOVAL).

8. Remove the right front carpet to gain access to the
battery positive cable bulkhead inside terminal.
Connect the voltmeter to measure between the bat-
tery positive cable terminal clamp and the battery
positive cable bulkhead inside terminal connection.
Rotate and hold the ignition switch in the Start
position. Observe the voltmeter. If the reading is
above 0.2 volt, clean and tighten the battery posi-
tive cable bulkhead inside terminal connection.
Repeat the test. If the reading is still above 0.2
volt, replace the battery rear positive cable, (Refer
to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM/CABLES -
REMOVAL).
REMOVAL
NEGATIVE - ENGINE COMPARTMENT
1. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Be cer-
tain that all electrical accessories are turned off.
battery.
4. Remove the fastener securing the battery negative
cable to the right front strut tower.
5. Raise vehicle on hoist, (Refer to LUBRICATION &

MAINTENANCE/HOISTING - STANDARD PROCE-
DURE).
6. Remove the fastener securing the battery negative
cable to the transmission housing.
7. One at a time, remove the battery cable retaining pushpins, fasteners and routing clips until the cable is free
from the vehicle.
8. Remove the battery cable from the engine compartment.
NEGATIVE - REAR COMPARTMENT

battery.
3. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable
(3).
4. Remove the fastener (4) securing the battery neg-
ative cable to the body.
5. Remove the cable from the vehicle.
POSITIVE - BATTERY TO BULKHEAD

battery.
(3).
4. Disconnect the battery positive cable (1).
5. Remove the Power Distribution Center (PDC) cover

(2).
6. Remove the battery positive cable to rear PDC fas-
tener (3).
7. One at a time, free the battery positive cable from

the routing clips located in the rear compartment
area.
8. Remove the right, front seat, (Refer to 23 - BODY/SEATS/SEAT - REMOVAL).

9. Remove the right, rear seat cushion. Pull upward at forward edge of each retainer loop of the rear seat cushion
to disengage retainer loops from cups in floor.
10. Remove the right, front and rear door sill trim panels.
11. Remove the right, B - pillar lower trim panel, (Refer to 23 - BODY/INTERIOR/B-PILLAR TRIM - REMOVAL).
12. position carpet aside to gain access to the battery positive cable.
13. One at a time, free the battery positive cable from
the routing clips located in the rear seat area.
14. Position the bulkhead insulator aside to gain

access to the battery positive cable bulkhead fas-
tener.
15. Remove the battery positive cable to bulkhead
fastener.
16. Remove the battery positive cable from the vehi-

cle making note of the cable routing under the
floor cross members.
POSITIVE - ENGINE COMPARTMENT

battery.
(3).
4. Raise vehicle on hoist, (Refer to LUBRICATION & MAINTENANCE/HOISTING - STANDARD PROCEDURE).

5. Remove the right front wheelhouse splash shield to gain access to the battery positive cable bulkhead outside
terminal, (Refer to 23 - BODY/EXTERIOR/RF WHEELHOUSE SPLASH SHIELD - REMOVAL).
6. Remove the battery positive cable to bulkhead

fastener.
7. Remove the battery positive cable to starter

fastener.
8. On the 2.7L and 3.5L free the battery positive cable

from the routing clips located at the back of the
engine.
9. On the 5.7L free the battery positive cable from the

routing clip located at the back of the starter.
10. Remove the battery positive cable from the vehi-
cle making note of the cable routing.
INSTALLATION
NEGATIVE - ENGINE COMPARTMENT
1. Position the battery negative cable in the engine
compartment.
2. Raise vehicle on hoist, (Refer to LUBRICATION &
MAINTENANCE/HOISTING - STANDARD PROCE-
DURE).
3. Install the fastener securing the battery negative
cable to the transmission housing. Torque the bolt
to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs.).
4. One at a time, install the battery cable retaining pushpins, fasteners and routing clips until the cable is installed
exactly where it was in the vehicle.
5. Lower vehicle.
6. Install the fastener securing the battery negative
cable to the right front strut tower.

8. Install the spare tire cover.
NEGATIVE - REAR COMPARTMENT
1. Position the battery negative cable in the vehicle.

2. Install the fastener (4) securing the battery negative
cable to the body.
POSITIVE - BATTERY TO BULKHEAD

1. Position the battery positive cable in the vehicle
taking care to route the cable under the floor cross
members.
2. Position the bulkhead insulator aside to gain

access to the battery positive cable bulkhead fas-
tener.
3. Install the battery positive cable to bulkhead fas-
tener.
4. Position the bulkhead insulator back to the normal
position.
1. One at a time, secure the battery positive cable to

the routing clips located in the rear seat area.
2. One at a time, secure the battery positive cable to

the routing clips located in the rear compartment
area.
3. Position the carpet back to the normal position.

4. Install the right, B - pillar lower trim panel, (Refer to 23 - BODY/INTERIOR/B-PILLAR TRIM - INSTALLATION).
5. Install the right, front and rear door sill trim panels.
6. Install the right, rear seat cushion. Engage retainer loops into cup on floor kick up. Push downward at forward
edge at each retainer loop of the rear seat cushion to engage retainers.
7. Install the right, front seat, (Refer to 23 - BODY/SEATS/SEAT - INSTALLATION).
8. Install the battery positive cable to rear Power Dis-

tribution Center (PDC) fastener (3).
9. Install the PDC cover (5).

10. Connect the battery positive cable (1).
POSITIVE - ENGINE COMPARTMENT

1. Position the battery positive cable in the engine
compartment.
2. On the 2.7L and 3.5L secure the battery positive

cable to the routing clips located at the back of the
engine.
3. On the 5.7L secure the battery positive cable to the

routing clip located at the back of the starter.
4. Install the battery positive cable to starter fastener.
5. Install the battery positive cable to bulkhead

fastener.
6. Install the right front wheelhouse splash shield, (Refer to 23 - BODY/EXTERIOR/RF WHEELHOUSE SPLASH
SHIELD - INSTALLATION).
7. Lower vehicle.

BATTERY TRAY
REMOVAL
1. Remove the battery, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM/BATTERY - REMOVAL).
2. Using a small flat bladed tool, gently release the
two mounting tabs that secure the Power Distribu-
tion Center (PDC) to the battery tray. Position the
PDC aside.
3. Remove the battery tray mounting fasteners and

remove the battery tray from the vehicle.
INSTALLATION
1. Position the battery tray in the vehicle and install
the mounting fasteners.
2. Position the Power Distribution Center (PDC) onto

the battery tray mounting tabs. Gently apply down-
ward pressure on the PDC until it snaps into place.
3. Install the battery, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM/BATTERY - INSTALLATION).

LX CHARGING 8F - 41
CHARGING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
CHARGING 3.5L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
DESCRIPTION - CHARGING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . 42 6.1L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
OPERATION - CHARGING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 5.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING INSTALLATION
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . 43 2.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
SPECIFICATIONS 3.0L DIESEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
TORQUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 3.5L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
GENERATOR 6.1L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 5.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 VOLTAGE REGULATOR
REMOVAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
2.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
3.0L DIESEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
8F - 42 CHARGING LX
CHARGING
DESCRIPTION - CHARGING SYSTEM
The charging system consists of:
Generator
Decoupler Pulley (If equipped)
Electronic Voltage Regulator (EVR) circuitry within the Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
Ignition switch (refer to the Ignition System section for information)
Battery (refer to the Battery section for information)
Ambient Air Temperature (If equipped)
Inlet Air Temperature (calculated battery temperature)(If equipped)
Voltmeter (refer to the Instrument Cluster section for information if equipped)
Wiring harness and connections (refer to the Wiring section for information)
Accessory drive belt (refer to the Cooling section for more information)
Battery Temperature sensor (if equipped)
OPERATION - CHARGING SYSTEM

The charging system is turned on and off with the ignition switch. The system is on when the engine is running and
the ASD relay is energized. The ASD relay is energized when the PCM grounds the ASD control circuit. This voltage
is connected through the PCM or IPM (intelligent power module) (if equipped) and supplied to one of the generator
field terminals (Gen. Source +) at the back of the generator.
The generator is driven by the engine through a serpentine belt and pulley or decoupler pulley arrangement.
The amount of DC current produced by the generator is controlled by the EVR (field control) circuitry contained
within the PCM. This circuitry is connected in series with the second rotor field terminal and ground.
An Ambient air temperature sensor is mounted on the bumper used to calculate the temperature near the battery.
This temperature data, along with data from monitored line voltage (battery voltage sense circuit), is used by the
PCM to vary the battery charging rate. This is done by cycling the feed path to control the strength of the rotor
magnetic field. The PCM then compensates and regulates generator current output accordingly to maintain system
voltage at the targeted system voltage based on battery temperature.
All vehicles are equipped with On-Board Diagnostics (OBD). All OBD-sensed systems, including EVR (field control)
circuitry, are monitored by the PCM. Each monitored circuit is assigned a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC). The PCM
will store a DTC in electronic memory for certain failures it detects and illuminate the (MIL) lamp. Refer to On-Board
Diagnostics in the Electronic Control Modules (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES/
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE - DESCRIPTION) section for more DTC information.
The Charging system Battery light indicates problems with the charging system (voltage too high/low, generator
failure, etc.). If an extreme condition is indicated, the lamp will be illuminated. The signal to activate the lamp is sent
via the PCI bus circuits. The lamp is located on the instrument panel. Refer to the Instrument Cluster section for
additional information.
The PCM uses the inlet air temperature sensor or ambient temperature sensor to control the charge system voltage.
This temperature, along with data from monitored line voltage, is used by the PCM to vary the battery charging rate.
The system voltage is higher at cold temperatures and is gradually reduced as the calculated battery temperature
increases.
The ambient temperature sensor is used to control the battery voltage based upon ambient temperature (approxi-
mation of battery temperature). The PCM maintains the optimal output of the generator by monitoring battery volt-
age and controlling it to a range of 13.5 - 14.7 volts based on battery temperature.
LX CHARGING 8F - 43

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) monitors critical input and output circuits of the charging system, making sure
they are operational. A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) is assigned to each input and output circuit monitored by the
OBD system. Some circuits are checked continuously and some are checked only under certain conditions.
If the OBD system senses that a monitored circuit is bad, it will put a DTC into electronic memory. The DTC will stay
in electronic memory as long as the circuit continues to be bad. The PCM is programmed to clear the memory after
40 good trip if the problem does not occur again.
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES
A DTC description can be read using the DRBIIIT scan tool. Refer to the appropriate Powertrain Diagnostic Proce-
dures manual for information.
A DTC does not identify which component in a circuit is bad. Thus, a DTC should be treated as a symptom, not as
the cause for the problem. In some cases, because of the design of the diagnostic test procedure, a DTC can be
the reason for another DTC to be set. Therefore, it is important that the test procedures be followed in sequence,
to understand what caused a DTC to be set.
ERASING DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES
The DRBIIIT Scan Tool must be used to erase a DTC.

The following procedures may be used to diagnose the charging system if:
the check gauges lamp or battery lamp is illuminated with the engine running
the voltmeter (if equipped) does not register properly
an undercharged or overcharged battery condition occurs.
Remember that an undercharged battery is often caused by:
accessories being left on with the engine not running
a faulty or improperly adjusted switch that allows a lamp to stay on. Refer to Ignition-Off Draw Test (Refer to
8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM/BATTERY - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
loose generator belt.
INSPECTION
The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) monitors critical input and output circuits of the charging system, making sure
they are operational. A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) is assigned to each input and output circuit monitored by the
On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) system. Some charging system circuits are checked continuously, and some are
checked only under certain conditions.
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Codes in; Powertrain Diagnostic manual for more DTC information. This will include a
complete list of DTCs including DTCs for the charging system.
To perform a complete test of the charging system, refer to the appropriate Powertrain Diagnostic Procedures ser-
vice manual and the DRBIIIT scan tool. Perform the following inspections before attaching the scan tool.
1. Inspect the battery condition. Refer to the Battery section (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM -
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for procedures.
2. Inspect condition of battery cable terminals, battery posts, connections at engine block, starter solenoid and
relay. They should be clean and tight. Repair as required.
3. Inspect all fuses in both the fuseblock and Power Distribution Center (PDC) or IPM (if equipped) for tightness in
receptacles. They should be properly installed and tight. Repair or replace as required.
4. Inspect generator mounting bolts for tightness. Replace or tighten bolts if required. Refer to the Generator
Removal/Installation section of this group for torque specifications (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/CHARGING -
SPECIFICATIONS).
5. Inspect generator drive belt condition and tension. Tighten or replace belt as required. Refer to Belt Tension
Specifications (Refer to 7 - COOLING/ACCESSORY DRIVE - SPECIFICATIONS).
6. Inspect decoupler pulley (if equipped). Ensure decoupler pulley is driving the alternator rotor.
7. Inspect automatic belt tensioner (if equipped). Refer to the Cooling System for more information.
8F - 44 CHARGING LX
8. Inspect generator electrical connections at generator field, battery output, and ground terminal (if equipped). Also
check generator ground wire connection at engine (if equipped). They should all be clean and tight. Repair as
required.
SPECIFICATIONS
TORQUE

Generator Mounting Bolts
65 48 -
- 2.7L
65 48 -
- 3.5L
65 48 -
- 5.7L
Generator Support Bracket
41 30 -
Bolt/Nuts - 5.7L
Generator B+ Output 13 - 115
Cable Terminal Nut
LX CHARGING 8F - 45
GENERATOR
DESCRIPTION
The generator is belt-driven by the engine. It is serviced only as a complete assembly. If the generator fails for any
reason, the entire assembly must be replaced. The generator produces DC voltage.
OPERATION
As the energized rotor begins to rotate within the generator, the spinning magnetic field induces a current into the
windings of the stator coil.
The Y type stator winding connections deliver the induced AC current to 6 positive and 6 negative diodes for rec-
tification. From the diodes, rectified DC current is delivered to the vehicles electrical system through the generator,
battery, and ground terminals.
Noise emitting from the generator may be caused by:
Worn, loose or defective bearings
Loose or defective drive pulley
Incorrect, worn, damaged or misadjusted drive belt
Loose mounting bolts
Misaligned drive pulley
Defective stator or diode
Damaged internal fins
REMOVAL
2.7L
2. Remove generator drive belt. Refer to the Cooling
System section.
3. Disconnect generator field circuit plug.

4. Remove B+ terminal nut and wire.
8F - 46 CHARGING LX
5. Remove 2 lower mounting bolts.
6. Remove upper bolt.
7. Remove generator.
LX CHARGING 8F - 47
3.0L DIESEL
2. Raise vehicle and support.
3. Remove front belly pan.
4. Remove middle belly pan.

5. Remove rear belly pan.
8F - 48 CHARGING LX
6. Remove side covers.
7. Remove sway bar heat shields.
8. Remove sway bar brackets.

LX CHARGING 8F - 49
9. Swing sway bar down and out of the way.
10. Clamp front heater hose.
11. Clamp rear heater hose.

8F - 50 CHARGING LX
12. Disconnect heater tube connection. There will be

some coolant loss.
13. Support engine.

14. Remove heat shield from motor mount.
LX CHARGING 8F - 51
15. Remove lower engine mount bolts.
16. Remove upper engine mount bolts.
17. Raise engine and remove motor mount.

8F - 52 CHARGING LX
18. Disconnect fuel line bracket from engine mount

bracket.
19. Remove engine mount bracket from vehicle. Fuel

line bracket mounting hole (1), engine mount
holes (2), Bracket mounting holes (3).
20. Lower engine.

21. Disconnect electrical connectors from generator.
LX CHARGING 8F - 53
22. Loosen upper mounting bolts.

23. Loosen lower mounting bolts.
24. Relocate heater tube.
25. Remove generator from vehicle.
3.5L
2. Remove generator drive belt. Refer to the Cooling System section.
8F - 54 CHARGING LX
3. Remove bracket bolts.

4. Remove upper mounting bolt.

6. Remove middle splash pan.
7. Disconnect generator field circuit plug.
8. Remove B+ terminal nut and wire.
LX CHARGING 8F - 55
9. Remove lower mounting bolts.
10. Remove generator.
6.1L
WARNING: DISCONNECT NEGATIVE CABLE FROM BATTERY BEFORE REMOVING BATTERY OUTPUT WIRE
(B+ WIRE) FROM GENERATOR. FAILURE TO DO SO CAN RESULT IN INJURY OR DAMAGE TO ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM.

8F - 56 CHARGING LX
3. A heat shield (1) is used over the right engine

mount (3). Remove two heat shield mounting bolts
(2). The heat shield must be removed to gain
access to generator support bracket nut (refer to
following step).
4. Loosen, but do not remove generator support

bracket nut (4).
5. Remove bolt (3).
6. Unsnap plastic insulator cap from B+ output termi-
nal.
7. Remove B+ terminal mounting nut at rear of gen-
erator. Disconnect terminal from generator.
8. Disconnect field wire connector at rear of generator
by pushing on connector tab.
9. Lower vehicle.
10. Remove generator drive belt. Refer to 7, Cooling
System for procedure.
11. Partially drain some engine coolant and remove

upper radiator hose.
12. Remove two generator mounting bolts (1).
13. Remove generator (2) from vehicle.
LX CHARGING 8F - 57
5.7L
WARNING: DISCONNECT NEGATIVE CABLE FROM BATTERY BEFORE REMOVING BATTERY OUTPUT WIRE
(B+ WIRE) FROM GENERATOR. FAILURE TO DO SO CAN RESULT IN INJURY OR DAMAGE TO ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM.

2. Remove generator drive belt. Refer to 7, Cooling System for procedure.
4. Unsnap plastic insulator cap from B+ output terminal.
5. Remove B+ terminal mounting nut at rear of generator. Disconnect terminal from generator.
6. Disconnect field wire connector at rear of generator by pushing on connector tab.
7. Remove generator support bracket nut (4) and bolt
(3). Remove support bracket (1).
8. Remove 2 generator mounting bolts (1).

9. Remove generator (2) from vehicle.
8F - 58 CHARGING LX
INSTALLATION
2.7L
1. Install generator.
2. Install upper bolt mounting bolt.

LX CHARGING 8F - 59
3. Install 2 lower mounting bolts.

4. Tighten bolts to 65 Nm (48 ft. lbs.).
5. Install B+ terminal nut and wire. Tighten nut to 13

Nm (115 in. lbs.).
6. Connect generator field circuit plug.
7. Install generator drive belt. Refer to the Cooling
System section.

8F - 60 CHARGING LX
3.0L DIESEL
1. Install the 2 upper bolts into generator. Install gen-
erator to vehicle.
2. Hand start the 2 upper bolts.

3. Start the 2 lower bolts.
4. Torque bolts to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.).
LX CHARGING 8F - 61
5. Connect the electrical connectors.
6. Install the engine mount bracket to engine.

7. Torque bolts to 30 Nm (22 ft. lbs.).
8. Install fuel line bracket and tighten bolt.

8F - 62 CHARGING LX
9. Loose install engine mount.
10. Hand start engine mount upper bolts.
11. Lower engine.

12. Install lower engine mount bolts. Torque bolts to
50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.).
LX CHARGING 8F - 63
13. Install engine mount heat shield and tighten bolt.
14. Connect heater tube and start tube nut.
15. Tighten tube nut.

8F - 64 CHARGING LX
16. Release rear heater tube clamp.
17. Release front heater tube clamp.
18. Swing sway bar up and into place.

LX CHARGING 8F - 65
19. Install mounting brackets and tighten bolts to 60

Nm (44 ft. lbs.).
20. Install sway bar mounting bracket heat shields.
21. Install drive belt.

8F - 66 CHARGING LX
22. Install rear belly pan.
23. Install middle belly pan.
24. Install front belly pan.

LX CHARGING 8F - 67
25. Install belly pan side shield.

26. Lower vehicle.
28. Check coolant level and refill if necessary.
3.5L
1. Install generator.
2. Install lower mounting bolts (3). Loosen install the

upper mounting bolt (4).
3. Tighten lower mounting bolts to 65 Nm (48 ft. lbs.).
4. Connect generator field circuit plug.

5. Install B+ terminal nut and wire. Tighten nut to 13
Nm (115 in. lbs.).
6. Install middle splash pan.
7. Lower vehicle.
8F - 68 CHARGING LX
8. Remove loose installed upper bolt (4).

9. Install bracket (2) and bracket bolt (1).
10. Install upper mounting bolt (4) and bracket (2).
11. Tighten upper mounting bolt to 65 Nm (48 ft.
lbs.).
12. Tighten Bracket bolt to 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.).
13. Install generator drive belt. Refer to the Cooling
System section.
6.1L
Rear Wheel Drive (RWD)
1. Position generator (2) to engine and install 2
mounting bolts (1). Do not tighten bolts (1) at this
time.
LX CHARGING 8F - 69
3. Position support bracket (1) to generator and install

bolt (3). Tighten all bolts / nut. Refer to Torque
Specifications.
4. Install heat shield (1) and two heat shield mounting

bolts (2).
5. Snap field wire connector into rear of generator.
6. Install B+ terminal eyelet to generator output stud.
Tighten mounting nut. Refer to Torque Specifica-
tions.
7. Lower vehicle.
CAUTION: Never force a belt over a pulley rim

using a screwdriver. The synthetic fiber of the belt
can be damaged.
CAUTION: When installing a serpentine accessory

drive belt, the belt MUST be routed correctly. The
water pump may be rotating in the wrong direction
if the belt is installed incorrectly, causing the
engine to overheat. Refer to belt routing label in
engine compartment, or refer to Belt Schematics
in 7, Cooling System.
8. Install generator drive belt. Refer to 7, Cooling System for procedure.

9. Install upper radiator hose and fill cooling system with coolant.
10. Install negative battery cable to battery.
8F - 70 CHARGING LX
5.7L
1. Position generator (2) to engine and install 2
mounting bolts (1).
2. Tighten bolts. Refer to Torque Specifications.
3. Position support bracket (1) to generator and install

bolt (3) and nut (4). Tighten bolt / nut. Refer to
Torque Specifications.
4. Snap field wire connector into rear of generator.

5. Install B+ terminal eyelet to generator output stud. Tighten mounting nut. Refer to Torque Specifications.
6. Lower vehicle.
CAUTION: Never force a belt over a pulley rim using a screwdriver. The synthetic fiber of the belt can be
damaged.
CAUTION: When installing a serpentine accessory drive belt, the belt MUST be routed correctly. The water
pump may be rotating in the wrong direction if the belt is installed incorrectly, causing the engine to over-
heat. Refer to belt routing label in engine compartment, or refer to Belt Schematics in 7, Cooling System.
7. Install generator drive belt. Refer to 7, Cooling System for procedure.

8. Install negative battery cable to battery.
LX CHARGING 8F - 71
VOLTAGE REGULATOR
DESCRIPTION
The Electronic Voltage Regulator (EVR) is not a separate component. It is actually a voltage regulating circuit
located within the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The EVR is not serviced separately. If replacement is neces-
sary, the PCM must be replaced.
OPERATION
The amount of DC current produced by the generator is controlled by EVR circuitry contained within the PCM. This
circuitry is connected in series with the generators second rotor field terminal and its ground.
Voltage is regulated within the PCM on the NGC vehicles, to control the strength of the rotor magnetic field. The
EVR circuitry monitors system line voltage at the PDC and calculated battery temperature or inlet air temperature
sensor (refer to Inlet Air Temperature Sensor, if equipped, for more information ). It then determines a target charg-
ing voltage. If sensed battery voltage is lower than the target voltage, the PCM feeds the field winding until sensed
battery voltage is at the target voltage. A circuit in the PCM cycles the feed side of the generator field at 250 times
per second (250Hz), but has the capability to feed the field control wire 100% of the time (full field) to achieve the
target voltage. If the charging rate cannot be monitored (limp-in), a duty cycle of 20% is used by the PCM in order
to have some generator output. Also refer to Charging System Operation for additional information.
8F - 72 STARTING LX
STARTING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
STARTING 3.0L DIESEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 3.5L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 5.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING REMOVAL - 6.1L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - STARTING INSTALLATION
SYSTEM TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 2.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - FEED CIRCUIT 3.0L diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
RESISTANCE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 3.5L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - CONTROL INSTALLATION - 6.1L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
CIRCUIT TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 5.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
SPECIFICATIONS
TORQUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
STARTER MOTOR
REMOVAL
2.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
LX STARTING 8F - 73
STARTING
DESCRIPTION
The starting system consists of:
Starter relay
Starter motor (including an integral starter solenoid)
Other components to be considered as part of starting system are:
Battery
Battery cables
Ignition switch and key lock cylinder
Clutch pedal position switch (manual transmission)
Park/neutral position switch (automatic transmission)
Wire harnesses and connections.
The Battery, Starting, and Charging systems operate in conjunction with one another, and must be tested as a com-
plete system. For correct operation of starting/charging systems, all components used in these 3 systems must per-
form within specifications. When attempting to diagnose any of these systems, it is important that you keep their
interdependency in mind.
The diagnostic procedures used in each of these groups include the most basic conventional diagnostic methods, to
the more sophisticated On-Board Diagnostics (OBD) built into the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). Use of an
induction-type milliampere ammeter, volt/ohmmeter, battery charger, carbon pile rheostat (load tester), and 12-volt
test lamp may be required.
OPERATION
These components form two separate circuits. A high amperage circuit that feeds the starter motor up to 300+
amps, and a control circuit that operates on less than 20 amps.
The PCM controls a double start over-ride safety that does not allow the starter to be engaged if the engine is
already running.

DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - STARTING SYSTEM TEST
For circuit descriptions and diagrams, refer to the Wiring Diagrams.
WARNING: ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH AIRBAGS, REFER TO THE PASSIVE RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
BEFORE ATTEMPTING STEERING WHEEL, STEERING COLUMN, OR INSTRUMENT PANEL COMPONENT
DIAGNOSIS OR SERVICE. FAILURE TO TAKE THE PROPER PRECAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN ACCIDEN-
TAL AIRBAG DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
INSPECTION
Before removing any unit from the starting system for repair or diagnosis, perform the following inspections:
Battery - Visually inspect the battery for indications of physical damage and loose or corroded cable connec-
tions. Determine the state-of-charge and cranking capacity of the battery. Charge or replace the battery, if
required. Refer to the Battery section for more information.
Ignition Switch - Visually inspect the ignition switch for indications of physical damage and loose or corroded
wire harness connections.
Transmission Range Sensor or Park/Neutral Switch - Visually inspect the transmission range sensor for
indications of physical damage and loose or corroded wire harness connections.
Starter Relay - Visually inspect the starter relay for indications of physical damage and loose or corroded wire
harness connections.
Starter Motor - Visually inspect the starter motor for indications of physical damage and loose or corroded
wire harness connections.
8F - 74 STARTING LX
Starter Solenoid - Visually inspect the starter solenoid for indications of physical damage and loose or cor-
roded wire harness connections.
Wiring - Visually inspect the wire harness for damage. Repair or replace any faulty wiring, as required. Check
for loose or corroded wire harness connections at main engine ground and remote jump post.
Power Distribution Center (PDC) - Visually inspect the B+ connections at the PDC for physical damage and
loose or corroded harness connections.
STARTING SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS
STARTER FAILS 1. BATTERY 1. REFER TO THE BATTERY SECTION FOR MORE

TO ENGAGE. DISCHARGED OR INFORMATION. CHARGE OR REPLACE BATTERY, IF
FAULTY. REQUIRED.
2. STARTING CIRCUIT 2. REFER TO FEED CIRCUIT RESISTANCE TEST AND FEED
WIRING FAULTY. CIRCUIT TEST IN THIS SECTION.
3. STARTER RELAY 3. REFER TO RELAY TEST, IN THIS SECTION. REPLACE
FAULTY. RELAY, IF NECESSARY.
4. IGNITION SWITCH 4. REFER TO IGNITION SWITCH TEST, IN THE STEERING
FAULTY. SECTION OR 8 WIRING DIAGRAMS. REPLACE SWITCH, IF
NECESSARY.
5. PARK/NEUTRAL 5. REFER PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH TEST, IN THE
POSITION SWITCH TRANSAXLE. SECTION FOR MORE INFORMATION. REPLACE
(AUTO TRANS) FAULTY SWITCH, IF NECESSARY.
OR MIS-ADJUSTED.
6. CLUTCH INTERLOCK 6. REFER TO CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH TEST, IN
SWITCH (MAN TRANS) THE CLUTCH. SECTION. REPLACE SWITCH, IF NECESSARY.
FAULTY.
7. STARTER SOLENOID 7. REFER TO SOLENOID TEST, IN THIS SECTION. REPLACE
FAULTY. STARTER ASSEMBLY, IF NECESSARY.
8. STARTER ASSEMBLY 8. IF ALL OTHER STARTING SYSTEM COMPONENTS AND
FAULTY. CIRCUITS CHECK OK, REPLACE STARTER ASSEMBLY.
9. FAULTY TEETH ON 9. ROTATE FLYWHEEL 360, AND INSPECT TEETH AND RING
RING GEAR. GEAR REPLACED IF DAMAGED.
10. PCM DOUBLE 10. REFER TO PCM DIAGNOSTIC. CHECK FOR CONTINUITY
START OVERRIDE BETWEEN PCM AND TERMINAL 85. REPAIR OPEN CIRCUIT
OUTPUT FAILURE. AS REQUIRED. IF OK, PCM MAY BE DEFECTIVE.
STARTER 1. BATTERY 1. REFER TO THE BATTERY SECTION FOR MORE

ENGAGES, DISCHARGED OR INFORMATION. CHARGE OR REPLACE BATTERY AS
FAILS TO TURN FAULTY. NECESSARY.
ENGINE.
2. STARTING CIRCUIT 2. REFER TO THE FEED CIRCUIT RESISTANCE TEST AND
WIRING FAULTY. THE FEED CIRCUIT TEST IN THIS SECTION. REPAIR AS
NECESSARY.
4. ENGINE SEIZED. 4. REFER TO THE ENGINE SECTION, FOR DIAGNOSTIC AND
SERVICE PROCEDURES.
5. LOOSE 5. INSPECT FOR LOOSE CONNECTIONS.
CONNECTION AT
BATTERY, PDC,
STARTER, OR ENGINE
GROUND.
LX STARTING 8F - 75
STARTER 1. BROKEN TEETH ON 1. REMOVE STARTER. INSPECT RING GEAR AND REPLACE
ENGAGES, STARTER RING GEAR. IF NECESSARY.
SPINS OUT
BEFORE
ENGINE
STARTS.
STARTER DOES 1. STARTER 1. INSTALL STARTER. TIGHTEN STARTER MOUNTING

NOT IMPROPERLY HARDWARE TO CORRECT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS.
DISENGAGE. INSTALLED.
2. STARTER RELAY 2. REFER TO RELAY TEST, IN THIS SECTION. REPLACE
FAULTY. RELAY, IF NECESSARY.
3. IGNITION SWITCH 3. REFER TO IGNITION SWITCH TEST, IN THE STEERING
FAULTY. SECTION. REPLACE SWITCH, IF NECESSARY.
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - FEED CIRCUIT RESISTANCE TEST

Before proceeding with this operation, review Diagnostic Preparation and Starter Feed Circuit Tests. The following
operation will require a voltmeter, accurate to 1/10 of a volt.
CAUTION: Ignition and Fuel systems must be disabled to prevent engine start while performing the follow-
ing tests.
1. To disable the Ignition and Fuel systems, disconnect the Automatic Shutdown Relay (ASD). The ASD relay is
located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to the PDC cover for proper relay location.
2. Gain access to battery terminals.
3. With all wiring harnesses and components properly connected, perform the following:
a. Connect the negative lead of the voltmeter to the battery negative post, and positive lead to the battery
negative cable clamp. Rotate and hold the ignition switch in the START position. Observe the voltmeter. If
voltage is detected, correct poor contact between cable clamp and post.
b. Connect positive lead of the voltmeter to the battery positive post, and negative lead to the battery positive
cable clamp. Rotate and hold the ignition switch key in the START position. Observe the voltmeter. If voltage
is detected, correct poor contact between the cable clamp and post.
c. Connect negative lead of voltmeter to battery negative terminal, and positive lead to engine block near the
battery cable attaching point. Rotate and hold the ignition switch in the START position. If voltage reads
above 0.2 volt, correct poor contact at ground cable attaching point. If voltage reading is still above 0.2 volt
after correcting poor contacts, replace ground cable.
4. Connect positive voltmeter lead to the starter motor housing and the negative lead to the battery negative ter-
minal. Hold the ignition switch key in the START position. If voltage reads above 0.2 volt, correct poor starter to
engine ground.
a. Connect the positive voltmeter lead to the battery positive terminal, and negative lead to battery cable ter-
minal on starter solenoid. Rotate and hold the ignition switch in the START position. If voltage reads above
0.2 volt, correct poor contact at battery cable to solenoid connection. If reading is still above 0.2 volt after
correcting poor contacts, replace battery positive cable.
8F - 76 STARTING LX
b. If resistance tests do not detect feed circuit failures, replace the starter motor.
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - CONTROL CIRCUIT TEST

The starter control circuit has:
Starter motor with integral solenoid
Starter relay
Transmission range sensor, or Park/Neutral Position switch with automatic transmissions
Ignition switch
Battery
All related wiring and connections
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
CAUTION: Before performing any starter tests, the ignition and fuel systems must be disabled.
To disable ignition and fuel systems, disconnect the Automatic Shutdown Relay (ASD). The ASD relay is
located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to the PDC cover for the proper relay location.
STARTER SOLENOID
WARNING: CHECK TO ENSURE THAT THE TRANSMISSION IS IN THE PARK POSITION WITH THE PARKING
BRAKE APPLIED. THIS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH.
1. Verify battery condition. Battery must be in good condition with a full charge before performing any starter tests.
Refer to Battery Tests.
2. Perform Starter Solenoid test BEFORE performing the starter relay test.
3. Perform a visual inspection of the starter/starter solenoid for corrosion, loose connections or faulty wiring.
4. Locate and remove the starter relay from the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to the PDC label for relay
identification and location.
5. Connect a remote starter switch or a jumper wire between the remote battery positive post and terminal 87 of the
starter relay connector.
a. If engine cranks, starter/starter solenoid is good. Go to the Starter Relay Test.
b. If engine does not crank or solenoid chatters, check wiring and connectors from starter relay to starter sole-
noid and from the battery positive terminal to starter post for loose or corroded connections. Particularly at
starter terminals.
c. Repeat test. If engine still fails to crank properly, trouble is within starter or starter mounted solenoid, and
replace starter. Inspect the ring gear teeth.
STARTER RELAY
WARNING: CHECK TO ENSURE THAT THE TRANSMISSION IS IN THE PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION WITH THE
PARKING BRAKE APPLIED. THIS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH.
RELAY TEST
The starter relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) in the engine compartment. Refer to the PDC
label for relay identification and location.
Remove the starter relay from the PDC as described in this group to perform the following tests:
1. A relay in the de-energized position should have continuity between terminals 87A and 30, and no continuity
between terminals 87 and 30. If OK, go to Step 2. If not OK, replace the faulty relay.
2. Resistance between terminals 85 and 86 (electromagnet) should be 75 5 ohms. If OK, go to Step 3. If not OK,
replace the faulty relay.
LX STARTING 8F - 77
3. Connect a battery B+ lead to terminals 85 and a ground lead to terminal 86 to energize the relay. The relay
should click. Also test for continuity between terminals 30 and 87, and no continuity between terminals 87A and
30. If OK, refer to Relay Circuit Test procedure. If not OK, replace the faulty relay.
CAV FUNCTION
30 B (+)
85 IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT
86 PCM-CONTROLLED GROUND
87 STARTER RELAY OUTPUT
87A NO CONNECT
RELAY CIRCUIT TEST

1. The relay common feed terminal cavity (30) is connected to battery voltage and should be hot at all times. If OK,
go to Step 2. If not OK, repair the open circuit to the PDC fuse as required.
2. The relay normally closed terminal (87A) is connected to terminal 30 in the de-energized position, but is not used
for this application. Go to Step 3.
8F - 78 STARTING LX
3. The relay normally open terminal (87) is connected to the common feed terminal (30) in the energized position.
This terminal supplies battery voltage to the starter solenoid field coils. There should be continuity between the
cavity for relay terminal 87 and the starter solenoid terminal at all times. If OK, go to Step 4. If not OK, repair the
open circuit to the starter solenoid as required.
4. The coil battery terminal (85) is connected to the electromagnet in the relay. It is energized when the ignition
switch is held in the Start position and the clutch pedal is depressed (manual trans). Check for battery voltage at
the cavity for relay terminal 86 with the ignition switch in the Start position and the clutch pedal is depressed
(manual trans), and no voltage when the ignition switch is released to the On position. If OK, go to Step 5. If not
OK, check for an open or short circuit to the ignition switch and repair, if required. If the circuit to the ignition
switch is OK, see the Ignition Switch Test procedure in this group.
5. The coil ground terminal (86) is connected to the electromagnet in the relay. It is grounded by the PCM if the
conditions are right to start the car. For automatic trans. cars the PCM must see Park Neutral switch low and
near zero engine speed (rpm). For manual trans. cars the PCM only needs to see near zero engine speed (rpm)
and low clutch interlock input and see near zero engine speed (rpm). To diagnose the Park Neutral switch of the
trans range sensor refer to the transaxle section. Check for continuity to ground while the ignition switch is in the
start position and if equipped the clutch pedal depressed. If not OK and the vehicle has an automatic trans. verify
Park Neutral switch operation. If that checks OK check for continuity between PCM and the terminal 86. Repair
open circuit as required. Also check the clutch interlock switch operation if equipped with a manual transmission.
If OK, the PCM may be defective.
SAFETY SWITCHES
For diagnostics of the Transmission Range Sensor, refer to the Transaxle section for more information.
If equipped with Clutch Interlock/Upstop Switch, refer to Diagnosis and Testing in the Clutch section.
IGNITION SWITCH
After testing starter solenoid and relay, test ignition switch and wiring. Refer to the Ignition Section or Wiring Dia-
grams for more information. Check all wiring for opens or shorts, and all connectors for being loose or corroded.
BATTERY
For battery diagnosis and testing, refer to the Battery section for procedures.
ALL RELATED WIRING AND CONNECTORS

Refer to Wiring Diagrams for more information.
SPECIFICATIONS
TORQUE

2.7L Starter Mounting 54.2 40 -
bolts
bolts
bolts
3.0L Diesel Starter 54.2 40 -
Mounting bolts
Intermediate Shaft Pinch 43 32 -
Bolt
Starter B+ Nut 11 - 97.4
LX STARTING 8F - 79
STARTER MOTOR
REMOVAL
2.7L
1. Disconnect negative battery cable
2. Install steering wheel holder locking steering wheel in straight-ahead position.
4. Remove the underbody splash shield.
5. Starter assembly.
6. Remove the intermediate steering shaft center bolt.

8F - 80 STARTING LX
7. Bolt removed.
8. Separate the intermediate steering shaft upper and

lower shaft.
9. Disconnect the electrical connection from the

starter.
LX STARTING 8F - 81
10. Remove the 3 starter mounting bolts and wiring

clip.
11. Pull starter forward and down.
12. Work starter up and around exhaust.

8F - 82 STARTING LX
13. Work starter past the intermediate steering shaft.
14. Remove starter from vehicle.

LX STARTING 8F - 83
3.0L DIESEL
3. Remove the rear belly pan.

4. Remove the middle belly pan.
8F - 84 STARTING LX
5. Disconnect the battery connection.
6. Disconnect the solenoid connection.
7. Remove the 2 mounting bolts.

LX STARTING 8F - 85
3.5L
1. Disconnect negative battery cable
2. Install steering wheel holder locking steering wheel in straight-ahead position.
4. Remove the underbody splash shield.
5. Starter assembly.
8F - 86 STARTING LX
6. Remove the intermediate steering shaft center bolt.
7. Bolt removed.
8. Separate the intermediate steering shaft upper and

lower shaft.
LX STARTING 8F - 87
9. Disconnect the electrical connection from the

starter.
10. Remove the 3 starter mounting bolts and wiring

clip.
11. Pull starter forward and down.

8F - 88 STARTING LX
12. Work starter up and around exhaust.
13. Work starter past the intermediate steering shaft.

LX STARTING 8F - 89
5.7L
REAR WHEEL DRIVE (RWD)
1. Disconnect and isolate negative battery cable.
3. Remove three starter mounting bolts (1).
4. Move starter motor (2) towards front of vehicle far
enough for nose of starter to clear. Always support
starter motor (2) during this process. Do not let
starter motor hang from wire harness.
5. Remove battery cable-to-solenoid nut.
6. Remove solenoid wire from solenoid stud.
7. Remove starter motor.
ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD)

The steering gear assembly must be partially lowered to gain access to starter. Do not disconnect any hydraulic
hoses or remove any steering linkage. Proceed.
3. Remove coupling bolt (pinch bolt) securing steering gear to steering column.
4. Remove three steering gear mounting bolts and slightly lower gear. Temporarily support the steering gear.
5. Remove steering gear heat-shield.
6. Remove two starter mounting bolts (2).
8F - 90 STARTING LX
REMOVAL - 6.1L
3. Remove two heat shield nuts (2) and remove heat
shield (3).
4. Remove three starter mounting bolts (1).

LX STARTING 8F - 91
INSTALLATION
2.7L
1. Work starter up and pass the transmission and
exhaust.
2. Work starter up and pass the intermediate shafts.

8F - 92 STARTING LX
3. Starter pass the intermediate shaft.
4. Angle starter up toward engine.
5. Install plastic retainer into starter dust shield. The

dust shield has TOP marked on it and the plastic
retainer goes in the hole.
LX STARTING 8F - 93
6. Plastic retainer installed.

7. Install dust shield to the engine block using the
plastic retainer to hold dust shield in place.
8. Install starter.
9. Install starter bolts.
10. Tighten bolts to 54.2 Nm (40 ft. lbs.).
11. Install electrical connection to starter.

8F - 94 STARTING LX
12. Match flats inside intermediate shaft with that in

intermediate shaft extension, then slide intermedi-
ate shaft onto extension.
13. Aline the hole in the shafts.
14. Install pinch bolt fastening intermediate shaft to

intermediate shaft extension.
15. Tighten pinch bolt to 43 Nm (32 ft. lbs.).
16. Install the underbody splash shield.
17. Lower vehicle.
18. Remove the steering wheel holder.
LX STARTING 8F - 95
3.0L diesel
1. Install starter to vehicle.
2. Install the 2 mounting bolts. Torque fasteners to

54.2 Nm (40 ft. lbs.).
8F - 96 STARTING LX
3. Connect battery connection.

4. Connect solenoid connection.
5. Starter installed.
6. Install the rear belly pan.

LX STARTING 8F - 97
7. Install the middle belly pan.

8. Lower vehicle.
3.5L
1. Work starter up and pass the transmission and
exhaust.
8F - 98 STARTING LX
2. Work starter up and pass the intermediate shafts.
3. Starter pass the intermediate shaft.
4. Angle starter up toward engine.

LX STARTING 8F - 99
5. Install plastic retainer into starter dust shield. The

dust shield has TOP marked on it and the plastic
retainer goes in the hole.
6. Plastic retainer installed.

7. Install dust shield to the engine block using the
plastic retainer to hold dust shield in place.
8. Install starter.
9. Install starter bolts.
10. Tighten bolts to 54.2 Nm (40 ft. lbs.).
8F - 100 STARTING LX
11. Install electrical connection to starter.
12. Match flats inside intermediate shaft with that in

intermediate shaft extension, then slide intermedi-
ate shaft onto extension.
13. Aline the hole in the shafts.

LX STARTING 8F - 101
14. Install pinch bolt fastening intermediate shaft to

intermediate shaft extension.
15. Tighten pinch bolt to 43 Nm (32 ft. lbs.).
16. Install the underbody splash shield.
17. Lower vehicle.
18. Remove the steering wheel holder.
INSTALLATION - 6.1L
1. Position starter (2) into transmission but do not
install bolts.
2. Connect solenoid wire to starter motor (snaps on).
3. Position battery cable to solenoid stud. Install and
tighten battery cable eyelet nut. Refer to Torque
Specifications. Do not allow starter motor to hang
from wire harness.
4. Install and tighten three mounting bolts (1). Refer
to Torque Specifications.
8F - 102 STARTING LX
5. Position heat shield (3) and install two shield

mounting nuts (2).
6. Lower vehicle.
5.7L
install bolts.
from wire harness.
4. Install and tighten three mounting bolts (1). Refer
to Torque Specifications.
5. Lower vehicle.
LX STARTING 8F - 103
ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD)

install bolts.
from wire harness.
4. Install and tighten both mounting bolts (2). Refer to
Torque Specifications.
5. Install steering gear assembly and mounting bolts.
Install steering column coupling bolt (pinch bolt).
Refer to Steering section for torque specifications.
6. Install steering gear heat-shield.
7. Lower vehicle.
LX HEATED SYSTEMS 8G - 1
HEATED SYSTEMS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
HEATED GLASS - SERVICE INFORMATION . . . . . . 1 HEATED SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS. . . 10

HEATED MIRRORS - SERVICE INFORMATION . . . 8 HEATED SEATS - SERVICE INFORMATION . . . . . 73
HEATED GLASS - SERVICE INFORMATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
HEATED GLASS - SERVICE INFORMATION RELAY-REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER

DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
ELECTRIC BACKLIGHT (EBL) SYSTEM . . . . . . . . 3 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
GRID-REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH-REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
STANDARD PROCEDURE DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
GRID LINE AND TERMINAL REPAIR . . . . . . . . . . . 4 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
8G - 2 HEATED GLASS - SERVICE INFORMATION LX
HEATED GLASS - SERVICE INFORMATION

DESCRIPTION
CAUTION: Grid lines can be damaged or scraped off with sharp instruments. Care should be taken in clean-
ing glass or removing foreign materials, decals or stickers. Normal glass cleaning solvents or hot water
used with rags or toweling is recommended.
The rear window defogger system, also known as

electric backlight (EBL), consists of two vertical bus
bars (1) linked by a series of grid lines (2) fired onto
the inside surface of the rear window (3).
The EBL system is turned On or Off by a switch and
timing circuit integral to the A/C-heater control located
at the center of the instrument panel.
Circuit protection is provided by two cartridge fuses
located in the power distribution center (PDC). One
fuse is for the heated rear window grid circuit and the
other fuse is for the heated outside mirror grid circuit,
when equipped.
OPERATION
The electric backlight (EBL) system is controlled by a
momentary switch (1) located in the A/C-heater control
(2) on the instrument panel. When the rear window
defogger switch is pressed to the On position, the
A/C-heater control energizes the rear window defog-
ger (EBL) relay and battery current is then directed
through the relay and to the rear window defogger grid
lines and the heated outside rear view mirrors, when
equipped. The grid lines heat the glass to help clear
the rear window and outside mirror surfaces of fog or
frost.
An amber indicator (3) in the rear window defogger
switch will illuminate to indicate when the EBL system
is turned on. The A/C-heater control contains the EBL
system control circuitry including the timer logic.
NOTE: The EBL system turns off automatically

after ten minutes of initial operation. Each follow-
ing activation cycle of the EBL system will last five
minutes.
The EBL system will be automatically turned off after an initial programmed time interval of about ten minutes. After
the initial time interval has expired, if the rear window defogger switch is turned on again during the same ignition
cycle, the EBL system will automatically turn off after about five minutes. The EBL system will automatically shut off
if the ignition switch is turned to the Off position, or it can be turned off manually by pressing the rear window
defogger switch a second time.
Repair of the rear window defogger grid lines, bus bars, terminals or pigtail wires can be accomplished using the
Mopar Rear Window Defogger Repair Kit (Part Number 04549275) or equivalent (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/
LX HEATED GLASS - SERVICE INFORMATION 8G - 3
HEATED GLASS/REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER GRID - STANDARD PROCEDURE - GRID LINE AND TERMINAL
REPAIR).

ELECTRIC BACKLIGHT (EBL) SYSTEM
NOTE: Illumination of the defogger switch indicator lamp does not necessary mean that electrical current is
reaching the rear glass heating grid lines.
NOTE: For circuit descriptions and diagrams of the rear window defogger system, refer to 8W - WIRING
DIAGRAM INFORMATION.
Operation of the electric backlight (EBL) system can be confirmed by the following:
1. If equipped with the automatic temperature control
(ATC) heating-A/C system, use a scan tool and
check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) related
to the A/C-heater control. If equipped with the man-
ual temperature control (MTC) heating-A/C system,
use the A/C-heater control to check for diagnostic
trouble codes (DTCs) related to the A/C-heater
control (Refer to 24 - HEATING & AIR CONDI-
TIONING - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - HVAC
SELF DIAGNOSTICS). If no DTCs are found, go to
Step 2. If any DTCs are found, repair as required,
then proceed to Step 2
2. Turn the ignition switch to the On position. Set the
rear window defogger switch in the On position.
The rear window defogger operation can be
checked by feeling the rear window or outside rear
view mirror glass surfaces. A distinct difference in temperature between the grid lines (4 and 5) and the adjacent
clear glass or the mirror glass should be detected within three to four minutes of operation.
3. If a temperature difference is not detected, use a 12-volt DC voltmeter and contact the rear glass heating grid
terminal A (1) with the negative lead, and terminal B (2) with the positive lead. The voltmeter should read battery
voltage. If the voltmeter does not read battery voltage, check the following:
Confirm that the ignition switch is in the On position.
Make sure that the rear glass heating grid feed wire (3) and ground wire (6) are connected to the terminals.
Confirm that the ground wire has continuity to ground.
Check the EBL relay and fuses located in the power distribution center (PDC) in the engine compartment. The
relay and fuses must be tight in their receptacles and all electrical connections must be secure.
When the above steps have been completed and the rear glass heating grid is still inoperative, one or more of the
following is faulty:
Rear window defogger switch in the A/C-heater control.
Rear window defogger grid lines (all grid lines would have to be broken, or the power feed or the ground wire
disconnected, for the entire heating grid to be inoperative).
4. If the EBL system operation has been verified but the rear window defogger LED indicator does not illuminate,
replace the A/C-heater control (Refer to 24 - HEATING & AIR CONDITIONING/CONTROLS/CONTROL-A/C
HEATER - REMOVAL).
GRID-REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER

STANDARD PROCEDURE
GRID LINE AND TERMINAL REPAIR
WARNING: Materials contained in the Repair Kit (Part Number 04549275) may cause skin or eye irritation.
The kit contains epoxy resin and amine type hardener, which are harmful if swallowed. Avoid contact with
the skin and eyes. For skin contact, wash the affected areas with soap and water. For contact with the eyes,
flush with plenty of water. Do not take internally. If taken internally, induce vomiting and call a physician
immediately. Use with adequate ventilation. Do not use near fire or flame. Contains flammable solvents.
Keep out of the reach of children. Failure to follow the warnings could result in possible personal injury or
death.
Repair of the rear glass heating grid lines, bus bars, terminals or pigtail wires can be accomplished using the Mopar
Rear Window Defogger Repair Kit (Part Number 04549275) or equivalent.
1. Mask the repair area with masking tape (3) so that
the conductive epoxy can be applied neatly. Extend
the epoxy application onto the grid line (2) or the
bus bar on each side of the break (1).
2. Follow the instructions in the repair kit for preparing
the damaged area.
3. Remove the package separator clamp and mix the
two conductive epoxy components thoroughly
within the packaging. Fold the package in half and
cut the center corner to dispense the epoxy.
4. For grid line repairs, mask the area to be repaired
with masking tape or use a template.
5. Apply the epoxy through the slit in the masking
tape or template. Overlap both ends of the break
by at least 19 millimeters (0.75 inch).
6. For a terminal or pigtail wire replacement, mask the adjacent areas so the epoxy can be extended onto the
adjacent grid line as well as the bus bar. Apply a thin layer of epoxy to the area where the terminal or pigtail wire
was fastened and onto the adjacent grid line.
7. Apply a thin layer of conductive epoxy to the terminal or bare wire end of the pigtail and place it in the proper
location on the bus bar. To prevent the terminal or pigtail wire from moving while the epoxy is curing, it must be
wedged or clamped.
8. Carefully remove the masking tape or template.
CAUTION: Do not allow the glass surface to exceed 204 C (400 F) when using a heat gun, or the glass
may fracture.
9. Allow the epoxy to cure 24 hours at room temperature, or carefully use a heat gun for fifteen minutes. When
using a heat gun, hold it approximately 25.4 centimeters (10 inches) from the repair and do not allow the glass
surface to exceed 204 C (400 F).
10. After the conductive epoxy is properly cured, remove the wedge or clamp from the terminal or pigtail wire.
11. Connect the wire harness leads to the grid terminals or pigtail wires and verify EBL operation.
RELAY-REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER

DESCRIPTION
The rear window defogger (EBL) relay (1) is a Inter-
national Standards Organization (ISO)-type relay.
Relays conforming to the ISO specifications have
common physical dimensions, current capacities, ter-
minal functions and patterns (2). The EBL relay is a
electromechanical device that switches battery current
through a fuse in the power distribution center (PDC)
to the rear window defogger grid and when equipped,
switches battery current through a fuse in the PDC to
the heated outside rear view mirrors. The EBL relay is
energized when the relay coil is provided a ground
path by the control circuitry within the A/C-heater con-
trol.
The EBL relay is located in the PDC at the rear of the
vehicle, near the battery.
OPERATION
The ISO-standard rear window defogger (EBL) micro-relay is an electromechanical switch that uses a low current
input controlled by the A/C-heater control to control the high current output to the rear window defogger grid lines.
The movable, common feed relay contact is held against the fixed, normally closed relay contact by spring pressure.
When the electromagnetic relay coil is energized, it draws the movable common feed relay contact away from the
fixed, normally closed relay contact and, holds it against the fixed, normally open relay contact. This action allows
high current to flow to the rear window defogger grid lines.
When the relay coil is de-energized, spring pressure returns the movable relay contact back against the fixed, nor-
mally closed contact point. The resistor or diode is connected in parallel with the relay coil, and helps to dissipate
voltage spikes and electromagnetic interference that can be generated as the electromagnetic field of the relay coil
collapses.
The EBL relay terminals are connected to the vehicle electrical system through a receptacle in the power distribution
center (PDC). The inputs and outputs of the EBL relay include:
The common feed terminal (30) receives a battery current input from a fused B(+) circuit at all times.
The coil ground terminal (85) receives a ground through the EBL relay control circuit only when the A/C-heater
control electronically pulls the circuit to ground.
The coil battery terminal (86) receives a battery current input from a fused B(+) circuit at all times.
The normally open terminal (87) provides battery current to the rear window defogger grid through the EBL
relay output circuit and a fuse located in the PDC only when the EBL relay coil is energized.
The normally closed terminal (87A) is not connected to any circuit in this application, but provides a battery
current output only when the EBL relay coil is de-energized.
The EBL micro-relay cannot be repaired and, if faulty or damaged, it must be replaced. Refer to the appropriate
wiring information for diagnosis and testing of the ISO-standard micro-relay and for complete rear window defogger
(EBL) wiring diagrams.
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable.
2. Open the cover of the power distribution center
(PDC) (1) located at the rear of the vehicle near
the battery (2).
3. Remove the EBL relay (3) from the PDC.
INSTALLATION
1. Position the EBL relay (3) into the proper recepta-
cle of the power distribution center (PDC) (1)
located at the rear of the vehicle near the battery
(2).
2. Align the EBL relay terminals with the terminal cav-
ities in the PDC receptacle and push down firmly
on the relay until the terminals are fully seated.
3. Close the cover of the PDC.
4. Reconnect the negative battery cable.
SWITCH-REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER

DESCRIPTION
The switch for the rear window defogger (EBL) system
(1) is integrated into the A/C-heater control (2), which
is located in the center of the instrument panel. When
the rear window defogger switch is activated, the tim-
ing circuit integral to the A/C-heater control operates
the rear window defogger (EBL) relay. An amber indi-
cator (3) in the rear window defogger switch will illu-
minate to indicate when the EBL system is turned on.
When the EBL relay is activated, current is directed to
the rear window defogger grid lines and when
equipped, to the heated outside rear view mirrors. The
grid lines heat the window and mirror glass to help
clear the surfaces of fog or frost.
OPERATION
An LED indicator will illuminate when the rear window defogger switch is activated. When the switch is activated,
the A/C-heater control operates the rear window defogger (EBL) relay. The EBL relay controls the current flow to the
heating grid of the rear window and when equipped, the heated outside rear view mirrors.
NOTE: The EBL system turns off automatically after ten minutes of initial operation. Each following activa-
tion cycle of the EBL system will last five minutes.
The EBL system will initially be on for approximately ten minutes or until the rear window defogger switch or the
ignition switch is turned off. After the initial time interval has expired, if the defogger switch is turned On again during
the same ignition cycle, the EBL system will automatically turn off after about five minutes.
NOTE: ATC A/C-heater controls are NOT interchangeable between other model years or other vehicle lines.
If replacement of the A/C-heater control is required, only use the control designed for the vehicle being
serviced.
The rear window defogger switch and the rear window defogger LED indicator cannot be repaired and, if faulty or
damaged, the A/C-heater control must be replaced (Refer to 24 - HEATING & AIR CONDITIONING/CONTROLS/
CONTROL-A/C HEATER - REMOVAL).
8G - 8 HEATED MIRRORS - SERVICE INFORMATION LX
HEATED MIRRORS - SERVICE INFORMATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
HEATED MIRRORS - SERVICE INFORMATION OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
LX HEATED MIRRORS - SERVICE INFORMATION 8G - 9
HEATED MIRRORS - SERVICE INFORMATION

DESCRIPTION
The optional heated mirror system is controlled by the
momentary rear window defogger switch (1) which is
integral to the A/C-heater control (2). An amber indica-
tor lamp in the switch (3) will illuminate to indicate
when the rear window defogger (EBL) system is
turned on.
The heated mirror system only operates in concert with the EBL system, and will be automatically shut off after a
programmed time interval of about ten minutes. After the initial time interval has expired, if the defogger switch is
turned on again during the same ignition cycle, the heated mirror system will automatically shut off after about five
minutes.
The heated mirror system will automatically shut off if the ignition switch is turned to the Off position, or it can be
shut off manually by pressing the rear window defogger switch a second time.
OPERATION
When the rear window defogger switch is pressed, the rear window defogger (EBL) system becomes activated and
an electric heater grid located behind the glass of each of the outside rear view mirrors is energized. When ener-
gized, each of these heater grids produce heat to help clear the outside rear view mirrors of ice, snow, or fog.
If the outside mirror heating grids are both inoperative, refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/HEATED GLASS - DIAGNOSIS
AND TESTING in this group. If only one of the outside mirror heating grids is inoperative, refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/
POWER MIRRORS - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING.
The heating grid behind each outside mirror glass cannot be repaired and, if faulty or damaged, the mirror glass
must be replaced (Refer to 23 - BODY/EXTERIOR/MIRROR-SIDE VIEW - GLASS - REMOVAL).
8G - 10 HEATED SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS LX
HEATED SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
HEATED SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS U0151-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH

DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER . . . . . 70
B1084-LEFT HEATED SEAT SWITCH INPUT U0154-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE . . . . . 70
B1087-RIGHT HEATED SEAT SWITCH U0155-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
INPUT CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . 15 CLUSTER/CCN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
B1092-FRONT LEFT SEAT HEATER U0156-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH EOM . . . 70
CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 U0159-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B1094-FRONT LEFT SEAT HEATER PARKING ASSIST CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . 70
CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 U0164-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HVAC
B1096-FRONT RIGHT SEAT HEATER CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 U0168-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B1098-FRONT RIGHT SEAT HEATER VEHICLE SECURITY CONTROL MODULE
CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 (SKREEM/WCM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
B120E-LEFT HEATED SEAT HI INDICATOR U0169-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 SUNROOF CONTROL MODULE. . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
B120F-LEFT HEATED SEAT HI INDICATOR U0181-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 HEADLAMP LEVELING TRANSLATOR . . . . . . . 71
B1216-LEFT HEATED SEAT LO INDICATOR U0184-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 RADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
B1217-LEFT HEATED SEAT LO INDICATOR U0186-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 AUDIO AMPLIFIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
B121A-RIGHT HEATED SEAT HI INDICATOR U0195-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 SDARS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
B121B-RIGHT HEATED SEAT HI INDICATOR U0197-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HFM . . . 71
CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 U0199-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B1222-RIGHT HEATED SEAT LO INDICATOR DRIVER DOOR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 U0200-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B1223-RIGHT HEATED SEAT LO INDICATOR PASSENGER DOOR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 U0209-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B210D-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 MEMORY SEAT CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . 71
B210E-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 U0212-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B221A-HEATED SEAT MODULE INTERNAL . . . 66 SCCM - CAN B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
U0019CAN B BUS HSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 U0231-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH RAIN
U0141LOST COMMUNICATION WITH SENSING MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
FRONT CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
LX HEATED SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8G - 11
HEATED SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS

B1084-LEFT HEATED SEAT SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:Ignition on, during the heated seat operation.
Set Condition:This code is set after the Cluster detects the heated seat switch sense circuit low for a prede-
termined amount of time.
Possible Causes
(P365) LEFT HEATED SEAT SWITCH SENSE SHORTED TO GROUND

LEFT HEATED SEAT SWITCH
CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1. VERIFY THAT DTC B1084-LEFT HEATED SEAT SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE IS ACTIVE

Operate the Heated Seat Switch in both positions several times.
Is the DTC B1084 LEFT HEATED SEAT SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT/
PERFORMANCE active?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present
at this time. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide,
inspect the wiring and connectors.
2. DISCONNECT THE LEFT HEATED SEAT SWITCH CONNECTOR AND CHECK SWITCH STATUS
Turn the ignition switch off.
Disconnect the Left Heated Seat Switch connector.
NOTE: Check connectors - Clean and repair as necessary.
With the scan tool in CCN Inputs/Outputs, read the Left Heated Seat
state.
Does the switch state display Not Set?
Yes >> Replace the Left Heated Seat Switch.
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK THE (P365) LEFT HEATED SEAT SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect the Cluster C3 connector.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (P365) Left Heated
Seat Switch sense circuit.
Was the resistance below 5.0 ohms?
Yes >> Repair the (P365) Left Heated Seat Switch sense circuit for
a short to ground
No >> Replace the Cluster in accordance with the Service Infor-
mation.
B1087-RIGHT HEATED SEAT SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE

Set Condition:This code is set after the Cluster detects the heated seat switch sense circuit low for a prede-
termined amount of time.
Possible Causes
(P366) RIGHT HEATED SEAT SWITCH SENSE SHORTED TO GROUND

RIGHT HEATED SEAT SWITCH
CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1. VERIFY THAT DTC B1087-RIGHT HEATED SEAT SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE IS ACTIVE
Is the DTC B1087 RIGHT HEATED SEAT SWITCH INPUT CIR-
CUIT/PERFORMANCE active?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. DISCONNECT THE RIGHT HEATED SEAT SWITCH CONNECTOR AND CHECK SWITCH STATUS
Disconnect the Right Heated Seat Switch connector.
With the scan tool in CCN Inputs/Outputs, read the Right Heated Seat
state.
Does the switch state display Not Set?
Yes >> Replace the Right Heated Seat Switch.
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK THE (P366) RIGHT HEATED SEAT SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the (P366) Right Heated
Seat Switch sense circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (P366) Right Heated Seat Switch sense circuit
for a short to ground
mation.
B1092-FRONT LEFT SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW

Set Condition:This code is set immediately after the Heated Seat Module detects the control circuit shorted to
ground.
Possible Causes
(P187) DRIVER SEAT HEATER B(+) DRIVER SHORTED TO GROUND

SEAT HEATER ELEMENT PIGTAIL HARNESS SHORTED
SEAT CUSHION HEATER ELEMENT SHORTED
SEAT BACK HEATER ELEMENT SHORTED
HEATED SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. VERIFY THAT DTC B1092-FRONT LEFT SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW IS ACTIVE
Does the DTC B1092 FRONT LEFT SEAT HEATER CONTROL
CIRCUIT LOW reset?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. DISCONNECT LEFT CUSHION HEATER 2-WAY CONNECTOR AND READ DTCS

Disconnect the Left Seat Cushion Heater connector.
With the scan tool, erase HSM DTCs
Does the scan tool display the same DTC?
Yes >> Go To 7
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK THE LEFT SEAT BACK HEATER RESISTANCE

Disconnect the Left Seat Back Heater connector.
Check the resistance of the seat back heater element by measuring
between the (P187) Left Seat Heater B(+) Driver and the Ground circuit
at the Left seat back heater connector.
No >> Go To 4
Yes >> Replace the seat back heater element as necessary.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1 (Refer to
4. CHECK THE LEFT SEAT BACK HEATER FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Measure between the (P187) Left Seat Heater B(+) Driver circuit at the
Left seat back heater connector and the seat frame for a short to
ground.
Yes >> Repair the pigtail harness for a short to ground condition or
replace the seat back heater element as necessary.
No >> Go To 5
5. CHECK THE LEFT CUSHION HEATER RESISTANCE

Check the resistance of the cushion heater element by measuring
at the Left seat cushion heater connector.
No >> Go To 6
Yes >> Replace the heater element as necessary.
6. CHECK THE LEFT CUSHION HEATER FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Measure between the (P187) Left Seat Heater B(+) Driver circuit at the
Left seat cushion heater connector and the seat frame for a short to
ground.
Yes >> Repair the pigtail harness or replace the heater element as
necessary.
No >> Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the
wiring and connectors for an intermittent short to ground.
7. Check the (P187) Left Seat Heater B(+) Driver circuit for a short to ground
Disconnect the Heat Seat Module connector.
Measure the (P187) Left Seat Heater B(+) Driver circuit to ground at
the HSM connector.
Yes >> Repair the (P187) Left Seat Heater B(+) Driver circuit for a
short to ground.
No >> Replace the Heated Seat Module.
B1094-FRONT LEFT SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN

Set Condition:This code is set immediately after the Heated Seat Module detects an open in the seat heater
B(+) driver circuit.
Possible Causes
(P187) LEFT SEAT HEATER B(+) DRIVER WIRE OPEN

(Z912) GROUND WIRE OPEN
SEAT CUSHION HEATER ELEMENT OPEN
SEAT BACK HEATER ELEMENT OPEN
HEATED SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. VERIFY THAT DTC B1094-FRONT LEFT SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN IS ACTIVE
Does the DTC B1094 FRONT LEFT SEAT HEATER CONTROL
CIRCUIT OPEN reset?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECK FOR AN OPEN SEAT HEATER ELEMENT

Disconnect the Left Seat Cushion Heater 2 way connector.
Measure the total resistance of the cushion and seat back heater ele-
ments at the Left Seat Cushion 2 way connector (seat side).
Is the total resistance 2.5 ohms + or .5 ohms?
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK THE LEFT SEAT BACK HEATER RESISTANCE

Disconnect the Left Seat Back Heater 2 way connector.
at the connector.
Yes >> Repair the open pigtail harness or replace the seat back
heater element as necessary.
No >> Repair the open pigtail harness or replace the seat cushion
4. CHECK THE LEFT SEAT HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT RESISTANCE

Measure the resistance of the Ground circuit at the Left Seat Heater
Cushion 2 way connector.
Yes >> Go To 5
No >> Repair the open ground circuit.
5. Check the (P187) Left Seat Heater B(+) Driver circuit for an open.
Disconnect the Heated Seat Module connector.
Measure the (P187) Left Seat Heater B(+) Driver circuit from the Left
Seat Cushion Heater 2way connector (harness side) to the HSM con-
nector.
Yes >> Replace the Heated Seat Module.
No >> Repair the (P187) Left Seat Heater B(+) Driver circuit for an
open.
B1096-FRONT RIGHT SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW

Set Condition:This code is set immediately after the Heated Seat Module detects the seat heater B(+) driver
circuit shorted to ground.
Possible Causes
(P188) RIGHT SEAT HEATER B(+) DRIVER SHORTED TO GROUND

SEAT HEATER ELEMENT PIGTAIL HARNESS SHORTED
SEAT CUSHION HEATER ELEMENT SHORTED
SEAT BACK HEATER ELEMENT SHORTED
HEATED SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. VERIFY THAT DTC B1096-FRONT RIGHT SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW IS ACTIVE
Does the DTC B1096-FRONT RIGHT SEAT HEATER CONTROL
CIRCUIT LOW reset?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. DISCONNECT RIGHT SEAT CUSHION HEATER 2-WAY CONNECTOR AND READ DTCS
Disconnect the Right Seat Cushion Heater connector.
With the scan tool, erase HSM DTCs
Yes >> Go To 7
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK THE RIGHT SEAT BACK HEATER RESISTANCE

Disconnect the Right Seat Back Heater connector.
between the (P188) Right Seat Heater B(+) Driver and the Ground cir-
cuit at the Right seat back heater connector.
No >> Go To 4
Yes >> Replace the seat back heater element as necessary.
4. CHECK THE RIGHT SEAT BACK HEATER FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Measure between the (P188) Right Seat Heater B(+) Driver circuit at
the Right Seat Back Heater connector and the seat frame for a short to
ground.
Yes >> Repair the pigtail harness for a short to ground condition or
replace the seat back heater element as necessary.
No >> Go To 5
5. CHECK THE RIGHT SEAT CUSHION HEATER RESISTANCE

Check the resistance of the cushion heater element by measuring
cuit at the Right seat cushion heater connector.
No >> Go To 6
Yes >> Replace the heater element as necessary.
6. CHECK THE RIGHT SEAT CUSHION HEATER FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Measure between the (P188) Right Seat Heater B(+) Driver circuit at
the Right Seat Cushion Heater connector and the seat frame for a short
to ground.
Yes >> Repair the pigtail harness or replace the heater element as
necessary.
wiring and connectors for an intermittent short to ground.
7. Check the (P188) Right Seat Heater B(+) Driver circuit for a short to ground
Measure the (P188) Right Seat Heater B(+) Driver circuit to ground at
the HSM connector.
Yes >> Repair the (P188) Right Seat Heater B(+) Driver circuit for
a short to ground.
No >> Replace the Heated Seat Module.
B1098-FRONT RIGHT SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN

Set Condition:This code is set immediately after the Heated Seat Module detects an open in the seat heat
B(+) driver circuit.
Possible Causes
(P188) PASSENGER SEAT HEATER B(+) DRIVER WIRE OPEN

(Z911) GROUND WIRE OPEN
SEAT CUSHION HEATER ELEMENT OPEN
SEAT BACK HEATER ELEMENT OPEN
HEATED SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. VERIFY THAT DTC B1098-FRONT RIGHT SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN IS ACTIVE
Does the DTC B1098 FRONT RIGHT SEAT HEATER CONTROL
CIRCUIT OPEN reset?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECK FOR AN OPEN SEAT HEATER ELEMENT

Disconnect the Right Seat Cushion Heater 2 way connector.
Measure the total resistance of the cushion and seat back heater ele-
ments at the Right Seat Cushion Heater 2 way connector (seat side).
Is the total resistance 2.5 ohms + or .5 ohms?
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK THE RIGHT SEAT BACK PAD HEATER RESISTANCE

Disconnect the Right Seat Back Heater 2 way connector.
cuit at the Right seat back heater connector.
Yes >> Repair the open pigtail harness or replace the seat back
No >> Repair the open pigtail harness or replace the seat cushion
4. CHECK THE RIGHT SEAT HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT RESISTANCE

Measure the resistance of the Ground circuit at the Right Seat Cushion
Heater 2 way connector (harness side).
Yes >> Go To 5
No >> Repair the open ground circuit.
5. Check the (P188) Right Seat Heater B(+) Driver circuit for an open.
Measure the (P188) Right Seat Heater B(+) Driver circuit from the Right
Seat Cushion Heater connector to the HSM connector.
No >> Repair the (P188) Right Seat Heater B(+) Driver circuit for
an open.
B120E-LEFT HEATED SEAT HI INDICATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:Continously with the ignition on.
Set Condition:This code is set immediately when the Cluster detects excessive voltage on the heated seat
indicator control circuit.
Possible Causes
(P83) LEFT HEATED SEAT HIGH INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY
CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1. VERIFY THAT DTC B120E-LEFT HEATED SEAT SWITCH HI INDICATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH IS
ACTIVE
Does the DTC B120E-LEFT HEATED SEAT HI INDICATOR CON-
TROL CIRCUIT HIGH reset?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. DISCONNECT THE LEFT HEATED SEAT SWITCH AND RE-READ DTC

With the scan tool erase DTCs
Cycle the ignition switch off then back on.
Does the DTC B120E-LEFT HEATED SEAT HI INDICATOR CON-
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Replace the Left Heated Seat switch.
3. DISCONNECT THE CLUSTER C3 CONNECTOR AND CHECK FOR VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage at the (P83) Left Heated Seat High Indicator
Driver circuit at the Cluster C3 connector.
Yes >> Repair the (P83) Left Heated Seat High Indicator Driver cir-
cuit for a short to battery.
mation.
B120F-LEFT HEATED SEAT HI INDICATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN

Set Condition:This code is set immediately when the Cluster detects low voltage on the heated seat indicator
control circuit.
Possible Causes
PDC FUSE #8
PDC FUSE #40
(F23) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT OPEN
(P83) LEFT HEATED SEAT HIGH INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN/SHORTED TO GROUND
CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1. VERIFY THAT DTC B120F-LEFT HEATED SEAT HI INDICATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN IS ACTIVE
Does the DTC B120F-LEFT HEATED SEAT HI INDICATOR CON-
TROL CIRCUIT OPEN reset?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. INSPECT PDC FUSES

Check PDC fuses #8 and #40.
Is either fuse open?
Yes >> Check for a possible short to ground on the (F23) Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) Circuit and
replace the fuse as necessary.
No >> Go To 3

Reinstall fuse if removed in previous test.
Measure the voltage at the (P83) Left Heated Seat High Indicator
Yes >> Replace the Cluster in accordance with the Service Infor-
mation.
No >> Go To 4
4. CHECK THE (F23) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START)

Disconnect the Left Heated Seat switch connector.
Measure the voltage of the (F23) Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-
Start) circuit at the Left Heated Seat Switch connector.
Is the voltage above 10.0 volts ?
Yes >> Go To 5
No >> Repair the (F23) Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start)
circuit for an open.
5. CHECK THE (P83) LEFT HEATED SEAT HIGH INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Seat High Indicator Driver circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (P83) Left Heated Seat High Indicator Driver cir-
cuit for a short to ground
No >> Go To 6
6. CHECK THE (P83) LEFT HEATED SEAT HIGH INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (P83) Left Heated Seat High Indicator
Driver circuit between the Cluster C3 connector and the Left Heated
Seat Switch connector.
No >> Repair the (P83) Left Heated Seat High Indicator Driver cir-
cuit for an open.
B1216-LEFT HEATED SEAT LO INDICATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH

Possible Causes
(P81) LEFT HEATED SEAT LO INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY

CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1. VERIFY THAT DTC B1216-LEFT HEATED SEAT SWITCH LO INDICATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH IS
ACTIVE
Does the DTC B1216-LEFT HEATED SEAT LO INDICATOR CON-
Yes >> Go To 2
2. DISCONNECT THE DRIVER HEATED SEAT SWITCH AND RE-READ DTC

Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Replace the Left Heated Seat switch.

Measure the voltage at the (P81) Left Heated Seat Low Indicator Driver
circuit at the Cluster C3 connector.
Yes >> Repair the (P81) Left Heated Seat Low Indicator Driver cir-
cuit for a short to battery.
mation.
B1217-LEFT HEATED SEAT LO INDICATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN

control circuit.
Possible Causes
PDC FUSE #8
PDC FUSE #40
(P81) LEFT HEATED SEAT LOW INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN/SHORTED TO GROUND
CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1. VERIFY THAT DTC B1217-LEFT HEATED SEAT LO INDICATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN IS ACTIVE
TROL CIRCUIT OPEN reset?
Yes >> Go To 2

Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1. (Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1).
No >> Go To 3

Measure the voltage at the (P81) Left Heated Seat Low Indicator Driver
circuit at the Cluster C3 connector.
mation.
No >> Go To 4

Disconnect the Left Heated Seat switch connector.
Start) circuit at the Left Heated Seat Switch connector.
Yes >> Go To 5
No >> Repair the (F23) Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start)
5. CHECK THE (P81) LEFT HEATED SEAT LO INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Seat Lo Indicator Driver circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (P81) Left Heated Seat Lo Indicator Driver cir-
No >> Go To 6
6. CHECK THE (P81) LEFT HEATED SEAT LO INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (P81) Left Heated Seat Lo Indicator
Driver circuit between the Cluster C3 connector and the Driver Heated
No >> Repair the (P81) Left Heated Seat Lo Indicator Driver cir-
cuit for an open.
B121A-RIGHT HEATED SEAT HI INDICATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH

Possible Causes
(P84) RIGHT HEATED SEAT HIGH INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY
CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1. VERIFY THAT DTC B121A-RIGHT HEATED SEAT SWITCH HI INDICATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH IS
ACTIVE
Does the DTC B121A-RIGHT HEATED SEAT HI INDICATOR
CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH reset?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. DISCONNECT THE RIGHT HEATED SEAT SWITCH AND RE-READ DTC

Does the DTC B121A-RIGHT HEATED SEAT HI INDICATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH reset?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Replace the Right Heated Seat switch.

Disconnect the Cluster C-3 connector.
Measure the voltage at the (P84) Right Heated Seat High Indicator
Driver circuit at the Cluster C-3 connector.
Yes >> Repair the (P84) Right Heated Seat High Indicator Driver
circuit for a short to battery.
mation.
B121B-RIGHT HEATED SEAT HI INDICATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN

control circuit.
Possible Causes
PDC FUSE #8
PDC FUSE #40
(P84) RIGHT HEATED SEAT HIGH INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN/SHORTED TO GROUND
CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1. VERIFY THAT DTC B121B-RIGHT HEATED SEAT HI INDICATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN IS ACTIVE
Does the DTC B121B-RIGHT HEATED SEAT HI INDICATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN reset?
Yes >> Go To 2

No >> Go To 3

Measure the voltage at the (P84) Right Heated Seat High Indicator
mation.
No >> Go To 4

Disconnect the Right Heated Seat switch connector.
Start ) circuit at the Right Heated Seat Switch connector.
Yes >> Go To 5
No >> Repair the (F23) Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start )
5. CHECK THE (P84) RIGHT HEATED SEAT HIGH INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO
GROUND
Seat High Indicator Driver circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (P84) Right Heated Seat High Indicator Driver
circuit for a short to ground
No >> Go To 6
6. CHECK THE (P84) RIGHT HEATED SEAT HIGH INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (P84) Right Heated Seat High Indicator
Driver circuit between the Cluster C3 connector and the Right Heated
No >> Repair the (P84) Right Heated Seat High Indicator Driver
B1222-RIGHT HEATED SEAT LO INDICATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH

Possible Causes
(P82) RIGHT HEATED SEAT LOW INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY
CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1. VERIFY THAT DTC B1222-RIGHT HEATED SEAT SWITCH LO INDICATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH IS
ACTIVE
Does the DTC B1222-RIGHT HEATED SEAT LO INDICATOR
CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH reset?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. DISCONNECT THE PASSENGER HEATED SEAT SWITCH AND RE-READ DTC

Does the DTC B1222-RIGHT HEATED SEAT LO INDICATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH reset?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Replace the Right Heated Seat switch.

Measure the voltage at the (P82) Right Heated Seat Low Indicator
Yes >> Repair the (P82) Right Heated Seat Low Indicator Driver
circuit for a short to battery.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES/
FRONT CONTROL MODULE - DIAGNOSIS AND TEST-
ING)
mation.
B1223-RIGHT HEATED SEAT LO INDICATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN

control circuit.
Possible Causes
PDC FUSE #8
PDC FUSE #40
(P82) RIGHT HEATED SEAT LOW INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN/SHORTED TO GROUND
CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1. VERIFY THAT DTC B1223-RIGHT HEATED SEAT LO INDICATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN IS ACTIVE
Does the DTC B1223-RIGHT HEATED SEAT LO INDICATOR
CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN reset?
Yes >> Go To 2

No >> Go To 3

Measure the voltage at the (P82) Right Heated Seat Low Indicator
mation.
No >> Go To 4

Disconnect the Right Heated Seat switch connector.
Measure the voltage of the (F23) Fused Ignition Switch Output circuit at
the Right Heated Seat Switch connector.
Yes >> Go To 5
No >> Repair the (F23) Fused Ignition Switch Output circuit for an
open.
5. CHECK THE (P82) RIGHT HEATED SEAT LO INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Seat Lo Indicator Driver circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (P82) Right Heated Seat Lo Indicator Driver cir-
No >> Go To 6
6. CHECK THE (P82) RIGHT HEATED SEAT LO INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (P82) Right Heated Seat Lo Indicator
Driver circuit between the Cluster C-3 connector and the Right Heated
No >> Repair the (P82) Right Heated Seat Lo Indicator Driver cir-
cuit for an open.

When Monitored:Engine running, during heated seat operation.
Set Condition:This code is set immediately after the Heated Seat Module receives a low charging system
voltage message over the CAN B Bus or detects voltage under 11.3 volts on the (A33) Fused B(+) circuit.
Possible Causes
CHARGING SYSTEM VOLAGE LOW

(A33) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT
HEATED SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK PCM FOR CHARGING SYSTEM DTC

With the scan tool, read Powertrain Control Module DTCs.
Are there any Charging System DTCs set in the Powertrain
Control Module?
Yes >> (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/CHARGING - DIAGNOSIS AND
TESTING) for Charging System diagnostic procedures.
No >> Go To 2
2. VERIFY THAT DTC B210D-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW IS ACTIVE

Turn the ignition switch to the Off position then start the engine and let run for one minute.
Does the DTC B210D-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW reset?
Yes >> Go To 3

Start the engine and let idle.
Measure the voltage on the (A33) Fused B(+) circuit at the HSM con-
nector and compare to voltage at the vehicle battery.
Is the voltage at the HSM connector the same as measured at
the battery?
No >> Repair the (A33) Fused B(+) circuit as necessary.

When Monitored:Engine running, during heated seat operation.
Set Condition:This code is set immediately after the Heated Seat Module receives a high charging system
voltage message over the CAN B Bus or detects voltage over 15 volts on the (A33) Fused B(+) circuit.
Possible Causes
CHARGING SYSTEM VOLAGE HIGH

HEATED SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test

Are there any Charging System DTCs set in the Powertrain
Control Module?
Yes >> (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/CHARGING - DIAGNOSIS AND
TESTING) for Charging System diagnostic procedures.
No >> Go To 2
2. VERIFY THAT DTC B210E-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH IS ACTIVE

Turn the ignition switch to the Off position then start the engine and let run for one minute.
Attempt to operate the heated seats.
Does the DTC B210E-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH reset?
Yes >> Go To 3

Measure the voltage on the (A33) Fused B(+) circuit at the HSM con-
nector and compare to voltage at the vehicles battery.
Is the voltage at the HSM connector the same as measured at
the battery?
B221A-HEATED SEAT MODULE INTERNAL

When Monitored:Ignition on.
Set Condition:This code is set immediately if the Heated Seat Module internal self test fails.
Possible Causes
HEATED SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. VERIFY THAT DTC B221A-HEATED SEAT MODULE INTERNAL IS ACTIVE

Does the DTC B221A-HEATED SEAT MODULE INTERNAL reset?
U0019CAN B BUS HSM

When Monitored:
Continuously
Set Condition:
will set.
Possible Causes

HEATED SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test

Does the scan tool display U0019 CAN B BUS CIRCUIT?
Yes >> Go To 2

No >> Go to 3

Measure the resistance of the (D55) Can B Bus (+) circuit between the
Front Control Module C1 connector and the Heated Seat Module con-
nector.
Yes >> Go To 4

Measure the resistance of the (D54) Can B Bus () circuit between the
Front Control Module C1 connector and the Heated Seat Module con-
nector.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.
U0156-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH EOM

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

(SKREEM/WCM)
test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.
U0197-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HFM

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.
LX HEATED SEATS - SERVICE INFORMATION 8G - 73
HEATED SEATS - SERVICE INFORMATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
HEATED SEATS - SERVICE INFORMATION OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 HEATED SEAT MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
HEATED SEAT SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
HEATER-CUSHION PAD SWITCH-HEATED SEAT
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
HEATED SEAT ELEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 HEATED SEAT SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
MODULE-HEATED SEATS
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
8G - 74 HEATED SEATS - SERVICE INFORMATION LX
HEATED SEATS - SERVICE INFORMATION

DESCRIPTION
WARNING: The front passenger seat assembly contains critical components that affect the front passenger
airbag deployment. Correctly functioning front passenger seat components are critical for the Occupant
Classification System (OCS) to properly classify the front passenger and calculate the proper airbag deploy-
ment. Unapproved modifications or service procedures to the front passenger seat assembly, its related
components, or trim cover may inadvertently change the airbag deployment in case of a frontal crash. This
could result in death or serious injury to the front seat passenger if the vehicle is involved in an accident.
The following requirements must be strictly adhered to:
Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or components in any way.
Do not modify the front seat center console or center position seat in any way.
Do not use prior or future model year seat trim covers not designated for the specific model being
repaired. Always use the correct seat trim cover specified for the vehicle.
Do not replace the seat trim cover with an aftermarket trim cover.
Do not add a secondary trim cover other than those approved by DaimlerChrysler/Mopar.
At no time should any Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) component or SRS related component or
fastener be modified or replaced with any part except those which are approved by DaimlerChrysler/Mo-
par.
Vehicles with the heated seat option can be visually

identified by the two heated seat switches (1) located
in the center stack of the instrument panel. The
heated seat system allows the driver and front seat
passenger to select from two different levels of electri-
cal seat heating (HI/LO). The heated seat system for
this vehicle includes the following major components,
which are described in further detail later in this sec-
tion:
Heated Seat Elements - Four heated seat ele-
ments are used per vehicle. Two heated seat
elements are integral to each seat, one in the
seat back and the other in the seat cushion.
Heated Seat Module - One heated seat module
is used per vehicle. The Heated Seat Module is
mounted under the right front seat. This module
contains the control logic and software for the
front heated seat system. The module communi-
cates on the Controller Area Network (CAN) data
bus.
Heated Seat Switches - Two heated seat switches are used per vehicle, one for each heated seat. Both
switches are mounted in the instrument panel center stack.
Instrument Cluster (CCN) - A Cab Compartment Node (CCN) is part of the instrument cluster on this vehicle.
The CCN utilizes integrated software and information carried on the CAN data bus. The CCN serves as the
link between the heated seat switches and the heated seat module.
OPERATION
The heated seat system operates on battery current received through a fuse in the Integrated Power Module (IPM).
Fused ignition switch output (run) circuits are used, so that the heated seat system will only operate when the igni-
tion switch is in the On position. The heated seat system will turn Off automatically whenever the ignition switch is
turned to any position except On.
A Heated Seat Module is used to control the heated seat system. The module responds to heated seat switch
messages and ignition switch status inputs by controlling the 12v output to the front seat heating elements through
integral solid-state relays.
When either of the heated seat switches are depressed a resistance signal is sent to the Cab Compartment Node
(CCN) or instrument cluster. The CCN then sends a message via the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus to the
heated seat module, signaling the module to energize the heating element for the selected seat. Amber Light Emit-
ting Diodes LEDS) in the top portion of each switch indicate the level of heat in use: Two LEDs are illuminated for
high, one for low, and none for off. Pressing the switch once will select high-level heating. Pressing the switch a
second time will select low-level heating. Pressing the switch a third time will shut the heating elements off.
The heated seat module energizes an integral solid-state relay, which supplies battery current to the heating ele-
ments. When high-temperature heating is selected, the heaters provide a boosted heat level during the first four
minutes of operation after heating is activated. The heat output then drops to the normal high-temperature level. If
high-level heating is selected, the control system will automatically switch to the low level after two hours of con-
tinuous operation. At that time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one, indicating the change.
Operation on the low setting also turns off automatically after two hours.
The module will automatically turn off the heating elements if it detects an OPEN or LOW short in the heating ele-
ment circuit.

HEATED SEAT SYSTEM
In order to obtain conclusive testing, the heated seat system and the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus circuit
must be checked. Any diagnosis of the heated seat system should begin with, the use of a scan tool and the
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with the heated seat option utilize a low voltage cut-off feature. This feature turns
off power to the heated seat system anytime vehicle voltage is below 11.1v or above 15.5v. Be certain to
HEATER-CUSHION PAD
DESCRIPTION
Vehicles equipped with the optional heated seat system have two, carbon fiber heated seat elements, located in
each front seat. One heating element is used for each seat cushion and another for each seat back.
Each of the heated seat element consists of multiple heating circuits operating in parallel throughout the carbon fiber
element. The heated seat elements are captured between the leather trim cover and the seat cushion assembly. If
a malfunction occurs in one or more of the individual carbon fiber circuits, the others will continue to provide heat.
The heated seat elements cannot be repaired. If found to be damaged or inoperative, a new heating element
assembly must be installed.
OPERATION
One end of the heated seat element is connected to ground at all times through a splice under the seat. Battery
current is directed to the other end of the heated seat element by the heated seat module. The heated seat module
will energize the heated seat element when the heated seat switch is depressed in the Low or High position.
As electrical current passes through the heated seat element, the resistance of the wire used in the element dis-
perses some of the electrical current in the form of heat. The heat produced by the heated seat element then radi-
ates through the underside of the seat cushion and seat back trim covers, warming the seat cover and its occupant.

HEATED SEAT ELEMENT
Refer to the appropriate wiring information for
complete circuit schematic or connector pin-out
information.
The wire harness connectors (2&3) for the heating
elements are located under the seat (1).
NOTE: When checking heated seat elements for

continuity, be certain to move the heating element
being checked. Moving the element, such as sit-
ting in the seat will eliminate the possibility of an
intermittent open in the element which would only
be evident if the element was in a certain position.
Failure to check the element in various positions
could result in an incomplete test.
1. Locate and disconnect the seat electrical connec-

tor.
2. Check the resistance between the circuit leading in
and out of the suspect heated seat element. The
resistance should be between 3.8 - 4.8 ohms for a
seat cushion element and 4.3 - 5.4 ohms for a seat
back element. If OK, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/
HEATED SEATS - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING). If not OK, replace the inoperative heated seat element.
REMOVAL
NOTE: Do not remove the factory installed heating
elements (3) from the seat or seat back cushions.
The original element is permanently attached and
cannot be removed without permanent damage.
The replacement heating element is designed to
be applied directly on top of the inoperative fac-
tory installed heating element.

2. Remove the appropriate seat cushion, (Refer to 23
- BODY/SEATS/SEAT CUSHION COVER -
REMOVAL) or seat back trim cover, (Refer to 23 -
BODY/SEATS/SEAT BACK CUSHION / COVER -
REMOVAL).
3. Disconnect the inoperative heated seat cushion or
seat back element electrical connectors (2).
4. Locate the wires leading from the inoperative heat-
ing element and cut them off flush with the edge of
the original heating element.
INSTALLATION
1. Peel off the adhesive backing on the back of the
replacement heating element (2) and stick directly
on top of the factory installed heating element (1).
CAUTION: During the installation of the replace-

ment heating element, be careful not to fold or
crease the element assembly. Folds or creases will
cause premature failure.
2. Connect the new heating element electrical con-

nectors (3&4).
4. Verify heated seat system operation.
5. Install the appropriate seat cushion, (Refer to 23 -
BODY/SEATS/SEAT CUSHION COVER - INSTAL-
LATION) or seat back trim cover, (Refer to 23 -
BODY/SEATS/SEAT BACK CUSHION / COVER -
INSTALLATION).
NOTE: Make certain the seat wire harness is cor-

rectly routed through the seat and seat back. The
excess wire between the cushion and back ele-
ments should be securely tucked between the rear
of the cushion foam and the rear carpet flap of the
trim cover.
MODULE-HEATED SEATS
DESCRIPTION
The heated seat module (1) is located under the right
front seat. It has a single electrical connector (3) and
four locking tabs (2) that secure it to the floor cross
member. The module can be accessed through the
separation between the front and rear carpet assem-
blies.
The heated seat module is a microprocessor designed
to use Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus mes-
sages from the instrument cluster also known as the
Cabin Compartment Node (CCN). The CCN receives
inputs from the heated seat switches and in turn sig-
nals the heated seat module to operate the heated
seat elements for both front seats.
OPERATION
The heated seat module operates on fused battery current received from the ignition switch. The module is
grounded to the body at all times through the electrical connector. Inputs to the module include Controller Area
Network (CAN) data bus messages and standard hardwired 12volt power and ground. In response to the CAN
inputs the heated seat module will control the battery current to the appropriate heated seat elements.
When a heated seat switch CAN data bus signal is received by the heated seat module, the module energizes the
selected heated seat element. The Low heat set point is about 38C (100.4F), and the High heat set point is about
42C (107.6F).
If the heated seat module detects a heated seat element OPEN or SHORT circuit, it will record and store the appro-
priate diagnostic trouble code (DTC).

HEATED SEAT MODULE
REMOVAL
2. Remove the right front seat from the vehicle, (Refer
to 23 - BODY/SEATS/SEAT - REMOVAL).
3. Reposition the front carpet assembly aside to gain
access to the heated seat module (1).
4. Disconnect the wire harness connector (3) from the
heated seat module (1).
5. Unsnap the heated seat module retaining clips (2)
from the floor crossmember.
6. Remove the heated seat module (1) from the
vehicle.
INSTALLATION
1. Install the heated seat module (3) in the vehicle.
2. Position the retaining clips (2) with the retaining
holes (1) in the floor cross member. Firmly apply
even pressure to the module (3) until all four retain-
ing clips (2) snap into place.
3. Connect the wire harness connector (3) to the

heated seat module (1).
4. Reposition the front carpet assembly to the original
position.
5. Install the right, front seat, (Refer to 23 - BODY/
SEATS/SEAT - INSTALLATION).
7. Check for proper heated seat system operation.
SWITCH-HEATED SEAT
DESCRIPTION
The heated seat switches (1) are both mounted in the
instrument panel. The two switches are snapped into
mounting holes in the instrument panel center bezel.
The two heated seat switches are identical in appear-
ance and construction.
Each heated seat switch provides a resistor-multi-

plexed signal to the Cab Compartment Node (CCN).
Amber Light Emitting Diodes LEDS) in the top portion
of each switch indicate the level of heat in use: Two
LEDs are illuminated for high, one for low, and none
for off. Pressing the switch once will select high-level
heating. Pressing the switch a second time will select
low-level heating. Pressing the switch a third time will
shut the heating elements off.
The LED indicator lamps in each heated seat switch cannot be repaired. If the LED lamps are inoperative or dam-
aged, or the switch is inoperative or damaged the individual heated seat switch assembly must be replaced.
OPERATION
The heated seat switches receive battery current through a fused ignition switch output (run) circuit when the igni-
tion switch is in the On position. Depressing the heated seat switch provides a hard-wired resistor multiplexed signal
to the Cabin Compartment Node (CCN). The CCN is responsible for supplying the Controller Area Network (CAN)
data bus message to the heated seat module, signaling the module to power the heated seat element of the
selected seat and maintain the temperature setting.
If the heated seat switch is depressed to a different position (Low or High) than the currently selected state, the
CCN will go through the process again to change the temperature setting. If a heated seat switch is depressed a
second time to the same position as the currently selected state, the CCN and heated seat module interprets the
second input as a request to turn the seat heater OFF. The CCN will then signal the heated seat module to turn the
heated seat elements for that seat off.

HEATED SEAT SWITCH
REMOVAL
2. Remove the ash receiver (1) from the instrument
panel, (Refer to 23 - BODY/INSTRUMENT PANEL/
ASH RECEIVER - REMOVAL).
3. Disconnect the heated seat switch connector (2)
from the heated seat switch (3).
4. From the back of the ash receiver (1), gently pry
the switch (3) free and push the heated seat switch
out through the front of the bezel.
INSTALLATION
1. From the front of the ash receiver (1), gently push
the heated seat switch (3) in through the front of
the bezel.
2. Connect the heated seat switch connector (2) onto
the heated seat switch (3).
3. Install the ash receiver (1) into the instrument
panel, (Refer to 23 - BODY/INSTRUMENT PANEL/
ASH RECEIVER - INSTALLATION).
5. Verify heated seat system operation.
LX HORN 8H - 1
HORN
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
HORN - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . 1 HORN SYSTEM- SERVICE INFORMATION . . . . . . 16
HORN - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
HORN - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS B2337HORN CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH

DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING FCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
B2332HORN SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT/ B2338HORN CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN
PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 FCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
B2336HORN CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW
FCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
8H - 2 HORN - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS LX
HORN - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS

LX HORN - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8H - 3
B2332HORN SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE

Theory of Operation
The Horn Switch is connected to the Right Steering Switch. The switching status is transferred to the Steering Col-
umn Control Module (SCCM) by way of the LIN bus, a serial sub-bus. The SCCM converts the data to CAN(B) and
sends the message to the corresponding module on the bus.
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Steering Column Control Module senses that the Horn Switch is in the Set position for greater than 50
seconds.
Possible Causes
INTERMITTENT HORN SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE DTC

(X3) HORN SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO (X903) HORN SWITCH RETURN CIRCUIT
(X3) HORN SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
HORN SWITCH
RIGHT STEERING SWITCH
STEERING COLUMN CONTROL MODULE (SCCM)
Diagnostic Test
1. DTC IS ACTIVE
NOTE: If P0562BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW or P0563BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH is set along with this DTC,
diagnose the battery voltage DTC first.
Ignition on, engine not running.
With the Scan Tool, select View DTCs in the Steering Column Control Module.
Is the DTC status Active at this time?
Yes >> Go to 2
No >> Go to 7
2. (X3) HORN SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO (X903) HORN SWITCH RETURN CIRCUIT
Remove the Driver Airbag in accordance with the Service information.
Disconnect the Horn Switch harness connector.
Disconnect the Right Steering Switch harness connector.
NOTE: Before proceeding, thoroughly inspect the wiring harness
and connectors between the Horn Switch and the Right Steering
Switch for a short to ground or any other circuit.
Measure the resistance between the (X3) Horn Switch circuit and the
(X903) Horn Switch Return circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (X3) Horn Switch circuit for a short to the (X903)
Horn Switch Return circuit.
Perform the VERIFICATION TEST-VER 1.
No >> Go to 3
3. (X3) HORN SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

NOTE: Before proceeding, thoroughly inspect the wiring harness
and connectors between the Horn Switch and the Right Steering
Switch for a short to ground or to any other circuit.
Measure the resistance between the (X3) Horn Switch circuit at the har-
ness connector to the Right Switch and ground (include the metal cas-
ing at the back side of the Airbag).
Yes >> Repair the (X3) Horn Switch circuit for a short to ground.
No >> Go to 4
4. HORN SWITCH
Measure the resistance between the (X3) Horn Switch circuit and the
(X903) Horn Switch Return circuit at the harness connector to the horn
switch.
Yes >> Replace the Horn Switch in accordance with the Service
Information.
No >> Go to 5
5. RIGHT STEERING SWITCH

Replace the Right Steering Switch in accordance with the Service Information.
NOTE: The C206 (LIN bus) connector must be connected for this test.
Press and release the Horn Switch several times.
With the Scan Tool, Clear Stored DTCs in the Steering Column Control Module.
With the Scan Tool, select Data Display and view the Horn switch data.
While monitoring the Horn switch data, press and release the Horn Switch several times.
Does the Horn switch data change from Set to Not Set when the switch is pressed and released?
Yes >> Test Complete.
No >> Go to 6
6. STEERING COLUMN CONTROL MODULE (SCCM)

View repair.
Repair
Replace the Steering Column Control Module (SCCM) in accordance with the Service Information.
7. INTERMITTENT HORN SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE DTC

The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time.
Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, wiggle test the wiring and connectors.
Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test.
B2336HORN CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW FCM

When Monitored:
Continuously
Set Condition:
When the Front Control Module detects a shorted low condition on the Horn Relay Control circuit this DTC will
set.
Possible Causes
HORN FUSE
(A905) FUSED B(+) OPEN
RELAY
POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER
Diagnostic Test

Operate the Horn Switch several times.
Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times and leave on.
Does the scan tool display B2336 HORN CONTROL CIRCUIT
LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. HORN FUSE
Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check the Horn fuse.
Does the test light illuminate and was the fuse OK?
No >> Replace the horn fuse if open and check for a short to ground on the Horn Relay Output circuit or
correct the open B(+) circuit to the fuse.
Yes >> Go To 3
3. OPEN (A905) FUSED B(+) TO RELAY

Remove the Horn Relay from the PDC.
Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check the Fused B(+)
circuit at the relay connector.
Does the test light illuminate?
No >> Replace the Power Distribution Center.
Yes >> Go To 4
4. HORN RELAY
Install a known good relay in place of the Horn Relay.
Does the scan tool display B2336 HORN CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW?
No >> Replace the original Horn Relay.
Yes >> Go To 5
5. (X4) HORN RELAY CONTROL SHORTED

Remove the Horn Relay.
Disconnect the Front Control Module from the PDC 49 way connec-
tor.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (X4) Horn Relay
Control circuit at the relay.
Yes >> Replace the Power Distribution Center.
No >> Replace the Front Control Module.
B2337HORN CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH FCM

When Monitored:
Continuously
Set Condition:
When the Front Control Module detects excessive current on the Horn Relay Control circuit.
Possible Causes
HORN RELAY
Diagnostic Test

HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. HORN RELAY
Does the scan tool display B2337 HORN CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 3
3. SHORTED POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER

Remove the Horn Relay.
Disconnect the Front Control Module from the PDC 49 way connec-
tor.
Measure the voltage between (X4) Horn Relay Control circuit and
ground.
B2338HORN CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN FCM

When Monitored:
Continuously
Set Condition:
When the Front Control Module does not detect voltage on the Horn Relay Control circuit.
Possible Causes
HORN FUSE
B(+) OPEN
RELAY
Diagnostic Test

OPEN?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. HORN FUSE
Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check the Horn fuse.
Does the test light illuminate and was the fuse OK?
No >> Replace the horn fuse if open and check for a short to ground on the Horn Relay Output circuit or
correct the open B(+) circuit to the fuse.
Yes >> Go To 3
3. OPEN FUSED B(+) TO RELAY

Remove the Horn Relay from the PDC.
circuit at the relay connector.
Does the test light illuminate?
Yes >> Go To 4
4. HORN RELAY
Does the scan tool display B2338 HORN CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes >> Go To 5
5. (X4)HORN RELAY CONTROL OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (X4)Horn Relay Control circuit from the
relay connector to FCM connector.
Yes >> Replace the Front Control Module.
8H - 16 HORN SYSTEM- SERVICE INFORMATION LX
HORN SYSTEM- SERVICE INFORMATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
HORN SYSTEM- SERVICE INFORMATION INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 SWITCH-HORN
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - HORN SYSTEM . . . 17 DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
HORN HORN SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
LX HORN SYSTEM- SERVICE INFORMATION 8H - 17
HORN SYSTEM- SERVICE INFORMATION

DESCRIPTION
The dual-note horn system features two electromag-
netic horn units. The horn system includes the follow-
ing major components:
Horn - The two horns are located behind the
grille below a trim cover.
Horn Switch - The horn switch is molded into
the driver airbag trim cover.
OPERATION
The horn system operates on battery current received through a fuse in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). The
horn system circuit is designed so that the system will remain operational, regardless of the ignition switch position.
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - HORN SYSTEM

The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the horn system requires the use of a scan
tool and the proper Diagnostic Procedures information.
In most cases, any problem involving continually sounding horns can be quickly alleviated by removing the horn
fuse from the Integrated Power Module (IPM).
PERSONAL INJURY.
8H - 18 HORN SYSTEM- SERVICE INFORMATION LX
HORN
REMOVAL

2. Remove cover above horn.
3. Disconnect electrical harness connector.
4. Remove mounting fastener and remove horn.
INSTALLATION
1. Position horn. Install and tighten mounting fasten-

ers.
2. Connect electrical harness connector.
3. Install cover above horn.
LX HORN SYSTEM- SERVICE INFORMATION 8H - 19
SWITCH-HORN
DESCRIPTION
The horn switch is molded into the driver airbag cover. The horn switch can not be serviced separately. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/RESTRAINTS/DRIVER AIRBAG - REMOVAL).

HORN SWITCH
The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the horn system requires the use of a scan
tool and the proper Diagnostic Procedures information.
PERSONAL INJURY.
LX IGNITION CONTROL 8I - 1
IGNITION CONTROL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
IGNITION SYSTEM - ELECTRICAL IGNITION SYSTEM - SERVICE INFORMATION. . . 31

DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
IGNITION SYSTEM - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
IGNITION SYSTEM - ELECTRICAL B211FIGNITION RUN/ACC/PAD CONTROL

DIAGNOSTICS CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING B2120IGNITION RUN/ACC/PAD CONTROL
B2100-IGNITION RUN/START INPUT CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 B2122-IGNITION RUN CONTROL CIRCUIT
B2104-IGNITION UNLOCK RUN/START LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 B2123-IGNITION RUN CONTROL CIRCUIT
B2105-IGNITION UNLOCK RUN/START HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 B2124-IGNITION RUN CONTROL CIRCUIT
B211EIGNITION RUN/ACC/PAD CONTROL OPEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
8I - 2 IGNITION SYSTEM - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS LX
IGNITION SYSTEM - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS

LX IGNITION SYSTEM - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8I - 3
B2100-IGNITION RUN/START INPUT CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Anytime the ignition input is compared against the CAN B Bus ignition status message.
Set Condition:
The Front Control Module will set this DTC if the CAN bus message and the hardwired ignition circuit do not
match.
Possible Causes
ACTIVE IGNITION RELATED FCM DTCS

(A106) FUSED B+ CIRCUIT OPEN
(F20) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN
(F202) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN
REAR PDC FUSE
IGNITION SWITCH
Diagnostic Test

NOTE: If B2104 or B2105 are active, perform those tests first before proceeding.
NOTE: Check the rear PDC fuses. An open fuse can cause this DTC to set. If open refer to the wiring dia-
grams to help isolate a possible shorted circuit.
Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECK THE (F20) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Remove the Fuse 29 from the rear PDC.
Measure the voltage of the (F20) Fused Ignition Switch Output circuit (input side of fuse).
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 4
3. (F202) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN

NOTE: Check Fuse 29 and 8 in the rear PDC for an open.
Remove the FCM from the IPM.
NOTE: Install the fuse in the rear PDC.
Measure the voltage of the (F202) Fused Ignition Switch Output circuit.
No >> Repair the (F202) Ignition Switch Output circuit for an open between the rear PDC and the IPM.
4. (A106) FUSED B+ CIRCUIT OPEN

NOTE: Check Fuse 8 in the rear PDC for an open.
Disconnect the Ignition Switch harness connector.
Measure the voltage of the (A106) Fused B+ circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (F20) Fused Ignition Switch Output circuit for an
open between the Ignition Switch and the rear PDC. If ok,
replace the Ignition Switch in accordance with the service
information.
No >> Repair the (A106) Fused B+ circuit for an open.
B2104-IGNITION UNLOCK RUN/START CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Front Control Module will set this DTC within 500ms if the ignition unlock run/start circuit voltage is less
than the expected value.
Possible Causes
(F902) IGNITION UNLOCK RUN START CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

SHIFTER LEVER ASSEMBLY
Diagnostic Test

Yes >> Go To 2
2. SHIFTER LEVER ASSEMBLY

Cycle the ignition switch from off to on, leaving the ignition on for a min-
imum of 90 seconds.
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Replace the Shifter Lever Assembly in accordance with the
3. (F902) IGNITION UNLOCK RUN START CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (F902) Ignition Unlock
Run Start circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (F902) Ignition Unlock Run Start circuit for a
short to ground.
B2105-IGNITION UNLOCK RUN/START CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
With the ignition on or off and with the FCM awake.
Set Condition:
The Front Control Module will set this DTC within 2 seconds if the ignition unlock run/start circuit voltage is not
what the expected value should be.
Possible Causes
(F902) IGNITION UNLOCK RUN START CIRCUIT OPEN

(F902) IGNITION UNLOCK RUN START CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
SHIFTER LEVER ASSEMBLY
Diagnostic Test

Cycle the ignition switch from off to on, leaving the ignition on for a minimum of 90 seconds then turn the ignition
off.
Yes >> Go To 2
2. (F902) IGNITION UNLOCK RUN START CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE

Cycle the ignition switch from off to on then back to off.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the off position when per-
forming the following step.
Using a 12volt test light connected to ground, check the (F902) Igni-
tion Unlock Run Start circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (F902) Ignition Unlock Run Start circuit for a
short to voltage.
No >> Go To 3
3. SHIFTER LEVER ASSEMBLY

With the test light still connected from the previous step, check the
(F902) Ignition Unlock Run Start circuit.
Yes >> Replace the Shifter Lever Assembly in accordance with the
No >> Go To 4
4. (F902) IGNITION UNLOCK RUN START CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (F902) Ignition Unlock Run Start circuit
between the Shifter Lever Assembly and the FCM-PDM connector.
No >> Repair the (F902) Ignition Unlock Run Start circuit for an
open.
B211EIGNITION RUN/ACC/PAD CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Front Control Module will set this DTC within 500ms if the (P307) Accessory Delay Relay Control circuit is
open or shorted to ground.
Possible Causes
(P307) ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN

(P307) ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY
Diagnostic Test

Yes >> Go To 2
2. ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY

Install a substitute relay in place of the original Accessory Delay Relay.
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Replace the original Accessory Delay Relay.
3. (P307) ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN

Remove the Accessory Delay Relay from the Rear Power Distribution
Module.
Measure the resistance of the Accessory Delay Relay Control circuit
from the Front Control Module PDM connector to the Relay connector.
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Repair the Accessory Delay Relay Control circuit for an
open.
4. (P307) ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (P307) Accessory
Delay Relay Control circuit at the relay cavity (85).
Yes >> Repair the (P307) Accessory Delay Relay Control circuit for
a short to ground.
B211FIGNITION RUN/ACC/PAD CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
shorted to voltage.
Possible Causes
(P307) ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE

Diagnostic Test

Yes >> Go To 2

Yes >> Go To 3
3. (P307) ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE

Module.
Measure the voltage of the (P307) Accessory Delay Relay Control cir-
cuit at the relay connector (cavity 85).
Yes >> Repair the (P307) Accessory Delay Relay Control circuit for
a short to voltage.
circuits. If OK, replace and program the Front Control Mod-
B2120IGNITION RUN/ACC/PAD CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
open.
Possible Causes
(P307) ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN

Diagnostic Test

Yes >> Go To 2

Yes >> Go To 3
3. (P307) ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN

Module.
Measure the resistance of the Accessory Delay Relay Control circuit
from the Front Control Module PDM connector to the relay connector.
No >> Repair the Accessory Delay Relay Control circuit for an
open.
circuits. If OK, replace and program the Front Control Mod-
B2122-IGNITION RUN CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Front Control Module will set this DTC within 500ms if the (F921) or (F923) Run Relay Control circuit
voltage is open or shorted to ground.
Possible Causes
(F921) or (F923) RUN RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED TO GROUND

RUN RELAY
Diagnostic Test

Yes >> Go To 2
2. RUN RELAY
Install a substitute Run Relay in place of the original Run Relay.
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Replace the original Run Relay.
3. (F921) or (F923) RUN RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN

Remove the Run Relay from the Rear Power Distribution Module.
NOTE: This circuit contains a diode. When checking resistance of
this circuit the red ohmmeter lead must be connected to the Run
Relay cavity (85) and the black ohmmeter lead must be connected
to the FCMPDM connector.
NOTE: Ensure the diode is installed correctly in the Rear Power
Distribution Module.
Measure the resistance of the Run Relay Control circuit.
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Repair the Run Relay Control circuit for an open.
4. (F921) RUN RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

NOTE: This circuit contains a diode. When checking for a short to
ground you must check both sides of the diode.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (F921) Run Relay
Control circuit at the Run Relay cavity (85).
Yes >> Repair the (F921) Run Relay Control circuit for a short to
ground.
No >> Go To 5

Control circuit at the FCMPDM connector.
ground.
B2123-IGNITION RUN CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
voltage is shorted to voltage.
Possible Causes
(F921) or (F923) RUN RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE

RUN RELAY
Diagnostic Test

Yes >> Go To 2
2. RUN RELAY
Yes >> Go To 3
3. (F921) RUN RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE

voltage you must check both sides of the diode.
Measure the voltage of the (F921) Run Relay Control circuit at the Run
Relay cavity (85).
voltage.
No >> Go To 4
4. (F923) RUN RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE

voltage you must check both sides of the diode.
Measure the voltage of the (F923) Run Relay Control circuit at the
FCMPDM connector.
voltage.
B2124-IGNITION RUN CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
voltage is open or shorted to ground.
Possible Causes
(F921) or (F923) RUN RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED TO GROUND

RUN RELAY
Diagnostic Test

Yes >> Go To 2
2. RUN RELAY
Yes >> Go To 3
3. (F921) or (F923) RUN RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN

NOTE: This circuit contains a diode. When checking resistance of
this circuit the red ohmmeter lead must be connected to the run
relay cavity (85) and the black ohmmeter lead must be connected
to the FCMPDM connector.
Measure the resistance of the Run Relay Control circuit.
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Repair the Run Relay Control circuit for an open.

Control circuit at the Run Relay cavity (85).
ground.
No >> Go To 5

Control circuit at the FCMPDM connector.
ground.
LX IGNITION SYSTEM - SERVICE INFORMATION 8I - 31
IGNITION SYSTEM - SERVICE INFORMATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
IGNITION SYSTEM - SERVICE INFORMATION INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

DESCRIPTION CYLINDER-IGNITION KEY AND LOCK
IGNITION SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
OPERATION - IGNITION SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
SPECIFICATIONS SENSOR-KNOCK
TORQUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 REMOVAL
SPARK PLUGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 2.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION 3.5L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
REMOVAL 5.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
2.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 6.1L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
3.5L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 INSTALLATION
5.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 2.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
6.1L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 3.5L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
INSTALLATION 5.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
2.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 6.1L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
3.5L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 PLUG-GLOW
5.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
6.1L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
COIL-IGNITION REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
REMOVAL INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
2.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 RELAY-GLOW PLUG
3.5L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
5.7/6.1L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
INSTALLATION DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - GLOW PLUG
2.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 RELAYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
3.5L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 PLUG-SPARK
5.7/6.1L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 DESCRIPTION - PLATINUM PLUGS . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
CAPACITOR-IGNITION COIL REMOVAL
REMOVAL 2.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
2.7/3.5L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 3.5L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
6.1L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 5.7L/6.1L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
INSTALLATION INSTALLATION
2.7/3.5L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 2.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
6.1L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 3.5L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
SWITCH-IGNITION 5.7L/6.1L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
8I - 32 IGNITION SYSTEM - SERVICE INFORMATION LX
IGNITION SYSTEM - SERVICE INFORMATION

DESCRIPTION
IGNITION SYSTEM
NOTE: All engines use a fixed ignition timing system. Basic ignition timing is not adjustable. All spark
advance is determined by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM).
The ignition system used on these engines is referred to as the Direct Ignition System (DIS). The systems three
main components are the coils, crankshaft position sensor, and camshaft position sensor. If equipped with the coil
on plug ignition system it utilizes an ignition coil for every cylinder, it is mounted directly over the each spark plug.
OPERATION - IGNITION SYSTEM

The crankshaft position sensor and camshaft position sensor are hall effect devices. The camshaft position sensor
and crankshaft position sensor generate pulses that are inputs to the PCM. The PCM determines engine position
from these sensors. The PCM calculates injector sequence and ignition timing from crankshaft & camshaft position.
For a description of both sensors, refer to Camshaft Position Sensor and Crankshaft Position Sensor.
SPECIFICATIONS
TORQUE

Camshaft Position Sensor
12 - 105
- 2.7L
Camshaft Position Sensor
12 - 105
- 3.5L
Camshaft Position Sensor 12 9 105
- 5.7L V-8 Engine
Crankshaft Position
12 - 105
Sensor - 2.7L
Crankshaft Position
12 - 105
Sensor - 3.5L
Crankshaft Position 12 9 105
Sensor - 5.7L V-8 Engine
Ignition Coil Mounting -
6.2 - 55
2.7L
Ignition Coil Mounting -
6.7 - 60
3.5L
Ignition Coil Mounting - 12 9 105 ( 20)
5.7L V-8 Engine
Ignition Coil Mounting - 6-8 - 53 - 71 in. lbs.
6.1L V-8 Engine
Knock Sensor - 2.7L 10 - 83
Knock Sensor - 3.5L 20 15.2 -
* Knock Sensor - 5.7/6.1L 20 15 176
V-8 Engine
Spark Plugs - 2.7L 17 - 150
Spark Plugs - 3.5L 28 20 -
** Spark Plugs - 5.7L V-8 18 ( 3) 13 ( 2) -
Engine

** Spark Plugs - 6.1L V-8 15 - 20 11 - 15 -
Engine
Capacitor Nut 12 8.8 106
* Do not apply any
sealant, thread-locker or
adhesive to bolts. Poor
sensor performance may
result.
** Torque critical tapered
design. Do not exceed 15
ft. lbs.
SPARK PLUGS
ENGINE PLUG TYPE ELECTRODE GAP

2.7L RE10PMC5 0.048 TO 0.058 in.
3.5L ZFR5LP-13G 0.048 TO 0.058 in.
5.7L Hemi V-8 Champion - RE14MCC4 1.14 mm (0.045 in.)
6.1L Hemi V-8 NGK PLZTR5A-13 1.3 mm (0.050 in.)
SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION
REMOVAL
2.7L
2. Unlock and disconnect electrical connector.
3. Remove mounting bolt.

4. Remove sensor.
3.5L
1. Camshaft Position Sensor location.
3. Unlock electrical connector.

4. Remove electrical connector.
5. Remove mounting bolt.

6. Remove sensor.
5.7L
The Camshaft Position Sensor (CMP) on the 5.7L V-8
engine (1) is bolted to the front/top of the timing chain
cover (2).
1. Disconnect electrical connector (4) at CMP sensor.
2. Remove sensor mounting bolt (3).
3. Carefully twist sensor from timing chain cover.
4. Check condition of sensor o-ring.
6.1L
The Camshaft Position Sensor (CMP) on the 6.1L V-8
engine (1) is bolted to the front/top of the timing chain
cover (2).
1. Disconnect electrical connector (4) at CMP sensor.
2. Remove sensor mounting bolt (3).
3. Carefully twist sensor from timing chain cover.
4. Check condition of sensor o-ring.
INSTALLATION
2.7L
1. Install sensor.
2. Install mounting bolt.
3. Tighten bolt to 12 Nm (105 in. lbs.).
4. Connect electrical connector and lock.

3.5L
1. Install new spacer to sensor if installing the old
sensor or new sensor will have the spacer
installed.
2. Install sensor and insert until sensor makes contact

with tone wheel.
3. Install mounting bolt.
4. Tighten mounting bolt to 12 Nm (105 in. lbs.).
5. Install electrical connector.

6. Lock connector.
5.7L
1. Clean out machined hole in timing chain cover.
2. Apply a small amount of engine oil to sensor
o-ring.
3. Install sensor (1) into timing chain cover (2) with a
slight rocking action. Do not twist sensor into posi-
tion as damage to o-ring may result.
CAUTION: Before tightening sensor mounting bolt,

be sure sensor is completely flush to timing chain
cover. If sensor is not flush, damage to sensor
mounting tang may result.
4. Install mounting bolt (3) and tighten to 12 Nm (105

in. lbs.)
5. Connect electrical connector (4) to sensor.
6.1L
1. Clean out machined hole in timing chain cover.
2. Apply a small amount of engine oil to sensor
o-ring.
3. Install sensor (1) into timing chain cover (2) with a
slight rocking action. Do not twist sensor into posi-
tion as damage to o-ring may result.
CAUTION: Before tightening sensor mounting bolt,

be sure sensor is completely flush to timing chain
cover. If sensor is not flush, damage to sensor
mounting tang may result.
4. Install mounting bolt (3) and tighten to 12 Nm (105

in. lbs.)
5. Connect electrical connector (4) to sensor.
COIL-IGNITION
REMOVAL
2.7L
2. Remove the intake manifold, (Refer to 9 - ENGINE/
MANIFOLDS/INTAKE MANIFOLD - REMOVAL)
3. Prior to removing the ignition coils, spray com-
pressed air around the coil area and spark plug.
4. Remove electrical connector from ignition coil.

5. Remove 2 fasteners from ignition coil assembly.
6. Remove ignition coil assembly.
3.5L
pressed air around the coil area.
4. Unlock and remove electrical connector from igni-
tion coil.
On 3.5L engines, it is necessary to loosen the screws

by alternating back and forth. Do not lose the spacers
under the coil when loosening the screws.
5. Remove 2 fasteners from ignition coil assembly.
6. Remove ignition coil assembly.
5.7/6.1L
A separate ignition coil (1), mounted to the valve cover
is used for each cylinder. Each coil fires the two spark
plugs at times predetermined by the Powertrain Con-
trol Module (PCM).
1. Unlock electrical connector (1) by pressing on tab

while pulling electrical connector from coil.
2. Remove two coil mounting bolts (3).
3. Carefully pull up coil from cylinder head opening

with a slight twisting action. Twisting will help break
loose boots (1) from spark plugs.
INSTALLATION
2.7L
1. Install ignition coil assembly to spark plug.
2. Install coil screws and tighten: 2.7L engine to 6.2
Nm (55 in. lbs.).
3. Connect the electrical connector and lock.
4. Install the intake manifold, (Refer to 9 - ENGINE/

MANIFOLDS/INTAKE MANIFOLD - INSTALLA-
TION)
3.5L
On 3.5L engines, it is necessary to tighten the screws
under the coil when installing ignition coils.
1. Install ignition coil assembly to spark plug.
2. Install coil screws and tighten 3.5L engines to 6.7
Nm (60 in. lbs.).
3. Connect the electrical connector and lock.

TION)
5.7/6.1L
1. Before installing coil(s), apply dielectric grease to
inside of spark plug boots (1).
2. Position ignition coil into valve cover and push both

spark plug boots onto each spark plug.
3. Install two coil mounting bolts (3) and tighten to 12
Nm (105 in. lbs.).
4. Connect electrical connector (1) to coil and lock
connector.
CAPACITOR-IGNITION COIL
REMOVAL
2.7/3.5L
1. Remove the negative battery cable.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Remove nut and capacitor.
6.1L
The ignition capacitor (1) is attached to the left-rear
corner of the intake manifold (3).
1. Remove electrical connector (2).
2. Remove mounting nut (4) and remove capacitor.
INSTALLATION
2.7/3.5L
1. Install capacitor and tighten nut.
2. Attach electrical connector to capacitor.
3. Install the negative battery cable.
6.1L
1. Install sensor (1) to mounting stud.
2. Install and tighten nut (4).
3. Install electrical connector (2).
SWITCH-IGNITION
REMOVAL
The ignition switch attaches to the lock cylinder housing on the end opposite the lock cylinder. For ignition switch
terminal and circuit identification, refer to the Wiring Diagrams section.
1. Disconnect negative cable from battery.
2. Remove the Instrument Panel Center Bezel, (Refer
to 23 - BODY/INSTRUMENT PANEL/CLUSTER
BEZEL - REMOVAL) Chrysler and (Refer to 23 -
BODY/INSTRUMENT PANEL/CLUSTER BEZEL -
REMOVAL) Dodge.
3. Bezel cluster removed.

4. Remove side trim panel to steering column cover.
5. Remove the screws that secure the steering col-

umn cover to the instrument panel and relocate
panel.
6. Pull the steering column cover rearward at the top
and right side of the cover to release the snap
retainers from the instrument panel.
7. Remove the screws that secure the instrument
panel steering column cover reinforcement to
bracket and remove reinforcement from the vehicle.
8. Remove the 2 front mounting nuts.
9. Remove the lower mounting nut.
10. Slide the assembly rearward into the instrument

panel and down to gain access to switch.
11. Disconnect the electrical connector from the igni-

tion Switch and SKREEM Module.
12. Remove the interlock cable by depressing the

locking tab and pulling straight out.
13. Interlocking cable removed.
14. Remove ignition switch mounting screw.

15. Squeeze the 2 locking tabs to remove ignition
switch from the lockhousing.
1 - Ignition Key Housing

2 - Ignition Switch
3 - Ignition Switch Mounting Screws
4 - Locking Tabs
INSTALLATION
The ignition switch attaches to the lock cylinder housing on the end opposite the lock cylinder. For ignition switch
terminal and circuit identification, refer to the Wiring Diagrams section.
1. A tab on the ignition switch indexes to a notch in

the lock cylinder housing. Also, a slot in the end of
the ignition switch fits over the shaft in the end of
the lock cylinder housing. Use the ignition key to
rotate the lock cylinder to align the ignition switch
with lock cylinder housing. Insert ignition switch into
lock housing until locking tabs are seated into
openings on lock housing.
2. Install ignition switch mounting screw.
3. Install the interlock cable into the switch assembly.

4. Attach electrical connector to SKREEM Module.
5. Install switch assembly into Instrument Panel.
6. Attach electrical connector to ignition switch.

7. Tighten the 2 mounting nuts.
8. Tighten the lower mounting nut.
9. Install steering column reinforcement.

10. Steering column reinforcement installed.
11. Install the Steering column reinforcement cover.

12. Install trim panel end.
13. Install the Bezel cluster.

14. Install the ignition switch bezel ring.

15. Connect the negative battery cable.
CYLINDER-IGNITION KEY AND LOCK

REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove bezel ignition switch ring.
3. Pull center console bezel loose from instrument panel.
4. Insert ignition key and turn to the ON position.
5. Depress the locking tab on the ignition switch
housing.
6. Pull the key cylinder from the ignition switch hous-
ing.
INSTALLATION
1. Install key in lock cylinder. Turn key to ON posi-
tion (retaining tab on lock cylinder can be
depressed).
2. The shaft at the end of the lock cylinder aligns with
the socket in the end of the housing. To align the
socket with the lock cylinder, ensure the socket is
in the ON position.
3. Align the lock cylinder with the grooves in the
housing. Slide the lock cylinder into the housing
until the tab sticks through the opening in the
housing.
4. Turn key to Off position and remove key.

5. Install center console bezel to instrument panel.

6. Install bezel ignition switch ring.
SENSOR-KNOCK
REMOVAL
2.7L
The sensors screws into the cylinder block, directly
below the intake manifold.
2. Remove intake manifold, (Refer to 9 - ENGINE/
3. Remove the passenger side cylinder head, refer to
the Engine section (Refer to 9 - ENGINE/CYLIN-
DER HEAD - REMOVAL).
4. Disconnect electrical connector from knock sensor.
5. Use a crows foot socket to remove the knock
sensors.
3.5L
2. Remove the upper intake manifold, (Refer to 9 -
ENGINE/MANIFOLDS/INTAKE MANIFOLD -
REMOVAL)
4. Remove the knock sensor.
5.7L
Two sensors (1) are used. Each sensor is bolted to
the outside of cylinder block below the exhaust mani-
fold (3).
1. Raise vehicle.
2. Disconnect knock sensor electrical connector (5).
3. Remove sensor mounting bolt (2). Note foam strip
on bolt threads. This foam is used only to retain the
bolts to sensors for plant assembly. It is not used
as a sealant. Do not apply any adhesive, sealant or
thread locking compound to these bolts.
4. Remove sensor from engine.
6.1L
Two knock sensors (1) are used. Each sensor is
bolted to the outside of cylinder block below the
exhaust manifold (3).
1. Raise vehicle.
2. Remove heat shield (1) from knock sensor. Shield

snaps to sensor.
3. Disconnect knock sensor electrical connector (5).

4. Remove sensor mounting bolt (2). Note foam strip
on bolt threads. This foam is used only to retain the
bolts to sensors for plant assembly. It is not used
as a sealant. Do not apply any adhesive, sealant or
thread locking compound to these bolts.
5. Remove sensor from engine.
INSTALLATION
2.7L
The sensors screws into the cylinder block, directly
below the intake manifold.
1. Install knock sensor. Tighten knock sensor to 10
Nm (7 ft. lbs.) torque. Over or under tightening
effects knock sensor performance resulting in
possible improper spark control.
2. Attach electrical connector to knock sensor.
3. Install the passenger side cylinder head, (Refer to
9 - ENGINE/CYLINDER HEAD - INSTALLATION)
4. Install intake manifold, (Refer to 9 - ENGINE/MAN-
IFOLDS/INTAKE MANIFOLD - INSTALLATION)
5. connect negative battery cable.
3.5L
1. Install knock sensor. Tighten knock sensor to 20
Nm (15.2 in. lbs.) torque. Over or under tighten-
ing effects knock sensor performance, possibly
causing improper spark control.
2. Route the knock sensor wire in the proper location.

TION)
4. Connect electrical connector.

5.7L
1. Thoroughly clean knock sensor mounting hole.
2. Install sensor (1) into cylinder block.
NOTE: Over or under tightening the sensor mount-

ing bolts will affect knock sensor performance,
possibly causing improper spark control. Always
use the specified torque when installing the knock
sensors. The torque for the knock senor bolt is
relatively light for an 8mm bolt.
NOTE: Note foam strip on bolt threads. This foam

is used only to retain the bolts to sensors for
plant assembly. It is not used as a sealant. Do not
apply any adhesive, sealant or thread locking
compound to these bolts.
3. Install and tighten mounting bolt (2). Refer to

torque specification.
4. Install electrical connector to sensor.
6.1L
1. Thoroughly clean knock sensor mounting hole.
2. Install sensor (1) onto cylinder block.
NOTE: Over or under tightening the sensor mount-

ing bolts will affect knock sensor performance,
possibly causing improper spark control. Always
use the specified torque when installing the knock
sensors. The torque for the knock senor bolt is
relatively light for an 8mm bolt.
NOTE: Note foam strip on bolt threads. This foam

is used only to retain the bolts to sensors for
plant assembly. It is not used as a sealant. Do not
apply any adhesive, sealant or thread locking
compound to these bolts.
3. Install and tighten mounting bolt (2). Refer to

torque specification.
4. Install electrical connector (5) to sensor.
5. Install heat shield (1) to sensor (shield snaps on).

PLUG-GLOW
DESCRIPTION
Glow plugs are used to help start a cold or cool
engine. The glow plugs will heat up and glow to heat
the combustion chamber of each cylinder. An individ-
ual glow plug is used for each cylinder. Each glow
plug is threaded into the side of the cylinder head
below the cylinder head cover.
OPERATION
The glow plugs are used to preheat the combustion chambers in order to achieve the ignition temperature required
for the fuel-air mixture.
The glow plug consists of a housing with a female thread and an interference-fit rod. The heating element is inte-
grated in the glow rod. It consists of a heating winding and a control winding connected in series.
When the glow plug system is switched ON, a current of about 30 ampere flows to each glow plug. The heating
winding heats the glow plug. The control winding increases its resistance as the temperature rises and limits the
current to approximately 15-25 ampere. The glow plug is protected this way from overloads.
REMOVAL
CAUTION: Engine temperature must be at least 90C (194F) before removing glow plugs. If cylinder head is
already removed, warm cylinder head to 90C (194F) before removing glow plugs.

2. Remove engine cover (Refer to 9 - ENGINE - REMOVAL).
3. Disconnect glow plug electrical connector (1).
WARNING: Risk of injury to skin and eyes from handling hot or glowing objects. Wear protective gloves,
clothing and eye wear.
4. Remove glow plugs and clean glow plug bay.
INSTALLATION
1. Clean glow plug bay and install glow plug. Tighten glow plugs to 12 Nm (106 lbs. in.).
2. Connect glow plug electrical connector (1).
3. Install engine cover (Refer to 9 - ENGINE - INSTALLATION).
RELAY-GLOW PLUG
DESCRIPTION
There are two glow plug relays. These relays are located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) in the engine
compartment.
OPERATION
When the ignition (key) switch is place in the ON position, a signal is sent to the ECM relating current engine cool-
ant temperature. This signal is sent from the engine coolant temperature sensor.
After receiving this signal, the ECM will determine if, when and for how long of a period the glow plug relays should
be activated. This is done before, during and after the engine is started. Whenever the glow plug relays are acti-
vated, it will control the 12 volt 100 amp circuit for the operation of the four glow plugs. Each relay control two glow
plugs.
The Glow Plug lamp is tied to this circuit. Lamp operation is also controlled by the ECM.
With a cold engine, the glow plug relays and glow plugs may be activated for a maximum time of 200 seconds.
Refer to the following Glow Plug Control chart for a temperature/time comparison of the glow plug relay operation.
In this chart, Pre-Heat and Post-Heat times are mentioned. Pre-Heat is the amount of time the glow plug relay
control circuit is activated when the ignition (key) is switched ON, without the engine running. Post-Heat is the
amount of time the glow plug relay control circuit is activated after the engine is operated. The Glow Plug lamp will
not be activated during the post-heat cycle.
Engine Coolant Wait-To Start Lamp 9ON9 Pre-Heat Cycle (Glow Post-Heat Cycle
Temperature 9Key ON9 (Seconds) Plugs On Seconds) (Seconds)
-30C 20 SEC. 35 SEC. 200 SEC.
-10C 8 SEC. 23 SEC. 180 SEC.
+10C 6 SEC. 21 SEC. 160 SEC.
+30C 5 SEC. 20 SEC. 140 SEC.
+40C 4 SEC. 19 SEC. 70 SEC.
+70C 1 SEC. 16 SEC. 20 SEC.
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - GLOW PLUG RELAYS

Refer to the appropriate Diesel Powertrain Diagnosis Manual for information on diagnosing the glow plug relays.
PLUG-SPARK
DESCRIPTION - PLATINUM PLUGS
The V6 engines use platinum resistor spark plugs. They have resistance values of 6,000 to 20,000 ohms when
checked with at least a 1000 volt tester. For spark plug identification and specifications, Refer to the Specifications
section.
Do not use an ohm meter to check the resistance of the spark plugs. This will give an inaccurate reading.
When the spark plugs use a single or double platinum tips and they have a recommended service life of 100,000
miles for normal driving conditions per schedule A in this manual. The spark plugs have a recommended service life
of 75,000 miles for severe driving conditions per schedule B in this manual. A thin platinum pad is welded to both
or just the center electrode end(s). Extreme care must be used to prevent spark plug cross threading, mis-gapping
and ceramic insulator damage during plug removal and installation.
CAUTION: Cleaning of the platinum plug may dam-

age the platinum tip.
REMOVAL
2.7L
Always remove the ignition coil assembly by grasping
at the spark plug boot, turning the assembly 1/2 turn
and pulling straight back in a steady motion.
pressed air around the coil area and spark plug or
contaminates from spark plug tube..
4. Remove the ignitions coil.
5. Remove the spark plug using a quality socket with
a rubber or foam insert.
6. Inspect the spark plug condition.
3.5L
Always remove the ignition coil assembly by grasping
at the spark plug boot, turning the assembly 1/2 turn
and pulling straight back in a steady motion.
pressed air around the coil area and spark plug or
contaminates from spark plug tube..
4. Remove the ignitions coil.
5. Remove the spark plug using a quality socket with
a rubber or foam insert.
6. Inspect the spark plug condition.
5.7L/6.1L
Each individual spark plug is located under each ignition coil. Each individual ignition coil must be removed to gain
access to each spark plug. Refer to Ignition Coil Removal/Installation.
1. Remove necessary air filter tubing at throttle body.
2. Prior to removing ignition coil, spray compressed air around coil base at cylinder head.
3. Prior to removing spark plug, spray compressed air into cylinder head opening. This will help prevent foreign
material from entering combustion chamber.
4. Remove spark plug from cylinder head using a quality socket with a rubber or foam insert. Also check condition
of ignition coil o-ring and replace as necessary.
5. Inspect spark plug condition.
INSTALLATION
2.7L
1. To avoid cross threading, start the spark plug into
the cylinder head by hand.
2. Tighten spark plugs. Tighten to 17 Nm (12.5 ft.
lbs.).
3. Install ignition coil assembly onto spark plug.
4. Hand tighten coil screws.
5. Tighten ignition coil screws to 6.7 Nm (60 in. lbs.).
6. Connect and lock the electrical connector.
TION)
3.5L
1. To avoid cross threading, start the spark plug into
the cylinder head by hand.
2. Tighten spark plugs. Tighten to 28 Nm (20 ft. lbs.).
3. Install ignition coil assembly onto spark plug.
4. Hand tighten coil screws.
5. Tighten ignition coil screws to 6.7 Nm (60 in. lbs.).
6. Connect and lock the electrical connector.
TION)
5.7L/6.1L
Special care should be taken when installing spark plugs into the cylinder head spark plug wells. Be sure the plugs
do not drop into the plug wells as electrodes can be damaged.
Always tighten spark plugs to the specified torque. Over tightening can cause distortion resulting in a change in the
spark plug gap or a cracked porcelain insulator.
1. Start the spark plug into the cylinder head by hand to avoid cross threading.
2. Tighten spark plugs. Refer to torque specifications.
3. Before installing ignition coil(s), check condition of coil o-ring and replace as necessary. To aid in coil installation,
apply silicone to coil o-ring.
4. Install ignition coil(s). Refer to Ignition Coil Removal/Installation.
LX INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 8J - 1
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - ELECTRICAL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - SERVICE

DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - ELECTRICAL B2213CCN INTERNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

DIAGNOSTICS U0019CAN B BUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING U0141LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B1200-AIRBAG WARNING INDICATOR FRONT CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 U0151-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B1202-AIRBAG WARNING INDICATOR OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER . . . . . 43
CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 U0159-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B1225-REAR WIPER INDICATOR CONTROL PARKING ASSIST CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . 43
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 U0164-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HVAC
B1226-REAR WIPER INDICATOR CONTROL CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 U0167-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B160A-PANEL DIMMER INPUT CIRCUIT INTRUSION TRANSCEIVER CONTROL
LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
B160B-PANEL DIMMER INPUT CIRCUIT U0168-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 VEHICLE SECURITY CONTROL MODULE
B1613-PANEL ILLUMINATION CONTROL (SKREEM/WCM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 U0184-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B1614-PANEL ILLUMINATION CONTROL RADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 U0195-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B1694-ACCESSORY DIMMING CONTROL SDARS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 U0197-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B1695-ACCESSORY DIMMING CONTROL HANDS FREE PHONE MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 U0208-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B2107-IGNITION SWITCH SENSE INPUT HEATED SEAT CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . 44
CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 U0209-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B2108-IGNITION SWITCH SENSE INPUT MEMORY SEAT CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . 44
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 U0212-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B2109-IGNITION SWITCH SENSE INPUT SCCM-CAN-B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
8J - 2 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS LX
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS

LX INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8J - 3
B1200-AIRBAG WARNING INDICATOR CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
With the ignition on and when requested to turn on by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC).
Set Condition:
The Instrument Cluster software detects the voltage across the Airbag Lamp is below 0.5 volts when ON.
Possible Causes
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test

NOTE: The Instrument Cluster performs internal tests on the Airbag Lamp during each ignition cycle.
Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition on.
Wait for the Instrument Cluster to perform the bulb check.
Is the DTC active?
Yes >> Replace and program the Instrument Cluster in accordance with the Service Information.
B1202-AIRBAG WARNING INDICATOR CIRCUIT OPEN

When Monitored:
With the ignition on and when requested to turn on by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC).
Set Condition:
The Instrument Cluster software detects the voltage across the Airbag Lamp is above 4.0 volts when ON.
Possible Causes
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test

NOTE: The Instrument Cluster performs internal tests on the Airbag Lamp during each ignition cycle.
Wait for the Instrument Cluster to perform the bulb check.
Is the DTC active?
Yes >> Replace and program the Instrument Cluster in accordance with the Service Information.
B1225-REAR WIPER INDICATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
Ignition Run-Start transition to on.
Set Condition:
Rear Wiper Output status HIGH.
Possible Causes
(W213) REAR WIPER INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN

SWITCH BANK
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test

Activate the rear wiper switch.
Wait 30 seconds.
Is the DTC active?
Yes >> Go To 2
by inspecting the related wiring harness for chafed, pierced, pinched, and partially broken wires. Also
nals.
2. CHECK THE (W213) REAR WIPER INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect the Instrument Cluster C3 harness connector.
Measure the resistance of the (W213) Rear Wiper Indicator Driver Cir-
cuit between the Instrument Cluster Harness connector and the Switch
Bank harness connector.
Yes >> Repair the (W213) Rear Wiper Indicator Driver Circuit for
an open.
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE REAR WIPER SWITCH

Reconnect the Switch Bank harness connector.
Measure the voltage on the (W213) Rear Wiper Indicator Driver Circuit
at the Instrument Cluster C3 harness connector.
Yes >> Replace the Instrument Cluster in accordance with the ser-
vice information.
No >> Replace the Switch Bank in accordance with the service
information.
B1226-REAR WIPER INDICATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Ignition Run-Start transition to on.
Set Condition:
Rear Wiper Output status LOW.
Possible Causes
(W213) REAR WIPER INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

SWITCH BANK
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test

Wait 30 seconds.
Is the DTC active?
Yes >> Go To 2
nals.
2. CHECK THE (W213) REAR WIPER INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Disconnect Switch Bank harness connector.
Measure the voltage on the (W213) Rear Wiper Indicator Driver circuit.
Is the voltage above 5 volts?
Yes >> Repair the (W213) Rear Wiper Indicator Driver circuit for a
short to voltage.
No >> Replace the Instrument Cluster in accordance with the ser-
vice information.
B160A-PANEL DIMMER INPUT CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
With the Instrument Cluster awake.
Set Condition:
Panel Dimmer Input less than 0.5 volts.
Possible Causes
(E2) PANEL LAMPS DIMMER SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

HEADLAMP SWITCH
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test

Activate the Panel Dimmer Switch.
Wait 30 seconds.
Is the DTC active?
Yes >> Go To 2
nals.
2. CHECK OPERATION OF HEADLAMP SWITCH

Disconnect the Headlamp Switch harness connector.
With the scan tool, read Instrument Cluster DTCs.
Does the scan tool display-B160B-PANEL DIMMER INPUT CIR-
CUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Replace the Headlamp Switch in accordance with the ser-
vice information.
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK THE (E2) PANEL LAMPS DIMMER SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the (E2) Panel Lamps
Dimmer Signal Circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (E2) Panel Lamps Dimmer Signal Circuit for a
short to ground.
vice information.
B160B-PANEL DIMMER INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Panel Dimmer Input greater than 4.8 volts.
Possible Causes
(E2) PANEL LAMPS DIMMER SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE

(L900) HEADLAMP SWITCH MUX RETURN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
(L900) HEADLAMP SWITCH MUX RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN
(E2) PANEL LAMPS DIMMER SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
HEADLAMP SWITCH
Diagnostic Test

Activate the Panel Dimmer Switch.
Wait 30 seconds.
Is the DTC active?
Yes >> Go To 2
nals.
2. CHECK THE (E2) PANEL LAMPS DIMMER SIGNAL CIRCUIT, AND THE (L900) HEADLAMP SWITCH MUX
RETURN CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Using a test light, measure for voltage on the (E2) Panel Lamps Dim-
mer Signal circuit.
Using a test light, measure for voltage on the (L900) Headlamp Switch
MUX Return circuit.
Is voltage present on the E2 or L900 circuit?
Yes >> Repair the E2 or the L900 for a short to voltage.
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE PANEL LAMPS DIMMER SWITCH

Connect a jumper wire at the Headlamp Switch harness connector
between the (E2) Panel Lamps Dimmer Signal circuit and the (L900)
Headlamp Switch MUX Return circuit.
Does the Scan tool display-B160A-PANEL DIMMER INPUT CIR-
CUIT LOW?
vice information.
No >> Go To 4
4. CHECK THE (L900) HEADLAMP SWITCH MUX RETURN CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (L900) Headlamp Switch MUX Return
circuit between the Instrument Cluster C2 harness connector and the
Headlamp Switch harness connector.
Yes >> Repair the (L900) Headlamp Switch MUX Return circuit for
an open.
No >> Go To 5
5. CHECK THE (E2) PANEL LAMPS DIMMER SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (E2) Panel Lamps Dimmer Signal circuit
between the Instrument Cluster C1 harness connector and the Head-
lamp Switch harness connector.
Yes >> Repair the (E2) Panel Lamps Dimmer Signal circuit for an
open.
vice information.
B1613-PANEL ILLUMINATION CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
With the Ignition on, and the Panel Illumination active.
Set Condition:
Panel Illumination Status HIGH.
Possible Causes
(E12) PANEL LAMPS DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

HEADLAMP SWITCH SHORTED TO GROUND
DRIVER HEATED SEAT SWITCH SHORTED TO GROUND
PASSENGER HEATED SEAT SWITCH SHORTED TO GROUND
CLOCK MODULE SHORTED TO GROUND
PRNDL LAMP SHORTED TO GROUND
SWITCH BANK SHORTED TO GROUND
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test

Activate the Panel Illumination.
Wait 30 seconds.
Is the DTC active?
Yes >> Go To 2
nals.
2. CHECK THE SWITCH BANK FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Disconnect the Switch Bank harness connector.
Does the scan tool display-B1614PANEL ILLUMINATION CON-
TROL CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Replace the Switch Bank in accordance with the service
information.
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK THE HEADLAMP SWITCH FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

TROL CIRCUIT HIGH?
vice information.
No >> Go To 4
4. CHECK THE DRIVER HEATED SEAT SWITCH FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Disconnect the Driver Heated Seat Switch harness connector.
TROL CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Replace the Driver Heated Seat Switch in accordance with
No >> Go To 5
5. CHECK THE PASSENGER HEATED SEAT SWITCH FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Disconnect the Passenger Heated Seat Switch harness connector.
TROL CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Replace the Passenger Heated Seat Switch in accordance
No >> Go To 6
6. CHECK THE CLOCK MODULE FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Disconnect the Clock Module harness connector.
TROL CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Replace the Clock Module in accordance with the service
information.
No >> Go To 7
7. CHECK THE PRNDL LAMP FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Disconnect the PRNDL Lamp harness connector.
TROL CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Replace the PRNDL Lamp in accordance with the service
information.
No >> Go To 8
8. CHECK THE (E12) PANEL LAMPS DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
With all the above components disconnected, measure the resistance
to ground of the (E12) Panel Lamps Driver Circuit from the Instrument
Cluster C3 harness connector.
Is the resistance less than 10K ohms?
Yes >> Repair the (E12) Panel Lamps Driver circuit for a short to
ground.
vice information.
B1614-PANEL ILLUMINATION CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
With the Ignition on, and the Panel Illumination not active.
Set Condition:
Panel Illumination status HIGH.
Possible Causes
(E12) PANEL LAMPS DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test

Wait 30 seconds.
Is the DTC active?
Yes >> Go To 2
nals.
2. CHECK (E12) PANEL LAMPS DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (E12) Panel Lamps Driver Circuit
between the Instrument Cluster C3 harness connector and the Head-
lamp Switch harness connector.
Yes >> Repair the (E12) Panel Lamps Driver Circuit for an open.
vice information.
B1694-ACCESSORY DIMMING CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Indicator Dimming Signal active. ATC not present.
Set Condition:
Indicator Dimmer Signal Output status LOW.
Possible Causes
(E22) INDICATOR DIMMER SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test

Activate the Accessory Dimming.
Is the DTC active?
Yes >> Go To 2
nals.
2. CHECK (E22) INDICATOR DIMMER SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Disconnect the A/C Heater Control C1 (MTC) harness connector.
Check the voltage on the (E22) Indicator Dimmer Signal circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (E22) Indicator Dimmer Signal circuit for a short
to voltage.
vice information.
B1695-ACCESSORY DIMMING CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN

When Monitored:
Ignition Run/Start transition to on, and ATC not present.
Set Condition:
Input Dimmer Signal Output status HIGH.
Possible Causes
(E22) INDICATOR DIMMER SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test

Is the DTC active?
Yes >> Go To 2
nals.
2. CHECK THE (E22) INDICATOR DIMMER SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (E22) Indicator Dimmer Signal Circuit
between the Instrument Cluster C3 Harness connector and the Switch
Bank harness connector.
Yes >> Repair the (E22) Indicator Dimmer Signal Circuit for an
open.
vice information.
B2107-IGNITION SWITCH SENSE INPUT CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Ignition switch in RUN or START, and Ignition RUN/START LOW. Ignition Switch in LOCK or UNLOCK, and
Ignition RUN/START HIGH.
Possible Causes
FUSED IGNITION SWITCH FUSES

(F202) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) OPEN
IGNITION SWITCH
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test

Wait 30 seconds.
Is the DTC active?
Yes >> Go To 2
nals.
2. CHECK PDC FUSES

Inspect PDC fuses #8, and #29 in the PDC.
Yes >> Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors for a short to ground
condition.
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK FOR VOLTAGE ON THE (F202) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT
Start) circuit.
vice information.
No >> Go To 4
4. CHECK THE (F202, F20) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (F202, F20) Fused Ignition Switch Output
(Run-Start) circuit between the Instrument Cluster C3 harness connec-
tor and the Ignition Switch harness connector.
Yes >> Repair the (F202, F20) Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-
Start) circuit for an open.
No >> Go To 5
5. CHECK THE (A106) FUSED B+ CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Measure the voltage on the (A106) Fused B+ circuit at the Ignition
Switch harness connector.
Yes >> Replace the Ignition Switch in accordance with the service
information.
B2108-IGNITION SWITCH SENSE INPUT CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Ignition Switch Sense circuit voltage less than .3 volts.
Possible Causes
(G20) IGNITION SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

(G20) IGNITION SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO (G900) IGNITION SWITCH SENSE RETURN CIRCUIT
IGNITION SWITCH
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test

Wait 30 seconds.
Is the DTC active?
Yes >> Go To 2
nals.
2. CHECK OPERATION OF IGNITION SWITCH

Connect a jumper wire between Ignition Switch harness connector cav-
ities 3 and 5.
NOTE: This will provide power to the vehicle systems with the
ignition switch disconnected.
With the scan tool, erase Instrument Cluster DTCs.
Wait 30 seconds.
Does the scan tool display-B2109-IGNITION SWITCH SENSE
INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH?
information.
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK THE (G20) IGNITION SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (G900) IGNITION SWITCH
SENSE RETURN CIRCUIT
Remove the jumper wire between Ignition Switch harness connector
cavities 3 and 5.
Measure the resistance between the (G20) Ignition Switch Sense Cir-
cuit and the (G900) Ignition Switch Sense Return circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (G20) Ignition Switch Sense Circuit for a short to
the (G900) Ignition Switch Sense Return circuit.
No >> Go To 4
4. CHECK THE (G20) IGNITION SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the (G20) Ignition Switch
Sense Circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (G20) Ignition Switch Sense Circuit for a short to
ground.
vice information.
B2109-IGNITION SWITCH SENSE INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Ignition Switch Sense circuit voltage greater than 4.7 volts.
Possible Causes
(G20) IGNITION SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN

(G900) IGNITION SWITCH SENSE RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN
IGNITION SWITCH
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test

Wait 30 seconds.
Is the DTC active?
Yes >> Go To 2
nals.
2. CHECK THE (G20) IGNITION SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
ities 3 and 5.
Measure the voltage on the (G20) Ignition Switch Sense circuit.
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 4
3. CHECK THE (G20) IGNITION SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
cavities 3 and 5.
Measure the voltage of the (G20) Ignition Switch Sense Circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (G20) Ignition Switch Sense circuit for a short to
voltage.
vice information.
4. CHECK OPERATION OF IGNITION SWITCH

ities 3 and 5.
ities 1 and 2.
With the scan tool, erase Instrument Cluster DTCs.
Wait 30 seconds.
Does the scan tool display-B2108-IGNITION SWITCH SENSE
INPUT CIRCUIT LOW?
information.
No >> Go To 5
5. CHECK THE (G900) IGNITION SWITCH SENSE RETURN CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN.
cavities 3 and 5.
Measure the resistance of the (G900) Ignition Switch Sense Return cir-
cuit between the Instrument Cluster C2 harness connector and the Igni-
tion Switch Harness connector.
Is the resistance greater than 5 ohms?
Yes >> Repair the (G900) Ignition Switch Sense Return circuit for
an open.
vice information.
B2213CCN INTERNAL
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Instrument Cluster detects an internal failure.
Possible Causes
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1. VERIFY INSTRUMENT CLUSTER OPERATION

With the scan tool, read Cluster DTCs.
Is DTC: B2213CABIN COMPARTMENT NODE/CLUSTER INTERNAL active?
YES >> Replace the Instrument Cluster in accordance with the service information.
NO >> Test complete.
U0019CAN B BUS

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
will set.
Possible Causes

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test

Is the DTC active?
Yes >> Go To 2
nals.

With the scan tool, read Front Control Module DTCs.
Does the scan tool display the U0019CAN B BUS DTC?
No >> Go to 3

Front Control Module C1 harness connector and the Instrument Cluster
Yes >> Go To 4

Front Control Module C1 harness connector and the Instrument Cluster
vice information.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

MODULE
test procedure.

(SKREEM/WCM)
test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.
LX INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - SERVICE INFORMATION 8J - 45
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - SERVICE INFORMATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - SERVICE INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

INFORMATION CLUSTER LENS
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING INSTRUMENT PANEL SWITCH POD
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
STANDARD PROCEDURE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
ENHANCED SEATBELT REMINDER REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
8J - 46 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - SERVICE INFORMATION LX
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - SERVICE INFORMATION

DESCRIPTION
The instrument cluster is an ElectroMechanical Instru-
ment Cluster (EMIC) that is located in the instrument
panel above the steering column opening, directly in
front of the driver. The remainder of the EMIC, includ-
ing the mounts and the electrical connections, are
concealed within the instrument panel behind the clus-
ter bezel. Besides analog gauges and indicators, the
EMIC module incorporates two blue-green digital Vac-
uum Fluorescent Display (VFD) units for displaying
odometer/trip odometer information, engine hours,
automatic transmission gear selector position
(PRNDL), several warning or reminder indications and
certain diagnostic information. The instrument cluster
also includes the hardware and software necessary to
serve as the electronic body control module and is
sometimes referred to as the Cab Compartment Node
or CCN.
Besides typical instrument cluster gauge and indicator
support, the electronic functions and features that the
EMIC supports or controls include the following:
Accessory Power Delay Relay Control - The EMIC provides timing and control for the accessory power
delay relay based upon inputs from both the ignition switch and the door ajar switches.
Audible Warnings - The EMIC electronic circuit board is equipped with an audible tone transducer and pro-
gramming that allows it to provide various audible alerts to the vehicle operator, including chime tones and
beep tones. An electromechanical relay is also soldered onto the circuit board to produce audible clicks that
emulate the sound of a conventional turn signal or hazard warning flasher. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/CHIME/
BUZZER - DESCRIPTION).
Automatic Headlamps Control - On models equipped with optional automatic headlamps, the EMIC monitors
inputs from both the headlamp switch and a sun load sensor located on the top of the instrument panel to
provide automatic headlamps.
Brake Lamp Control - The EMIC provides electronic brake lamp request messages to the Front Control Mod-
ule (FCM) located on the Integrated Power Module (IPM) for brake lamp control, excluding control of the Cen-
ter High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL), which remains controlled by a direct hard wired output of the brake
lamp switch.
Brake Transmission Shift Interlock Control - The EMIC monitors inputs from the brake lamp switch, ignition
switch, and the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS), then controls a high-side driver output to operate the
Brake Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI) solenoid that locks and unlocks the automatic transmission gearshift
selector lever on the steering column.
Compass Mini Trip Computer Support - The EMIC provides support for the optional Compass Mini Trip
Computer (CMTC) by calculating average fuel economy, distance to empty and outside temperature values
and storing trip odometer and elapsed ignition on time data. The EMIC receives data and reset requests from
the CMTC and transmits the appropriate information for the CMTC to display using electronic messaging.
Enhanced Accident Response Support - The EMIC monitors an input from the Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) and, following an airbag deployment, will immediately disable the power lock output, unlock all doors by
activating the power unlock output, then enables the power lock output if the power lock switch input remains
inactive for two seconds. The EMIC also monitors an input from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) to auto-
matically turn on the interior lighting after an airbag deployment event, ten seconds after the vehicle speed is
zero. The interior lighting remains illuminated until the ignition switch is turned to the Off position, at which time
the interior lighting returns to normal operation and control. These Enhanced Accident Response System
(EARS) features are each dependent upon a functional vehicle electrical system following the vehicle impact
event.
Exterior Lamp Load Shedding - The EMIC provides a battery saver feature which will automatically turn off
all exterior lamps that remain on with the ignition switch in the Off position after a timed interval of about five
minutes.
Exterior Lighting Control - The EMIC provides electronic head lamp and/or park lamp request messages to
the Front Control Module (FCM) located on the Integrated Power Module (IPM) for the appropriate exterior
lamp control of standard head and park lamps, as well as optional front fog lamps. This includes support for
headlamp beam selection and the optical horn feature, also known as flash-to-pass.
Exterior Lighting Fail-safe - In the absence of a headlamp switch input, the EMIC will turn on the cluster
illumination lamps and provide electronic headlamp low beam and park lamp request messages to the Front
Control Module (FCM) located on the Integrated Power Module (IPM) for default exterior lamp operation. The
FCM will also provide default park lamp and headlamp low beam operation and the EMIC will turn on the
cluster general illumination lighting if there is a failure of the electronic data bus communication between the
EMIC and the FCM.
Fuel Level Data Support - The EMIC provides a current source for and receives a hard wired analog input
from the fuel level sending unit located on the fuel pump module in the fuel tank. The EMIC uses this input to
calculate the proper fuel gauge needle position and low fuel indicator operation. Based upon this input, the
EMIC also calculates fuel level, average fuel economy and distance to empty data, then uses electronic mes-
saging to transmit this data over the CAN data bus for use by other electronic modules in the vehicle.
Heated Seat Control - The EMIC monitors inputs from the ignition switch and electronic engine speed mes-
sages from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) to control a high side driver output to the heated seat switch
Light Emitting Diode (LED) indicators. This input allows the heated seat switches to wake up the heated seat
module if the switch is actuated. The EMIC will de-energize the heated seat switch LED indicators, which
deactivates the heated seat system, if the ignition switch is turned to any position except On or Start, or if the
engine speed message indicates zero. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/HEATED SEATS - DESCRIPTION).
Horn Control - The EMIC monitors an input from the horn switch and provides electronic horn request mes-
sages to the Front Control Module (FCM) located on the Integrated Power Module (IPM) for horn relay control.
The EMIC also controls horn relay operation in this manner to provide the horn features of the optional
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) or Vehicle Theft Security System (VTSS).
Interior Lamp Load Shedding - The EMIC provides a battery saver feature which will automatically turn off all
interior lamps that remain on after a timed interval of about fifteen minutes.
Interior Lighting Control - The EMIC monitors inputs from the interior lighting switch, the door ajar switches,
the reading lamp switches, and the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM) to provide courtesy lamp
control. This includes support for timed illuminated entry with theater-style fade-to-off and courtesy illumination
defeat features.
Panel Lamps Dimming Control - The EMIC monitors hard wired multiplexed inputs from the headlamp switch
on the instrument panel, then provides a hard wired 12-volt Pulse-Width Modulated (PWM) output that syn-
chronizes the dimming level of all panel lamps dimmer controlled lamps with that of the cluster illumination
lighting.
Power Locks - The EMIC monitors inputs from the power lock switches and the Sentry Key REmote Entry
Module (SKREEM) to provide control of the power lock motors through high side driver outputs to the motors.
This includes support for rolling door locks (also known as automatic door locks), automatic door unlock, brief-
case lock mode, door lock inhibit mode, and central locking (with the optional Vehicle Theft Security System
only). (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER LOCKS - DESCRIPTION).
Remote Keyless Entry - The EMIC supports the standard Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system features,
including support for the RKE Lock, Unlock (with optional driver-door-only unlock, and unlock-all-doors), Panic,
audible chirp, optical chirp, illuminated entry modes, an RKE programming mode, as well as optional Vehicle
Theft Security System (VTSS) arming (when the proper VTSS arming conditions are met) and disarming.
Remote Radio Switch Interface - The EMIC monitors inputs from the optional remote radio switches and then
provides the appropriate electronic data bus messages to the radio to select the radio operating mode, volume
control, preset station scan and station seek features.
Turn Signal & Hazard Warning Lamp Control - The EMIC monitors hard wired multiplexed inputs from the
multi-function switch on the steering column, then provides electronic turn and hazard lamp request messages
to the Front Control Module (FCM) located on the Integrated Power Module (IPM) for turn and hazard lamp
control. The EMIC also provides an audible click at one of two rates to emulate normal and bulb out turn or
hazard flasher operation based upon electronic lamp outage messages from the FCM, and provides an audible
turn signal on chime warning if a turn is signalled continuously for more than about 1.6 kilometers (one mile)
and the vehicle speed remains greater than about twenty-four kilometers-per-hour (fifteen miles-per-hour).
Vacuum Fluorescent Display Synchronization - The EMIC monitors hard wired multiplexed inputs from the
headlamp switch on the instrument panel, then transmits electronic panel lamp dimming level messages which
allows all other electronic modules on the CAN data bus with Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) units to coor-
dinate their illumination intensity with that of the EMIC VFD units. This includes a parade mode (also known as
funeral mode) that allows all VFD units in the vehicle to be illuminated at full (daytime) intensity while driving
during daylight hours with the exterior lamps turned On.
Vehicle Theft Security System Control - The EMIC monitors inputs from the door ajar switches, the liftgate
ajar switch, the ignition switch, and the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM), then provides electronic
horn and lighting request messages to the Front Control Module (FCM) located on the Integrated Power Mod-
ule (IPM) for the appropriate VTSS alarm output features.
Wiper/Washer System Control - The EMIC monitors both hard wired multiplexed inputs from the front wiper
and washer switches in the multi-function switch on the steering column and electronic messages from the rear
wiper and washer switches in the heater and air conditioner control on the instrument panel. The EMIC then
provides electronic wiper and/or washer request messages to the Front Control Module (FCM) located on the
Integrated Power Module (IPM) for the appropriate front or rear wiper and washer system features. (Refer to
8 - ELECTRICAL/WIPERS/WASHERS - DESCRIPTION).
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER

Eight switches mounted on the steering wheel control the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Pressing the
switches, conveniently selects from a variety of useful information. Personal settings, hands-free system communi-
cation system screens, Navigation system screens, trip computer functions, outside temperature, compass head-
ings, audio modes and System Status messages including Tire Pressure Monitor System warnings can be displayed
in the EVIC. For more detailed information (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/OVERHEAD CONSOLE/ELECTRONIC VEHI-
CLE INFORMATION CENTER - DESCRIPTION).
CHRYSLER INSTRUMENT CLUSTERS

Three clusters are offered on Chrysler 300 sedans.
300 AND 300 TOURING EDITION
The Chrysler 300 and base 300 Touring Edition model

instrument clusters include the following features:
Four large easy to read gauges: Fuel, speedom-
eter, tachometer and engine temperature.
Electroluminescent silhouette-lit alabaster gauges
(gauge faces glow blue-green when headlamps
are on). Electroluminescent lighting is totally uni-
form and glare free for optimum driver visibility.
Black gauge pointers.
Vertical vacuum-fluorescent transmission shift-range indicator.
Up to 19 warning indicators depending on equipment level.
Chrome gauge rings.
140-mph speedometer.
Vacuum-fluorescent odometer with outside temperature indicator and three warning indicators: Trunk Ajar, Low
Washer Fluid, and Door Ajar.
300 TOURING LUXURY, LUXURY SPORT, AND SRT8
Instrument clusters on Chrysler 300 Touring Edition

with Luxury or Luxury Sport packages include the fol-
lowing features:

Chrome gauge rings.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center with driver-interactive three-line dot-matrix display controlled by steering
wheel switches.
180-mph speedometer on SRT8.
HEMI C AND EXPORT 300C
The Chrysler 300Hemi C and Export 300C instrument

cluster include the following features:
Chrome gauge rings.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center with driver-interactive three-line dot-matrix display controlled by steering
wheel switches.
APPEARANCE AND LIGHTING
Alabaster gauge faces with black nomenclature and black pointers provide excellent visibility in daylight. With the
headlamps on, the electroluminescent gauges glow blue-green. The lighting intensity of the gauges can be adjusted
to suit the drivers preference, using the thumbwheel dimmer control that is part of the headlamp switch. Electrolu-
minescent lighting is totally uniform and glare free for optimum driver visibility.
FIXED SEGMENT DISPLAYS
The standard cluster features two fixedsegment vacuum fluorescent digital displays to show transmission range
and odometer reading. The fixed-segment odometer display also includes the following indicators:
ODOMETER DISPLAY INDICATORS
INDICATOR DISPLAY COLOR

Trunk Ajar ISO Blue/Green
Low Wash ISO Blue/Green
Door Ajar ISO Blue/Green
Outside Temperature Numeric Blue/Green
INDICATOR LAMPS
The following indicator lamps are included in all instrument clusters. Actual usage depends on how the vehicle is
equipped.
INDICATOR LAMPS

Right Turn ISO Green
Left Turn ISO Green
Front Fog Lamps ISO Green
Rear Fog (Export Only) ISO Amber
High Beam ISO Blue
Brake Word U.S. only/ISO Export Red
Seat Belt ISO Red
Airbag ISO Red
Electronic Throttle Control ISO Red
Low Oil Pressure ISO Red
Engine Temperature ISO Red
Charge ISO Red
VTA (Vehicle Theft Alarm) Dot Red
ABS ISO Amber
Check Engine ISO Amber
BAS (Brake Assist) ISO Amber
ASR/ESP (Anti-Slip Regulation/Electronic
ISO Amber
Stability Program)
Low Fuel ISO Amber
TPM (Tire Pressure Monitor) ISO Amber
DODGE INSTRUMENT CLUSTERS

Two clusters are offered on the Dodge Magnum Sports Tourer.
DODGE MAGNUM SE AND SXT
The Magnum SE and SXT instrument clusters include

the following features:
Horizontal odometer with outside temperature
indicator and four blue-green ISO messages
(fixed segment display).
Vertical transmission shift-range indicator.
White mask and lens assembly for individual
gauges.
Electroluminescent silhouette-lit white gauges
(gauges glow white when headlamps are on).
Four large easy to read gauges: Fuel, 140-mph speedometer, tachometer and engine temperature.
Non-lit orange pointers.
DODGE MAGNUM RT
The Magnum RT instrument cluster includes the fol-

lowing features:
Vertical transmission shift-range indicator.
White mask and lens assembly for individual
gauges.
Electroluminescent silhouette-lit white gauges
(gauges glow white when headlamps are on).
Four large easy to read gauges: Fuel, 140-mph speedometer, tachometer and engine temperature.
Non-lit orange pointers.
Dot-matrix Electronic Vehicle Information Center with Driver-Interactive Display.
APPEARANCE AND LIGHTING
White gauge faces with black nomenclature provide excellent visibility in daylight. Pointers are non-lit orange. With
the headlamps on, the electroluminescent gauges glow white. The lighting intensity of the gauges can be adjusted
to suit the drivers preference, using the thumbwheel dimmer control that is part of the headlamp switch. Electrolu-
minescent lighting is uniform and glare free for optimum driver visibility.
FIXED SEGMENT DISPLAYS
The standard cluster features two fixedsegment vacuum fluorescent digital displays to show transmission range
and odometer reading. The fixed-segment odometer display also includes the following indicators:
ODOMETER DISPLAY INDICATORS

Hatch Ajar ISO Blue/Green
Low Wash ISO Blue/Green
Door Ajar ISO Blue/Green
Outside Temperature Numeric Blue/Green
INDICATOR LAMPS
The following indicator lamps are included in all instrument clusters. Actual usage depends on how the vehicle is
equipped.
INDICATOR LAMPS

Right Turn ISO Green
Left Turn ISO Green
Front Fog Lamps ISO Green
High Beam ISO Blue
Brake Word U.S. only/ISO Export Red
Seat Belt ISO Red
Airbag ISO Red
Electronic Throttle Control ISO Red
Low Oil Pressure ISO Red
Engine Temperature ISO Red
Charge ISO Red
VTA (Vehicle Theft Alarm) Dot Red
ABS ISO Amber
Check Engine ISO Amber
BAS (Brake Assist) ISO Amber
ASR/ESP (Anti-Slip Regulation/Electronic
ISO Amber
Stability Program)
Low Fuel ISO Amber
TPM (Tire Pressure Monitor) ISO Amber
OPERATION
The microprocessor-based EMIC hardware and software uses various inputs to control the gauges and indicators
visible on the face of the cluster. Some of these inputs are hard wired, but most are in the form of electronic mes-
sages that are transmitted by other electronic modules over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. (Refer to
8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES/COMMUNICATION - OPERATION).
The EMIC microprocessor smooths the input data using algorithms to provide gauge readings that are accurate,
stable and responsive to operating conditions. These algorithms are designed to provide gauge readings during
normal operation that are consistent with customer expectations. However, when abnormal conditions exist such as
high coolant temperature, the algorithm can drive the gauge pointer to an extreme position and the microprocessor
can sound a chime through the on-board audible tone transducer to provide distinct visual and audible indications of
a problem to the vehicle operator. The EMIC may also produce audible warnings for other electronic modules in the
vehicle based upon electronic tone request messages received over the CAN data bus. Each audible warning is
intended to provide the vehicle operator with an audible alert to supplement a visual indication.
The EMIC circuitry operates on battery current received through a fused B(+) fuse on a non-switched fused B(+)
circuit, and on battery current received through a fused ignition switch output (run-start) fuse on a fused ignition
switch output (run-start) circuit. This arrangement allows the EMIC to provide some features regardless of the igni-
tion switch position, while other features will operate only with the ignition switch in the On or Start positions. The
EMIC circuitry is grounded through a ground circuit of the instrument panel wire harness.
The EMIC also has a self-diagnostic actuator test capability (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT CLUSTER -
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING), which will test each of the CAN bus message-controlled functions of the cluster by
lighting the appropriate indicators, positioning the gauge needles at several predetermined calibration points across
the gauge faces, and illuminating all segments of the odometer/trip odometer and gear selector indicator Vacuum-
Fluorescent Display (VFD) units.
GAUGES
All gauges receive battery current through the EMIC circuitry only when the ignition switch is in the On or Start
positions. With the ignition switch in the Off position battery current is not supplied to any gauges, and the EMIC
circuitry is programmed to move all of the gauge needles back to the low end of their respective scales. Therefore,
the gauges do not accurately indicate any vehicle condition unless the ignition switch is in the On or Start positions.
All of the EMIC gauges are air core magnetic units. Two fixed electromagnetic coils are located within each gauge.
These coils are wrapped at right angles to each other around a movable permanent magnet. The movable magnet
is suspended within the coils on one end of a pivot shaft, while the gauge needle is attached to the other end of the
shaft. One of the coils has a fixed current flowing through it to maintain a constant magnetic field strength. Current
flow through the second coil changes, which causes changes in its magnetic field strength. The current flowing
through the second coil is changed by the EMIC circuitry in response to messages received over the CAN data bus.
The gauge needle moves as the movable permanent magnet aligns itself to the changing magnetic fields created
around it by the electromagnets.
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE
This gauge is controlled by the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic mes-
sages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN)
data bus.
The engine coolant temperature gauge is an air core magnetic unit that receives battery current on the instrument
cluster electronic circuit board through the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit whenever the ignition switch
is in the On or Start positions. The cluster is programmed to move the gauge needle back to the low end of the
scale after the ignition switch is turned to the Off position. The instrument cluster circuitry controls the gauge needle
position and provides the following features:
Engine Temperature Message - Each time the cluster receives a message from the PCM indicating the
engine coolant temperature is between the low end of normal [about 54 C (130 F)] and the high end of
normal [about 122 C (252 F)], the gauge needle is moved to the actual relative temperature position on the
gauge scale.
Engine Temperature Low Message - Each time the cluster receives a message from the PCM indicating the
engine coolant temperature is below the low end of normal [about 54 C (130 F)], the gauge needle is held
at the C increment at low end of the gauge scale. The gauge needle remains at the low end of the gauge
scale until the cluster receives a message from the PCM indicating that the engine temperature is above about
54 C (130 F), or until the ignition switch is turned to the Off position, whichever occurs first.
Engine Temperature High Message - Each time the cluster receives a message from the PCM indicating the
engine coolant temperature is above about 122 C (252 F), the gauge needle is moved into the red zone on
the gauge scale, the engine temperature indicator is illuminated, and a single chime tone is sounded. The
gauge needle remains in the red zone and the engine temperature indicator remains illuminated until the clus-
ter receives a message from the PCM indicating that the engine temperature is below about 122 C (252 F),
or until the ignition switch is turned to the Off position, whichever occurs first. The chime tone feature will only
repeat during the same ignition cycle if the engine temperature indicator is cycled off and then on again by the
appropriate engine temperature messages from the PCM.
Communication Error - If the cluster fails to receive an engine temperature message, it will hold the gauge
needle at the last indication for about five seconds or until the ignition switch is turned to the Off position,
whichever occurs first. After five seconds, the cluster will move the gauge needle to the low end of the gauge
scale.
Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the engine coolant temperature gauge
needle will be swept to several calibration points on the gauge scale in a prescribed sequence in order to
confirm the functionality of the gauge and the cluster control circuitry.
The PCM continually monitors the engine coolant temperature sensor to determine the engine operating tempera-
ture. The PCM then sends the proper engine coolant temperature messages to the instrument cluster. For further
diagnosis of the engine coolant temperature gauge or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the gauge, (Refer
to 8 - ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING). If the instrument cluster turns on the
engine temperature indicator due to a high engine temperature gauge reading, it may indicate that the engine or the
engine cooling system requires service. The engine coolant temperature gauge is serviced as a unit with the instru-
ment cluster.
FUEL GAUGE
The fuel gauge gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the level of fuel in the fuel tank. This gauge is con-
trolled by the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and a hard wired input received by
the cluster from the fuel level sending unit on the fuel pump module in the fuel tank.
The fuel gauge is an air core magnetic unit that receives battery current on the instrument cluster electronic circuit
board through the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit whenever the ignition switch is in the On or Start
positions. The cluster is programmed to move the gauge needle back to the low end of the scale after the ignition
switch is turned to the Off position. The instrument cluster circuitry controls the gauge needle position and provides
Fuel Level Sending Unit Input - The cluster provides a constant current source to the fuel level sending unit
and monitors a return input on a fuel level sense circuit. The resistance through the fuel level sending unit
increases as the fuel level falls and decreases as the fuel level rises causing changes in the sense input volt-
age. The cluster programming applies an algorithm to calculate the proper fuel gauge needle position based
upon the fuel level sense input, then moves the gauge needle to the proper relative position on the gauge
scale. This algorithm is used to dampen gauge needle movement against the negative effect that fuel sloshing
within the fuel tank can have on accurate inputs from the fuel tank sending unit to the cluster.
Less Than Ten Percent Tank Full Input - Each time the fuel level sense input to the cluster indicates the fuel
tank is about ten percent full or less for ten consecutive seconds and the vehicle speed is zero, or for sixty
consecutive seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than zero, the gauge needle is moved to about the
one-eighth graduation on the gauge scale, the low fuel indicator is illuminated, and a single chime tone is
sounded. The low fuel indicator remains illuminated until the fuel level sense input indicates that the fuel tank
is greater than about thirteen percent full for ten consecutive seconds and the vehicle speed is zero, or for
sixty consecutive seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than zero, or until the ignition switch is turned to
the Off position, whichever occurs first. The chime tone feature will only repeat during the same ignition cycle
if the low fuel indicator is cycled off and then on again by the appropriate inputs from the fuel level sending
unit.
Less Than Empty Stop Input - Each time the cluster receives a fuel level sense input that indicates the fuel
level in the fuel tank is less than the Empty gauge needle stop position, the gauge needle is moved to the low
end of the gauge scale and the low fuel indicator is illuminated immediately. This input would indicate that the
fuel level sense input to the cluster is a short circuit.
More Than Full Stop Input - Each time the cluster receives a fuel level sense input that indicates the fuel
level in the fuel tank is more than the Full gauge needle stop position, the gauge needle is moved to the low
fuel level sense input to the cluster is an open circuit.
Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the fuel gauge needle will be swept to
several calibration points on the gauge scale in a prescribed sequence in order to confirm the functionality of
the gauge and the cluster control circuitry.
The instrument cluster continually monitors the fuel tank sending unit to determine the level of fuel in the fuel tank.
The cluster then sends the proper fuel level messages to other electronic modules in the vehicle over the Controller
Area Network (CAN) data bus. For further diagnosis of the fuel gauge or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls
the gauge, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING). The fuel gauge is
serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster.
SPEEDOMETER
The speedometer gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the vehicle road speed. This gauge is controlled by
the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the clus-
ter from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus.
The speedometer is an air core magnetic unit that receives battery current on the instrument cluster electronic cir-
cuit board through the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit whenever the ignition switch is in the On or Start
Vehicle Speed Message - Each time the cluster receives a vehicle speed message from the PCM it will cal-
culate the correct vehicle speed reading and position the gauge needle at that relative speed position on the
gauge scale. The cluster will receive a new vehicle speed message and reposition the gauge pointer accord-
ingly about every 88 milliseconds. The gauge needle will continually be positioned at the relative vehicle speed
position on the gauge scale until the vehicle stops moving, or until the ignition switch is turned to the Off
position, whichever occurs first.
Communication Error - If the cluster fails to receive a speedometer message, it will hold the gauge needle at
the last indication for about three seconds, or until the ignition switch is turned to the Off position, whichever
occurs first. After three seconds, the gauge needle will return to the left end of the gauge scale.
Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the speedometer needle will be swept
to several calibration points on the gauge scale in a prescribed sequence in order to confirm the functionality
of the gauge and the cluster control circuitry.
The PCM continually monitors the vehicle speed sensor to determine the vehicle road speed. The PCM then sends
the proper vehicle speed messages to the instrument cluster. For further diagnosis of the speedometer or the instru-
ment cluster circuitry that controls the gauge, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - DIAGNOSIS
AND TESTING). The speedometer is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster.
TACHOMETER
The tachometer gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the engine speed. This gauge is controlled by the
instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster
from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus.
The tachometer is an air core magnetic unit that receives battery current on the instrument cluster electronic circuit
board through the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit whenever the ignition switch is in the On or Start
Engine Speed Message - Each time the cluster receives an engine speed message from the PCM it will
calculate the correct engine speed reading and position the gauge needle at that relative speed position on the
gauge scale. The cluster will receive a new engine speed message and reposition the gauge pointer accord-
ingly about every 88 milliseconds. The gauge needle will continually be repositioned at the relative engine
speed position on the gauge scale until the engine stops running, or until the ignition switch is turned to the Off
Communication Error - If the cluster fails to receive an engine speed message, it will hold the gauge needle
at the last indication for about three seconds, or until the ignition switch is turned to the Off position, whichever
occurs first. After three seconds, the gauge needle will return to the left end of the gauge scale.
Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the tachometer needle will be swept to
several calibration points on the gauge scale in a prescribed sequence in order to confirm the functionality of
the gauge and the cluster control circuitry.
The PCM continually monitors the crankshaft position sensor to determine the engine speed. The PCM then sends
the proper engine speed messages to the instrument cluster. For further diagnosis of the tachometer or the instru-
ment cluster circuitry that controls the gauge, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - DIAGNOSIS
AND TESTING). The tachometer is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster.
The gauges are diagnosed using the EMIC self-diagnostic actuator test (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING). Proper testing of the CAN data bus and the electronic data bus message
inputs to the EMIC that control each gauge require the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diag-
nostic information.
VACUUM-FLUORESCENT DISPLAYS
The Vacuum-Fluorescent Display (VFD) units are soldered to the EMIC electronic circuit board. With the ignition
switch in the Off or Accessory positions, the odometer display is activated when the driver door is opened (Rental
Car mode) and is deactivated when the driver door is closed. Otherwise, both display units are active when the
ignition switch is in the On or Start positions, and inactive when the ignition switch is in the Off or Accessory posi-
tions.
The illumination intensity of the VFD units is controlled by the EMIC circuitry based upon an input from the head-
lamp switch and a dimming level input received from the panel dimmer switch. The EMIC synchronizes the illumi-
nation intensity of other VFD units with that of the units in the EMIC by sending electronic dimming level messages
to other electronic modules in the vehicle over the CAN data bus.
While in the odometer mode with the ignition switch in the On position and the engine not running, depressing the
odometer/trip odometer switch for about six seconds will display the engine hours information. Holding this switch
depressed while turning the ignition switch from the Off position to the On position will initiate the EMIC self-diag-
nostic actuator test. Refer to the instrument cluster diagnosis and testing service information for additional details on
this cluster function. The EMIC microprocessor remembers which display mode is active when the ignition switch is
turned to the Off position, and returns the VFD display to that mode when the ignition switch is turned On again.
The VFD units are diagnosed using the EMIC self-diagnostic actuator test (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING). Proper testing of the CAN data bus and the electronic data bus message
inputs to the EMIC that control some of the VFD functions requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the
appropriate diagnostic information.
TRANSMISSION RANGE INDICATOR
The electronic transmission range indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the transmission gear that
has been selected with the automatic transmission gear selector lever. This indicator is controlled by the instrument
cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received from the Powertrain Control
Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus.
The transmission range indicator information is displayed by a dedicated Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) unit
soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board, and the VFD will not display the transmission range
indicator information after the ignition switch is turned to the Off position. Each time the cluster is disconnected from
battery current for more than about five minutes, it must configure itself for the automatic transmission model that is
in the vehicle once it is reconnected to battery current. The instrument cluster circuitry operates the transmission
range indicator VFD to provide the following features:
Selected Gear Message - Each time the cluster receives a selected gear message from the PCM, a box will
be illuminated around the appropriate character in the gear selector indicator VFD. The box will remain illumi-
nated until the cluster receives a different selected gear message, or until the ignition switch is turned to the
Off position, whichever occurs first.
Communication Error - If the cluster fails to receive a selected gear message from the PCM within three
seconds, the instrument cluster circuitry will display all gear selector positions boxed (selected) until a valid
selected gear message is received or until the ignition switch is turned to the Off position, whichever occurs
first.
Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the gear selector indicator VFD will
display all of its characters at once, then step through each character segment individually during the VFD
portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the VFD and the cluster control circuitry.
The PCM continually monitors a hard wired multiplex input from the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS), then sends
the proper selected gear messages to the instrument cluster. For further diagnosis of the transmission range indi-
cator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls this function, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT CLUS-
TER - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING). The Transmission Range indicator is serviced with the instrument cluster.
INDICATORS
Indicators are located in various positions within the EMIC and are all connected to the EMIC electronic circuit
board. The various EMIC indicators are controlled by different strategies; some receive fused ignition switch output
from the EMIC circuitry and have a switched ground, while others are grounded through the EMIC circuitry and have
a switched battery feed. However, all indicators are completely controlled by the EMIC microprocessor based upon
various hard wired and electronic message inputs. All indicators except those located within the VFD units are illu-
minated at a fixed intensity, which is not affected by the selected illumination intensity of the electro-luminescent
EMIC general illumination lamp. The illumination intensity of those within the VFD units is synchronized with that of
the EMIC general illumination lamp.
In addition, certain indicators in this instrument cluster are automatically configured or self-configured. This feature
allows the configurable indicators to be enabled by the EMIC circuitry for compatibility with certain optional equip-
ment. The EMIC defaults for the ABS indicator and airbag indicator are enabled, and these configuration settings
must be programmatically disabled in the EMIC using a diagnostic scan tool for vehicles that do not have this equip-
ment. The automatically configured or self-configured indicators remain latent in each EMIC at all times and will be
active only when the EMIC receives the appropriate CAN message inputs for that optional system or equipment.
ABS INDICATOR
The ABS indicator gives an indication to the vehicle

operator when the ABS system is faulty or inoperative.
This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the
instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster
from the Controller Antilock Brake (CAB) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus.
The ABS indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that
logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the
fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be off when the ignition switch is in any
position except On or Start. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster
transistor. The instrument cluster will turn on the ABS indicator for the following reasons:
Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the On position the ABS indicator is illuminated for about
four seconds as a bulb test. The entire bulb test is a function of the CAB.
ABS Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives a lamp-on message from the CAB, the ABS indi-
cator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-off message from
the CAB, or until the ignition switch is turned to the Off position, whichever occurs first.
Communication Error - If the cluster receives no lamp-on or lamp-off messages from the CAB for five con-
secutive message cycles, the ABS indicator is illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster
receives a valid message from the CAB, or until the ignition switch is turned to the Off position, whichever
occurs first.
Actuator Test - Each time the instrument cluster is put through the actuator test, the ABS indicator will be
turned on, then off again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and
the cluster control circuitry.
ABS Diagnostic Test - The ABS indicator is blinked on and off by lamp-on and lamp-off messages from the
CAB during the performance of the ABS diagnostic tests.
The CAB continually monitors the ABS circuits and sensors to decide whether the system is in good operating con-
dition. The CAB then sends the proper lamp-on or lamp-off messages to the instrument cluster. If the CAB sends a
lamp-on message after the bulb test, it indicates that the CAB has detected a system malfunction and/or that the
ABS system has become inoperative. The CAB will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any malfunction it
detects. Each time the ABS indicator fails to light due to an open or short in the cluster ABS indicator circuit, the
cluster sends a message notifying the CAB of the condition, then the instrument cluster and the CAB will each store
a DTC. The ABS indicator is serviced with the instrument cluster.
AIRBAG INDICATOR
The airbag indicator gives an indication to the vehicle

operator when the airbag system is faulty or inopera-
tive. The airbag indicator is controlled by a transistor
on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon
cluster programming and electronic messages
received by the cluster from the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data
bus.
The airbag indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and
that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the
transistor. The instrument cluster will turn on the airbag indicator for the following reasons:
Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the On position the airbag indicator is illuminated for
about six to eight seconds. The entire bulb test is a function of the ORC.
ORC Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives a lamp-on message from the ORC, the airbag indi-
cator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated for about twelve seconds or until the cluster
receives a lamp-off message from the ORC, whichever is longer.
Communication Error - If the cluster receives no airbag messages for ten consecutive message cycles, the
airbag indicator is illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a single lamp-off
message from the ORC.
Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the airbag indicator will be turned on,
then off again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster
control circuitry. The actuator test illumination of the airbag indicator is a function of the instrument cluster.
The ORC continually monitors the airbag system circuits and sensors to decide whether the system is in good oper-
ating condition. The ORC then sends the proper lamp-on or lamp-off messages to the instrument cluster. If the ORC
sends a lamp-on message after the bulb test, it indicates that the ORC has detected a system malfunction and/or
that the airbags and seat belt tensioners may not deploy when required, or may deploy when not required. The
ORC will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any malfunction it detects. Each time the airbag indicator fails
to illuminate due to an open or short in the cluster airbag indicator circuit, the cluster sends a message notifying the
ORC of the condition, the instrument cluster and the ORC will each store a DTC, and the cluster will flash the seat
belt indicator on and off as a backup to notify the vehicle operator. The Airbag indicator is serviced with the instru-
ment cluster.
BRAKE/PARK BRAKE INDICATOR
The brake indicator gives an indication to the vehicle

operator when the parking brake is applied, when
there are certain brake hydraulic system malfunctions
as indicated by a low brake hydraulic fluid level con-
dition, or when the brake fluid level switch is discon-
nected. The brake indicator can also give an indication when certain faults are detected in the Antilock Brake
System (ABS). This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster
programming, electronic messages received by the cluster from the Controller Antilock Brake (CAB) over the Con-
troller Area Network (CAN) data bus, and a hard wired input from the park brake switch.
The brake indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and
transistor. The instrument cluster will turn on the brake indicator for the following reasons:
Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the On position the brake indicator is illuminated for
about four seconds as a bulb test. The entire bulb test is a function of the CAB.
Brake Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives a lamp-on message from the CAB, the brake indi-
cator will be illuminated. The CAB can also send brake lamp-on messages as feedback during ABS diagnostic
procedures. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-off message from the CAB, or
until the ignition switch is turned to the Off position, whichever occurs first.
Park Brake Switch Input - Each time the cluster detects ground on the park brake switch sense circuit (park
brake switch closed = park brake applied or not fully released) while the ignition switch is in the On position,
the brake indicator flashes on and off. The indicator continues to flash until the park brake switch sense input
to the cluster is an open circuit (park brake switch open = park brake fully released), or until the ignition switch
is turned to the Off position, whichever occurs first.
Actuator Test - Each time the instrument cluster is put through the actuator test, the brake indicator will be
The park brake switch on the park brake pedal mechanism provides a hard wired ground input to the instrument
cluster circuitry through the park brake switch sense circuit whenever the park brake is applied or not fully released.
The CAB continually monitors the ABS system circuits and sensors, including the brake fluid level switch on the
brake master cylinder reservoir, to decide whether the system is in good operating condition. The CAB then sends
the proper lamp-on or lamp-off messages to the instrument cluster. If the CAB sends a lamp-on message after the
bulb test, it indicates that the CAB has detected a brake hydraulic system malfunction and/or that the ABS system
has become inoperative. The CAB will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any malfunction it detects. The
Brake/Park Brake indicator is serviced with the instrument cluster.
CHARGING INDICATOR
The charging indicator gives an indication to the vehi-

cle operator when the electrical system voltage is too
low or too high. This indicator is controlled by a tran-
sistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by
the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus.
The charging indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and
transistor. The instrument cluster will turn on the charging indicator for the following reasons:
Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the On position the charging indicator is illuminated by
the instrument cluster for about two seconds as a bulb test.
Voltage Low Message - Each time the cluster receives a message from the PCM indicating the electrical
system voltage is low (less than about 11.5 volts is a charge fail condition), the charging indicator will be illu-
minated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a message from the PCM indicating the
electrical system voltage is normal (greater than about 12.0 volts, but less than 16.0 volts), or until the ignition
switch is turned to the Off position, whichever occurs first.
Voltage High Message - Each time the cluster receives a message from the PCM indicating the electrical
system voltage is high (greater than about 16.0 volts), the charging indicator will be illuminated. The indicator
remains illuminated until the cluster receives a message from the PCM indicating the electrical system voltage
is normal (less than about 15.5 volts, but greater than 11.5 volts), or until the ignition switch is turned to the Off
Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the charging indicator will be turned on,
control circuitry.
The PCM continually monitors the electrical system voltage to control the generator output. The PCM then sends
the proper system voltage messages to the instrument cluster. If the instrument cluster turns on the charging indi-
cator due to a charge fail or voltage high condition, it may indicate that the charging system requires service. For
further diagnosis of the charging indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the indicator, (Refer to 8 -
ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING). The Charging indicator is serviced with the
instrument cluster.
ENGINE TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
The engine temperature indicator gives an indication

to the vehicle operator when the engine temperature
gauge reading reflects a condition requiring immediate
attention. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on
ter from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus.
The engine temperature indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic
circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current
input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be off when the ignition
switch is in any position except On or Start. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the
instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn on the engine temperature indicator for the following
reasons:
Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the On position the engine temperature indicator is illu-
minated for about two seconds as a bulb test. The entire bulb test is a function of the PCM.
Engine Temperature High Message - Each time the cluster receives a message from the PCM indicating the
engine coolant temperature is above about 122 C (252 F), the engine temperature indicator will be illumi-
nated and a single chime tone is sounded. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a mes-
sage from the PCM indicating that the engine coolant temperature is below about 119 C (246 F), or until the
ignition switch is turned to the Off position, whichever occurs first. The chime tone feature will only repeat
during the same ignition cycle if the engine temperature indicator is cycled off and then on again by the appro-
priate engine temperature messages from the PCM.
Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the engine temperature indicator will be
The PCM continually monitors the engine coolant temperature sensor to determine the engine operating tempera-
ture. The PCM then sends the proper engine coolant temperature messages to the instrument cluster. For further
diagnosis of the engine temperature indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, (Refer to 8 -
ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING). If the instrument cluster turns on the engine
temperature indicator due to a high engine temperature gauge reading, it may indicate that the engine or the engine
cooling system requires service. The Engine Temperature indicator is serviced with the instrument cluster.
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL INDICATOR
The Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) indicator gives

an indication to the vehicle operator when the ETC
system is faulty or inoperative. The ETC indicator is
controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster cir-
cuit board based upon cluster programming and elec-
tronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area
Network (CAN) data bus.
The ETC indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and
transistor. The instrument cluster will turn on the ETC indicator for the following reasons:
Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the On position the ETC indicator is illuminated for about
fifteen seconds. The entire bulb test is a function of the PCM.
ETC Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives a lamp-on message from the PCM, the ETC indi-
cator will be illuminated. The indicator can be flashed on and off, or illuminated solid, as dictated by the PCM
message. The indicator remains illuminated solid or continues to flash for about twelve seconds or until the
cluster receives a lamp-off message from the PCM, whichever is longer. If the indicator is illuminated solid with
the engine running the vehicle will usually remain drivable. If the indicator is flashing with the engine running
the vehicle may require towing. A flashing indicator means the ETC system requires immediate service.
Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the ETC indicator will be turned on, then
off again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control
circuitry. The actuator test illumination of the ETC indicator is a function of the PCM.
The PCM continually monitors the ETC system circuits and sensors to decide whether the system is in good oper-
ating condition. The PCM then sends the proper lamp-on or lamp-off messages to the instrument cluster. If the PCM
sends a lamp-on message after the bulb test, it indicates that the PCM has detected an ETC system malfunction
and/or that the ETC system is inoperative. The PCM will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any malfunction
it detects. Each time the ETC indicator fails to illuminate due to an open or short in the cluster ETC indicator circuit,
the cluster sends a message notifying the PCM of the condition, the instrument cluster and the PCM will each store
a DTC. The Electronic Throttle Control indicator is serviced with the instrument cluster.
FOG LAMP INDICATOR
The fog lamp indicator gives an indication to the vehi-

cle operator whenever the optional fog lamps are illu-
minated. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on
ter from the Front Control Module (FCM) (also known as the Integrated Power Module/IPM) over the Controller Area
Network (CAN) data bus.
The fog lamp indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and
that logic will allow this indicator to operate whenever the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the
fused B(+) circuit. Therefore, the LED can be illuminated regardless of the ignition switch position. The LED only
illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn
on the fog lamp indicator for the following reasons:
Fog Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives a fog lamp-on message from the FCM indicating the
fog lamp relay is energized, the fog lamp indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until
the cluster receives a fog lamp-off message from the FCM.
Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the fog lamp indicator will be turned on,
control circuitry.
The instrument cluster continually monitors a hard wired input from the headlamp switch to determine the selected
fog lamp switch status. The instrument cluster then sends the proper fog lamp-on and lamp-off messages to the
FCM over the CAN data bus. The FCM activates the fog lamp relay then sends the proper fog lamp indicator
lamp-on and lamp-off messages to the instrument cluster. For further diagnosis of the fog lamp indicator or the
instrument cluster circuitry that controls the indicator, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - DIAG-
NOSIS AND TESTING). The Fog Lamp indicator is serviced with the instrument cluster.
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR
The high beam indicator gives an indication to the

vehicle operator whenever the headlamp high beams
are illuminated. This indicator is controlled by a tran-
sistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and a hard wired multiplex input
received by the cluster from the headlamp beam select switch circuitry of the multi-function switch on the washer/
beam select switch mux circuit.
The high beam indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit,
and that logic will allow this indicator to operate whenever the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on
the fused B(+) circuit. Therefore, the LED can be illuminated regardless of the ignition switch position. The LED only
on the high beam indicator for the following reasons:
High Beam Headlamps-On Input - Each time the cluster detects a high beam headlamps-on input from the
headlamp beam select switch circuitry of the multi-function switch on the washer/beam select switch mux cir-
cuit, the headlamp high beams and the high beam indicator will be illuminated. The headlamp high beams and
the high beam indicator remain illuminated until the cluster receives a high beam headlamps-off input from the
multi-function switch, or until the exterior lamp load shedding (battery saver) timed interval expires, whichever
occurs first.
Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the high beam indicator will be turned
on, then off again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the
cluster control circuitry.
The instrument cluster continually monitors the headlamp switch and the multi-function switch to determine the
proper headlamp low beam and high beam control. The instrument cluster then sends the proper low beam and
high beam lamp-on and lamp-off messages to the Front Control Module (FCM) over the Controller Area Network
(CAN) data bus and turns the high beam indicator on or off accordingly. For further diagnosis of the high beam
indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the indicator, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING). The High Beam indicator is serviced with the instrument cluster.
LOW FUEL INDICATOR
The low fuel indicator gives an indication to the vehi-

cle operator when the level of fuel in the fuel tank
becomes low. This indicator is controlled by a transis-
tor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and a hard wired input received by the
cluster from the fuel level sending unit on the fuel pump module in the fuel tank.
The low fuel indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and
transistor. The instrument cluster will turn on the low fuel indicator for the following reasons:
Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the On position the low fuel indicator is illuminated for
about two seconds as a bulb test.
Less Than Ten Percent Tank Full Input - The cluster provides a constant current source to the fuel level
sending unit and monitors a return input on a fuel level sense circuit. The resistance through the fuel level
sending unit increases as the fuel level falls and decreases as the fuel level rises causing changes in the
sense input voltage. Each time the fuel level sense input to the cluster indicates the fuel tank is about ten
percent full or less for ten consecutive seconds and the vehicle speed is zero, or for sixty consecutive seconds
and the vehicle speed is greater than zero, the fuel gauge needle is moved to about the one-eighth graduation
on the gauge scale, the low fuel indicator is illuminated, and a single chime tone is sounded. The low fuel
indicator remains illuminated until the fuel level sense input indicates that the fuel tank is greater than about
thirteen percent full for ten consecutive seconds and the vehicle speed is zero, or for sixty consecutive sec-
onds and the vehicle speed is greater than zero, or until the ignition switch is turned to the Off position, which-
ever occurs first. The chime tone feature will only repeat during the same ignition cycle if the low fuel indicator
is cycled off and then on again by the appropriate inputs from the fuel level sending unit.
Less Than Empty Stop Input - Each time the cluster receives a fuel level sense input that indicates the fuel
level in the fuel tank is less than the Empty gauge needle stop position, the gauge needle is moved to the low
fuel level sense input to the cluster is a short circuit.
More Than Full Stop Input - Each time the cluster receives a fuel level sense input that indicates the fuel
level in the fuel tank is more than the Full gauge needle stop position, the gauge needle is moved to the low
fuel level sense input to the cluster is an open circuit.
Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the low fuel indicator will be turned on,
control circuitry.
The instrument cluster continually monitors the fuel tank sending unit to determine the level of fuel in the fuel tank.
The cluster then sends the proper fuel level messages to other electronic modules in the vehicle over the Controller
Area Network (CAN) data bus. For further diagnosis of the low fuel indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that
controls the LED, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING). The Low
Fuel indicator is serviced with the instrument cluster.
LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR
The low oil pressure indicator gives an indication to

the vehicle operator when the engine oil pressure
reading reflects a condition requiring immediate atten-
tion. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster program-
ming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the
Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus.
The low oil pressure indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic
circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current
input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be off when the ignition
switch is in any position except On or Start. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the
instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn on the low oil pressure indicator for the following rea-
sons:
Engine Oil Pressure Low Message - Each time the cluster receives a message from the PCM indicating the
engine oil pressure is about 6.9 kPa (1 psi) or lower, the low oil pressure indicator will be illuminated. The
indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a message from the PCM indicating that the engine oil
pressure is above about 6.9 kPa (1 psi), or until the ignition switch is turned to the Off position, whichever
occurs first. The cluster will only turn the indicator on in response to an engine oil pressure low message if the
engine speed is greater than zero.
Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the low oil pressure indicator will be
The PCM continually monitors the engine oil pressure sensor to determine the engine oil pressure. The PCM then
sends the proper engine oil pressure messages to the instrument cluster. For further diagnosis of the low oil pres-
sure indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING). The Low Oil Pressure indicator is serviced with the instrument cluster.
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP
The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) gives an indica-

tion to the vehicle operator when the Powertrain Con-
trol Module (PCM) has recorded a Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC) for an On-Board Diagnostics II (OBDII)
emissions-related circuit or component malfunction. The MIL is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster
circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the PCM over
the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus.
The MIL Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will
only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition
switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be off when the ignition switch is in any position
except On or Start. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster tran-
sistor. The instrument cluster will turn on the MIL for the following reasons:
Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the On position the indicator is illuminated for about
fifteen seconds as a bulb test. The entire bulb test is a function of the PCM.
MIL Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives a MIL lamp-on message from the PCM, the indicator
will be illuminated. The indicator can be flashed on and off, or illuminated solid, as dictated by the PCM mes-
sage. For some DTCs, if a problem does not recur, the PCM will send a lamp-off message automatically.
Other DTCs may require that a fault be repaired and the PCM be reset before a lamp-off message will be
sent. For more information on the PCM, and the DTC set and reset parameters, (Refer to 25 - EMISSIONS
CONTROL - OPERATION).
Communication Error - If the cluster receives no messages from the PCM for ten consecutive message
cycles, the MIL is illuminated by the instrument cluster to indicate a loss of bus communication. The indicator
remains controlled and illuminated by the cluster until a valid message is received from the PCM.
Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the MIL indicator will be turned on
during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry.
The PCM continually monitors the fuel and emissions system circuits and sensors to decide whether the system is
in good operating condition. The PCM then sends the proper lamp-on or lamp-off messages to the instrument clus-
ter. For further diagnosis of the MIL or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, (Refer to 8 - ELEC-
TRICAL/INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING). If the instrument cluster turns on the MIL after the
bulb test, it may indicate that a malfunction has occurred and that the fuel and emissions systems may require
service. The Malfunction Indicator Lamp is serviced with the instrument cluster.
SEAT BELT INDICATOR
The seat belt indicator gives an indication to the vehi-

cle operator of the status of the driver side front seat
belt. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the
instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster
programming and a hard wired input from the seat belt switch in the driver side front seat belt retractor through the
seat belt indicator driver circuit.
The seat belt indicator also includes a programmable enhanced seat belt reminder or beltminder feature that is
enabled when the vehicle is shipped from the factory. This beltminder feature can be disabled and enabled by the
customer using a specific programming event sequence, or by the dealer using a diagnostic scan tool.
The seat belt indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and
transistor. The instrument cluster will turn on the seat belt indicator for the following reasons:
Seat Belt Reminder Function - Each time the cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition
switch output (run-start) circuit, the indicator will be illuminated as a seat belt reminder for about six seconds,
or until the ignition switch is turned to the Off position, whichever occurs first. This reminder function will occur
regardless of the status of the seat belt switch input to the cluster.
Driver Side Front Seat Belt Not Buckled - Beltminder Active - Following the seat belt reminder function,
each time the cluster detects an open circuit on the seat belt indicator driver circuit (seat belt switch open =
seat belt unbuckled) with the ignition switch in the Start or On positions, the indicator will be illuminated. In
addition, if the driver side front seat belt remains unbuckled about sixty seconds after the conclusion of the
seat belt reminder function with the vehicle speed greater than about 8 kilometers-per-hour (5 miles-per-hour),
the seat belt indicator will begin to cycle between flashing on and off for three seconds, then lighting solid for
two seconds. The seat belt indicator will continue to cycle between flashing and solid illumination for thirteen
complete cycles, until the seat belt indicator driver input to the cluster is closed to ground (seat belt switch
closed = seat belt buckled), or until the ignition switch is turned to the Off position, whichever occurs first.
Driver Side Front Seat Belt Not Buckled - Beltminder Inactive - Following the seat belt reminder function,
each time the cluster detects an open circuit on the seat belt indicator driver circuit (seat belt switch open =
seat belt unbuckled) with the ignition switch in the Start or On positions, the indicator will be illuminated. The
seat belt indicator remains illuminated until the seat belt indicator driver input to the cluster is closed to ground
(seat belt switch closed = seat belt buckled), or until the ignition switch is turned to the Off position, whichever
occurs first.
Airbag Indicator Backup - If the instrument cluster detects a fault in the airbag indicator circuit it will send a
message indicating the fault to the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), then flash the seat belt indicator on
and off. The cluster will continue to flash the seat belt indicator until the airbag indicator circuit fault is resolved,
or until the ignition switch is turned to the Off position, whichever occurs first.
Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the seat belt indicator will be turned on,
control circuitry.
The seat belt switch is connected in series between ground and the seat belt indicator driver input to the instrument
cluster. The seat belt switch input to the instrument cluster circuitry may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic
tools and methods. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. The Seat Belt indicator is serviced with the instru-
ment cluster.
SECURITY INDICATOR
The security indicator gives an indication to the vehi-

cle operator when the Vehicle Theft Security System
(VTSS) is arming or is armed. On models equipped
with the Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS), the
security indicator also gives an indication to the vehi-
cle operator of the status of the SKIS. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit
board based upon cluster programming, hard wired inputs to the cluster from the various security system compo-
nents, electronic messages received by the cluster from the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) over the
Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus.
The security indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and
that logic will allow this indicator to operate whenever the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the
fused B(+) circuit. Therefore, the LED can be illuminated regardless of the ignition switch position. The LED only
on the security indicator for the following reasons:
Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the On position the security indicator illuminates for
about two seconds as a bulb test. The entire bulb test is a function of the SKREEM.
VTSS Indication - During the sixteen second VTSS arming function, the cluster will flash the security indicator
on and off repeatedly at a steady, fast rate to indicate that the VTSS is in the process of arming. Following
successful VTSS arming, the cluster flashes the security indicator on and off continuously at a slower rate to
indicate that the VTSS is armed. The security indicator continues flashing at the slower rate until the VTSS is
disarmed or triggered. If the VTSS has alarmed and rearmed, the cluster will flash the security indicator at a
steady, slow rate for about thirty seconds after the VTSS is disarmed.
SKIS Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives a SKIS lamp-on message from the SKREEM, the
security indicator will be illuminated. The indicator can be flashed on and off, or illuminated solid, as dictated
by the SKREEM message. The indicator remains illuminated solid or continues to flash until the cluster
receives a SKIS lamp-off message from the SKREEM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the Off position,
whichever occurs first. For more information on the SKIS and the security indicator control parameters, (Refer
to 8 - ELECTRICAL/VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY/SENTRY KEY IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM - OPERATION).
Communication Error - If the cluster receives no SKIS lamp-on or lamp-off messages from the SKREEM for
ten consecutive message cycles, the security indicator is illuminated by the instrument cluster. The indicator
remains controlled and illuminated by the cluster until a valid SKIS lamp-on or lamp-off message is received
from the SKREEM.
Actuator Test - Each time the instrument cluster is put through the actuator test, the security indicator will be
The instrument cluster circuitry controls the security indicator whenever the ignition switch is in the Off position and
the VTSS is arming, armed, or alarming. Whenever the ignition switch is in the On or Start positions, the SKREEM
performs a self-test to decide whether the SKIS is in good operating condition and whether a valid key is present in
the ignition lock cylinder. The SKREEM then sends the proper lamp-on or lamp-off messages to the instrument
cluster. For further diagnosis of the security indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the indicator,
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING). If the instrument cluster
flashes the security indicator upon ignition On, or turns on the security indicator solid after the bulb test, it indicates
that a SKIS malfunction has occurred or that the SKIS is inoperative. The Security indicator is serviced with the
instrument cluster.
TRACTION CONTROL INDICATOR
The traction control indicator gives an indication to the

vehicle operator when the electronic Traction Control
System (TCS) has been activated. This indicator is
controlled by the instrument cluster circuit board
based upon cluster programming and electronic mes-
sages received by the cluster from the Controller Antilock Brake (CAB) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data
bus.
The traction control indicator is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only
allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition
switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the indicator will always be off when the ignition switch is in any position
except On or Start. The indicator only illuminates when it is switched to ground by the instrument cluster circuitry.
The instrument cluster will turn on the traction control indicator for the following reasons:
Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the On position the traction control indicator is illuminated
for about four seconds as a bulb test. The entire bulb test is a function of the CAB.
Traction Control Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives a traction control lamp-on message
from the CAB indicating that the TCS has been activated, the traction control indicator will be illuminated. The
indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a traction control lamp-off message from the CAB, or
until the ignition switch is turned to the Off position, whichever occurs first.
Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the traction control indicator will be
The CAB continually monitors the traction control switch to determine the proper outputs to the components of the
Antilock Brake System (ABS). The CAB then sends the proper traction control lamp-on and lamp-off messages to
the instrument cluster. For further diagnosis of the traction control indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that
controls the indicator, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING). The
Traction Control indicator is serviced with the instrument cluster.
TURN SIGNAL INDICATORS
The turn signal indicators give an indication to the

vehicle operator that the turn signal (left or right indi-
cator flashing) or hazard warning (both left and right
indicators flashing) have been selected and are oper-
ating. These indicators are controlled by transistors on
the instrument cluster electronic circuit board based upon the cluster programming, a hard wired multiplex input
received by the cluster from the turn signal and hazard warning switch circuitry of the multi-function switch on the
turn/hazard switch mux circuit, and electronic messages received from the Front Control Module (FCM) (also known
as the Integrated Power Module/IPM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus.
Each turn signal indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit,
and that logic will allow this indicator to operate whenever the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on
the fused B(+) circuit. Therefore, each LED can be illuminated regardless of the ignition switch position. The LED
only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will
turn on the turn signal indicators for the following reasons:
Turn Signal-On Input - Each time the cluster detects a turn signal-on input from the turn signal switch circuitry
of the multi-function switch on the turn/hazard switch mux circuit, it sends the appropriate electronic turn signal
switch status messages to the FCM over the CAN data bus. The FCM responds to these messages by con-
trolling a battery voltage output and the flash rate for either the right or left turn signal lamps. The FCM also
sends the appropriate electronic messages back to the EMIC to control the illumination and flash rate of the
right or left turn signal indicators, as well as to control the click rate of an electromechanical relay soldered
onto the EMIC electronic circuit board that emulates the sound emitted by a conventional turn signal flasher.
The turn signals and the turn signal indicators continue to flash on and off until the cluster receives a turn
signal-off input from the multi-function switch, or until the ignition switch is turned to the Off position, whichever
occurs first.
Hazard Warning-On Input - Each time the cluster detects a hazard warning-on input from the hazard warning
switch circuitry of the multi-function switch on the turn/hazard switch mux circuit, it sends the appropriate elec-
tronic hazard switch status messages to the FCM over the CAN data bus. The FCM responds to these mes-
sages by controlling a battery voltage output and the flash rate for each of the right and left turn signal lamps.
The FCM also sends the appropriate electronic messages back to the EMIC to control the illumination and
flash rate of the right and left turn signal indicators, as well as to control the click rate of an electromechanical
relay soldered onto the EMIC electronic circuit board that emulates the sound emitted by a conventional haz-
ard warning flasher. The turn signals and the turn signal indicators continue to flash on and off until the cluster
receives a hazard warning-off input from the multi-function switch.
Lamp Out Mode - The instrument cluster also sends electronic turn signal on and off messages to the FCM
over the CAN data bus, and the FCM flashes the appropriate exterior turn signal lamps. If the FCM detects an
inoperative turn signal lamp or circuit, it increases the flash rate for the remaining operative turn signals and
sends an electronic message back to the instrument cluster. The instrument cluster then increases the flash
rate of the turn signal indicator(s) and the clicking rate of the electromechanical relay to provide an indication
of the problem to the vehicle operator.
Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the turn signal indicators will be turned
on, then off again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of each LED and the
cluster control circuitry.
The instrument cluster continually monitors the multi-function switch and electronic messages from the FCM to
determine the proper turn signal and hazard warning system control. For further diagnosis of the turn signal indi-
cators or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the indicators, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING). The Turn Signal indicators are serviced with the instrument cluster.
CLUSTER ILLUMINATION
The EMIC has a single electro-luminescent lamp that provides cluster back lighting whenever the exterior lighting is
turned On. The illumination intensity of this lamp is adjusted when the interior lighting thumbwheel on the headlamp
switch is rotated (down to dim, up to brighten) to one of six available minor detent positions. The EMIC monitors a
resistor multiplexed input from the headlamp switch on a dimmer input circuit. In response to that input, the EMIC
electronic circuitry converts a fused 12-volt input it receives on a hard wired panel lamps dimmer switch signal cir-
cuit into a 12-volt Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) output.
The EMIC uses this PWM output to control the illumination intensity of the electro-luminescent cluster illumination
lamp and the VFD units on the EMIC circuit board, then provides a synchronized PWM output on various hard wired
fused panel lamps dimmer switch signal circuits to control and synchronize the illumination intensity of other incan-
descent illumination lamps in the vehicle. The EMIC also transmits electronic dimming level messages over the CAN
data bus to other electronic modules in the vehicle to control and synchronize the illumination intensity of their VFD
units to that of the EMIC VFD units.
In addition, the thumbwheel on the headlamp switch has a Parade Mode position to provide a parade or funeral
mode. The EMIC monitors the request for this mode from the headlamp switch, then transmits an electronic dim-
ming level message to illuminate all VFD units in the vehicle at full (daytime) intensity for easier visibility when
driving in daylight with the exterior lighting turned On.
The electro-luminescent lamp unit consists of layers of phosphor, carbon, idium tin oxide, and dielectric applied by
a silk-screen process between two polyester membranes and includes a short pigtail wire and connector. The lamp
pigtail wire is connected to a connector receptacle on the EMIC circuit board. The EMIC powers this lamp with an
Alternating Current (AC) rated at 80 volts rms (root mean squared) and 415 Hertz produced by a transformer on the
circuit board, which excites the phosphor particles causing them to luminesce.

The following Modes allow the driver to access and display the driver- interactive features:
TRIP MODE
Provides a choice of units displayed in English or metric. The following information can be displayed at the top of
the screen: Average MPG, distance to empty (DTE), Trip A and Trip B odometers, and elapsed time. The odometer
is displayed at the bottom of the screen. If warnings exist, they will replace the odometer in the display. The driver
can scroll to view multiple warnings.
COMPASS, TEMPERATURE AND AUDIO MODE
Compass heading and outside temperature are displayed at the top of the screen. On the lower half of the screen
the audio mode is displayed along with the odometer.
TELEPHONE MODE
Provides the following information and features for the optional hands-free communications system:
Phone status: idle, voice mail, roaming, battery strength and signal strength in increments of 20 percent.
Call status: Incoming call, connecting, connected, air time in minutes and seconds, call ended, busy, call failed,
roaming and no phone connection.
Caller ID phone number display.
NAVIGATION MODE
Displays Turn-by-Turn directions that appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a
programmed route.
PERSONAL SETTINGS MODE
Allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in Park.
SYSTEM STATUS MODE
Displays warnings and user interaction messages. Initial warnings will be displayed full-screen for three seconds,
then override the odometer and show text warnings on the bottom line of the display. Critical text warnings will be
displayed until the failure is corrected. Non-critical text warnings will be displayed for 60 seconds. The driver can
scroll to view multiple messages. A single chime sounds for all warnings.
For a more detailed operation of the EVIC (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/OVERHEAD CONSOLE/ELECTRONIC VEHI-
CLE INFO CENTER - OPERATION).

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment, per-
sonal injury or death.
If all of the instrument cluster gauges and indicators are inoperative, be certain to check the instrument cluster fused
B(+) fuse and the instrument cluster fused B(+) and ground circuits for shorts or opens. Refer to the appropriate
wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures,
details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire
harness connectors, splices and grounds.
If an individual hard wired gauge or indicator is inoperative, refer to the diagnosis and testing service information for
that specific gauge or indicator. If an individual Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus message-controlled gauge
or indicator is inoperative, perform the Actuator Test as follows:
CAUTION: Instrument clusters used in this model automatically configure themselves for compatibility with
the features and optional equipment in the vehicle in which they are initially installed. The instrument clus-
ter is programmed to do this by embedding the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and other information
critical to proper cluster operation into electronic memory. This embedded information is learned through
electronic messages received from other electronic modules in the vehicle over the Controller Area Network
(CAN) data bus, and through certain hard wired inputs received when the cluster is connected to the vehicle
electrically. Once configured, the instrument cluster memory may be irreparably damaged and certain irre-
versible configuration errors may occur if the cluster is connected electrically to another vehicle; or, if an
electronic module from another vehicle is connected that provides data to the instrument cluster (including
odometer values) that conflicts with that which was previously learned and stored. Therefore, the practice
of exchanging (swapping) instrument clusters and other electronic modules in this vehicle with those
removed from another vehicle must always be avoided. Failure to observe this caution may result in instru-
ment cluster damage, which is not reimbursable under the terms of the product warranty. Service replace-
ment instrument clusters are provided with the correct VIN, and the certified odometer and engine hours
values embedded into cluster memory, but will otherwise be automatically configured for compatibility with
the features and optional equipment in the vehicle in which they are initially installed.
NOTE: Certain indicators in this instrument cluster are automatically configured. This feature allows those
indicators to be activated or deactivated for compatibility with certain optional equipment. If the problem
being diagnosed involves improper illumination of the cruise indicator, the electronic throttle control indi-
cator, the tow/haul indicator, the service four-wheel drive indicator, the four-wheel drive low indicator, the
four-wheel drive lock indicator, the transmission overtemp indicator, the security indicator or the gear selec-
tor indicator, disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. After about five minutes, reconnect the bat-
tery negative cable and turn the ignition switch to the On position. The instrument cluster should
automatically relearn the equipment in the vehicle and properly configure the configurable indicators
accordingly.
ACTUATOR TEST
The instrument cluster actuator test will put the instrument cluster into its self-diagnostic mode. In this mode the
instrument cluster can perform a self-diagnostic test that will confirm that the instrument cluster circuitry, the gauges,
and the indicators are capable of operating as designed. During the actuator test the instrument cluster circuitry will
position each of the gauge needles at various calibration points and illuminate all of the segments in the Vacuum
Fluorescent Display (VFD) units.
Successful completion of the actuator test will confirm that the instrument cluster is operational. However, there may
still be a problem with the CAN data bus, the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), the Front Control Module (FCM),
the Transmission Control Module (TCM), the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), the Controller Anti-lock Brake
(CAB), or the hard wired inputs to one of these electronic control modules. Use a diagnostic scan tool to diagnose
these components. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information.
1. Begin the test with the ignition switch in the Off position.
2. Depress the odometer/trip odometer switch button.
3. While still holding the odometer/trip odometer switch button depressed, turn the ignition switch to the On position,
but do not start the engine.
4. Release the odometer/trip odometer switch button.
5. The instrument cluster will simultaneously begin to illuminate all of the operational segments in both VFD units,
and perform a bulb check of each operational LED indicator. The VFD segments and LED indicators remain
illuminated as each gauge needle is swept to several calibration points and back. If a VFD segment or an LED
indicator fails to illuminate, or if a gauge needle fails to sweep through the calibration points and back during this
test, the instrument cluster must be replaced.
6. The actuator test is now completed. The instrument cluster will automatically exit the self-diagnostic mode and
return to normal operation at the completion of the test. The actuator test will be aborted if the ignition switch is
turned to the Off position, or if a vehicle speed message indicating that the vehicle is moving is received from the
PCM over the CAN data bus during the test.
7. Go back to Step 1 to repeat the test, if necessary.
STANDARD PROCEDURE
ENHANCED SEATBELT REMINDER PROGRAMMING
The seatbelt indicator also includes a programmable enhanced seatbelt reminder or beltminder feature that is
enabled when the vehicle is shipped from the factory. This beltminder feature provides extended and modified visual
seatbelt indicator and audible chime warning responses to an unbuckled driver side front seat belt. The beltminder
feature may be disabled or enabled by the customer using the programming sequence that follows, or by the dealer
using a diagnostic scan tool. The following sequence of events must occur within sixty (60) seconds of the ignition
switch being placed in the On position in order for the programming to be completed successfully.
1. With the ignition switch in any position except On or Start, buckle the driver side front seat belt.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the On position and wait for the seatbelt indicator reminder function to conclude (about
six seconds).
3. Unbuckle and buckle the driver side front seat belt three or more times, ending with the belt buckled.
4. Turn the ignition switch to any position except On or Start to toggle the beltminder feature from its current setting
(from active to inactive, or from inactive to active). A single chime tone will provide an audible confirmation that
the programming sequence has been successfully completed.
REMOVAL
2.
WARNING: Wait two minutes for the airbag system

reserve capacitor to discharge before beginning
any airbag system or component service. Failure
to do so may result in accidental airbag deploy-
ment, personal injury or death.
3. Remove the instrument cluster bezel (Refer to 23 -

REMOVAL).
4. Remove the four cluster retaining screws.
5. Disconnect the cluster electrical connectors.
6. Remove cluster from instrument panel.
INSTALLATION
1. Position cluster into instrument panel opening.
2. Connect the cluster electrical connectors.
3. Install the four cluster retaining screws.
4. Install the cluster bezel (Refer to 23 - BODY/IN-
STRUMENT PANEL/CLUSTER BEZEL - INSTAL-
LATION).
CLUSTER LENS
REMOVAL
2.


REMOVAL).
4. Remove the cluster lens retaining screws.
5. Separate the cluster lens from the cluster and
remove from Instrument panel.
INSTALLATION
1. Place cluster lens into position on cluster.
2. Install the cluster lens screws.
LATION).
INSTRUMENT PANEL SWITCH POD

DESCRIPTION
The Instrument Panel Switch Pod includes push but-
ton controls for the Hazard Flashers, Electronic Stabil-
ity Program (ESP) or Anti-Slip Regulation (ASR) Off
switch, and on Dodge models Rear Wiper/Washer.
Also the Passenger Airbag Disabled (PAD) Indicator is
located within the switch pod. The switch pod is a sin-
gle unit with one wire connector and two mounting
tabs and cannot be taken apart or serviced. If one or
more of the switches, or illumination is inoperative, the
entire pod must be replaced.
The Instrument Panel Switch Pod is located in the

instrument panel center bezel just above the radio,
and between the A/C outlet ducts.
There a different configurations depending on the model and country.
DOMESTIC SEDAN
The sedan for sale in North America will have a Haz-
ard Switch , Passenger Airbag Disabled (PAD) Indica-
tor, and Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Off Switch.
If equipped with Anti-Lock brakes, but not with ESP,

the vehicle will be equipped with the Traction Control
System (TCS).
DOMESTIC WAGON
The wagon for sale in North America will have Rear
Wipe/Wash Switch, Hazard Switch, Passenger Airbag
Disabled (PAD) Indicator, and Electronic Stability Pro-
gram (ESP) Off Switch.
EXPORT WAGON
The wagon for sale outside North America will have
Rear Wipe/Wash Switch, Hazard Switch, Passenger
Airbag Disabled (PAD) Indicator, and Electronic Stabil-
ity Program (ESP) Off Switch.
Export wagons may also have Rear Wipe/Wash

Switch, Hazard Switch, Passenger Airbag Disabled
(PAD) Indicator, and Anti-Slip Regulation (ASR) Off
Switch.
OPERATION
LIFTGATE WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH
A liftgate wiper and washer rocker switch provides intermittent wiper operation as well as rear washer operation.
Pressing one side of the rocker switch knob actuates the washer system, while pressing the other side of the rocker
switch knob turns the intermittent rear wiper ON and OFF. When the rear intermittent wiper is ON, an indicator in
the switch knob is illuminated. Refer to Wipers/Washers for description and operation of the Rear WiperWasher
Switch.
HAZARD WARNING SWITCH

A latching push-button hazard-warning switch is placed in the instrument panel switch pod. This is an ergonomic
place for the switch where it can be conveniently reached. Refer to Lamps/Lighting - Exterior for description and
operation of the hazard warning switch.
PASSENGER AIRBAG DISABLED (PAD) INDICATOR

The indicator is placed in the instrument panel switch pod. This is an ergonomic place for the indicator where it can
be conveniently seen by all interior occupants. Refer to Restraints for description and operation of the Passenger
Airbag Disabled (PAD) Indicator.
ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM (ESP) OFF SWITCH

A momentary contact, push-button ESP switch is placed in the instrument panel switch pod. This is an ergonomic
place for the switch where it can be conveniently reached. Refer to Brakes for description and operation of the ESP
system and ESP off switch.
ANTI-SLIP REGULATION (ASR) OFF SWITCH

A momentary contact, push-button ASR switch is placed in the instrument panel switch pod. This is an ergonomic
place for the switch where it can be conveniently reached. Refer to Brakes for description and operation of the ASR
system and ASR off switch.
REMOVAL
2.

3. Remove the instrument panel center bezel (Refer

to 23 - BODY/INSTRUMENT PANEL/INSTRU-
MENT PANEL CENTER BEZEL - REMOVAL).
4. Remove the two screws (1) from the rear of the
switch pod.
5. Separate switch from center bezel.
INSTALLATION
1. Place the switch pod in the bezel opening and
install the two screws (1).
2. Install the instrument panel ceter bezel (Refer to 23
LX LAMPS 8L - 1
LAMPS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
LAMPS/LIGHTING - EXTERIOR - ELECTRICAL LAMPS/LIGHTING - INTERIOR - ELECTRICAL

DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
LAMPS/LIGHTING - EXTERIOR - SERVICE LAMPS/LIGHTING - INTERIOR - SERVICE
INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
LAMPS/LIGHTING - EXTERIOR - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
LAMPS/LIGHTING - EXTERIOR - ELECTRICAL B1648-REAR RIGHT TURN CONTROL

DIAGNOSTICS CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING B1659-FRONT FOG LAMP CONTROL
B162B-LEFT LOW BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 B1660-FRONT FOG LAMP CONTROL
B162F-RIGHT LOW BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 B1661-FRONT FOG LAMP CONTROL
B1630-RIGHT LOW BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 B168F-FRONT FOG LAMP SWITCH STUCK . . . 47
B1633-LEFT HI BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT B165C-PARK LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT
LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
B1634-LEFT HI BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT B165D-PARK LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT
HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
B1637-RIGHT HI BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT B1667-REVERSE LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT
LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
B1638-RIGHT HI BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT B1668-REVERSE LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT
HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
B163B-FRONT LEFT TURN CONTROL B1607-HEADLAMP SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
B163C-FRONT LEFT TURN CONTROL B1608-HEADLAMP SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT
CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
B163F-FRONT RIGHT TURN CONTROL B167A-LEFT FRONT HEADLAMP LIGHT
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 SOURCE CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
B1640-FRONT RIGHT TURN CONTROL B167B-RIGHT FRONT HEADLAMP LIGHT
CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 SOURCE CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
B1643-REAR LEFT TURN CONTROL B2235-LEFT FRONT HEADLAMP BALLAST
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 ECU INTERNAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
B1644-REAR LEFT TURN CONTROL B2236-RIGHT FRONT HEADLAMP BALLAST
CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 ECU INTERNAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
B1647-REAR RIGHT TURN CONTROL B2239-HID LEVELING TRANSLATOR ECU
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 INTERNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
8L - 2 LAMPS/LIGHTING - EXTERIOR - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS LX
LAMPS/LIGHTING - EXTERIOR - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS

LX LAMPS/LIGHTING - EXTERIOR - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8L - 3
B162B-LEFT LOW BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
With the Headlamps activated.
Set Condition:
When the FCM detects a LOW condition.
Possible Causes
(L43) LEFT LOW BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Test

With the Scan Tool, clear all FCM DTCs.
Turn the Headlamps on.
With the Scan Tool read the DTC information.
Does the Scan Tool read: B162B-LEFT LOW BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2
Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
2. (L43) LEFT LOW BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT

Measure the resistance between ground and the (L43) Left Low Beam
Control circuit.
Yes >> Replace the Front Control Module (FCM) in accordance
No >> Repair the (L43) Left Low Beam Control circuit for a short
to ground condition.
B162F-RIGHT LOW BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(L44) RIGHT LOW BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Test
Does the Scan Tool read: B162F-RIGHT LOW BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. (L44) RIGHT LOW BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT

Measure the resistance between ground and the (L44) Right Low Beam
Control circuit.
No >> Repair the (L44) Right Low Beam Control circuit for a short
B1630-RIGHT LOW BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When the FCM detects a HIGH condition.
Possible Causes
(L44) RIGHT LOW BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Test
Does the Scan Tool read: B1630-RIGHT LOW BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. (L44) RIGHT LOW BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT

Measure the resistance of the (L44) Right Low Beam Control circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (L44) Right Low Beam Control circuit for a short
to battery condition.
No >> Replace the Front Control Module (FCM) in accordance
B1633-LEFT HI BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(L33) LEFT HIGHBEAM OUTPUT CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Test
Turn the Highbeam Headlamps on.
Does the Scan Tool read: B1633-LEFT HI BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. (L33) LEFT HIGHBEAM OUTPUT CIRCUIT

Measure the resistance between ground and the (L33) Left Highbeam
Output circuit.
No >> Repair the (L33) Left Highbeam Output circuit for a short to
ground condition.
B1634-LEFT HI BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(L33) LEFT HIGH BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Test
Does the Scan Tool read: B1634-LEFT HI BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. (L33) HIGH BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT

Measure the resistance of the (L33) Left High Beam Control circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (L33) Left High Beam Control circuit for a short
B1637-RIGHT HI BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
With the Highbeam Headlamps activated.
Set Condition:
When the FCM detects a High condition.
Possible Causes
(L34) RIGHT HIGHBEAM OUTPUT CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Test
Turn the Highbeam Headlamps on.
Does the Scan Tool read: B1637-RIGHT HI BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. (L34) RIGHT HIGHBEAM OUTPUT CIRCUIT

Measure the resistance between ground and the (L34) Right Highbeam
Output circuit.
No >> Repair the (L34) Right Highbeam Output circuit for a short
B1638-RIGHT HI BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(L34) RIGHT HIGH BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Test
Does the Scan Tool read: B1638-RIGHT HI BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. (L34) RIGHT HIGH BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT

Measure the resistance of the (L34) Right High Beam Control circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (L34) Right High Beam Control circuit for a short
B163B-FRONT LEFT TURN CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW

Possible Causes
(L61) FRONT LEFT TURN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT

Diagnostic Test
Turn the Left Turn Signals on.
Does the Scan Tool read: B163B-FRONT LEFT TURN CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. L61 FRONT LEFT TURN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT

Disconnect the FCM C2 connector.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (L61) Front Left Turn
Signal Control circuit.
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Repair the (L61) Front Left Turn Signal Control circuit for a
short to ground.
3. FRONT CONTROL MODULE

Measure the resistance between ground and the (L61) Front Left Turn Signal Control circuit in the FCM.
Yes >> Replace the Power Distribution Center in accordance with the service information.
No >> Replace the Front Control Module in accordance with the service information.
B163C-FRONT LEFT TURN CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Continuously
Set Condition:
When the Front Control Module detects a short to battery on the Control circuit.
Possible Causes
(L61) TURN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT

Diagnostic Test

Clear all FCM DTCs
Turn the Left Turn Signal on.
Does the scan tool read: B163C-FRONT LEFT TURN CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. L61 LEFT TURN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT

Measure the resistance of the (L61) Front Left Turn Signal Control cir-
cuit.
No >> Repair the (L61) Turn Signal Control circuit.
Yes >> Go To 3

Disconnect the Front Control Module from the PDC 49-way connector.
Measure the voltage between (L61) Front Left Turn Signal Control circuit and ground.
B163F-FRONT RIGHT TURN CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW

Possible Causes
(L60) FRONT RIGHT TURN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Test
Turn the Right Turn Signals on.
Does the Scan Tool read: B163F-FRONT RIGHT TURN CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. L60 FRONT RIGHT TURN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT

Measure the resistance between ground and the (L60) Front Right Turn
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Repair the (L60) Front Right Turn Signal Control circuit for
a short to ground.

Disconnect the FCM connector.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (L60) Front Right Turn Signal Control circuit in the FCM.
B1640-FRONT RIGHT TURN CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Continuously
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(L60) FRONT RIGHT TURN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT

Diagnostic Test

Clear all FCM DTCs
Turn the Right Turn Signal on.
Does the scan tool read: B1640-FRONT RIGHT TURN CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. L60 FRONT RIGHT TURN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT

Disconnect the PDC connector from the FCM.
Measure the resistance of the (L60) Front Right Turn Signal Control cir-
cuit.
No >> Repair the (L60) Front Right Turn Signal Control circuit.
Yes >> Go To 3

Disconnect the Front Control Module from the PDC 49 way connector.
Measure the voltage between (L60) Front Right Turn Signal Control circuit and ground.
B1643-REAR LEFT TURN CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW

Possible Causes
(L63) REAR LEFT TURN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT

MODULE POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER
Diagnostic Test
Turn the Left Turn Signals on.
Does the Scan Tool read: B1643-REAR LEFT TURN CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. L63 REAR LEFT TURN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT

Disconnect the FCM PDM connector.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (L63) Rear Left Turn
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Repair the (L63) Rear Left Turn Signal Control circuit for a
short to ground.

Disconnect the PDM connector.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (L63) Rear Left Turn Signal Control circuit in the PDM.
Yes >> Replace the Module Power Distribution Center in accordance with the service information.
B1644-REAR LEFT TURN CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Continuously
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(L63) REAR LEFT TURN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT

Diagnostic Test

Clear all FCM DTCs
Turn the Left Turn Signal on.
Does the scan tool read: B1644-REAR LEFT TURN CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. L63 REAR LEFT TURN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT

Disconnect the PDM connector from the FCM.
Measure the resistance of the (L63) Rear Left Turn Signal Control cir-
cuit.
No >> Repair the (L63) Rear Left Turn Signal Control circuit.
Yes >> Go To 3

Disconnect the Front Control Module from the PDM 49 way connector.
Measure the voltage between (L63) Rear Left Turn Signal Control circuit and ground.
B1647-REAR RIGHT TURN CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW

Possible Causes
(L62) REAR RIGHT TURN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT

MODULE POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER
Diagnostic Test
Turn the Right Turn Signals on.
Does the Scan Tool read: B1647-REAR RIGHT TURN CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. L62 REAR RIGHT TURN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT

Measure the resistance between ground and the (L62) Rear Right Turn
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Repair the (L62) Rear Right Turn Signal Control circuit for a
short to ground.

Disconnect the PDM connector.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (L62) Rear Right Turn Signal Control circuit in the PDM.
B1648-REAR RIGHT TURN CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Continuously
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(L62) REAR RIGHT TURN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT

Diagnostic Test

Clear all FCM DTCs
Does the scan tool read: B1648-REAR RIGHT TURN CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. L62 REAR RIGHT TURN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT

Measure the resistance of the (L62) Rear Right Turn Signal Control cir-
cuit.
No >> Repair the (L62) Rear Right Turn Signal Control circuit.
Yes >> Go To 3

Measure the voltage between (L62) Rear Right Turn Signal Control circuit and ground.
B1659-FRONT FOG LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
With the Fog Lamps activated.
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(L89) FOG LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Test
Turn the Fog Lamps on.
Does the Scan Tool read: B1659-FRONT FOG LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. (L89) FOG LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT

Disconnect the FCM PDM harness connector.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (L89) Fog Lamp Con-
trol circuit.
No >> Repair the (L89) Fog Lamp Control circuit for a short to
ground condition.
B1660-FRONT FOG LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
With the Front Fog Lamps activated.
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY

MODULE-POWER DISTRIBUTION
Diagnostic Test
Actuate the Front Fog Lamps.
Does the Scan Tool read: B1660-FRONT FOG LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY

Remove and install a known good relay in place of the Front Fog Lamp Relay.
Do the Front Fog Lamps operate normally?
Yes >> Replace the Front Fog Lamp Relay in accordance with the service information.
No >> Go To 3

Remove the Front Fog Lamp Relay from the MPD.
Remove the FCM from the Module Power Distribution.
Measure the voltage of the (L89) Front Fog Lamp Relay Output circuit
and ground.
Yes >> Replace the Module Power Distribution center in accor-
No >> Replace the Module Front Control in accordance with the
B1661-FRONT FOG LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN

When Monitored:
With the Fog Lamps activated.
Set Condition:
When the IPM detects an OPEN condition.
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1. INTEGRATED POWER MODULE

Replace the Fog Lamp relay with and known good relay.
With the Scan Tool, clear all IPM DTCs.
Turn the Fog Lamps ON then OFF.
Does the Scan Tool read: B1661-FRONT FOG LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes >> Replace the Integrated Power Module in accordance with the service information.
Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CON-
TROL MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
TROL MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
B168F-FRONT FOG LAMP SWITCH STUCK

When Monitored:
With the Fog Lamps on.
Set Condition:
When the CCN detects a Fog Lamp Switch Stuck message on the BUS.
Possible Causes
HEADLAMP SWITCH
(L307) SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORT TO THE (L900) SWITCH RETURN CIRCUIT
(L307) HEADLAMP SWITCH MUX SHORT TO GROUND
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test

Operate the Fog Lamp Switch several times.
Turn the ignition on and wait 30 seconds.
Does the scan tool display: B168F-FRONT FOG LAMP SWITCH STUCK?
Yes >> Go To 2
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1).
2. HEADLAMP SWITCH SHORTED

Disconnect the Headlamp Switch connector.
Does the scan tool display: B168F-FRONT FOG LAMP SWITCH STUCK?
No >> Replace the Headlamp Switch in accordance with the service information.
Yes >> Go To 3
3. (L307) HEADLAMP SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (L307) Headlamp
Switch Mux circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (L307) Headlamp Switch Mux circuit for a short
to ground.
No >> Go To 4
4. (L307) SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORT TO (L900) SWITCH RETURN CIRCUIT

Measure the resistance between the (L307) Switch Mux circuit and the
(L900) Switch Return circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (L307) Switch Mux circuit for a short to the
(L900) Switch Return circuit.
No >> Replace the Instrument Cluster.
B165C-PARK LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
With the Park Lamps activated.
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(L177) PARK LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Test
Turn the Park Lamps on.
Does the Scan Tool read: B165C-PARK LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. (L177) PARK LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT

Disconnect the FCM PDM harness connector.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (L177) Park Lamp
Control circuit.
No >> Repair the (L177) Park Lamp Control circuit for a short to
ground condition.
B165D-PARK LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
With the Front Fog Lamps activated.
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
PARK LAMP RELAY

MODULE-POWER DISTRIBUTION
Diagnostic Test
Actuate the Park Lamps.
Does the Scan Tool read: B165D-PARK LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. PARK LAMP RELAY

Remove and install a known good relay in place of the Park Lamp Relay.
Do the Front Fog Lamps operate normally?
Yes >> Replace the Park Lamp Relay in accordance with the service information.
No >> Go To 3

Remove the Park Lamp Relay from the MPD.
Remove the FCM from the Module Power Distribution.
Measure the voltage of the (L177) Park Lamp Relay Control circuit and
ground.
Yes >> Replace the Module Power Distribution center in accor-
No >> Replace the Module Front Control in accordance with the
B1667-REVERSE LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW

Possible Causes
(L1) BACKUP LAMPS FEED CIRCUIT

Diagnostic Test
Turn the Reverse Lamps on.
Does the Scan Tool read: B1667-REVERSE LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. L1 BACKUP LAMPS FEED CIRCUIT

Measure the resistance between ground and the (L1) Backup Lamps
Feed circuit.
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Repair the (L1) Backup Lamps Control circuit for a short to
ground.

Disconnect the FCM from the IPM connector.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (L1) Backup Lamps Feed circuit in the IPM.
B1668-REVERSE LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Continuously
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(L1) BACKUP LAMPS CONTROL CIRCUIT

Diagnostic Test

Clear all FCM DTCs
Does the scan tool read: B1668-REVERSE LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. L1 BACKUP LAMPS CONTROL CIRCUIT

Measure the resistance of the (L1) Backup Lamps Control circuit.
No >> Repair the (L1) Backup Lamps Control circuit.
Yes >> Go To 3

Measure the voltage between (L1) Backup Lamps Control circuit and ground.
B1607-HEADLAMP SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT LOW

Possible Causes
HEADLAMP SWITCH
(L900) MUX RETURN CIRCUIT
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
With the Scan Tool, clear all CCN DTCs.
Does the Scan Tool read: B1607-HEADLAMP SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. HEADLAMP SWITCH
Measure the voltage of the (L900) MUX Return circuit.
Does the voltage read 5.0 volts?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Replace the Headlamp Switch in accordance with the service information.
3. (L900) MUX RETURN CIRCUIT

Disconnect the Instrument Cluster C2 connector.
Measure the resistance of the (L900) MUX Return circuit to ground.
Yes >> Repair the (L900) Headlamp MUX return circuit.
vice information.
B1608-HEADLAMP SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH

Possible Causes
HEADLAMP SWITCH
(L900) HEADLAMP MUX RETURN CIRCUIT
(L307) HEADLAMP MUX INPUT CIRCUIT
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
With the Scan Tool, clear all CCN DTCs.
Does the Scan Tool read: B1608-HEADLAMP SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. HEADLAMP SWITCH
Measure the voltage between the (L900) Headlamp MUX Return circuit and (L307) Headlamp Input MUX circuit.
Does the voltage read 0.0 volts?
Yes >> Replace the Headlamp Switch in accordance with the service information.
No >> Go To 3
3. (L900) MUX RETURN CIRCUIT

Measure the resistance of the (L900) Headlamp MUX Return circuit.
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Repair the (L900) Headlamp MUX Return circuit.
4. INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Measure the resistance of the (L307) Headlamp MUX circuit.
Yes >> Replace the instrument Cluster in accordance with the ser-
vice information.
No >> Repair the (L307) Headlamp MUX circuit.
B167A-LEFT FRONT HEADLAMP LIGHT SOURCE CIRCUIT

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The code will set when the HID Module detects an INOP Headlamp Source.
Possible Causes
HEADLAMP SOURCE
Diagnostic Test
1. Verify DTC B167A-LEFT FRONT HEADLAMP LIGHT SOURCE CIRCUIT IS ACTIVE

This is a Headlamp Source failure
View repair
Does the DTC reset and read B167A-LEFT FRONT HEADLAMP LIGHT SOURCE CIRCUIT?
Repair
Replace the appropriate Headlamp Source in accordance with the service information.
B167B-RIGHT FRONT HEADLAMP LIGHT SOURCE CIRCUIT

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The code will set when the HID Module detects an INOP Headlamp Source.
Possible Causes
HEADLAMP SOURCE
Diagnostic Test
1. Verify DTC B167B-RIGHT FRONT HEADLAMP LIGHT SOURCE CIRCUIT IS ACTIVE

This is a Headlamp Source failure
View repair
Does the DTC reset and read B167B-RIGHT FRONT HEADLAMP LIGHT SOURCE CIRCUIT?
Repair
Replace the appropriate Headlamp Source in accordance with the service information.
B2235-LEFT FRONT HEADLAMP BALLAST ECU INTERNAL

When Monitored:
Continuously with the Headlamps on.
Set Condition:
The code will set when a Check Sum error is detected.
Possible Causes
LEFT HEADLAMP BALLAST ECU FAILURE
Diagnostic Test
1. Verify DTC B2235-LEFT FRONT HEADLAMP BALLAST ECU INTERNAL IS ACTIVE

This is an internal Ballast ECU failure
View repair
Does the DTC reset and read B2235-LEFT FRONT HEADLAMP BALLAST ECU INTERNAL?
Repair
Replace the Left Side Headlamp Ballast ECU in accordance with the service information.
B2236-RIGHT FRONT HEADLAMP BALLAST ECU INTERNAL

When Monitored:
Continuously with the Headlamps on.
Set Condition:
The code will set when a Check Sum error is detected.
Possible Causes
RIGHT HEADLAMP BALLAST ECU FAILURE
Diagnostic Test
1. Verify DTC B2236-RIGHT FRONT HEADLAMP BALLAST ECU INTERNAL IS ACTIVE

This is an internal Headlamp Ballast ECU failure
View repair
Does the DTC reset and read B2236-RIGHT FRONT HEADLAMP BALLAST ECU INTERNAL?
Repair
Replace the Right Side Headlamp Ballast ECU in accordance with the service information.
B2239-HID LEVELING TRANSLATOR ECU INTERNAL

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The code will set when the HID Module detects an internal failure.
Possible Causes
MODULE INTERNAL FAILURE
Diagnostic Test
1. Verify DTC B2239-HID LEVELING TRANSLATOR ECU INTERNAL IS ACTIVE

This is an internal module failure
View repair
Does the DTC reset and read B2239-HID LEVELING TRANSLATOR ECU INTERNAL?
Repair
Replace the HID Translator Module in accordance with the service information.
8L - 72 LAMPS/LIGHTING - EXTERIOR - SERVICE INFORMATION LX
LAMPS/LIGHTING - EXTERIOR - SERVICE INFORMATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
LAMPS/LIGHTING - EXTERIOR - SERVICE SWITCH-HEADLAMP

INFORMATION REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 HEADLAMP UNIT
WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 REMOVAL - 300C AND MAGNUM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
STANDARD PROCEDURE INSTALLATION - 300C AND MAGNUM . . . . . . . . . 116
FRONT LAMP AIMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 LICENSE PLATE LAMP UNIT
SPECIFICATIONS REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
EXTERIOR LAMPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
AUTO HEADLAMP SENSOR MULTI-FUNCTION SWITCH
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
CENTER HIGH MOUNTED STOP LAMP REPEATER LAMP - EXPORT
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
FOG LAMP UNIT SWITCH - STOP LAMP
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
FRONT SIDE MARKER LAMP DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 STOP LAMP SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
FRONT SIDE MARKER LAMP UNIT - CHARGER INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 ADJUSTMENTS
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 STOP LAMP SWITCH ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . 128
FRONT PARK/TURN SIGNAL LAMP TAIL LAMP UNIT
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
HEADLAMP SPOT LAMP - POLICE
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING SPOT LAMP ASSEMBLY - POLICE
HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE HEADLAMPS . . 94 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
HEADLAMP LEVELING MODULE - EXPORT SPOT LAMP ASSEMBLY - POLICE . . . . . . . . . . 135
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 UNDERHOOD LAMP - POLICE
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
HEADLAMP LEVEL SENSOR - EXPORT INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 UNDERHOOD LAMP UNIT - POLICE
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
LX LAMPS/LIGHTING - EXTERIOR - SERVICE INFORMATION 8L - 73
LAMPS/LIGHTING - EXTERIOR - SERVICE INFORMATION

DESCRIPTION
The exterior lighting system for this model includes the following exterior lamp units:
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp - A Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) is centered on the rear
shelf trim panel at the base of the backlite on sedans, and on the liftgate spoiler just above the liftgate glass
opening at the rear of the vehicle on the wagon.
Front Fog Lamps - Vehicles equipped with this option have a fog lamp unit mounted near each outboard end
of the front bumper support, behind the lower portion of the front fascia.
Front Headlamp Units - A front headlamp unit is mounted to the front of each front fender panel on either
side of the grille opening.
License Plate Lamp - A rear license plate lamp unit is mounted to the rear fascia, just above the license plate
tub.
Tail Lamp Units - A tail lamp unit is mounted to the rear of each quarter panel on either side of the liftgate
opening.
These exterior lighting lamps and their controls are combined to provide the following exterior lighting features:
Automatic Headlamps - Vehicles with the automatic headlamps option are equipped with a unique headlamp
switch that includes an automatic position and a sun load sensor located on the top of the instrument panel to
sense ambient light levels. When the Auto position of the headlamp switch is selected, the headlamps are
turned On automatically when ambient light levels are low.
Daytime Running Lamps - Vehicles manufactured for sale in Canada illuminate the low beam filament of the
headlamp bulb in each front lamp unit to serve as the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL). Fleet vehicles manu-
factured for sale in the United States illuminate the high beam filament of the headlamp bulb in each front
lamp unit to serve as the DRL.
Other components of the exterior lighting system for this model include:
Backup Lamp Switch - A Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) integral to the solenoid pack on the valve body
of the electronic automatic transmission performs the backup lamp switch function for this model.
Brake Lamp Switch - A plunger-type brake lamp switch is located on the steering column support bracket
under the instrument panel and is actuated by the brake pedal arm.
Front Control Module - The Front Control Module (FCM) is integral to the Integrated Power Module (IPM).
The FCM/IPM is located in the engine compartment, near the battery and the Power Distribution Center (PDC).
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER DISTRIBUTION - DESCRIPTION).
Headlamp Switch - A headlamp switch is located on the left side of the instrument panel, below and outboard
of the steering column. The headlamp switch includes a rotary knob for the park lamps and headlamps On or
Off, and a push button switch for selecting the front fog lamps on vehicles so equipped. The headlamp switch
also features a vertical thumbwheel for selecting the panel lamps dimming level, a Parade mode to illuminate
all Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) units at full brightness for visibility when driving in daylight with the
exterior lighting turned On, and for interior lighting control.
Instrument Cluster - The ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) is also known as the Cab Control
Node (CCN) in this vehicle. The EMIC/CCN is located in the instrument panel above the steering column
opening, directly in front of the driver. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - DESCRIPTION).
Multi-Function Switch - The multi-function switch is located on the steering column, just below the steering
wheel. A control stalk that extends from the left side of the switch is used to select the turn signal lamps (right
or left) and to select the headlamp beam (low, high or optical horn).
OPERATION
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS
Power is reduced using pulse-width modulation (PWM) to the high beams, where by the power is switched on and
off rapidly instead of remaining on continuously. The duration and interval of the power pulses is programmed into
the IPM.
AUTOMATIC HEADLAMP SYSTEM

Automatic headlamps are controlled by the Cab Compartment Node (CCN). With the headlamp switch in the AUTO
position, the CCN will control the headlamp, parking, side marker, tail and instrumentation lamps based on ambient
light levels. Ambient light levels are monitored by the CCN using the ambient light signal present. Ambient light
readings are averaged to limit cycling the lamps ON and OFF when passing through areas with varying light levels.
The automatic headlamps will only function when the engine is running with the RPM greater than 300. When the
headlamp switch is in the AUTO position (Automatic mode), the Headlamp Time Delay system will function when the
ignition switch is placed in any position other than run/start.
HEADLAMP TIME DELAY SYSTEM

The headlamp time delay system is activated by turning the headlamps ON (high or low beam) while the engine is
running, turning the ignition switch OFF, and then turning the headlamp switch OFF. The Cab Compartment Node
(CCN) will allow the headlamps to remain ON for 90 seconds (configurable) before they automatically turn off (If the
key is in the ignition during the headlamp time delay mode, then both the headlamps and park lamps (including
panel dimming) will be ON). Refer to the Owners Manual for more information.
If the headlamp switch is in the Auto Headlamp Position, the headlamps are ON due to the night signal from the
ambient light sensor and the ignition switch is in any position other than run/start, the CCN shall enter a 90 second
(configurable) Auto Headlamps time delay mode. If the key is in the ignition during the headlamp time delay mode,
then both the headlamps and park lamps (including panel dimming) will be ON. If the key is not in the ignition, then
only the headlamps will be ON. The CCN will allow the headlamps to remain ON for 90 seconds before they auto-
matically turn OFF. Refer to the Owners Manual for more information.
WARNING
Eye protection should be used when servicing glass components. Personal injury or death could result.
This vehicle contains mercury added devices added by the manufacturer: High Intensity Discharge (HID)
headlamps. Remove devices before vehicle disposal. Upon removal of devices, please reuse, recycle, or
dispose of as hazardous waste.
Do not back probe any connectors or pierce any wiring to the HID headlamp system. High voltage (a/c volt-
age) is used in this system and component and personal injury or death could result (Refer to 8 - ELEC-
TRICAL/LAMPS/LIGHTING - EXTERIOR/HEADLAMP - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - HID HEADLAMPS).
Do not power up the headlamp assembly with the headlamp access cover off. A high voltage a/c (alternating
current) shock may occur causing personal injury or death.
On vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steer-
ing column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery nega-
tive cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further
diagnosis or service. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment
and possible personal injury or death.
Do not touch the glass of halogen bulbs with fingers or other possibly oily surface, reduced bulb life will
result. Do not use bulbs other than those indicated in the bulb application table. Damage to lamp and/or
daytime running lamp module can result. Do not use fuses, circuit breakers or relays having greater amper-
age value than indicated on the fuse panel or in the owners manual.
Do not use bulbs other than those listed in the bulb application table. Damage to lamp can result. Do not
touch bulbs with fingers or other oily surfaces. Bulb life will be reduced.
STANDARD PROCEDURE
FRONT LAMP AIMING
VEHICLE PREPARATION FOR LAMP ALIGNMENT
1. Check for and correct any burnt out bulbs.
2. Repair or replace any faulty, worn or damaged body or suspension components that could hinder proper lamp
alignment.
3. Verify proper tire inflation pressures.
4. Remove any accumulations of mud, snow or ice from the vehicle underbody and clean the front lamp lenses.
5. Verify that there is no load in the vehicle (cargo or passengers), except for the driver.
6. The fuel tank should be Full. Add 2.94 kilograms (6.5 pounds) of weight over the fuel tank for each estimated
gallon of missing fuel.
7. Verify correct vehicle suspension height.
LAMP ALIGNMENT SCREEN PREPARATION
The procedure that follows will prepare a suitable front lamp alignment screen.
1. Tape a line on a level floor 7.62 meters (25 feet) away from and parallel to the flat wall that will be used as the
lamp alignment screen. The level floor will be used as the horizontal zero reference.
2. An adjacent wall or floor member that is perpendicular to the alignment screen can be used as the vertical zero
reference. If there is no adjacent wall or floor member that is perpendicular to the screen, tape a second line on
the floor perpendicular to both the alignment screen and the first line, and outboard of either side of where the
vehicle will be positioned. This will be used as the vertical zero reference.
3. Position the vehicle so that the side of the vehicle is parallel to the vertical zero reference, and so that the front
of the lamp lenses are in the vertical plane of the parallel line taped on the floor 7.62 meters (25 feet) away from
the screen.
4. Rock the vehicle side-to-side three times to allow the suspension to stabilize.
5. Jounce the front suspension three times by pushing downward on the front bumper and releasing.
6. Measure the distance between the optical center of one of the lamps being aimed (head or fog) and the floor
(horizontal zero reference). Transfer this measurement to the alignment screen with a piece of tape placed hor-
izontally to the floor. This line will be used as the lamp horizontal reference.
7. Measure the distance between the vertical zero reference and the optical center of the nearest lamp being aimed
(head or fog). Transfer this measurement to the alignment screen with a piece of tape placed vertically across
the appropriate (head or fog) lamp horizontal reference. This is the centerline reference for the first lamp.
8. Measure the distance on center between the first and the second lamp being aimed. Transfer this measurement
to the alignment screen with a second piece of tape placed vertically across the appropriate (head or fog) lamp
horizontal reference. This is the centerline reference for the second lamp.
HEADLAMP ALIGNMENT
There are three different kinds of headlamp aiming procedures:
Visual Aim Optical Left (VOL) - 300C with halogen and 300C w/HID.
Visual Aim Optical Right (VOR) - 300/300 Touring and Dodge Magnum.
Export - 300C w/HID - Export vehicles.
The VOL or VOR is embossed on the lower front of each headlamp unit.
VOL HEADLAMP AIMING
With the horizontal centerline of the headlamp (2) transferred on the wall, measure down 53 mm (2.1 in). This line
(1) will be the vertical aiming mark. Using the left side of the headlamp vertical centerline (3), adjust the headlamp
unit so the residual light from the headlamp, not the hot spot, is even with the line (1) that was marked previously
53 mm (2.1 in) below the horizontal centerline (2). The ideal alignment should be (5). The right headlamp aiming will
be the same, but using the area left of right headlamp vertical centerline (not shown).
1. Turn the headlamps On and select the Low beams.
2. Rotate the headlamp vertical adjustment screw (and horizontal on export) on each lamp to adjust the beam
height as required.
VOR HEADLAMP AIMING
With the horizontal centerline of the headlamp (1) transferred on the wall, this line (1) will be the vertical aiming
mark. Using the right side of the headlamp vertical centerline (2 for the left and 4 for the right), adjust the headlamp
unit so the residual light from the headlamp is even with the horizontal centerline (1). The ideal alignment should be
(5).
height as required.
EXPORT HEADLAMP AIMING
With the horizontal centerline of the headlamp (1) transferred on the wall, measure down 76 mm (3 in). This line (6)
will be the vertical aiming mark. Using the intersecting point (5) of the horizontal centerline (6) and the vertical cen-
terline (2) for the left headlamp, adjust the headlamp unit horizontally and vertically so (5) is the intersecting point
at lines (6 and 2). For the right headlamp unit, cover up the left headlamp and follow the same procedure but
intersecting at (6 and 4).
height as required.
FOG LAMP ALIGNMENT

A properly aimed front fog lamp will project a pattern on the alignment screen 100 millimeters (4 inches) below the
fog lamp centerline and straight ahead of the lamp.
1. Turn the fog lamps On.
2. Rotate the fog lamp vertical adjustment screw (2)
on each lamp to adjust the beam height as
required.
SPECIFICATIONS
EXTERIOR LAMPS
BULB APPLICATION TABLE
LAMP BULB
CHRYSLER 300/300 TOURING
Back-Up 3057
CHMSL LED (Replace as unit)
Front Fog 9145/H10
Front Park/Turn 3757AK
Front Sidemarker W5W
License 168
Rear Sidemarker 168
Tail/Stop/Turn 3057
CHRYSLER 300C
Back-Up 3057
Front Fog 9145/H10
Front Sidemarker W5W
License W5W
Low Beam Headlamp (Halogen) 9006XS
Low Beam Headlamp (HID) DIS
Tail/Stop/Turn 3057
DODGE MAGNUM
Back-Up 921/W16W
Front Fog 9145/H10
Front Sidemarker 194NA
License W5W
Rear Sidemarker 3757APY27/7W
Spot Lamp - Police H3
Tail/Stop/Turn 3157KP27/7W
DODGE CHARGER
Back-Up 921
CHMSL LED (Replaced as unit)
Front Fog 9145/H10
Front Park/Turn 3157NAK
Front Sidemarker 194
LAMP BULB
License 168
Rear Sidemarker 168
Spot Lamp - Police H3
Tail/Stop/Turn 3057
AUTO HEADLAMP SENSOR

REMOVAL
2. Remove the defroster grille (Refer to 23 - BODY/
INSTRUMENT PANEL/DEFROSTER GRILLE -
REMOVAL).
3. Using a trim stick (special tool #C-4755) or equiv-

alent, gently pry up on the auto headlamp sensor
(1).
4. Pull the sensor from the top of the instrument
panel.
5. Disconnect the one electrical connector.
INSTALLATION
1. Connect the one electrical connector.
2. Position the auto headlamp sensor (1) in instru-
ment panel and press firmly down to snap into
place.
3. Install the defroster grille (Refer to 23 - BODY/IN-

STRUMENT PANEL/DEFROSTER GRILLE -
INSTALLATION).
CENTER HIGH MOUNTED STOP LAMP

REMOVAL
SEDAN
2. Remove the rear shelf trim panel (Refer to 23 -
BODY/INTERIOR/REAR SHELF TRIM PANEL -
REMOVAL).
3. Disconnect the CHMSL electrical connector (1).
4. Remove the two mounting fasteners (3) to the

CHMSL (2).
WAGON
1. Remove the rear spoiler (Refer to 23 - BODY/EX-

TERIOR/SPOILER - REMOVAL).
2. With the rear spoiler on bench, remove the fasten-
ers and electrical connector from the CHMSL.
INSTALLATION
SEDAN
1. Place the center high mounted stop lamp (2) into
position at the bottom of the backlite.
2. Install and tighten the mounting fasteners (3).
3. Connect the electrical connector (1).


TION).
WAGON
1. Place the CHMSL on the spoiler (1) and install and
tighten the mounting fasteners.
2. Install the spoiler (Refer to 23 - BODY/EXTERIOR/
SPOILER - INSTALLATION).
FOG LAMP UNIT

REMOVAL
2. Open hood and remove the upper radiator closeout
panel (2 and 4).
3. Remove the six upper fascia retaining fasteners
(Refer to 13 - FRAME & BUMPERS/BUMPERS/
FRONT FASCIA - REMOVAL).
4. Remove the headlamp unit (Refer to 8 - ELECTRI-

CAL/LAMPS/LIGHTING - EXTERIOR/HEADLAMP
UNIT - REMOVAL).
5. From behind the bumper fascia, disconnect the

harness connector.
6. Remove two fog lamp unit mounting fasteners.
7. Remove fog lamp unit (1).
INSTALLATION
1. Position the fog lamp unit (1) in fascia opening.
2. Install the two fog lamp unit mounting fasteners.
3. Connect the harness connector.
4. Install the headlamp unit (Refer to 8 - ELECTRI-

UNIT - INSTALLATION).
5. Install the six upper fascia retaining fasteners

FRONT FASCIA - INSTALLATION).
6. Install the upper radiator closeout panel (2 and 4).
FRONT SIDE MARKER LAMP

REMOVAL
CHRYSLER
UNIT - REMOVAL).
3. It may be necessary to loosen the fascia (1) to gain

access to the side marker lamp (Refer to 13 -
FRAME & BUMPERS/BUMPERS/FRONT FASCIA -
REMOVAL).
4. Remove side marker lamp from side marker lamp
unit by twisting lamp socket.
DODGE
UNIT - REMOVAL).
3. Remove the front side marker lamp from the head-

lamp unit.
INSTALLATION
CHRYSLER
1. Install the side marker lamp into side marker lamp
unit by twisting lamp socket.
2. If the fascia (1) was loosened to gain access to the
side marker lamp, install the fascia (Refer to 13 -
INSTALLATION).

DODGE
1. Install the front side marker lamp into the headlamp

unit.

FRONT SIDE MARKER LAMP UNIT - CHARGER

REMOVAL
1. Open hood, disconnect and isolate the battery neg-
ative cable.
2. If removing the left front side marker lamp unit, the
air cleaner housing must be removed to gain
access to the release tabs (Refer to 9 - ENGINE/
AIR INTAKE SYSTEM - REMOVAL). The right side
is accessible without removing any components.
3. Reach in behind the headlamp unit and on the out-
board side of the unit, find and pinch together the
release tabs (1) of the front side marker lamp unit
(2).
4. Push the unit (2) forward and out of the front fas-
cia.
5. Disconnect the side marker lamp unit connector by
releasing the retaining tab and pull it out of the
lamp unit.
INSTALLATION
1. Connect the side marker lamp unit (2) electrical
connector.
2. Push the unit (2) rearward making sure that the
alignment dowel (3) is lined up and firmly push into
place until it seats with a snap.
3. If the left front side marker lamp unit was replaced,
the air cleaner housing must be reinstalled (Refer
to 9 - ENGINE/AIR INTAKE SYSTEM - INSTALLA-
TION).
4. Connect the battery negative cable and close hood.
FRONT PARK/TURN SIGNAL LAMP

REMOVAL
2. From atop the headlamp unit, reach behind and
just below the upper radiator crossmember and
twist the park/turn signal lamp socket out.
3. Remove the lamp from the socket.
INSTALLATION
1. Install lamp into socket.
2. Install lamp socket (1) into the headlamp unit. Twist
sochet clockwise.
HEADLAMP
DESCRIPTION
Quad headlamps are standard equipment on this model. They are halogen headlamps, both low and high beams.
This vehicle may be equipped with optional High
Intensity Discharge (HID) low beams. The HID type
lamp is used in place of the conventional halogen low
beam lamp. High beam lamps remain the same halo-
gen type.
HID lamps get their name from the intense white light
produced by the electrical discharge. The light pro-
duced by the HID lamps appears as a white color as
opposed to the yellow color of the standard halogen
lamps.
HID lighting provides about three times the light output
of standard halogen lamps while using less energy.
The lamps are also designed to last 10 times longer
than standard halogen lamps.
OPERATION
To turn on the headlamps, turn the left knob of the
headlamp switch clockwise to the first detent for park-
ing lamp and instrument panel lamp operation. Turn to
the second detent for headlamp, park lamp and instru-
ment panel lamp operation.
High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) rely on an AC (alternating current) electrical charge to ignite xenon gas
contained in a sealed beam lamp. The HID lamps are similar in operation to common vapor filled street headlamps.
Instead of using a filament to produce light, the gas inside the lamp is ignited by creating an arc between two
electrodes.
The color of the light source is classified as its color temperature. As the color temperature increases, the color of
the light moves from yellow to blue-white to white. The light produced by the HID lamps appears as a white color
as opposed to the yellow color of the standard (halogen) lamps. HID lamps provide light as a higher color temper-
ature than standard halogen lamps.
For the color temperature of different lamp types, refer to the COLOR TEMPERATURE table. As a point of refer-
ence, typical sunlight at noon has a color temperature of 4977 C (8990 F).
COLOR TEMPERATURE
LAMP TEMPERATURE
INCANDESCENT LAMPS 2527 C (4580 F)
HALOGEN LAMPS 2927 C (5300 F)
HID LAMPS 3827 C (6920 F)
There are three components to each of the HID headlamps:
1. Ballast Module - The 12 volt Direct Current (DC)
power supplied by the low beam relay is converted
to Alternating Current (AC) power by the ballast
module. Each lamp requires its own ballast mod-
ule. The ballast converts and steps up the low
beam relay output to 800 volts AC, and supplies
the lamp assembly via a cable connected to the
igniter.
2. Lamp/Igniter - The lamp contains electrodes and

xenon gas. The lamp takes about 10-15 seconds of
warm-up time to reach full operation. The light
appears blue during warm-up and then turns to
white. The igniter controls the voltage applied to
the lamp electrodes. The igniter uses the voltage
supplied by the ballast module and momentarily
steps up the voltage to 25,000 volts to start the
lamp. Once ignited, it will reduce the voltage to 85
volts.
3. Cable - The cable is used to transfer the high volt-

age produced by the ballast module to the
lamp/igniter.

HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE HEADLAMPS
The High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps are supplied B+ voltage and ground, the same as normal halogen
low beam lamps. The low beam system is different from there forward. The ballast module is mounted to the bottom
of the headlamp unit. The ballast module has internal circuit protection to prevent module damage in case of an
open or shorted circuit. The module has overcharge and undercharge circuit protection. If either is sensed, the mod-
ule will not illuminate the headlamps for that key cycle or until the fault is corrected. Recycle the ignition and head-
lamp switch if both headlamps do not illuminate. Before determining the headlamp assembly is faulty, check the
connector at the headlamp and check if there is voltage coming from the IPM pin providing the power to the respec-
tive headlamp. If the module senses a short or open circuit condition, it will not operate the lamp/igniter.
WARNING: The headlamp unit must be removed to perform these tests (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/LAMPS/
LIGHTING - EXTERIOR/HEADLAMP UNIT - REMOVAL). Failure to do so could result in personal injury or
death.
1. Inspect lamp for a burned out lamp. If lamp is burned out it will appear black or smoky, similar to a normal
halogen bulb. If lamp looks OK, go to Step 2.
2. Check for B+ battery voltage at the connector going into the ballast module. Refer to Wiring Diagrams for con-
nector location. If battery voltage and a good ground are present, go to Step 3. If B+ voltage and a good ground
are not present, refer to Wiring Diagrams for circuit and connector locations to find short or open circuit.
3. Plug in a known good ballast module and check for lamp operation. If lamp lights, replace ballast module. If lamp
still fails to light, replace igniter assembly.
REMOVAL
HALOGEN HEADLAMP
NOTE: If replacing the left low or high beam head-
lamp, the air box has to be removed first (Refer to
9 - ENGINE/AIR INTAKE SYSTEM - REMOVAL).

2. Disconnect the lamp electrical connector.
3. Twist lamp (1 and 2) out of headlamp housing.
HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE (HID) HEADLAMPS (IF EQUIPPED) - LOW BEAM

HEADLAMP
NOTE: If replacing the left front low beam HID

headlamp, the air box has to be removed first
(Refer to 9 - ENGINE/AIR INTAKE SYSTEM -
REMOVAL).

2. Remove the rubber boot (1) protecting the lamp/ig-
niter from the elements.
3. Disconnect the electrical cable connector to the

lamp/igniter by pulling straight down.
4. Release the retaining wire clip on the back of the

lamp/igniter.
5. Grab the igniter by pulling rearward and rocking it
slightly as you pull.
6. Pull the igniter straight out of the headlamp unit.
The lamp is integral to the igniter and cannot be
separated.
BALLAST MODULE
UNIT - REMOVAL).
2. From the underside of the headlamp unit, remove

the six retaining screws (1).
3. Pull the ballast module out of headlamp unit.

4. Disconnect the two electrical connectors (1 and 2).
One of the connectors (1) will be a standard
push tab to release connector.
The second connector (2) has a lever that must
be rotated away or down from the wire of the
cable and connector.
5. Separate ballast module from headlamp unit.
CABLE
UNIT - REMOVAL).
2. From the underside of the headlamp unit, remove

3. Pull the ballast module out of headlamp unit.

4. Disconnect the cable connector (2) Move the lever
away or down from the wire of the cable and
connector.
5. Remove the rubber boot (1) protecting the lamp/ig-

6. Disconnect the electrical cable connector to the

lamp/igniter by pulling straight down.
7. Maneuver cable through headlamp unit to

separate.
INSTALLATION
HALOGEN HEADLAMP
1. Twist lamp (1 or 2) into headlamp housing clock-
wise.
2. Connect the lamp electrical connector.
NOTE: If replacing the left low or high beam head-

lamp, the air box has to be reinstalled (Refer to 9 -
ENGINE/AIR INTAKE SYSTEM - INSTALLATION).
HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE (HID) HEADLAMPS (IF EQUIPPED) - LOW BEAM

HEADLAMP
1. Push the igniter straight into the headlamp unit with
the connector pointing straight down. The lamp is
integral to the igniter.
2. Put the retaining wire clip on the back of the
lamp/igniter.
3. Connect the electrical cable connector to the

lamp/igniter.
4. Install the rubber boot (1) protecting the lamp/ig-

NOTE: If replacing the left low beam headlamp, the

air box has to be reinstalled (Refer to 9 - ENGINE/
AIR INTAKE SYSTEM - INSTALLATION).
BALLAST MODULE
1. Connect the two electrical connectors (1 and 2).

One of the connectors (1) will be a standard
push tab to release connector.
The second connector (2) has a lever that must
be locked when connected.
2. Position the ballast module in of headlamp unit.
3. From the underside of the headlamp unit, install


CABLE
1. Maneuver cable through headlamp unit.
2. Connect the cable electrical connectors (2). The

connector (2) has a lever that must be locked when
connected.
3. From the underside of the headlamp unit, install

4. Connect the electrical cable connector to the

lamp/igniter.
5. Install the rubber boot (1) protecting the lamp/ig-


HEADLAMP LEVELING MODULE - EXPORT

DESCRIPTION
The Headlamp Leveling Module or HID Translator
Module is the remote electronic sub-component of the
headlamp leveling system. The HID translator module
is used to translate communication of the headlamps
leveling system. The sensors communicate over a
K-Line to the headlamp stepper motors, then to the
translator module. To enable the scan tool to read sys-
tem inputs and outputs, and to retrieve Diagnostic
Trouble Codes (DTCs), the translator module must
convert this K-Line data into Controller Area Network
(CAN) data.
The HID translator module is located inside the right
front engine compartment, just behind the headlamp
unit. It is mounted to a stamped steel bracket by one
fastener and has one electrical connector that con-
nects it to the wiring harness.
OPERATION
The system is designed to automatically level the vehicles headlamps, regardless of cargo or passenger loads or
road conditions. When the vehicle is loaded with passengers and/or cargo, as the ignition is turned to RUN, the
system will look at the front and rear sensors and make an adjustment based upon feedback from the sensor to see
if it has approximately 27.5 degrees from its zero or neutral position. The headlamp stepper motor then adjusts the
headlamp up or down for proper headlamp aiming. The system is dynamic. The headlamp level will be adjusted
while driving if required based on sensor inputs.
NOTE: If the headlamp leveling module (HID translator module) or sensors are replaced, the system needs
to be calibrated using a Scan Tool.
When in calibration mode, the key in the RUN position, the vehicle doors, trunk/liftgate, and hood must be closed.
In addition, no one is seated in vehicle, the vehicle may not be touched (bounced or bumped) until the calibration
is complete. The headlamps must be ON to power the stepper motors. The approximate calibration time is 12 - 15
seconds. The scan tool will display a status of calibration message. These being either still in progress, passed,
or failed.
If a system fault occurs, the translator module will store the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) and enable it to be read
using the scan tool and assist in diagnosing the headlamp leveling system.
REMOVAL
2. Disconnect the one electrical connector to the HID
translator module (1).
3. Remove the one nut (2) holding the module (1) to
the bracket.
INSTALLATION
WARNING: When replacing the headlamp leveling module/HID translator module, the system must be cali-
brated using a Scan Tool.
1. Install the one nut (2) holding the module (1) to the
bracket.
2. Connect the one electrical connector to the HID
translator module.
4. Using a Scan Tool, calibrate the headlamp levelling
system.
HEADLAMP LEVEL SENSOR - EXPORT

DESCRIPTION
The headlamp leveling system uses two headlamp
level sensors to determine when the vehicle has had
its ride height or angle changes, due to passenger/
cargo additions and road conditions.
There is one sensor (1) mounted on the spring link (3)

on the right side of the rear suspension.
There is a second sensor (2) mounted on the upper

control arm (1) on the right side, in the front of the
vehicle.
Each sensor has a link that is connected to the sus-
pension and to the sensor, one electrical connector
that connects the sensor to the vehicles electrical sys-
tem wiring harness, and one bracket that mounts with
one nut to the vehicle.
OPERATION
The system is designed to automatically level the headlamps, regardless of cargo/passenger loads or road condi-
tions. When the vehicle is loaded with passengers and/or cargo, as the ignition is turned to RUN, the system will
look at the front and rear sensors and make an adjustment to the headlamp stepper motors based upon feedback
from the sensor to see if it has moved approximately 27.5 degrees from its zero or neutral position. The headlamp
stepper motor then adjusts the headlamp up or down for proper headlamp aiming.
The headlamp level sensors act like a potentiometer to relay information via the data bus to the HID translator
module when the vehicle has changed its angle or ride height in either the front or rear of the vehicle.
NOTE: If the headlamp leveling module (HID translator module) or sensors are replaced, the system needs
to be calibrated using a Scan Tool.
When in calibration mode, the vehicle doors, trunk/liftgate, and hood must be closed. In addition, the vehicle may
not be touched (bounced or bumped) until the calibration is complete. The headlamps must be ON to power the
stepper motors. The approximate calibration time is 12 - 15 seconds. The scan tool will display a status of cali-
bration message. These being either still in progress, passed, or failed.
If a system fault occurs, the translator module will store the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) and enable it to be read
using the scan tool and assist in diagnosing the headlamp leveling system.
REMOVAL
FRONT
2. Hoist vehicle.
3. Unsnap the sensor link from the upper control arm
(front) (1).
4. Disconnect the one electrical connector (4).
5. Remove the two speed nuts (3) to remove sensor
and bracket (2).
REAR
2. Hoist vehicle.
3. Unsnap the sensor link from the spring link (rear)
(3).
5. Remove the two fasteners to the sensor and
bracket (1).
INSTALLATION
FRONT
1. Install the two retaining nuts (3) to the sensor and
bracket (2).
2. Connect the one electrical connector (4).
3. Snap the sensor link onto the upper control arm
(front) (1).
4. Remove the vehicle from the hoist.
6. Using a Scan Tool, calibrate the headlamp leveling
system.
REAR
1. Install the fasteners to the sensor and bracket (1).
3. Snap the sensor link onto the spring link (rear) (3).
4. Remove the vehicle from the hoist.
6. Using a Scan Tool, calibrate the headlamp leveling
system.
SWITCH-HEADLAMP
REMOVAL
WARNING: Wait two minutes for the airbag system reserve capacitor to discharge before beginning any air-
bag system or component service. Failure to do so may result in accidental airbag deployment, personal
injury or death.
2. Remove steering column opening cover (Refer to

COLUMN OPENING COVER - REMOVAL).
3. From underneath and behind the instrument panel,
push up on the lower clip on headlamp switch then
wiggle it down and out of instrument panel.
4. Disconnect the headlamp switch electrical
connector.
INSTALLATION
1. Connect the headlamp switch electrical connector.
2. Position headlamp switch in instrument panel and
firmly snap into place.
3. Install the steering column opening cover (Refer to
COLUMN OPENING COVER - INSTALLATION).
HEADLAMP UNIT
REMOVAL - 300C AND MAGNUM
2. Open hood and remove the two upper headlamp
unit mounting screws.
3. The two upper retaining screws (1) are located just

in front of the upper radiator cross-member.
NOTE: It may be necessary to loosen the side of

the fascia to access the lower headlamp unit
retaining screw (Refer to 13 - FRAME & BUMPERS/
BUMPERS/FRONT FASCIA - REMOVAL).
4. Remove the one lower headlamp unit retaining

screw.
5. Disconnect the electrical connectors.

6. Separate headlamp unit from vehicle.
REMOVAL - CHARGER
1. On Charger models, the fascia must first be removed to gain access for the removal of headlamp unit and fas-
teners (Refer to 13 - FRAME & BUMPERS/BUMPERS/FRONT FASCIA - REMOVAL).
3. Open hood and remove the two upper headlamp
unit mounting screws.
4. The two upper retaining screws (1) are located just

in front of the upper radiator cross-member.
5. Remove the one lower headlamp unit retaining

screw.
6. Disconnect the electrical connectors.

7. Separate headlamp unit from vehicle.
INSTALLATION - 300C AND MAGNUM

1. Position the headlamp unit in the opening in the
headlamp mounting cross-member.
2. Connect the electrical connector.
3. Install the one lower headlamp unit retaining screw.
NOTE: If the fascia was loosened, reattach it

FRONT FASCIA - INSTALLATION).
4. Install the two upper retaining screws (1).

INSTALLATION - CHARGER
1. Position the headlamp unit in the opening in the

headlamp mounting cross-member.
3. Install the one lower headlamp unit retaining screw.
4. Install the two upper retaining screws (1).

5. Install front fascia (Refer to 13 - FRAME & BUMPERS/BUMPERS/FRONT FASCIA - INSTALLATION).

LICENSE PLATE LAMP UNIT

REMOVAL
1. Remove the two mounting screws (1) to the license
lamp unit.
2. Remove the lamp socket from the lamp unit by

twisting socket counterclockwise.
3. Separate socket from lamp.
INSTALLATION
1. Position lamp socket into lamp unit.
2. Twist the socket clockwise until stops.
3. Maneuver the lamp unit up into rear fascia and

install the two retaining screws (1).
MULTI-FUNCTION SWITCH
DESCRIPTION
The multi-function switch (2) is located on the steering
column, just below the steering wheel, within the
Steering Column Control Module (SCCM).
The only visible components of the multi-function

switch are the control stalk and control knob that
extend through the SCCM on the left side of the col-
umn. The remainder of the switch including its mount-
ing provisions, its electrical connection, and the turn
signal cancel actuator are concealed within the
SCCM.
Each of the switch controls has white International Control and Display Symbol graphics applied to it, which clearly
identify its many functions. Three integral locating posts on the switch housing, slide into channels in a receptacle
in the circuit board within the SCCM. A single integral connector receptacle in the circuit board connects the switch
to the vehicle electrical system through the instrument panel wire harness.
The multi-function switch provides the vehicle operator with a control interface for the following functions:
Front Washer Control - The multi-function switch control knob provides a momentary position for front washer
system operation.
Front Wiper Control - The multi-function switch control knob provides two continuous front wipe switch posi-
tions, low speed or high speed; and, an intermittent front wipe mode with six delay interval positions.
Headlamp Beam Selection - The multi-function switch control stalk provides detent switching for selection of
the headlamp high or low beams. There is also an intermediate momentary position that allows the headlamp
high beam circuits to be momentarily flashed to provide an optical horn feature (sometimes referred to as
flash-to-pass) as an optical signalling device.
Turn Signal Control - The multi-function switch control stalk provides momentary non-detent (lane change)
switching and detent switching with automatic cancellation for both the left and right turn signal lamps.
The multi-function switch cannot be adjusted or repaired. If any function of the switch is faulty, or if the switch is
damaged, the entire switch must be replaced as a unit (Refer to 19 - STEERING/COLUMN/STEERING COLUMN
CONTROL MODULE - DISASSEMBLY).
OPERATION
The multi-function switch operates as follows:
Front Washer Control - The control knob on the end of the multi-function switch control stalk is depressed
towards the steering column to momentarily activate the washer pump in the front washer mode. The washer
pump will continue to operate in the front washer mode until the control knob is released. The multi-function
switch provides an output by sending electronic front washer switch status messages to the Front Control Mod-
ule (FCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The FCM responds by energizing or de-energiz-
ing the washer pump in the front washer mode.
Front Wiper Control - The control knob on the end of the multi-function switch control stalk is rotated to one
of the continuous front wiper detents, to one of six intermittent ( or auto wipe sensitivity positions if so
equipped) wiper detents, or to the Off position to select the front wiper mode. The multi-function switch pro-
vides an output by sending electronic front wiper switch status messages to the FCM over the CAN data bus.
The FCM responds by energizing or de-energizing the wiper on/off and high/low relays in the Power Distribu-
tion Center (PDC) for front wiper system control.
Headlamp Beam Selection - The control stalk of the multi-function switch is pushed toward the instrument
panel for a latching high beam selection. Pulling the stalk rearward toward the steering wheel for a latching low
beam selection. Each time the control stalk is actuated to the momentary position with the headlamps turned
off, the headlamp high beams will be illuminated for as long as the control stalk is held in this position. The
multi-function switch provides an output to the FCM over the CAN data bus. The FCM energizes or de-ener-
gizes the selected low or high beam circuits.
Turn Signal Control - The control stalk of the multi-function switch is moved upward to activate the right turn
signal circuitry, and, downward to activate the left turn signal circuitry. The turn signal switch has a detent
position in each direction that provides turn signals with automatic cancellation, and an intermediate, momen-
tary position in each direction that provides turn signals only until the control stalk is released. When the con-
trol stalk is moved to a turn signal switch detent position, the cancel actuator extends toward the center of the
steering column. A turn signal cancel cam that is integral to the clockspring rotates with the steering wheel and
the cam lobes contact the cancel actuator when it is extended from the multi-function switch. When the steer-
ing wheel is rotated during a turning maneuver, one of the two turn signal cancel cam lobes will contact the
turn signal cancel actuator. The cancel actuator latches against the cancel cam rotation in the direction oppo-
site that which is signaled. If the left turn signal detent is selected, the lobes of the cancel cam will ratchet past
the cancel actuator when the steering wheel is rotated to the left, but will unlatch the cancel actuator as the
steering wheel rotates to the right and returns to center, which will cancel the turn signal event and release the
control stalk from the detent so it returns to the neutral Off position. When a turn signal is activated, the multi-
function switch provides an output to the FCM over the CAN data bus. In addition, the message is sent to the
CCN via the CAN bus to activate the proper signal within the EMIC. The FCM energizes and flashes or de-
energizes the selected left or right turn signal circuits.
The multi-function switch can be diagnosed using a diagnostic scan tool and the appropriate diagnostic information.
The multi-function switch cannot be adjusted or repaired. If any function of the switch is faulty, or if the switch is
damaged, the entire switch must be replaced as a unit (Refer to 19 - STEERING/COLUMN/STEERING COLUMN
CONTROL MODULE - DISASSEMBLY).
REPEATER LAMP - EXPORT

REMOVAL
1. Push lamp (3) to the left and disengage lamp by
rotating it out of the metal around its left edge.
2. Remove lamp.
3. Rotate Socket out.
4. Remove Bulb.
INSTALLATION
1. Replace Bulb.
2. Engage right hook of lamp (3) into the sheet metal
(2 - note correct orientation of lettering on lens).
3. Rotate lamp in place until left side engages (light
audible click).
SWITCH - STOP LAMP

DESCRIPTION
The stop lamp switch (2) is located under the instru-
ment panel at the brake pedal arm. This switch con-
tains three internal switches controlling various
functions of the vehicle, one of them controls opera-
tion of the vehicles brake lamps. Other functions of
the internal switches include speed control deactiva-
tion and brake sense for the ABS and the brake trans-
mission shift interlock.
OPERATION
The stop lamp switch has three internal switches used for various functions. Among these are:
Brake lamp actuation
Speed control deactivation, and
Brake sense for ABS and brake transmission shift interlock
When the brake pedal is in the released position, the plunger on the outside of the stop lamp switch is pushed
inward by the brake pedal. In this position, the electrical contacts for one internal switch are open while the electrical
contacts for other two internal switches are closed.
When the brake pedal is pressed, the plunger on the outside of the stop lamp switch extends outward. This action
closes the electrical contacts for the one internal switch and opens the contacts for the remaining two switches
within the stop lamp switch. The internal switch which closes when the brake pedal is pressed completes the circuit
to the brake lamps at the rear of the vehicle, thus allowing illumination of the brake lamps and the center-high-
mounted stop lamp (CHMSL).

STOP LAMP SWITCH
NOTE: Before proceeding with this diagnostic test, verify the adjustment of the stop lamp switch to rule out
misadjustment. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/LAMPS/LIGHTING - EXTERIOR/STOP LAMP SWITCH - ADJUST-
MENTS)
If the electrical circuit has been tested and the stop lamp switch is suspected of being faulty, it can be tested using
the following method.
1. Remove the switch from the vehicle. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/LAMPS/LIGHTING - EXTERIOR/STOP LAMP
SWITCH - REMOVAL)
2. With the switch in the released position (plunger
extended), use an ohmmeter to test each of the
three internal switches as shown. You should
achieve the results as indicated in the figure.
3. Gently push the plunger on the stop lamp switch in

until it stops.
4. With the switch in the depressed position (plunger
pushed in), use an ohmmeter to test each of the
three internal switches as shown. You should
achieve the results as indicated in the figure.
If you do not achieve the results as indicated in both
figures, the switch is faulty and must be replaced.
5. Install the switch in the vehicle. (Refer to 8 - ELEC-
TRICAL/LAMPS/LIGHTING - EXTERIOR/STOP
LAMP SWITCH - INSTALLATION)
REMOVAL
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2. Remove the stop lamp switch (2) from its bracket
on the brake pedal assembly (6). To do so, rotate
the stop lamp switch in a counterclockwise direc-
tion approximately 30 degrees from its proper
mounting position. Pull the switch rearward and
remove it from its mounting bracket.
3. Disconnect the wiring harness connector (1) from
the switch.
INSTALLATION
NOTE: Prior to installing the stop lamp switch into its bracket, the plunger must be moved to its fully
extended position using the procedure described in Step 1.
1. Hold the stop lamp switch firmly in one hand. Using your other hand, pull outward on the plunger of the switch
until it has ratcheted out to its fully extended position.
2. Connect the wiring harness connector (1) to the
stop lamp switch (2).
3. Mount the stop lamp switch into the bracket on the
brake pedal assembly (6) as follows: Depress the
brake pedal as far down as possible. Install the
switch in its bracket by aligning the index key on
switch with the notch in the square mounting hole
of the mounting bracket. Once the switch is fully
seated, rotate the switch clockwise approximately
30 degrees to lock the switch into the bracket.
CAUTION: Do not use excessive force when pull-

ing back on the brake pedal to adjust the stop
lamp switch. If to much force is used, damage to
the stop lamp switch or striker can result.
4. Gently pull back on brake pedal until the pedal

stops moving. This will cause the switch plunger to
ratchet backward to the correct position.
5. Check for proper operation of the brake lamps and
speed control.
ADJUSTMENTS
STOP LAMP SWITCH ADJUSTMENT
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2. Remove the stop switch from its bracket. To do so, rotate the stop lamp switch in a counterclockwise direction
approximately 30 degrees from its proper mounting position. Pull the switch rearward and remove it from its
mounting bracket.
3. Hold the stop lamp switch firmly in one hand. Using your other hand, pull outward on the plunger of the switch
until it has ratcheted out to its fully extended position.
4. Mount the stop lamp switch into the bracket as follows: Depress the brake pedal as far down as possible. Install
the switch in its bracket by aligning the index key on switch with the notch in the square mounting hole of the
mounting bracket. Once the switch is fully seated, rotate the switch clockwise approximately 30 degrees to lock
the switch into the bracket.
CAUTION: Do not use excessive force when pulling back on the brake pedal to adjust the stop lamp switch.
If to much force is used, damage to the stop lamp switch or striker can result.
5. Gently pull back on brake pedal until the pedal stops moving. This will cause the switch plunger to ratchet back-
ward to the correct position.
6. Check for proper operation of the brake lamps and speed control.
TAIL LAMP UNIT

REMOVAL
SEDAN
2. From inside the trunk, peel back the trunk trim and
disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Remove the three plastic wing nuts (3).

4. Pull the tail lamp unit (1) straight out of the rear of
the quarter trim panel.
WAGON

2. Remove the two push fasteners (1) in the liftgate
opening.
3. From inside the cargo area, using a trim stick (spe-

cial tool #C-4755) or equivalent, gently pry the
access panel off the rear of the quarter trim panel.
4. Remove the one plastic wing nut.
5. Pulling rearward, release the mounting tabs of the

tail lamp unit (1).
6. Disconnect the electrical connector (3) from tail

lamp unit (1).
1. Twist counterclockwise to remove the Stop (1),

Turn Signal (2), or Back-Up lamps.
INSTALLATION
SEDAN
1. Position the tail lamp unit (1) in the rear quarter
panel of vehicle.
2. Install and tighten the three plastic wing nuts (3).
3. From within the trunk, connect the electrical con-

nector (1) to tail lamp unit (2).
4. Replace trunk carpeting.
WAGON
1. Connect the electrical connector (3) to the tail lamp

unit (2).
2. Position the tail lamp unit (2) in quarter panel open-

ing.
3. Give a firm push forward to seat the indexing pins.
4. Install and tighten the one plastic wing nut.
5. Install the two push pin fasteners (1) in the liftgate

opening.
SPOT LAMP - POLICE

REMOVAL
1. Remove the PDC cover and pull the fuse, depend-
ing on which spot lamp is being serviced.
2. Raise the spot lamp from the stowed to the oper-
ating position.
3. Support the spot lamp sealed beam in position.
4. Remove the screws (1) retaining the bezel to the
spot lamp head assembly.
5. Remove the bezel from the spot lamp head assem-
bly.
6. Tilt the sealed beam (2) away from the spot lamp
head assembly.
7. Disconnect the electrical connector to the spot
lamp head assembly.
8. Remove the bulb from the lamp housing by moving
the hold downs.
9. Remove bulb from lamp.
INSTALLATION
1. Position bulb into spot lamp assembly.
2. Install the hold downs.
3. Connect the electrical connector to the spot lamp
head assembly.
4. Tilt the sealed beam (2) toward the spot lamp head
assembly.
5. Install the bezel to the spot lamp head assembly.
6. Install the screws (1) retaining the bezel to the spot
lamp head assembly.
7. Lower the spot lamp from the operating to stowed
position.
8. Install the fuse and PDC cover.
SPOT LAMP ASSEMBLY - POLICE

DESCRIPTION
This vehicle may be equipped with up to two spot
lamp assemblies attached to the A-Pillars. The spot
lamp assembly switch is located on the handle just
above the rotating handle grip.
Each spot lamp assembly contains a 100 watt halogen
bulb. The spot lamp assemblies are fused individually
and powered hot at all times. There are three fuses in
the Power Distribution Center (PDC) that control the
spot lamp assemblies:
The parts available for service are:
Complete spot lamp assembly.
H3 100 watt halogen bulb.
Inside control handle w/switch.
OPERATION
Use this switch (1) to turn the spot lamp assembly ON
and OFF. Rotate and twist the handle to adjust the
position of the spot lamp assembly.

SPOT LAMP ASSEMBLY - POLICE
IF SPOT LAMP DOES NOT LIGHT
1. If both spot lamps are inoperative, check spot lamp master fuse. Refer to Wiring Diagrams for fuse locations. If
fuse is OK, refer to Step 4. If fuse is damaged or inoperative, replace as necessary.
2. If the left spot lamp is inoperative, check fuse. If fuse is OK, refer to Step 4. If fuse is damaged or inoperative,
replace as necessary. If fuse blows again, find short to ground. Refer to Wiring Diagrams for circuit information.
3. If the right spot lamp is inoperative, check fuse. If fuse is OK, refer to Step 4. If fuse is damaged or inoperative,
replace as necessary. If fuse blows again, find short to ground. Refer to Wiring Diagrams for circuit information.
4. Check for B+ power at the spot lamp bulb with switch turned ON (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/LAMPS/LIGHTING
- EXTERIOR/SPOT LAMP - REMOVAL). If there is B+ power at the spot lamp bulb connector, replace bulb. If
there is not B+ power present, refer to Step 5.
5. If there is not B+ power present at the spot lamp with the switch turned on, check circuit for an open. Possibly
the connector in the A-pillar. Refer to Wiring Diagrams for circuit information.
6. If there is B+ power at the spot lamp connector, and no B+ power at the spot lamp bulb, then the switch is
damaged or inoperative within the spot lamp assembly and the entire unit must be replaced. (Refer to 8 - ELEC-
TRICAL/LAMPS/LIGHTING - EXTERIOR/SPOT LAMP - REMOVAL).
7. If lamp still does not light, remove the handle (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/LAMPS/LIGHTING - EXTERIOR/SPOT
LAMP - REMOVAL), and check the contact on the shaft end of the head assembly into the handle to make sure
the contact is not damaged.
IF SPOT LAMP IS HARD TO TURN

1. Check that the head housing clamping screw creates just enough drag to hold the spot lamp head in position in
windy conditions. Extreme drag will require more force on the handle to move the spot lamp head and cause
damage.
REMOVAL
CAUTION: Make sure that the master spot lamp
feed or either the left or right spot lamp feed are
removed from the Power Distribution Center (PDC)
before performing service on the spot lamps.
1. Remove the fuse cover and pull the fuse, depend-

ing on which spot lamp is being serviced.
2. Raise the spot lamp from the stowed to the oper-
ating position.
3. Using a trim stick or equivalent, gently pry out on
the A-pillar trim to release it. This will allow access
to the spot lamp electrical connector.
4. Remove the instrument panel end cap.
5. Disconnect the spot lamp electrical connector
(located behind the instrument panel end-cap).
6. Loosen, but do not remove the bolt (1) retaining

the handle to the outer tube.
NOTE: Do not remove the bolt all the way.
7. Using a plastic tipped hammer, gently tap the head

of the handle retaining bolt and the opposing
wedge nut.
8. Remove the handle from the outer tube.
9. Remove the A-pillar trim from the spot lamp outer
tube.
CAUTION: Support the head of the spot lamp

while loosening the head assembly clamp screw.
10. Loosen the clamp screw (1) at the base of the

spot lamp head assembly.
11. Carefully remove the spot lamp head with the

intermediate and inner shafts from the outer tube
and mounting bracket.
12. Remove the screws retaining the spot lamp

mounting bracket to the A-pillar.
13. Remove the spot lamp outer tube and mounting
bracket from the A-pillar.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Make sure that the master spot lamp
feed or either the left or right spot lamp feed are
removed from the Power Distribution Center (PDC)
before performing service on the spot lamps.
1. Install the spot lamp outer tube and mounting

bracket to the A-pillar.
2. Install the screws retaining the spot lamp mounting
bracket to the A-pilla and tighten to 33 Nm (29 in.
lbs.).
3. Carefully lift the edge of the secondary door seal
along the windshield pillar to expose the spot lamp
outer tube and apply a small amount of clear sili-
cone sealer to the base of the outer tube.
4. Carefully install the spot lamp head with the inter-

mediate and inner shafts to the outer tube and
mounting bracket until the head assembly bottoms
out on the outer tube.
5. Tighten the clamp screw (1) at the base of the spot

lamp head assembly in small increments while test-
ing the effort required to rotate the spot lamp
between the stowed and operating positions. Stop
tightening the clamp screw when the spot lamp can
maintain any desired position.
6. Position the A-pillar trim to the spot lamp outer

tube.
CAUTION: Support the head of the spot lamp

while tightening the head assembly clamp screw.
Maintain an operating or vertical position.
7. Install the handle to the outer tube.

a. Position the spot lamp handle in the operating
(downward close to vertical) position to the
outer tube.
b. There are two detent positions to which the
handle must line up and engage. Rotate the
knob of the handle and the handle base to aid
in engaging each of the detents. Using the
wedge nut opening on the handle for visual
aid, rotate the handle as necessary while
installing, in order to bring the flat detent on
the intermediate shaft into view along the bot-
tom of the opening.
8. Tighten the bolt (1) retaining the handle to the outer tub and tighten to 6.5 Nm (58 in. lbs.).
9. Connect the spot lamp electrical connector.

10. Install the instrument panel end-cap.
11. Install the A-pillar trim.
12. Install the fuse, depending on which spot lamp is
being serviced.
13. Inspect the operation of the spot lamp to ensure that the range of movement is correct.
Using the handle, rotate the spot lamp from the operating position to the stowed position and back. Ensure
that the lamp will maintain the desired position. The stowed position should be just above the windshield and
the operating position should be vertical to slightly outboard.
Using the knob of the handle, rotate the head of the spot lamp around on its axis. The spot lamp must rotate
360 degrees on its axis.
14. If the spot lamp head does not rotate 360 degrees on its axis, or if excessive effort is required to rotate the
lamp head on its axis, perform the following:
a. Remove the handle and inspect for damage to the inner shaft and the gears in the handle. Repair or replace
as necessary.
b. If no damage is present to the inner shaft or the gears in the handle, reinstall the handle and reinspect the
operation of the lamp.
c. If the spot lamp head still does not properly rotate 360 degrees on its axis, remove the cover from the end
of the spot lamp head assembly and inspect for damage to the gears in the head assembly. Repair or
replace as necessary.
15. Lower the spot lamp to the stowed position.
UNDERHOOD LAMP - POLICE

REMOVAL
ative remote terminal or pull fuse in the PDC.
2. Insert a small flat blade in access slot between the
lamp base (1) and lamp lens (2).
3. Lift the lamp lens (2) upward and remove the lamp
lens (2).
4. Depress bulb terminal (2) inward to release bulb

(1).
INSTALLATION
1. Engage the replacement bulb wire loop (3) to ter-
minal closest to lamp base (4) wire connector.
2. Depress the opposite terminal inward and engage
the remaining bulb wire loop (3).
3. Position the lamp lens (2) on the lamp base (1)

and firmly snap into place.
4. Connect the battery negative remote cable or insert
fuse in the PDC.
UNDERHOOD LAMP UNIT - POLICE

REMOVAL
ative remote terminal or pull fuse in the PDC.
2. Disconnect the wire harness connector (1) from
lamp unit (2).
3. Remove the push-pin fastener attaching underhood
lamp unit (2) to inner hood panel.
4. Remove the underhood lamp unit (2) from the
vehicle.
INSTALLATION
1. Position the underhood lamp unit (2) on the hood
inner panel.
2. Install the push-pin fastener attaching the lamp unit
base (2) to the inner hood panel.
3. Connect the wire harness connector (1).
4. Connect the battery negative remote cable or rein-
sert fuse in the PDC.
5. Close hood.
8L - 144 LAMPS/LIGHTING - INTERIOR - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS LX
LAMPS/LIGHTING - INTERIOR - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
LAMPS/LIGHTING - INTERIOR - ELECTRICAL B161F-READING LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT

DIAGNOSTICS LOW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
B161B-COURTESY/DOME LAMP CONTROL
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
LX LAMPS/LIGHTING - INTERIOR - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8L - 145
LAMPS/LIGHTING - INTERIOR - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS

B161B-COURTESY/DOME LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Cluster detects a Short to Ground on the (M24) Courtesy Lamps Driver circuit.
Possible Causes
(M24) COURTESY LAMPS DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
Clear all Cluster DTCs.
Turn the Courtesy Lamps on.
With the Scan Tool, read the Cluster DTCs.
Does the Scan Tool read: B161B-COURTESY/DOME LAMP OUTPUT CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND?
Yes >> Go To 2
TROL MODULES/FRONT CONTROL MODULE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
2. (M24) COURTESY LAMPS DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance of the (M24) Courtesy Lamp Driver circuit to
ground.
Yes >> Repair the (M24) Courtesy lamp Driver circuit for a short to
ground.
to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES/
ING)
vice information.
ING)
B161F-READING LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Cluster detects a short to ground on the (M27) Reading/Rail Lamps Driver circuit.
Possible Causes
(M27) READING/RAIL LAMPS DRIVER
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
Clear all Cluster DTCs.
Turn the Driver Reading Lamps on.
Does the Scan Tool read: B161F-READING LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2
Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST-VER1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES/FRONT CONTROL MODULE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
2. (M27) READING/RAIL LAMPS DRIVER

Disconnect the Cluster C3 harness connector.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (M27) Reading/Rail
Lamps Driver circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (M27) Reading/Rail Lamps Driver circuit for a
short to ground.
Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST-VER1. (Refer to 8
ING)
No >> Relpace the Cluster in accordance with the service informa-
tion.
Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST-VER1. (Refer to 8
ING)
LX LAMPS/LIGHTING - INTERIOR - SERVICE INFORMATION 8L - 151
LAMPS/LIGHTING - INTERIOR - SERVICE INFORMATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
LAMPS/LIGHTING - INTERIOR - SERVICE DOME LAMP UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

INFORMATION DOOR COURTESY LAMP
INTERIOR LAMPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
DOME LAMP - POLICE LIFTGATE LAMP
REMOVAL INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
LAMP BULB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 READING LAMP
DOME LAMP UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
INSTALLATION INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
LAMP BULB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
8L - 152 LAMPS/LIGHTING - INTERIOR - SERVICE INFORMATION LX
LAMPS/LIGHTING - INTERIOR - SERVICE INFORMATION

SPECIFICATIONS
INTERIOR LAMPS
BULB APPLICATION TABLE
LAMP BULB
CHRYSLER
Door Courtesy 562
Glove Box 194
Overhead Console 578
Rear Courtesy W5W
Shift Indicator JKLE14140
Trunk 579
Visor Vanity A6220
DODGE
Door Courtesy 562
Glove Box 194
Liftgate 578
Overhead Console 578
Rear Courtesy W5W
Shift Indicator JKLE14140
Trunk 562
Visor Vanity A6220
DOME LAMP - POLICE

DESCRIPTION
The dome lamp is B+ battery-fed, fused, and operates independently of the standard factory installed dome lamp
switch. It features duel switched white incandescent and red Light Emitting Diode (LED) lights. The lamp is mounted
on the headliner at the longitudinal center-line, rearward of the factory installed overheard console, approximately
19.5 inches from the front windshield header. The police package, optioned dome lamp has a three way switch
mounted on the rear side of the lamp assembly. One position for the incandescent light, one position or the red
LED, and one middle position for OFF. When the when the vehicle is put into stealth mode, this lamp will still be
operational. It must be shut off manually due to its direct battery feed.
REMOVAL
LAMP BULB
2. Gently pull off the dome lamp cover.
3. Reach up into the lamp unit and pull down on the lamp bulb.
DOME LAMP UNIT

2. Slide the dome lamp unit towards the right rear of the vehicle. There is lip on the retaining bracket that will slide
out of the headliner opening to allow for removal.
3. Pull down gently on the left front of the dome lamp unit and then slide the unit toward the left front of the vehicle.
This will allow for the retaining bracket to release from the headliner.
4. Disconnect the dome lamp unit electrical connector.
INSTALLATION
LAMP BULB
1. Place lamp bulb into lamp unit.
2. Position dome lamp unit cover over unit and firmly snap into place.
DOME LAMP UNIT

1. Connect the dome lamp unit electrical connector.
2. Position the lamp unit into the headliner mounting hole.
3. Slide the longer of the two bracket tabs up into the headliner toward the right rear.
4. Slide the dome lamp unit toward the left front of the vehicle until you feel the bracket take a seat in the headliner.
DOOR COURTESY LAMP

REMOVAL
2. Remove the front door trim panel (Refer to 23 -
BODY/DOOR - FRONT/TRIM PANEL - REMOVAL).
3. With the trim panel on bench, gently pull the door

courtesy lamp (1) out of courtesy lamp unit.
INSTALLATION
1. Place the door courtesy lamp (1) into the courtesy
lamp unit.
2. Install the front door trim panel (Refer to 23 -

BODY/DOOR - FRONT/TRIM PANEL - INSTALLA-
TION).
LIFTGATE LAMP
REMOVAL
2. Open liftgate.
3. Using a trim stick (3) (special tool #C-4755) or
equivalent, gently pry out on liftgate lamp lens (2)
and remove from trim panel (1).
4. Gently pry up on the edge of the affected lamp and

pull out of the liftgate lamp unit to remove.
INSTALLATION
1. Place new lamp over retaining clips in liftgate lamp
unit retaining clips and firmly snap into place.
2. Place the liftgate lamp lens (2) over the retaining

pins making sure that they are lined up and then
firmly snap into place.
READING LAMP
REMOVAL
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
alent, gently pry out the top (toward windshield)
side of the reading lamp lens.
3. Lift the top of the lens up and slide forward (toward

windshield) until the tab is released from the over-
head console.
4. Gently pull the lamp out of the overhead console.
REAR

alent, gently pry out the edge of the reading lamp
lens. There will be a small slot on the side of the
lens that should be used. Looking at the unit it will
be on the left side of the lens.
3. Lift out on the lens and slide the lens to the left so
that the retaining tabs are exposed and the lens
can be then removed.
4. Grasp lamp with fingers and firmly pull lamp (1)

from unit.
INSTALLATION
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
1. Firmly push the lamp into the overhead console.
2. Place the tab inside the rear edge of the overhead
console. Carefully push down on the side of the
lens opposite from the tab side, making sure to
snap in both sides of the lens.
REAR
1. Firmly push the lamp (1) into the reading lamp unit.
2. Looking at the lamp unit place the right side in first

and make sure the tabs are under the lip of the
unit. Slide right and then firmly snap lens (1) into
place.
LX MESSAGE SYSTEMS 8M - 1
MESSAGE SYSTEMS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
MESSAGE CENTER - ELECTRICAL OVERHEAD CONSOLE - SERVICE

DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
MESSAGE CENTER - SERVICE INFORMATION . 136
OVERHEAD CONSOLE - ELECTRICAL
DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
MESSAGE CENTER - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
MESSAGE CENTER - ELECTRICAL B17D4 HEADLAMP STATUS OUTPUT

DIAGNOSTICS CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING B17D5 HEADLAMP STATUS OUTPUT
P1462 FUEL LEVEL OUTPUT CIRCUIT CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 B19B4 DRIVER DOOR AJAR OUTPUT
P1463 FUEL LEVEL OUTPUT CIRCUIT CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 P19B5 DRIVER DOOR AJAR OUTPUT
P1504 VEHICLE SPEED OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 P1A5B PANIC ALARM MUTE REQUEST
P1505 VEHICLE SPEED OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 B1A5D PANIC ALARM ACTIVATION
P164A MIL OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . 18 OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
P164B MIL OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . 21 B1A5E PANIC ALARM ACTIVATION
P170A PARK/NEUTRAL OUTPUT STATUS CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 B1CC1 DEPLOYMENT NOTIFICATION
P170B PARK/NEUTRAL OUTPUT OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 B1CC2 DEPLOYMENT NOTIFICATION
P170C ENGINE RPM OUTPUT CIRCUIT OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 B210D-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
P170D ENGINE RPM OUTPUT CIRCUIT B210E-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 B237C DATA COMMUNICATION RADIO
C1088 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 B237F HORN MUTE REQUEST CIRCUIT
C1089 BRAKE LAMP OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 B2381 DRIVER SEAT BELT OUTPUT
B1693 ACCESSORY DIMMING CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 B2382 DRIVER SEAT BELT OUTPUT
B1694 ACCESSORY DIMMING CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 B2384 HORN SWITCH OUTPUT CIRCUIT
B17CF EMERGENCY FLASHING LAMP LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
REQUEST 1 CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 B2385 HORN SWITCH OUTPUT CIRCUIT
B17D2 EMERGENCY FLASHING LAMP HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
REQUEST 2 CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 U0021 CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . 122
8M - 2 MESSAGE CENTER - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS LX
U0022 CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . 124 U0168-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
U0023 CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . 126 VEHICLE SECURITY CONTROL MODULE
U0024 CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . 128 (SKREEM/WCM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
U0025 CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . 130 U0184-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
U0026 CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . 132 RADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
U0141 LOST COMMUNICATION WITH U0195-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
IPM (FCM/TIPM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 SDARS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
U0151 LOST COMMUNICATION WITH U0197-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER HANDS FREE PHONE MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . 135
(ORC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 U0208-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
U0156 LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HEATED SEAT CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . 135
ELECTRONIC OVERHEAD MODULE . . . . . . . 134 U0209-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
U0159-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH PARK MEMORY SEAT CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . 135
ASSIST CONTROL MODULE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 U0212-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
U0164-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HVAC STEERING COLUMN CONTROL MODULE . . 135
CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
INTRUSION TRANSCEIVER CONTROL
MODULE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
LX MESSAGE CENTER - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8M - 3
MESSAGE CENTER - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS

P1462 FUEL LEVEL OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
With the ignition switch on.
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the Fuel Level Status Signal
circuit below a calibrated value.
Possible Causes
(W514) FUEL LEVEL STATUS SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

AFTERMARKET LIGHT/SIREN CONTROLLER
tion related DTCs.
Yes >> Diagnose and repair the DTC. Refer to the Table of Contents in ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS for a complete list of the symptoms.
No >> Go To 2. Diagnostic Test

Erase the DTCs.
Yes >> Go To 3.
nectors. Look for broken, bent, pushed out, or corroded terminals, and repair any obvious problems.
3. CHECK THE (W514) FUEL LEVEL STATUS SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect the Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Mod-
ule-PTIM) C2 harness connector.
Measure the resistance of the (W514) Fuel Level Status Signal circuit
between ground and the Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Inter-
face Module-PTIM) C2 harness connector.
Yes >> Go To 4.
No >> Go To 5.
4. ISOLATE THE SHORT TO GROUND IN THE (W514) CHECK THE FUEL LEVEL STATUS SIGNAL CIRCUIT
ule-PTIM) 24 way harness connector (aftermarket light/siren controller
side).
Yes >> Repair the (W514) Fuel Level Status Signal circuit for a
short to ground.
No >> Refer to electrical diagnostics for the aftermarket light/siren
controller, and repair or replace the aftermarket light/siren
controller in accordance with the manufacturers service
information.
5. CHECK THE MULTI-PURPOSE MODULE (POLICE AND TAXI INTERFACE MODULE-PTIM)

Disconnect all Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) and aftermarket light/siren controller
Check for damaged or corroded pins, pinched wires, or damaged connectors, and repair any obvious problems.
Connect all Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) and aftermarket light/siren controller
With the scan tool monitor active codes as you work through the following step.
Wiggle the wiring harness and connectors of the Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) and
aftermarket light/siren controller.
If only stored codes return continue the test until the problem area has been isolated, and repair any obvious prob-
lems.
Is DTC P1462 FUEL LEVEL OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW still displayed?
Yes >> Replace the Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) in accordance with the ser-
vice information.
No >> Repair is complete. The problem may have been caused by a loose or corroded terminal.
P1463 FUEL LEVEL OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the Fuel Level Status Signal
circuit above a calibrated value.
Possible Causes
(W514) FUEL LEVEL STATUS SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED TO VOLTAGE


tion related DTCs.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes >> Go To 3.
3. CHECK THE (W514) FUEL LEVEL STATUS SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Measure the voltage of the (W514) Fuel Level Status Signal circuit
Yes >> Go To 4.
No >> Go To 5.
4. ISOLATE THE SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE (W514) FUEL LEVEL STATUS SIGNAL
Disconnect Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-
PTIM) 24 way harness connector (aftermarket light/siren controller side).
Measure the voltage of the (W514) Fuel Level Status Signal circuit
Yes >> Repair the (W514) Fuel Level Status Signal circuit for a
short to voltage.
controller, and repair or replace the aftermarket light siren
information.
5. CHECK THE (W514) FUEL LEVEL STATUS SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
side).
between the Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-
PTIM) 24 way and the (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) C2 har-
ness connectors.
Yes >> Go To 6.
No >> Repair the (W514) Fuel Level Status Signal circuit for an
open or high resistance.

harness connectors.
Connect all Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) and aftermarket light/siren controller har-
ness connectors.
lems.
Is DTC P1463 FUEL LEVEL OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH still displayed?
vice information.
P1504 VEHICLE SPEED OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the Vehicle Speed Signal
Possible Causes
(W526) VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND


tion related DTCs.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes >> Go To 3.
3. CHECK THE (W526) VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
ule-PTIM) C2 electrical connector.
Measure the resistance of the (W526) Vehicle Speed Signal circuit
face Module-PTIM) C2 electrical connector.
Yes >> Go To 4.
No >> Go To 5.
4. ISOLATE THE SHORT TO GROUND IN THE (W526) THE VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
side).
Yes >> Repair the (W526) Vehicle Speed Signal circuit for a short
to ground.
controller, and repair or replace the aftermarket light siren/
information.

harness connectors.
ness connectors.
lems.
Is DTC P1504 VEHICLE SPEED OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW still displayed?
vice information.
P1505 VEHICLE SPEED OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the Vehicle Speed Signal
Possible Causes
(W526) VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED TO VOLTAGE


tion related DTCs.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes >> Go To 3.
3. CHECK THE (W526) VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO POWER
Measure the voltage of the (W526) Vehicle Speed Signal circuit
Yes >> Go To 4.
No >> Go To 5.
4. ISOLATE THE SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE (W526) VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL CIRCUIT
side).
Measure the voltage of the (W526) Vehicle Speed Signal circuit
Yes >> Repair the (W526) Vehicle Speed Signal circuit for a short
to power.
information.
5. CHECK THE (W526) VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

side).
PTIM) 24 way and the Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface
Module-PTIM) C2 harness connectors.
Yes >> Go To 6.
No >> Repair the (W526) Vehicle Speed Signal for an open or
high resistance.

harness connectors.
ness connectors.
lems.
Is DTC P1505 VEHICLE SPEED OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH still displayed?
vice information.
P164A MIL OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the Malfunction Indicator Sig-
nal circuit below a calibrated value.
Possible Causes
(W516) MALFUNCTION INDICATOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND


tion related DTCs.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes >> Go To 3.
3. CHECK THE (W516) MALFUNCTION INDICATOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance of the (W516) Malfunction Indicator Signal cir-
cuit between ground and the Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi
Interface Module-PTIM) C2 harness connector.
Yes >> Go To 4.
No >> Go To 5.
4. ISOLATE THE SHORT TO GROUND IN THE (W516) MALFUNCTION INDICATOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT
side).
Yes >> Repair the (W516) Malfunction Indicator Signal circuit for a
short to ground.
information.

harness connectors.
ness connectors.
lems.
Is DTC P164A MIL OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW still displayed?
vice information.
P164B MIL OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the Malfunction Indicator Sig-
nal circuit above a calibrated value.
Possible Causes
(W516) MALFUNCTION INDICATOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED TO POWER


tion related DTCs.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes >> Go To 3.
3. CHECK THE (W516) MALFUNCTION INDICATOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO POWER
Measure the voltage of the (W516) Malfunction Indicator Signal circuit
Yes >> Go To 4.
No >> Go To 5.
4. ISOLATE THE SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE (W516) MALFUNCTION INDICATOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT
side).
Measure the voltage of the (W516) Malfunction Indicator Signal circuit
Yes >> Repair the (W516) Malfunction Indicator Signal circuit for a
short to power.
information.
5. CHECK THE (W516) MALFUNCTION INDICATOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

side).
cuit between the Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Mod-
ule-PTIM) 24 way and the Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi
Interface Module-PTIM) C2 harness connectors.
Yes >> Go To 6.
No >> Repair the (W516) Malfunction Indicator Signal circuit for an

harness connectors.
ness connectors.
lems.
Is DTC P164B MIL OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH still displayed?
vice information.
P170A PARK/NEUTRAL OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the P/N Switch Sense circuit
below a calibrated value.
Possible Causes
(W519) P/N SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND


tion related DTCs.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes >> Go To 3.
3. CHECK THE (W519) P/N SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance of the (W519) P/N Switch Sense circuit
Yes >> Go To 4.
No >> Go To 5.
4. ISOLATE THE SHORT TO GROUND IN THE (W519) P/N SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT
side).
Yes >> Repair the (W519) P/N Switch Sense circuit for a short to
ground.
information.

harness connectors.
ness connectors.
lems.
Is DTC P170A PARK/NEUTRAL OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW still displayed?
vice information.
P170B PARK/NEUTRAL OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the P/N Switch Sense circuit
above a calibrated value.
Possible Causes
(W519) P/N SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED TO VOLTAGE


tion related DTCs.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes >> Go To 3.
3. CHECK THE (W519) P/N SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Measure the voltage of the (W519) P/N Switch Sense circuit between
ground and the Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Mod-
Yes >> Go To 4.
No >> Go To 5.
4. ISOLATE THE SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE (W519) P/N SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT
side).
Measure the voltage of the (W519) P/N Switch Sense circuit between
Yes >> Repair the (W519) P/N Switch Sense circuit for a short to
voltage.
information.
5. CHECK THE (W519) PARK/NEUTRAL OUTPUT CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

side).
Yes >> Go To 6.
No >> Repair the (W519) P/N Switch Sense circuit for an open or
high resistance.

harness connectors.
ness connectors.
lems.
Is DTC P170B PARK/NEUTRAL OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH still displayed?
vice information.
P170C ENGINE RPM OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the Engine Running Status
Signal circuit below a calibrated value.
Possible Causes
(W529) ENGINE RUNNING STATUS SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND


tion related DTCs.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes >> Go To 3.
3. CHECK THE (W529) ENGINE RUNNING STATUS SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance of the (W529) Engine Running Status Signal
circuit between ground and the Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi
Yes >> Go To 4.
No >> Go To 5.
4. ISOLATE THE SHORT TO GROUND IN THE (W529) ENGINE RUNNING STATUS SIGNAL CIRCUIT
side).
Yes >> Repair the (W529) Engine RPM Output circuit for a short to
ground.
information.

harness connectors.
ness connectors.
lems.
Is DTC P170C ENGINE RPM OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW still displayed?
vice information.
P170D ENGINE RPM OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the Engine Running Status
Signal above a calibrated value.
Possible Causes
(W529) ENGINE RUNNING STATUS SIGNAL OPEN OR SHORTED TO VOLTAGE


tion related DTCs.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes >> Go To 3.
3. CHECK THE (W529) ENGINE RUNNING STATUS SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Measure the voltage of the (W529) Engine Running Status Signal circuit
Yes >> Go To 4.
No >> Go To 5.
4. ISOLATE THE SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE (W529) ENGINE RUNNING STATUS SIGNAL CIRCUIT
side).
Measure the voltage of the (W529) Engine Running Status Signal circuit
Yes >> Repair the (W529) Engine Running Status Signal circuit for
a short to voltage.
information.
5. CHECK THE (W529) ENGINE RUNNING STATUS SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
side).
circuit between the PTIM 24 way and the Multi-Purpose Module (Police
And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) C2 harness connectors.
Yes >> Go To 6.
No >> Repair the (W529) Engine Running Status Signal circuit for
an open or high resistance.

harness connectors.
ness connectors.
lems.
Is DTC P170D ENGINE RPM OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH still displayed?
vice information.
C1088 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the Brake Lamp Switch
Sense circuit below a calibrated value.
Possible Causes
(W520) BRAKE LAMP SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND


tion related DTCs.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes >> Go To 3.
3. CHECK THE (W520) BRAKE LAMP SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance of the (W520) Brake Lamp Switch Sense circuit
Yes >> Go To 4.
No >> Go To 5.
4. ISOLATE THE SHORT TO GROUND IN THE (W520) BRAKE LAMP SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT
side).
Yes >> Repair the (W520) Brake Lamp Switch Sense circuit for a
short to ground.
information.

harness connectors.
ness connectors.
lems.
Is DTC C1088 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW still displayed?
vice information.
C1089 BRAKE LAMP OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the Brake Lamp Switch
Sense circuit above a calibrated value.
Possible Causes
(W520) BRAKE LAMP SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED TO POWER


tion related DTCs.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes >> Go To 3.
3. CHECK THE (W520) BRAKE LAMP SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Measure the voltage of the (W520) Brake Lamp Switch Sense circuit
Yes >> Go To 4.
No >> Go To 5.
4. ISOLATE THE SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE (W520) BRAKE LAMP SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT
side).
Measure the voltage of the (W520) Brake Lamp Switch Sense circuit
Yes >> Repair the (W520) Brake Lamp Switch Sense circuit for a
short to power.
information.
5. CHECK THE (W520) BRAKE LAMP SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
side).
Yes >> Go To 6.
No >> Repair the (W520) Brake Lamp Switch Sense circuit for an

harness connectors.
ness connectors.
lems.
Is DTC C1089 BRAKE LAMP OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH still displayed?
vice information.
B1693 ACCESSORY DIMMING CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the Cluster Dimmer Switch
Possible Causes
(W525) CLUSTER DIMMER SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND


tion related DTCs.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes >> Go To 3.
3. CHECK THE (W525) CLUSTER DIMMER SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance of the (W525) Cluster Dimmer Switch circuit
Yes >> Go To 4.
No >> Go To 5.
4. ISOLATE THE SHORT TO GROUND IN THE (W525) CLUSTER DIMMER SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT
side).
Measure the resistance of the (W525) Cluster Dimmer Switch circuit
face Module-PTIM) 22 way harness connector.
Yes >> Repair the (W525) Cluster Dimmer Switch circuit for a short
to ground.
information.

harness connectors.
ness connectors.
lems.
Is DTC B1693 ACCESSORY DIMMING CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW still displayed?
vice information.
B1694 ACCESSORY DIMMING CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the Cluster Dimmer Switch
Possible Causes
(W525) CLUSTER DIMMER SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED TO VOLTAGE


tion related DTCs.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes >> Go To 3.
3. CHECK THE (W525) CLUSTER DIMMER SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
ule-PTIM) C2 electrical connector.
Measure the voltage of the (W525) Cluster Dimmer Switch Sense circuit
Yes >> Go To 4.
No >> Go To 5.
4. ISOLATE THE SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE (W525) CLUSTER DIMMER SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT
ule-PTIM) 24 way electrical connector (aftermarket light/siren controller
side).
Measure the voltage of the (W525) Cluster Dimmer Switch Sense circuit
Yes >> Repair the (W525) Cluster Dimmer Switch Sense circuit for
a short to ground.
information.
5. CHECK THE (W525) CLUSTER DIMMER SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
ule-PTIM) 24 way connector.
Measure the resistance of the (W525) Cluster Dimmer Switch Sense
circuit between the Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface
Module-PTIM) 24 way and the Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi
Interface Module-PTIM) C2 electrical connectors.
Yes >> Go To 6.
No >> Repair the (W525) Cluster Dimmer Switch Sense circuit for

lems.
Is B1694 ACCESSORY DIMMING CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH still displayed?
vice information.
B17CF EMERGENCY FLASHING LAMP REQUEST 1 CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the Front Flashing Lights
Signal circuit above a calibrated value.
Possible Causes
(W500) FRONT FLASHING LIGHTS SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED TO POWER


tion related DTCs.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes >> Go To 3.
3. CHECK THE (W500) FRONT FLASHING LIGHTS SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO POWER
Measure the voltage of the (W500) Front Flashing Lights Signal circuit
Yes >> Go To 4.
No >> Go To 5.
4. ISOLATE THE SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE (W500) FRONT FLASHING LIGHTS SIGNAL CIRCUIT
side).
Measure the voltage of the (W500) Front Flashing Lights Signal circuit
Yes >> Repair the (W500) Front Flashing Lights Signal circuit for a
short to power.
information.
5. CHECK THE (W500) FRONT FLASHING LIGHTS SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
side).
Measure the resistance of the (W500) Front Flashing Lights Signal cir-
Yes >> Go To 6.
No >> Repair the (W500) Front Flashing Lights Signal circuit for an

harness connectors.
ness connectors.
lems.
Is B17CF EMERGENCY FLASHING LAMP REQUEST 1 CIRCUIT HIGH still displayed?
vice information.
B17D2 EMERGENCY FLASHING LAMP REQUEST 2 CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the Rear Flashing Lights Sig-
Possible Causes
(W501) REAR FLASHING LIGHTS SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED TO VOLTAGE


tion related DTCs.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes >> Go To 3.
3. CHECK THE (W501) REAR FLASHING LIGHTS SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Measure the voltage of the (W501) Rear Flashing Lights Signal circuit
Yes >> Go To 4.
No >> Go To 5.
4. ISOLATE THE SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE (W501) REAR FLASHING LIGHTS SIGNAL CIRCUIT
side).
Measure the voltage of the (W501) Rear Flashing Lights Signal circuit
Yes >> Repair the (W501) Rear Flashing Lights Signal circuit for a
short to voltage.
information.
5. CHECK THE (W501) REAR FLASHING LIGHTS SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
side).
Measure the resistance of the (W501) Rear Flashing Lights Signal cir-
Yes >> Go To 6.
No >> Repair the (W501) Rear Flashing Lights Signal circuit for an

harness connectors.
ness connectors.
lems.
Is B17D2 EMERGENCY FLASHING LAMP REQUEST 2 CIRCUIT HIGH still displayed?
vice information.
B17D4 HEADLAMP STATUS OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the Headlamp Switch Sense
Possible Causes
(W521) HEADLAMP SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND


tion related DTCs.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes >> Go To 3.
3. CHECK THE (W521) HEADLAMP SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance of the (W521) Headlamp Switch Sense circuit
Yes >> Go To 4.
No >> Go To 5.
4. ISOLATE THE SHORT TO GROUND IN THE (W521) HEADLAMP SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT
side).
Yes >> Repair the (W521) Headlamp Switch Sense circuit for a
short to ground.
information.

harness connectors.
ness connectors.
lems.
Is B17D4 HEADLAMP STATUS OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW still displayed?
vice information.
B17D5 HEADLAMP STATUS OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the Headlamp Switch Sense
Possible Causes
(W521) HEADLAMP SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED TO VOLTAGE


tion related DTCs.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes >> Go To 3.
3. CHECK THE (W521) HEADLAMP SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Measure the voltage of the (W521) Headlamp Switch Sense circuit
Yes >> Go To 4.
No >> Go To 5.
4. ISOLATE THE SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE (W521) HEADLAMP SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT
side).
Measure the voltage of the (W521) Headlamp Switch Sense circuit
Yes >> Repair the (W521) Headlamp Switch Sense circuit for a
short to power.
information.
5. CHECK THE (W521) HEADLAMP SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

side).
Yes >> Go To 6.
No >> Repair the (W521) Headlamp Switch Sense circuit for an

harness connectors.
ness connectors.
lems.
Is P17D5 HEADLAMP STATUS OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH still displayed?
vice information.
B19B4 DRIVER DOOR AJAR OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the Driver Door Ajar Switch
Possible Causes
(W524) DRIVER DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND


tion related DTCs.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes >> Go To 3.
3. CHECK THE (W524) DRIVER DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance of the (W524) Driver Door Ajar Switch Sense
Yes >> Go To 4.
No >> Go To 5.
4. ISOLATE THE SHORT TO GROUND IN THE (W524) DRIVER DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT
side).
Yes >> Repair the (W524) Driver Door Ajar Switch Sense circuit for
a short to ground.
information.

harness connectors.
ness connectors.
lems.
Is B19B4 DRIVER DOOR AJAR OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW still displayed?
vice information.
P19B5 DRIVER DOOR AJAR OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the Driver Door Ajar Switch
Possible Causes
(W524) DRIVER DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED TO VOLTAGE

tion related DTCs.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes >> Go To 3.
3. CHECK THE (W524) DRIVER DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Measure the voltage of the (W524) Driver Door Ajar Switch Sense cir-
Yes >> Go To 4.
No >> Go To 5.
4. ISOLATE THE SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE (W524) DRIVER DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT
side).
Measure the voltage of the (W524) Driver Door Ajar Switch Sense cir-
Yes >> Repair the (W524) Driver Door Ajar Switch Sense circuit for
a short to voltage.
information.
5. CHECK THE (W524) DRIVER DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
side).
Module-PTIM) 24 way and the Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi
Yes >> Go To 6.
No >> Repair the (W524) Driver Door Ajar Switch Sense circuit for

harness connectors.
ness connectors.
lems.
Is P19B5 DRIVER DOOR AJAR OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH still displayed?
vice information.
P1A5B PANIC ALARM MUTE REQUEST CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the Security Alarm Mute Sig-
Possible Causes
(W512) SECURITY ALARM MUTE SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED TO VOLTAGE


tion related DTCs.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes >> Go To 3.
3. CHECK THE (W512) SECURITY ALARM MUTE SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO POWER
Measure the voltage of the (W512) Security Alarm Mute Signal circuit
Yes >> Go To 4.
No >> Go To 5.
4. ISOLATE THE SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE (W512) SECURITY ALARM MUTE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
side).
Measure the voltage of the (W512) Security Alarm Mute Signal circuit
between ground and the PTIM C2 harness connector.
Yes >> Repair the (W512) Security Alarm Mute Signal circuit for a
short to voltage.
information.
5. CHECK THE (W512) SECURITY ALARM MUTE SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
side).
Measure the resistance of the (W512) Security Alarm Mute Signal circuit
Yes >> Go To 6.
No >> Repair the (W512) Security Alarm Mute Signal circuit for an

harness connectors.
ness connectors.
lems.
Is P1A5B PANIC ALARM MUTE REQUEST CIRCUIT HIGH still displayed?
vice information.
B1A5D PANIC ALARM ACTIVATION OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the Security Alarm On Signal
Possible Causes
(W517) SECURITY ALARM ON SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND


tion related DTCs.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes >> Go To 3.
3. CHECK THE (W517) SECURITY ALARM ON SIGNAL OUTPUT CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance of the (W517) Security Alarm On Signal circuit
Yes >> Go To 4.
No >> Go To 5.
4. ISOLATE THE SHORT TO GROUND IN THE (W517) SECURITY ALARM ON SIGNAL OUTPUT CIRCUIT
side).
Yes >> Repair the (W517) Security Alarm On Signal circuit for a
short to ground.
information.

harness connectors.
ness connectors.
lems.
Is B1A5D PANIC ALARM ACTIVATION OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW still displayed?
vice information.
B1A5E PANIC ALARM ACTIVATION STATUS CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the Security Alarm On Signal
Possible Causes
(W517) SECURITY ALARM ON SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED TO VOLTAGE


tion related DTCs.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes >> Go To 3.
3. CHECK THE (W517) SECURITY ALARM ON SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Measure the voltage of the (W517) Security Alarm On Signal circuit
Yes >> Go To 4.
No >> Go To 5.
4. ISOLATE THE SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE (W517) SECURITY ALARM ON SIGNAL CIRCUIT
side).
Measure the voltage of the (W517) Security Alarm On Signal circuit
Yes >> Repair the (W517) Security Alarm On Signal circuit for a
short to voltage.
information.
5. CHECK THE (W517) SECURITY ALARM ON SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

side).
Yes >> Go To 6.
No >> Repair the (W517) Security Alarm On Signal circuit for an

harness connectors.
ness connectors.
lems.
Is P1A5E PANIC ALARM ACTIVATION STATUS CIRCUIT HIGH still displayed?
vice information.
B1CC1 DEPLOYMENT NOTIFICATION OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the Front or Side Airbag Sta-
tus Signal circuits below a calibrated value.
Possible Causes
(W523) FRONT AIRBAG STATUS SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

(W522) SIDE AIRBAG STATUS SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

tion related DTCs.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes >> Go To 3.
3. CHECK THE (W523) FRONT AIRBAG STATUS SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance of the (W523) Front Airbag Status Signal circuit
Yes >> If the vehicle is equipped with a side airbag, go to 4. Oth-
erwise, go to 5.
No >> Go To 7.
4. CHECK THE (W522) SIDE AIRBAG DEPLOYMENT NOTIFICATION OUTPUT CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO
GROUND
Measure the resistance of the (W522) Side Airbag Deployment Notifica-
tion Output circuit between ground and the Multi-Purpose Module
(Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) C2 harness connector.
Yes >> Go to 7.
No >> Go To 6.
5. ISOLATE THE SHORT TO GROUND IN THE (W523) FRONT AIRBAG STATUS SIGNAL CIRCUIT
side).
Yes >> Repair the (W523) Front Airbag Status Signal circuit for a
short to ground.
information.
6. ISOLATE THE SHORT TO GROUND IN THE (W522) SIDE AIRBAG STATUS SIGNAL CIRCUIT
side).
Measure the resistance of the (W522) Side Airbag Status Signal circuit
Yes >> Repair the (W522) Side Airbag Status Signal circuit for a
short to ground.
information.

harness connectors.
ness connectors.
lems.
Is B1CC1 DEPLOYMENT NOTIFICATION OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW still displayed?
vice information.
B1CC2 DEPLOYMENT NOTIFICATION OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the Front or Side Airbag Sta-
tus Signal circuits above a calibrated value.
Possible Causes
(W523) FRONT AIRBAG STATUS SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE

(W522) SIDE AIRBAG STATUS SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE

tion related DTCs.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes >> Go To 3.
3. CHECK THE (W523) FRONT AIRBAG STATUS SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Measure the voltage of the (W523) Front Airbag Status Signal circuit
Yes >> Go To 5.
No >> If equipped with a side airbag, go to 4. Otherwise, Go To 8.
4. CHECK THE (W522) SIDE AIRBAG STATUS SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Measure the voltage of the (W522) Side Airbag Status Signal circuit
Yes >> Go To 6.
No >> Go To 7.
5. ISOLATE THE SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE (W523) FRONT AIRBAG STATUS SIGNAL CIRCUIT
side).
Measure the voltage of the (W523) Front Airbag Status Signal circuit
Yes >> Repair the (W523) Front Airbag Status Signal circuit for a
short to power.
information.
6. ISOLATE THE SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE (W522) SIDE AIRBAG STATUS SIGNAL CIRCUIT
side).
Measure the voltage of the (W522) Side Airbag Status Signal circuit
Yes >> Repair the (W522) Side Airbag Deployment Notification Out-
put circuit for a short to voltage.
information.
7. CHECK THE (W522) SIDE AIRBAG STATUS SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
side).
Measure the resistance of the (W522) Side Airbag Status Signal circuit
Yes >> Go To 9.
No >> Repair the (W522) Side Airbag Status Signal circuit for an
8. CHECK THE (W523) FRONT AIRBAG STATUS SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
side).
Yes >> Go To 9.
No >> Repair the (W523) Front Airbag Status Signal circuit for an

harness connectors.
ness connectors.
lems.
Is B1CC2 DEPLOYMENT NOTIFICATION OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH still displayed?
vice information.

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the Fused (B+) input voltage
below a calibrated value.
Possible Causes
(A913) FUSED (B+) CIRCUIT OPEN
Diagnostic Test

Erase the DTCs.
Yes >> Go To 2.

NOTE: Repair any PCM charging/cranking DTCs before proceeding with this test.
NOTE: Verify the battery is fully charged.
Yes >> (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES/FRONT CONTROL MODULE - DIAG-
NOSIS AND TESTING)
No >> Go To 3.
3. CHECK (A913) FUSED (B+) CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Measure the voltage of the (A913) Fused (B+) circuit in the Multi-Pur-
pose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) harness connec-
tor.
Yes >> Go to 4.
No >> Repair the (A913) Fused (B+) circuit for an open.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1. (Refer to 8
FRONT CONTROL MODULE - DIAGNOSIS AND
TESTING).

lems.
Is B210D-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW still displayed?
vice information.

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the Fused (B+) input voltage
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test

Erase the DTCs.
Yes >> Go To 2.

NOTE: Repair any PCM charging/cranking DTCs before proceeding with this test.
NOTE: Verify the battery is fully charged.
NOSIS AND TESTING)
No >> Go To 3.

Is B210E-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH still displayed?
vice information.
B237C DATA COMMUNICATION RADIO INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the Police Radio Input Signal
Possible Causes
(W511) POLICE RADIO INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED TO VOLTAGE


tion related DTCs.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes >> Go To 3.
3. CHECK THE (W511) POLICE RADIO INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Measure the voltage of the (W511) Police Radio Input Signal circuit
Yes >> Go To 4.
No >> Go To 5.
4. ISOLATE THE SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE (W511) POLICE RADIO INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
side).
Measure the voltage of the (W511) Police Radio Input Signal circuit
Yes >> Repair the (W511) Police Radio Input Signal circuit for a
short to power.
information.
5. CHECK THE (W511) POLICE RADIO INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
side).
Measure the resistance of the (W511) Police Radio Input Signal circuit
PTIM) 24 way and the PTIM C2 harness connectors.
Yes >> Go To 6.
No >> Repair the (W511) Police Radio Input Signal circuit for an

harness connectors.
ness connectors.
lems.
Is B237C DATA COMMUNICATION RADIO INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH still displayed?
vice information.
B237F HORN MUTE REQUEST CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the Horn Mute Signal circuit
Possible Causes
(W513) HORN MUTE SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED TO VOLTAGE


tion related DTCs.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes >> Go To 3.
3. CHECK THE (W513) HORN MUTE REQUEST SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Measure the voltage of the (W513) Horn Mute Request Signal circuit
Yes >> Go To 4.
No >> Go To 5.
4. ISOLATE THE SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE (W513) HORN MUTE REQUEST SIGNAL CIRCUIT
side).
Measure the voltage of the (W513) Horn Mute Request Signal circuit
Yes >> Repair the (W513) Horn Mute Request Signal circuit for a
short to voltage.
information.
5. CHECK THE (W513) HORN MUTE REQUEST SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
side).
Measure the resistance of the (W513) Horn Mute Request Signal circuit
Yes >> Go To 6.
No >> Repair the (W513) Horn Mute Request Signal circuit for an

harness connectors.
ness connectors.
lems.
Is B237F HORN MUTE REQUEST CIRCUIT HIGH still displayed?
vice information.
B2381 DRIVER SEAT BELT OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the Driver Seat Belt Switch
Possible Causes
(W515) DRIVER SEAT BELT SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND


tion related DTCs.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes >> Go To 3.
3. CHECK THE (W515) DRIVER SEAT BELT SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance of the (W515) Driver Seat Belt Switch Sense
Yes >> Go To 4.
No >> Go To 5.
4. ISOLATE THE SHORT TO GROUND IN THE (W515) DRIVER SEAT BELT SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT
side).
Yes >> Repair the (W515) Driver Seat Belt Switch Sense circuit for
a short to ground.
information.

harness connectors.
ness connectors.
lems.
Is B2381 DRIVER SEAT BELT OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW still displayed?
vice information.
B2382 DRIVER SEAT BELT OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the Driver Seat Belt Switch
Possible Causes
(W515) DRIVER SEAT BELT SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED TO VOLTAGE

tion related DTCs.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes >> Go To 3.
3. CHECK THE (W515) DRIVER SEAT BELT SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Measure the voltage of the (W515) Driver Seat Belt Switch Sense cir-
Yes >> Go To 4.
No >> Go To 5.
4. ISOLATE THE SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE (W515) DRIVER SEAT BELT SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT
side).
Measure the voltage of the (W515) Driver Seat Belt Switch Sense cir-
Yes >> Repair the (W515) Driver Seat Belt Switch Sense circuit for
a short to power.
information.
5. CHECK THE (W515) DRIVER SEAT BELT SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
side).
Module-PTIM) 24 way and the PTIM C2 harness connectors.
Yes >> Go To 6.
No >> Repair the (W515) Driver Seat Belt Switch Sense circuit for

harness connectors.
ness connectors.
lems.
Is B2382 DRIVER SEAT BELT OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH still displayed?
vice information.
B2384 HORN SWITCH OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the Horn Switch Sense cir-
cuit below a calibrated value.
Possible Causes
(W518) HORN SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND


tion related DTCs.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes >> Go To 3.
3. CHECK THE (W518) HORN SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance of the (W518) Horn Switch Sense circuit
Yes >> Go To 4.
No >> Go To 5.
4. ISOLATE THE SHORT TO GROUND IN THE (W518) HORN SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT
side).
Yes >> Repair the (W515) Driver Seat Belt Sense circuit for a short
to ground.
information.

harness connectors.
ness connectors.
lems.
Is B2384 HORN SWITCH OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW still displayed?
vice information.
B2385 HORN SWITCH OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the Horn Switch Sense cir-
cuit above a calibrated value.
Possible Causes
(W518) HORN SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED TO VOLTAGE


tion related DTCs.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes >> Go To 3.
3. CHECK THE (W518) HORN SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Measure the voltage of the (W518) Horn Switch Sense circuit between
Yes >> Go To 4.
No >> Go To 5.
4. ISOLATE THE SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE (W518) HORN SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT
side).
Measure the voltage of the (W518) Horn Switch Sense circuit between
Yes >> Repair the (W518) Horn Switch Sense circuit for a short to
voltage.
information.
5. CHECK THE (W518) HORN SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

side).
Yes >> Go To 6.
No >> Repair the (W518) Horn Switch Sense circuit for an open or
high resistance.

harness connectors.
ness connectors.
lems.
Is B2385 HORN SWITCH OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH still displayed?
vice information.
U0021 CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT OPEN

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected an open condition on the
(W527) VSIM CAN B Bus (+) circuit.
Possible Causes
(W527) VSIM CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT OPEN
Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM)
Diagnostic Test

Erase the DTCs.
Yes >> Go To 2.
2. CHECK THE (W527) VSIM CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
side).
Measure the resistance of the (W527) VSIM CAN B Bus (+) circuit
PTIM) C2 connector and the Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi
Interface Module-PTIM) 24 way harness connector (aftermarket light/si-
ren controller side).
No >> Repair the (W527) Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi
Interface Module-PTIM) CAN B Bus (+) circuit for an open.
U0022 CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the (W527) VSIM CAN B
Bus (+) circuit is below a calibrated value.
Possible Causes
(W527) VSIM CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
Diagnostic Test

Erase the DTCs.
Yes >> Go To 2.
2. CHECK (W527) VSIM CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
side).
Measure the resistance between ground and the (W527) VSIM CAN B
Bus (+) circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (W527) VSIM CAN B Bus (+) circuit for a short
to ground.
circuits. If ok, replace the Multi-Purpose Module (Police And
Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) in accordance with the service
information.
U0023 CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Bus (+) circuit is above a calibrated value.
Possible Causes
(W527) VSIM CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE

(W528) VSIM CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
Diagnostic Test

Erase the DTCs.
Yes >> Go To 2.
2. VSIM CAN B BUS CIRCUITS SHORTED TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage of the VSIM CAN B Bus circuits.
Yes >> Repair the VSIM CAN B Bus circuit(s) for a short to voltage.
information.
U0024 CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT OPEN

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected an open condition on the
(W527) VSIM CAN B Bus (-) circuit.
Possible Causes
(W527) VSIM CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT OPEN
Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM)
Diagnostic Test

Erase the DTCs.
Yes >> Go To 2.
2. CHECK THE (W527) VSIM CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
side).
Measure the resistance of the (W527) VSIM CAN B Bus (-) circuit
PTIM) C2 connector and the Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi
Interface Module-PTIM) 24 way harness connector (aftermarket light/si-
ren controller side).
No >> Repair the (W528) Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi
Interface Module-PTIM) CAN B Bus (-) circuit for an open.
U0025 CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Bus (-) circuit is below a calibrated value.
Possible Causes
(W527) VSIM CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
Diagnostic Test

Erase the DTCs.
Yes >> Go To 2.
2. CHECK (W527) VSIM CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
side).
Measure the resistance between ground and the (W527) VSIM CAN B
Bus (-) circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (W527) VSIM CAN B Bus (+) circuit for a short
to ground.
information.
U0026 CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Bus (-) circuit is above a calibrated value.
Possible Causes
(W528) VSIM CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE

(W527) VSIM CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
Diagnostic Test

Erase the DTCs.
Yes >> Go To 2.
2. VSIM CAN B BUS CIRCUITS SHORTED TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage of the VSIM CAN B Bus circuits.
Yes >> Repair the VSIM CAN B Bus circuit(s) for a short to voltage.
information.
U0141 LOST COMMUNICATION WITH IPM (FCM/TIPM)

test procedure.
U0151 LOST COMMUNICATION WITH OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER

(ORC)
test procedure.
U0156 LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ELECTRONIC OVERHEAD MODULE

test procedure.
U0159-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH PARK ASSIST CONTROL MODULE

test procedure.

test procedure.

MODULE
test procedure.

(SKREEM/WCM)
test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.
U0212-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH STEERING COLUMN CONTROL MODULE

test procedure.
8M - 136 MESSAGE CENTER - SERVICE INFORMATION LX
MESSAGE CENTER - SERVICE INFORMATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
MODULE REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

MODULE - POLICE/TAXI INTERFACE . . . . . . . . 137
LX MESSAGE CENTER - SERVICE INFORMATION 8M - 137
MODULE
DESCRIPTION
The Police/Taxi Interface Module (PTIM) (1) serves as
an interface between the aftermarket module and
various control modules of the vehicle. It is located in
the instrument panel center stack (2) where the ash
receiver is normally located on non-fleet equipped
vehicles. Depending on the request from the after-
market module, the PTIM retrieves information from
the Front Control Module (FCM), Sentry Key Remote
Entry Module (SKREEM)/Wireless Control Module
(WCM), Occupant restraint controller (ORC), Cabin
Compartment Node (CCN), and Steering Column
Module (SCM) via the Controller Area Network
(CAN)-B data bus and makes them available for spe-
cific applications that the aftermarket module may
apply. This microprocessor based module shall be in
sleep mode or wake-up mode based on the status
of the CAN BUS. The PTIM is operational when bat-
tery power is supplied independent of the ignition
switch power.

MODULE - POLICE/TAXI INTERFACE
Any diagnosis of the Police/Taxi Interface Module (PTIM) should begin with the use of a scan tool and the proper
Diagnostic Procedures Information. The scan tool can provide confirmation that the Controller Area Network (CAN)
Data Bus is functional and that all of the electronic modules are sending and receiving the proper messages on the
CAN Data Bus.
For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring dia-
grams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out
information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds.
Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information.
REMOVAL
2. Using an appropriate flat bladed tool, remove the
console cubby bin (1).
3. Remove the nuts (2) and screws (4) that secure
the accessory mounting bracket (3). Remove the
accessory mounting bracket (3) from the vehicle.
4. Remove the nut (2) securing the console (3) to the

mounting stud (5).
5. Lift the console (3) off the mounting stud (5) and
pull rearward to release the console mounting clips
from the instrument panel (1).
6. Disconnect the power outlet (4) electrical connector
(6) and remove the console (3) from the vehicle.
7. Remove the Police/Taxi Interface Module (PTIM)

retaining screws (3).
8. Pull the PTIM (1) rearward to release the PTIM
mounting bracket from the instrument panel center
stack (2).
9. Disconnect the electrical connectors (2) from the

PTIM (3) and remove it from the vehicle.
LX MESSAGE CENTER - SERVICE INFORMATION 8M - 139
10. Remove the PTIM (1) from the mounting bracket

(5) by releasing the retaining clip (4) and rotating
the PTIM upward releasing the locating tab (2)
from the bracket.
INSTALLATION
1. Install the Police/Taxi Interface Module (PTIM) (1)
onto the mounting bracket (5) by inserting the
locating tab (2) and rotating the PTIM downward
until the retaining clip (4) is securely snapped into
place.
2. Position the PTIM (3) into the vehicle and connect

the electrical connectors (2).
3. Push the PTIM (1) forward to insert the PTIM

mounting bracket clips into the instrument panel
center stack (2).
4. Install the retaining screws (3).
5. Position the console into the vehicle.

6. Connect the power outlet (4) electrical connector
(6)
7. Push forward to insert the console mounting clips
into the instrument panel (1). Lower the console (3)
onto the mounting stud (5) and install the retaining
nut (2).
8. Position the accessory mounting bracket (3) into

the vehicle and onto the mounting studs (7).
9. Install the nuts (2) and screws (4) that secure the
accessory mounting bracket (3).
10. Install the console cubby bin (1).
LX OVERHEAD CONSOLE - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8M - 141
OVERHEAD CONSOLE - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
OVERHEAD CONSOLE - ELECTRICAL U0169-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH

DIAGNOSTICS SUNROOF CONTROL MODULE. . . . . . . . . . . . 152
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING U0184-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B1A32-UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR RADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
SWITCH 1 STUCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 U0186-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B1A33-UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR AUDIO AMPLIFIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
B1A34-UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR SDARS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
B2217 - EVIC/EOM/CMTC INTERNAL . . . . . . . . 146 VEHICLE ENTERTAINMENT CONTROL
B222D - ECU UNABLE TO CONFIGURE / MODULE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
CONFIGURATION NOT LEARNED. . . . . . . . . . 147 U0197-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B2331VEHICLE NEEDS DEGAUSSED . . . . . . 148 HANDS FREE PHONE MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . 153
U0019CAN B BUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 U0199-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
U0141LOST COMMUNICATION WITH DRIVER DOOR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
FRONT CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 U0200-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
U0151-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH PASSENGER DOOR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER . . . . 152 U0208-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
U0154-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HEATED SEAT CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . 153
OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE . . . . 152 U0209-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
U0155-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH MEMORY SEAT CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . 154
CLUSTER/CCN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 U0212-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
U0159-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH SCCM-CAN-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
PARKING ASSIST CONTROL MODULE . . . . . 152 U0231-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH RAIN
U0164-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HVAC SENSING MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 U0241-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH AUTO
U0167-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HIGHBEAM HEADLAMP CONTROL
INTRUSION TRANSCEIVER CONTROL MODULE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
MODULE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
VEHICLE SECURITY CONTROL MODULE
(SKREEM/WCM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
8M - 142 OVERHEAD CONSOLE - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS LX
OVERHEAD CONSOLE - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS

B1A32-UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR SWITCH 1 STUCK

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Electronic Overhead Module detects the UGDO switch in the closed position for more than 2 minutes.
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1. REPLACE THE ELECTRONIC OVERHEAD MODULE

When this code is set, the Electronic Overhead Module must be replaced.
Repair
Replace the Electronic Overhead Module in accordance with the Service Information.

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test

Repair

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test

Repair
B2217 - EVIC/EOM/CMTC INTERNAL

When Monitored:
With the ignition on, internal self test routine running.
Set Condition:
The Electronic Overhead Module fails one of seven internal tests.
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1. VERIFY OPERATION OF THE ELECTRONIC OVERHEAD MODULE

With the scan tool, erase Electronic Overhead Module DTCs.
With the scan tool, activate the Electronic Overhead Module self test.
Wait for self test to complete.
With the scan tool, read Electronic Overhead Module DTCs.
Does the scan tool display: B2217EVIC/EOM/CMTC INTERNAL?
YES >> Replace the Electronic Overhead Module in accordance with the service information.
NO >> Test complete.
B222D - ECU UNABLE TO CONFIGURE / CONFIGURATION NOT LEARNED

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Electronic Overhead Module does not receive the configuration information from the Front Control Module.
POSSIBLE CAUSES
NO COMMUNICATION WITH FRONT CONTROL MODULE
ACTIVE FCM DTCs
Diagnostic Test

With the scan tool, record and erase any Electronic Overhead Module DTCs.
Turn the ignition off, wait 30 seconds then turn the ignition on.
Is the DTC active?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The condition that caused this code to set is not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram as a
guide, inspect the wiring and connectors for an intermittent condition. Operate the system several times
and recheck for active DTCs.
2. CHECK COMMUNICATION TO THE FRONT CONTROL MODULE

With the scan tool, check to see if the Front Control Module is active on the bus.
Is the scan tool able to communicate with the Front Control Module?
Yes >> Replace the Electronic Overhead Module in accordance with the Service Information.
No >> Refer to the symptom list for problems related to Communication. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELEC-
TRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
B2331VEHICLE NEEDS DEGAUSSED

When Monitored:
Vehicle speed greater than 10 mph.
Set Condition:
The magnetic field around the vehicle is greater than 2.4 guass.
Diagnostic Test
1. PERFORM THE VEHICLE DEMAGNITIZING PROCEDURE

NOTE: A blank compass display indicates that vehicle degaussing is required.
NOTE: After demagnitizing, the vehicle will enter Auto Fast-Cal when the ignition is turned on.
NOTE: Ensure that the correct compass variance is stored in the compass memory. See Setting Compass
Variance in the Service Information.
View repair.
Repair
Refer to the Service Information and perform the Compass Demagnitizing Standard Procedure.
U0019CAN B BUS

When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
If the Can B Bus (+) or B Bus () circuit is open, shorted to voltage, or shorted to ground.
Possible Causes

Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC U0019CAN B BUS

With the scan tool, record and erase any Electronic Overhead Module DTCs.
Is DTC U0019CAN B BUS active?
Yes >> Go To 2
nals.
2. CHECK FOR ACTIVE CAN B BUS RELATED DTCS IN THE FRONT CONTROL MODULE
Does the scan tool display any active CAN B BUS related DTCs?
Yes >> Diagnose and repair the DTC(s). (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
No >> Go to 3
3. CHECK (D55) CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Disconnect the Electronic Overhead Module harness connector.
Front Control Module C1 harness connector and the Electronic Over-
head Module harness connector.
Yes >> Go To 4
4. CHECK THE (D54) CAN B BUS () CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Front Control Module C1 harness connector and the Electronic Over-
head Module harness connector.
Yes >> Replace the Electronic Overhead Module in accordance

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

MODULE
test procedure.

(SKREEM/WCM)
test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

MODULE
test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.
U0241-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH AUTO HIGHBEAM HEADLAMP CONTROL

MODULE
test procedure.
LX OVERHEAD CONSOLE - SERVICE INFORMATION 8M - 155
OVERHEAD CONSOLE - SERVICE INFORMATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
OVERHEAD CONSOLE - SERVICE DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING

INFORMATION UNIVERSAL TRANSMITTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 STANDARD PROCEDURE
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 PROGRAMMING TRANSMITER CODES . . . . . 167
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 ERASING TRANSMITTER CODES . . . . . . . . . . . 168
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION REPROGAMMING TRANSMITTER CODES . . . 168
CENTER REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 SENSOR-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
CENTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
STANDARD PROCEDURE AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR . . . . . . . . . 170
COMPASS CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
COMPASS DEMAGNETIZING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
COMPASS VARIATION ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . 163
UNIVERSAL TRANSMITTER
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
8M - 156 OVERHEAD CONSOLE - SERVICE INFORMATION LX
OVERHEAD CONSOLE - SERVICE INFORMATION

DESCRIPTION
An overhead console is standard on this vehicle and
includes the following components:
Overhead storage compartment (1)
Front map/reading lamps (2)
Power sunroof switch (3) - if equipped
Universal transmitter (4)
Electronic Overhead Module
The overhead console assembly is mounted by three

snap clips (1) securing it to a molded plastic retainer
bracket located above the headliner. The Electronic
Overhead Module is secured to the overhead console
with screws (2).
REMOVAL
2. Pull downward on the sides of the overhead con-
sole housing firmly and evenly to disengage the
snap clips from the overhead console bracket.
3. Lower the overhead console from the headliner far

enough to access the wire harness connectors (2).
4. Disconnect the roof wire harness connectors (2)
from the overhead console wire harness connector.
5. Remove the overhead console from the headliner.
INSTALLATION
1. Position the overhead console near the mounting
location on the headliner.
2. Reconnect the roof wire harness connectors (2) to
the overhead console.
3. Align the snap clips on the overhead console hous-
ing with their receptacles (1) in the overhead con-
sole bracket.
4. Push upward firmly and evenly on the sides of the
overhead console housing over the snap clip loca-
tions until the snap clip is fully engaged with its
receptacle in the overhead console bracket.
5. Reconnect the battery negative cable.

DESCRIPTION
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
tures a driver-interactive display. The display is located
in the upper part of the instrument cluster between the
speedometer and tachometer. This system conve-
niently allows the driver to select a variety of useful
information by pressing the switches mounted on the
steering wheel. The EVIC displays information related
to the following:
System Status
Vehicle information warning message displays
Tire Pressure Monitor System If Equipped
Personal Settings (customer programmable features)
Compass display
Outside temperature display
Trip computer functions
UConnect hands-free communication system displays If Equipped
Navigation system screens If Equipped
Audio mode display
The EVIC system is comprised of several different components. Those components are:
Instrument Cluster
Steering Wheel Switches
Ambient Temperature Sensor
Electronic Overhead Module
Controller Area Network (CAN) Data Bus
Local Interface Network (LIN) Data Bus
The EVIC display is part of the Instrument Cluster assembly and is not serviced as a separate component. If the
display is inoperative the complete Instrument Cluster assembly must be replaced, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/IN-
STRUMENT CLUSTER - REMOVAL). If the steering wheel switches are inoperative and require replacement, (Refer
to 8 - ELECTRICAL/AUDIO/REMOTE SWITCHES - REMOVAL) for the appropriate procedure. If the compass posi-
tion sensor (Electronic Overhead Module) is inoperative and requires replacement, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/
OVERHEAD CONSOLE/UNIVERSAL TRANSMITTER - REMOVAL) for the appropriate procedure.
OPERATION
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) uses both non-switched and ignition switched sources of battery
current so that some of its features remain operational at any time, while others may only operate with the ignition
switch in the On position. When the ignition switch is turned to the On position, the EVIC display will return to the
last function being displayed before the ignition was turned to the Off position.
The EVIC system is comprised of several different components that communicate over the Controller Area Network
(CAN) and Local Interface Network (LIN) Data Buses. If the system is inoperative a scan tool and the appropriate
diagnostic information must be used to diagnose the system.
The steering wheel switches are used to operate the

different functions of the EVIC system. Pressing and
releasing the MENU button (1) will change the mode
displayed between Trip Functions, Navigation (If
Equipped), System Status, Personal Settings, and
Telephone (If Equipped). Pressing and releasing the
C/T (compass/thermometer) button (3) will cause the
EVIC to return to the compass/thermometer/trip com-
puter display mode from any other mode.
The SCROLL buttons (3) are used to scroll through

Trip Functions, Navigation (If Equipped), System Sta-
tus Messages, and Personal Settings (Customer Pro-
grammable Features). Pressing and releasing the
FUNCTION SELECT button (1) accepts a selected
choice. The AUDIO MODE SELECT button (2)
changes the mode of the radio from AM to FM to Tape
to CD, or to Satellite (SAT) depending on which radio
is in the vehicle. This button can also be used to
return to a previous navigation menu selection.
EVIC DISPLAY MODES

SYSTEM STATUS MODE
Displays warnings and user interaction messages. Initial warnings will be displayed full-screen for three seconds,
then override the odometer and show text warnings on the bottom line of the display. Critical text warnings will be
displayed until the failure is corrected. Non-critical text warnings will be displayed for 60 seconds. The driver can
scroll to view multiple messages by using the SCROLL buttons.
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays the following messages:
Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime)
Left Front Turn Signal Lamp Out
Left Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out
Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out
Right Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out
RKE Battery Low (with a single chime)
Memory 1/2 Profile Set
Memory 1/2 Profile Recall
Memory System Disabled Vehicle Not In Park (with a single chime)
Memory System Disabled Seat Belt Buckled (with a single chime)

Personal Settings Not Available Vehicle Not in Park
Left/Right Front Door Ajar (one or more, with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph)
Left/Right Rear Door Ajar (one or more, with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph)
Door (S) Ajar (with a single chime if vehicle is in motion)
Trunk Ajar (with a single chime)
Low Washer Fluid (with a single chime)
Adjustable Pedals Disabled Cruise Engaged
Adjustable Pedals Disabled Vehicle In Reverse
Channel 1, 2, OR 3 Transmit
Channel 1, 2, OR 3 Training
Channel 1, 2, OR 3 Trained
Clearing Channels
Channels Cleared
Channels Defaulted
Did Not Train
Left Front Tire Low Pressure
Left Rear Tire Low Pressure
Right Front Tire Low Pressure
Right Rear Tire Low Pressure
Check Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) System
Service Park Assist System
TRIP MODE
Provides a choice of units displayed in English or metric. The following information can be displayed at the top of
the screen:
Average Miles Per Gallon (MPG)
Distance to empty (DTE)
Trip A odometer
Trip B odometer
Elapsed time
The EVIC trip computer features several functions that can be reset. Pressing and releasing the FUNCTION
SELECT button once will clear the resettable function currently being displayed. Reset will only occur if a resettable
function is currently being displayed. To reset all resettable functions, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
button a second time within 3 seconds of resetting the currently displayed function (>Reset ALL will be displayed
during this 3 second window).
The odometer is displayed at the bottom of the screen. If warnings exist, they will replace the odometer in the
display. The driver can scroll to view information in the EVIC by using the SCROLL buttons.
COMPASS, TEMPERATURE AND AUDIO MODE
Compass heading and outside temperature are displayed at the top of the screen. On the lower half of the screen
the audio mode is displayed along with the odometer. Eight-point compass headings are displayed (N, S, E, W, NE,
NW, SE, SW) and up to 15 compass variance settings can be set and recalled. Outside temperature is displayed in
C (degrees Celsius) or F (degrees Fahrenheit). Audio mode can display any one of 12 radio station preset fre-
quencies, CD disc number, CD track number, tape, and one of 200 Satellite Radio Channels - if equipped.
TELEPHONE MODE - IF EQUIPPED
Provides the following information and features for the optional hands-free communications system:
Phone status: idle, voice mail, roaming, battery strength and signal strength in increments of 20 percent
Call status: Incoming call, connecting, connected, air time in minutes and seconds, call ended, busy, call failed,
roaming and no phone connection
Caller ID phone number display
NAVIGATION MODE - IF EQUIPPED
When the Navigation System is On, the steering wheel buttons can be used to select the Map or Menu display on
the Navigation Unit. When the Menu display is active, the SCROLL buttons can be used to scroll through the list,
the FUNCTION SELECT button can be used to select an item, and the AUDIO MODE SELECT button can be used
to return to the previous menu. When the Map display is active, pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will
change the Navigation Unit Display to the Menu.
If Turn by Turn Navigation is enabled through Personal Settings, the Navigation System will provide turn by turn
directions to the programmed destination in the EVIC display. The name of the approaching road is displayed at the
top of the screen, followed by an arrow to show the direction of the turn and the remaining distance to the turn
counted down.
PERSONAL SETTINGS MODE (CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES)
Allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in Park by pressing and releasing the MENU
button until Personal Settings is displayed in the EVIC. The following personal settings can be set and recalled:
Language: English, Spanish, German, Italian or French
Display units in English or Metric
Lock doors automatically at 15 mph (24 Kph), On or Off
Unlock door automatically on exit, On or Off
Remote Keyless Entry unlock driver door on first press or unlock all doors on first press
Recall Memory with Remote Keyless Entry Unlock, On or Off
Sound horn with Remote Keyless Entry Lock, On or Off
Delay turning headlamps off for 0, 30, 60 or 90 seconds
Headlamps on with wipers, On or Off
Rain Sensing Intermittent Wipers, On or Off
Automatically move seat back on exit, On or Off
Tilt mirrors down and in when transmission is shifted to Reverse, On or Off
Delay Power off to accessories until exit off, 45-seconds maximum, 5-minute maximum, 10-minute maximum
or 60-minute maximum
Turn headlamps on with Remote Keyless Entry Lock, On or Off
Turn headlamps on with Remote Keyless Entry Unlock, Off or 30 seconds
Park Assist System, On or Off
Confirmation of Voice Commands, On or Off
Turn-by-Turn Navigation, On or Off

The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) data is obtained from several components on the Controller Area
Network (CAN) Data Bus circuit. The EVIC will not function properly if the bus messages from any of these com-
ponents is not received. If no EVIC data is displayed, check the CAN Data Bus circuit communications, the Instru-
ment Cluster functions and the Front Control Module (FCM).
The use of a scan tool and the proper diagnostic procedures information are recommended for further testing of the
EVIC and the CAN Data Bus circuit. Refer to the appropriate wiring information for complete circuit schematic or
connector pin-out information.
STANDARD PROCEDURE
COMPASS CALIBRATION
CAUTION: Do not place any external magnets, such as magnetic roof mount antennas, in the vicinity of the
compass. Do not use magnetic tools when servicing the overhead console.
The electronic compass unit features a self-calibrating design, which simplifies the calibration procedure. This fea-
ture automatically updates the compass calibration while the vehicle is being driven. This allows the compass unit
to compensate for small changes in the residual magnetism that the vehicle may acquire during normal use. If the
compass readings appear to be erratic or the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays CAL, perform
the following calibration procedure. Also, any time EVIC service replacement components are installed, they must be
calibrated using this procedure. Do not attempt to calibrate the compass near large metal objects such as other
vehicles, large buildings, or bridges; or, near overhead or underground power lines.
Calibrate the compass manually as follows:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the On position.
2. Depress and hold the C/T push button (3) for
approximately two seconds.
3. Use the SCROLL buttons (3) until MANUAL COM-

PASS CALIBRATION is highlighted.
4. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button
(1) to start the calibration. The message CAL will
appear in the EVIC display.
5. Drive the vehicle on a level surface, away from
large metal objects and power lines, through one or
two complete circles in not less than 16 seconds.
The CAL message will disappear from the display
to indicate that the compass is now calibrated.
NOTE: A blank compass display indicates that

vehicle degaussing (demagnetizing) is necessary.
NOTE: If the CAL message remains in the dis-

play, either there is excessive magnetism near the
compass, or the unit is inoperative. Repeat the
calibration procedure at least one more time.
NOTE: If the wrong direction is still indicated in the compass display, the area selected for calibration may
be too close to a strong magnetic field. Repeat the calibration procedure in another location.
COMPASS DEMAGNETIZING
A degaussing tool (Special Tool 6029) is used to
demagnetize, or degauss, the roof panel above the
overhead console. Equivalent units must be rated as
continuous duty for 110/115 volts and 60 Hz. They
must also have a field strength of over 350 gauss at 7
millimeters (0.25 inch) beyond the tip of the probe.
To demagnetize the roof panel proceed as follows:

1. Be certain that the ignition switch is in the Off posi-
tion, before you begin the demagnetizing proce-
dure.
2. Place a piece of paper approximately 22 by 28
centimeters (8.5 by 11 inches), oriented on the
vehicle lengthwise from front to rear, on the center
line of the roof at the windshield header. The pur-
pose of the paper is to protect the roof panel from
scratches, and to define the area to be demagne-
tized.
3. Connect the degaussing tool to an electrical outlet,
while keeping the tool at least 61 centimeters (2
feet) away from the compass unit.
4. Slowly approach the center line of the roof panel at
the windshield header, with the degaussing tool
connected.
5. Contact the roof panel with the plastic coated tip of
the degaussing tool. Be sure that the template is in
place to avoid scratching the roof panel. Using a
slow, back-and-forth sweeping motion, and allowing
13 millimeters (0.50 inch) between passes, move
the tool at least 11 centimeters (4 inches) to each
side of the roof center line, and 28 centimeters (11
inches) back from the windshield header.
6. With the degaussing tool still energized, slowly
back it away from the roof panel. When the tip of
the tool is at least 61 centimeters (2 feet) from the
roof panel, disconnect the tool.
7. Calibrate the compass, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/OVERHEAD CONSOLE/ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFO CEN-
TER - STANDARD PROCEDURE - COMPASS CALIBRATION) and adjust the compass variance, (Refer to 8 -
ELECTRICAL/OVERHEAD CONSOLE/ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFO CENTER - STANDARD PROCEDURE -
COMPASS VARIATION ADJUSTMENT).
COMPASS VARIATION ADJUSTMENT

Compass variance, also known as magnetic declination, is the difference in angle between magnetic north and true
geographic north. In some geographic locations, the difference between magnetic and geographic north is great
enough to cause the compass to give false readings. If this problem occurs, the compass variance setting may need
to be changed.
To set the compass variance:
1. Using the Variance Settings map, find your geographic location and note the zone number.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the On position.
3. Depress and hold the C/T push button (3) for
approximately two seconds.
4. Use the SCROLL buttons (3) until COMPASS

VARIANCE is highlighted. The COMPASS VARI-
ANCE message and the last variance zone num-
ber will be displayed.
5. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button
(1) until the zone number for your geographic loca-
tion appears in the display.
6. Depress and release the C/T push button (3) to

exit.
7. Confirm that the correct directions are now indi-
cated by the compass.
DESCRIPTION
The universal transmitter transceiver is integral to the
overhead console. The only visible component of the
universal transmitter are the three transmitter push
buttons (4) at the front of the overhead console. The
buttons are marked with one, two or three illuminated
dots, respectively, for identification of each channel.
Each of the three universal transmitter push buttons
controls an independent radio transmitter channel.
Each of these three channels can be trained to trans-
mit a different radio frequency signal for the remote
operation of garage door openers, motorized gate
openers, home or office lighting, security systems or
just about any other device that can be equipped with
a radio receiver in the 286 to 399 MegaHertz (MHz)
frequency range for remote operation. The universal
transmitter is capable of operating systems using
either rolling code or non-rolling code technology. The system will not transmit operating signals if the Vehicle Theft
Security System is armed.
The universal transmitter cannot be repaired, and is available for service only as a unit. This unit includes the push
button switches and the plastic module.

If the Universal Transmitter is inoperative, but the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) is operating normally,
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/OVERHEAD CONSOLE/UNIVERSAL TRANSMITTER - STANDARD PROCEDURE) for
instructions on training the Transmitter. Retrain the Transmitter with a known good transmitter as instructed and test
the Transmitter operation again.
If the unit is still inoperative, test the universal trans-
mitter with Radio Frequency Detector special tool as
described below:
1. Turn the Radio Frequency (RF) Detector ON. A
chirp will sound and the green power LED will
light. If the green LED does not light, replace the
battery.
2. Hold the RF detector within one inch of the
TRAINED universal transmitter and press any of
the transmitters buttons.
3. The red signal detection LEDs will light and the tool
will beep if a radio signal is detected. Repeat this
test for each button. If any button is inoperative,
replace the universal transmitter assembly, (Refer
to 8 - ELECTRICAL/OVERHEAD CONSOLE/UNI-
VERSAL TRANSMITTER - REMOVAL).
If both the Transmitter and the EVIC module are inop-
erative, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/OVERHEAD CON-
SOLE/ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFO CENTER -
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for further diagnosis.
Refer to the appropriate wiring information for com-
plete circuit schematic or connector pin-out informa-
tion.
STANDARD PROCEDURE
PROGRAMMING TRANSMITER CODES
CAUTION: Vehicle exhaust contains carbon mon-
oxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run the vehicles
exhaust while training the transceiver. Exhaust
gas can cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION: Your motorized door or gate will open

and close while you are training the Universal
Transceiver. Do not train the transceiver if people
or pets are in the path of the door or gate. A mov-
ing door or gate can cause serious injury or death
to people and pets or damage to objects.
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-

tures a driver-interactive display which includes
HomeLinkT system messages. The EVIC is located in
the upper part of the cluster between the speedometer
and tachometer.
1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLinkT buttons (4), and release only when the EVIC display shows Channels
Cleared (after 20 seconds). Do not hold the buttons for longer than 30 seconds and do not repeat step one to
program a second and/or third hand-held transmitter to the remaining two HomeLinkT buttons.
2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 1-3 inches (3-8 cm) away from the HomeLinkT buttons.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLinkT button that you want to train and the hand-held transmitter
buttons. Do not release the buttons until step 4 has been completed.
4. The EVIC display will show Channel X Training (where X is Channel 1, 2, or 3). Release both buttons after the
EVIC display shows Channel X Trained.
NOTE: If the EVIC display shows Did Not Train repeat steps 24.
5. Press and hold the just trained HomeLinkT button and observe the EVIC display. If the EVIC display shows
Channel X Transmit (where X is Channel 1, 2, or 3), programming is complete and your device should activate
when the HomeLinkT button is pressed and released.
NOTE: To program the remaining two HomeLinkT buttons, begin with Programming step two. Do not
repeat step one.
NOTE: If your hand-held transmitter appears to program the universal transceiver, but your garage door
does not operate using the transmitter and your garage door opener was manufactured after 1995, your
garage door opener may have a multiple security code system (rolling code system). Please proceed to
steps 68 to complete the programming of a rolling code equipped device (most common garage door
openers require this step.
6. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit) in the garage, locate the learn or smart button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head unit.
7. Firmly press and release the learn or smart button. (The name and color of the button may vary by manu-
facturer.)
NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate step eight.
8. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two seconds and release the programmed HomeLinkT button.
Repeat the press/hold/release sequence a second time, and, depending on the brand of the garage door
opener (or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming.
9. HomeLinkT should now activate your rolling code equipped device.
10. To program the remaining two HomeLinkT buttons, begin with Programming step two. Do not repeat step
one.
ERASING TRANSMITTER CODES

NOTE: Individual channels cannot be erased. Erasing the transmitter codes will erase ALL programmed
codes.
To erase programming from the three buttons (individual buttons cannot be erased but can be reprogrammed -
note below), follow the step noted:
Press and hold the two outer HomeLinkT buttons and release only when the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) display shows Channels Cleared (after 20 seconds). Release both buttons. Do not hold for
longer that 30 seconds. HomeLinkT is now in the train (or learning) mode and can be programmed at any time,
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/OVERHEAD CONSOLE/UNIVERSAL TRANSMITTER - STANDARD PROCE-
DURE).
REPROGAMMING TRANSMITTER CODES

CAUTION: Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run the vehicles exhaust
while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION: Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the Universal Transceiver.
Do not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the path of the door or gate. A moving door or gate can
cause serious injury or death to people and pets or damage to objects.
To program a device to HomeLinkT using a HomeLinkT button previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLinkT button
(4). Do NOT release the button.
2. The EVIC display will show Channel X Trans-
mit (where X is Channel 1, 2, or 3) for 20 seconds
and then change to Channel X Training. Without
releasing the HomeLinkT button, proceed to step 3.
3. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter
1-3 inches (3-8 cm) away from the HomeLinkT but-
tons.
4. Simultaneously press and hold both the
HomeLinkT button that you want to train and the
hand-held transmitter buttons. Do not release the
buttons until step 4 has been completed.
5. Press and hold the just trained HomeLinkT but-
ton and observe the EVIC display. If the EVIC dis-
play shows Channel X Transmit (where X is
Channel 1, 2, or 3), programming is complete and your device should activate when the HomeLinkT button is
pressed and released.
NOTE: To program the remaining two HomeLinkT buttons, begin with Programming step two. Do not
repeat step one.
NOTE: If your hand-held transmitter appears to program the universal transceiver, but your garage door
does not operate using the transmitter and your garage door opener was manufactured after 1995, your
garage door opener may have a multiple security code system (rolling code system). Please proceed to
steps 68 to complete the programming of a rolling code equipped device (most common garage door
openers require this step).
6. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit) in the garage, locate the learn or smart button. This
can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head unit.
7. Firmly press and release the learn or smart button. (The name and color of the button may vary by man-
ufacturer.)
NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate step eight.
8. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two seconds and release the programmed HomeLinkT but-
ton. Repeat the press/hold/release sequence a second time, and, depending on the brand of the garage door
opener (or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming.
9. HomeLinkT should now activate your rolling code equipped device.
REMOVAL
2. Remove the overhead console assembly, (Refer to
8 - ELECTRICAL/OVERHEAD CONSOLE -
REMOVAL).
3. Remove the universal transmitter retaining screws
(2) and separate the transmitter from the overhead
console.
INSTALLATION
NOTE: In addition to the Universal Transmitter
operation the Electronic Overhead Module is
responsible for some of the compass functions.
Anytime the Electronic Overhead Module is
replaced the compass variance value must be set,
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/OVERHEAD CONSOLE/
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFO CENTER - STAN-
DARD PROCEDURE - COMPASS VARIATION
ADJUSTMENT).
1. Position the universal transmitter onto the overhead

console assembly and install the retaining screws
(2).
2. Install the overhead console assembly, (Refer to 8 -
ELECTRICAL/OVERHEAD CONSOLE - INSTAL-
LATION).
4. Program the universal transmitter codes, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/OVERHEAD CONSOLE/UNIVERSAL
TRANSMITTER - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
SENSOR-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE

DESCRIPTION
The ambient temperature sensor is a variable resistor
type sensor. it is mounted to the lower front fascia
behind the radiator grille and in front of the engine
compartment.
The ambient temperature sensor cannot be adjusted
or repaired and, if inoperative or damaged, it must be
replaced.
OPERATION
The ambient temperature sensor is a variable resistor that operates on a five-volt reference signal sent by the Front
Control Module (FCM). The resistance in the sensor changes as temperature changes, changing the temperature
sensor signal circuit voltage to the FCM. Based upon the resistance in the sensor, the FCM senses a specific volt-
age on the temperature sensor signal circuit. The FCM then translates the voltage into a temperature reading that
it sent over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus to other modules utilizing temperature information.

AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
The temperature function is supported by the ambient temperature sensor, a wiring circuit, and the Front Control
Module (FCM). If any portion of the ambient temperature sensor circuit fails or if the Controller Area Network (CAN)
data bus information is missing, a ( ) will appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) display in
place of the temperature. When the sensor is exposed to temperatures above 55 C (130 F), or if the sensor circuit
is shorted, 55 C (130 F) will appear in the EVIC display in place of the temperature. When the sensor is exposed
to temperatures below - 40 C (- 40 F) or if the sensor circuit is open, - 40 C (- 40 F) will appear in the EVIC
display.
The ambient temperature sensor circuit can also be diagnosed using the following Sensor Test, and Sensor Circuit
Test. If the temperature sensor and circuit are confirmed to be OK, but the temperature display is inoperative or
incorrect, test the EVIC operation, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/OVERHEAD CONSOLE/ELECTRONIC VEHICLE
INFO CENTER - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).
SENSOR TEST
1. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Disconnect the
ambient temperature sensor harness connector.
2. Measure the resistance of the ambient temperature sensor. At - 40 C (- 40 F), the sensor resistance is 336
kilohms. At 55 C (130 F), the sensor resistance is 2.488 kilohms. The sensor resistance should read between
these two values. If OK, refer to Sensor Circuit Test in this group. If not OK, replace the inoperative ambient
temperature sensor.
SENSOR CIRCUIT TEST

1. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Disconnect the wire
harness connectors from the ambient temperature sensor and the FCM.
2. Connect a jumper wire between the two terminals in the body half of the ambient temperature sensor harness
connector.
3. Check for continuity between the sensor return circuit and the ambient temperature sensor signal circuit cavities
of the FCM harness connector. There should be continuity. If OK, go to Step 4. If not OK, repair the open sensor
return circuit or ambient temperature sensor signal circuit to the ambient temperature sensor as required.
4. Check for continuity between the ambient temperature sensor signal circuit cavity of the FCM harness connector
and a good ground. There should be no continuity. If OK, test the EVIC operation, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/
OVERHEAD CONSOLE/ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFO CENTER - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING). If not OK,
repair the shorted ambient temperature sensor signal circuit as required.
REMOVAL
2. Remove the belly pan, (Refer to 23 - BODY/EXTERIOR/BELLY PAN - REMOVAL).
3. Disconnect the wire harness connector (1) from the
ambient temperature sensor (2).
4. Remove the fastener that secures the ambient tem-

perature sensor bracket to the front fascia.
5. Remove the ambient temperature sensor from the
vehicle.
INSTALLATION
1. Position the ambient temperature sensor in the
vehicle.
2. Install the fastener that secures the ambient tem-
perature sensor to the front fascia.
3. Connect the wire harness connector (1) to the

ambient temperature sensor (2).
4. Install the belly pan, (Refer to 23 - BODY/EXTERI-
OR/BELLY PAN - INSTALLATION).
LX POWER SYSTEMS 8N - 1
POWER SYSTEMS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS. . . . 1 POWER SEATS - SERVICE INFORMATION. . . . . 184

POWER LOCKS - SERVICE INFORMATION . . . . . 50 POWER TOP - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSIS . . . . . . 201
POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL POWER TOP - SUNROOF SERVICE INFO . . . . . 220
DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 POWER WINDOWS - ELECTRICAL
POWER MIRRORS - SERVICE INFORMATION. . 114 DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS . . 119 POWER WINDOWS - SERVICE INFORMATION . 290
POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS B1826TRUNK RELEASE SWITCH INPUT

B1801DRIVER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK *DECKLID/LIFTGATE RELEASE
SWITCH CIRCUIT LOW CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . 3 INOPERATIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
B1803DRIVER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK *ALL DOORS FAIL TO LOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK LOCK *PASSENGER DOORS FAIL TO UNLOCK . . . . . 35
CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 *RIGHT DOOR LOCKS INOPERATIVE
B1804DRIVER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK (LHD ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK UNLOCK *LEFT DOOR LOCKS INOPERATIVE (LHD
CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
B1806PASSENGER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK *DRIVER DOOR LOCK INOPERATIVE . . . . . . . . 43
SWITCH CIRCUIT LOW CLUSTER . . . . . . . . 12 *ONE PASSENGER DOOR LOCK
B1808PASSENGER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK INOPERATIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK LOCK
CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
B1809PASSENGER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK
SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK UNLOCK
CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
8N - 2 POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS LX
POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS

LX POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 3
B1801DRIVER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT LOW CLUSTER

When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
When the Driver Door Lock Switch Mux circuit is below 0.15 volts for over 10 seconds.
Possible Causes
(G161) DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

(G161) DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORT TO THE (G167) DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH
RETURN CIRCUIT
DOOR LOCK SWITCH SHORT TO GROUND
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test

Operate the Driver Door Lock Switch in all positions several times.
Does the scan tool display B1801DRIVER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. DOOR LOCK SWITCH SHORTED

Disconnect the Driver Window/Door Lock Switch C1 and C2 connec-
tors.
Does the scan tool display B1801DRIVER DOOR LOCK/UN-
LOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT LOW?
No >> Replace the Driver Express Window/Door Lock Switch.
BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1.
Yes >> Go To 3
3. (G161) DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (G161) Driver Door
Lock Switch Mux circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (G161) Driver Door Lock Switch Mux circuit for a
short to ground.
No >> Go To 4
4. (G161) DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORT TO (G167) DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH
RETURN CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (G161) Driver Door Lock Switch
Mux circuit (in the C1 connector) and the (G167) Driver Door Lock
Switch Return circuit (in the C2 connector).
short to the (G167) Driver Door Lock Switch Return circuit.
B1803DRIVER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK LOCK CLUSTER

When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
When the Driver Door Lock Switch Mux circuit is between 0.8 and 1.5 volts for over 30 seconds.
Possible Causes

RETURN CIRCUIT
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test

Does the scan tool display B1803DRIVER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK LOCK?
Yes >> Go To 2

tors.
LOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK LOCK?
Yes >> Go To 3

short to ground.
No >> Go To 4
RETURN CIRCUIT
Mux circuit and the (G167) Driver Door Lock Switch Return circuit in
the Cluster C2 connector.
B1804DRIVER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK UNLOCK

CLUSTER
When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
When the Driver Door Lock Switch Mux circuit is between 0.15 and 0.8 volts for over 30 seconds.
Possible Causes

RETURN CIRCUIT
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test

Does the scan tool display B1804DRIVER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK UNLOCK?
Yes >> Go To 2

tors.
LOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK UNLOCK?
Yes >> Go To 3

short to ground.
No >> Go To 4
RETURN CIRCUIT
Mux circuit and the (G167) Driver Door Lock Switch Return circuit in
the Cluster C2 connector.
B1806PASSENGER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT LOW CLUSTER

When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
When the Passenger Door Lock Switch Mux circuit is below 0.15 volts for over 10 seconds.
Possible Causes
(G160) PASSENGER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

(G160) PASSENGER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORT TO THE (P37) PASSENGER DOOR LOCK
SWITCH RETURN CIRCUIT
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test

Operate the Passenger Door Lock Switch in all positions several times.
Does the scan tool display B1806PASSENGER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2

Disconnect the Passenger Express Window/Door Lock Switch connec-
tor.
Does the scan tool display B1806PASSENGER DOOR LOCK/
UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT LOW?
No >> Replace the Passenger Express Window/Door Lock Switch.
Yes >> Go To 3
3. (G160) PASSENGER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (G160) Passenger
Door Lock Switch Mux circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (G160) Passenger Door Lock Switch Mux circuit
No >> Go To 4
4. (G160) PASSENGER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORT TO (P37) PASSENGER DOOR LOCK
Measure the resistance between the (G160) Passenger Door Lock
Switch Mux circuit and the (P37) Passenger Door Lock Switch Return
circuit.
for a short to the (P37) Passenger Door Lock Switch
Return circuit.
B1808PASSENGER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK LOCK

CLUSTER
When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
When the Passenger Door Lock Switch Mux circuit is between 0.8 and 1.5 volts for over 30 seconds.
Possible Causes

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test

Does the scan tool display B1808PASSENGER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK LOCK?
Yes >> Go To 2
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1 (Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1).

tor.
UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK LOCK?
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1 (Refer to
Yes >> Go To 3

No >> Go To 4
circuit.
Return circuit.
B1809PASSENGER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK UNLOCK

CLUSTER
When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
When the Passenger Door Lock Switch Mux circuit is between 0.15 and 0.8 volts for over 30 seconds.
Possible Causes

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test

Does the scan tool display B1809PASSENGER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK
UNLOCK?
Yes >> Go To 2

tor.
UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK UNLOCK?
Yes >> Go To 3

No >> Go To 4
circuit.
Return circuit.
B1826TRUNK RELEASE SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
Whenever the module is awake.
Set Condition:
When the (G25) Decklid/Liftgate Release Switch Sense circuit is shorted low for over 30 seconds.
Possible Causes
(G25) DECKLID/LIFTGATE RELEASE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

DECKLID OR LIFTGATE SWITCH SHORTED TO GROUND
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test

Operate the Decklid or Liftgate Switch several times.
Does the scan tool display B1826TRUNK RELEASE SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1 (Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1).
2. TRUNK SWITCH SHORTED

Disconnect the Decklid or Liftgate Release Switch connector.
Cycle the ignition from on to off three times.
Does the scan tool display B1826TRUNK RELEASE SWITCH
INPUT CIRCUIT LOW?
No >> Replace the decklid or liftgate switch.
Yes >> Go To 3
3. (P25) DECKLID/LIFTGATE RELEASE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND.

Measure the resistance between Ground and the (G25) Decklid/Liftgate
Release Switch sense circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (G25) Decklid/Liftgate Release Switch Sense cir-
No >> Replace the Instrument Cluster
*DECKLID/LIFTGATE RELEASE INOPERATIVE

Possible Causes
(P31) DECKLID/LIFTGATE RELEASE DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

(P31) DECKLID/LIFTGATE RELEASE DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
(P31) DECKLID/LIFTGATE RELEASE DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN
DECKLID/LIFTGATE RELEASE GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
(G25) DECKLID/LIFTGATE RELEASE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(G25) DECKLID/LIFTGATE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN
DECKLID OR LIFTGATE SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
DECKLID OR LIFTGATE SWITCH INOPERATIVE
DECKLID OR LIFTGATE LATCH INOPERATIVE
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1. DECKLID/LIFTGATE OPERATIONAL FROM RKE ONLY
Is the Decklid Or Liftgate operational from the RKE only?

No >> Go To 2
Yes >> Go To 7
2. DECKLID OR LIFTGATE LATCH INOPERATIVE

NOTE: Ensure all fuses are good before proceeding.
Disconnect the liftgate or decklid latch connector.
Connect a test light between the (P31) Decklid/Liftgate Release Driver
circuit and the Ground circuit.
Operate the decklid or liftgate and observe the test light.
Does the testlight illuminate brightly for approximately 300 ms.
when the decklid or liftgate is operated?
Yes >> Replace the Decklid or Liftgate Latch.
No >> Go To 3
3. OPEN GROUND CIRCUIT.

Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, check the Ground cir-
cuit in the latch connector.
No >> Repair the Ground circuit for an open.
Yes >> Go To 4
4. (P31) DECKLID/LIFTGATE RELEASE DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND.

Measure the resistance between Ground and the (P31) Decklid/Liftgate
Release Driver circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (P31) Decklid/Liftgate Release Driver circuit for
a short to ground.
No >> Go To 5
5. (P31) DECKLID/LIFTGATE RELEASE DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE.

Measure the voltage between Ground and the (P31) Decklid/Liftgate
Release Driver circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (P31) Decklid/Liftgate Release Driver circuit for
a short to voltage.
No >> Go To 6
6. (P31) DECKLID/LIFTGATE RELEASE DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN.

Measure the resistance of the (P31) Decklid/Liftgate Release Driver cir-
cuit between the Latch connector and the Cluster C3 connector.
No >> Repair the (P31) Decklid/Liftgate Release Driver circuit for
an open.
Yes >> Replace the Instrument Cluster.
7. IS THIS VEHICLE A 4 DOOR SEDAN?
Is this vehicle a 4 door sedan?

Yes >> Go To 8
No >> Go To 12
8. DECKLID SWITCH INOPERATIVE.

NOTE: Ensure the Decklid Latch is connected before proceeding.
Disconnect the Decklid Release Switch connector.
Turn the Ignition On.
Momentarily connect a jumper wire between the (G25) Decklid/Liftgate
Release Switch Sense circuit and the Ground circuit.
Did the decklid open?
Yes >> Replace the decklid switch.
No >> Go To 9
9. SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN

cuit.
Yes >> Go To 10

No >> Go To 11
11. (P25) DECKLID/LIFTGATE RELEASE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN.

Measure the resistance of the (G25) Decklid/Liftgate Release Switch
sense circuit between the Switch connector and the Cluster C1 connec-
tor.
No >> Repair the (G25) Decklid/Liftgate Release Switch Sense cir-
cuit for an open.
Yes >> Replace the Instrument Cluster
12. LIFTGATE SWITCH INOPERATIVE.

Turn the Ignition Off.
Disconnect the Liftgate Release Switch connector.
Connect an ohmmeter between the terminals of the switch connector (Switch Side).
Press and hold the switch closed while measuring the resistance of the switch.
Is the resistance approximately 4700.0 ohms?
No >> Replace the liftgate switch.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1 (Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1).
Yes >> Go TO 13
13. SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN

cuit in the Liftgate Release Switch harness connector.
No >> Repair the Ground circuit for an open.Perform BODY VER-
IFICATION TEST - VER 1 (Refer to BODY VERIFICATION
TEST - VER 1).
Yes >> Go To 14

No >> Go To 11
15. (P25) DECKLID/LIFTGATE RELEASE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN.

Measure the resistance of the (G25) Decklid/Liftgate Release Switch
sense circuit between the Switch connector and the Cluster C1 connec-
tor.
No >> Repair the (G25) Decklid/Liftgate Release Switch Sense cir-
cuit for an open.
Yes >> Replace the Instrument Cluster
*ALL DOORS FAIL TO LOCK

Theory of Operation
Both the Door Lock Driver circuits (P392 and P393) are connected together inside the Cluster. Therefore either
circuit shorted will affect all door locks. Depending on where the short is, some doors may lock.
Possible Causes
(P392) DOOR LOCK DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR DOOR LOCK DTCS

Try to operate the door locks several times.
Does the scan tool display any Door Lock System DTCs?
No >> Go To 2
Yes >> Refer to symptom list for problems related to POWER DOOR LOCKS.
2. CHECK (P392) DOOR LOCK DRIVER RIGHT DOORS CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
NOTE: If only one motor is inoperative when the door locks are actuated, disconnect that motor and retest
to see if the other doors lock properly. If they do, replace the defective motor.
NOTE: Ensure the door lock inhibit (key in ignition) and the door ajar systems are operating properly before
proceeding. These systems affect the door lock locking functions if they are not working as they should.

Measure the resistance between ground and the (P392) Door Lock
Driver circuit.
No >> Go To 3
Yes >> Repair the (P392) Door Lock Driver circuit for a short to
ground.
3. CHECK (P393) DOOR LOCK DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (P393) Door Lock
Driver circuit.
No >> Replace the Cluster in accordance with service information.
ground.
*PASSENGER DOORS FAIL TO UNLOCK

Possible Causes
(P303) PASSENGER DOORS UNLOCK DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1. (P303) PASSENGER DOORS UNLOCK DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

NOTE: If only one motor fails to unlock when the door locks are actuated, disconnect that motor and retest
to see if the other doors unlock properly. If they do, replace the defective motor.

Measure the resistance between ground and the (P303) Passenger
Doors Unlock Driver circuit.
No >> Replace the Cluster in accordance with service information.
Yes >> Repair the (P303) Passenger Doors Unlock Driver circuit
*RIGHT DOOR LOCKS INOPERATIVE (LHD ONLY)

Possible Causes
(P392) DOOR LOCK DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN

(P303) PASSENGER DOOR UNLOCK DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN
CLUSTER
Theory of Operation
This test is only for Left Hand Drive vehicles because on the Right Hand Drive vehicles the Right Rear door lock is
connected with the Left Front door and the Left Rear door lock is connected with the Right Front (driver) door.
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK (P392) DOOR LOCK DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

NOTE: Graphics show Right Front Latch, Right Rear is similar.

Remove either right door inner trim panels to gain access to the door
latch connector.
Disconnect the Right Door Latch connector.
Measure the resistance of the (P392) Door Lock Driver circuit between
the Cluster C1 connector and the Right Door Latch connector.
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Repair the (P392) Door Lock Driver circuit for an open.
2. CHECK (P303) PASSENGER DOORS UNLOCK DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (P303) Passenger Doors Unlock Driver
circuit.
Yes >> Replace the Cluster in accordance with service information.
No >> Repair the (P303) Passenger Doors Unlock Driver circuit
for an open.
*LEFT DOOR LOCKS INOPERATIVE (LHD ONLY)

Possible Causes

CLUSTER
Theory of Operation
This test is only for Left Hand Drive vehicles because on the Right Hand Drive vehicles the Right Rear door lock is
connected with the Left Front door and the Left Rear door lock is connected with the Right Front (driver) door.
Diagnostic Test

Remove the left door inner trim panel to gain access to the door latch
connector.
Disconnect the Left Rear Door Latch connector.
the Cluster C1 connector and the Left Rear Door Latch connector.
Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECK (P303) PASSENGER DOORS UNLOCK DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (P303) Passenger Doors Unlock Driver
circuit between the Cluster C1 connector and the Left Rear Door Latch
connector.
Yes >> Replace the Cluster in accordance with service information.
No >> Repair the (P303) Passenger Doors Unlock Driver circuit
for an open.
*DRIVER DOOR LOCK INOPERATIVE

Possible Causes

(P1) DRIVER DOOR UNLOCK DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN
(P1) DRIVER DOOR UNLOCK DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
DRIVER DOOR LATCH
CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1. DRIVER DOOR LATCH INOPERATIVE

Disconnect the Driver Door Latch connector.
Connect a test light between the (P393) Door Lock Driver circuit and
the (P1) Driver Door Unlock Driver circuit.
Close the front doors or trip the door latches to the closed position.
Operate the door locks in both positions and observe the test light.
Does the test light illuminate brightly for approximately 300 ms.
when the door locks are actuated?
Yes >> Replace the Driver Door Latch.
No >> Go To 2
2. CHECK (P1) DRIVER DOOR UNLOCK DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (P1) Driver Door Unlock Driver circuit
between the Latch connector and the Cluster C1 connector.
No >> Repair the (P1) Driver Door Unlock Driver circuit for an
open.
Yes >> Go To 3
3. CHECK (P1) DRIVER DOOR UNLOCK DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between Ground and the (P1) Driver Door
Unlock Driver circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (P1) Driver Door Unlock Driver circuit for a short
to ground.
No >> Go To 4

the Cluster C1 connector and the Driver Door Latch connector.
Yes >> Go To 5
5. CHECK (P393) DOOR LOCK DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between Ground and the (P393) Door Lock
Driver circuit.
ground.
No >> Replace the Instrument Cluster in accordance with service
information.
*ONE PASSENGER DOOR LOCK INOPERATIVE

Possible Causes
(P392) OR (P393) DOOR LOCK DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN

(P392) OR (P393) DOOR LOCK DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(P303) PASSENGER DOOR UNLOCK DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
DOOR LATCH
Diagnostic Test
1. PASSENGER DOOR LATCH INOPERATIVE

NOTE: Graphics in this test show Passenger Front Latch (LHD) but the other 2 passenger latches are iden-
tical. They are also similar for RHD.

Disconnect the inoperative Passenger Door latch connector.
Connect a test light between the (P392/3) Door Lock Driver circuit and
the (P303) Passenger Door Unlock Driver circuit.
Close the front doors or trip the door latches to the closed position.
Operate the door locks in both positions and observe the test light.
Does the test light illuminate brightly for approximately 300
ms. when the door locks are actuated?
Yes >> Replace the Passenger Door Latch.
No >> Go To 2
2. CHECK (P303) PASSENGER DOOR UNLOCK DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (P303) Passenger Door Unlock Driver
circuit between the Latch connector and the Cluster C1 connector.
No >> Repair the (P303) Passenger Door Unlock Driver circuit for
an open.
Yes >> Go To 3
3. CHECK (P303) PASSENGER DOOR UNLOCK DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between Ground and the (P303) Passenger
Door Unlock Driver circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (P303) Passenger Door Unlock Driver circuit for
a short to ground.
No >> Go To 4
4. CHECK (P392/3) DOOR LOCK DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (P392/3) Door Lock Driver circuit
between the Cluster C1 connector and the Passenger Door Latch con-
nector.
Yes >> Repair the (P392/3) Door Lock Driver circuit for a short to
ground.
No >> Repair the (P392/3) Door Lock Driver circuit for an open.
8N - 50 POWER LOCKS - SERVICE INFORMATION LX
POWER LOCKS - SERVICE INFORMATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
POWER LOCKS - SERVICE INFORMATION STANDARD PROCEDURE

DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY CUSTOMER
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 PREFERENCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER
POWER LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 BATTERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 SPECIFICATIONS
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER . . . 57
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER . . . 56
LX POWER LOCKS - SERVICE INFORMATION 8N - 51
POWER LOCKS - SERVICE INFORMATION

DESCRIPTION
POWER LOCKS
The power lock system allows all of the doors and liftgate to be locked or unlocked electrically by operating a switch
on either front door trim panel. The power lock system receives non-switched battery current through a fuse in the
Junction Block (JB), so that the power locks remain operational, regardless of the ignition switch position.
The instrument cluster locks the doors automatically when the vehicle speed exceeds 25.7 Km/h (15 mph), all doors
are closed, and the accelerator pedal is depressed. The rolling door lock feature can be disabled through the EVIC.
This vehicle also offers several customer programmable features, which allows the selection of several optional
electronic features to suit individual preferences.
The power lock system for this vehicle can also be operated remotely using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) trans-
mitters.
CENTRAL LOCKING/UNLOCKING
The central locking system controls powered operation of the door and liftgate locks and the illuminated entry sys-
tem. Central locking includes the following features:
Automatic locking of the doors and liftgate when the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 25 km/h (15 mph).
Locking prevention with a door lock switch or the RKE transmitter if the key is in the ignition switch and the
drivers door is open.
Driver selectable unlocking mode: Unlock only the drivers door or all doors and the liftgate with one press of
the RKE transmitter unlock button. The drivers door cylinder can also be used to unlock the door. One turn of
the cylinder will unlock the drivers door, two turns within five seconds will unlock all doors.
Automatic illumination of interior courtesy lamps when the vehicle is unlocked.
Locking all doors and the liftgate by pressing the lock button on the RKE transmitter, or by pressing a lock
switch on one of the front doors.
DOOR LOCK MOTORS

The lock mechanisms are actuated by a reversible electric motor mounted within each door. The power lock motors
are integral to the door latch units.
The power lock motors cannot be adjusted or repaired. If inoperative or damaged, the door latch unit must be
replaced.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY

The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system locks and unlocks the doors and liftgate, turns on interior lamps, and arms
and disarms the Vehicle Theft Security System (if equipped). The RKE system operates on non-switched battery
current through a fuse in the Integrated Power Module (IPM), so that the system remains operational regardless of
the ignition switch position.
The RKE transmitters are also equipped with a Panic button. If the Panic button on the RKE transmitter is
depressed, the horn will sound and the exterior lights will flash on the vehicle for about three minutes or until the
Panic button is depressed a second time. A vehicle speed of approximately 25.7 kilometers-per-hour (15 miles-per-
hour) will also cancel the panic event.
The RKE system can also perform other functions on this vehicle. If the vehicle is equipped with the optional Vehicle
Theft Security System (VTSS), the RKE transmitter will arm the VTSS when the Lock button is depressed and dis-
arm the VTSS when the Unlock button is depressed.
The RKE system includes two transmitters when the vehicle is shipped from the factory, but the system can retain
the vehicle access codes of up to a total of eight transmitters. The transmitter codes are retained in the RKE mod-
ule memory, even if the battery is disconnected. If an RKE transmitter is faulty or lost, new transmitter vehicle
access codes can be programmed into the system using a scan tool.
This vehicle also offers several customer programmable features, which allows the selection of several optional
electronic features to suit individual preferences. Customer programmable feature options affecting the RKE system
include:
Remote Unlock Sequence - Allows the option of having only the driver side front door unlock when the RKE
transmitter Unlock button is depressed the first time. The remaining doors unlock when the button is depressed
a second time within five seconds of the first unlock press. Another option is having all doors and liftgate
unlock upon the first depression of the RKE transmitter Unlock button.
Sound Horn on Lock - Allows the option of having the horn sound a short chirp as an audible verification that
the RKE system received a valid Lock request from the RKE transmitter, or having no audible verification.
Flash Lights with Lock and Unlock - Allows the option of having the park lamps flash as an optical verifi-
cation that the RKE system received a valid Lock request or Unlock request from the RKE transmitter, or hav-
ing no optical verification.
Programming Additional Transmitters - Allows up to a total of eight transmitter vehicle access codes to be
stored in the receiver memory.
Certain functions and features of the RKE system rely upon resources shared with other electronic modules in the
vehicle over the CAN data bus network. For diagnosis of these electronic modules or of the data bus network, the
use of a scan tool and the appropriate diagnostic information are required.
OPERATION
POWER LOCKS
The instrument cluster locks or unlocks the doors when an actuation input signal from a door lock switch or Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is received. The instrument cluster turns on the output drivers and provides a volt-
age level to the door lock motor for a specified time. All passenger doors can be locked or unlocked using a
mechanical button mounted on the door trim panel. The drivers door can be locked or unlocked by using the key
cylinder.
DOOR LOCK MOTORS

The door lock motors are controlled by the instrument cluster. A positive and negative battery connection to the two
motor terminals will cause the motor to move in one direction. Reversing the current will cause the motor to move
in the opposite direction.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY

LOCK: Pressing the LOCK button locks all doors, sounds horn (chirp) once if enabled, flashes the park lamps
once if enabled, and arms the Vehicle Theft Security System (VTSS), if enabled. The chirp verifies that the
instrument cluster has sent a message for door lock operation. If a door has not been closed before pressing
the LOCK button, the vehicle may not be secured and the VTSS (if equipped) will not arm until the door is
closed.
UNLOCK: Pressing the UNLOCK button once will unlock the drivers door first if enabled, flashes the park
lamps twice if enabled, activates the illuminated entry system, and disarms the Vehicle Theft Security System
(VTSS), if equipped. Pressing the UNLOCK button twice within five seconds will unlock all doors, if drivers
door first is enabled.
PANIC: Pressing the PANIC button sounds the horns at half second intervals, flashes the exterior lamps, and
turns ON the interior lamps. The panic alarm will remain on for three minutes or until either the PANIC button
is actuated again or the vehicle speed exceeds 25.7 Km/h (15 mph) which will cancel the panic event.

POWER LOCKS
The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the power lock system requires the use of a
scan tool and the proper Diagnostic Procedures information.
Following are tests that will help to diagnose the hard wired components and circuits of the power lock system.
However, these tests may not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of this system. In order to obtain conclusive testing
of the power lock system, the CAN data bus network must be checked.
PRELIMINARY DIAGNOSIS
As a preliminary diagnosis for the power lock system, note the system operation while you actuate both the Lock
and Unlock functions with the power lock switches and with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. Then,
proceed as follows:
If the entire power lock system fails to function with either the power lock switches or the RKE transmitter,
check the fuse in the Junction Block (JB).
If the power lock system functions with both power lock switches, but not with the RKE transmitter, proceed to
diagnosis of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system.
If the power lock system functions with the RKE transmitter, but not with one or both power lock switches,
proceed to diagnosis of the door lock switches.
If the driver side power lock switch operates only the driver side front door power lock motor, but all other
power lock motors operate with the passenger side power lock switch or the RKE transmitter, use a scan tool
and the appropriate diagnostic information to diagnose the CAN data bus.
If only one power lock motor fails to operate with both power lock switches and the RKE transmitter, use a
scan tool and the appropriate diagnostic information to diagnose the CAN data bus.
SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK
DESCRIPTION
A window/lock switch located in each front door trim panel. The drivers side window/lock switch includes the fol-
lowing:
Power Lock Switch - A two-way, momentary, resistor multiplexed switch to control the power lock system.
Power Window Lockout Switch - A two-way, latching, push-button switch allows the vehicle operator to lock
out the power window switches on each passenger door so that the passenger door power windows may be
operated only from the master switches.
Power Window Switches - A two-way, momentary power window switch for the driver side front door also has
a second detent in the Down direction and internal circuitry to provide an Auto-Down feature for the driver side
front door power window. In addition to the power window switch for its own door, the window/lock switch
houses individual master switches for each passenger door power window.
The passenger side window/lock switch includes the following:
Power Lock Switch - A two-way, momentary, resistor multiplexed switch to control the power lock system.
Power Window Switch - A two-way, momentary power window switch for the passenger side front door.
OPERATION
The driver side window/lock switch combines a power lock switch, a driver power window switch with an Auto-down
feature, master switches for each passenger door power window, a power window lockout switch, a power mirror
selector switch, and four power mirror adjustment switches in a single assembly. The switches in the window/lock
switch can be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and methods.
Power Lock Switch
The power lock switch circuitry is connected in series between ground and the driver door switch mux input of the
instrument cluster (without memory). If equipped with the memory system, the circuitry is connected to the memory
mirror module. Each power lock switch position (Lock, Unlock, and Neutral) provides a different resistance value to
the instrument cluster or memory mirror input, which allows the instrument cluster or memory module to sense the
switch position. Based upon the power lock switch input, the instrument cluster or memory module controls the
battery and ground feed outputs to the individual power lock motors to lock or unlock the door latches. The Light-
Emitting Diode (LED) in the power lock switch is connected to battery current through the power window circuit
breaker in the Integrated Power Module (IPM) on a fused ignition switch output (run-acc) circuit so that the switch
will be illuminated whenever the ignition switch is in the On or Accessory positions.
Power Window Switches
The power window switch circuitry is connected to battery current through a circuit breaker in the Integrated Power
Module (IPM) on a fused ignition switch output (run-acc) circuit so that the power windows will operate whenever
the ignition switch is in the On or Accessory positions. Each two-way, momentary master passenger power window
switch in the window/lock switch provides battery current and ground to the individual power window switches on
each passenger door so that the power window switch controls the battery current and ground feeds to its respec-
tive power window motor. The switch for the driver side front door power window includes an auto-down feature.
When this switch is depressed to a second momentary detent position and released, the driver door power window
is automatically operated through an internal circuit and relay to its fully lowered position. The Auto-down event is
cancelled if the switch paddle is depressed a second time in either the Up or Down direction. When the two position
window lockout switch in the window/lock switch is depressed and latched in the lockout position, the battery current
feed to each of the individual passenger power window switches is interrupted so that the passenger door power
windows can only be operated from the switches in the window/lock switch. The window lockout switch also controls
the battery current feed for the LED in each passenger power window switch so that the switch will not be illumi-
nated when it is locked out.
REMOVAL

2. Remove the door trim panel (Refer to 23 - BODY/
3. Using a flat bladed tool, remove the window/lock
switch (2) from the door trim panel.
INSTALLATION
1. Install window/lock switch (2) to door trim panel

and snap into place.
2. Install door trim panel (Refer to 23 - BODY/DOOR
- FRONT/TRIM PANEL - INSTALLATION).

Using special tool 9001, first test to ensure that the
transmitter is functioning. Typical testing distance is
2.5 centimeters (1 inch) for Asian transmitters and
30.5 centimeters (12 inches) for all others. To test,
position the transmitter as shown. Press any transmit-
ter button, then test each button individually. The tool
will beep if a radio signal strength that lights five or
more LEDs is detected. Repeat this test three times.
If transmitter fails any of the test refer to the proper
Diagnostic Procedures information.
STANDARD PROCEDURE
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY CUSTOMER PREFERENCES
HORN CHIRP DISABLING/ENABLING
The horn chirp can be toggled using a scan tool or by using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
To DISABLE (cancel) the horn chirp feature: With the ignition in the ON position, press and hold the transmitter
LOCK button for four seconds. While pressing the LOCK button in, press the PANIC button within six seconds.
Release both buttons when a single chime is heard.
To ENABLE the horn chirp feature, repeat the above procedure.
UNLOCK SEQUENCE
The unlock sequence can be toggled using a scan tool or by using the following procedure.
1. Place the key in the ignition.
2. Within 10 seconds, cycle the key from the OFF position to the ON position four times, ending in the ON position
(Do not start the engine).
3. Within 30 seconds, press the drivers door lock switch in the UNLOCK direction. A single chime will be heard to
indicate the feature has been disabled.
This will toggle between Driver door first and Unlock all doors function.
To ENABLE this feature, repeat the above procedure.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER BATTERIES

The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter case snaps open and shut for battery access. To replace the RKE
transmitter batteries:
1. Using a trim stick or a thin coin, gently pry at the notch in the center seam of the RKE transmitter case halves
located near the key ring until the two halves unsnap.
2. Lift the back half of the transmitter case off of the RKE transmitter.
3. Remove the two batteries from the RKE transmitter.
4. Replace the battery with a new CR2032. Be certain that the battery is installed with the polarity correctly ori-
ented.
5. Align the two RKE transmitter case halves with each other, and squeeze them firmly and evenly together using
hand pressure until they snap back into place.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER PROGRAMMING

If vehicle is not equipped with Sentry Key Theft Deterrent, new Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters can be
programed using a scan tool and the proper Diagnostic Information. If vehicle is equipped with Sentry Key Theft
Deterrent, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
SPECIFICATIONS
Normal operation range is up to 20 meters (60 feet) away from the vehicle. Range may be better or worse depend-
ing on the environment around the vehicle.
8N - 58 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS LX
POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL U0019CAN B BUS PASSENGER DOOR

DIAGNOSTICS MODULE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
B1D04MIRROR ADJUST SWITCH INPUT FRONT CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE DRIVER U0151-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
DOOR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER . . . . 111
B1D07MIRROR ADJUST SWITCH INPUT U0154-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
CIRCUIT STUCK DRIVER DOOR OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE . . . . 111
MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 U0155-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B1D09,B1D12MIRROR POSITION SENSOR CLUSTER/CCN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT LOW U0156-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH EOM . . 111
MEMORY MIRROR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 U0159-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B1D0A,B1D13MIRROR POSITION SENSOR PARKING ASSIST CONTROL MODULE . . . . . 111
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT HIGH DOOR U0164-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HVAC
MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 CONTROL MODULE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
B1D0C,B1D15MIRROR VERTICAL U0168-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT LOW VEHICLE SECURITY CONTROL MODULE
DOOR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 (SKREEM/WCM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
B1D0D,B1D16MIRROR VERTICAL U0169-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH SUNROOF CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
DOOR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 U0169-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B1D0F,B1D18MIRROR HORIZONTAL SUNROOF CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT LOW U0184-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
DOOR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 RADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
B1D10,B1D19MIRROR HORIZONTAL U0186-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH AUDIO AMPLIFIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
DOOR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 U0195-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B1D1E,B1D2AMIRROR VERTICAL MOTOR SDARS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
CONTROL CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE U0197-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
DOOR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 HANDS FREE PHONE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
B1D22,B1D2EMIRROR HORIZONTAL U0200-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT/ PASSENGER DOOR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
PERFORMANCE DOOR MODULE . . . . . . . . . 94 U0208-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B1D4DMEMORY SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HEATED SEAT CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . 112
STUCK DOOR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 U0209-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B210D-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW . . . . . . . . . . . 101 MEMORY SEAT CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . 112
B210E-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . 102 U0212-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B2218,B2219-DOOR MODULE INTERNAL . . . . 104 SCCM - CAN B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
U0019CAN B BUS DRIVER DOOR U0231-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH RAIN
MODULE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 SENSING MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
LX POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 59
POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS

B1D04MIRROR ADJUST SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE DRIVER

DOOR MODULE
When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
When the Driver Door Module receives a mirror movement command from the switch but then senses an open
or shorted circuit on one of the switch sense circuits for over 100 ms., this code will set.
Possible Causes
(P703) MIRROR HORIZONTAL LEFT SWITCH SENSE OPEN

(P703) MIRROR HORIZONTAL LEFT SWITCH SENSE SHORT TO GROUND
(P703) MIRROR HORIZONTAL LEFT SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO ANOTHER SWITCH SENSE
CIRCUIT
(P704) MIRROR HORIZONTAL RIGHT SWITCH SENSE OPEN
(P704) MIRROR HORIZONTAL RIGHT SWITCH SENSE SHORT TO GROUND
(P704) MIRROR HORIZONTAL RIGHT SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO ANOTHER SWITCH SENSE
CIRCUIT
(P705) MIRROR VERTICAL DOWN SWITCH SENSE OPEN
(P705) MIRROR VERTICAL DOWN SWITCH SENSE SHORT TO GROUND
(P705) MIRROR VERTICAL DOWN SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO ANOTHER SWITCH SENSE
CIRCUIT
(P706) MIRROR VERTICAL UP SWITCH SENSE OPEN
(P706) MIRROR VERTICAL UP SWITCH SENSE SHORT TO GROUND
(P706) MIRROR VERTICAL UP SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO ANOTHER SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT
(P710) MIRROR COMMON SWITCH SENSE OPEN
(P710) MIRROR COMMON SWITCH SENSE SHORT TO GROUND
(P710) MIRROR COMMON SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO ANOTHER SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT
MIRROR SWITCH
DRIVER DOOR MODULE
Theory of Operation
This code will only set in vehicles that have the Memory System. The supply circuit for the Memory Mirrors are
supplied by the Driver Door Module.
Diagnostic Test

Press the Mirror Switch in all directions several times.
Does the scan tool display B1D04MIRROR ADJUST SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE?
Yes >> Go To 2
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. If the conditions returns, replace the switch.
2. TEST THE SWITCH

Remove the Driver Window/Door Lock Switch assembly.
Test the Mirror Switch in all positions by using the procedure in SERVICE INFORMATION / POWER LOCKS / WIN-
DOW/LOCK SWITCH / DIAGNOSING & TESTING / WINDOW/LOCK SWITCH.
Does the switch pass the test in all positions
No >> Replace the Mirror Switch.
Yes >> Go to 3
3. TEST FOR SWITCH SENSE WIRE SHORT TO GROUND

Disconnect the Driver Door Module C3 connector.
Measure the resistance between Ground and the (P703) Mirror Hori-
zontal Left Switch Sense circuit in the Driver Door Module connector.
Measure the resistance between Ground and the (P704) Mirror Hori-
zontal Right Switch Sense circuit in the Driver Door Module connector.
Measure the resistance between Ground and the (P705) Mirror Vertical
Down Switch Sense circuit in the Driver Door Module connector.
Measure the resistance between Ground and the (P706) Mirror Vertical
Up Switch Sense circuit in the Driver Door Module connector.
Measure the resistance between Ground and the (P710) Mirror Com-
mon Switch Sense circuit in the Driver Door Mirror Module connector.
Is the resistance below 5000.0 ohms in any of the circuits?
Yes >> Repair the Appropriate Switch Sense circuit for a short to
ground.
No >> Go to 4
4. TEST FOR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN

Disconnect the Mirror Switch connector.
Measure the resistance of the (P703) Mirror Horizontal Left Switch
Sense circuit between the Driver Door Module connector and the Mirror
Switch connector.
Measure the resistance of the (P704) Mirror Horizontal Right Switch
Switch connector.
Measure the resistance of the (P705) Mirror Vertical Down Switch
Switch connector.
Measure the resistance of the (P706) Mirror Vertical Up Switch Sense
circuit between the Driver Door Module connector and the Mirror Switch
connector.
Measure the resistance of the (P710) Mirror Common Switch Sense cir-
cuit between the Driver Door Module connector and the Mirror Switch
connector.
Is the resistance below 2.0 ohms in all of the Switch Sense
circuits?
No >> Repair the Appropriate Switch Sense circuit for an open.
Yes >> Go to 5
5. TEST FOR A SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO ANOTHER SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between each of the switch sense circuits to
each of the other switch sense circuits.
Is the resistance below 10000.0 ohms between any of the
switch sense circuits?
Yes >> Repair the appropriate switch sense circuit for a short to
the other switch sense circuits.
Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer
to BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1).
No >> Replace the Driver Door Module.
B1D07MIRROR ADJUST SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT STUCK DRIVER DOOR

MODULE
When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
When the Driver Door Module receives a mirror movement command from the switch for over 30 seconds, this
code will set.
Possible Causes
MIRROR SWITCH
DRIVER DOOR MODULE
Diagnostic Test

Press the Mirror Switch in all directions several times.
Does the scan tool display B1D07MIRROR ADJUST SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT STUCK?
Yes >> Go To 2
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. If the conditions returns, replace the switch.
2. TEST THE SWITCH

Remove the Driver Window/Door Lock Switch assembly.
Remove the Mirror Switch.
Test the Mirror Switch in all positions by using the procedure in SERVICE INFORMATION / POWER LOCKS / WIN-
DOW/LOCK SWITCH / DIAGNOSING & TESTING / WINDOW/LOCK SWITCH.
Does the switch pass the test in all positions
No >> Replace the Mirror Switch.
Yes >> Replace the Driver Door Module.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1 (Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1).
B1D09,B1D12MIRROR POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT LOW

MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
When the Driver Door Module senses voltage below 4.3 volts on the Mirror Position Sensor Supply circuit for
over 30 ms., this code will set.NOTE: This test covers both the Driver and Passenger code depending on
the side the code appeared in.
Possible Causes
(P145) OR (P146) MIRROR POSITION SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

(P145) OR (P146) MIRROR POSITION SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (P69) OR (P66) MIRROR
MIRROR SHORTED
DRIVER OR PASSENGER DOOR MODULE
Diagnostic Test

Operate the Mirror Switch in all directions several times.
Does the scan tool display B1D09 or B1D12MIRROR POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. TEST FOR A SHORTED MIRROR

Disconnect the appropriate mirror connector.
Measure the voltage between the (P145) or (P146) Mirror Position Sen-
sor Supply circuit and the ((P69) or (P66) Mirror Sensor Ground circuit.
Yes >> Replace the Mirror.
No >> Go to 3
3. TEST THE (P145) OR (P146) MIRROR POSITION SENSOR SUPPLY WIRE

Disconnect the appropriate Driver Door Module connector.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (P145) or (P146) Mir-
ror Position Sensor Supply circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (P145) or (P146) Mirror Position Sensor Supply
circuit for a short to ground.
No >> Go to 4
4. TEST THE (P145) OR (P146) MIRROR POSITION SENSOR SUPPLY WIRE SHORTED TO THE (P69) OR
(P66) MIRROR SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT.
Measure the resistance between the (P145) or (P146) Mirror Position
Sensor Supply circuit and the (P69) or (P66) Mirror Sensor Ground cir-
cuit.
circuit for a short to the (P69) or (P66) Sensor Ground Cir-
cuit.
No >> Replace the appropriate Driver Door Module.
BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1)..
B1D0A,B1D13MIRROR POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT HIGH

DOOR MODULE
When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
When the Driver/Passenger Door Module senses voltage above 5.5 volts on the Mirror Position Sensor Supply
circuit for over 30 ms., this code will set.NOTE: This test covers both the Driver and Passenger code
depending on the side the code appeared in.
Possible Causes
(P145) OR (P146) MIRROR POSITION SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT OPEN

(P145) OR (P146) MIRROR POSITION SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
(P69) R (P66) MIRROR SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
MIRROR OPEN
DRIVER/PASSENGER DOOR MODULE
Diagnostic Test

Does the scan tool display B1D0A or B1d13MIRROR POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. TEST FOR AN OPEN MIRROR

Measure the voltage between the (P145) or (P146) Mirror Position Sen-
sor Supply circuit and the ((P69) or (P66) Mirror Sensor Ground circuit.
No >> Go to 3
3. TEST THE (P145) OR (P146) MIRROR POSITION SENSOR SUPPLY WIRE FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect the appropriate Door Module C4 connector.
Measure the resistance between of the (P145) or (P146) Mirror Position
Sensor Supply circuit between the Module connector and the Mirror
connector.
No >> Repair the (P145) or (P146) Mirror Position Sensor Supply
Yes >> Go to 4
4. TEST THE (P69) OR (P66) MIRROR SENSOR GROUND WIRE FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the ((P69) or (P66) Mirror Sensor Ground
circuit between the Module connector and the Mirror connector.
No >> Repair the (P69) or (P66) Mirror Sensor Ground circuit for
an open.
Yes >> Go to 5
5. TEST THE (P145) OR (P146) MIRROR POSITION SENSOR SUPPLY WIRE SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
Measure the voltage between ground and the (P145) or (P146) Mirror
Position Sensor Supply circuit.
circuit for a short to voltage.
No >> Replace the appropriate Door Module.
B1D0C,B1D15MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT LOW

DOOR MODULE
When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
When the Driver/Passenger Door Module senses a value below the parameter of the mirror sensor on the
Mirror Vertical Position Signal circuit for over 60 ms., this code will set.NOTE: This test covers both the
Driver and Passenger code depending on the side the code appeared in.
Possible Causes
(P67) OR (P64) MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

(P67) OR (P64) MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (P69) OR (P66) MIRROR
MIRROR SHORTED
Diagnostic Test

Does the scan tool display B1D0C or B1D15MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT
LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2

Does the scan tool display B1D0C or B1D15MIRROR VERTI-
CAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT LOW?
No >> Replace the Mirror.
Yes >> Go to 3
3. TEST THE (P67) OR (P64) MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL WIRE FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the (P67) or (P64) Mirror
Vertical Position Signal circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (P67) or (P64) Mirror Vertical Position Signal cir-
No >> Go to 4
4. TEST THE (P67) OR (P64) MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (P69) OR
(P66) MIRROR SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT.
Measure the resistance between the (P67) or (P64) Mirror Vertical Posi-
tion Signal circuit and the (P69) or (P66) Mirror Sensor Ground circuit.
cuit for a short to the (P69) or (P66) Sensor Ground Circuit.
B1D0D,B1D16MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH

DOOR MODULE
When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
When the Driver/Passenger Door Module senses a value above the parameter of the mirror sensor on the
Mirror Vertical Position Signal circuit for over 60 ms., this code will set.NOTE: This test covers both the
Possible Causes
(P67) OR (P64) MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

(P67) OR (P64) MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
(P69) OR (P66) MIRROR SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
MIRROR SHORTED
Diagnostic Test

Does the scan tool display B1D0D or B1D16MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT
HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 2

Does the scan tool display B1D0D or B1D16MIRROR VERTI-
CAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go to 3
3. TEST THE (P67) OR (P64) MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL WIRE FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Measure the voltage between the (P67) or (P64) Mirror Vertical Position
Signal circuit and ground.
cuit for a short to voltage.
No >> Go to 4
Measure the resistance of the (P69) or (P66) Mirror Sensor Ground cir-
cuit between the Module connector and the Mirror connector.
an open.
Yes >> Go to 5
5. TEST THE (P67) OR (P64) MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL WIRE FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (P67) or (P64) Mirror Vertical Position
Signal circuit between the Module connector and the Mirror connector.
No >> Repair the (P67) or (P64) Mirror Vertical Position Signal cir-
cuit for an open.
Yes >> Replace the appropriate Door Module.
B1D0F,B1D18MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT LOW

DOOR MODULE
When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
When the Driver/Passenger Door Module senses a value below the parameter of the mirror sensor on the
Mirror Horizontal Position Signal circuit for over 60 ms., this code will set.NOTE: This test covers both the
Possible Causes
(P65) OR (P68) MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

(P65) OR (P68) MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (P69) OR (P66) MIRROR
MIRROR SHORTED
Diagnostic Test

Does the scan tool display B1D0F or B1D18MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT
LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2

Does the scan tool display B1D0F or B1D18MIRROR HORI-
ZONTAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go to 3
3. TEST THE (P65) OR (P68) MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL WIRE FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Horizontal Position Signal circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (P65) or (P68) Mirror Horizontal Position Signal
No >> Go to 4
4. TEST THE (P65) OR (P68) MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (P69)
OR (P66) MIRROR SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT.
Measure the resistance between the (P65) or (P68) Mirror Horizontal
Position Signal circuit and the (P69) or (P66) Mirror Sensor Ground cir-
cuit.
circuit for a short to the (P69) or (P66) Sensor Ground Cir-
cuit.
B1D10,B1D19MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH

DOOR MODULE
When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
When the Driver/Passenger Door Module senses a value above the parameter of the mirror sensor on the
Mirror Horizontal Position Signal circuit for over 60 ms., this code will set.NOTE: This test covers both the
Possible Causes
(P65) OR (P68) MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

(P65) OR (P68) MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
(P69) OR (P66) MIRROR SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
MIRROR OPEN
Diagnostic Test

Does the scan tool display B1D10 or B1D19MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT
HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. TEST FOR AN OPEN MIRROR

Measure the voltage between the (P65) or (P68) Mirror Horizontal Posi-
tion Signal circuit and the (P69) or (P66) Mirror Sensor Ground circuit.
No >> Go to 3
3. TEST THE (P65) OR (P68) MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL WIRE FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Measure the voltage between the (P65) or (P68) Mirror Horizontal Posi-
tion Signal circuit and ground.
No >> Go to 4
Measure the resistance of the (P69) or (P66) Mirror Sensor Ground cir-
cuit between the Module connector and the Mirror connector.
an open.
Yes >> Go to 5
5. TEST THE (P65) OR (P68) MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL WIRE FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (P65) or (P68) Mirror Horizontal Position
Signal circuit between the Module connector and the Mirror connector.
No >> Repair the (P65) or (P68) Mirror Horizontal Position Signal
B1D1E,B1D2AMIRROR VERTICAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE

DOOR MODULE
When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
When the Memory Mirror Module senses a value below the tolerance of the mirror motor on the Mirror Vertical
Motor Control circuit for over 10 ms., this code will set.NOTE: This test covers both the Driver and Pas-
senger code depending on the side the code appeared in.
Possible Causes
(P71) OR (P72) MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

(P71) OR (P72) MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Z912) OR (Z911) GROUND
CIRCUIT
MIRROR SHORTED
Diagnostic Test

Does the scan tool display B1D1E or B1D2AMIRROR VERTICAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT/PERFOR-
MANCE?
Yes >> Go To 2

Does the scan tool display B1D1E or B1D2AMIRROR VERTI-
CAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE?
Yes >> Go to 3
3. TEST THE (P71) OR (P72) MIRROR VERTICAL MOTOR DRIVER WIRE FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Vertical Motor Driver circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (P71) or (P72) Mirror Vertical Motor Driver circuit
No >> Go to 4
4. TEST THE (P71) OR (P72) MIRROR VERTICAL MOTOR DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Z912)
GROUND CIRCUIT.
Measure the resistance between the (P71) or (P72) Mirror Vertical
Motor Driver circuit and the (Z912) or (Z911) Ground circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (P71) or (P72) Mirror Vertical Motor Driver circuit
for a short to the (Z912) or (Z911) Ground Circuit.
B1D22,B1D2EMIRROR HORIZONTAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE

DOOR MODULE
When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
When the Driver/Passenger Door Module senses a value below the tolerance of the mirror motor on the Mirror
Horizontal Motor Driver circuit for over 10 ms., this code will set.NOTE: This test covers both the Driver and
Passenger code depending on the side the code appeared in.
Possible Causes
(P75) OR (P74) MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

(P75) OR (P74) MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Z912) OR (Z911) GROUND
CIRCUIT
MIRROR SHORTED
Diagnostic Test

Does the scan tool display B1D22 or B1D2EMIRROR HORIZONTAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT/PER-
FORMANCE?
Yes >> Go To 2

Does the scan tool display B1D22 or B1D2EMIRROR HORI-
ZONTAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE?
Yes >> Go to 3
3. TEST THE (P75) OR (P74)) MIRROR HORIZONTAL MOTOR DRIVER WIRE FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Horizontal Motor Driver circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (P75) or (P74) Mirror Horizontal Motor Driver cir-
No >> Go to 4
4. TEST THE (P75) OR (P74) MIRROR HORIZONTAL MOTOR DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Z912)
OR (Z911) GROUND CIRCUIT.
Measure the resistance between the (P75) or (P74) Mirror Horizontal
Driver circuit and the (Z912) or (Z911) Ground circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (P75) or (P74) Mirror Horizontal Motor Driver cir-
cuit for a short to the (Z912) or (Z911) Mirror Heater
Ground Circuit.
B1D4DMEMORY SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT STUCK DOOR MODULE

When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
When the Memory Select Switch Mux is under 2.6 volts for over 30 seconds.
Possible Causes
(P200) MEMORY SELECT SWITCH MUX WIRE PARTIAL SHORT TO GROUND

(P200) MEMORY SELECT SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (G920) MEMORY SELECT SWITCH
RETURN CIRCUIT
MEMORY SET SWITCH
DRIVER DOOR MODULE
Diagnostic Test

Press the Memory Set Switch several times in all positions.
Does the scan tool display MEMORY SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT STUCK?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. MEMORY SELECTOR SWITCH SHORTED TO GROUND

Disconnect the Memory Set Switch connector.
Does the scan tool display MEMORY SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT
STUCK?
No >> Replace the Memory Set Switch.
Yes >> Go to 3
3. (P200) MEMORY SELECT SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORT TO THE GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (P200) Memory Select
Switch Mux circuit.
Yes >> Repair the Memory Select Switch Mux wire for a short to
ground.
Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer
to BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1).
No >> Go to 4
4. (P200) MEMORY SELECT SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORT TO THE (G920) MEMORY SELECT SWITCH
RETURN CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (P200) Memory Select Switch Mux
circuit and the (G920) Memory Select Switch Return circuit in the Driver
Door Module C3 connector.
Yes >> Repair the (P200) Memory Select Switch Mux circuit for a
short to the (G920) Memory Select Switch return circuit.

When Monitored:
Engine running.
Set Condition:
This code is set immediately after the Door Module detects voltage under 11.3 volts on the (A913) Fused B(+)
circuit.
Possible Causes
CHARGING SYSTEM VOLTAGE LOW

Diagnostic Test

Are there any Charging System DTCs set in the Powertrain Control Module?
Yes >> (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/CHARGING - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for Charging System diagnostic
procedures.
No >> Go To 2

Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position then start the engine and let run for one minute.
Yes >> Go To 3

Measure the voltage on the (A913) Fused B(+) circuit at the Door Mod-
ule C4 connector and compare to voltage at the vehicle battery.
Is the voltage at the Door Module C4 connector the same as
measured at the battery?
Yes >> Replace the Driver/Passenger Door Module in accordance

When Monitored:
Engine running.
Set Condition:
This code is set immediately after the Door Module detects voltage over 15 volts on the (A913) Fused B(+)
circuit.
Possible Causes
CHARGING SYSTEM VOLTAGE HIGH

Diagnostic Test

procedures.
No >> Go To 2

Yes >> Go To 3

Measure the voltage on the (A913) Fused B(+) circuit at the Door Mod-
ule C4 connector and compare to voltage at the vehicle battery.
Is the voltage at the Door Module C4 connector the same as
measured at the battery?
Yes >> Replace the Driver/Passenger Door Module in accordance
B2218,B2219-DOOR MODULE INTERNAL

When Monitored:
Ignition on.
Set Condition:
This code is set immediately if the Driver/Passenger Door Module internal self test fails.
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1. VERIFY THAT DTC B2218, B2219-DOOR MODULE INTERNAL IS ACTIVE

Does the DTC B2218 or B2219 - DOOR MODULE INTERNAL reset?
U0019CAN B BUS DRIVER DOOR MODULE

When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
Whenever the CAN B Bus (+) or CAN B (-) circuit is open.
Possible Causes

DRIVER DOOR MODULE
Diagnostic Test

Cycle the ignition switch from off to on at least five times, leaving the ignition on for a minimum of 90 seconds per
cycle.
Yes >> Go To 2

Yes >> (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
No >> Go To 3

Front Control Module C1 connector and the Driver Door Module C4
connector.
Yes >> Go To 4

Measure the resistance of the (D54) CAN B Bus () circuit between the
Front Control Module C1 connector and the Driver Door Module C4
connector.
Yes >> Replace the Driver Door Module in accordance with the
U0019CAN B BUS PASSENGER DOOR MODULE

When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
Whenever the CAN B Bus (+) or CAN B (-) circuit is open.
Possible Causes

Diagnostic Test

cycle.
Yes >> Go To 2

No >> Go To 3

Disconnect the Passenger Door Module C4 connector.
Front Control Module C1 connector and the Passenger Door Module
C4 connector.
Yes >> Go To 4

Front Control Module C1 connector and the Passenger Door Module
C4 connector.
Yes >> Replace the Passenger Door Module in accordance with

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

(SKREEM/WCM)
test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.
U0197-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HANDS FREE PHONE

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.
8N - 114 POWER MIRRORS - SERVICE INFORMATION LX
POWER MIRRORS - SERVICE INFORMATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
POWER MIRRORS - SERVICE INFORMATION SWITCH-MIRROR

OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
POWER MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 POWER MIRROR SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
MIRROR-INSIDE REARVIEW REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
AUTOMATIC DAY/NIGHT MIRROR . . . . . . . . . . . 116
LX POWER MIRRORS - SERVICE INFORMATION 8N - 115
POWER MIRRORS - SERVICE INFORMATION

DESCRIPTION
AUTOMATIC DAY/NIGHT MIRROR
The automatic day/night mirror system is able to automatically change the reflectance of the inside rear view and
outside left mirror in order to reduce the glare of headlamps approaching the vehicle from the rear. The automatic
day/night rear view mirror receives battery current through a fuse in the junction block only when the ignition switch
is in the ON position.
OUTSIDE REAR VIEW MIRROR

The power operated rear view mirrors allow the driver to adjust both outside mirrors electrically from the driver side
front seat position by operating a switch on the driver side front door trim panel. The power mirrors receive a non-
switched battery feed through a fuse in the junction block so that the system will remain operational, regardless of
the ignition switch position.
OPERATION
A switch located on the bottom of the automatic day/night mirror housing allows the vehicle operator to select
whether the automatic dimming feature is operational. When the automatic day/night mirror is turned on, the mirror
switch is lighted by an integral Light-Emitting Diode (LED). The mirror will automatically disable its self-dimming
feature whenever the vehicle is being driven in reverse. The day/night mirror is automatically turned ON each time
the ignition is turned to the ON position, regardless if it was previously turned OFF.

POWER MIRRORS
Any diagnosis of the Power Mirror system should begin with the use of scan tool. For information on the
use of the scan tool, refer to the appropriate Diagnostic Service information.
1. Check the fuses in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) and the junction block. If OK, go to Step 2. If not OK,
repair the shorted circuit or component as required and replace the faulty fuse(s).
2. Check for battery voltage at the fuse in the junction block. If OK, go to Step 3. If not OK, repair the open circuit
to the PDC as required.
3. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Remove the driver side power window switch and bezel
assembly and unplug the wire harness connector from the power mirror switch. Connect the battery negative
cable. Check for battery voltage at the fused B(+) circuit cavity in the door wire harness half of the power mirror
switch wire harness connector. If OK, go to Step 4. If not OK, repair the open circuit to the junction block as
required.
4. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Check for continuity between the ground circuit cavity in the
door wire harness half of the power mirror switch wire harness connector and a good ground. There should be
continuity. If not OK, repair open in the ground circuit.
MIRROR-INSIDE REARVIEW
DESCRIPTION
The automatic day/night mirror uses a thin layer of electrochromic material between two pieces of conductive glass
to form the face of the mirror. When the mirror switch is in the ON position, two photocell sensors are used by the
mirror circuitry to monitor external light levels and adjust the reflectance of the mirror.
OPERATION
The ambient photocell sensor is located on the forward-facing (windshield side) of the rear view mirror housing, and
detects the ambient light levels outside of the vehicle. The headlamp photocell sensor is located inside the rear view
mirror housing behind the mirror glass and faces rearward, to detect the level of the light being received at the rear
window side of the mirror. When the circuitry of the automatic day/night mirror detects that the difference between
the two light levels is too great (the light level received at the rear of the mirror is much higher than that at the front
of the mirror), it begins to darken the mirror.
The automatic day/night mirror circuitry also monitors the transmission using an input from the backup lamp circuit.
The mirror circuitry is programmed to automatically disable its self-dimming feature whenever it senses that the
transmission backup lamp circuit is energized.
The automatic day/night mirror is a completely self-contained unit and cannot be repaired. If faulty or damaged, the
entire mirror assembly must be replaced.

1. Check the fuse in the junction block. If OK, go to Step 2. If not OK, repair the shorted circuit or component as
required and replace the faulty fuse.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Check for battery voltage at the fuse in the junction block. If OK, go
to Step 3. If not OK, repair the open circuit to the ignition switch as required.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Unplug the wire
harness connector from the automatic day/night mirror. Connect the battery negative cable. Turn the ignition
switch to the ON position. Check for battery voltage at the fused ignition switch output (run/start) circuit cavity of
the automatic day/night mirror wire harness connector. If OK, go to Step 4. If not OK, repair the open circuit to
the junction block as required.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Check for continuity
between the ground circuit cavity of the automatic day/night mirror wire harness connector and a good ground.
There should be continuity. If OK, go to Step 5. If not OK, repair the circuit to ground as required.
5. Connect the battery negative cable. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Apply the parking brake. Place
the transmission gear selector lever in the Reverse position. Check for battery voltage at the backup lamp switch
output circuit cavity of the automatic day/night mirror wire harness connector. If OK, go to Step 6. If not OK,
repair the open circuit as required.
6. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Plug in the automatic day/night
mirror wire harness connector. Connect the battery negative cable. Cover the forward facing ambient photocell
sensor to keep out any ambient light. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Place the transmission gear
selector lever in the Neutral position. Place the mirror switch in the ON (the LED in the mirror switch is lighted)
position. Cover the forward facing ambient photocell sensor to keep out any ambient light.
NOTE: The ambient photocell sensor must be covered completely, so that no light reaches the sensor. Use
a finger pressed tightly against the sensor, or cover the sensor completely with electrical tape.
7. Shine a light into the rearward facing headlamp photocell sensor. The mirror glass should darken. If OK, go to
Step 8. If not OK, replace the faulty automatic day/night mirror unit.
8. With the mirror glass darkened, place the transmission gear selector lever in the Reverse position. The mirror
should return to its normal reflectance. If not OK, replace the faulty automatic day/night mirror.
LX POWER MIRRORS - SERVICE INFORMATION 8N - 117
SWITCH-MIRROR
DESCRIPTION
A power mirror switch is located on the drivers door trim panel, attached to the window/lock switch. The power
mirror switch includes the following:
Power Mirror Selector Switch - A three-position rotary joystick switch selects the right or left power mirror for
adjustment, or turns the power mirror system Off in the center position.
Power Mirror Adjustment Switch - A momentary joystick directional switch allows the driver to adjust the
selected power mirror in the Up, Down, Right or Left directions.
OPERATION
The power mirror switch circuitry is connected to battery current through a fuse in the IPM on a fused B(+) circuit
so that the power mirrors remain operational regardless of the ignition switch position. A rotary joystick selector
switch has three positions, one to select the right mirror, one to select the left mirror, and a center OFF position.
After the right or left mirror is selected, the joystick is moved to adjust the selected mirror Up, Down, Right or Left.
In vehicles without Memory Mirrors the power mirror switch circuitry controls the battery current and ground feeds to
each of the four (two in each mirror head) power mirror motors. In vehicles with Memory Mirrors the mirror switch
connects to the driver power mirror module. The driver memory mirror module uses the mirror switch inputs to con-
trol the battery current and ground feeds to driver mirror motor and sends a CAN Bus message to the passenger
mirror module. The passenger mirror module controls the battery current and ground feeds to passenger mirror
motors based on the CAN bus message from the driver memory module.
In vehicles equipped with the exterior day/night mirror, the operation of the dimming feature is controlled by the
interior day/night mirror. The exterior mirror is hard wired to the interior mirror.

POWER MIRROR SWITCH
2. Remove the power mirror switch (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER MIRRORS/POWER MIRROR SWITCH -
REMOVAL).
3. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the switch.
4. Test the switch continuity. refer to the Power Mirror Switch Tests chart to determine if the continuity is correct for
the switch in each switch position. If not OK, replace the inoperative switch as required.
POWER MIRROR SWITCH TEST
CONTINUITY BETWEEN
SWITCH POSITION PINS OF MIRROR
SWITCH
LEFT MIRROR SELECTED
UP PINS 5 & 7, PINS 4 & 3
DOWN PINS 4 & 7, PINS 5 & 3
RIGHT PINS 4 & 9, PINS 5 & 3
LEFT PINS 4 & 3, PINS 5 & 9
RIGHT MIRROR SELECTED
UP PINS 4 & 3, PINS 5 & 6
DOWN PINS 4 & 6, PINS 5 & 3
RIGHT PINS 4 & 8, PINS 5 & 3
LEFT PINS 4 & 3, PINS 5 & 8
REMOVAL

2. Remove the door trim panel.
3. Remove the power mirror switch from the door trim
panel by twisting the switch counter-clockwise.
INSTALLATION
1. Install power mirror switch to door trim panel.

2. Connect wire harness connectors to switches.
3. Install door trim panel.
LX POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 119
POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS U0141LOST COMMUNICATION WITH

DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING FRONT CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
B1D62POWER SEAT SWITCH STUCK . . . . . . 121 U0151-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B1D63POWER SEAT SWITCH OPEN . . . . . . . 122 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER . . . . 180
B1D6DSEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION U0154-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE . . . . 180
B1D6ESEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION U0155-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 CLUSTER/CCN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
B1D71SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION U0156-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH EOM . . 180
SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 U0159-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B1D72SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION PARKING ASSIST CONTROL MODULE . . . . . 180
SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 U0164-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HVAC
B1D75SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 U0168-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B1D76SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION VEHICLE SECURITY CONTROL MODULE
SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 (SKREEM/WCM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
B1D79SEAT RECLINER POSITION U0169-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 SUNROOF CONTROL MODULE. . . . . . . . . . . . 181
B1D7ASEAT RECLINER POSITION U0181LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 HEADLAMP LEVEL TRANSLATOR. . . . . . . . . . 181
B1D7BSEAT HORIZONTAL MOTOR U0184-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . 146 RADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
B1D7FSEAT FRONT VERTICAL MOTOR U0186-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . 151 AUDIO AMPLIFIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
B1D83SEAT REAR VERTICAL MOTOR U0195-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . 156 SDARS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
B1D87SEAT BACKREST MOTOR U0197-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . 161 HANDS FREE PHONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
B1D9BSEAT HORIZONTAL FRONT STOP U0199-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
NOT LEARNED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 DRIVER DOOR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
B210D-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW . . . . . . . . . . . 167 U0200-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B210E-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . 169 PASSENGER DOOR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
B221C-MEMORY SEAT MODULE INTERNAL . 171 U0208-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
U0020-CAN B BUS OFF PERFORMANCE . . . . 172 HEATED SEAT CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . 181
U0021-CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . . . 175 U0212LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
U0022-CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . 176 SCCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
U0023-CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . 177 U0231-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH RAIN
U0024-CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . . . . 178 SENSING MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
U0025-CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . 179 POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION
U0026-CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . 180 TEST VER 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
8N - 120 POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS LX
POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS

B1D62POWER SEAT SWITCH STUCK

When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
When the Memory Seat Module detects the switch engaged in an active position for over 50 seconds, this
code will set.
Possible Causes
DRIVER SEAT SWITCH
Diagnostic Test

Press the Seat Switch in all directions several times.
Wait one minute.
Does the scan tool display B1D62POWER SEAT SWITCH STUCK?
Yes >> Replace the Driver Seat Switch as necessary.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER
SEATS - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
B1D63POWER SEAT SWITCH OPEN

When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
When the Memory Seat Module detects an open driver seat switch MUX circuit this code will set.
Possible Causes
(P239) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL/HORIZONTAL SWITCH MUX OPEN

(P339) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL/RECLINER SWITCH MUX OPEN
(P599) DRIVER SEAT SWITCH MUX RETURN OPEN
DRIVER SEAT SWITCH
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test

Press the Seat Switch in all directions several times.
Wait one minute.
Does the scan tool display B1D63POWER SEAT SWITCH OPEN?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECK THE (P239) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL/HORIZONTAL SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT RESISTANCE
Disconnect the Memory Seat Module C4 connector.
Measure the resistance between the (P239) Driver Seat Rear Vertical/
Horizontal Switch MUX circuit and the (P599) Driver Seat Switch MUX
Return circuit in the C4 connector.
Is the resistance 47.0 ohms + or 1.0?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 5
3. CHECK THE (P339) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL/RECLINER SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT RESISTANCE
Measure the resistance between the (P339) Driver Seat Front Vertical/
Recliner Switch MUX circuit and the (P599) Driver Seat Switch MUX
Return circuit in the C4 connector.
Is the resistance 47.0 ohms + or 1.0?
Yes >> Replace the Memory Seat Module.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST
VER 1 (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS - DIAG-
NOSIS AND TESTING)
No >> Go To 4
4. CHECK THE (P339) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL/RECLINER SWITCH MUX WIRE RESISTANCE
Disconnect the Driver Seat Switch.
Measure the resistance of the (P339) Driver Seat Front Vertical/Re-
cliner Switch MUX circuit between the C4 connector and the Driver
Is the resistance below 1.0 ohm?
Yes >> Replace the Driver Seat Switch.
NOSIS AND TESTING)
No >> Repair the (P339) Driver Seat Front Vertical/Recliner Switch
MUX circuit for an open.
NOSIS AND TESTING)
5. CHECK THE (P239) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL/HORIZONTAL SWITCH MUX WIRE RESISTANCE
Measure the resistance of the (P239) Driver Seat Rear Vertical/Horizon-
tal Switch MUX circuit between the C4 connector and the Driver Seat
Switch connector.
Yes >> Go To 6
No >> Repair the (P239) Driver Seat Rear Vertical/Horizontal
Switch MUX circuit for an open.
NOSIS AND TESTING)
6. CHECK THE (P599) DRIVER SEAT SWITCH MUX RETURN WIRE RESISTANCE
Measure the resistance of the (P599) Driver Seat Switch MUX Return
circuit between the C4 connector and the Driver Seat Switch connector.
Yes >> Replace the Driver Seat Switch.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1 (Refer to
No >> Repair the (P599) Driver Seat Switch MUX Return circuit
for an open.
NOSIS AND TESTING)
B1D6DSEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
When the seat motor is activated (sensor supply voltage is switched on whenever motor is activated).
Set Condition:
If sensor voltage is not within a specified range this DTC will set. This DTC will only set when the seat switch
is moved in the same direction three consecutive times.
Possible Causes
(G401) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

DRIVER HORIZONTAL SEAT ADJUSTER MOTOR
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test

Move the Seat Switch in the Horizontal position three times.
Does the scan tool display B1D6DSEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECK THE (G401) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSE VOLTAGE

Disconnect the Driver Horizontal Seat Adjuster Motor.
NOTE: Check connectors Clean and repair as necessary.
Move the Seat Switch in the Horizontal position during the next step.
Using a 12-volt test light connect one lead to the (G401) Driver Seat
Horizontal Position Sense circuit and the other lead to Driver Seat Hor-
izontal Sensor Ground at the Driver Horizontal Seat Adjuster Motor con-
nector.
Does the test light illuminate for approximately two seconds
then turn off with the seat switch engaged?
Yes >> Replace the seat track horizontal motor assembly.
NOSIS AND TESTING)
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK THE (G401) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSE WIRE FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance of the (G401) Driver Seat Horizontal Position
Sense wire at the Driver Horizontal Seat Adjuster Motor connector to
ground.
Yes >> Repair the (G401) Driver Seat Horizontal Position Sense
NOSIS AND TESTING)
No >> Replace the Memory Seat Module.
NOSIS AND TESTING)
B1D6ESEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If during motor operation the sensor voltage is not within a specified range this code will set. This DTC will
only set when the seat switch is moved in the same direction three consecutive times.
Possible Causes
(G401) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE

DRIVER RECLINER SEAT ADJUSTER MOTOR
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test

Move the seat switch in the horizontal position three times.
Does the scan tool display B1D6ESEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 2

Move the seat switch in the horizontal positions three times.
Does the same DTC reset?
No >> Inspect the position sense wire for a possible intermittent short to voltage from another circuit, if OK
replace the Driver Horizontal Seat Adjuster Motor assembly.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST VER 1 (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER
Yes >> Inspect the position sense wire for a possible short to voltage from another circuit, if OK replace the
Memory Seat Module.
B1D71SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(G404) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
FRONT DRIVER VERTICAL SEAT ADJUSTER MOTOR
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test

Move the Seat Switch in the Front Vertical position three times.
Does the scan tool display B1D71SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECK THE (G404) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSE VOLTAGE
Disconnect the Front Driver Vertical Seat Adjuster Motor.
Move the seat switch in the front vertical position during the next step.
Front Vertical Position Sense circuit and the other lead to the Driver
Seat Front Vertical Sensor Ground at the Front Driver Seat Adjuster
Motor connector.
Yes >> Replace the Front Driver Seat Adjuster Motor assembly.
NOSIS AND TESTING)
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK THE (G404) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSE WIRE FOR A SHORT TO
GROUND
Measure the resistance of the (G404) Driver Seat Front Vertical Posi-
tion Sense wire at the Front Driver Vertical Seat Adjuster Motor con-
nector to ground.
Yes >> Repair the (G404) Driver Seat Front Vertical Position Sense
NOSIS AND TESTING)
NOSIS AND TESTING)
B1D72SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(G404) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
REAR DRIVER VERTICAL SEAT ADJUSTER MOTOR
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test

Move the seat switch front vertical position three times.
Does the scan tool display B1D72SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 2
Move the seat switch in the both front vertical positions three times.
No >> Inspect the position sense wire for a possible intermittent short to another circuit, if OK replace the Front
Driver Vertical Seat Adjuster Motor assembly.
Yes >> Inspect the position sense wire for a possible short to another circuit, if OK replace the Memory Seat
Module.
B1D75SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(G402) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test

Move the Seat Switch in the Rear Vertical position three times.
Does the scan tool display B1D75SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECK THE (G402) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSE VOLTAGE
Disconnect the Rear Driver Vertical Seat Adjuster Motor.
Move the seat switch in the rear vertical position during the next step.
Rear Vertical Position Sense circuit and the other lead to Driver Seat
Rear Vertical Sensor Ground at the Rear Driver Seat Adjuster Motor
connector.
Yes >> Replace the Rear Driver Vertical Seat Adjuster Motor
assembly.
NOSIS AND TESTING)
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK THE (G402) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSE WIRE FOR A SHORT TO
GROUND
Measure the resistance of the (G402) Driver Seat Rear Vertical Position
Sense wire at the Rear Driver Vertical Seat Adjuster Motor connector to
ground.
Yes >> Repair the (G402) Driver Seat Rear Vertical Position Sense
NOSIS AND TESTING)
NOSIS AND TESTING)
B1D76SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(G402) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test

Move the seat switch rear vertical position three times.
Does the scan tool display B1D76SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 2
Move the seat switch in the both rear vertical positions three times.
replace the Rear Driver Vertical Seat Adjuster Motor assembly.
Memory Seat Module.
B1D79SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(G403) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test

Move the Seat Switch recliner position three times.
Does the scan tool display B1D79SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECK THE (G403) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSE VOLTAGE

Disconnect the Driver Recliner Seat Adjuster Motor.
Move the seat switch in the recliner position during the next step.
Recliner Position Sense circuit and the other lead to Driver Seat
Recliner Position Sensor Ground at the Driver Recliner Seat Adjuster
Motor connector.
Yes >> Replace the Driver Recliner Seat Adjuster Motor assembly.
NOSIS AND TESTING)
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK THE (G403) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSE WIRE FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance of the (G403) Driver Seat Recliner Position
Sense wire at the Driver Recliner Seat Adjuster Motor connector to
ground.
Yes >> Repair the (G403) Driver Seat Recliner Position Sense cir-
NOSIS AND TESTING)
NOSIS AND TESTING)
B1D7ASEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(G403) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE

MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test

Move the seat switch recliner position three times.
Does the scan tool display B1D7ASEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 2

Move the seat switch in the both recliner positions three times.
replace the Driver Recliner Seat Adjuster Motor assembly.
Memory Seat Module.
B1D7BSEAT HORIZONTAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Whenever the seat motor is activated.
Set Condition:
If the Memory Seat Module does not detect the rotation of the seat motor this DTC will set. This DTC will only
set when the seat switch is moved in the same direction three consecutive times.
Possible Causes
SEAT POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES

(G401) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN
(G491) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
(P115) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER
(P117) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER
DRIVER HORIZONTAL SEAT ADJUSTER MOTOR
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR RELATED DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES

Does the scan tool display any seat position sensor DTCs?
Yes >> Diagnose and repair the other DTC(s) first. Refer to the Table of Contents in this Section for a complete
list of symptoms.
No >> Go To 2

Move the Seat Switch in the Horizontal position three times.
Does the scan tool display B1D7BSEAT HORIZONTAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE?
Yes >> Go To 3

Horizontal Position Sense circuit and the other lead to Driver Seat Hor-
izontal Sensor Ground at the Driver Horizontal Seat Adjuster Motor con-
nector.
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Go To 5
4. CHECK THE DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD/REARWARD DRIVER VOLTAGE

Using a 12-volt test light connect one lead to the (P115) Driver Seat
Horizontal Forward Driver circuit and the other lead to (P117) Driver
Seat Horizontal Rearward Driver circuit at the Driver Horizontal Seat
Adjuster Motor connector.
Does the test light illuminate with the seat switch engaged?
Yes >> Replace the track/horizontal motor assembly.
NOSIS AND TESTING)
No >> Go To 7
5. CHECK THE (G401) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSE WIRE FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (G401) Driver Seat Horizontal Position
Sense circuit at the Driver Horizontal Seat Adjuster Motor connector to
the C3 connector.
Is the resistance above 1.0 ohm?
Yes >> Repair the (G401) Driver Seat Horizontal Position Sense
NOSIS AND TESTING)
No >> Go To 6
6. CHECK THE (G491) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL SENSOR GROUND FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (G491) Driver Seat Horizontal Sensor
Ground circuit at the Driver Horizontal Seat Adjuster Motor connector to
the C3 connector.
Yes >> Repair the (G491) Driver Seat Horizontal Senor Ground cir-
cuit for an open.
NOSIS AND TESTING)
NOSIS AND TESTING)
7. CHECK THE (P115) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER WIRE FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (P115) Driver Seat Horizontal Forward
Driver circuit at the Driver Horizontal Seat Adjuster Motor connector to
the C3 connector.
Yes >> Repair the (P115) Driver Seat Horizontal Forward Driver cir-
cuit for an open.
NOSIS AND TESTING)
No >> Go To 8
8. CHECK THE (P117) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (P117) Driver Seat Horizontal Rearward
Driver circuit at the Driver Horizontal Seat Adjuster Motor connector to
the C3 connector.
Yes >> Repair the (P117) Driver Seat Horizontal Rearward Driver
NOSIS AND TESTING)
NOSIS AND TESTING)
B1D7FSEAT FRONT VERTICAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes

(G404) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN
(G494) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
(P119) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL UP DRIVER
(P121) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL DOWN DRIVER
FRONT DRIVER VERTICAL SEAT ADJUSTER MOTOR
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test

Yes >> Diagnose and repair other DTC(s) first. Refer to the Table of Contents in this Section for a complete list
of symptoms.
No >> Go To 2

Move the Seat Switch in the Front Vertical position three times.
Does the scan tool display B1D7FSEAT FRONT VERTICAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFOR-
MANCE?
Yes >> Go To 3
Move the Seat Switch in the front vertical position during the next step.
Front Vertical Position Sense circuit and the other lead to Driver Seat
Front Vertical Sensor Ground at the Driver Front Vertical Seat Adjuster
Motor connector.
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Go To 5
4. CHECK THE DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL UP/DOWN DRIVER VOLTAGE

Move the Seat Switch in the front vertical position during the next step.
Front Vertical Up Driver circuit and the other lead to (P121) Driver Seat
Front Vertical Down Driver circuit at the Front Driver Vertical Seat
Yes >> Replace the Front Driver Vertical Seat Adjuster motor
assembly.
VER 1
No >> Go To 7
5. CHECK THE (G404) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSE WIRE FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (G404) Driver Seat Front Vertical Posi-
tion Sense circuit at the Front Driver Vertical Seat Adjuster Motor con-
nector to the C3 connector.
Yes >> Repair the (G404) Driver Seat Front Vertical Position Sense
VER 1
No >> Go To 6
6. CHECK THE (G494) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL SENSOR GROUND FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (G494) Driver Seat Front Vertical Sensor
Ground circuit at the Driver Front Vertical Seat Adjuster Motor connec-
tor to the C3 connector.
Yes >> Repair the (G494) Driver Seat Front Vertical Senor Ground
VER 1
VER 1
7. CHECK THE (P119) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL UP DRIVER WIRE FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (P119) Driver Seat Front Vertical Up
Driver circuit at the Driver Front Vertical Seat Adjuster Motor connector
to the C3 connector.
Yes >> Repair the (P119) Driver Seat Front Vertical Up Driver cir-
cuit for an open.
VER 1
No >> Go To 8
8. CHECK THE (P121) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL DOWN DRIVER FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (P121) Driver Seat Front Vertical Down
Driver circuit at the Driver Front Vertical Seat Adjuster Motor connector
Yes >> Repair the (P121) Driver Seat Front Vertical Down Driver
VER 1
VER 1
B1D83SEAT REAR VERTICAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes

(G402) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN
(G492) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
(P111) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL UP DRIVER
(P113) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL DOWN DRIVER
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test

Yes >> Diagnose and repair other DTC(s) first. Refer to the Table of Contents in this Section for a complete list
of symptoms.
No >> Go To 2

Move the Seat Switch in the Rear Vertical position three times.
Does the scan tool display B1D83SEAT REAR VERTICAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE?
Yes >> Go To 3
Move the Seat Switch in the rear vertical position during the next step.
Rear Vertical Position Sense circuit and the other lead to Driver Seat
Rear Vertical Sensor Ground at the Driver Rear Vertical Seat Adjuster
Motor connector.
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Go To 5
4. CHECK THE DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL UP/DOWN DRIVER VOLTAGE

Move the Seat Switch in the rear vertical position during the next step.
Rear Vertical Up Driver circuit and the other lead to (P113) Driver Seat
Rear Vertical Down Driver circuit at the Rear Driver Vertical Seat
Yes >> Replace the Rear Driver Vertical Seat Adjuster motor
assembly.
VER 1
No >> Go To 7
5. CHECK THE (G402) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSE WIRE FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (G402) Driver Seat Rear Vertical Position
Sense circuit at the Rear Driver Vertical Seat Adjuster Motor connector
Yes >> Repair the (G402) Driver Seat Rear Vertical Position Sense
VER 1
No >> Go To 6
6. CHECK THE (G492) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL SENSOR GROUND FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (G492) Driver Seat Rear Vertical Sensor
Ground circuit at the Driver Rear Vertical Seat Adjuster Motor connector
Yes >> Repair the (G492) Driver Seat Rear Vertical Senor Ground
Perform MEMORY SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST VER
1
VER 1
7. CHECK THE (P111) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL UP DRIVER WIRE FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (P111) Driver Seat Rear Vertical Up
Driver circuit at the Driver Rear Vertical Seat Adjuster Motor connector
Yes >> Repair the (P111) Driver Seat Rear Vertical Up Driver circuit
for an open.
VER 1
No >> Go To 8
8. CHECK THE (P113) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL DOWN DRIVER FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (P113) Driver Seat Rear Vertical Down
Driver circuit at the Driver Rear Vertical Seat Adjuster Motor connector
Yes >> Repair the (P113) Driver Seat Rear Vertical Down Driver
VER 1
VER 1
B1D87SEAT BACKREST MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes

(G403) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN
(G493) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
(P141) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER UP DRIVER
(P143) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER DOWN DRIVER
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test

list of symptoms.
No >> Go To 2

Move the Seat Switch in the Recliner position three times.
Does the scan tool display B1D87SEAT BACKREST MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE?
Yes >> Go To 3

Move the Seat Switch in the Recliner position during the next step.
Recliner Position Sense circuit and the other lead to Driver Seat
Recliner Position Sensor Ground at the Driver Recliner Seat Adjuster
Motor connector.
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Go To 5
4. CHECK THE DRIVER SEAT RECLINER FORWARD/REARWARD DRIVER VOLTAGE

Move the Seat Switch in the Recliner position during the next step.
Recliner Up Driver circuit and the other lead to (P143) Driver Seat
Recliner Down Driver circuit at the Driver Recliner Seat Adjuster Motor
connector.
Yes >> Replace the Recliner motor assembly.
VER 1
No >> Go To 7
5. CHECK THE (G403) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSE WIRE FOR AN OPEN
Sense circuit at the Driver Recliner Seat Adjuster Motor connector to
the C2 connector.
Yes >> Repair the (G403) Driver Seat Recliner Position Sense cir-
cuit for an open.
VER 1
No >> Go To 6
6. CHECK THE (G493) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSTION SENSOR GROUND FOR AN OPEN
Sensor Ground circuit at the Driver Recliner Seat Adjuster Motor con-
nector to the C2 connector.
Yes >> Repair the (G493) Driver Seat Recliner Position Senor
Ground circuit for an open.
VER 1
VER 1
7. CHECK THE (P141) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER UP DRIVER WIRE FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (P141) Driver Seat Recliner Up Driver
circuit at the Driver Recliner Seat Adjuster Motor connector to the C2
connector.
Yes >> Repair the (P141) Driver Seat Recliner Up Driver circuit for
an open.
VER 1
No >> Go To 8
8. CHECK THE (P143) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER DOWN DRIVER FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (P143) Driver Seat Recliner Down Driver
circuit at the Driver Recliner Seat Adjuster Motor connector to the C2
connector.
Yes >> Repair the (P143) Driver Seat Recliner Down Driver circuit
for an open.
VER 1
VER 1
B1D9BSEAT HORIZONTAL FRONT STOP NOT LEARNED

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Seat becomes de-standardized. If the seat is not standardized, an Easy Exit/Entry function can not be per-
formed. If seat is standardized (learn seat cushion horizontal front hardstop) and then becomes de-standard-
ized (conditions are: seat cushion motor is 5% past the expected hard stop position or seat cushion hall sensor
failure is occured), a DTC is logged.
Possible Causes
OTHER DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES SET IN THE MEMORY SEAT MODULE
SEAT STANDERDIZATION ROUTINE NOT PERFORMED
Diagnostic Test

Does the scan tool display any seat position sensor or circuit performance DTCs?
list of symptoms.
No >> Go To 2

Move the seat in the full forward horizontal position.
Does the scan tool display B1D9BSEAT HORIZONTAL FRONT STOP NOT LEARNED?
Yes >> With the scan tool, perform the MSM Standard Routine.

When Monitored:
Engine running, during seat motor operation.
Set Condition:
This code is set immediately after the Seat Memory Module receives a low charging system voltage message
over the CAN B Bus or detects voltage under 9.5 volts on the (A110) Fused B(+) circuit.
Possible Causes
CHARGING SYSTEM VOLTAGE LOW

SEAT MEMORY MODULE
Diagnostic Test

procedures.
No >> Go To 2
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST VER 1.

Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position then start the engine and operate the driver power seat.
Yes >> Go To 3

Disconnect the Memory Seat Module connector.
Measure the voltage on the (A110) Fused B(+) circuit at the MSM con-
nector and compare to voltage at the vehicle battery.
Is the voltage at the MSM connector the same as measured at
the battery?
VER 1.
VER 1.

When Monitored:
Engine running, during seat operation.
Set Condition:
This code is set immediately after the Memory Seat Module receives a high charging system voltage message
over the CAN B Bus or detects voltage over 16.5 volts on the (A110) Fused B(+) circuit.
Possible Causes
CHARGING SYSTEM VOLTAGE HIGH

MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test

procedures.
No >> Go To 2

Attempt to operate the driver power seat.
Yes >> Go To 3

Disconnect the Seat Memory Module connector.
Measure the voltage on the (A110) Fused B(+) circuit at the MSM con-
nector and compare to voltage at the vehicles battery.
Is the voltage at the MSM connector the same as measured at
the battery?
VER 1.
VER 1.
B221C-MEMORY SEAT MODULE INTERNAL

When Monitored:
Ignition on.
Set Condition:
This code is set immediately if the Memory Seat Module internal self test fails.
Possible Causes
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. VERIFY THAT DTC B221C-MEMORY SEAT MODULE INTERNAL IS ACTIVE

Does the DTC B221C-MEMORY SEAT MODULE INTERNAL reset?
Yes >> Replace the Memory Seat Module.

When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
The Memory Seat Module detects the (D55) CAN B Bus (+) circuit or (D54) CAN B Bus (-) circuit open.
Possible Causes

MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test

With the scan tool, record and erase MSM DTCs
With the scan tool, read active MSM DTCs.
Yes >> Go To 2

ground.
circuits. If ok, replace the Memory Seat Module in accor-
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.

ground.
VER 1.
No >> Repair the (D54) CAN B Bus (-) circuit for an open.
U0021-CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT OPEN

When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
The Memory Seat Module detects the (D55) CAN B Bus (+) circuit is open.
Possible Causes
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test

Yes >> Go To 2

ground.
VER 1.
U0022-CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT LOW

test procedure.
U0023-CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT HIGH

test procedure.
U0024-CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT OPEN

When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
The Memory Seat Module detects the (D54) CAN B Bus (-) circuit is open.
Possible Causes
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Theory of Operation
Diagnostic Test

Yes >> Go To 2

ground.
VER 1.
No >> Repair the (D54) CAN B Bus (-) circuit for an open.
U0025-CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT LOW

test procedure.
U0026-CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT HIGH

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

(SKREEM/WCM)
test procedure.

test procedure.
U0181LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HEADLAMP LEVEL TRANSLATOR

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.
U0197-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HANDS FREE PHONE

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.
U0212LOST COMMUNICATION WITH SCCM

test procedure.

test procedure.
POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST VER 1

Diagnostic Test
1. Perform Power Seat System Verification Test

Disconnect all jumper wires and reconnect all previously disconnected components and connectors.
Ensure that all accessories are turned off.
Ensure that the battery is fully charged.
If either the Memory Seat Module or the Driver Horizontal Seat Adjuster Motor/Seat Track was replaced, the MSM
Standard Routine must be performed using the scan tool.
With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs from all modules.
Operate the driver seat in all positions.
With the Memory Switch on the Drivers Door, program the Drivers Seat No. 1 Button to a desired position and
Driver No. 2 Button to a different position.
Verify that both Memory positions can be recalled from the RKE transmitter and the Memory Switch on the Drivers
Door.
Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, and then turn the ignition on.
Check for DTCs in the modules.
Are DTCs present in any of the modules or is the original condition still present?
Yes >> The repair is not complete. Refer to the related category for the DTC or symptom that is still present.
8N - 184 POWER SEATS - SERVICE INFORMATION LX
POWER SEATS - SERVICE INFORMATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
POWER SEATS - SERVICE INFORMATION POWER SEAT RECLINER

DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING SWITCH-SEAT
MEMORY SEAT SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
POWER SEAT ADJUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
STANDARD PROCEDURE DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
MEMORY SYSTEM PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . 189 POWER SEAT SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
LX POWER SEATS - SERVICE INFORMATION 8N - 185
POWER SEATS - SERVICE INFORMATION

DESCRIPTION
POWER SEAT SYSTEM
WARNING: The front passenger seat assembly contains critical components that affect the front passenger
airbag deployment. Correctly functioning front passenger seat components are critical for the Occupant
Classification System (OCS) to properly classify the front passenger and calculate the proper airbag deploy-
ment. Unapproved modifications or service procedures to the front passenger seat assembly, its related
components, or trim cover may inadvertently change the airbag deployment in case of a frontal crash. This
could result in death or serious injury to the front seat passenger if the vehicle is involved in an accident.
The following requirements must be strictly adhered to:
Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or components in any way.
Do not modify the front seat center console or center position seat in any way.
Do not use prior or future model year seat trim covers not designated for the specific model being
repaired. Always use the correct seat trim cover specified for the vehicle.
Do not replace the seat trim cover with an aftermarket trim cover.
Do not add a secondary trim cover other than those approved by DaimlerChrysler/MoparT.
At no time should any Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) component or SRS related component or
fastener be modified or replaced with any part except those which are approved by DaimlerChrysler/Mo-
par.
The power seat system allows the driver and front

seat passenger to electrically adjust their seating posi-
tions using the power seat switches located on the
outboard seat cushion side shield of each front seat.
The eight-way power seat includes a six-way adjust-
able seat cushion track and a two-way power seat
back. The power seat can be adjusted up, down, front
up, front down, forward, rearward, recliner forward,
and recliner rearward. The power seat system is also
available with the heated seat option and memory
seat option that automatically positions the driver
power seat for two different drivers (Refer to 8 -
ELECTRICAL/HEATED SEATS - DESCRIPTION ) and
MEMORY SEAT SYSTEM below.
The power seat system for this vehicle includes the

following major components:
Power Seat Adjuster - The power seat adjuster
is made up of the upper and lower power seat
adjuster assemblies. The upper power seat
adjuster contains two reversible motors that are
connected to worm-drive gearboxes that move
the seat adjuster through a combination of
screw-type drive units. These motors are the
height adjust motor and the front tilt motor. On
vehicles equipped with non-memory power seats,
each motor contains a self-resetting circuit
breaker to protect it from overload. On vehicles
equipped with memory power seats the motor
overload protection is a function of the Memory
Seat Module (MSM). Consecutive or frequent
resetting of the circuit breakers may damaged the motors.
The height adjust motor is located on the rear of the upper power seat adjuster assembly and controls the up
and down movement of the entire seat. The height adjust motor can be serviced separately from the power
seat adjuster assembly.
The front tilt motor is located on the front of the
upper power seat adjuster assembly and controls
the up and down movement of the seat front
only. The front tilt motor can be serviced sepa-
rately from the power seat adjuster assembly.
The lower power seat adjuster contains one

reversible motor that is connected to a worm-
drive gearbox that moves the seat adjuster
through a screw-type drive unit. On vehicles
equipped with non-memory power seats, the
motor will contain a self-resetting circuit breaker
to protect it from overload. On vehicles equipped
with memory power seats the motor overload
protection is a function of the Memory Seat Mod-
ule (MSM). The motor is part of the lower power
seat track unit and must be replaced as an
assembly, (Refer to 23 - BODY/SEATS/SEAT
ADJUSTERS - REMOVAL).
Power Seat Recliner - The power seat recliner replaces the manual seat recliner.
The power seat option includes an electrically

operated power seat back recliner mechanism.
The power seat recliner switch is integral to the
power seat switch assembly, but is actuated with
a separate switch knob.
The power seat recliner motor cannot be
repaired. If the unit is inoperative or damaged,
the seat back frame must be replaced, (Refer to
8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS/POWER
SEAT MOTOR - REMOVAL).
Power Seat Switches - Vehicles may be equipped with driver only, or driver and passenger power seat
switches. One seat switch is used for each front
seat. The power seat switches are paddle-type
levers mounted on the outboard seat side
shields. Movement of the seat cushions and
backs mimics the action of the switch paddles.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS/
SEAT SWITCH - DESCRIPTION) for additional
information.
MEMORY SEAT SYSTEM

An electronic memory seat system is available on certain models. The memory system is able to store and recall all
driver side power seat positions, outside mirror positions, power tilt/telescopic steering column positions and power
adjustable pedal position. The system can be set for two different drivers. On vehicles with a factory installed radio
connected to the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus network, the memory system is also able to store and
recall up to twelve radio station presets (six AM and six FM), also for two drivers. The memory system will also
store and recall the last station listened to for each driver, even if it is not one of the twelve preset stations.
The memory system will automatically recall all of these settings when a button of the memory switch is depressed,
or when the doors are unlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter (if enabled). If the vehicle has
more than two drivers the RKE transmitter recall of memory features can be disabled. This is a customer program-
mable feature of the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) set through the use of the appropriate steering
wheel switches. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/OVERHEAD CONSOLE/ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFO CENTER -
OPERATION) for additional information on the customer programmable features.
The memory system also has an Easy Entry and /Exit feature that provides the driver with more room to enter or
exit the vehicle. When the seat is in a memorized position, it will move rearward 55 millimeters or to the end of its
travel, whichever occurs first, when the key is removed from the ignition switch lock cylinder. This is also a customer
programmable feature of the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) set through the use of the appropriate
steering wheel switches.
The memory system also has a 9Tilt in Reverse9 feature that tilts the outside mirrors down a fixed, incremental angle
when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE with the ignition switch in the RUN position. This feature provides the
customer with a better view of the ground and vehicle in the area of the rear tires when backing up. The mirrors
move back to their previous position when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE.
The memory system includes the following components:
Memory Selector Switch - located in the driver door trim panel.
Driver Door Module (DDM) - located in the driver door, behind the trim panel.
Passenger Door Module (PDM) - located in the passenger door, behind the trim panel.
Hall Effect Sensors - Outside Mirror - The hall effect sensor is permanently installed on the outside mirror
motor. This hall effect sensor is used to provide a reference signal to the memory heated seat mirror module,
letting the module know the exact position of the mirror.
Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM) - located at ignition key cylinder.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter - located with ignition key.
Memory Seat Module (MSM) - located underneath the driver seat and also controls the Adjustable Pedals.
Hall Effect Sensors - Seat Track - These hall effect sensors are permanently installed in each of the power
seat track motors. They are used to provide a reference signal to the memory heated seat mirror module,
letting the module know the exact position of the seat cushion and recliner.
Radio - located in the instrument panel center stack.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) - located in the instrument panel center stack.
Certain functions and features of the memory system rely upon resources shared with other electronic modules in
the vehicle over the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus. The CAN bus allows the sharing of sensor information.
This helps to reduce wire harness complexity, internal controller hardware, and component sensor current loads. At
the same time, this system provides increased reliability, enhanced diagnostics, and allows the addition of many
new feature capabilities. For diagnosis of these electronic modules or of the CAN bus, the use of a scan tool and
the proper diagnostic information are needed.
OPERATION
POWER SEAT SYSTEM
The power seat system receives battery current through a 50 amp fuse in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) so
that the power seats remain operational, regardless of the ignition switch position.
When a power seat switch is actuated, a battery feed and a ground path are applied through the power seat switch
contacts to the appropriate motor or motors. The motor and drive unit operate to move the seat in the selected
direction until the switch is released, or until the travel limit of the power seat track is reached. When the switch is
moved in the opposite direction, the battery feed and ground path to the motor is reversed through the switch con-
tacts. This causes the motor to run in the opposite direction.
MEMORY SEAT SYSTEM

The Memory Seat Module (MSM) receives battery current through a 25 amp circuit breaker in the Power Distribution
Center (PDC) so that the power seats remain operational, regardless of the ignition switch position. When the driver
memory seat switch control knob is actuated, a resistance signal is sent to the MSM via the Controller Area Network
(CAN) bus circuit. The MSM is responsible for the 12V battery feed and ground path to the power seat adjuster
motor. The adjuster motor operates to move the power seat adjuster mechanism through its drive unit in the
selected direction until the switch is released, or until the travel limit of the adjuster is reached.
The MSM receives memory set/position switch input through the CAN bus circuit. The MSM also receives hard
wired input from the hall effect sensors, mounted on each of the driver power seat adjuster motors and the driver
side view mirror motor. The programmed software in the module allows it to know where the seat/mirror is located
in its designed travel by a pulse count generated from the hall effect sensors. This way, when the memory switch is
depressed the module will power the seat adjuster/mirror motors until the correct preset location is achieved. The
module will prevent the seat memory recall function from being initiated, if the transmission gear selector lever is not
in the Park position, or if the vehicle is moving. These inputs are monitored over the Controller Area Network (CAN)
bus circuit by the MSM.
For driver safety, memorized settings can not be recalled if the transmission is in a position other than Park or the

MEMORY SEAT SYSTEM
In order to obtain conclusive testing of the power seats with and without the memory system option, the Controller
Area Network (CAN) bus, and all of the electronic modules that provide inputs to, or receive outputs from the mem-
ory system components must be checked. Use a scan tool and the proper diagnostic information to accurately diag-
nose the power seat/memory seat systems.
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with the memory/heated seat option utilize a low voltage cut-off feature. This fea-
ture turns off the 12V power to the power seat system anytime vehicle voltage is below 11.0V. Be certain to
POWER SEAT ADJUSTER

Operate the power seat switch and move the seat in all directions. The seat should move in each of the selected
directions.
If the power seat adjuster fails to operate in more than one direction, proceed as follows:
1. Inspect the power seat adjuster motors to ensure the electrical connectors are fully seated to the motors. If OK,
go to Step 2. If not OK, connect the electrical connector to the fully seated position.
2. Check the power seat fuse in the power distribution center. If OK, go to Step 3. If not OK, replace the inoperative
fuse.
3. Remove the power seat switch from the seat cushion side panel. Check for battery voltage at the fused B(+)
circuit cavity of the power seat switch wire harness connector. If OK, go to Step 4. If not OK, repair the open
circuit to the power distribution center as required.
4. Check for continuity between the ground circuit cavity of the power seat switch wire harness connector and a
good ground. There should be continuity. If OK, go to Step 5. If not OK, repair the open circuit to ground as
required.
5. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS/SEAT SWITCH - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING). If the switch tests
OK, check the wire harness between the power seat switch and the motor. If the circuits check OK, replace the
inoperative power seat adjuster assembly. If the circuits are not OK, repair the wire harness as required.
STANDARD PROCEDURE
MEMORY SYSTEM PROGRAMMING
The Memory Seat Module (MSM) interfaces with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system via the Controller Area
Network (CAN) bus. The proper procedure of setting and recalling a memory position using the RKE is as follows:
1. Press and release memory switch 1 or 2 to recall memory position 1 or 2.
2. Adjust the seat, recliner, adjustable pedal position, set radio station presets, set HVAC temperature preset, and
the side view mirrors to the desired position.
3. Press momentarily and release memory switch S.
4. Within five seconds, press momentarily and release memory switch 1 or 2.
5. To link the RKE transmitter: within ten seconds, press and release the LOCK button on one of the RKE trans-
mitters
To program the second drivers position, repeat the above procedure using memory switch 2. The second RKE
transmitter can be programmed in the same fashion as indicated in Step 5.
NOTE: The module will abort a recall if the transmission is moved out of park or if any seat movement is
activated whether manually or by memory recall. The module will also abort a recall if any movement of the
adjustable pedals is detected.
To recall either of the programmed positions momentarily press and release either memory selector switch 1 or 2.
If using RKE, just press and release the UNLOCK button on the proper transmitter for either position 1 or 2.
A recall is possible any time the vehicle transmission is in PARK and the seatbelt is unbuckled. This condition is
monitored by the MSM.
MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER
REMOVAL
WARNING: A seat structure that has seen signifi-
cant load may have the locking mechanism acti-
vated and may exhibit the following symptoms:
Locking pawl (2) loose
Locking pawl (2) engaged into the seat frame
sidemember (1)
Height adjuster only works on outboard side
Broken or missing shear pin (3)
If any one or more of these symptoms exist

replace the height adjuster assembly. Do not
attempt any repairs. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury or death.
FRONT TILT MOTOR

2. Remove the affected seat with the inoperative
motor (1) (Refer to 23 - BODY/SEATS/SEAT -
FRONT - REMOVAL).
3. Remove the seat cushion and pan (Refer to 23 -
BODY/SEATS/SEAT CUSHION COVER -
REMOVAL).
4. Disconnect the motor electrical connector.
5. Remove the fasteners holding the motor to the seat

adjuster (1).
6. Remove motor from seat adjuster (2).
HEIGHT ADJUST MOTOR

WARNING: Use caution when removing the height adjust motor (3) if the motor is inoperative, and the
power seat is not in the full up position. The seat adjuster assembly (2) is under load from the height adjust
spring and may cause the motor to rotate under pressure when the fasteners are removed. The seat
adjuster assembly also may spring upward when the motor is removed. If the height adjust motor is oper-
ative, move the power seat to the full up position prior to disconnecting the battery.

2. Remove the affected seat with the inoperative
motor (3) (Refer to 23 - BODY/SEATS/SEAT -
FRONT - REMOVAL).
3. Remove the seat cushion and pan (Refer to 23 -
REMOVAL).
4. Disconnect the motor electrical connector.
5. Remove the fasteners (1) holding the motor (3) to

the seat adjuster (2).
6. Remove screw and washer from the motor shaft.
7. Remove motor (3) from seat adjuster (2).
INSTALLATION
WARNING: A seat structure that has seen signifi-
cant load may have the locking mechanism acti-
vated and may exhibit the following symptoms:
Locking pawl (2) loose
Locking pawl (2) engaged into the seat frame
sidemember (1)
Height adjuster only works on outboard side
Broken or missing shear pin (3)
If any one or more of these symptoms exist

replace the height adjuster assembly. Do not
attempt any repairs. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury or death.
FRONT TILT MOTOR

1. Position motor (1) on seat adjuster (2).
2. Install the fasteners (1) holding the motor to the

seat adjuster (2). Tighten the screws to 5 Nm (44
in. lbs.).
3. Connect the motor electrical connector.

4. Install the seat cushion (Refer to 23 - BODY/
SEATS/SEAT CUSHION COVER - INSTALLA-
TION).
5. Clip the wire harness to cushion pan.
6. Install the seat assembly (Refer to 23 - BODY/
8. Verify normal operation of the power seat
assembly.
HEIGHT ADJUST MOTOR
1. Ensure the seat adjuster (2) is in the full up posi-

tion by pulling upward on the upper adjuster
assembly.
2. Position motor (3) on seat adjuster (2).
3. Install the motor shaft screw and washer and
tighten until snug. Do not torque screw at this
time.
4. Install the screws (1) holding the motor (3) to the

seat adjuster (2). It may be necessary to twist
the motor slightly to align the fastener holes.
5. Starting with the bottom screw, tighten the motor
screws (1) to 9 Nm (80 in. lbs.).
6. Tighten the motor shaft screw and washer to 6.5
Nm (57.5 in. lbs.).
7. Connect the motor electrical connector.

8. Install the seat cushion (Refer to 23 - BODY/
SEATS/SEAT CUSHION COVER - INSTALLA-
TION).
9. Clip the wire harness to cushion pan.
10. Install the seat assembly (Refer to 23 - BODY/
12. Verify normal operation of the power seat
assembly.
POWER SEAT RECLINER

REMOVAL
NOTE: The recliner motor is serviced as part of
the seat back frame. Do not attempt to transfer the
motor as the service part will come equipped with
a new motor installed.
1. Remove the seat back frame assembly (Refer to

23 - BODY/SEATS/SEAT BACK CUSHION/COVER
- REMOVAL).
2. Remove any parts that will need to be installed on
new seat back frame assembly.
INSTALLATION
1. Install parts from old seat back assembly as nec-
essary.
2. Install the seat back (1) (Refer to 23 - BODY/
SEATS/SEAT BACK CUSHION/COVER -
INSTALLATION).
SWITCH-SEAT
DESCRIPTION
Both the driver and passenger power seats can be adjusted in eight different ways using the power seat switch. The
power seat switch is located on the lower outboard side of the seat cushion on the seat cushion side shield on all
models.
The individual switches in the power seat switch assembly cannot be repaired. If one switch is damaged or faulty,
the entire power seat switch must be replaced.
OPERATION
When a power seat switch is actuated, a battery feed and a ground path are applied through the switch contacts to
the power seat adjuster or recliner adjuster motor. The selected adjuster motor operates to move the seat or recliner
through its drive unit in the selected direction until the switch is released, or until the travel limit of the adjuster is
reached. When the switch is moved in the opposite direction, the battery feed and ground path to the motor are
reversed through the switch contacts. This causes the adjuster motor to run in the opposite direction.
On vehicles equipped with memory system, a resistance signal is sent to the Memory Seat Module (MSM) via the
Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit, when the driver memory seat switch control knob is actuated. The MSM
is responsible for the 12v battery feed and ground path to the power seat adjuster motor. The adjuster motor oper-
ates to move the power seat adjuster mechanism through its drive unit in the selected direction until the switch is
released, or until the travel limit of the adjuster is reached.
No power seat switch should be held applied in any direction after the adjuster has reached its travel limit. The
power seat adjuster motors each contain a self-resetting circuit breaker to protect them from overload. However,
consecutive or frequent resetting of the circuit breaker may result in motor damage.

POWER SEAT SWITCH
DRIVER WITHOUT MEMORY SEAT SYSTEM
2. Remove the power seat switch from the power seat
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS/SEAT
SWITCH - REMOVAL).
3. Use an ohmmeter to test the continuity of the
power seat switch. Refer to DRIVER POWER
SEAT SWITCH WITHOUT MEMORY SEAT SYS-
TEM CONTINUITY table. If not OK, replace the
faulty power seat switch. If switch tests OK (Refer
to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS/POWER
SEAT ADJUSTER - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).
DRIVER POWER SEAT SWITCH WITHOUT MEMORY SEAT SYSTEM CONTINUITY

SWITCH POSITION CONTINUITY BETWEEN

OFF 7-1, 7-3, 7-4, 7-5, 7-8, 7-9, 7-10, 7-11
RECLINER UP 6-3, 7-1, 7-4, 7-5, 7-8, 7-9, 7-10, 7-11
RECLINER DOWN 6-1, 7-3, 7-4, 7-5, 7-8, 7-9, 7-10, 7-11
HORIZONTAL FORWARD 6-8, 7-1, 7-3, 7-4, 7-5, 7-9, 7-10, 7-11
HORIZONTAL REARWARD 6-4, 7-1, 7-3, 7-5, 7-8, 7-9, 7-10, 7-11
FRONT TILT DOWN 6-5, 7-1, 7-3, 7-4, 7-8, 7-9, 7-10, 7-11
FRONT TILT UP 6-9, 7-1, 7-3, 7-4, 7-5, 7-8, 7-10, 7-11
REAR TILT DOWN 6-10, 7-1, 7-3, 7-4, 7-5, 7-8, 7-9, 7-11
REAR TILT UP 6-11, 7-1, 7-3, 7-4, 7-5, 7-8, 7-9, 7-10
PASSENGER SEAT
SWITCH - REMOVAL).
3. Use an ohmmeter to test the continuity of the
power seat switch. Refer to PASSENGER POWER
SEAT SWITCH CONTINUITY table. If not OK,
replace the faulty power seat switch. If switch tests
OK (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS/
POWER SEAT ADJUSTER - DIAGNOSIS AND
TESTING).
PASSENGER POWER SEAT SWITCH CONTINUITY
SWITCH POSITION CONTINUITY BETWEEN

OFF 7-1, 7-3, 7-4, 7-5, 7-8, 7-9, 7-10, 7-11
RECLINER UP 6-3, 7-1, 7-4, 7-5, 7-8, 7-9, 7-10, 7-11
RECLINER DOWN 6-1, 7-3, 7-4, 7-5, 7-8, 7-9, 7-10, 7-11
HORIZONTAL FORWARD 6-8, 7-1, 7-3, 7-4, 7-5, 7-9, 7-10, 7-11
HORIZONTAL REARWARD 6-4, 7-1, 7-3, 7-5, 7-8, 7-9, 7-10, 7-11
FRONT TILT DOWN 6-5, 7-1, 7-3, 7-4, 7-8, 7-9, 7-10, 7-11
FRONT TILT UP 6-9, 7-1, 7-3, 7-4, 7-5, 7-8, 7-10, 7-11
REAR TILT DOWN 6-10, 7-1, 7-3, 7-4, 7-5, 7-8, 7-9, 7-11
REAR TILT UP 6-11, 7-1, 7-3, 7-4, 7-5, 7-8, 7-9, 7-10
DRIVER WITH MEMORY SEAT SYSTEM

SWITCH - REMOVAL).
3. Use an ohmmeter to test the resistance of the
power seat switch. Refer to DRIVER POWER
SEAT SWITCH WITH MEMORY SEAT SYSTEM
CONTINUITY table. If not OK, replace the faulty
power seat switch. If switch tests OK (Refer to 8 -
ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS/POWER SEAT
ADJUSTER - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).
DRIVER POWER SEAT SWITCH WITH MEMORY SEAT SYSTEM CONTINUITY
SWITCH POSITION CONTINUITY BETWEEN RESISTANCE VALUE

OFF 10-4 OPEN
OFF 10-11 OPEN
OFF 1-4 47 OHMS
OFF 1-11 47 OHMS
REAR TILT UP 10-11 169 OHMS
REAR TILT DOWN 10-11 76 OHMS
HORIZONTAL FORWARD 10-11 43 OHMS
HORIZONTAL REARWARD 10-11 10 OHMS
RECLINER UP 10-4 43 OHMS
RECLINER DOWN 10-4 10 OHMS
FRONT TILT UP 10-4 169 OHMS
FRONT TILT DOWN 10-4 76 OHMS
ALL RESISTANCE VALUES ARE FIVE PERCENT
REMOVAL
2. Remove the seat cushion side panel from the seat and disconnect the electrical harness connector.
3. Using a small flat bladed tool, gently release the four mounting tabs that secure the power seat switch and sep-
arate switch from trim panel.
INSTALLATION
1. Position the power seat switch on the seat cushion side panel. Gently apply pressure to the switch until the four
mounting tabs that secure the switch snap into place.
2. Connect the power seat switch electrical connector.
3. Install the seat cushion side panel on the seat.
5. Verify normal operation of the power seat assembly.
LX POWER TOP - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSIS 8N - 201
POWER TOP - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSIS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
POWER TOP - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSIS B2227SUNROOF ECU INTERNAL . . . . . . . . . . 213

B1841SUNROOF OPEN SWITCH INPUT FRONT CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 U0155-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B1844SUNROOF CLOSE SWITCH INPUT CLUSTER/CCN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 U0019CAN B BUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
B1847SUNROOF VENT SWITCH INPUT B210D-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW . . . . . . . . . . . 217
CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 B210E-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . 219
B1849SUNROOF MOTOR CONTROL
CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE (STALLED) . . . . . . 212
8N - 202 POWER TOP - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSIS LX
POWER TOP - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSIS

B1841SUNROOF OPEN SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH

Theory of Operation
The Sunroof Motor/Module supplies a 12 volt supply circuit to the sunroof switch. When the switch is closed to any
of the 3 sense circuits (open, close or vent), it sends that command back to the module.
When Monitored:
Whenever the Sunroof module is awake.
Set Condition:
Whenever the module has determined that the open switch has been applied for over 15 seconds or there is
a short to voltage on the Sunroof Open Switch Sense circuit, this code will set.
Possible Causes
(Q3) SUNROOF OPEN SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

(Q3) SUNROOF OPEN SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO (Q6) SUNROOF SWITCH SUPPLY CIRCUIT
SUNROOF SWITCH SHORTED
Diagnostic Test

Press and release the Sunroof Switch in all positions several times.
Wait 30 seconds.
Does the scan tool display B1841SUNROOF OPEN SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Check the switch for any bind-
ing conditions and using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
2. SUNROOF SWITCH SHORTED

Disconnect the Sunroof Switch connector.
Does the scan tool display B1841SUNROOF OPEN SWITCH
INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Replace the Sunroof Switch.
3. (Q3) SUNROOF OPEN SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

NOTE: To further diagnose the sunroof, it is necessary to lower or
remove the headliner.
Lower the headliner to gain access to the Sunroof Motor/Module con-
nector.
Disconnect the Sunroof Motor/Module connector.
NOTE: Ensure the A-Pillar connector is connected before proceed-
ing.
Measure the voltage between the (Q3) Sunroof Open Switch Sense cir-
cuit and Ground.
Yes >> Repair the (Q3) Sunroof Open Switch Sense circuit for a
short to voltage.
No >> Go To 4
4. (Q3) SUNROOF OPEN SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO (Q6) SUNROOF SWITCH SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Disconnect the A-Pillar connector.
Measure the resistance between the (Q3) Sunroof Open Switch Sense
circuit and the (Q6) Sunroof Switch Supply circuit in the Sunroof Motor/
Module connector.
Yes >> Repair the (Q3) Sunroof Open Switch Sense circuit for a
short to the (Q6) Sunroof Switch Supply circuit.
No >> Replace the Sunroof Motor/Module.
Perform the Sunroof Position Calibration, (Refer to 8 -
ELECTRICAL/POWER TOP/MOTOR - STANDARD PRO-
CEDURE - SUNROOF POSITION CALIBRATION). Perform
the Excessive Force Limitation Calibration, (Refer to 8 -
CEDURE - EXCESSIVE FORCE LIMITATION CALIBRA-
TION).
B1844SUNROOF CLOSE SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH

Theory of Operation
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Whenever the module has determined that the close switch has been applied for over 15 seconds or there is
a short to voltage on the Sunroof Close Switch Sense circuit, this code will set.
Possible Causes
(Q5) SUNROOF CLOSE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

(Q5) SUNROOF CLOSE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO (Q6) SUNROOF SWITCH SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Test

Wait 30 seconds.
Does the scan tool display B1844SUNROOF CLOSE SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 2

Does the scan tool display B1844SUNROOF CLOSE SWITCH
INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 3
3. (Q5) SUNROOF CLOSE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

nector.
ing.
Measure the voltage between the (Q5) Sunroof Close Switch Sense cir-
cuit and Ground.
Yes >> Repair the (Q5) Sunroof Close Switch Sense circuit for a short to voltage.
No >> Go To 4
4. (Q5) SUNROOF CLOSE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO (Q6) SUNROOF SWITCH SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (Q5) Sunroof Close Switch Sense
Module connector.
Yes >> Repair the (Q5) Sunroof Close Switch Sense circuit for a
TION).
B1847SUNROOF VENT SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH

Theory of Operation
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Whenever the module has determined that the vent switch has been applied for over 15 seconds or there is
a short to voltage on the Sunroof Vent Switch Sense circuit, this code will set.
Possible Causes
(Q4) SUNROOF VENT SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

(Q4) SUNROOF VENT SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO (Q6) SUNROOF SWITCH SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Test

Wait 30 seconds.
Does the scan tool display B1847SUNROOF VENT SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 2

Does the scan tool display B1847SUNROOF VENT SWITCH
INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 3
3. (Q4) SUNROOF VENT SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

nector.
ing.
Measure the voltage between the (Q4) Sunroof Vent Switch Sense cir-
cuit and Ground.
Yes >> Repair the (Q4) Sunroof Vent Switch Sense circuit for a short to voltage.
No >> Go To 4
4. (Q4) SUNROOF VENT SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO (Q6) SUNROOF SWITCH SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (Q4) Sunroof Vent Switch Sense
Module connector.
Yes >> Repair the (Q4) Sunroof Vent Switch Sense circuit for a
TION).
B1849SUNROOF MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE (STALLED)

When Monitored:
Whenever the Sunroof motor/module is in motion.
Set Condition:
Whenever the sunroof motor/module is attempting to move the sunroof in response to the input switches (or in
response to an obstacle), and it doesnt appear to be responding correctly. This code is usually set when there
is some type of binding in the sunroof mechanism.
Possible Causes
MECHANICAL BINDING, STICKING OR CABLES OUT OF CALIBRATION
Diagnostic Test

Operate the Sunroof Switch in all positions several times.
Wait 30 seconds.
Does the scan tool display B1849SUNROOF MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE (STALLED)?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Check for any binding or stick-
ing conditions.
2. SUNROOF MOTOR
NOTE: To further diagnose the sunroof, it is necessary to lower or remove the headliner.
NOTE: Any time the Sunroof Motor is removed, it is necessary to perform the Position Calibration when the
motor is re-installed.
Lower the headliner to gain access to the Sunroof Motor/Module.
Remove the Sunroof Motor/Module from the sunroof.
NOTE: Ensure the A-Pillar connector is connected before proceeding.
While holding the motor firmly in your hand, have an assistant press the sunroof switch Open and after the motor
stops press Close (NOT VENT) several times and observe the motor operation.
Did the motor operate smoothly and powerfull?
Yes >> Repair or replace the sunroof mechanism as necessary in accordance with Service Information.Perform
BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1).
No >> Replace the Sunroof Motor Module in accordance with service information.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER TOP/MOTOR - INSTALLATION) Perform BODY VERIFICATION
TEST - VER 1. (Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1).
B2227SUNROOF ECU INTERNAL

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Whenever the module has determined that there is a motor or electronic malfunction, this code will set.
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test

Operate the Sunroof Switch in all positions several times.
Wait 30 seconds.
Does the scan tool display B2227SUNROOF ECU INTERNAL?
Yes >> Replace the Sunroof Motor/Module.
Perform the Sunroof Position Calibration, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER TOP/MOTOR - STAN-
DARD PROCEDURE - SUNROOF POSITION CALIBRATION). Perform the Excessive Force Limitation
Calibration, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER TOP/MOTOR - STANDARD PROCEDURE - EXCES-
SIVE FORCE LIMITATION CALIBRATION).
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Operate the Sunroof several
times and recheck for DTCs. If the code reappears now or later, replace the Sunroof Motor/Module.

test procedure.

test procedure.
U0019CAN B BUS

When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
Whenever the CAN B Bus (+) or CAN B Bus (-) circuit is open, shorted to voltage or shorted to ground.
Possible Causes

Diagnostic Test

cycle.
Turn the ignition off and wait 30 seconds.
Yes >> Go To 2

No >> Go To 3

Front Control Module C1 connector and the Sunroof Motor/Module con-
nector.
Yes >> Go To 4

Front Control Module C1 connector and the Sunroof Motor/Module con-
nector.
Yes >> Replace the Sunroof Motor/Module in accordance with the
TION).

When Monitored:
At all times.
Set Condition:
Anytime the module senses voltage input below 9.5 volts (motor operating or not). After this code is set, it
becomes stored when the voltage exceeds 9.6 volts.
POSSIBLE CAUSES
LOW VOLTAGE ENGINE DTC

(X13) FUSED B(+) OR (Z909) GROUND CIRCUIT HAS HIGH RESISTANCE
POWER TOP MOTOR/MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK ENGINE DTCs

NOTE: Ensure the battery is fully charged before proceeding.
With the scan tool, read ENGINE DTCs
Are there any ENGINE BATTERY OR CHARGING SYSTEM DTCs present?
No >> Go to 2
Yes >> Refer to symptom list for problems related to ENGINE.

Start the engine and run for two minutes.
Does the scan tool display BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW in the Sunroof module only?
Yes >> Go To 3
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
3. (X13) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT RESISTED

Lower the headliner and disconnect the Sunroof Motor/Module connec-
tor.
Test for a resisted (X13) Fused B(+) circuit by connecting a 12-volt test
light between the (X13) Fused B(+) circuit and the (Z909) Ground circuit
in the Sunroof Motor/Module connector. The test light must illuminate
brightly. Compare the brightness to that of a direct connection to the
battery.
Yes >> Replace the Sunroof Motor/Module in accordance with Ser-
vice Information. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER TOP/
MOTOR - REMOVAL)
No >> Test the (X13) Fused B(+) and the (Z909) Ground circuits to
determine which one has the high resistance. Repair the
(X13) Fused B(+) circuit or the (Z909) Ground circuit for
high resistance.

When Monitored:
At all times.
Set Condition:
Anytime the module senses voltage input above 16 volts. This code will become stored when the voltage
drops below 15.9 volts.
POSSIBLE CAUSES
HIGH VOLTAGE ENGINE DTC
SUNROOF MOTOR/ MODULE
Diagnostic Test

Are there any ENGINE DTCs present?
No >> Go to 2

Does the scan tool display BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH in this module only?
Yes >> Replace the Sunroof Motor/Module in accordance with service information. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/
POWER TOP/MOTOR - REMOVAL)
8N - 220 POWER TOP - SUNROOF SERVICE INFO LX
POWER TOP - SUNROOF SERVICE INFO
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
POWER TOP - SUNROOF SERVICE INFO EXCESSIVE FORCE LIMITATION (EFL)

DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
POWER TOP - SUNROOF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 SWITCH - SUNROOF
MOTOR/MODULE-SUNROOF DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
MOTOR/MODULE - SUNROOF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
STANDARD PROCEDURE SWITCH - POWER SUNROOF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
SUNROOF POSITION CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . 223
LX POWER TOP - SUNROOF SERVICE INFO 8N - 221
POWER TOP - SUNROOF SERVICE INFO

DESCRIPTION
The power sunroof system allows the sunroof to be opened, closed or placed in the vent position electrically by
actuating a switch in the overhead console. The sunroof system receives battery feed through a fuse in the Power
Distribution Center (PDC). The sunroof will operate normally with the key in any position while the Accessory Delay
system is active.
The sunroof glass panel tilts upward at the rear for ventilation and slides rearward under the roof when open. The
panel seals flush with the roof in the closed position to eliminate wind noise. The sunroof includes a manual-sliding
sunshade to cover the deep-tinted glass panel.
In addition to the standard power sunroof operation, this vehicle offers several additional features. There is an
express (one-touch) opening and closing feature as well as Excessive Force Limitation (EFL). The EFL function
detects obstacles trapped between the glass and the vehicle roof during a closing motion. Upon sensing an obstacle
the EFL function will reverse direction of the glass to allow removal of the obstacle.
The main components of the power sunroof system are:
The motor/module assembly
The power sunroof glass and frame assembly
The power sunroof switch
The manual-sliding sunshade
OPERATION
This vehicle has a vent, tilt and slide power sunroof system with express (one-touch) open and closing feature. The
sunroof system receives constant battery feed through a fuse in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). The sunroof
will operate normally with the key in any position while the Accessory Delay system is active. If the sunroof is mov-
ing when the key is turned to the START position (crank engine), all motions stop until the key is released, then the
previously requested sunroof motion will resume. The sunroof will also complete a requested motion if the Acces-
sory Delay system goes inactive while the motion is in progress.
A combination push-button and rocker switch module mounted in the overhead console controls sunroof operation.
The sunroof switch is a rocker design with a push button in the center of the two halves of the rocker. Pressing the
rocker towards the front of the car commands the sunroof closed. Pressing the rocker towards the rear of the car
commands the sunroof open. Pressing the center push button commands the sunroof up into the vent position
(Rear of sunroof glass raises above the vehicle roof with glass still covering the sunroof opening). All switch com-
mands operate with the glass starting in any position. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER TOP/SWITCH - OPER-
ATION) for additional information.
An electronic control system, integral to the motor/module assembly, provides the express open and close functions.
Pressing the 9open9 or 9close9 end of the rocker switch moves the sunroof glass panel to the full open or full closed
position, respectively. During express closing, anytime an obstacle is detected in the way of the glass, the motor will
stop and reverse travel to avoid pinching an occupants finger, ice in the track, etc. This function is called Excessive
Force Limitation (EFL). There are two methods of overriding the EFL function.
1. When three EFL events occur without the glass being allowed to fully close, the next close attempt will only
move while the close switch is continuously actuated. This allows the sunroof to be forced closed if multiple close
attempts fail.
2. If the sunroof close switch is continuously actuated during an EFL event, through the reversal, and during a two
second wait time, then continuing to hold the close switch will cause the roof to move towards close with the EFL
protection disabled. This allows the sunroof to be forced closed if it is known that a reversal will occur.
While in EFL override, the closing motion will cease if the sunroof switch is released at any time.
The motor/module is programmed to learn the speed required to drive the panel based on position and recalibrates
itself as needed. If the sunroof becomes uncalibrated, it will only respond to the vent switch. If the vent switch is
pressed, the glass will move toward vent; if the switch is released, all motion stops. In the event that the sunroof
system becomes uncalibrated perform the sunroof position calibration procedure, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/
POWER TOP/MOTOR - STANDARD PROCEDURE -SUNROOF POSITION CALIBRATION).

POWER TOP - SUNROOF
Any diagnosis of the power sunroof system should begin with the use of a scan tool and the proper Diagnostic
Procedures Information. The scan tool can provide confirmation that the Controller Area Network (CAN) Data Bus is
functional, that all of the electronic modules are sending and receiving the proper messages on the CAN Data Bus,
and that the power sunroof motor is being sent the proper hard wired output by the sunroof switch.
MOTOR/MODULE-SUNROOF
MOTOR/MODULE - SUNROOF
Procedures Information. The scan tool can provide confirmation that the Controller Area Network (CAN) Data Bus is
functional, that all of the electronic modules are sending and receiving the proper messages on the CAN Data Bus,
and that the power sunroof motor is being sent the proper hard wired output by the sunroof switch.
STANDARD PROCEDURE
SUNROOF POSITION CALIBRATION
Press the power sunroof switch (Open, Closed, and Vent). If no movement occurs when either the open switch or
closed switch is pressed, but the system does move when the vent button is pressed and held, the system is not
calibrated. Perform the following procedure to position calibrate the power sunroof system.
1. Turn the ignition to the RUN position.
2. Press the vent button on the power sunroof switch and hold until the sunroof glass panel has moved to the full
vent position and the motor movement has stopped for at least 1 second.
3. Press the close switch on the power sunroof switch and hold for a moment (at least 100ms) and release. The
sunroof glass panel should continue travel to the full close position. If the sunroof glass panel does not return to
the full close position, refer to the appropriate diagnostic information for full system diagnosis.
4. Verify proper system operation.
EXCESSIVE FORCE LIMITATION (EFL) CALIBRATION

NOTE: Verify the battery is in good condition prior to performing this procedure. Do not leave the vehicle on
a battery charger while performing this procedure. If the voltage at the sunroof motor/module drops below
11 volts or exceeds 15 volts at anytime while this procedure is being performed, the Excessive Force Lim-
itation (EFL) function will not be properly calibrated.
1. Turn the ignition to the RUN position.

2. Press the vent button on the power sunroof switch and hold until the sunroof glass panel has moved to the full
vent position and the motor movement has stopped for at least 1 second.
3. Press the close position on the power sunroof switch and release. The sunroof glass panel should continue
travel to the full closed position. This will be considered the first sunroof closed position in a series of four
sunroof closes.
4. Press the vent button on the power sunroof switch and release. The sunroof glass panel should move to the full
vent position. After the sunroof motor/module has stopped, press the close position on the power sunroof switch
and release. The sunroof glass panel should continue travel to the full closed position. This will be considered
the second sunroof closed position in a series of four sunroof closes.
5. Continue to move the sunroof glass to the vent then closed positions two more times so that the sunroof glass
has moved to the closed position a total of four times starting with the first sunroof close in step 3.
6. Press the open position on the power sunroof switch and release. The sunroof glass panel should continue travel
to the full open position.
7. Press the close position on the power sunroof switch and release. The sunroof glass panel should continue
travel to the full closed position. This will be considered the first sunroof closed position in a series of five
sunroof closes.
8. Press the open position on the power sunroof switch and release. The sunroof glass panel should move to the
full open position. After the sunroof motor/module has stopped, press the close position on the power sunroof
switch and release. The sunroof glass panel should continue travel to the full closed position. Continue to move
the sunroof glass to the open then closed position four more times so that the sunroof glass has
moved to the closed position a total of five times starting with the first sunroof close in step 7.
Verify proper EFL calibration by placing a standard pencil at the front of the sunroof and then moving the
sunroof to the full closed position. The sunroof should reverse direction upon contact without damage to
the pencil.
REMOVAL
WARNING: The Excessive Force Limitation (EFL) feature must be calibrated any time a sunroof motor/mod-
ule is replaced with a new component. Failure to perform this procedure could result in vehicle damage
and/or personal injury. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER TOP/MOTOR - STANDARD PROCEDURE - EXCES-
SIVE FORCE LIMITATION (EFL) CALIBRATION) for the appropriate procedure.

2. Remove the vehicle headliner, (Refer to 23 - BODY/INTERIOR/HEADLINER - REMOVAL).
3. Remove the power sunroof motor/module electrical
connector (2).
4. Remove the retaining screws (3) and remove the
motor/module (1) from the vehicle.
INSTALLATION
WARNING: The Excessive Force Limitation (EFL) feature must be calibrated any time a sunroof motor/mod-
ule is replaced with a new component. Failure to perform this procedure could result in vehicle damage
and/or personal injury. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER TOP/MOTOR - STANDARD PROCEDURE - EXCES-
SIVE FORCE LIMITATION (EFL) CALIBRATION) for the appropriate procedure.
1. Position the power sunroof motor/module (1) in the

vehicle.
2. Install the motor/module retaining screws (3).
Tighten the screws to 4 Nm (35 in. lbs.).
3. Connect the motor/module electrical connector (2).
4. Connect the battery negative cable and move the
sunroof through one open and close cycle to con-
firm proper system operation.
5. Install the vehicle headliner, (Refer to 23 - BODY/
INTERIOR/HEADLINER - INSTALLATION).
6. Perform the sunroof position calibration, (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/POWER TOP/MOTOR - STAN-
DARD PROCEDURE - SUNROOF POSITION
CALIBRATION).
7. Perform the Excessive Force Limitation (EFL) cali-
bration, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER TOP/
MOTOR - STANDARD PROCEDURE -
EXCESSIVE FORCE LIMITATION (EFL) CALIBRA-
TION).
8. Verify proper operation of the power sunroof system.
SWITCH - SUNROOF
DESCRIPTION
The power sunroof switch (3) is a combination push-
button and rocker switch module mounted in the over-
head console. The sunroof switch is a direct contact
unit that is directly wired to the sunroof motor/module
assembly. The sunroof switch performs the following
functions:
Power sunroof open (back of switch pushed)
Power sunroof closed (front of switch pushed)
Power sunroof vent (switch center button
pushed)
The power sunroof switch is part of the overhead
console assembly and cannot be replaced sepa-
rately. If the switch is damaged or inoperative the
overhead console must be replaced, (Refer to 8 -
ELECTRICAL/OVERHEAD CONSOLE - REMOVAL).
OPERATION
The power sunroof switch is hard wired to the sunroof motor/module assembly. The switch receives battery current
from the motor/module when the ignition switch is in the RUN and ACCESSORY positions or the vehicle Accessory
Delay System is active. When one of the switch positions is pressed it sends battery current back to the motor/
module, signaling it to move the power sunroof to the appropriate position. The motor/module will perform one of the
following functions:
Power sunroof open (back of switch pushed)
Power sunroof closed (front of switch pushed)
Power sunroof vent (switch center button pushed)

SWITCH - POWER SUNROOF
Procedures Information. The scan tool can provide confirmation that the Controller Area Network (CAN) Data Bus
circuit is functional, that all of the electronic modules are sending and receiving the proper messages on the CAN
Data Bus, and that the power sunroof motor/module assembly is being sent the proper hard wired output by the
sunroof switch.
information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. If completing the
appropriate diagnostic information results in the sunroof switch being inoperative, perform the following test prior to
switch replacement.
2. Remove the overhead console, (Refer to 8 - ELEC-
TRICAL/OVERHEAD CONSOLE - REMOVAL).
3. Disconnect the power sunroof switch wire harness
connector.
4. Using an ohmmeter, test the continuity of the
power sunroof switch in each switch position. Refer
to the POWER SUNROOF SWITCH CONTINUITY
TABLE . If OK, inspect the wiring harness and con-
nectors for damage. Use a scan tool and the
proper Diagnostic Procedures Information to com-
plete diagnosis of the power sunroof system. If not
OK, replace the overhead console.
POWER SUNROOF SWITCH CONTINUITY TABLE
SWITCH POSITION CONTINUITY BETWEEN PINS

OFF NO CONTINUITY
SUNROOF OPEN B&D
SUNROOF CLOSED B&C
SUNROOF VENT B&A
8N - 228 POWER WINDOWS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS LX
POWER WINDOWS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
POWER WINDOWS - ELECTRICAL U0151-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH

DIAGNOSTICS OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER . . . . 285
B1852DRIVER WINDOW SWITCH CIRCUIT OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE . . . . 285
STUCK DDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 U0155-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B1854DRIVER WINDOW MOTOR CLUSTER/CCN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW DDM. . . . . . . . . . . 233 U0156-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH EOM . . 285
B1855DRIVER WINDOW MOTOR U0159-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH DDM . . . . . . . . . . 236 PARKING ASSIST CONTROL MODULE . . . . . 285
B1858DRIVER WINDOW POSITION U0164-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HVAC
SENSOR POWER SUPPLY LOW DDM . . . . 239 CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
B1859DRIVER WINDOW POSITION U0168-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
SENSOR POWER SUPPLY HIGH DDM. . . . 242 VEHICLE SECURITY CONTROL MODULE
B185A-DRIVER WINDOW POSITION (SKREEM/WCM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
SENSOR CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE - DDM . 244 U0169-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B185D-PASSENGER WINDOW SWITCH SUNROOF CONTROL MODULE. . . . . . . . . . . . 286
CIRCUIT STUCK - PDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 U0181-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B185FPASSENGER WINDOW MOTOR HEADLAMP LEVELING TRANSLATOR . . . . . . 286
CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW PDM. . . . . . . . . . . 253 U0184-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B1860PASSENGER WINDOW MOTOR RADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH PDM . . . . . . . . . . 256 U0186-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B1863PASSENGER WINDOW POSITION AUDIO AMPLIFIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
SENSOR POWER SUPPLY LOW PDM . . . . 259 U0186-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B1864PASSENGER WINDOW POSITION AUDIO AMPLIFIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
SENSOR POWER SUPPLY HIGH PDM. . . . 262 U0195-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B1865PASSENGER WINDOW POSITION SDARS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
SENSOR CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE - PDM . 264 U0199-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B1868DRIVER PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER DOOR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK DDM . . . . . . . . . . 270 U0200-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B210D-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW PASSENGER DOOR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
DDM/PDM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 U0208-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B210E-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH HEATED SEAT CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . 287
DDM/PDM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 U0209-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B2218, B2219DRIVER/PASSENGER DOOR MEMORY SEAT CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . 287
MODULE INTERNAL DDM/PDM . . . . . . . . . . 275 U0212-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
U0019CAN B BUS-DDM/PDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 SCCM - CAN B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
B16A4PASSENGER WINDOW SWITCH U0231-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH RAIN
BACKLIGHTING CIRCUIT LOW PDM . . . . . 280 SENSING MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
B16A5PASSENGER WINDOW SWITCH *FRONT WINDOW MOVES ABOUT 3
BACKLIGHTING CIRCUIT HIGH PDM . . . . . 283 INCHES AND QUITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
U0141LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
FRONT CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
LX POWER WINDOWS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 229
POWER WINDOWS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS

B1852DRIVER WINDOW SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK DDM

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When the Driver Window Driver Express Switch Mux circuit is below 3.5 volts for over 30 seconds.
Possible Causes
(Q221) DRIVER WINDOW DRIVER EXPRESS SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(Q221) DRIVER WINDOW DRIVER EXPRESS SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORT TO THE (Z421) DRIVER
EXPRESS SWITCH RETURN CIRCUIT
WINDOW/DOOR LOCK SWITCH SHORT TO GROUND
DRIVER DOOR MODULE (DDM)
Diagnostic Test

Operate the Driver Window Switch in all positions several times.
Wait 30 seconds.
Does the scan tool display B1852DRIVER WINDOW SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. DRIVER WINDOW SWITCH SHORTED

Disconnect the Driver Window/Door Lock Switch C2 connector.
Does the scan tool display B1852DRIVER WINDOW SWITCH
CIRCUIT STUCK?
Yes >> Go To 3
3. (Q221) DRIVER WINDOW DRIVER EXPRESS SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the (Q221) Driver Window
Driver Express Switch Mux circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (Q221) Driver Window Driver Express Switch
Mux circuit for a short to ground.
Yes >> Go To 4
4. (Q221) DRIVER WINDOW DRIVER EXPRESS SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORT TO (Z421) DRIVER
Measure the resistance between the (Q221) Driver Window Driver
Express Switch Mux circuit and the (Z421) Driver Express Switch
Return circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (Q221) Driver Window Driver Express Switch
Mux circuit for a short to the (Z421) Driver Express Switch
Return circuit.
B1854DRIVER WINDOW MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW DDM

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When both Driver Window Driver circuits (Up and Down) are grounded during a window movement command,
this code will set.
Possible Causes
(Q321) DRIVER WINDOW EXPRESS DOWN DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

(Q311) DRIVER WINDOW EXPRESS UP DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(Q321) DRIVER WINDOW EXPRESS DOWN DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Q311) DRIVER WINDOW
EXPRESS UP DRIVER CIRCUIT
WINDOW MOTOR SHORTED
Diagnostic Test

Try to operate the Driver Window up and down several times.
Wait 30 seconds.
Does the scan tool display B1854DRIVER WINDOW MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. WINDOW MOTOR SHORTED

Disconnect the Driver Window Motor connector.
Operate the driver window switch up and down several times.
Does the scan tool display B1854DRIVER WINDOW MOTOR
CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW?
No >> Replace the Window Motor.
Yes >> Go To 3
3. (Q321) DRIVER WINDOW EXPRESS DOWN DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between Ground and the (Q321) Driver Win-
dow Express Down Driver circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (Q321) Driver Window Express Down Driver cir-
No >> Go To 4
4. (Q311) DRIVER WINDOW EXPRESS UP DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between Ground and the (Q311) Driver Window
Express Up Driver circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (Q311) Driver Window Express Up Driver circuit
No >> Go TO 5
5. (Q321) DRIVER WINDOW EXPRESS DOWN DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO (Q311) DRIVER WINDOW
EXPRESS UP DRIVER CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (Q321) Driver Window Express
Down Driver circuit and the (Q311) Driver Window Express Up Driver
circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (Q321) Driver Window xpress Down Driver cir-
cuit for a short to the (Q311) Driver Window Express Up
Driver circuit.
B1855DRIVER WINDOW MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH DDM

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When both Driver Window Driver circuits (Up and Down) are supplied with voltage during a window movement
command, this code will set.
Possible Causes
(Q321) DRIVER WINDOW EXPRESS DOWN DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

(Q311) DRIVER WINDOW EXPRESS UP DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Diagnostic Test

Wait 30 seconds.
Does the scan tool display B1855DRIVER WINDOW MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. (Q321) DRIVER WINDOW EXPRESS DOWN DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage between the (Q321) Driver Window Express Down
Driver circuit and Ground.
Yes >> Repair the (Q321) Driver Window Express Down Driver cir-
cuit for a short to voltage.
No >> Go To 3
3. (Q311) DRIVER WINDOW EXPRESS UP DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage between the (Q311) Driver Window Express Up
Driver circuit and Ground.
Yes >> Repair the (Q311) Driver Window Express Up Driver circuit
B1858DRIVER WINDOW POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY LOW DDM

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When the Driver Window Hall Sensor Supply circuit falls below 1.4 volts for over 315 ms., this code will set.
Possible Causes
(Q305) DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Diagnostic Test

Operate the Driver Window up and down several times.
Wait 30 seconds.
Does the scan tool display B1858DRIVER WINDOW POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2

Operate the driver window switch up and down several times.
Does the scan tool display B1858DRIVER WINDOW POSITION
SENSOR POWER SUPPLY LOW?
Yes >> Go To 3
3. (Q305) DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

dow Hall Sensor Supply circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (Q305) Driver Window Hall Sensor Supply circuit
B1859DRIVER WINDOW POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY HIGH DDM

When Monitored:
Whenever the power is turned off to the module and it goes from being awake to sleep mode.
Set Condition:
When the Driver Window Hall Sensor Supply circuit is above 0.96 volts for over 15 ms. and the power to the
module has been turned off, this code will set.
Possible Causes
(Q305) DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Diagnostic Test

Wait 30 seconds.
Does the scan tool display B1859DRIVER WINDOW POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. (Q305) DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage between the (Q305) Driver Window Hall Sensor
Supply circuit and Ground.
Yes >> Repair the (Q305) Driver Window Hall Sensor Supply circuit
B185A-DRIVER WINDOW POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE - DDM

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When one or both of the window motor hall sensors does not generate a signal during a window movement,
this code will set.
Possible Causes
(Q301) DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

(Q303) DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR B SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(Q301) DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Q303) DRIVER WINDOW
HALL SENSOR B SIGNAL CIRCUIT
(Q301) DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Z405) DRIVER WINDOW
HALL SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT
(Q303) DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR B SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Z405) DRIVER WINDOW
HALL SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT
(Q301) DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
(Q303) DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR B SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
WINDOW MOTOR MALFUNCTION
Diagnostic Test

Wait 30 seconds.
Does the scan tool display B185ADRIVER WINDOW POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. (Q301) DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNAL SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between Ground and the Driver Window Hall
Sensor A Signal circuit.
Yes >> Repair the Driver Window Hall Sensor A signal circuit for a
short to ground.
No >> Go To 3
3. (Q303) DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR B SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

dow Hall Sensor B Signal circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (Q303) Driver Window Hall Sensor B Signal cir-
No >> Go To 4
4. (Q301) DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (Q301) Driver Window Hall Sensor A Sig-
nal circuit between the Motor connector and the Module C2 connector.
No >> Repair the (Q301) Driver Window Hall Sensor A Signal cir-
cuit for an open.
Yes >> Go To 5
5. (Q303) DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR B SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (Q303) Driver Window Hall Sensor B
Signal circuit between the Motor connector and the Module C2 connec-
tor.
No >> Repair the (Q303) Driver Window Hall Sensor B Signal cir-
cuit for an open.
Yes >> Go TO 6
6. (Q303) DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR B SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Z405) DRIVER
WINDOW HALL SENSOR RETURN
Measure the resistance between the (Q303) Driver Window Hall Sensor
B Signal circuit and the (Z405) Driver Window Hall Senspr Return cir-
cuit.
No >> Repair the (Q303) Driver Window Hall Sensor B Signal cir-
cuit for a short to the Driver Window Hall Sensor Return cir-
cuit.
Yes >> Go TO 7
7. (Q301) DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Z405) DRIVER
A Signal circuit and the (Z405) Driver Window Hall Senspr Return cir-
cuit.
No >> Repair the (Q301) Driver Window Hall Sensor A Signal cir-
cuit for a short to the (Z405) Driver Window Hall Sensor
Return circuit.
Yes >> Go TO 8
8. (Q301) DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO (Q303) DRIVER WINDOW HALL
SENSOR B SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A Signal circuit and the (Q303) Driver Window Hall Sensor B Signal cir-
cuit.
Yes >> Repair the (Q301) Driver Window Hall Sensor A Signal cir-
cuit for a short to the (Q303) Driver Window Hall Sensor B
Signal circuit.
B185D-PASSENGER WINDOW SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK - PDM

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When the Passenger Window Express Switch Mux circuit is below 3.5 volts for over 30 seconds.
Possible Causes
(Q336) PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

(Q336) PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER EXPRESS SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORT TO THE (Q936)
PASSENGER WINDOW EXPESS SWITCH RETURN CIRCUIT
PASSENGER DOOR MODULE (PDM)
Diagnostic Test

Operate the Passenger Window Switch in all positions several times.
Wait 30 seconds.
Does the scan tool display B185D-PASSENGER WINDOW SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Check for a sticking switch and
using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1.

Disconnect the Passenger Window/Door Lock Switch connector.
Does the scan tool display B185DPASSENGER WINDOW
SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK?
Yes >> Go To 3
3. (Q336) PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (Q336) Passenger
Window Express Switch Mux circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (Q336) Passenger Window Express Switch Mux
No >> Go To 4
4. (Q336) PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORT TO (Q936) PASSENGER
Measure the resistance between the (Q336) Passenger Window
Express Switch Mux circuit and the (Q936) Passenger Express Switch
Return circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (Q336) Passenger Express Switch Mux circuit
for a short to the (Q936) Passenger Window Express
Switch Return circuit.
No >> Replace the Passenger Door Module.
B185FPASSENGER WINDOW MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW PDM

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When both Passenger Window Driver circuits (Up and Down) are grounded during a window movement com-
mand, this code will set.
Possible Causes
(Q322) PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS DOWN DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

(Q312) PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS UP DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(Q322) PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS DOWN DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Q312) PASSENGER
WINDOW EXPRESS UP DRIVER CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Test

Try to operate the Passenger Window up and down several times.
Wait 30 seconds.
Does the scan tool display B185FPASSENGER WINDOW MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2

Disconnect the Passenger Window Motor connector.
Operate the passenger window switch up and down several times.
Does the scan tool display B185FPASSENGER WINDOW
MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 3
3. (Q322) PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS DOWN DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between Ground and the (Q322) Passenger
Window Express Down Driver circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (Q322) Passenger Window Express Down
Driver circuit for a short to ground.
No >> Go To 4
4. (Q312) PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS UP DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Window Express Up Driver circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (Q312) Passenger Window Express Up Driver
No >> Go To 5
5. (Q322) PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS DOWN DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO (Q312) PASSENGER
WINDOW EXPRESS UP DRIVER CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (Q322) Passsenger Window
Express Down Driver circuit and the (Q312) Passenger Window
Express Up Driver circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (Q322) Passenger Window xpress Down Driver
circuit for a short to the (Q312) Passenger Window Express
Up Driver circuit.
B1860PASSENGER WINDOW MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH PDM

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When both Passenger Window Driver circuits (Up and Down) are supplied with voltage during a window move-
ment command, this code will set.
Possible Causes
(Q322) PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS DOWN DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

(Q312) PASSENGR WINDOW EXPRESS UP DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
PASSENGER DOOR MODULE (DDM)
Diagnostic Test

Wait 30 seconds.
Does the scan tool display B1860PASSENGER WINDOW MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. (Q322) PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS DOWN DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage between the (Q322) Passenger Window Express
Down Driver circuit and Ground.
Yes >> Repair the (Q322) Passenger Window Express Down
Driver circuit for a short to voltage.
No >> Go To 3
3. (Q312)PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS UP DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage between the (Q312) Passenger Window Express
Up Driver circuit and Ground.
Yes >> Repair the (Q312) Passenger Window Express Up Driver
B1863PASSENGER WINDOW POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY LOW PDM

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When the Passenger Window Hall Sensor Supply circuit falls below 1.4 volts for over 315 ms., this code will
set.
Possible Causes
(Q306) PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Diagnostic Test

Operate the Passenger Window up and down several times.
Wait 30 seconds.
Does the scan tool display B1863PASSENGER WINDOW POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2

Operate the passenger window switch up and down several times.
Does the scan tool display B1863PASSENGER WINDOW POSI-
TION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY LOW?
Yes >> Go To 3
3. (Q306) PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Window Hall Sensor Supply circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (Q306) Passenger Window Hall Sensor Supply
B1864PASSENGER WINDOW POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY HIGH PDM

When Monitored:
Whenever the power is turned off to the module and it goes from being awake to sleep mode.
Set Condition:
When the Passenger Window Hall Sensor Supply circuit is above 0.96 volts for over 15 ms. and the power to
the module has been turned off, this code will set.
Possible Causes
(Q306) P[ASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Diagnostic Test

Operate the Passenger Window up and down several times.
Wait 30 seconds.
With the scan tool, read the stored DTCs.
Does the scan tool display B1864PASSENGER WINDOW POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. (Q306) PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage between the (Q306) Passenger Window Hall Sen-
sor Supply circuit and Ground.
Yes >> Repair the (Q306) Passenger Window Hall Sensor Supply
B1865PASSENGER WINDOW POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE - PDM

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When one or both of the window motor hall sensors do not generate a signal within 1.25 ms during a window
movement, this code will set.
Possible Causes
(Q302) PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

(Q304) PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR B SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(Q302) PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Q304) PASSENGER
WINDOW HALL SENSOR B SIGNAL CIRCUIT
(Q302) PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Z404) PASSENGER
WINDOW HALL SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT
(Q304) PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR B SIIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Z404) PASSENGER
WINDOW HALL SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT
(Q302) PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
(Q304) PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR B SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
WINDOW MOTOR MALFUNCTION
Diagnostic Test

Wait 30 seconds.
Does the scan tool display B1865PASSENGER WINDOW POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. (Q302) PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNAL SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between Ground and the Passenger Window
Hall Sensor A Signal circuit.
Yes >> Repair the Passenger Window Hall Sensor A signal circuit
No >> Go To 3
3. (Q304) PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR B SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Window Hall Sensor B Signal circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (Q304) Passenger Window Hall Sensor B Signal
No >> Go To 4
4. (Q302) PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (Q302) Passenger Window Hall Sensor
A Signal circuit between the Motor connector and the Module C2 con-
nector.
No >> Repair the (Q302) Passenger Window Hall Sensor A Signal
Yes >> Go To 5
5. (Q304) PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR B SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (Q304) Passenger Window Hall Sensor
B Signal circuit between the Motor connector and the Module C2 con-
nector.
No >> Repair the (Q304) Passenger Window Hall Sensor B Signal
Yes >> Go To 6
6. (Q304) PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR B SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (Z404) PASSENGER
Measure the resistance between the (Q304) Passenger Window Hall
Sensor B Signal circuit and the (Z404) Passenger Window Hall Sensor
Return circuit in the PDM C2 connector.
No >> Repair the (Q304) Passenger Window Hall Sensor B Signal
circuit for a short to the (Z404) Passenger Window Hall
Sensor Return circuit.
Yes >> Go To 7
7. (Q302) PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (Z404) PASSENGER
Sensor A Signal circuit and the (Z404) Passenger Window Hall Sensor
Return circuit in the PDM C2 connector.
No >> Repair the (Q302) Passenger Window Hall Sensor A Signal
circuit for a short to the (Z404) Passenger Window Hall
Sensor Return circuit.
Yes >> Go To 8
8. (Q304) PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO (Q304) PASSENGER
WINDOW HALL SENSOR B SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Sensor A Signal circuit and the (Q304) Passenger Window Hall Sensor
B Signal circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (Q302) Passenger Window Hall Sensor A Signal
circuit for a short to the (Q304) Passenger Window Hall
Sensor B Signal circuit.
B1868DRIVER PASSENGER WINDOW SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK DDM

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When the Passenger Window Driver Express Switch Mux circuit is below 3.5 volts for over 30 seconds.
Possible Causes
(Q222) PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER EXPRESS SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(Q222) PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER EXPRESS SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORT TO THE (Z421) DRIVER
Diagnostic Test

Operate the Driver Passenger Window Switch in all positions several times.
Wait 30 seconds.
Does the scan tool display B1868DRIVER PASSENGER WINDOW SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK?
Yes >> Go To 2

Disconnect the Driver Window/Door Lock Switch C2 connector.
Does the scan tool display B1868DRIVER PASSENGER WIN-
DOW SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK?
Yes >> Go To 3
3. (Q222) PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER EXPRESS SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the (Q222) Passenger
Window Driver Express Switch Mux circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (Q222) Passenger Window Driver Express
Switch Mux circuit for a short to ground.
No >> Go To 4
4. (Q222) PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER EXPRESS SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORT TO (Z421) DRIVER
Measure the resistance between the (Q222) Passenger Window Driver
Express Switch Mux circuit and the (Z421) Driver Express Switch
Return circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (Q222) Passenger Window Driver Express
Switch Mux circuit for a short to the (Z421) Driver Express
Switch Return circuit.
B210D-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW DDM/PDM

When Monitored:
At all times.
Set Condition:
Anytime the module senses voltage input below 9.0 volts, this code will set.
POSSIBLE CAUSES
LOW VOLTAGE ENGINE DTC
Diagnostic Test

No >> Go to 2

Start the engine and run for 2 minutes.
Does the scan tool display B210D-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW?
B210E-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH DDM/PDM

When Monitored:
At all times.
Set Condition:
Anytime the module senses voltage input above 15.9 volts, this code will set.
POSSIBLE CAUSES
HIGH VOLTAGE ENGINE DTC
Diagnostic Test

No >> Go to 2

Does the scan tool display B210E-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH?
B2218, B2219DRIVER/PASSENGER DOOR MODULE INTERNAL DDM/PDM

When Monitored:
At all times.
Set Condition:
Whenever the module detects an EEPROM failure
POSSIBLE CAUSES
Diagnostic Test
1. Replace the Door Module

NOTE: Anytime this code is logged, the module must be replaced.
Repair
Replace the appropriate Door Module.
U0019CAN B BUS-DDM/PDM

When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
Whenever the CAN B Bus (+) or CAN B Bus (-) circuit is open.
Possible Causes

Diagnostic Test

cycle.
Yes >> Go To 2

No >> Go To 3
3. MEMORY SYSTEM EQUIPPED?

IS THIS VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH THE MEMORY SYSTEM?
No >> Go To 4
Yes >> Go To 6

Front Control Module C1 connector and the Door Module C2 connector.
Yes >> Go To 5

Yes >> Replace the appropriate Door Module in accordance with

Yes >> Go To 7

Yes >> Replace the appropriate Door Module in accordance with
B16A4PASSENGER WINDOW SWITCH BACKLIGHTING CIRCUIT LOW PDM

When Monitored:
Whenever the module is awake, the park lamps are on and the window lock out switch is on.
Set Condition:
When the Passenger Window Express Switch Illumination Driver circuit falls below 3.0 volts for over 25 ms.
and the above conditions are met, this code will set.
Possible Causes
(E34) PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH ILLUMINATION DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(E34) PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH ILLUMINATION DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO (Q936)
PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH RETURN
WINDOW/DOOR LOCK SWITCH SHORTED
Diagnostic Test

Ensure the passenger window lock out switch is on.
Turn the park lights on.
Wait 30 seconds.
Does the scan tool display B16A4PASSENGER WINDOW SWITCH BACKLIGHTING CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. WINDOW/DOOR LOCK SWITCHSHORTED

Operate the passenger window lock out switch several times.
Does the scan tool display B16A4PASSENGER WINDOW
SWITCH BACKLIGHTING CIRCUIT LOW?
No >> Replace the Window/Door Lock Switch.
Yes >> Go To 3
3. (E34) PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH ILLUMINATION DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
Turn the park lamps off.
Measure the resistance between Ground and the (E34) Passenger Win-
dow Express Switch Illumination Driver circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (E34) Passenger Window Express Switch Illumi-
nation Driver circuit for a short to ground.
No >> Go To 4
4. (E34) PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH ILLUMINATION DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO (Q936)
PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH RETURN
Measure the resistance between the (E34) Passenger Window Express
Switch Illumination Driver circuit and the (Q936) Passenger Window
Express Switch Return circuit.
nation Driver circuit for a short to the (Q936) Passenger
Window Express Switch Return circuit.
B16A5PASSENGER WINDOW SWITCH BACKLIGHTING CIRCUIT HIGH PDM

When Monitored:
Whenever the power is turned off to the module and it goes from awake to sleep mode.
Set Condition:
When the Passenger Window Express Switch Illumination Driver circuit is above 2.5 volts for over 15 ms. and
the switch illumination output is turned off.
Possible Causes
(E34) PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH ILLUMINATION DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
WINDOW/DOOR LOCK SWITCH SHORTED
Diagnostic Test

Ensure the passenger window lock out switch is off.
Wait 30 seconds.
Does the scan tool display B16A5PASSENGER WINDOW SWITCH BACKLIGHTING CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. WINDOW/DOOR LOCK SWITCHSHORTED

Operate the passenger window lock out switch several times.
Does the scan tool display B16A5PASSENGER WINDOW
SWITCH BACKLIGHTING CIRCUIT HIGH?
No >> Replace the Window/Door Lock Switch.
Yes >> Go To 3
3. (E34) PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH ILLUMINATION DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Measure the voltage between the (E34) Passenger Window Express
Switch Illumination Driver circuit and Ground.
nation Driver circuit for a short to voltage.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

(SKREEM/WCM)
test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.
*FRONT WINDOW MOVES ABOUT 3 INCHES AND QUITS
NOTE: The Driver circuits are shown but the Passenger side is similar.
Possible Causes
WINDOW HALL SENSOR A AND SENSOR B SIGNAL CIRCUITS OPEN
WINDOW MOTOR (HALL SENSOR OPEN)
Diagnostic Test
1. TEST FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES

Does the scan tool display any Power Window related DTCs?
No >> Go To 2
Yes >> Refer to symptom list for problems related to POWER WINDOWS.
2. WINDOW HALL SENSOR A AND SENSOR B SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN

NOTE: Both Window Hall Sensor Signal circuits (A and B) must be open or closed for the result of this test
to be valid.
Disconnect the appropriate Window Motor connector.
Measure the resistance of the Window Hall Sensor A Signal circuit between the Motor connector and the Module C2
connector.
Measure the resistance of the Window Hall Sensor B Signal circuit between the Motor connector and the Module C2
connector.
Is the resistance below 2.0 ohms on both Signal circuits?
No >> Repair the Window Hall Sensor Signal circuits for opens.
Yes >> Replace the Window Motor.
8N - 290 POWER WINDOWS - SERVICE INFORMATION LX
POWER WINDOWS - SERVICE INFORMATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
POWER WINDOWS - SERVICE INFORMATION POWER WINDOW SWITCH

POWER WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
LX POWER WINDOWS - SERVICE INFORMATION 8N - 291
POWER WINDOWS - SERVICE INFORMATION

DESCRIPTION
The power window system allows each of the door windows to be raised and lowered electrically by actuating a
switch on the trim panel of each respective door. A master switch on the driver side front door trim panel allows the
driver to raise or lower each of the passenger door windows and to lock out the individual switches on the pas-
senger doors from operation. The power window system receives battery feed through a circuit breaker in the Junc-
tion Block (JB), only when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
The power window system includes the power window switches on each door trim panel, circuit breaker, door mod-
ules and the power window motors inside each door.
The window motors are replaced with the window regulator assembly. If the window motors require replacement, the
window regulator must be replaced.
OPERATION
POWER WINDOW SWITCH
The power windows are controlled by a window/lock switch on the trim panel of each front door. Switches in the
driver door window/lock switch allows the driver to control the passenger windows.
The power window switch for the driver side front door window has a second detent position beyond the normal
Down position that provides an automatic one-touch window down feature.
Some vehicles may be equipped with an express closing feature (front windows only). During an express closing,
anytime an obstacle is detected in the way of the glass, the motor will stop and reverse travel to avoid pinching an
occupants fingers, etc. Modules in the doors are programmed to compare the position of the glass to the amount
of current that is being used to drive up the glass.
The system also includes various features to manage the perceived forces on the glass as it travels up. If the
express closing calibration is lost, the system will self-calibrate itself after the windows are moved up and down two
cycles.
The power window switches control the battery and ground feeds to the power window motors. All of the passenger
door power window switches receive their battery and ground feeds through the circuitry of the window/lock switch.
When the power window lockout switch is in the Lock position, the battery feed for the individual passenger door
power window switches is interrupted.
POWER WINDOW MOTOR

A permanent magnet reversible motor moves the window regulator through an integral gearbox mechanism. A pos-
itive and negative battery connection to the two motor terminals will cause the motor to rotate in one direction.
Reversing the current through these same two connections will cause the motor to rotate in the opposite direction.
In addition, each power window motor is equipped with an integral self-resetting circuit breaker to protect the motor
from overloads.

POWER WINDOWS
Any diagnosis of the Power Windows system should begin with the use of scan tool. For information on the
use of the scan tool, refer to the appropriate Diagnostic Service information.
8N - 292 POWER WINDOWS - SERVICE INFORMATION LX
POWER WINDOW SWITCH

REMOVAL

2. Remove rear door trim panel (Refer to 23 - BODY/
DOORS - REAR/TRIM PANEL - REMOVAL).
3. Remove switch (1) from door trim panel (2).
INSTALLATION
1. Install switch (1) to rear door trim panel (2).

2. Install rear door trim panel (Refer to 23 - BODY/
DOORS - REAR/TRIM PANEL - INSTALLATION).
LX RESTRAINTS 8O - 1
RESTRAINTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
RESTRAINTS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . 1 RESTRAINTS - SERVICE INFORMATION . . . . . . 363
RESTRAINTS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
RESTRAINTS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS B1B0C-PASSENGER AIRBAG SQUIB 2

B1203-SRS WARNING INDICATOR B1B0D-PASSENGER AIRBAG SQUIB 2
CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
B1204-PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR B1B0E-PASSENGER AIRBAG SQUIB 2
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
B1205-PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR B1B0F-PASSENGER AIRBAG SQUIB 2
CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
B1206-PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR B1B18-LEFT SIDE CURTAIN SQUIB 1
CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
B1207-PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR B1B19-LEFT SIDE CURTAIN SQUIB 1
CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
B1B00-DRIVER AIRBAG SQUIB 1 CIRCUIT B1B1A-LEFT SIDE CURTAIN SQUIB 1
LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
B1B01-DRIVER AIRBAG SQUIB 1 CIRCUIT B1B1B-LEFT SIDE CURTAIN SQUIB 1
HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
B1B02-DRIVER AIRBAG SQUIB 1 CIRCUIT B1B20-RIGHT SIDE CURTAIN SQUIB 1
OPEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
SHORTED TOGETHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER . . . . . . . . . . . 107
B1B06-DRIVER AIRBAG SQUIB 2 CIRCUIT B1B28-1st ROW DRIVER SEAT BELT
OPEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 PRETENSIONER CIRCUIT LOW. . . . . . . . . . . . 110
B1B07-DRIVER AIRBAG SQUIB 2 CIRCUIT B1B29-1ST ROW DRIVER SEAT BELT
SHORTED TOGETHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 PRETENSIONER CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . 113
B1B08-PASSENGER AIRBAG SQUIB 1 B1B2A-1st ROW DRIVER SEAT BELT
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 PRETENSIONER CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . . . . . . . 117
B1B09-PASSENGER AIRBAG SQUIB 1 B1B2B-1st ROW DRIVER SEAT BELT
CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 PRETENSIONER CIRCUIT SHORTED
B1B0A-PASSENGER AIRBAG SQUIB 1 TOGETHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 B1B2C-1st ROW PASSENGER SEAT BELT
B1B0B-PASSENGER AIRBAG SQUIB 1 PRETENSIONER CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . 125
CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 B1B2D-1st ROW PASSENGER SEAT BELT
PRETENSIONER CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . 129
8O - 2 RESTRAINTS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS LX
B1B2E-1st ROW PASSENGER SEAT BELT B1B91-DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION

PRETENSIONER CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . . . . . . . 133 SENSOR CONFIGURATION MISMATCH . . . . 248
B1B2F-1st ROW PASSENGER SEAT BELT B1BA5-AIRBAG SQUIB CONFIGURATION
PRETENSIONER CIRCUIT SHORTED MISMATCH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
TOGETHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 B1BA6-OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION
B1B70-UP-FRONT LEFT SATELLITE UNDETERMINED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
ACCELERATION SENSOR INTERNAL . . . . . . 141 B1BA7-OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION
B1B71-UP-FRONT RIGHT SATELLITE SYSTEM VERIFICATION REQUIRED . . . . . . . 253
ACCELERATION SENSOR INTERNAL . . . . . . 146 B1BA8-OCM SYSTEM OUT OF
B1B72-LEFT SIDE SATELLITE CALIBRATION/NOT CALIBRATED . . . . . . . . . . 256
ACCELERATION SENSOR 1 INTERNAL . . . . 151 B1BB8-SRS WARNING INDICATOR STATUS
B1B73-LEFT SIDE SATELLITE MISMATCH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
ACCELERATION SENSOR 2 INTERNAL . . . . 156 B1BBA-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT
B1B75-RIGHT SIDE SATELLITE SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
ACCELERATION SENSOR 1 INTERNAL . . . . 161 B1BBB-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT
B1B76-RIGHT SIDE SATELLITE SENSOR INPUTS SHORTED TOGETHER. . . 262
ACCELERATION SENSOR 2 INTERNAL . . . . 166 B1BBC-OCS NEGATIVE SYSTEM WEIGHT . . 265
B1B78-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT B1BBD-OCM CURRENT CONFIGURATION
SENSOR 3 - LEFT FRONT TABLE UNPROGRAMMED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 B1BC7-DEPLOYMENT DATA RECORD FULL . 269
B1B79-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT B1BC8-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT
SENSOR 3 - LEFT FRONT INPUT CIRCUIT SENSORS PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
LOW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 B2101-IGNITION RUN/START INPUT
B1B7A-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
SENSOR 3 - LEFT FRONT INPUT CIRCUIT B2102-IGNITION RUN/START INPUT
HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
B1B7D-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT B210D-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW . . . . . . . . . . . 280
SENSOR 2 - RIGHT FRONT B210E-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . 284
PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 B212C-IGNITION RUN/START INPUT
B1B7E-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
SENSOR 2 - RIGHT FRONT INPUT B212D-IGNITION RUN ONLY INPUT
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
B1B7F-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT B2201-CALIBRATION MISMATCH . . . . . . . . . . . 297
SENSOR 2 - RIGHT FRONT INPUT B2205-ORIGINAL VIN MISSING/MISMATCH . . 298
CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 B2206-CURRENT VIN MISSING/MISMATCH . . 299
B1B82-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT B2207-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT
SENSOR 4 - LEFT REAR PERFORMANCE. . 201 CONTROLLER INTERNAL 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
B1B83-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT B2208-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT
SENSOR 4 - LEFT REAR INPUT CIRCUIT CONTROLLER INTERNAL 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
LOW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 B2209-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT
B1B84-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT CONTROLLER INTERNAL 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
SENSOR 4 - LEFT REAR INPUT CIRCUIT B220A-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT
HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 CONTROLLER INTERNAL 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
B1B87-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT B220B-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT
SENSOR 1 - RIGHT REAR CONTROLLER FIRING STORED ENERGY . . 306
PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 B220C-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT
B1B88-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT CONTROLLER ACCELEROMETER 1
SENSOR 1 - RIGHT REAR INPUT CIRCUIT INTERNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
LOW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 B220D-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT
B1B89-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT CONTROLLER ACCELEROMETER 2
SENSOR 1 - RIGHT REAR INPUT CIRCUIT INTERNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 B220F-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT
B1B8C-DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION CONTROLLER CONTROL DRIVER 1 . . . . . . . 309
SENSOR CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . 231 B2210-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT
B1B8D-DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION CONTROLLER CONTROL DRIVER 2 . . . . . . . 310
SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 B2212-OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION
B1B8E-DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION MODULE INTERNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 B223B-VEHICLE CONFIGURATION
MISMATCH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
LX RESTRAINTS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8O - 3
B223D-OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION U0175-LOST COMMUNICATION W/RIGHT

MODULE DTC PRESENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 SIDE SATELLITE ACCELERATION
U0019-CAN B BUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 SENSOR 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
U0020-CAN B BUS OFF PERFORMANCE . . . . 318 U0176-LOST COMMUNICATION W/RIGHT
U0022-CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . 321 SIDE SATELLITE ACCELERATION
U0023-CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . 321 SENSOR 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
U0026-CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . 321 U0184-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
U0121-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH RADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) U0186-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 AUDIO AMPLIFIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
FRONT CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 SDARS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER VEHICLE ENTERTAINMENT CONTROL
(ORC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 MODULE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE . . . . 321 HANDS FREE PHONE MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . 353
CLUSTER/CCN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 DRIVER DOOR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
U0156-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH EOM . . 321 U0200-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
U0164-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HVAC PASSENGER DOOR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 U0208-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
U0168-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HEATED SEAT CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . 353
VEHICLE SECURITY CONTROL MODULE U0209-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
(SKREEM/WCM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 MEMORY SEAT CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . 353
U0170-LOST COMMUNICATION W/UP- *DIAGNOSIS AND CHECKOUT
FRONT LEFT SATELLITE ACCELERATION PROCEDURE FOR SEAT WEIGHT
SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 SENSORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
U0171-LOST COMMUNICATION W/UP- *OCS VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1 . . . . . . . . . 358
FRONT RIGHT SATELLITE *ORC VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1 . . . . . . . . . 360
ACCELERATION SENSOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 U1414-IMPLAUSIBLE/MISSING ECU
U0172-LOST COMMUNICATION W/LEFT CONFIGURATION DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
SIDE SATELLITE ACCELERATION U1415-IMPLAUSIBLE/MISSING VEHICLE
SENSOR 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 CONFIGURATION DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
U0173-LOST COMMUNICATION W/LEFT
SIDE SATELLITE ACCELERATION
SENSOR 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
RESTRAINTS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS

B1203-SRS WARNING INDICATOR CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
With the ignition on, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the CAN B bus for a message from the
Instrument Cluster containing the airbag warning indicator status. The ORC requests the warning lamp status
from the Instrument Cluster once every second.
Set Condition:
This DTC will set immediately if the indicator status is LOW or HIGH.
Possible Causes
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ACTIVE DTCs
ORC
Diagnostic Test

NOTE: When reconnecting Airbag system components, the ignition must be turned off and the battery must
be disconnected.
With the scan tool, read ORC DTCs.
Select DTC type.
Active
Go To 2
Stored
Go To 4
2. CHECK FOR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DTCs

Does the scan tool display any Instrument Cluster DTCs?
Yes >> Refer to the symptom list for problems related to the Instrument Cluster.
Perform the ORC VERIFICATION TEST-VER 1.
No >> Go To 3
3. REPLACE THE ORC

WARNING: To avoid personal injury or death, turn the ignition off, disconnect the battery and wait two min-
utes before proceeding.
WARNING: If the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) is dropped at any time, it must be replaced. Failure to
take the proper precautions can result in accidental airbag deployment and personal injury or death.
View Repair
Repair
Replace the ORC in accordance with the service information.

With the scan tool, record and erase all DTCs from all Airbag modules.
If any ACTIVE codes are present they must be resolved before diagnosing any stored codes.
Look for chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires and broken, bent, pushed out, spread, corroded, or con-
taminated terminals.
The following additional checks may assist you in identifying a possible intermittent problem.
Reconnect any disconnected components and harness connector.
WARNING: To avoid personal injury or death, turn the ignition on, then reconnect the battery.
With the scan tool, monitor active codes as you work through the following steps.
WARNING: To avoid personal injury or death, maintain a safe distance from all airbags while performing the
following steps.
Wiggle the wiring harness and connectors of the related airbag circuit or component.
If codes are related to the Driver Airbag circuits, rotate the steering wheel from stop to stop.
If only stored codes return, continue the test until the problem area has been isolated.
In the previous steps you have attempted to recreate the conditions responsible for setting the active DTC in ques-
tion.
Does the scan tool display any ACTIVE DTCs?
Yes >> Select the appropriate diagnostic procedure from the Table of Contents in this section.
No >> No problem found at this time. Erase all codes before returning vehicle to customer.
B1204-PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) cannot detect voltage on the (G104) Passenger Airbag Indicator
Driver circuit.
Possible Causes
(G104) PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

(F23) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT RUN-START CIRCUIT OPEN
PASSENGER AIRBAG ON/OFF INDICATOR LAMP (SWITCH BANK)
ORC
Diagnostic Test
1. VERIFY THAT DTC B1204-PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR CIRCUIT LOW IS ACTIVE

NOTE: The scan tool, SRS Airbag Load Tool MRL 8443, and DVOM are required to perform the following
test.
be disconnected.
Does the scan tool display active: B1204-PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Go To 6
2. CHECK THE PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT VOLTAGE AT THE ORC CONNECTOR.
WARNING: If the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) is dropped
at any time, it must be replaced. Failure to take the proper precau-
tions can result in accidental airbag deployment and personal
injury or death.
Disconnect the ORC C1 and C2 connector.
Connect the Load Tool ORC Adaptor (8443-24) to the ORC C2 connec-
tor.
Measure the voltage of the (G104) Passenger Airbag Indicator Driver
circuit between the ORC Adaptor cavity 9 and ground.
Yes >> Go To 5
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK (F23) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT RUN-START CIRCUIT VOLTAGE

Disconnect the Switch Bank Connector
Measure the voltage of the (F23) Fused Ignition Switch Output Run-
Start circuit at the Switch Bank connector cavity 5.
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Repair the (F23) Fused Ignition Switch Output Run-Start cir-
cuit open or low voltage condition. Perform ORC VERIFICA-
TION TEST - VER 1.
4. CHECK (G104) PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance of the (G104) Passenger Airbag Indicator Driver
circuit between the ORC Adaptor cavity 9 and ground.
Yes >> Repair the (G104) Passenger Airbag Indicator Driver circuit
Perform ORC VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
No >> Replace the Switch Bank in accordance with the service
information. Perform the ORC VERIFICATION TEST-VER
1.
5. REPLACE THE ORC

Repair
Perform the ORC VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.

following steps.
tion.
B1205-PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) senses a low resistance to battery voltage on the (G104) Passen-
ger Airbag Indicator Driver circuit.
Possible Causes
(G104) PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (F23) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH
OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT
(G104) PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
ORC
Diagnostic Test
1. VERIFY THAT DTC B1205-PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR CIRCUIT HIGH IS ACTIVE

test.
be disconnected.
Does the scan tool display active: B1205-PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Go To 5
2. CHECK (G104) PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO (F23) FUSED
IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT
injury or death.
WARNING: If the Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is
dropped at any time, it must be replaced. Failure to take the
proper precautions can result in accidental airbag deployment and
Disconnect the ORC C1 and C2 connectors.
Disconnect the OCM C1 connector.
Disconnect the Switch Bank connector.
Connect the appropriate Load Tool ORC Adaptor (8443-24) to the ORC
connectors.
Measure the resistance between the (G104) Passenger Airbag Indicator Driver circuit and the (F23) Fused Ignition
Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit in the Switch Bank connector.
Yes >> Repair the (G104) Passenger Airbag Indicator Driver circuit for a short to the (F23) Fused Ignition
Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit.
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK (G104) PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Remove the Airbag Run-Start Fuse from the PDC.
circuit in the Switch Bank connector cavity 4.
No >> Go To 4
4. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC B1205-PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR CIRCUIT HIGH WITH SWITCH BANK
CONNECTOR DISCONNECTED
Reconnect the Airbag Run-Start Fuse from the PDC.
Remove the Load Tool ORC Adaptor from the ORC connectors.
Reconnect the ORC C1 and C2 connectors.
Reconnect the OCM C1 connector.
With the scan tool, erase ORC DTCs.
Does the scan tool display active: B1205-PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >>
No >> Replace the Switch Bank in accordance with the Service Information.

following steps.
tion.
B1206-PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR CIRCUIT OPEN

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) cannot detect voltage on the (G104) Passenger Airbag Indicator
Driver circuit.
Possible Causes
SWITCH BANK CONNECTOR DISCONNECTED

(G104) PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN
ORC
Diagnostic Test
1. VERIFY THAT DTC B1206 PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR CIRCUIT OPEN IS ACTIVE
test.
be disconnected.
Does the scan tool display active: B1206-PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Go To 6
2. VERIFY THAT SWITCH BANK CONNECTOR IS CONNECTED

Gain access to the Switch Bank connector.
Is the Switch Bank connected to the dash harness?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Connect the Switch Bank to the dash harness.
3. CHECK (G104) PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT OPERATION

Disconnect the ORC C1 and C2 connector.
Connect the appropriate Load Tool ORC Adaptor (8443-24) to the ORC connector.
Measure the voltage of the (G104) Passenger Airbag Indicator Driver circuit between the ORC Adaptor cavity 9 and
the Switch Bank connector cavity 4.
Yes >>
take the proper precautions can result in accidental airbag deployment and personal injury or death.Replace
the ORC in accordance with the service information.
No >> Go To 4
4. CHECK (G104) PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

injury or death.
Measure the resistance of the (G104) Passenger Airbag Indicator Driver
circuit between the ORC Adaptor cavity 9 and the Switch Bank connec-
tor cavity 4.
Yes >> Go To 5
No >> Repair the (G104) Passenger Airbag Indicator Driver circuit
for an open.
5. CHECK (F23) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage of the (F23) Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit at the Switch Bank connector
cavity 5.
Yes >> Replace the Switch Bank in accordance with the service information.
No >> Repair the open (F23) Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit.

following steps.
tion.
B1207-PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) detects over current on the (G104) Passenger Airbag Indicator
Driver circuit.
Possible Causes
(G104) PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (F23) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH
OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT
(G104) PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
PASSENGER AIRBAG ON/OFF INDICATOR LAMP (SWITCH BAN)
ORC
Diagnostic Test
1. VERIFY THAT DTC B1207-PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER IS ACTIVE
test.
be disconnected.
Does the scan tool display active: B1207-PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR CIRCUIT SHORTED
TOGETHER?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Go To 6
2. CHECK (G104) PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO (F23) FUSED
IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT
injury or death.
WARNING: If the Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is
dropped at any time, it must be replaced. Failure to take the
proper precautions can result in accidental airbag deployment and
Disconnect the ORC C1 and C2 connectors.
Disconnect the Switch Bank connector.
Connect the appropriate Load Tool ORC Adaptor (8443-24) to the ORC
connectors.
Measure the resistance between the (G104) Passenger Airbag Indicator Driver circuit and the (F23) Fused Ignition
Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit in the Switch Bank connector.
Yes >> Repair the (G104) Passenger Airbag Indicator Driver circuit for a short to the (F23) Fused Ignition
Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit.
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK (G104) PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
circuit.
No >> Go To 4
4. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC B1207-PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER
Remove the Load Tool ORC Adaptor from the ORC connectors.
Reconnect the ORC C1 and C2 connectors.
Reconnect the OCM C1 connector.
Does the scan tool display active: B1207-PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR CIRCUIT SHORTED
TOGETHER?
Yes >> Go To 5
No >> Replace the Switch Bank in accordance with the Service Information.
5. REPLACE THE ORC

View Repair
Repair

following steps.
tion.
B1B00-DRIVER AIRBAG SQUIB 1 CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
With the ignition on, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the resistance of the Driver Squib 1
circuits.
Set Condition:
The ORC has detected low resistance on the Driver Squib 1 circuits.
Possible Causes
(R43) DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 CIRCUIT OR (R45) DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
CLOCKSPRING
DRIVER AIRBAG
ORC
Diagnostic Test
1. DETERMINE ACTIVE OR STORED DTC

test.
NOTE: When reconnecting airbag system components the Ignition must be turned off and the Battery must
be disconnected.
Select Active or Stored DTC.
Is the DTC active or stored?
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 6
2. CHECK FOR SHORTED SQUIB CIRCUITS IN DRIVER AIRBAG

Disconnect the Driver Airbag Squib connectors.
WARNING: To avoid personal injury or death, do not place an
intact undeployed airbag face down on a hard surface, the airbag
will propel into the air if accidentally deployed.
Connect the 8443 Load Tool and appropriate Jumper to the Driver Air-
bag Squib connectors.
With the scan tool, read the active ORC DTCs.
Does the scan tool display: B1B00 DRIVER AIRBAG SQUIB 1
CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Replace the Driver Airbag in accordance with the Service
Information.
Perform ORC VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1
3. CHECK CLOCKSPRING SQUIB CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Disconnect the 8443 Load Tool Jumper from the Driver Airbag Squib
connectors.
Remove the Steering Control Module from the steering column in accor-
Disconnect the Steering Control Module connector.
With the Steering Control Module Connector attached to the steering
column, connect the 8443 Load Tool and appropriate Jumper to the
Steering Control Module connector.
CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Replace the Clockspring in accordance with the Service
Information.
4. CHECK (R43) DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 CIRCUIT AND (R45) DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 CIRCUIT FOR A
SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect the 8443 Load Tool and Jumper from the Steering Control
Module connector.
Disconnect the ORC connectors.
Connect the 8443 Load Tool ORC Adaptor to the ORC C2 connector.
Measure the resistance of the (R43) Driver Squib 1 Line 2 circuit
between ground and the Steering Column Module connector.
Is the resistance below 10K ohms for either measurement?
Yes >> Repair the Driver Squib 1 circuits with a resistance below
10K ohms for a short to ground.
No >> Go To 5
5. REPLACE THE ORC

be disconnected.
Repair
Replace the ORC in accordance with the Service Information.
6. STORED ORC DTC

With the scan tool, record and erase all DTCs from all Airbag System Modules.
With the scan tool monitor active codes as you work through the following steps.
If only stored codes return continue the test until the problem area has been isolated.
In the previous steps you have attempted to recreate the conditions responsible for setting active DTC in question.
Are any ACTIVE DTCs present?
B1B01-DRIVER AIRBAG SQUIB 1 CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
With the ignition on, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the voltage on the Driver Squib 1 cir-
cuits.
Set Condition:
The ORC has detected voltage on the Driver Squib 1 circuits.
Possible Causes
(R43) DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 CIRCUIT OR (R45) DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY
CLOCKSPRING
DRIVER AIRBAG
ORC
Diagnostic Test

test.
be disconnected.
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 6

CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 3
Information.
3. CHECK CLOCKSPRING SQUIB CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO BATTERY

Disconnect the 8443 Load Tool and Jumper from the Driver Airbag
Squib connectors.
CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 4
Information.
SHORT TO BATTERY
Module connector.
Measure the voltage of the (R43) Driver Squib 1 Line 2 circuit between
the Steering Control Module connector and ground.
Is there any voltage present for either measurement?
Yes >> Repair the Driver Squib 1 circuits with voltage present for a
short to Battery.
No >> Go To 5
5. REPLACE THE ORC

be disconnected.
View Repair
Repair
6. STORED ORC DTC

In the previous steps you have attempted to recreate the conditions responsible for setting active DTCs in question.
B1B02-DRIVER AIRBAG SQUIB 1 CIRCUIT OPEN

When Monitored:
circuits.
Set Condition:
The ORC has detected an open or high resistance on the Driver Squib 1 circuits.
Possible Causes
(R43) DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 CIRCUIT OPEN

CLOCKSPRING
DRIVER AIRBAG
ORC
Diagnostic Test

test.
be disconnected.
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 7
2. CHECK FOR OPEN SQUIB CIRCUITS IN DRIVER AIRBAG

CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes >> Go To 3
Information.
3. CHECK CLOCKSPRING SQUIB CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN

Squib connectors.
CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes >> Go To 4
Information.
4. CHECK (R43) DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Module connector.
between the Steering Control Module connector and the ORC Load
Tool Adaptor.
Yes >> Go To 5
No >> Repair the (R43) Driver Squib 1 Line 2 circuit for an open.
Then, Go To 5

Tool Adaptor.
Yes >> Go To 6
6. REPLACE THE ORC

be disconnected.
View Repair
Repair
7. STORED ORC DTC

B1B03-DRIVER AIRBAG SQUIB 1 CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER

When Monitored:
circuits.
Set Condition:
The ORC has detected low resistance between the Driver Squib 1 circuits.
Possible Causes
(R43) DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (R45) DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 CIRCUIT
CLOCKSPRING
DRIVER AIRBAG
ORC
Diagnostic Test

test.
be disconnected.
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 6

CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER?
Yes >> Go To 3
Information.
3. CHECK CLOCKSPRING SQUIB CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER

Disconnect the 8443 Load Tool ORC from the Driver Airbag Squib con-
nectors.
Yes >> Go To 4
Information.
4. CHECK (R43) DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO (R45) DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 1
CIRCUIT
Module connector.
Measure the resistance between the (R43) Driver Squib 1 Line 2 circuit
and the (R45) Driver Squib 1 Line 1 circuit at the Steering Control Mod-
ule connector.
Yes >> Repair the (R43) Driver Squib 1 Line 2 circuit for a short to
the (R45) Driver Squib 1 Line 1 circuit.
No >> Go To 5
5. REPLACE THE ORC

be disconnected.
View Repair
Repair
6. STORED ORC DTC

B1B04-DRIVER AIRBAG SQUIB 2 CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
circuits.
Set Condition:
The ORC has detected low resistance on the Driver Squib 2 circuits.
Possible Causes
(R63) DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 CIRCUIT OR (R61) DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
CLOCKSPRING
DRIVER AIRBAG
ORC
Diagnostic Test

test.
be disconnected.
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 6

CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 3
Information.
3. CHECK CLOCKSPRING SQUIB CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Disconnect the 8443 Load Tool Jumper from the Driver Airbag Squib
connectors.
CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 4
Information.
SHORT TO GROUND
Module connector.
Is the resistance below 10K ohms for either measurement?
Yes >> Repair the Driver Squib 2 circuits with a resistance below 10K ohms for a short to ground.
No >> Go To 5
5. REPLACE THE ORC

be disconnected.
View Repair
Repair
6. STORED ORC DTC

B1B05-DRIVER AIRBAG SQUIB 2 CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
With the ignition on, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the voltage on the Driver Squib 2 cir-
cuits.
Set Condition:
The ORC has detected voltage on the Driver Squib 2 circuits.
Possible Causes
(R63) DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 CIRCUIT OR (R61) DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY
CLOCKSPRING
DRIVER AIRBAG
ORC
Diagnostic Test

NOTE: The Scan Tool, SRS Airbag Load Tool MRL 8443 and DVOM are required to perform the following
test.
be disconnected.
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 6

CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 3
Information.
3. CHECK CLOCKSPRING SQUIB CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO BATTERY

Squib connectors.
With the Steering Control Module connector attached to the steering
CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 4
Information.
SHORT TO BATTERY
Module connector.
Is there any voltage present for either measurement?
Yes >> Repair the Driver Squib 2 circuits with voltage present for a
short to Battery.
No >> Go To 5
5. REPLACE THE ORC

be disconnected.
View Repair
Repair
6. STORED ORC DTC

In the previous steps you have attempted to recreate the conditions responsible for setting active DTCs in question.
B1B06-DRIVER AIRBAG SQUIB 2 CIRCUIT OPEN

When Monitored:
circuits.
Set Condition:
The ORC has detected an open or high resistance on the Driver Squib 2 circuits.
Possible Causes

CLOCKSPRING
DRIVER AIRBAG
ORC
Diagnostic Test

test.
be disconnected.
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 7
2. CHECK FOR OPEN SQUIB CIRCUITS IN DRIVER AIRBAG

CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes >> Go To 3
Information.
3. CHECK CLOCKSPRING SQUIB CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN

Squib connectors.
CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes >> Go To 4
Information.

Module connector.
Tool Adaptor.
Yes >> Go To 5
Then, Go To 5

Tool Adaptor.
Yes >> Go To 6
6. REPLACE THE ORC

be disconnected.
View Repair
Repair
7. STORED ORC DTC

B1B07-DRIVER AIRBAG SQUIB 2 CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER

When Monitored:
circuits.
Set Condition:
The ORC has detected low resistance between the Driver Squib 2 circuits.
Possible Causes
(R63) DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (R61) DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 CIRCUIT
CLOCKSPRING
DRIVER AIRBAG
ORC
Diagnostic Test

NOTE: The Scan Tool, SRS Airbag Load Tool MRL 8443 and DVOM are required to perform the following
test.
be disconnected.
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 6

Yes >> Go To 3
Information.
3. CHECK CLOCKSPRING SQUIB CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER

Disconnect the 8443 Load Tool ORC from the Driver Airbag Squib con-
nectors.
Yes >> Go To 4
Information.
4. CHECK (R63) DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO (R61) DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 2
CIRCUIT
Module connector.
Measure the resistance between the (R63) Driver Squib 2 Line 1 circuit
and the (R61) Driver Squib 2 Line 2 circuit at the Steering Control Mod-
ule connector.
Yes >> Repair the (R63) Driver Squib 2 Line 1 circuit for a short to
the (R61) Driver Squib 2 Line 2 circuit.
No >> Go To 5
5. REPLACE THE ORC

be disconnected.
View Repair
Repair
6. STORED ORC DTC

B1B08-PASSENGER AIRBAG SQUIB 1 CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
With the ignition on, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the resistance of the Passenger Squib
1 circuits.
Set Condition:
The ORC has detected low resistance on the Passenger Squib 1 circuits.
Possible Causes
(R42) PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 CIRCUIT OR (R44) PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO
GROUND
PASSENGER AIRBAG
ORC
Diagnostic Test

test.
be disconnected.
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 5
2. CHECK FOR SHORTED SQUIB CIRCUITS IN PASSENGER AIRBAG

Disconnect the Passenger Airbag Squib connector.
WARNING: To avoid personal injury or death, do not place an intact
undeployed airbag face down on a hard surface, the airbag will pro-
pel into the air if accidentally deployed.
Connect the 8443 Load Tool to the Passenger Airbag Squib connector.
Does the scan tool display: B1B08 PASSENGER AIRBAG SQUIB
1 CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Replace the Passenger Airbag in accordance with the Ser-
vice Information.
3. CHECK (R42) PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 CIRCUIT AND (R44) PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 CIRCUIT
FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect the 8443 Load Tool from the Passenger Airbag Squib con-
nector.
Measure the resistance of the (R42) Passenger Squib 1 Line 2 circuit
between ground and the Passenger Airbag Squib connector.
Is the resistance below 10K ohms on either circuit?
Yes >> Repair the Passenger Squib 1 circuits with a resistance below 10K ohms for a short to ground.
No >> Go To 4
4. REPLACE THE ORC

be disconnected.
View Repair
Repair
5. STORED ORC DTC

B1B09-PASSENGER AIRBAG SQUIB 1 CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
With the ignition on, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the voltage on the Passenger Squib 1
circuits.
Set Condition:
When the ORC has detected voltage on the Passenger Squib 1 circuits.
Possible Causes
BATTERY
PASSENGER AIRBAG
ORC
Diagnostic Test

test.
be disconnected.
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 5

Does the scan tool display: B1B09 PASSENGER AIRBAG SQUIB
1 CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 3
vice Information.
FOR A SHORT TO BATTERY
nector.
Measure the voltage of the (R42) Passenger Squib 1 Line 2 circuit
between the Passenger Airbag Squib connector and ground.
Yes >> Repair the Passenger Squib 1 circuits with voltage present for a short to battery.
No >> Go To 4
4. REPLACE THE ORC

be disconnected.
View Repair
Repair
5. STORED ORC DTC

B1B0A-PASSENGER AIRBAG SQUIB 1 CIRCUIT OPEN

When Monitored:
1 circuits.
Set Condition:
The ORC has detected an open or high resistance on the Passenger Squib 1 circuits.
Possible Causes
(R42) PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 CIRCUIT OPEN

PASSENGER AIRBAG
ORC
Diagnostic Test

test.
be disconnected.
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 6
2. CHECK FOR OPEN SQUIB CIRCUITS IN PASSENGER AIRBAG

Does the scan tool display: B1B0A PASSENGER AIRBAG SQUIB
1 CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes >> Go To 3
vice Information.
3. CHECK (R42) PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

nector.
between the Passenger Airbag Squib connector and the 8443 ORC
Adaptor.
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Repair the (R42) Passenger Squib 1 Line 2 circuit for and
open. Then, Go To 4

between the Passenger Airbag Squib connector and the 8443 ORC
Adaptor.
Yes >> Go To 5
No >> Repair the (R44) Passenger Squib 1 Line 1 circuit for an
open.
5. REPLACE THE ORC

be disconnected.
If there are no possible causes remaining, view repair.
Repair
6. STORED ORC DTC

B1B0B-PASSENGER AIRBAG SQUIB 1 CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER

When Monitored:
1 circuits.
Set Condition:
The ORC has detected low resistance between the Passenger Squib 1 circuits.
Possible Causes
(R42) PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (R44) PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 CIRCUIT
PASSENGER AIRBAG
ORC
Diagnostic Test

test.
be disconnected.
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 5

Does the scan tool display: B1B0B PASSENGER AIRBAG SQUIB
1 CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER?
Yes >> Go To 3
vice Information.
3. CHECK (R42) PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO (R44) PASSENGER SQUIB 1
LINE 1 CIRCUIT
nector.
Measure the resistance between the (R42) Passenger Squib 1 Line 2
circuit and the (R44) Passenger Squib 1 Line 1 circuit at the Passenger
Airbag Squib connector.
Yes >> Repair the (R42) Passenger Squib 1 Line 2 circuit for a short
to the (R44) Passenger Squib 1 Line 1 circuit.
No >> Go To 4
4. REPLACE THE ORC

be disconnected.
View Repair
Repair
5. STORED ORC DTC

B1B0C-PASSENGER AIRBAG SQUIB 2 CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
2 circuits.
Set Condition:
The ORC has detected low resistance on the Passenger Squib 2 circuits.
Possible Causes
GROUND
PASSENGER AIRBAG
ORC
Diagnostic Test

test.
be disconnected.
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 5

Does the scan tool display: B1B0C PASSENGER AIRBAG SQUIB
2 CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 3
vice Information.
FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
nector.
Yes >> Repair the Passenger Squib 2 circuits with a resistance below 10K ohms for a short to ground.
No >> Go To 4
4. REPLACE THE ORC

be disconnected.
View Repair
Repair
5. STORED ORC DTC

B1B0D-PASSENGER AIRBAG SQUIB 2 CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
With the ignition on, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the voltage of the Passenger Squib 2
circuits.
Set Condition:
The ORC has detected voltage on the Passenger Squib 2 circuits.
Possible Causes
BATTERY
PASSENGER AIRBAG
ORC
Diagnostic Test

test.
be disconnected.
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 5

Does the scan tool display: B1B0D PASSENGER AIRBAG SQUIB
2 CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 3
vice Information.
FOR A SHORT TO BATTERY
nector.
Yes >> Repair the Passenger Squib 2 circuits with voltage present for a short to battery.
No >> Go To 4
4. REPLACE THE ORC

be disconnected.
View Repair
Repair
5. STORED ORC DTC

B1B0E-PASSENGER AIRBAG SQUIB 2 CIRCUIT OPEN

When Monitored:
2 circuits.
Set Condition:
The ORC has detected an open or high resistance on the Passenger Squib 2 circuits.
Possible Causes

PASSENGER AIRBAG
ORC
Diagnostic Test

test.
be disconnected.
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 6
2. CHECK FOR OPEN SQUIB CIRCUITS IN PASSENGER AIRBAG

Does the scan tool display: B1B0E PASSENGER AIRBAG SQUIB
CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes >> Go To 3
vice Information.

nector.
between the Passenger Airbag Squib connector and the 8443 Load
Tool ORC Adaptor.
Yes >> Go to 4
open. Then, Go To 4

between the Passenger Airbag Squib connector and the 8443 Load
Tool ORC Adaptor.
Yes >> Go To 5
open.
5. REPLACE THE ORC

be disconnected.
View Repair
Repair
6. STORED ORC DTC

If codes are related to the Passenger Airbag circuits, rotate the steering wheel from stop to stop.
B1B0F-PASSENGER AIRBAG SQUIB 2 CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER

When Monitored:
2 circuits.
Set Condition:
The ORC has detected low resistance between the Passenger Squib 2 circuits.
Possible Causes
(R64) PASSENGER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (R62) PASSENGER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 CIRCUIT
PASSENGER AIRBAG
ORC
Diagnostic Test

test.
be disconnected.
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 5

then reconnect the battery
Does the scan tool display: B1B0F PASSENGER AIRBAG SQUIB
Yes >> Go To 3
vice Information.
3. CHECK (R64) PASSENGER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO (R62) PASSENGER SQUIB 2
LINE 2 CIRCUIT
nector.
Measure the resistance between the (R64) Passenger Squib 2 Line 1
circuit and the (R62) Passenger Squib 2 Line 2 circuit at the Passenger
Airbag Squib connector.
Yes >> Repair the (R64) Passenger Squib 2 Line 1 circuit for a short
to the (R62) Passenger Squib 2 Line 2 circuit.
No >> Go to 4
4. REPLACE THE ORC

be disconnected.
Repair
5. STORED ORC DTC

B1B18-LEFT SIDE CURTAIN SQUIB 1 CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
With the ignition on, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the resistance of the Left Curtain Squib
1 circuits.
Set Condition:
The ORC has detected low resistance of the Left Curtain Squib 1 circuits.
Possible Causes
(R3) LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 CIRCUIT OR (R1) LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 CIRCUIT SHORTED
TO GROUND
LEFT SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG
ORC
Diagnostic Test

test.
be disconnected.
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 5
2. CHECK FOR SHORTED SQUIB CIRCUITS IN LEFT SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG

Disconnect the Left Side Curtain Airbag connector.
intact undeployed curtain airbag face down on a hard surface, the
airbag will propel into the air if accidentally deployed.
Connect the 8443 Load Tool and appropriate Jumper to the Left Side
Curtain Airbag connector.
Does the scan tool display: B1B18 LEFT SIDE CURTAIN SQUIB
1 CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Replace the Left Side Curtain Airbag in accordance with the
3. CHECK (R3) LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 CIRCUIT AND (R1) LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2
CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect the 8443 Load Tool and Jumper from the Left Side Curtain
Airbag connector.
Measure the resistance of the (R3) Left Curtain Squib 1 Line 1 circuit
between ground and the Left Side Curtain Airbag connector.
between ground and the Left Side Curtain Airbag connector.
Yes >> Repair the Left Curtain Squib 1 circuits with a resistance
below 10K ohms for a short to ground.
No >> Go To 4
4. REPLACE THE ORC

be disconnected.
Repair
5. STORED ORC DTC

IF only stored codes return continue the test until the problem area has been isolated.
B1B19-LEFT SIDE CURTAIN SQUIB 1 CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
With the ignition on, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the voltage on the Left Curtain Squib 1
circuits.
Set Condition:
The ORC has detected voltage on the Left Curtain Squib 1 circuits.
Possible Causes
(R3) LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 CIRCUIT OR (R1) LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 CIRCUIT SHORTED
TO BATTERY
ORC
Diagnostic Test

test.
be disconnected.
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 5

Does the scan tool display: B1B19 LEFT SIDE CURTAIN SQUIB
1 CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 3
3. CHECK (R3) LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 CIRCUIT AND (R1) LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2
CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO BATTERY
Airbag connector.
Measure the voltage of the (R3) Left Curtain Squib 1 Line 1 circuit
between the Left Side Curtain Airbag connector and ground.
Measure the voltage of the (R1) Left Curtain Squib 1 Line 2 circuit
between the Left Side Curtain Airbag connector and ground.
Yes >> Repair the Left Curtain Squib 1 circuits with voltage present for a short to battery.
No >> Go To 4
4. REPLACE THE ORC

be disconnected.
Repair
5. STORED ORC DTC

WARNING: To avoid personal injury or death, turn the ignition off then disconnect the battery and wait two
minutes before proceeding.
B1B1A-LEFT SIDE CURTAIN SQUIB 1 CIRCUIT OPEN

When Monitored:
1 circuits.
Set Condition:
The ORC has detected an open or high resistance on the Left Curtain Squib 1 circuits.
Possible Causes
(R3) LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 CIRCUIT OPEN

(R1) LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 CIRCUIT OPEN
ORC
Diagnostic Test

test.
be disconnected.
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 6
2. CHECK FOR OPEN SQUIB CIRCUITS IN LEFT SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG

Does the scan tool display: B1B1A LEFT SIDE CURTAIN SQUIB
1 CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes >> Go To 3
3. CHECK (R3) LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Airbag connector.
between the Left Side Curtain Airbag connector and the Load Tool ORC
Adaptor.
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Repair the (R3) Left Curtain Squib 1 Line 1 circuit for an
open. Then, Go To 4
4. CHECK (R1) LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

between the Left Side Curtain Airbag connector and the Load Tool ORC
Adaptor.
Yes >> Go To 5
No >> Repair the (R1) Left Curtain Squib 1 Line 2 circuit for an
open.
5. REPLACE THE ORC

be disconnected.
Repair
6. STORED ORC DTC

B1B1B-LEFT SIDE CURTAIN SQUIB 1 CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER

When Monitored:
1 circuits.
Set Condition:
The ORC has detected low resistance between the Left Curtain Squib 1 circuits.
Possible Causes
(R3) LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (R1) LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 CIRCUIT
ORC
Diagnostic Test

test.
be disconnected.
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 5

Does the scan tool display: B1B1B LEFT SIDE CURTAIN SQUIB
Yes >> Go To 3
3. CHECK (R3) LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO (R1) LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1
LINE 2 CIRCUIT
Airbag connector.
Measure the resistance between the (R3) Left Curtain Squib 1 Line 1
circuit and the (R1) Left Curtain Squib 1 Line 2 circuit at the Left Side
Yes >> Repair the (R3) Left Curtain Squib 1 Line 1 circuit for a
short to the (R1) Left Curtain Squib 1 Line 2 circuit.
No >> Go To 4
4. REPLACE THE ORC

be disconnected.
Repair
5. STORED ORC DTC

B1B20-RIGHT SIDE CURTAIN SQUIB 1 CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
With the ignition on, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the resistance of the Right Curtain
Squib 1 circuits.
Set Condition:
The ORC has detected low resistance on the Right Curtain Squib 1 circuits.
Possible Causes
(R4) RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 CIRCUIT OR (R2) RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 CIRCUIT
SHORTED TO GROUND
RIGHT SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG
ORC
Diagnostic Test

test.
be disconnected.
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 5
2. CHECK FOR SHORTED SQUIB CIRCUITS IN RIGHT SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG

Disconnect the Right Side Curtain Airbag connector.
Connect the 8443 Load Tool and appropriate Jumper to the Right Side
Does the scan tool display: B1B20 RIGHT SIDE CURTAIN
SQUIB 1 CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Replace the Right Side Curtain Airbag in accordance with
3. CHECK (R4) RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 CIRCUIT AND (R2) RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2
CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect the 8443 Load Tool and Jumper from the Right Side Curtain
Airbag connector.
Measure the resistance of the (R4) Right Curtain Squib 1 Line 1 circuit
between ground and the Right Side Curtain Airbag connector.
between ground and the Right Side Curtain Airbag connector.
Yes >> Repair the Right Curtain Squib 1 circuits with a resistance below 10K ohms for a short to ground.
No >> Go to 4
4. REPLACE THE ORC

be disconnected.
Repair
5. STORED ORC DTC

B1B21-RIGHT SIDE CURTAIN SQUIB 1 CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
With the ignition on, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the voltage on the Right Curtain Squib
1 circuits.
Set Condition:
When the ORC detects voltage on the Right Curtain Squib 1 circuits.
Possible Causes
(R4) RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 CIRCUIT OR (R2) RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 CIRCUIT
SHORTED TO BATTERY
ORC
Diagnostic Test

test.
be disconnected.
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 5

intact uncoupled curtain airbag face down on a hard surface, the
SQUIB 1 CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 3
3. CHECK (R4) RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 CIRCUIT AND (R2) RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2
CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO BATTERY
Airbag connector.
Measure the voltage of the (R4) Right Curtain Squib 1 Line 1 circuit
between the Right Side Curtain Airbag connector and ground.
Measure the voltage of the (R2) Right Curtain Squib 1 Line 2 circuit
between the Right Side Curtain Airbag connector and ground.
Yes >> Repair the Right Curtain Squib 1 circuits with voltage present for a short to battery.
No >> Go to 4
4. REPLACE THE ORC

be disconnected.
Repair
5. STORED ORC DTC

No >> No problem found at this time. Erase all codes before returning vehicle to customer
B1B22-RIGHT SIDE CURTAIN SQUIB 1 CIRCUIT OPEN

When Monitored:
Squib 1 circuits.
Set Condition:
When the ORC has detects an open or high resistance on the Right Curtain Squib 1 circuits.
Possible Causes
(R4) RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 CIRCUIT OPEN

(R2) RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 CIRCUIT OPEN
ORC
Diagnostic Test

test.
be disconnected.
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 6
2. CHECK FOR OPEN SQUIB CIRCUITS IN RIGHT SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG

SQUIB 1 CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes >> Go to 3
3. CHECK (R4) RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Airbag connector.
between the Right Side Curtain Airbag connector and the 8443 ORC
Adaptor.
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Repair the (R4) Right Curtain Squib 1 Line 1 circuit for an
open. Then, Go To 4
4. CHECK (R2) RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

between the Right Side Curtain Airbag connector and the 8443 ORC
Adaptor.
Yes >> Go To 5
No >> Repair the (R2) Right Curtain Squib 1 Line 2 circuit for an
open.
5. REPLACE THE ORC

be disconnected.
Repair
6. STORED ORC DTC

B1B23-RIGHT SIDE CURTAIN SQUIB 1 CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER

When Monitored:
Squib 1 circuits.
Set Condition:
The ORC has detected low resistance between the Right Curtain Squib 1 circuits.
Possible Causes
(R4) RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (R2) RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2
CIRCUIT
ORC
Diagnostic Test

test.
be disconnected.
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 5

SQUIB 1 CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER?
Yes >> Go to 3
3. CHECK (R4) RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO (R2) RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1
LINE 2 CIRCUIT
Airbag connector.
Measure the resistance between the (R4) Right Curtain Squib 1 Line 1
circuit and the (R2) Right Curtain Squib 1 Line 2 circuit at the Right
Side Curtain Airbag connector.
Yes >> Repair the (R4) Right Curtain Squib 1 Line 1 circuit for a
short to the (R2) Right Curtain Squib 1 Line 2 circuit.
No >> Go to 4
4. REPLACE THE ORC

be disconnected.
Repair
5. STORED ORC DTC

B1B28-1st ROW DRIVER SEAT BELT PRETENSIONER CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
With the ignition on, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the resistance of the Driver Seat Belt
Tensioner circuits.
Set Condition:
The ORC has detected low resistance on the Driver Seat Belt Tensioner circuits.
Possible Causes
(R55) DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 CIRCUIT OR (R53) DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 2
CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
DRIVER SEAT BELT PRETENSIONER
ORC
Diagnostic Test

test.
be disconnected.
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 5
2. CHECK FOR SHORTED DRIVER SEAT BELT PRETENSIONER

Disconnect the Driver Seat Belt Pretensioner connector.
Connect the 8443 Load Tool and appropriate Jumper to the Driver Seat
Belt Pretensioner connector.
Does the scan tool display: B1B28 1st ROW DRIVER SEAT
BELT PRETENSIONER CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Replace the Driver Seat Belt Pretensioner in accordance
with the Service Information.
3. CHECK (R55) DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 CIRCUIT AND (R53) DRIVER SEAT BELT
TENSIONER LINE 2 CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect the 8443 Load Tool and Jumper from the Driver Seat Belt
Pretensioner connector.
Measure the resistance of the (R55) Driver Seat Belt Tensioner Line 1
circuit between ground and the Driver Seat Belt Pretensioner connector.
circuit between ground and the Driver Seat Belt Pretensioner connector.
Yes >> Repair the Driver Seat Belt Tensioner circuits with a resis-
tance below 10K ohms for a short to ground.
No >> Go To 4
4. REPLACE THE ORC

be disconnected.
Repair
5. STORED ORC DTC

B1B29-1ST ROW DRIVER SEAT BELT PRETENSIONER CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
With the ignition on, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the voltage on the Driver Seat Belt
Tensioner circuits.
Set Condition:
The ORC detects voltage on the Driver Seat Belt Tensioner circuits.
Possible Causes
CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY
ORC
Diagnostic Test

test.
be disconnected.
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 5

Does the scan tool display: B1B29 1st ROW DRIVER SEAT
BELT PRETENSIONER CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 3
3. CHECK (R55) DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 CIRCUIT AND (R53) DRIVER SEAT BELT
TENSIONER LINE 2 CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO BATTERY
Measure the voltage of the (R55) Driver Seat Belt Tensioner Line 1 cir-
cuit between the Driver Seat Belt Pretensioner connector and ground.
Measure the voltage of the (R53) Driver Seat Belt Tensioner Line 2 cir-
cuit between the Driver Seat Belt Pretensioner connector and ground.
Yes >> Repair the Driver Seat Belt Tensioner circuits with voltage
present for a short to battery.
No >> Go To 4
4. REPLACE THE ORC

be disconnected.
Repair
5. STORED ORC DTC

B1B2A-1st ROW DRIVER SEAT BELT PRETENSIONER CIRCUIT OPEN

When Monitored:
Tensioner circuits.
Set Condition:
The ORC has detected an open or high resistance on the Driver Seat Belt Tensioner circuits.
Possible Causes
CIRCUIT OPEN
ORC
Diagnostic Test

test.
be disconnected.
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 6
2. CHECK FOR OPEN DRIVER SEAT BELT PRETENSIONER

Does the scan tool display: B1B2A 1st ROW DRIVER SEAT
BELT PRETENSIONER CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes >> Go To 3
3. CHECK (R55) DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
circuit between the Driver Seat Belt Pretensioner connector and the
8443 ORC Adaptor.
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Repair the (R55) Driver Seat Belt Tensioner Line 1 circuit
for and open. Then Go To 4
4. CHECK (R53) DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 2 CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
circuit between the Driver Seat Belt Pretensioner connector and the
8443 ORC Adaptor.
Yes >> Go To 5
No >> Repair the (R53) Driver Seat Belt Tensioner Line 2 circuit
for and open.
5. REPLACE THE ORC

be disconnected.
Repair
Replace the ORC in accordance with Service Information.
6. STORED ORC DTC

WARNING: TO AVOID PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH, TURN THE IGNITION OFF, DISCONNECT THE BAT-
TERY AND WAIT TWO MINUTES BEFORE PROCEEDING.
WARNING: TO AVOID PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH, TURN THE IGNITION ON, THEN RECONNECT THE
BATTERY.
B1B2B-1st ROW DRIVER SEAT BELT PRETENSIONER CIRCUIT SHORTED

TOGETHER
When Monitored:
Tensioner circuits.
Set Condition:
The ORC has detected low resistance between the Driver Seat Belt Tensioner circuits.
Possible Causes
(R55) DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (R53) DRIVER SEAT BELT
TENSIONER LINE 2 CIRCUIT
ORC
Diagnostic Test
1. SELECT ACTIVE OR STORED DTC

test.
be disconnected.
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 5

Disconnect the Driver Seatbelt Pretensioner connector.
WARNING: To avoid personal injury or death, turn the ignition on
Does the scan tool display: B1B2B 1st ROW DRIVER SEAT
BELT PRETENSIONER CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER?
Yes >> Go To 3
3. CHECK (R55) DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO (R53) DRIVER SEAT
BELT TENSIONER LINE 2 CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (R55) Driver Seat Belt Tensioner
Line 1 circuit and the (R53) Driver Seat Belt Tensioner Line 2 circuit at
the Driver Seat Belt Pretensioner connector.
Yes >> Repair the (R55) Driver Seat Belt Tensioner Line 1 circuit
for a short to the (R53) Driver Seat Belt Tensioner Line 2
circuit.
No >> Go To 4
4. REPLACE THE ORC

be disconnected.
Repair
5. STORED ORC DTC

B1B2C-1st ROW PASSENGER SEAT BELT PRETENSIONER CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
With the ignition on, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the resistance of the Passenger Seat
Belt Tensioner circuits.
Set Condition:
The ORC has detected low resistance on the Passenger Seat Belt Tensioner circuits.
Possible Causes
(R56) PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 CIRCUIT OR (R54) PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER
LINE 2 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
PASSENGER SEAT BELT PRETENSIONER
ORC
Diagnostic Test

test.
be disconnected.
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 5
2. CHECK FOR SHORTED PASSENGER SEAT BELT PRETENSIONER

Disconnect the Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioner connector.
Connect the 8443 Load Tool and appropriate Jumper to the Passenger
Seat Belt Pretensioner connector.
Does the scan tool display: B1B2C 1st ROW PASSENGER
SEAT BELT PRETENSIONER CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Replace the Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioner in accor-
3. CHECK (R56) PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 CIRCUIT AND (R54) PASSENGER SEAT
BELT TENSIONER LINE 2 CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect the 8443 Load Tool and Jumper from the Passenger Seat
Measure the resistance of the (R56) Passenger Seat Belt Tensioner
Line 1 circuit between ground and the Passenger Seat Belt Preten-
sioner connector.
Line 2 circuit between ground and the Passenger Seat Belt Preten-
sioner connector.
Yes >> Repair the Passenger Seat Belt Tensioner circuits with a resistance below 10k ohms for a short to
ground.
No >> Go To 4
4. REPLACE THE ORC

be disconnected.
Repair
5. STORED ORC DTC

B1B2D-1st ROW PASSENGER SEAT BELT PRETENSIONER CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
With the ignition on, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the voltage on the Passenger Seat Belt
Tensioner circuits.
Set Condition:
The ORC detects voltage on the Passenger Seat Belt Tensioner circuits.
Possible Causes
LINE 2 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY
ORC
Diagnostic Test

test.
be disconnected.
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 5

Does the scan tool display: B1B2D 1st ROW PASSENGER
SEAT BELT TENSIONER CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 3
3. CHECK (R56) PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 CIRCUIT AND (R54) PASSENGER SEAT
BELT TENSIONER LINE 2 CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO BATTERY
Measure the voltage of the (R56) Passenger Seat Belt Tensioner Line 1
circuit between the Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioner connector and
ground.
Measure the voltage of the (R54) Passenger Seat Belt Tensioner Line 2
circuit between the Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioner connector and ground.
Yes >> Repair the Passenger Seat Belt Tensioner circuits with voltage present for a short to battery.
No >> Go To 4
4. OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER

be disconnected.
Repair
5. STORED ORC DTC

No >> No problem found at this time. Erase all codes before returning vehicle to customer
B1B2E-1st ROW PASSENGER SEAT BELT PRETENSIONER CIRCUIT OPEN

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The ORC has detected an open or high resistance on the Passenger Seat Belt Tensioner circuits.
Possible Causes
LINE 2 CIRCUIT OPEN
ORC
Diagnostic Test

test.
be disconnected.
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 6
2. CHECK FOR OPEN PASSENGER SEAT BELT PRETENSIONER

Does the scan tool display: B1B2E 1st ROW PASSENGER
SEAT BELT PRETENSIONER CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes >> Go To 3
3. CHECK (R56) PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Line 1 circuit between the Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioner connector
and the 8443 ORC Adaptor.
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Repair the (R56) Passenger Seat Belt Tensioner Line 1 cir-
cuit for an open. Then Go To 4
4. CHECK (R54) PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 2 CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Line 2 circuit between the Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioner connector
and the 8443 ORC Adaptor.
Yes >> Go to 5
No >> Repair the (R54) Passenger Seat Belt Tensioner Line 2 cir-
cuit for an open.
5. REPLACE THE ORC

be disconnected.
Repair
Replace the ORC in accordance with Service Information.
6. STORED ORC DTC

B1B2F-1st ROW PASSENGER SEAT BELT PRETENSIONER CIRCUIT SHORTED

TOGETHER
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The ORC has detected low resistance between the Passenger Seat Belt Tensioner circuits.
Possible Causes
(R56) PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (R54) PASSENGER SEAT BELT
TENSIONER LINE 2 CIRCUIT
ORC
Diagnostic Test

test.
be disconnected.
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 5

WARNING: To avoid personal injury or death, turn the ignition on
Does the scan tool display: B1B2F 1st ROW PASSENGER
SEAT BELT PRETENSIONER CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER?
Yes >> Go To 3
3. CHECK (R56) PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (R54)
PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 2 CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (R56) Passenger Seat Belt Ten-
sioner Line 1 circuit and the (R54) Passenger Seat Belt Tensioner Line
2 circuit at the Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioner connector.
Yes >> Repair the (R56) Passenger Seat Belt Tensioner Line 1 cir-
cuit for a short to the (R54) Passenger Seat Belt Tensioner
Line 2 circuit.
No >> Go to 4
4. REPLACE THE ORC

be disconnected.
Repair
5. STORED ORC DTC

B1B70-UP-FRONT LEFT SATELLITE ACCELERATION SENSOR INTERNAL

When Monitored:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) continuously communicates with the Front Left Impact Sensor over
the sensor signal circuit. The sensor communication and on board diagnostics are powered by the ORC signal.
Set Condition:
This code will set, if the ORC and the Front Left Impact Sensor do not establish and maintain valid data com-
munications.
Possible Causes
(R79) SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY

(R79) SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(R79, R81) FRONT LEFT IMPACT SENSOR CIRCUITS SHORTED TOGETHER
(R81) FRONT LEFT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
(R79) FRONT LEFT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
ORC, FRONT LEFT IMPACT SENSOR
Diagnostic Test
1. VERIFY THAT DTC B1B70-UP-FRONT LEFT SATELLITE ACCELERATION SENSOR INTERNAL IS ACTIVE
be disconnected.
Does the scan tool display active: B1B70-UP-FRONT LEFT SATELLITE ACCELERATION SENSOR INTER-
NAL?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Go To 9
2. CHECK THE (R79, R81) FRONT LEFT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL AND GROUND CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT
TO BATTERY
Disconnect the Front Left Impact Sensor connector.
Disconnect the ORC connector.
Measure the voltage of the (R79) Front Left Impact Sensor Signal cir-
cuit and (R81) Sensor Ground circuit at the Front Left Impact Sensor
connector and ground.
Yes >> Repair the (R79, R81) Front Left Impact Sensor circuits for
a short to battery.
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK THE (R79) FRONT LEFT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance of the (R79) Front Left Impact Sensor Signal
circuit between the Front Left Impact Sensor connector and ground.
Yes >> Repair the (R79) Front Left Impact Sensor Signal circuit for
a short to ground.
No >> Go To 4
4. CHECK THE (R79, R81) FRONT LEFT IMPACT SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
Measure the resistance between the (R79) Front Left Impact Sensor
Signal and (R81) Sensor Ground circuits at the Front Left Impact Sen-
sor connector.
Yes >> Repair the (R79, R81) Front Left Impact Sensor circuits
shorted together.
No >> Go To 5
5. CHECK THE (R81) FRONT LEFT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR HIGH
RESISTANCE
Connect the 8443 Load Tool ORC Adaptor to the Occupant Restraint
Control Module connector.
Measure the resistance of the (R81) Front Left Impact Sensor Ground
circuit between the Front Left Impact Sensor connector and the 8443
Load Tool ORC Adaptor.
Is the resistance below 1 ohm?
Yes >> Go To 6
No >> Repair the (R81) Front Left Impact Sensor 1 Ground circuit
for an open or high resistance.
6. CHECK THE (R79) FRONT LEFT IMPACT SENSOR CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE
Yes >> Go To 7
No >> Repair the (R79) Front Left Impact Sensor Signal circuit for
7. CHECK OPERATION OF THE FRONT LEFT IMPACT SENSOR

Replace the Front Left Impact Sensor.
Reconnect the vehicle body harness to the impact sensor.
Remove any special tools or jumper wires and reconnect all previously disconnected components - except the Bat-
tery.
Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector - use the most current software available.
Use the scan tool and erase the stored codes in all airbag system modules.
Turn the Ignition Off, and wait 15 seconds before turning the Ignition On.
Wait one minute, and read active codes and if there are none present read the stored codes.
Did the active Front Left Impact Sensor DTC return?
Yes >> Go To 8
8. REPLACE THE OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER

WARNING: If the airbag control module is dropped at any time, it must be replaced. Failure to take the
proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and personal injury or death.
Repair
Replace the Occupant Restraint Controller in accordance with Service Information.
9. TEST FOR AN INTERMITTENT CONDITION

following steps.
Yes >> Select the appropriate symptom from Symptom List.
B1B71-UP-FRONT RIGHT SATELLITE ACCELERATION SENSOR INTERNAL

When Monitored:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) continuously communicates with the Front Right Impact Sensor over
Set Condition:
This code will set, if the ORC and the Front Right Impact Sensor do not establish and maintain valid data
communications.
Possible Causes

(R80, R82) FRONT RIGHT IMPACT SENSOR CIRCUITS SHORTED TOGETHER
(R82) FRONT RIGHT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
(R80) FRONT RIGHT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
ORC, FRONT RIGHT IMPACT SENSOR
Diagnostic Test
1. VERIFY THAT DTC B1B71-UP-FRONT RIGHT SATELLITE ACCELERATION SENSOR INTERNAL IS

ACTIVE
be disconnected.
Does the scan tool display active: B1B71-UP-FRONT RIGHT SATELLITE ACCELERATION SENSOR
INTERNAL?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Go To 9
2. CHECK THE (R80, R82) FRONT RIGHT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL AND GROUND CIRCUITS FOR A
SHORT TO BATTERY
Disconnect the Front Right Impact Sensor connector.
Measure the voltage of the (R80) Front Right Impact Sensor Signal cir-
cuit and (R82) Sensor Ground circuit at the Front Right Impact Sensor
Yes >> Repair the (R80, R82) Front Right Impact Sensor circuits
for a short to battery.
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK THE (R80) FRONT RIGHT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
WARNING: To avoid personal injury or death, turn ignition on, then
reconnect the battery.
Measure the resistance of the (R80) Front Right Impact Sensor Signal
circuit between the Front Right Impact Sensor connector and ground.
Yes >> Repair the (R80) Front Right Impact Sensor Signal circuit
No >> Go To 4
4. CHECK THE (R80, R82) FRONT RIGHT IMPACT SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
Measure the resistance between the (R80) Front Right Impact Sensor
Signal and (R82) Sensor Ground circuits at the Front Right Impact Sen-
sor connector.
shorted together.
No >> Go To 5
5. CHECK THE (R82) FRONT RIGHT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR HIGH
RESISTANCE
Connect the 8443 Load Tool ORC Adaptor to the Occupant Control
Module connector.
Measure the resistance of the (R82) Front Right Impact Sensor Ground
circuit between the Front Right Impact Sensor connector and the 8443
Yes >> Go To 6
No >> Repair the (R82) Front Right Impact Sensor 2 Ground cir-
cuit for an open or high resistance.
6. CHECK THE (R80) FRONT RIGHT IMPACT SENSOR CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE
Yes >> Go To 7
No >> Repair the (R80) Front Right Impact Sensor Signal circuit
7. CHECK OPERATION OF THE FRONT RIGHT IMPACT SENSOR

Replace the Front Right Impact Sensor.
tery.
Did the active Front Right Impact Sensor DTC return?
Yes >> Go To 8

Repair
Replace the Occupant Restraint Controller in accordance with Service Instructions.

following steps.
B1B72-LEFT SIDE SATELLITE ACCELERATION SENSOR 1 INTERNAL

When Monitored:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) continuously communicates with the Left Side Impact Sensor 1 over
Set Condition:
This code will set, if the ORC and the Left Side Impact Sensor 1 do not establish and maintain valid data
communications.
Possible Causes

(R13, R15) LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 CIRCUITS SHORTED TOGETHER
(R15) LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
(R13) LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
ORC, LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1
Diagnostic Test
1. VERIFY THAT DTC B1B72-LEFT SIDE SATELLITE ACCELERATION SENSOR 1 INTERNAL 1 IS ACTIVE
be disconnected.
Does the scan tool display active: B1B72-LEFT SIDE SATELLITE ACCELERATION SENSOR 1 INTER-
NAL?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Go To 9
2. CHECK THE (R13, R15) LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL AND GROUND CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT
TO BATTERY
Disconnect the Left Side Impact Sensor 1 connector.
Measure the voltage of the (R13) Left Side Impact Sensor 1 Signal cir-
cuit and (R15) Sensor Ground circuit at the Left Side Impact Sensor 1
Yes >> Repair the (R13, R15) Left Side Impact Sensor 1 circuits
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK THE (R13) LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance of the (R13) Left Side Impact Sensor 1 Signal
circuit between the Left Side Impact Sensor 1 connector and ground.
Yes >> Repair the (R13) Left Side Impact Sensor 1 Signal circuit
No >> Go To 4
4. CHECK THE (R13, R15) LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
Measure the resistance between the (R13) Left Side Impact Sensor 1
Signal and (R15) Sensor Ground circuits at the Left Side Impact Sensor
1 connector.
shorted together.
No >> Go To 5
5. CHECK THE (R15) LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR HIGH
RESISTANCE
Module connector.
Measure the resistance of the (R15) Left Side Impact Sensor 1 Ground
circuit between the Left Side Impact Sensor 1 connector and the 8443
Yes >> Go To 6
No >> Repair the (R15) Left Side Impact Sensor 1 Ground circuit
6. CHECK THE (R13) LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE
Yes >> Go To 7
No >> Repair the (R13) Left Side Impact Sensor 1 Signal circuit
7. CHECK OPERATION OF THE LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1

Replace the Left Side Impact Sensor 1.
tery.
Did the active Left Side Impact Sensor 1 DTC return?
Yes >> Go To 8

Repair

following steps.
B1B73-LEFT SIDE SATELLITE ACCELERATION SENSOR 2 INTERNAL

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
communications.
Possible Causes

Diagnostic Test
1. VERIFY THAT DTC B1B73-LEFT SIDE SATELLITE ACCELERATION SENSOR 2 INTERNAL IS ACTIVE
be disconnected.
Does the scan tool display active: B1B73-LEFT SIDE SATELLITE ACCELERATION SENSOR 2 INTER-
NAL?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Go To 9
TO BATTERY
No >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 4
4. CHECK THE (R17, R19) LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
2 connector.
shorted together.
No >> Go To 5
RESISTANCE
Module connector.
Yes >> Go To 6
Yes >> Go To 7

tery.
Yes >> Go To 8

Repair

following steps.
B1B75-RIGHT SIDE SATELLITE ACCELERATION SENSOR 1 INTERNAL

When Monitored:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) continuously communicates with the Right Side Impact Sensor 1
over the sensor signal circuit. The sensor communication and on board diagnostics are powered by the ORC
signal.
Set Condition:
This code will set, if the ORC and the Right Side Impact Sensor 1 do not establish and maintain valid data
communications.
Possible Causes

(R14, R16) RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 CIRCUITS SHORTED TOGETHER
(R16) RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
(R14) RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
ORC, RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1
Diagnostic Test
1. VERIFY THAT DTC B1B75-RIGHT SIDE SATELLITE ACCELERATION SENSOR 1 INTERNAL

be disconnected.
Does the scan tool display active: B1B75-RIGHT SIDE SATELLITE ACCELERATION SENSOR 1 INTER-
NAL?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Go To 9
2. CHECK THE (R14, R16) RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL AND GROUND CIRCUITS FOR A
SHORT TO BATTERY
Disconnect the Right Side Impact Sensor 1 connector.
Measure the voltage of the (R14) Right Side Impact Sensor 1 Signal
circuit and (R16) Sensor Ground circuit at the Right Side Impact Sensor
1 connector and ground.
Yes >> Repair the (R14, R16) Right Side Impact Sensor 1 circuits
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK THE (R14) RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance of the (R14) Right Side Impact Sensor 1 Signal
circuit between the Right Side Impact Sensor 1 connector and ground.
Yes >> Repair the (R14) Right Side Impact Sensor 1 Signal circuit
No >> Go To 4
4. CHECK THE (R14, R16) RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
Measure the resistance between the (R14) Right Side Impact Sensor 1
Signal and (R16) Sensor Ground circuits at the Right Side Impact Sen-
sor 1 connector.
shorted together.
No >> Go To 5
5. CHECK THE (R16) RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR HIGH
RESISTANCE
Module connector.
Measure the resistance of the (R16) Right Side Impact Sensor 1
Ground circuit between the Right Side Impact Sensor 1 connector and
the 8443 Load Tool ORC Adaptor.
Yes >> Go To 6
No >> Repair the (R16) Right Side Impact Sensor 1 Ground circuit
6. CHECK THE (R14) RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE
circuit between the Right Side Impact Sensor 1 connector and the 8443
Yes >> Go To 7
No >> Repair the (R14) Right Side Impact Sensor 1 Signal circuit
7. CHECK OPERATION OF THE RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1

Replace the Right Side Impact Sensor 1.
tery.
Did the active Right Side Impact Sensor 1 DTC return?
Yes >> Go To 8

Repair

following steps.
B1B76-RIGHT SIDE SATELLITE ACCELERATION SENSOR 2 INTERNAL

When Monitored:
signal.
Set Condition:
communications.
Possible Causes

Diagnostic Test
1. VERIFY ACTIVE B1B76-RIGHT SIDE SATELLITE ACCELERATION SENSOR 2 INTERNAL

be disconnected.
Does the scan tool display an active: B1B76-RIGHT SIDE SATELLITE ACCELERATION SENSOR 2
INTERNAL?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Go To 9
SHORT TO BATTERY
No >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 4
4. CHECK THE (R18, R20) RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
sor 2 connector.
shorted together.
No >> Go To 5
RESISTANCE
Controller C2 connector.
Yes >> Go To 6
Yes >> Go To 7

tery.
Yes >> Go To 8

Repair

following steps.
B1B78-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 3 - LEFT FRONT PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
When CAN ignitions status is Run or SNA, during auto zero and while performing the Occupant Classification
Module System Verification Test.
Set Condition:
During the occupant classification verification test: if the module detects that the sensor input is less than 1.4
volts or greater than 3.6 volts. During auto zero: if the module detects that the sensor input is less than 1 volt
or greater than 4 volts.
Possible Causes
PASSENGER SEAT HARNESS WIRES CHAFED, PIERCED, PINCHED, PARTIALLY BROKEN

PASSENGER SEAT HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINALS BROKEN, BENT PUSHED OUT, SPREAD,
CORRODED, CONTAMINATED
LEFT-FRONT PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR
DAMAGE TO THE PASSENGER SEAT STRUCTURE, RISER ASSEMBLY, CROSSMEMBERS, SEAT TRACKS,
FLOOR PAN
OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE (OCM)
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE INTERNAL FAULTS, IGNITION FAULTS, AND BATTERY FAULTS IN THE OCCUPANT
CLASSIFICATION MODULE (OCM)
be disconnected.
With the scan tool, read Occupant Classification Module (OCM) DTCs.
Does the scan tool display any active DTCs relating to internal faults, ignition faults, or battery faults?
Yes >> Diagnose and repair the DTCs. Refer to the Table of Contents in this Section for a complete list of
symptoms.
No >> Go To 2
2. VERIFY THAT DTC B1B78-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 3 - LEFT FRONT PERFORMANCE IS
ACTIVE
With the scan tool, read OCM DTCs.
Does the scan tool display active: B1B78-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 3 - LEFT FRONT PER-
FORMANCE?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 5
3. INSPECT PASSENGER SEAT HARNESS WIRES AND CONNECTORS

Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the Passenger Seat Harness wiring and connectors. Look
for chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires and broken, bent, pushed out, spread, corroded, or contam-
inated terminals.
Are any of these conditions present?
Yes >>
Replace the Passenger Seat Harness in accordance with the Service Information.
No >> Go To 4
4. PERFORM OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST

Verify that all of the Seat Weight Sensor mounting screws are torqued to specification. Refer to 23 - BODY/SEATS.
NOTE: Failure to follow test instructions or aborting the test will cause faults to set when performing the
Occupant Classification Module System Verification Test. To prevent faults due to process errors: Verify
That All Tests Steps That Led You Here Were Performed As Directed; Verify That The Ignition Is In Run; Wait
30 Seconds After Changing The Seat Weight Before Proceeding To Allow The System To Stabilize; Only
Press Scan Tool Buttons When Directed To Do So; and Perform The Occupant Classification Module System
Verification Test To Completion.
With the scan tool in OCM, select More Options, select System Tests, and select Occupant Classification Module
System Verification Test. Run the test by following the instructions displayed on the scan tool. When the test is
complete, wait two minutes, and then proceed as follows.
Does the scan tool display any active PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR PERFORMANCE DTCs?
Yes >> Perform the *Diagnosis/Checkout Procedure For Seat Weight Sensors.
No - But Other DTCs Present
Diagnose and repair the DTCs. Refer to the Table of Contents in this Section for a complete list of
symptoms.
No Active DTCs Present

following steps.
tion.
Yes >> Select appropriate symptom from Symptom List.
B1B79-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 3 - LEFT FRONT INPUT CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
While the CAN bus ignition status is in IGN_RUN, the module checks the sensor input ranges.
Set Condition:
If the module detects that the sensor input is less than 3.4 .6% of the (R701) Seat Weight Sensor 5 Volt
circuit voltage. This DTC will also set if the (R701) Seat Weight Sensor 5 Volt circuit is shorted to ground.
However, this condition would prevent communication with the OCM and cause a Lost Communication With
OCM DTC to set in other modules.
Possible Causes
PASSENGER SEAT HARNESS IMPROPERLY ROUTED

(R717) LT-FT SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(R717) LT-FT SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
(R701) SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 5 VOLT CIRCUIT OPEN
LEFT-FRONT SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR
Diagnostic Test
be disconnected.
symptoms.
No >> Go To 2
2. VERIFY THAT DTC B1B79PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 3 - LEFT FRONT INPUT CIRCUIT LOW
IS ACTIVE
Does the scan tool display active: B1B79PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 3 - LEFT FRONT INPUT
CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 10

inated terminals.
Yes >>
No >> Go To 4
4. VERIFY THAT PASSENGER SEAT HARNESS IS ROUTED CORRECTLY

Verify that the Passenger Seat Harness is routed correctly.
Is the Passenger Seat Harness routed correctly?
Yes >> Go To 5
No >> Reroute the Passenger Seat Harness as necessary. Then, Go To 5
5. CHECK IF MORE THAN ONE PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR DTC IS ACTIVE
Does the scan tool display any active PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR DTCs?
Yes - More Than One PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR DTC Is Active.
Perform the Diagnosis/Checkout Procedure For Seat Weight Sensors.
Perform OCS VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1
Yes - Only DTC B1B79 Is Active.
Go To 6
No - But Other DTCs Present.
symptoms.
No - No Active DTCs Present.
6. CHECK VOLTAGE OF (R701) SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 5 VOLT CIRCUIT

Disconnect the Left-Front Seat Weight Sensor connector.
Measure the voltage of the (R701) Seat Weight Sensor 5 Volt circuit.
Yes >> Go To 7
No >> Go To 9
7. CHECK (R717) LT-FT SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance of the (R717) LT-FT Seat Weight Sensor Signal
circuit between ground and the OCM C2 connector.
Yes >>
NOTE: Do not attempt to repair the Seat Harness. Replace the Seat
Harness if the condition inspecting or testing for is present in the
Seat Harness.
Replace the Passenger Seat Harness in accordance with
No >> Go To 8
8. CHECK (R717) LT-FT SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (R717) LT-FT Seat Weight Sensor Signal
circuit between the OCM C2 connector and the Left-Front Seat Weight
Sensor connector.
Yes >> Replace the Left-Front Seat Weight Sensor in accordance
with the Service Information. Perform OCS VERIFICATION
TEST - VER 1. If DTC B1B79PASSENGER SEAT
WEIGHT SENSOR 3 - LEFT FRONT INPUT CIRCUIT LOW
returns active, replace the OCM in accordance with the
No >>
Seat Harness.
Replace the Passenger Seat Harness in accordance with
9. CHECK (R701) SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 5 VOLT CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (R701) Seat Weight Sensor 5 Volt circuit
between the OCM C2 connector and the Left-Front Seat Weight Sensor
connector.
Yes >> Replace the OCM in accordance with the Service Informa-
tion.
No >>
Seat Harness.
Replace the Passenger Seat Harness in accordance with the

following steps.
tion.
B1B7A-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 3 - LEFT FRONT INPUT CIRCUIT

HIGH
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If the module detects that the sensor input is greater than 96 0.6% of the (R701) Seat Weight Sensor 5 Volt
circuit voltage.
Possible Causes

(R717) LT-FT SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
(R717) LT-FT SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (R701) SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 5
VOLT CIRCUIT
(R728) SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
LEFT-FRONT SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR
Diagnostic Test
be disconnected.
symptoms.
No >> Go To 2
2. VERIFY THAT DTC B1B7APASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 3 - LEFT FRONT INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH
IS ACTIVE
Does the scan tool display active: B1B7APASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 3 - LEFT FRONT INPUT
CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 9

inated terminals.
Yes >>
No >> Go To 4

Yes >> Go To 5
No >> Reroute the Passenger Seat Harness as necessary.
Yes - More Than One PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR DTC Is Active
Perform the *Diagnosis/Checkout Procedure For Seat Weight Sensors.
Yes - Only DTC B1B7A Is Active
Go To 6
symptoms.
No - No Active DTCs Present
6. CHECK (R717) LT-FT SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Measure the voltage of the (R717) LT-FT Seat Weight Sensor Signal cir-
cuit.
Yes >>
Seat Harness.
No >> Go To 7
7. CHECK (R717) LT-FT SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO (R701) SEAT WEIGHT
SENSOR 5 VOLT CIRCUIT
Disconnect the Left-Front Seat Weight Sensor connector.
Measure the resistance between the (R717) LT-FT Seat Weight Sensor
Signal circuit and the (R701) Seat Weight Sensor 5 Volt circuit.
Yes >>
Seat Harness.
No >> Go To 8
8. CHECK (R728) SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (R728) Seat Weight Sensor Ground circuit
between the OCM C2 connector and the Left-Front Seat Weight Sensor
connector.
tion.
No >>
Seat Harness.

following steps.
tion.
B1B7D-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 2 - RIGHT FRONT PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes

RIGHT-FRONT PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR
FLOOR PAN
Diagnostic Test
be disconnected.
symptoms.
No >> Go To 2
2. VERIFY THAT DTC B1B7DPASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 2 - RIGHT FRONT PERFORMANCE IS
ACTIVE
Does the scan tool display active: B1B7DPASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 2 - RIGHT FRONT PER-
FORMANCE?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 5

inated terminals.
Yes >>
No >> Go To 4

No, But Other DTCs Present
symptoms.

following steps.
tion.
B1B7E-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 2 - RIGHT FRONT INPUT CIRCUIT

LOW
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If the module detects that the sensor input is less than 3.4 0.6% of the (R701) Seat Weight Sensor 5 Volt
Possible Causes

(R718) RT-FT SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(R718) RT-FT SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
RIGHT-FRONT SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR
Diagnostic Test
be disconnected.
symptoms.
No >> Go To 2
2. VERIFY THAT DTC B1B7E-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 2 - RIGHT FRONT INPUT CIRCUIT LOW
IS ACTIVE
Does the scan tool display active: B1B7EPASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 2 - RIGHT FRONT
INPUT CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 10

inated terminals.
Yes >>
No >> Go To 4

Yes >> Go To 5
No >> Reroute the Passenger Seat Harness as necessary. Then, Go To 5
Yes - Only DTC B1B7E Is Active
Go To 6
symptoms.

Disconnect the Right-Front Seat Weight Sensor connector.
Yes >> Go To 7
No >> Go To 9
7. CHECK (R718) RT-FT SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance of the (R718) RT-FT Seat Weight Sensor Signal
Yes >>
Seat Harness.
No >> Go To 8
8. CHECK (R718) RT-FT SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (R718) RT-FT Seat Weight Sensor Signal
circuit between the OCM C2 connector and the Right-Front Seat Weight
Sensor connector.
Yes >> Replace the Right-Front Seat Weight Sensor in accordance
TEST - VER 1. If DTC B1B7E-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT
SENSOR 2 - RIGHT FRONT INPUT CIRCUIT LOW returns
active, replace the OCM in accordance with the Service
Information.
No >>
Seat Harness.

between the OCM C2 connector and the Right-Front Seat Weight Sen-
sor connector.
tion.
No >>
Seat Harness.

following steps.
tion.
B1B7F-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 2 - RIGHT FRONT INPUT CIRCUIT

HIGH
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
circuit voltage.
Possible Causes

(R718) RT-FT SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
(R718) RT-FT SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (R701) SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 5
VOLT CIRCUIT
RIGHT-FRONT SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR
Diagnostic Test
be disconnected.
symptoms.
No >> Go To 2
2. VERIFY THAT DTC B1B7FPASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 2 - RIGHT FRONT INPUT CIRCUIT
HIGH IS ACTIVE
Does the scan tool display active: B1B7FPASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 2 - RIGHT FRONT
INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 9

inated terminals.
Yes >>
No >> Go To 4

Yes >> Go To 5
Yes, More Than One PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR DTC Is Active
Yes, Only DTC B1B7F Is Active
Go To 6
symptoms.
6. CHECK (R718) RT-FT SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Measure the voltage of the (R718) RT-FT Seat Weight Sensor Signal cir-
cuit.
Yes >>
Seat Harness.
No >> Go To 7
7. CHECK (R718) RT-FT SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO (R701) SEAT WEIGHT
Disconnect the Right-Front Seat Weight Sensor connector.
Measure the resistance between the (R718) RT-FT Seat Weight Sensor
Yes >>
Seat Harness.
No >> Go To 8

between the OCM C2 connector and the Right-Front Seat Weight Sen-
sor connector.
tion.
No >>
Seat Harness.

following steps.
tion.
B1B82-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 4 - LEFT REAR PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes

LEFT-REAR PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR
FLOOR PAN
Diagnostic Test
be disconnected.
symptoms.
No >> Go To 2
2. VERIFY THAT DTC B1B82PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 4 - LEFT REAR PERFORMANCE IS
ACTIVE
Does the scan tool display active: B1B82PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 4 - LEFT REAR PER-
FORMANCE?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 5

inated terminals.
Yes >>
No >> Go To 4

symptoms.

following steps.
tion.
B1B83-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 4 - LEFT REAR INPUT CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes

(R705) LT-RR SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(R705) LT-RR SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
LEFT-REAR SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR
Diagnostic Test
be disconnected.
symptoms.
No >> Go To 2
2. VERIFY THAT DTC B1B83PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 4 - LEFT REAR INPUT CIRCUIT LOW IS
ACTIVE
Does the scan tool display active: B1B83PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 4 - LEFT REAR INPUT
CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 10

inated terminals.
Yes >>
No >> Go To 4

Yes >> Go To 5
Yes - Only DTC B1B83 Is Active
Go To 6
symptoms.

Disconnect the Left-Rear Seat Weight Sensor connector.
Yes >> Go To 7
No >> Go To 9
7. CHECK (R705) LT-RR SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance of the (R705) LT-RR Seat Weight Sensor Signal
Yes >>
Seat Harness.
No >> Go To 8
8. CHECK (R705) LT-RR SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (R705) LT-RR Seat Weight Sensor Signal
circuit between the OCM C2 connector and the Left-Rear Seat Weight
Sensor connector.
Yes >> Replace the Left-Rear Seat Weight Sensor in accordance
TEST - VER 1. If DTC B1B83-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT
SENSOR 4 - LEFT REAR INPUT CIRCUIT LOW returns
Information.
No >>
Seat Harness.

between the OCM C2 connector and the Left-Rear Seat Weight Sensor
connector.
tion.
No >>
Seat Harness.

following steps.
tion.
B1B84-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 4 - LEFT REAR INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
circuit voltage.
Possible Causes

(R705) LT-RR SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
(R705) LT-RR SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (R701) SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 5
VOLT CIRCUIT
LEFT-REAR SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR
Diagnostic Test
be disconnected.
symptoms.
No >> Go To 2
2. VERIFY THAT DTC B1B84PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 4 - LEFT REAR INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH
IS ACTIVE
Does the scan tool display active: B1B84PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 4 - LEFT REAR INPUT
CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 9

inated terminals.
Yes >>
No >> Go To 4

Yes >> Go To 5
Go To 6
symptoms.
No - Active DTCs Present
6. CHECK (R705) LT-RR SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Measure the voltage of the (R705) LT-RR Seat Weight Sensor Signal cir-
cuit.
Yes >>
Seat Harness.
No >> Go To 7
7. CHECK (R705) LT-RR SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO (R701) SEAT WEIGHT
Disconnect the Left-Rear Seat Weight Sensor connector.
Measure the resistance between the (R705) LT-RR Seat Weight Sensor
Yes >>
Seat Harness.
No >> Go To 8

between the OCM C2 connector and the Left-Rear Seat Weight Sensor
connector.
tion.
No >>
Seat Harness.

following steps.
tion.
B1B87-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 1 - RIGHT REAR PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes

RIGHT-REAR PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR
FLOOR PAN
Diagnostic Test
be disconnected.
symptoms.
No >> Go To 2
2. VERIFY THAT DTC B1B87PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 1 - RIGHT REAR PERFORMANCE IS
ACTIVE
Does the scan tool display active: B1B87PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 1 - RIGHT REAR PER-
FORMANCE?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 5

inated terminals.
Yes >>
No >> Go To 4

symptoms.

following steps.
tion.
B1B88-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 1 - RIGHT REAR INPUT CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes

(R706) RT-RR SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(R706) RT-RR SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
RIGHT-REAR SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR
Diagnostic Test
be disconnected.
symptoms.
No >> Go To 2
2. VERIFY THAT DTC B1B88PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 1 - RIGHT REAR INPUT CIRCUIT LOW
IS ACTIVE
Does the scan tool display active: B1B88PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 1 - RIGHT REAR INPUT
CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 10

inated terminals.
Yes >>
No >> Go To 4

Yes >> Go To 5
Yes, More Than One PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR DTC Is Active
Go To 6
symptoms.

Disconnect the Right-Rear Seat Weight Sensor connector.
Yes >> Go To 7
No >> Go To 9
7. CHECK (R706) RT-RR SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance of the (R706) RT-RR Seat Weight Sensor Signal
Yes >>
Seat Harness.
No >> Go To 8
8. CHECK (R706) RT-RR SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (R706) RT-RR Seat Weight Sensor Signal
circuit between the OCM C2 connector and the Right-Rear Seat Weight
Sensor connector.
Yes >> Replace the Right-Rear Seat Weight Sensor in accordance
TEST - VER 1. If DTC B1B88PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT
SENSOR 1 - RIGHT REAR INPUT CIRCUIT LOW returns
Information.
No >>
Seat Harness.

between the OCM C2 connector and the Right-Rear Seat Weight Sensor
connector.
tion.
No >>
Seat Harness.

following steps.
tion.
B1B89-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 1 - RIGHT REAR INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
circuit voltage.
Possible Causes

(R706) RT-RR SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
(R706) RT-RR SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (R701) SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 5
VOLT CIRCUIT
RIGHT-REAR SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR
Diagnostic Test
be disconnected.
symptoms.
No >> Go To 2
2. VERIFY THAT DTC B1B89PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 1 - RIGHT REAR INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH
IS ACTIVE
Does the scan tool display active: B1B89PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 1 - RIGHT REAR INPUT
CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 9

inated terminals.
Yes >>
No >> Go To 4

Yes >> Go To 5
Go To 6
symptoms.
6. CHECK (R706) RT-RR SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Measure the voltage of the (R706) RT-RR Seat Weight Sensor Signal
circuit.
Yes >>
Seat Harness.
No >> Go To 7
7. CHECK (R706) RT-RR SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO (R701) SEAT WEIGHT
Disconnect the Right-Rear Seat Weight Sensor connector.
Measure the resistance between the (R706) RT-RR Seat Weight Sensor
Yes >>
Seat Harness.
No >> Go To 8

between the OCM C2 connector and the Right-Rear Seat Weight Sensor
connector.
tion.
No >>
Seat Harness.

following steps.
tion.
B1B8C-DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If the module detects that the sensor input is between 8 and 12 mA.
Possible Causes
DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR
1. IDENTIFYING VEHICLE EQUIPMENT

NOTE: The Seat Track Position Sensor(s) will be wired to the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) if the
vehicle is not equipped with the Occupant Classification Module (OCM).
With the scan tool, read ORC and if equipped OCM active DTCs.
Select the module reporting the Seat Track Position Sensor DTC(s)
ORC >> Go To 5
OCM
Go To 2 Diagnostic Test
2. CHECK FOR ACTIVE INTERNAL FAULTS, IGNITION FAULTS, BATTERY FAULTS, OR SEAT TRACK
POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH OR LOW FAULTS IN THE OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE
(OCM)
Does the scan tool display any active DTCs relating to internal faults, ignition faults, battery faults, or
Seat Track Position Sensor Circuit High or Low faults?
symptoms.
No >> Go To 3
3. VERIFY THAT B1B8C-DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE IS ACTIVE
Does the scan tool display active: B1B8C-DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT
PERFORMANCE?
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Go To 8
4. PERFORM SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR PERFORMANCE TEST

With the scan tool, erase OCM DTCs.
Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds and then turn the ignition on.
Cycle the driver seat to the full forward position and then to the full rearward position.
Return the driver seat to its approximate original position.
Wait two minutes, and then with the scan tool, read OCM DTCs.
Does the scan tool display active: B1B8C-DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT PERFOR-
MANCE?
Yes >>
WARNING: If the Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is dropped at any time, it must be replaced. Failure
to take the proper precautions can result in accidental airbag deployment and personal injury or death.Re-
place the Driver Seat Track Position Sensor in accordance with the Service Information.
Perform the OCS VERIFICATION TEST-VER 1.If DTC B1B8C-DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION SEN-
SOR CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE returns active, replace the OCM in accordance with the Service Infor-
mation.
No >> Perform the OCS VERIFICATION TEST-VER 1. Diagnostic Test
5. CHECK FOR ACTIVE INTERNAL FAULTS, IGNITION FAULTS, BATTERY FAULTS, OR SEAT TRACK
POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH OR LOW FAULTS IN THE OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER
(ORC)
With the scan tool, read Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) DTCs.
Does the scan tool display any active DTCs relating to internal faults, ignition faults, battery faults, or
Seat Track Position Sensor Circuit High or Low faults?
symptoms.
No >> Go To 6
6. VERIFY THAT B1B8C-DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE IS ACTIVE
MANCE?
Yes >> Go To 7
No >> Go To 8
7. PERFORM SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR PERFORMANCE TEST

Cycle the driver seat to the full forward position and then to the full rearward position.
Return the driver seat to its approximate original position.
MANCE?
Yes >>
the Driver Seat Track Position Sensor in accordance with the Service Information.
Perform the ORC VERIFICATION TEST-VER 1.If DTC B1B8C-DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION SEN-
SOR CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE returns active, replace the ORC in accordance with the Service Infor-
mation.
No >> Perform the ORC VERIFICATION TEST-VER 1.

With the scan tool, record and erase all DTCs from the OCM and ORC.
following steps.
B1B8D-DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
While the CAN bus ignition status is in IGN_RUN and the module is configured for a Seat Track Position
Sensor, the module checks the sensor input current ranges.
Set Condition:
If the module detects that the sensor input is less than or equal to 0.3 ma. This DTC may set when the current
is between 0.3 mA and 2.0 mA.
Possible Causes
DRIVER SEAT HARNESS IMPROPERLY ROUTED

DRIVER SEAT HARNESS WIRES CHAFED, PIERCED, PINCHED, PARTIALLY BROKEN
DRIVER SEAT HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINALS BROKEN, BENT, PUSHED OUT, SPREAD, CORRODED,
CONTAMINATED
(R261) SEAT POSITION SENSOR DATA-DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(R263) SEAT POSITION SENSOR VOLTAGE-DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(R261) SEAT POSITION SENSOR DATA-DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN
(R263) SEAT POSITION SENSOR VOLTAGE-DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER (ORC)
Diagnostic Test

ORC >> Go To 8
OCM
symptoms.
No >> Go To 3
3. VERIFY THAT DTC B1B8D-DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW IS ACTIVE
Does the scan tool display active: B1B8D-DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Go To 14
4. INSPECT DRIVER SEAT HARNESS WIRES AND CONNECTORS

Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the Driver Seat Harness wiring and connectors. Look for
chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires and broken, bent, pushed out, spread, corroded, or contaminated
terminals.
Yes >>
Replace the Driver Seat Harness in accordance with the Service Information.
No >> Go To 5
5. VERIFY THAT DRIVER SEAT HARNESS IS ROUTED CORRECTLY

Verify that the Driver Seat Harness is routed correctly.
Is the Driver Seat Harness routed correctly?
Yes >> Go To 6
No >> Reroute the Driver Seat Harness as necessary.
6. CHECK (R261) SEAT POSITION SENSOR DATA-DRIVER CIRCUIT AND (R263) SEAT POSITION SENSOR
VOLTAGE-DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the (R261) Seat Position
Sensor Data-Driver circuit.
Sensor Voltage-Driver circuit.
Is the resistance below 10k ohms on either circuit?
Yes >>
Seat Harness.
Replace the Driver Seat Harness in accordance with the ser-
vice information.
No >> Go To 7
VOLTAGE-DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (R261) Seat Position Sensor Data-Driver
circuit between the OCM C1 connector and the Driver Seat Track Posi-
tion Sensor connector.
Measure the resistance of the (R263) Seat Position Sensor Voltage-
Driver circuit between the OCM C1 connector and the Driver Seat Track
Position Sensor connector.
Is the resistance of either circuit above 5.0 ohms?
Yes >>
Seat Harness.
Replace the Driver Seat Harness in accordance with the
No >>
WARNING: If the Occupant Classification module (OCM) is dropped
injury or death.Replace the OCM in accordance with the service
information.
Perform the OCS VERIFICATION TEST-VER 1. Diagnostic Test
RESTRAINT CONTROLLER (ORC)
With the scan tool, read Occupant restraint Controller (ORC) DTCs.
symptoms.
No >> Go To 9
9. VERIFY THAT DTC B1B8D-DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW IS ACTIVE
Does the scan tool display active: B1B8D-DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 10
No >> Go To 14

terminals.
Yes >>
No >> Go To 11

Yes >> Go To 12
12. CHECK (R261) SEAT POSITION SENSOR DATA-DRIVER CIRCUIT AND (R263) SEAT POSITION
SENSOR VOLTAGE-DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Sensor Data-Driver circuit.
Sensor Voltage-Driver circuit.
Is the resistance below 10k ohms on either circuit?
Yes >>
Seat Harness.
vice information.
No >> Go To 13
SENSOR VOLTAGE-DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect the ORC C1 connector.
Measure the resistance of the (R261) Seat Position Sensor Data-Driver
circuit between the ORC-C1 connector and the Driver Seat Track Posi-
tion Sensor connector.
Measure the resistance of the (R263) Seat Position Sensor Voltage-
Driver circuit between the ORC-C1 connector and the Driver Seat Track
Position Sensor connector.
Is the resistance of either circuit above 5.0 ohms?
Yes >>
Seat Harness.
Replace the Driver Seat Harness in accordance with the
No >>
injury or death.Replace the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC )
in accordance with the service information.

With the scan tool, record and erase all DTCs from the OCM.
following steps.
B1B8E-DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
While the CAN bus ignition status is in IGN_RUN and the module is configured for a Seat Track Position
Sensor, the module checks the sensor input current ranges.
Set Condition:
If the module detects that the sensor input is greater than or equal to 20.5 mA. This DTC may set when the
current is between 17 mA and 20.5 mA.
Possible Causes
DRIVER SEAT HARNESS IMPROPERLY ROUTED

DRIVER SEAT HARNESS WIRES CHAFED, PIERCED, PINCHED, PARTIALLY BROKEN
DRIVER SEAT HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINALS BROKEN, BENT, PUSHED OUT, SPREAD, CORRODED,
CONTAMINATED
(R261) SEAT POSITION SENSOR DATA-DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
(R263) SEAT POSITION SENSOR VOLTAGE-DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
(R261) SEAT POSITION SENSOR DATA-DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (R263) SEAT POSITION SENSOR
VOLTAGE-DRVER CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Test

ORC >> Go To 9
OCM
symptoms.
No >> Go To 3
3. VERIFY THAT DTC B1B8E-DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH IS ACTIVE
Does the scan tool display active: B1B8E-DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Go To 16

terminals.
Yes >>
No >> Go To 5

Yes >> Go To 6
6. CHECK FOR DTC B1B8E-DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH WITH DRIVER SEAT
TRACK POSITION SENSOR DISCONNECTED
Disconnect the Driver Seat Track Position Sensor connector.
Does the scan tool display: B1B8E-DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 7
No >>
utes before proceeding.Replace the Driver Seat Track Position Sensor in accordance with the service infor-
mation.
VOLTAGE-DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Measure the voltage of the (R261) Seat Position Sensor Data-Driver cir-
cuit.
Measure the voltage of the (R263) Seat Position Sensor Voltage-Driver
circuit.
Is the voltage above 0.2 volts on either circuit?
Yes >>
Seat Harness.
disconnect the battery and wait two minutes before proceeding.Re-
place the Driver Seat Harness in accordance with the Service Infor-
mation.
No >> Go To 8
8. CHECK (R261) SEAT POSITION SENSOR DATA-DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO (R263) SEAT
POSITION SENSOR VOLTAGE-DRIVER CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (R261) Seat Position Sensor Data-
Driver circuit and the (R263) Seat Position Sensor Voltage-Driver circuit.
Yes >>
Seat Harness.
vice information.
No >> Replace the OCM in accordance with the Service information.
Diagnostic Test
symptoms.
No >> Go To 10
10. VERIFY THAT DTC B1B8E-DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH IS ACTIVE
Does the scan tool display active: B1B8E-DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 11
No >> Go To 16

terminals.
Yes >>
No >> Go To 12

Yes >> Go To 13
13. CHECK FOR DTC B1B8E-DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH WITH DRIVER
SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR DISCONNECTED
Disconnect the Driver Seat Track Position Sensor connector.
Wait two minutes, and then with the scan tool, read ORC DTCs.
Does the scan tool display: B1B8E-DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 14
No >>
utes before proceeding.Replace the Driver Seat Track Position Sensor in accordance with the service infor-
mation.
SENSOR VOLTAGE-DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Measure the voltage of the (R261) Seat Position Sensor Data-Driver cir-
cuit at the Driver Seat Track Position Sensor connector.
Measure the voltage of the (R263) Seat Position Sensor Voltage-Driver
circuit at the Driver Seat Track Position Sensor connector.
Is the voltage above 0.2 volts on either circuit?
Yes >>
Seat Harness.
disconnect the battery and wait two minutes before proceeding.Replace the Driver Seat Harness in accor-
No >> Go To 15
15. CHECK (R261) SEAT POSITION SENSOR DATA-DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO (R263) SEAT
POSITION SENSOR VOLTAGE-DRIVER CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (R261) Seat Position Sensor Data-
Driver circuit and the (R263) Seat Position Sensor Voltage-Driver circuit
in the Driver Seat Track Position Sensor connector.
Yes >>
Seat Harness.
vice information.
No >> Replace the ORC in accordance with the Service information.

following steps.
B1B91-DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR CONFIGURATION MISMATCH

When Monitored:
With the ignition on the OCM monitors the Seat Track Position Sensors circuits.
Set Condition:
If the module detects current on the Seat Track Position Sensors circuits and the module is not configured for
STPS.
Possible Causes
SENSORS
WIRING
Diagnostic Test

Select the module reporting the Active Seat Track Position Sensor DTC(s)
ORC >> Go To 5
OCM
symptoms.
No >> Go To 3
3. VERIFY THAT B1B91-DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR CONFIGURATION MISMATCH IS ACTIVE
Wait 2 minutes, and then with the scan tool, read OCM DTCs.
Does the scan tool display active: B1B91-DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR CONFIGURATION
MISMATCH?
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Perform the OCS VERIFICATION TEST-VER. 1
4. VERIFY WIRING
Inspect the driver and passenger seat wiring for Seat Position Sensors.
Are Seat Position Sensor(s) present?
Yes >>
WARNING: If the Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is dropped at any time, it must be replaced. Failure
to take the proper precautions can result in accidental airbag deployment and personal injury or death.Re-
place the OCM in accordance with the Service Information.
Perform the OCS VERIFICATION TEST-VER. 1
No >> Perform the OCS VERIFICATION TEST-VER. 1 Diagnostic Test
symptoms.
No >> Go To 6
6. VERIFY THAT B1B91-DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR CONFIGURATION MISMATCH IS ACTIVE

Wait 2 minutes, and then with the scan tool, read ORC DTCs.
Does the scan tool display active: B1B91-DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR CONFIGURATION
MISMATCH?
Yes >> Go To 7
No >> Perform the ORC VERIFICATION TEST-VER. 1
7. VERIFY WIRING
Inspect the driver and passenger seat wiring for Seat Position Sensors.
Are Seat Position Sensor(s) present?
Yes >>
the ORC in accordance with the Service Information.
Perform the ORC VERIFICATION TEST-VER. 1
No >> Perform the ORC VERIFICATION TEST-VER. 1
B1BA5-AIRBAG SQUIB CONFIGURATION MISMATCH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If an Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) configured for vehicles without side airbags is installed in a vehicle
with side airbags.
Possible Causes
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM)
Diagnostic Test
1. VERIFY THAT DTC B1BA5 AIRBAG SQUIB CONFIGURATION MISMATCH IS ACTIVE

be disconnected.
Does the scan tool display active: B1BA5 AIRBAG SQUIB CONFIGURATION MISMATCH?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Go To 5
2. VERIFY THAT VEHICLE IS EQUIPPED WITH OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM (OCS)

Vehicles equipped with a Occupant Classification System (OCS) will have a Passenger Airbag On/Off Indicator
Lamp mounted to the dashboard. Verify that the vehicle is equipped with this indicator lamp.
With the scan tool, select ECU View and check that the Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is active on the bus.
Is the vehicle equipped with an Occupant Classification System (OCS)?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Replace the ORC in accordance with Service Information.
3. CHECK ORC PART NUMBER WITH SCAN TOOL

With the scan tool, select ECU View, select ORC, select ECU Details, and read the ORC part number.
Is the part number correct for the vehicle?
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Replace the ORC in accordance with Service Information.
4. CHECK VIN WITH SCAN TOOL

With the scan tool, read the VIN.
Is the correct VIN displayed?
Yes >> Replace the ORC in accordance with Service Information.
No >> Replace the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) in accordance with Service Information.

following steps.
tion.
B1BA6-OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION UNDETERMINED

When Monitored:
With the ignition on or off.
Set Condition:
Because other DTCs have made occupant detection impossible. This DTC will set in addition to all sensor and
module DTCs and will be erased when the repairs are completed.
Refer to B1BA7-OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM VERIFICATION REQUIRED for the diagnostic test pro-
cedure.
B1BA7-OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM VERIFICATION REQUIRED
OCS SEAT WEIGHTS MRL #9077

When Monitored:
With the CAN ignition status as IGN_RUN, the module tries to detect potentially damaging events and moni-
tors the CAN Bus for the X Impact messages (crash event causing one or more airbag or pretensioner to
deploy) or upon detecting an Offset Event (if equipped).
Set Condition:
This DTC will set if the module detects a potentially damaging event or the Impact messages from the CAN
Bus input.
Possible Causes
B1BA7-OCS VERIFICATION REQUIRED DTC ACTIVE
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE (OCM) ACTIVE DTCs:

ACTIVE INTERNAL FAULTS
IGNITION FAULTS
BATTERY FAULT
SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR DTCs
be disconnected.
Does the scan tool display any active DTCs listed above?
symptoms.
No >> Go To 2
2. VERIFY THAT DTC B1BA7-OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM VERIFICATION REQUIRED IS ACTIVE

Does the scan tool display active: B1BA7-OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM VERIFICATION
REQUIRED?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 4

Verify that the passenger seat is empty.
Perform a visual inspection of the Passenger Seat, wiring, connectors, risers, sensors, and retainers. Look for
terminals. Also, inspect for damaged or bent risers, a damaged or bent seat and seat structure, damaged or bent
seat tracks, and damaged or loose sensors. Repair or replace any problems found in accordance with the service
information and then continue this procedure. Refer to 23 - BODY/SEATS.
NOTE: Failure to follow the test instructions or aborting the test will cause faults to set when performing
the Occupant Classification Module System Verification Test. To prevent faults due to process errors: Verify
complete, proceed as follows.
Does the scan tool display active: B1BA7-OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM VERIFICATION
REQUIRED?
symptoms.
4. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC B1BA8OCM SYSTEM OUT OF CALIBRATION/NOT CALIBRATED

Does the scan tool display active: B1BA8-OCM SYSTEM OUT OF CALIBRATION/NOT CALIBRATED?
Yes >> Diagnose and repair the DTC. Refer to the Table of Contents in this Section for a complete list of symp-
toms.
No >> Perform OCS VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
B1BA8-OCM SYSTEM OUT OF CALIBRATION/NOT CALIBRATED

When Monitored:
While the CAN bus ignition status is IGN_RUN or status not available.
Set Condition:
This DTC will set if the module or the technician initiated a system verification (rezero) process and the system
verification process was not successfully completed.
Diagnostic Test

Does the scan tool display any active DTCs?
Yes - B1BA8 is Active
Yes Other DTCs Present
symptoms.
B1BB8-SRS WARNING INDICATOR STATUS MISMATCH

When Monitored:
After the Instrument Cluster bulb check is completed, the ORC compares the lamp request by the ORC (On or
Off) and the Lamp On request by the Instrument Cluster (On or Off) Can bus messages. Each message is
transmitted one time per second or when a change in the lap state occurs.
Set Condition:
If the lamp request by the ORC (On or Off), and the Lamp On by the Instrument Cluster (On or Off), messages
do not match, this code will set.
Possible Causes
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER, INSTRUMENT CLUSTER MESSAGE MISMATCH

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test

be disconnected.
Select DTC type.
Active
Go To 2
Stored
Go To 5
2. CHECK FOR ACTIVE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DTCs

Does the scan tool display and active Instrument Cluster DTCs?
Yes >> Refer to symptom list for problems related to the Instrument Cluster.
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK THE ORC AND INSTRUMENT CLUSTER FOR LAMP STATUS

With the scan tool view the Instrument Cluster Data Display.
Cycle the ignition key and observe the SRS Indicator Lamp Request status (Set/Not Set) during the Instrument
Cluster bulb check.
With the scan tool view the ORC Data Display.
Cycle the ignition key and observe the SRS Indicator Lamp Status (Lamp On/Lamp Off) during the Instrument Clus-
ter bulb check.
Did the Data Display information match the operation of the lamp?
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Replace the Instrument Cluster in accordance with the service information.

Repair
Replace the Occupant Restraint Controller in accordance with the service information.

following steps.
tion.
B1BBA-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT

When Monitored:
While the CAN bus ignition status is in IGN_RUN, the module checks the sensor supply.
Set Condition:
If the OCM detects that the sensor supply shorted. NOTE: A shorted supply circuit will cause a NO
RESPONSE FROM OCM condition.
Possible Causes
OCS SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED
Diagnostic Test
1. VERIFY THAT B1BBA-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT DTC IS ACTIVE
Does the scan tool display active: B1BBA-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT?
Yes >> Replace the OCM in accordance with the Service Information.
Perform the OCS VERIFICATION REQUIRED procedure.
No >> Go To 2

inated terminals.
Yes >>
No >> Go To 3

following steps.
B1BBB-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR INPUTS SHORTED TOGETHER

When Monitored:
While the CAN bus ignition status is in IGN_RUN.
Set Condition:
If the OCM detects any two sensors voltages below 20 mV for 10 minutes while any other sensor is greater
than 40 mV. Note: 1 a/d count is equal to 5 mV. NOTE: A shorted supply circuit will cause a NO
RESPONSE FROM OCM condition.
Possible Causes
OCS SENSOR CIRCUITS SHORTED TOGETHER
Diagnostic Test
1. VERIFY THAT B1BBB-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR INPUTS SHORTED TOGETHER

Does the scan tool display active: B1BBB-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR INPUTS SHORTED
TOGETHER ?
Perform the OCS VERIFICATION REQUIRED procedure.
No >> Go To 2

inated terminals.
Yes >>
No >> Go To 3

following steps.
B1BBC-OCS NEGATIVE SYSTEM WEIGHT

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If the module detects a seat weight sensor input with the total seat weight below -6.5 kg +/- 1kg.
Possible Causes
FLOOR PAN
OBJECT UNDER SEAT OR REAR SEAT FOLDED DOWN AND RESTING AGAINST PASSENGER SEAT
Diagnostic Test
1. TEST CONDITIONS
ACTIVE INTERNAL DTC
IGNITION DTC
BATTERY DTC
SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR DTC
be disconnected.
Does the scan tool display any active DTCs listed above?
symptoms.
No >> Go To 2
2. ACTIVE OR STORED DTC

Does the scan tool display active: B1BBC-NEGATIVE SYSTEM WEIGHT?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 4

Does the scan tool display active: B1BBC-OCS NEGATIVE SYSTEM WEIGHT DTC?
symptoms.
4. STORED B1BBC-OCS NEGATIVE SYSTEM WEIGHT DTC

IF only stored codes return continue the test until the problem area has been isolated.
B1BBD-OCM CURRENT CONFIGURATION TABLE UNPROGRAMMED

When Monitored:
If the Configuration Table is not programmed at the supplier or when the checksum is invalid.
Set Condition:
This DTC will set if the module was received unprogrammed from the supplier, the vehicle line was not iden-
tified correctly or if the flash procedure was not completed successfully
Possible Causes
NEW OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE
INTERNAL CHECKSUM FAILURE
Diagnostic Test
1. MODULE CONFIGURATION
Does the scan tool display B1BBD-OCM CURRENT CONFIGURATION TABLE UNPROGRAMMED?
Yes >> Perform the B1BA7OCS VERIFICATION REQUIRED diagnostic procedure.
No >> Replace the Occupant Classification Module in accordance with the service information.
With the scan tool, perform the OCM SYSTEM VERIFICATION procedure.
B1BC7-DEPLOYMENT DATA RECORD FULL

When Monitored:
With the ignition on. The modules on board diagnostics continuously performs internal circuit tests.
Set Condition:
This DTC will set if the module identifies an out of range internal circuit.
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test

Is the Deployment Data Record Full DTC active?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Perform the ORC VERIFICATION TEST-VER. 1.

proper precautions can result in accidental airbag deployment and personal injury or death.
View repair.
Repair
B1BC8-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSORS PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If the module detects the difference between 2 sensors is less than 3 A/D (15 mV) counts for 10 consecutive
minutes while at least one sensor count is changing and greater than 8 A/D (40 mV) counts.
Possible Causes
OTHER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR FAULTS ACTIVE IN THE OCM

PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSORS
FLOOR PAN
Diagnostic Test
be disconnected.
NOTE: This DTC will take 10 minutes to mature, allow plenty of time for the code to mature between as you
work through the test steps.
symptoms.
No >> Go To 2
2. VERIFY THAT DTC B1BC8-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSORS PERFORMANCE IS ACTIVE

Does the scan tool display active: B1BC8-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSORS PERFORMANCE?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 6
3. CHECK FOR OTHER ACTIVE PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR FAULTS IN THE OCM
Does the scan tool display any other active Seat Weight Sensor DTCs?
symptoms.
No >> Go To 4

inated terminals.
Yes >>
No >> Go To 5

Does the scan tool display any active B1BC8-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSORS PERFORMANCE
DTC?
Other DTCs ACTIVE
symptoms.

NOTE: This DTC will take 10 minutes to mature, allow plenty of time for the code to mature between as you
work through the test steps.
following steps.
tion.
B2101-IGNITION RUN/START INPUT CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
While the CAN bus is RUN or signal not available and the IOD status is IN. The module checks the (F201)
Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit voltage input range.
Set Condition:
With the ignition on, if voltage on the (F201) Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit is equal to or
below 6.50 0.25 volts. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition off, if the (F201) Fused Ignition Switch Out-
put (Run-Start) circuit is 2.4 to 5.0 volts.
Possible Causes
(F20) IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT OPEN

(F201) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
OPEN FUSE (27)
Diagnostic Test
1. VERIFY THAT DTC B2101 IGNITION RUN/START INPUT CIRCUIT LOW IS ACTIVE IN THE ORC.
be disconnected.
Does the scan tool display active: B210-IGNITION RUN/START INPUT CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Go To 7
2. INSPECT AIRBAG RUN-START FUSE

Remove the Airbag Run-Start Fuse from the rear Power Distribution Center and inspect the fuse.
Is the Run/Start fuse open?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 5
3. CHECK (F201) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT RESISTANCE

Measure the resistance of the (F201) Fused Ignition Switch Output
(Run-Start) circuit between ground and the Airbag Run-Start fuse termi-
nal (output side).
Yes >> Go To 4
related wiring and connectors. Look for chafed, pierced,
pinched, or partially broken wires and broken, bent, pushed
out, spread, corroded, or contaminated terminals.
Replace Airbag Run-Start Fuse.
4. CHECK (F201) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT RESISTANCE WITH ORC
CONNECTORS DISCONNECTED
can result in accidental airbag deployment and personal injury or
death.
Disconnect the both ORC connectors.
Connect the Load Tool ORC 8443-24 Adaptor to the ORC C2 connec-
tor.
(Run-Start) circuit between 8443-24 adaptor and ground).
Yes >> Repair the (F201) Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit shorted to ground.
No >> Replace the ORC in accordance with the Service Information.
Replace the Airbag Run-Start Fuse.
Perform ORC VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1 .
5. CHECK (F201) IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Measure the voltage of the (F201) Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start)
circuit at the Airbag Run-Start fuse terminal (supply side).
Is the voltage above 6.50 0.25 volts?
Yes >> Go To 6
No >> Repair the open (F201) Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start)
circuit.
6. CHECK (F201) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Reinstall the Airbag Run-Start Fuse.
Install the Airbag Load tool ORC 8443-24 adaptor to the ORC C2 con-
nector.
Measure the voltage of the (F201) Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) Circuit between the 8443-24 connector
and ground.
Yes >> Replace the ORC in accordance with the Service Information.

following steps.
tion.
No >> No problem found Erase all codes before returning vehicle to customer.
B2102-IGNITION RUN/START INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
While the CAN bus ignition status is RUN or signal not available and the IOD status is 9IN9. The module
checks the (F201) Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit voltage input range.
Set Condition:
If the module detects that the ignition voltage is greater than 24.25 volts 0.25 volts for 10 seconds.
Possible Causes

VEHICLE WIRING AND HARNESS CONNECTORS
Diagnostic Test
1. VERIFY THAT DTC B2102-IGNITION RUN/START INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH IS ACTIVE

be disconnected.
Does the scan tool display active: B2102-IGNITION RUN/START INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Go To 3
No >> Replace the OCM in accordance with the Service Information.

following steps.
tion.

When Monitored:
OCM-While the CAN bus ignition status received is RUN or signal not available, the module checks the (A106)
Fused B(+) circuit voltage input range.
Set Condition:
OCM-If the module detects that the battery voltage is less than or equal to 6.50 0.25 volts.
When Monitored:
ORC-While the CAN bus ignition status received is RUN or signal not available, the module checks the (F201)
Fused Ignition Switch Output (RUN/START) circuit and the (F214) Fused Run Relay Output (RUN only) circuit
voltage input range.
Set Condition:
ORC-If the module detects that the battery voltage is less than or equal to 6.50 0.25 volts on the (F201) or
(F214) circuits.
Possible Causes
OCM (A106) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT

ORC (F201) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN/START) CIRCUIT OPEN
ORC (F214) FUSED RUN RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN
Diagnostic Test

be disconnected.
Select module and DTC type.
OCM Active
Go To 2
OCM Stored
Go To 4
ORC Active
Go To 3
ORC Stored
Go To 4
2. TEST THE VOLTAGE OF OCM (A106) FUSED B(+) CIRCUITS.

Measure the voltage of the (A106) Fused (B+) circuit.
Is the voltage above 6.50 0.25 volts on both circuits?
Yes >> Replace the OCM in accordance with the service informa-
tion. Perform the Occupant Classification Module System
Verification Test.
No >> Repair the low voltage on the (A106) FUSED B(+) circuit.
3. MEASURE THE VOLTAGE OF ORC (F214) FUSED RUN RELAY OUTPUT AND THE (F201) FUSED
IGNITION OUTPUT RUN/START CIRCUITS
Measure the voltage of the (F214) fused Run Relay Output and (F201) Fused Ignition Switch Output Run/Start cir-
cuits.
Is the voltage above 6.50 0.25 volts on both circuits?
No >> Repair the (F214) Fused Run relay Output and/or (F201) Fused Ignition Switch output Run/Start circuits
for an open.

following steps.
tion.

When Monitored:
While the CAN bus ignition status received is RUN or signal not available, the module checks the (A106)
Fused B(+) circuit voltage input range.
Set Condition:
If the module detects that the battery voltage is greater than or equal to 24.25 0.25 volts for 10 seconds.
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test

Does the scan tool display active: B210E-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Go To 4
2. CHECK THE BATTERY VOLTAGE TO THE OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE

With the scan tool in Data Display, read OCM battery voltage.
Is the battery voltage greater than 24.25 volts 0.25 volts?
Yes >> Go To 3

following steps.
tion.
B212C-IGNITION RUN/START INPUT CIRCUIT OPEN

When Monitored:
With the ignition in the Run-Start position.
Set Condition:
If voltage on the (F201) Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit drops below 6.0 volts.
Possible Causes
(F20) IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT OPEN

(F201) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
OPEN FUSE (27)
Diagnostic Test
1. VERIFY THAT DTC B212C-IGNITION RUN/START INPUT CIRCUIT OPEN IS ACTIVE IN THE ORC.
be disconnected.
Does the scan tool display active: B212C-IGNITION RUN/START INPUT CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 2
2. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC B212C-IGNITION RUN/START INPUT CIRCUIT OPEN IN OCM.
Does the scan tool display active: B212C-IGNITION RUN/START INPUT CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 11
3. INSPECT AIRBAG RUN-START FUSE

Remove the Airbag Run-Start Fuse from the rear Power Distribution Center and inspect the fuse.
Is the Run/Start fuse open?
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Go To 7
4. CHECK (F201) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT RESISTANCE

nal (output side).
Yes >> Go To 5
Replace Airbag Run-Start Fuse.
5. CHECK (F201) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT RESISTANCE WITH ORC
CONNECTORS DISCONNECTED
death.
Connect the Load Tool ORC 8443-24 Adaptor to the ORC C2 connec-
tor.
(Run-Start) circuit between 844324 adaptor and ground).
Yes >> Go To 6
6. CHECK (F201) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT RESISTANCE WITH OCM C1
CONNECTOR DISCONNECTED
WARNING: If the Occupant Classification Module is dropped at
any time, it must be replaced. Failure to take the proper precau-
injury or death.
nal (output side).
Yes >> Repair the (F201) Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start)
No >> Replace the OCM in accordance with the Service Informa-
tion.
7. CHECK (F201) IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Measure the voltage of the (F20) Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) cir-
cuit at the Airbag Run-Start fuse terminal (supply side).
Yes >> Go To 8
No >> Repair the open (F20) Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start)
circuit.
Install the Airbag Load tool ORC 8443-24 adaptor to the ORC C2 con-
nector.
Measure the voltage of the (F201) Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) Circuit between the 8443-24 connector
and ground.
Perform OCS VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1 if DTC B210C-IGNITION RUN/START INPUT CIRCUIT
OPEN was Active in the OCM.
Disconnect the both Occupant Classification Module (OCM) connectors.
Start) Circuit between the OCM connector and ground.
Yes >> Go To 10
No >> Repair the open (F201) Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-
Start) circuit between the OCM and the splice.
10. VERIFY THAT DTC B212C-IGNITION RUN/START INPUT CIRCUIT OPEN DTC IS ACTIVE.
Reconnect both Occupant Restraints Controller (ORC) connectors.
Reconnect both Occupant Classification Module (OCM) connectors.
With the scan tool, read Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) DTCs and Occupant Classification Module (OCM)
DTCs.
Select the module displaying the active: B212C-IGNITION RUN/START INPUT CIRCUIT OPEN?
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Replace the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) in accordance with the Service Information.
Occupant Classification Module (OCM)
Replace the Occupant Classification Module (OCM) in accordance with the Service Information.

following steps.
tion.
B212D-IGNITION RUN ONLY INPUT CIRCUIT OPEN

When Monitored:
With the ignition in the Run position.
Set Condition:
If voltage on the (F214) Fused Run Relay Output circuit drops below 6.50 0.25 volts.
Possible Causes
ACTIVE FCM RUN RELAY TROUBLE CODES

(F922) RUN RELAY CIRCUIT OPEN
FUSE 28 OPEN
(F214) FUSED RUN RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED TO GROUND
Diagnostic Test
1. VERIFY THAT DTC B212D-IGNITION RUN ONLY INPUT CIRCUIT OPEN IS ACTIVE
be disconnected.
Does the scan tool display active: B212D-IGNITION RUN ONLY INPUT CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Go To 8
2. CHECK FOR ACTIVE FCM RUN RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT DTC

With the scan tool, read Front Control Module (FCM) DTCs.
Does the scan tool display active: B2122, B2123, or B2124 DTCs?
Yes >> (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/IGNITION CONTROL - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - B2122), (Refer to 8 -
ELECTRICAL/IGNITION CONTROL - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - B2123), (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/
IGNITION CONTROL - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - B2124).
No >> Go To 3
3. INSPECT AIRBAG RUN CIRCUIT FUSE

Remove the Airbag Run Circuit Fuse No. 28 from the Power Distribution Center and inspect the fuse.
Is the fuse open?
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Go To 6
4. CHECK (F214) FUSED RUN RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT RESISTANCE

Measure the resistance of the (F214) Run Relay Output circuit between
the Airbag Run Relay Output Circuit fuse No. 28 (supply side) terminal
and ground.
Yes >> Go To 5
Replace Airbag Run Circuit Fuse.
5. CHECK (F214 ) FUSED RUN RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT RESISTANCE WITH ORC C2 CONNECTOR
DISCONNECTED
death.
Connect the appropriate Load Tool ORC 8443-24 Adaptor to the ORC
connector.
Measure the resistance of the (F214) Fused Run Relay Output circuit
between 8443-24 adaptor and ground.
Yes >> Repair the (F214) Fused Run Relay Output circuit for a
short to ground.
Replace the Airbag Run Circuit Fuse.
Replace the Airbag Run Circuit Fuse.
6. CHECK (F922) RUN RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage of the (F922) Run Relay Output circuit at the Air-
bag Run Circuit fuse terminal (supply side).
Yes >> Go To 7
No >> Repair the open (F922) Run Relay Output circuit.
7. CHECK (F214) FUSED RUN RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Reinstall the Airbag Run Circuit Fuse.
Connect the Airbag Load Tool ORC 8443-24 Adaptor to the ORC C1
harness connector.
Measure the voltage of the (F214) Fused Run Relay Output Circuit
between the 8443-24 adaptor and ground.
Yes >> Replace the ORC in accordance with the Service Informa-
tion.
No >> Repair the open (F214) Fused Run Relay Output circuit.

following steps.
tion.
B2201-CALIBRATION MISMATCH
When Monitored:
With the Ignition on.
Set Condition:
This DTC will be set when the VIN stored in the PCM does not match the VIN stored in the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC). The ORC does not support a stored B2201 DTC.
Possible Causes
INCORRECT PCM
Diagnostic Test
1. VERIFY THAT DTC B2201-CALIBRATION MISMATCH IS ACTIVE

be disconnected.
Does the scan tool display active: B2201-CALIBRATION MISMATCH?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECK VIN IN PCM

With the scan tool compare the VIN that is programmed into the PCM to the VIN stored in the ORC.
Does the VIN programmed into the PCM match the VIN stored in the ORC?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Replace and program the Powertrain Control Module in accordance with the service information. Ensure
the PCM is replaced with the correct vehicle line PCM.

View repair.
Repair
B2205-ORIGINAL VIN MISSING/MISMATCH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Occupant Restraint Controller will receive and monitor the VIN message from the PCM and record the VIN
if different from the last VIN.
Possible Causes
INCORRECT VIN PROGRAMMED IN PCM
Diagnostic Test
1. VERIFY THAT DTC B2205-ORIGINAL VIN MISSING/MISMATCH

be disconnected.
Does the scan tool display active : B2205-ORIGINAL VIN MISSING/MISMATCH?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECK VIN IN PCM

With the scan tool compare the VIN that is programmed into the PCM to the VIN on the vehicle.
Does the VIN programmed into the PCM match the vehicles VIN?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Replace the Powertrain Control Module in accordance with Service Information.
Perform the (NGC) POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST-VER. 1

View repair.
Repair

When Monitored:
During power-up, the ORC and OCM monitors the CAN bus for the VIN message.
Set Condition:
This DTC will set if the VIN information received from the PCM is different from the stored VIN.
Possible Causes
INCORRECT VIN PROGRAMMED INTO THE PCM

Diagnostic Test

NOTE: Troubleshoot any Ignition, Battery, Seat Weight Sensor, or OCM Internal DTCs BEFORE proceeding
NOTE: Ensure that the battery is fully charged.
Select the module and DTC type.
OCM-Active
Go To 2
OCM-Stored
Erase code with scan tool, test complete.
ORC-Active
Go To 4
ORC-Stored
Erase code with scan tool, test complete.
2. CHECK THE VIN STORED IN THE PCM

With the scan tool, compare the VIN that is stored in the PCM to the VIN of the vehicles VIN plate.
Does the VIN stored in the PCM match the vehicles VIN?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Replace and Configure the Powertrain Control Module in accordance with the service information.
Perform (NGC) POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST VER - 5. Refer to (Refer to 9 - ENGINE - DIAG-
NOSIS AND TESTING).

Does the scan tool display active: B2206-CURRENT VIN MISSING/MISMATCH?
symptoms.
4. CHECK THE VIN STORED IN THE PCM

With the scan tool, compare the VIN that is stored in the PCM to the VIN of the vehicles VIN plate.
Does the VIN stored in the PCM match the vehicles VIN?
Yes >> Go To 5
No >> Replace and Configure the Powertrain Control Module in accordance with the service information.
Perform (NGC) POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST VER - 5. Refer to (Refer to 9 - ENGINE - DIAG-
NOSIS AND TESTING).

View repair.
Repair
B2207-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER INTERNAL 1

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1. REPLACE OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER

With the scan tool, erase and read ORC DTCs.
WARNING: If the Occupant Restraint Controller is dropped at any time, it must be replaced. Failure to take
When this code is set, view repair.
Repair
Replace the Occupant Restraint Controller in accordance with the Service Information.
Perform the ORC VERIFICATION TEST-VER. 1.

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test

Repair

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test

Repair
B220A-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER INTERNAL 4

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test

Repair
B220B-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER FIRING STORED ENERGY

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test

Repair
B220C-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER ACCELEROMETER 1 INTERNAL

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test

Repair
B220D-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER ACCELEROMETER 2 INTERNAL

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test

Repair
B220F-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER CONTROL DRIVER 1

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test

Repair
B2210-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER CONTROL DRIVER 2

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test

Repair
B2212-OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE INTERNAL

When Monitored:
While the IGN status is RUN or signal not available, while the CAN bus system voltage is between 10 and 16
volts, and during the OCS Verification Test.
Set Condition:
This DTC will set if the module detects an internal failure.
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1. PERFORM THE OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE VERIFICATION TEST

NOTE: Ensure that the passenger seat is empty.
NOTE: Ensure that all seat and strain gauge sensor bolts are properly torqued.
Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds and turn ignition on.
Did the DTC: B2212-OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE INTERNAL reset?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Perform the OCS VERIFICATION TEST-VER 1.

Does the scan tool display any active DTCs?
Yes - B2212 is ACTIVE
Replace the Occupant Classification Module in accordance with the service information.
Yes - other DTCs ACTIVE
symptoms.
B223B-VEHICLE CONFIGURATION MISMATCH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Front Control Module sends a message to the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) that the vehicle is not
equipped with an Occupant Classification Module (OCM) but the ORC is receiving OCM messages over the
Can B bus.
Possible Causes
INCORRECT PCM
Diagnostic Test
1. VERIFY THAT DTC B223B-VEHICLE CONFIGURATION MISMATCH IS ACTIVE

be disconnected.
Does the scan tool display active: B223B-VEHICLE CONFIGURATION MISMATCH?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. COMPARE STORED VINS IN THE PCM AND ORC

With the scan tool, read and record the VIN that is stored in the PCM.
With the scan tool, read and record the VIN that is stored in the ORC.
Do the VINs stored in the PCM and ORC match?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Replace and program the Powertrain Control Module in accordance with the Service Information.
Ensure the PCM is replaced with the correct VIN.

View repair.
Repair
B223D-OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE DTC PRESENT

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
This DTC will set if the ORC receives a bus message with the active OCM DTC Present bit set.
Possible Causes
ACTIVE DTC IN OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. ACTIVE OR STORED DTC

With the scan tool, read the OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER active DTCs.
Is the B223D-OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE DTC active?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> With the scan tool, perform the ORC VERIFICATION TEST VER-1.
2. ACTIVE DTC IN OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE

With the scan tool, read the OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE active DTCs.
Are there any active DTC present?
Yes >> Refer to the symptom list for problems related to the OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE (OCM).
No >> Go To 3

Repair
U0019-CAN B BUS
MS-CAN B D54 AND D55

When Monitored:
Continuously
Set Condition:
Whenever the CAN B Bus (+) or CAN B Bus (-) circuit is open, shorted to voltage, or shorted to ground.
Possible Causes
ACTIVE U0019 CAN B BUS DTC IN FRONT CONTROL MODULE

Diagnostic Test
1. VERIFY DTC U0019-CAN B BUS IS ACTIVE

Does the scan tool display active: U0019-CAN B BUS?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> If the DTC is stored, check for an intermittent condition by inspecting the related wiring harness for
chafed, pierced, pinched, and partially broken wires. Also, inspect the related connectors for broken,
bent, pushed out, spread, corroded, or contaminated terminals.
Perform ORC VERIFICATION TEST VER 1.
2. CHECK FOR ACTIVE CAN B BUS RELATED DTCS IN THE FRONT CONTROL MODULE (FCM)
With the scan tool, read Front Control Module (FCM) DTCs
Does the scan tool display any active: CAN B BUS related DTCs?
No >> Go To 3

Disconnect the Front Control Module (FCM) C1 connector.
Front Control Module C1 connector and the ORC C2 connector.
Yes >> Go To 4
4. CHECK (D54) CAN B BUS () CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Front Control Module C1 connector and the ORC C2 connector.
Yes >> Replace the ORC in accordance with the Service Informa-
tion.
MS-CAN B D54 AND D55

When Monitored:
Continuously
Set Condition:
Whenever the CAN B Bus (+) or CAN B Bus (-) circuit is open, shorted to voltage, or shorted to ground.
Possible Causes
ACTIVE U0020 CAN B BUS DTC IN OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE

Diagnostic Test
1. VERIFY DTC U0020-CAN B BUS OFF PERFORMANCE IS ACTIVE

Does the scan tool display active: U0020-CAN B BUS OFF PERFORMANCE?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> If the DTC is stored, check for an intermittent condition by inspecting the related wiring harness for
chafed, pierced, pinched, and partially broken wires. Also, inspect the related connectors for broken,
bent, pushed out, spread, corroded, or contaminated terminals.
Perform ORC VERIFICATION TEST VER 1.
2. CHECK FOR ACTIVE CAN B BUS RELATED DTCS IN THE FRONT CONTROL MODULE (FCM)
With the scan tool, read Front Control Module (FCM) DTCs
No >> Go To 3

Disconnect the Front Control Module (FCM) C1 connector.
Front Control Module C1 connector and the OCM C1 connector.
Yes >> Go To 4
4. CHECK (D54) CAN B BUS () CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Front Control Module C1 connector and the OCM C1 connector.
tion.
U0022-CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT LOW

test procedure.
U0023-CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT HIGH

test procedure.
U0026-CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT HIGH

test procedure.
U0121-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

CONTROL MODULE
test procedure.
U0141-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH FRONT CONTROL MODULE

test procedure.

(ORC)
test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

(SKREEM/WCM)
test procedure.
U0170-LOST COMMUNICATION W/UP-FRONT LEFT SATELLITE ACCELERATION

SENSOR
When Monitored:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) continuously communicates with the Front Left Impact Sensor over
Set Condition:
This code will set, if the ORC and the Front Left Impact Sensor do not establish and maintain valid data com-
munications.
Possible Causes

(R79, R81) FRONT LEFT IMPACT SENSOR CIRCUITS SHORTED TOGETHER
(R81) FRONT LEFT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
(R79) FRONT LEFT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
ORC, FRONT LEFT IMPACT SENSOR
Diagnostic Test
1. VERIFY THAT DTC U0170-LOST COMMUNICATION W/UP-FRONT LEFT SATELLITE ACCELERATION

SENSOR IS ACTIVE
be disconnected.
Does the scan tool display active: U0170-LOST COMMUNICATION W/UP-FRONT LEFT SATELLITE
ACCELERATION SENSOR?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Go To 9
2. CHECK THE (R79, R81) FRONT LEFT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL AND GROUND CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT
TO BATTERY
Disconnect the Front Left Impact Sensor connector.
Measure the voltage of the (R79) Front Left Impact Sensor Signal cir-
cuit and (R81) Sensor Ground circuit at the Front Left Impact Sensor
Yes >> Repair the (R79, R81) Front Left Impact Sensor circuits for
a short to battery.
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK THE (R79) FRONT LEFT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance of the (R79) Front Left Impact Sensor Signal
circuit between the Front Left Impact Sensor connector and ground.
Yes >> Repair the (R79) Front Left Impact Sensor Signal circuit for
a short to ground.
No >> Go To 4
4. CHECK THE (R79, R81) FRONT LEFT IMPACT SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
Measure the resistance between the (R79) Front Left Impact Sensor
Signal and (R81) Sensor Ground circuits at the Front Left Impact Sen-
sor connector.
Yes >> Repair the (R79, R81) Front Left Impact Sensor circuits
shorted together.
No >> Go To 5
5. CHECK THE (R81) FRONT LEFT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR HIGH
RESISTANCE
Control Module connector.
Yes >> Go To 6
No >> Repair the (R81) Front Left Impact Sensor 1 Ground circuit
6. CHECK THE (R79) FRONT LEFT IMPACT SENSOR CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE
Yes >> Go To 7
No >> Repair the (R79) Front Left Impact Sensor Signal circuit for
7. CHECK OPERATION OF THE FRONT LEFT IMPACT SENSOR

Replace the Front Left Impact Sensor.
tery.
Did the active Front Left Impact Sensor DTC return?
Yes >> Go To 8

Repair

following steps.
U0171-LOST COMMUNICATION W/UP-FRONT RIGHT SATELLITE ACCELERATION

SENSOR
When Monitored:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) continuously communicates with the Front Right Impact Sensor over
Set Condition:
This code will set, if the ORC and the Front Right Impact Sensor do not establish and maintain valid data
communications.
Possible Causes

(R80, R82) FRONT RIGHT IMPACT SENSOR CIRCUITS SHORTED TOGETHER
(R82) FRONT RIGHT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
(R80) FRONT RIGHT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
ORC, FRONT RIGHT IMPACT SENSOR
Diagnostic Test
1. VERIFY THAT DTC U0171-LOST COMMUNICATION W/UP-FRONT RIGHT SATELLITE ACCELERATION

SENSOR IS ACTIVE
be disconnected.
Does the scan tool display active: U0171-LOST COMMUNICATION W/UP-FRONT RIGHT SATELLITE
ACCELERATION SENSOR?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Go To 9
2. CHECK THE (R80, R82) FRONT RIGHT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL AND GROUND CIRCUITS FOR A
SHORT TO BATTERY
Disconnect the Right Front Impact Sensor connector.
Measure the voltage of the (R80) Front Right Impact Sensor Signal cir-
cuit and (R82) Sensor Ground circuit at the Front Right Impact Sensor
Yes >> Repair the (R80 and R82) Front Right Impact Sensor cir-
cuits for a short to battery.
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK THE (R80) FRONT RIGHT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
circuit between the Front Right Impact Sensor connector and ground.
Yes >> Repair the (R80) Front Right Impact Sensor Signal circuit
No >> Go To 4
4. CHECK THE (R80, R82) FRONT RIGHT IMPACT SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
Measure the resistance between the (R80) Front Right Impact Sensor
Signal and (R82) Sensor Ground circuits at the Front Right Impact Sen-
sor connector.
shorted together.
No >> Go To 5
5. CHECK THE (R82) FRONT RIGHT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR HIGH
RESISTANCE
Module connector.
Measure the resistance of the (R82) Front Right Impact Sensor Ground
Yes >> Go To 6
No >> Repair the (R82) Front Right Impact Sensor 2 Ground cir-
cuit for an open or high resistance.
6. CHECK THE (R80) FRONT RIGHT IMPACT SENSOR CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE
Yes >> Go To 7
No >> Repair the (R80) Front Right Impact Sensor Signal circuit
7. CHECK OPERATION OF THE FRONT RIGHT IMPACT SENSOR

Replace the Front Right Impact Sensor.
tery.
Did the active Front Right Impact Sensor DTC return?
Yes >> Go To 8

Repair

following steps.
U0172-LOST COMMUNICATION W/LEFT SIDE SATELLITE ACCELERATION SENSOR

1
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
communications.
Possible Causes

Diagnostic Test
1. VERIFY THAT DTC U0172-LOST COMMUNICATION W/LEFT SIDE SATELLITE ACCELERATION SENSOR 1
IS ACTIVE
be disconnected.
Does the scan tool display active: U0172-LOST COMMUNICATION W/LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Go To 9
TO BATTERY
No >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 4
4. CHECK THE (R13, R15) LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
1 connector.
shorted together.
No >> Go To 5
RESISTANCE
Module connector.
Yes >> Go To 6
Yes >> Go To 7

tery.
Yes >> Go To 8

Repair

following steps.
U0173-LOST COMMUNICATION W/LEFT SIDE SATELLITE ACCELERATION SENSOR

2
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
communications.
Possible Causes

Diagnostic Test
1. VERIFY THAT DTC U0173-LOST COMMUNICATION W/LEFT SIDE SATELLITE ACCELERATION SENSOR 2
IS ACTIVE
be disconnected.
Does the scan tool display active: U0173-LOST COMMUNICATION W/LEFT SIDE SATELLITE ACCELERA-
TION SENSOR 1?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Go To 9
TO BATTERY
No >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 4
4. CHECK THE (R17, R19) LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
2 connector.
shorted together.
No >> Go To 5
RESISTANCE
Module connector.
Yes >> Go To 6
Yes >> Go To 7

tery.
Yes >> Go To 8

Repair

following steps.
U0175-LOST COMMUNICATION W/RIGHT SIDE SATELLITE ACCELERATION

SENSOR 1
When Monitored:
signal.
Set Condition:
communications.
Possible Causes

Diagnostic Test
1. VERIFY THAT DTC U0175-LOST COMMUNICATION W/RIGHT SIDE SATELLITE ACCELERATION SENSOR
1
be disconnected.
Does the scan tool display active: U0175-LOST COMMUNICATION W/RIGHT SIDE SATELLITE ACCELER-
ATION SENSOR 1?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Go To 9
SHORT TO BATTERY
No >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 4
sor 1 connector.
shorted together.
No >> Go To 5
RESISTANCE
Module connector.
Yes >> Go To 6
Yes >> Go To 7

tery.
Yes >> Go To 8

Repair

following steps.
U0176-LOST COMMUNICATION W/RIGHT SIDE SATELLITE ACCELERATION

SENSOR 2
When Monitored:
signal.
Set Condition:
communications.
Possible Causes

Diagnostic Test
1. VERIFY ACTIVE DTC U0176-LOST COMMUNICATION W/RIGHT SIDE SATELLITE ACCELERATION

SENSOR 2
be disconnected.
Does the scan tool display an active: U0176-LOST COMMUNICATION W/RIGHT SIDE SATELLITE ACCEL-
ERATION SENSOR 2?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Go To 9
SHORT TO BATTERY
No >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 4
sor 2 connector.
shorted together.
No >> Go To 5
RESISTANCE
Controller C2 connector.
Yes >> Go To 6
Yes >> Go To 7

tery.
Yes >> Go To 8

View Repair
Repair

following steps.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

MODULE
test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.
*DIAGNOSIS AND CHECKOUT PROCEDURE FOR SEAT WEIGHT SENSORS

1. VERIFY COMPLAINT
Move the front passenger seat to the full rear position. Verify that the seat is empty, the seat back is in the normal
upright position, and that the seat is not interfering with any interior components.
Verify that all related connectors are properly seated and locked.
With the scan tool in OCM, select Data Display and note the Passenger Seat Weight Sensor voltage for all four
sensors (Left Front, Right Front, Left Rear and Right Rear).
Move the front passenger seat to the mid track position.
Using the scan tool, note the Passenger Seat Weight Sensor voltage for all four sensors.
Move the front passenger seat to the full forward position.
Using the scan tool, note the Passenger Seat Weight Sensor voltage for all four sensors. The voltage should be
from 1.4 to 3.6 volts for each sensor in each position (full rear, mid track, and full forward).
Is any sensors voltage reading out of the acceptable range in any position?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Perform test B1BA7 Occupant Classification System Verification Required. If the test passes, the seat
weight sensing system is working properly. Return to the procedure that directed you to this procedure.
2. CHECKING FOR BENT FLOOR PAN

Loosen all of the mounting screws retaining the front passenger seat to the vehicle crossmembers, but do not
remove them. Verify that the seat is loose and that no binding exists between the seat and the crossmembers.
Move the front passenger seat to the full rear position and then to the full forward position.
Tighten all of the mounting screws to specification. Refer to 23 - BODY/SEATS.
Move the front passenger seat to the full rear position.
Move the front passenger seat to the mid track position.
Move the front passenger seat to the full forward position.
from 1.4 to 3.6 volts for each sensor in each position.
Is any sensors voltage reading out of the acceptable range in any position?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Perform test B1BA7 Occupant Classification System Verification Required. If the test passes, the seat
weight sensing system is working properly. Return to the procedure that directed you to this procedure.
3. CHECKING SEAT TO RISER STRESS

Loosen all of the mounting screws retaining the front passenger seat track to the riser, but do not remove them.
Verify that the seat track is loose and that no binding exists between the seat track and the risers.
from 1.5 to 3.5 volts for each sensor.
Is any sensors voltage reading out of the acceptable range?
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Visually inspect for damaged or bent risers and crossmembers. Also, verify that the riser holes line up
with the seat mounts in the crossmembers.
If riser damage is apparent, replace the risers in accordance with the Service Information. Then, reinstall
the Seat Weight Sensors, and Go To 6.
If crossmember or floorpan damage is present, repair or replace the components as necessary in accor-
dance with the Service Information. Reinstall the seat in the vehicle in accordance with the Service
Information. Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool in OCM, select More Options, select System Tests,
and select Occupant Classification Module System Verification Test. Run the test by following the direc-
tions displayed on the scan tool. When the test is complete, Go To 1.
4. TEST SEAT FRAME

Remove the front passenger seat from the risers in accordance with the Service Information. Return the risers to
their normal mounting position.
Yes >> Go To 5
No >> Visually inspect for damaged or bent risers, a damaged or bent seat and seat structure, and damaged
or bent seat tracks. Also, verify that the holes in the center of the sensors line up with the seat track
holes and that the seat track position locating tabs are locked in the same parallel slots. If riser damage
is apparent, replace the risers in accordance with the Service Information. Then, reinstall the Seat
Weight Sensors, and Go To 6.
If seat or seat track damage is present, replace the components as necessary in accordance with the
Service Information. Then, Go To 7
5. TEST SENSOR
Loosen the mounting screws of all of the Seat Weight Sensors, but do not remove them. Verify that the sensors are
loose and that no binding exists between the sensors and the risers.
Yes >> Replace any Seat Weight Sensors that have an unacceptable voltage reading in accordance with the
Service Information. Then, Go To 6.
No >> Replace the risers in accordance with the Service Information. Then, reinstall the Seat Weight Sensors,
and Go To 6
6. CHECKING FOR IMPROPER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR TORQUE

Tighten all of the Seat Weight Sensor mounting screws to specification. Refer to 23 - BODY/SEATS.
Yes >> Loosen the mounting screws of all Seat Weight Sensors with an unacceptable voltage reading, and
repeat Steps 5 and 6.
No >> Go To 7
7. TEST SEAT TRACKS

Mount the front passenger seat on the risers in accordance with service information.
Yes >> Replace the seat track in accordance with the Service Information. Verify that no binding exists between
the seat and risers. Then, repeat Steps 6 and 7.
No >>
Reinstall the seat in the vehicle in accordance with the Service Information. Turn the ignition on. With
the scan tool in OCM, select More Options, select System Tests, and select Occupant Classification
Module System Verification Test. Run the test by following the instructions displayed by the scan tool.
When the test is complete, Go To 1
*OCS VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1

1.
1. Remove any special tools or jumper wires and reconnect all previously disconnected components - except the
Battery.
WARNING: TO AVOID PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH, TURN THE IGNITION ON THEN RECONNECT THE
BATTERY.
2. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector - use the most current software available.
3. With the scan tool to erase stored DTCs in all airbag system modules.
4. Turn the ignition off, and wait 15 seconds, then turn the ignition on.
5. Wait one minute, and read active codes and if there are none present read the stored codes.
6. Note: Read the DTCs in all airbag system related modules.
7. If the scan tool shows any active or stored codes, return to the Table of Content and follow path specified for that
trouble code. If no active or stored codes are present, the repair is complete.
Are any DTCs present or is the original condition still present?
Yes >> Repair is not complete, refer to appropriate symptom list.
*ORC VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1

1.
1. Remove any special tools or jumper wires and reconnect all previously disconnected components - except the
Battery.
WARNING: TO AVOID PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH, TURN THE IGNITION ON THEN RECONNECT THE
BATTERY.
2. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector - use the most current software available.
3. With the scan tool to erase stored DTCs in all airbag system modules.
4. Turn the ignition off, and wait 15 seconds, then turn the ignition on.
5. Wait one minute, and read active codes and if there are none present read the stored codes.
6. Note: If equipped with Airbag On - Off switch, read the DTCs in all switch positions.
7. Note: Read the DTCs in all airbag system related modules.
8. If the scan tool shows any active or stored codes, return to the Table of Contents and follow path specified for
that trouble code. If no active or stored codes are present, the repair is complete.
Are any DTCs present or is the original condition still present?
Yes >> Repair is not complete, refer to appropriate symptom list.
U1414-IMPLAUSIBLE/MISSING ECU CONFIGURATION DATA

When Monitored:
With the ignition on. The ORC on board diagnostics continuously monitors the CAN Bus message from the
FCM containing the ORC Configuration Data.
Set Condition:
This DTC will set if the appropriate CAN Bus message is not received by the ORC.
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1. FRONT CONTROL MODULE FAILURE

Does the scan tool display any Front Control Module DTCs?
Yes >> Select appropriate symptom from Symptom List. Repair all FCM active DTCs and before diagnosing the
ORC DTCs.
Perform the *AIRBAG SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
U1415-IMPLAUSIBLE/MISSING VEHICLE CONFIGURATION DATA

When Monitored:
With the ignition on. The ORC on board diagnostics loads the ORC Configuration Data from the FCM CAN
Bus message.
Set Condition:
This DTC will set if the CAN Bus message was received but the information is invalid or corrupt.
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1. OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER

the proper precautions can result in accidental airbag deployment and personal injury or death.
Disconnect the ORC harness connector(s).
Repair
Perform the *AIRBAG SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
LX RESTRAINTS - SERVICE INFORMATION 8O - 363
RESTRAINTS - SERVICE INFORMATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
RESTRAINTS - SERVICE INFORMATION OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
AIRBAG SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
HANDLING AIRBAGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
SERVICE AFTER AN AIRBAG DEPLOYMENT . 369 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER
HANDLING NON-DEPLOYED DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
CHILD RESTRAINT ANCHOR PASSENGER AIRBAG
CLOCKSPRING REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 SEAT BELT AND RETRACTOR
CLOCKSPRING CENTERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
CURTAIN AIRBAG SEAT BELT BUCKLE
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 SEAT BELT TENSIONER
DRIVER AIRBAG OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
DRIVER AIRBAG TRIM COVER INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR
FRONT SEAT BELT HEIGHT ADJUSTER OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
IMPACT SENSOR
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
8O - 364 RESTRAINTS - SERVICE INFORMATION LX
RESTRAINTS - SERVICE INFORMATION

DESCRIPTION
The Occupant Restraint System include both active and passive types. Active restraints are those which require the
vehicle occupants to take some action to employ, such as fastening a seat belt; while passive restraints require no
action by the vehicle occupants to be employed.
ACTIVE RESTRAINTS
The active restraints include:
Front Seat Belts - Both front seating positions are equipped with three-point seat belt systems employing
lower B-pillar mounted inertia latch-type emergency locking retractors, height-adjustable upper B-pillar mounted
turning loops, a traveling lower seat belt anchor secured to the outboard side of the seat frame, and a traveling
end-release seat belt buckle secured to the inboard side of the seat frame. The driver side front seat belt
retractor includes an integral seat belt switch that detects whether the driver side front seat belt has been
fastened.
Second Row Seat Belts - All three second row seating positions are equipped with three-point seat belt sys-
tems. The outboard seating position belts employ lower C-pillar mounted inertia latch-type emergency locking
retractors, self-cinching latch plates for compatibility with child seats, fixed lower seat belt anchors secured to
the floor panel. The center position retractor is secured within the center rear seat back panel, and the fixed
lower seat belt anchor and the fixed end-release buckle are both secured to the floor panel.
Child Restraint Anchors - All vehicles are equipped with three, fixed-position, child seat upper tether anchors
for the second row seating. These upper anchors are integral to the rear shelf panel on sedans, and the back
of each second row seat back on wagons. Two lower anchors are also provided for each second row seating
position. These lower anchors are accessed from the front of the rear seat where the seat back meets the seat
cushion.
PASSIVE RESTRAINTS
The passive restraints include the following:
Dual Front Airbags - Multistage driver and front
passenger airbags are standard in this model.
This airbag system is a passive, inflatable, Sup-
plemental Restraint System (SRS) and vehicles
with this equipment can be readily identified by
the SRS - AIRBAG logo molded into the driver
airbag trim cover in the center of the steering
wheel and also into the passenger airbag door
on the top of the instrument panel above the
glove box. Vehicles with the airbag system can
also be identified by the airbag indicator, which
will illuminate in the Electro-Mechanical Instru-
ment Cluster (EMIC) for about seven seconds as
a bulb test each time the ignition switch is turned
to the On position. A pyrotechnic-type seat belt
tensioner is also integral to the driver and pas-
senger front seat belt retractors to work in conjunction with the dual front airbags.
Occupant Classification System - Vehicles manufactured for sale in North America (except Mexico) also
include an Occupant Classification System (OCS) with components that are located on the front seats. These
components include an Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and four seat weight sensors on the passenger
seat, and a seat track position sensor on the driver seat. Vehicles equipped with the OCS components can be
readily identified by a passenger airbag disabled indicator located just above the radio, between the a/c outlets
on the instrument panel.
Curtain Airbags - Curtain airbags are available when it is also equipped with dual front airbags. This airbag
system is a passive, inflatable, Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) and can be readily identified by a
molded identification trim button with the SRS - AIRBAG logo located on the headliner above each B-pillar.
The supplemental restraint system includes the follow-

ing major components, which are described in further
detail elsewhere in this service information:
Airbag Indicator - The airbag indicator is integral to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC), which
is located on the instrument panel in front of the driver.
Clockspring - The clockspring is located near the top of the steering column, directly beneath the steering
wheel.
Curtain Airbag - In vehicles equipped with this option, a curtain airbag is secured to each inside roof side rail,
and extends from the A-pillar to the D-pillar. The curtain airbags are concealed above the headliner trim.
Driver Airbag - The driver airbag is located in the center of the steering wheel, beneath the driver airbag trim
cover.
Driver Knee Blocker - The driver knee blocker is a structural unit secured to the back side of and integral to
the instrument panel steering column opening cover.
Front Impact Sensor - Two front impact sensors are used on vehicles equipped with dual front airbags, one
left side and one right side. One sensor is located on the back side of each vertical member of the radiator
support.
Occupant Classification Module - Vehicles equipped with the Occupant Classification System (OCS) include
an Occupant Classification Module (OCM) which is secured to the underside of the passenger side front seat
cushion frame.
Occupant Restraint Controller - The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) is located on a mount on the floor
panel transmission tunnel in front of the transmission gear selector, and is concealed below the instrument
panel.
Passenger Airbag - The passenger airbag is located in the instrument panel, beneath the passenger airbag
door on the top of the instrument panel above the glove box on the passenger side of the vehicle.
Passenger Airbag Disabled Indicator - The Occupant Classification System (OCS) includes a passenger air-
bag disabled indicator which is located just above the radio in the instrument panel center stack, between the
a/c outlets.
Passenger Knee Blocker - The passenger knee blocker is a structural reinforcement that is integral to and
concealed within the glove box door.
Seat Belt Tensioner - A seat belt tensioner is integral to both front seat belt retractor units on vehicles
equipped with dual front airbags. The seat belt retractor and tensioner units are secured to the right and left
inner B-pillars and concealed beneath the lower B-pillar trim.
Seat Track Position Sensor - The Occupant Classification System (OCS) includes two seat track position
sensors. One sensor is located on the inboard side of the outboard seat adjuster track on both the driver and
the passenger front seats.
Seat Weight Sensor - Vehicles equipped with the Occupant Classification System (OCS) include four seat
weight sensors, one on each corner of the passenger side front seat between the seat cushion frame and the
seat adjuster tracks.
Side Impact Sensor - Four side impact sensors are used on vehicles equipped with the curtain airbags, two
on each side of the vehicle. One sensor is located near each right and left side B-pillar and C-pillar concealed
behind the interior trim.
The ORC, the OCM, and the EMIC each contain a microprocessor and programming that allow them to communi-
cate with each other using the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. This method of communication is used by
the ORC for control of the airbag indicator in the EMIC. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MOD-
ULES/COMMUNICATION - DESCRIPTION).
OPERATION
ACTIVE RESTRAINTS
The primary passenger restraints in this or any other vehicle are the seat belts and child restraint anchors. Seat
belts and child restraint anchors are referred to as an active restraint because the vehicle occupants are required to
physically fasten and properly adjust these restraints in order to benefit from them. See the owners manual in the
vehicle glove box for more information on the features, use and operation of all of the factory-installed active
restraints.
PASSIVE RESTRAINTS
The passive restraints are referred to as a supplemental restraint system because they were designed and are
intended to enhance the protection for the occupants of the vehicle only when used in conjunction with the seat
belts. They are referred to as passive restraints because the vehicle occupants are not required to do anything to
make them operate; however, the vehicle occupants must be wearing their seat belts in order to obtain the maxi-
mum safety benefit from the factory-installed supplemental restraint system.
The supplemental restraint system electrical circuits are continuously monitored and controlled by a microprocessor
and software contained within the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). An airbag indicator in the ElectroMechanical
Instrument Cluster (EMIC) illuminates for about seven seconds as a bulb test each time the ignition switch is turned
to the On or Start positions. Following the bulb test, the airbag indicator is turned on or off by the ORC to indicate
the status of the supplemental restraint system. If the airbag indicator comes on at any time other than during the
bulb test, it indicates that there is a problem in the supplemental restraint system electrical circuits. Such a problem
may cause airbags not to deploy when required, or to deploy when not required.
Deployment of the supplemental restraints depends upon the angle and severity of an impact. Deployment is not
based upon vehicle speed; rather, deployment is based upon the rate of deceleration as measured by the forces of
gravity (G force) upon the impact sensors. When an impact is severe enough, the microprocessor in the ORC sig-
nals the inflator of the appropriate airbags to deploy their cushions. The front seat belt tensioners are provided with
a deployment signal by the ORC in conjunction with the front airbags.
During a frontal vehicle impact, the knee blockers work in concert with properly fastened and adjusted seat belts to
restrain both the driver and the front seat passenger in the proper position for an airbag deployment. The knee
blockers also absorb and distribute the crash energy from the driver and the front seat passenger to the structure
of the instrument panel. The seat belt tensioners remove the slack from the front seat belts to provide further assur-
ance that the driver and front seat passenger are properly positioned and restrained for an airbag deployment.
The airbag deployment and deflation occur very rapidly. In a typical 48 kilometer-per-hour (30 mile-per-hour) barrier
impact, from the moment of impact until the airbags are fully inflated takes about 40 milliseconds. Within one to two
seconds from the moment of impact, the airbags are almost entirely deflated. The times cited for these events are
approximations, which apply only to a barrier impact at the given speed. Actual times will vary somewhat, depending
upon the vehicle speed, impact angle, severity of the impact, and the type of collision.
When the ORC monitors a problem in any of the dual front airbag system circuits or components, including the seat
belt tensioners, it stores a fault code or Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) in its memory circuit and sends an elec-
tronic message to the EMIC to turn on the airbag indicator. Proper testing of the supplemental restraint system
components, the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus, the electronic message inputs to and outputs from the
EMIC or the ORC, as well as the retrieval or erasure of a DTC from the ORC or the EMIC requires the use of a
diagnostic scan tool and the appropriate diagnostic information.
See the owners manual in the vehicle glove box for more information on the features, use and operation of all of
the passive restraints.
OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM
In vehicles equipped with the Occupant Classification System (OCS), the OCS automatically suppresses or enables
passenger airbag and seat belt tensioner operation based upon whether or not the passenger front seat is occupied
and, if the seat is occupied, classifies the size of the occupant and whether the seat is occupied by a child seat.
The OCS has an Occupant Classification Module (OCM) that monitors inputs from the seat weight sensors under
the passenger side front seat cushion and from the seat track position sensors on the passenger side and driver
side seat adjuster tracks. Based upon those inputs the microprocessor within the OCM classifies the occupant of the
passenger front seat, and the proximity of each front seat to the front airbags. The OCM then sends electronic
occupant classification messages to the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). The microprocessor and program-
ming of the ORC determines whether to enable or disable the deployment circuits for the passenger airbag and seat
belt tensioner; and, if enabled, what force level should be used to deploy each front airbag.
The OCS electrical circuits and components are continuously monitored by the OCM, and the OCM is continuously
monitored by the ORC. A passenger airbag disabled indicator is located in the instrument panel center stack just
above the radio, between the a/c outlets. This indicator receives battery current whenever the ignition switch is in
the On or Start positions, and illuminates only when the ORC pulls the indicator control circuit to ground. The indi-
cator illuminates for about seven seconds as a bulb test each time the ignition switch is turned to the On or Start
positions. Following the bulb test, the indicator is turned on or off by the ORC based upon the electronic occupant
classification messages received from the OCM. This indicator is illuminated whenever the seat is occupied and
passenger airbag and seat belt tensioner operation has been suppressed, and is turned off whenever the seat is
empty or when the seat is occupied and the passenger airbag and seat belt tensioner are enabled.
When the OCM monitors a problem in any of the OCS circuits or components, it stores a fault code or DTC in its
memory circuit and sends an electronic message to the ORC. The ORC then sends an electronic message to the
Electro-Mechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) to turn on the airbag indicator. If for any reason the OCM is unable to
classify the occupant it sends an electronic message to the ORC, and the ORC suppresses passenger airbag and
seat belt tensioner operation. Proper testing of the OCS components, the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus,
the electronic message inputs to and outputs from the OCM, the EMIC or the ORC, as well as the retrieval or
erasure of a DTC from the OCM, the ORC or the EMIC requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool and the appro-
priate diagnostic information.
See the owners manual in the vehicle glove box for more information on the features, use and operation of the
OCS.
WARNING
Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable before beginning any airbag system component diagno-
sis, testing, removal, or installation procedures. Allow system capacitor to discharge for two minutes before
beginning any component service. This will disable the airbag system. Failure to disable the airbag system
may result in accidental airbag deployment, personal injury, or death.
Do not place an intact undeployed airbag face down on a solid surface. The airbag will propel into the air
if accidentally deployed and may result in personal injury or death.
When carrying or handling an undeployed airbag, the trim side (face) of the airbag should be pointing
towards the body to minimize possibility of injury if accidental deployment occurs. Failure to do this may
result in personal injury or death.
Replace airbag system components with MoparT replacement parts. Substitute parts may appear inter-
changeable, but internal differences may result in inferior occupant protection. Failure to do so may result
in occupant personal injury or death.
Wear safety glasses, rubber gloves, and long sleeved clothing when cleaning powder residue from vehicle
after an airbag deployment. Powder residue emitted from a deployed airbag can cause skin irritation. Flush
affected area with cool water if irritation is experienced. If nasal or throat irritation is experienced, exit the
vehicle for fresh air until the irritation ceases. If irritation continues, see a physician.
Do not use a replacement airbag that is not in the original packaging. This may result in improper deploy-
ment, personal injury, or death.
The factory installed fasteners, screws and bolts used to fasten airbag components have a special coating
and are specifically designed for the airbag system. Do not use substitute fasteners. Use only original
equipment fasteners listed in the parts catalog when fastener replacement is required.
During, and following, any child restraint anchor service, due to impact event or vehicle repair, carefully
inspect all mounting hardware, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. If a
child restraint anchor is found damaged in any way, the anchor must be replaced. Failure to do this may
result in personal injury or death.
Deployed and nondeployed airbags may or may not have live pyrotechnic material within the airbag inflator.
Do not dispose of driver/passenger/curtain airbags or seat belt tensioners unless you are sure of complete
deployment. Refer to the Hazardous Substance Control System for proper disposal. Dispose of deployed
airbags and tensioners consistent with state, provincial, local, and federal regulations.
After any airbag component testing or service, do not connect the battery negative cable (Refer to 8 - ELEC-
TRICAL/RESTRAINTS - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - AIRBAG SYSTEM) Personal injury or death may result if
the system test is not performed first.
If the vehicle is equipped with the Occupant Classification System (OCS), do not connect the battery neg-
ative cable before performing the OCS Verification test using the scan tool and the appropriate diagnostic
information. Personal injury or death may result if the system test is not performed properly.
Never replace both the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) and the Occupant Classification Module (OCM)
at the same time. If both require replacement, replace one, then perform the airbag system test (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/RESTRAINTS - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - AIRBAG SYSTEM) before replacing the other.
Both the ORC and the OCM store OCS calibration data, which they transfer to one another when one of
them is replaced. If both are replaced at the same time, an irreversible fault will be set in both modules and
the OCS may malfunction and result in personal injury or death.
If both require replacement, replace one, then perform the airbag system test (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/
RESTRAINTS - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - AIRBAG SYSTEM) before replacing the other. Failure to do this
may result in personal injury or death.
If equipped with OCS, the seat weight sensor is a sensitive, calibrated unit and must be handled carefully.
Do not drop or handle roughly. If dropped or damaged, replace with another sensor. Failure to do so may
result in occupant injury or death.
If equipped with OCS, the front passenger seat must be handled carefully as well. When removing the seat,
be careful when setting on floor not to drop. If dropped, the sensor may be inoperative, could result in
occupant injury, or possibly death.
If equipped with OCS, when the passenger front seat is on the floor, no one should sit in the front passen-
ger seat. This uneven force may damage the sensing ability of the seat weight sensors. If sat on and dam-
aged, the sensor may be inoperative, could result in occupant injury, or possibly death.

AIRBAG SYSTEM
1. With the battery negative cable disconnected, connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC).
2. Turn the ignition key to the ON position, then exit vehicle with the scan tool.
3. After checking that no one is inside the vehicle, connect the battery negative remote terminal.
4. Read and record the ACTIVE Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) data.
5. Read and record any STORED DTCs.
6. Refer to the proper diagnostic information if any DTCs are found in Step 4 and Step 5.
7. If the airbag warning lamp either fails to light, or goes ON and stays ON, there is a system malfunction. To test
the airbag warning lamp (bulb) operation in the cluster (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT CLUSTER -
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING). Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information for any other system problems.
STANDARD PROCEDURE
HANDLING AIRBAGS
DEPLOYED AIRBAG
WARNING: The vehicle interior may contain a very small amount of powder, a by-product of airbag deploy-
ment. This powder can irritate the skin, eyes, nose and throat. Wear safety glasses, rubber gloves, and long
sleeved clothing when cleaning any of the powder residue from the vehicle. If you find that the cleanup is
irritating your skin, run cool water over the affected area. Also, if you experience nasal or throat irritation,
exit the vehicle for fresh air until the irritation ceases. If irritation continues, see a physician.
UNDEPLOYED AIRBAG
WARNING: The airbags must be stored in its original special container until used for service. At no time
should a source of electricity be permitted near the inflator on the back of an airbag. When carrying or
handling an undeployed airbag, the trim side of the airbag should be pointing toward the body to minimize
the possibility of personal injury or death if accidental deployment occurs. Do not place undeployed airbag
face down on a solid surface, the airbag will propel into the air if accidental deployment occurs.
SERVICE AFTER AN AIRBAG DEPLOYMENT

DRIVER AIRBAG
After a Driver Airbag has been deployed due to a collision, the following MUST be replaced:
Driver Airbag
Clockspring Assembly
Steering Wheel
Complete Steering Column Assembly w/Lower Steering Column Coupler
All other airbag and vehicle components should be closely inspected following any airbag deployment, and should
be replaced when visible damage is incurred.
WARNING: Do not connect the battery negative cable (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/RESTRAINTS - DIAGNOSIS
AND TESTING - AIRBAG SYSTEM). Personal injury or death may result if the system test is not performed
first.
PASSENGER AIRBAG
After a Passenger Airbag has been deployed due to a collision. the following MUST be replaced:
Passenger Airbag
Instrument Panel Top Pad Assembly
first.
CURTAIN AIRBAG
After a Curtain Airbag has been deployed due to a collision, the following MUST be replaced:
Curtain Airbag Assembly
Headliner
A, B, and C-Pillar Trim on deployed side.
first.
OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM (OCS)

After an impact event, either front, rear, or side, the OCS system components need to be inspected and replaced if
found to be damaged.
This includes:
Occupant Classification Module (OCM)
Passenger Airbag Disabled Indicator
Seat Weight Sensor
WARNING: Never replace both the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) and the Occupant Classification
Module (OCM) at the same time. If both require replacement, replace one, then perform the Airbag System
test (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/RESTRAINTS - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - AIRBAG SYSTEM) before replac-
ing the other. Both the ORC and the OCM store Occupant Classification System (OCS) calibration data,
which they transfer to one another when one of them is replaced. If both are replaced at the same time, an
irreversible fault will be set in both modules and the OCS may malfunction and result in personal injury or
death.
Whether replaced or not, the OCS must be re-zeroed to make sure that the system in within proper parameters to
sense the occupants weight correctly.
first.
WARNING: Following successful completion of the Airbag System test procedure, the Occupant Classifica-
tion System Verification Test must be done using a scan tool and the appropriate diagnostic information.
Personal injury or death may result if the system test is not performed.
SEAT BELTS AND TENSIONERS

After a frontal impact where an airbag has been deployed due to a collision, the following MUST be replaced:
Front Seat Belt and Retractor (driver and passenger) with integral Tensioners.
first.
All other seat belts should be closely inspected for cuts, tears, fraying, or damage in any way following any frontal
impact or airbag deployment. The other seat belts are to be replaced when visible damage is incurred. Inspect the
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH) child restraint anchors for damage after an impact event and
replace as needed.
CLEAN UP PROCEDURE
Roll or fold the airbag towards its mounting point (i.e.
instrument panel, steering wheel, knee blocker, cur-
tain, or seat back). Then tape the ripped cover over
the deployed airbag if applicable.
Use a vacuum cleaner to remove any residual powder
from the vehicle interior. Work from the outside in to
avoid kneeling or sitting in a contaminated area. Vac-
uum the heater and A/C outlets as well. If the heater
or air conditioner was in RECIRC mode at time of air-
bag deployment, operate blower motor on low speed
and vacuum powder residue expelled from the heater
and A/C outlets. Multiple vacuum cleaning may be
necessary to decontaminate the interior of the vehicle.
HANDLING NON-DEPLOYED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTS

At no time should any source of electricity be permitted near the inflator on the back of a non-deployed airbag or
seat belt tensioner. When carrying a non-deployed airbag, the trim cover or airbag cushion side of the unit should
be pointed away from the body to minimize injury in the event of an accidental deployment. If the airbag unit is
placed on a bench or any other surface, the trim cover or airbag cushion side of the unit should be face up to
minimize movement in the event of an accidental deployment.
When handling a non-deployed seat belt tensioner, take proper care to keep fingers out from under the retractor
cover and away from the seat belt webbing where it exits from the retractor cover. In addition, the supplemental
restraint system should be disarmed whenever any steering wheel, steering column, seat belt tensioner, airbag,
impact sensor, or instrument panel components require diagnosis or service. Failure to observe this warning could
result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury.
All damaged, faulty or non-deployed airbags and seat belt tensioners which are replaced on vehicles are to be
handled and disposed of properly. If an airbag or seat belt tensioner unit is faulty or damaged and non-deployed,
refer to the Hazardous Substance Control System for proper disposal. Dispose of all non-deployed and deployed
airbags and seat belt tensioners in a manner consistent with state, provincial, local and federal regulations.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT STORAGE

Airbags and seat belt tensioners must be stored in their original, special container until they are used for service.
Also, they must be stored in a clean, dry environment; away from sources of extreme heat, sparks, and high elec-
trical energy. Always place or store any airbag on a surface with its trim cover or airbag cushion side facing up, to
minimize movement in case of an accidental deployment.
SPECIFICATIONS
RESTRAINTS
DESCRIPTION N-m Ft. Lbs. In. Lbs.

Curtain airbag inflator to C/D-pillar bolt 11 8 97
Curtain airbag roof side rail retaining screws 5 4 44
Driver airbag retaining bolts 10 7 89
Front seat belt anchor nut 37 27.5 328
Front seat belt buckle retaining nut 43 31.5 381
Front seat belt guide retaining screw 3 2 27
Front seat belt height adjuster retaining bolts 32 23.5 283
Front seat belt retractor retaining bolt 32 23.5 283
Front seat belt turning loop retaining bolt 40 30 354
Impact sensor retaining screws 7 5 62
Left and right side passenger airbag mounting screws 3 2 27
Occupant classification module retaining screws 2 1 18
Occupant restraint controller retaining screws 11 8 97
Passenger airbag mounting bolts 12 9 106
Rear center seat belt retractor anchor nut 34 25 301
Rear seat belt anchor bolt 32 23.5 283
Rear seat belt buckle retaining nut 34 25 301
Rear seat belt turning loop retaining bolt 40 29.5 354
Seat weight sensor - adjuster to riser center retaining nut 45 33 398
Seat weight sensor to seat riser nuts 40 29.5 354
Sedan - Rear center seat belt retractor retaining nut 34 25 301
Sedan - Rear seat belt retractor retaining bolt 32 23 283
Wagon - Rear seat belt retractor retaining bolt 34 25 301
Wagon - Rear center seat belt retractor retaining nut 34 25 301
CHILD RESTRAINT ANCHOR

DESCRIPTION
The Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren, or LATCH
child restraint anchorage system provides for the
installation of suitable child restraints in certain seating
positions without using the seat belt provided for that
seating position. The second row seats are equipped
with a fixed-position child restraint upper tether anchor
for both the center and the two outboard seating posi-
tions, and child restraint lower anchors for all three
seating positions.
The three upper tether anchors are integral to the rear

shelf panel on sedans and the seat back frame on
wagons. These anchors are each constructed from a
heavy-gauge steel wire loop. The child restraint upper
tether anchors cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if
faulty or damaged, they must be replaced.
The lower anchors (1) are permanently mounted to

the rear floor pan beneath the seat. These anchors
are also constructed from a heavy-gauge steel wire
loop welded to the floor pan. They are each accessed
from the front of their respective seats, at each side
where the seat back meets the seat cushion. These
lower anchors cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if
faulty or damaged, they must be replaced as a unit.
OPERATION
See the owners manual in the vehicle glove box for more information on the proper use of all of the factory-installed
child restraint anchors.
CLOCKSPRING
DESCRIPTION
The clockspring assembly is secured with three
screws (1) onto the top of the Steering Column Con-
trol Module (SCCM) (Refer to 19 - STEERING/COL-
UMN/STEERING COLUMN CONTROL MODULE -
DESCRIPTION) near the top of the steering column
behind the steering wheel.
The clockspring consists of a flat, round molded plas-

tic case. Within the plastic case is a spool-like molded
plastic rotor with a hub. The surface of the rotor hub
has a large center hole. Within the plastic case and
wound around the rotor spool is a long ribbon-like
tape that consists of several thin copper wire leads
sandwiched between two thin plastic membranes. The
outer end of the tape terminates at the connector ter-
minals that align themselves into the SCCM self-dock-
ing connector that faces the instrument panel, while
the inner end of the tape terminates at the pigtail
wires and connector receptacles on the hub of the
clockspring rotor that face the steering wheel.
Service replacement clocksprings are shipped pre-

centered and with the screws backed out and holding
the clockspring into place. If reusing a clockspring or
installing a new one that you are unsure if it is cen-
tered or not, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/RE-
STRAINTS/CLOCKSPRING - STANDARD
PROCEDURE - CLOCKSPRING CENTERING).
The clockspring cannot be repaired. If the clockspring
is faulty, damaged, or if the driver airbag has been
deployed, the clockspring must be replaced.
OPERATION
The clockspring is a mechanical electrical circuit component that is used to provide continuous electrical continuity
between the fixed instrument panel wire harness and the electrical components mounted on or in the rotating steer-
ing wheel. On this model the rotating electrical components include the:
Driver Airbag
Horn Switch
Steering Wheel Switches (if the vehicle is so equipped)
The clockspring case is positioned and secured to Steering Column Control Module (SCCM) mounting housing near
the top of the steering column. The connector terminals on the tail of the fixed clockspring case connect the clock-
spring to the vehicle electrical system through the self-docking connector in the instrument panel wire harness.
The clockspring rotor is movable and is keyed to the steering column shaft that is molded onto the rotor hub. The
lobe on the turn signal cancel cam on the lower surface of the clockspring rotor hub contact a turn signal cancel
actuator of the multi-function switch to provide automatic turn signal cancellation.
Two short, yellow-sleeved pigtail wires on the upper surface of the clockspring rotor connect the clockspring to the
multistage driver airbag, while a steering wheel wire harness connects the two connector receptacles on the upper
surface of the clockspring rotor to the horn switch feed pigtail wire connector and, if the vehicle is so equipped, to
the optional steering wheel switches on the steering wheel.
Like the clockspring in a timepiece, the clockspring tape has travel limits and can be damaged by being wound too
tightly during full stop-to-stop steering wheel rotation. To prevent this from occurring, the clockspring is centered
when it is installed on the steering column. Centering the clockspring indexes the clockspring tape to the movable
steering components so that the tape can operate within its designed travel limits. However, if the clockspring is
removed from the steering column or if the steering shaft is disconnected from the steering gear, the clockspring
spool can change position relative to the movable steering components. The clockspring must be re-centered fol-
lowing completion of this service or the tape may be damaged.
Service replacement clocksprings are shipped pre-centered. The screws that retain the clockspring to the SCCM
should not be removed until the clockspring has been installed on the SCCM. If the screws have been removed
before the clockspring is installed on the SCCM, the clockspring centering procedure must be performed (Refer to
8 - ELECTRICAL/RESTRAINTS/CLOCKSPRING - STANDARD PROCEDURE - CLOCKSPRING CENTERING).
The clockspring is located within the SCCM. If the clockspring has to be replaced (Refer to 19 - STEERING/COL-
UMN/STEERING COLUMN CONTROL MODULE - DISASSEMBLY).
STANDARD PROCEDURE
CLOCKSPRING CENTERING
If the rotating tape (wire coil) in the clockspring is not
positioned properly with the steering wheel and the
front wheels, the clockspring may fail. The following
procedure MUST BE USED to center the clockspring
if it is not known to be properly positioned, or if the
front wheels were moved from the straight ahead posi-
tion.
NOTE: Before starting this procedure, be certain

to turn the steering wheel until the front wheels
are in the straight-ahead position.
1. Position steering wheel and front wheels straight

ahead.
2. Remove the Steering Column Control Module (SCCM) (Refer to 19 - STEERING/COLUMN/STEERING COLUMN
CONTROL MODULE - REMOVAL).
3. Remove the clockspring (Refer to 19 - STEERING/
COLUMN/STEERING COLUMN CONTROL MOD-
ULE - DISASSEMBLY).
4. The clockspring can rotate approximately 5 3/4
turns from lock to lock. To be properly centered,
rotate the clockspring rotor clockwise until the rotor
stops. Do not apply excessive force.
5. From the end of travel, rotate the rotor counter-
clockwise two turns and then keep going a little
more until the wires end up on the right side of the
column shaft (at the 3 oclock position).
6. Install the SCCM (Refer to 19 - STEERING/COL-

UMN/STEERING COLUMN CONTROL MODULE -
INSTALLATION)
WARNING: Do not connect the battery negative

cable (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/RESTRAINTS -
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING). Personal injury or
death may result if the system test is not per-
formed properly.
CURTAIN AIRBAG
DESCRIPTION
Curtain airbags are available when also equipped with
dual front airbags. These airbags are passive, inflat-
able, Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) compo-
nents, and can be readily identified by a molded
identification trim button with the SRS - AIRBAG logo
located near the top of each upper B-pillar trim panel.
This system is designed to reduce injuries to the vehi-
cle occupants in the event of a side impact collision.
Curtain airbags have two individually controlled curtain

airbags. These airbags are concealed and mounted
above the headliner where they are each secured to
one of the roof side rails. Each folded airbag cushion
extends along the roof rail from the A-pillar at the front
of the vehicle to the D-pillar at the rear of the vehicle.
The airbag cushion is initially secured during installa-
tion with plastic push-in fasteners to the roof rail.
A long tether extends down the A-pillar from the front

of the airbag cushion. A short tether is secured near
the top of the D-pillar.
The hybrid-type inflator for each airbag is secured to
the roof rail at the rear of airbag, back by the C and
D-pillars. The entire assembly is secured to the inside
of the roof rail with screws.
An airbag squib harness connector is routed up to the
rear of the airbag inflator. The body harness then con-
nects the curtain airbag to the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC).
The curtain airbag cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if deployed, faulty, or in any way damaged.
Once a curtain airbag has been deployed, the complete airbag, the headliner, the upper A, B, C and D-pillar trim,
and all other visibly damaged components must be replaced.
OPERATION
Each curtain airbag is deployed individually by an electrical signal generated by the Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) to which it is connected through squib circuits. The hybrid-type inflator assembly for each airbag contains a
small canister of highly compressed inert gas. When the ORC sends the proper electrical signal to the airbag infla-
tor, the electrical energy creates enough heat to ignite chemical pellets within the inflator.
Once ignited, these chemicals burn rapidly and produce the pressure necessary to rupture a containment disk in the
inert gas canister. The inflator and inert gas canister are sealed and connected to a tubular manifold so that all of
the released gas is directed into the folded curtain airbag cushion, causing the cushion to inflate. As the airbag
cushion inflates it will drop down from the roof rail between the edge of the headliner and the side glass/body pillars
to form a curtain-like cushion to protect the vehicle occupants during a side impact collision.
The front and rear tethers keep the airbag cushion taut to the side of the vehicle, thus ensuring that the bag will
deploy in the proper position. Following the airbag deployment, the airbag cushion quickly deflates by venting the
inert gas through the loose weave of the cushion fabric, and the deflated cushion hangs down loosely from the roof
rail.
REMOVAL
NOTE: The sedan and wagon curtain airbags are mounted similar and are removed the same way.

2. Remove the headliner from the vehicle (Refer to 23

- BODY/INTERIOR/HEADLINER - REMOVAL).
3. Disconnect the curtain airbag squib connector (2)
from the inflator (3).
4. Remove the screws (1) that secure the curtain airbag to the spring nuts in the roof side rail.
5. Remove the push pin and unclip the front tether (2)
from the A-pillar (1).
6. Remove the bolt (2) holding the inflator to the

C/D-pillar.
7. The curtain airbag will be held in place with push pins. Release the push pins and remove bag from vehicle.
INSTALLATION
NOTE: The sedan and wagon curtain airbags are mounted similar and are removed the same way.
1. Position the curtain airbag in vehicle along roof side rail and install by fastening to roof side rail with integral push
fasteners.
2. Install the bolt (2) holding the inflator to the C/D-
pillar. Torque bolt to 11 Nm (97 in. lbs.).
3. Clip the front tether (2) to the A-pillar (1) and install
push fastener.
4. Install the screws (1) that secure the curtain airbag to the spring nuts in the roof side rail. Torque screws to 5
Nm (44 in. lbs.).
5. Connect the curtain airbag squib connector (2) to
the inflator (3).
6. Install the headliner into the vehicle (Refer to 23 -
BODY/INTERIOR/HEADLINER - INSTALLATION).

DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - AIRBAG SYSTEM).
Personal injury or death may result if the system
test is not performed first.
DRIVER AIRBAG
DESCRIPTION
The driver airbag used in this model is a multistage,
Next Generation-type that complies with revised fed-
eral airbag standards to deploy with less force than
those used in some prior models. A radial deploying
fabric cushion with internal tethers is used. The airbag
inflator is a dual-initiator, non-azide, pyrotechnic-type
unit with four mounting studs and is secured to the
stamped metal airbag housing by four flanged hex
nuts. Two keyed and color-coded connector recepta-
cles on the driver airbag inflator connect the two infla-
tor initiators to the vehicle electrical system through
two yellow-jacketed, two-wire pigtail harnesses of the
clockspring.
The driver airbag unit cannot be repaired, and must
be replaced if deployed or in any way damaged. The
driver airbag trim cover and horn switch unit may be
disassembled from the driver airbag unit, and is avail-
able for separate service replacement.
The driver airbag protective trim cover (1) is the most

visible part of the driver airbag. The driver airbag is
located in the center of the steering wheel (1), where
it is secured with two screws to the armature of the
four-spoke steering wheel. Concealed beneath the
driver airbag trim cover are the horn switch, the folded
airbag cushion, the airbag cushion retainer, the airbag
housing, the airbag inflator, and the retainers that
secure the inflator to the airbag housing.
The airbag cushion, housing, and inflator are secured
within the trim cover.
The vertical walls of this trim cover have small win-

dows with blocking tabs that are engaged by hook for-
mations around the perimeter of the airbag housing.
Each hook is inserted through one of the windows and
the blocking tab in each window keeps the hook prop-
erly engaged with the trim cover, locking the trim
cover securely into place on the airbag housing.
The resistive membrane-type horn switch is secured
with heat stakes to the inside surface of the driver air-
bag trim cover, between the trim cover and the folded
airbag cushion.
OPERATION
The multistage driver airbag is deployed by electrical signals generated by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
through the driver airbag squib 1 and squib 2 circuits to the two initiators in the airbag inflator. By using two initi-
ators, the airbag can be deployed at multiple levels of force. The force level is controlled by the ORC to suit the
monitored impact conditions by providing one of three delay intervals between the electrical signals provided to the
two initiators. The longer the delay between these signals, the less forcefully the airbag will deploy.
When the ORC sends the proper electrical signals to each initiator, the electrical energy generates enough heat to
initiate a small pyrotechnic charge which, in turn ignites chemical pellets within the inflator. Once ignited, these
chemical pellets burn rapidly and produce a large quantity of inert gas. The inflator is sealed to the back of the
airbag housing and a diffuser in the inflator directs all of the inert gas into the airbag cushion, causing the cushion
to inflate. As the cushion inflates, the driver airbag trim cover will split at predetermined breakout lines, then fold
back out of the way along with the horn switch unit. Following an airbag deployment, the airbag cushion quickly
deflates by venting the inert gas towards the instrument panel through vent holes within the fabric used to construct
the back (steering wheel side) panel of the airbag cushion.
Some of the chemicals used to create the inert gas may be considered hazardous while in their solid state before
they are burned, but they are securely sealed within the airbag inflator. Typically, both initiators are used and all
potentially hazardous chemicals are burned during an airbag deployment event.
The inert gas that is produced when the chemicals are burned is harmless. However, a small amount of residue
from the burned chemicals may cause some temporary discomfort if it contacts the skin, eyes, or breathing pas-
sages. If skin or eye irritation is noted, rinse the affected area with plenty of cool, clean water. If breathing passages
are irritated, move to another area where there is plenty of clean, fresh air to breath. If the irritation is not alleviated
by these actions, contact a physician.
REMOVAL

2. From behind the steering wheel (1), remove the

two screw covers and screws (5) to the driver air-
bag (3).
CAUTION: Do not pull on the horn switch feed pig-

tail wire to disengage the connector from the
driver airbag or to disconnect the horn switch to
steering wheel wire harness connection. Improper
pulling on this pigtail wire or connection can
result in damage to the horn switch membrane or
feed circuit.
3. Carefully pull airbag rearward just far enough to disconnect the two airbag squib connectors (2) and the horn
connector (4).
4. Separate driver airbag from steering column.
NOTE: The driver airbag trim cover is available for service separately. If the horn switch is faulty or the trim
cover is damaged, the airbag cushion assembly may be transferred to a new trim cover. If the airbag is
defective, the entire driver airbag and driver airbag trim cover must be replaced as an assembly.
INSTALLATION
NOTE: The driver airbag trim cover is available for
service separately. If the horn switch is faulty or
the trim cover is damaged, the airbag cushion
assembly may be transferred to a new trim cover.
If the airbag is defective, the entire driver airbag
and driver airbag trim cover must be replaced as
an assembly.
1. Position driver airbag (3) in steering wheel (1) near

mounting location.
2. Connect the two airbag squib connectors (2) and
the horn connector (4).
3. Position the driver airbag mounting screws (2) into
the driver airbag. From behind the steering wheel
(1) install the two screws (5) to the driver airbag.
Torque the two screws (5) to 10 Nm (89 in. lbs.).

DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - AIRBAG SYSTEM). Personal injury or death may result if the system test is not
performed first.
DRIVER AIRBAG TRIM COVER

REMOVAL

CAUTION: Do not pull on the horn switch feed pig-

tail wire to disengage the connector from the
driver airbag or to disconnect the horn switch to
steering wheel wire harness connection. Improper
pulling on this pigtail wire or connection can
result in damage to the horn switch membrane or
feed circuit.
2. Remove the driver airbag (2) (Refer to 8 - ELEC-

TRICAL/RESTRAINTS/DRIVER AIRBAG -
REMOVAL).
3. With driver airbag removed, pick a corner and push down on the inflator (1) or latch hook mounting plate until the
latch hooks (2) push out of the driver airbag cover (3).
4. Remove driver airbag from driver airbag cover.
5. The membrane type horn switch is integral to the driver airbag trim cover. If inoperative, the entire trim cover
must be replaced.
INSTALLATION
1. Place the driver airbag into new driver airbag trim
cover. Be careful not to pinch the airbag cushion
between the latch hook mounting plate and the trim
cover.
NOTE: Make sure that the horn switch wire har-

ness is routed through the cut-out on the side of
the trim cover and positioned in the hook on the
back of the housing. Attach connector to the
housing.
2. Push down on the latch hook mounting plate and

guide the latch hooks into the slots on the driver
airbag cover.
3. Once all the latch hooks have been started, pull

the driver airbag cover away from the driver airbag
to fully seat the latch hooks.
4. Install the driver airbag (2) (Refer to 8 - ELECTRI-
CAL/RESTRAINTS/DRIVER AIRBAG - INSTALLA-
TION). Torque the two screws (1) to 10 Nm (89 in.
lbs.).

FRONT SEAT BELT HEIGHT ADJUSTER

REMOVAL
1. Remove the upper turning loop (3) trim cover (2).
2. Remove the upper turning loop retaining bolt (4).
3. Remove the upper B-pillar trim (Refer to 23 -

BODY/INTERIOR/B-PILLAR TRIM - REMOVAL).
4. Remove the two bolts (1) to the seat belt height

adjuster (2).
INSTALLATION
1. Position height adjuster making sure that indexing
tab is in the proper hole.
2. Install the two mounting bolts (1). Torque bolts to
32 Nm (24 ft. lbs.).
3. Install the upper B-pillar trim (Refer to 23 - BODY/

INTERIOR/B-PILLAR TRIM - INSTALLATION).
4. Position the upper turning loop (3) and install the

retaining bolt (4). Torque bolt to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs.).
5. Install the upper turning loop (3) trim cover (2).
IMPACT SENSOR
DESCRIPTION
FRONT IMPACT SENSORS
Two front impact sensors (1) are used on this model,
one each for the left and right sides of the vehicle.
These sensors are mounted remotely from the impact
sensor that is internal to the Occupant Restraint Con-
troller (ORC). Each front sensor is secured with two
screws (2) to the backs of the right and left vertical
members of the radiator support within the engine
compartment.
The right and left front impact sensors are identical in

construction and calibration. A cavity in the center of
the molded black plastic impact sensor housing con-
tains the electronic circuitry of the sensor which
includes an electronic communication chip and an
electronic impact sensor. Potting material fills the cav-
ity to seal and protect the internal electronic circuitry
and components.
The impact sensors cannot be repaired or adjusted
and, if damaged or faulty, they must be replaced.
SIDE IMPACT SENSORS

Four side impact sensors are used on this model
when it is equipped with the curtain airbags, two each
for the left and right sides of the vehicle. The sedan
and wagon side impact sensor locations are identical.
These sensors are mounted remotely from the impact
sensor that is internal to the Occupant Restraint Con-
troller (ORC). Each side sensor is secured with two
screws to the inner right or left B-pillar and C-pillar
within the passenger compartment.
The right and left side impact sensors are identical in

construction and calibration. A cavity in the center of
the molded black plastic impact sensor housing con-
tains the electronic circuitry of the sensor which
includes an electronic communication chip and an
electronic impact sensor. Potting material fills the cav-
ity to seal and protect the internal electronic circuitry
and components.
The impact sensors cannot be repaired or adjusted
and, if damaged or faulty, they must be replaced.
OPERATION
FRONT IMPACT SENSORS
The front impact sensors are electronic accelerometers that sense the rate of vehicle deceleration, which provides
verification of the direction and severity of an impact. Each sensor also contains an electronic communication chip
that allows the unit to communicate the sensor status as well as sensor fault information to the microprocessor in
the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC).
The ORC microprocessor continuously monitors all of the passive restraint system electrical circuits to determine the
system readiness. If the ORC detects a monitored system fault, it sets a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) and con-
trols the airbag indicator operation accordingly. The impact sensors each receive battery current and ground through
dedicated left and right sensor plus and minus circuits from the ORC. The impact sensors and the ORC commu-
nicate by modulating the voltage in the sensor plus circuit.
The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the impact sensors, the ORC, and the electronic mes-
sage communication between the sensors and the ORC requires the use of a scan tool and the appropriate diag-
nostic information.
SIDE IMPACT SENSORS

The side impact sensors are electronic accelerometers that sense the rate of vehicle deceleration, which provides
verification of the direction and severity of an impact. Each sensor also contains an electronic communication chip
that allows the unit to communicate the sensor status as well as sensor fault information to the microprocessor in
the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC).
The ORC microprocessor continuously monitors all of the side passive restraint system electrical circuits to deter-
mine the system readiness. If the ORC detects a monitored system fault, it sets a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
and controls the airbag indicator operation accordingly. The impact sensors each receive battery current and ground
through the same left or right sensor plus and minus circuits in a series arrangement from the ORC. The impact
sensors and the ORC communicate by modulating the voltage in the sensor plus circuit.
The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the impact sensors, the ORC, and the electronic mes-
sage communication between the sensors and the ORC requires the use of a scan tool and the appropriate diag-
nostic information.
REMOVAL
FRONT IMPACT SENSOR

NOTE: If replacing the left front impact sensor, the

air intake system needs to be removed (Refer to 9
- ENGINE/AIR INTAKE SYSTEM - REMOVAL).

3. Remove the two mounting screws (2).
SIDE IMPACT SENSOR

B-PILLAR MOUNTED SIDE IMPACT SENSOR

2. Remove the B-pillar trim panel (Refer to 23 -

4. Remove the two retaining screws (2).
C-PILLAR MOUNTED SIDE IMPACT SENSOR

2. Remove the C-pillar trim panel (Refer to 23 -

4. Remove the two retaining screws (2).
INSTALLATION
FRONT IMPACT SENSOR
1. Position the front impact sensor in the correct
mounting location and install the two mounting
screws (2). Torque screws (2) to 7 Nm (62 in. lbs.).
NOTE: If replacing the left front impact sensor, the

air intake system needs to be installed (Refer to 9
- ENGINE/AIR INTAKE SYSTEM - INSTALLATION).

SIDE IMPACT SENSOR

B-PILLAR MOUNTED SIDE IMPACT SENSOR
1. Position the B-pillar mounted impact sensor in the
correct mounting location and install the two
mounting screws (2). Torque screws (2) to 7 Nm
(62 in. lbs.).
3. Install the B-pillar trim panel (Refer to 23 - BODY/

C-PILLAR MOUNTED SIDE IMPACT SENSOR

1. Position the C-pillar mounted impact sensor in the
correct mounting location and install the two
mounting screws (2). Torque screws (2) to 7 Nm
(62 in. lbs.).
3. Install the C-pillar trim panel (Refer to 23 - BODY/


DESCRIPTION
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is secured
with two screws to a mount on the underside of the
passenger side front seat cushion frame near the out-
board front corner. Concealed within a hollow in the
center of the molded plastic OCM housing is a micro-
processor and the other electronic circuitry of the
module. The module housing is sealed to enclose and
protect the internal electronic circuitry. The OCM soft-
ware is flash programmable.
A non-calibrated OCM is available for service replace-
ment. The OCM and all of the other components of
the Occupant Classification System (OCS) including
the passenger front seat, the seat weight sensors, the
passenger or driver seat track position sensor and the
seat adjusters, cushion, back, frame, foam, springs,
and wiring harness are a factory-calibrated and
assembled unit. Any time any one of these components is removed or replaced for any reason, the OCM must be
re-calibrated using a diagnostic scan tool, the Occupant Classification Seat Weight special tool, and the Occupant
Classification System Verification Test. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic procedures.
The OCM cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if damaged or faulty, it must be replaced.
OPERATION
The microprocessor in the Occupant Classification
Module (OCM) (2) contains the Occupant Classifica-
tion System (OCS) logic circuits. The OCM uses On-
Board Diagnostics (OBD) and can communicate with
other electronic modules in the vehicle as well as with
the diagnostic scan tool using the Controller Area Net-
work (CAN) data bus. This method of communication
is also used for OCS diagnosis and testing through
the 16-way data link connector located on the driver
side lower edge of the instrument panel.
The OCM (2) provides voltage to the four seat weight
sensors located on the corners of the passenger front
seat (1, 3, and 4), and to the seat track position sen-
sors on the outboard passenger and driver front seat
upper seat tracks. The OCM then monitors return
inputs from each of the sensors on dedicated hard
wired data communication circuits. The seat weight
sensor input allows the OCM to determine whether the
passenger side front seat is occupied and the relative
size of the occupant by providing a weight-sensing reference to the load on the seat. The seat track position sensor
provides an additional logic input to the OCM microprocessor that allows it to determine the position of the front seat
passenger and driver relative to the front airbags.
Pre-programmed decision algorithms and OCS cali-

bration allow the OCM microprocessor to determine
when passenger airbag protection is appropriate
based upon the seat load as signaled by the seat
weight sensors. When the programmed conditions are
met, the OCM sends the proper electronic occupant
classification messages over the CAN data bus to the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), and the ORC
enables or disables the deployment circuits for the
passenger front supplemental restraints. The ORC
also provides a control output for the Passenger Airbag Disabled (PAD) Indicator in the instrument panel based
upon the electronic occupant classification messages it receives from the OCM.
The OCM also sends electronic driver and passenger seat track position messages to the ORC over the CAN data
bus. The ORC uses the seat track position data as an additional logic input for determining the force level with
which to deploy the multistage front airbags.
The OCM microprocessor continuously monitors all of the OCS electrical circuits and components to determine the
system readiness. If the OCM detects a monitored system fault, it sets an active and stored Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC) and sends the appropriate electronic messages to the ORC over the CAN data bus. Then the ORC
sets a DTC and sends messages to control the airbag indicator operation accordingly. An active fault only remains
for the duration of the fault, or in some cases for the duration of the current ignition switch cycle, while a stored fault
causes a DTC to be stored in memory by the OCM and the ORC. For some DTCs, if a fault does not recur for a
number of ignition cycles, the OCM will automatically erase the stored DTC. For other internal faults, the stored
DTC is latched forever.
The OCM receives battery current on a fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. The OCM receives ground
through a ground circuit and take out of the body wire harness. These connections allow the OCM to be operational
whenever the ignition switch is in the Start or On positions.
The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the OCM, the CAN data bus network, and the elec-
tronic message inputs to and outputs from the OCM requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool and the appropriate
REMOVAL
death.

2. Reach under the front edge of the passenger front

seat cushion to access and disconnect the two har-
ness connectors (3) from the Occupant Classifica-
tion Module (OCM) (4).
3. Remove the two screws (2) that secure the OCM
to the OCM bracket (1).
4. Remove the OCM from under the passenger front
seat.
INSTALLATION
death.
1. Carefully position the Occupant Classification Mod-

ule (OCM) (4) to the OCM bracket (1).
2. Install and tighten the two screws (2) that secure
the OCM to the OCM bracket. Tighten the screws
to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.).
3. Connect the two harness connectors (3) to the
OCM.

WARNING: Following successful completion of the

Airbag System test procedure, the Occupant Clas-
sification System Verification Test must be done
using a scan tool and the appropriate diagnostic
information.

DESCRIPTION
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) (2), some-
times referred to as the Airbag Control Module (ACM),
is secured with three screws to a stamped steel
mounting bracket welded onto the top of the floor
panel transmission tunnel underneath the instrument
panel center stack, beneath the center floor console in
the passenger compartment of the vehicle. Concealed
within a hollow in the center of the die cast aluminum
ORC housing is the electronic circuitry of the ORC
which includes a microprocessor, an electronic impact
sensor, an electronic safing sensor, and an energy
storage capacitor. A stamped metal cover plate is
secured to the bottom of the ORC housing with four
screws to enclose and protect the internal electronic
circuitry and components.
The ORC housing has integral mounting flanges in

three locations. Two molded plastic electrical connec-
tors (1 and 2) exit the rearward facing side of the
ORC housing. These terminal pins connect the ORC
to the vehicle electrical system through two connec-
tors.
The impact sensor and safing sensor internal to the
ORC are calibrated for the specific vehicle, and are
only serviced as a unit with the ORC. The ORC can-
not be repaired or adjusted and, if damaged or faulty,
it must be replaced.
OPERATION
The microprocessor in the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) contains the supplemental restraint system logic
circuits and controls all of the supplemental restraint system components. The ORC uses On-Board Diagnostics
(OBD) and can communicate with other electronic modules in the vehicle as well as with the diagnostic scan tool
using the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. This method of communication is used for control of the airbag
indicator in the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) and for supplemental restraint system diagnosis and
testing through the 16-way data link connector located on the driver side lower edge of the instrument panel.
The ORC microprocessor continuously monitors all of the supplemental restraint system electrical circuits to deter-
mine the system readiness. If the ORC detects a monitored system fault, it sets an active and stored Diagnostic
Trouble Code (DTC) and sends electronic messages to the EMIC over the CAN data bus to turn on the airbag
indicator. An active fault only remains for the duration of the fault, or in some cases for the duration of the current
ignition switch cycle, while a stored fault causes a DTC to be stored in memory by the ORC. For some DTCs, if a
fault does not recur for a number of ignition cycles, the ORC will automatically erase the stored DTC. For other
internal faults, the stored DTC is latched forever.
On models equipped with the Occupant Classification System (OCS), the ORC communicates with the Occupant
Classification Module (OCM) over the CAN data bus. The ORC will internally disable the passenger airbag and seat
belt tensioner deployment circuits if the OCM detects that the passenger front seat is unoccupied or that it is occu-
pied by a load that is inappropriate for an airbag deployment. The ORC also provides a control output to the pas-
senger airbag disabled indicator through the passenger airbag indicator driver circuit. The OCM notifies the ORC
when it has detected a monitored system fault and stored a DTC in its memory for any faulty OCS component or
circuit, then the ORC sets a DTC and controls the airbag indicator operation accordingly.
The ORC receives battery current through two circuits; a fused ignition switch output (run) circuit and a fused igni-
tion switch output (run-start) circuit. The ORC receives ground through a ground circuit of the instrument panel wire
harness. These connections allow the ORC to be operational whenever the ignition switch is in the Start or On
positions.
The ORC also contains an energy-storage capacitor. When the ignition switch is in the Start or On positions, this
capacitor is continually being charged with enough electrical energy to deploy the front supplemental restraint com-
ponents for up to one second following a battery disconnect or failure. The purpose of the capacitor is to provide
backup supplemental restraint system protection in case there is a loss of battery current supply to the ORC during
an impact.
Two sensors are contained within the ORC, an electronic impact sensor and a safing sensor. The ORC also mon-
itors inputs from two remote front impact sensors located on the back of the right and left vertical members of the
radiator support near the front of the vehicle. The electronic impact sensors are accelerometers that sense the rate
of vehicle deceleration, which provides verification of the direction and severity of an impact. On vehicles equipped
with curtain airbags, the ORC also monitors inputs from four additional remote impact sensors located on the left
and right inner B-pillars and C-pillars to control deployment of the curtain airbags.
The safing sensor is an electronic accelerometer sensor within the ORC that provides an additional logic input to the
ORC microprocessor. The safing sensor is used to verify the need for a supplemental restraint deployment by
detecting impact energy of a lesser magnitude than that of the primary electronic impact sensors, and must exceed
a safing threshold in order for the airbags to deploy. Vehicles equipped with curtain airbags, feature a second safing
sensor within the ORC to provide confirmation to the ORC microprocessor of side impact forces. This second safing
sensor is a bi-directional unit that detects impact forces from either side of the vehicle.
Pre-programmed decision algorithms in the ORC microprocessor determine when the deceleration rate as signaled
by the impact sensors and the safing sensors indicate an impact that is severe enough to require supplemental
restraint system protection and, based upon the severity of the monitored impact, determines the level of front air-
bag deployment force required for each front seating position. When the programmed conditions are met, the ORC
sends the proper electrical signals to deploy the dual multistage front airbags at the programmed force levels, the
front seat belt tensioners and, if the vehicle is so equipped, either curtain airbag. For vehicles equipped with the
OCS, the passenger airbag and seat belt tensioner will be deployed by the ORC only if enabled by the OCM mes-
sages (passenger airbag disabled indicator Off) at the time of the impact.
The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the ORC, the CAN data bus, and the electronic mes-
sage inputs to and outputs from the ORC requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool and the appropriate diagnostic
information.
REMOVAL
death.

2. Remove the center floor console (Refer to 23 -

BODY/INTERIOR/FLOOR CONSOLE -
REMOVAL).
3. Disconnect the two electrical connectors (1 and 2).
4. Move the sound deadening material (1) as needed

to access the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
mounting screws.
5. Remove the three mounting screws (1) to the ORC

(2).
INSTALLATION
WARNING: Do not install ORC if mounting location is deformed or damaged. This will cause the ORC to be
improperly located and could result in occupant personal injury or death.
death.
1. Position the ORC (2) into position and install the

three mounting screws (1). Tighten the screws to
11 Nm (97 in. lbs.).
2. Make sure to reinstall the sound deadening mate-

rial (1) over the ORC.
3. Connect the two electrical connectors (1 and 2).
4. Install the center floor console (Refer to 23 -

BODY/INTERIOR/FLOOR CONSOLE - INSTALLA-
TION).

PASSENGER AIRBAG
DESCRIPTION
The passenger airbag used in this model is a multi-
stage, Next Generation-type that complies with revised
federal airbag standards to deploy with less force than
those used in some prior models. The passenger air-
bag consists of a stamped and welded metal housing,
the airbag cushion, the airbag inflator, and a stamped
metal airbag cushion retainer plate that is secured to
the airbag housing. The airbag housing contains the
airbag inflator and the folded airbag cushion. A rectan-
gular fabric cushion is used.
The airbag inflator is a non-azide, pyrotechnic-type
unit that is secured to and sealed within the airbag
housing. A short four-wire pigtail harness with a keyed,
yellow connector insulator connects the two inflator ini-
tiators to the vehicle electrical system through the
instrument panel wire harness.
This passenger airbag cannot be repaired, and must
be replaced if deployed, faulty, or in any way
damaged.
The horizontal surface of the injection molded, thermo-
plastic passenger airbag door (2) is the most visible
part of the passenger airbag. The passenger airbag
door is located above the glove box opening on the
top of the instrument panel, in front of the front seat
passenger seating position.
Located below the passenger airbag door within the

instrument panel is the passenger airbag. The passen-
ger airbag housing fits into a molded receptacle on the
back of the airbag door, where twelve stamped hook
formations on the forward and rearward edges of the
airbag housing are engaged in mating small window
openings on the forward and rearward flanges of the
receptacle to secure the airbag door to the airbag
housing. These airbag door fasteners and mounting
provisions are all concealed beneath the instrument
panel base trim.
The passenger airbag is secured by four screws (1)

through a stamped mounting bracket to the instrument
panel cover/pad and two bolts (2) to the instrument
panel structural support.
OPERATION
The multistage passenger airbag is deployed by electrical signals generated by the Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) through the passenger airbag squib 1 and squib 2 circuits to the two initiators in the airbag inflator. By using
two initiators, the airbag can be deployed at multiple levels of force. The force level is controlled by the ORC to suit
the monitored impact conditions by providing one of three delay intervals between the electrical signals provided to
the two initiators. The longer the delay between these signals, the less forcefully the airbag will deploy.
When the ORC sends the proper electrical signals to each initiator, the electrical energy generates enough heat to
initiate a small pyrotechnic charge which, in turn ignites chemical pellets within the inflator. Once ignited, these
chemical pellets burn rapidly and produce a large quantity of inert gas. The inflator is sealed to the airbag cushion
and a diffuser in the inflator directs all of the inert gas into the airbag cushion, causing the cushion to inflate. As the
cushion inflates, the passenger airbag door will split at predetermined tear seam lines concealed on the inside sur-
face of the door, then the door will pivot up over the top of the instrument panel and out of the way. Following an
airbag deployment, the airbag cushion quickly deflates by venting the inert gas through vent holes within the fabric
used to construct the back (windshield side) of the airbag cushion. Typically, both initiators are used during an air-
bag deployment event.
REMOVAL
DEPLOYED PASSENGER AIRBAG
For deployed passenger airbags, the instrument
panel top pad must be replaced.
1. Open hood.

3. Remove instrument panel (Refer to 23 - BODY/IN-

STRUMENT PANEL/INSTRUMENT PANEL
ASSEMBLY - REMOVAL).
4. Disconnect the passenger airbag electrical connec-
tor (3).
5. Remove the four left and right passenger airbag
mounting screws (1).
6. Remove the two lower passenger airbag mounting
bolts (2).
7. Separate passenger airbag from instrument panel.
8. Remove and inspect all reusable components from the instrument panel and transfer to the new instrument panel
top pad.
9. Clean powder residue from interior of vehicle (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/RESTRAINTS - STANDARD PROCE-
DURE - SERVICE AFTER AN AIRBAG DEPLOYMENT).
NONDEPLOYED PASSENGER AIRBAG


2. Remove the right side silencer pad (Refer to 23 -

PANEL SILENCER - REMOVAL).
3. Remove the glove box assembly (Refer to 23 -

BODY/INSTRUMENT PANEL/GLOVE BOX -
REMOVAL).
4. Remove the two inboard mounting screws (2) to

the passenger airbag just below the distribution
duct (1) and to the left of the distribution housing.
5. Remove the two outboard mounting screws (1) to

the passenger airbag just below the distribution
duct.
6. Remove the two passenger airbag mounting bolts

(2) to the crosscar beam.
7. Disconnect the passenger airbag electrical connec-
tor (3).
8. Maneuver the passenger airbag down in a way to

clear any obstacles that may impede the removal
of the airbag.
INSTALLATION
DEPLOYED PASSENGER AIRBAG
NOTE: For deployed passenger airbags, the instru-
ment panel top pad must be replaced.
1. Clean powder residue from interior of vehicle

(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/RESTRAINTS - STAN-
DARD PROCEDURE - SERVICE AFTER AN AIR-
BAG DEPLOYMENT).
2. Inspect and transfer all reusable components from
the old instrument panel top pad to the new instru-
ment panel top pad.
3. Position new passenger airbag into instrument
panel cavity.
4. Install the two lower passenger airbag mounting

bolts (2). Torque bolts to 11.6 Nm (103 in. lbs.).
5. Install the four left and right passenger airbag
mounting screws (1). Torque screws to 2.8 Nm (25
in. lbs.).
6. Connect the passenger airbag electrical connector
(3).
7. Install new instrument panel assembly (Refer to 23
PANEL ASSEMBLY - INSTALLATION).

NONDEPLOYED PASSENGER AIRBAG
1. Maneuver the passenger airbag up into the instru-

ment panel in a way to clear any obstacles that
may impede the installation of the airbag.
2. Place the passenger into the cavity of the passen-

ger airbag door.
3. Install the two passenger airbag mounting bolts (2)

to the crosscar beam. Torque bolts to 11.6 Nm
(103 in. lbs.).
4. Connect the passenger airbag electrical connector
(3).
5. Install the two inboard mounting screws (2) to the

passenger airbag just below the distribution duct
(1) and to the left of the distribution housing.
Torque screws to 2.8 Nm (25 in. lbs.).
6. Install the two outboard mounting screws (1) to the

passenger airbag just below the distribution duct.
Torque screws to 2.8 Nm (25 in. lbs.).
7. Install the glove box assembly (Refer to 23 -

BODY/INSTRUMENT PANEL/GLOVE BOX -
INSTALLATION).
8. Install the right side silencer pad (Refer to 23 -

PANEL SILENCER - INSTALLATION).

SEAT BELT AND RETRACTOR

REMOVAL
FRONT

2. Remove trim cover (3) from the seat cushion out-

board trim cover.
3. Remove seat belt (1) lower anchor nut (2) from
seat cushion frame.
4. Remove the upper turning loop (3) trim cover (2).

5. Remove the upper turning loop retaining bolt (4).
6. Remove the lower B-pillar trim (Refer to 23 -

7. Remove the one screw (2) to the front seat belt

web guide (3).
8. Disconnect the tensioner (2) squib connector (3).

9. Remove the one screw between the upper retractor

indexing tabs in B-pillar.
10. Remove the one front seat belt retractor (4)
retaining bolt (3).
11. Pull the retractor inboard and release the indexing
tabs (2) from the B-pillar (1).
REAR - SEDAN
1. Remove the lower seat belt anchor (2) bolt (3).
2. Remove the upper C-pillar trim panel (Refer to 23 -

3. Remove the one upper turning loop retaining bolt

(2).
4. Remove the one seat belt retractor (4) mounting

bolt (3).
5. Pull retractor inboard and drop down to release
tabs from slots.
REAR - WAGON
1. Remove the lower seat belt anchor (2) bolt (3).
2. Remove the quarter trim panel.

3. Remove the one rear seat belt retractor (4) retain-
ing nut (2).
REAR CENTER - SEDAN

1. Remove the rear seat cushion (Refer to 23 -
REMOVAL).
2. Remove the one nut (3) to the seat belt lower
anchor.
3. Remove the rear shelf trim panel (Refer to 23 -

REMOVAL).
4. Remove the one retaining nut (1) to the center seat

belt retractor (2).
REAR CENTER - WAGON

1. Remove the left seat back trim cover (60% portion
of the rear folding seats) (Refer to 23 - BODY/
SEATS/SEAT BACK CUSHION/COVER -
REMOVAL).
2. Disconnect the rear seat back latching cable from
seat frame.
NOTE: If the seat back is not fully latched, the

center seat belt will not release from the retractor.
3. Remove the one bolt (2) holding the rear center

seat belt retractor.
INSTALLATION
FRONT
1. Position the retractor in the B-pillar (1) with the
indexing tabs (2).
2. Install the one front seat belt retractor (4) retaining
bolt (3). Torque bolt to 32 Nm (24 ft. lbs.).
3. Install the one screw between the upper retractor
indexing tabs (2) in B-pillar.
4. Connect the tensioner (2) squib connector (3).
5. Install the one screw (2) to the front seat belt web
guide (3). Torque screw to 3 Nm (20 in. lbs.).
6. Position the upper turning loop (3) and install the

retaining bolt (4). Torque bolt to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs.).
7. Install the upper turning loop (3) trim cover (2).
8. Install the lower B-pillar trim (Refer to 23 - BODY/

9. Position the seat belt (1) onto the stud on the seat
cushion frame and install the lower anchor nut (2).
Torque nut to 37 Nm (27 ft. lbs.).
10. Install the trim cover (3) onto the seat cushion
outboard trim cover.

REAR - SEDAN
1. Position the retractor (4) on the C-pillar to the

indexing tab slips up into the pillar.
2. Install the retractor mounting bolt (3). Torque bolt to
32 Nm (24 ft. lbs.).
3. Install the one upper turning loop retaining bolt (2).

Torque bolt to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs.).
4. Install the upper C-pillar trim panel (Refer to 23 -

BODY/INTERIOR/C-PILLAR TRIM -
INSTALLATION).
5. Install the lower seat belt anchor (2) bolt (3).

REAR - WAGON
1. Place the one rear seat belt retractor (4) so that
the indexing tab is in its slot.
2. Install the retaining nut (2). Torque nut to 34 Nm
(25 ft. lbs.).
3. Install the quarter trim panel.
4. Install the lower seat belt anchor (2) bolt (3).

REAR CENTER - SEDAN
1. Place the rear center retractor (2) into position and

install the one retaining nut (1). Torque nut to 34
Nm (25 ft. lbs.).
2. Install the rear shelf trim panel (Refer to 23 -

INSTALLATION).
3. Install the one nut (3) to the seat belt lower anchor.
Torque nut to 34 Nm (25 ft. lbs.).
4. Install the rear seat cushion (Refer to 23 - BODY/
SEATS/SEAT CUSHION COVER -
INSTALLATION).
REAR CENTER - WAGON

1. Position the rear center retractor into position in the
seat back.
2. Install the one bolt (2) holding the rear center seat
belt retractor. Torque nut to 34 Nm (25 ft. lbs.).
3. Install the left seat back trim cover (60% portion of
the rear folding seats) (Refer to 23 - BODY/SEATS/
SEAT - INSTALLATION).
SEAT BELT BUCKLE

REMOVAL
FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLE

2. Remove center console from vehicle (Refer to 23 -

BODY/INTERIOR/FLOOR CONSOLE -
REMOVAL).
3. Remove the inner side shield from the front seat
cushion.
4. Disconnect the one electrical connector.
5. Remove the one nut to the buckle assembly.
REAR SEAT BELT BUCKLE

1. Remove the rear seat cushion (Refer to 23 -
REMOVAL).
2. Remove the one nut (2) to the seat belt buckle.
INSTALLATION
FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLE
1. Position the front seat belt buckle onto the stud
near the rear of the inboard seat cushion frame.
2. Install the retaining nut onto seat cushion frame.
Tighten the nut to 43 Nm (32 ft. lbs.)
3. Connect the seat belt buckle electrical connector.
4. Install the seat cushion side shield.
5. Install floor console (Refer to 23 - BODY/INTERI-
OR/FLOOR CONSOLE - INSTALLATION).


Airbag System test procedure, the Occupant Classification System Verification Test must be done using a
scan tool and the appropriate diagnostic information.
REAR SEAT BELT BUCKLE

1. Position the rear seat belt buckle onto mounting
studs (3).
2. Install retaining nut. Torque nut to 34 Nm (25 ft.
lbs.).
3. Install rear seat cushion (Refer to 23 - BODY/
SEATS/SEAT CUSHION COVER -
INSTALLATION).
SEAT BELT TENSIONER

DESCRIPTION
Seat Belt Tensioners supplement the dual front air-
bags. The seat belt tensioners are integral to the front
seat belt retractors (2), which are secured to the inner
B-pillar (1) on the right and left sides of the vehicle.
The retractor is concealed beneath the lower B-pillar
trim. The seat belt tensioner consists primarily of a
sprocket/pinion, a steel tube, a cast metal housing,
numerous steel balls, a stamped metal ball trap, a tor-
sion bar, a small pyrotechnically activated gas gener-
ator, and a short pigtail wire. All of these components
are located on one side of the retractor spool on the
outside of the retractor housing except for the torsion
bar, which serves as the spindle upon which the
retractor spool rides. The seat belt tensioners are con-
trolled by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
and are connected to the vehicle electrical system
through the body wire harness (3).
The seat belt tensioners cannot be repaired and, if
faulty or damaged, the entire front seat belt and
retractor unit must be replaced. If the front airbags have been deployed, the seat belt tensioners have also been
deployed. The seat belt tensioners are not intended for reuse and must be replaced following any front airbag
deployment. A growling or grinding sound while attempting to operate the seat belt retractor is a sure indication that
the seat belt tensioner has been deployed and requires replacement. Refer to the proper Body Diagnostic Proce-
dures manual for diagnosis and testing.
OPERATION
The seat belt tensioners are deployed in conjunction with the front airbags by a signal generated by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) through the driver or passenger seat belt tensioner line 1 and line 2 (or squib) circuits.
When the ORC sends the proper electrical signal to the tensioners, the electrical energy generates enough heat to
initiate a small pyrotechnic gas generator. The gas generator is installed in one end of a steel tube that contains
numerous steel balls. As the gas expands, it pushes the steel balls through the tube into a cast metal housing,
where a ball guide directs the balls into engagement with the teeth of a sprocket that is geared to one end of the
retractor spool. As the balls drive past the sprocket, the sprocket turns and drives the seat belt retractor spool caus-
ing the slack to be removed from the front seat belts. The ball trap captures the balls as they leave the sprocket and
are expelled from the housing.
Removing excess slack from the front seat belts not only keeps the occupants properly positioned for an airbag
deployment following a frontal impact of the vehicle, but also helps to reduce injuries that the occupant might expe-
rience in these situations as a result of harmful contact with the steering wheel, steering column, instrument panel
and/or windshield. Also, the seat belt tensioner torsion bar that the retractor spool rides upon is designed to deform
in order to control the loading being applied to the occupants by the seat belts during a frontal impact, further reduc-
ing the potential for occupant injuries.
The ORC monitors the condition of the seat belt tensioners through circuit resistance, and will illuminate the airbag
indicator in the instrument cluster and store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any fault that is detected. For
proper diagnosis of the seat belt tensioners, a scan tool is required and the appropriate body diagnostic information.
SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR

DESCRIPTION
The seat track position sensor (1) is a Hall Effect-type
sensor. This sensor consists of a Hall Effect Integrated
Circuit (IC) chip encased in potting material within a
cavity of the molded plastic sensor housing. The sen-
sor housing has two integral snap features (3) and
snaps into a stamped metal bracket located on the
lower outboard seat adjuster track. A molded connec-
tor (2) integral to the sensor housing is connected to
the vehicle electrical system through the driver seat
wire harness.
The seat track position sensor cannot be adjusted or
repaired and, if faulty or damaged, the entire sensor
must be replaced.
OPERATION
The seat track position sensor is designed to provide a seat position data input to the Occupant Classification Mod-
ule (OCM) indicating whether the driver front seat is in a forward or rearward position. The OCM sends electronic
seat position messages to the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data
bus. The ORC uses this data as an additional logic input for use in determining the appropriate deployment force to
be used when deploying the multistage front airbags.
The seat track position sensor receives a nominal five volt supply from the OCM. The sensor communicates the
seat position by modulating the voltage returned to the OCM on a sensor data circuit. The OCM also monitors the
condition of the sensor circuits and will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any fault that is detected, then
send messages to the ORC to illuminate the airbag indicator in the instrument cluster. For proper diagnosis of the
seat track position sensor, a diagnostic scan tool is required and the appropriate diagnostic information.
REMOVAL

2. Reach under the front edge of the front seat cush-

ion to access the seat track position sensor (3) in a
bracket (1) located on the lower outboard seat
track (5).
3. Disconnect the electrical connector (4) from the
sensor.
4. Using a small screwdriver, depress the snap fea-
ture (2) and pull the sensor out of the bracket.
INSTALLATION
1. Position the seat track position sensor (3) on the
end of the bracket (1) located on the lower out-
board seat track (5).
2. Push the sensor firmly into the bracket until the
snap feature (2) locks into place.
3. Connect the electrical connector (4) to the sensor.


information.
SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR

DESCRIPTION
The seat weight sensors (4) are strain gauge-type
units. The electronic elements of the sensor are
encased in a potting material within the molded plastic
sensor housing. Four sensors (4) are used in the
Occupant Classification System (OCS). A sensor is
located at each corner of the passenger side front
seat.
The strain gauge for each sensor is secured by three
screws and nuts (2) between the seat cushion frame
and the seat adjusters (3). A molded connector recep-
tacle (1) integral to each sensor housing is connected
to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated
connector and take out of the passenger seat wire
harness beneath the seat cushion frame.
The seat weight sensors cannot be adjusted or
repaired and, if faulty or damaged, the entire sensor
must be replaced.
WARNING: The Seat Weight Sensor is a sensitive, calibrated unit and must be handled carefully. Do not
drop or handle roughly. If dropped or damaged, replace with another sensor. Failure to do so may result in
occupant injury or death.
WARNING: The front passenger seat must be handled carefully as well. When removing the seat, be careful
when setting on floor not to drop. If dropped, the sensor may be inoperative, could result in occupant
injury, or possibly death.
WARNING: When the seat is on the floor, no one should sit in the front passenger seat. This uneven force
may damage the sensing ability of the seat weight sensors. If sat on and damaged, the sensor may be
inoperative, could result in occupant injury, or possibly death.
OPERATION
The seat weight sensor units are designed to sense the relative weight of a load applied to the passenger side front
seat, which provides a logic input to the microprocessor of the Occupant Classification Module (OCM). When a load
is applied to the seat, the strain gauge of each sensor is flexed causing a change of electrical resistance through
the strain gauge. These changes in resistance are measured by the sensor and the internal sensor circuitry
changes the sensor output voltage.
Each weight sensor receives a nominal five volts and a ground through parallel hard wired circuits from the OCM.
The OCM then monitors the output voltage of each sensor on dedicated hard wired data communication circuits.
The hard wired circuits between the sensors and the OCM may be diagnosed and tested using conventional diag-
nostic tools and procedures. However, the most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the seat weight
sensor inputs to the OCM, and the electronic message communication between the OCM and the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic informa-
tion.
REMOVAL
MANUAL PASSENGER FRONT SEAT
WARNING: The Seat Weight Sensor is a sensitive,
calibrated unit and must be handled carefully. Do
not drop or handle roughly. If dropped or dam-
aged, replace with another sensor. Failure to do so
may result in occupant injury or death.
WARNING: The front passenger seat must be han-

dled carefully as well. When removing the seat, be
careful when setting on floor not to drop. If
dropped, the sensor may be inoperative, could
result in occupant injury, or possibly death.
WARNING: When the seat is on the floor, no one

should sit in the front passenger seat. This
uneven force may damage the sensing ability of
the seat weight sensors. If sat on and damaged,
the sensor may be inoperative, could result in
WARNING: Wait two minutes for the airbag system reserve capacitor to discharge before beginning any air-
bag system or component service. Failure to do so may result in accidental airbag deployment, personal
injury or death.
2. Remove front passenger seat (Refer to 23 - BODY/SEATS/SEAT - REMOVAL).

3. Remove the adjuster to riser mounting bolt (3). For
additional information (Refer to 23 - BODY/SEATS/
SEAT RISER - REMOVAL).
4. Remove the two nuts (2) holding the seat weight

sensor (4) to the seat riser.
POWER FRONT PASSENGER SEAT

NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with a power
front passenger seat, to remove the adjuster from
the riser it is necessary to have battery power to
move the seat forward and rearward to access the
mounting bolts.
1. Remove front passenger seat mounting bolts

(Refer to 23 - BODY/SEATS/SEAT - REMOVAL).
2. Remove the adjuster to riser mounting bolt (3). For

additional information (Refer to 23 - BODY/SEATS/
SEAT RISER - REMOVAL).

4. Remove the two nuts (2) holding the seat weight

sensor (4) to the seat riser.
INSTALLATION
MANUAL PASSENGER FRONT SEAT
WARNING: The Seat Weight Sensor is a sensitive,
calibrated unit and must be handled carefully. Do
not drop or handle roughly. If dropped or dam-
aged, replace with another sensor. Failure to do so
may result in occupant injury or death.
WARNING: The front passenger seat must be han-

dled carefully as well. When removing the seat, be
careful when setting on floor not to drop. If
dropped, the sensor may be inoperative, could
result in occupant injury, or possibly death.
WARNING: When the seat is on the floor, no one

should sit in the front passenger seat. This
uneven force may damage the sensing ability of
the seat weight sensors. If sat on and damaged,
the sensor may be inoperative, could result in
1. Position the seat weight sensor onto passenger front seat riser.
2. Install the two nuts (2) holding the seat weight sensor (4) to the seat riser. Torque nuts to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs.).
4. Install the adjuster to riser mounting bolt (3).
Torque nuts to 45 Nm (33 ft. lbs.). For additional
information (Refer to 23 - BODY/SEATS/SEAT
RISER - INSTALLATION).
5. Install the front passenger seat (Refer to 23 -

BODY/SEATS/SEAT - INSTALLATION)


information.
POWER FRONT PASSENGER SEAT

NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with a power
front passenger seat, to remove the adjuster from
the riser it is necessary to have battery power to
move the seat forward and rearward to access the
mounting bolts.
1. Position the seat weight sensor onto passenger

front seat riser.
2. Install the two nuts (2) holding the seat weight sen-
sor (4) to the seat riser. Torque nuts to 40 Nm (30
ft. lbs.).
4. Install the adjuster to riser mounting bolt (3).

Torque nuts to 45 Nm (33 ft. lbs.). For additional
information (Refer to 23 - BODY/SEATS/SEAT
RISER - INSTALLATION).
5. Install the front passenger seat bolts (Refer to 23 -

BODY/SEATS/SEAT - INSTALLATION).


information.
LX SPEED CONTROL 8P - 1
SPEED CONTROL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
SPEED CONTROL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
8P - 2 SPEED CONTROL LX
SPEED CONTROL
DESCRIPTION
The speed control system is fully and electronically controlled by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). A cable
and a vacuum controlled servo are not used. This is a servo-less system. The switch is labeled: ON/OFF,
RES/ACCEL, SET, COAST, and CANCEL.
OPERATION
When speed control is selected by depressing the ON switch, the PCM allows a set speed to be stored in its RAM
for speed control. To store a set speed, depress the SET switch while the vehicle is moving at a speed between 25
and 100 mph. In order for the speed control to engage, the brakes cannot be applied, nor can the gear selector
indicating the transmission is in Park or Neutral or low.
The speed control can be disengaged manually by:
Stepping on the brake pedal
Depressing the OFF switch
Depressing the CANCEL switch.
NOTE: Depressing the OFF switch or turning off the ignition switch will erase the set speed stored in the
PCM (the ECM with a diesel engine).
For added safety, the speed control system is programmed to disengage for any of the following conditions:
An indication of Park or Neutral
A rapid increase rpm (indicates that the clutch has been disengaged)
Excessive engine rpm (indicates that the transmission may be in a low gear)
The speed signal increases at a rate of 10 mph per second (indicates that the coefficient of friction between
the road surface and tires is extremely low)
The speed signal decreases at a rate of 10 mph per second (indicates that the vehicle may have decelerated
at an extremely high rate)
Once the speed control has been disengaged, depressing the RES/ACCEL switch (when speed is greater than 20
mph) restores the vehicle to the target speed that was stored in the PCM (the ECM with a diesel engine).
While the speed control is engaged, the driver can increase the vehicle speed by depressing the RES/ACCEL
switch. The new target speed is stored in the PCM (the ECM with a diesel engine) when the RES/ACCEL is
released. The PCM (the ECM with a diesel engine) also has a 9tap-up9 feature in which vehicle speed increases at
a rate of approximately 1 mph for each momentary switch activation of the RES/ACCEL switch.
A tap down feature is used to decelerate without disengaging the speed control system. To decelerate from an
existing recorded target speed, momentarily depress the COAST switch. For each switch activation, speed will be
lowered approximately 1 mph.
LX VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY 8Q - 1
VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY - ELECTRICAL VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY - SERVICE

DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY - ELECTRICAL B1A41-SECURITY TRANSMITTER SENSOR

DIAGNOSTICS CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING B1A42-SECURITY TRANSMITTER SENSOR
B1A20-PRE-ARM TIMEOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
B1A24KEY NOT PROGRAMMED . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 B1A43-SECURITY TRANSMITTER SENSOR
B1A25-INVALID KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 RETURN CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
B1A26MAXIMUM NUMBER OF KEYS B1A44-SECURITY RECEIVER SENSOR
PROGRAMMED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
B1A27SKREEM PROGRAMMING B1A45-SECURITY RECEIVER SENSOR
PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
B1A28-ECM MISMATCH WITH SKIM . . . . . . . . . . 11 B1A46-SECURITY RECEIVER SENSOR
B1A29-SKIM BASESTATION MISMATCH . . . . . . 14 RETURN CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
B1A2A-KEY 1 COMMUNICATION ERROR . . . . . 17 B1A47-SECURITY TRANSMITTER/
B1A2BA-KEY 2 COMMUNICATION ERROR . . . . 20 RECEIVER SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT
B1A2C-KEY 3 COMMUNICATION ERROR . . . . . 23 HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
B1A2D-KEY 4 COMMUNICATION ERROR . . . . . 26 B2101-IGNITION RUN/START INPUT LOW . . . . 82
B1A2E-KEY 5 COMMUNICATION ERROR . . . . . 29 B2102-IGNITION RUN/START INPUT HIGH . . . . 85
B1A2F-KEY 6 COMMUNICATION ERROR . . . . . 32 B210A-SYSTEM VOLTAGE LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
B1A30-KEY 7 COMMUNICATION ERROR . . . . . 35 B210D-SYSTEM VOLTAGE HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
B1A31-KEY 8 COMMUNICATION ERROR . . . . . 38 B210D-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
B1A35-UNIDENTIFIED KEY B210E-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
COMMUNICATION ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 B2204-ECU CONFIGURATION MISMATCH . . . . 95
B1A37SECURITY TRANSMITTER SENSOR B2205-ORIGINAL VIN MISSING/MISMATCH . . . 96
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 B2206-CURRENT VIN MISSING/MISMATCH . . . 98
B1A38SECURITY TRANSMITTER SENSOR B2224SKREEM INTERNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 B2228-SKREEM INTERNAL - RKE
B1A3ASECURITY RECEIVER SENSOR RECEIVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 B2229-SKREEM INTERNAL - SKIM
B1A3BSECURITY RECEIVER SENSOR IMMOBILIZER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 B222A-VEHICLE LINE MISMATCH . . . . . . . . . . . 102
B1A3C-INTERNAL SIREN BATTERY . . . . . . . . . . 54 B223C-INTRUSION TRANSCEIVER MODULE
B1A3D-SIREN BATTERY TAMPER / LOSS INTERNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
OF POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 B2254-COLUMN LOCK MODULE INTERNAL . 104
B1A3E-SIREN / ITM MISMATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 U0019-CAN B BUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
B1A3F-ITM ARMING SEQUENCE U0019CAN B BUS ITM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
8Q - 2 VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS LX

FRONT CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 CLUSTER/CCN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
U0146-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH U110D-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
CENTRAL GATEWAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 SECURITY SIREN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
U0151-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH U1416-IMPLAUSIBLE SECURITY SIREN
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER . . . . 113 SIGNAL RECEIVED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
U0154-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH STANDARD PROCEDURE
OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE . . . . 113 SKREEM/SKIM VERIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
LX VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8Q - 3
VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS

B1A20-PRE-ARM TIMEOUT
When Monitored:
During the VTSS pre-arm process.
Set Condition:
If the VTSS pre-arm sequence is interrupted within sixteen seconds after securing the vehicle.
Possible Causes
INTERMITTENT PROBLEM WITH FUSED (B+) TO CLUSTER
INTERMITTENT PROBLEM WITH CAN B BUS CIRCUITS TO CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1. DETERMINING IF DTC IS CURRENT

NOTE: Diagnose any related Communication DTC(s) before continuing.
With a scan tool, read and record DTC(s).
With the scan tool, clear DTC(s).
Turn the ignition off and remove the key from the ignition.
Lock and close all doors to allow the VTSS to go from pre-arm to armed status and wait one minute.
Disarm the VTSS.
Using the scan tool, read DTC(s).
Does the DTC reset?
Yes >> Remove the Cluster and inspect the Fused B (+) and both CAN B BUS circuits for spread terminals or
intermittent opens.
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No >> DTC is not active at this time. Test complete.
B1A24KEY NOT PROGRAMMED

When Monitored:
Possible Causes
KEY NOT PROGRAMMED
SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY MODULE (SKREEM)
Diagnostic Test
1. PROGRAM ALL OF THE IGNITION KEYS

With the scan tool, attempt to program the key(s) into the SKREEM.
Was the programming of the key(s) successful?
Yes >> Perform SKREEM VERIFICATION TEST. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY -
No >> Replace the ignition key and attempt to program it into the SKREEM. If the DTC resets, replace and
program the SKREEM in accordance with the Service Information.
NOTE: If this vehicle is equipped with a Steering Column Lock Module, it must be replaced along with the
SKREEM.
Perform SKREEM VERIFICATION TEST. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY -
B1A25-INVALID KEY

When Monitored:
At ignition on and during Key Programming Mode.
Set Condition:
When the SKREEM does not receive a transponder response after 8 consecutive transponder read attempts
within 2.0 seconds.
Possible Causes
MULTIPLE KEY OPERATION

IGNITION KEY
SKREEM
INTERMITTENT WIRING HARNESS PROBLEM
Diagnostic Test

With the scan tool, read and record the SKREEM DTCs.
With the scan tool, erase the SKREEM DTCs
NOTE: Perform the following test several times to ensure the DTC is current.
Wait 10 seconds.
With the scan tool, read the SKREEM DTCs.
Does the scan tool display the DTC that was previously erased?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Go To 6
2. CHECKING FOR MULTIPLE KEYS
Are there multiple vehicle ignition keys available?

Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 4
3. MULTIPLE KEY OPERATION

NOTE: Perform the following steps using one of the vehicle ignition keys. When finished, repeat the pro-
cedure using each of the other vehicle keys, one at a time.
With the scan tool, erase the SKREEM DTCs.
Wait 10 seconds.
Turn the ignition on
Is the DTC present for all ignition keys?
Yes >> Replace and program the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module in accordance with the Service Information.
No >> Replace the ignition key(s) that cause the SKIM DTC.
4. REPROGRAM KEY
With the scan tool, attempt to reprogram the ignition key to the SKREEM.
Wait 10 seconds.
Does the DTC set again?
Yes >> Go To 5
5. PROGRAM NEW IGNITION KEY

Replace the ignition key with a new key.
With the scan tool, program the new ignition key to the SKREEM.
Wait 10 seconds.
Perform SKREEM VERIFICATION TEST
6. INTERMITTENT WIRING HARNESS PROBLEM

NOTE: Check the following items:
Visually inspect the related wiring harness. Look for any chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken
wires.
Visually inspect the related wiring harness connectors. Look for broken, bent, pushed out, or corroded
terminals.
Refer to any Technical Service Bulletins (TSB) that may apply.
Yes >> Repair wiring harness/connectors as necessary.
B1A26MAXIMUM NUMBER OF KEYS PROGRAMMED

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When the maximum number of keys (8) have been programmed into the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module
(SKREEM).
Possible Causes
MAXIMUM AMOUNT OF KEY PROGRAMMED INTO SKREEM
SKREEM
Diagnostic Test
1. REPROGRAM ALL IGNITION KEYS

NOTE: This procedure will clear all the key information from the SKREEM. It is important to obtain all of the
customers ignition keys so they may be reprogrammed into the module.
With the scan tool, clear all the key information in the SKREEM.
Program the all of the customer keys into the SKREEM (maximum eight).
Did the Maximum Number of Keys Programmed display again?
Yes >> Replace and program the SKREEM in accordance with the Service Information.
NOTE: If this vehicle is equipped with a Steering Column Lock Module it must be replaced along with the
SKREEM.
No >> Programming of the keys was successful. Test complete.
B1A27SKREEM PROGRAMMING PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1. VERIFY THAT THE DTC IS ACTIVE

NOTE: Before continuing, review and check for the following:
Review the repair history of the vehicle.
Ensure that the vehicle has the correct PCM and SKREEM installed by verifying the part numbers.
With the scan tool, ensure that the PCM and SKREEM are programmed correctly. Compare the PCM VIN
to the SKREEM VIN and ensure the two VINs match.
With the scan tool, clear DTCs.
Perform 5 ignition cycles, leaving the ignition switch on for a minimum of 90 seconds per cycle.
Does the DTC reset?
SKREEM.
No >> The DTC is not active at this time. Test complete.
B1A28-ECM MISMATCH WITH SKIM

When Monitored:
At ignition on, after ignition on during any rolling code handshake that occurs with the PCM due to a SKIM or
PCM reset.
Set Condition:
When a PCM STATUS message with a Valid Key status is not received by the SKIM within 3.5 seconds of
transmitting the last Valid Key Code message to the PCM.
Possible Causes
VERIFYING PCM VIN

REPLACE SKREEM AND CHECK DTCS
PCM
Diagnostic Test

Wait 10 seconds.
Turn the ignition on and wait 2 minutes.
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Go To 4
2. VERIFYING THE PCM VIN

With the scan tool, select Engine system from the main menu.
Display and record the Vehicle Identification Number.
NOTE: Ensure that a VIN has been programmed into the PCM. If a VIN is not displayed, attempt to program
the PCM with the correct VIN before continuing.
Does the VIN recorded from the PCM match the VIN of the vehicle?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Perform the PCM replaced to update the VIN in the PCM.
3. REPLACE SKREEM AND CHECK DTCS

Replace and program the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module in accordance with the Service Information.
With the scan tool, display and clear all PCM and SKREEM DTCs.
Perform 5 ignition key cycles leaving the ignition key on for 90 seconds per cycle.
With the scan tool, check for SKREEM DTCs.
Yes >> Replace and program the Powertrain Control Module in accordance with the Service Information.
4. INTERMITTENT
NOTE: Check for the following conditions:
wires.
terminals.
B1A29-SKIM BASESTATION MISMATCH

When Monitored:
PCM reset.
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
VERIFYING PCM VIN

PCM
Diagnostic Test

Wait 10 seconds.
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Go To 4

Yes >> Go To 3

4. INTERMITTENT
wires.
terminals.
B1A2A-KEY 1 COMMUNICATION ERROR

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
within 2.0 seconds.
Possible Causes

IGNITION KEY
SKREEM
Diagnostic Test

Wait 10 seconds.
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Go To 6

Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 4

Wait 10 seconds.
4. REPROGRAM KEY
Wait 10 seconds.
Yes >> Go To 5

Wait 10 seconds.

wires.
terminals.
B1A2BA-KEY 2 COMMUNICATION ERROR

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
within 2.0 seconds.
Possible Causes

IGNITION KEY
SKREEM
Diagnostic Test

Wait 10 seconds.
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Go To 6

Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 4

cedure using each of the other vehicle keys one at a time.
Wait 10 seconds.
4. REPROGRAM KEY
Wait 10 seconds.
Yes >> Go To 5

Wait 10 seconds.

wires.
terminals.
B1A2C-KEY 3 COMMUNICATION ERROR

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
within 2.0 seconds.
Possible Causes

IGNITION KEY
SKREEM
Diagnostic Test

Wait 10 seconds.
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Go To 6

Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 4

Wait 10 seconds.
4. REPROGRAM KEY
Wait 10 seconds.
Yes >> Go To 5

Wait 10 seconds.

wires.
terminals.
B1A2D-KEY 4 COMMUNICATION ERROR

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
within 2.0 seconds.
Possible Causes

IGNITION KEY
SKREEM
Diagnostic Test

Wait 10 seconds.
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Go To 6

Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 4

Wait 10 seconds.
4. REPROGRAM KEY
Wait 10 seconds.
Yes >> Go To 5

Wait 10 seconds.

wires.
terminals.
B1A2E-KEY 5 COMMUNICATION ERROR

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
within 2.0 seconds.
Possible Causes

IGNITION KEY
SKREEM
Diagnostic Test

Wait 10 seconds.
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Go To 6

Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 4

Wait 10 seconds.
4. REPROGRAM KEY
Wait 10 seconds.

Wait 10 seconds.

wires.
terminals.
B1A2F-KEY 6 COMMUNICATION ERROR

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
within 2.0 seconds.
Possible Causes

IGNITION KEY
SKREEM
Diagnostic Test

Wait 10 seconds.
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Go To 6

Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 4

Wait 10 seconds.
4. REPROGRAM KEY
Wait 10 seconds.
Yes >> Go To 5

Wait 10 seconds.

wires.
terminals.
B1A30-KEY 7 COMMUNICATION ERROR

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
within 2.0 seconds.
Possible Causes

IGNITION KEY
SKREEM
Diagnostic Test

Wait 10 seconds.
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Go To 6

Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 4

Wait 10 seconds.
4. REPROGRAM KEY
Wait 10 seconds.
Yes >> Go To 5

Wait 10 seconds.

wires.
terminals.
B1A31-KEY 8 COMMUNICATION ERROR

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
within 2.0 seconds.
Possible Causes

IGNITION KEY
SKREEM
Diagnostic Test

Wait 10 seconds.
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Go To 6

Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 4

Wait 10 seconds.
4. REPROGRAM KEY
Wait 10 seconds.
Yes >> Go To 5

Wait 10 seconds.

wires.
terminals.
B1A35-UNIDENTIFIED KEY COMMUNICATION ERROR

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
within 2.0 seconds.
Possible Causes

IGNITION KEY
SKREEM
Diagnostic Test

Wait 10 seconds.
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Go To 6

Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 4

Wait 10 seconds.
4. REPROGRAM KEY
Wait 10 seconds.
Yes >> Go To 5

Wait 10 seconds.

wires.
terminals.
B1A37SECURITY TRANSMITTER SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
When the VTSS is armed.
Set Condition:
If the current flow on the sensor signal circuit is above a specified range this DTC will set.
Possible Causes
(A645) INTRUSION TRANSMITTER SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

INTRUSION SENSOR TRANSMITTER
Diagnostic Test

Close all doors and arm the VTSS and wait 2 minutes.
Disarm the VTSS turn the ignition on.
Turn the ignition on and with the scan tool, read DTCs.
Does the scan tool display B1A37SECURITY TRANSMITTER SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW ?
Yes >> Go To 2
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1 (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
2. INTRUSION SENSOR TRANSMITTER

Disconnect the Intrusion Sensor Transmitter connector.
Turn the ignition on and with the scan tool, erase DTCs.
Does the scan tool display B1A41SECURITY TRANSMITTER
SENSOR CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes >> Replace the Intrusion Sensor Transmitter.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1 (Refer to 8 -
ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK THE (A645) INTRUSION TRANSMITTER SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
Turn the ignition is off.
Disconnect the Intrusion Transceiver Module connector.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (A645) Intrusion Trans-
mitter Sensor Signal circuit at the Intrusion Transceiver Module connec-
tor.
Yes >> Repair the (A645) Intrusion Transmitter Sensor Signal circuit
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No >> Replace the Intrusion Transceiver Module in accordance
B1A38SECURITY TRANSMITTER SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(A645) INTRUSION TRANSMITTER SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
Diagnostic Test

Does the scan tool display B1A38SECURITY TRANSMITTER SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH ?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECK THE (A645) INTRUSION TRANSMITTER SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Disconnect the Intrusion Sensor Transmitter connector
Measure for voltage between chassis ground and the (A645) Intrusion
Transmitter Sensor Signal circuit at the Intrusion Transceiver Module
connector.
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No >> Replace the Intrusion Transceiver Module in accordance with the Service Information.
B1A3ASECURITY RECEIVER SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(G460) INTRUSION RECEIVER SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

INTRUSION SENSOR RECEIVER
Diagnostic Test

Does the scan tool display B1A3ASECURITY RECEIVER SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW ?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. INTRUSION SENSOR RECEIVER

Disconnect the Intrusion Sensor Receiver connector.
Turn the ignition on and with the scan tool, erase DTCs.
Does the scan tool display B1A44SECURITY RECEIVER SEN-
SOR CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes >> Replace the Intrusion Sensor Receiver.
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK THE (G460) INTRUSION RECEIVER SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the (G460) Intrusion
Receiver Sensor Signal circuit at the Intrusion Transceiver Module con-
nector.
Yes >> Repair the (G460) Intrusion Receiver Sensor Signal circuit
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
B1A3BSECURITY RECEIVER SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(G460) INTRUSION RECEIVER SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
Diagnostic Test

Does the scan tool display B1A3BSECURITY RECEIVER SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH ?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECK THE (G460) INTRUSION RECEIVER SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Measure for voltage between chassis ground and the (G460) Intrusion
Receiver Sensor Signal circuit at the Intrusion Transceiver Module con-
nector.
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
B1A3C-INTERNAL SIREN BATTERY

When Monitored:
Continuously with the engine over 600 RPM.
Set Condition:
When the internal battery within the siren does not charge as expected, the ITM sets this code.
Possible Causes
VEHICLE STORED WITH NO BATTERY VOLTAGE FOR EXTENDED PERIOD OF TIME
SIREN
Diagnostic Test

Start the engine and allow it to idle for 2 minutes then turn the engine off.
Does the DTC reset?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. VEHICLE STORED WITH NO BATTERY VOLTAGE FOR EXTENDED PERIOD OF TIME

NOTE: If the vehicle was allowed to sit with no battery voltage for an extended period of time the back up
battery located in the siren may discharge and need to be recharged.
Was the vehicle battery power just restored after the vehicle was stored with no power for an extended
period of time?
Yes >> Allow the vehicle to sit with a fully charged battery for two hours then restart this procedure.
No >> Replace the Siren in accordance with the Service Information. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELEC-
TRONIC CONTROL MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
B1A3D-SIREN BATTERY TAMPER / LOSS OF POWER SUPPLY

When Monitored:
Continuously with the VTSS armed.
Set Condition:
If the ITM detects incorrect voltage at the siren this code will set.
Possible Causes
HARNESS TAMPERING/INTERMITTENT CONDITION

SIREN GROUND OPEN
SIREN
Diagnostic Test
1. INSPECT SIREN HARNESS

Inspect the wiring harness to the siren for any signs of tampering or intermittent condition.
Were there any problems found?
Yes >> Repair wiring as necessary.
No >> Go To 2

Disarm the VTSS.
Does the DTC reset?
Yes >> Go To 3
3. CHECK THE FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT AT THE SIREN

Disconnect the Siren connector.
circuit at the siren connector.
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Repair the Fused B(+) circuit for an open.
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
4. CHECK THE GROUND CIRCUIT AT THE SIREN

Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, check the Ground circuit
at the siren connector.
Yes >> Replace the Siren in accordance with the Service Informa-
tion.
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
B1A3E-SIREN / ITM MISMATCH

When Monitored:
While the VTSS is armed.
Set Condition:
ITM losses battery voltage.
Possible Causes
CAN B BUS COMMUNICATION PROBLEMS
INTERMITTENT LOSS OF FUSED B(+) TO THE ITM WITH THE VTSS ARMED
Diagnostic Test

Disarm the VTSS.
Does the DTC reset?
Yes >> Check for and correct any CAN B Bus DTCs set in the ITM or other modules. Also check for intermit-
tent loss Fused B(+) to the ITM.
B1A3F-ITM ARMING SEQUENCE PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
ITM losses battery voltage.
Possible Causes
CAN B BUS COMMUNICATION PROBLEMS
INTERMITTENT LOSS OF FUSED B(+) TO THE ITM DURING THE VTSS PRE-ARM PROCESS
Diagnostic Test

Disarm the VTSS.
Does the DTC reset?
Yes >> Check for and correct any CAN B Bus DTCs set in the ITM or other modules. Also check for intermit-
tent loss Fused B(+) to the ITM.
B1A41-SECURITY TRANSMITTER SENSOR CIRCUIT OPEN

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If the voltage current is below a specified range this DTC will set.
Possible Causes
(A645) INTRUSION TRANSMITTER SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN

(G945) INTRUSION TRANSMITTER SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
INTRUSION SENSOR TRANSMITTER OPEN/MISSING
Diagnostic Test

Close all doors and arm the VTSS and wait 1 minute.
Disarm the VTSS turn the ignition on and wait 1 minute.
Does the scan tool display B1A41SECURITY TRANSMITTER SENSOR CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECK THE (A645) INTRUSION TRANSMITTER SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT VOLTAGE

NOTE: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
With the scan tool actuate the Intrusion Sensor Transmitter.
Measure the voltage between (A645) Intrusion Sensor Signal circuit and
(G945) Intrusion Transmitter Sensor Ground circuit.
Is the voltage above 10.0 volts
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 4
3. CHECK THE INTRUSION SENSOR TRANSMITTER

Install a known good Intrusion Sensor Transmitter.
With the scan tool erase DTCs.
Close all doors and arm the VTSS and wait 1 minute.
Disarm the VTSS turn the ignition on and wait 1 minute.
Does the scan tool display B1A41SECURITY TRANSMITTER SENSOR CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes >> Replace the Intrusion Transceiver Module in accordance with the Service Information.
No >> Replace the original Intrusion Sensor Transmitter.
4. CHECK THE (A645) INTRUSION TRANSMITTER SENSOR SIGNAL WIRE

Measure the resistance of the (A645) Intrusion Transmitter Sensor Sig-
nal circuit between the Intrusion Sensor Transmitter connector and the
Intrusion Transceiver Module connector.
for an open.
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No >> Go To 5
5. CHECK THE (G945) INTRUSION TRANSMITTER SENSOR GROUND WIRE FOR AN OPEN
Ensure Ignition is off.
Measure the resistance of the (G945) Intrusion Transmitter Sensor
Ground circuit from the Intrusion Sensor Transmitter connector to the
Intrusion Transceiver Module connector.
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No >> Repair the (G945) Intrusion Transmitter Sensor Ground cir-
cuit for an open.
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
B1A42-SECURITY TRANSMITTER SENSOR CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
INTRUSION SENSOR TRANSMITTER

(A645) INTRUSION TRANSMITTER SENSOR SIGNAL SHORTED TO (G945) INTRUSION TRANSMITTER
SENSOR GROUND
Diagnostic Test

Disarm the VTSS.
Does the DTC reset?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. INTRUSION SENSOR TRANSMITTER

Connect a known good Intrusion Sensor Transmitter.
Disarm the VTSS.
Does the DTC reset?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Replace the original Intrusion Sensor Transmitter.
3. CHECK THE (A645) INTRUSION TRANSMITTER SENSOR SIGNAL WIRE FOR A SHORT TO (G945)
INTRUSION TRANSMITTER SENSOR GROUND
Disconnect the Intrusion Sensor Transceiver connector.
Measure the resistance between the (A645) Intrusion Transmitter Sen-
sor Signal circuit to the (G945) Intrusion Transmitter Sensor Ground cir-
cuit in the Intrusion Sensor Transmitter connector.
for a short to the (G945) Intrusion Transmitter Sensor
Ground circuit.
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No >> Replace the Intrusion Transceiver Module in accordance with the Service Information.
B1A43-SECURITY TRANSMITTER SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Intrusion Transceiver Module detects a short to ground condition on the sensor ground circuit.
Possible Causes
(G945) INTRUSION TRANSMITTER SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
Diagnostic Test

Disarm the VTSS.
Does the DTC reset?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECK THE (G945) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

Transmitter Sensor Ground circuit at the Intrusion Sensor Transmitter
connector.
Yes >> Repair the (G945) Intrusion Transmitter Sensor Ground cir-
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
B1A44-SECURITY RECEIVER SENSOR CIRCUIT OPEN

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(G460) INTRUSION RECEIVER SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN

(G946) INTRUSION RECEIVER SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
INTRUSION SENSOR RECEIVER OPEN/MISSING
Diagnostic Test

Close all doors and arm the VTSS and wait one minute.
Disarm the VTSS turn the ignition on and wait one minute.
Does the scan tool display B1A44SECURITY RECEIVER SENSOR CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECK THE (G460) INTRUSION RECEIVER SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT VOLTAGE

With the scan tool actuate the Intrusion Sensor Receiver.
Measure the voltage between (G460) Intrusion Receiver Sensor Signal
circuit and (G946) Intrusion Receiver Sensor Ground circuit.
Is the voltage above 10.0 volts
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 4
3. CHECK THE INTRUSION SENSOR RECEIVER

Install a known good Intrusion Sensor Receiver.
With the scan tool erase DTCs.
Close all doors and arm the VTSS and wait one minute.
Disarm the VTSS turn the ignition on and wait one minute.
Does the scan tool display B1A44SECURITY RECEIVER SENSOR CIRCUIT OPEN?
No >> Replace the original Intrusion Sensor Receiver.
4. CHECK THE (G460) INTRUSION RECEIVER SENSOR SIGNAL WIRE

Measure the resistance of the (G460) Intrusion Receiver Sensor Signal
circuit between the Intrusion Sensor Receiver connector and the Intru-
sion Transceiver Module connector.
for an open.
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No >> Go To 5
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
5. CHECK THE (G946) SENSOR GROUND WIRE FOR AN OPEN

Ensure Ignition is off.
Measure the resistance of the (G946) Intrusion Receiver Sensor Ground
circuit from the Intrusion Sensor Receiver connector to the Intrusion
Transceiver Module connector.
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No >> Repair the (G946) Intrusion Receiver Sensor Ground circuit
for an open.
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
B1A45-SECURITY RECEIVER SENSOR CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
INTRUSION SENSOR RECEIVER

(G460) INTRUSION RECEIVER SENSOR SIGNAL SHORTED TO (G946) INTRUSION RECEIVER SENSOR
GROUND
Diagnostic Test

Disarm the VTSS.
Does the DTC reset?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. INTRUSION SENSOR RECEIVER

Connect a known good Intrusion Sensor Receiver.
Disarm the VTSS.
Does the DTC reset?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Replace the original Intrusion Sensor Receiver.
3. CHECK THE (G460) INTRUSION RECEIVER SENSOR SIGNAL WIRE FOR A SHORT TO (G946)
INTRUSION RECEIVER SENSOR GROUND
Disconnect the Intrusion Sensor Transceiver connector.
Measure the resistance between the (G460) Intrusion Receiver Sensor
Signal circuit to the (G946) Intrusion Receiver Sensor Ground circuit in
the Intrusion Sensor Receiver connector.
for a short to the (G946) Sensor Ground circuit.
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
B1A46-SECURITY RECEIVER SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Intrusion Transceiver Module detects a short to ground condition on the sensor ground circuit.
Possible Causes
(946) INTRUSION RECEIVER SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
Diagnostic Test

Disarm the VTSS.
Does the DTC reset?
Yes >> Go to 2
2. CHECK THE (G946) INTRUSION RECEIVER SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
Receiver Sensor Ground circuit at the Intrusion Sensor Receiver con-
nector.
Yes >> Repair the (G946) Intrusion Receiver Sensor Ground circuit
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
B1A47-SECURITY TRANSMITTER/RECEIVER SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Intrusion Transceiver Module detects a short to battery condition on the sensor ground circuit.
Possible Causes
(G945) INTRUSION TRANSMITTER SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY

(G946) INTRUSION RECEIVER SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY
Diagnostic Test

Disarm the VTSS.
Does the DTC reset?
Yes >> Go to 2
2. CHECK THE (G946) INTRUSION RECEIVER SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY
Measure the voltage of the (G946) Intrusion Receiver Sensor Ground
circuit in the Intrusion Sensor Receiver connector.
Yes >> Repair the (G946) Intrusion Receiver Sensor Ground circuit
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK THE (G945) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

Measure the voltage of the (G945) Intrusion Transmitter Sensor Ground
circuit in the Intrusion Sensor Transmitter connector.
Yes >> Repair the (G945) Transmitter Sensor Ground circuit for a
short to voltage.
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
B2101-IGNITION RUN/START INPUT LOW

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The SKREEM has detected the ignition switch input voltage below a calibrated value.
Possible Causes
FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT OPEN
SKREEM
Diagnostic Test

NOTE: Diagnose any related Powertrain DTC(s) before continuing.
Does the DTC reset?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go to 2
NOTE: Check for any of the follow conditions:
Poor wire to terminal connection
Corroded terminals
Backed out or loose terminals
Broken wire internal to the insulation
Dirty (partial) module ground
With the ignition on, wiggle the related wires.
Using a scan tool, read DTC(s).
Does the DTC reset?
Yes >> Repair the wiring as necessary.
3. FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT OPENED

NOTE: Check the related fuses to the Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit. If the fuse is found
to be open, repair the circuit for a shorted condition.
Disconnect the SKREEM harness connector.
Using a 12 volt test light connected to ground, probe the Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit in the
SKREEM harness connector.
Yes >> Go to 4
No >> Repair the Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit for an open.
4. SKREEM
NOTE: A dirty (partial) ground can cause abnormal conditions within a system. Ensure the module has a
good ground before continuing.
Reconnect the SKREEM connector
Back probe the Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit.
Start the engine.
Using the scan tool, view battery voltage under Data Display in the Engine category.
Compare the voltage on the scan tool to the voltage reading on the voltmeter.
Is the voltage on the scan tool equal to the voltmeter reading +/- .5 volt?
No >> Repair the Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit for high resistance.
B2102-IGNITION RUN/START INPUT HIGH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The SKREEM has detected the ignition switch input voltage above a calibrated value.
Possible Causes
FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT
SKREEM
Diagnostic Test

Does the DTC reset?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go to 2
Corroded terminals
Does the DTC reset?
3. FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE

Yes >> Repair the Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit for a short to voltage.
No >> Replace and program the SKREEM in accordance with the Service Information.
B210A-SYSTEM VOLTAGE LOW

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The SKREEM has detected the system voltage is below a calibrated value.
Possible Causes
FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT OPEN

FUSED (B+) CIRCUIT OPEN
SKREEM
Diagnostic Test

Does the DTC reset?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go to 2
Corroded terminals
Does the DTC reset?
3. FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT OPEN

NOTE: Check the related fuses to the Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit. If the fuse is found
to be open repair the circuit for a shorted condition.
Yes >> Go to 4
No >> Repair the Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit for an open.
4. FUSED (B+) CIRCUIT OPEN

Using a 12 volt test light connected to ground, probe the Fused (B+) circuit in the SKREEM harness connector.
Yes >> Go to 5
No >> Repair the Fused (B+) circuit for an open.
5. SKREEM
NOTE: Repeat the below procedure for both the Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit and the
Fused (B+) circuit.
Reconnect the SKREEM connector.
Back probe the Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit and then the Fused (B+) circuit.
Start the engine.
No >> Repair the circuit(s) that indicated the incorrect voltage.
B210D-SYSTEM VOLTAGE HIGH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The SKREEM has detected the system voltage above a calibrated value.
Possible Causes
FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT
SKREEM
Diagnostic Test

Does the DTC reset?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go to 2
Corroded terminals
Does the DTC reset?
3. FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE

Yes >> Repair the Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit for a short to voltage.
No >> Replace and reprogram the SKREEM in accordance with the Service Information.

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The SKREEM has detected the Fused (B+) input voltage below a calibrated value.
Possible Causes
FUSED (B+) CIRCUIT OPEN
SKREEM
Diagnostic Test

Does the DTC reset?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go to 2
Corroded terminals
Dirty (partial ) module ground
Does the DTC reset?
3. FUSED (B+) CIRCUIT OPEN

NOTE: Check the related fuses to the Fused (B+) circuit. If the fuse is found to be open repair the circuit for
a shorted condition.
Using a 12 volt test light connected to ground, probe the Fused (B+) circuit in the SKREEM harness connector.
Yes >> Go to 4
No >> Repair the Fused (B+) circuit for an open.
4. SKREEM
Reconnect the SKREEM connector
Back probe the Fused (B+) circuit.
Start the engine.
No >> Repair the Fused (B+) circuit for high resistances.

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The SKREEM has detected the Fused (B+) input voltage above a calibrated value.
Possible Causes
SKREEM
Diagnostic Test

CAUTION: Diagnose and repair all Powertrain DTCs before continuing.
With the scan tool, record and erase the SKREEM DTCs.
Using the scan tool, read the SKREEM DTCs.
Does the DTC reset?
No >> Perform SKREEM VERIFICATION TEST.
B2204-ECU CONFIGURATION MISMATCH

When Monitored:
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test

Does the DTC reset?
SKREEM.
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
B2205-ORIGINAL VIN MISSING/MISMATCH

When Monitored:
PCM reset.
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
VERIFYING PCM VIN

PCM
Diagnostic Test

Wait 10 seconds.
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Go To 4

Yes >> Go To 3

4. INTERMITTENT
wires.
terminals.

When Monitored:
Anytime the ignition key is in the ON position.
Set Condition:
VIN stored in Intrusion Transceiver Module does not match the VIN stored in the Cluster.
Possible Causes
INTRUSION TRANSCEIVER MODULE SWAPPED FROM DIFFERENT VEHICLE
Diagnostic Test

Disarm the VTSS.
Does the DTC reset?
Yes >> Using the scan tool under Miscellaneous functions initialize the Intrusion Transceiver Module.
B2224SKREEM INTERNAL
When Monitored:
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test

Does the DTC reset?
SKREEM.
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
B2228-SKREEM INTERNAL - RKE RECEIVER

When Monitored:
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test

Does the DTC reset?
SKREEM.
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
B2229-SKREEM INTERNAL - SKIM IMMOBILIZER

When Monitored:
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test

Does the DTC reset?
SKREEM.
STANDARD PROCEDURE)

When Monitored:
Anytime the ignition key is in the ON position.
Set Condition:
If the Intrusion Transceiver Module is not configured.
Possible Causes
INTRUSION TRANSCEIVER MODULE CONFIGURATION
Diagnostic Test
1. CONFIGURE THE INTRUSION TRANSCEIVER MODULE

Using the scan tool under miscellaneous functions perform the initialization procedure for the Intrusion Transceiver
Module.
Disarm the VTSS.
Does the DTC reset?
B223C-INTRUSION TRANSCEIVER MODULE INTERNAL

When Monitored:
Ignition on.
Set Condition:
Internal Intrusion Transceiver Module test failed.
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test

Disarm the VTSS.
Does the DTC reset?
B2254-COLUMN LOCK MODULE INTERNAL

When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
If the SKREEM does not receive the correct response message back from the Steering Column Lock Module.
Possible Causes
INTERMITTENT CONDITION
(A917) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT OPEN
(F892) IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (KEY-IN) CIRCUIT OPEN
(D508) TIRE PRESSURE BUS CIRCUIT OPEN
STEERING COLUMN LOCK MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. INTERMITTENT DTC
With the scan tool, erase the current SKREEM DTCs.
Arm the VTSS and wait one minute.
Disarm the VTSS and turn the ignition on.
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The condition that caused this symptom is currently not present. Inspect the related wiring harness for
a possible intermittent condition. Look for any chafed, pierced, pinched or partially broken wires.
2. (A917) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT OPEN

Gain access to the Steering Column Lock Module.
Disconnect the Steering Column Lock Module connector.
B(+) circuit in the Steering Column Lock Module connector.
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Repair the (A917) Fused B(+) circuit for an open.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8 -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
3. (A892) IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (KEY-IN) CIRCUIT OPEN

Ensure the ignition key is fully inserted into the ignition switch.
Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check the (A892) Ignition
Switch Output (Key-In) circuit in the Steering Column Lock Module con-
nector.
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Repair the (A892) Ignition Switch Output (Key-In) circuit for
an open.
STANDARD PROCEDURE)

Ground circuit at the Steering Column Lock Module connector.
Yes >> Go To 5
No >> Repair the (Z910) Ground circuit for an open.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - 1A. (Refer to 8 -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
5. (D508) TIRE PRESSURE BUS CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (D508) Tire Pressure Bus circuit between
the SKREEM and the Steering Column Lock Module connectors.
Yes >> Replace the Steering Column Lock Module in accordance
Perform SKREEM VERIFICATION TEST. (Refer to 8 -
ELECTRICAL/VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY - STANDARD
PROCEDURE)
No >> Repair the (D508) Tire Pressure Bus circuit for an open.
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
U0019-CAN B BUS

When Monitored:
Continuously
Set Condition:
Whenever the CAN B Bus (+) or CAN B Bus () circuit is open, shorted to voltage or shorted to ground.
Possible Causes

SKREEM
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTCs

cycle.
Yes >> Go To 2

Does the scan tool display any CAN B BUS DTCs - ACTIVE?
Yes >> Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING.
No >> Go To 3

Disconnect the SKREEM connector.
Disconnect the Front Control Module connector.
Measure the resistance of the (D55) CAN B Bus (+) circuit between the Front Control Module harness connector
and the SKREEM harness connector.
Yes >> Go To 4

Measure the resistance of the (D54) CAN B Bus () circuit between the Front Control Module harness connector
and the SKREEM harness connector.
Yes >> Replace the SKREEM in accordance with the service information.
U0019CAN B BUS ITM

When Monitored:
Continuously
Set Condition:
Possible Causes

Diagnostic Test

cycle.
Yes >> Go To 2

No >> Go To 3

Front Control Module C1 connector and the Intrusion Transceiver Mod-
ule connector.
Yes >> Go To 4
STANDARD PROCEDURE)

Front Control Module C1 connector and the Intrusion Transceiver Mod-
ule connector.
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
U0141-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH FRONT CONTROL MODULE

test procedure.
U0146-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH CENTRAL GATEWAY

(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) and perform the
U0141-Lost Communication With Front Control Module test for the diagnostic test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.
U110D-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH SECURITY SIREN

When Monitored:
Continuously while the VTSS is armed.
Set Condition:
If the Intrusion Transceiver Module does not receive messages from the Siren.
Possible Causes
(A117) FUSED B(+) (I.O.D.) CIRCUIT OPEN
(D96) SIREN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY
(D96) SIREN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN
(D96) SIREN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
SIREN
Diagnostic Test
1. INTERMITTENT DTC
With the scan tool, erase the current Intrusion Transceiver Module DTCs.
Arm the VTSS and wait 1 minute.
Yes >> Go To 2
2. (A117) FUSED B(+) (I.O.D.) CIRCUIT OPEN

Gain access to the VTSS Siren.
B(+) (I.O.D.) circuit in the Siren connector.
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Repair the (A117) Fused B(+) (I.O.D.) circuit for an open.
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
3. (Z904) GROUND CIRCUIT

Ground circuit at the siren connector.
Yes >> Go To 4
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
4. FAULTY SIREN
Use the DRBIIIT and set up as follows:
Use the Scope input cable CH7058, Cable to Probe adapter CH7062,
and the red and black test probes.
Connect the scope input cable to the channel one connector on the
DRBIIIT. Attach the red and black leads and the cable to probe adapter
to the scope input cable.
Select DRBIIIT Stand-alone.
Select lab scope.
Select Live.
Select 12 volt square wave.
Press F2 for Scope.
Press F2 and use the down arrow to set voltage range to 20 volts.
Press F2 again when complete.
Connect the black lead to the chassis ground. Connect the red lead to the (D96) Siren Signal Control circuit in the
Siren connector.
Close all doors and arm the VTSS.
Observe the voltage displayed on the DRBIIIT Lab Scope.
Is there a voltage square wave present 1 to 2 seconds?
Yes >> Connect a known good siren and try to reset the DTC. If the DTC does not reset the original siren
needs to be replaced. If the DTC does reset replace the ITM.
No >> Go To 5
5. (D96) SIREN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

Disconnect the Siren harness connector.
Measure the voltage of the (D96) Siren Signal Control circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (D96) Siren Signal Control circuit for a short to
voltage.Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - 1A. (Refer
to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No >> Go To 6
6. (D96) SIREN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (D96) Siren Signal
Control circuit.
Yes >> Go To 7
No >> Repair the (D96) Siren Signal Control circuit for a short to
ground.
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
7. (D96) SIREN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (D96) Siren Signal Control circuit
between the Intrusion Transceiver Module and the Siren connector.
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No >> Repair the (D96) Siren Signal Control circuit for an open.
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
U1416-IMPLAUSIBLE SECURITY SIREN SIGNAL RECEIVED

When Monitored:
Continuously while the VTSS is armed.
Set Condition:
If the Intrusion Transceiver Module does not receive messages from the Siren.
Possible Causes
(A117) FUSED B(+) (I.O.D.) CIRCUIT OPEN
(D96) SIREN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY
(D96) SIREN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN
(D96) SIREN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
SIREN
Diagnostic Test
1. INTERMITTENT DTC
With the scan tool, erase the current Intrusion Transceiver Module DTCs.
Arm the VTSS and wait one minute.
Yes >> Go To 2
2. (A117) FUSED B(+) (I.O.D.)

Gain access to the VTSS Siren.
B(+) (I.O.D.) circuit in the Siren connector.
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Repair the (A117) Fused B(+) (I.O.D.) circuit for an open.
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
3. (Z904) GROUND CIRCUIT

Ground circuit at the siren connector.
Yes >> Go To 4
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
4. FAULTY SIREN
Use the DRBIIIT and set up as follows:
Use the Scope input cable CH7058, Cable to Probe adapter CH7062,
and the red and black test probes.
Connect the scope input cable to the channel one connector on the
DRBIIIT. Attach the red and black leads and the cable to probe adapter
to the scope input cable.
Select DRBIIIT Stand-alone.
Select lab scope.
Select Live.
Select 12 volt square wave.
Press F2 for Scope.
Press F2 and use the down arrow to set voltage range to 20 volts.
Press F2 again when complete.
Connect the black lead to the chassis ground. Connect the red lead to the (D96) Siren Signal Control circuit in the
Siren connector.
Close all doors and arm the VTSS.
Observe the voltage displayed on the DRBIIIT Lab Scope.
Is there a voltage square wave present 1 to 2 seconds?
Yes >> Connect a known good siren and try to reset the DTC. If the DTC does not reset the original siren
needs to be replaced. If the DTC does reset replace the Intrusion Transceiver Module in accordance
No >> Go To 5
5. (D96) SIREN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

Measure the voltage of the (D96) Siren Signal Control circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (D96) Siren Signal Control circuit for a short to
voltage.Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - 1A. (Refer
to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No >> Go To 6
6. (D96) SIREN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (D96) Siren Signal
Control circuit.
Yes >> Go To 7
No >> Repair the (D96) Siren Signal Control circuit for a short to
ground.
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
7. (D96) SIREN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (D96) Siren Signal Control circuit
between the Intrusion Transceiver Module and the Siren connector.
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No >> Repair the (D96) Siren Signal Control circuit for an open.
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
STANDARD PROCEDURE
SKREEM/SKIM VERIFICATION
Diagnostic Test
1. SKREEM/SKIM VERIFICATION
NOTE: When entering the PIN, care should be taken because the SKREEM will only allow 3 consecutive
attempts to enter the correct PIN. If 3 consecutive incorrect PINs are entered the SKREEM will Lock Out the
scan tool. To exit Lock Mode, the ignition key must remain the Run position for I hour. All accessories must
be off. A battery charger connected to the battery during this time period is recommended.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with a premium Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) system, when the SKREEM
and/or the spare tire pressure sensor is replaced with a new unit, a diagnostic scan tool MUST be used to
run a routine that allows the SKREEM to be programmed with the ID number and location of the spare tire
pressure sensor mounted in the wheel of the spare tire. Follow the programming steps outlined in the diag-
nostic scan tool for Learn Spare Tire Sensor ID under Miscellaneous Functions for the WCM/Wireless
Control Module menu item as appropriate. In addition, if the SKREEM is replaced, the spare tire must be
dismounted from its wheel to access and note the ID number on the spare tire pressure sensor so that the
ID code for that sensor can be programmed into the new SKREEM.
1. Reconnect the previously disconnected components and connectors.
2. Obtain the vehicles unique Personal Identification Number (PIN) assigned to its original SKREEM. This num-
ber can be obtained from the vehicle invoice or from the DaimlerChrysler Customer Center (Phone 1-800-992-
1997).
3. With the scan tool, select Miscellaneous Functions, WCM/Wireless Control Module. Then select the desired
procedure and follow the display on the scan tool.
4. If the vehicle is equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring System program the Palcard Pressure Values into the
WCM/SKREEM.
5. Ensure all the customers key have been programmed into the new module if necessary.
6. With the scan tool, ease all DTCs. Perform 5 ignition key cycles, leaving the key on for at least 90 seconds
per cycle.
7. With the scan tool, read SKREEM DTC(s).
8.
SKREEM.
Are there any SKREEM DTC(s) present?
Yes >> Repair not complete, refer to the appropriate symptom.
8Q - 124 VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY - SERVICE INFORMATION LX
VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY - SERVICE INFORMATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY - SERVICE RECEIVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

INFORMATION INSTALLATION
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 TRANSMITTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 RECEIVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING SHAFT LOCK MODULE - EXPORT
VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY SYSTEM/ DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM . . . 128 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
HOOD AJAR SWITCH - EXPORT SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY MODULE
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY MODULE
INTRUSION MODULE - EXPORT (SKREEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 TRANSPONDER KEY
INTRUSION SENSOR - EXPORT OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
DESCRIPTION STANDARD PROCEDURE
TRANSMITTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 TRANSPONDER PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . 146
RECEIVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 VTSS/SKIS INDICATOR LAMP
OPERATION DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
TRANSMITTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
RECEIVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
REMOVAL
TRANSMITTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
LX VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY - SERVICE INFORMATION 8Q - 125
VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY - SERVICE INFORMATION

DESCRIPTION
VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY SYSTEM
The VTSS is available in two different configurations: One is designed for vehicles manufactured for sale in North
America; while the other configuration is designed for vehicles manufactured for sale in markets outside of North
America, also referred to as export markets. In addition, the VTSS for export is available in two versions: base and
premium. All vehicles equipped with VTSS are also equipped with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and the
Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS), regardless of their market destination.
The North American and export base version of the VTSS system provide perimeter vehicle protection by monitoring
the vehicle doors, the ignition switch, and for vehicles built for certain markets where it is required equipment, the
hood. If unauthorized vehicle use or tampering is detected, these systems respond by pulsing the vehicle horn as
an audible deterrent and flashing certain exterior lamps as a visual deterrent.
The export premium version of the VTSS system is only available in vehicles manufactured for sale in certain mar-
kets where it is required equipment. The export premium version of the VTSS provides the same perimeter protec-
tion features as the base version, but adds interior vehicle intrusion protection.
The VTSS includes the following major components, which are described in further detail elsewhere in this service
information:
Door Ajar Switches - A door ajar switch is integral to the door latch mechanism of each front and rear door.
The FCM/IPM is located in the engine compartment, near the battery and the Power Distribution Center (PDC)
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER DISTRIBUTION - DESCRIPTION).
Horn Relay - The horn relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) in the engine compartment
near the battery
Ignition Switch - The ignition switch is located on the steering column in the passenger compartment (Refer
to 8 - ELECTRICAL/IGNITION CONTROL/IGNITION SWITCH - DESCRIPTION).
Instrument Cluster - The ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) is also known as the Cab Compart-
ment Node (CCN). The EMIC/CCN is located in the instrument panel above the steering column opening,
directly in front of the driver (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - DESCRIPTION).
Intrusion Module - An intrusion module is located the passenger side instrument panel, just above the glove
box of vehicles built for sale in certain export markets where it is required equipment (Refer to 8 - ELECTRI-
CAL/VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY/INTRUSION TRANSCEIVER MODULE - DESCRIPTION).
Intrusion Sensor Receiver - An intrusion sensor receiver is located in the right front corner of the overhead
console above the headliner in the passenger compartment of vehicles built for sale in certain export markets
where it is required equipment (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY/INTRUSION SENSOR
RECEIVER - DESCRIPTION).
Intrusion Sensor Transmitter - An intrusion sensor transmitter is located in the right C-pillar upper trim panel
in the passenger compartment of vehicles built for sale in certain export markets where it is required equip-
ment (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY/INTRUSION SENSOR TRANSMITTER -
DESCRIPTION).
Liftgate Ajar Switch - Wagon only - A liftgate ajar switch is integral to the latch mechanism of the liftgate.
Security Indicator - The security indicator is integral to the instrument cluster (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - OPERATION).
Siren - An alarm siren is located behind the left front wheelhouse splash shield, outboard of the left front frame
rail. A single screw secures the mounting bracket to the right end of the front crossmember of vehicles built for
sale in certain export markets where it is required equipment.
SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM

The Sentry Key Remote Entry System (SKREES) provides passive vehicle protection by preventing the engine from
operating unless a valid electronically encoded key is detected in the ignition lock cylinder. The SKREES used in
combination with the export premium version of the VTSS adds a steering shaft lock feature that provides passive
protection by preventing the vehicle from being steered unless a valid electronically encoded key is detected in the
ignition lock cylinder.
The SKREES includes the following major components, which are described in further detail elsewhere in this ser-
vice information:
Powertrain Control Module - The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) is located in the engine compartment.
Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM)/Wireless Control Module (WCM) - The Sentry Key REmote
Entry Module (SKREEM), sometimes referred to as the Wireless Control Module (WCM), is located on the right
side of the steering column near the ignition lock cylinder housing and an integral molded plastic antenna ring
circles the ignition lock cylinder like a halo. The SKREEM and its antenna are concealed beneath the instru-
ment panel steering column shrouds.
Sentry Key Transponder - The Sentry Key transponder is contained within the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter on the ignition key.
Security Indicator - The security indicator is integral to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - OPERATION).
Shaft Lock Module - A shaft lock module is located on the lower end of the steering column casting below the
instrument panel in the passenger compartment of vehicles built for sale in certain export markets where it is
required equipment.
OPERATION
The ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC), sometimes referred to as the Cab Compartment Node (CCN), is
used to control and integrate many of the functions and features included in the Vehicle Theft Security System
(VTSS). In the VTSS, the EMIC/CCN receives inputs indicating the status of the door ajar switches, the liftgate ajar
switch and the ignition switch. The EMIC/CCN will process the information from all of these inputs, internally control
the security indicator as appropriate, and send electronic messages to the Front Control Module (FCM) over the
Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The FCM internally controls the output to the hazard warning lamps and
sends a control output to energize or de-energize the horn relay as appropriate.
Following are paragraphs describing the operation of each of the VTSS features.
ENABLING
VTSS should be learned off the vehicle configuration message from the FCM when the EMIC/CCN gets replaced.
ARMING
Passive arming of the VTSS occurs when the vehicle is exited with the key removed from the ignition switch, the
headlamps are turned off, and the doors are locked while they are open using the power lock switch. Active arming
occurs when the Lock button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is depressed to lock the vehicle. For
active arming to occur, the doors must be closed and the ignition switch must be in the Off position when the RKE
transmitter Lock button is depressed. The power lock switch will not function if the key is in the ignition switch or
the headlamps are turned on with the driver side front door open.
Pre-arming of the VTSS is initiated when a door or the liftgate is open when the vehicle is locked using a power
door lock switch or when the RKE transmitter Lock button is depressed. Pre-arming will not occur if the key is in
the ignition switch or the headlamps are turned on with the driver side front door open. When the VTSS is pre-
armed, the arming sequence is delayed until all of the doors and the liftgate have been closed. The VTSS will
remain in Pre-Armed mode for up to seventeen seconds after all doors and the liftgate have been closed.
Once the VTSS begins the passive or active arming sequence, the security indicator in the instrument cluster will
flash rapidly for about seventeen seconds. This indicates that VTSS arming is in progress. If the ignition switch is
turned to the On position, a door or the liftgate is opened, a door or the liftgate is unlocked by any means, or the
RKE Panic button is depressed during the seventeen second arming process, the security indicator will stop flash-
ing and the arming process will abort. Once the seventeen second arming sequence is successfully completed, the
security indicator will flash at a slower rate, indicating that the VTSS is armed.
DISARMING
Since this model is not equipped with lock cylinder switches, passive disarming of the VTSS is only possible if the
vehicle is equipped with the optional Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS). On vehicles with SKIS, turning the
ignition switch to the On position using a valid SKIS key will passively disarm VTSS. Active disarming of the VTSS
occurs when the vehicle is unlocked by depressing the Unlock button of the RKE transmitter. Once the alarm has
been activated, either disarming method will also deactivate the alarm. Depressing the Panic button on the RKE
transmitter will not disarm the VTSS.
POWER-UP MODE
When the armed VTSS senses that the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, it enters its power-up
mode. In the power-up mode the alarm system remains armed following a battery failure or disconnect. If the VTSS
was armed prior to a battery disconnect or failure, the technician or vehicle operator will have to actively or pas-
sively disarm the alarm system after the battery is reconnected. The power-up mode will also apply if the battery
goes dead while the system is armed, and battery jump-starting is attempted. The VTSS will be armed until the
technician or vehicle operator has actively or passively disarmed the alarm system. If the VTSS is in the disarmed
mode prior to a battery disconnect or failure, it will remain disarmed after the battery is reconnected or replaced, or
if jump-starting is attempted.
TAMPER ALERT
The VTSS tamper alert feature will sound the horn three times upon disarming, if the alarm was triggered and has
since timed-out (about eighteen minutes) or if the battery has been disconnected and reconnected. This feature
alerts the vehicle operator that the VTSS alarm was activated while the vehicle was unattended.
INTRUSION ALARM
The intrusion alarm is an exclusive feature of the export premium version of the VTSS, which is only available in
certain markets where it is required. When the VTSS is armed, the intrusion module uses a hard wired outputs to
control an ultrasonic transmitter and receiver which allows the module to monitor the interior of the vehicle for move-
ment. If motion is detected, the intrusion module sends an electronic message to the EMIC/CCN and the FCM over
the CAN data bus to invoke the visual alarm features, and sends an electronic message to the siren over a dedi-
cated serial bus to invoke the audible alarm feature.
The motion detect feature of the intrusion module can be disabled by depressing the LOCK button on the RKE
transmitter three times within 15 seconds during VTSS arming, while the security indicator is still flashing rapidly.
The VTSS provides a single short siren chirp as an audible confirmation that the motion detect disable request has
been received.
The intrusion module must be electronically enabled in order for the intrusion alarm to perform as designed. The
intrusion alarm function of the module is enabled on vehicles equipped with this option at the factory, but a service
replacement module must be configured and enabled by the dealer using a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appro-
priate diagnostic information. The intrusion module monitors the conditions of the transmitter and receiver sensors
as well as the siren, and will store fault information in the form of a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) if a system
malfunction is detected. The intrusion module can be diagnosed, and any stored DTC can be retrieved using a
diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information.
SENTRY KEY IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM

The Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS, sometimes referred to as the Sentry Key Remote Entry System
(SKREES), ) is designed to provide passive protection against unauthorized vehicle use by disabling the engine
after about two seconds of running, whenever any method other than a valid Sentry Key is used to start the vehicle.
The SKIS/SKREES is considered a passive protection system because it is always active when the ignition system
is energized and does not require any customer intervention. The SKIS/SKREES uses Radio Frequency (RF) com-
munication to obtain confirmation that the key in the ignition switch is a valid key for operating the vehicle. The
microprocessor-based SKIS/SKREES hardware and software also uses electronic messages to communicate with
other electronic modules in the vehicle over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRI-
CAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES/COMMUNICATION - OPERATION).
Pre-programmed Sentry Key transponders are provided with the vehicle from the factory. Each Sentry Key REmote
Entry Module (SKREEM), sometimes referred to as the Wireless Control Module (WCM), will recognize a maximum
of eight Sentry Keys. If the customer would like additional keys other than those provided with the vehicle, they may
be purchased from any authorized dealer. These additional keys must be programmed to the SKREEM/WCM in the
vehicle in order for the system to recognize them as valid keys. This can be done by the dealer using a diagnostic
scan tool or, if Customer Learn programming is an available SKIS/SKREES feature in the market where the vehicle
was purchased, the customer can program the additional keys, as long as at least two valid Sentry Keys are already
available. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY - STANDARD PROCEDURE - TRANSPONDER
PROGRAMMING).
In vehicles equipped with an export premium version of the VTSS, the SKIS also controls an electronic shaft lock
module on the steering column that locks the steering shaft from rotation unless a valid key is detected in the igni-
tion lock cylinder. The SKREEM communicates with the shaft lock module over a dedicated serial bus to monitor
and control the shaft lock function.
The SKREEM performs a self-test of the SKIS and the shaft lock module each time the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position, and will store fault information in the form of a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) if a system mal-
function is detected. The SKREEM will also send an electronic message to the instrument cluster if a fault is
detected, and the instrument cluster illuminates the security indicator or displays a textual shaft lock error message
in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) as appropriate. The SKIS can be diagnosed, and any stored
DTC can be retrieved using a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information.

VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY SYSTEM/SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM
SENTRY KEY IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (SKIM)/SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM
(SKREES)
Conventional diagnostic methods may not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the Sentry Key REmote Entry Mod-
ule (SKREEM), sometimes referred to as the Wireless Control Module (WCM), and the Sentry Key Immobilizer Sys-
tem (SKIM), sometimes referred to as the Sentry Key Remote Entry System (SKREES), the ElectroMechanical
Instrument Cluster (EMIC), the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus, or
the electronic message inputs used to provide the electronic features of the SKREES. The most reliable, efficient,
and accurate means to diagnose the SKREEM, the EMIC, the PCM, the CAN data bus, and the electronic message
inputs for the SKREES requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information.
SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS
SECURITY INDICATOR 1. Light-Emitting Diode (LED) 1. Perform the instrument cluster actuator test.
FAILS TO LIGHT DURING faulty. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT
BULB TEST CLUSTER - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING -
ACTUATOR TEST)..
2. Fuse faulty. 2. Check the SKREEM fused B(+) fuse and the
fused ignition switch output (run-start) fuse in the
Junction Block (JB). Replace fuses, if required.
3. Ground path faulty. 3. Check for continuity to ground at the connector
for the SKREEM. Repair wiring, if required.
4. Battery feed faulty. 4. Check for battery voltage at the connector for
the SKREEM. Repair wiring, if required.
5. Ignition feed faulty. 5. Check for battery voltage at the connector for
the SKREEM with the ignition switch in the On
position. Repair wiring, if required.
SECURITY INDICATOR 1. Invalid key in ignition 1. Replace the key with a known valid key.
FLASHES FOLLOWING switch lock cylinder.
BULB TEST
2. Key-related fault. 2. Use a diagnostic scan tool and the appropriate
diagnostic information for further diagnosis.
SECURITY INDICATOR 1. SKREES system 1. Use a diagnostic scan tool and the appropriate
LIGHTS SOLID FOLLOWING malfunction/fault detected. diagnostic information for further diagnosis.
BULB TEST 2. SKREES system 2. Use a diagnostic scan tool and the appropriate
inoperative. diagnostic information for further diagnosis.
VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY SYSTEM

However, conventional diagnostic methods may not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the ElectroMechanical
Instrument Cluster (EMIC), the Front Control Module (FCM), the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus, or the
electronic message inputs used to provide the electronic features of the VTSS. The most reliable, efficient, and
accurate means to diagnose the EMIC, the FCM, the CAN data bus, and the electronic message inputs for the
VTSS requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information.
HOOD AJAR SWITCH - EXPORT

DESCRIPTION
The hood ajar switch is a normally closed, single pole,
spring-loaded plunger actuated switch that is used
only on vehicles equipped with the Vehicle Theft Secu-
rity System (VTSS) for sale in certain markets where it
is required equipment. The switch is connected to the
vehicle electrical system through the headlamp and
dash wire harness.
The switch plunger (3) extends through a mounting
collar (4) and sleeve on the upper end of the switch
body. The sleeve has a one-time, self-adjustment fea-
ture that is activated after the switch is installed by
closing the hood. Two integral latches (2) lock the
switch into a keyed mounting hole in the stamped
steel switch mounting bracket. The mounting bracket
is secured toward the left rear of the engine compart-
ment. The underside of the hood panel inner reinforce-
ment actuates the switch plunger as the hood panel is
closed.
An installed hood ajar switch cannot be readjusted or
repaired. If the switch is damaged, ineffective, or requires readjustment, it must be replaced with a new unit.
OPERATION
The hood ajar switch is a normally closed switch that is held open as the spring-loaded switch plunger is depressed
by the inner hood panel reinforcement when the hood panel is closed and latched. When the hood is opened, the
spring-loaded switch plunger extends from the switch body and the switch contacts are closed. The switch is con-
nected in series between ground and the hood ajar switch sense input of the Front Control Module (FCM). The FCM
uses an internal resistor pull up to monitor the state of the hood ajar switch contacts.
The components of the switch self-adjustment feature include an integral stop on the shaft of the plunger and a
ribbed, ratcheting sleeve at the top of the switch body from which the plunger extends. With the switch mounting
collar secured in its mounting bracket, the plunger is depressed by the hood inner reinforcement as the hood is
closed. As the plunger is depressed, the plunger stop contacts the top of the sleeve and the sleeve is driven down-
ward, ratcheting through the switch mounting collar until the hood is fully closed and latched. The ribs on the sleeve
are engaged within the mounting collar to maintain this adjusted position.
REMOVAL
1. Unlatch and open the hood.
3. From the top of the hood ajar switch mounting bracket, squeeze the two switch latch tabs together and pull the
switch upward.
4. Pull the hood ajar switch up through the hole in the mounting bracket far enough to access and disconnect the
wire harness connector and remove switch from vehicle.
INSTALLATION
NOTE: Self-adjustment of the hood ajar switch is a one-time feature. If the switch is damaged, ineffective,
removed or requires readjustment, it must be replaced with a new unit.
1. Position the hood ajar switch near the hole in the mounting bracket.
2. Pull the wire harness connector through the switch mounting bracket and reconnect it to the switch.
3. From the top of the mounting bracket, press the switch downward into the mounting hole until the integral switch
latch tabs lock it into place.
5. Close and latch the hood. This will adjust the hood ajar switch to the proper height.
INTRUSION MODULE - EXPORT

DESCRIPTION
An intrusion module (1) is part of the premium version
of the Vehicle Theft Security System (VTSS). The pre-
mium version of the VTSS is only available in vehicles
built for certain markets, where the additional features
offered by this system are required. The intrusion
module is located in the passenger compartment. This
unit is designed to work in conjunction with the intru-
sion sensor transmitter and intrusion sensor receiver
to provide interior motion detection and serves as the
interface between the Forward Control Module (FCM),
the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC),
(CCN), and the alarm siren.
The intrusion module has two integral mounts (2) that
are secured behind the passenger side instrument
panel, just above the glove box. Concealed within the
molded plastic housing is the circuitry of the module,
which includes a microprocessor. The module is con-
nected to the vehicle electrical system by a connector
of the body wire harness.
The intrusion module unit cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if faulty or damaged, it must be replaced.
OPERATION
The microprocessor in the intrusion module contains the motion detection logic circuits and controls all of the fea-
tures of the premium version of the Vehicle Theft Security System (VTSS). The module uses On-Board Diagnostics
(OBD) and can communicate with other modules in the vehicle as well as with a diagnostic scan tool using the
Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. This method of communication is used by the module to communicate with
the Forward Control Module (FCM) and the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC), sometimes referred to as
the Cab Compartment Node (CCN). The module also communicates with the alarm siren over a dedicated serial
bus circuit.
The intrusion module microprocessor continuously monitors inputs from the intrusion sensor transmitter and receiver
as well as inputs from the EMIC/CCN and the alarm siren module. The module energizes the intrusion sensor trans-
mitter, which transmits ultrasonic signals into the vehicle cabin through a transmit transducer, then monitors the
current draw of the transmitter to detect problems with the transmitter and transmitter circuits. The module also
energizes the intrusion sensor receiver, which listens to the ultrasonic signals through a receive transducer as they
bounce off of objects in the vehicle interior, then monitors the current draw of the receiver for data signals and to
detect problems with the receiver and receiver circuits. If an object is moving in the interior, a detection circuit in the
module senses this movement through the modulation of the returning data signals from the receiver.
If movement is detected, the intrusion module sends an electronic message to the FCM over the CAN data bus to
flash the exterior lighting and sends another message to the alarm siren module over the dedicated serial bus line
to sound the siren. When the EMIC/CCN or FCM detect a breach in the perimeter protection through a door or hood
ajar switch input, they send an electronic message to the intrusion module and the module sends a message to the
FCM to flash the exterior lighting and a message to the alarm siren module to sound the siren. The module also
monitors message inputs from the alarm siren module for siren battery or siren input/output circuit tamper alerts,
and siren battery condition alerts, then sets active and stored Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) for any monitored
system faults it detects. An active fault only remains for the current ignition switch cycle, while a stored fault causes
a DTC to be stored in memory by the module. If a fault does not recur for 50 ignition cycles, the module will auto-
matically erase the stored DTC.
The intrusion module receives constant battery voltage (when armed), and is grounded at all times through a hard
wired remote ground point. These connections allow the module to remain operational, regardless of the ignition
switch position. Use a diagnostic scan tool and refer to the appropriate diagnostic information for proper diagnosis
of the system.
REMOVAL
2. Remove the glove box (Refer to 23 - BODY/INSTRUMENT PANEL/GLOVE BOX - REMOVAL).
3. Reach up behind the instrument panel and remove the two retaining screws to the intrusion module.
4. Disconnect the electrical connector to the intrusion Module.
5. Remove the module from the instrument panel.
INSTALLATION
1. Position the intrusion module on the passenger side of the instrument panel and connect the electrical connector.
2. Install and tighten the two fasteners that secure the module to the instrument panel.
3. Install the glove box (Refer to 23 - BODY/INSTRUMENT PANEL/GLOVE BOX - INSTALLATION).
INTRUSION SENSOR - EXPORT

DESCRIPTION
TRANSMITTER
An intrusion sensor transmitter (2) is part of the pre-
mium version of the Vehicle Theft Security System
(VTSS). The premium version of the VTSS is only
available in vehicles built for certain markets, where
the additional features offered by this system are
required. This unit is designed to work in conjunction
with the intrusion sensor receiver to provide interior
motion detection inputs to the intrusion module, which
serves as the interface between the Forward Control
Module (FCM), the ElectroMechanical Instrument
Cluster (EMIC), sometimes referred to as the Cab
Compartment Node (CCN), and the alarm siren.
The transmitter is located in the passenger compart-
ment, where it is concealed behind the right C-pillar.
The trim bezel has a small round opening that faces
the front of the vehicle through which the transducer is
aimed. Concealed within the molded plastic transmitter
housing is the circuitry of the transmitter which
includes an ultrasonic transmit transducer (1).
The intrusion sensor transmitter cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if faulty or damaged, it must be replaced. The
transmitter mounting bracket is serviced as a unit with the headliner. The transducer trim bezel is available for sep-
arate service replacement.
RECEIVER
An intrusion sensor receiver (1) is part of the premium
version of the Vehicle Theft Security System (VTSS).
The premium version of the VTSS is only available in
vehicles built for certain markets, where the additional
features offered by this system are required. This unit
is designed to work in conjunction with the intrusion
sensor transmitter to provide interior motion detection
inputs to the intrusion module, which serves as the
interface between the Forward Control Module (FCM),
the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC),
(CCN), and the alarm siren.
The receiver is located in the passenger compartment,
where it is concealed behind the right front corner of
the overhead console housing and engages three
latch tabs integral to the receiver housing. The ultra-
sonic receiver transducer (2) is aimed through a small
dedicated round opening in the overhead console for-
ward of the reading lamps and is the only evidence of
the receiver that is visible from the passenger compartment.
Concealed within the receiver housing is the circuitry which includes the receive transducer. The receiver is con-
nected to the vehicle electrical system wire harness that is integral to the headliner.
The intrusion sensor receiver cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if faulty or damaged, it must be replaced. The
receiver mounting bracket is serviced as a unit with the overhead console.
OPERATION
TRANSMITTER
The intrusion sensor transmitter operates only when it is energized by the intrusion module. The transmitter gener-
ates ultrasonic signals into the vehicle cabin through a transmit transducer. Then the intrusion sensor receiver lis-
tens to the returning signals as they bounce off of objects in the vehicle interior and provides input signals to the
intrusion module. If an object is moving in the interior, a detection circuit in the intrusion module senses this move-
ment through the modulation of the returning signals that occur due to the Doppler effect. The intrusion module
monitors the current draw of the transmitter circuits to determine the condition of the transmitter and, if the draw is
too high or too low, it will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any fault that is detected.
Use a diagnostic scan tool and refer to the appropriate diagnostic information for diagnosis and testing of the sys-
tem.
RECEIVER
The intrusion sensor receiver operates only when it is energized by the intrusion module. The receiver monitors
ultrasonic signals generated in the vehicle cabin by the intrusion sensor transmitter through a receive transducer.
The receiver listens to the ultrasonic signals as they bounce off of objects in the vehicle interior and provides input
signals to the intrusion module. If an object is moving in the interior, a detection circuit in the intrusion module
senses this movement through the modulation of the returning signals that occur due to the Doppler effect. The
intrusion module monitors the current draw of the receiver circuits to determine the condition of the receiver and, if
the draw is too high or too low, it will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any fault that is detected.
Use a diagnostic scan tool and refer to the appropriate diagnostic information for diagnosis and testing of the sys-
tem.
REMOVAL
TRANSMITTER
2. If replacing the bezel, pull the bezel (1) inboard
from the C-pillar (3), or use a trim stick or equiva-
lent to unsnap it from the transducer housing (2) of
the intrusion sensor transmitter.
3. Remove the C-pillar trim panel (Refer to 23 -
4. Remove the two retaining screws from the C-pillar
and remove the sensor.
RECEIVER
2. Remove the overhead console from the headliner.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/OVERHEAD CONSOLE
- REMOVAL).
3. Disconnect the electrical connector (5) on the
receiver housing.
4. Release the three latch features (2) of the mount-
ing bracket and disengage the receiver from the
bracket.
INSTALLATION
TRANSMITTER
1. Position the sensor on the inside of the C-pillar.
2. Install the two retaining screws.
4. Install the C-pillar (Refer to 23 - BODY/INTERIOR/
C-PILLAR TRIM - INSTALLATION).
5. If installing the bezel, position the bezel (1) over
the transducer housing (2) of the intrusion sensor
transmitter and press it straight on until it snaps
into place against the Cpillar (3).
RECEIVER
1. Position the intrusion sensor receiver (1) to the
mounting bracket (4) on the right front corner of the
overhead console housing (3).
2. Press the receiver down until the three latch fea-
tures (2) of the bracket are fully engaged.
3. Connect the electrical connector (5) on the receiver
housing.
4. Install the overhead console onto the headliner.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/OVERHEAD CONSOLE
- INSTALLATION).
SHAFT LOCK MODULE - EXPORT

DESCRIPTION
A shaft lock module (1) is part of the premium version of
the Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) in the Vehicle
Theft Security System (VTSS). The premium version of
the SKIS is only available in vehicles built for certain
markets, where the additional features offered by this
system are required. The shaft lock module is located in
a bracket integral to the lower end of the steering column
housing casting below the instrument panel in the pas-
senger compartment. This unit is designed to work in
conjunction with the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module
(SKREEM) to control a locking bolt (2) that engages a
machined slot in the steering shaft to prevent shaft rota-
tion whenever there is not a valid key present in the igni-
tion lock cylinder on the instrument panel.
Concealed within the module is the electronic circuitry
of the module, and a bi-directional electric motor that
actuates the locking bolt. The module is connected to
the vehicle electrical system through the instrument
panel wire harness.
The mounting provisions for the shaft lock module are designed to resist unauthorized tampering. The module can-
not be removed from the steering column while the locking bolt is in the locked position, or while the steering col-
umn is installed in the vehicle. The shaft lock module unit cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or
damaged, the entire steering column must be replaced.
OPERATION
The electronic circuitry within the shaft lock module contains all of the logic circuits and components to monitor and
control the operation of the shaft locking bolt. The module uses a serial data bus for bi-directional communication
with the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM), sometimes referred to as the Wireless Control Module
(WCM). If the module detects a problem with the positioning or operation of the locking bolt, it sends an error mes-
sage to the SKREEM/WCM. The SKREEM/WCM then stores a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) and sends an elec-
tronic error message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC), sometimes referred to as the Cab
Compartment Node (CCN), over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus, and a SERVICE COLUMN LOCK
message will appear in the instrument cluster display.
The shaft lock module continuously monitors inputs from the SKREEM/WCM and energizes the electric motor to
move the locking bolt to the locked or unlocked position based upon that input. If the SKREEM/WCM indicates that
the key present in the ignition lock cylinder is invalid, the locking bolt remains in the locked position. When the
SKREEM/WCM indicates that a valid key is present in the ignition lock cylinder, the shaft lock module operates a
motor to move the locking bolt to the unlocked position. However, to prevent inadvertent column locking due to a
failure while the vehicle is being operated, the module cannot move the locking bolt from the unlocked position to
the locked position as long as a key remains in the ignition lock cylinder.
The shaft lock module receives ground at all times through a hard wired remote ground point. The module receives
battery voltage to operate and to move the locking bolt in the unlocked direction on a B(+) circuit, and receives
battery voltage to operate the locking bolt in the locked direction only when the key is removed from the ignition
switch. These connections allow the module to remain operational, regardless of the ignition switch position.
For added system security, the shaft lock module learns a unique Secret Key code from the SKREEM/WCM over
the serial data bus upon initialization. This code is stored in the memory of the module and cannot be changed.
Therefore, if the SKREEM/WCM requires service replacement, a new shaft lock module will also be required.
Another security code, called a PIN, is used to gain access to the SKREEM/WCM Secured Access Mode. The
Secured Access Mode is required during service to initialize a new shaft lock module. The shaft lock module is not
available for separate service replacement. It is integral to the steering column so a complete column must be
installed if the module is damaged or inoperative (Refer to 19 - STEERING/COLUMN - REMOVAL).
Use a diagnostic scan tool and refer to the appropriate diagnostic information to diagnose and test the system.

DESCRIPTION
The Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM) (3),
sometimes referred to as the Wireless Control Module
(WCM), performs the functions of what used to be the
Sentry Key Immobilizer Module (SKIM), the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) Module, and the Tire Pressure
Monitoring (TPM) System.
The SKREEM/WCM is located on and around

(antenna ring) (4) the ignition key cylinder (2) along
with the ignition switch (1). It is accessible only from
behind the instrument panel, to the left of the steering
column. Serviceability requires lock cylinder removal
to access the complete unit.
SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM (SKREES)

The Sentry Key REmote Entry System (SKREES), sometimes referred to as the Sentry Key Immobilizer System
(SKIS), authenticates an electronically coded Transponder Key placed into the ignition and sends a valid/invalid key
message to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) based upon the results. The VALID/INVALID KEY message
communication is performed using a rolling code algorithm via the Programmable Controller Area Network (CAN)
data bus. A VALID KEY message must be sent to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) within two seconds of
ignition ON to free the engine from immobilization.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)

The RKE transmitter uses radio frequency signals to communicate with the SKREEM/WCM. The SKREEM/WCM is
on the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus network. When the operator presses a button on the transmitter, it
sends a specific request to the SKREEM/WCM. In turn the SKREEM/WCM sends the appropriate request over the
CAN bus to the Integrated Power Module (IPM) to activate the park lamps, the headlamps, and the horn for horn
chirp.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM)

If equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) System, each of the vehicles four wheels will have a valve
stem with a pressure sensor and radio transmitter built in. Signals from the tire pressure sensor/transmitter are
received and interpreted by the SKREEM/WCM.
A sensor/transmitter in a mounted wheel will broadcast its detected pressure once per minute when the vehicle is
moving faster than 15 mph (24 km/h). Each sensor/transmitters broadcast is uniquely coded so that the SKREEM/
WCM can determine the location.
OPERATION
SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM (SKREES)
The Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM), sometimes referred to as the Wireless Control Module (WCM),
receives an encrypted Radio Frequency (RF) signal from the transponder key. The SKREEM/WCM then decrypts
the signal and broadcasts the requested remote commands to the appropriate modules in the vehicle over the Con-
troller Area Network (CAN) data bus. A valid transponder key ID must be incorporated into the RF signal in order for
the SKREEM/WCM to pass the message on to the appropriate modules.
Automatic transponder key synchronization is done by the SKREEM/WCM if a valid transponder key is inserted into
the ignition cylinder, and the ignition is turned ON. This provides a maximum operation window for RKE functions.
Each Sentry Key Remote Entry System (SKREES), sometimes referred to as the Sentry Key Immobilizer System
(SKIS), consists of a SKREEM/WCM and a transponder key. Each system has a secret key code unique to that
system. The secret key is electronically coded in the SKREEM/WCM and in all programmed transponder keys. It is
used for immobilization and RKE functions for data security. In addition, each transponder key will have a unique
identification.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)

After pressing the lock button on the RKE transmitter, all of the door locks will lock, the illuminated entry will turn off
(providing all doors are closed), and the Vehicle Theft Security System (VTSS) (if equipped) will arm. After pressing
the unlock button, on the RKE transmitter, one time, the driver door lock will unlock, the illuminated entry will turn on
the courtesy lamps, and the VTSS (if equipped) will disarm. After pressing the unlock button a second time, the
remaining door locks will unlock. The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or a scan tool can reprogram this
feature to unlock all of the door locks with one press of the unlock button. If the vehicle is equipped with the mem-
ory system, the memory message will identify which transmitter (1 or 2) sent the signal. Refer to Overhead Console/
Electronic Vehicle Information Center for more information on customer programmable features.
The SKREEM/WCM is capable of retaining up to 8 individual access codes (8 transmitters). If the PRNDL is in any
position except park, the SKREEM/WCM will disable the RKE. The 4 button transmitter uses 1-CR2032 battery. The
minimum battery life is approximately 4.7 years based on 20 transmissions a day at 84F (25C). Use a scan tool
or the Miller Tool 9001 RF Detector to test the RKE transmitter. Use a scan tool or the customer programming
method to program the RKE system. However, the SKREEM/WCM will only allow RKE programming when the igni-
tion is in the ON position, the PRNDL is in park position, and the VTSS (if equipped) is disarmed.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM)

The SKREEM monitors the signals from the tire pressure sensor/transmitters and determines if any tire has gone
below the low pressure threshold LOW TIRE PRESSURE THRESHOLDS table.
LOW TIRE PRESSURE THRESHOLDS
SYSTEM STATUS
TIRE PRESSURE
INDICATOR
ON 172 kPa (25 PSI)
OFF 207 kPa (30 PSI)
CRITICAL AND NON-CRITICAL SYSTEM ALERTS
CRITICAL: A critical alert will be triggered when a tire pressure has gone below a set threshold pressure. The
SKREEM will send a message to the cluster to display X TIRE(S) LOW PRESSURE. X will be the number of
tires reporting low pressure. The message will display for the duration of the current ignition cycle or until an EVIC
button is pressed. If the display is removed without correcting the condition, it will reappear 300 seconds to warn the
driver of the low pressure condition.
NONCRITICAL: A noncritical alert will be triggered when no signal is received from a sensor/transmitter or when a
sensor/transmitter low battery condition is detected. The cluster will display SERVICE TIRE PRESS. SYSTEM.

For proper diagnosis and testing of the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM), sometimes referred to as the
Wireless Control Module (WCM), Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System, and the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM),
use a scan tool and appropriate diagnostic information.
REMOVAL


REMOVAL).
3. Remove the steering column opening cover (Refer
to 23 - BODY/INSTRUMENT PANEL/STEERING
COLUMN OPENING COVER - REMOVAL).
4. Reach up behind the left side of the center stack
and disconnect the ignition switch (6) and
SKREEM (5) electrical connectors.
5. From underneath the ignition switch/lock assembly, loosen the lower retaining screw (2).
6. Remove the two mounting nuts (1) from the front of the instrument panel.
7. Push the ignition switch/lock assembly (3) inward toward the bulkhead.
8. Remove the SKREEM mounting screw (1) on the
ignition lock assembly and separate the SKREEM
from the ignition lock assembly.
NOTE: After a SKREEM/WCM is replaced, the igni-

tion/transponder keys need to be programmed to
the new SKREEM/WCM. Follow the directions on
the diagnostic scan tool. The transponder key for
the SKREES/SKIM and the RKE will both be pro-
grammed during this operation. There is no need
to program the fob of the key for RKE functionality
once the transponder key is programmed to the
new SKREEM/WCM.
NOTE: When a PCM and the SKREEM/WCM are

replaced at the same time, perform the following
steps in order:

PROGRAMMING).
INSTALLATION
NOTE: After a SKREEM/WCM is replaced, the igni-
tion/transponder keys need to be programmed to
the new SKREEM/WCM. Follow the directions on
the diagnostic scan tool. The transponder key for
the SKREES/SKIM and the RKE will both be pro-
grammed during this operation. There is no need
to program the fob of the key for RKE functionality
once the transponder key is programmed to the
new SKREEM/WCM.
NOTE: When a PCM and the SKREEM/WCM are

replaced at the same time, perform the following
steps in order:

Program all ignition/transponder keys to the new
SKREEM/WCM.
PROGRAMMING).
1. Position the SKREEM on the ignition lock housing and install the retaining screw (1).
2. Position the ignition switch/lock assembly (3) up in behind the instrument panel and push rearward.
3. Install the two mounting nuts to the front of the instrument panel (1).
4. From underneath the ignition switch/lock assembly,

tighten the lower retaining screw (3).
5. Reach up behind the left side of the center stack
and connect the ignition switch (6) and SKREEM
(5) electrical connectors.
LATION).
7. Install the steering column opening cover (Refer to
COLUMN OPENING COVER - INSTALLATION).
TRANSPONDER KEY
DESCRIPTION
Each ignition key (2) used in the Sentry Key Remote
Entry System (SKREES), sometimes referred to as
the Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) has a tran-
sponder chip included on the circuit board (4) beneath
the cover (1) of the integral Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter (3). In addition to having to be cut to
match the mechanical coding of the ignition lock cylin-
der and programmed for operation of the RKE system,
each new Sentry Key has a unique transponder iden-
tification code that is permanently programmed into it
by the manufacturer, and which must be programmed
into the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM),
sometimes referred to as the Wireless Control Module
(WCM), to be recognized by the SKREES/SKIS as a
valid key.
The Sentry Key transponder cannot be adjusted or

repaired. If faulty or damaged, the entire key and RKE
transmitter unit must be replaced.
OPERATION
When the ignition switch is turned to the On position, the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM), sometimes
referred to as the Wireless Control Module (WCM), communicates through its antenna with the Sentry Key tran-
sponder using a Radio Frequency (RF) signal. The SKREEM/WCM then listens for a RF response from the tran-
sponder through the same antenna. The Sentry Key transponder chip is within the range of the SKREEM/WCM
transceiver antenna ring when it is inserted into the ignition lock cylinder. The SKREEM/WCM determines whether
a valid key is present in the ignition lock cylinder based upon the response from the transponder. If a valid key is
detected, that fact is communicated by the SKREEM/WCM to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Con-
troller Area Network (CAN) data bus, and the PCM allows the engine to continue running. If the PCM receives an
invalid key message, or receives no message from the SKREEM/WCM over the CAN data bus, the engine will be
disabled after about two seconds of operation. The ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) will also respond
to the invalid key message on the CAN data bus by flashing the security indicator on and off.
Each Sentry Key has a unique transponder identification code permanently programmed into it by the manufacturer.
Likewise, the SKREEM/WCM has a unique Secret Key code programmed into it by the manufacturer. When a Sen-
try Key is programmed into the memory of the SKREEM/WCM, the SKREEM/WCM stores the transponder identi-
fication code from the Sentry Key, and the Sentry Key learns the Secret Key code from the SKREEM/WCM. Once
the Sentry Key learns the Secret Key code of the SKREEM/WCM, it is permanently stored in the memory of the
transponder. Therefore, once a Sentry Key has been programmed to a particular vehicle, it cannot be used on any
other vehicle (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY/TRANSPONDER KEY - STANDARD PRO-
CEDURE).
The Sentry Key REmote Entry System (SKREES), sometimes referred to as the Sentry Key Immobilizer System
(SKIS), performs a self-test each time the ignition switch is turned to the On position, and will store key-related fault
information in the form of a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) in SKREEM/WCM memory if a Sentry Key transponder
problem is detected. The Sentry Key transponder chip can be diagnosed, and any stored DTC can be retrieved
using a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information.
Common communication problems:
Two transponder keys too close together.
Speed Pass too close to transponder key.
Solid indicator that there is a system failure.
Loss of PCM communication.
Failed antenna circuit.
order:

PROGRAMMING).
STANDARD PROCEDURE
TRANSPONDER PROGRAMMING
order:

PROGRAMMING).
All Sentry Keys included with the vehicle are pre-programmed to work with the Sentry Key Remote Entry System
(SKREES), sometimes referred to as the Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS), when it is shipped from the factory.
The Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM), sometimes referred to as the Wireless Control Module (WCM),
can be programmed to recognize up to a total of eight Sentry Keys. When programming a blank Sentry Key tran-
sponder, the key must first be cut to match the ignition switch lock cylinder in the vehicle for which it will be used.
Once the additional or new key has been cut, the SKREEM/WCM must be programmed to recognize it as a valid
key. There are two possible methods to program the SKREEM/WCM to recognize a new or additional valid key, the
Secured Access Method and the Customer Learn Method. Following are the details of these two programming
methods.
SECURED ACCESS METHOD

The Secured Access method applies to all vehicles. This method requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. This
method will also require that you have access to the unique four-digit PIN code that was assigned to the original
SKREEM/WCM. The PIN code MUST be used to enter the Secured Access Mode in the SKREEM/WCM. This PIN
number may be obtained from the vehicle owner, from the original vehicle invoice, or from the DaimlerChrysler Cus-
tomer Center. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information for the proper Secured Access method programming
procedures.
NOTE: The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter will also be programmed during this procedure.
CUSTOMER LEARN METHOD

The Customer Learn feature is only available on domestic vehicles, or those vehicles which have a U.S. country
code designator. This programming method also requires access to at least two valid Sentry Keys. If two valid Sen-
try Keys are not available, or if the vehicle does not have a U.S. country code designator, the Secured Access
Method MUST be used to program new or additional valid keys to the SKREEM/WCM. The Customer Learn pro-
gramming method procedures are as follows:
1. Obtain the blank Sentry Key(s) that are to be programmed as valid keys for the vehicle. Cut the blank key(s) to
match the ignition switch lock cylinder mechanical key codes.
2. Insert one of the two valid Sentry Keys into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch to the On position.
3. After the ignition switch has been in the On position for longer than three seconds, but no more than fifteen
seconds, cycle the ignition switch back to the Off position. Replace the first valid Sentry Key in the ignition switch
lock cylinder with the second valid Sentry Key and turn the ignition switch back to the On position. The second
valid Sentry Key must be inserted in the lock cylinder within fifteen seconds of removing the first valid key.
4. About ten seconds after the completion of Step 3, the security indicator in the instrument cluster will start to flash
to indicate that the system has entered the Customer Learn programming mode.
5. Within sixty seconds of entering the Customer Learn programming mode, turn the ignition switch to the Off posi-
tion, replace the valid Sentry Key with a blank Sentry Key transponder, and turn the ignition switch back to the
On position.
6. About ten seconds after the completion of Step 5, the security indicator will stop flashing, stay on solid for three
seconds, then turn off to indicate that the blank Sentry Key has been successfully programmed. The SKREES/
SKIS will immediately exit the Customer Learn programming mode. After the ignition is cycled the vehicle may be
started using the newly programmed valid Sentry Key.
NOTE: The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter will also be programmed during this procedure.
Each of these steps must be repeated and completed in their entirety for each additional Sentry Key that is to be
programmed. If the above steps are not completed in the given sequence, or within the allotted time, the SKREEM/
WCM will exit the Customer Learn programming mode and the programming will be unsuccessful. The SKREEM/
WCM will also automatically exit the Customer Learn programming mode if it sees a non-blank Sentry Key
transponder when it should see a blank, if it has already programmed eight (8) valid Sentry Keys, or if the ignition
switch is turned to the Off position for more than about fifty seconds.
NOTE: If an attempt is made to start the vehicle while in the Customer Learn mode (security indicator flash-
ing), the SKREES/SKIS will respond as though the vehicle were being started with an invalid key. In other
words, the engine will stall after about two seconds of operation. No faults will be set.
NOTE: Once a Sentry Key has been programmed as a valid key to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed as a
valid key for use on any other vehicle.
VTSS/SKIS INDICATOR LAMP

DESCRIPTION
The Sentry Key Remote Entry System (SKREES), sometimes referred to as the Sentry Key Immobilizer System
(SKIS), uses an indicator light to convey information on the status of the system to the customer. This light is shared
with the Vehicle Theft Security System (VTSS). The light is located in the instrument panel switch pod, just to the
right of the cluster. The indicator light is controlled by the Cab Compartment Node (CCN), via the Controller Area
Network (CAN) data bus based upon messages it receives from the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM),
sometimes referred to as the Wireless Control Module (WCM),on the CAN data bus, and is hard wired to the clus-
ter.
OPERATION
The VTSS/SKREES lamp is controlled according to Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM), sometimes
referred to as the Wireless Control Module (WCM), messages. Then, the SKREEM/WCM sends messages to the
Front Control Module (FCM) to operate the light based upon the results of the SKREES/SKIS self tests. The light
may be actuated in two possible ways, flashing or on solid. If the light comes on and stays on solid after a power-up
test, this indicates that the SKREEM/WCM has detected a system malfunction. If the SKREEM/WCM detects an
invalid key when the ignition switch is moved to the ON position, it sends a message on the CAN bus to the FCM,
to flash the light. The SKREEM/WCM can also send a message to flash the light and generate a single audible
chime at the same time. These two events occurring simultaneously indicate that the SKREES/SKIS has been
placed into the 9Customer Learn9 mode (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY/TRANSPONDER
KEY - STANDARD PROCEDURE). If the light comes on and stays on after the power-up test, diagnosis of the
SKREES/SKIS should be performed using a scan tool and the appropriate diagnostic information. The light is not a
serviceable component.
LX WIPERS/WASHERS 8R - 1
WIPERS/WASHERS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
WIPERS/WASHERS - ELECTRICAL WIPERS/WASHERS - SERVICE INFORMATION . . 63

DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
WIPERS/WASHERS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
WIPERS/WASHERS - ELECTRICAL B231B-REAR WIPER MOTOR CONTROL

DIAGNOSTICS CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING B231C-REAR WIPER MOTOR CONTROL
B2304-WIPER PARK SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 B231D-REAR WIPER MOTOR CONTROL
B2305-WIPER PARK SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 B2323-HEADLAMP WASHER MOTOR
B2313-WIPER ON/OFF CONTROL CIRCUIT CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 B2324-HEADLAMP WASHER MOTOR
B2314-WIPER ON/OFF CONTROL CIRCUIT CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 B2325-HEADLAMP WASHER MOTOR
B2315-WIPER ON/OFF CONTROL CIRCUIT CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
OPEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 B2328-WASHER FLUID LEVEL SENSOR
B2317-WIPER HI/LOW CONTROL CIRCUIT INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 B210D-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW (RSM) . . . . . . 53
B2318-WIPER HI/LOW CONTROL CIRCUIT B210E-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH (RSM) . . . . . . 54
HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 B2211-RAIN SENSOR MODULE
B2319-WIPER HI/LOW CONTROL CIRCUIT INITIALIZATION PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . 55
OPEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 B221D-(RSM) RAIN SENSOR MODULE
B231F-FRONT/REAR WASHER MOTOR INTERNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 B2329-RAIN SENSOR OPTICAL PATH 1
B2320-FRONT/REAR WASHER MOTOR PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 B232A-RAIN SENSOR OPTICAL PATH 2
B2321-FRONT/REAR WASHER MOTOR PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 B232B-RAIN SENSOR OPTICAL PATH 3
B230D-REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH INPUT PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 B232C-RAIN SENSOR OPTICAL PATH 4
B230E-REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH INPUT PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 U0019CAN B BUS (RSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
8R - 2 WIPERS/WASHERS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS LX
WIPERS/WASHERS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS

LX WIPERS/WASHERS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8R - 3
B2304-WIPER PARK SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The FCM detects a short to ground condition.
Possible Causes
FRONT WIPER MOTOR

(W7) FRONT WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
Diagnostic Test
Turn the Wipers on, then off.
With the Scan Tool, read the FCM DTCs.
Does the Scan Tool read: B2304-WIPER PARK SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. WIPER MOTOR
Disconnect the Front Wiper Motor harness connector.
Activate the Wipers
Wait 30 seconds.
Does the Scan Tool read: B2305-WIPER PARK SWITCH INPUT
CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Replace the Front Wiper Motor in accordance with the ser-
vice information.
ING)
No >> Go To 3
3. (W7) FRONT WIPER MOTOR PARK SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect the IPM C5 harness connector.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (W7) Front Wiper Park
Switch Sense circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (W7) Front Wiper Park Switch Sense circuit for a
short to ground condition.
ING)
No >> Replace the Front Control Module in accordance with the
ING)
B2305-WIPER PARK SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The FCM detects an open condition.
Possible Causes
(W7) FRONT WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Diagnostic Test
Turn the Front Wipers on, then off.
Does the Scan Tool read: B2305-WIPER PARK SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. (W7) FRONT WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Disconnect the Front Wiper Motor harness connector.
Measure the voltage on the (W7) Front Wiper Park Switch Sense cir-
cuit.
Yes >> Repair the (W7) Front Wiper Park Switch Sense circuit for a
short to voltage.
ING)
No >> Replace the FCM in accordance with the service informa-
tion.
ING) )
B2313-WIPER ON/OFF CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When the FCM detects a short/low condition.
Possible Causes

WIPER ON/OFF RELAY
Diagnostic Test

NOTE: Check all fuses and circuit breakers before proceeding with
the diagnosis of this DTC.
Remove the Wiper ON/OFF relay.
Measure the voltage at cavity 86 of the Wiper ON/OFF relay.
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Check the (A11) Fused B+ circuit for an open.
ING)
2. WIPER ON/OFF RELAY

Replace the Wiper ON/OFF relay with and known good relay.
Turn the Wipers ON then OFF.
With the Scan Tool, read the Wiper DTCs.
Does the Scan Tool read: B2313-WIPER ON/OFF CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Replace the Wiper ON/OFF relay.

Disconnect the FCM from the IPM.
Measure the voltage on cavity 27 (Wiper ON/OFF Relay Control) of the
IPM.
Yes >> Replace the FCM in accordance with the service informa-
tion.
ING)
No >> Replace the IPM in accordance with the service information.
ING)
B2314-WIPER ON/OFF CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When the FCM detects a short/HIGH condition.
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test

Does the Scan Tool read: B2314-WIPER ON/OFF CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH?
B2315-WIPER ON/OFF CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test

Does the Scan Tool read: B2315-WIPER ON/OFF CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN?
B2317-WIPER HI/LOW CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes

WIPER HI/LOW RELAY
Diagnostic Test

Remove the Wiper HI/LOW relay.
Measure the voltage at cavity 86 of the Wiper HI/LOW relay.
Yes >> Go To 2
ING)
2. WIPER HI/LOW RELAY

Replace the Wiper HI/LOW relay with and known good relay.
Does the Scan Tool read: B2313-WIPER HI/LOW CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Replace the Wiper HI/LOW relay.

Measure the voltage on cavity 29 (Wiper HI/LOW Relay Control) of the
IPM.
tion.
ING)
ING)
B2318-WIPER HI/LOW CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test

Does the Scan Tool read: B2318-WIPER HI/LOW CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH?
B2319-WIPER HI/LOW CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test

Does the Scan Tool read: B2319-WIPER HI/LOW CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN?
B231F-FRONT/REAR WASHER MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When the FCM detects a short/low condition on the washer Pump Motor Control circuit.
Possible Causes
(W10)/(W20) WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TOGETHER

(W10) WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(W20) WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
WIPER WASHER PUMP
Diagnostic Test
Turn the Washers on.
With the Scan Tool, read the Wiper/Washers DTCs.
Does the Scan Tool read: B231F-FRONT/REAR WASHER MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. WASHER PUMP MOTOR

Disconnect the Washer Pump Motor connector.
Does the Scan Tool read:B231F-FRONT/REAR WASHER MOTOR
CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Replace the Washer Pump Motor in accordance with the
ING)
3. (W10)/(W20) WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUITS SHORT TOGETHER

Disconnect the IPM C4 and C5 harness connectors.
Measure the resistance between the (W10) and (W20) Washer Pump
Motor Control circuits.
Yes >> Repair the (W10) and (W20) Washer Pump Motor Control
circuits for a short together.
ING)
No >> Go To 4
4. (W10) WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (W10) Washer Pump
Motor Control circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (W10) Washer Pump Motor Control circuit for a
short to ground.
ING)
No >> Go To 5
5. (W20) WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (W20) Washer Pump
Motor Control circuit.
short to ground.
ING)
ING)
B2320-FRONT/REAR WASHER MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(W10) WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

(W20) WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Diagnostic Test
With the Scan Tool, read the Wiper/Washers DTCs.
Does the Scan Tool read: B2320-FRONT/REAR WASHER MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. (W10) WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Disconnect the Washer Pump Motor harness connector.
Measure the voltage of the (W10) Washer Pump Motor Control circuit.
short to voltage.
ING)
No >> Go To 3
3. (W20) WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Measure the Voltage of the (W20) Washer Pump Motor Control circuit.
short to voltage.
ING)
ING)
B2321-FRONT/REAR WASHER MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(W10) WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN

(W20) WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN
Diagnostic Test
Does the Scan Tool read: B2321-FRONT/REAR WASHER MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. (W10) WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN

Disconnect the Washer Pump Motor harness connector.
Measure the resistance of the (W10) Washer Pump Motor Control cir-
cuit.
Yes >> Repair the (W10) Washer Pump Motor Control circuit for an
open.
ING)
No >> Go To 3
3. (W20) WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (W20) Washer Pump Motor Control cir-
cuit.
Yes >> Repair the (W20) Washer Pump Motor Control circuit for an
open.
ING)
ING)
B230D-REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT LOW

Possible Causes
REAR WIPER MOTOR

(W17) REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
Diagnostic Test
Turn the Rear Wipers on.
Does the Scan Tool read: B230D-REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. REAR WIPER MOTOR

Disconnect the Rear Wiper Motor connector.
Does the Scan Tool read: B230D-REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH
INPUT CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Replace the Rear Wiper Motor in accordance with the ser-
vice information.
ING)
3. (W17) REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (W17) Rear Wiper
Park Switch Sense circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (W17) Rear Wiper Park Switch Sense circuit for
a short condition.
ING)
ING)
B230E-REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT OPEN

Possible Causes
(W17) REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN
Diagnostic Test
Turn the Rear Wipers on.
With the Scan Tool, read the Rear Wiper DTCs.
Does the Scan Tool read: B230E-REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. (W17) REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN

Disconnect the Rear Wiper Motor connector.
Measure the resistance of the (W17) Rear Wiper Park Switch Sense cir-
cuit.
Yes >> Repair the (W17) Rear Wiper Park Switch Sense circuit for
an open condition.
B231B-REAR WIPER MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW

Possible Causes

REAR WIPER RELAY
Diagnostic Test

NOTE: Check all fuses and circuit breakers before proceeding with the diagnosis of this DTC.
Remove the Rear Wiper relay.
Measure the voltage at cavity 86 of the Rear Wiper relay.
Yes >> Go To 2
2. REAR WIPER RELAY

Replace the Rear Wiper relay with and known good relay.
Turn the Rear Wipers ON then OFF.
Does the Scan Tool read: B231B-REAR WIPER MOTOR CON-
TROL CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Replace the Rear Wiper relay.
ING)

Measure the voltage on cavity 28 (Rear Wiper Relay Control) of the
IPM.
tion.
ING)
ING)
B231C-REAR WIPER MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH

Possible Causes
REAR WIPER RELAY
Diagnostic Test

Replace the Rear Wiper relay with a known good relay.
Does the Scan Tool read: B231C-REAR WIPER MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH?
B231D-REAR WIPER MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test

Does the Scan Tool read: B231D-REAR WIPER MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN?
B2323-HEADLAMP WASHER MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes

WIPER ON/OFF RELAY
Diagnostic Test

Remove the Headlamp Washer relay.
Measure the voltage at cavity 86 of the Headlamp Washer relay.
Yes >> Go To 2
ING)
2. HEADLAMP WASHER RELAY

Replace the Headlamp Washer relay with a known good relay.
Activate the Headlamp Washers.
Does the Scan Tool read: B2323-HEADLAMP WASHER MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Replace the Headlamp Washer relay.
3. (W24) HEADLAMP WASHER RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Disconnect the IPM C4 Connector.
Measure the resistance to ground of the (W24) Headlamp Washer
Relay Control circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (W24) Headlamp Washer Relay Control circuit
ING)
No >> Replace the FCM in accordance with the service informa-
tion.
ING)
B2324-HEADLAMP WASHER MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1. HEADLAMP WASHER RELAY

Does the Scan Tool read: B231C-REAR WIPER MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH?
B2325-HEADLAMP WASHER MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When the FCM detects a high condition.
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test

Does the Scan Tool read: B2325HEADLAMP WASHER MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH?
B2328-WASHER FLUID LEVEL SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(W1) WASHER FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Diagnostic Test
Turn the Wiper Washers on.
Does the Scan Tool read: B2328-WASHER FLUID LEVEL SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. W1 WASHER FLUID LEVEL SENSOR CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Disconnect the Washer Fluid Level Sensor connector.
Measure the voltage of the (W1) Washer Fluid Level Sensor control cir-
cuit.
Yes >> Repair the (W1) Washer Fluid Level Sensor control circuit.
ING)
ING)
B210D-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW (RSM)

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Rain Sensor Module supply voltage less than 8.0 volts.
Possible Causes
RAIN SENSING MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC: B210D-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW

With the scan tool, record and erase Rain Sensor Module DTCs.
Wait 30 seconds.
With the scan tool, read Rain Sensor Module DTCs.
Is DTC: B210D-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW active?
Yes >> Go To 2
nals.

NOSIS AND TESTING)
No >> Replace the Rain Sensor Module in accordance with the service information.
B210E-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH (RSM)

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Rain Sensor Module supply voltage greater than 16.0 volts.
Possible Causes
RAIN SENSOR MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC: B210E-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH

With the scan tool, record and erase Rain Sensor Module DTCs.
Wait 30 seconds.
With the scan tool, read Rain Sensor Module DTCs.
Is DTC: B210E-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH active?
Yes >> Go To 2
nals.

NOSIS AND TESTING)
No >> Replace the Rain Sensor Module in accordance with the service information.
B2211-RAIN SENSOR MODULE INITIALIZATION PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
This DTC is set when the internal initialization state machine is set to FAIL.
Possible Causes
WINDSHIELD
RAIN SENSOR MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR DELAMINATION ON THE WINDSHIELD

NOTE: If module has been reflashed or powered up while not connected to the windshield, this DTC will set.
If this is the case, reattach the RSM to the windshield and proceed.
Check the contact surface of the Rain Sensor Module to the windshield for delamination (this will resemble air bub-
bles in the contact area).
Is delamination present on the windshield?
Yes >> Replace the windshield in accordance with the service information
No >> Go To 2
2. REPLACE THE RAIN SENSOR MODULE

With the scan tool read RSM DTCs.
Does the scan tool read: B2211-RAIN SENSOR MODULE INITIALIZATION PERFORMANCE?
Yes >> Replace the RSM in accordance with the service information.
B221D-(RSM) RAIN SENSOR MODULE INTERNAL

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Rain Sensing Module detects an internal failure.
Possible Causes
RAIN SENSING MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. REPLACE THE RAIN SENSING MODULE

With the scan tool, read RSM DTCs.
Is DTC: B221D-(RSM) RAIN SENSOR MODULE INTERNAL active?
Yes >> Replace the Rain Sensing Module in accordance with the Service Information.
B2329-RAIN SENSOR OPTICAL PATH 1 PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Each optical track (received value) is monitored once a second while the rain sensor is active (WK Intermittent
1-5, LX intermittent 16) and compared to a small value. The optical track value must be below this value for
4 minutes (checked once per second) before this DTC will be set. Once the DTC is set, the optical track must
be above the threshold for 4 minutes (checked once per second) before the DTC is cleared.
Possible Causes
RAIN SENSING MODULE
Diagnostic Test

NOTE: Check the contact surface of the RSM to the windshield for Delamination (this will resemble air bub-
bles in the contact area). If Delamination is present, replace the windshield in accordance with the service
information.
Does the scan tool read: B2329-RAIN SENSOR OPTICAL PATH 1 PERFORMANCE?
B232A-RAIN SENSOR OPTICAL PATH 2 PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
1-5, LX intermittent 1-6) and compared to a small value. The optical track value must be below this value for
Possible Causes
RAIN SENSING MODULE
Diagnostic Test

information.
Does the scan tool read: B232A-RAIN SENSOR OPTICAL PATH 2 PERFORMANCE?
B232B-RAIN SENSOR OPTICAL PATH 3 PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
RAIN SENSING MODULE
Diagnostic Test

information.
Does the scan tool read: B232B-RAIN SENSOR OPTICAL PATH 3 PERFORMANCE?
B232C-RAIN SENSOR OPTICAL PATH 4 PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
RAIN SENSING MODULE
Diagnostic Test

information.
Does the scan tool read: B232C-RAIN SENSOR OPTICAL PATH 4 PERFORMANCE?
U0019CAN B BUS (RSM)

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If the Can B Bus (+) or B Bus () circuit is open, shorted to voltage, or shorted to ground.
Possible Causes

RAIN SENSOR MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC U0019CAN B BUS

With the scan tool, record and erase any Rain Sensor Module DTCs.
Is DTC U0019CAN B BUS active?
Yes >> Go To 2
nals.
2. CHECK FOR ACTIVE CAN B BUS RELATED DTCS IN THE FRONT CONTROL MODULE
Yes >> Diagnose and repair the DTC(s). (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES/
FRONT CONTROL MODULE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
No >> Go to 3

Disconnect the Rain Sensor Module harness connector.
and the Rain Sensor Module harness connector.
Yes >> Go To 4
4. CHECK THE (D54) CAN B BUS () CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

and the Rain Sensor Module harness connector.
Yes >> Replace the Rain Sensor Module in accordance with the service information.
LX WIPERS/WASHERS - SERVICE INFORMATION 8R - 63
WIPERS/WASHERS - SERVICE INFORMATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
WIPERS/WASHERS - SERVICE INFORMATION INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 SENSOR-RAIN
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
CHECK VALVE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
FRONT WIPER MODULE REAR WIPER MOTOR - WAGON ONLY
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 WASHER FLUID LEVEL SWITCH
FRONT WIPER MOTOR INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 WASHER PUMP MOTOR
HEADLAMP WASHER INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 WASHER RESERVOIR
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 WIPER ARMS
HEADLAMP WASHER HOSE REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
HEADLAMP WASHER PUMP MOTOR
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
8R - 64 WIPERS/WASHERS - SERVICE INFORMATION LX
WIPERS/WASHERS - SERVICE INFORMATION

DESCRIPTION
FRONT WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
The wiper and washer system includes the following major components:
The FCM/IPM is located in the engine compartment, near the right shock tower. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/
POWER DISTRIBUTION - DESCRIPTION).
Front Washer Nozzle - Two washer nozzles with integral check valves are secured to the hood panel near the
base of the windshield.
Front Washer Plumbing - The plumbing for the washer system consists of nylon hoses and molded plastic
fittings. The plumbing is routed within the engine compartment from the washer reservoir. The front washer
hose is routed across the underside of the hood panel to the washer nozzles.
Front Wiper Arms - The two wiper arms are secured with nuts to the threaded ends of the two wiper pivot
shafts, which extend through the cowl panel located near the base of the windshield.
Front Wiper Blade - The two wiper blades are secured to the two wiper arms with an integral latch, and are
parked on the glass near the bottom of the windshield when the wiper system is not in operation.
Front Wiper Module - The wiper pivot shafts are the only visible components of the front wiper module. The
remainder of the module is concealed within the engine compartment beneath the cowl panel. The wiper mod-
ule includes a cast aluminum wiper module bracket, two rubber-isolated wiper module mounts, one dowel on
the underside of the wiper motor, the wiper motor crank arm, the two wiper drive links, the two powered wiper
pivots.
directly in front of the driver. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - DESCRIPTION).
Multi-Function Switch - The multi-function switch is located on the steering column, just behind the steering
wheel. A control stalk that extends from the left side of the switch that is dedicated to providing all of the driver
controls for the front wiper and washer systems, turn signal, and high and low beam functions (Refer to 8 -
ELECTRICAL/LAMPS/LIGHTING - EXTERIOR/MULTI-FUNCTION SWITCH - DESCRIPTION).
Rain Sensor - Vehicles equipped with the automatic wiper feature have a Rain Sensor located just below the
inside rear view mirror button. The sensor bracket is bonded to the inside surface of the windshield glass.
Washer Fluid Level Switch - The washer fluid level switch is located in a dedicated hole on the lower portion
of the washer reservoir, ahead of the right front wheel house splash shield.
Washer Pump/Motor - The reversible electric washer pump/motor is located in the lower portion of the washer
reservoir, ahead of the right front wheel house splash shield. The washer pump/motor is a reversible motor
(wagon only) and provides washer fluid to either the front or rear (wagon only) washer system plumbing,
depending upon the direction of the pump motor rotation.
Washer Reservoir - The washer reservoir is mounted just in front of the right front wheel splash shield. The
filler neck is located in the right front corner of the engine compartment.
Wiper High/Low Relay - The wiper high/low relay is an International Standards Organization (ISO) micro relay
located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) in the engine compartment.
Wiper On/Off Relay - The wiper on/off relay is an International Standards Organization (ISO) micro relay
located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) in the engine compartment.
HEADLAMP WASHERS
The headlamp washers on this vehicle (if equipped) work in conjunction with the windshield washers. The headlamp
washers are enabled with the headlamps ON and the windshield washers activated. With the windshield washers
activated the headlamp washers will spray once for a predetermined amount of time.
REAR WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM - WAGON ONLY

The rear wiper and washer system includes the following major components:
The FCM/IPM is located on the side of engine compartment. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER DISTRIBU-
TION - DESCRIPTION).
Instrument Panel Switch Pod - The rear wiper/washer switch is part of the instrument panel switch pod. The
pod contains the rear wipe/wash switch, the hazard switch, the passenger airbag disabled (PAD) indicator, and
the electronic stability program (ESP) off switch. The instrument panel switch pod is located in the instrument
panel center bezel, just above the radio and in between the A/C outlets.
directly in front of the driver. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - DESCRIPTION).
Rear Washer Nozzle - A rear washer nozzle is secured to a mounting hole in the liftgate panel.
Rear Washer Plumbing - The plumbing for the washer system consists of nylon hoses and molded plastic
fittings. The rear washer hose is routed through the dash panel from the engine compartment into the pas-
senger compartment, along the right side body harness, then up the c-pillar and into the liftgate.
Rear Wiper Arm - The single rear wiper arm is secured by a nut directly to the rear wiper motor output shaft,
which extends through the center of the liftgate outer panel near the base of the liftgate glass.
Rear Wiper Blade - The single rear wiper blade is secured to the rear wiper arm with an integral latch, and is
parked near the bottom of the liftgate glass when the rear wiper system is not in operation.
Rear Wiper Motor - The rear wiper motor output shaft is the only visible component of the rear wiper motor.
The remainder of the motor is concealed within the liftgate beneath the liftgate. The rear wiper motor includes
the motor bracket, the rear wiper motor, and the rear wiper motor park switch.
Rear Wiper Relay - The rear wiper relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) in the engine com-
partment near the battery.
Washer Reservoir - The rear washer system shares a single reservoir and reversible pump with the front
washer system, but has its own dedicated plumbing.
OPERATION
FRONT WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
All front wiper and washer system functions are initi-
ated with the control knob on the end of the multi-
function switch control stalk that extends from the left
side of the steering column, just behind the steering
wheel. Rotating the control knob on the end of the
control stalk, selects the Off, Intermittent, Auto (on
models equipped with automatic wipers), Low, or High
front wiper system operating modes. In the Intermittent
mode, the control knob also allows the vehicle opera-
tor to select from one of six intermittent wipe intervals.
In the Auto mode, the control knob also allows the
vehicle operator to select from one of six automatic wiper sensitivity levels. Pressing in on the end of the control
stalk momentarily activates the Mist Wipe. Pressing it in all the way will activate the windshield washers. In the Auto
mode, as you increase the sensitivity of the wipers (less delay between wipes), the result will be a corresponding
acknowledgment wipe to let you know you made an adjustment to the system. The multi-function switch provides
hard wired resistor multiplexed inputs to the Steering Column Control Module (SCCM), for all of the wiper and
washer system functions. The SCCM then sends electronic messages to the Front Control Module (FCM) over the
Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus requesting the appropriate front wiper and washer system operating
modes.
All the front wiper and washer system operation is controlled by the FCM logic circuits, and that logic will only allow
these systems to operate when the ignition switch is in the Accessory or On positions. Battery current is directed
from a B(+) fuse in the Integrated Power Module (IPM) to the wiper on/off relay and the wiper high/low relay in the
PDC through a fused B(+) circuit. The FCM uses low side drivers to control wiper system operation by energizing
or de-energizing the wiper high/low and wiper on/off relays. The FCM uses both high side and low side drivers to
control the operation of the washer pump/motor unit. The multi-function switch circuitry receives a clean ground
output from the SCCM on a multi-function switch return circuit, then provides resistor multiplexed inputs to the
SCCM on an intermittent wipe mux circuit to indicate the selected wiper system mode and on a wash/beam select
mux circuit to indicate the selected washer system mode.
AUTOMATIC WIPE MODE
In models equipped with the automatic wiper feature, the internal circuitry of both the multi-function switch, the rain
sensor, and the CCN work in concert to provide an automatic wiper mode with five sensitivity selections. When
selected, this switch position will automatically operate the front wipers at the designated sensitivity setting and
maintain visibility through the windshield glass at that predetermined sensitivity setting.
With automatic wipers, when the control knob on the control stalk of the multi-function switch is moved to one of the
six Auto sensitivity positions, the SCCM sends an electronic message to the Rain Sensor over the Controller Area
Network (CAN) data bus network indicating the selected position. The sensor monitors an area within the wipe pat-
tern of the windshield glass for the accumulation of moisture. Based upon internal programming and the selected
sensitivity level, when sufficient moisture has accumulated the rain sensor sends the appropriate electronic wipe
command messages to the FCM over the CAN data bus and the FCM operates the front wiper system accordingly.
As the sensitivity level is set higher, the rain sensor is more sensitive to moisture accumulation and will send wipe
commands more frequently. The SCCM logic is also programmed to provide an immediate wipe cycle each time the
control knob on the multi-function switch is moved from a non-automatic wipe position to one of the six Auto sen-
sitivity positions, and another immediate wipe cycle each time the control knob is moved from a lower Auto sensi-
tivity position to a higher Auto sensitivity position.
CONTINUOUS WIPE MODE
When the Low position of the control knob on the control stalk of the multi-function switch is selected, the SCCM
sends an electronic wiper switch low message to the FCM, then the FCM energizes the wiper on/off relay. This
directs battery current through the normally open contacts of the energized wiper on/off relay and the normally
closed contacts of the de-energized wiper high/low relay to the low speed brush of the wiper motor, causing the
wipers to cycle at low speed.
When the High position of the control knob is selected, the SCCM sends an electronic wiper switch high message
to the FCM, then the FCM energizes both the wiper on/off relay and the wiper high/low relay. This directs battery
current through the normally open contacts of the energized wiper on/off relay and the normally open contacts of the
energized wiper high/low relay to the high speed brush of the wiper motor, causing the wipers to cycle at high
speed.
When the Off position of the multi-function switch control knob is selected, the SCCM sends an electronic wiper
switch off message to the FCM. If the wiper motor was operating at high speed, the FCM immediately de-energizes
the wiper high/low relay causing the wiper motor to return to low speed operation. Then one of two events will
occur. The event that occurs depends upon the position of the wiper blades on the windshield at the moment that
the control knob Off position is selected.
If the wiper blades are in the down position on the windshield when the Off position is selected, the park switch that
is integral to the wiper motor is closed to ground and provides a hard wired park switch sense input to the FCM.
The FCM then de-energizes the wiper on/off relay and the wiper motor ceases to operate. If the wiper blades are
not in the down position on the windshield at the moment the Off position is selected, the park switch is an open
circuit and the FCM keeps the wiper on/off relay energized, which causes the wiper motor to continue running at low
speed until the wiper blades are in the down position on the windshield and the park switch input to the FCM is
again closed to ground.
HEADLAMPS ON WITH WIPERS MODE
The CCN provides an automatic headlamps on with wipers feature for models equipped automatic headlamps. This
is a customer programmable feature. If this feature is enabled, the headlamps will turn on automatically whenever
the windshield wipers are turned on; and, if the headlamps were turned on automatically when the wipers were
turned on, they will also turn off automatically when the wipers are turned off. If this feature is enabled, when the
automatic wiper mode is selected the headlamps will turn on automatically only after the wipers complete a mini-
mum of five automatic wipe cycles within about sixty seconds, and they will turn off automatically after four minutes
elapse without any wipe cycles.
INTERMITTENT WIPE MODE
When the control knob on the control stalk of the multi-function switch is moved to one of the Intermittent interval
positions the SCCM sends an electronic wiper switch delay message to the FCM, then the FCM electronic inter-
mittent wipe logic circuit responds by calculating the correct length of time between wiper sweeps based upon the
selected delay interval input. The FCM monitors the changing state of the wiper motor park switch through a hard
wired park switch sense input. This input allows the FCM to determine the proper intervals at which to energize and
de-energize the wiper on/off relay to operate the wiper motor intermittently for one low speed cycle at a time.
The FCM logic is also programmed to provide vehicle speed sensitivity to the selected intermittent wipe delay inter-
vals. In order to provide this feature the FCM monitors electronic vehicle speed messages from the Powertrain Con-
trol Module (PCM) and doubles the selected delay interval whenever the vehicle speed is approximately sixteen
kilometers-per-hour (ten miles-per-hour) or less.
PULSE WIPE MODE
When the control knob on the control stalk of the multi-function switch is depressed to the momentary pulse wipe
position for less than about one-half second, the SCCM sends an electronic switch message to the FCM, then the
FCM energizes the wiper on/off relay for one complete wipe cycle. The FCM de-energizes the relay when the state
of the park switch sense changes to ground, parking the wiper blades near the base of the windshield.
WASH MODE
When the control knob on the control stalk of the multi-function switch is depressed to the momentary Wash position
for more than about one-half second, the SCCM sends an electronic washer switch message to the FCM, then the
FCM directs battery current and ground to the washer pump/motor unit. This will cause the washer pump/motor unit
to be energized for as long as the Wash switch is held closed up to about ten seconds, and to de-energize when
the front Wash switch is released.
When the control knob is depressed to the momentary Wash position while the wiper system is operating in one of
the intermittent interval positions, the washer pump/motor operation is the same. However, the FCM also energizes
the wiper on/off relay to override the selected delay interval and operate the wiper motor in a continuous low speed
mode for as long as the control knob is held depressed, then de-energizes the relay and reverts to the selected
delay mode interval several wipe cycles after the control knob is released. If the control knob is held depressed for
more than about ten seconds, the FCM will suspend washer pump/motor operation until the knob is released. then
cycled back to the Wash position if so desired.
The headlamp washer system (if equipped) utilizes a separate high pressure pump that is attached to the wind-
shield washer reservoir. The headlamp washer pump feeds nozzles that are mounted in the front fascia of the vehi-
cle. The nozzle bodies spray the headlamps with high pressure washer solvent when the system is activated.
To activate the headlamp washers, turn ON the headlamps and then press the windshield washer control knob. This
will operate the windshield washers and direct two timed high pressure sprays onto the headlamp lens.
WIPE-AFTER-WASH MODE
When the control knob on the control stalk of the multi-function switch is depressed to the momentary Wash position
for more than about one-half second while the wiper system is not operating, the instrument cluster sends an elec-
tronic washer switch message to the FCM, then the FCM directs battery current and ground to the washer pump/
motor unit and energizes the wiper on/off relay. This will cause the washer pump/motor unit to be energized and
operate the wiper motor in a continuous low speed mode for as long as the Wash switch is held closed up to about
ten seconds. When the control knob is released, the FCM de-energizes the washer pump/motor unit, but allows the
wiper motor to operate for several additional wipe cycles before it de-energizes the wiper on/off relay and parks the
wiper blades near the base of the windshield.
If the control knob is held depressed for more than about thirty seconds, the FCM will suspend washer pump/motor
operation until the knob is released, then cycled back to the Wash position; however, the wipers will continue to
operate for as long as the Wash switch is held closed. The FCM monitors the changing state of the wiper motor
park switch through a hard wired wiper park switch sense circuit input. This input allows the FCM to count the
number of wipe cycles that occur after the Wash switch is released, and to determine the proper interval at which
to de-energize the wiper on/off relay to complete the wipe-after-wash mode cycle.
REAR WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM - WAGON ONLY
All rear wiper and washer system functions are initi-

ated with the rear wiper and washer switch in the
instrument panel switch pod located on the instrument
panel center bezel, just above the radio and below the
a/c outlets (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER/INSTRUMENT PANEL SWITCH POD -
REMOVAL). Pushing the left side of the wiper/washer
switch selects the rear wiper system operating mode
(intermittent). it has fixed 10 seconds delay between
wipe (not adjustable). indicator at bottom of the WIPE
graphic will light up when the wipe switch is ON and goes away when the wipe is OFF. Depressing the momentary
contact switch activates the rear washer system. When a rear wiper or washer mode is selected, the circuitry within
the instrument panel switch pod sends an electronic rear wiper/washer switch status message over the Controller
Area Network (CAN) data bus to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) also referred to as the Cab Com-
partment Node (CCN). The CCN then sends electronic messages to the Front Control Module (FCM) over the CAN
data bus requesting the appropriate rear wiper and washer system operating modes.
INTERMITTENT WIPE MODE
When the rear wiper switch is pressed to the left, the instrument cluster sends an electronic wiper switch message
to the FCM, then the FCM electronic wipe logic circuit responds by selecting a predetermined length of time
between wiper sweeps.
WASH MODE
When the rear washer control switch is depressed to the right in the momentary Wash position, the instrument clus-
ter sends an electronic washer switch message to the FCM, then the FCM directs battery current and ground to the
washer pump/motor. This will cause the washer pump/motor to be energized for as long as the Wash switch is held
closed up to about ten seconds, and to de-energize when the rear wiper/washer switch is released.
WIPE-AFTER-WASH MODE
When the rear washer switch is released from the momentary Wash position, the instrument cluster sends an elec-
tronic washer switch message to the FCM. The FCM de-energizes the washer pump/motor, but allows the rear
wiper motor to operate for several wipe cycles before it de-energizes the rear wiper relay.
OFF MODE
When the Off position of the rear wiper switch is selected, one of three events is possible. The event that will occur
depends upon the position of the wiper blade on the liftgate glass and the mode the wiper motor is operating under
at the moment that the Off position is selected. If the wiper blade is in the down position on the glass and the rear
wiper system is operating in the intermittent cycle mode when the Off position is selected, the park switch is open
and the FCM de-energizes the rear wiper relay control coil causing the rear wiper motor to cease to operate.
If the wiper blade is not in the down position on the glass and is operating in the intermittent cycle mode when the
Off position is selected, the park switch is closed to ground and the FCM keeps the rear wiper relay control coil
energized to operate the rear wiper motor until the rear wiper blade is in the down position on the glass and the
park switch input is an open circuit.
The third event occurs with the rear wiper operating in the wipe-after-wash mode when the Off position is selected,
in which case the FCM will continue to run the wiper motor until the completion of two wipes after wash before the
rear wiper blade is parked. The FCM will also run the rear wiper motor to park the rear wiper blade if the ignition
switch is turned to the Off position while the rear wiper system is still operating.
CHECK VALVE
REMOVAL
The rear washer check valve is located on the lower
liftgate.
2. Remove the lower liftgate trim panel (Refer to 23 -
BODY/DECKLID/HATCH/LIFTGATE/TAILGATE/
TRIM PANEL - REMOVAL).
3. Remove check valve by twisting washer hose at
each end.
INSTALLATION
1. Insert check valve into washer hose.
2. Install lower liftgate trim panel (Refer to 23 -
BODY/DECKLID/HATCH/LIFTGATE/TAILGATE/
TRIM PANEL - INSTALLATION).
FRONT WIPER MODULE

DESCRIPTION
The front wiper module is secured with screws
through two rubber grommet-type insulators to the
cowl plenum panel. The module is located in the rear
of the engine compartment where it is concealed
beneath the molded plastic cowl plenum grille panel.
The ends of the pivot shafts protruding through open-
ings in the cowl plenum cover/grille panel are the only
visible components of the wiper module. The wiper
module consists of the following major components:
Crank Arm - The wiper motor crank arm is a stamped steel unit with an internally splined hole on the driven
end that is secured to the wiper motor output shaft with a nut, and a long ball stud secured to the drive end
to accept the wiper linkage.
Linkage - The two wiper linkage members are each constructed of stamped steel. A driver side drive link with
a plastic socket-type bushing in the left end, and a plastic sleeve-type bushing in the right end. The socket
bushing is snap-fit over the pivot ball stud on the left pivot lever arm, while the sleeve bushing is fit over the
longer pivot stud on the wiper motor crank arm. The passenger side drive link has a plastic socket-type bush-
ing on each end. One end of this drive link is snap-fit over the ball stud on the right pivot lever arm, while the
other end is snap-fit over the top of the driver side drive link on the ball stud of the wiper motor crank arm.
Motor - The wiper motor is secured on the underside of the module bracket near the center with three screws.
The wiper motor output shaft passes through a hole in the module bracket, where a nut secures the wiper
motor crank arm to the motor output shaft. The two-speed permanent magnet wiper motor features an integral
transmission, an internal park switch, and an internal Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) circuit breaker.
Pivots - This module features two pivots. The two wiper pivot shafts have lever arms with ball studs at their
base to accept the wiper linkage. The upper end of all three pivot shafts has a threaded stud with a tapered
and serrated area just below the threads to accept the left wiper arm or the right wiper arm links.
The front wiper module cannot be adjusted or repaired. The front wiper motor is available for separate service
replacement. If any other component of the module is inoperative or damaged, the entire front wiper module unit
must be replaced.
OPERATION
The front wiper module operation is controlled by the battery current inputs received by the wiper motor through the
wiper on/off and wiper high/low relays. The wiper motor speed is controlled by current flow to either the low speed
or the high speed set of brushes. The park switch is a single pole, single throw, momentary switch within the wiper
motor that is mechanically actuated by the wiper motor transmission components. The park switch alternately opens
and closes the wiper park switch sense circuit to ground, depending upon the position of the wipers on the glass.
This feature allows the motor to complete its current wipe cycle after the wiper system has been turned Off, and to
park the wiper blades in the lowest portion of the wipe pattern. The automatic resetting circuit breaker protects the
motor from overloads.
The wiper motor crank arm, the two wiper linkage members, and the two wiper pivots mechanically convert the
rotary output of the wiper motor to the back and forth wiping motion of the wiper arms and blades on the glass.
REMOVAL
2. Remove the wiper arms (1) and (2) (Refer to 8 -
ELECTRICAL/WIPERS/WASHERS/WIPER ARMS -
REMOVAL).
3. Remove the cowl panel (1) (Refer to 23 - BODY/

EXTERIOR/COWL GRILLE - REMOVAL).
4. Disconnect the wiper motor electrical connector (1).

5. Remove the two retaining bolts (1 and 4) and

remove wiper module (3) from vehicle.
INSTALLATION
1. Inspect the grommet (1) that the wiper motor sits
in. If cracked, brittle, or damaged, replace the
grommet (1).
2. While positioning the wiper module in its mounting

location, make sure that the dowel on the bottom of
the wiper motor (1) slides into the mounting grom-
met (2) correctly.
3. Install the two retaining bolts (1 and 4). Torque

bolts to 8 Nm (70 in. lbs.).
4. Connect the wiper motor electrical connector (1).
5. Install the cowl panel (1) (Refer to 23 - BODY/EX-

TERIOR/COWL GRILLE - INSTALLATION).
6. Install the wiper arms (1) and (2) (Refer to 8 -

ELECTRICAL/WIPERS/WASHERS/WIPER ARMS -
INSTALLATION). Torque nuts to 18 Nm (150 in.
lbs.).
FRONT WIPER MOTOR

REMOVAL
2. Remove the front wiper module (3) (Refer to 8 -
ULE - REMOVAL).
3. With front wiper module on bench or in vise,

remove the one nut attaching the bellcrank to the
motor shaft.
4. Using a flat bladed tool, carefully pry the bellcrank

from the wiper motor shaft.
5. Separate the bellcrank from the wiper motor shaft.
6. Remove the two motor mounting bolts (1).

NOTE: When separating the motor from the link-

age, there are two pocket nuts that may fall out.
Take care to keep these and reinstall them during
installation.
7. Separate the wiper motor from the wiper

module/linkage.
INSTALLATION
1. Ensure that the shaft seal (3) is on the new motor
shaft. If necessary, transfer the one on the old
motor. If transferred, make sure the seal is in good
shape (not brittle, free from cracks, and not
damaged).
2. Ensure that the pocket nuts (1) are in place in the

motor before assembly.
3. If needed to install pocket nut (1), align the nut with

the pocket.
4. Drop nut (1) into pocket.
5. Place wiper motor in its mounting location making

sure that the pocket nuts are in place.
6. Install and tighten the mounting bolts (1).
7. Position the bellcrank on the wiper motor shaft.
8. Align the bellcrank with the linkage arms.

9. Install and tighten the nut to the bellcrank.
10. Install the front wiper module (3) (Refer to 8 -

ULE - INSTALLATION).
HEADLAMP WASHER
DESCRIPTION
The headlamp washers work in conjunction with the
windshield washers. The headlamp washers are
enabled with the headlamps ON and the front wind-
shield washers activated. With the windshield washers
activated the headlamp washers will spray twice for a
predetermined amount of time.
OPERATION
The headlamp washer system utilizes a separate high pressure pump that is attached to the windshield washer
reservoir. The headlamp washer pump feeds nozzles that are mounted in the front fascia of the vehicle. The nozzles
are aimed in front of the headlamp assembly. These nozzles spray the headlamps when the system is activated.
To activate the headlamp washers, turn ON the headlamps and then press the front windshield washer control knob.
This will operate the windshield washers and direct one, timed high pressure sprays onto the headlamp lens.
REMOVAL
2. Loosen front fascia as necessary on the side to be
removed (Refer to 13 - FRAME & BUMPERS/
BUMPERS/FRONT FASCIA - REMOVAL).
3. Disconnect washer hose (2) from headlamp
washer.
4. Remove headlamp washer from front fascia (1).
INSTALLATION
1. Install headlamp washer to front fascia (1).
2. Attache washer hose (2) to headlamp washer fitting
(3).
3. Install front fascia (1) (Refer to 13 - FRAME &
BUMPERS/BUMPERS/FRONT FASCIA - INSTAL-
LATION).
HEADLAMP WASHER HOSE

REMOVAL
The headlamp washer hose (2) is a special high pres-
sure hose with specific fittings (3), and must be
replaced as a unit.
2. Loosen up the fascia (1) on the side of the vehicle
in which hose needs replacing (Refer to 13 -
REMOVAL).
3. When disconnecting hose (2) , press down firmly
on latch (3) at headlamp washer pump motor and
washer assembly and pull apart.
INSTALLATION
The headlamp washer hose is a special high pressure
hose with specific fittings, and must be replaced as a
unit.
1. Install the new high pressure headlamp washer
hose (2) assembly. Push fitting (3) on until a snap
is heard.
2. Install the fascia (Refer to 13 - FRAME &
BUMPERS/BUMPERS/FRONT FASCIA - INSTAL-
LATION).
HEADLAMP WASHER PUMP MOTOR

REMOVAL
2. Drain washer fluid from the reservoir and into a
suitable clean container. This can be done by dis-
connecting the windshield washer hose from the
front (outboard) washer pump and allowing the
washer fluid to drain into a container through a
temporary jumper hose connected to the front
washer pump.
3. Remove the washer reservoir (Refer to 8 - ELEC-
TRICAL/WIPERS/WASHERS/WASHER RESER-
VOIR - REMOVAL).
4. Disconnect the high pressure headlamp washer
pump hose by pressing down firmly on latch and
pulling hose off.
5. Disconnect the high pressure headlamp washer
pump motor electrical connector (1).
6. Remove pump from reservoir by pulling pump up
and away from reservoir cavity and out of mounting
grommet. Do not damage reservoir/pump sealing
surface or puncture reservoir during removal.
7. Remove pump grommet and discard.
INSTALLATION
1. Use new grommet when installing a new pump
assembly.
2. Assure that the pump is aligned to and fully seated
in the reservoir cavity.
3. Install the washer reservoir (Refer to 8 - ELECTRI-
CAL/WIPERS/WASHERS/WASHER RESERVOIR -
INSTALLATION).
4. Connect the electrical harness connectors to the
washer pump motors and the fluid level sensor.
5. Connect the high pressure headlamp washer hose
by firmly pushing hose onto inlet until a snap is
heard.
6. Refill the reservoir with fluid drained previously.
SENSOR-RAIN
DESCRIPTION
The Rain Sensor is the primary component of the
automatic wiper system.
The rain sensor is located on the inside of the wind-

shield, just below the rear view mirror mounting button
(1).
Sliding cam locks (6) on each side of the top sides of

the sensor (either side of the connector) secures the
sensor to the mounting bracket (9) that is bonded (1)
to the windshield glass. A small screwdriver can be
used to push in the tabs until the slider protrudes from
the opposing side of the sensor case (5). Concealed
within the sensor housing (5) is the electronic circuitry
(7) of the module, which includes four Infrared diodes,
four photocells, and a microprocessor.
The rain sensor software is Flash compatible, which
means it can be reprogrammed using Flash repro-
gramming procedures. However, if any of the hard-
ware of the sensor is damaged or faulty, the entire
rain sensor must be replaced. The rain sensor bracket
(9) is serviced as a unit with the windshield glass. If
the bracket is faulty, damaged, or separated from the
windshield glass, the windshield must be replaced.
OPERATION
The microprocessor-based Rain Sensor senses mois-
ture in the wipe pattern (1) on the outside of the wind-
shield glass and sends wipe commands to the Front
Control Module (FCM). Four Infrared diodes within the
sensor generate infrared light beams that are aimed
by four of the convex optical lenses near the base of
the sensor through the windshield glass. Four addi-
tional convex optical lenses near the top of the sensor
are focused on the infrared light beams on the outside
of the windshield glass and allow the four photocells
within the sensor to sense changes in the intensity of
these infrared light beams. When sufficient moisture
accumulates within the wipe pattern (1) of the wind-
shield glass, the sensor detects a change in the mon-
itored infrared light beam intensity.
The internal programming of the sensor then sends
the appropriate electronic wipe command messages to
the FCM over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data
bus. The FCM responds by activating or deactivating
the front wiper system. The CCN sends electronic sensitivity level messages to the rain sensor over the CAN data
bus based upon the driver-selected sensitivity setting of the control knob on the control stalk of the multi-function
switch. The higher the selected sensitivity setting the more sensitive the rain sensor is to the accumulated moisture
on the windshield glass, and the more frequently the sensor will send wipe commands to the FCM to operate the
front wiper system.
The rain sensor operates on battery current received through a fuse in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) on a
fused B+ circuit. The rain sensor receives ground at all times through the body wire harness. It is important to note
that the default condition of the automatic wiper system is low. Therefore, if no message is received by the FCM
from the rain sensor for more than about five seconds when in the Auto sensitivity wipe mode, the wipers will default
to a constant low wipe state.
The rain sensor ground and battery current inputs may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and meth-
ods. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the rain sensor requires the use of a scan tool
and the appropriate diagnostic information.
REMOVAL
3. Using a small screwdriver or equivalent, from the
top (connector side) push in the tabs until the slider
protrudes from the opposing (bottom) side of the
sensor case.
4. Gently pull each slider (1) slightly more until the
cam lock releases the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. Make sure that the slider locks are positioned cor-
rectly in the downward position, sticking out of the
side opposite the connector.
2. Position the rain sensor below the inside rear view
mirror, over the bracket and gently push down to
seat it on the bracket.
3. Push the slider cam locks (1) inward until they are
flush with the side of the sensor case.
4. Connect the wire harness connector to the sensor.
REAR WIPER MOTOR - WAGON ONLY

REMOVAL
2. Remove the rear wiper arm (3) (Refer to 8 - ELEC-
TRICAL/WIPERS/WASHERS/WIPER ARMS -
REMOVAL).
3. Remove the liftgate trim panel (Refer to 23 - BODY/DECKLID/HATCH/LIFTGATE/TAILGATE/TRIM PANEL -

REMOVAL).
4. Remove the three mounting fasteners (1).
5. Disconnect the electrical harness connector (5).

6. Separate the wiper motor (3) from the liftgate.
7. Inspect the wiper motor shaft to liftgate seal (1).

INSTALLATION
1. Inspect the shaft-to-liftgate seal (1) in liftgate.
2. If seal is damaged, brittle, or deformed in any way

replace. Position shaft seal (1) with the arrow in the
UP position.
3. Position wiper motor (3) in liftgate.
4. Install the mounting nuts (1). Torque nuts to 8 Nm

(70 in. lbs).
5. Connect the electrical harness connector (5).

6. Install lower liftgate trim panel (Refer to 23 - BODY/DECKLID/HATCH/LIFTGATE/TAILGATE/TRIM PANEL -

INSTALLATION).
7. Install the rear wiper arm (Refer to 8 - ELECTRI-
CAL/WIPERS/WASHERS/WIPER ARMS - INSTAL-
LATION). Torque nut to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs.).
WASHER FLUID LEVEL SWITCH

REMOVAL
washer pump.
VOIR - REMOVAL).
4. Remove the washer fluid level switch by pulling out

of reservoir. Inspect the grommet and if installing a
new switch, always use a new grommet.
INSTALLATION
1. Inspect grommet and if installing new switch, use a
new grommet. Position the switch into opening and
firmly press into place.

INSTALLATION).
WASHER PUMP MOTOR

REMOVAL
washer pump.
VOIR - REMOVAL).
4. Remove the washer pump motor by pulling out of

reservoir. Inspect the grommet and if installing a
new motor, always use a new grommet.
INSTALLATION
1. Inspect grommet and if installing new motor, use a
new grommet. Position the motor into opening and
firmly press into place.

INSTALLATION).
WASHER RESERVOIR
REMOVAL

2. Remove the front fascia (4) (Refer to 13 - FRAME & BUMPERS/BUMPERS/FRONT FASCIA - REMOVAL).
3. Disconnect electrical harness connectors (1 and 3)
from reservoir.
4. Disconnect hose from reservoir (2) and drain fluid
into container.
5. Remove the rear mounting fastener (2).
6. Remove the remaining fasteners (1).

7. Remove the reservoir (4) from the vehicle.
INSTALLATION
1. Position reservoir (4) in vehicle.
2. Install mounting fasteners (1). Torque fasteners to 7

Nm (62 in. lbs).
3. Install rear mounting fastener (2). Torque fastener

to 7 Nm (62 in. lbs).
4. Connect electrical harness connectors (1 and 3)

and hoses (2) to reservoir.
5. Install front fascia (4) (Refer to 13 - FRAME & BUMPERS/BUMPERS/FRONT FASCIA - INSTALLATION).
7. Fill reservoir.
WIPER ARMS
REMOVAL
FRONT WIPER ARM
1. Remove the nut caps (3).
2. Remove the retaining nuts (4).
3. Using a suitable two jaw puller (5), separate the

wiper arm (7) from the wiper pivot.
4. Remove the wiper arms (1 and 2).
REAR WIPER ARM - WAGON

1. Remove the nut cap (2).
2. Remove the retaining nut (1).
3. Gently rock the wiper arm from side to side to
loosen it from the shaft.
4. Remove the wiper arm (3).
INSTALLATION
FRONT WIPER ARM
1. Install wiper arms (1) on wiper arm pivots.
2. Install retaining nuts (4). Torque nuts to 18 Nm (13
ft. lbs.).
3. Install nut caps (3).
REAR WIPER ARM - WAGON

1. Install wiper arm (3).
2. Install retaining nut (1). Torque nut to 18 Nm (13 ft.
lbs.).
3. install nut cap (2).
LX NAVIGATION/TELECOMMUNICATION 8T - 1
NAVIGATION/TELECOMMUNICATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
NAVIGATION/TELECOMMUNICATION - NAVIGATION/TELECOMMUNICATION -
ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 SERVICE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
NAVIGATION/TELECOMMUNICATION - ELECTRICAL
DIAGNOSTICS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
NAVIGATION/TELECOMMUNICATION - U0141LOST COMMUNICATION WITH

ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS FRONT CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
B1411-HFM LEFT AUDIO OUTPUT CIRCUIT OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER . . . . . 52
LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 U0154-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B1412-HFM LEFT AUDIO OUTPUT CIRCUIT OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE . . . . . 52
HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 U0155-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B1415-HFM RIGHT AUDIO OUTPUT CLUSTER/CCN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 U0156-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH EOM . . . 52
B1416-HFM RIGHT AUDIO OUTPUT U0159-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 PARKING ASSIST CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . 52
B1435-VOICE RECOGNITION/PHONE U0164-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HVAC
SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE . . . 18 CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
B1436-VOICE RECOGNITION/PHONE U0168-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 VEHICLE SECURITY CONTROL MODULE
B1437-VOICE RECOGNITION/PHONE (SKREEM/WCM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 U0169-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B1438VOICE RECOGNITION SWITCH SUNROOF CONTROL MODULE. . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
STUCK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 U0181-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B1439-PHONE SWITCH STUCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 HEADLAMP LEVELING TRANSLATOR . . . . . . . 53
B145A-TELEMATICS MIRROR CONTROL U0184-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 RADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
B1459-TELEMATICS MIRROR CONTROL U0186-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 AUDIO AMPLIFIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
B1492GENERAL MICROPHONE U0195-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 SDARS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
B2203ROM CHECKSUM PERFORMANCE . . . 43 U0196-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B222A-VEHICLE LINE MISMATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 VEHICLE ENTERTAINMENT CONTROL
B222EFLASH CHECKSUM PERFORMANCE . 45 MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
B222FFLASH WRITE PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . 46 U0199-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B2223-(HFM) HANDS FREE PHONE DRIVER DOOR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
INTERNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 U0200-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B2230RAM WRITE PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . 48 PASSENGER DOOR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
U0019CAN B BUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 U0208-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
HEATED SEAT CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . 53
8T - 2 NAVIGATION/TELECOMMUNICATION - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS LX
U0209-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH U0231-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH RAIN

MEMORY SEAT CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . 54 SENSING MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
SCCM - CAN B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
LX NAVIGATION/TELECOMMUNICATION - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8T - 3
NAVIGATION/TELECOMMUNICATION - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS

B1411-HFM LEFT AUDIO OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Hands Free Module detects low voltage on the (X703) Left Audio Output circuit.
Possible Causes
(X703) LEFT AUDIO OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN

(X703) LEFT AUDIO OUTPUT CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(X795) COMMON AUDIO OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN
(X703) LEFT AUDIO OUTPUT CIRCUIT SHORT TO (X795) COMMON AUDIO OUTPUT CIRCUIT
HANDS FREE MODULE
Diagnostic Test

cycle.
Yes >> Go To 2
2. (X703) LEFT AUDIO OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (X703) Left Audio Output circuit between
the HFM connector and the radio connector.
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Repair the (X703) Left Audio Output circuit for an open
3. (X703) LEFT AUDIO OUTPUT CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (X703) Left Audio Out-
put circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (X703) Left Audio Output circuit for short to
ground.
No >> Go To 4
4. (X795) COMMON AUDIO OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (X795) Common Audio Output circuit
between the HFM connector and the radio connector.
Yes >> Go To 5
No >> Repair the (X795) Common Audio Output circuit for an
open.
5. (X703) LEFT AUDIO OUTPUT CIRCUIT SHORT TO (X795) COMMON AUDIO OUTPUT CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (X703) Left Audio Output circuit
and the (X795) Common Audio Output circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (X703) Left Audio Output circuit for a short to
the (X795) Common Audio Output circuit.
circuits. If ok, replace and program the Hands Free Module
B1412-HFM LEFT AUDIO OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Hands Free Module detects high voltage on the (X703) Left Audio Output circuit.
Possible Causes
(X703) LEFT AUDIO OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN

(X703) LEFT AUDIO OUTPUT CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
HANDS FREE MODULE
Diagnostic Test

cycle.
Yes >> Go To 2
2. (X703) LEFT AUDIO OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (X703) Left Audio Output circuit between
the HFM connector and the radio connector.
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Repair the (X703) Left Audio Output circuit for an open

Yes >> Go To 4
open.
4. (X703) LEFT AUDIO OUTPUT CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage of the (X703) Left Audio Output circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (X703) Left Audio Output circuit for a short to
voltage.
B1415-HFM RIGHT AUDIO OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Hands Free Module detects low voltage on the (X704) Right Audio Output circuit.
Possible Causes
(X704) RIGHT AUDIO OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN

(X704) RIGHT AUDIO OUTPUT CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(X704) RIGHT AUDIO OUTPUT CIRCUIT SHORT TO (X795) COMMON AUDIO OUTPUT CIRCUIT
HANDS FREE MODULE
Diagnostic Test

cycle.
Yes >> Go To 2
2. (X704) RIGHT AUDIO OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (X704) Right Audio Output circuit
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Repair the (X704) Right Audio Output circuit for an open.
3. (X704) RIGHT AUDIO OUTPUT CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (X704) Right Audio
Output circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (X704) Right Audio Output circuit for short to
ground.
No >> Go To 4

Yes >> Go To 5
open.
5. (X704) RIGHT AUDIO OUTPUT CIRCUIT SHORT TO (X795) COMMON AUDIO OUTPUT CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (X704) Right Audio Output circuit
and the (X795) Common Audio Output circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (X704) Right Audio Output circuit for a short to
the (X795) Common Audio Output circuit.
B1416-HFM RIGHT AUDIO OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Hands Free Module detects high voltage on the (X704) Right Audio Output circuit.
Possible Causes
(X704) RIGHT AUDIO OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN

(X704) RIGHT AUDIO OUTPUT CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
HANDS FREE MODULE
Diagnostic Test

cycle.
Yes >> Go To 2
2. (X704) RIGHT AUDIO OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (X704) Right Audio Output circuit
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Repair the (X704) Right Audio Output circuit for an open.

Yes >> Go To 4
open.
4. (X704) RIGHT AUDIO OUTPUT CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage of the (X704) Right Audio Output circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (X704) Right Audio Output circuit for a short to
voltage.
B1435-VOICE RECOGNITION/PHONE SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Hands Free Module detects an invalid voltage signal on the (X730) Voice Recognition/Phone Switch Sig-
nal circuit.
Possible Causes
INSIDE REAR VIEW MIRROR
HANDS FREE MODULE
Diagnostic Test

cycle.
Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECK THE VOLTAGE OF THE (X730) VOICE RECOGNITION/PHONE SWITCH SIGNAL

Disconnect the Inside Rear View Mirror C2 harness connector.
With the scan tool, monitor the VR Phone Switch voltage.
While monitoring the VR Phone Switch voltage, momentarily connect a
jumper wire between the (X730) Voice Recognition/Phone Switch Sig-
nal circuit and ground.
NOTE: The scan tool sensor voltage should switch from above 4.7
volts when the jumper is not connected to below 0.6 volts when
the jumper is connected.
Does the sensor voltage switch from above 4.7 volts to below
0.6 volt as described?
Yes >> Replace the Inside Rear View Mirror in accordance with the
B1436-VOICE RECOGNITION/PHONE SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Hands Free Module detects voltage below 0.6 volts on the (X730) Voice Recognition/Phone Switch Signal
circuit.
Possible Causes

(X730) VOICE RECOGNITION/PHONE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO (X835) SENSOR GROUND
CIRCUIT
(X730) VOICE RECOGNITION/PHONE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
HANDS FREE MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. Check for active DTC

cycle.
Yes >> Go To 2

No >> Go To 3
3. (X730) VOICE/RECOGNITION/PHONE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (X835) SENSOR

GROUND CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (X730) Voice Recognition/Phone
Switch Signal circuit and the (X835) Sensor Ground circuit.
Yes >> Repair the (X730) Voice Recognition/Phone Switch Signal
circuit for a short to the (X835) Sensor Ground circuit.
No >> Go To 4
4. (X730) VOICE/RECOGNITION/PHONE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (X730) Voice Recog-
nition/Phone Switch Signal circuit.
B1437-VOICE RECOGNITION/PHONE SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Hands Free Module detects voltage above 4.7 volts on the (X730) Voice Recognition/Phone Switch Signal
circuit.
Possible Causes
(X730) VOICE RECOGNITION/PHONE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

(X730) VOICE RECOGNITION/PHONE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
(X835) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
HANDS FREE MODULE
Diagnostic Test

cycle.
Yes >> Go To 2

Measure the voltage of the (X730) Voice Recognition/Phone Switch
Signal circuit.
No >> Go To 3
3. INSIDE REAR VIEW MIRROR

Connect a jumper wire between (X730) Voice Recognition/Phone
Switch Signal circuit and the (X835) Sensor Ground circuit.
With the scan tool, monitor the VR Phone Switch Voltage.
Is the voltage approximately 0 volts?
No >> Go To 4
4. (X730) VOICE RECOGNITION/PHONE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (X730) Voice Recognition/Phone Switch
Signal circuit between the HFM connector and the inside rear view mir-
ror connector.
Yes >> Go To 5
No >> Repair the (X730) Voice Recognition/Phone Switch Signal
5. (X835) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (X835) Sensor Ground circuit between
the HFM connector and the inside rear view mirror connector.
No >> Repair the (X835) Sensor Ground circuit for an open.
B1438VOICE RECOGNITION SWITCH STUCK

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Hands Free Module detects voltage between 3.5 volts and 4.0 volts on the (X730) Voice Recognition/
Phone Switch Signal circuit for more than 30 seconds.
Possible Causes
HANDS FREE MODULE
Diagnostic Test

cycle.
Yes >> Go To 2

jumper wire between (X730) Voice Recognition/Phone Switch Signal
circuit and ground.
B1439-PHONE SWITCH STUCK

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Hands Free Module detects voltage between 2.8 volts and 3.3 volts on the (X730) Voice Recognition/
Phone Switch Signal circuit for more than 30 seconds.
Possible Causes
HANDS FREE MODULE
Diagnostic Test

cycle.
Yes >> Go To 2

jumper wire between (X730) Voice Recognition/Phone Switch Signal
circuit and ground.
B145A-TELEMATICS MIRROR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Hands Free Module detects high voltage on the (X793) Microphone Feed circuit.
Possible Causes
(X793) MICROPHONE FEED CIRCUIT OPEN

(X793) MICROPHONE FEED CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
HANDS FREE MODULE
Diagnostic Test

cycle.
Attempt to make a phone call with the system.
Yes >> Go To 2
2. (X793) MICROPHONE FEED CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (X793) Microphone Feed circuit between
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Repair the (X793) Microphone Feed circuit for an open.
3. (X793) MICROPHONE FEED CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage of the (X793) Microphone Feed circuit.
Is the voltage above 1.0 volt?
Yes >> Repair the (X793) Microphone Feed circuit for short to volt-
age.
No >> Go To 4

Replace the Inside Rear View Mirror in accordance with the service information.
cycle.
Yes >> Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage or shorted circuits. If ok, replace and program the Hands
Free Module in accordance with the service information.
B1459-TELEMATICS MIRROR CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Hands Free Module detects low voltage on the (X793) Microphone Feed circuit.
Possible Causes
(X793) MICROPHONE FEED CIRCUIT OPEN

(X793) MICROPHONE FEED CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
HANDS FREE MODULE
Diagnostic Test

cycle.
Yes >> Go To 2
2. (X793) MICROPHONE FEED CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (X793) Microphone Feed circuit between
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Repair the (X793) Microphone Feed circuit for an open.
3. (X793) MICROPHONE FEED CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (X793) Microphone
Feed circuit
Yes >> Repair the (X793) Microphone Feed circuit for short to
ground.
No >> Go To 4

cycle.
B1492GENERAL MICROPHONE PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Hands Free Module detects a fault in any of the microphone circuits.
Possible Causes
(X712) MICROPHONE 1 IN (+) CIRCUIT OPEN

(X722) MICROPHONE 2 IN (+) CIRCUIT OPEN
(X792) MICROPHONE IN (-) CIRCUIT OPEN
(X712) (X722) (X792) MICROPHONE CIRCUITS SHORTED TO GROUND
(X712) (X722) (X792) MICROPHONE CIRCUITS SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
(X712) (X722) (X792) MICROPHONE CIRCUITS SHORTED TOGETHER
HANDS FREE MODULE
Diagnostic Test

cycle.
Yes >> Go To 2
2. (X712) MICROPHONE 1 IN (+) CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (X712) Microphone 1 IN (+) circuit
between the HFM connector and the inside rear view mirror connector.
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Repair the (X712) Microphone 1 IN (+) circuit for an open.
3. (X722) MICROPHONE 2 IN (+) CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (X722) Microphone 2 IN (+) circuit
between the HFM connector and the inside rear view mirror connector.
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Repair the (X722) Microphone 2 IN (+) circuit for an open.
4. (X792) MICROPHONE IN (-) CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (X792) Microphone IN (-) circuit between
Yes >> Go To 5
No >> Repair the (X792) Microphone IN (-) circuit for an open.
5. (X712) (X722) (X792) MICROPHONE CIRCUITS SHORTED TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and each (X712) (X722)
(X792) Microphone circuit.
Yes >> Repair the Microphone circuit that measured below 100.0
ohms for short to ground.
No >> Go To 6
6. (X712) (X722) (X792) MICROPHONE CIRCUITS SHORTED TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage of each (X712) (X722) (X792) Microphone circuit.
Yes >> Repair the Microphone circuit that measured above 1.0 volt
for short to voltage.
No >> Go To 7
7. (X712) (X722) (X792) MICROPHONE CIRCUITS SHORTED TOGETHER

Measure the resistance between each (X712) (X722) (X792) Micro-
phone circuit.
Yes >> Repair the Microphone circuit that measured below 100.0
ohms for a short together.
No >> Go To 8

cycle.
B2203ROM CHECKSUM PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Hands Free Module detects a fault during an internal diagnostic check.
Possible Causes
HANDS FREE MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. REPLACE THE HANDS FREE MODULE IF DTC IS ACTIVE

cycle.
Yes >> Replace and program the Hands Free Module in accordance with the service information.

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Hands Free Module will receive and monitor the vehicle line message from the PCM and record the vehi-
cle line if different from the last vehicle line.
Possible Causes
INCORRECT PCM
HANDS FREE MODULE
Diagnostic Test

cycle.
Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECK VEHICLE LINE IN PCM

With the scan tool compare the vehicle line that is programmed into the PCM to the vehicle line of the vehicle.
Does the vehicle line programmed into the PCM match the vehicle?
No >> Replace and program the Powertrain Control Module in accordance with the service information. Ensure
the PCM is replaced with the correct vehicle line PCM.
B222EFLASH CHECKSUM PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
HANDS FREE MODULE
Diagnostic Test

cycle.
B222FFLASH WRITE PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
HANDS FREE MODULE
Diagnostic Test

cycle.
B2223-(HFM) HANDS FREE PHONE INTERNAL

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
HANDS FREE MODULE
Diagnostic Test

cycle.
B2230RAM WRITE PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
HANDS FREE MODULE
Diagnostic Test

cycle.
U0019CAN B BUS

When Monitored:
Continuously
Set Condition:
Possible Causes

HANDS FREE MODULE
Diagnostic Test

cycle.
Yes >> Go To 2

With the scan tool, read the Front Control Module active DTCs.
Yes >> (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) and
perform the appropriate diagnostic test.
No >> Go To 3

Front Control Module C1 connector and the Hands Free Module con-
nector.
Yes >> Go To 4

Front Control Module C1 connector and the Hands Free Module con-
nector.
Yes >> Replace the Hands Free Module in accordance with the

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

(SKREEM/WCM)
test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

MODULE
test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.
LX NAVIGATION/TELECOMMUNICATION - SERVICE INFORMATION 8T - 55
NAVIGATION/TELECOMMUNICATION - SERVICE
INFORMATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
NAVIGATION/TELECOMMUNICATION - HANDS FREE MODULE

SERVICE INFORMATION REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING -
TELECOMMUNICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
8T - 56 NAVIGATION/TELECOMMUNICATION - SERVICE INFORMATION LX
NAVIGATION/TELECOMMUNICATION - SERVICE INFORMATION

DESCRIPTION
TELECOMMUNICATIONS
The hands-free cellular system uses Bluetooth technology to provide wireless communication between the oper-
ators compatible cellular telephone and the vehicles on-board receiver.
The system uses voice recognition technology to control operation. The incoming voice is broadcast through the
vehicles radio speakers, automatically overriding any other audio signals on the front speakers when the hands-free
system is in use. A microphone in the rear view mirror receives the vehicle occupants voices. If a call is in progress
when the ignition is switched off, the hands-free system will continue to operate for up to 45 seconds as part of the
Accessory Relay Delay function. Thereafter, the call can continue on the hand-held telephone.
The system will communicate with a telephone that is anywhere within the vehicle. However, covering the hand held
phone or the hands-free phone module with a metal object may block the signal. The system will recognize up to
seven telephones, each of which is given a spoken identification by the user during the setup process. The system
includes Spanish and French voice recognition in addition to English.
Two buttons on the rearview mirror, identified with ISO icons, control the system: A 9phone9 button turns the system
on and off; a 9voice recognition9 (or voice command) button prompts the hands-free system to listen for a voice
command.
OPERATION
TELECOMMUNICATION
Two buttons on the rearview mirror, identified with ISO icons, control the system: A 9phone9 button turns the system
on and off; a 9voice recognition9 (or voice command) button prompts the hands-free system to listen for a voice
command. The system includes the following features:
Phonebook - Stores telephone numbers for later recall by name or other verbal identification, called a voice
tag, and memory location.
Four memory locations - Home, Work, Cellular and Pager. A maximum of 32 unique names or voice tags may
be stored at the same time, with a different number in each of the four memory locations.
Voice tag dialing - Dials the number associated with a voice tag and memory location.
Digit dialing - Dials the telephone number by recognizing the names of the digits as they are spoken.
Receiving calls - A voice prompt notifies the user of an incoming call. A voice response accepts or rejects the
call without manual intervention.
Privacy Mode - Switches the call to the handheld telephone and the hands-free system and back again using
the voice recognition (or voice command) button and a voice command, if desired.
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - TELECOMMUNICATION

Any diagnosis of the Telecommunication system should begin with the use of scan tool. For information on
the use of the scan tool, refer to the appropriate Diagnostic Service information.
WARNING: ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH AIRBAGS, REFER TO ELECTRICAL, RESTRAINTS BEFORE

ATTEMPTING ANY STEERING WHEEL, STEERING COLUMN, OR INSTRUMENT PANEL COMPONENT DIAG-
NOSIS OR SERVICE. FAILURE TO TAKE THE PROPER PRECAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN ACCIDENTAL AIR-
BAG DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS


Phone Not 1. Bluetooth phone not 1. Ensure that phone(s) are paired to the system.
Available paired to the system.
2. Bluetooth phone not 2. Make sure paired phone is present, turned ON and that the
present or turned OFF. Bluetooth option is enabled on the phone.
3. Bluetooth phone has 3. At low battery levels, some phones will turn off Bluetooth
low battery. functionality. Ensure cellular phone is charged to an adequate
level.
Phone Pairing 1. Phone does not 1. The Telecommunication system requires the cellular phone to
Failed support Hands Free be Bluetooth enabled, as well as supporting the Hands Free
Profile Profile. The customer will have to upgrade their phone to one
supporting Hands Free Profile. A list of suggested phones is
available at: http://www.chrysler.com/uconnect.
2. Phone not Bluetooth 2. The Telecommunication system requires the cellular phone to
enabled. be Bluetooth enabled. A list of suggested phones is available
at: http://www.chrysler.com/uconnect.
3. PIN entered on the 3. The PIN spoken to the system must be the same PIN entered
phone is not the same into the phone.
as PIN spoken to the
system.
4. Phone has reached 4. Remove one of the previously paired devices from its list.
maximum number of
allowed devices paired.
Poor Voice 1. Microphone failure 1. Using a scan tool, check for microphone fault codes.
Recognition
2. Customer not waiting 2. Ensure customer is waiting for the system 9beep9 prior to
for the beep before beginning the speech to be recognized.
speaking.
3. Customer not 3. Verify that the customer is attempting to use the system with a
speaking in a smooth smooth consistent voice. The system is designed to accept
normal manner. normal speech spoken at a normal tone, some people tend to
speak to a computer loud and slow, which results in reduced
performance.
4. Rear view mirror not 4. Mirror must be firmly mounted to the mounting location. Ensure
properly attached to that mirror is tightened to the specified torque.
mounting.
5. High levels of noise in 5. System performance is increased when noise conditions in the
vehicle compartment vehicle are lowered. Ideal conditions include windows closed.
6. Object interfering with 6. Verify that there is no object, hanging from the mirror, that
microphone input could be obstructing the microphone.
7. User not saying 9send9 7. User must say 9send9 at the end of a Pager Dialing request.
after a pager dialing
request
8. Other passengers 8. Although designed for primary use by the driver, the
talking while customer is microphone will pick up passengers in any seat of the vehicle.
attempting to use the System performance is increased in low noise environments.
system
Phonebook 1. Phonebook names 1. For increased system performance, it is recommended that the
names not recorded in high noise phone book entries are recorded in a low noise environment. That
recognized conditions is, vehicle in park, with windows up.
consistently

2. Phonebook name(s) 2. For increased performance it is recommended that the user
short use both first and last name as a phonebook entry. Example 9
James Johnson9 as opposed to 9James9.
3. Phonebook names 3. It is recommended that each user of the system record their
recorded by another user own phonebook entries. This will increase the recognition
performance.
4. Similar names in 4. For increased system performance it is recommended that the
phonebook user do not enter similar sounding names in the phonebook.
5. Object interfering with 5. Object interfering with microphone input.
microphone input
Poor Phone 1. Microphone failure 1. Use a scan tool, and check for Microphone faults.
audio quality.
2. Rear view mirror not 2. Mirror must be firmly mounted to the mounting location. Tighten
properly fixed to mirror to the specified torque.
mounting button
3. System being used in 3. System performance is increased when noise conditions in the
high noise conditions vehicle are lowered. Ideal conditions include windows closed.
No Phone Audio 1. Phone setting cause 1. Route audio to 9Hands free9 device.
phone audio to be routed
to handset.
HANDS FREE MODULE

REMOVAL

2. Remove the glove box.
3. Disconnect the electrical harness connector.
4. Remove the mounting fasteners

5. Remove the hands free module.
INSTALLATION
1. Position hands free module. Install and tighten

mounting fasteners.
2. Connect wire harness connector.

3. Install glove box.
LX WIRING 8W - 1
WIRING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
WIRING DIAGRAM INFORMATION . . . . . . . 8W-01-1 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-48-1

COMPONENT INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-02-1 OVERHEAD CONSOLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-49-1
POWER DISTRIBUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-1 FRONT LIGHTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-1
FUSE/RELAY BLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-11-1 REAR LIGHTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-1
INTEGRATED POWER MODULE . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-1 TURN SIGNALS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-1
GROUND DISTRIBUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-1 WIPERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-1
BUS COMMUNICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-1 NAVIGATION/TELECOMMUNICATIONS . . . . 8W-55-1
CHARGING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-20-1 CONVENIENCE SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56-1
STARTING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-21-1 POWER WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-60-1
FUEL/IGNITION SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-1 POWER DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-61-1
TRANSMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM . . . . . 8W-31-1 POWER MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-62-1
VEHICLE SPEED CONTROL. . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-33-1 POWER SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-1
ANTILOCK BRAKES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-1 POWER SUNROOF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-64-1
VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY SYSTEM . . . . . 8W-39-1 SPEED PROPORTIONAL STEERING . . . . . . 8W-65-1
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-1 SPLICE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-70-1
HORN/CIGAR LIGHTER/POWER OUTLET . . 8W-41-1 CONNECTOR PIN-OUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-1
AIR CONDITIONING/HEATER . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-1 CONNECTOR/GROUND/SPLICE
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEM. . . . . . . . 8W-43-1 LOCATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-91-1
INTERIOR LIGHTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-1 POWER DISTRIBUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-97-1
AUDIO SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-1
LX 8W-01 WIRING DIAGRAM INFORMATION 8W - 01 - 1
8W-01 WIRING DIAGRAM INFORMATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
WIRING DIAGRAM INFORMATION STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A

DESCRIPTION SHORT TO GROUND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A
DIAGRAMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES
DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION . . . . . . 7 POWERING SEVERAL LOADS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . 7 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A
DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION VOLTAGE DROP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
AND INFORMATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 SPECIAL TOOLS
DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND WIRING/TERMINAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
AND SPLICE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 CONNECTOR
WARNING REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
WARNINGS - GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING DIODE
HARNESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
STANDARD PROCEDURE INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
STANDARD PROCEDURE - TERMINAL
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
SENSITIVE DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF WIRE
VOLTAGE POTENTIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING . . . . 21
STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR
CONTINUITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
8W - 01 - 2 8W-01 WIRING DIAGRAM INFORMATION LX
WIRING DIAGRAM INFORMATION

DESCRIPTION
DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS
DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring con-
tent. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it
is important to understand all of their features and characteristics.
Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the
ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page.
All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed
from the ignition.
Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A
dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete com-
ponents have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete.
It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they
appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches
and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only.
SYMBOLS
International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used
around the world.
TERMINOLOGY
This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams.
LHD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Left Hand Drive Vehicles

RHD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Right Hand Drive Vehicles
ATX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive
MTX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive
AT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive
MT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive
SOHC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Over Head Cam Engine
DOHC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Over Head Cam Engine
Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America
Except Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicles Built For Sale In North America
DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION
Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit,
gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen
gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer.
WIRE COLOR CODE CHART
COLOR CODE COLOR

BL BLUE
BK BLACK
BR BROWN
DB DARK BLUE
DG DARK GREEN
GY GRAY
LB LIGHT BLUE
LG LIGHT GREEN
OR ORANGE
PK PINK
RD RED
TN TAN
VT VIOLET
WT WHITE
YL YELLOW
* WITH TRACER
DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS

All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and its function. To identify which circuit
code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and
does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models.
CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CODE CHART
CIRCUIT FUNCTION
A BATTERY FEED
B BRAKE CONTROLS
C CLIMATE CONTROLS
D DIAGNOSTIC CIRCUITS
E DIMMING ILLUMINATION
CIRCUITS
F FUSED CIRCUITS
G MONITORING CIRCUITS
(GAUGES)
H MULTIPLE
I NOT USED
J OPEN
K POWERTRAIN CONTROL
MODULE
L EXTERIOR LIGHTING
M INTERIOR LIGHTING
N MULTIPLE
O NOT USED
P POWER OPTION (BATTERY
FEED)
Q POWER OPTIONS (IGNITION
FEED)
R PASSIVE RESTRAINT
S SUSPENSION/STEERING
T TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/
TRANSFER CASE
U OPEN
V SPEED CONTROL, WIPER/
WASHER
W WIPERS
X AUDIO SYSTEMS
Y TEMPORARY
Z GROUNDS
DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION

The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group,
it will be shown complete (all wires, connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay
is most likely to be found in Group 30, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another
group if it contains some associated wiring.
Splice diagrams in Section 8W-70 show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices
serves. Section 8W-70 only contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the
wiring diagrams.
Section 8W-80 shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified
using the name/number on the diagram pages.
DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION

CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical
example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before
attempting a repair.
IDENTIFICATION
In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows:
In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers.
In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers.
In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers.
Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers.
Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a G and follow the same series numbering as the in-line
connectors.
Splices are identified with an S and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition,
S001S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment.
Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a
component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier.
LOCATIONS
Section 8W-91 contains connector/ground/splice location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name
(or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. Connector/ground/splice location charts in
section 8W-91 reference the figure numbers of the illustrations.
The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness
branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations
WARNING
WARNINGS - GENERAL
WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings
that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced.
WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to
be on.
WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
park. A manual transmission should be in neutral.
WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area.
WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts.
WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s),
tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the bat-
tery.
WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing.
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS

TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS
When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed
and explained below.
Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in
a circuit.
WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and
ground.
Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and
the red lead to the positive side of the circuit.
CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in todays vehicles are Solid State. When checking volt-
ages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating.
Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit
means good continuity.
CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in todays vehicles are Solid State. When checking resis-
tance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure
the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicles electrical system
can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings.
Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing

terminals in connectors. Select the proper size
tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert
the probing end (2) into the terminal being
tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert
the meter probe.
INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS

Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a
sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the
following items.
Connectors are fully seated
Spread terminals, or terminal push out
Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position
Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem
Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture
Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground
Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation
Wiring broken inside of the insulation
TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS

When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and
explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle
is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem.
1. Verify the problem.
2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same
circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams.
3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most
likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue.
4. Isolate the problem area.
5. Repair the problem area.
6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to
the wiring diagrams.
STANDARD PROCEDURE
STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE
DEVICES
All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a
symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any
component with this symbol, comply with the following
procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic
charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge
into the component. If it is not known whether the part
is ESD sensitive, assume that it is.
1. Always touch a known good ground before han-
dling the part. This should be repeated while han-
dling the part and more frequently after sliding
across a seat, sitting down from a standing posi-
tion, or walking a distance.
2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure.
3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first.
4. Do not remove the part from its protective packing until it is time to install the part.
5. Before removing the part from its package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle.
STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL

1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known
good ground.
2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the
selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need
to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the
appropriate test procedure.
STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY

1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked
or, disconnect the battery.
2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of
the circuit being tested
3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the cir-
cuit being tested. Low or no resistance means
good continuity.
STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse.
2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse.
3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test
lamp.
4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the
wiring harness.
STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES

POWERING SEVERAL LOADS
1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits.
2. Replace the blown fuse.
3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery.
4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the
short to ground has been isolated.
STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP

1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the
side of the circuit closest to the battery.
2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other
side of the switch, component or circuit.
3. Operate the item.
4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage
between the two points.
SPECIAL TOOLS
WIRING/TERMINAL
PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807
TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680
TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638
TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934

CONNECTOR
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect battery.
2. Release Connector Lock (2).
3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from
its mating half/component.
4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1).
5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1).

1 - TYPICAL CONNECTOR 7 - MOLEX CONNECTOR

2 - PICK FROM SPECIAL TOOL KIT 6680 8 - SPECIAL TOOL 6742
3 - APEX CONNECTOR 9 - THOMAS AND BETTS CONNECTOR
4 - PICK FROM SPECIAL TOOL KIT 6680 10 - SPECIAL TOOL 6934
5 - AUGAT CONNECTOR 11 - TYCO CONNECTOR
6 - SPECIAL TOOL 6932 12 - SPECIAL TOOL 8638
6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to
remove the terminal from the connector.
INSTALLATION
1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector.
2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities.
For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams.
3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to pre-
vent terminal push out.
4. Replace dress cover (if applicable).
5. Connect connector to its mating half/component.
6. Connect battery and test all affected systems.
DIODE
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery.
2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the
protective covering.
3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention
to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3).
INSTALLATION
1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode.
2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate
wiring diagram for current flow.
3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder.
4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements.
5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems.
TERMINAL
REMOVAL
1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section.
2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector.
INSTALLATION
1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired.
2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove onehalf (1/2) inch of insulation.
3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure) (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/WIRING DIA-
GRAM INFORMATION/WIRE - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector.
5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component.
6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 11/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair.
7. Connect battery and test all affected systems.
WIRE
STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING
When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams.
1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each
wire that needs to be spliced.
2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing
on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will
be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair
area.
3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other
inside of the splice clip (1).
4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA,

crimp the splice clip and wires together.
5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin

core type solder (1) only.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER.
6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and
heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tub-
ing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of
both ends of the tubing.
LX 8W-02 COMPONENT INDEX 8W - 02 - 1
8W-02 COMPONENT INDEX
Component Page Component Page

Actuator-Blend Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42 Lamps-Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51
Actuator-Mode Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42 Lamps-Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44
Actuator-Recirculation Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42 Lamps-Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50, 51
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43 Lamps-High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50
Amplifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47, 48 Lamps-High Intensity Discharge . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50
Antenna-Global Positioning System . . . . . . . 8W-55 Lamps-License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51
Antenna-Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47 Lamps-Low Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50
Assembly-Electrohydraulic Control Unit . . . . 8W-31 Lamps-Park/Turn Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50
Assembly-Exhaust Gas Recirculation Valve . . 8W-30 Lamps-Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50
Assembly-Natural Vacuum Leak Detection . . 8W-30 Lamps-Side Repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52
Assembly-Shifter Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31 Lamps-Spot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44
Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Lamps-Tail Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31 Lamps-Tail Stop/Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51
Assembly-Variable Line Pressure . . . . . . . . . 8W-31 Lamps-Tail Stop/Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51, 52
Backlite-Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47 Lamps-Tail Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52
Backlite-Electric Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-48 Lamps-Tail/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10 Lamps-Turn Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52
Booster-Active Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35 Lamps-Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44
Capacitors-Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30 Latches-Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-61
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10 Lighter-Cigar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41
Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40 Media System-Monitor/DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47
Clutch-A/C Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42 Mega Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10
Coils-Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-49, 55, 62
Connector-Interface-Police/Taxi . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40 Module-Antilock Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35
Connector-Police Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-11 Module-Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51
Control-A/C-Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42 Module-Clock-Analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40
Data Link Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18 Module-Electronic Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-49
Diodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10 Module-Electronic Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31
Display-Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56 Module-Engine Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Fan-Radiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30 Module-Front Blower Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42
Flasher-Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50 Module-Front Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13, 18
Fuse/Relay Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-11 Module-Fuel Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10, 11, 13 Module-Glow Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Fusible Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10, 13 Module-Hands Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-55
Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-20 Module-Headlamp Leveling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50
Glow Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30 Module-Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63
Grounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15 Module-Integrated Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13
Heater-Cabin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42 Module-Interface-Police/Taxi . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40
Heater-Crankcase Vent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30 Module-Intrusion Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39
Heaters-Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63 Module-Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56, 63
Horns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41 Module-Occupant Classification . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43
Injectors-Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30 Module-Occupant Restraint Controller . . . . . 8W-43
Lamp-Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44 Module-Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56
Lamp-Center High Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . 8W-51 Module-Powertrain Control . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30, 31
Lamp-Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44 Module-Sentry Key Remote Entry . . . . . . . . . 8W-39
Lamp-Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44 Module-Steering Column-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39
Lamp-PRNDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44 Module-Steering Control . 8W-33, 41, 43, 47, 50, 51,
Lamp-Reading-Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44 52, 53, 56, 65
Lamp-Underhood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44 Module-Traffic Information Receiver . . . . . . . 8W-55
8W - 02 - 2 8W-02 COMPONENT INDEX LX

Module-Transmission Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31 Sensor-Exhaust Differential Pressure . . . . . . 8W-30
Modules-Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-60, 62 Sensor-Exhaust Gas Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Motor-Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56 Sensor-Fuel Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Motor-Blower-Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42 Sensor-Fuel Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Motor-Boost Pressure Servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30 Sensor-Inlet Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Motor-Headlamp Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53 Sensor-Inlet Air Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Motor-Intake Swirl Servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30 Sensor-Intake Air Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Motor-Steering Telescope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56 Sensor-Knocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Motor-Steering Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56 Sensor-Manifold Absolute Pressure . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Motor/Module-Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-64 Sensor-Mass Air Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Motors-Seats Adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63 Sensor-Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Motors-Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-60 Sensor-Oil Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Motors-Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53 Sensor-Post-Catalyst Exhaust Gas
Post-Pass Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10 Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10 Sensor-Pre-Catalyst Exhaust Gas
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41 Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Pump-Washer-Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53 Sensor-Rain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47 Sensor-Seat Track Position-Driver . . . . . . . . . 8W-43
Receiver-Intrusion Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39 Sensor-Shift Lever Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31
Receiver-Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47 Sensor-Sun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42
Relay-A/C Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42 Sensor-Transmission Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31
Relay-Accessory Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10 Sensor-Washer Fluid Level-Front . . . . . . . . . 8W-53
Relay-Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56 Sensors Impact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43
Relay-Auto Shut Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30 Sensors Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31
Relay-Fuel Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30 Sensors-Headlamps Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50
Relay-Headlamp Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53 Sensors-Oxygen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Relay-High Intensity Discharge Lamp . . . . . 8W-50 Sensors-Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56
Relay-Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41 Sensors-Seat Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43
Relay-PTCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42 Sensors-Wheel Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35, 40
Relay-Park Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50, 51 Siren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39
Relay-Rear Window Defogger . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-48 Solenoid-Brake Transmission Shift
Relay-Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10 Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31
Relay-Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-21 Solenoid-Fuel Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Relay-Stop Lamp Inhibit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51 Solenoid-Fuel Quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Relay-Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31 Solenoid-Manifold Tuning Valve . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Relay-Transmission Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31 Solenoid-Multi Displacement System Cyls . . 8W-30
Relays-Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50, 51 Solenoid-Proportional Purge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Relays-Police . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-11 Solenoid-Short Runner Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Relays-Radiator Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30 Speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47
Relays-Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53 Splices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-70
Resistor Block-Blower Motor-Front . . . . . . . . 8W-42 Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-21
Seat Belt-Tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43 Switch-Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56
Sensor-Accelerator Pedal Position . . . . . . . . . 8W-30 Switch-Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31
Sensor-Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56 Switch-Bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35, 44, 52, 53
Sensor-Ambient Air Temperature . . . . . . . . . 8W-30 Switch-Decklid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-61
Sensor-Boost Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30 Switch-Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44, 50
Sensor-Brake Fluid Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40 Switch-Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41
Sensor-Brake Pedal Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35 Switch-Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10
Sensor-Brake Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35 Switch-Liftgate Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-61
Sensor-Camshaft Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30 Switch-Memory Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56, 63
Sensor-Crankshaft Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30 Switch-Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-62
Sensor-Dynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-65 Switch-Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Sensor-Engine Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . 8W-30 Switch-Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Sensor-Evaporator Temperature . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42 Switch-Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40
LX 8W-02 COMPONENT INDEX 8W - 02 - 3

Switch-Security Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39 Switches-Window/Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 8W-60, 61
Switch-Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51 Throttle Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Switch-Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-64 Transducer-A/C Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42
Switches-Heated Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63 Transmitter-Intrusion Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39
Switches-Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-60 Transponders-Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40
Switches-Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40 Valve-EGR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Switches-Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63 Valve-EGR Air Flow Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Switches-Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41, 47
LX 8W-10 POWER DISTRIBUTION 8W - 10 - 1
8W-10 POWER DISTRIBUTION

Amplifier-Antenna-Backlite . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-18, 22 Module-Door-Passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-11, 17
Amplifier-Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-9 Module-Electronic Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-8, 18
Amplifier-Subwoofer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-12 Module-Engine Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-12, 14
Backlite-Electric Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-22 Module-Front Blower Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-20
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-7, 8 Module-Front Control . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-8, 14, 15, 17, 20
Circuit Breaker No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-16 Module-Fuel Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-12
Circuit Breaker No. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-16 Module-Glow Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-7
Circuit Breaker No. 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-17 Module-Hands Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-9
Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-8, 12, 14, 16, 19 Module-Headlamp Leveling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-21
Control-A/C-Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-8, 13, 20, 22 Module-Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-11
Data Link Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-12 Module-Integrated Power . . 8W-10-7, 8, 10, 12, 14, 15, 17, 20
Diode-No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-13, 14 Module-Interface-Police/Taxi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-11
Diode-No. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-20 Module-Intrusion Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-8
Diode-Zener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-11 Module-Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-16
Flasher-Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-18 Module-Occupant Classification . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-12, 13
Fuse 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-7, 8 Module-Occupant Restraint Controller . . . . . . 8W-10-13, 20
Fuse 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-7, 10 Module-Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-20
Fuse 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-7, 10 Module-Powertrain Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-12, 14
Fuse 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-10 Module-Sentry Key Remote Entry . . . . . . . 8W-10-8, 14, 19
Fuse 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-11 Module-Steering Column-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-12, 19
Fuse 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-12 Module-Steering Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-11
Fuse 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-12 Module-Traffic Information Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-9
Fuse 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-12 Module-Transmission Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-14
Fuse 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-15 Motor-Blower-Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-20
Fuse 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-12, 15 Motor/Module-Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-9
Fuse 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-8 Post-Pass Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-7
Fuse 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-19 Power Distribution Center . 8W-10-2, 7, 8, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,
Fuse 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-19 15, 16, 17, 19, 20, 22
Fuse 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-19 Power Outlet-Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-15
Fuse 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-17 Power Outlet-Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-19
Fuse 19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-19 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-9
Fuse 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-19 Receiver-Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-9
Fuse 27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-13 Relay-Accessory Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-17
Fuse 28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-20 Relay-Fog Lamp-Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-15
Fuse 29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-13 Relay-Fuel Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-12, 13
Fuse 30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-11 Relay-PTC No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-7
Fuse 35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-17, 18 Relay-PTC No. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-7
Fuse 36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-8 Relay-PTC No. 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-7
Fuse 37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-14 Relay-Police-No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-18
Fuse 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-13 Relay-Rear Window Defogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-22
Fuse 41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-20 Relay-Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-20
Fuse 42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-20 Relay-Stop Lamp Inhibit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-19
Fuse 43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-22 Relay-Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-13, 14
Fuse 44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-8 Relay-Wiper-Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-19
Fuse/Relay Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-7, 8 Sensor-Headlamp Level-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-21
Fusible Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-7, 10 Sensor-Headlamp Level-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-20
G302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-11 Sensor-Mass Air Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-14
G303 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-7 Sensor-Rain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-18
Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-7 Siren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-8
Lamp-Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-8 Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-7
Lamp-Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-10 Switch-Bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-13
Lamp-Fog-Left Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-15 Switch-Heated Seat-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-13
Lamp-Fog-Right Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-15 Switch-Heated Seat-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-13
Lamp-High Intensity Discharge-Left . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-21 Switch-Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-12
Lamp-High Intensity Discharge-Right . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-21 Switch-Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-11, 18
Lamp-Spot-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-15 Switch-Seat-Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-16
Lamp-Spot-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-12 Switch-Seat-Passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-16
Lighter-Cigar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-17 Switch-Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-13, 19
Media System-Monitor/DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-9 Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-17
Mega Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-8 Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Express . . . . . . 8W-10-17
Mirror-Inside Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-13 Switch-Window/Door Lock-Passenger . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-17
Mirror-Outside Rearview-Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-22 Switch-Window/Door Lock-Passenger Express . . . . 8W-10-18
Mirror-Outside Rearview-Passenger . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-22 Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-21
Module-Antilock Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-14 Transponder-Tire Pressure-Right Front . . . . . . . . 8W-10-21
Module-Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-19 Transponder-Tire Pressure-Right Rear . . . . . . . . 8W-10-20
Module-Clock-Analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-8
Module-Door-Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-11, 17
LX 8W-11 FUSE/RELAY BLOCK 8W - 11 - 1
8W-11 FUSE/RELAY BLOCK

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-11-4, 8 Mega Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-11-8
Connector-Police Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-11-9 Module-Glow Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-11-4
Fuse 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-11-5, 9 Module-Integrated Power . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-11-4, 8
Fuse 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-11-5, 9 Post-Pass Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-11-4, 8
Fuse 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-11-5, 9 Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-11-4, 8
Fuse 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-11-9 Relay-Accessory Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-11-8
Fuse 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-11-9 Relay-PTC No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-11-5
Fuse 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-11-9 Relay-PTC No. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-11-5
Fuse 35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-11-8 Relay-PTC No. 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-11-5
Fuse/Relay Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-11-2, 5, 6, 8, 9 Relay-Police-No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-11-8, 9
Fusible Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-11-4, 8 Relay-Police-No. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-11-8, 9
G301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-11-9 Relay-Police-No. 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-11-8, 9
Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-11-4, 8 Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-11-4, 8
Heater-Cabin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-11-5
LX 8W-13 INTEGRATED POWER MODULE 8W - 13 - 1
8W-13 INTEGRATED POWER MODULE

Assembly-Shifter Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-29, 34 Lamp-Park/Turn-Right Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-14, 36
Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch . . . 8W-13-28 Lamp-Side Marker-Left Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-14
Assembly-Variable Line Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-28 Lamp-Side Marker-Left Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-16
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-11 Lamp-Side Marker-Right Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-14
Capacitor-Ignition-No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-20, 23 Lamp-Side Marker-Right Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-16
Capacitor-Ignition-No. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-19, 20, 22, 23 Lamp-Side Repeater-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-36
Clutch-A/C Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-13 Lamp-Side Repeater-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-36
Coil-Ignition-No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-18, 21 Lamp-Tail Park-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-16
Coil-Ignition-No. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-18, 19, 21 Lamp-Tail Park-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-16
Coil-Ignition-No. 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-18, 21 Lamp-Tail Stop/Park-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-16, 35
Coil-Ignition-No. 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-18, 19, 21 Lamp-Tail Stop/Park-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-16, 35
Coil-Ignition-No. 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-18, 21 Lamp-Tail Stop/Turn-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-16, 30
Coil-Ignition-No. 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-19, 22 Lamp-Tail Stop/Turn-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-16, 30
Coil-Ignition-No. 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-20, 23 Lamp-Tail Turn-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-30
Coil-Ignition-No. 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-20, 23 Lamp-Tail Turn-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-30
Data Link Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-32 Lamp-Tail/Stop-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-15, 35
Diode-No. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-37 Lamp-Tail/Stop-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-15, 35
Fan-Radiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-27, 28 Lamp-Turn-Left Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-30
Fuse 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-12 Lamp-Turn-Right Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-30
Fuse 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-12 Lamp-Underhood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-13
Fuse 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-12 Mega Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-11
Fuse 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-13 Mirror-Inside Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-29
Fuse 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-13 Module-Antilock Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-26, 28
Fuse 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-13 Module-Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-34
Fuse 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-14 Module-Electronic Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-29, 34
Fuse 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-14 Module-Engine Control . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-17, 24, 25, 27, 28
Fuse 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-17 Module-Front Control . 8W-13-2, 3, 12, 13, 14, 17, 24, 26, 27, 28,
Fuse 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-27, 37 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 36, 37
Fuse 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-17 Module-Glow Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-11, 25
Fuse 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-17 Module-Integrated Power . 8W-13-2, 3, 11, 12, 13, 14, 17, 24, 25,
Fuse 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-17 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 37
Fuse 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-17 Module-Powertrain Control . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-17, 27, 28, 29
Fuse 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-26 Motor-Boost Pressure Servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-25
Fuse 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-26 Motor-Intake Swirl Servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-25
Fuse 19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-27 Motor-Wiper-Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-26, 31
Fuse 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-27 Motor-Wiper-Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-33
Fuse 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-28 Post-Pass Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-11
Fuse 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-28 Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-11, 37
Fuse 23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-12 Pump-Washer-Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-31
Fuse 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-28 Relay-A/C Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-13, 28
Fuse 25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-17 Relay-Accessory Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-37
Fuse 26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-28 Relay-Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-12
Fuse 27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-17 Relay-Auto Shut Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-17
Fuse 29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-37 Relay-Fog Lamp-Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-14
Fuse 44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-37 Relay-Fog Lamp-Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-37
Fuse/Relay Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-11, 24 Relay-Fuel Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-25
Fusible Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-11, 17 Relay-Headlamp Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-13, 31
G100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-34 Relay-High Intensity Discharge Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-12
G101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-12, 26 Relay-Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-13
G102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-12, 28 Relay-PTC No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-24
Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-11 Relay-PTC No. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-24
Heater-Crankcase Vent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-25 Relay-PTC No. 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-24
Horn-No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-13 Relay-Park Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-14
Horn-No. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-13 Relay-Radiator Fan Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-28
Injector-Fuel-No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-18, 19, 22 Relay-Radiator Fan High . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-27
Injector-Fuel-No. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-19, 22 Relay-Radiator Fan High/Low Control . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-27
Injector-Fuel-No. 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-18, 19, 22 Relay-Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-37
Injector-Fuel-No. 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-19, 22 Relay-Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-27
Injector-Fuel-No. 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-18, 20, 23 Relay-Stop Lamp Inhibit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-34
Injector-Fuel-No. 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-19, 20, 23 Relay-Transmission Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-28
Injector-Fuel-No. 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-20, 23 Relay-Wiper High/Low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-26
Injector-Fuel-No. 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-20, 23 Relay-Wiper On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-26
Lamp-Backup-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-29 Relay-Wiper-Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-31
Lamp-Backup-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-29 Sensor-Ambient Air Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-34
Lamp-Center High Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-35 Sensor-Brake Fluid Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-33
Lamp-Fog-Left Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-14 Sensor-Oxygen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-25
Lamp-Fog-Right Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-14 Sensor-Washer Fluid Level-Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-33
Lamp-High Beam-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-36 Sensor-Wheel Speed-Right Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-33
Lamp-High Beam-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-36 Solenoid-Short Runner Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-20, 23
Lamp-High Intensity Discharge-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-12 Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-11, 27
Lamp-High Intensity Discharge-Right . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-12 Switch-Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-12
Lamp-License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-15 Switch-Bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-33
Lamp-License-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-15 Switch-Security Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-34
Lamp-License-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-15 Switch-Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-34
Lamp-Low Beam-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-36 Transducer-A/C Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-31, 33
Lamp-Low Beam-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-12 Valve-Egr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-25
Lamp-Park/Turn-Left Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-14, 36
LX 8W-15 GROUND DISTRIBUTION 8W - 15 - 1
8W-15 GROUND DISTRIBUTION

Amplifier-Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-16 Latch-Door-Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-26
Amplifier-Subwoofer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-17 Latch-Door-Passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-24
Assembly-Exhaust Gas Recirculation Valve . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-7, 8 Latch-Door-Right Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-22
Assembly-Natural Vacuum Leak Detection . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-25 Lighter-Cigar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-15
Assembly-Shifter Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-17, 22, 23 Media System-Monitor/DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-13
Backlite-Electric Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-17, 23, 26 Mirror-Inside Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-13
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-26 Mirror-Outside Rearview-Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-20
Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-15 Mirror-Outside Rearview-Passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-24
Clutch-A/C Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-7, 8, 11 Module-Antilock Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-4
Control-A/C-Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-12, 15 Module-Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-25
Data Link Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-16 Module-Clock-Analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-12
Diode-Zener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-25 Module-Door-Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-20
Fan-Radiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-5, 6 Module-Door-Passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-24
Flasher-Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-3 Module-Electronic Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-14
G100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-2, 3 Module-Electronic Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-16
G101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-4, 5 Module-Engine Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-10
G102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-6, 7, 8, 10 Module-Front Blower Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-15
G103 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-11 Module-Front Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-2
G104 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-11 Module-Fuel Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-17, 23
G105 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-11 Module-Glow Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-11
G106 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-11 Module-Hands Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-12
G107 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-11 Module-Headlamp Leveling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-5
G108 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-11 Module-Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-18, 22
G109 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-11 Module-Integrated Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-4, 6
G110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-11 Module-Interface-Police/Taxi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-16
G111 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-11 Module-Intrusion Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-16
G200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-12, 13 Module-Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-19
G201 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-15 Module-Occupant Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-22
G202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-15, 16 Module-Occupant Restraint Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-13
G300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-17, 18, 19, 20, 21 Module-Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-25
G301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-19, 21, 22, 23, 24 Module-Powertrain Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-6, 7
G302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30 Module-Sentry Key Remote Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-15
G303 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-26 Module-Steering Column-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-16
G304 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-18, 22 Module-Steering Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-15
Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-7, 8 Module-Traffic Information Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-13
Heater-Seat Back-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-19 Module-Transmission Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-16, 17
Heater-Seat Back-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-21 Motor-Boost Pressure Servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-10
Heater-Seat Cushion-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-19 Motor-Headlamp Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-6
Heater-Seat Cushion-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-21 Motor-Intake Swirl Servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-10
Lamp-Backup-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-27, 30 Motor-Wiper-Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-3, 8
Lamp-Backup-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-28, 30 Motor-Wiper-Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-26
Lamp-Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-26 Motor/Module-Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-14
Lamp-Center High Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-18, 22 Power Outlet-Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-17, 23
Lamp-Courtesy-Left Front Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-20 Power Outlet-Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-26
Lamp-Courtesy-Left Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-14 Pump-Washer-Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-6
Lamp-Courtesy-Right Front Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-24 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-13
Lamp-Courtesy-Right Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-14 Receiver-Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-13
Lamp-Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-14 Relay-High Intensity Discharge Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-6
Lamp-Fog-Left Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-3 Relay-Police-No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-24
Lamp-Fog-Left Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-27, 30 Relay-Police-No. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-24
Lamp-Fog-Right Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-5 Relay-Police-No. 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-24
Lamp-Fog-Right Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-28, 30 Relay-Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-25
Lamp-Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-12 Relay-Transmission Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-6
Lamp-High Beam-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-2 Relay-Wiper-Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-25
Lamp-High Beam-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-4 Sensor-Brake Fluid Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-2, 8
Lamp-High Intensity Discharge-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-2 Sensor-Headlamp Level-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-5
Lamp-High Intensity Discharge-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-4 Sensor-Headlamp Level-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-26
Lamp-License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-29, 30 Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-11
Lamp-License-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-29, 30 Sensor-Oxygen-Left Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-2, 8
Lamp-License-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-29, 30 Sensor-Oxygen-Right Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-11
Lamp-Low Beam-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-3 Sensor-Oxygen-Right Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-2, 8
Lamp-Low Beam-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-4 Sensor-Rain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-13
Lamp-PRNDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-17, 23 Sensor-Washer Fluid Level-Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-4
Lamp-Park/Turn-Left Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-2 Siren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-10
Lamp-Park/Turn-Right Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-5 Solenoid-Manifold Tuning Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-7, 8
Lamp-Reading-Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-14 Solenoid-Multi Displacement System Cyl 1 . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-9
Lamp-Side Marker-Left Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-3 Solenoid-Multi Displacement System Cyl 4 . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-9
Lamp-Side Marker-Left Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-27 Solenoid-Multi Displacement System Cyl 6 . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-9
Lamp-Side Marker-Right Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-5 Solenoid-Multi Displacement System Cyl 7 . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-9
Lamp-Side Marker-Right Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-28 Switch-Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-19
Lamp-Side Repeater-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-3 Switch-Bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-12
Lamp-Side Repeater-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-6 Switch-Decklid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-16
Lamp-Tail Park-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-27 Switch-Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-15
Lamp-Tail Park-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-28 Switch-Heated Seat-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-12
Lamp-Tail Stop/Park-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-27 Switch-Heated Seat-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-12
Lamp-Tail Stop/Park-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-28 Switch-Liftgate Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-26
Lamp-Tail Stop/Turn-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-27 Switch-Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-20
Lamp-Tail Stop/Turn-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-28 Switch-Seat Belt-Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-19, 21
Lamp-Tail Turn-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-27 Switch-Seat Belt-Passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-24
Lamp-Tail Turn-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-28 Switch-Seat-Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-19
Lamp-Tail/Stop-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-30 Switch-Seat-Passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-19, 21
Lamp-Tail/Stop-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-30 Switch-Security Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-6
Lamp-Turn-Left Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-30 Switch-Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-17, 23
Lamp-Turn-Right Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-30 Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-20
Lamp-Underhood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-10 Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Express . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-20
Lamp-Vanity-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-14 Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-3
Lamp-Vanity-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-14 Transponder-Tire Pressure-Right Front . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-5
Latch-Door-Decklid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-18, 22 Transponder-Tire Pressure-Right Rear . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-18, 22
Latch-Door-Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-20 Valve-EGR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-10
Latch-Door-Left Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-19
LX 8W-18 BUS COMMUNICATIONS 8W - 18 - 1
8W-18 BUS COMMUNICATIONS

Amplifier-Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-4, 6 Module-Interface-Police/Taxi . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-5
Assembly-Shifter Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-10 Module-Intrusion Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-5
Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-6 Module-Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-7
Control-A/C-Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-4, 5 Module-Occupant Classification . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-7
Data Link Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-2 Module-Occupant Restraint Controller . . 8W-18-5, 6
Fuse 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-2 Module-Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-7
G202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-2 Module-Powertrain Control . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-2, 9
Media System-Monitor/DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-3 Module-Sentry Key Remote Entry . . . . . . . 8W-18-6
Module-Antilock Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-9 Module-Steering Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-6, 10
Module-Door-Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-7 Module-Traffic Information Receiver . . . . . 8W-18-6
Module-Door-Passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-7 Module-Transmission Control . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-9
Module-Electronic Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-8 Motor/Module-Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-8
Module-Electronic Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-10 Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-2
Module-Engine Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-2, 9 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-5, 6
Module-Front Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-2, 3, 9 Receiver-Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-3
Module-Hands Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-4, 5, 6 Sensor-Dynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-9
Module-Headlamp Leveling . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-3 Sensor-Rain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-4, 5
Module-Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-7
LX 8W-20 CHARGING SYSTEM 8W - 20 - 1
8W-20 CHARGING SYSTEM

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-20-2, 3 Module-Engine Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-20-3
Fuse/Relay Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-20-2 Module-Glow Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-20-3
Fusible Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-20-2, 3 Module-Powertrain Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-20-2
G102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-20-2 Post-Pass Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-20-2, 3
G303 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-20-2, 3 Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-20-2, 3
Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-20-2, 3 Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-20-2, 3
Mega Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-20-2
LX 8W-21 STARTING SYSTEM 8W - 21 - 1
8W-21 STARTING SYSTEM

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-21-2 Module-Glow Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-21-2
Fuse 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-21-2 Module-Integrated Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-21-2
Fuse 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-21-2 Module-Powertrain Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-21-2
Fusible Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-21-2 Post-Pass Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-21-2
G303 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-21-2 Relay-Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-21-2
Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-21-2 Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-21-2
Module-Engine Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-21-2
LX 8W-30 FUEL/IGNITION SYSTEM 8W - 30 - 1
8W-30 FUEL/IGNITION SYSTEM

Assembly-Exhaust Gas Recirculation Valve . . . . 8W-30-14 Motor-Boost Pressure Servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-23
Assembly-Natural Vacuum Leak Detection . . . . 8W-30-15 Motor-Intake Swirl Servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-23
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-22 Post-Pass Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-22
Capacitor-Ignition-No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-4, 7, 9 Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-2, 18, 21, 22
Capacitor-Ignition-No. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-4, 7 Relay-A/C Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-16
Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-18 Relay-Auto Shut Down . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-3, 5, 6, 8, 19
Coil-Ignition-No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-3, 5, 6, 8 Relay-Fuel Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-2, 19, 21
Coil-Ignition-No. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-3, 5, 6, 9 Relay-PTC No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-20
Coil-Ignition-No. 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-3, 5, 6, 8 Relay-Radiator Fan Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-16
Coil-Ignition-No. 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-4, 7, 9 Relay-Radiator Fan High . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-16
Coil-Ignition-No. 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-4, 7, 9 Relay-Radiator Fan High/Low Control . . . . . . . 8W-30-16
Coil-Ignition-No. 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-4, 7, 9 Relay-Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-2, 19
Data Link Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-17 Sensor-Accelerator Pedal Position . . . . . . . . 8W-30-14, 29
Fan-Radiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-16 Sensor-Ambient Air Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-17
Fuse 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-2, 21 Sensor-Boost Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-27
Fuse 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-2, 19 Sensor-Camshaft Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-10, 25
Fuse 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-3, 5, 6, 8, 19 Sensor-Crankshaft Position . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-10, 25
Fuse 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-3, 5, 6, 8, 19 Sensor-Engine Coolant Temperature . . . . . . 8W-30-12, 28
Fuse 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-3, 5, 6, 8, 16, 19 Sensor-Exhaust Differential Pressure . . . . . . . . 8W-30-28
Fuse 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-19 Sensor-Exhaust Gas Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-28
Fuse 19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-16 Sensor-Fuel Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-27
Fuse 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-16 Sensor-Fuel Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-27
Fuse 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-16 Sensor-Inlet Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-26
Fuse 29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-2, 21 Sensor-Inlet Air Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-12
Fuse/Relay Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-20 Sensor-Intake Air Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-26
Fusible Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-22 Sensor-Knock No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-12
G100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-11 Sensor-Knock No. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-12
G101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-16 Sensor-Manifold Absolute Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-10
G102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-11, 13, 14, 16, 17, 19, 23 Sensor-Mass Air Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-21, 26
G109 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-11 Sensor-Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-13, 25
G111 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-22 Sensor-Oil Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-13, 25
G300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-15, 18 Sensor-Oxygen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-20, 23
G301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-15, 18 Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-11
G302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-15 Sensor-Oxygen-Left Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-11
Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-14, 22 Sensor-Oxygen-Right Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-11
Glow Plug No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-22 Sensor-Oxygen-Right Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-11
Glow Plug No. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-22 Sensor-Post-Catalyst Exhaust Gas Temperature . 8W-30-28
Glow Plug No. 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-22 Sensor-Pre-Catalyst Exhaust Gas Temperature . 8W-30-28
Glow Plug No. 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-22 Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Right Front . . . . . . . . 8W-30-17
Glow Plug No. 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-22 Sensor-Wheel Speed-Right Front . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-17
Glow Plug No. 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-22 Solenoid-Fuel Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-27
Heater-Crankcase Vent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-23 Solenoid-Fuel Quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-27
Injector-Fuel-No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-4, 7, 8, 24 Solenoid-Manifold Tuning Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-14
Injector-Fuel-No. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-4, 7, 9, 24 Solenoid-Multi Displacement System Cyl 1 . . . . 8W-30-13
Injector-Fuel-No. 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-4, 7, 9, 24 Solenoid-Proportional Purge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-15
Injector-Fuel-No. 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-4, 7, 9 Solenoid-Short Runner Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-4, 7
Injector-Fuel-No. 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-4, 7, 9 Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-22
Module-Antilock Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-15, 17 Switch-Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-21
Module-Engine Control . . 8W-30-16, 17, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, Switch-Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-25
24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 Switch-Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-12
Module-Front Control . . . 8W-30-2, 3, 5, 6, 8, 16, 17, 19, 20 Switch-Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-2, 15
Module-Fuel Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-2, 18, 21 Throttle Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-10
Module-Glow Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-22, 23 Valve-EGR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-23
Module-Integrated Power . . . 8W-30-2, 3, 5, 6, 8, 16, 19, 20 Valve-EGR Air Flow Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-26
Module-Powertrain Control . 8W-30-2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10,
11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17
LX 8W-31 TRANSMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM 8W - 31 - 1
8W-31 TRANSMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

Assembly-Electrohydraulic Control Unit . . 8W-31-8 Module-Integrated Power . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-2, 3, 6
Assembly-Shifter Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-4, 6 Module-Powertrain Control . . . . . . 8W-31-2, 3, 4, 5
Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Module-Transmission Control . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-6, 8
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-2, 5 Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-6
Assembly-Variable Line Pressure . . . . . . 8W-31-2, 3 Relay-Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-3
Fuse 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-3 Relay-Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-6
Fuse 26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-2 Relay-Transmission Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-2
Fuse 37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-6 Sensor-Input Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-4
G102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-2 Sensor-Output Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-4
G202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-6, 7 Sensor-Shift Lever Position . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-7
G300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-6 Sensor-Transmission Range . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-3
G301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-4, 6 Solenoid-Brake Transmission Shift
G302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-6 Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-7
Module-Electronic Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-6, 7 Switch-Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-7
Module-Front Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-3, 4, 6
LX 8W-33 VEHICLE SPEED CONTROL 8W - 33 - 1
8W-33 VEHICLE SPEED CONTROL

Assembly-Shifter Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-33-3 Module-Front Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-33-3
Fuse 29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-33-4 Module-Steering Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-33-2, 3
Fuse 30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-33-2 Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-33-2, 4
G101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-33-4 Sensor-Wheel Speed-Abs-Right Front . . . . . 8W-33-4
G202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-33-2 Sensor-Wheel Speed-Right Front . . . . . . . . 8W-33-3
Module-Antilock Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-33-3, 4 Switch-Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-33-3
Module-Electronic Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-33-3 Throttle Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-33-3
LX 8W-35 ANTILOCK BRAKES 8W - 35 - 1
8W-35 ANTILOCK BRAKES

Booster-Active Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-5 Module-Integrated Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-2
Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-2 Module-Powertrain Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-5
Fuse 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-2 Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-2, 3, 5
Fuse 19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-5 Relay-Stop Lamp Inhibit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-5
Fuse 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-2 Sensor-Brake Pedal Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-4
Fuse 29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-2, 3 Sensor-Brake Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-4
G101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-2 Sensor-Dynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-4
G200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-2 Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front . . . . . 8W-35-4
G300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-3 Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Rear . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-3
G301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-3 Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Right Front . . . . 8W-35-4
Module-Antilock Brakes . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-2, 3, 4, 5 Switch-Bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-2
Module-Engine Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-5 Switch-Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-3
Module-Front Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-5
LX 8W-39 VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY SYSTEM 8W - 39 - 1
8W-39 VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY SYSTEM

Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-2, 3, 4, 5 Latch-Door-Right Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-3
Fuse 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-7 Module-Front Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-2, 3
Fuse 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-2 Module-Intrusion Transceiver . . . . . . . 8W-39-2, 7, 8
Fuse 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-2 Module-Sentry Key Remote Entry . . . . . . . 8W-39-2
Fuse 29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-2 Module-Steering Column-Lock . . . . . . . . 8W-39-2, 7
G102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-3, 7 Receiver-Intrusion Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-8
G202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-2, 4, 7, 8 Siren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-7, 8
G300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-4 Switch-Decklid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-4
G301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-4 Switch-Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-7
G302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-5 Switch-Liftgate Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-5
G304 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-4 Switch-Security Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-3
Lamp-Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-4 Transmitter-Intrusion Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-8
Latch-Door-Decklid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-4 Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front . . . . 8W-39-6
Latch-Door-Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-3 Transponder-Tire Pressure-Right Front . . . 8W-39-6
Latch-Door-Left Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-3 Transponder-Tire Pressure-Right Rear . . . . 8W-39-6
Latch-Door-Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-5
Latch-Door-Passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-3
LX 8W-40 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 8W - 40 - 1
8W-40 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

Circuit Breaker No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-2 Module-Antilock Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-10
Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 Module-Clock-Analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-8, 9
Connector-Interface-Police/Taxi . . . . . . . . 8W-40-14 Module-Front Control . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-2, 10, 13
Control-A/C-Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-4, 8, 9 Module-Fuel Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-6
Fuse 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-2 Module-Interface-Police/Taxi . . . . . . . . 8W-40-13, 14
Fuse 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-2 Module-Sentry Key Remote Entry . . . . . . 8W-40-11
Fuse 29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-2 Power Distribution Center . . . . . 8W-40-2, 9, 11, 13
Fuse 30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-13 Sensor-Ambient Air Temperature . . . . . . . 8W-40-10
Fuse 38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-9 Sensor-Brake Fluid Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-10
Fuse 41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-11 Sensor-Wheel Speed-Abs-Right Front . . . . 8W-40-10
G100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-10, 12 Sensor-Wheel Speed-Right Front . . . . . . . 8W-40-10
G101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-12 Switch-Bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-3, 8, 9
G102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-10 Switch-Decklid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-8
G200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-9 Switch-Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-3, 8, 9
G202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-2, 13 Switch-Heated Seat-Left . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-4, 8, 9
G300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-5, 6, 11 Switch-Heated Seat-Right . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-4, 8, 9
G301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-3, 5, 11 Switch-Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-4
Lamp-Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-7 Switch-Liftgate Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-8
Lamp-Courtesy-Left Front Door . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-7 Switch-Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-6
Lamp-Courtesy-Left Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-7 Switch-Seat Belt-Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-6
Lamp-Courtesy-Right Front Door . . . . . . . . 8W-40-7 Switch-Seat Belt-Passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-3
Lamp-Courtesy-Right Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-7 Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver . . . . . . . . 8W-40-6
Lamp-Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-7 Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Express . 8W-40-6
Lamp-Prndl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-8, 9 Switch-Window/Door Lock-Passenger . . . 8W-40-6, 7
Lamp-Reading-Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-7 Switch-Window/Door Lock-Passenger
Lamp-Vanity-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-7 Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-6, 7
Lamp-Vanity-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-7 Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left
Latch-Door-Decklid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-8 Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-11, 12
Latch-Door-Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-5 Transponder-Tire Pressure-Right
Latch-Door-Left Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-5 Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-11, 12
Latch-Door-Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-8 Transponder-Tire Pressure-Right
Latch-Door-Passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-5 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-11
Latch-Door-Right Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-5
LX 8W-41 HORN/CIGAR LIGHTER/POWER OUTLET 8W - 41 - 1
8W-41 HORN/CIGAR LIGHTER/POWER OUTLET

Fuse 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41-4 Lighter-Cigar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41-2
Fuse 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41-2 Module-Steering Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41-3
G202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41-2, 3 Power Outlet-Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41-2
G300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41-2 Power Outlet-Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41-2
G301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41-2 Relay-Accessory Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41-2
G302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41-2 Relay-Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41-4
Horn-No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41-4 Switch-Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41-3
Horn-No. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41-4 Switch-Steering-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41-3
LX 8W-42 AIR CONDITIONING/HEATER 8W - 42 - 1
8W-42 AIR CONDITIONING/HEATER

Actuator-Blend Door-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-4, 9 G200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-3, 8
Actuator-Blend Door-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-9 G201 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-3, 10
Actuator-Mode Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-5, 9 Heater-Cabin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-11
Actuator-Recirculation Door . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-4, 9 Module-Engine Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-2, 11
Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-5, 7, 8 Module-Front Blower Power . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-10
Clutch-A/C Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-2 Module-Front Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-2, 7, 11
Control-A/C-Heater . . . . 8W-42-3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 Module-Integrated Power . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-2, 11
Fuse 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-11 Motor-Blower-Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-6, 10
Fuse 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-11 Power Distribution Center . . . . . . 8W-42-3, 4, 7, 10
Fuse 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-2 Relay-A/C Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-2
Fuse 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-3, 7 Relay-PTC No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-11
Fuse 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-2 Relay-PTC No. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-11
Fuse 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-2 Relay-PTC No. 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-11
Fuse 26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-2 Relay-Rear Window Defogger . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-3, 7
Fuse 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-3 Relay-Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-3, 4, 7, 10
Fuse 41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-3, 7 Resistor Block-Blower Motor-Front . . . . . . 8W-42-6
Fuse 42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-4, 10 Sensor-Evaporator Temperature . . . . . . 8W-42-4, 10
Fuse/Relay Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-11 Sensor-Sun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-8
G102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-2 Transducer-A/C Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-2
G110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-2
LX 8W-43 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEM 8W - 43 - 1
8W-43 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEM

Airbag-Driver Squib 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-3 Module-Steering Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-3, 4
Airbag-Driver Squib 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-3 Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-2, 3, 6
Airbag-Passenger Squib . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-5 Seat Belt-Tensioner-Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-5
Airbag-Side Curtain-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-7 Seat Belt-Tensioner-Passenger . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-5
Airbag-Side Curtain-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-7 Sensor-Front Impact-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-5
Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-2 Sensor-Front Impact-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-5
Fuse 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-6 Sensor-Seat Track Position-Driver . . . . . 8W-43-3, 6
Fuse 27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-2, 6 Sensor-Seat Weight-Left Front . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-6
Fuse 28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-2 Sensor-Seat Weight-Left Rear . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-6
Fuse 30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-3 Sensor-Seat Weight-Right Front . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-6
Fuse 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-2 Sensor-Seat Weight-Right Rear . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-6
G200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-2 Sensor-Side Impact-Left 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-7
G202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-3 Sensor-Side Impact-Left 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-7
G301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-6 Sensor-Side Impact-Right 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-7
Module-Front Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-4 Sensor-Side Impact-Right 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-7
Module-Occupant Classification . . . . . . . 8W-43-4, 6 Switch-Bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-2
Module-Occupant Restraint
Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-2, 3, 4, 5, 7
LX 8W-44 INTERIOR LIGHTING 8W - 44 - 1
8W-44 INTERIOR LIGHTING

Circuit Breaker No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-2 Lamp-Courtesy-Right Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-3
Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 Lamp-Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-10
Control-A/C-Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-6, 8, 9 Lamp-Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-3
Fuse 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-10 Lamp-PRNDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-8, 9
Fuse 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-10 Lamp-Reading-Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-4
Fuse 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-10 Lamp-Spot-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-10
Fuse 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-10 Lamp-Spot-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-10
Fuse 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-2 Lamp-Underhood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-10
Fuse 29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-2 Lamp-Vanity-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-4
Fuse 38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-6 Lamp-Vanity-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-4
Fuse 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-6 Module-Clock-Analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-8, 9
G102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-10 Module-Front Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-2
G200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-3, 4, 8, 10 Module-Integrated Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-10
G202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-2, 8 Module-Occupant Restraint Controller . . . . 8W-44-6
G300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-5, 8, 9 Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . 8W-44-2, 6, 10
G301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-5, 8, 9 Switch-Bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-6, 8
G302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-5 Switch-Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-7, 8
Lamp-Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-5, 6 Switch-Heated Seat-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-8
Lamp-Courtesy-Left Front Door . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-5 Switch-Heated Seat-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-8
Lamp-Courtesy-Left Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-3
Lamp-Courtesy-Right Front Door . . . . . . . . 8W-44-5
LX 8W-47 AUDIO SYSTEM 8W - 47 - 1
8W-47 AUDIO SYSTEM

Amplifier-Antenna-Backlite . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-3 Module-Steering Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-15
Amplifier-Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-6, 7, 8, 9 Module-Traffic Information Receiver . . . . . 8W-47-3
Amplifier-Subwoofer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-9 Power Distribution
Antenna-Global Positioning System . . . . . . 8W-47-3 Center . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-2, 3, 6, 9, 10, 12, 14, 15
Antenna-Satellite No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-10 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 11, 12, 14
Antenna-Satellite No. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-10 Receiver-Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-10, 11
Backlite-Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-3 Relay-Accessory Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-3
Fuse 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-2, 6, 10, 12, 14 Speaker-Instrument Panel-Center . . . . . . . 8W-47-8
Fuse 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-9 Speaker-Instrument Panel-Left . . . . . . . 8W-47-5, 8
Fuse 30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-15 Speaker-Instrument Panel-Right . . . . . . 8W-47-5, 8
Fuse 35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-3 Speaker-Left Front Door . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-4, 5, 7
Fuse 36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-2, 10, 12, 14 Speaker-Left Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-4, 5, 7
Fuse 44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-6 Speaker-Right Front Door . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-4, 5, 7
G200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-2, 10, 12, 14 Speaker-Right Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-4, 5, 7
G202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-6, 15 Speaker-Subwoofer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-8, 9
G300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-9 Switch-Steering-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-15
Media System-Monitor/DVD . . . . . . . . 8W-47-12, 13 Switch-Steering-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-15
Module-Front Control . . . . . . 8W-47-2, 6, 11, 13, 15
Module-Hands Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-14
LX 8W-48 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER 8W - 48 - 1
8W-48 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER

Amplifier-Antenna-Backlite . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-48-2 G301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-48-2
Backlite-Electric Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-48-2 G302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-48-2
Control-A/C-Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-48-2 Mirror-Outside Rearview-Driver . . . . . . . . . 8W-48-2
Fuse 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-48-2 Mirror-Outside Rearview-Passenger . . . . . . 8W-48-2
Fuse 43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-48-2 Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-48-2
G300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-48-2 Relay-Rear Window Defogger . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-48-2
LX 8W-49 OVERHEAD CONSOLE 8W - 49 - 1
8W-49 OVERHEAD CONSOLE

Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-49-2, 5 Mirror-Inside Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-49-3
Fuse 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-49-2 Mirror-Outside Rearview-Driver . . . . . . . . . 8W-49-3
Fuse 35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-49-4 Module-Electronic Overhead . . . . . . . . . . 8W-49-4, 5
G200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-49-2, 3, 4 Motor/Module-Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-49-6
G202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-49-2 Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . 8W-49-2, 3, 4
Lamp-Reading-Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-49-2 Switch-Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-49-6
LX 8W-50 FRONT LIGHTING 8W - 50 - 1
8W-50 FRONT LIGHTING

Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-2, 3 Lamp-Low Beam-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-6
Flasher-Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-10, 11 Lamp-Park/Turn-Left Front . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-4, 5
Fuse 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-6 Lamp-Park/Turn-Right Front . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-4, 5
Fuse 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-6 Lamp-Side Marker-Left Front . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-4
Fuse 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-9 Lamp-Side Marker-Right Front . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-4
Fuse 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-4 Lamp-Side Repeater-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-5
Fuse 23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-6 Lamp-Side Repeater-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-5
Fuse 35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-10 Module-Front Control . . . . . . 8W-50-2, 4, 5, 6, 9, 10
Fuse 41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-7 Module-Headlamp Leveling . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-2, 7
G100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-4, 5, 6, 9, 10 Module-Integrated Power . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-4, 6, 9
G101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 Module-Steering Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-2
G102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-5, 6 Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-7, 10
G202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-3 Relay-Accessory Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-10
G302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-8 Relay-Fog Lamp-Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-9
Lamp-Fog-Left Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-9 Relay-High Intensity Discharge Lamp . . . . 8W-50-6
Lamp-Fog-Right Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-9 Relay-Park Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-4
Lamp-High Beam-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-5, 10 Sensor-Headlamp Level-Left . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-7, 8
Lamp-High Beam-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-5, 10 Sensor-Headlamp Level-Right . . . . . . . . 8W-50-7, 8
Lamp-High Intensity Discharge-Left . . . 8W-50-6, 7 Switch-Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-3
Lamp-High Intensity Discharge-Right . . 8W-50-6, 7
Lamp-Low Beam-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-6
LX 8W-51 REAR LIGHTING 8W - 51 - 1
8W-51 REAR LIGHTING

Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-2, 3 Lamp-Tail Park-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-8
Fuse 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-6 Lamp-Tail Stop/Park-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-5, 7
Fuse 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-11 Lamp-Tail Stop/Park-Right . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-5, 8
Fuse 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-4 Lamp-Tail Stop/Turn-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-7
Fuse 19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-4 Lamp-Tail Stop/Turn-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-8
Fuse 29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-4 Lamp-Tail/Stop-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-5, 6, 10
G202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-3 Lamp-Tail/Stop-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-5, 6, 10
G300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-4, 5, 7 Lamp-Turn-Left Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-10
G301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-4, 5, 7 Lamp-Turn-Right Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-10
G302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 Module-Antilock Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-4
Lamp-Backup-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-9, 10 Module-Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-4
Lamp-Backup-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-9, 10 Module-Front Control . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-2, 6, 9, 11
Lamp-Center High Mounted Stop . . . . . . 8W-51-5, 7 Module-Integrated Power . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-6, 9, 11
Lamp-Fog-Left Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-11 Module-Powertrain Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-4
Lamp-Fog-Right Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-11 Module-Steering Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-2
Lamp-License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-6 Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-4, 11
Lamp-License-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-6 Relay-Fog Lamp-Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-11
Lamp-License-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-6 Relay-Park Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-6
Lamp-Side Marker-Left Rear . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-7 Relay-Stop Lamp Inhibit . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-4, 7
Lamp-Side Marker-Right Rear . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-8 Switch-Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-3
Lamp-Tail Park-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-7 Switch-Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-4
LX 8W-52 TURN SIGNALS 8W - 52 - 1
8W-52 TURN SIGNALS

Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-2 Lamp-Tail Stop/Turn-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-4
G100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-3 Lamp-Tail Stop/Turn-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-4
G101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-3 Lamp-Tail Turn-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-4
G102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-3 Lamp-Tail Turn-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-4
G200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-2 Lamp-Tail/Stop-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-5
G302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-4, 5 Lamp-Tail/Stop-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-5
Lamp-Backup-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-5 Lamp-Turn-Left Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-5
Lamp-Backup-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-5 Lamp-Turn-Right Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-5
Lamp-Park/Turn-Left Front . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-3 Module-Front Control . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-2, 3, 4, 5
Lamp-Park/Turn-Right Front . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-3 Module-Integrated Power . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-4, 5
Lamp-Side Repeater-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-3 Module-Steering Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-2
Lamp-Side Repeater-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-3 Switch-Bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-2
LX 8W-53 WIPERS 8W - 53 - 1
8W-53 WIPERS

Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-5 Module-Integrated Power . . . . . . . . 8W-53-2, 4, 6, 7
Fuse 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-7 Module-Steering Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-3
Fuse 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-5 Motor-Headlamp Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-7
Fuse 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-2 Motor-Wiper-Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-2
Fuse 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-6 Motor-Wiper-Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-6
Fuse 30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-3 Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . 8W-53-3, 4, 5, 6
Fuse 35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-4 Pump-Washer-Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-4
Fuse 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-5 Relay-Headlamp Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-7
G100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-2 Relay-Wiper High/Low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-2
G101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-2, 4 Relay-Wiper On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-2
G102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-2, 4, 7 Relay-Wiper-Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-6
G200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-4 Sensor-Rain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-4
G202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-3, 5 Sensor-Washer Fluid Level-Front . . . . . . . . 8W-53-4
G302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-6 Switch-Bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-5
Module-Front Control . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-2, 4, 6, 7
LX 8W-55 NAVIGATION/TELECOMMUNICATIONS 8W - 55 - 1
8W-55 NAVIGATION/TELECOMMUNICATIONS

Amplifier-Antenna-Backlite . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-55-3 Mirror-Inside Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-55-5
Antenna-Global Positioning System . . . . . . 8W-55-2 Module-Front Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-55-3, 4
Backlite-Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-55-3 Module-Hands Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-55-4, 5
Fuse 36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-55-2, 3, 4 Module-Traffic Information Receiver . . . . . 8W-55-3
Fuse 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-55-5 Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . 8W-55-2, 3, 4, 5
G200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-55-2, 3, 4, 5 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-55-2, 3, 4
LX 8W-56 CONVENIENCE SYSTEMS 8W - 56 - 1
8W-56 CONVENIENCE SYSTEMS

Circuit Breaker No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56-3 Motor-Steering Telescope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56-5
Display-Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56-6 Motor-Steering Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56-5
Fuse 41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56-6 Relay-Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56-2
G300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56-2, 3 Relay-Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56-6
G302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56-6 Sensor-Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56-5
Module-Door-Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56-3 Sensor-Park Assist-No. 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56-7, 8
Module-Front Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56-2, 4, 6 Sensor-Park Assist-No. 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56-7, 8
Module-Integrated Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56-2 Sensor-Park Assist-No. 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56-7, 8
Module-Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56-3, 5 Sensor-Park Assist-No. 10 . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56-7, 8
Module-Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56-6, 7, 8 Switch-Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56-2, 3
Module-Steering Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56-4 Switch-Memory Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56-3
Motor-Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56-2, 3
LX 8W-60 POWER WINDOWS 8W - 60 - 1
8W-60 POWER WINDOWS

Circuit Breaker No. 3 . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-60-2, 4, 5, 6 Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . 8W-60-2, 4, 5, 6
G300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-60-2, 4, 5 Relay-Accessory Delay . . . . . . . . . . 8W-60-2, 4, 5, 6
Module-Door-Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-60-4, 5 Switch-Power Window-Left Rear . . . . . . 8W-60-2, 4
Module-Door-Passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-60-6 Switch-Power Window-Right Rear . . . . . 8W-60-2, 4
Module-Front Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-60-5 Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver . . . . . . 8W-60-2, 3
Motor-Window-Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-60-3 Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver
Motor-Window-Driver Express . . . . . . . . . . 8W-60-5 Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-60-4, 5
Motor-Window-Left Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-60-2, 4 Switch-Window/Door Lock-Passenger . . . . . 8W-60-3
Motor-Window-Passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-60-3 Switch-Window/Door Lock-Passenger
Motor-Window-Passenger Express . . . . . . . 8W-60-6 Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-60-6
Motor-Window-Right Rear . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-60-2, 4
LX 8W-61 POWER DOOR LOCKS 8W - 61 - 1
8W-61 POWER DOOR LOCKS

Circuit Breaker No. 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-61-2 Latch-Door-Passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-61-5
Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-61-3, 4, 5, 6, 7 Latch-Door-Right Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-61-5
G202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-61-6 Relay-Accessory Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-61-2
G300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-61-3, 4, 5, 6 Switch-Decklid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-61-6
G301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-61-5, 6 Switch-Liftgate Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-61-7
G302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-61-7 Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver . . . . . . 8W-61-2, 3
G304 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-61-6 Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver
Latch-Door-Decklid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-61-6 Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-61-2, 4
Latch-Door-Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-61-5 Switch-Window/Door Lock-Passenger . . . 8W-61-2, 3
Latch-Door-Left Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-61-5 Switch-Window/Door Lock-Passenger
Latch-Door-Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-61-7 Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-61-2, 4
LX 8W-62 POWER MIRRORS 8W - 62 - 1
8W-62 POWER MIRRORS

Circuit Breaker No. 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-62-2 Mirror-Outside Rearview-Passenger . . 8W-62-3, 5, 6
Control-A/C-Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-62-2 Module-Door-Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-62-2, 4, 5
Fuse 30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-62-2 Module-Door-Passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-62-2, 6
Fuse 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-62-2, 3, 5, 6 Relay-Accessory Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-62-2
G300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-62-2, 3, 4, 5 Relay-Rear Window Defogger . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-62-2
G301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-62-3, 6 Switch-Memory Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-62-4
Mirror-Inside Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-62-5 Switch-Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-62-2, 3, 4, 5
Mirror-Outside Rearview-Driver . . . . . . . 8W-62-3, 5
LX 8W-63 POWER SEATS 8W - 63 - 1
8W-63 POWER SEATS

Circuit Breaker No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-2, 8 Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Recliner . . . 8W-63-2, 9
Circuit Breaker No. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-3 Motor-Seat Adjuster-Front Driver
Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-7 Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-2, 9
Fuse 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-4 Motor-Seat Adjuster-Front Passenger
Fuse 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-7 Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-3
G200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-7 Motor-Seat Adjuster-Passenger Horizontal . 8W-63-3
G300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-2, 4, 5, 6, 8 Motor-Seat Adjuster-Passenger Recliner . . . 8W-63-3
G301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-3, 4, 5, 6 Motor-Seat Adjuster-Rear
Heater-Seat Back-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-5 Driver Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-2, 9
Heater-Seat Back-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-6 Motor-Seat Adjuster-Rear Passenger
Heater-Seat Cushion-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-5 Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-3
Heater-Seat Cushion-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-6 Power Distribution Center . . . . . 8W-63-2, 3, 4, 7, 8
Module-Door-Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-8 Switch-Heated Seat-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-7
Module-Front Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-4 Switch-Heated Seat-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-7
Module-Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-4 Switch-Memory Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-8
Module-Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-4, 8, 9 Switch-Seat-Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-2, 8
Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal . . 8W-63-2, 9 Switch-Seat-Passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-3
LX 8W-64 POWER SUNROOF 8W - 64 - 1
8W-64 POWER SUNROOF

Fuse 44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-64-2 Motor/Module-Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-64-2
G200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-64-2 Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-64-2
Module-Front Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-64-2 Switch-Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-64-2
LX 8W-65 SPEED PROPORTIONAL STEERING 8W - 65 - 1
8W-65 SPEED PROPORTIONAL STEERING

Assembly-Shifter Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-65-2 Module-Powertrain Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-65-3
Fuse 30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-65-2 Module-Steering Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-65-2, 4
G202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-65-2 Module-Transmission Control . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-65-3
Module-Antilock Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-65-3 Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-65-2
Module-Electronic Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-65-2 Sensor-Dynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-65-3
Module-Front Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-65-3, 4
LX 8W-70 SPLICE INFORMATION 8W - 70 - 1
8W-70 SPLICE INFORMATION

S100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-7 S228 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-8
S101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-5 S229 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-2
S102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-3 S230 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-11
S103 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-14 S231 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-19
S104 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-14 S232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-11
S105 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-70-2 S233 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-11
S106 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-70-3 S234 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-11
S107 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-18, 22 S235 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-11
S108 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-19, 23 S236 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-11
S109 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-20, 21 S237 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-11
S110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-70-4 S300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-18
S111 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-70-4 S301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-4
S112 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-11 S302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-7
S113 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-4 S303 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-29
S114 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-28 S304 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-12
S115 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-8 S305 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-15
S116 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-7 S306 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-7
S117 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-7 S307 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-5
S118 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-15 S308 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-60-2, 4
S119 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-15 S309 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-34
S120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-14 S310 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-5
S121 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-70-3 S311 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-16
S122 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-9 S312 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-15
S123 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-7 S313 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-13
S124 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-9 S314 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-13
S125 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-11 S315 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-11
S126 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-14 S316 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-22
S127 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-14 S317 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-17
S128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-13 S318 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-7
S129 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-28 S319 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-7
S130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-13 S320 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-13
S131 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-21 S321 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-20
S132 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-3 S322 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-8
S133 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-3 S323 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-17
S134 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-36 S326 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-20
S135 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-36 S327 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56-5
S136 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-9 S328 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-8
S138 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-7 S329 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-22
S139 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-6 S330 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-5
S140 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-21 S331 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-11
S141 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-6 S332 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-5
S142 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-7 S333 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-19
S143 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-17, 24 S334 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-21
S144 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-29 S335 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-6
S145 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-22 S336 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-6
S146 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-25 S337 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-6
S148 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-10 S338 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-8
S149 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-10 S339 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-8
S150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-7 S340 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-7
S151 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-7 S341 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-7
S152 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-7 S342 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-14
S155 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-12 S343 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-13
S156 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-25 S344 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-15
S157 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-11 S345 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-29, 30
S158 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-11 S346 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56-7
S159 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-11 S347 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56-8
S160 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-11 S348 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-10
S161 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-11 S349 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-29
S162 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-11 S350 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-28
S163 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-11 S351 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-16
S164 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-11 S352 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-27
S165 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-11 S353 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-16
S200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-8 S354 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-26
S201 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-16 S355 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-20
S202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-8 S356 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-17
S203 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-9 S357 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-60-4
S204 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-6 S358 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-62-3
S205 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-6 S359 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-11
S206 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-10 S360 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-24
S207 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-10 S361 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-60-4
S208 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-8 S362 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-4
S209 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-14 S363 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-15
S210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-20 S370 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-9
S211 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-2 S371 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-13
S212 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-7 S372 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-3
S213 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-9 S373 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-3
S214 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-18 S374 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-8
S215 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-12 S375 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-31
S216 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-6 S376 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-31
S217 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-13 S377 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-62-5
S218 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-4, 5 S378 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-62-5
S219 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-4, 5 S379 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-35
S220 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-9 S380 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-8
S221 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-5 S381 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-19
S222 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-5 S382 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-6
S223 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-5 S383 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-21
S224 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-5 S384 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-35
S225 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56-5 S385 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-5
S226 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56-5 S386 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-11
S227 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-7
LX 8W-80 CONNECTOR PIN-OUTS 8W - 80 - 1
8W-80 CONNECTOR PIN-OUTS

Actuator-Blend Door-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-7 C101 (5.7L MDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-18
Actuator-Blend Door-Right (ATC) . . . . . . . . 8W-80-7 C102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-18
Actuator-Mode Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-7 C102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-19
Actuator-Recirculation Door . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-7 C103 (LX48) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-19
Airbag-Driver Squib 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-8 C103 (LX48) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-20
Airbag-Driver Squib 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-8 C104 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-20
Airbag-Passenger Squib . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-8 C104 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-21
Airbag-Side Curtain-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-8 C105 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-21
Airbag-Side Curtain-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-9 C105 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-22
Amplifier-Antenna-Backlite C1 . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-9 C107 (SRT8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-22
Amplifier-Antenna-Backlite C2 . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-9 C107 (SRT8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-22
Amplifier-Antenna-Backlite C3 . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-9 C108 (Diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-23
Amplifier-Antenna-Backlite C4 . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-10 C108 (Diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-23
Amplifier-Radio C1 (Midline II/Highline) . 8W-80-10 C200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-23
Amplifier-Radio C2 (Midline II/Highline) . 8W-80-10 C200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-24
Amplifier-Subwoofer (SRT8 Except C201 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-24
Export) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-11 C201 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-25
Antenna Cable-Satellite Radio No. 1 . . . . 8W-80-11 C202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-26
Antenna Cable-Satellite Radio No. 2 . . . . 8W-80-11 C202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-26
Antenna-Global Positioning System C203 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-27
(Navigation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-11 C203 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-28
Antenna-Satellite No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-12 C204 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-29
Antenna-Satellite No. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-12 C204 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-29
Assembly-Electrohydraulic Control Unit C205 (Except Base) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-30
(NAG1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-12 C205 (Except Base) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-30
Assembly-Exhaust Gas Recirculation Valve C206 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-31
(Gas Except SRT8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-12 C206 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-31
Assembly-Natural Vacuum Leak Detection (Gas C207 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-31
Except Export Except SRT8/Police) . . . 8W-80-13 C207 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-31
Assembly-Natural Vacuum Leak Detection C208 (Column NAG1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-31
(Police/SRT8 Except Export) . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-13 C208 (Column NAG1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-32
Assembly-Shifter Lever (Console NAG1) . 8W-80-13 C300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-32
Assembly-Shifter Lever (RLE) . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-13 C300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-33
Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure C301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-33
Switch (RLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-13 C301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-34
Assembly-Variable Line Pressure (RLE) . . 8W-80-14 C302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-35
Backlite-Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-14 C302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-35
Backlite-Electric Heated (Ground) . . . . . . 8W-80-14 C303 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-35
Backlite-Electric Heated (Power) . . . . . . . 8W-80-14 C303 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-36
Battery-Negative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-14 C304 (LX49) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-36
Battery-Positive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-15 C304 (LX49) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-36
Booster-Active Brake (MK25) . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-15 C305 (LX49) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-36
C100 (2.7L/3.5L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-15 C305 (LX49) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-37
C100 (2.7L/3.5L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-16 C306 (LX48 Base) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-37
C100 (5.7L/SRT8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-16 C306 (LX48 Base) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-37
C100 (5.7L/SRT8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-17 C306 (LX48 Except Base/LX49 Except
C100 (Diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-17 Export) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-37
C100 (Diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-17 C306 (LX48 Except Base/LX49 Except
C101 (5.7L MDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-18 Export) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-38
8W - 80 - 2 8W-80 CONNECTOR PIN-OUTS LX

C306 (LX49 Export) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-38 Coil-Ignition-No. 3 (2.7L/3.5L Early
C306 (LX49 Export) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-39 Build) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-52
C307 (LX48) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-39 Coil-Ignition-No. 3 (5.7L Late Build/
C307 (LX48) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-39 SRT8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-53
C308 (LX48) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-40 Coil-Ignition-No. 4 (2.7L/3.5L Early
C308 (LX48) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-40 Build) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-53
C309 (LX49) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-40 Coil-Ignition-No. 4 (5.7L Late Build/
C309 (LX49) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-40 SRT8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-53
C310 (LX49) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-41 Coil-Ignition-No. 4 (3.5L Late Build) . . . . 8W-80-53
C310 (LX49) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-41 Coil-Ignition-No. 4 (5.7L Early Build) . . . . 8W-80-54
C311 (Sunroof) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-41 Coil-Ignition-No. 5 (5.7L Early Build) . . . . 8W-80-54
C311 (Sunroof) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-42 Coil-Ignition-No. 5 (3.5L Late Build) . . . . 8W-80-54
C313 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-42 Coil-Ignition-No. 5 (2.7L/3.5L Early
C313 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-42 Build) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-54
C314 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-43 Coil-Ignition-No. 5 (5.7L Late Build/
C314 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-43 SRT8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-54
C315 (Base) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-43 Coil-Ignition-No. 6 (2.7L/3.5L Early
C315 (Base) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-43 Build) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-55
C315 (Midline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-44 Coil-Ignition-No. 6 (5.7L Late Build/
C315 (Midline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-44 SRT8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-55
C315 (Premium) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-44 Coil-Ignition-No. 6 (3.5L Late Build) . . . . 8W-80-55
C315 (Premium) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-45 Coil-Ignition-No. 6 (5.7L Early Build) . . . . 8W-80-55
C316 (LHD Heated Seat/RHD Power Coil-Ignition-No. 7 (5.7L Early Build) . . . . 8W-80-56
Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-45 Coil-Ignition-No. 7 (5.7L Late Build/
C316 (LHD Heated Seat/RHD Power SRT8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-56
Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-45 Coil-Ignition-No. 8 (5.7L Late Build/
C316 (RHD Power/Heated Seat) . . . . . . . . 8W-80-45 SRT8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-56
C316 (RHD Power/Heated Seat) . . . . . . . . 8W-80-46 Coil-Ignition-No. 8 (5.7L Early Build) . . . . 8W-80-56
C317 (Satellite Radio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-46 Connector-Interface-Police/Taxi . . . . . . . . 8W-80-57
C317 (Satellite Radio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-46 Connector-Police Accessories (Police) . . . . 8W-80-57
C318 (Police) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-47 Control-A/C-Heater C1 (ATC) . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-58
C318 (Police) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-47 Control-A/C-Heater C1 (MTC) . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-58
Capacitor-Ignition-No. 1 (2.7L/3.5L) . . . . . 8W-80-47 Control-A/C-Heater C2 (ATC) . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-59
Capacitor-Ignition-No. 1 (SRT8) . . . . . . . . 8W-80-47 Control-A/C-Heater C2 (MTC) . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-59
Capacitor-Ignition-No. 2 (2.7L/5.7L) . . . . . 8W-80-48 Control-A/C-Heater C3 (MTC) . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-59
Cluster C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-48 Data Link Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-60
Cluster C2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-49 Display-Park Assist (Parktronics) . . . . . . . 8W-80-60
Cluster C3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-49 Fan-Radiator C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-60
Clutch-A/C Compressor (Gas) . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-50 Fan-Radiator C2 (AWD/Diesel/SRT8
Clutch-A/C Compressor (Diesel) . . . . . . . . 8W-80-50 Export) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-61
Coil-Ignition-No. 1 (5.7L Early Build) . . . . 8W-80-50 Fan-Radiator C2 (SRT8 Except Export) . . 8W-80-61
Coil-Ignition-No. 1 (3.5L Late Build) . . . . 8W-80-50 Flasher-Headlamp C1 (Police) . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-61
Coil-Ignition-No. 1 (2.7L/3.5L Early Flasher-Headlamp C2 (Police) . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-61
Build) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-51 Generator (Diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-62
Coil-Ignition-No. 1 (5.7L Late Build/ Generator (Gas) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-62
SRT8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-51 Generator-Eyelet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-62
Coil-Ignition-No. 2 (2.7L/3.5L Early Glow Plug No. 1 (Diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-62
Build) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-51 Glow Plug No. 2 (Diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-62
Coil-Ignition-No. 2 (5.7L Late Build/ Glow Plug No. 3 (Diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-63
SRT8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-51 Glow Plug No. 4 (Diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-63
Coil-Ignition-No. 2 (3.5L Late Build) . . . . 8W-80-52 Glow Plug No. 5 (Diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-63
Coil-Ignition-No. 2 (5.7L Early Build) . . . . 8W-80-52 Glow Plug No. 6 (Diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-63
Coil-Ignition-No. 3 (5.7L Early Build) . . . . 8W-80-52 Heater-Cabin (Diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-63
Coil-Ignition-No. 3 (3.5L Late Build) . . . . 8W-80-52 Heater-Crankcase Vent (Diesel) . . . . . . . . 8W-80-64

Heater-Seat Back-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-64 Lamp-License (Except 300C/Export) . . . . . 8W-80-75
Heater-Seat Back-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-64 Lamp-License-Left (300C/Export) . . . . . . . 8W-80-75
Heater-Seat Cushion-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-64 Lamp-License-Right (300C/Export) . . . . . . 8W-80-76
Heater-Seat Cushion-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-65 Lamp-Low Beam-Left (Except HID
Horn-No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-65 Lamps) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-76
Horn-No. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-65 Lamp-Low Beam-Right (Except HID
Injector-Fuel-No. 1 (Gas) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-65 Lamps) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-76
Injector-Fuel-No. 1 (Diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-66 Lamp-Park/Turn-Left Front (300C Except
Injector-Fuel-No. 2 (Diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-66 Export) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-76
Injector-Fuel-No. 2 (Gas) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-66 Lamp-Park/Turn-Left Front (300T/
Injector-Fuel-No. 3 (Gas) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-66 Export) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-77
Injector-Fuel-No. 3 (Diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-66 Lamp-Park/Turn-Left Front (LX49 Except
Injector-Fuel-No. 4 (Gas) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-67 Lamp-Park/Turn-Right Front (300C Except
Injector-Fuel-No. 5 (Gas) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-67 Export) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-77
Injector-Fuel-No. 5 (Diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-67 Lamp-Park/Turn-Right Front (300T/
Injector-Fuel-No. 6 (Gas) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-68 Lamp-Park/Turn-Right Front (LX49 Except
Injector-Fuel-No. 7 (5.7L/SRT8) . . . . . . . . 8W-80-68 Export) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-78
Injector-Fuel-No. 8 (5.7L/SRT8) . . . . . . . . 8W-80-68 Lamp-PRNDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-78
Lamp-Backup-Left (300C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-68 Lamp-Reading-Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-79
Lamp-Backup-Left (300T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-69 Lamp-Side Marker-Left Front (LX48) . . . . 8W-80-79
Lamp-Backup-Left (LX49) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-69 Lamp-Side Marker-Left Rear (300T) . . . . 8W-80-79
Lamp-Backup-Right (300C) . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-69 Lamp-Side Marker-Right Front (LX48) . . 8W-80-79
Lamp-Backup-Right (300T) . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-69 Lamp-Side Marker-Right Rear (300T) . . . 8W-80-80
Lamp-Backup-Right (LX49) . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-70 Lamp-Side Repeater-Left (Export) . . . . . . 8W-80-80
Lamp-Cargo (LX48 Chrysler) . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-70 Lamp-Side Repeater-Right (Export) . . . . . 8W-80-80
Lamp-Cargo (LX48 Dodge) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-70 Lamp-Spot-Left (Police) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-80
Lamp-Cargo (LX49) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-70 Lamp-Spot-Right (Police) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-81
Lamp-Center High Mounted Stop (LX48 Lamp-Tail Park-Left (300C Except
Chrysler) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-70 Export) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-81
Lamp-Center High Mounted Stop (LX48 Lamp-Tail Park-Right (300C Except
Dodge) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-71 Export) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-81
Lamp-Center High Mounted Stop (LX49) . 8W-80-71 Lamp-Tail Stop/Park-Left (300C) . . . . . . . 8W-80-81
Lamp-Courtesy-Left Front Door (Except Lamp-Tail Stop/Park-Right (300C) . . . . . . 8W-80-82
Base) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-71 Lamp-Tail Stop/Turn-Left (300T) . . . . . . . 8W-80-82
Lamp-Courtesy-Left Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-71 Lamp-Tail Stop/Turn-Right (300T) . . . . . . 8W-80-82
Lamp-Courtesy-Right Front Door (Except Lamp-Tail Turn-Left (300C Except
Base) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-72 Export) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-82
Lamp-Courtesy-Right Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-72 Lamp-Tail Turn-Left (300C Export) . . . . . 8W-80-83
Lamp-Dome (Police) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-72 Lamp-Tail Turn-Right (300C Except
Lamp-Fog-Left Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-72 Export) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-83
Lamp-Fog-Left Rear (300C Export) . . . . . 8W-80-72 Lamp-Tail Turn-Right (300C Export) . . . . 8W-80-83
Lamp-Fog-Left Rear (LX49 Export) . . . . . 8W-80-73 Lamp-Tail/Stop-Left (LX49) . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-83
Lamp-Fog-Right Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-73 Lamp-Tail/Stop-Right (LX49) . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-84
Lamp-Fog-Right Rear (300C Export) . . . . 8W-80-73 Lamp-Turn-Left Rear (LX49) . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-84
Lamp-Fog-Right Rear (LX49 Export) . . . . 8W-80-73 Lamp-Turn-Right Rear (LX49) . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-84
Lamp-Glove Box (Except Police) . . . . . . . . 8W-80-74 Lamp-Underhood (Police) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-84
Lamp-High Beam-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-74 Lamp-Vanity-Left (Except Police) . . . . . . . 8W-80-85
Lamp-High Beam-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-74 Lamp-Vanity-Right (Except Police) . . . . . . 8W-80-85
Lamp-High Intensity Discharge-Left (HID Latch-Door-Decklid (LX48) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-85
Lamps) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-74 Latch-Door-Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-85
Lamp-High Intensity Discharge-Right (HID Latch-Door-Left Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-86
Lamps) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-75 Latch-Door-Liftgate (LX49) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-86

Latch-Door-Passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-86 Module-Memory Seat C5 (Adjustable
Latch-Door-Right Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-87 Pedals) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-107
Lighter-Cigar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-87 Module-Occupant Classification C1 (Except
Media System-Monitor/DVD . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-87 Export) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-107
Mirror-Inside Rearview C1 (Except Base) . 8W-80-88 Module-Occupant Classification C2 (Except
Mirror-Inside Rearview C2 (Hands Free) . 8W-80-88 Export) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-108
Mirror-Outside Rearview-Driver (Except Module-Occupant Restraint Controller
Memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-88 C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-108
Mirror-Outside Rearview-Driver Module-Occupant Restraint Controller
(Memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-89 C2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-109
Mirror-Outside Rearview-Passenger (Except Module-Park Assist (Parktronics) . . . . . . 8W-80-109
Memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-89 Module-Powertrain Control C1 . . . . . . . . 8W-80-110
Mirror-Outside Rearview-Passenger Module-Powertrain Control C2 . . . . . . . . 8W-80-111
(Memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-89 Module-Powertrain Control C3 . . . . . . . . 8W-80-112
Module-Antilock Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-90 Module-Powertrain Control C4 (RLE) . . . 8W-80-113
Module-Brake (Trailer Tow) . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-91 Module-Sentry Key Remote Entry . . . . . 8W-80-114
Module-Clock-Analog (Except Police) . . . . 8W-80-91 Module-Steering Column-Lock (RHD) . . . 8W-80-114
Module-Door-Driver C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-91 Module-Steering Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-114
Module-Door-Driver C2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-91 Module-Traffic Information Receiver C1
Module-Door-Driver C3 (Memory) . . . . . . 8W-80-92 (Export) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-115
Module-Door-Driver C4 (Memory) . . . . . . 8W-80-92 Module-Traffic Information Receiver C2
Module-Door-Passenger C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-93 (Export) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-115
Module-Door-Passenger C2 . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-93 Module-Traffic Information Receiver C3
Module-Door-Passenger C4 (Memory) . . . . 8W-80-93 (Export) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-115
Module-Electronic Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-94 Module-Transmission Control C1
Module-Electronic Shift C1 (Column (NAG1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-115
NAG1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-94 Module-Transmission Control C2
Module-Electronic Shift C2 (Column (NAG1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-116
NAG1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-94 Motor-Adjustable Pedals (LHD) . . . . . . . 8W-80-116
Module-Engine Control C1 (Diesel) . . . . . 8W-80-95 Motor-Blower-Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-116
Module-Engine Control C2 (Diesel) . . . . . 8W-80-97 Motor-Boost Pressure Servo (Diesel) . . . . 8W-80-116
Module-Front Blower Power C1 (ATC) . . . 8W-80-98 Motor-Headlamp Washer (HID Lamps) . . 8W-80-117
Module-Front Blower Power C2 (ATC) . . . 8W-80-98 Motor-Intake Swirl Servo (Diesel) . . . . . . 8W-80-117
Module-Front Control C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-98 Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal . . 8W-80-117
Module-Front Control C2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-99 Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Recliner (Except
Module-Front Control IPM . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-99 Memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-117
Module-Fuel Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-100 Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Recliner
Module-Glow Plug (Diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-100 (Memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-118
Module-Glow Plug-Eyelet (Diesel) . . . . . . 8W-80-101 Motor-Seat Adjuster-Front Driver
Module-Hands Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-101 Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-118
Module-Headlamp Leveling (Export) . . . 8W-80-101 Motor-Seat Adjuster-Front Passenger
Module-Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-102 Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-118
Module-Integrated Power C1 . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-102 Motor-Seat Adjuster-Passenger
Module-Integrated Power C2 . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-103 Horizontal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-118
Module-Integrated Power C3 . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-103 Motor-Seat Adjuster-Passenger Recliner
Module-Integrated Power C4 . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-103 (RHD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-119
Module-Integrated Power C5 . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-104 Motor-Seat Adjuster-Rear Driver
Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-119
Module-Interface-Police/Taxi C1 . . . . . . . 8W-80-105
Motor-Seat Adjuster-Rear Passenger
Module-Interface-Police/Taxi C2 . . . . . . . 8W-80-105
Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-119
Module-Intrusion Transceiver (RHD) . . . 8W-80-106
Motor-Steering Telescope (LHD
Module-Memory Seat C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-106
Memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-119
Motor-Steering Tilt (LHD Memory) . . . . 8W-80-120
Motor-Window-Driver (Base) . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-120

Motor-Window-Driver Express (Except Sensor-Inlet Air Pressure (Diesel) . . . . . . 8W-80-132
Base) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-120 Sensor-Inlet Air Temperature (Gas) . . . . 8W-80-133
Motor-Window-Left Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-120 Sensor-Input Speed (RLE) . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-133
Motor-Window-Passenger (Base) . . . . . . . 8W-80-121 Sensor-Intake Air Temperature (Diesel) . 8W-80-133
Motor-Window-Passenger Express (Except Sensor-Knock No. 1 (Gas) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-133
Base) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-121 Sensor-Knock No. 2 (5.7L/SRT8) . . . . . . . 8W-80-134
Motor-Window-Right Rear . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-121 Sensor-Manifold Absolute Pressure
Motor-Wiper-Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-121 (Gas) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-134
Motor-Wiper-Rear (LX49) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-122 Sensor-Mass Air Flow (Diesel) . . . . . . . . 8W-80-134
Motor/Module-Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-122 Sensor-Oil Pressure (Diesel) . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-134
Post-Pass Through-Eyelet . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-122 Sensor-Oil Pressure (5.7L/SRT8) . . . . . . 8W-80-135
Post-Pass Through-Eyelet . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-122 Sensor-Oil Temperature (5.7L/SRT8) . . . 8W-80-135
Power Outlet-Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-123 Sensor-Oil Temperature (Diesel) . . . . . . . 8W-80-135
Power Outlet-Rear (LX49) . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-123 Sensor-Output Speed (RLE) . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-135
Pump-Washer-Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-123 Sensor-Oxygen (Diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-135
Radio C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-124 Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front (Gas) . . . . . . . 8W-80-136
Radio C2 (Satellite Radio) . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-124 Sensor-Oxygen-Left Rear (Gas) . . . . . . . . 8W-80-136
Radio-Antenna (Navigation) . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-125 Sensor-Oxygen-Right Front (Gas) . . . . . . 8W-80-136
Radio-Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-125 Sensor-Oxygen-Right Rear (Gas) . . . . . . 8W-80-136
Receiver-Intrusion Sensor (RHD) . . . . . . 8W-80-125 Sensor-Park Assist-No. 10 (Parktronics) . 8W-80-137
Receiver-Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-125 Sensor-Park Assist-No. 7 (Parktronics) . . 8W-80-137
Relay-Headlamp Washer (HID Lamps) . . 8W-80-126 Sensor-Park Assist-No. 8 (Parktronics) . . 8W-80-137
Resistor Block-Blower Motor-Front Sensor-Park Assist-No. 9 (Parktronics) . . 8W-80-137
(MTC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-126 Sensor-Post-Catalyst Exhaust Gas Temperature
Seat Belt-Tensioner-Driver . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-126 (Diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-138
Seat Belt-Tensioner-Passenger . . . . . . . . 8W-80-126 Sensor-Pre-Catalyst Exhaust Gas Temperature
Sensor-Accelerator Pedal Position . . . . . . 8W-80-127 (Diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-138
Sensor-Adjustable Pedals (LHD Sensor-Rain (Auto Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-138
Memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-127 Sensor-Seat Track Position-Driver . . . . . 8W-80-138
Sensor-Ambient Air Temperature . . . . . . 8W-80-127 Sensor-Seat Weight-Left Front (Except
Sensor-Boost Pressure (Diesel) . . . . . . . . 8W-80-127 Export) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-138
Sensor-Brake Fluid Level . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-128 Sensor-Seat Weight-Left Rear (Except
Sensor-Brake Pedal Travel (MK25) . . . . . 8W-80-128 Export) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-139
Sensor-Brake Pressure (MK25) . . . . . . . . 8W-80-128 Sensor-Seat Weight-Right Front (Except
Sensor-Camshaft Position (2.7L/3.5L) . . . 8W-80-128 Export) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-139
Sensor-Camshaft Position (5.7L/SRT8) . . 8W-80-129 Sensor-Seat Weight-Right Rear (Except
Sensor-Camshaft Position (Diesel) . . . . . 8W-80-129 Export) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-139
Sensor-Crankshaft Position (Diesel) . . . . 8W-80-129 Sensor-Shift Lever Position (Column
Sensor-Crankshaft Position (Gas) . . . . . . 8W-80-129 NAG1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-139
Sensor-Dynamics (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-129 Sensor-Side Impact-Left 1 . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-140
Sensor-Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor-Side Impact-Left 2 . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-140
(Gas) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-130 Sensor-Side Impact-Right 1 . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-140
Sensor-Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor-Side Impact-Right 2 . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-140
(Diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-130 Sensor-Sun (ATC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-141
Sensor-Evaporator Temperature . . . . . . . 8W-80-130 Sensor-Transmission Range (RLE) . . . . . 8W-80-141
Sensor-Exhaust Differential Pressure Sensor-Washer Fluid Level-Front . . . . . . 8W-80-141
(Diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-130 Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front . . . 8W-80-141
Sensor-Exhaust Gas Pressure (Diesel) . . 8W-80-131 Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Rear . . . . . . . . 8W-80-142
Sensor-Front Impact-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-131 Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Right Front . . 8W-80-142
Sensor-Front Impact-Right . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-131 Sensor-Wheel Speed-Right Front (Except
Sensor-Fuel Pressure (Diesel) . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-131 ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-142
Sensor-Fuel Temperature (Diesel) . . . . . . 8W-80-132 Siren (RHD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-143
Sensor-Headlamp Level-Left (Export) . . . 8W-80-132 Solenoid-Fuel Pressure (Diesel) . . . . . . . 8W-80-143
Sensor-Headlamp Level-Right (Export) . 8W-80-132 Solenoid-Fuel Quantity (Diesel) . . . . . . . 8W-80-143

Solenoid-Manifold Tuning Valve (2.7L/ Switch-Ignition C2 (RHD) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-151
3.5L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-143 Switch-Liftgate Release (LX49) . . . . . . . . 8W-80-151
Solenoid-Multi Displacement System Cyl 1 (5.7L Switch-Memory Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-151
MDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-144 Switch-Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-152
Solenoid-Multi Displacement System Cyl 4 (5.7L Switch-Oil Level (Diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-152
MDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-144 Switch-Oil Pressure (2.7L/3.5L) . . . . . . . 8W-80-152
Solenoid-Multi Displacement System Cyl 6 (5.7L Switch-Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-152
MDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-144 Switch-Power Window-Left Rear . . . . . . 8W-80-153
Solenoid-Multi Displacement System Cyl 7 (5.7L Switch-Power Window-Right Rear . . . . . 8W-80-153
MDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-144 Switch-Seat Belt-Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-153
Solenoid-Proportional Purge (Gas) . . . . . 8W-80-145 Switch-Seat Belt-Passenger (Except
Solenoid-Short Runner Valve (3.5L) . . . . 8W-80-145 Export) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-153
Speaker-Instrument Panel-Center Switch-Seat-Driver (Except Memory) . . . 8W-80-154
(Highline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-145 Switch-Seat-Driver (Memory) . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-154
Speaker-Instrument Panel-Left . . . . . . . 8W-80-145 Switch-Seat-Passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-154
Speaker-Instrument Panel-Right . . . . . . 8W-80-146 Switch-Security Hood (Export) . . . . . . . . 8W-80-155
Speaker-Left Front Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-146 Switch-Steering-Left (Premium) . . . . . . . 8W-80-155
Speaker-Left Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-146 Switch-Steering-Right (Premium) . . . . . . 8W-80-155
Speaker-Right Front Door . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-146 Switch-Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-155
Speaker-Right Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-146 Switch-Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-156
Speaker-Subwoofer (Highline Except Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver C1
SRT8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-147 (Base) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-156
Speaker-Subwoofer (SRT8 Except Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver C2
Export) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-147 (Base) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-156
Starter (2.7L/3.5L/5.7L AWD) . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-147 Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Express C1
Starter (5.7L RWD/SRT8) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-147 (Except Base) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-156
Starter (Diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-147 Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Express C2
Starter-Fusible Link-Eyelet (Except 5.7L RWD/ (Except Base) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-157
SRT8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-148 Switch-Window/Door Lock-Passenger
Starter-Fusible Link-Eyelet (5.7L RWD/ (Base) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-157
SRT8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-148 Switch-Window/Door Lock-Passenger Express
Starter-Post-Pass Through-Eyelet (Except 5.7L (Except Base) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-157
RWD/SRT8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-148 Throttle Body (Gas) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-157
Starter-Post-Pass Through-Eyelet (5.7L RWD/ Transducer-A/C Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-158
SRT8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-148 Transmitter-Intrusion Sensor (RHD) . . . 8W-80-158
Switch-Adjustable Pedals (LHD) . . . . . . . 8W-80-149 Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front (Tire
Switch-Autostick (Column NAG1) . . . . . . 8W-80-149 Pressure Monitor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-158
Switch-Bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-149 Transponder-Tire Pressure-Right Front (Tire
Switch-Decklid Release (LX48) . . . . . . . . 8W-80-149 Pressure Monitor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-158
Switch-Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-150 Transponder-Tire Pressure-Right Rear (Tire
Switch-Heated Seat-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-150 Pressure Monitor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-159
Switch-Heated Seat-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-150 Valve-EGR (Diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-159
Switch-Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-150 Valve-EGR Air Flow Control (Diesel) . . . 8W-80-159
Switch-Ignition C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-151
ACTUATOR-BLEND DOOR-LEFT - BLACK 6 WAY

CAV CIRCUIT FUNCTION
1 C55 20DB/WT LEFT BLEND DOOR COMMON DRIVER
2 - -
3 - -
4 - -
5 - -
6 C255 20WT/DB LEFT BLEND DOOR DRIVER
ACTUATOR-BLEND DOOR-RIGHT (ATC) - BLACK 6 WAY

1 C52 20DB/LG RIGHT BLEND DOOR COMMON DRIVER
2 - -
3 - -
4 - -
5 - -
6 C252 20LG/DB RIGHT BLEND DOOR DRIVER
ACTUATOR-MODE DOOR - BLACK 6 WAY

1 C66 20DB/OR MODE DOOR COMMON DRIVER
2 - -
3 - -
4 - -
5 - -
6 C266 20OR/DB MODE DOOR DRIVER
ACTUATOR-RECIRCULATION DOOR - BLACK 6 WAY

1 C68 20DB/YL RECIRCULATION DOOR COMMON DRIVER
2 - -
3 - -
4 - -
5 - -
6 C268 20YL/DB RECIRCULATION DOOR DRIVER
AIRBAG-DRIVER SQUIB 1 - BLACK/YELLOW 2 WAY

1 R45 20LG/OR DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 1
2 R43 20LG/BR DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 2
AIRBAG-DRIVER SQUIB 2 - BROWN/YELLOW 2 WAY

1 R63 20LG/WT DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 1
2 R61 20LG/VT DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 2
AIRBAG-PASSENGER SQUIB - YELLOW 4 WAY

1 R44 20LB/OR PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 1
2 R42 20LB/BR PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 2
3 R64 20LB/WT PASSENGER SQUIB 2 LINE 1
4 R62 20LB/VT PASSENGER SQUIB 2 LINE 2
AIRBAG-SIDE CURTAIN-LEFT - YELLOW 2 WAY

1 R1 20LB/WT LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2
2 R3 20LB/OR LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1
AIRBAG-SIDE CURTAIN-RIGHT - YELLOW 2 WAY

1 R4 20OR/LB RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1
2 R2 20WT/LB RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2
AMPLIFIER-ANTENNA-BACKLITE C1 - BLACK 3 WAY

1 C15 12DB/WT FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT
2 - -
3 F880 20PK/DG FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT
AMPLIFIER-ANTENNA-BACKLITE C2 - 1 WAY
1 D999 18WT/OR ANTENNA GRID SIGNAL
AMPLIFIER-ANTENNA-BACKLITE C3 - BLACK 2 WAY

1 D5 6WT/OR ANTENNA SIGNAL
2 D931 WT/YL ANTENNA SHIELD
AMPLIFIER-ANTENNA-BACKLITE C4 - 1 WAY
1 C215 14LB ELECTRIC HEATED BACKLITE DRIVER
AMPLIFIER-RADIO C1 (MIDLINE II/HIGHLINE) - NATURAL 14 WAY

1 X201 18GY/VT AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+)
2 X202 18DG/VT AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+)
3 X303 18DG/TN AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR SPEAKER (+)
4 X304 18DG/BR AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR SPEAKER (+)
5 X300 18GY/BR AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 1 (+)
6 - -
7 X291 18GY/YL AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-)
8 X292 18DG/YL AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-)
9 X393 18DG/GY AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR SPEAKER (-)
10 - -
11 - -
12 X394 18YL/GY AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR SPEAKER (-)
13 X390 18DG/BR AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 1 (-)
14 - -
AMPLIFIER-RADIO C2 (MIDLINE II/HIGHLINE) - WHITE 20 WAY

1 X209 18GY/OR AMPLIFIED LEFT I/P SPEAKER (+)
2 X208 18GY/DG AMPLIFIED RIGHT I/P SPEAKER (+)
3 X200 18GY/BR (HIGHLINE) AMPLIFIED CENTER I/P SPEAKER (+)
4 X13 16DG/GY FUSED B(+) (I.O.D.)
5 - -
6 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS (+)
7 X51 18DG/DB RADIO LEFT AUDIO (+)
8 X52 18GY/DB RADIO RIGHT AUDIO (+)
9 Z910 16BK/TN GROUND
10 X299 18GY/YL AMPLIFIED LEFT I/P SPEAKER (-)
11 X298 18GY/LG AMPLIFIED RIGHT I/P SPEAKER (-)
12 X290 18GY/OR (HIGHLINE) AMPLIFIED CENTER I/P SPEAKER (-)
14 - -
15 - -
16 - -
17 D54 20WT CAN B BUS (-)
18 X57 18DG/OR RADIO LEFT AUDIO (-)
19 X58 18GY/OR RADIO RIGHT AUDIO (-)
AMPLIFIER-SUBWOOFER (SRT8 EXCEPT EXPORT) - BLACK 6 WAY

1 A139 16RD/YL FUSED B(+)
4 X30 18DG/YL SUBWOOFER 1 (+)
5 X31 18GY/TN SUBWOOFER 1 (-)
6 Z912 16BK/OR GROUND
ANTENNA CABLE-SATELLITE RADIO NO. 1 - BLUE 2 WAY

1 D106 6WT/LG SATELLITE ANTENNA SIGNAL 1
2 D126 WT/TN SATELLITE ANTENNA SHIELD 1
ANTENNA CABLE-SATELLITE RADIO NO. 2 - WHITE 2 WAY

1 D109 6WT/OR SATELLITE ANTENNA SIGNAL 2
2 D129 WT/YL SATELLITE ANTENNA SHIELD 2
ANTENNA-GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM (NAVIGATION) - GRAY 2 WAY

1 D8 6WT/LB GPS ANTENNA SIGNAL
2 D108 LB/WT GPS ANTENNA SHIELD
ANTENNA-SATELLITE NO. 1 - BLUE 2 WAY

1 D106 WT/LG SATELLITE ANTENNA SIGNAL 1
2 D126 WT/TN SATELLITE ANTENNA SHIELD 1
ANTENNA-SATELLITE NO. 2 - WHITE 2 WAY

1 D109 WT/OR SATELLITE ANTENNA SIGNAL 2
2 D129 WT/YL SATELLITE ANTENNA SHIELD 2
ASSEMBLY-ELECTROHYDRAULIC CONTROL UNIT (NAG1) - BLACK 13 WAY

1 T71 20YL/OR INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) SIGNAL
2 T76 20YL/TN MODULATION PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL
3 T70 20YL INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) SIGNAL
4 T54 20DG/OR TEMPERATURE SENSOR-P/N SWITCH SIGNAL
5 - -
6 T78 20YL SOLENOID SUPPLY VOLTAGE
7 T72 20YL/DB SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE
8 T74 20YL/LG 2-3 SOLENOID CONTROL
9 T73 20YL/GY 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL
10 T77 20YL/BR SHIFT PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL
11 T75 20YL/LB TCC SOLENOID CONTROL
12 T13 20DG/VT SENSOR GROUND
13 T60 20YL/GY 1-2/4-5 SOLENOID CONTROL
ASSEMBLY-EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION VALVE (GAS EXCEPT SRT8) - BLACK 6 WAY

1 K34 20DB/LG EGR SIGNAL
2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY
3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND
4 Z904 20BK/BR GROUND
5 - -
6 K35 20DB/VT EGR SOL CONTROL
ASSEMBLY-NATURAL VACUUM LEAK DETECTION (GAS EXCEPT EXPORT EXCEPT SRT8/POLICE) -

BLACK 2 WAY
1 Z914 20BK/GY GROUND
2 K107 20VT/WT NVLD SWITCH SIGNAL
ASSEMBLY-NATURAL VACUUM LEAK DETECTION (POLICE/SRT8 EXCEPT EXPORT) - BLACK 3 WAY

3 K106 20VT/GY NVLD SOL CONTROL
ASSEMBLY-SHIFTER LEVER (CONSOLE NAG1) - BLACK 6 WAY

1 F902 20PK IGNITION UNLOCK-RUN-START
2 Z911 20BK/WT (EXCEPT SRT8) GROUND
2 Z912 20BK/OR (SRT8) GROUND
3 B29 20DG/WT BRAKE SWITCH SIGNAL
4 - -
5 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+)
6 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-)
ASSEMBLY-SHIFTER LEVER (RLE) - WHITE 2 WAY

1 Z911 20BK/WT GROUND
ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH (RLE) - LT. BROWN 10 WAY

1 T60 20YL/GY OD SOLENOID CONTROL
2 T59 20YL/LB UD SOLENOID CONTROL
3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT
4 T19 20YL/DB 2-4 SOLENOID CONTROL
5 T47 20YL/DG 2-4 PRESSURE SWITCH SENSE
6 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SWITCH SENSE
7 T20 20DG/WT L/R SOLENOID CONTROL
8 - -
9 - -
10 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SWITCH SENSE
ASSEMBLY-VARIABLE LINE PRESSURE (RLE) - BLACK 6 WAY

1 - -
3 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL
6 T118 20DG PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID CONTROL
BACKLITE-ANTENNA - NATURAL 1 WAY

1 D999 18WT/OR ANTENNA GRID SIGNAL
BACKLITE-ELECTRIC HEATED (GROUND) - BLACK 1 WAY

1 Z912 14BK/OR (LX48) GROUND
1 Z914 14BK/GY (LX49) GROUND
BACKLITE-ELECTRIC HEATED (POWER) - BLACK 1 WAY

1 C215 14LB ELECTRIC HEATED BACKLITE DRIVER
BATTERY-NEGATIVE - 1 WAY
1 Z915 4BK (DIESEL) GROUND
1 Z915 6BK (GAS) GROUND
BATTERY-POSITIVE - 1 WAY
1 A1 1RD B(+)
1 A1 6RD B(+)
BOOSTER-ACTIVE BRAKE (MK25) - BLACK 6 WAY

1 B135 20DG/LG BRAKE PEDAL FORCE SWITCH OPEN
2 B134 20DG/YL BRAKE PEDAL FORCE SWITCH CLOSE
3 B132 20DG/LB ACTIVE BRAKE BOOSTER SOLENOID (-)
4 B131 20DG/YL ACTIVE BRAKE BOOSTER SOLENOID (+)
5 B136 20DG/LB BRAKE PEDAL FORCE SWITCH SIGNAL
6 - -
C100 (2.7L/3.5L) - BLACK (ENGINE SIDE)

CAV CIRCUIT
1 F855 20PK/YL
2 F856 20YL/PK
3 G6 20VT/GY
4 K236 20DB/LG (3.5L)
5 -
6 -
7 K343 16BR/YL
8 -
9 T15 20YL/BR (2.7L)
10 T16 16YL/OR (2.7L)
11 -
12 T750 16LG
13 Z904 14BK/BR (2.7L)
13 Z904 16BK/BR (3.5L)
14 C3 18DB/YL
C100 (2.7L/3.5L) - BLACK (HEADLAMP AND

DASH SIDE)
CAV CIRCUIT
1 F855 20PK/YL
2 F856 20YL/PK
3 G6 20VT/GY
4 K236 20DB/LG
5 -
6 -
7 K343 16BR/YL
8 -
9 T15 20YL/BR
10 T16 16YL/OR
11 -
12 T750 16YL/GY
13 Z904 14BK/BR
14 C3 18DB/YL
C100 (5.7L/SRT8) - BLACK (ENGINE SIDE)

CAV CIRCUIT
1 T750 16LG (5.7L)
1 T750 16YL/GY (SRT8)
2 -
3 G6 20VT/GY
4 K26 20BR/YL
5 K28 20BR/LB
6 K97 16DB/YL
7 K451 20BR/LB (5.7L)
8 K98 16DB/YL
9 K343 16BR/YL
10 K452 20BR/LB (5.7L)
11 K454 20BR/OR (5.7L)
12 F855 20PK/YL
13 F856 20YL/PK
14 C3 18DB/YL
15 G224 20VT/YL
16 Z904 16BK/BR
C100 (5.7L/SRT8) - BLACK (HEADLAMP AND

DASH SIDE)
CAV CIRCUIT
1 T750 16YL/GY
2 -
3 G6 20VT/GY
4 K26 20BR/YL
5 K28 20BR/LB
6 K97 16DB/YL
7 K451 20BR/WT (5.7L)
8 K98 16DB/YL
9 K343 16BR/YL
10 K452 20BR/LB (5.7L)
11 K454 20BR/OR (5.7L)
12 F855 20PK/YL
13 F856 20YL/PK
14 C3 18DB/YL
15 G224 20VT/YL
16 Z904 14BK/BR
C100 (DIESEL) - BLACK (HEADLAMP AND

DASH SIDE)
CAV CIRCUIT
1 K343 16BR/YL
2 Z904 14BK/BR
3 C3 18DB/YL
4 G6 20VT/GY
5 F202 20PK/GY
6 T750 16YL/GY
C100 (DIESEL) - (ENGINE SIDE)

CAV CIRCUIT
1 K343 16RD/DG
2 Z904 16BR
3 C3 18BL/DG
4 G6 20BL/RD
5 F202 18BK/GY
6 T750 14VT
C101 (5.7L MDS) - DK. GRAY (ENGINE SIDE)

CAV CIRCUIT
1 K451 20BR/LB
2 K452 20BR/LB
3 K453 20BR/DG
4 K454 20BR/OR
5 -
6 Z904 18BK/BR
C101 (5.7L MDS) - DK. GRAY (MULTI DIS-

PLACEMENT SOLENOID SIDE)
CAV CIRCUIT
1 K451 20BR/WT
2 K452 20BR/LB
3 K453 20BR/DG
4 K454 20BR/OR
5 -
6 Z904 20BK/BR
C102 - BLACK (INSTRUMENT PANEL SIDE)

CAV CIRCUIT
1 -
2 D71 20WT/DB
3 D72 20WT/LB
4 D54 20WT
5 D55 20WT/OR
6 D64 20WT/LB
7 D65 20WT/LG
8 -
9 D15 20WT/DG
10 D16 20WT/OR
11 D20 20WT/LG
12 D21 20WT/BR
13 F500 20DG/PK (EXCEPT POLICE)
14 R79 20LB/VT
15 R80 20VT/LB
16 R81 20LB/WT
17 -
18 R82 20WT/LB
19 L91 20WT/DB
20 F21 20PK/DG
21 F202 20PK/GY
22 -
23 F902 20PK (POLICE)
23 D96 20WT/LB (RHD)
24 -
25 D508 20WT/GY
26 -
C102 - LT. GRAY (HEADLAMP AND DASH SIDE)

CAV CIRCUIT
1 -
2 D71 20WT/DB
3 D72 20WT/LB
4 D54 20WT
5 D55 20WT/OR
6 D64 20WT/LB
7 D65 20WT/LG
8 -
9 D15 20WT/DG (EXCEPT SRT8)
10 D16 20WT/OR (EXCEPT SRT8)
11 D20 20WT/LG (GAS)
12 D21 20WT/BR
13 F500 20DG/PK (TIRE PRESSURE MONI-
TOR)
14 R79 20LB/VT
15 R80 20VT/LB
16 R81 20LB/WT
17 -
18 R82 20WT/LB
19 L91 20WT/DB
20 F21 20PK/DG
21 F202 20PK/GY
22 -
23 F902 20PK (POLICE)
23 D96 20WT/LB (RHD)
24 -
25 D508 20WT/GY (TIRE PRESSURE
MONITOR)
26 -
C103 (LX48) - DK. GRAY (FRONT END LIGHT-

ING SIDE)
CAV CIRCUIT
1 Z901 20BK/TN
2 Z902 20BK/BR
3 L777 20WT/VT
TOR)
5 L89 20WT/YL (EXCEPT BASE)
MONITOR)
C103 (LX48) - DK. GRAY (HEADLAMP AND

DASH SIDE)
CAV CIRCUIT
1 Z901 18BK/DG
2 Z902 18BK/LB
3 L777 20WT/VT
TOR)
5 L89 18WT/YL (EXCEPT BASE)
MONITOR)
C104 - BLACK (BODY SIDE)

CAV CIRCUIT
1 A22 12RD/WT
2 F880 20PK/DG (POLICE)
MONITOR)
4 B15 20DG/WT
5 B16 20LB/DG
6 F902 20PK (NAG1)
7 -
8 A22 12RD/WT
9 F855 20PK/YL
10 F856 20YL/PK
11 X13 16DG/GY
12 F20 20PK/WT (EXPORT)
13 -
14 P307 20LG/GY
15 K343 16BR/YL (EXPORT)
16 -
17 L62 20WT/YL
18 A117 20RD/DG (RHD)
19 -
20 B29 20DG/WT
21 B121 20DG/DB (MK25)
22 D51 20WT/BR (ESP)
23 D52 20WT/LB (ESP)
24 G4 20VT/LB (ESP)
25 G94 20VT/DB (ESP)
26 L63 20WT/DG
C104 - BLACK (HEADLAMP AND DASH SIDE)

CAV CIRCUIT
1 A22 12RD/WT
2 F880 20PK/DG (POLICE)
3 D508 20WT/GY (TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR)
4 B15 20DG/WT
5 B16 20LB/DG
6 F902 20PK (NAG1/RLE VLP)
7 -
8 A22 12RD/WT
9 F855 20PK/YL
10 F856 20YL/PK
11 X13 16DG/GY
12 F20 20PK/WT (EXPORT)
13 -
14 P307 20LG/GY
15 K343 18BR/YL (DIESEL)
15 F20 20PK/WT (GAS EXPORT)
16 -
17 L62 18WT/YL
18 A117 20RD/DG (RHD)
19 -
20 B29 20DG/WT
21 B121 20DG/DB (MK25)
22 D51 20WT/BR (ESP)
23 D52 20WT/LB (ESP)
24 G4 20VT/LB (ESP)
25 G94 20VT/DB (ESP)
26 L63 18WT/DG
C105 - BROWN (BODY SIDE)

CAV CIRCUIT
1 -
2 -
3 -
4 K23 20BR/WT
5 K29 20WT/BR
6 K106 20VT/GY (POLICE/SRT8 EXCEPT EXPORT)
7 K107 20VT/WT (EXCEPT EXPORT)
8 -
9 -
10 -
11 K400 20BR/VT
12 K167 20BR/YL
13 F923 20PK/YL
14 K31 20BR
15 L13 20WT/YL (EXPORT)
16 L239 20WT/DG (EXPORT)
17 L1 20WT/LG
18 B1 20DG/OR (ABS)
19 B2 20DG/LB (ABS)
20 B3 20DG/YL (ABS)
21 B4 20DG/GY (ABS)
22 W12 20BR/OR (LX49)
23 W17 18BR/YL (LX49 EXCEPT POLICE)
23 W17 18BR/LG (LX49 POLICE)
24 L124 18WT/DB (POLICE)
25 A72 20RD/OR (LHD ADJUSTABLE PEDALS EXCEPT MEMORY)
26 L777 20WT/VT
C105 - BROWN (HEADLAMP AND DASH SIDE)

CAV CIRCUIT
1 -
2 -
3 -
4 K23 20BR/WT
5 K29 20WT/BR
6 K106 20VT/GY (POLICE/SRT8 EXCEPT
EXPORT)
7 K107 20VT/WT (GAS)
8 -
9 -
10 -
11 K400 20BR/VT
12 K167 16BR/YL (DIESEL)
12 K167 20BR/YL (GAS)
13 F923 20PK/YL
14 K31 20BR
15 L13 20WT/YL (EXPORT)
16 L239 20WT/DG (EXPORT)
17 L1 20WT/LG
18 B1 20DG/OR (ABS)
19 B2 20DG/LB (ABS)
20 B3 20DG/YL (ABS)
21 B4 20DG/GY (ABS)
22 W12 20BR/OR (LX49)
23 W17 20BR/LG (LX49)
24 L124 18WT/DB (POLICE)
25 A72 20RD/OR
26 L777 20WT/VT
C107 (SRT8) - BLACK (ENGINE SIDE)

CAV CIRCUIT
1 K21 20DB/LG
2 K900 20DB/DG
C107 (SRT8) - BLACK (INLET AIR TEMPERA-

TURE SENSOR JUMPER SIDE)
CAV CIRCUIT
1 K21 20DB/LG
2 K900 20DB/DG
C108 (DIESEL) - BLACK (STARTER SIDE)

CAV CIRCUIT
1 A11 6BR/RD
C108 (DIESEL) - BLACK (HEADLAMP AND

DASH SIDE)
CAV CIRCUIT
1 A11 6BR/RD

CAV CIRCUIT
1 A110 16OR/RD (LHD)
2 A106 20LB/RD (LHD)
2 G945 20VT/DG (RHD)
3 A917 16RD/TN (LHD EXCEPT POLICE)
3 A917 18RD/TN (POLICE)
3 A645 20RD/VT (RHD)
4 A300 16GY/LG
5 P37 20LG/TN (LHD)
6 G78 22VT/OR
7 F201 20PK/OR
8 C7 12DB
9 F20 20PK/WT
10 F202 20PK/GY
11 F214 20PK/LG
12 F23 20RD/OR
13 F500 20DG/PK
14 A930 18RD/LG (POLICE)
15 G74 18VT/WT (LHD)
16 G76 20VT/YL (LHD)
17 X13 16DG/GY (EXCEPT POLICE)
18 D64 20WT/LB (CONSOLE NAG1)
19 D65 20WT/LG (CONSOLE NAG1)
20 L1 20WT/LG (AUTO DAY/NIGHT MIR-
ROR)
21 A23 20RD/YL
22 F880 20PK/DG (EXCEPT POLICE)
23 M24 18YL/WT
24 A931 18RD/WT (POLICE)
25 A932 18RD (POLICE)
26 -
C200 - NATURAL (BODY SIDE)

CAV CIRCUIT
1 A110 16OR/RD (LHD)
2 A106 20LB/RD (LHD)
2 G945 20VT/DG (RHD)
3 A917 18RD/TN (LHD)
3 A645 20RD/VT (RHD)
4 A300 16GY/LG
5 P37 20LG/TN (LHD)
6 G78 20VT/OR
7 F201 20PK/OR
8 C7 12DB
9 F20 20PK/WT
10 F202 20PK/GY
11 F214 20PK/LG
12 F23 20RD/OR
13 F500 20DG/PK
15 G74 20VT/WT (LHD)
16 G76 20VT/YL (LHD)
18 D64 20WT/LB (CONSOLE NAG1)
19 D65 20WT/LG (CONSOLE NAG1)
20 L1 20WT/LG (EXCEPT POLICE)
21 A23 20RD/YL
23 M24 18YL/WT
25 A932 18RD (LX48 POLICE)
25 A932 16RD (LX49 POLICE)
26 -

CAV CIRCUIT
1 -
2 E12 20OR/GY
3 X304 18DG/BR
4 X394 18YL/GY
5 X202 18DG/VT (LHD)
5 X201 18GY/VT (RHD)
6 X292 18DG/YL (LHD)
6 X291 18DG/YL (RHD)
7 C115 20DB
8 -
9 G160 20VT/LG (LHD)
10 P392 20LG/DB
11 D54 20WT
12 D55 20WT/OR
13 A117 20RD/DG (EXCEPT POLICE)
14 P303 20TN (LHD)
15 P31 20TN/YL (LHD)
16 A205 16RD/OR
17 A913 20RD/GY
18 R58 20LB/GY (LHD)

CAV CIRCUIT
19 B29 20DG/WT (POLICE)
20 D777 20WT/DG (PARKTRONICS)
21 X777 20DG/GY (PARKTRONICS)
22 Z171 20GY/BK (PARKTRONICS)
23 F942 18PK/BK (RHD)
24 -
25 G25 20VT/TN (LHD)
26 F942 18PK/BK (POLICE)
C201 - GREEN (BODY SIDE)

CAV CIRCUIT
1 -
2 E12 20OR/GY
3 X304 18DG/BR
4 X394 18YL/GY
5 X202 18DG/VT (LHD)
5 X201 18GY/VT (RHD)
6 X292 18DG/YL (LHD)
6 X291 18GY/YL (RHD)
7 C115 20DB
8 -
9 G160 20VT/LG (LHD)
10 P392 20LG/DB
11 D54 20WT
12 D55 20WT/OR
13 A117 20RD/DG
14 P303 20TN (LHD)
15 P31 20TN/YL (LHD EXCEPT LX48
POLICE)
15 P31 20BK (LX48 POLICE)
16 A205 16RD/OR
17 A913 20RD/GY
18 R58 20LB/GY (LHD)
19 B29 20DG/WT (POLICE)
23 F942 18PK/BK (RHD)
24 -
25 G25 20VT/TN (LX49)
26 F942 18PK/BK (POLICE)
C202 - NATURAL (HVAC SIDE)

CAV CIRCUIT
1 C55 20DB/WT
2 C255 20WT/DB
3 C52 20DB/LG (ATC)
4 C252 20LG/DB (ATC)
5 C66 20DB/OR
6 C266 20OR/DB
7 Z908 12BK (ATC)
7 C70 12DB/YL (MTC)
8 C7 12DB
9 C68 20DB/YL
10 C268 20YL/DB
11 C21 20DB/LG
12 C121 20DB/DG
13 C73 14DB/VT (MTC)
14 C72 14DB/OR (MTC)
15 C56 20DB/LB (ATC)
16 C71 16DB/BR (MTC)
C202 - NATURAL (INSTRUMENT PANEL SIDE)

CAV CIRCUIT
1 C55 20DB/WT
2 C255 22WT/DB
3 C52 22DB/LG (ATC)
4 C252 22LG/DB (ATC)
5 C66 20DB/OR
6 C266 20OR/DB
7 Z908 12BK/RD (ATC)
7 C70 12DB/YL (MTC)
8 C7 12DB
9 C68 22DB/YL
10 C268 22YL/DB (ATC EXCEPT SRT8
EARLY BUILD)
10 C268 20YL/DB (ATC SRT8 EARLY
BUILD/MTC)
11 C21 20DB/LG
12 C121 20DB/DG
13 C73 12DB/VT (MTC)
14 C72 18DB/OR (MTC)
15 C56 20DB/LB (ATC)
16 C71 16DB/BR (MTC)

CAV CIRCUIT
1 X300 18GY/BR (HIGHLINE)
2 B25 20GY/BK
3 G167 20VT/LB
4 G75 20VT
5 G77 20VT/GY
6 P112 20TN/OR (LHD AUTO DAY/NIGHT
MIRROR)
6 P37 20LG/TN (RHD)
7 Z210 20BK
8 X390 18DG/BR (HIGHLINE)
9 N4 20DB/WT
10 N5 20DB/WT
11 P1 20TN/LG
12 X303 18DG/TN
13 X393 18DG/GY
14 X201 18GY/VT (LHD)
14 X202 18DG/VT (RHD)
15 X291 18GY/YL (LHD)
15 X292 18DG/YL (RHD)
16 P393 20LG
17 P953 16DG/TN (LHD MEMORY)
17 A110 16OR/RD (RHD)
18 G914 20VT/GY (LHD MEMORY)
18 G74 20VT/WT (RHD)
19 P153 16TN/DG (LHD MEMORY)
19 G76 20VT/YL (RHD)
20 P151 20TN/OR (LHD MEMORY)
20 G160 20VT/LG (RHD)
21 P114 20TN/WT (LHD AUTO DAY/NIGHT
MIRROR)
21 A106 20LB/RD (RHD)
22 R57 20LG/GY
23 G161 20VT/DG
24 P152 20TN/LB (LHD MEMORY)
24 P303 20TN (RHD)
25 P157 16LB/TN (LHD MEMORY)
25 P31 20BK (RHD)
26 A917 18RD/TN (RHD)

CAV CIRCUIT
1 X300 18GY/BR (HIGHLINE)
2 B25 20GY/BK
3 G167 20VT/LB
4 G75 20VT
5 G77 20VT/GY
6 P112 20TN/OR (LHD AUTO DAY/NIGHT
MIRROR)
6 P37 20LG/TN (RHD)
7 Z210 20BK
8 X390 18DG/BR (HIGHLINE)
9 N4 20DB/WT
10 N5 20DB/WT
11 P1 20TN/LG
12 X303 18DG/TN
13 X393 18DG/GY
14 X201 18GY/VT (LHD)
14 X202 18DG/VT (RHD)
15 X291 18GY/YL (LHD)
15 X292 18DG/YL (RHD)
16 P393 20LG
17 P953 16DG/TN (LHD MEMORY)
17 A110 16OR/RD (RHD)
18 G914 20VT/GY (LHD MEMORY)
18 G74 18VT/WT (RHD)
19 P153 16TN/DG (LHD MEMORY)
19 G76 20VT/YL (RHD)
20 G160 20VT/LG (RHD)
21 P114 20TN/WT (LHD AUTO DAY/NIGHT
MIRROR)
21 A106 20LB/RD (RHD)
22 R57 20LG/GY
23 G161 20VT/DG
24 P152 20TN/LB (LHD MEMORY)
24 P303 20TN (RHD)
25 P157 16LB/TN (LHD MEMORY)
25 P31 20TN/YL (RHD)
26 D21 20PK (LHD EXCEPT POLICE)
26 A917 18RD/TN (RHD)
C204 - NATURAL (DOME SIDE)

CAV CIRCUIT
1 -
2 M24 18YL/WT
3 M27 18YL/LB
4 Z909 16BK/LG
5 A117 20RD/DG (EVIC)
6 F880 20PK (EVIC EXCEPT RHD SUN-
ROOF)
6 F880 20PK/DG (RHD SUNROOF)
7 D54 20WT (EVIC/SUNROOF)
8 D55 20WT/OR (EVIC/SUNROOF)
11 X13 16DG/GY (SUNROOF)
13 -
14 G460 20DG/VT (RHD)
15 G946 20LG/VT (RHD)
16 -
17 -
18 -
C204 - NATURAL (INSTRUMENT PANEL SIDE)

CAV CIRCUIT
1 E12 20OR/GY
2 M24 18YL/WT
3 M27 20YL/LB
4 Z909 16BK/LG
5 A117 20RD/DG (EXCEPT POLICE)
7 D54 20WT (EXCEPT POLICE)
8 D55 20WT/OR (EXCEPT POLICE)
13 -
14 G460 20DG/VT (RHD)
15 G946 20LG/VT (RHD)
16 -
17 -
18 -
C205 (EXCEPT BASE) - NATURAL (INSTRUMENT

PANEL SIDE)
CAV CIRCUIT
1 F880 20PK/DG (AUTO WIPERS)
2 D54 20WT (AUTO WIPERS)
3 D55 20WT/OR (AUTO WIPERS)
4 F23 20RD/OR
5 L1 20WT/LG
6 P112 20TN/OR (LHD)
7 X835 20OR/GY (LHD HANDS FREE)
8 -
9 P114 20TN/WT (LHD)
10 Z909 20BK/LG
11 X712 22DG/LB (LHD HANDS FREE)
12 X722 22LB/DG (LHD HANDS FREE)
13 X792 22LB/DG (LHD HANDS FREE)
14 X793 22DG/YL (LHD HANDS FREE)
15 X730 20GY/YL (LHD HANDS FREE)
16 -
17 -
18 -
C205 (EXCEPT BASE) - NATURAL (INTERIOR

MIRROR JUMPER SIDE)
CAV CIRCUIT
1 F880 20BK/PK (AUTO WIPERS)
2 D54 20BK (AUTO WIPERS)
3 D55 20BK/WT (AUTO WIPERS)
4 F23 20BK/RD (AUTO DAY/NIGHT MIR-
ROR)
5 L1 20BK/TN (AUTO DAY/NIGHT MIR-
ROR)
6 P112 20BK/LB (AUTO DAY/NIGHT MIR-
ROR)
7 X835 20BK/OR (HANDS FREE)
8 -
9 P114 20BK/DB (AUTO DAY/NIGHT MIR-
ROR)
10 Z909 20BK/LG (AUTO DAY/NIGHT MIR-
ROR)
11 X712 20BK/DG (HANDS FREE)
12 X722 20BK/BR (HANDS FREE)
13 X792 20BK/YL (HANDS FREE)
14 X793 20BK/GY (HANDS FREE)
15 X730 20BK/VT (HANDS FREE)
16 -
17 -
18 -
C206 - NATURAL (STEERING PAD SIDE)

CAV CIRCUIT
1 D500 20WT
2 D501 20WT/LG
3 D502 20WT/OR (PREMIUM)
C206 - WHITE (CLOCKSPRING SIDE)

CAV CIRCUIT
1 D500 20WT
2 D501 20WT/LG
3 D502 20WT/OR (PREMIUM)

CAV CIRCUIT
1 D5 6WT/OR
2 D931 WT/YL

CAV CIRCUIT
1 D5 6WT/OR
2 D931 WT/YL
C208 (COLUMN NAG1) - NATURAL (INSTRU-

MENT PANEL SIDE)
CAV CIRCUIT
1 -
2 Z910 20BK/TN
3 F902 20PK
4 B29 20DG/WT
5 D65 20WT/LG
6 D64 20WT/LB
C208 (COLUMN NAG1) - NATURAL (STEERING

COLUMN SIDE)
CAV CIRCUIT
1 -
2 Z910 22BK
3 F902 22LB
4 B29 22YL
5 D65 22LG/BK
6 D64 22GY

CAV CIRCUIT
1 Q411 14OR/WT
2 C16 20DB/GY
3 A913 20RD/GY
4 Q412 14OR/LB
5 G75 20VT
6 G167 20VT/LB
7 G161 20VT/DG
8 M24 18YL/WT
9 D55 20WT/OR (EXCEPT BASE)
10 Q26 14OR/GY (BASE)
10 D54 20WT (EXCEPT BASE)
11 X201 18GY/VT
12 X291 18GY/YL
13 F880 20PK/DG (EXCEPT MEMORY)
14 Z912 14BK/OR
15 Q15 14OR/LB
16 P1 20TN/LG
17 P72 20TN/GY (EXCEPT MEMORY)
17 P699 20LG/DG (RHD)
18 P74 20TN/OR (EXCEPT MEMORY)
18 P114 20TN/WT (LHD MEMORY)
18 P110 20LG/WT (RHD)
19 Q611 14OR/GY
20 P393 20LG (LHD)
20 P392 20LG (RHD)
21 Q612 14OR/DB
22 F881 14PK
23 P76 22TN/LB (EXCEPT MEMORY)
24 Q16 14OR/TN (BASE)
C300 - NATURAL (DRIVER DOOR SIDE)

CAV CIRCUIT
1 Q411 14OR/WT
2 C16 20DB/GY
3 A913 20RD/GY
4 Q412 14OR/LB
5 G75 20VT
6 G167 20VT/LB
7 G161 20VT/DG
8 M24 20YL/WT (EXCEPT BASE)
11 X201 18GY/VT
12 X291 18GY/YL
13 F880 20PK/DG (EXCEPT MEMORY)
14 Z912 14BK/OR
15 Q15 14OR/LB
16 P1 20TN/LG
17 P699 20LG/DG (RHD)
18 P114 20TN/WT (LHD MEMORY)
18 P110 20LG/WT (RHD)
19 Q611 14OR/GY
20 P393 20LG (LHD)
20 P392 20LG (RHD)
21 Q612 14OR/DB
22 F881 14PK

CAV CIRCUIT
1 -
2 C16 20DB/GY
3 A913 20RD/GY (EXCEPT BASE)
5 G74 20VT/WT
6 P37 20LG/TN
7 G160 20VT/LG
8 M24 20YL/WT
11 X202 18DG/VT (LHD)
11 X201 18GY/VT (RHD)
12 X292 18DG/YL (LHD)
12 X291 18GY/YL (RHD)
13 F880 20PK/DG (EXCEPT BASE)
14 Z911 14BK/WT
15 Q15 14OR/LB (BASE)
16 P303 20TN

CAV CIRCUIT
17 P110 20LG/WT (RHD)
18 P699 20LG/DG (RHD)
19 -
20 P392 20LG/DB (LHD)
20 P393 20LG/DB (RHD)
22 F881 14PK
24 -
C301 - NATURAL (PASSENGER DOOR SIDE)

CAV CIRCUIT
1 -
2 C16 20DB/GY
3 A913 20RD/GY (EXCEPT BASE)
5 G74 20VT/WT
6 P37 20LG/TN
7 G160 20VT/LG
8 M24 20YL/WT (EXCEPT BASE)
11 X202 18DG/VT (LHD)
11 X201 18GY/VT (RHD)
12 X292 18DG/YL (LHD)
12 X291 18GY/YL (RHD)
13 F880 20PK/DG (EXCEPT BASE)
14 Z911 14BK/WT
15 Q15 14OR/LB (BASE)
16 P303 20TN
17 P110 20LG/WT (RHD)
18 P699 20LG/DG (RHD)
19 -
20 P392 20LG/DB (LHD)
20 P393 20LG/DB (RHD)
22 F881 14PK
24 -

CAV CIRCUIT
1 Q15 14OR/LB
2 -
3 Q411 14OR/WT
4 -
5 G77 20VT/GY
6 Z912 20BK/OR
7 P303 20TN
8 P393 20LG
9 -
10 Q611 14OR/GY
C302 - NATURAL (LEFT REAR DOOR SIDE)

CAV CIRCUIT
1 Q15 14OR/LB
2 -
3 Q411 14OR/WT
4 -
5 G77 20VT/GY
6 Z912 20LG/BK
7 P303 20TN
8 P393 20LG
9 -
10 Q611 14OR/GY

CAV CIRCUIT
1 Q15 14OR/LB
2 -
3 Q412 14OR/LB
4 -
5 G76 20VT/YL
6 Z911 20BK/WT
7 P303 20TN
8 P392 20LG/DB
9 -
10 Q612 14OR/DB
C303 - NATURAL (RIGHT REAR DOOR SIDE)

CAV CIRCUIT
1 Q15 14OR/LB
2 -
3 Q412 14OR/LB
4 -
5 G76 20VT/YL
6 Z911 20BK/WT
7 P303 20TN
8 P392 20LG/DB
9 -
10 Q612 14OR/DB
C304 (LX49) - LT. GRAY (BODY SIDE)

CAV CIRCUIT
1 C15 12DB/WT
2 W13 16BR/LG
3 W17 18BR/YL (EXCEPT POLICE)
3 W17 18BR/LG (POLICE)
4 L53 20DG/WT (MK25)
4 B29 20DG/WT (MK25E)
5 Z911 20BK/WT
6 Z914 14BK/GY
C304 (LX49) - LT. GRAY (LIFTGATE SIDE)

CAV CIRCUIT
1 C15 12DB/WT
2 W13 16BR/LG
3 W17 18BR/YL
4 L53 20DG/WT (MK25)
4 B29 20DG/WT (MK25E)
5 Z911 20BK/WT
6 Z914 14BK/GY
C305 (LX49) - LT. GRAY (BODY SIDE)

CAV CIRCUIT
1 F880 20PK/DG
2 G25 20VT/TN
3 G78 20VT/OR
4 M24 20YL/WT
5 P31 20TN/YL
6 -
C305 (LX49) - LT. GRAY (LIFTGATE SIDE)

CAV CIRCUIT
1 F880 20PK/DG
2 G25 20VT/TN
3 G78 20VT/OR
4 M24 20YL/WT
5 P31 20TN/YL
6 -
C306 (LX48 BASE) - BLACK (BODY SIDE)

CAV CIRCUIT
1 L777 20WT/VT
2 Z914 20BK/GY
C306 (LX48 BASE) - BLACK (REAR END LIGHT-

ING SIDE)
CAV CIRCUIT
1 L777 20WT/VT
2 Z914 20BK/BR
C306 (LX48 EXCEPT BASE/LX49 EXCEPT

EXPORT) - BLACK (BODY SIDE)
CAV CIRCUIT
1 X700 20GY/OR (LX48 PARKTRONICS)
1 L777 20WT/VT (LX49)
2 Z914 20BK/GY (2.7L/3.5L LX49)
2 Z914 16BK/GY (5.7L LX49)
2 D701 20WT/LB (LX48 PARKTRONICS)
3 D700 20WT/GY (LX48 PARKTRONICS)
3 L53 20DG/WT (LX49 MK25)
3 B29 20DG/WT (LX49 MK25E)
4 D703 20WT/BK (LX48 PARKTRONICS)
4 L1 20WT/LG (LX49)
5 D704 20WT/DB (LX48 PARKTRONICS)
5 L62 20WT/YL (LX49)
6 X750 20GY/LB (LX48 PARKTRONICS)
6 L63 20WT/DG (LX49)
7 L777 20WT/VT (LX48)
8 Z914 20BK/GY (LX48 EXCEPT EXPORT)
8 Z914 18BK/GY (LX48 EXPORT)
9 -
10 -
C306 (LX48 EXCEPT BASE/LX49 EXCEPT

EXPORT) - BLACK (REAR END LIGHTING SIDE)
CAV CIRCUIT
1 X700 20GY/OR (LX48 PARKTRONICS)
1 L777 20WT/VT (LX49)
2 D701 20WT/LB (LX48 PARKTRONICS)
2 Z914 18BK/BR (LX49)
3 D700 20WT/GY (LX48 PARKTRONICS)
3 L53 20DG/WT (LX49 MK25)
3 B29 20DG/WT (LX49 MK25E)
4 D703 20WT/BK (LX48 PARKTRONICS)
4 L1 20WT/LG (LX49)
5 D704 20WT/DB (LX48 PARKTRONICS)
5 L62 18WT/YL (LX49)
6 X750 20GY/LB (LX48 PARKTRONICS)
6 L63 18WT/DG (LX49)
7 L777 20WT/VT (LX48)
8 Z914 20BK/BR (LX48)
9 -
10 -
C306 (LX49 EXPORT) - BLACK (BODY SIDE)

CAV CIRCUIT
1 L777 20WT/VT
2 Z914 16BK/GY
3 L53 20DG/WT (MK25)
3 B29 20DG/WT (MK25E)
4 L1 20WT/LG
5 L62 20WT/YL
6 L63 20WT/DG
7 L90 20WT/OR
8 D700 20WT/GY
9 D701 20WT/LB
10 D703 20WT/BK
11 D704 20WT/DB
12 X700 20GY/OR
13 X750 20GY/LB
14 -
15 -
16 -
C306 (LX49 EXPORT) - BLACK (REAR END

LIGHTING SIDE)
CAV CIRCUIT
1 L777 20WT/VT
2 Z914 16BK/BR
3 L53 20DG/WT (MK25)
3 B29 20DG/WT (MK25E)
4 L1 20WT/LG
5 L62 18WT/YL
6 L63 18WT/DG
7 L90 20WT/OR
8 D700 20WT/GY
9 D701 20WT/LB
10 D703 20WT/BK
11 D704 20WT/DB
12 X700 20GY/OR
13 X750 20GY/LB
14 -
15 -
16 -
C307 (LX48) - BLACK (BODY SIDE)

CAV CIRCUIT
1 L777 20WT/VT
2 Z914 20BK/GY
3 L63 20WT/DG
4 L53 20DG/WT (MK25)
4 B29 20DG/WT (MK25E)
5 L1 20WT/LG
6 L90 20WT/OR (EXPORT)
C307 (LX48) - BLACK (LEFT TAIL LAMP SIDE)

CAV CIRCUIT
1 L777 20WT/VT (EXCEPT EXPORT)
1 L777 18WT/VT (EXPORT)
2 Z914 20BK/GY
3 L63 18WT/DG
4 L53 18DG/WT (MK25)
4 B29 18DG/WT (MK25E)
5 L1 20WT/LG (300C)
5 L1 18WT/LG (EXCEPT 300C)
C308 (LX48) - BLACK (BODY SIDE)

CAV CIRCUIT
1 L777 20WT/VT
2 Z914 20BK/GY
3 L62 20WT/YL
4 L53 20DG/WT (MK25)
4 B29 20DG/WT (MK25E)
5 L1 20WT/LG
C308 (LX48) - BLACK (RIGHT TAIL LAMP SIDE)

CAV CIRCUIT
1 L777 20WT/VT (EXCEPT EXPORT)
1 L777 18WT/VT (EXPORT)
2 Z914 20BK/GY
3 L62 18WT/YL
4 L53 18DG/WT (MK25)
4 B29 18DG/WT (MK25E)
5 L1 20WT/LG (300C)
5 L1 18WT/LG (EXCEPT 300C)
C309 (LX49) - DK. GRAY (LEFT TAIL LAMP

SIDE)
CAV CIRCUIT
1 L777 20BR
2 Z914 20BK
3 L63 18RD/OR
4 L53 20BR/VT (MK25)
4 B29 20BR/VT (MK25E)
5 L1 20VT/RD
6 -
C309 (LX49) - DK. GRAY (REAR END LIGHTING

SIDE)
CAV CIRCUIT
1 L777 20WT/VT
2 Z914 20BK/BR
3 L63 18WT/DG
4 L53 20DG/WT (MK25)
4 B29 20DG/WT (MK25E)
5 L1 20WT/LG
6 -
C310 (LX49) - DK. GRAY (REAR END LIGHTING

SIDE)
CAV CIRCUIT
1 L777 20WT/VT
2 Z914 20BK/BR
3 L62 18WT/YL
4 L53 20DG/WT (MK25)
4 B29 20DG/WT (MK25E)
5 L1 20WT/LG
6 -
C310 (LX49) - DK. GRAY (RIGHT TAIL LAMP

SIDE)
CAV CIRCUIT
1 L777 20BR
2 Z914 20BK
3 L62 18RD/OR
4 L53 20BR/VT (MK25)
4 B29 20BR/VT (MK25E)
5 L1 20VT/RD
6 -
C311 (SUNROOF) - NATURAL (DOME SIDE)

CAV CIRCUIT
1 Q6 20OR/LG (LHD)
1 Q6 22OR/LG (RHD)
2 -
3 X13 16DG/GY
4 Q5 20OR/LB (LHD)
4 Q5 22OR/LB (RHD)
5 Z909 16BK/LG
6 D55 20WT/OR
7 D54 20WT
8 Q3 20OR/TN (LHD)
8 Q3 22OR/TN (RHD)
9 Q4 20OR/YL (LHD)
9 Q4 22OR/YL (RHD)
10 -
C311 (SUNROOF) - NATURAL (SUNROOF SIDE)

CAV CIRCUIT
1 Q6 20OR/LG
2 D270 20WT (FACTORY ONLY)
3 X13 18RD
4 Q5 20OR/LB
5 Z909 18BK
6 D55 20WT/OR
7 D54 20WT
8 Q3 20OR/TN
9 Q4 20OR/YL
10 -
C313 - LT. GRAY (BODY SIDE)

CAV CIRCUIT
1 Z912 16BK/OR
2 R57 20LG/GY
3 P187 20LG/BR (LHD HEATED SEAT)
3 P188 20LG/VT (RHD HEATED SEAT)
4 A110 16OR/RD (EXCEPT MEMORY)
5 P205 20LG/WT (ADJUSTABLE PEDALS
EXCEPT MEMORY)
6 P206 20LG/LB (ADJUSTABLE PEDALS
EXCEPT MEMORY)
7 -
8 A72 20RD/OR (ADJUSTABLE PEDALS
EXCEPT MEMORY)
C313 - LT. GRAY (DRIVER SEAT SIDE)

CAV CIRCUIT
1 Z912 20BK/OR (MEMORY)
1 Z912 18BK/OR (POWER HEATED SEAT
EXCEPT MEMORY)
1 Z912 16BK/OR (POWER SEAT/ADJUST-
ABLE PEDALS EXCEPT MEMORY)
2 R57 20LG/GY
3 P187 18LG/BR (LHD POWER HEATED
SEAT EXCEPT MEMORY)
3 P188 20LG/VT (RHD HEATED SEAT)
4 A110 16OR/RD (EXCEPT MEMORY)
5 P205 20LG/WT (ADJUSTABLE PEDALS
EXCEPT MEMORY)
6 P206 20LG/LB (ADJUSTABLE PEDALS
EXCEPT MEMORY)
7 -
8 A72 20RD/OR (ADJUSTABLE PEDALS
EXCEPT MEMORY)
C314 - LT. GRAY (BODY SIDE)

CAV CIRCUIT
1 A916 14RD (LHD)
1 Z911 14BK/WT (RHD)
2 Z911 14BK/WT (LHD)
3 P188 20LG/VT (LHD HEATED SEAT)
3 P187 20LG/BR (RHD HEATED SEAT)
4 A916 14RD (RHD)
5 -
6 -
7 -
8 -
C314 - LT. GRAY (PASSENGER SEAT SIDE)

CAV CIRCUIT
1 A916 14RD (LHD POWER SEAT)
1 Z911 18BK/OR (RHD HEATED SEAT)
1 Z911 16BK/OR (RHD POWER SEAT)
2 Z911 16BK/WT (LHD HEATED SEAT)
2 Z911 14BK/WT (LHD POWER SEAT)
3 P187 18LG/BR (RHD HEATED SEAT)
4 A916 16OR/RD (RHD POWER SEAT)
5 -
6 -
7 -
8 -
C315 (BASE) - LT. GRAY (DRIVER SEAT BACK

JUMPER SIDE)
CAV CIRCUIT
1 P41 18LG/GY
2 P43 18LG/VT
C315 (BASE) - LT. GRAY (DRIVER SEAT SIDE)

CAV CIRCUIT
1 P41 18LG/GY
2 P43 18LG/VT
C315 (MIDLINE) - LT. GRAY (DRIVER SEAT

BACK JUMPER SIDE)
CAV CIRCUIT
1 P41 18LG/GY (LHD HEATED SEAT)
1 P141 18LG/BR (MEMORY)
2 P143 18LG/GY (MEMORY)
3 G493 20OR/VT (MEMORY)
4 Z912 20BK/OR (LHD HEATED SEAT)
4 G403 20VT/OR (MEMORY)
C315 (MIDLINE) - LT. GRAY (DRIVER SEAT

SIDE)
CAV CIRCUIT
1 P41 18LG/GY (LHD HEATED SEAT)
1 P141 18LG/BR (MEMORY)
2 P143 18LG/GY (MEMORY)
3 G493 20OR/VT (MEMORY)
4 Z912 20BK/OR (LHD HEATED SEAT)
4 G403 20VT/OR (MEMORY)
C315 (PREMIUM) - LT. GRAY (DRIVER SEAT

BACK JUMPER SIDE)
CAV CIRCUIT
1 P141 18LG/BR
2 P143 18LG/GY
3 G493 20OR/VT
4 G403 20VT/OR
5 P187 20LG/BR (LHD)
5 P188 20LG/VT (RHD)
6 Z912 20BK/OR
C315 (PREMIUM) - LT. GRAY (DRIVER SEAT

SIDE)
CAV CIRCUIT
1 P141 18LG/BR
2 P143 18LG/GY
3 G493 20OR/VT
4 G403 20VT/OR
5 P187 20LG/BR (LHD)
5 P188 20LG/VT (RHD)
6 Z912 20BK/OR
C316 (LHD HEATED SEAT/RHD POWER SEAT) -

LT. GRAY (PASSENGER SEAT BACK JUMPER
SIDE)
CAV CIRCUIT
1 P188 20LG/VT (LHD)
1 P42 18LG/GY (RHD)
2 P44 18LG/VT (RHD)
C316 (LHD HEATED SEAT/RHD POWER SEAT) -

LT. GRAY (PASSENGER SEAT SIDE)
CAV CIRCUIT
1 P188 20LG/VT (LHD)
1 P42 18LG/GY (RHD)
2 P44 18LG/VT (RHD)
C316 (RHD POWER/HEATED SEAT) - LT. GRAY

(PASSENGER SEAT BACK JUMPER SIDE)
CAV CIRCUIT
1 P42 18LG/GY
2 P44 18LG/VT
3 P187 20LG/BR
4 Z911 20BK/OR
C316 (RHD POWER/HEATED SEAT) - LT. GRAY

(PASSENGER SEAT SIDE)
CAV CIRCUIT
1 P42 18LG/GY
2 P44 18LG/VT
3 P187 20LG/BR
4 Z911 20BK/OR
C317 (SATELLITE RADIO) - NATURAL (INSTRU-

MENT PANEL SIDE)
CAV CIRCUIT
1 D54 20WT
2 D55 20WT/OR
3 Z909 16BK/LG
4 A300 16GY/LG
5 X16 20DG/YL
6 X17 20DG/OR
7 X917 20DG
8 X926 20GY/OR
9 X521 20GY/LB
10 X522 20GY/DB
11 X910 20GY/DG
12 X510 20DG/LB
13 X511 20GY/LG
14 -
15 -
16 -
C317 (SATELLITE RADIO) - NATURAL (SATEL-

LITE RADIO JUMPER SIDE)
CAV CIRCUIT
1 D54 20WT
2 D55 20WT/OR
3 Z909 18BK/LG
4 A300 18GY/LG
5 X16 20DG/YL
6 X17 20DG/OR
7 X917 20DG
8 X926 20GY/OR (DVD)
9 X521 20GY/LB (DVD)
10 X522 20GY/DB (DVD)
11 X910 20GY/DG (DVD)
12 X510 20DG/LB (DVD)
13 X511 20GY/LG (DVD)
14 -
15 -
16 -
C318 (POLICE) - LT. GRAY (BODY SIDE)

CAV CIRCUIT
1 A100 16RD/WT
2 A101 16VT/RD
3 A102 16WT/RD
4 F100 16PK/VT
5 F101 16VT/PK
6 F102 16WT/PK
7 -
8 -
C318 (POLICE) - LT. GRAY (ACCESSORY

JUMPER SIDE)
CAV CIRCUIT
1 A100 16RD/WT
2 A101 16VT/RD
3 A102 16WT/RD
4 F100 16PK/VT
5 F101 16VT/PK
6 F102 16WT/PK
7 -
8 -
CAPACITOR-IGNITION-NO. 1 (2.7L/3.5L) - BLACK 1 WAY

1 K343 16BR/YL FUSED ASD RELAY OUTPUT 2
CAPACITOR-IGNITION-NO. 1 (SRT8) - BLACK 2 WAY

2 - -
CAPACITOR-IGNITION-NO. 2 (2.7L/5.7L) - BLACK 1 WAY

CLUSTER C1 - GRAY 26 WAY

1 - -
3 L307 20WT/BR HEADLAMP SWITCH MUX
4 E2 20OR/BR PANEL LAMPS DIMMER SIGNAL
5 G161 20VT/DG DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX
6 G160 20VT/LG PASSENGER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX
7 - -
8 - -
9 G76 20VT/YL RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE
10 G77 20VT/GY LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE
11 P1 20TN/LG DRIVER DOOR UNLOCK DRIVER
12 P393 20LG DOOR LOCK DRIVER
13 P392 20LG/DB DOOR LOCK DRIVER
18 B25 20GY/BK PARK BRAKE SWITCH SENSE
19 - -
20 B27 20DG/WT TRACTION CONTROL SWITCH SENSE
21 - -
22 G25 20VT/TN DECKLID/LIFTGATE RELEASE SWITCH SENSE
23 G78 22VT/OR DECKLID/LIFTGATE AJAR SWITCH SENSE
24 A110 16OR/RD FUSED B(+)
26 P303 20TN PASSENGER DOOR UNLOCK DRIVER
CLUSTER C2 - GRAY 16 WAY

1 N5 20DB/WT FUEL LEVEL SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL
3 R57 20LG/GY DRIVER SEAT BELT SWITCH SENSE
4 W113 20BR/YL REAR WIPER SWITCH MUX
5 L900 20WT/YL HEADLAMP SWITCH MUX RETURN
6 - -
7 P37 20LG/TN PASSENGER DOOR LOCK SWITCH RETURN
8 G900 20VT/OR IGNITION SWITCH SENSE RETURN
9 C105 18LB/LG (MTC) HVAC MUX CONTROL
10 - -
11 - -
12 G20 20VT/BR IGNITION SWITCH SENSE
13 G167 20VT/LB DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH RETURN
14 - -
15 G926 20VT/WT REAR WIPER SWITCH MUX RETURN
16 Z210 20BK GROUND
CLUSTER C3 - WHITE 26 WAY

1 W213 20BR/OR REAR WIPER INDICATOR DRIVER
2 E22 20OR/GY (ATC) INDICATOR DIMMER SIGNAL
2 E22 18OR/GY (MTC) INDICATOR DIMMER SIGNAL
3 G75 20VT DRIVER DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE
4 - -
5 - -
6 - -
7 P83 20TN/WT (HEATED SEATS) LEFT HEATED SEAT HIGH INDICATOR DRIVER
8 - -
9 P81 20TN/LB (HEATED SEATS) LEFT HEATED SEAT LOW INDICATOR DRIVER
10 P84 20TN/VT (HEATED SEATS) RIGHT HEATED SEAT HIGH INDICATOR DRIVER
11 E12 20OR/GY PANEL LAMPS DRIVER
12 M24 18YL/WT COURTESY LAMPS DRIVER
13 - -
14 A23 20RD/YL FUSED B(+) (I.O.D.)
15 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START)
16 G74 18VT/WT PASSENGER DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE
17 R58 20LB/GY (LHD) PASSENGER SEAT BELT SWITCH SENSE
18 P365 20LG/GY (HEATED SEATS) LEFT HEATED SEAT SWITCH SENSE
19 P366 20LG/LB (HEATED SEATS) RIGHT HEATED SEAT SWITCH SENSE
20 - -
21 - -
22 P82 20TN/DG (HEATED SEATS) RIGHT HEATED SEAT LOW INDICATOR DRIVER
23 - -
24 P31 20TN/YL DECKLID/LIFTGATE RELEASE DRIVER
25 M27 20YL/LB READING/RAIL LAMPS DRIVER
26 A917 16RD/TN (LHD EXCEPT POLICE) FUSED B(+)
26 A917 18RD/TN (RHD/POLICE) FUSED B(+)
CLUTCH-A/C COMPRESSOR (GAS) - BLACK 2 WAY

1 C3 18DB/YL A/C CLUTCH RELAY OUTPUT
CLUTCH-A/C COMPRESSOR (DIESEL) - BLACK 2 WAY

1 C3 18BL/DG A/C CLUTCH RELAY OUTPUT
2 Z925 18BR GROUND
COIL-IGNITION-NO. 1 (5.7L EARLY BUILD) - BLACK 2 WAY

2 K19 16DB/DG COIL CONTROL NO. 1
COIL-IGNITION-NO. 1 (3.5L LATE BUILD) - DK. GRAY 3 WAY

1 - -
COIL-IGNITION-NO. 1 (2.7L/3.5L EARLY BUILD) - BLACK 2 WAY

COIL-IGNITION-NO. 1 (5.7L LATE BUILD/SRT8) - BLACK 3 WAY

3 - -

2 K17 16DB/TN COIL CONTROL NO. 2

3 - -

1 - -


2 K18 16DB/LG COIL CONTROL NO. 3

1 - -


3 - -

2 K15 16DB/GY COIL CONTROL NO. 4

3 - -

1 - -


2 K16 16DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 5

1 - -


3 - -

2 K10 16DB/OR COIL CONTROL NO. 6

3 - -

1 - -



3 - -

3 - -

CONNECTOR-INTERFACE-POLICE/TAXI - NATURAL 24 WAY

1 W500 20BR/OR FRONT FLASHING LIGHTS SIGNAL
2 W501 20BR/VT REAR FLASHING LIGHTS SIGNAL
3 W511 20BR/WT POLICE RADIO INPUT SIGNAL
4 W512 20BR/VT SECURITY ALARM MUTE SIGNAL
5 W513 20BR/GY HORN MUTE SIGNAL
6 W514 20BR/YL FUEL LEVEL STATUS SIGNAL
7 W515 20BR/LB DRIVER SEAT BELT SWITCH SENSE
8 W516 20BR/DB MALFUNCTION INDICATOR SIGNAL
9 W517 20BR/LG SECURITY ALARM ON SIGNAL
10 W518 20BR/DG HORN SWITCH SENSE
11 W519 20BR/TN P/N SWITCH SENSE
12 W520 20BR/OR BRAKE LAMP SWITCH SENSE
13 W521 20BR/WT HEADLAMP SWITCH SENSE
14 W522 20BR/VT SIDE AIRBAG STATUS SIGNAL
15 W523 20BR/GY FRONT AIRBAG STATUS SIGNAL
16 Z384 20BK SIGNAL RETURN
17 W524 20BR/YL DRIVER DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE
18 W525 20BR/LB CLUSTER DIMMER SWITCH SENSE
19 W526 20BR/DB VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
20 W527 20BR/LG VSIM CAN B BUS (+)
21 W528 20BR/DG VSIM CAN B BUS (-)
22 W529 20BR/TN ENGINE RUNNING STATUS SIGNAL
23 - -
24 - -
CONNECTOR-POLICE ACCESSORIES (POLICE) - LT. GRAY 8 WAY

1 A100 16RD/WT FUSED B(+)
2 A101 16VT/RD FUSED B(+)
3 A102 16WT/RD FUSED B(+)
4 F100 16PK/VT POLICE NO. 1 RELAY OUTPUT
5 F101 16VT/PK POLICE NO. 3 RELAY OUTPUT
6 F102 16WT/PK POLICE NO. 2 RELAY OUTPUT
7 - -
8 - -
CONTROL-A/C-HEATER C1 (ATC) - GRAY 22 WAY

1 F500 20DG/PK FUSED RUN RELAY OUTPUT
3 Z909 20BK/LG GROUND
6 C115 20DB REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY CONTROL
8 G39 20VT/LB SUN SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL
9 G139 20VT/OR SUN SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL
10 L24 20WT/VT AUTO HEADLAMPS SIGNAL
11 G939 20VT/DB SUN SENSOR RETURN
12 - -
13 - -
14 - -
15 - -
16 - -
17 - -
18 - -
19 - -
20 - -
21 - -
22 - -
CONTROL-A/C-HEATER C1 (MTC) - BLACK 16 WAY

1 F23 20RD/OR (EARLY BUILD) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START)
1 F500 20DG/PK (LATE BUILD) FUSED RUN RELAY OUTPUT
4 C105 18LB/LG HVAC MUX CONTROL
5 C115 20DB REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY CONTROL
6 C850 20LB/VT BLOWER SWITCH POSITION SIGNAL
8 - -
9 E22 18OR/GY INDICATOR DIMMER SIGNAL
10 - -
11 - -
12 - -
13 - -
14 - -
15 - -
16 - -
CONTROL-A/C-HEATER C2 (ATC) - GRAY 16 WAY

3 - -
4 - -
7 C252 22LG/DB RIGHT BLEND DOOR DRIVER
8 C52 22DB/LG RIGHT BLEND DOOR COMMON DRIVER
9 C268 22YL/DB (EXCEPT SRT8 EARLY RECIRCULATION DOOR DRIVER
BUILD)
9 C268 20YL/DB (SRT8 EARLY BUILD) RECIRCULATION DOOR DRIVER
11 C21 20DB/LG EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL
12 C121 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND
13 C56 20DB/LB FRONT BLOWER CONTROL
14 - -
15 - -
16 - -
CONTROL-A/C-HEATER C2 (MTC) - GRAY 12 WAY

3 - -
4 - -
7 C268 20YL/DB RECIRCULATION DOOR DRIVER
11 - -
12 - -
CONTROL-A/C-HEATER C3 (MTC) - BLACK 10 WAY

1 C70 12DB/YL FRONT BLOWER HIGH SPEED
2 C850 20LB/VT BLOWER SWITCH POSITION SIGNAL
3 C73 12DB/VT FRONT BLOWER M2 SPEED
4 Z908 12BK/RD GROUND
5 - -
6 - -
7 - -
8 - -
9 C72 18DB/OR FRONT BLOWER M1 SPEED
10 C71 16DB/BR FRONT BLOWER LOW SPEED
DATA LINK CONNECTOR - BLACK 16 WAY

1 - -
2 - -
3 - -
6 D72 20WT/LB CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (+)
7 D21 20PK (EARLY BUILD) SCI TRANSMIT (ECM/PCM)
7 D21 20WT/BR (LATE BUILD) SCI TRANSMIT (ECM/PCM)
8 - -
9 D16 20WT/OR SCI RECEIVE (TCM)
10 - -
11 - -
12 D20 20WT/LG SCI RECEIVE (PCM)
13 - -
14 D71 20WT/DB CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (-)
15 D15 20WT/DG SCI TRANSMIT (TCM)
16 A106 20LB/RD FUSED B(+)
DISPLAY-PARK ASSIST (PARKTRONICS) - BLACK 3 WAY

1 X777 20DG/GY PARK ASSIST DISPLAY SUPPLY
2 Z171 20GY/BK PARK ASSIST DISPLAY GROUND
3 D777 20WT/DG PARK ASSIST DISPLAY SIGNAL
FAN-RADIATOR C1 - DK. GRAY 4 WAY

1 N24 12DG/DB RADIATOR FAN CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT
2 N210 12DB/DG RADIATOR FAN HIGH/LOW CONTROL FEED
3 N23 10DB/DG RADIATOR FAN HIGH RELAY OUTPUT
4 Z904 12BK/BR (EXCEPT POLICE/SRT8 GROUND
EXPORT)
4 Z401 12BK/DG (POLICE/SRT8 EXPORT) GROUND
FAN-RADIATOR C2 (AWD/DIESEL/SRT8 EXPORT) - DK. GRAY 2 WAY

1 K175 18BR/LB RADIATOR FAN RELAY COIL SIGNAL
2 A934 10RD FUSED B(+)
FAN-RADIATOR C2 (SRT8 EXCEPT EXPORT) - DK. GRAY 2 WAY

1 K175 18BR/LB RADIATOR FAN RELAY COIL SIGNAL
FLASHER-HEADLAMP C1 (POLICE) - LT. GRAY 6 WAY

1 L33 18WT/LG LEFT HIGH BEAM DRIVER
2 L34 18WT/GY RIGHT HIGH BEAM DRIVER
6 Z902 20BK/LB GROUND
FLASHER-HEADLAMP C2 (POLICE) - LT. GRAY 6 WAY

GENERATOR (DIESEL) - BLUE 2 WAY

1 D509 20WT/BL ECM LIN BUS
2 - -
GENERATOR (GAS) - BLACK 2 WAY

2 K20 18BR/GY GEN FIELD CONTROL
GENERATOR-EYELET - 1 WAY
1 A802 4RD B(+)
1 A802 12BK (DIESEL) B(+)
GLOW PLUG NO. 1 (DIESEL) - 1 WAY

1 A202 16BK/BL GLOW PLUG NO. 1 CONTROL

1 A203 16BK/VT GLOW PLUG NO. 2 CONTROL

1 A204 16BK/RD GLOW PLUG NO. 3 CONTROL

1 A208 16BK/YL GLOW PLUG NO. 4 CONTROL

1 A211 16BK/DG GLOW PLUG NO. 5 CONTROL

1 A216 16BK/WT GLOW PLUG NO. 6 CONTROL
HEATER-CABIN (DIESEL) - LT. GRAY 4 WAY

1 N113 10DB/OR PTC NO. 1 RELAY OUTPUT
2 N114 10DB/LB PTC NO. 2 RELAY OUTPUT
3 N115 10DB/YL PTC NO. 3 RELAY OUTPUT
4 - -
HEATER-CRANKCASE VENT (DIESEL) - BLACK 2 WAY

1 N116 18BR/VT CRANKCASE VENT HEATER CONTROL
2 K343 18RD/DG FUSED ASD RELAY OUTPUT 2
HEATER-SEAT BACK-LEFT - GRAY 2 WAY

1 P187 20LG/BR LEFT SEAT HEATER B(+) DRIVER
2 Z912 20BK/OR (LHD) GROUND
2 Z911 20BK/OR (RHD) GROUND
HEATER-SEAT BACK-RIGHT - GRAY 2 WAY

1 P188 20LG/VT RIGHT SEAT HEATER B(+) DRIVER
2 Z911 20BK/WT (LHD) GROUND
HEATER-SEAT CUSHION-LEFT - GREEN 2 WAY

2 Z912 20BK/OR (LHD) GROUND
HEATER-SEAT CUSHION-RIGHT - GREEN 2 WAY

HORN-NO. 1 - BLACK 1 WAY

1 X2 18DG/OR HORN RELAY OUTPUT
HORN-NO. 2 - BLACK 1 WAY

INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 1 (GAS) - BLACK 2 WAY

1 K11 20BR/YL INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 1
INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 1 (DIESEL) - BLACK 2 WAY

1 K611 16BK/BL FUEL INJECTOR NO. 1 LOW-SIDE CONTROL
2 K11 16BL FUEL INJECTOR NO. 1 HIGH-SIDE CONTROL

1 K612 16BK/VT FUEL INJECTOR NO. 2 LOW-SIDE CONTROL
2 K12 16BL/VT FUEL INJECTOR NO. 2 HIGH-SIDE CONTROL

1 K12 20BR/DB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 2

1 K13 20BR/LB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 3

1 K613 16BK/RD FUEL INJECTOR NO. 3 LOW-SIDE CONTROL
2 K13 16BL/RD FUEL INJECTOR NO. 3 HIGH-SIDE CONTROL

1 K614 16BK/YL FUEL INJECTOR NO. 4 LOW-SIDE CONTROL
2 K14 16BL/YL FUEL INJECTOR NO. 4 HIGH-SIDE CONTROL

1 K14 20BR/TN INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 4

1 K38 20BR/OR INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 5

1 K638 16BK/DG FUEL INJECTOR NO. 5 LOW-SIDE CONTROL
2 K38 16BL/DG FUEL INJECTOR NO. 5 HIGH-SIDE CONTROL

1 K658 16BK/WT FUEL INJECTOR NO. 6 LOW-SIDE CONTROL
2 K58 16BL/WT FUEL INJECTOR NO. 6 HIGH-SIDE CONTROL

1 K58 20BR/VT INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 6
INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 7 (5.7L/SRT8) - BLACK 2 WAY

INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 8 (5.7L/SRT8) - BLACK 2 WAY

LAMP-BACKUP-LEFT (300C) - GRAY 3 WAY

2 - -
3 L1 20WT/LG BACKUP LAMP FEED
LAMP-BACKUP-LEFT (300T) - GRAY 2 WAY

LAMP-BACKUP-LEFT (LX49) - LT. GRAY 2 WAY

1 Z914 20BK GROUND
2 L1 20VT/RD BACKUP LAMP FEED
LAMP-BACKUP-RIGHT (300C) - GRAY 3 WAY

2 - -
LAMP-BACKUP-RIGHT (300T) - GRAY 2 WAY

LAMP-BACKUP-RIGHT (LX49) - LT. GRAY 2 WAY

1 Z914 20BK GROUND
2 L1 20VT/RD BACKUP LAMP FEED
LAMP-CARGO (LX48 CHRYSLER) - BLACK 2 WAY

2 A117 20RD/DG FUSED B(+) (I.O.D.)
LAMP-CARGO (LX48 DODGE) - WHITE 2 WAY

LAMP-CARGO (LX49) - GRAY 3 WAY

2 - -
LAMP-CENTER HIGH MOUNTED STOP (LX48 CHRYSLER) - LT. GRAY 2 WAY

2 L53 20DG/WT (MK25) STOP LAMP INHIBIT RELAY OUTPUT
2 B29 20DG/WT (MK25E) BRAKE SWITCH SIGNAL
LAMP-CENTER HIGH MOUNTED STOP (LX48 DODGE) - BLACK 2 WAY

LAMP-CENTER HIGH MOUNTED STOP (LX49) - NATURAL 2 WAY

LAMP-COURTESY-LEFT FRONT DOOR (EXCEPT BASE) - WHITE 2 WAY

LAMP-COURTESY-LEFT REAR - BLACK 3 WAY

A M24 20YL/WT COURTESY LAMPS DRIVER
B Z909 20BK/LG GROUND
C M27 20YL/LB READING/RAIL LAMPS DRIVER
LAMP-COURTESY-RIGHT FRONT DOOR (EXCEPT BASE) - WHITE 2 WAY

LAMP-COURTESY-RIGHT REAR - BLACK 3 WAY

A M24 20YL/WT COURTESY LAMPS DRIVER
B Z909 20BK/LG GROUND
C M27 20YL/LB READING/RAIL LAMPS DRIVER
LAMP-DOME (POLICE) - BLACK 2 WAY

LAMP-FOG-LEFT FRONT - BLACK 2 WAY

A L89 20WT/YL (LX48 EXCEPT BASE) FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT
A L89 18WT/YL (LX49) FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT
B Z902 20BK/BR (LX48 EXCEPT BASE) GROUND
B Z902 18BK/LB (LX49) GROUND
LAMP-FOG-LEFT REAR (300C EXPORT) - GREEN 2 WAY

2 L90 18WT/OR REAR FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT
LAMP-FOG-LEFT REAR (LX49 EXPORT) - GRAY 2 WAY

LAMP-FOG-RIGHT FRONT - BLACK 2 WAY

A L89 20WT/YL (LX48 EXCEPT BASE) FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT
A L89 18WT/YL (LX49) FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT
B Z901 20BK/TN (LX48 EXCEPT BASE) GROUND
B Z901 18BK/DG (LX49) GROUND
LAMP-FOG-RIGHT REAR (300C EXPORT) - GREEN 2 WAY

LAMP-FOG-RIGHT REAR (LX49 EXPORT) - GRAY 2 WAY

LAMP-GLOVE BOX (EXCEPT POLICE) - BLACK 2 WAY

LAMP-HIGH BEAM-LEFT - BLACK 2 WAY

A L33 18WT/LG LEFT HIGH BEAM DRIVER
B Z902 18BK/LB GROUND
LAMP-HIGH BEAM-RIGHT - BLACK 2 WAY

A L34 18WT/GY RIGHT HIGH BEAM DRIVER
B Z901 18BK/DG GROUND
LAMP-HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE-LEFT (HID LAMPS) - DK. GRAY 6 WAY

1 L303 18WT/OR LEFT HID LAMP DRIVER
2 D205 20WT/DB (EXPORT) SCI RECEIVE (LEFT HID LAMP)
4 F500 20DG/PK (EXPORT) FUSED RUN RELAY OUTPUT
5 - -
6 L13 20WT/YL (EXPORT) HEADLAMP LEVEL SENSOR SIGNAL
LAMP-HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE-RIGHT (HID LAMPS) - DK. GRAY 6 WAY

1 L304 18OR/WT RIGHT HID LAMP DRIVER
2 D211 20WT/RD (EXPORT) SCI RECEIVE (RIGHT HID LAMP)
3 Z901 18BK/DG GROUND
4 F500 20DG/PK (EXPORT) FUSED RUN RELAY OUTPUT
5 - -
6 L13 20WT/YL (EXPORT) HEADLAMP LEVEL SENSOR SIGNAL
LAMP-LICENSE (EXCEPT 300C/EXPORT) - BLACK 2 WAY

1 L777 20WT/VT PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT
LAMP-LICENSE-LEFT (300C/EXPORT) - BLACK 2 WAY

LAMP-LICENSE-RIGHT (300C/EXPORT) - BLACK 2 WAY

LAMP-LOW BEAM-LEFT (EXCEPT HID LAMPS) - GRAY 2 WAY

A L43 18WT/DB LEFT LOW BEAM DRIVER
B Z902 18BK/LB GROUND
LAMP-LOW BEAM-RIGHT (EXCEPT HID LAMPS) - GRAY 2 WAY

A L44 18WT/TN RIGHT LOW BEAM DRIVER
B Z901 18BK/DG GROUND
LAMP-PARK/TURN-LEFT FRONT (300C EXCEPT EXPORT) - BLACK 3 WAY

3 L61 18WT/LG LEFT FRONT TURN SIGNAL CONTROL
LAMP-PARK/TURN-LEFT FRONT (300T/EXPORT) - BLACK 3 WAY

LAMP-PARK/TURN-LEFT FRONT (LX49 EXCEPT EXPORT) - BLACK 3 WAY

LAMP-PARK/TURN-RIGHT FRONT (300C EXCEPT EXPORT) - BLACK 3 WAY

3 L60 18WT/TN RIGHT FRONT TURN SIGNAL CONTROL
LAMP-PARK/TURN-RIGHT FRONT (300T/EXPORT) - BLACK 3 WAY

LAMP-PARK/TURN-RIGHT FRONT (LX49 EXCEPT EXPORT) - BLACK 3 WAY

LAMP-PRNDL - WHITE 3 WAY

2 - -
LAMP-READING-FRONT - NATURAL 4 WAY

1 - -
LAMP-SIDE MARKER-LEFT FRONT (LX48) - BLACK 2 WAY

LAMP-SIDE MARKER-LEFT REAR (300T) - BLACK 2 WAY

LAMP-SIDE MARKER-RIGHT FRONT (LX48) - BLACK 2 WAY

LAMP-SIDE MARKER-RIGHT REAR (300T) - BLACK 2 WAY

LAMP-SIDE REPEATER-LEFT (EXPORT) - BLACK 2 WAY

LAMP-SIDE REPEATER-RIGHT (EXPORT) - BLACK 2 WAY

LAMP-SPOT-LEFT (POLICE) - BLACK 2 WAY

A A931 18RD/WT FUSED B(+)
B - -
LAMP-SPOT-RIGHT (POLICE) - BLACK 2 WAY

A A930 18RD/LG FUSED B(+)
B - -
LAMP-TAIL PARK-LEFT (300C EXCEPT EXPORT) - GREEN 2 WAY

LAMP-TAIL PARK-RIGHT (300C EXCEPT EXPORT) - GREEN 2 WAY

LAMP-TAIL STOP/PARK-LEFT (300C) - BLACK 3 WAY

LAMP-TAIL STOP/PARK-RIGHT (300C) - BLACK 3 WAY

LAMP-TAIL STOP/TURN-LEFT (300T) - BLACK 3 WAY

3 L63 18WT/DG LEFT REAR TURN SIGNAL CONTROL
LAMP-TAIL STOP/TURN-RIGHT (300T) - BLACK 3 WAY

3 L62 18WT/YL RIGHT REAR TURN SIGNAL CONTROL
LAMP-TAIL TURN-LEFT (300C EXCEPT EXPORT) - GRAY 2 WAY

LAMP-TAIL TURN-LEFT (300C EXPORT) - NATURAL 2 WAY

LAMP-TAIL TURN-RIGHT (300C EXCEPT EXPORT) - GRAY 2 WAY

LAMP-TAIL TURN-RIGHT (300C EXPORT) - NATURAL 2 WAY

LAMP-TAIL/STOP-LEFT (LX49) - BROWN 4 WAY

1 L777 20BR PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT
2 Z914 20BK GROUND
3 Z914 20BK GROUND
4 L53 20BR/VT (MK25) STOP LAMP INHIBIT RELAY OUTPUT
4 B29 20BR/VT (MK25E) BRAKE SWITCH SIGNAL
LAMP-TAIL/STOP-RIGHT (LX49) - BROWN 4 WAY

1 L777 20BR PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT
2 Z914 20BK GROUND
3 Z914 20BK GROUND
4 L53 20BR/VT (MK25) STOP LAMP INHIBIT RELAY OUTPUT
4 B29 20BR/VT (MK25E) BRAKE SWITCH SIGNAL
LAMP-TURN-LEFT REAR (LX49) - TAN 4 WAY

1 - -
2 Z914 20BK GROUND
3 Z914 20BK GROUND
4 L63 18RD/OR LEFT REAR TURN SIGNAL CONTROL
LAMP-TURN-RIGHT REAR (LX49) - TAN 4 WAY

1 - -
2 Z914 20BK GROUND
3 Z914 20BK GROUND
4 L62 18RD/OR RIGHT REAR TURN SIGNAL CONTROL
LAMP-UNDERHOOD (POLICE) - BLACK 2 WAY

LAMP-VANITY-LEFT (EXCEPT POLICE) - BLACK 2 WAY

LAMP-VANITY-RIGHT (EXCEPT POLICE) - BLACK 2 WAY

LATCH-DOOR-DECKLID (LX48) - BLACK 3 WAY

1 Z911 20BK/WT (LHD EXCEPT POLICE) GROUND
1 Z911 20BK (RHD/POLICE) GROUND
2 G78 20VT/OR (LHD EXCEPT POLICE) DECKLID/LIFTGATE AJAR SWITCH SENSE
2 G78 20BK (RHD/POLICE) DECKLID/LIFTGATE AJAR SWITCH SENSE
3 P31 20TN/YL (LHD EXCEPT POLICE) DECKLID/LIFTGATE RELEASE DRIVER
3 P31 20BK (RHD/POLICE) DECKLID/LIFTGATE RELEASE DRIVER
LATCH-DOOR-DRIVER - BLACK 4 WAY

1 G75 20VT DRIVER DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE
3 P1 20TN/LG DRIVER DOOR UNLOCK DRIVER
LATCH-DOOR-LEFT REAR - BLACK 4 WAY

1 G77 20VT/GY LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE
2 Z912 20LG/BK GROUND
LATCH-DOOR-LIFTGATE (LX49) - BLACK 4 WAY

4 P31 20TN/YL DECKLID/LIFTGATE RELEASE DRIVER
LATCH-DOOR-PASSENGER - BLACK 4 WAY

1 G74 20VT/WT PASSENGER DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE
LATCH-DOOR-RIGHT REAR - BLACK 4 WAY

1 G76 20VT/YL RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE
LIGHTER-CIGAR - GRAY 3 WAY

1 A205 16RD/OR FUSED B(+)
2 - -
MEDIA SYSTEM-MONITOR/DVD - LT. GRAY 12 WAY

1 X510 20DG/LB DVD AUDIO RIGHT (+)
2 X926 20GY/OR AUX AUDIO COMMON
3 X521 20GY/LB AUX AUDIO LEFT (+)
4 - -
5 - -
6 A300 18GY/LG FUSED B(+) (I.O.D.)
7 X511 20GY/LG DVD AUDIO LEFT (+)
8 X910 20GY/DG DVD AUDIO COMMON
9 X522 20GY/DB AUX AUDIO RIGHT (+)
MIRROR-INSIDE REARVIEW C1 (EXCEPT BASE) - BLACK 7 WAY

1 F23 20BK/RD FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START)
3 L1 20BK/TN BACKUP LAMP FEED
4 P112 20BK/LB AUTO DAY/NIGHT MIRROR (+)
5 P114 20BK/DB AUTO DAY/NIGHT MIRROR (-)
6 - -
7 - -
MIRROR-INSIDE REARVIEW C2 (HANDS FREE) - BLACK 12 WAY

1 - -
2 - -
3 - -
4 X722 20BK/BR MICROPHONE 2 IN (+)
5 - -
6 X712 20BK/DG MICROPHONE 1 IN (+)
7 X793 20BK/GY MICROPHONE FEED
8 - -
9 X730 20BK/VT VOICE RECOGNITION/PHONE SWITCH SIGNAL
10 - -
11 X835 20BK/OR SENSOR GROUND
12 X792 20BK/YL MICROPHONE IN (-)
MIRROR-OUTSIDE REARVIEW-DRIVER (EXCEPT MEMORY) - NATURAL 8 WAY

1 P71 20TN/DG DRIVER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER
2 P76 20TN/LB MIRROR COMMON DRIVER
3 P75 20TN/LG DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER
4 C16 20DB/GY FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT
6 - -
7 - -
8 - -
MIRROR-OUTSIDE REARVIEW-DRIVER (MEMORY) - BLACK 12 WAY

2 P73 20TN/VT DRIVER MIRROR COMMON DRIVER
6 P145 20LG/OR DRIVER MIRROR POSITION SENSOR SUPPLY
7 P67 20TN/OR DRIVER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL
8 P114 20TN/WT (LHD) AUTO DAY/NIGHT MIRROR (-)
8 P110 20LG/WT (RHD) POWER FOLDING MIRROR RETURN
9 P65 20TN/VT DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL
10 P69 20TN/WT DRIVER MIRROR SENSOR GROUND
11 P112 20TN/OR (LHD) AUTO DAY/NIGHT MIRROR (+)
11 P699 20LG/DG (RHD) POWER FOLDING MIRROR DRIVER
12 - -
MIRROR-OUTSIDE REARVIEW-PASSENGER (EXCEPT MEMORY) - NATURAL 8 WAY

1 P72 20TN/GY PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER
2 P76 20TN/LB MIRROR COMMON DRIVER
3 P74 20TN/OR PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER
6 - -
7 - -
8 - -
MIRROR-OUTSIDE REARVIEW-PASSENGER (MEMORY) - BLACK 12 WAY

2 P70 20TN/LB PASSENGER MIRROR COMMON DRIVER
6 P146 20LG/DB PASSENGER MIRROR POSITION SENSOR SUPPLY
7 P64 20TN PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL
9 P68 20TN/YL PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIG-
NAL
10 P66 20TN/LG PASSENGER MIRROR SENSOR GROUND
12 - -
MODULE-ANTILOCK BRAKES - BLACK 47 WAY

1 A107 10TN/RD FUSED B(+)
2 - -
3 B137 20DG/BR (MK25) BRAKE PEDAL TRAVEL SENSOR SIGNAL
4 F202 20PK/GY (EXCEPT MK25E) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START)
4 B15 20DG/WT (MK25E) BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL
5 B937 20DG/BR (MK25) BRAKE PEDAL TRAVEL SENSOR RETURN
6 G4 20VT/LB (MK25) DYNAMICS SENSOR SUPPLY
7 B237 20DG/YL (MK25) BRAKE PEDAL TRAVEL SENSOR SUPPLY
8 F202 20PK/GY (MK25E) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START)
9 B16 20LB/DG (TCS) BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL
10 - -
11 D65 20WT/LG (EXCEPT MK25E) CAN C BUS (+)
12 D65 20WT/LG (MK25E) CAN C BUS (+)
13 D64 20WT/LB (MK25E) CAN C BUS (-)
14 - -
15 D64 20WT/LB (EXCEPT MK25E) CAN C BUS (-)
16 Z903 14BK/DG (EXCEPT MK25E) GROUND
16 Z903 10BK/DG (MK25E) GROUND
17 B131 20DG/YL (MK25) ACTIVE BRAKE BOOSTER SOLENOID (+)
18 B83 20DG/WT (MK25) BRAKE PRESSURE SENSOR SUPPLY
18 D52 20WT/LB (MK25E) DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK
19 B984 20DG/OR (MK25) BRAKE PRESSURE SENSOR RETURN
19 D51 20WT/BR (MK25E) DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK
20 B84 20DG/YL (MK25) BRAKE PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL
21 - -
22 G4 20VT/LB (MK25E) DYNAMICS SENSOR SUPPLY
23 - -
24 G94 20VT/DB (MK25) DYNAMICS SENSOR GROUND
25 D51 20WT/BR (MK25) DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK
26 - -
27 B135 20DG/LG (MK25) BRAKE PEDAL FORCE SWITCH OPEN
28 B136 20DG/LB (MK25) BRAKE PEDAL FORCE SWITCH SIGNAL
29 D52 20WT/LB (MK25) DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK
29 G94 20VT/DB (MK25E) DYNAMICS SENSOR GROUND
30 B134 20DG/YL (MK25) BRAKE PEDAL FORCE SWITCH CLOSE
31 B132 20DG/LB (MK25) ACTIVE BRAKE BOOSTER SOLENOID (-)
32 A111 14DG/RD FUSED B(+)
33 B6 20DG/WT RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL
34 B7 20DG/VT RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY
35 B121 20DG/DB (MK25) STOP LAMP INHIBIT RELAY CONTROL
36 B4 20DG/GY LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY
37 B3 20DG/YL LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL
38 B15 20DG/WT (TCS) BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL
39 - -
40 - -
41 - -
42 B1 20DG/OR RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL
43 B2 20DG/LB RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY
44 - -
45 B9 20DG/LG LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY
46 B8 20DG/TN LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL
MODULE-BRAKE (TRAILER TOW) - BLUE 4 WAY

2 B400 16DB TRAILER TOW ELECTRIC BRAKE OUTPUT
MODULE-CLOCK-ANALOG (EXCEPT POLICE) - NATURAL 4 WAY

4 - -
MODULE-DOOR-DRIVER C1 - BLACK 4 WAY

2 F881 14PK FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT
3 Q321 16OR/DB DRIVER WINDOW EXPRESS DOWN DRIVER
4 Q311 16OR/LB DRIVER WINDOW EXPRESS UP DRIVER
MODULE-DOOR-DRIVER C2 - BLACK 16 WAY

1 - -
2 A913 20RD/GY (EXCEPT MEMORY) FUSED B(+)
3 Z912 18BK/OR (EXCEPT MEMORY) GROUND
4 Q15 18OR/LB WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT
5 Q222 20OR/GY PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER EXPRESS SWITCH
MUX
6 - -
7 D54 20WT (EXCEPT MEMORY) CAN B BUS (-)
8 D55 20WT/OR (EXCEPT MEMORY) CAN B BUS (+)
9 - -
10 - -
11 Q221 20GY/OR DRIVER WINDOW DRIVER EXPRESS SWITCH MUX
12 Z421 20BK/BR DRIVER EXPRESS SWITCH RETURN
13 Z405 20BK DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR RETURN
14 Q303 20WT/OR DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR B SIGNAL
15 Q301 20OR/WT DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNAL
16 Q305 20OR DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR SUPPLY
MODULE-DOOR-DRIVER C3 (MEMORY) - GRAY 16 WAY

1 P550 20TN/LG MIRROR SWITCH SUPPLY
2 E55 20OR/DG MIRROR SWITCH ILLUMINATION DRIVER
3 - -
4 P703 20DB/LG MIRROR HORIZONTAL LEFT SWITCH SENSE
5 - -
6 P710 20LG MIRROR COMMON SWITCH SENSE
7 P705 20LG/OR MIRROR VERTICAL DOWN SWITCH SENSE
8 - -
9 P950 20TN/GY MIRROR SWITCH RETURN
10 G920 20VT/YL MEMORY SELECT SWITCH RETURN
11 - -
12 - -
13 G200 20VT/BR MEMORY SELECT SWITCH MUX
14 - -
15 P704 20LG/TN MIRROR HORIZONTAL RIGHT SWITCH SENSE
16 P706 20LG/GY MIRROR VERTICAL UP SWITCH SENSE
MODULE-DOOR-DRIVER C4 (MEMORY) - DK. GRAY 22 WAY

1 A913 20RD/GY FUSED B(+)
2 - -
3 P73 20TN/VT DRIVER MIRROR COMMON DRIVER
6 P65 20TN/VT DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL
7 P67 20TN/OR DRIVER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL
8 P145 20LG/OR DRIVER MIRROR POSITION SENSOR SUPPLY
9 - -
10 Z912 18BK/OR GROUND (DRIVER SIDE IDENTIFIER LHD/RHD)
11 - -
13 - -
14 - -
15 - -
16 - -
17 P69 20TN/WT DRIVER MIRROR SENSOR GROUND
20 - -
21 - -
22 - -
MODULE-DOOR-PASSENGER C1 - BLACK 4 WAY

3 Q322 16LG/OR PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS DOWN DRIVER
4 Q312 16DB/OR PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS UP DRIVER
MODULE-DOOR-PASSENGER C2 - BLACK 16 WAY

1 - -
3 - -
4 - -
5 Q336 20OR/GY PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH MUX
6 E34 20OR/TN PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH ILLUMINA-
TION DRIVER
7 D54 20WT (EXCEPT MEMORY) CAN B BUS (-)
8 D55 20WT/OR (EXCEPT MEMORY) CAN B BUS (+)
9 - -
10 - -
11 - -
12 Q936 20OR/LG PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH RETURN
13 Z404 20BK/LG PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR RETURN
14 Q304 20LG/OR PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR B SIGNAL
15 Q302 20OR/LG PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNAL
16 Q306 20OR/DB PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR SUPPLY
MODULE-DOOR-PASSENGER C4 (MEMORY) - DK. GRAY 22 WAY

2 - -
3 P70 20TN/LB PASSENGER MIRROR COMMON DRIVER
6 P68 20TN/YL PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIG-
NAL
7 P64 20TN PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL
8 P146 20LG/DB PASSENGER MIRROR POSITION SENSOR SUPPLY
9 - -
10 - -
11 - -
13 - -
14 - -
15 - -
16 - -
17 P66 20TN/LG PASSENGER MIRROR SENSOR GROUND
20 - -
21 - -
22 - -
MODULE-ELECTRONIC OVERHEAD - BLACK 6 WAY

5 F880 20PK (EXCEPT RHD SUNROOF) FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT
5 F880 20PK/DG (RHD SUNROOF) FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT
6 - -
MODULE-ELECTRONIC SHIFT C1 (COLUMN NAG1) - BLACK 12 WAY

1 - -
2 Z910 22BK GROUND
3 F902 22LB IGNITION UNLOCK-RUN-START
4 B29 22YL BRAKE SWITCH SIGNAL
5 D65 22LG/BK CAN C BUS (+)
6 D64 22GY CAN C BUS (-)
7 22YL AUTOSTICK SWITCH MUX SUPPLY
8 22GY AUTOSTICK SWITCH MUX SIGNAL
9 - -
10 22BK SHIFT LEVER POSITION SENSOR GROUND
11 22LB SHIFT LEVER POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL
12 22LG/BK SHIFT LEVER POSITION SENSOR SUPPLY
MODULE-ELECTRONIC SHIFT C2 (COLUMN NAG1) - BLACK 2 WAY

1 K321 24BK BTSI SOLENOID CONTROL
2 F902 24BK IGNITION UNLOCK-RUN-START
MODULE-ENGINE CONTROL C1 (DIESEL) - BLACK 96 WAY

1 K11 16BL FUEL INJECTOR NO. 1 HIGH-SIDE CONTROL
2 K12 16BL/VT FUEL INJECTOR NO. 2 HIGH-SIDE CONTROL
3 K13 16BL/RD FUEL INJECTOR NO. 3 HIGH-SIDE CONTROL
4 - -
5 - -
6 K902 20GY/WT O2 1/1 PUMP CELL CURRENT TRIM
7 K844 20RD/VT CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR 5 VOLT SUPPLY
8 K900 20BR/RD INLET AIR PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND
9 K934 20OR EXHAUST GAS PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND
10 K944 20BR/DG CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR GROUND
11 K312 20GY/OR EGR AIR FLOW CONTROL VALVE POSITION SENSOR
SIGNAL
12 N116 18BR/VT CRANKCASE VENT HEATER CONTROL
13 - -
14 - -
15 K853 20RD/VT CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR 5 VOLT SUPPLY
16 - -
17 - -
18 F858 20GY/YL EXHAUST GAS PRESSURE SENSOR 5 VOLT SUPPLY
19 K356 20RD/BK BOOST PRESSURE SENSOR 5 VOLT SUPPLY
20 N117 20GY INTAKE SWIRL SERVO MOTOR CONTROL
21 - -
22 X635 20GY/DG BOOST PRESSURE SERVO MOTOR CONTROL
23 K369 18RD/GY FUEL PRESSURE SOLENOID 12 VOLT SUPPLY
24 K315 20GY/PK EGR AIR FLOW CONTROL VALVE MOTOR (-)
25 K14 16BL/YL FUEL INJECTOR NO. 4 HIGH-SIDE CONTROL
26 K38 16BL/DG FUEL INJECTOR NO. 5 HIGH-SIDE CONTROL
27 K58 16BL/WT FUEL INJECTOR NO. 6 HIGH-SIDE CONTROL
28 K960 18BR/VT INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND
29 - -
30 - -
31 K41 20DG/BK O2 1/1 REFERENCE SIGNAL
32 - -
33 K44 20YL/GY CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL
34 K358 20GY/BL OIL LEVEL SWITCH SIGNAL
35 - -
36 - -
37 K957 18BR MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR GROUND
38 - -
39 G224 20YL/GY OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL
40 F851 20DG OIL PRESSURE SENSOR 5 VOLT SUPPLY
41 K313 20DG/GY EGR AIR FLOW CONTROL VALVE POSITION SENSOR
SUPPLY
42 K668 20BR/BK INLET AIR PRESSURE SENSOR 5 VOLT SUPPLY
43 K350 20RD/WT FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR 5 VOLT SUPPLY
44 - -
45 - -
46 - -
47 K366 18BK/BL/DG FUEL QUANTITY SOLENOID 12 VOLT SUPPLY
48 K99 16GY/BR O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL
49 K638 16BK/DG FUEL INJECTOR NO. 5 LOW-SIDE CONTROL
50 K611 16BK/BL FUEL INJECTOR NO. 1 LOW-SIDE CONTROL
51 K658 16BK/WT FUEL INJECTOR NO. 6 LOW-SIDE CONTROL
52 K222 20BR/RD ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND
53 Z753 16BR/BK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR GROUND

54 - -
55 - -
56 K914 20BL/DG FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND
57 Z42 20DG/BL O2 1/1 NEGATIVE CURRENT CONTROL
58 - -
59 - -
60 K2 20DG/RD ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL
61 K156 20BL/RD FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL
62 K916 20BR/WT PRE-CATALYST EXHAUST GAS TEMPERATURE SEN-
SOR GROUND
63 K915 20BR/WT POST-CATALYST EXHAUST GAS TEMPERATURE SEN-
SOR GROUND
64 K359 20GY/BR FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND
65 K181 20DG/VT FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL
66 K157 20BL/YL MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR SIGNAL
67 K390 20DG/PK EGR AIR FLOW CONTROL VALVE POSITION SENSOR
RETURN
68 - -
69 - -
70 - -
71 K34 20GY/YL EGR SOLENOID CONTROL
72 K314 20GY/RD EGR AIR FLOW CONTROL VALVE MOTOR (+)
73 K612 16BK/VT FUEL INJECTOR NO. 2 LOW-SIDE CONTROL
74 K613 16BK/RD FUEL INJECTOR NO. 3 LOW-SIDE CONTROL
75 K614 16BK/YL FUEL INJECTOR NO. 4 LOW-SIDE CONTROL
76 Z36 20YL/DG OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND
77 K24 16DG/WT CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL
78 K936 20GY/PK OIL PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND
79 - -
80 K43 20GY/RD O2 1/1 POSITIVE CURRENT CONTROL
81 K35 20GY/BK EXHAUST GAS PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL
82 K37 20GY/YL BOOST PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL
83 K352 20YL PRE-CATALYST EXHAUST GAS TEMPERATURE SEN-
SOR SIGNAL
84 K21 20DG/WT INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL
85 K68 20RD/BL INLET AIR PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL
86 - -
87 K656 20BR/GY BOOST PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND
89 K353 20YL/WT POST-CATALYST EXHAUST GAS TEMPERATURE SEN-
SOR SIGNAL
90 K362 20DG/YL INLET AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL
91 - -
92 - -
93 K370 18BK/WT FUEL PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL
94 K365 18YL/BK FUEL QUANTITY SOLENOID CONTROL
95 - -
96 - -

1 K344 14BR/GY FUSED ASD RELAY OUTPUT 3
5 K342 14BR/WT FUSED ASD RELAY OUTPUT 1
7 K167 16BR/YL ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR NO. 1 GROUND
8 - -
9 - -
10 - -
11 K355 18BR/DG EXHAUST DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL
12 K29 20WT/BR ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL
13 - -
14 G6 20VT/GY OIL PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL
15 F855 20PK/YL ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR NO. 1 5 VOLT SUPPLY
16 K354 18BR/LG EXHAUST DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSOR 5 VOLT SUPPLY
17 F856 20YL/PK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR NO. 2 5 VOLT SUPPLY
18 - -
19 - -
20 - -
21 - -
22 - -
23 - -
24 K23 20BR/WT ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL
25 - -
26 - -
27 - -
28 - -
29 - -
30 K951 20BR/DB EXHAUST DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND
31 - -
32 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP RELAY CONTROL
33 - -
34 - -
35 - -
36 - -
37 - -
38 - -
39 - -
40 K400 20BR/VT ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR NO. 2 GROUND
42 K51 20BR/WT ASD RELAY CONTROL
43 D21 20WT/BR SCI TRANSMIT (ECM/PCM)
44 T752 20DG/OR STARTER RELAY CONTROL
45 - -
46 - -
47 - -
48 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (START)
49 - -
50 - -
53 - -
54 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH RELAY CONTROL
55 K363 20OR/BR PTC NO. 3 RELAY CONTROL
56 - -
57 - -
58 - -
MODULE-FRONT BLOWER POWER C1 (ATC) - BLACK 4 WAY

1 - -
2 Z908 12BK GROUND
3 C56 20DB/LB FRONT BLOWER CONTROL
4 C7 12DB FUSED RUN RELAY OUTPUT
MODULE-FRONT BLOWER POWER C2 (ATC) - BLACK 2 WAY

1 C7 12DB BLOWER MOTOR SUPPLY
MODULE-FRONT CONTROL C1 - BLACK 24 WAY

4 - -
5 D72 20WT/LB CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (+)
6 D71 20WT/DB CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (-)
7 - -
10 B20 20DG/OR BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE
11 C18 20LB/BR A/C PRESSURE TRANSDUCER SIGNAL
12 B6 20DG/WT (EXCEPT ABS) RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL
13 L91 20WT/DB HAZARD SWITCH SENSE
14 W17 20BR/LG (LX49) REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE
15 B7 20DG/VT (EXCEPT ABS) RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY
16 F891 20PK/GY 5 VOLT SUPPLY
17 - -
18 W1 20BR/TN WASHER FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE
19 - -
20 - -
22 Z902 18BK/LB (DODGE SRT8) GROUND
22 Z902 20BK/LB (EXCEPT DODGE SRT8) GROUND
23 G70 20VT/LB (EXPORT) HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE
24 - -
MODULE-FRONT CONTROL C2 - BLACK 12 WAY

1 L44 18WT/TN RIGHT LOW BEAM DRIVER
2 - -
3 - -
4 G31 20VT/LG AAT SIGNAL
5 G931 20VT/BR SENSOR GROUND
6 L43 18WT/DB (EXCEPT HID LAMPS) LEFT LOW BEAM DRIVER
9 - -
11 - -
MODULE-FRONT CONTROL IPM - BLACK 49 WAY

1 - -
2 A906 FUSED B(+)
3 A902 FUSED B(+)
4 A901 FUSED B(+)
5 A903 FUSED B(+)
6 - -
7 L1 BACKUP LAMP FEED
8 - -
9 - -
10 W24 (HID LAMPS) HEADLAMP WASHER RELAY CONTROL
11 W20 (LX49) REAR WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL
12 W10 FRONT WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL
13 F902 IGNITION UNLOCK-RUN-START
14 K361 (DIESEL) PTC NO. 2 RELAY CONTROL
15 X13 FUSED B(+) (I.O.D.)
16 K360 (DIESEL) PTC NO. 1 RELAY CONTROL
17 F202 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START)
18 Z901 GROUND
19 - -
20 - -
21 L239 (EXPORT) REAR FOG LAMP RELAY CONTROL
22 F923 RUN RELAY CONTROL
23 - -
24 - -
25 Z901 GROUND
26 L139 FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY CONTROL
27 W5 WIPER ON/OFF RELAY CONTROL
28 W12 (LX49) REAR WIPER RELAY CONTROL
29 W2 WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY CONTROL
30 K542 ASD RELAY OUTPUT
31 W7 FRONT WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE
32 - -
33 Z901 GROUND
34 L62 RIGHT REAR TURN SIGNAL CONTROL
35 C918 A/C PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND
36 - -
37 - -
MODULE-FRONT CONTROL IPM - BLACK 49 WAY

38 P307 ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY CONTROL
39 N201 RADIATOR FAN CONTROL RELAY CONTROL
40 - -
41 Z901 GROUND
42 - -
43 L63 LEFT REAR TURN SIGNAL CONTROL
44 - -
45 N112 RADIATOR FAN HIGH RELAY CONTROL
46 P201 (EXCEPT MEMORY) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY CONTROL
47 X4 HORN RELAY CONTROL
48 L177 PARK LAMP RELAY CONTROL
49 K175 (AWD/SRT8/DIESEL) RADIATOR FAN RELAY COIL SIGNAL
MODULE-FUEL PUMP - BLACK 5 WAY

2 Z210 20BK GROUND
5 N1 16DB/OR FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT
MODULE-GLOW PLUG (DIESEL) - 12 WAY

1 A202 16BK/BL GLOW PLUG NO. 1 CONTROL
2 A203 16BK/VT GLOW PLUG NO. 2 CONTROL
3 A204 16BK/RD GLOW PLUG NO. 3 CONTROL
4 A208 16BK/YL GLOW PLUG NO. 4 CONTROL
6 Z917 18BR GROUND
7 A211 16BK/DG GLOW PLUG NO. 5 CONTROL
8 A216 16BK/WT GLOW PLUG NO. 6 CONTROL
9 - -
10 - -
11 - -
MODULE-GLOW PLUG-EYELET (DIESEL) - 1 WAY

1 A802 7RD B(+)
MODULE-HANDS FREE - DK. GRAY 22 WAY

2 - -
3 - -
5 X722 22LB/DG MICROPHONE 2 IN (+)
6 - -
7 - -
8 X703 22DG/OR LEFT AUDIO OUTPUT
9 X704 22DG/YL RIGHT AUDIO OUTPUT
10 X795 20DG COMMON AUDIO OUTPUT
11 - -
12 - -
13 - -
15 X730 20GY/YL VOICE RECOGNITION/PHONE SWITCH SIGNAL
16 X712 22DG/LB MICROPHONE 1 IN (+)
17 X792 22LB/DG MICROPHONE IN (-)
18 - -
19 - -
20 X793 22DG/YL MICROPHONE FEED
21 X835 20OR/GY SENSOR GROUND
MODULE-HEADLAMP LEVELING (EXPORT) - BLACK 6 WAY

2 D205 20WT/DB SCI RECEIVE (LEFT HID LAMP)
5 D211 20WT/RD SCI RECEIVE (RIGHT HID LAMP)
MODULE-HEATED SEATS - BLACK 6 WAY

2 A33 14RD/YL FUSED B(+)
MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C1 - GREEN 26 WAY

2 - -
3 - -
4 - -
5 C13 20LB/OR (GAS) A/C CLUTCH RELAY CONTROL
6 C3 18DB/YL (GAS) A/C CLUTCH RELAY OUTPUT
7 L303 18WT/OR (HID LAMPS) LEFT HID LAMP DRIVER
8 A111 14DG/RD (ABS) FUSED B(+)
9 - -
10 - -
11 - -
12 - -
13 - -
14 L45 16WT/OR (HID LAMPS) FUSED B(+)
15 L304 18OR/WT (HID LAMPS) RIGHT HID LAMP DRIVER
19 C918 20BK/LB A/C PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND
20 F923 20PK/YL RUN RELAY CONTROL
21 - -
23 L239 20WT/DG (EXPORT) REAR FOG LAMP RELAY CONTROL
24 K175 18BR/LB (AWD/SRT8/DIESEL) RADIATOR FAN RELAY COIL SIGNAL
25 W12 20BR/OR (LX49) REAR WIPER RELAY CONTROL
26 - -
MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C2 - LT. GRAY 4 WAY

1 N24 12DG/DB RADIATOR FAN CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT
3 N210 12DB/DG RADIATOR FAN HIGH/LOW CONTROL FEED
4 N23 10DB/DG RADIATOR FAN HIGH RELAY OUTPUT
MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C3 - BLACK 15 WAY

1 - -
2 P307 20LG/GY ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY CONTROL
5 A934 10RD (AWD/SRT8/DIESEL) FUSED B(+)
7 A904 16RD (EXCEPT SRT8 EXCEPT FUSED B(+)
HID LAMPS)
8 - -
9 Z904 20BK/BR (2.7L/3.5L) GROUND
9 C13 20LB/OR (DIESEL) A/C CLUTCH RELAY CONTROL
11 - -
12 W3 14BR/WT FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY LOW SPEED OUT-
PUT
13 T16 16YL/OR (2.7L/3.5L) TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT
14 T16 16YL/OR (2.7L/3.5L) TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT
14 C3 18DB/YL (DIESEL) A/C CLUTCH RELAY OUTPUT
15 T15 20YL/BR (2.7L/3.5L) TRANSMISSION CONTROL
15 K343 18BR/YL (DIESEL) FUSED ASD RELAY OUTPUT 2

1 L45 16WT/OR (HID LAMPS) FUSED B(+)
2 - -
3 W24 20BR/OR (HID LAMPS) HEADLAMP WASHER RELAY CONTROL
4 - -
5 - -
6 - -
7 - -
8 A107 10TN/RD (ABS) FUSED B(+)
9 - -
10 A72 20RD/OR ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY OUTPUT
11 Z904 20BK/BR (HID LAMPS EXCEPT GROUND
SRT8 EARLY BUILD)
11 Z901 20BK/DG (HID LAMPS SRT8 GROUND
EARLY BUILD)
12 L44 18WT/TN (HID LAMPS) RIGHT LOW BEAM DRIVER
13 - -
14 - -
15 - -
16 - -

17 - -
18 - -
19 L89 18WT/YL (FOG LAMPS) FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT
20 W10 20BR FRONT WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL
21 - -
22 F902 20PK IGNITION UNLOCK-RUN-START
23 - -
25 - -
26 W4 14BR/OR FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY HIGH SPEED OUT-
PUT
MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C5 - BLUE 26 WAY

1 - -
2 - -
3 T751 20YL (GAS) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (START)
5 T750 16YL/GY STARTER RELAY OUTPUT
6 A209 18RD (GAS) FUSED B(+)
7 - -
8 - -
9 K361 20WT/BR (DIESEL) PTC NO. 2 RELAY CONTROL
10 K360 20GY/BR (DIESEL) PTC NO. 1 RELAY CONTROL
12 W7 20BR/GY FRONT WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE
13 - -
14 - -
16 A22 16RD/WT (EXCEPT BASE/SRT8) FUSED B(+)
17 K342 14BR/WT (DIESEL) FUSED ASD RELAY OUTPUT 1
17 K342 16BR/WT (GAS) FUSED ASD RELAY OUTPUT 1
18 - -
19 - -
21 - -
23 W20 20BR/YL (LX49) REAR WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL
24 - -
25 K344 14BR/GY (DIESEL) FUSED ASD RELAY OUTPUT 3
26 K343 14BR/YL (DIESEL) FUSED ASD RELAY OUTPUT 2
26 K343 16BR/YL (GAS) FUSED ASD RELAY OUTPUT 2
MODULE-INTERFACE-POLICE/TAXI C1 - GRAY 12 WAY

4 - -
5 - -
6 - -
8 - -
9 - -
10 - -
11 - -
12 - -
MODULE-INTERFACE-POLICE/TAXI C2 - DK. GRAY 22 WAY

1 W500 20BR/OR FRONT FLASHING LIGHTS SIGNAL
2 W501 20BR/VT REAR FLASHING LIGHTS SIGNAL
3 W511 20BR/WT POLICE RADIO INPUT SIGNAL
4 W512 20BR/VT SECURITY ALARM MUTE SIGNAL
5 W513 20BR/GY HORN MUTE SIGNAL
6 W514 20BR/YL FUEL LEVEL STATUS SIGNAL
7 W515 20BR/LB DRIVER SEAT BELT SWITCH SENSE
8 W516 20BR/DB MALFUNCTION INDICATOR SIGNAL
9 W517 20BR/LG SECURITY ALARM ON SIGNAL
10 W518 20BR/DG HORN SWITCH SENSE
11 W519 20BR/TN P/N SWITCH SENSE
12 W520 20BR/OR BRAKE LAMP SWITCH SENSE
13 W521 20BR/WT HEADLAMP SWITCH SENSE
14 W522 20BR/VT SIDE AIRBAG STATUS SIGNAL
15 W523 20BR/GY FRONT AIRBAG STATUS SIGNAL
16 Z384 20BK SIGNAL RETURN
17 W524 20BR/YL DRIVER DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE
18 W525 20BR/LB CLUSTER DIMMER SWITCH SENSE
19 W526 20BR/DB VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
20 W527 20BR/LG VSIM CAN B BUS (+)
21 W528 20BR/DG VSIM CAN B BUS (-)
22 W529 20BR/TN ENGINE RUNNING STATUS SIGNAL
MODULE-INTRUSION TRANSCEIVER (RHD) - BLACK 12 WAY

2 - -
3 A645 20RD/VT INTRUSION TRANSMITTER SENSOR SIGNAL
4 G460 20DG/VT INTRUSION RECEIVER SENSOR SIGNAL
5 D96 20WT/LB SIREN SIGNAL CONTROL
8 - -
9 G945 20VT/DG INTRUSION TRANSMITTER SENSOR GROUND
10 G946 20LG/VT INTRUSION RECEIVER SENSOR GROUND
11 - -
MODULE-MEMORY SEAT C1 - BLACK 14 WAY

1 P205 16LG/WT (LHD ADJUSTABLE ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD
PEDALS)
2 P206 16LG/LB (LHD ADJUSTABLE ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR REARWARD
PEDALS)
3 P153 16TN/DG (LHD) TILT STEERING MOTOR UP/DOWN DRIVER
4 P157 16LB/TN (LHD) TELESCOPE STEERING MOTOR FORWARD/REAR-
WARD DRIVER
6 P953 16DG/TN (LHD) STEERING MOTOR COMMON
9 G13 18VT/LB (LHD ADJUSTABLE PED- ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SUPPLY
ALS)
11 P152 20TN/LB (LHD) TELESCOPE STEERING FORWARD/REARWARD POSI-
TION SENSE
12 G914 20VT/GY (LHD) SENSOR RETURN
13 P151 20TN/OR (LHD) TILT STEERING UP/DOWN POSITION SENSE
14 G14 18VT/DB (LHD ADJUSTABLE PED- ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SIGNAL
ALS)
MODULE-MEMORY SEAT C2 - BLACK 6 WAY

1 G493 20OR/VT DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSOR
GROUND
2 P141 18LG/BR DRIVER SEAT RECLINER UP DRIVER
3 - -
4 P143 18LG/GY DRIVER SEAT RECLINER DOWN DRIVER
5 G403 20VT/OR DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSE
6 - -
MODULE-MEMORY SEAT C3 - NATURAL 14 WAY

1 G404 20VT/YL DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSE
2 G402 20VT/DB DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSE
3 G401 20VT/LG DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSE
4 G494 20YL/VT DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL SENSOR GROUND
5 G492 20LB/VT DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL SENSOR GROUND
6 G491 20VT/GY DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL SENSOR GROUND
7 - -
8 P115 16LG DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER
9 P117 16LG/LB DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER
10 P113 18LG/WT DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL DOWN DRIVER
11 - -
12 P111 18LG/YL DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL UP DRIVER
13 P121 18LG/DB DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL DOWN DRIVER
14 P119 18LG/DG DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL UP DRIVER
MODULE-MEMORY SEAT C4 - WHITE 6 WAY

1 P599 20LG/TN DRIVER SEAT SWITCH MUX RETURN
2 P239 20LG/WT DRIVER SEAT SWITCH REAR VERTICAL/HORIZONTAL
SWITCH MUX
3 P339 20LG/DB DRIVER SEAT SWITCH FRONT VERTICAL/RECLINER
SWITCH MUX
4 - -
5 - -
6 P9 20LG/OR DRIVER SEAT SWITCH SUPPLY
MODULE-MEMORY SEAT C5 (ADJUSTABLE PEDALS) - BLACK 6 WAY

1 - -
2 - -
3 - -
4 Q102 20OR/LB ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SWITCH FORWARD
5 Q103 20OR/LG ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SWITCH REARWARD
6 Q101 20OR/LB ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SWITCH GROUND
MODULE-OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION C1 (EXCEPT EXPORT) - BLACK 10 WAY

2 F201 20PK/OR FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START)
3 - -
6 - -
7 R263 20LB/VT DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR VOLTAGE
8 - -
9 R261 20LB/WT DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR DATA
MODULE-OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION C2 (EXCEPT EXPORT) - BLACK 12 WAY

1 R701 20LG SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 5 VOLT
2 - -
3 R717 20LG/DG SEAT WEIGHT LEFT FRONT SENSOR SIGNAL
4 - -
5 R718 20LB/DG SEAT WEIGHT RIGHT FRONT SENSOR SIGNAL
6 - -
7 R706 20LB/OR SEAT WEIGHT RIGHT REAR SENSOR SIGNAL
8 - -
9 R705 20LG/OR SEAT WEIGHT LEFT REAR SENSOR SIGNAL
10 - -
11 - -
12 R728 20LB/YL SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR GROUND
MODULE-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER C1 - YELLOW 32 WAY

1 R53 20LG/YL DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 2
2 R55 20LG/DG DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1
3 R56 20LB/DG PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1
4 R54 20LB/YL PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 2
5 - -
6 - -
7 - -
8 - -
9 - -
10 - -
11 - -
12 - -
13 R261 20LB/WT (EXPORT) DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR DATA
14 - -
15 R13 20LG/TN (SIDE AIRBAGS) LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL
16 R16 20BR/LG (SIDE AIRBAGS) RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND
17 R263 20LB/VT (EXPORT) DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR VOLTAGE
18 - -
19 R15 20LG/BR (SIDE AIRBAGS) LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND
20 R19 20LG/WT (SIDE AIRBAGS) LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 GROUND
21 R20 20WT/LG (SIDE AIRBAGS) RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 GROUND
22 R17 20LG (SIDE AIRBAGS) LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 SIGNAL
23 R18 20LB (SIDE AIRBAGS) RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 SIGNAL
24 R14 20TN/LG (SIDE AIRBAGS) RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL
25 R1 20LB/WT (SIDE AIRBAGS) LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2
26 R3 20LB/OR (SIDE AIRBAGS) LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1
27 R4 20OR/LB (SIDE AIRBAGS) RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1
28 R2 20WT/LB (SIDE AIRBAGS) RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2
29 - -
30 - -
31 - -
32 - -
MODULE-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER C2 - YELLOW 32 WAY

5 R42 20LB/BR PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 2
6 R44 20LB/OR PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 1
7 R64 20LB/WT PASSENGER SQUIB 2 LINE 1
8 R62 20LB/VT PASSENGER SQUIB 2 LINE 2
9 G104 20VT/GY (EARLY BUILD) PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR DRIVER
10 - -
11 - -
12 R82 20WT/LB RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND
13 - -
14 - -
16 F201 20PK/OR FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START)
17 - -
18 - -
19 - -
20 R81 20LB/WT LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND
21 - -
24 F214 20PK/LG FUSED RUN RELAY OUTPUT
25 R79 20LB/VT LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL
26 R80 20VT/LB RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL
27 - -
28 - -
29 - -
30 - -
31 - -
32 - -
MODULE-PARK ASSIST (PARKTRONICS) - BLACK 18 WAY

1 - -
2 - -
3 D703 20WT/BK PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 9 SIGNAL
4 D700 20WT/GY PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 7 SIGNAL
7 - -
8 X750 20GY/LB PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND
9 Z171 20GY/BK PARK ASSIST DISPLAY GROUND
23 D704 20WT/DB PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 10 SIGNAL
24 D701 20WT/LB PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 8 SIGNAL
25 D777 20WT/DG PARK ASSIST DISPLAY SIGNAL
26 - -
27 - -
28 X700 20GY/OR PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY
29 X777 20DG/GY PARK ASSIST DISPLAY SUPPLY
MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C1 - BLACK/BLACK 38 WAY

1 K98 16DB/YL (5.7L/SRT8) COIL CONTROL NO. 8
2 - -
3 K97 16DB/YL (5.7L/SRT8) COIL CONTROL NO. 7
4 K28 20BR/LB (5.7L/SRT8) INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 8
5 K26 20BR/YL (5.7L/SRT8) INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 7
6 - -
7 - -
8 - -
10 - -
12 F902 20PK (RLE) IGNITION UNLOCK-RUN-START
13 - -
14 - -
15 - -
16 K236 20DB/LG (3.5L) SRV CONTROL
17 - -
19 - -
20 G6 20VT/GY ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL
21 - -
22 - -
23 - -
24 - -
25 D20 20WT/LG SCI RECEIVE (PCM)
26 D16 20WT/OR (EXCEPT SRT8) SCI RECEIVE (TCM)
28 K452 20BR/LB (5.7L MDS) MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 4
29 A209 18RD FUSED B(+)
30 T751 20YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (START)
31 K141 20DB/YL O2 1/2 SIGNAL
32 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWN)
33 K243 20BR O2 2/2 SIGNAL
36 D21 20WT/BR SCI TRANSMIT (ECM/PCM)
37 D15 20WT/DG (EXCEPT SRT8) SCI TRANSMIT (TCM)
38 - -
MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C2 - BLACK/ORANGE 38 WAY

1 K10 18DB/OR (3.5L LATE BUILD) COIL CONTROL NO. 6
1 K10 16DB/OR (EXCEPT 3.5L LATE COIL CONTROL NO. 6
BUILD)
2 K16 18DB/YL (3.5L LATE BUILD) COIL CONTROL NO. 5
2 K16 16DB/YL (EXCEPT 3.5L LATE COIL CONTROL NO. 5
BUILD)
3 K15 18DB/GY (3.5L LATE BUILD) COIL CONTROL NO. 4
3 K15 16DB/GY (EXCEPT 3.5L LATE COIL CONTROL NO. 4
BUILD)
4 K58 20BR/VT INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 6
5 K38 20BR/OR INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 5
6 K124 18DB/GY ETC MOTOR (+)
7 K18 18DB/LG (3.5L LATE BUILD) COIL CONTROL NO. 3
7 K18 16DB/LG (EXCEPT 3.5L LATE COIL CONTROL NO. 3
BUILD)
8 K35 20DB/VT (EXCEPT SRT8) EGR SOL CONTROL
9 K17 18DB/TN (3.5L LATE BUILD) COIL CONTROL NO. 2
9 K17 16DB/TN (EXCEPT 3.5L LATE COIL CONTROL NO. 2
BUILD)
10 K19 18DB/DG (3.5L LATE BUILD) COIL CONTROL NO. 1
10 K19 16DB/DG (EXCEPT 3.5L LATE COIL CONTROL NO. 1
BUILD)
11 K14 20BR/TN INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 4
13 K12 20BR/DB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 2
15 K922 18BR/DB TP SENSOR RETURN
16 K136 18BR (2.7L/3.5L) MTV CONTROL
16 K453 20BR/DG (5.7L MDS) MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 6
17 K199 20BR/VT O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL
18 K99 20BR/LG O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL
19 K20 18BR/GY GEN FIELD CONTROL
20 K2 20VT/OR ECT SIGNAL
21 K22 18BR/OR TP SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL
22 K34 20DB/LG (EXCEPT SRT8) EGR SIGNAL
23 K1 20VT/BR MAP SIGNAL
24 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN
25 K42 20DB/YL KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL
26 - -
28 K122 18BR/DG TP SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL
29 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY
30 K21 20DB/LG IAT SIGNAL
31 K41 20DB/LB O2 1/1 SIGNAL
32 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UP)
33 K43 20DB/LG O2 2/1 SIGNAL
34 K44 20DB/GY CMP SIGNAL
35 K24 20DB/WT CKP SIGNAL
36 K242 20BR/WT (5.7L/SRT8) KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL
37 K924 20WT/BR (5.7L/SRT8) KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN
38 K126 18DB/LG ETC MOTOR (-)
MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C3 - BLACK/NATURAL 38 WAY

1 - -
2 - -
4 - -
5 K454 20BR/OR (5.7L MDS) MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 7
6 K451 20BR/WT (5.7L MDS) MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 1
7 - -
8 K106 20VT/GY (POLICE/SRT8 EXCEPT NVLD SOL CONTROL
EXPORT)
9 K299 20BR/WT O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL
10 K399 20BR/GY O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL
11 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH RELAY CONTROL
12 - -
13 - -
14 B16 20LB/DG BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL
15 - -
16 K167 20BR/YL APPS NO. 1 RETURN
17 K400 20BR/VT APPS NO. 2 RETURN
18 - -
20 K52 20DB/OR EVAP PURGE CONTROL
21 - -
22 - -
23 B15 20DG/WT BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL
24 - -
25 K23 20BR/WT APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL
26 - -
27 - -
29 K70 20DB/BR EVAP PURGE RETURN
30 - -
31 - -
32 - -
33 G224 20VT/YL (5.7L/SRT8) ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SIGNAL
34 - -
36 K29 20WT/BR APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL
37 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP RELAY CONTROL
MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C4 (RLE) - BLACK/GREEN 38 WAY

1 T60 20YL/GY OD SOLENOID CONTROL
2 T59 20YL/LB UD SOLENOID CONTROL
3 - -
4 - -
5 - -
6 T19 20YL/DB 2-4 SOLENOID CONTROL
7 - -
8 - -
9 - -
10 T20 20DG/WT L/R SOLENOID CONTROL
11 T118 20DG (VLP) PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID CONTROL
15 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SENSE
16 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SENSE
17 - -
18 T15 20YL/BR TRANSMISSION CONTROL
20 - -
21 - -
22 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SWITCH SENSE
23 - -
24 - -
25 - -
26 - -
27 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SENSE (P/N SENSE)
29 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SWITCH SENSE
30 T47 20YL/DG 2-4 PRESSURE SWITCH SENSE
31 T38 20YL/BR (VLP) LINE PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL
32 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL
33 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL
35 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL
36 - -
37 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SENSE
MODULE-SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY - BLACK 8 WAY

1 - -
2 D508 20WT/GY TIRE PRESSURE BUS
5 A23 20RD/YL (LHD) FUSED B(+) (I.O.D.)
5 A917 18RD/TN (RHD) FUSED B(+)
8 - -
MODULE-STEERING COLUMN-LOCK (RHD) - 4 WAY

1 A917 18RD/TN FUSED B(+)
3 F892 20PK/LB IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (KEY-IN)
MODULE-STEERING CONTROL - BLACK 14 WAY

5 - -
6 - -
7 - -
14 - -
MODULE-TRAFFIC INFORMATION RECEIVER C1 (EXPORT) - BLACK 12 WAY

1 - -
3 - -
4 - -
5 - -
7 Z909 20BK GROUND
9 - -
10 - -
11 - -
12 - -

1 D5 6WT/OR ANTENNA SIGNAL
2 D931 WT/YL ANTENNA SHIELD

1 D6 6WT/OR RADIO ANTENNA SIGNAL
2 D932 WT/YL RADIO ANTENNA SHIELD
MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C1 (NAG1) - BLACK 18 WAY

1 - -
2 - -
3 - -
4 - -
5 - -
6 - -
7 - -
8 - -
9 - -
10 - -
23 - -
24 - -
25 - -
26 - -
27 - -
28 - -
29 F942 18PK/BK FUSED TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT
30 Z912 18BK/OR (LHD EXCEPT POLICE) GROUND
30 Z910 18BK/TN (RHD/POLICE) GROUND
MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C2 (NAG1) - BLACK 14 WAY

12 T70 20YL INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) SIGNAL
13 T72 20YL/DB SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE
14 T60 20YL/GY 1-2/4-5 SOLENOID CONTROL
15 T73 20YL/GY 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL
16 T74 20YL/LG 2-3 SOLENOID CONTROL
17 T75 20YL/LB TCC SOLENOID CONTROL
34 T54 20DG/OR TEMPERATURE SENSOR-P/N SWITCH SIGNAL
35 T71 20YL/OR INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) SIGNAL
36 T76 20YL/TN MODULATION PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL
37 T77 20YL/BR SHIFT PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL
38 T78 20YL SOLENOID SUPPLY VOLTAGE
H1 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+)
L2 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-)
MOTOR-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS (LHD) - NATURAL 6 WAY

1 P206 20LG/LB (EXCEPT MEMORY) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR REARWARD
1 P206 16LG/LB (MEMORY) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR REARWARD
2 P205 20LG/WT (EXCEPT MEMORY) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD
2 P205 16LG/WT (MEMORY) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD
3 - -
4 - -
5 - -
6 - -
MOTOR-BLOWER-FRONT - BLACK 2 WAY

2 C7 12DB (ATC) BLOWER MOTOR SUPPLY
2 C7 12DB (MTC) FUSED RUN RELAY OUTPUT
MOTOR-BOOST PRESSURE SERVO (DIESEL) - NATURAL 5 WAY

2 Z904 18BR GROUND
3 - -
4 X635 20GY/DG BOOST PRESSURE SERVO MOTOR CONTROL
5 - -
MOTOR-HEADLAMP WASHER (HID LAMPS) - BLACK 2 WAY

A W23 16BR/OR HEADLAMP WASHER RELAY OUTPUT
B Z904 16BK/BR GROUND
MOTOR-INTAKE SWIRL SERVO (DIESEL) - BLACK 4 WAY

1 Z904 18BR GROUND
3 N117 20GY INTAKE SWIRL SERVO MOTOR CONTROL
4 - -
MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-DRIVER HORIZONTAL - GRAY 4 WAY

1 P15 16LG/WT (EXCEPT MEMORY) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER
1 P115 16LG (LHD MEMORY) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER
1 P117 16LG/LB (RHD MEMORY) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER
2 P17 16LG/DG (EXCEPT MEMORY) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER
2 P117 16LG/LB (LHD MEMORY) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER
2 P115 16LG (RHD MEMORY) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER
3 G491 20VT/GY (MEMORY) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL SENSOR GROUND
4 G401 20VT/LG (MEMORY) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSE
MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-DRIVER RECLINER (EXCEPT MEMORY) - NATURAL 4 WAY

1 P43 18LG/VT DRIVER SEAT RECLINER UP DRIVER
3 - -
4 - -
MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-DRIVER RECLINER (MEMORY) - BLUE 4 WAY

2 P141 18LG/BR DRIVER SEAT RECLINER UP DRIVER
3 G493 20OR/VT DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSOR
GROUND
4 G403 20VT/OR DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSE
MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-FRONT DRIVER VERTICAL - GRAY 4 WAY

1 P21 18LG/TN (EXCEPT MEMORY) DRIVER SEAT FRONT RISER DOWN DRIVER
1 P121 18LG/DB (MEMORY) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL DOWN DRIVER
2 P19 18LG/LB (EXCEPT MEMORY) DRIVER SEAT FRONT RISER UP DRIVER
2 P119 18LG/DG (MEMORY) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL UP DRIVER
3 G494 20YL/VT (MEMORY) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL SENSOR GROUND
4 G404 20VT/YL (MEMORY) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSE
MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-FRONT PASSENGER VERTICAL - GRAY 4 WAY

1 P20 18LG/LB (LHD) PASSENGER SEAT FRONT RISER DOWN DRIVER
1 P20 18LG/TN (RHD) PASSENGER SEAT FRONT RISER DOWN DRIVER
2 P18 18LG/OR (LHD) PASSENGER SEAT FRONT RISER UP DRIVER
2 P18 18LG/LB (RHD) PASSENGER SEAT FRONT RISER UP DRIVER
3 - -
4 - -
MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-PASSENGER HORIZONTAL - GRAY 4 WAY

1 P16 16LG/WT PASSENGER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER
2 P14 16LG/OR (LHD) PASSENGER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER
2 P14 16LG/DG (RHD) PASSENGER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER
3 - -
4 - -
MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-PASSENGER RECLINER (RHD) - NATURAL 4 WAY

1 P44 18LG/VT PASSENGER SEAT RECLINER UP DRIVER
2 P42 18LG/GY PASSENGER SEAT RECLINER DOWN DRIVER
3 - -
4 - -
MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-REAR DRIVER VERTICAL - GRAY 4 WAY

1 P13 18LG/OR (EXCEPT MEMORY) DRIVER SEAT REAR RISER DOWN DRIVER
1 P113 18LG/WT (MEMORY) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL DOWN DRIVER
2 P11 18LG/YL (EXCEPT MEMORY) DRIVER SEAT REAR RISER UP DRIVER
2 P111 18LG/YL (MEMORY) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL UP DRIVER
3 G492 20LB/VT (MEMORY) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL SENSOR GROUND
4 G402 20VT/DB (MEMORY) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSE
MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-REAR PASSENGER VERTICAL - GRAY 4 WAY

1 P12 18LG/YL (LHD) PASSENGER SEAT REAR RISER DOWN DRIVER
1 P12 18LG/OR (RHD) PASSENGER SEAT REAR RISER DOWN DRIVER
2 P10 18LG/TN (LHD) PASSENGER SEAT REAR RISER UP DRIVER
2 P10 18LG/YL (RHD) PASSENGER SEAT REAR RISER UP DRIVER
3 - -
4 - -
MOTOR-STEERING TELESCOPE (LHD MEMORY) - NATURAL 4 WAY

1 P953 16DG/TN STEERING MOTOR COMMON
2 P157 16LB/TN TELESCOPE STEERING MOTOR FORWARD/REAR-
WARD DRIVER
3 P152 20TN/LB TELESCOPE STEERING FORWARD/REARWARD POSI-
TION SENSE
4 G914 20VT/GY SENSOR RETURN
MOTOR-STEERING TILT (LHD MEMORY) - BLACK 4 WAY

1 P953 16DG/TN STEERING MOTOR COMMON
2 P153 16TN/DG TILT STEERING MOTOR UP/DOWN DRIVER
3 P151 20TN/OR TILT STEERING UP/DOWN POSITION SENSE
MOTOR-WINDOW-DRIVER (BASE) - LT. GRAY 2 WAY

1 Q21 16OR/WT DRIVER WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN)
2 Q11 16OR/LG DRIVER WINDOW DRIVER (UP)
MOTOR-WINDOW-DRIVER EXPRESS (EXCEPT BASE) - LT. GRAY 6 WAY

1 Z405 20BK DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR RETURN
2 Q303 20WT/OR DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR B SIGNAL
3 Q321 16OR/DB DRIVER WINDOW EXPRESS DOWN DRIVER
4 Q305 20OR DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR SUPPLY
5 Q301 20OR/WT DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNAL
6 Q311 16OR/LB DRIVER WINDOW EXPRESS UP DRIVER
MOTOR-WINDOW-LEFT REAR - LT. GRAY 2 WAY

1 Q211 16TN/LB LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN)
2 Q111 16TN/YL LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP)
MOTOR-WINDOW-PASSENGER (BASE) - LT. GRAY 2 WAY

1 Q22 16OR/VT PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN)
2 Q12 16OR/BR PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER (UP)
MOTOR-WINDOW-PASSENGER EXPRESS (EXCEPT BASE) - LT. GRAY 6 WAY

1 Z404 20BK/LG PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR RETURN
2 Q304 20LG/OR PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR B SIGNAL
3 Q322 16LG/OR PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS DOWN DRIVER
4 Q306 20OR/DB PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR SUPPLY
5 Q302 20OR/LG PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNAL
6 Q312 16DB/OR PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS UP DRIVER
MOTOR-WINDOW-RIGHT REAR - LT. GRAY 2 WAY

1 Q212 16OR/VT RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN)
2 Q112 16OR/BR RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP)
MOTOR-WIPER-FRONT - BLACK 5 WAY

1 W4 14BR/OR (LHD) FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY HIGH SPEED OUT-
PUT
1 Z902 14BK/LB (RHD) GROUND
2 W3 14BR/WT (LHD) FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY LOW SPEED OUT-
PUT
2 W7 20BR/GY (RHD) FRONT WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE
3 - -
4 W7 20BR/GY (LHD) FRONT WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE
4 W4 14BR/OR (RHD) FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY HIGH SPEED OUT-
PUT
5 Z904 14BK/BR (DODGE SRT8) GROUND
5 W3 14BR/WT (RHD) FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY LOW SPEED OUT-
PUT
MOTOR-WIPER-REAR (LX49) - BLACK 3 WAY

1 W13 16BR/LG REAR WIPER MOTOR CONTROL
2 W17 18BR/YL REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE
MOTOR/MODULE-SUNROOF - LT. GRAY 10 WAY

1 - -
2 Q4 20OR/YL SUNROOF VENT SWITCH SENSE
3 Q3 20OR/TN SUNROOF OPEN SWITCH SENSE
6 Z909 18BK GROUND
7 Q5 20OR/LB SUNROOF CLOSE SWITCH SENSE
8 X13 18RD FUSED B(+) (I.O.D.)
9 D270 20WT (FACTORY ONLY) SUNROOF DIAGNOSTIC
10 Q6 20OR/LG SUNROOF SWITCH SUPPLY
POST-PASS THROUGH-EYELET - (BATTERY SIDE) 1 WAY

1 A1 1RD B(+)
POST-PASS THROUGH-EYELET - (STARTER SIDE) 1 WAY

1 A11 4BR/RD (DIESEL) B(+)
1 A11 4RD (GAS) B(+)
POWER OUTLET-CONSOLE - BLACK 3 WAY

1 A305 16RD/LB FUSED B(+)
2 - -
POWER OUTLET-REAR (LX49) - BLACK 3 WAY

1 A105 16DB/RD FUSED B(+)
2 - -
PUMP-WASHER-WINDSHIELD - NATURAL 2 WAY

1 W10 20BR FRONT WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL
2 Z904 20BK/BR (LX48) GROUND
2 W20 20BR/YL (LX49) REAR WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL
RADIO C1 - DK. GRAY 22 WAY

2 - -
3 - -
4 X703 22DG/OR (HANDS FREE) LEFT AUDIO OUTPUT
7 X202 18DG/VT (LOWLINE/MIDLINE I) RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+)
8 X292 18DG/YL (LOWLINE/MIDLINE I) RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-)
9 X291 18GY/YL (LOWLINE/MIDLINE I) LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-)
10 X201 18GY/VT (LOWLINE/MIDLINE I) LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+)
13 - -
14 - -
15 - -
16 X704 22DG/YL (HANDS FREE) RIGHT AUDIO OUTPUT
17 X795 20DG (HANDS FREE) COMMON AUDIO OUTPUT
18 X303 18DG/TN (LOWLINE/MIDLINE I) LEFT REAR SPEAKER (+)
18 X51 18DG/DB (MIDLINE II/HIGHLINE) RADIO LEFT AUDIO (+)
19 X393 18DG/GY (LOWLINE/MIDLINE I) LEFT REAR SPEAKER (-)
19 X57 18DG/OR (MIDLINE II/HIGHLINE) RADIO LEFT AUDIO (-)
20 X394 18YL/GY (LOWLINE/MIDLINE I) RIGHT REAR SPEAKER (-)
20 X58 18GY/OR (MIDLINE II/HIGHLINE) RADIO RIGHT AUDIO (-)
21 X304 18DG/BR (LOWLINE/MIDLINE I) RIGHT REAR SPEAKER (+)
21 X52 18GY/DB (MIDLINE II/HIGHLINE) RADIO RIGHT AUDIO (+)
RADIO C2 (SATELLITE RADIO) - BLACK 10 WAY

1 X16 20DG/YL AUDIO SIGNAL RIGHT (+)
2 X917 20DG AUDIO SIGNAL COMMON
3 - -
4 X510 20DG/LB DVD AUDIO RIGHT (+)
5 X926 20GY/OR AUX AUDIO COMMON
6 X17 20DG/OR AUDIO SIGNAL LEFT (+)
7 X910 20GY/DG DVD AUDIO COMMON
8 X511 20GY/LG DVD AUDIO LEFT (+)
9 X521 20GY/LB AUX AUDIO LEFT (+)
10 X522 20GY/DB AUX AUDIO RIGHT (+)
RADIO-ANTENNA (NAVIGATION) - GRAY 2 WAY

1 D8 WT/LB GPS ANTENNA SIGNAL
2 D108 LB/WT GPS ANTENNA SHIELD
RADIO-ANTENNA - BLACK 2 WAY

1 D5 6WT/OR (EXCEPT EXPORT) ANTENNA SIGNAL
1 D6 6WT/OR (EXPORT) RADIO ANTENNA SIGNAL
2 D931 WT/YL (EXCEPT EXPORT) ANTENNA SHIELD
2 D932 WT/YL (EXPORT) RADIO ANTENNA SHIELD
RECEIVER-INTRUSION SENSOR (RHD) - BLACK 3 WAY

1 G460 20DG/VT INTRUSION RECEIVER SENSOR SIGNAL
2 - -
3 G946 20LG/VT INTRUSION RECEIVER SENSOR GROUND
RECEIVER-SATELLITE - BLACK 12 WAY

2 - -
4 - -
5 - -
6 X17 20DG/OR AUDIO SIGNAL LEFT (+)
9 - -
10 - -
11 X917 20DG AUDIO SIGNAL COMMON
12 X16 20DG/YL AUDIO SIGNAL RIGHT (+)
RELAY-HEADLAMP WASHER (HID LAMPS) - LT. GRAY 5 WAY

2 W24 20BR/OR HEADLAMP WASHER RELAY CONTROL
3 - -
4 W23 16BR/OR HEADLAMP WASHER RELAY OUTPUT
RESISTOR BLOCK-BLOWER MOTOR-FRONT (MTC) - BLACK 5 WAY

1 C70 12DB/YL FRONT BLOWER HIGH SPEED
3 C73 14DB/VT FRONT BLOWER M2 SPEED
4 C72 14DB/OR FRONT BLOWER M1 SPEED
5 C71 16DB/BR FRONT BLOWER LOW SPEED
SEAT BELT-TENSIONER-DRIVER - BLACK 2 WAY

1 R53 20LG/YL DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 2
2 R55 20LG/DG DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1
SEAT BELT-TENSIONER-PASSENGER - BLACK 2 WAY

1 R56 20LB/DG PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1
2 R54 20LB/YL PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 2
SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION - BLACK 6 WAY

1 F856 20YL/PK (DIESEL) ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR NO. 2 5
VOLT SUPPLY
1 F856 20YL/PK (GAS) 5 VOLT SUPPLY
2 K29 20WT/BR (DIESEL) ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR NO. 2 SIG-
NAL
2 K29 20WT/BR (GAS) APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL
3 K400 20BR/VT (DIESEL) ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR NO. 2
GROUND
3 K400 20BR/VT (GAS) APPS NO. 2 RETURN
4 K167 20BR/YL (DIESEL) ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR NO. 1
GROUND
4 K167 20BR/YL (GAS) APPS NO. 1 RETURN
5 K23 20BR/WT (DIESEL) ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR NO. 1 SIG-
NAL
5 K23 20BR/WT (GAS) APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL
6 F855 20PK/YL (DIESEL) ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR NO. 1 5
VOLT SUPPLY
6 F855 20PK/YL (GAS) 5 VOLT SUPPLY
SENSOR-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS (LHD MEMORY) - BLACK 3 WAY

2 G14 18VT/DB ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SIGNAL
3 G13 18VT/LB ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SUPPLY
SENSOR-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE - BLACK 2 WAY

1 G31 20VT/LG AAT SIGNAL
2 G931 20VT/BR SENSOR GROUND
SENSOR-BOOST PRESSURE (DIESEL) - 3 WAY

1 K656 20BR/GY BOOST PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND
2 K37 20GY/YL BOOST PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL
3 K356 20RD/BK BOOST PRESSURE SENSOR 5 VOLT SUPPLY
SENSOR-BRAKE FLUID LEVEL - GRAY 2 WAY

2 B20 20DG/OR BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE
SENSOR-BRAKE PEDAL TRAVEL (MK25) - BLACK 3 WAY

1 B237 20DG/YL BRAKE PEDAL TRAVEL SENSOR SUPPLY
2 B937 20DG/BR BRAKE PEDAL TRAVEL SENSOR RETURN
3 B137 20DG/BR BRAKE PEDAL TRAVEL SENSOR SIGNAL
SENSOR-BRAKE PRESSURE (MK25) - BLACK 3 WAY

1 B984 20DG/OR BRAKE PRESSURE SENSOR RETURN
2 B84 20DG/YL BRAKE PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL
3 B83 20DG/WT BRAKE PRESSURE SENSOR SUPPLY
SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION (2.7L/3.5L) - BLACK 3 WAY

SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION (5.7L/SRT8) - GRAY 3 WAY

SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION (DIESEL) - 3 WAY

1 K944 20BR/DG CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR GROUND
2 K44 20YL/GY CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL
3 K844 20RD/VT CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR 5 VOLT SUPPLY
SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION (DIESEL) - BLACK 3 WAY

1 Z753 16BR/BK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR GROUND
2 K24 16DG/WT CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL
3 K853 20RD/VT CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR 5 VOLT SUPPLY
SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION (GAS) - BLACK 3 WAY

3 K24 20DB/WT CKP SIGNAL
SENSOR-DYNAMICS (ESP) - BLACK 6 WAY

1 D51 20WT/BR DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK
2 D52 20WT/LB DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK
3 G4 20VT/LB DYNAMICS SENSOR SUPPLY
4 - -
5 G94 20VT/DB DYNAMICS SENSOR GROUND
6 - -
SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (GAS) - BLACK 2 WAY

1 K2 20VT/OR ECT SIGNAL
SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (DIESEL) - BLACK 2 WAY

1 K222 20BR/RD ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND
2 K2 20DG/RD ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL
SENSOR-EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE - BLACK 2 WAY

SENSOR-EXHAUST DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE (DIESEL) - 3 WAY

1 K355 18BR/DG EXHAUST DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSOR SIG-
NAL
2 K951 20BR/DB EXHAUST DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSOR
GROUND
3 K354 18BR/LG EXHAUST DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSOR 5 VOLT
SUPPLY
SENSOR-EXHAUST GAS PRESSURE (DIESEL) - 3 WAY

1 F858 20GY/YL EXHAUST GAS PRESSURE SENSOR 5 VOLT SUPPLY
2 K934 20OR EXHAUST GAS PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND
3 K35 20GY/BK EXHAUST GAS PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL
SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-LEFT - GRAY 2 WAY

1 R81 20LB/WT LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND
2 R79 20LB/VT LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL
SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-RIGHT - GRAY 2 WAY

1 R82 20WT/LB RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND
2 R80 20VT/LB RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL
SENSOR-FUEL PRESSURE (DIESEL) - BLACK 3 WAY

1 K359 20GY/BR FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND
2 K181 20DG/VT FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL
3 K350 20RD/WT FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR 5 VOLT SUPPLY
SENSOR-FUEL TEMPERATURE (DIESEL) - 2 WAY

1 K914 20BL/DG FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND
2 K156 20BL/RD FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL
SENSOR-HEADLAMP LEVEL-LEFT (EXPORT) - BLACK 6 WAY

2 Z921 20BK GROUND
3 - -
4 L13 20WT/YL HEADLAMP LEVEL SENSOR SIGNAL
6 Z921 20BK GROUND
SENSOR-HEADLAMP LEVEL-RIGHT (EXPORT) - BLACK 6 WAY

2 Z920 20BK GROUND
3 Z920 20BK GROUND
4 L13 20WT/YL HEADLAMP LEVEL SENSOR SIGNAL
6 - -
SENSOR-INLET AIR PRESSURE (DIESEL) - 3 WAY

1 K900 20BR/RD INLET AIR PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND
2 K68 20RD/BL INLET AIR PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL
3 K668 20BR/BK INLET AIR PRESSURE SENSOR 5 VOLT SUPPLY
SENSOR-INLET AIR TEMPERATURE (GAS) - BLACK 2 WAY

1 K21 20DB/LG IAT SIGNAL
SENSOR-INPUT SPEED (RLE) - BLACK 2 WAY

2 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL
SENSOR-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (DIESEL) - BLACK 2 WAY

1 K960 18BR/VT INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND
2 K21 20DG/WT INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL
SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 (GAS) - BLACK 2 WAY

1 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN
2 K42 20DB/YL KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL
SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 (5.7L/SRT8) - BLACK 2 WAY

1 K924 20WT/BR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN
2 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL
SENSOR-MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (GAS) - GRAY 3 WAY

1 K1 20VT/BR MAP SIGNAL
SENSOR-MASS AIR FLOW (DIESEL) - BLACK 4 WAY

1 F202 18RD/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START)
2 K957 18BR MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR GROUND
3 K362 20DG/YL INLET AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL
4 K157 20BL/YL MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR SIGNAL
SENSOR-OIL PRESSURE (DIESEL) - 3 WAY

1 F851 20DG OIL PRESSURE SENSOR 5 VOLT SUPPLY
2 G6 20BL/RD OIL PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL
3 K936 20GY/PK OIL PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND
SENSOR-OIL PRESSURE (5.7L/SRT8) - BLACK 3 WAY

SENSOR-OIL TEMPERATURE (5.7L/SRT8) - BLACK 2 WAY

1 G224 20VT/YL ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SIGNAL
SENSOR-OIL TEMPERATURE (DIESEL) - BLACK 2 WAY

1 Z36 20YL/DG OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND
2 G224 20YL/GY OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL
SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED (RLE) - BLACK 2 WAY

2 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL
SENSOR-OXYGEN (DIESEL) - BLACK 6 WAY

1 K43 20GY/RD O2 1/1 POSITIVE CURRENT CONTROL
2 Z42 20DG/BL O2 1/1 NEGATIVE CURRENT CONTROL
3 K99 16GY/BR O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL
5 K902 20GY/WT O2 1/1 PUMP CELL CURRENT TRIM
6 K41 20DG/BK O2 1/1 REFERENCE SIGNAL
SENSOR-OXYGEN-LEFT FRONT (GAS) - BLACK 4 WAY

1 K99 20BR/LG O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL
2 Z907 18BK GROUND
4 K41 20DB/LB O2 1/1 SIGNAL
SENSOR-OXYGEN-LEFT REAR (GAS) - BLACK 4 WAY

1 K299 20BR/WT O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL
4 K141 20DB/YL O2 1/2 SIGNAL
SENSOR-OXYGEN-RIGHT FRONT (GAS) - BLACK 4 WAY

1 K199 20BR/VT O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL
2 Z907 18BK GROUND
4 K43 20DB/LG O2 2/1 SIGNAL
SENSOR-OXYGEN-RIGHT REAR (GAS) - BLACK 4 WAY

1 K399 20BR/GY O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL
4 K243 20BR O2 2/2 SIGNAL
SENSOR-PARK ASSIST-NO. 10 (PARKTRONICS) - BLACK 3 WAY

1 D704 20WT/DB PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 10 SIGNAL

1 D700 20WT/GY PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 7 SIGNAL

1 D701 20WT/LB PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 8 SIGNAL

1 D703 20WT/BK PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 9 SIGNAL
SENSOR-POST-CATALYST EXHAUST GAS TEMPERATURE (DIESEL) - BLACK 2 WAY

1 K915 20BR/WT POST-CATALYST EXHAUST GAS TEMPERATURE SEN-
SOR GROUND
2 K353 20YL/WT POST-CATALYST EXHAUST GAS TEMPERATURE SEN-
SOR SIGNAL
SENSOR-PRE-CATALYST EXHAUST GAS TEMPERATURE (DIESEL) - BLACK 2 WAY

1 K916 20BR/WT PRE-CATALYST EXHAUST GAS TEMPERATURE SEN-
SOR GROUND
2 K352 20YL PRE-CATALYST EXHAUST GAS TEMPERATURE SEN-
SOR SIGNAL
SENSOR-RAIN (AUTO WIPERS) - BLACK 4 WAY

1 F880 20BK/PK FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT
3 D55 20BK/WT CAN B BUS (+)
4 D54 20BK CAN B BUS (-)
SENSOR-SEAT TRACK POSITION-DRIVER - GRAY 2 WAY

1 R261 20LB/WT DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR DATA
2 R263 20LB/VT DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR VOLTAGE
SENSOR-SEAT WEIGHT-LEFT FRONT (EXCEPT EXPORT) - BLACK 4 WAY

3 - -
4 R717 20LG/DG SEAT WEIGHT LEFT FRONT SENSOR SIGNAL
SENSOR-SEAT WEIGHT-LEFT REAR (EXCEPT EXPORT) - BLACK 4 WAY

3 - -
4 R705 20LG/OR SEAT WEIGHT LEFT REAR SENSOR SIGNAL
SENSOR-SEAT WEIGHT-RIGHT FRONT (EXCEPT EXPORT) - BLACK 4 WAY

3 - -
4 R718 20LB/DG SEAT WEIGHT RIGHT FRONT SENSOR SIGNAL
SENSOR-SEAT WEIGHT-RIGHT REAR (EXCEPT EXPORT) - BLACK 4 WAY

3 - -
4 R706 20LB/OR SEAT WEIGHT RIGHT REAR SENSOR SIGNAL
SENSOR-SHIFT LEVER POSITION (COLUMN NAG1) - BLACK 6 WAY

1 22BK SHIFT LEVER POSITION SENSOR GROUND
2 22LG/BK SHIFT LEVER POSITION SENSOR SUPPLY
3 - -
4 22LB SHIFT LEVER POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL
5 - -
6 - -
SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 1 - GRAY 2 WAY

1 R15 20LG/BR LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND
2 R13 20LG/TN LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL
SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 2 - GRAY 2 WAY

1 R19 20LG/WT LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 GROUND
2 R17 20LG LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 SIGNAL
SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 1 - GRAY 2 WAY

1 R16 20BR/LG RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND
2 R14 20TN/LG RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL
SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 2 - GRAY 2 WAY

1 R20 20WT/LG RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 GROUND
2 R18 20LB RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 SIGNAL
SENSOR-SUN (ATC) - BLACK 4 WAY

1 G39 20VT/LB SUN SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL
2 G939 20VT/DB SUN SENSOR RETURN
3 L24 20WT/VT AUTO HEADLAMPS SIGNAL
4 G139 20VT/OR SUN SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL
SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE (RLE) - LT. GREEN 10 WAY

1 - -
2 - -
4 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL
5 - -
6 - -
7 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SENSE
8 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SENSE
9 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SENSE
10 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SENSE (P/N SENSE)
SENSOR-WASHER FLUID LEVEL-FRONT - LT. GRAY 2 WAY

2 W1 20BR/TN WASHER FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE
SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-LEFT FRONT - BLACK 4 WAY

1 - -
2 - -
3 B9 20DG/LG LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY
4 B8 20DG/TN LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL
SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-REAR - BLACK 4 WAY

1 B2 20DG/LB RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY
2 B1 20DG/OR RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL
3 B4 20DG/GY LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY
4 B3 20DG/YL LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL
SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-RIGHT FRONT - BLACK 4 WAY

1 - -
2 - -
SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-RIGHT FRONT (EXCEPT ABS) - BLACK 4 WAY

1 - -
2 - -
SIREN (RHD) - BLACK 3 WAY

3 D96 20WT/LB SIREN SIGNAL CONTROL
SOLENOID-FUEL PRESSURE (DIESEL) - NATURAL 2 WAY

1 K370 18BK/WT FUEL PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL
2 K369 18RD/GY FUEL PRESSURE SOLENOID 12 VOLT SUPPLY
SOLENOID-FUEL QUANTITY (DIESEL) - BLACK 2 WAY

1 K365 18YL/BK FUEL QUANTITY SOLENOID CONTROL
2 K366 18BK/BL/DG FUEL QUANTITY SOLENOID 12 VOLT SUPPLY
SOLENOID-MANIFOLD TUNING VALVE (2.7L/3.5L) - GRAY 2 WAY

2 K136 18BR MTV CONTROL
SOLENOID-MULTI DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM CYL 1 (5.7L MDS) - BLACK 2 WAY

1 K451 20BR/WT MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 1

1 K452 20BR/LB MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 4

1 K453 20BR/DG MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 6

1 K454 20BR/OR MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 7
SOLENOID-PROPORTIONAL PURGE (GAS) - BLACK 2 WAY

1 K52 20DB/OR EVAP PURGE CONTROL
2 K70 20DB/BR EVAP PURGE RETURN
SOLENOID-SHORT RUNNER VALVE (3.5L) - GRAY 2 WAY

1 K236 20DB/LG SRV CONTROL
SPEAKER-INSTRUMENT PANEL-CENTER (HIGHLINE) - WHITE 2 WAY

1 X200 18GY/BR AMPLIFIED CENTER I/P SPEAKER (+)
2 X290 18GY/OR AMPLIFIED CENTER I/P SPEAKER (-)
SPEAKER-INSTRUMENT PANEL-LEFT - WHITE 2 WAY

1 X201 18GY/VT (MIDLINE I) LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+)
1 X209 18GY/OR (MIDLINE II/HIGHLINE) AMPLIFIED LEFT I/P SPEAKER (+)
2 X291 18GY/YL (MIDLINE I) LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-)
2 X299 18GY/YL (MIDLINE II/HIGHLINE) AMPLIFIED LEFT I/P SPEAKER (-)
SPEAKER-INSTRUMENT PANEL-RIGHT - WHITE 2 WAY

1 X202 18DG/VT (MIDLINE I) RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+)
1 X208 18GY/DG (MIDLINE II/HIGHLINE) AMPLIFIED RIGHT I/P SPEAKER (+)
2 X292 18DG/YL (MIDLINE I) RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-)
2 X298 18GY/LG (MIDLINE II/HIGHLINE) AMPLIFIED RIGHT I/P SPEAKER (-)
SPEAKER-LEFT FRONT DOOR - WHITE 3 WAY

1 X201 18GY/VT (LOWLINE/MIDLINE I) LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+)
1 X201 18GY/VT (MIDLINE II/HIGHLINE) AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+)
2 - -
3 X291 18GY/YL (LOWLINE/MIDLINE I) LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-)
3 X291 18GY/YL (MIDLINE II/HIGHLINE) AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-)
SPEAKER-LEFT REAR - WHITE 3 WAY

1 X393 18DG/GY (LOWLINE/MIDLINE I) LEFT REAR SPEAKER (-)
1 X393 18DG/GY (MIDLINE II/HIGHLINE) AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR SPEAKER (-)
2 - -
3 X303 18DG/TN (LOWLINE/MIDLINE I) LEFT REAR SPEAKER (+)
3 X303 18DG/TN (MIDLINE II/HIGHLINE) AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR SPEAKER (+)
SPEAKER-RIGHT FRONT DOOR - WHITE 3 WAY

1 X202 18DG/VT (LOWLINE/MIDLINE I) RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+)
1 X202 18DG/VT (MIDLINE II/HIGHLINE) AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+)
2 - -
3 X292 18DG/YL (LOWLINE I) RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-)
3 X292 18DG/YL (MIDLINE II/HIGHLINE) AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-)
SPEAKER-RIGHT REAR - WHITE 3 WAY

1 X394 18YL/GY (LOWLINE/MIDLINE I) RIGHT REAR SPEAKER (-)
1 X394 18YL/GY (MIDLINE II/HIGHLINE) AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR SPEAKER (-)
2 - -
3 X304 18DG/BR (LOWLINE/MIDLINE I) RIGHT REAR SPEAKER (+)
3 X304 18DG/BR (MIDLINE II/HIGHLINE) AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR SPEAKER (+)
SPEAKER-SUBWOOFER (HIGHLINE EXCEPT SRT8) - WHITE 3 WAY

2 - -
SPEAKER-SUBWOOFER (SRT8 EXCEPT EXPORT) - BLACK 2 WAY

1 X30 18DG/YL SUBWOOFER 1 (+)
2 X31 18GY/TN SUBWOOFER 1 (-)
STARTER (2.7L/3.5L/5.7L AWD) - BLACK 1 WAY

1 T750 16LG STARTER RELAY OUTPUT
STARTER (5.7L RWD/SRT8) - NATURAL 1 WAY

1 T750 16LG (5.7L RWD) STARTER RELAY OUTPUT
1 T750 16YL/GY (SRT8) STARTER RELAY OUTPUT
STARTER (DIESEL) - 1 WAY

1 T750 14VT STARTER RELAY OUTPUT
STARTER-FUSIBLE LINK-EYELET (EXCEPT 5.7L RWD/SRT8) - 1 WAY

1 A802 8LB B(+)
STARTER-FUSIBLE LINK-EYELET (5.7L RWD/SRT8) - 1 WAY

1 A802 8LB (5.7L RWD) B(+)
1 A802 4RD (SRT8) B(+)
STARTER-POST-PASS THROUGH-EYELET (EXCEPT 5.7L RWD/SRT8) - 1 WAY

1 A11 4BR/RD (DIESEL) B(+)
1 A11 4RD (GAS) B(+)
STARTER-POST-PASS THROUGH-EYELET (5.7L RWD/SRT8) - 1 WAY

1 A11 4RD B(+)
SWITCH-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS (LHD) - WHITE 6 WAY

1 - -
3 P206 20LG/LB (EXCEPT MEMORY) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR REARWARD
3 Q103 20OR/LG (MEMORY) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SWITCH REARWARD
4 P205 20LG/WT (EXCEPT MEMORY) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD
4 Q102 20OR/LB (MEMORY) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SWITCH FORWARD
6 A72 20RD/OR (EXCEPT MEMORY) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY OUTPUT
6 Q101 20OR/LB (MEMORY) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SWITCH GROUND
SWITCH-AUTOSTICK (COLUMN NAG1) - WHITE 2 WAY

1 22YL AUTOSTICK SWITCH MUX SUPPLY
2 22GY AUTOSTICK SWITCH MUX SIGNAL
SWITCH-BANK - BLACK 12 WAY

1 L91 20WT/DB HAZARD SWITCH SENSE
3 B27 20DG/WT TRACTION CONTROL SWITCH SENSE
4 G104 20VT/GY (EARLY BUILD) PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR DRIVER
5 F23 20RD/OR FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START)
6 E22 20OR/GY INDICATOR DIMMER SIGNAL
8 W113 20BR/YL REAR WIPER SWITCH MUX
9 W213 20BR/OR REAR WIPER INDICATOR DRIVER
10 G926 20VT/WT REAR WIPER SWITCH MUX RETURN
11 - -
12 - -
SWITCH-DECKLID RELEASE (LX48) - BLACK 2 WAY

SWITCH-HEADLAMP - BLACK 10 WAY

1 L307 20WT/BR HEADLAMP SWITCH MUX
2 E2 20OR/BR PANEL LAMPS DIMMER SIGNAL
3 L900 20WT/YL HEADLAMP SWITCH MUX RETURN
6 - -
7 - -
8 - -
9 - -
10 - -
SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-LEFT - BLACK 8 WAY

3 P365 20LG/GY LEFT HEATED SEAT SWITCH SENSE
4 P83 20TN/WT LEFT HEATED SEAT HIGH INDICATOR DRIVER
5 - -
6 P81 20TN/LB LEFT HEATED SEAT LOW INDICATOR DRIVER
8 - -
SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-RIGHT - BLACK 8 WAY

3 P366 20LG/LB RIGHT HEATED SEAT SWITCH SENSE
4 P84 20TN/VT RIGHT HEATED SEAT HIGH INDICATOR DRIVER
5 - -
6 P82 20TN/DG RIGHT HEATED SEAT LOW INDICATOR DRIVER
8 - -
SWITCH-HORN - BLACK 2 WAY

1 D500 20WT (BASE) LIN BUS
1 X3 20DG/VT (PREMIUM) HORN SWITCH SIGNAL
2 D501 20WT/LG (BASE) LIN SLAVE RETURN
2 X903 20GY/LG (PREMIUM) HORN SWITCH RETURN
SWITCH-IGNITION C1 - BLACK 5 WAY

1 G900 20VT/OR IGNITION SWITCH SENSE RETURN
2 G20 20VT/BR IGNITION SWITCH SENSE
3 F20 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START)
SWITCH-IGNITION C2 (RHD) - BLACK 2 WAY

2 F892 20PK/LB IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (KEY-IN)
SWITCH-LIFTGATE RELEASE (LX49) - BLACK 2 WAY

SWITCH-MEMORY SET - BLACK 4 WAY

A - -
B G920 20VT/YL MEMORY SELECT SWITCH RETURN
C G200 20VT/BR MEMORY SELECT SWITCH MUX
D - -
SWITCH-MIRROR - LT. GRAY 10 WAY

2 F880 20PK/DG (EXCEPT MEMORY) FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT
2 E55 20OR/DG (MEMORY) MIRROR SWITCH ILLUMINATION DRIVER
3 P76 20TN/LB (EXCEPT MEMORY) MIRROR COMMON DRIVER
3 P710 20LG (MEMORY) MIRROR COMMON SWITCH SENSE
4 P950 20TN/GY (MEMORY) MIRROR SWITCH RETURN
5 P550 20TN/LG (MEMORY) MIRROR SWITCH SUPPLY
6 P72 20TN/GY (EXCEPT MEMORY) PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER
6 P706 20LG/GY (MEMORY) MIRROR VERTICAL UP SWITCH SENSE
7 P71 20TN/DG (EXCEPT MEMORY) DRIVER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER
7 P705 20LG/OR (MEMORY) MIRROR VERTICAL DOWN SWITCH SENSE
8 P74 20TN/OR (EXCEPT MEMORY) PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER
8 P704 20LG/TN (MEMORY) MIRROR HORIZONTAL RIGHT SWITCH SENSE
9 P75 20TN/LG (EXCEPT MEMORY) DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER
9 P703 20DB/LG (MEMORY) MIRROR HORIZONTAL LEFT SWITCH SENSE
SWITCH-OIL LEVEL (DIESEL) - BLACK 2 WAY

1 - -
2 K358 20GY/BL OIL LEVEL SWITCH SIGNAL
SWITCH-OIL PRESSURE (2.7L/3.5L) - LT. GREEN 2 WAY

2 - -
SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE - BLACK 1 WAY

1 B25 20GY/BK PARK BRAKE SWITCH SENSE
SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-LEFT REAR - LT. GRAY 6 WAY

1 Q611 14OR/GY MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (DOWN)
2 Q211 16TN/LB LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN)
3 Q111 16TN/YL LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP)
4 Q411 14OR/WT MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (UP)
5 - -
SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-RIGHT REAR - LT. GRAY 6 WAY

1 Q612 14OR/DB MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (DOWN)
2 Q212 16OR/VT RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN)
3 Q112 16OR/BR RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP)
4 Q412 14OR/LB MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (UP)
5 - -
SWITCH-SEAT BELT-DRIVER - LT. GRAY 2 WAY

2 R57 20LG/GY DRIVER SEAT BELT SWITCH SENSE
SWITCH-SEAT BELT-PASSENGER (EXCEPT EXPORT) - LT. GRAY 2 WAY

1 R58 20LB/GY PASSENGER SEAT BELT SWITCH SENSE
SWITCH-SEAT-DRIVER (EXCEPT MEMORY) - BLACK 11 WAY

2 - -
3 P43 18LG/VT DRIVER SEAT RECLINER UP DRIVER
4 P17 16LG/DG DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER
5 P21 18LG/TN DRIVER SEAT FRONT RISER DOWN DRIVER
8 P15 16LG/WT DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER
9 P19 18LG/LB DRIVER SEAT FRONT RISER UP DRIVER
10 P13 18LG/OR DRIVER SEAT REAR RISER DOWN DRIVER
11 P11 18LG/YL DRIVER SEAT REAR RISER UP DRIVER
SWITCH-SEAT-DRIVER (MEMORY) - GRAY 11 WAY

1 P599 20LG/TN DRIVER SEAT SWITCH MUX RETURN
2 - -
3 - -
4 P239 20LG/WT DRIVER SEAT SWITCH REAR VERTICAL/HORIZONTAL
SWITCH MUX
5 - -
6 - -
7 - -
8 - -
9 - -
10 P9 20LG/OR DRIVER SEAT SWITCH SUPPLY
11 P339 20LG/DB DRIVER SEAT SWITCH FRONT VERTICAL/RECLINER
SWITCH MUX
SWITCH-SEAT-PASSENGER - BLACK 11 WAY

1 P42 18LG/GY (RHD) PASSENGER SEAT RECLINER DOWN DRIVER
2 - -
3 P44 18LG/VT (RHD) PASSENGER SEAT RECLINER UP DRIVER
4 P16 16LG/WT (LHD) PASSENGER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER
4 P16 16LG/DG (RHD) PASSENGER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER
5 P20 18LG/LB (LHD) PASSENGER SEAT FRONT RISER DOWN DRIVER
5 P20 18LG/TN (RHD) PASSENGER SEAT FRONT RISER DOWN DRIVER
6 A916 14RD (LHD) FUSED B(+)
6 A916 16OR/RD (RHD) FUSED B(+)
8 P14 16LG/OR (LHD) PASSENGER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER
8 P14 16LG/WT (RHD) PASSENGER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER
9 P18 18LG/OR (LHD) PASSENGER SEAT FRONT RISER UP DRIVER
9 P18 18LG/LB (RHD) PASSENGER SEAT FRONT RISER UP DRIVER
10 P12 18LG/YL (LHD) PASSENGER SEAT REAR RISER DOWN DRIVER
10 P12 18LG/OR (RHD) PASSENGER SEAT REAR RISER DOWN DRIVER
11 P10 18LG/TN (LHD) PASSENGER SEAT REAR RISER UP DRIVER
11 P10 18LG/YL (RHD) PASSENGER SEAT REAR RISER UP DRIVER
SWITCH-SECURITY HOOD (EXPORT) - BLACK 2 WAY

1 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE
SWITCH-STEERING-LEFT (PREMIUM) - BLACK 4 WAY

1 G907 20VT EVIC/NAV MUX RETURN
2 D503 20WT/OR LIN LIGHTING
3 G106 20VT/OR EVIC MUX SIGNAL 1
SWITCH-STEERING-RIGHT (PREMIUM) - BLACK 10 WAY

1 D503 20WT/OR LIN LIGHTING
2 X903 20GY/LG HORN SWITCH RETURN
5 D500 20WT LIN BUS
6 D502 20WT/OR LIN SLAVE FEED
7 X3 20DG/VT HORN SWITCH SIGNAL
8 D501 20WT/LG LIN SLAVE RETURN
9 G907 20VT EVIC/NAV MUX RETURN
10 - -
SWITCH-STOP LAMP - GRAY 6 WAY

1 B15 20DG/WT BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL
3 B16 20LB/DG BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL
6 A103 20PK/DB FUSED B(+)
SWITCH-SUNROOF - BLACK 4 WAY

A Q4 20OR/YL (LHD) SUNROOF VENT SWITCH SENSE
A Q4 22OR/YL (RHD) SUNROOF VENT SWITCH SENSE
B Q6 20OR/LG (LHD) SUNROOF SWITCH SUPPLY
B Q6 22OR/LG (RHD) SUNROOF SWITCH SUPPLY
C Q5 20OR/LB (LHD) SUNROOF CLOSE SWITCH SENSE
C Q5 22OR/LB (RHD) SUNROOF CLOSE SWITCH SENSE
D Q3 20OR/TN (LHD) SUNROOF OPEN SWITCH SENSE
D Q3 22OR/TN (RHD) SUNROOF OPEN SWITCH SENSE
SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C1 (BASE) - LT. GRAY 8 WAY

1 - -
6 Q21 16OR/WT DRIVER WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN)
7 Q11 16OR/LG DRIVER WINDOW DRIVER (UP)
SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C2 (BASE) - LT. GRAY 6 WAY

5 Q26 14OR/GY MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER (DOWN)
6 Q16 14OR/TN MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER (UP)
SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER EXPRESS C1 (EXCEPT BASE) - LT. GRAY 8 WAY

7 - -
SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER EXPRESS C2 (EXCEPT BASE) - BLACK 6 WAY

1 Q221 20GY/OR DRIVER WINDOW DRIVER EXPRESS SWITCH MUX
2 Q222 20OR/GY PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER EXPRESS SWITCH
MUX
4 Z421 20BK/BR DRIVER EXPRESS SWITCH RETURN
6 - -
SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER (BASE) - LT. GRAY 8 WAY

1 Q26 14OR/GY MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER (DOWN)
2 Q22 16OR/VT PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN)
3 Q12 16OR/BR PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER (UP)
8 Q16 14OR/TN MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER (UP)
SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER EXPRESS (EXCEPT BASE) - BLACK 6 WAY

1 E34 20OR/TN PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH ILLUMINA-
TION DRIVER
2 Q336 20OR/GY PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH MUX
3 Q936 20OR/LG PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH RETURN
THROTTLE BODY (GAS) - BLACK 6 WAY

1 K22 18BR/OR TP SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL
3 K124 18DB/GY ETC MOTOR (+)
4 K122 18BR/DG TP SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL
5 K126 18DB/LG ETC MOTOR (-)
6 K922 18BR/DB TP SENSOR RETURN
TRANSDUCER-A/C PRESSURE - GRAY 4 WAY

1 C918 20BK/LB A/C PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND
2 F891 20PK/GY 5 VOLT SUPPLY
3 C18 20LB/BR A/C PRESSURE TRANSDUCER SIGNAL
4 - -
TRANSMITTER-INTRUSION SENSOR (RHD) - BLACK 3 WAY

1 A645 20RD/VT INTRUSION TRANSMITTER SENSOR SIGNAL
2 - -
3 G945 20VT/DG INTRUSION TRANSMITTER SENSOR GROUND
TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-LEFT FRONT (TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR) - BLACK 6 WAY

3 Z902 20BK/LB (LX49) GROUND
4 Z902 20BK/LB (LX49) GROUND
5 - -
6 - -
TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-RIGHT FRONT (TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR) - BLACK 6 WAY

3 Z901 20BK/TN (LX48) GROUND
3 Z901 20BK/DG (LX49) GROUND
4 - -
5 Z901 20BK/TN (LX48) GROUND
5 Z901 20BK/DG (LX49) GROUND
6 - -
TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-RIGHT REAR (TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR) - BLACK 6 WAY

4 - -
5 - -
VALVE-EGR (DIESEL) - 4 WAY

1 K34 20GY/YL EGR SOLENOID CONTROL
3 Z904 18BR GROUND
4 - -
VALVE-EGR AIR FLOW CONTROL (DIESEL) - 6 WAY

1 K315 20GY/PK EGR AIR FLOW CONTROL VALVE MOTOR (-)
2 K390 20DG/PK EGR AIR FLOW CONTROL VALVE POSITION SENSOR
RETURN
3 K313 20DG/GY EGR AIR FLOW CONTROL VALVE POSITION SENSOR
SUPPLY
4 K314 20GY/RD EGR AIR FLOW CONTROL VALVE MOTOR (+)
5 - -
6 K312 20GY/OR EGR AIR FLOW CONTROL VALVE POSITION SENSOR
SIGNAL
LX 8W-91 CONNECTOR/GROUND/SPLICE LOCATION 8W - 91 - 1
8W-91 CONNECTOR/GROUND/SPLICE LOCATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
CONNECTOR/GROUND/SPLICE LOCATION
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
8W - 91 - 2 8W-91 CONNECTOR/GROUND/SPLICE LOCATION LX
CONNECTOR/GROUND/SPLICE LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
This section provides illustrations identifying connector, ground and splice locations in the vehicle. Connector,
ground and splice indexes are provided. Use the wiring diagrams in each section for connector, ground and splice
identification. Refer to the appropriate index for the proper figure number. For items that are not shown in this sec-
tion N/S is placed in the Fig. column.
CONNECTORS
CONNECTOR NAME/ COLOR LOCATION FIG.

NUMBER
Actuator-Blend Door-Left BK Left Side of HVAC Unit 36
Actuator-Blend Door-Right BK Center of HVAC Unit 34
(ATC)
Actuator-Mode Door BK Left Side of HVAC Unit 36
Actuator-Recirculation Door BK Right Side of HVAC Unit 35
Airbag-Driver Squib 1 BK/YL At Steering Wheel 42
Airbag-Driver Squib 2 BR/YL At Steering Wheel 42
Airbag-Passenger Squib YL Passenger side of Instrument Panel 37, 38, 49
Airbag-Side Curtain-Left YL Body Behind Left Rear Seat 62, 63
Airbag-Side Curtain-Right YL Body Behind Right Rear Seat 64, 74
Amplifier-Antenna-Backlite C1 BK Upper Right Backlite 64, 73, 78
Amplifier-Antenna-Backlite C2 - N/S
Amplifier-Antenna-Backlite C3 BK Upper Right Backlite 64, 73, 78
Amplifier-Antenna-Backlite C4 - N/S
Amplifier-Radio C1 NAT Driver Side of Instrument Panel 37, 39, 40
Amplifier-Radio C2 WT Driver Side of Instrument Panel 37, 39, 40
Amplifier-Subwoofer (SRT8) BK Center Rear Shelf 64
Antenna Cable-Satellite Radio BL Rear Center Headliner 71, 72
No. 1
Antenna Cable-Satellite Radio WT Rear Center Headliner 71, 72
No. 2
Antenna-Global Positioning GY N/S
System (Navigation)
Antenna-Satellite No. 1 BL Left Rear Trunk 71, 72
Antenna-Satellite No. 2 WT Left Rear Trunk 71, 72
Assembly-Electrohydraulic BK Right Side Transmission 7, 33
Control Unit (NAG1)
Assembly-Exhaust Gas BK Rear of Engine 17
Recirculation valve (2.7L)
Assembly-Exhaust Gas BK Rear of Engine 20
Assembly-Exhaust Gas BK Right Front Engine 24
Assembly-Natural Vacuum BK In Right Rear Wheel Well 64, 65
Leak Detection (Except
Export)

NUMBER
Assembly-Shifter Lever BK Below Center Console 53
(Console NAG1)
Assembly-Shifter Lever (RLE) WT Below Center Console 53
Assembly-Transmission LT-BR At Top of Transmission 17, 20
Solenoid/Pressure Switch
Assembly-Variable Line BK On Transmission N/S
Pressure (RLE)
Backlite-Antenna NAT Right Backlite 73
Backlite-Electric Heated BK Right Backlite 73
(POWER)
Backlite-Electric Heated BK Left Backlite 62, 78
(GROUND)
Battery-Negative Right Rear Trunk 80, 81
Battery-Positive Right Rear Trunk 81, 82
Booster-Active Brake BK Left Rear Engine Compartment 8
C100 (2.7L/3.5L) BK Right Engine Compartment 7, 9, 17, 20
C100 (5.7L/SRT8) BK Right Engine Compartment 7, 25, 28, 29
C100 (DIESEL) BK Left Rear Engine Compartment 8, 9, 30
C101 (5.7L DK GY Left Rear Engine Compartment 26
C102 LT GY/BK Passenger Side of Instrument Panel 37, 38, 47, 53
C103 (LX48) DK GY Right Front Engine Compartment 3
C104 BK Passenger Side of Instrument Panel 52, 53
C105 BR Passenger Side of Instrument Panel 52, 53
C106 (NAG1) LT GY Left Kick Panel N/S
C107 BK Top Front of Engine 28
C108 (DIESEL) BK Right Rear Engine Compartment 7, 15
C200 NAT/BK Passenger Side of Instrument Panel 37, 38, 47, 52, 53
C201 GN/BK Passenger Side of Instrument Panel 37, 38, 47, 52, 53
C202 NAT Right Side of HVAC Unit 35, 37, 38, 47
C203 BK Driver Side Kick Panel 37, 39, 40, 43, 51, 54
C204 NAT Right Side Instrument Panel 37, 39, 49, 66
C205 NAT Left Instrument Panel 36, 37, 38, 50
C206 NAT/WT At Steering Wheel 42
C207 BK Right Side Instrument Panel 37, 39, 47, 53, 54
C208 (Column NAG1) NAT At Bottom of Steering Column N/S
C300 NAT Front of Driver Door 51, 54, 60
C301 NAT Front of Passenger Door 52, 53, 60
C302 (Body) NAT Front of Left Rear Door 57
C302 (Door) NAT Front of Left Rear Door 61
C303 (Body) NAT Front of Right Rear Door 58
C303 (Door) NAT At Right B-Pillar 61
C304 (LX49) LT GY Top Front of Liftgate 78
C305 (LX49) LT GY Top Front of Liftgate 78

NUMBER
C306 BK Right Rear Body 75, 76, 86
C307 (LX48) BK Left Rear Taillamp Assembly 76, 85
C308 (LX48) BK Right Rear Taillamp Assembly 76, 85
C309 (LX49) DK GY Left Rear Fascia 83, 84, 86
C310 (LX49) DK GY Right Rear Fascia 83, 84, 86
C311 NAT Rear of Sunroof 66, 70
C313 LT GY Below Driver Seat 51, 55
C314 LT GY Below Passenger Seat 52, 53, 56
C315 LT GY Rear Driver Seat N/S
C316 LT GY Passenger Seat 56
C317 NAT Left Kick Panel 37, 38, 40, 43, 59
Capacitor-Ignition-No. 1 BK Right Side Engine Near T/O for Ignition N/S
Coil No. 5
Capacitor-Ignition-No. 1 BK At Rear of Left Engine Head N/S
(6.1L)
Capacitor-Ignition-No. 2 BK Top Left of Engine 18
(2.7L/5.7L)
Cluster C1 GY Rear of Instrment Cluster 37, 39, 44
Cluster C2 GY Rear of Instrment Cluster 37, 39, 44
Cluster C3 WT Rear of Instrment Cluster 37, 39, 44
Clutch-A/C Compressor BK Front of Engine 18, 26, 29
Clutch-A/C Compressor BK On Engine Harness N/S
(DIESEL)
Coil-Ignition-No. 1 (2.7L/3.5L) BK Top Right Front of Engine N/S
Coil-Ignition-No. 1 (5.7L/6.1L) BK Top Left Front of Engine 26, 28, 29
Coil-Ignition-No. 2 (2.7L/3.5L) BK Top Left Front of Engine 18, 22
Coil-Ignition-No. 2 (5.7L/6.1L) BK Top Right Front of Engine 25, 28
Coil-Ignition-No. 3 (2.7L/3.5L) BK Top Right of Engine N/S
Coil-Ignition-No. 3 (5.7L/6.1L) BK Top Left of Engine 26, 28, 29
Coil-Ignition-No. 4 (2.7L/3.5L) BK Top Left of Engine 18, 22
Coil-Ignition-No. 4 (5.7L/6.1L) BK Top Right of Engine 25, 28
Coil-Ignition-No. 5 (2.7L/3.5L) BK Top Right Rear of Engine N/S
Coil-Ignition-No. 5 (5.7L/6.1L) BK Top Left Rear of Engine 26, 28, 29
Coil-Ignition-No. 6 (2.7L/3.5L) BK Top Left Rear of Engine 18, 22
Coil-Ignition-No. 6 (5.7L/6.1L) BK Top Right Rear of Engine 25, 28
Coil-Ignition-No. 7 (5.7L/6.1L) BK Top Left Rear of Engine 26, 28, 29
Coil-Ignition-No. 8 (5.7L/6.1L) BK Top Right Rear of Engine 25, 28
Connector-Interface-Police/ NAT At Mini Console N/S
Taxi
Connector-Police Accessories Lt. GY N/S
Control-A/C-Heater C1 (ATC) GY At Center Stack 37, 38, 46
Control-A/C-Heater C1 (MTC) BK At Center Stack 37, 38, 46
Control-A/C-Heater C2 GY At Center Stack 37, 38, 46

NUMBER
Control-A/C-Heater C3 (MTC) BK At Center Stack 37, 46
Data Link Connector BK Driver Side of Instrument Panel Above 37, 39, 40, 43
Pedals
Diode-No. 1 (NAG1) N/S
Diode-No. 2 N/S
Diode-Zener N/S
Display-Park Assist BK Center Rear Headliner, Above Backlite 66
(Parktronics)
Fan-Radiator C1 DK GY Right Front of Engine Compartment 3, 4
Fan-Radiator C2 (SRT8/ DK-GY Right Front of Engine Compartment 3, 4
DIESEL)
Flasher-Headlamp C1 LT GY N/S
(Police)
Flasher-Headlamp C2 LT GY N/S
(Police)
Fuse Block A (Police) Right Kick Pannel 53
Fuse Block B (Police) Right Kick Pannel 53
Fuse/Relay Block 1 (DIESEL) Behind Right Shocktower, Engine 7, 15
Compartment
Fuse/Relay Block 2 (DIESEL) Behind Right Shocktower, Engine 7, 15
Compartment
Generator (GAS) BK Right Front of Engine 17, 20, 25, 28
Generator (DIESEL) BL On Engine Harness N/S
Generator-Eyelet - Right Front of Engine 17, 20, 25, 28
Glow Plug-No. 1 BK Right Top of Engine 31
Glow Plug-No. 2 BK Left Top of Engine 31
Heater-Cabin (DIESEL) LT GY At Left Side of HVAC 53
Heater-Crankcase Vent BK Top Center of Engine N/S
(DIESEL)
Heater-Seat Back-Left GY Near Driver Seat Back Pivot N/S
Heater-Seat Back-Right GY Near Passenger Seat Back Pivot 56
Heater-Seat Cushion-Left GN Under Driver Seat 55
Heater-Seat Cushion-Right GN Under Passenger Seat 56
Horn-No. 1 BK Right Front of Engine Compartment 3
Horn-No. 2 BK Right Front of Engine Compartment 3
Injector-Fuel-No.1 (2.7L/3.5L) BK Top Right Front of Engine N/S
Injector-Fuel-No.1 (5.7L) BK Top Left Front of Engine 26
Injector-Fuel-No.1 (6.1L) BK At Left Side of Intake Manifold 29
Injector-Fuel-No.1 (DIESEL) BK Right Top of Engine 31
Injector-Fuel-No.2 (2.7L/3.5L) BK Top Left Front of Engine 18

NUMBER
Injector-Fuel-No.2 (5.7L/6.1L) BK Top Right Front of Engine 25, 28
Injector-Fuel-No.2 (DIESEL) BK Left Top of Engine 31
Injector-Fuel-No.3 (2.7L/3.5L) BK Top Right of Engine N/S
Injector-Fuel-No.3 (5.7L) BK Top Left of Engine 26
Injector-Fuel-No.4 (2.7L) BK Top Left of Engine 18
Injector-Fuel-No.4 (5.7L/6.1L) BK Top Right of Engine 25, 28
Injector-Fuel-No.5 (2.7L) BK Top Right Rear of Engine N/S
Injector-Fuel-No.5 (5.7L) BK Top Left Rear of Engine 26
Injector-Fuel-No.6 (5.7L/6.1L) BK Top Right Rear of Engine 25, 28
Injector-Fuel-No.8 (5.7L/6.1L) BK Top Right Rear of Engine 25, 28
Lamp-Back-Up-Left (300C) GY Right Tail Lamp Assembly 85
Lamp-Back-Up-Left (300T) GY Left Tail Lamp Assembly 83
Lamp-Back-Up-Left (LX49) LT GY Left Tail Lamp Assembly 84
Lamp-Back-Up-Right (300C) GY Right Tail Lamp Assembly 85
Lamp-Back-Up-Right (300T) GY Right Tail Lamp Assembly 83
Lamp-Back-Up-Right (LX49) LT GY Right Tail Lamp Assembly 84
Lamp-Cargo (LX48 Chrysler) BK Bottom Center of Backlite 64
Lamp-Cargo (LX48 Dodge) WT Bottom Center of Backlite 64
Lamp-Cargo (LX49) GY Rear of Liftgate 78
Lamp-Center High Mounted LT GY Bottom Center of Backlite 64
Stop (LX48 Chrysler)
Lamp-Center High Mounted BK Bottom Center of Backlite 64
Stop (LX48 Dodge)
Lamp-Center High Mounted NAT Right of Liftgate 78
Stop (LX49)
Lamp-Courtesy-Left Front WT At Bottom of Door 60
Door (Except Base)
Lamp-Courtesy-Left Rear BK Left Rear of Headliner 66
Lamp-Courtesy-Right Front WT At Bottom of Door 60
Door (Except Base)
Lamp-Courtesy-Right Rear BK Right Rear of Headliner 66
Lamp-Dome (Police) Rear of Overhead Console 68
Lamp-Fog-Left Front BK Inside of Left Front Fascia 4

NUMBER
Lamp-Fog-Left Rear (300C GN Left Rear Taillamp Assembly 85
Export)
Lamp-Fog-Left Rear (LX49 GY Left Rear Fascia 86
Export)
Lamp-Fog-Right Front BK Inside of Right Front Fascia 2
Lamp-Fog-Right Rear (300C GN Right Rear Taillamp Assembly 85
Export)
Lamp-Fog-Right Rear (LX49 GY Right Rear Fascia 86
Export)
Lamp-Glove Box BK Passenger Side of Instrument Panel 37, 38, 49
Lamp-High Beam-Left BK Left Front Lamp Assembly 1, 4
Lamp-High Beam-Right BK Right Front Lamp Assembly 1, 2
Lamp-High Intensity DK GY Left Front Lamp Assembly 1
Discharge-Left (HID Lamps)
Lamp-High Intensity DK GY Right Front Lamp Assembly 1
Discharge-Right ( HID
Lamps)
Lamp-License (Except 300C BK Center of Rear Fascia 86
Export)
Lamp-License-Left (Export) BK Center of Rear Fascia 86
Lamp-License-Right (Export) BK Center of Rear Fascia 86
Lamp-Low Beam-Left (Except GY Left Front Lamp Assembly 1, 4
HID Lamps)
Lamp-Low Beam-Right GY Right Front Lamp Assembly 1, 2
(Except HID Lamps)
Lamp-Park/Turn-Left Front BK Left Front Lamp Assembly 1, 4
Lamp-Park/Turn-Right Front BK Right Front Lamp Assembly 1, 2
Lamp-PRNDL WT Below Center Console 53
Lamp-Reading-Front NAT Overhead Console 69
Lamp-Side Marker-Left Front BK Behind Left Front Fender 5
(LX48)
Lamp-Side Marker-Left Rear BK Left Tail Lamp Assembly 83
(300T)
Lamp-Side Marker-Right BK Behind Right Front Fender 5
Front (LX48)
Lamp-Side Marker-Right Rear BK Right Tail Lamp Assembly 83
(300T)
Lamp-Side Repeater-Left BK Behind Left Front Fender 5
(Export)
Lamp-Side Repeater-Right BK Behind Right Front Fender 5
(Export)
Lamp-Spot-Left (Police) Top of Left A-Pillar 67
Lamp-Spot-Right (Police) Top of Right A-Pillar 67
Lamp-Tail Park-Left (300C GN Right Tail Lamp Assembly 85
Except Export)

NUMBER
Lamp-Tail Park-Right (300C GN Right Tail Lamp Assembly 85
Except Export)
Lamp-Tail Stop/Park-Left BK Left Tail Lamp Assembly 85
(300C)
Lamp-Tail Stop/Park-Right BK Right Tail Lamp Assembly 85
(300C)
Lamp-Tail Stop/Turn-Left BK Left Tail Lamp Assembly 83
(300T)
Lamp-Tail Stop/Turn-Right BK Right Tail Lamp Assembly 83
(300T)
Lamp-Tail Turn-Left (300C GY Left Tail Lamp Assembly 85
Except Export)
Lamp-Tail Turn-Left (300C NAT Left Tail Lamp Assembly 85
Export)
Lamp-Tail Turn-Right (300C NAT Right Tail Lamp Assembly 85
Except Export)
Lamp-Tail Turn-Right (300C GY Right Tail Lamp Assembly 85
Export)
Lamp-Tail/Stop-Left (LX49) BR Left Tail Lamp Assembly 84
Lamp-Tail/Stop-Right (LX49) BR Right Tail Lamp Assembly 84
Lamp-Turn-Left Rear (LX49) TN Left Tail Lamp Assembly 84
Lamp-Turn-Right Rear (LX49) TN Right Tail Lamp Assembly 84
Lamp-Underhood (Police) BK Right Rear Under Hood 16
Lamp-Vanity-Left BK Left Visor 66
Lamp-Vanity-Right BK Right Visor 66
Latch-Door-Decklid (LX48) BK At Decklid Latch 77
Latch-Door-Driver BK Left Front Door 60
Latch-Door-Left Rear BK Rear of Left Rear Door 61
Latch-Door-Liftgate (LX49) BK At Liftgate Latch 78
Latch-Door-Passenger BK Right Front Door 60
Latch-Door-Right Rear BK Rear of Right Rear Door 61
Lighter-Cigar GY Center Stack 37, 38, 47
Media System-Monitor/DVD LT-GY Rear Center Console N/S
Mirror-Inside Rearview C1 BK Center Top of Windshield 50
(Except Base)
Mirror-Inside Rearview C2 BK Center Top of Windshield 50
(Hands Free)
Mirror-Outside Rearview- NAT Driver Door 60
Driver (Except Memory)
Mirror-Outside Rearview- BK Driver Door 60
Driver (Memory)
Mirror-Outside Rearview- NAT Passenger Door 60
Passenger (Except Memory)
Mirror-Outside Rearview- BK Passenger Door 60
Passenger (Memory)

NUMBER
Module-Antilock Brakes BK Right Front Engine Compartment 6
Module-Brake (Trailer Tow) BL Left Kick Panel 51
Module-Clock Analog NAT Top Center Indstrument Panel 37, 38, 46
Module-Door-Driver C1 BK Middle of Driver Door 60
Module-Door-Driver C2 BK Middle of Driver Door 60
Module-Door-Driver C3 GY Middle of Driver Door 60
(Memory)
Module-Door-Driver C4 DK GY Middle of Driver Door 60
(Memory)
Module-Door-Passenger C1 BK Middle of Passenger Door N/S
Module-Door-Passenger C2 BK Middle of Passenger Door N/S
Module-Door-Passenger C4 DK GY Middle of Passenger Door N/S
(Memory)
Module-Electronic Overhead BK Overhead Console 66, 69
Module-Electronic Shift C1 BK At Bottom of Steering Column N/S
(Column NAG1)
Module-Electronic Shift C2 BK At Bottom of Steering Column N/S
(Column NAG1)
Module-Engine Control C1 BK Left Rear Engine Compartment N/S
(DIESEL)
Module-Engine Control C2 BK Left Rear Engine Compartment 8, 9
(DIESEL)
Module-Front Blower Power BK Center HVAC Unit 34
C1 (ATC)
Module-Front Blower Power BK Center HVAC Unit 34
C2 (ATC)
Module-Front Control C1 BK Right Engine Compartment 6
Module-Front Control C2 BK Right Engine Compartment 6
Module-Front Control IPM BK At End of IPM N/S
Module-Fuel Pump BK Top of Fuel Tank 57
Module-Glow Plug Top Center of Engine 31, 32
Module-Glow Plug-Eyelet In Starter Harness N/S
Module-Hands Free DK GY Right Side Instrument Panel 37, 47
Module-Headlamp Leveling BK Right Front Engine Compartment 2, 6
(Export)
Module-Heated Seats BK Below Passenger Seat 53, 54
Module-Integrated Power C1 GN Right Engine Compartment 6
Module-Integrated Power C2 LT GY Right Engine Compartment 6
Module-Integrated Power C3 BK Right Engine Compartment 6
Module-Integrated Power C4 LT GY Right Engine Compartment 6
Module-Integrated Power C5 BL Right Engine Compartment 6
Module-Integrated Power- - Right Engine Compartment 14
Eyelet
Module-Interface-Police/Taxi GY In Mini Console, at Center Stack end 48
C1

NUMBER
Module-Interface-Police/Taxi DK GY In Mini Console, at Center Stack end 48
C2
Module-Intrusion Transceiver BK Left Side of Instrument Pannel 38
(RHD)
Module-Memory Seat C1 BK Below Driver Seat 51, 55
Module-Memory Seat C2 BK Below Driver Seat 55
Module-Memory Seat C3 NAT Below Driver Seat 55
Module-Memory Seat C4 WT Below Driver Seat 55
Module-Memory Seat C5 BK Below Driver Seat 55
Module-Occupant BK Below Passenger Seat 53, 56
Classification C1 (Except
Export)
Module-Occupant BK Below Passenger Seat 56
Classification C2 (Except
Export)
Module-Occupant Restraint YL In Center Console 53
Controller C1
Module-Occupant Restraint YL In Center Console 37, 38, 43
Controller C2
Module-Park Assist BK Behind Right Rear Seat 76
(Parktronics)
Module-Powertrain Control BK/BK Right Engine Compartment 7
C1 (LHD)
Module-Powertrain Control BK/BK Left Rear Engine Compartment 9
C1 (RHD)
Module-Powertrain Control BK/OR Right Engine Compartment 17, 20, 25, 28, 29
C2
Module-Powertrain Control BK/NAT Right Engine Compartment 7
C3 (LHD)
Module-Powertrain Control BK/NAT Left Rear Engine Compartment 9
C3 (RHD)
Module-Powertrain Control BK/GN Right Engine Compartment 17, 20
C4
Module-Sentry Key Remote BK Steering Column 37, 39, 40
Entry
Module-Steering Column- Right Side of Steering Column 39
Lock (RHD)
Module-Steering Control BK Steering Column 37, 39, 41, 44
Module-Traffic Information BK Instrument Panel Near Radio N/S
Receiver C1 (EXPORT)
Module-Transmission Control BK Below Steering Column 39, 43, 51, 54
C1 (NAG1)

NUMBER
Module-Transmission Control BK Below Steering Column 8, 43, 51, 54
C2 (NAG1)
Motor-Adjustable Pedals NAT At Adjustable Pedal Assembly 53
Motor-Blower-Front BK Right Side HVAC Unit 34, 35
Motor-Boost Pressure Servo NAT On Turbocharger Assembly 31
Motor-Headlamp Washer BK Behind Right Front Bumper 2
(HID Lamps)
Motor-Intake Swirl Servo BK At Top Center of Engine, Intake Valley 31
Motor/Module-Sunroof LT GY Rear Center Headliner 70
Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver GY Below Driver Seat 55
Horizontal
Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver NAT Driver Seat Back N/S
Recliner (Except Memory)
Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver BL N/S
Recliner (Memory)
Motor-Seat Adjuster-Front GY Below Driver Seat 55
Driver Vertical
Motor-Seat Adjuster-Front GY Front Passenger Seat 56
Passenger Vertical
Motor-Seat Adjuster- GY Below Passenger Seat 56
Passenger Horizontal
Motor-Seat Adjuster-Rear GY Rear Driver Seat N/S
Driver Vertical
Motor-Seat Adjuster-Rear GY Below Passenger Seat 56
Passenger Vertical
Motor-Steering Telescope NAT Steering Column 37, 40
(Memory)
Motor-Steering Tilt (Memory) BK Steering Column 37, 40
Motor-Window-Driver (Base) LT GY Middle of Driver Door 60
Motor-Window-Driver-Express LT GY Middle of Driver Door 60
(Except Base)
Motor-Window-Left Rear LT GY Middle of Left Rear Door 61
Motor-Window-Passenger LT GY Middle of Passenger Door 60
(Base)
Motor-Window-Passenger LT GY Middle of Passenger Door 60
Express (Except Base)
Motor-Window-Right Rear LT GY Middle of Right Rear Door 61
Motor-Wiper-Front (RHD) BK Right Rear Engine Compartment 7, 15
Motor-Wiper-Front (LHD) BK Left Rear Engine Compartment 8
Motor-Wipe-Rear (LX49) BK Rear Decklid 78
Post-Pass Through-Eyelet Right Front Kick Panel 79
(Battery Side)
Post-Pass Through-Eyelet Right Wheel Well 10
(Starter Side)
Power Distribution Center- Right Rear Trunk 81
Eyelet

NUMBER
Power Outlet-Console BK In Center of Console 53
Power Outlet-Rear (LX49) BK Right Rear Cargo Area 65, 74
Pump-Washer-Windshield NAT Right Front Engine Compartment 2
Radio C1 DK GY Rear of Radio 37, 38, 45
Radio C2 BK Rear of Radio 37, 38, 45
Radio-Antenna (Navigation) GY N/S
Radio-Antenna BK Rear of Radio 37, 38, 49
Receiver-Intrusion Sensor BK Above the Glove Box N/S
(RHD)
Receiver-Satellite BK Left Rear Side Trunk 59
Relay-Headlamp Washer LT GY Below Right Front Lamp Housing 2
(HID Lamps)
Resistor Block-Blower BK Center HVAC Unit 34
Motor-Front (MTC)
Seat Belt-Tensioner-Driver BK Left B-Pillar 57
(LHD)
Seat Belt-Tensioner-Driver BK At Base of Right B-Pillar 58
(RHD)
Seat Belt-Tensioner- BK Right B-Pillar 58
Passenger (LHD)
Seat Belt-Tensioner- BK At Base of Left B-Pillar 57
Passenger (RHD)
Sensor-Accelerator Pedal BK At Adjustable Pedal Assembly 53, 54
Position
Sensor-Adjustable Pedals BK At Adjustable Pedal Assembly 51
Sensor-Ambient Air BK Right Front Engine Compartment 3
Temperature
Sensor-Boost Pressure At Front Side of Air Control Valve 31
Sensor-Brake Fluid Level GY Left Rear Engine Compartment 8
(LHD)
Sensor-Brake Fluid Level GY Right Rear Engine Compartment 7, 15
(RHD)
Sensor-Brake Pedal Travel BK Left Rear Engine Compartment 8
Sensor-Brake Pressure BK Left Rear Engine Compartment 8
Sensor-Camshaft Position BK Top Front of Engine 19
(2.7L/3.5L)
Sensor-Camshaft Position GY Top Front of Engine N/S
(5.7L)
Sensor-Camshaft Position GY Top Right Front of Engine N/S
(6.1L)
Sensor-Camshaft Position On Top of Right Valve Cover 31
(DIESEL)
Sensor-Crankshaft Position BK Right Rear of Engine 17
(2.7L)
Sensor-Crankshaft Position BK Right Rear of Engine 20
(3.5L)

NUMBER
Sensor-Crankshaft Position BK Right Rear of Engine 25, 28
(5.7L/6.1L)
Sensor-Crankshaft Position BK Left Rear Engine Block, Near 30
(DIESEL) Bellhousing
Sensor-Dynamics BK Below Center Console 53
Sensor-Engine Coolant BK Front of Engine 19
Temperature
Sensor-Engine Coolant BK Left Front of Engine N/S
Temperature (6.1L)
Sensor-Engine Coolant BK Top of Left Engine Head, Under Center 31
Temperature (DIESEL) of Fuel Rail
Sensor-Evaporator BK Center HVAC Unit 34
Temperature
Sensor-Exhaust Differential Left Rear Engine Compartment 8
Pressure (LHD DIESEL)
Sensor-Exhaust Differential Right Rear Engine Compartment 7
Pressure (RHD DIESEL)
Sensor-Exhaust Gas Next to EGR Valve, Center of Engine 30, 31
Pressure (DIESEL) side
Sensor-Front Impact-Left GY Left Front Engine Compartment 4
Sensor-Front Impact-Right GY Right Front Engine Compartment 3
Sensor-Fuel Pressure BK At Rear of Right Fuel Rail 31
(DIESEL)
Sensor-Fuel Temperature On Front of High Pressure Fuel Pump 31
(DIESEL)
Sensor-Headlamp Level-Left BK Right Front Engine Compartment N/S
(Export)
Sensor-Headlamp Level-Right BK Under Right Side Body 2, 64
(Export)
Sensor-Inlet Air Pressure On Rear of Air Filter Box 32
(DIESEL)
Sensor-Inlet Air Temperature BK Top of Engine, or in Air Intake System 18, 21, 25
Sensor-Input Speed BK Right Side of Transmission 17, 20
Sensor-Intake Air BK On Rear of Air Inlet Tube, Just before 31
Temperature (DIESEL) Air Control Valve
Sensor-Knock No. 1 BK Rear of Engine 18, 26, 29
Sensor-Knock No. 2 BK Right Rear of Engine 25, 28
(5.7L/6.1L)
Sensor-Manifold Absolute GY Top of Engine, or in Intake Manifold 18, 21, 22, 26, 28, 29
Pressure
Sensor-Mass Air Flow BK At Air Filter Box 32
(DIESEL)
Sensor-Oil Pressure (5.7L) BK Right Front of Engine N/S
Sensor-Oil Pressure (6.1L) BK Right Front of Engine 28
Sensor-Oil Pressure Left Front of Engine Near Fuel Quantity N/S
(DIESEL) Solenoid

NUMBER
Sensor-Oil Temperature BK Right Front of Engine 25, 28
(5.7L/6.1L)
Sensor-Oil Temperature BK At Rear of Oil Pan 30
(DIESEL)
Sensor-Output Speed BK Right Side of Transmission 17, 20
Sensor-Oxygen (DIESEL) AT Rear of Engine N/S
Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front BK Right Rear Engine Compartment 17, 20
(2.7L/ 3.5L)
Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front BK Left Rear Engine Compartment 25, 26
(5.7L)
Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front BK Left Rear Engine Compartment 28, 29
(6.1L)
Sensor-Oxygen-Left Rear BK Left Rear Engine Compartment 8, 11, 12, 13
Sensor-Oxygen-Right Front BK Left Side of Engine 18, 21
(2.7L/3.5L)
Sensor-Oxygen-Right Front BK Right Side of Engine 25
(5.7L)
Sensor-Oxygen-Right Front BK Right Side of Engine 28, 29
(6.1L)
Sensor-Oxygen-Right Rear BK Lower Rear of Engine Compartment 11, 12, 13
Sensor-Park Assist-No. 7 BK Right Rear Fascia 86
Sensor-Park Assist-No. 8 BK Right Rear Fascia 86
Sensor-Park Assist-No. 9 BK Left Rear Fascia 86
Sensor-Park Assist-No. 10 BK Left Rear Fascia 86
Sensor-Post-Catalyst Exhaust BK At Rear of Engine N/S
Gas Temperature (DIESEL)
Sensor-Pre-Catalyst Exhaust BK At Rear of Engine N/S
Gas Temperature (DIESEL)
Sensor-Rain (Auto wipers) BK At Inside Rearview Mirror 50
Sensor-Seat Track Position- GY Below Driver Seat 51, 54, 55
Driver
Sensor-Seat Weight-Left BK Below Passenger Seat 56
Front (Except Export)
Sensor-Seat Weight-Left Rear BK Below Passenger Seat 56
(Except Export)
Sensor-Seat Weight-Right BK Below Passenger Seat 56
Front (Except Export)
Sensor-Seat Weight-Right BK Below Passenger Seat 56
Rear (Except Export)
Sensor-Shift Lever Position BK Steering Column N/S
(Column NAG1)
Sensor-Side Impact-Left 1 GY Left B-Pillar 57
Sensor-Side Impact-Left 2 GY Rear of Left Rear Door 62, 63
Sensor-Side Impact-Right 1 GY Right B-Pillar 58
Sensor-Side Impact-Right 2 GY Rear of Right Rear Door 64, 65
Sensor-Sun (ATC) BK Top Center Instrument Panel 37, 38, 45

NUMBER
Sensor-Transmission Range LT GN Right Side of Transmission 17, 20
Sensor-Washer Fluid LT GY Right Front of Engine Compartment 2
Level-Front
Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS- BK Left Front Wheel Well 4
Left Front
Sensor-Wheel Speed-Left BK Left Front Wheel Well 4
Front (Except ABS)
Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS- BK Right Front of Cargo Pan 65
Rear
Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS- BK Right Front Wheel Well 6
Right Front
Sensor-Wheel Speed-Right BK Right Front Wheel Well 6
Front (Except ABS)
Siren BK Left Front Wheel Well 5
Solenoid-Fuel Pressure NAT At Front of Left Fuel Rail 31
(DIESEL)
Solenoid-Fuel Quantity BK On Front of Hi Pressure Fuel Pump 31
(DIESEL)
Solenoid-Manifold Tuning GY Front of Engine 19, 21
Valve (2.7L/3.5L)
Solenoid-Multi Displacement BK In Valley Under Intake N/S
System Cyl 1 (5.7L MDS)
Solenoid-Proportional Purge BK Right Engine Compartment 7
(GAS)
Solenoid-Short Runner Valve GY Top of Engine 19, 21
(3.5L)
Solenoid-Starter Right Rear of Engine N/S
Speaker-Insturment WT Top Center Instrument Panel 37, 38, 45
Panel-Center (Highline)
Speaker-Insturment WT Top Left Instrument Panel 37, 38, 40
Panel-Left
Speaker-Insturment WT Right Instrument Panel 37, 39, 49
Panel-Right
Speaker-Left Front Door WT Bottom of Door 60
Speaker-Left Rear (LX48) WT Left Rear Shelf 62
Speaker-Left Rear (LX49) WT Body Behind Left Rear Seat 63
Speaker-Right Front Door WT Bottom of Door 60
Speaker-Right Rear (LX48) WT Right Rear Shelf 64
Speaker-Right Rear (LX49) WT Body Behind Right Rear Seat 65

NUMBER
Speaker-Subwoofer (Highline WT Center Rear Shelf 64
Except SRT8)
Speaker-Subwoofer (SRT8) BK Center Rear Shelf 62
Starter (2.7L/3.5L/5.7L AWD) BK Left Rear of Engine 18, 21
Starter (5.7L RWD) NAT Right Rear fo Engine 25
Starter (6.1L) NAT Right Rear fo Engine 28
Starter (DIESEL) Rear of Engine N/S
Starter-Fusible Link-Eyelet - Left Side of Engine 18, 21, 23
(2.7L/3.5L/5.7L AWD)
Starter-Fusible Link-Eyelet - Right Side of Engnie 25, 27
(5.7L RWD)
Starter-Fusible Link-Eyelet - Right Rear of Engnie 28
(6.1L)
Starter-Post-Pass Through- - Left Side of Engine 23
Eyelet (2.7L/3.5L)
Starter-Post-Pass Through- - Right Side of Engine 27
Eyelet (V8)
Switch-Adjustable Pedals WT Right Side of Driver Seat N/S
Switch-Autostick (Column WT Steering Column N/S
NAG1)
Switch-Bank BK Top Center Instrument Panel 37, 38, 46
Switch-Decklid Release BK Driver Side of Instrument Panel 37, 44
(LX48)
Switch-Decklid Release BK Driver Side of Instrument Panel 39
(RHD)
Switch-Headlamp BK Driver Side of Instrument Panel 37, 39, 44
Switch-Heated Seat-Left BK Center Stack 37, 38, 43, 47
Switch-Heated Seat-Right BK Center Stack 37, 38, 43, 47
Switch-Horn BK Steering Wheel 42
Switch-Ignition (LHD) BK In IP to Right of Steering Cloumn 37, 40
Switch-Ignition C1 (RHD) BK In IP to Right of Steering Cloumn 39
Switch-Ignition C2 (RHD) BK In IP to Right of Steering Cloumn 39
Switch-Liftgate Release BK Left Rear Liftgate 78
(LX49)
Switch-Memory Set BK Middle of Driver Door 60
Switch-Mirror LT GY Middle of Driver Door 60
Switch-Oil Level BK Bottom Left of Oil Pan 30
Switch-Oil Pressure LT GN Front of Engine N/S
(2.7L/3.5L)
Switch-Parking Brake BK Base of Parking Brake 51
Switch-Power Window-Left LT GY Left Rear Door 61
Rear
Switch-Power Window-Right LT GY Right Rear Door 61
Rear

NUMBER
Switch-Seat Belt-Driver LT GY Below Driver Seat 55
(LX48)
Switch-Seat Belt-Driver LT GY Below Left B-Pillar 51
(LX49)
Switch-Seat Belt-Passenger LT GY Below Passenger Seat 53
Switch-Seat-Driver (Except BK Right Side of Driver Seat N/S
Memory)
Switch-Seat-Driver (Memory) GY Right Side of Driver Seat N/S
Switch-Seat-Passenger BK Side of Passenger Seat 56
Switch-Security Hood (LHD) BK Right Engine Compartment 7, 15
Switch-Security Hood (RHD) BK Left Rear Engine Compartment 9
Switch-Steering-Left BK Left Steering Wheel 42
(Premium)
Switch-Steering-Right BK Right Steering Wheel 42
(Premium)
Switch-Stop Lamp GY Base of Brake Pedal 51, 54
Switch-Sunroof BK Overhead Console 69
Switch-Window/Door LT GY Middle of Driver Door 60
Lock-Driver C1 (Base)
Lock-Driver C2 (Base)
Lock-Driver Express C1
(Except Base)
Switch-Window/Door BK Middle of Driver Door 60
Lock-Driver Express C2
(Except Base)
Switch-Window/Door LT GY Middle of Passenger Door, Similar to N/S
Lock-Passenger (Base) Driver Door
Switch-Window/Door BK Middle of Passenger Door, Similar to N/S
Lock-Passenger Express Driver Door
(Except Base)
Throttle Body BK Top of Intake Manifold 18, 21, 26, 28
Transducer-A/C Pressure GY Left Rear Engine Compartment 8, 9, 32
Transmitter-Intrusion Sensor BK Near Glove Box N/S
(RHD)
Transponder-Tire Pressure- BK Left Front Side of Engine Compartment 4
Left Front
Transponder-Tire Pressure- BK Right Front of Engine Compartment 2
Right Front
Transponder-Tire Pressure- BK High in Right Rear Wheel Well 64, 65
Right Rear
Valve-Air Flow Control BK Right Front Corner of Engine 31
Valve-EGR (DIESEL) On Top of Engine, Left Rear 30
Valve-EGR Airflow Control BK Right Front of Engine 31
(DIESEL)
GROUNDS
GROUND LOCATION FIG.

G100 Left Front of Engine Compartment 4
G101 Right Front of Engine Compartment 6
G102 Right of Engine Compartment 6, 15
G104 Right of Engine Compartment 17, 20, 25, 28, 29
G105 (2.7L/3.5L) On Engine Near T/O for Ignition Coil No. 5 N/S
G105 (5.7L/6.1L) Rear of Engine 25, 28
G106 (2.7L/3.5L) Left Side of Engine 18, 21
G106 (5.7L/6.1L) Rear of Engine 25, 28, 29
G107 (3.5L) Right Side of Engine Near Generator N/S
G108 Left Side of Engine 21
G109 (SRT8) On Right Shock Tower, Near Purge Solenoid 28, 29
G110 On Engine Harness N/S
G111 Right Front of Engine 31
G200 (LHD) Left Instrument Panel Near T/O for Ignition Switch 37, 40
G200 (RHD) Left Side of Center Stack 38
G201 Passenger side of Instrument Panel 37, 38, 49
G202 Driver Side of Instrument Panel Near T/O for Cluster C3 37, 39, 40
G300 Below Left B-Pillar 51, 52
G301 Below Right B-Pillar 53, 54
G302 Right Front of Cargo Pan 65
G303 Right Rear Cargo Pan 80
G304 Next to Decklid Latch 77
SPLICES
SPLICE LOCATION FIG.

S100 Rear of Engine 18, 21, 25, 28, 29
S101 N/S
S102 N/S
S105 Right Rear of Engine Compartment 17, 20, 25, 28
S106 Right Rear of Engine Compartment 17, 20, 25, 28
S107 (2.7L) Top of Engine 18
S107 (3.5L) Top of Engine Between Take Outs for Fuel Injectors No. 3 N/S
and No. 5
S107 (5.7L/6.1L) Top of Engine 25, 28, 29
S108 (2.7L) Rear of Engine 18
S108 (3.5L) Between Take Outs for Fuel Injectors No. 4 and No. 6 22
S108 (5.7L) Top of Engine Between Fuel Injectors No. 5 and No. 7 26
S108 (SRT8) Right Rear Top of Engine, Next to Ign Coil No. 8 28, 29
S109 Right Rear of Engine 20, 25, 28
S110 Rear Engine Compartment 17, 21, 25, 28
S111 Left Side of Engine 18, 25, 28

S112 Right Rear Engine Compartment 17, 20, 25, 28
S113 Rear Engine Compartment 17, 20
S114 Right Rear Engine Compartment 17, 20
S115 Right Side of Engine 25, 28
S116 Right Rear Engine Compartment 17, 20
S117 Right Rear Engine Compartment 17
S118 (LHD) Right Engine Compartment 7
S118 (RHD) Left Rear Engine Compartment 9
S119 (GAS) Right Rear Engine Compartment 7
S120 N/S
S121 (LHD) Right Rear Engine Compartment 7
S121 (RHD) (3.5L/5.7L) Left Rear Engine Compartment 9
S122 Right Engine Compartment 6, 7
S123 (LHD) (GAS) Right Front Engine Compartment 4
S123 (LHD) (DIESEL) Right Front Engine Compartment 4
S123 (RHD) (DIESEL) Right Front Engine Compartment 2
S124 (LHD) Right Engine Compartment 6
S124 (RHD) Right Rear Engine Compartment 7
S125 (LHD) Left Rear Engine Compartment 8
S125 (RHD) (GAS) Right Rear Engine Compartment 7
S126 Right Rear Engine Compartment 7
S126 (RHD) Right Side Engine Compartment 6
S127 Right Engine Compartment 6
S127 (RHD) Right Engine Compartment 6
S128 (LHD) Front Engine Compartment 4
S128 (RHD) Right Front Engine Compartment 3
S129 (Except SRT8) Right Engine Compartment 7
S129 (RHD) (GAS) Right Engine Compartment 7
S130 (LHD DIESEL) Right Front Engine Compartment 2
S130 (GAS) Front Engine Compartment 4
S131 (LHD) (GAS) Front Engine Compartment 4
S131 (RHD) (DIESEL) Right Front Engine Compartment 3
S132 (LHD Export) Right Rear Engine Compartment 7
S133 (LHD Export) Right Rear Engine Compartment 7
S134 (LHD) (Export) Front Engine Compartment 4
S134 (RHD) Right Side of Engine Compartment 9
S135 (LHD) Front Engine Compartment 4
S135 (LHD) (DIESEL) Front Engine Compartment 6
S136 N/S

S138 N/S
S139 N/S
S140 N/S
S141(SRT8) Right Instrument Panel 53
S142 (SRT8) Right Rear of Engine, on Fusible Link eyelet T/O 28
S143 Right Engine Compartment 7
S143 (DIESEL) In T/O for Diesel Fuse Block 7, 15
S143 (SRT8) In T/O to C100 7
S144 N/S
S145 Right Front on Engine 31
S146 Left Rear Top of Engine 30
S148 Left Rear Top of Engine 31
S149 Right Side on Engine Compartment 6
S150 In T/O for C108 7
S155 (DIESEL) Right Rear of Engine Compartment 7, 15
S156 (LHD) Rear Engine Compartment 7
S156 (RHD) Left Rear Engine Compartment 9
S200 (LHD) Right Instrument Panel 49
S200 (RHD) Center Instrument Panel 38
S201 (LHD) Left Instrument Panel 40
S201 (RHD) In Center Stack 38
S202 (RHD) Left Instrument Panel 38
S204 Above Steering Column 39, 45
S205 Above Steering Column 39, 45
S206 (RHD) Right Side of Center Stack 39
S208 (RHD) Right Instrument Panel 39
S210 Left Center Instrument Panel 38, 45
S211 (LHD) Center Instrument Panel 45
S214 (LHD Export) Right Instrument Panel 49

S215 (RHD) Left of Center Stack 38
S216 Behind Center Stack 46
S217 (RHD) Left of Center Stack 38
S221 In T/O for Left Instrument Panel Speaker 40
S222 (LHD) In T/O for Rightt Instrument Panel Speaker 49
S223 (LHD) In T/O for Left Instrument Panel Speaker 40
S224 In T/O for Right Instrument Panel Speaker 49
S225 Left Instrument Panel 40
S228 Left Side Instrument Panel 44
S300 (Except SRT8) Below Right Front Door 53
S300 (SRT8) Near T/O for Right Taillamp 76
S300 (RHD) Body Below Driver Seat 54
S301 Rear of Right Rear Door 64
S302 In Power Distribution Center 75, 76
S303 Below Right Rear Door 58
S304 Below Right Rear Door 53
S305 Right Rear Body 76
S306 (LHD) Right Kick Panel 53
S307 Right Kick Panel 53, 54
S308 Left Kick Panel 51, 52
S312 (Export) Right Rear Body 75, 76
S313 (LHD) Below Right Rear Door 58

S318 Below Right B-Pillar 53, 54
S319 Below Right B-Pillar 58
S324 (RHD) Body Below Passenger Seat 52
S325 (RHD) Body Below Passenger Seat 52
S328 Below Right Front Door 53, 54
S331 Below Right B-Pillar 58
S332 Below Driver Seat 55
S333 Below Driver Seat 55
S334 Below Passenger Seat 56
S338 Front Headliner 66
S343 Near T/O for Inside Rearview Mirror 50
S344 Right Rear Fascia 86
S345 Right Rear Fascia 86
S346 (Parktronics) Middle Rear Fascia 86
S347 (Parktronics) Middle Rear Fascia 86
S348 (LX49) Middle Rear Fascia 86
S349 (LX49) Left Rear Fascia 86
S350 (Right) Right Tail lamp Assembly 83, 85
S351 (Right) Right Tail lamp Assembly 83, 85
S352 (Left) Left Tail lamp Assembly 83, 85
S353 (Left) Left Tail lamp Assembly 83, 85

S354 N/S
S355 Bottom of Left Front Door 60
S356 (Driver Except Bottom of Left Front Door 60
Base)
S360 (Passenger) Bottom of Right Front Door 60
S361 Right Rear Fascia N/S
S362 (Trailer Tow) Right Side of Trunk 75
S362 (RHD) Near Right Taillamp Connector 76
S363 (LX49 Export) Right Rear Fascia 86
S364 N/S
S370 Center Console N/S
Fig. 1 FRONT LIGHTING RIGHT (LEFT SIMILAR)

Fig. 2 RIGHT FRONT ENGINE COMPARTMENT

Fig. 3 RIGHT FRONT ENG COMP RAD YOKE

Fig. 4 FRONT ENGINE COMPARTMENT

Fig. 5 RIGHT SIDE LIGHTING

Fig. 6 RIGHT SIDE ENGINE COMPARTMENT

Fig. 7 RIGHT INNER FENDER SHIELD

Fig. 8 LEFT REAR ENGINE COMPARTMENT (LHD)

Fig. 9 LEFT REAR ENGINE COMPARTMENT (RHD)

Fig. 10 RIGHT WHEEL WELL
Fig. 11 REAR ENGINE COMPARTMENT V6

Fig. 12 REAR ENGINE COMPARTMENT V8
Fig. 13 REAR ENGINE COMPARTMENT (AWD)

Fig. 14 INTEGRATED POWER MODULE

Fig. 15 FUSE RELAY BLOCK (DIESEL)

Fig. 16 HOOD (POLICE)

Fig. 17 ENGINE 2.7L RIGHT REAR

Fig. 18 ENGINE 2.7L LEFT REAR

Fig. 19 ENGINE 2.7L/3.5L FRONT



Fig. 22 ENGINE 3.5L LEFT SIDE

Fig. 23 STARTER CONNECTIONS (2.7L/3.5L)

Fig. 24 ENGINE 5.7L RIGHT FRONT



Fig. 27 STARTER CONNECTIONS (V8)

Fig. 28 ENGINE 6.1L RIGHT REAR (SRT8)

Fig. 29 ENGINE 6.1L LEFT REAR (SRT8)

Fig. 30 LEFT REAR ENGINE (3.0L DIESEL)

Fig. 31 ENGINE (3.0L DIESEL)

Fig. 32 AIR INTAKE BOX (3.0L DIESEL)

Fig. 33 TRANSMISSION
Fig. 34 HVAC CENTER
Fig. 35 HVAC RIGHT

Fig. 36 HVAC AND INSTRUMENT PANEL

Fig. 37 INSTRUMENT PANEL (LHD)

Fig. 38 INSTRUMENT PANEL (RHD)

Fig. 39 INSTRUMENT PANEL RIGHT (RHD)

Fig. 40 STEERING COLUMN (LHD)

Fig. 41 MULTIFUNCTION SWITCHES
Fig. 42 HORN PAD SWITCHES

Fig. 43 INSTRUMENT PANEL LEFT
Fig. 44 INSTRUMENT PANEL - COLUMN

Fig. 45 INSTRUMENT PANEL CENTER FRONT (LHD)

Fig. 46 INSTRUMENT PANEL CENTER STACK

Fig. 47 INSTRUMENT PANEL CENTER AND RIGHT

Fig. 48 POLICE/TAXI INTERFACE MODULE (LHD)

Fig. 49 INSTRUMENT PANEL RIGHT

Fig. 50 LEFT A-PILLAR

Fig. 51 BODY LEFT FRONT (LHD)

Fig. 52 BODY LEFT FRONT (RHD)

Fig. 53 BODY RIGHT FRONT (LHD)

Fig. 54 BODY RIGHT FRONT

Fig. 55 DRIVER SEAT

Fig. 56 PASSENGER SEAT

Fig. 57 BODY LEFT SIDE

Fig. 58 BODY RIGHT SIDE

Fig. 59 SATELLITE RADIO JUMPER

Fig. 60 LEFT FRONT DOOR (RIGHT SIMILAR)

Fig. 61 RIGHT REAR DOOR (LEFT SIMILAR)
Fig. 62 LEFT REAR QUARTER (LX48)

Fig. 63 BODY LEFT REAR QUARTER (LX49)

Fig. 64 BODY RIGHT REAR QUARTER (LX48)

Fig. 65 BODY RIGHT REAR QUARTER (LX49)

Fig. 66 HEADLINER
Fig. 67 HEADLINER
Fig. 68 CENTER HEADLINER

Fig. 69 OVERHEAD CONSOLE
Fig. 70 SUNROOF
Fig. 71 SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA CABLES (LX48)

Fig. 72 SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA CABLES (LX49)

Fig. 73 BACKLITE
Fig. 74 REAR CARGO RIGHT (LX49)
Fig. 75 RIGHT REAR AND PDC (LX49)

Fig. 76 TRUNK (LX48)

Fig. 77 DECKLID (LX48)

Fig. 78 LIFTGATE (LX49)

Fig. 79 BODY RIGHT POWER CABLES
Fig. 80 TRUNK BATTERY CONNECTIONS

Fig. 81 TRUNK BATTERY AND PDC CONNECTIONS
Fig. 82 BODY B+ REAR ROUTE

Fig. 83 RIGHT TAIL LAMP (LX49) (LEFT SIMILAR)

Fig. 84 RIGHT TAIL LAMP (LX49) (LEFT SIMILAR)
Fig. 85 RIGHT TAIL LAMPS (LX48) (LEFT SIMILAR)

Fig. 86 REAR FASCIA

8W-97 POWER DISTRIBUTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
POWER DISTRIBUTION POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER

DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 POWER OUTLET
INTEGRATED POWER MODULE DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
8W - 97 - 2 8W-97 POWER DISTRIBUTION LX
POWER DISTRIBUTION
DESCRIPTION
CAUTION: Within the power distribution system there are replaceable diodes that can be installed incor-
rectly. Ensure when replacing a diode that it is inserted in the correct orientation.
The power distribution system for this vehicle consists of the following components:
Cigar Lighter Outlet
Front Control Module (FCM) - located underhood
Integrated Power Module (IPM) - located underhood
Power Distribution Center (PDC) - located in trunk
Power Outlets
Refer to Wiring Diagrams for complete circuit schematics.
The power distribution system also incorporates various types of circuit control and protection features, including:
Automatic resetting circuit breakers
Blade-type fuses
Cartridge fuses
Relays
OPERATION
The power distribution system for this vehicle is designed to provide safe, reliable, and centralized distribution points
for the electrical current required to operate all of the many standard and optional factory-installed electrical and
electronic powertrain, chassis, safety, security, comfort and convenience systems. At the same time, the power dis-
tribution system was designed to provide ready access to these electrical distribution points for the technician to use
when conducting diagnosis and repair of inoperative circuits. The power distribution system can also prove useful
for the sourcing of additional electrical circuits that may be required to provide the electrical current needed to oper-
ate many accessories that the vehicle owner may choose to have installed.

DESCRIPTION
The majority of electrical system fuses and relays are housed in the two Power Distribution Centers (PDC). One is
located in the engine compartment, combined with the Front Control Module (FCM) to form the Integrated Power
Module (IPM). The other is next to the battery at the rear of the vehicle.
REMOVAL

(2).
2. Open the battery cable nut cover to expose nut.

3. Remove battery cable nut and battery cable from
the Integrated Power Module (IPM).
4. Disengage the outboard retaining clip, and rotate

the IPM to access wire harness connectors.
5. Disconnect wire harness connectors from IPM.
6. Disengage the two inboard retaining clips.
7. Remove IPM from vehicle.
INSTALLATION
1. Position Integrated Power Module (IPM) to vehicle.

Engage the three retaining clips.
2. Disengage the outboard retaining clip and rotate

the IPM to access wire harness connectors.
3. Connect electrical harness connectors to IPM.
4. Connect battery cable to IPM.

5. Install and tighten retaining nut.
6. Close the battery cable nut cover.
7. Connect battery negative cable (2).


DESCRIPTION
The majority of electrical system fuses and relays are
housed in the two Power Distribution Centers (PDC).
One is located in the engine compartment, combined
with the Front Control Module (FCM) to form the Inte-
grated Power Module (IPM). The other is next to the
battery at the rear of the vehicle. The PDC located
next to the battery is replaced only as part of the body
wiring harness.
POWER OUTLET
DESCRIPTION
Sedans are equipped with two 12volt electrical outlets. Wagons are equipped with three 12volt electrical outlets.
The outlets are located in the following locations:
Cargo area right quarter trim panel (wagons only).
Inside the center console.
Next to the ash receiver in the center stack.
The outlets in the console and quarter trim panel have power at all times, and include tethered covers. The outlet
in the ash receiver tray is shipped with power available only when the ignition is in the ON position. This outlet can
be changed to provide power at all times by moving a fuse in the fuse block.
REMOVAL

2. Pull the cigar lighter knob and element out of the cigar lighter receptacle base, or unsnap the protective cap from
the power outlet.
3. Look inside the cigar lighter or power outlet and note the position of the rectangular retaining bosses of the
mount that secures the receptacle base.
4. Insert a pair of external snap ring pliers into the cigar lighter or power outlet receptacle base and engage the tips
of the pliers with the retaining bosses of the mount.
5. Squeeze the pliers to disengage the mount retaining bosses from the receptacle base and, using a gentle rock-
ing motion, pull the pliers and the receptacle base out of the mount.
6. Pull the receptacle base away far enough to access the wire harness connector.
7. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the cigar lighter or power outlet.
8. Remove the cigar lighter or power outlet.
INSTALLATION
1. Connect the wire harness connector to the cigar lighter or power outlet receptacle base connector receptacle.
2. Install the cigar lighter or power outlet mount into position.
3. Align the splines on the outside of the cigar lighter or power outlet receptacle base connector receptacle with the
grooves on the inside of the mount.
4. Press firmly on the cigar lighter or power outlet receptacle base until the retaining bosses of the mount are fully
engaged in their receptacles.
5. Install the cigar lighter knob and element into the cigar lighter receptacle base, or the protective cap into the
power outlet receptacle base.
LX ENGINE 9-1
ENGINE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
ENGINE ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . 1 ENGINE - 3.5L - SERVICE INFORMATION . . . . 2095

ENGINE ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS - DIESEL. 1039 ENGINE - 5.7L SERVICE INFORMATION . . . . . 2285
ENGINE - 2.7L DOHC - SERVICE ENGINE - 6.1L SERVICE INFORMATION . . . . . 2452
INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1899 ENGINE - 3.0L TD SERVICE INFORMATION . . 2602
ENGINE ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
ENGINE ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS P0111-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING RATIONALITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING P0112-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE
PROCEDURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
INTERMITTENT CONDITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 P0113-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE
P0016CRANKSHAFT / CAMSHAFT TIMING SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
MISALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 P0116ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
P0031-O2 SENSOR 1/1 HEATER CIRCUIT SENSOR CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . 75
LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 P0117-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
P0032-O2 SENSOR 1/1 HEATER CIRCUIT SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 P0118-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
P0037-O2 SENSOR 1/2 HEATER CIRCUIT SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 P0121-THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1
P0038-O2 SENSOR 1/2 HEATER CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 P0122-THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1
P0051-O2 SENSOR 2/1 HEATER CIRCUIT CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 P0123-THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1
P0052-O2 SENSOR 2/1 HEATER CIRCUIT CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 P0125-INSUFFICIENT COOLANT TEMP FOR
P0057-O2 SENSOR 2/2 HEATER CIRCUIT CLOSED-LOOP FUEL CONTROL. . . . . . . . . . . 102
LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 P0128-THERMOSTAT RATIONALITY . . . . . . . . . 105
P0058-O2 SENSOR 2/2 HEATER CIRCUIT P0129-BAROMETRIC PRESSURE OUT-OF-
HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 RANGE LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
P0071-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE P0131-O2 SENSOR 1/1 CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . 121
SENSOR PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 P0132-O2 SENSOR 1/1 CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . 125
P0072-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE P0133-O2 SENSOR 1/1 SLOW RESPONSE . . 130
SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 P0135-O2 SENSOR 1/1 HEATER
P0073AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 P0137-O2 SENSOR 1/2 CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . 137
P0107-MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE P0138-O2 SENSOR 1/2 CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . 141
SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 P0139-O2 SENSOR 1/2 SLOW RESPONSE . . 146
P0108-MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE P0141-O2 SENSOR 1/2 HEATER
SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
P0151-O2 SENSOR 2/1 CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . 153
9-2 ENGINE ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS LX
P0152-O2 SENSOR 2/1 CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . 157 P0406-EGR POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT
P0153-O2 SENSOR 2/1 SLOW RESPONSE . . 162 HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
P0155-O2 SENSOR 2/1 HEATER P0420-CATALYST 1/1 EFFICIENCY . . . . . . . . . . 410
PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 P0430-CATALYST 2/1 EFFICIENCY . . . . . . . . . . 413
P0157-O2 SENSOR 2/2 CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . 169 P0440-GENERAL EVAP SYSTEM FAILURE . . . 416
P0158-O2 SENSOR 2/2 CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . 173 P0441-EVAP PURGE SYSTEM
P0159-O2 SENSOR 2/2 SLOW RESPONSE . . 178 PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
P0161-O2 SENSOR 2/2 HEATER P0442-EVAP PURGE SYSTEM MEDIUM
PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 LEAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
P0171-FUEL SYSTEM 1/1 LEAN . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 P0443-EVAP PURGE SOLENOID CIRCUIT . . . 434
P0172-FUEL SYSTEM 1/1 RICH . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 P0452-NVLD PRESSURE SWITCH STUCK
P0174-FUEL SYSTEM 2/1 LEAN . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 CLOSED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
P0175-FUEL SYSTEM 2/1 RICH . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 P0453-NVLD PRESSURE SWITCH STUCK
P0196ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE OPEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
SENSOR CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . 211 P0455-EVAP PURGE SYSTEM LARGE LEAK . 448
P0197-ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE P0456-EVAP PURGE SYSTEM SMALL LEAK . 454
SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 P0457-LOOSE FUEL CAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
P0198-ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE P0461-FUEL LEVEL SENSOR 1
SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
P0201-FUEL INJECTOR 1 CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . 223 P0462-FUEL LEVEL SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT
P0202-FUEL INJECTOR 2 CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . 227 LOW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
P0203-FUEL INJECTOR 3 CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . 231 P0463-FUEL LEVEL SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT
P0204-FUEL INJECTOR 4 CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . 235 HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
P0205-FUEL INJECTOR 5 CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . 239 P0480-COOLING FAN 1 CONTROL CIRCUIT . 478
P0206-FUEL INJECTOR 6 CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . 243 P0481-COOLING FAN 2 CONTROL CIRCUIT . 481
P0207-FUEL INJECTOR 7 CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . 247 P0498-NVLD CANISTER VENT VALVE
P0208-FUEL INJECTOR 8 CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . 251 SOLENOID CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
P0221-THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 P0499-NVLD CANISTER VENT VALVE
PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 SOLENOID CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
P0222-THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 P0501-VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR 1
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 PERFORMANCE (Not Equipped with ABS). . . 493
P0223-THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 P0503-VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR 1
CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 ERRATIC (Not Equipped with ABS). . . . . . . . . . 496
P0300- MULTIPLE CYLINDER 1 MISFIRE . . . . 270 P0501-VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR 1
P0301-CYLINDER 1 MISFIRE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 PERFORMANCE (Equipped with ABS) . . . . . . 499
P0302-CYLINDER 2 MISFIRE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 P0503-VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR 1
P0303-CYLINDER 3 MISFIRE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 ERRATIC (Equipped with ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
P0304-CYLINDER 4 MISFIRE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 P0506-IDLE SPEED PERFORMANCE
P0305-CYLINDER 5 MISFIRE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 LOWER THAN EXCEPTED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
P0306-CYLINDER 6 MISFIRE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 P0507-IDLE SPEED PERFORMANCE
P0307-CYLINDER 7 MISFIRE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 HIGHER THAN EXCEPTED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
P0308-CYLINDER 8 MISFIRE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 P0513-INVALID SKIM KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
P0315-NO CRANK SENSOR LEARNED . . . . . . 349 P0520-ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR
P0325-KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . 352 CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
P0330-KNOCK SENSOR 2 CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . 356 P0521-ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR
P0335-CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 P0522-ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR
P0339-CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
INTERMITTENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 P0523-ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR
P0340-CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 P0524-ENGINE OIL PRESSURE TOO LOW . . 530
P0344-CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR P0532-A/C PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
INTERMITTENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 LOW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
P0401-EGR SYSTEM PERFORMANCE . . . . . . 389 P0533-A/C PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
P0403-EGR SOLENOID CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
P0404-EGR POSITION SENSOR P0551-POWER STEERING PRESSURE
PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 SWITCH PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
P0405-EGR POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT P0562-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
LOW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 P0563-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . 552
LX ENGINE ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 9-3
P0571-BRAKE SWITCH 1 PERFORMANCE . . 555 P1416CYLINDER 6 REACTIVATION

P0572-BRAKE SWITCH 1 STUCK ON . . . . . . . . 560 CONTROL PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
P0573-BRAKE SWITCH 1 STUCK OFF . . . . . . . 564 P1417CYLINDER 7 REACTIVATION
P0579SPEED CONTROL MULTIPLEXED CONTROL PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
SWITCH #1 PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569 P1501VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR 1/2
P0580SPEED CONTROL MULTIPLEXED CORRELATION DRIVE WHEELS (Not
SWITCH #1 LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572 Equipped with ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657
P0585-SPEED CONTROL MULTIPLEXED P1502VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR 1/2
SWITCH 1/2 CORRELATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575 CORRELATION NON DRIVE WHEELS
P0591SPEED CONTROL MULTIPLEXED (Not Equipped with ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660
SWITCH PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578 P1501VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR 1/2
P0600-SERIAL COMMUNICATION LINK . . . . . . 581 CORRELATION DRIVE WHEELS
P0601-INTERNAL MEMORY CHECKSUM (Equipped with ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663
INVALID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582 P1502VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR 1/2
P0606-INTERNAL ECM PROCESSOR . . . . . . . 583 CORRELATION NON DRIVE WHEELS
P060B-ETC A/D GROUND PERFORMANCE . . 584 (Equipped with ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666
P060D-ETC LEVEL 2 APP PERFORMANCE . . 585 P1521INCORRECT ENGINE OIL TYPE . . . . . 669
P060E-ETC LEVEL 2 TPS PERFORMANCE . . 586 P1572-BRAKE SWITCH STUCK ON . . . . . . . . . 670
P060F-ETC LEVEL 2 ECT PERFORMANCE . . 587 P1573-BRAKE SWITCH STUCK OFF . . . . . . . . 674
P061A-ETC LEVEL 2 TORQUE P1593SPEED CONTROL SWITCH 1/2
PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588 STUCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679
P061C-ETC LEVEL 2 RPM PERFORMANCE . . 589 P1603-PCM INTERNAL DUAL-PORT RAM
P0622-GENERATOR FIELD CONTROL COMMUNICATION FAILURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682
CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590 P1604-PCM INTERNAL DUAL-PORT RAM
P0627-FUEL PUMP RELAY CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . 594 READ/WRITE INTEGRITY FAILURE . . . . . . . . 684
P062C-ETC LEVEL 2 MPH PERFORMANCE . . 598 P1607-PCM INTERNAL SHUTDOWN TIMER
P0630-VIN NOT PROGRAMMED IN PCM . . . . 599 RATIONALITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686
P0632-ODOMETER NOT PROGRAMMED IN P1618-SENSOR REFERENCE VOLTAGE 1
PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600 CIRCUIT ERRATIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688
P0633-SKIM KEY NOT PROGRAMMED IN P1628-SENSOR REFERENCE VOLTAGE 2
PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601 CIRCUIT ERRATIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691
P0642-SENSOR REFERENCE VOLTAGE 1 P1696-EEPROM MEMORY WRITE DENIED/
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602 INVALID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695
P0643-PRIMARY 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT P1697-EMR (SRI) MILEAGE NOT STORED . . . 697
HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604 P1897PCM PROCESSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699
P0645-A/C CLUTCH RELAY CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . 606 P2008SHORT RUNNER VALVE SOLENOID
P0652-SENSOR REFERENCE VOLTAGE 2 CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609 P2066-FUEL LEVEL SENSOR 2
P0653-SENSOR REFERENCE VOLTAGE 2 PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704
CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612 P2067-FUEL LEVEL SENSOR 2 CIRCUIT
P0660MANIFOLD TUNE VALVE SOLENOID LOW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708
CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614 P2068-FUEL LEVEL SENSOR 2 CIRCUIT
P0685-AUTO SHUTDOWN RELAY CONTROL HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 712
CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618 P2072-ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL
P0688-AUTO SHUTDOWN RELAY SENSE SYSTEM - ICE BLOCKAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622 P2097-DOWNSTREAM FUEL TRIM SYSTEM
P0700-TRANSMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM 1 LEAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
(MIL REQUEST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627 P2097-DOWNSTREAM FUEL TRIM SYSTEM
P0703-BRAKE SWITCH 2 PERFORMANCE . . 628 1 RICH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723
P0850-PARK/NEUTRAL SWITCH P2098-DOWNSTREAM FUEL TRIM SYSTEM
PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633 2 LEAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 729
P1115-GENERAL TEMPERATURE P2099-DOWNSTREAM FUEL TRIM SYSTEM
RATIONALITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634 2 RICH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 735
P01404-EGR POSITION SENSOR P2100-ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL
RATIONALITY CLOSED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637 MOTOR CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741
P1411CYLINDER 1 REACTIVATION P2101-ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL
CONTROL PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641 MOTOR PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 747
P1414CYLINDER 4 REACTIVATION P2107-ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL
CONTROL PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645 MODULE PROCESSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 749
P2108-ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL P2311-IGNITION COIL 4 SECONDARY

MODULE PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750 CIRCUIT- INSUFFICIENT IONIZATION . . . . . . 885
- FORCED LIMITED RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751 CIRCUIT- INSUFFICIENT IONIZATION . . . . . . 890
- UNABLE TO CLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756 CIRCUIT- INSUFFICIENT IONIZATION . . . . . . 895
- UNABLE TO OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761 CIRCUIT- INSUFFICIENT IONIZATION . . . . . . 900
P2115-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION P2323-IGNITION COIL 8 SECONDARY
SENSOR 1 MINIMUM STOP CIRCUIT- INSUFFICIENT IONIZATION . . . . . . 905
PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766 P2503-CHARGING SYSTEM OUTPUT LOW . . 910
P2116-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION P3400-MDS RATIONALITY BANK 1 . . . . . . . . . . 915
SENSOR 2 MINIMUM STOP P3402-CYLINDER 1 DEACTIVATION
PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767 CONTROL PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 917
P2118-ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL P3426-CYLINDER 4 DEACTIVATION
MOTOR CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768 CONTROL PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 923
P2122-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION P3442-CYLINDER 6 DEACTIVATION
SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774 CONTROL PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 929
P2123-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION P3450-CYLINDER 7 DEACTIVATION
SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780 CONTROL PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 934
P2127-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION P3401-MDS SOLENOID 1 CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . 940
SENSOR 2 CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785 P3425-MDS SOLENOID 4 CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . 948
P2128-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION P3441-MDS SOLENOID 6 CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . 956
SENSOR 2 CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 791 P3449-MDS SOLENOID 7 CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . 964
P2135-THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1/2 P3497-MDS RATIONALITY BANK 2 . . . . . . . . . . 972
CORRELATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795 U0001-CAN C BUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 974
P2138-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION U0101-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH TCM . . 976
SENSOR 1/2 CORRELATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 U0103-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
P2161-VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR 2 ELECTRIC GEAR SHIFT MODULE . . . . . . . . . 977
ERRATIC (Not Equipped with ABS). . . . . . . . . . 809 U0121-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
P2161-VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR 2 ANTI-LOCK BRAKE MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 979
ERRATIC (Equipped with ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812 U0141-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
P2166-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION FRONT CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 981
SENSOR 1 MAXIMUM STOP U0155-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815 CLUSTER/CCN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 983
P2167-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION U0168-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
SENSOR 2 MAXIMUM STOP VEHICLE SECURITY CONTROL MODULE
PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 816 (SKREEM/WCM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 985
P2172-HIGH AIRFLOW/VACUUM LEAK U110A-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
DETECTED (INSTANTANEOUS SCCM - CAN - C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 987
ACCUMULATION). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 817 U110C-NO FUEL LEVEL BUS MESSAGE
P2173-HIGH AIRFLOW/VACUUM LEAK RECEIVED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 989
DETECTED (SLOW ACCUMULATION) . . . . . . 828 U110E-LOST AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
P2174-LOW AIRFLOW/RESTRICTION MESSAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991
DETECTED (INSTANTANEOUS U110F-LOST FUEL VOLUME MESSAGE . . . . . 993
ACCUMULATION). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839 U1110-LOST VEHICLE SPEED MESSAGE . . . . 995
P2175-LOW AIRFLOW/RESTRICTION U1120-LOST WHEEL DISTANCE MESSAGE . . 997
DETECTED (SLOW ACCUMULATION) . . . . . . 850 U1403-IMPLAUSIBLE FUEL LEVEL SIGNAL . . 999
P2181-COOLING SYSTEM PERFORMANCE . 861 U1411-IMPLAUSIBLE FUEL VOLUME
P2299-BRAKE PEDAL POSITION / SIGNAL RECEIVED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1001
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION U1412-IMPLAUSIBLE VEHICLE SPEED
INCOMPATIBLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 867 SIGNAL RECEIVED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1003
P2302-IGNITION COIL 1 SECONDARY U1417-IMPLAUSIBLE LEFT WHEEL
CIRCUIT- INSUFFICIENT IONIZATION . . . . . . 870 DISTANCE SIGNAL RECEIVED . . . . . . . . . . . 1006
P2305-IGNITION COIL 2 SECONDARY U1418-IMPLAUSIBLE RIGHT WHEEL
CIRCUIT- INSUFFICIENT IONIZATION . . . . . . 875 DISTANCE SIGNAL RECEIVED . . . . . . . . . . . 1009
P2308-IGNITION COIL 3 SECONDARY *5.7L INTERMITTENT NO CRANK
CIRCUIT- INSUFFICIENT IONIZATION . . . . . . 880 CONDITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1012
*CHECKING THE FUEL DELIVERY SYSTEM . 1013
*HARD START FUEL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1016 *START AND STALL CONDITION . . . . . . . . . . . 1033
*ENGINE CRANKS BUT DOES NOT START . 1019 STANDARD PROCEDURE
*FUEL PRESSURE LEAK DOWN . . . . . . . . . . . 1022 POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST . . . . . . . 1036
*NO CRANK CONDITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1023
*NO RESPONSE WITH A NO START
CONDITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1027
ENGINE ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS

PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE

Diagnostic Test
1. NO RESPONSE WITH A NO START CONDITION
Is the customer complaint a NO RESPONSE WITH A NO START condition?

Yes >> Check the vehicle for any NO START related PCM DTC(s) or Vehicle Theft Security related DTC(s).
If no Theft related DTC(s) are present, refer to the NO RESPONSE WITH A NO START CONDITION
test.
No >> Go To 2
2. NO RESPONSE
Make sure the scan tool will communicate with the appropriate modules.
Are you currently experiencing a NO RESPONSE condition with the PCM?
Yes >> The NO RESPONSE condition must be properly diagnosed before continuing.
Refer to Section 8 ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS and perform
the appropriate Communication test.
No >> Go To 3
3. NO START
Is the customer complaint a NO START condition?
Yes >> Check the vehicle for any NO START related PCM DTC(s) or Vehicle Theft Security related DTC(s).
If no Theft related DTC(s) are present, refer to the Non DTC Diagnostic Procedures that relate to Fuel
and Starting.
No >> Go To 4
4. VEHICLE HISTORY AND TSB(s)

Continue by reading PCM DTC(s) and record the related Freeze Frame data if any DTC(s) are present.
Whether or not any DTC(s) are present you will want to check the following items which may assist in repairing the
customers complaint successfully.
Check the vehicles repair history.
If the vehicle has a repair history that pertains to the customers current complaint, review the repair.
Inspect the vehicle for any aftermarket accessories that may have been installed incorrectly.
Check for any TSB(s) related to the customers complaint or DTC(s).
If a TSB applies, follow the instructions per the TSB.
Choose the following scenario that best applies.
The TSB repaired the customers complaint.
Testing complete.
A DTC is present, no TSB applies, or the TSB didnt repair the customers complaint.
Go To 5
No DTC(s) are present.

Refer to the INTERMITTENT CONDITION Diagnostic Procedure.
5. WIRE HARNESS INSPECTION

Clear the DTC(s).
Attempt to duplicate the customer complaint.
Whether the customer complaint can be duplicated or not, make a quick wire harness inspection related to the
DTC(s) that were previously cleared.
Check the Powertrain Control Module connectors, the suspected component connection, in-line connectors, wire
harness splices, PCM power and ground circuits, and any related fuses.
If the DTC(s) are fuel or air related, check the fuel level, quality and the air duct system.
Were any repairs made that fixed the customers complaint?
Yes >> Testing complete.
No >> Refer to the diagnostic test procedure related to the DTC.
POSSIBLE CAUSES
Diagnostic Test
NOTE: The conditions that set the DTC are not present at this time. The following list may help in identi-
Review the scan tool Freeze Frame information. If possible, try to duplicate the conditions under which the DTC set.
With the engine running at normal operating temperature, monitor the scan tool parameters related to the DTC while
wiggling the wire harness. Look for parameter values to change and/or a DTC to set.
Visually inspect the related wire harness. Disconnect all the related harness connectors. Look for any chafed,
pierced, pinched, partially broken wires and broken, bent, pushed out, or corroded terminals.
Perform a voltage drop test on the related circuits between the suspected faulty component and the PCM.
CAUTION: Do not probe the PCM harness connectors. Probing the PCM harness connectors will damage
the PCM terminals resulting in poor terminal to pin connection. Install Miller Special Tool #8815 to perform
diagnosis.
Inspect and clean all PCM, engine, and chassis grounds that are related to the most current DTC.
If numerous trouble codes were set, use a wire schematic and look for any common ground or supply circuits.
For any Relay DTCs, actuate the Relay with the scan tool and wiggle the related wire harness to try to interrupt the
actuation.
For intermittent Evaporative Emission trouble codes perform a visual and physical inspection of the related parts
including hoses and the Fuel Filler cap.
For intermittent Misfire DTCs check for restrictions in the Intake and Exhaust system, proper installation of Sensors,
vacuum leaks, and binding components that are run by the accessory drive belt.
Use the scan tool to perform a System Test if one applies to the failing component.
A co-pilot, data recorder, and/or lab scope should be used to help diagnose intermittent conditions.
Yes >> Perform the necessary repairs.
9 - 10 ENGINE ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS LX
P0016CRANKSHAFT / CAMSHAFT TIMING MISALIGNMENT

When Monitored:
Engine cranking and Engine running
Set Condition:
Powertrain Control Module detects an error when the camshaft position is out of phase with the crankshaft
position. One Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes
ERRATIC CAM POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL

CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR TONE WHEEL/PULSE RING
ERRATIC CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR TONE WHEEL/PULSE RING
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 9 - ENGINE -
Diagnostic Test
1. ACTIVE DTC
With the scan tool clear the DTC(s).
Start the engine and run until operating temp is reached. (Closed Loop)
If the DTC does not reset it may be necessary to test drive the vehicle.
Does the P0016 return?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECKING THE CMP SIGNAL WITH A LAB SCOPE

With a lab scope, backprobe the (K44) CMP Signal circuit at the CMP
Sensor harness connector.
WARNING: When the engine is operating, do not stand in direct
line with the fan. Do not put your hands near the pulleys, belts, or
fan. Do not wear loose clothing. Failure to follow these instruc-
tions can result in personal injury or death.
Start the engine.
Observe the lab scope screen.
Are there any irregular or missing signals?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 6
LX ENGINE ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 9 - 11
3. CMP WIRE HARNESS INSPECTION

Visually inspect the related wire harness. Look for any chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires.
Visually inspect the related wire harness connectors. Look for broken, bent, pushed out, or corroded terminals.
Make sure the Crankshaft Position Sensor and the Camshaft Position Sensor are properly installed and the mount-
ing bolt(s) are torqued to their proper specification.
Refer to any TSBs that may apply.
Were any of the above conditions present?
No >> Go To 4
4. TONE WHEEL/PULSE RING INSPECTION

Remove the Camshaft Position Sensor.
Inspect the Tone Wheel/Pulse Ring for damage, foreign material, or excessive movement.
Yes >> Repair or replace the Tone Wheel/Pulse Ring as necessary.
No >> Go To 5
5. CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR

Repair
Replace the Camshaft Position Sensor.
6. ERRATIC CMP SIGNAL

Remove the lab scope probe.
With scan tool, erase DTCs.
Start the engine.
Gently tap on and wiggle the Cam Position Sensor.
Inspect the Sensor connector and harness connector, and inspect the PCM connector and harness connector for
loose, bent, corroded, or pushed out pins/terminals.
Inspect the related wire harness and the splices in the CMP circuit.
Does the P0016 return?
Yes >> Repair the wiring/connector concerns as needed or replace the Camshaft Position Sensor.
No >> Go To 7
7. CHECKING THE CKP SIGNAL WITH A LAB SCOPE

With a lab scope, backprobe the (K24) CKP Signal circuit at the CKP
harness connector.
Start the engine.
Observe the lab scope screen.
Are there any irregular or missing signals?
Yes >> Go To 8
No >> Go To 10
8. CKP WIRE HARNESS INSPECTION

Visually inspect the related wire harness. Look for any chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires.
Visually inspect the related wire harness connectors. Look for broken, bent, pushed out, or corroded terminals.
Make sure the Crankshaft Position Sensor and the Camshaft Position Sensor are properly installed and the mount-
ing bolt(s) are torqued to their proper specification.
Refer to any TSBs that may apply.
Were any of the above conditions present?
No >> Go To 9
9. TONE WHEEL/FLEX PLATE INSPECTION

Remove the Crankshaft Position Sensor.
Inspect the Tone Wheel/Flex Plate slots for damage, foreign material, or excessive movement.
Yes >> Repair or replace the Tone Wheel/Flex Plate as necessary.
No >> Replace the Crankshaft Position Sensor.
10. ERRATIC CKP SIGNAL

NOTE: The conditions that set this DTC are not present at this time. The following test may help in identi-
Start the engine.
Gently tap on and wiggle the Crank Position Sensor.
Inspect the Sensor connector and harness connector, and inspect the PCM connector and harness connector for
loose, bent, corroded, or pushed out pins/terminals.
Inspect the related wire harness and the splices in the CKP circuits.
Yes >> Repair the wiring/connector concerns as needed or replace the Crankshaft Position Sensor.
P0031-O2 SENSOR 1/1 HEATER CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
Battery voltage above 10.6 volts, ASD is powered up, and O2 heater is powered.
Set Condition:
Desired state does not match Actual state. One Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes
(K99) O2 SENSOR 1/1 HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

O2 SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1. O2 SENSOR HEATER OPERATION

NOTE: Wait a minimum of 8 minutes to allow the O2 Sensor to cool down before continuing the test. Allow
the O2 Sensor voltage to stabilize at 5.0 volts.
With a scan tool, actuate the O2 Heater Test.
With the scan tool, monitor 1/1 O2 Sensor voltage for at least 2 minutes.
Does the O2 Sensor voltage stay above 4.5 volts?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. O2 HEATER ELEMENT
NOTE: Allow the O2 Sensor to cool down to room temperature.
Disconnect the 1/1 O2 Sensor harness connector.
Measure the resistance across the O2 Sensor Heater element, between the Heater Control terminal and the Heater
ground terminal at the component.
NOTE: O2 Heater Element resistance values should be measured at 70F (21.1C). The resistance value will
vary with different temperature values.
Is the O2 Sensor Heater Element resistance between 2.0 and 30.0 ohms?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Replace the O2 Sensor.
3. O2 SENSOR
With a scan tool, actuate the O2 1/1Heater Test with the O2 Sensor
harness connector still disconnected.
Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, probe the (K99) O2 1/1
Heater Control circuit in the O2 Sensor harness connector.
Does the test light illuminate brightly and flash on and off dur-
ing the actuation?
Yes >> Replace the O2 Sensor.
Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. (Refer
to 9 - ENGINE - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No >> Go To 4
4. (K99) O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

Disconnect the PCM harness connectors.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (K99) O2 1/1 Heater
Control circuit in the O2 Sensor harness connector.
Yes >> Repair the short to ground in the (K99) O2 1/1 Heater Con-
trol circuit.
No >> Go To 5
5. PCM
NOTE: Before continuing, check the PCM harness connector terminals for corrosion, damage, or terminal
push out. Repair as necessary.
Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wire harness and connectors. Pay particular attention to all Power and
Ground circuits.
No >> Replace and program the Powertrain Control Module per Service Information.
P0032-O2 SENSOR 1/1 HEATER CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Battery voltage above 10.6 volts, ASD is powered up, and O2 heater is off.
Set Condition:
Desired state does not equal Actual state. One Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes
(K99) O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN

(Z904) O2 1/1 HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
(K99) O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
O2 SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1. ACTIVE DTC
With a scan tool, read DTCs.
Is the DTC active at this time?
Yes >> Go To 2
Measure the resistance across the O2 Sensor Heater element between the O2 Heater Control terminal and the O2
Heater ground terminal at the component.
Yes >> Go To 3
3. (K99) O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT

With a scan tool, actuate the O2 1/1 Heater Test with the Sensor har-
ness connector still disconnected.
ing the actuation?
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Go To 5
4. (Z904) O2 HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance between an engine ground and the (Z904) O2
1/1 Heater ground circuit in the O2 Sensor harness connector.
No >> Repair the open in the (Z904) O2 1/1Heater ground circuit.
5. (K99) O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage on the (K99) O2 1/1 Heater Control circuit in the
O2 Sensor harness connector.
Does the voltmeter indicate any voltage present?
Yes >> Repair the short to battery voltage in the (K99) O2 1/1
Heater Control circuit.
No >> Go To 6
6. (K99) O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (K99) O2 1/1 Heater Control circuit from
the O2 Sensor harness connector to the appropriate terminal of special
tool #8815.
Yes >> Go To 7
No >> Repair the open in the (K99) O2 1/1 Heater Control circuit.
7. PCM
Ground circuits.

When Monitored:
Battery voltage above 10.6 volts, ASD is powered up, and O2 heater is on.
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(K299) O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

O2 SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test

With a scan tool, actuate the O2 1/2 Heater Test.
Yes >> Go To 2
Measure the resistance across the O2 Sensor Heater element, between the O2 Heater Control terminal and the O2
Heater ground terminal at the component.
Yes >> Go To 3
3. O2 SENSOR
With a scan tool, actuate the O2 Heater Test with the 1/2 O2 Sensor
ing the actuation?
No >> Go To 4

Yes >> Repair the short to ground in the (K299) O2 1/2 Heater
Control circuit.
No >> Go To 5
5. PCM
Ground circuits.

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes

(K299) O2 SENSOR 1/2 HEATER CONTROL SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
O2 SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1. ACTIVE DTC
Yes >> Go To 2
Yes >> Go To 3

With a scan tool, actuate the O2 1/2 Heater Test with the O2 Sensor
ing the actuation?
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Go To 5

No >> Repair the open in the (Z902) O2 1/2 Heater ground circuit.

No >> Go To 6

tool #8815.
Yes >> Go To 7
7. PCM
Ground circuits.

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(K199) O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

O2 SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test

With a scan tool, monitor 2/1 O2 Sensor voltage for at least 2 minutes.
Yes >> Go To 2
Yes >> Go To 3
3. O2 SENSOR
With a scan tool, actuate the O2 Heater Test with the O2 Sensor har-
ing the actuation?
No >> Go To 4

Yes >> Repair the short to ground in the (K199) O2 2/1 Sensor
No >> Go To 5
5. PCM
Ground circuits.

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes

O2 SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1. ACTIVE DTC
Yes >> Go To 2
Measure the resistance across the O2 Sensor Heater element, between the O2 Heater Control terminal and the
Heater ground terminal at the component connector.
Yes >> Go To 3

With the scan tool, actuate the O2 Heater Test with the Sensor harness
connector still disconnected.
ing the actuation?
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Go To 5
4. (Z904) O2 2/1 HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN


No >> Go To 6

tool #8815.
Yes >> Go To 7
7. PCM
Ground circuits.
Repair
Replace and program the Powertrain Control Module per Service Information.

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(K399) O2 SENSOR 2/2 HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

O2 SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test

Yes >> Go To 2
Heater ground terminal in the component connector.
Yes >> Go To 3
3. O2 SENSOR
With a scan tool, actuate the O2 Heater Test with the O2 Sensor har-
ing the actuation?
No >> Go To 4

Yes >> Repair the short to ground in the (K399) O2 2/2 Sensor
No >> Go To 5
5. PCM
Ground circuits.

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes

O2 SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1. ACTIVE DTC
Yes >> Go To 2
Heater ground terminal in the component connector.
Yes >> Go To 3

With a scan tool, actuate the O2 2/2 Heater Test with the Sensor har-
ing the actuation?
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Go To 5


Measure the voltage on the (K399) O2 Heater 2/2 Control circuit in the
No >> Go To 6

tool #8815.
Yes >> Go To 7
7. PCM
Ground circuits.
P0071-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR PERFORMANCE

Theory of Operation
Ambient Air Temperature Sensor performance looks at the outputs of three temperature sensors and compares
them under cold start conditions. Following a start to run delay time, the outputs of the ambient, engine coolant, and
intake air temperature sensors will be compared. If the engine coolant and intake air temperature sensors agree and
the ambient air temperature does not agree, the ambient air temperature sensor is declared as irrational.
When Monitored:
Engine off time is greater than 480 minutes. Ambient temperature is greater than 4 C (38 F).
Set Condition:
After a calibrated amount of cool down time the PCM compares the ECT Sensor, IAT Sensor, and the Ambient
Air Temp Sensor values. If the IAT Sensor value is not within -10 C (18 F) of the other two temperature
sensors. Two Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes
(G31) AAT SIGNAL CIRCUIT HIGH RESISTANCE

(G931) SENSOR GROUND HIGH RESISTANCE
AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Test
1. ACTIVE DTC
NOTE: Diagnose any CAN - C Communication DTCs before continuing.
Yes >> Go To 2
2. AAT SENSOR VOLTAGE ABOVE 4.6 VOLTS

Disconnect the AAT sensor harness connector.
With a scan tool, read the AAT voltage.
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 4
3. AAT SENSOR
Connect a jumper wire between the (G31) AAT Signal circuit and the
(G931) Sensor ground circuit in the AAT Sensor harness connector.
With a scan tool, read the AAT voltage.
Is the voltage below 1.0 volt with the jumper wire installed?
Yes >> Replace the AAT Sensor.
No >> Go To 4
NOTE: Remove the jumper wire before continuing.
4. (G31) AAT SIGNAL CIRCUIT HIGH RESISTANCE

Reconnect the AAT sensor harness connector.
Using a voltmeter perform a voltage drop test. Backprobe the (G31) AAT Signal circuit at the AAT sensor harness
connector and the FCM.
WARNING: WARNING: When the engine is operating, do not stand in direct line with the fan. Do not put
your hands near the pulleys, belts, or fan. Do not wear loose clothing. Failure to follow these instructions
can result in personal injury or death.
Start the engine and allow it to reach normal operating temperature.
Monitor the voltmeter.
Yes >> Go To 5
No >> Repair the high resistance in the (G31) AAT Signal circuit.
5. (G931) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT HIGH RESISTANCE

Reconnect the AAT sensor harness connector.
Using a voltmeter perform a voltage drop test. Backprobe the (G931) Sensor ground circuit at the AAT sensor har-
ness connector and the FCM.
WARNING: When the engine is operating, do not stand in direct line with the fan. Do not put your hands near the
pulleys, belts, or fan. Do not wear loose clothing. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury or
death.
Yes >> Go To 6
No >> Repair the high resistance in the (G931) Sensor ground circuit.

NOTE: Before continuing, check the FCM harness connector terminals for corrosion, damage, or terminal
Ground circuits.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER - 1.
No >> Replace the Front Control Module per Service Information.
P0072-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
The ignition key on.
Set Condition:
Ambient Temperature Sensor is less than 0.078 of a volt at the PCM for 2.8 seconds. One Trip Fault. Three
good trips to turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes
(G31) AAT SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

(G31) AAT SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (G931) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Test
1. AAT SENSOR VOLTAGE BELOW 0.078 OF A VOLT

NOTE: Diagnose any CAN - C Communication DTCs before continuing.
With a scan tool, read the Ambient Air Temperature Sensor voltage.
Is the voltage below 0.078 of a volt?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECKING AAT SENSOR

Disconnect the Ambient Air Temperature Sensor harness connector.
With a scan tool, read the AAT Sensor voltage.
Yes >> Replace the Ambient Temperature Sensor.
No >> Go To 3
3. (G31) AAT SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

Disconnect the C2 FCM harness connectors.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (G31) AAT Signal cir-
cuit in the AAT Sensor harness connector.
Yes >> Repair the short to ground in the (G31) AAT Signal circuit.
No >> Go To 4
4. (G31) AAT SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (G931) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (G931) Sensor ground circuit and the (G31) AAT Signal circuit in the AAT Sen-
sor harness connector.
Yes >> Repair the short between the (G931) Sensor ground circuit and the (G31) AAT Signal circuit.
No >> Go To 5

Ground circuits.
No >> Replace and program the Front Control Module per Service Information.
P0073AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
With the ignition on. Battery voltage greater than 10 volts.
Set Condition:
The Ambient Temperature Sensor voltage is greater than 4.98 volts at the PCM for 2.8 seconds. One Trip
Fault. Three good trips to turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes
(G31) AAT SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE

(G31) AAT SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
(G931) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
Diagnostic Test
1. AAT SENSOR VOLTAGE ABOVE 4.98 VOLTS

With a scan tool, read the Ambient Air Temperature Sensor voltage.
Yes >> Go To 2
2. AAT SENSOR
Disconnect the Ambient Air Temperature Sensor harness connector.
Connect a jumper wire between the (G31) AAT Signal circuit and the
(G931) Sensor ground circuit in the AAT Sensor harness connector.
With a scan tool, read AAT Sensor voltage.
Yes >> Replace the Ambient Air Temperature Sensor.
No >> Go To 3
3. (G31) AAT SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE

Disconnect the C2 FCM harness connector.
Measure the voltage on the (G31) AAT Signal circuit in the AAT Sensor
harness connector.
Yes >> Repair the short to battery voltage in the (G31) AAT Signal
circuit.
No >> Go To 4
4. (G31) AAT SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (G31) AAT Signal circuit from the AAT
Sensor harness connector to the C2 FCM harness connector.
Yes >> Go To 5
No >> Repair the open in the (G31) AAT Signal circuit.
5. (G931) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (G931) Sensor ground circuit from the
AAT Sensor harness connector to the C2 FCM harness connector.
Yes >> Go To 6
No >> Repair the open in the (G931) Sensor ground circuit.

Ground circuits.
No >> Replace the Front Control Module per Service Information.
P0107-MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
Engine speed between 600 to 3500 RPM. Battery voltage greater than 10 volts.
Set Condition:
The MAP sensor signal voltage is below 0.0782 of a volt for 1.7 seconds. One Trip Fault. Three good trips to
turn off the MIL, (ETC light will flash.)
Possible Causes
(F856) 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT OPEN

(F856) 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(K1) MAP SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(K1) MAP SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (K900) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
MAP SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1. MAP SENSOR VOLTAGE BELOW 0.0782 OF A VOLT

With a scan tool, read the MAP Sensor voltage.
Yes >> Go To 2
2. (F856) 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT

Disconnect the MAP Sensor harness connector.
Measure the voltage on the (F856) 5-volt Supply circuit in the MAP
Is the voltage between 4.5 to 5.2 volts?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 6
3. MAP SENSOR
With a scan tool, monitor the MAP Sensor voltage with the Sensor harness connector disconnected.
Yes >> Replace the MAP Sensor.
No >> Go To 4
4. (K1) MAP SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (K1) MAP Signal cir-
cuit in the MAP Sensor harness connector.
Yes >> Repair the short to ground in the (K1) MAP Signal circuit.
No >> Go To 5
5. (K1) MAP SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (K900) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (K1) MAP Signal circuit and the
(K900) Sensor ground circuit in the MAP Sensor harness connector.
Yes >> Repair the short between the (K900) Sensor ground and
the (K1) MAP Signal circuit.
No >> Go To 8
6. (F856) 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (F856) 5-volt Supply circuit from the
MAP Sensor harness connector to the appropriate terminal of special
tool #8815.
Yes >> Go To 7
No >> Repair the open in the (F856) 5-volt Supply circuit.
7. (F856) 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (F856) 5-volt Supply
circuit in the MAP Sensor harness connector.
Yes >> Repair the short to ground in the (F856) 5-volt Supply cir-
cuit.
No >> Go To 8
8. PCM
Ground circuits.
P0108-MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Engine speed between 600 to 3500 RPM. Battery voltage greater than 10.37 volts.
Set Condition:
The MAP sensor signal voltage is greater than 4.92 volts for 3.0 seconds. One trip fault. Three good trips to
turn off the MIL. (ETC light will flash).
Possible Causes
(K1) MAP SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE

(K1) MAP SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
(K1) MAP SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (F856) 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT
(K900) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
MAP SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1. MAP SENSOR VOLTAGE ABOVE 4.92 VOLTS

Start the engine.
With a scan tool, read the MAP Sensor voltage.
Yes >> Go To 2
2. MAP SENSOR
Connect a jumper wire between the (K1) MAP Signal circuit and the
(K900) Sensor ground circuit in the Sensor harness connector.
With a scan tool, monitor the MAP Sensor voltage.
No >> Go To 3
3. (K1) MAP SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage on the (K1) MAP Signal circuit in the MAP Sensor
harness connector.
Yes >> Repair the short to battery voltage in the (K1) MAP Signal
circuit.
No >> Go To 4
4. (K1) MAP SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (K1) MAP Signal circuit from the MAP
Sensor harness connector to the appropriate terminal of special tool
#8815.
Yes >> Go To 5
No >> Repair the open in the (K1) MAP Signal circuit.
5. (K1) MAP SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (F856) 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (K1) MAP Signal circuit and the
(F856) 5-volt Supply circuit in the MAP Sensor harness connector.
Yes >> Repair the short between the (F856) 5-volt Supply circuit
and the (K1) MAP Signal circuit.
No >> Go To 6
6. (K900) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (K900) Sensor ground circuit from the
tool #8815.
Yes >> Go To 7
No >> Repair the open in the (K900) Sensor ground circuit.
7. PCM
Ground circuits.
P0111-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR RATIONALITY

Theory of Operation
Intake Air Temperature Sensor performance looks at the outputs of three temperature sensors and compares them
under cold start conditions. Following a start to run delay time, the outputs of the ambient, engine coolant, and
intake air temperature sensors will be compared. If the engine coolant and ambient air temperature sensors agree
and the intake air temperature does not agree, the intake air temperature sensor is declared as irrational.
When Monitored:
The engine off time is greater than 480 minutes. Ambient Temperature if greater than 4C (38F).
Set Condition:
After a calibrated amount of cool down time the PCM compares the ECT Sensor, IAT Sensor, and the Ambient
Air Temp Sensor values. If the IAT Sensor value is not within 10C of the other two temperature sensors. Two
Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes
(K21) IAT SIGNAL CIRCUIT HIGH RESISTANCE

(K900) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT HIGH RESISTANCE
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1. ACTIVE DTC
Yes >> Go To 2
2. IAT SENSOR VOLTAGE ABOVE 4.6 VOLTS

Disconnect the IAT Sensor harness connector.
With a scan tool, read the IAT voltage.
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 4
3. IAT SENSOR
Connect a jumper wire between the (K21) IAT Signal circuit and the
(K900) Sensor ground circuit in the IAT Sensor harness connector.
Yes >> Replace the IAT Sensor.
No >> Go To 4
4. (K21) IAT SIGNAL CIRCUIT HIGH RESISTANCE

Disconnect the C2 PCM harness connector.
the PCM terminals resulting in poor terminal to pin connection. Install Miller Special Tool #8815 along with
the #8815-1 to perform the diagnosis.
Using a voltmeter perform a voltage drop test. Backprobe the (K21) IAT Signal circuit at the IAT Sensor harness
connector to the appropriate terminal of the special tool #8815. Ensure the voltmeter leads are connected with the
circuits correct polarity.
Yes >> Go To 5
No >> Repair the high resistance in the (K21) IAT Signal circuit.
5. (K900) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT HIGH RESISTANCE

Using a voltmeter perform a voltage drop test. Backprobe the (K900) Sensor Ground circuit at the IAT Sensor har-
ness connector to the appropriate terminal of the special tool #8815. Ensure the voltmeter leads are connected with
the circuits correct polarity.
Yes >> Go To 6
6. PCM
Ground circuits.
P0112-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
With the ignition on and battery voltage greater than 10.4 volts.
Set Condition:
When the Inlet Air Temp Sensor Signal circuit voltage is less than .078 volt for more than 2.8 seconds. One
trip failure. Three good trips to clear the MIL.
Possible Causes
(K21) IAT SENSOR SIGNAL SHORTED TO GROUND

(K21) IAT SENSOR SIGNAL SHORTED TO (K900) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1. IAT SENSOR VOLTAGE BELOW 0.078 OF A VOLT

Yes >> Go To 2
2. IAT SENSOR
Disconnect the IAT Sensor harness connector.
With a scan tool, read IAT voltage.
Is the voltage above 4.5 of a volts?
Yes >> Replace the Intake Air Temperature Sensor.
No >> Go To 3
3. (K21) IAT SENSOR SIGNAL SHORTED TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (K21) IAT Sensor Sig-
nal circuit in the IAT Sensor harness connector.
Yes >> Repair the short to ground in the (K21) IAT Sensor Signal
circuit.
No >> Go To 4
4. (K21) IAT SENSOR SIGNAL SHORTED TO THE (K900) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (K21) IAT Sensor Signal circuit
and the (K900) Sensor ground circuit in the IAT Sensor harness con-
nector.
Yes >> Repair the short between the (K900) Sensor ground circuit
and the (K21) IAT Sensor Signal circuit.
No >> Go To 5
5. PCM
Ground circuits.
P0113-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
With the ignition on. Battery voltage greater than 10.4 volts.
Set Condition:
The Intake Air Temperature (IAT) sensor circuit voltage at the PCM goes above 4.98 volts for 2.8 seconds.
One Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes
(K21) IAT SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE

(K21) IAT SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
IAT SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1. IAT SENSOR VOLTAGE ABOVE 4.98 VOLTS

With a scan tool, read the Intake Air Temperature Sensor voltage.
Yes >> Go To 2
2. IAT SENSOR
Disconnect the Intake Air Temperature Sensor harness connector.
Connect a jumper wire between the (K21) IAT Signal circuit and the
(K900) Sensor ground circuit in the IAT Sensor harness connector.
With a scan tool, read the IAT Sensor voltage.
Yes >> Replace the IAT Sensor.
No >> Go To 3
3. (K21) IAT SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage on the (K21) IAT Signal circuit in the IAT Sensor
harness connector.
Yes >> Repair the short to battery voltage in the (K21) IAT Signal
circuit.
No >> Go To 4
4. (K21) IAT SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN

Disconnect the PCM harness connector.
Measure the resistance of the (K21) IAT Signal circuit from the IAT Sen-
sor harness connector to the appropriate terminal of special tool #8815.
Yes >> Go To 5
No >> Repair the open in the (K21) IAT Signal circuit.

IAT Sensor harness connector to the appropriate terminal of special tool
#8815.
Yes >> Go To 6
6. PCM
Ground circuits.
P0116ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Engine off time is greater than 480 minutes. Ambient temperature is greater than 4 C (38 F).
Set Condition:
After a calibrated amount of cool down time, the PCM compares the ECT Sensor, IAT Sensor and the Ambient
Air Temperature Sensor values. If the ECT Sensor value is not within calibrated temperature amount of the
other two temperature sensors an error is detected. Two Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn off the MIL. (ETC
lamp will illuminate with the MIL.)
Possible Causes
(K2) ECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT HIGH RESISTANCE

(K900) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT HIGH RESISTANCE
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1. ACTIVE DTC
Yes >> Go To 2
2. ECT SENSOR VOLTAGE ABOVE 4.6 VOLTS

Disconnect the ECT Sensor harness connector.
With a scan tool, read the ECT voltage.
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 4
3. ECT SENSOR
Connect a jumper wire between the (K2) ECT Signal circuit and the
(K900) Sensor ground circuit in the ECT Sensor harness connector.
Yes >> Replace the ECT Sensor.
No >> Go To 4
4. (K2) ECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT HIGH RESISTANCE

CAUTION: CAUTION: Do not probe the PCM harness connectors. Probing the PCM harness connectors will
damage the PCM terminals resulting in poor terminal to pin connection. Install Miller Special Tool #8815
along with the #8815-1 to perform the diagnosis.
Using a voltmeter perform a voltage drop test. Backprobe the (K2) ECT Signal circuit at the ECT Sensor harness
Yes >> Go To 5
No >> Repair the high resistance in the (K2) ECT Signal circuit.
5. (K900) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT HIGH RESISTANCE

Using a voltmeter perform a voltage drop test. Backprobe the (K900) Sensor Ground circuit at the ECT Sensor
harness connector to the appropriate terminal of the special tool #8815. Ensure the voltmeter leads are connected
with the circuits correct polarity.
Yes >> Go To 6
6. PCM
Ground circuits.
P0117-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor circuit voltage at the PCM is less than 0.078 of a volt for more
than 2.8 seconds. One Trip Fault. Three good trips to clear the MIL.
Possible Causes
(K2) ECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

(K2) ECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (K900) SENSOR GROUND
ECT SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1. ECT SENSOR VOLTAGE BELOW 0.078 OF A VOLT

Yes >> Go To 2
2. ECT SENSOR
Disconnect the ECT harness connector.
With a scan tool, read ECT voltage.
No >> Go To 3
3. (K2) ECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (K900) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (K900) Sensor ground circuit and
the (K2) ECT Signal circuit in the ECT Sensor harness connector.
Yes >> Repair the short to between the (K900) Sensor ground cir-
cuit and the (K2) ECT Signal circuit.
No >> Go To 4
4. (K2) ECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (K2) ECT Signal cir-
cuit in the ECT Sensor harness connector.
Yes >> Repair the short to ground in the (K2) ECT Signal circuit.
No >> Go To 5
5. PCM
Ground circuits.
P0118-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor circuit voltage at the PCM is greater than 4.98 volts for more
than 2.8 seconds. One Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn off the MIL. (ETC lamp will illuminate with the MIL.)
Possible Causes
(K2) ECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE

(K2) ECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
ECT SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1. ECT SENSOR VOLTAGE ABOVE 4.98 VOLTS

Yes >> Go To 2
2. ECT SENSOR
Disconnect the ECT harness connector.
Connect a jumper wire between the (K2) ECT Signal circuit and the
(K900) Sensor ground circuit in the ECT harness connector.
With a scan tool, read ECT voltage.
No >> Go To 3
3. (K2) ECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage on the (K2) ECT Signal circuit in the ECT Sensor
harness connector.
Is voltage present?
Yes >> Repair the short to battery voltage in the (K2) ECT Signal
circuit.
No >> Go To 4
4. (K2) ECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (K2) ECT Signal circuit from the ECT
#8815.
Yes >> Go To 5
No >> Repair the open in the (K2) ECT Signal circuit.

ECT Sensor harness connector to the appropriate terminal of special
tool #8815.
Yes >> Go To 6
6. PCM
Ground circuits.
P0121-THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Ignition on and No MAP Sensor DTCs set.
Set Condition:
TP Sensor signals do not correlate to the MAP Sensor signal. Two Trip Fault. ETC light will illuminate. P2135
should set with this code also.
Possible Causes
RESISTANCE IN THE (K22) TP SENSOR NO.1 OR (K122) TP SENSOR NO.2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT
RESISTANCE IN (F855) 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT
RESISTANCE IN THE (K922) SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT
(K22) TP SENSOR NO.1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (K122) TP SENSOR NO.2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR/THROTTLE BODY
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1. ACTIVE DTC
NOTE: Diagnose any other TP Sensor DTC(s) before continuing.
NOTE: The throttle plate should be free from binding and carbon build up, make sure the throttle plate is at
the idle position.
NOTE: Inspect the engine for vacuum leaks, repair before continuing.
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Go To 8
2. THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

Connect the PCM harness connectors.
With a scan tool, monitor the TP Sensor No.1 and No.2 voltage.
Connect a jumper wire between the (K922) Sensor Return circuit and
the (K22) TP Sensor No.1 Signal circuit.
NOTE: TP Sensor No.1 voltage should change from approximately
4.5 volts to less than 0.5 of a volt.
For TP Sensor No.2, connect a jumper wire between (F855) 5-volt sup-
ply circuit and the (K122) TP Sensor No.2 signal circuit.
NOTE: TP Sensor No.2 voltage should change from approximately
0 volts to 5.0 volts?
Is the voltage reading within the listed specification when the
jumper wire is installed?
Yes >> Replace the Throttle Body Assembly. Disconnect the Bat-
tery when replacing the Throttle Body Assembly. After
installation is complete, use a scan tool and select the ETC
RELEARN function.
No >> Go To 3
3. EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE IN THE (K22) TP SENSOR NO.1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT AND (K122) TP SENSOR
NO.2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT
the PCM terminals resulting in poor terminal to pin connection. Install Miller Special Tool #8815 along with
the #8815-1 to perform the diagnosis.
Using a voltmeter perform a voltage drop test. Backprobe the (K22) TP Sensor No.1 Signal circuit at the Throttle
Body harness connector to the appropriate terminal of the special tool #8815. Ensure the voltmeter leads are con-
nected with the circuits correct polarity.
Repeat the voltage drop test for the (K122) TP Sensor No.2 Signal circuit.
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Repair the excessive resistance in the (K22) TP Sensor No.1 Signal circuit or the (K122) TP Sensor
No.2 Signal circuit.
4. EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE IN THE (F855) 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT

Perform a voltage drop test. Backprobe the (F855) 5-volt Supply circuit at the Throttle Body harness connector to
the appropriate terminal of the special tool #8815. Ensure the voltmeter leads are connected with the circuits cor-
rect polarity.
Yes >> Go To 5
No >> Repair the excessive resistance in the (F855) 5-volt Supply circuit.
5. EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE IN THE (K922) SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT

Perform a voltage drop test. Backprobe the (K922) Sensor Return circuit at the Throttle Body harness connector to
the appropriate terminal of the special tool #8815. Ensure the voltmeter leads are connected with the circuits cor-
rect polarity.
Yes >> Go To 6
No >> Repair the excessive resistance in the (K922) Sensor Return circuit.
6. (K22) TP SENSOR NO.1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (K122) TP SENSOR NO.2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (K22) TP Sensor No.1 Signal cir-
cuit and the (K122) TP Sensor No.2 Signal circuit in the Throttle Body
harness connector.
Yes >> Repair the short between the (K122) TP Sensor No.2 Sig-
nal circuit and the (K22) TP Sensor No.1 Signal circuit.
No >> Go To 7
7. PCM
Ground circuits.
8. THROTTLE FOLLOWER TEST

With a scan tool, perform the Throttle Follower Test and monitor the TP Sensor No.1 or No.2 voltage.
Slowly press the throttle pedal down.
The voltage for TP Sensor No.1 should start at approximately 0.3 of a volt and increase to above 4.7 volts.
The voltage for TP Sensor No.2 should start at approximately 4.7 volts and decrease to approximately 0.3 of a volt.
Is the voltage within the range of the listed specification for the appropriate Sensor?
Yes >> Refer to the INTERMITTENT CONDITION Diagnostic Procedure.
No >> Disconnect the Battery when replacing the Throttle Body Assembly. Replace the Throttle Body Assem-
bly. After installation is complete, use a scan tool and select the ETC RELEARN function.
P0122-THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Throttle Position Sensor voltage at the PCM is less than 0.16 of a volt for 0.7 of a second. One Trip Fault.
Three good trips to turn off the MIL. ETC light will illuminate.
Possible Causes

(K22) TP SENSOR NO.1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(K22) TP SENSOR NO.1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (K922) SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1. ACTIVE DTC
NOTE: If a 5-Volt Supply DTC has also set, diagnose the 5-Volt DTC before continuing.
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Go To 10
2. P0222 ALSO SET

Was the P0222-TP SENSOR NO.2 VOLTAGE LOW DTC set along with the P0122?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 4

Disconnect the Throttle Body harness connector.
Measure the voltage on the (F855) 5-volt Supply circuit in the Throttle
Body harness connector.
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Go To 7

With a scan tool, monitor the TP Sensor No.1 voltage with the Sensor harness connector disconnected.
Yes >> Disconnect the Battery when replacing the Throttle Body Assembly. Replace the Throttle Body Assem-
bly. After installation is complete, using a scan tool select the ETC RELEARN function.
No >> Go To 5
5. (K22) TP SENSOR NO.1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (K22) TP Sensor No.1
Signal circuit in the Throttle Body harness connector.
Yes >> Repair the short to ground in the (K22) TP Sensor No.1
Signal circuit.
No >> Go To 6
6. (K22) TP SENSOR NO.1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (K922) SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT
cuit and the (K922) Sensor Return circuit in the Throttle Body harness
connector.
Yes >> Repair the short between the (K922) Sensor Return circuit
and the (K22) TP Sensor No.1 Signal circuit.
No >> Go To 9

to perform diagnostics.
Throttle Body harness connector to the appropriate terminal of special
tool #8815.
Yes >> Go To 8

circuit in the Throttle Body harness connector.
cuit.
No >> Go To 9
9. PCM
Ground circuits.

With a scan tool, perform the Throttle Follower Test.
Monitor the TP Sensor No.1 voltage.
Does voltage start at approximately 0.8 of a volt and go above 3.5 volts with a smooth transition?
bly. After installation is complete, using a scan tool select ETC RELEARN function.
P0123-THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Throttle Position Sensor No.1 voltage is greater than 4.8 volts for 25 ms. One Trip Fault. ETC light will illumi-
nate.
Possible Causes
(K22) TP SENSOR NO.1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE

(K22) TP SENSOR NO.1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
(K22) TP SENSOR NO.1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (F855) 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT
(K922) SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN
THROTTLE PLATE JAMMED AGAINST THE MAXIMUM STOP
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1. TP SENSOR NO.1 VOLTAGE ABOVE 4.8 VOLTS

NOTE: Make sure the throttle is fully closed and free from binding or carbon build up.
NOTE: If a 5-Volt Supply DTC has also set, diagnose the 5-Volt DTC before continuing.
NOTE: If P2101 is also set, then make sure that the blade moves freely and does not hang up near Wide
Open Throttle before trying to repair P0123.
Start the engine.
With a scan tool, read the TP Sensor No.1 voltage.
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Go To 8

Disconnect the Throttle Body harness connector.
Connect a jumper wire between the (K22) TP Sensor No.1 Signal cir-
cuit and the (K922) Sensor Return circuit in the Throttle Body harness
connector.
With a scan tool, monitor the TP Sensor No.1 voltage.
Is the voltage below 0.5 of a volt with the jumper wire
installed?
Yes >> Disconnect the Battery when replacing the Throttle Body
Assembly. Replace the Throttle Body Assembly. After instal-
lation is complete, using a scan tool, select the ETC
RELEARN function.
No >> Go To 3
3. (K22) TP SENSOR NO.1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage on the (K22) TP Sensor No.1 Signal circuit in the Throttle Body harness connector.
Is voltage present?
Yes >> Repair the short to battery voltage in the (K22) TP Sensor No.1 Signal circuit.
No >> Go To 4
4. (K22) TP SENSOR NO.1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (K22) TP Sensor No.1 Signal circuit from
the Throttle Body harness connector to the appropriate terminal of spe-
cial tool #8815.
Yes >> Go To 5
No >> Repair the open in the (K22) TP Sensor No.1 Signal circuit.
5. (K22) TP SENSOR NO.1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (F855) 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT
cuit and the (F855) 5-volt Supply circuit in the Throttle Body harness
connector.
Yes >> Repair the short between the (F855) 5-volt Supply circuit
and the (K22) TP Sensor No.1 Signal circuit.
No >> Go To 6
6. (K922) SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (K922) Sensor Return circuit from the
Throttle Body harness connector to the appropriate terminal of special
tool #8815.
Yes >> Go To 7
No >> Repair the open in the (K922) Sensor Return circuit.
7. PCM
Ground circuits.

With a scan tool, perform the Throttle Follower Test.
Monitor the TP Sensor No.1 voltage.
Does voltage start at approximately 0.3 of a volt and go above 4.7 volts with a smooth transition?
bly. After installation is complete, using a scan tool select the ETC RELEARN function.
P0125-INSUFFICIENT COOLANT TEMP FOR CLOSED-LOOP FUEL CONTROL

When Monitored:
With battery voltage greater than 10.4 volts and after engine is started.
Set Condition:
The engine temperature does not enable closed loop. Failure time depends on start-up coolant temperature
and ambient temperature. (i.e. 2 minutes for a start temp of 10C (50F) or up to 10 minutes for a vehicle with
a start-up temp of -28C (19F). Two Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes
LOW COOLANT LEVEL

THERMOSTAT
ECT SENSOR
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECKING COOLANT LEVEL AND CONDITION

NOTE: If an Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) DTC is set along with this code, diagnose the ECT DTC first.
NOTE: Inspect the ECT terminals and related PCM terminals. Make sure the terminals are free from corro-
sion and damage.
NOTE: The best way to diagnose this DTC is to allow the vehicle to sit overnight outside in order to have
a totally cold soaked engine.
NOTE: Extremely cold outside ambient temperatures may have caused this DTC to set.
WARNING: Never open the cooling system when the engine is hot. The system is under pressure. Extreme
burns or scalding may result. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury or death.
Allow the engine to cool before opening the cooling system.
Inspect the coolant system for proper level and condition.
Is the coolant level and condition OK?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> Inspect the vehicle for a coolant leak, make the appropriate repairs, and add the correct amount of
coolant.
2. THERMOSTAT OPERATION
NOTE: This test works best if performed on a cold engine (cold soak).
With a scan tool, read the Eng Coolant Temp Deg value. If the engine was allowed to sit overnight (cold soak), the
temperature value should be a sensible value that is somewhere close to the ambient temperature.
NOTE: If engine coolant temperature is above 82C (180F), allow the engine to cool until 65C (150F) is
reached.
Start the Engine.
During engine warm-up monitor the Eng Coolant Temp Deg value. The temp deg value change should be a smooth
transition from start up to normal operating temp 82C (180F). Also monitor the actual coolant temperature with a
thermometer.
NOTE: As the engine warms up to operating temperature, the actual coolant temperature (thermometer read-
ing) and the scan tool Eng Coolant Temp Deg values should stay relatively close to each other.
Using the appropriate service information, determine the proper opening temperature of the thermostat.
Did the thermostat open at the proper temperature?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Replace the thermostat.
3. ECT SENSOR OPERATION

With a scan tool, read the Eng Coolant Temp Deg value. If the engine was allowed to sit overnight (cold soak), the
temperature value should be a sensible value that is somewhere close to the ambient temperature.
reached.
Start the Engine.
During engine warm-up monitor the Eng Coolant Temp Deg value. The temp deg value change should be a smooth
transition from start up to normal operating temp 82C (180F). Also monitor the actual coolant temperature with a
thermometer.
ing) and the scan tools Eng Coolant Temp Deg value should stay relatively close to each other.
Is the thermometer reading relatively close to the scan tool ECT reading?
Yes >> Test Complete.
No >> Replace the Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor.
P0128-THERMOSTAT RATIONALITY

Theory of Operation
The PCM predicts what the engine coolant temperature should be, based on the engine coolant temperature at
start-up, ambient temperature and how the vehicle is subsequently driven. The predicted engine coolant tempera-
ture is compared to the Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor reading. The error between the two is calculated and
integrated with respect to time. When the Thermostat diagnostic runs, the integrated error is compared to a cali-
brated threshold and pass/fail is determined. Separate pass and fail thresholds are used in order to improve accu-
racy of the diagnostic.
When Monitored:
Engine running.
Set Condition:
The PCM predicts a coolant temperature value that it will compare to the actual coolant temperature. A sig-
nificant difference results in an error. Two Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes
LOW COOLANT LEVEL

THERMOSTAT OPERATION
SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (K900), (G931) SENSOR GROUND
OTHER POSSIBLE CAUSES
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1. ACTIVE DTC
NOTE: If any ECT, AAT, CMP or CKP sensor DTCs have set along with P0128, diagnose them before con-
tinuing.
NOTE: Make sure that the Pinion Factor has been programmed correctly into the PCM.
Yes >> Go To 2
2. LOW COOLANT LEVEL

NOTE: If an Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) DTC is set along with this code, diagnose the ECT DTC first.
NOTE: Inspect the ECT terminals and related PCM terminals. Make sure the terminals are free from corro-
sion and damage.
NOTE: The best way to diagnose this DTC is to allow the vehicle to sit overnight outside in order to have
a totally cold soaked engine.
NOTE: Extremely cold outside ambient temperatures may have caused this DTC to set.
WARNING: Never open the cooling system when the engine is hot. The system is under pressure. Failure to
follow these instructions can result in personal injury including extreme burns, scalding, or death. Allow the
engine to cool before opening the cooling system.
Check the coolant system to make sure that the coolant is in good condition and at the proper level.
Is the coolant level and condition OK?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Inspect the vehicle for a coolant leak and add the necessary amount of coolant.
3. THERMOSTAT OPERATION
With a scan tool, read the ECT Deg value. If the engine was allowed to sit overnight (cold soak), the temperature
value should be a sensible value that is somewhere close to the ambient temperature.
reached.
Start the Engine.
During engine warm-up, monitor the ECT Deg value. The temp deg value change should be a smooth transition
from start up to normal operating temp 82C (180F). Also monitor the actual coolant temperature with a thermom-
eter.
ing) and the scan tool, ECT Temperature value should stay relatively close to each other.
Using the appropriate service information, determine the proper opening temperature of the thermostat.
Did the thermostat open at the proper temperature?
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Replace the thermostat.
4. AMBIENT AIR TEMP SENSOR OPERATION

With a scan tool, read and record the AAT Sensor Temperature value.
Using the DRB Temperature Probe #CH7050, or an equivalent temperature measuring tool, measure the ambient air
temperature near the AAT Sensor.
Is the AAT Sensor value with -15C (5F) of the temperature probe reading?
Yes >> Go To 5
No >> Go To 7

WARNING: Make sure the engine cooling system is cool before removing the pressure cap or any hose. The
cooling system is pressurized when hot. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury
including extreme burns, scalding, or death.
With a scan tool, read and record the ECT Sensor Temperature value.
Use the DRB Temperature Probe #CH7050, or an equivalent temperature measuring tool, measure the engine cool-
ant temperature.
Is the ECT Sensor value with -15C (5F) of the temperature probe reading?
Yes >> Go To 6
No >> Go To 7
6. OTHER POSSIBLE CAUSES

Inspect the Temperature Sensors for any physical damage.
Inspect the engine coolant. Make sure the coolant is at the proper level. Refer to the Service Information COOLING.
Make sure the Temperature Sensors are properly installed.
Make sure the CMP and CKP sensors are installed properly. Check the connectors for any signs of damage.
With the engine running at normal operating temperature, monitor the Temperature sensor parameters while wig-
gling the wire harness. Look for parameter values to change.
Visually inspect the related wire harness. Look for any chafed, pierced, pinched, partially broken wires and broken,
bent, pushed out, or corroded terminals.
diagnosis.
Inspect and clean all PCM, engine, and chassis grounds.
7. SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE

NOTE: Visually inspect both the component and the PCM/FCM
connectors. Look for damage, partially broken wires and backed
out or corroded terminals
Disconnect the applicable Temperature Sensor harness connector.
Disconnect the applicable controller harness connectors.
Measure the voltage on the Signal circuit at the Temperature Sensor
harness connector.
Is voltage present?
Yes >> Repair the short to battery voltage in the Signal circuit.
No >> Go To 8
8. TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Connect the controller harness connectors.
Connect a jumper wire across Sensor harness connectors.
With a scan tool, read the Temperature Sensor voltage.
Does the voltage start at 5.0 volts and drop below 1.0 volt
when the jumper wire is installed?
Yes >> Replace the appropriate Temperature Sensor.
No >> Go To 9
NOTE: Disconnect the jumper wire before continuing.
9. SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN

diagnosis.
Measure the resistance of the Sensor Signal circuit Sensor harness connector to the appropriate terminal of special
tool #8815 or the FCM.
Yes >> Go To 10
No >> Repair the open in the Sensor Signal circuit.
10. SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the Sensor ground circuit from the appropri-
ate Temperature Sensor harness connector to the appropriate terminal
of special tool #8815 or the FCM.
Yes >> Go To 11
No >> Repair the open in the Sensor ground circuit.
11. SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the Sensor Signal circuit in the Temperature Sensor harness connec-
tor.
Yes >> Repair the short to ground in the Signal circuit.
No >> Go To 12
12. SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT

Measure the resistance between the Signal circuit and the Sensor
ground circuit in the Sensor harness connector.
Yes >> Repair the short between the Sensor ground circuit and the
Sensor Signal circuit.
No >> Go To 13
13. FCM/PCM
NOTE: Before continuing, check the FCM/PCM harness connector
terminals for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Repair as
necessary.
Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wire harness and
connectors. Pay particular attention to all Power and Ground cir-
cuits.
No >> Replace applicable Control Module per Service Information.
P0129-BAROMETRIC PRESSURE OUT-OF-RANGE LOW

When Monitored:
With the ignition key on. No Cam or Crank signal within 75 ms. Engine speed less than 250 RPM.
Set Condition:
The PCM senses the voltage from the MAP sensor to be less than 2.2 volts but above 0.04 of a volt for 300
milliseconds. One Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn off the MIL. (ETC lamp will flash)
Possible Causes
(F856) 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE

(K1) MAP SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
(K1) MAP SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(K1) MAP SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (K900) SENSOR GROUND
MAP SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1. ACTIVE DTC
Is the DTC active at this time.
Yes >> Go To 2

Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 7
3. MAP SENSOR
With a scan tool, monitor the MAP Sensor voltage with the Sensor harness connector disconnected.
No >> Go To 4
4. (K1) MAP SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (K1) MAP Signal circuit from the MAP
#8815.
Yes >> Go To 5
No >> Repair the open in the (K1) MAP Signal circuit.
5. (K1) MAP SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (K900) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
the (K1) MAP Signal circuit in the MAP Sensor harness connector.
Yes >> Repair the short between the (K900) Sensor ground circuit
and the (K1) MAP Signal circuit.
No >> Go To 6
6. (K1) MAP SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (K1) MAP Signal cir-
cuit in the MAP Sensor harness connector.
Yes >> Repair the short to ground in the (K1) MAP Signal circuit.
No >> Replace the Powertrain Control Module in accordance with
the Service information.
7. (F856) 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE

Yes >> Repair the short to battery voltage in the (F856) 5-volt Sup-
ply circuit.
No >> Go To 8

tool #8815.
Yes >> Go To 9

circuit in the MAP Sensor harness connector.
cuit.
No >> Go To 10
10. PCM
Ground circuits.
P0131-O2 SENSOR 1/1 CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
Engine running for less than 30 seconds and the O2 Sensor Heater Temperature is less than 251C (484F)
with battery voltage greater 10.4 volts.
Set Condition:
The oxygen sensor signal voltage is below 1.5 volts for 3 seconds after starting engine. One Trip Fault. Three
Possible Causes
(K902) O2 RETURN UPSTREAM CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

(K41) O2 1/1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(K41) O2 1/1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (K902) O2 RETURN UPSTREAM CIRCUIT
(K41) O2 1/1 SIGNAL SHORTED TO THE (Z904) O2 1/1 HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT
O2 SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1. O2 SENSOR BELOW 1.5 VOLTS

Start the engine.
Allow the engine to reach normal operating temperature.
With a scan tool, read the 1/1 O2 Sensor voltage.
Yes >> Go To 2
2. (K41) O2 SENSOR 1/1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT

With a scan tool, monitor the O2 Sensor voltage.
Is the 1/1 O2 Sensor voltage above 4.8 volts?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 5
3. O2 SENSOR
Measure the voltage on the (K902) O2 Return Upstream circuit in the
Is the voltage at 2.5 volts?
No >> Go To 4
4. (K902) O2 RETURN UPSTREAM CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (K902) O2 Upstream
Return circuit in the O2 Sensor harness connector.
Yes >> Repair the short to ground in the (K902) O2 Return
Upstream circuit.
No >> Go To 8
5. (K41) O2 SENSOR 1/1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (K41) O2 Sensor 1/1
Signal circuit in the O2 Sensor harness connector.
Yes >> Repair the short to ground in the (K41) O2 Sensor 1/1 Sig-
nal circuit.
No >> Go To 6
6. (K41) O2 SENSOR 1/1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (K902) O2 RETURN UPSTREAM CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (K41) O2 Sensor 1/1 Signal circuit
and the (K902) O2 Return Upstream circuit in the O2 Sensor harness
connector.
Yes >> Repair the short between the (K902) O2 Return Upstream
circuit and the (K41) O2 Sensor 1/1 Signal circuit.
No >> Go To 7
7. (K41) O2 SENSOR 1/1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Z904) O2 1/1 HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (K41) O2 Sensor 1/1 Signal circuit
and the (Z904) O2 1/1Heater ground circuit in the O2 Sensor harness
connector.
Yes >> Repair the short between the (Z904) O2 1/1 Heater ground
circuit and the (K41) O2 Sensor 1/1 Signal circuit.
No >> Go To 8
8. PCM
Ground circuits.
P0132-O2 SENSOR 1/1 CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
O2 Sensor Heater Temperature is greater than 496C (925F) and battery voltage greater than 10.4 volts.
Set Condition:
The Oxygen Sensor voltage is above 3.7 volts for 40 seconds. One Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn off the
MIL.
Possible Causes
(K41) O2 1/1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE

(K902) O2 UPSTREAM RETURN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
(K41) O2 1/1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
(K902) O2 UPSTREAM RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN
O2 SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1. O2 SENSOR ABOVE 3.7 VOLTS

NOTE: When only one O2 Sensor is shorted to voltage, the scan tool will display all O2 Sensor voltage
readings at approximately 5.0 volts. When diagnosing this DTC, only diagnose the O2 Sensor that set the
DTC.
Start the engine.
Yes >> Go To 2
2. (K41) O2 1/1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE

Start the engine and allow the engine to idle.
Measure the voltage on the (K41) O2 Sensor 1/1 Signal circuit in the
1/1 O2 Sensor harness connector.
NOTE: Measure the voltage in reference to ground, not the (K902)
O2 Upstream Return circuit.
Yes >> Repair the short to battery voltage in the (K41) O2 Sensor
1/1 Signal circuit.
No >> Go To 3
3. (K902) O2 UPSTREAM RETURN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage on the (K902) O2 Upstream Return circuit in the
Yes >> Repair the short to battery voltage in the (K902) O2
Upstream Return circuit.
No >> Go To 4
4. 1/1 O2 SENSOR
Connect a jumper wire between the (K41) O2 1/1 Signal circuit and the
(K902) O2 Upstream Return circuit in the O2 Sensor harness connec-
tor.
With a scan tool, monitor the 1/1 O2 Sensor voltage.
Is the voltage between 2.3 and 2.7 volts with the jumper wire
installed?
No >> Go To 5
5. (K41) O2 1/1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (K41) O2 1/1 Signal circuit from the 1/1
O2 Sensor harness connector to the appropriate terminal of special tool
#8815.
Yes >> Go To 6
No >> Repair the open in the (K41) O2 1/1 Signal circuit.
6. (K902) O2 UPSTREAM RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (K902) O2 Upstream Return circuit from
tool #8815.
Yes >> Go To 7
No >> Repair the open in the (K902) O2 Upstream Return circuit.
7. PCM
Ground circuits.
P0133-O2 SENSOR 1/1 SLOW RESPONSE

Theory of Operation
For an aged O2 sensor, the response rate to the air/fuel change is slower than when it was new. The O2 sensor
tends to move less with the same air/fuel changes in a given time frame. Therefore by observing the activity of
voltage readings from the upstream O2 sensor, the quality of the O2 sensor can be detected.
When Monitored:
Vehicle is started and driven between 20 and 55 MPH with the Throttle open for a minimum of 120 seconds.
Coolant greater than 70C (158F). Catalytic Converter Temp greater than 600C, (1112F) and EVAP Purge is
active.
Set Condition:
O2 Sensor response is too slow for a calibrated amount of time. Two Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn off the
MIL.
Possible Causes
EXHAUST LEAK
(K41) O2 1/1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT
(K902) O2 RETURN UPSTREAM CIRCUIT
O2 SENSOR
Diagnostic Test
1. ACTIVE DTC
NOTE: Check for contaminants that may have damaged the O2 Sensor: contaminated fuel, unapproved sil-
icone, oil and coolant.
NOTE: After the repairs have been made, verify proper O2 Sensor operation. If all the O2 Sensor voltage
readings have not returned to normal, follow the diagnostic procedure for the remaining O2 Sensors.
Yes >> Go To 2
2. EXHAUST LEAK
Start the engine.
Inspect the exhaust for leaks between the engine and the O2 Sensor.
If a leak is heard but unable to be located, it may be necessary to use special tool Miller Tool #8404A Evaporative
Emissions Leak Detector (EELD) on the exhaust system to find leaks.
Connect the SMOKE supply tip (black hose) to the exhaust cone adapter (if equipped) and place it into the tail pipe.
Set the smoke/air control switch to SMOKE.
Press the remote smoke/air start button.
While still holding the remote smoke/air start button, use the white light (#8404-CLL) to follow the EVAP system
path, and look for the source of the leak indicated by exiting smoke.
If a leak is concealed from view, release the remote smoke/air start button, and use the ultraviolet (UV) black light
#8404-UVL and the yellow goggles 8404-20 to look for residual traces of dye that is left behind by the smoke.
The exiting smoke deposits a residual fluid that is either bright green or bright yellow in color when viewed with a
UV light.
Be sure to check the exhaust manifold to cylinder head connection for leaks.
Are there any exhaust leaks?
Yes >> Repair or replace the leaking exhaust parts as necessary.
No >> Go To 3
3. (K41) O2 1/1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT HIGH RESISTANCE

Using a voltmeter perform a voltage drop test. Backprobe the (K41) O2 1/1 Signal circuit at the O2 Sensor harness
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Repair the high resistance in the (K41) O2 1/1 Signal circuit.
4. (K902) O2 RETURN CIRCUIT HIGH RESISTANCE

Using a voltmeter perform a voltage drop test. Backprobe the (K902) O2 Return circuit at the O2 Sensor harness
Yes >> Go To 5
No >> Repair the open in the (K902) O2 Return circuit.
5. O2 SENSOR
Repair
Replace the O2 Sensor
P0135-O2 SENSOR 1/1 HEATER PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Engine running and heater duty cycle greater than 0%. Battery voltage greater than 11.0 volts.
Set Condition:
No sensor output is received when the PCM powers up the sensor heater. Two trip fault. Three good trips to
turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes
(K99) O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT

(Z904) O2 1/1 HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT
O2 SENSOR HEATER ELEMENT
PCM
Diagnostic Test

the O2 Sensor voltage to stabilize between 4.6 and 5.0 volts.
Does the voltage stay above 4.5 volts?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. O2 SENSOR HEATER ELEMENT

NOTE: Allow the O2 sensor to cool down to room temperature.
Disconnect the O2 Sensor harness connector.
Measure the resistance of the O2 Heater Element across the 1/1 O2 Sensor connector between the O2 Heater
Control terminal and the Heater ground terminal.
Is the resistance of the O2 Sensor Heater Element between 2.0 and 30.0 ohms?
Yes >> Go To 3
3. (K99) O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH RESISTANCE

Disconnect the O2 harness connectors.
With the scan tool, actuate the O2 Heater.
Using a 12-volt test light connected ground, probe the (K99) O2 1/1 Heater Control circuit from the O2 harness
connector.
NOTE: The test light should be illuminated and bright. Compare the brightness to that of a direct connec-
tion to the battery.
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Repair the excessive resistance in the (K99) O2 1/1 Heater Control circuit.
4. (Z904) O2 1/1 HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT HIGH RESISTANCE

Using a 12-volt test light connected battery voltage, probe the (Z904) O2 Heater ground circuit in the O2 Sensor
harness connector.
Yes >> Go To 5
No >> Repair the excessive resistance in the (Z904) O2 1/1 Heater ground circuit.
5. PCM
Ground circuits.

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(K904) O2 DOWNSTREAM RETURN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

(K141) O2 1/2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (K904) O2 DOWNSTREAM RETURN CIRCUIT
(K141) O2 1/2 SIGNAL SHORTED TO THE (Z902) O2 1/2 HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT
O2 SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test

Start the engine.
Yes >> Go To 2
2. (K141) O2 1/2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT

Is the O2 Sensor voltage above 4.8 volts?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 5
3. O2 SENSOR
Measure the voltage on the (K904) O2 Downstream Return circuit in
the O2 Sensor harness connector.
No >> Go To 4
4. (K904) O2 DOWNSTREAM RETURN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (K904) O2 Down-
stream Return circuit in the O2 Sensor harness connector.
Yes >> Repair the short to ground in the (K904) O2 Downstream
Return circuit.
No >> Go To 8
5. (K141) O2 1/2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (K141) O2 1/2 Signal
circuit in the O2 Sensor harness connector.
Yes >> Repair the short to ground in the (K141) O2 1/2 Signal cir-
cuit.
No >> Go To 6
6. (K141) O2 1/2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (K904) O2 DOWNSTREAM RETURN CIRCUIT

Measure the resistance between the (K141) O2 1/2 Signal circuit and
the (K904) O2 Downstream Return circuit in the O2 Sensor harness
connector.
Yes >> Repair the short between the (K904) O2 Downstream
Return circuit and the (K141) O2 1/2 Signal circuit.
No >> Go To 7
7. (K141) O2 1/2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (Z902) O2 1/2 HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT
the (Z902) O2 1/2 Heater ground circuit in the O2 Sensor harness con-
nector.
circuit and the (K141) O2 1/2 Signal circuit.
No >> Go To 8
8. PCM
Ground circuits.

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
MIL.
Possible Causes

(K904) O2 DOWNSTREAM RETURN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
(K141) O2 1/2 SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
(K904) O2 DOWNSTREAM RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN
O2 SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test

DTC.
Start the engine.
Yes >> Go To 2

O2 Downstream Return circuit.
1/2 Signal circuit.
No >> Go To 3
3. (K904) O2 DOWNSTREAM RETURN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE

Yes >> Repair the short to battery voltage in the (K904) O2 Down-
stream Return circuit.
No >> Go To 4
4. O2 SENSOR
Connect a jumper wire between the (K141) O2 1/2 Signal circuit and
the (K904) O2 Downstream Return circuit in the 1/2 O2 Sensor harness
connector.
installed?
No >> Go To 5

Measure the resistance of the (K141) O2 1/2 Signal circuit from the O2
#8815.
Yes >> Go To 6
6. (K904) O2 DOWNSTREAM RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (K904) O2 Downstream Return circuit
from the O2 Sensor harness connector to the appropriate terminal of
special tool #8815.
Yes >> Go To 7
No >> Repair the open in the (K904) O2 Downstream Return cir-
cuit.
7. PCM
Ground circuits.

When Monitored:
Coolant greater than 70C (158F). Catalytic Converter Temp greater than 600C (1112F) and EVAP Purge is
active.
Set Condition:
The oxygen sensor signal voltage switches less than 16 times from lean to rich within 20 seconds during mon-
itoring. Two Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes
EXHAUST LEAK
(K904) O2 DOWNSTREAM RETURN CIRCUIT
O2 SENSOR
Diagnostic Test
1. ACTIVE DTC
Yes >> Go To 2
2. EXHAUST LEAK
Start the engine.
UV light.
No >> Go To 3

Yes >> Go To 4

Yes >> Go To 5
5. O2 SENSOR
Repair
Replace the O2 Sensor

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes

(Z902) O2 HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT
PCM
Diagnostic Test

Yes >> Go To 2

Measure the resistance of the O2 Heater Element across the O2 Sensor connector between the O2 Heater Control
terminal and the Heater ground terminal.
Yes >> Go To 3

connector.
Yes >> Go To 4
4. (Z902) O2 1/2 HEATER GROUND CIRCUITHIGH HIGH RESISTANCE

harness connector.
Yes >> Go To 5
No >> Repair the excessive resistance in the (Z902) O2 1/2 Heater ground circuit.
5. PCM
Ground circuits.

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(K902) O2 UPSTREAM RETURN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

(K43) O2 2/1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (K902) O2 UPSTREAM RETURN CIRCUIT
(K43) O2 2/1 SIGNAL SHORTED TO THE (Z904) HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT
O2 SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test

Start the engine.
Yes >> Go To 2

Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 5
3. O2 SENSOR
Yes >> Replace the 2/1 O2 Sensor.
No >> Go To 4
4. (K902) O2 UPSTREAM RETURN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (K902) O2 Upstream
Return circuit in the O2 Sensor harness connector.
Yes >> Repair the short to ground in the (K902) O2 Upstream
Return circuit.
No >> Go To 8

cuit.
No >> Go To 6
6. (K43) O2 2/1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (K902) O2 UPSTREAM RETURN CIRCUIT

Measure the resistance between the (K43) O2 2/1 Signal circuit and the
tor.
Yes >> Repair the short between the (K902) O2 Upstream Return
No >> Go To 7
7. (K43) O2 2/1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (Z904) HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT

Measure the resistance between the (K43) O2 2/1 Signal circuit and the
(Z904) O2 Heater ground circuit in the O2 Sensor harness connector.
Yes >> Repair the short between the (Z904) O2 Heater ground cir-
cuit and the (K43) O2 2/1 Signal circuit.
No >> Go To 8
8. PCM
Ground circuits.

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
MIL.
Possible Causes

(K902) O2 UPSTREAM RETURN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
(K902) O2 UPSTREAM RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN
O2 SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test

DTC.
Start the engine.
Yes >> Go To 2

O2 Upstream Return circuit.
2/1 Signal circuit.
No >> Go To 3
3. (K902) O2 UPSTREAM RETURN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE

Yes >> Repair the short to battery voltage in the (K902) O2
Upstream Return circuit.
No >> Go To 4
4. O2 SENSOR
Connect a jumper wire between the (K43) O2 2/1 Signal circuit and the
tor.
in place?
No >> Go To 5

Measure the resistance of the (K43) O2 2/1 Signal circuit from the 2/1
O2 Sensor harness connector to the appropriate terminal of special tool
#8815.
Yes >> Go To 6
6. (K902) O2 UPSTREAM RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (K902) O2 Upstream Return circuit from
tool #8815.
Yes >> Go To 7
No >> Repair the open in the (K902) O2 Upstream Return circuit.
7. PCM
Ground circuits.

Theory of Operation
For an aged O2 sensor , the response rate to the air/fuel change is slower than when it was new. The O2 sensor
tends to move less with the same air/fuel changes in a given time frame. Therefore by observing the activity of
voltage readings from the upstream O2 sensor, the quality of the O2 sensor can be detected.
When Monitored:
Coolant greater than 70C (158F). Catalytic Converter Temp greater than 600C, (1112F) and EVAP Purge is
active.
Set Condition:
O2 Sensor response is too slow for a calibrated amount of time. Two Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn off the
MIL.
Possible Causes
EXHAUST LEAK
(K902) O2 UPSTREAM RETURN CIRCUIT
O2 SENSOR
Diagnostic Test
1. ACTIVE DTC
With a scan tool, read DTCs and record the related Freeze Frame data.
Yes >> Go To 2
2. EXHAUST LEAK
Start the engine.
UV light.
No >> Go To 3

Yes >> Go To 4

Yes >> Go To 5
5. O2 SENSOR
Repair
Replace the O2 Sensor.

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes

(Z904) O2 HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT
PCM
Diagnostic Test

Yes >> Go To 2

Measure the resistance of the O2 Heater Element across the O2 Sensor connector between the O2 Heater Control
terminal and the O2 Heater ground terminal.
Yes >> Go To 3

connector.
Yes >> Go To 4
4. (Z904) O2 SENSOR HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT HIGH RESISTANCE

harness connector.
Yes >> Go To 5
No >> Repair the excessive resistance in the (Z904) O2 Heater ground circuit.
5. PCM
Ground circuits.

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(K904) O2 DOWNSTREAM RETURN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

(K243) O2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (K904) O2 DOWNSTREAM RETURN CIRCUIT
(K243) O2 SIGNAL SHORTED TO THE (Z902) O2 2/2 HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT
O2 SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test

Start the engine.
Yes >> Go To 2

Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 5
3. O2 SENSOR
Measure the voltage on the (K904) O2 Donwstream Return circuit in
No >> Go To 4
4. (K904) O2 DOWNSTREAM RETURN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (K904) O2 Down-
stream Return circuit in the O2 Sensor harness connector.
Yes >> Repair the short to ground in the (K904) O2 Downstream
Return circuit.
No >> Go To 8

cuit.
No >> Go To 6
6. (K243) O2 2/2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (K904) O2 DOWNSTREAM RETURN CIRCUIT
the (K904) O2 Dowstream Return circuit in the O2 Sensor harness con-
nector.
Yes >> Repair the short between the (K904) O2 Downstream
Return circuit and the (K243) O2 2/2 Signal circuit.
No >> Go To 7
7. (K243) O2 2/2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (Z902) O2 2/2 HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT
the (Z902) O2 2/2 Heater ground circuit in the O2 Sensor harness con-
nector.
No >> Go To 8
8. PCM
Ground circuits.

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
MIL.
Possible Causes
(K243) O22/2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE

(K904) O2 DOWNSTREAM RETURN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
(K904) O2 DOWNSTREAM RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN
O2 SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test

DTC.
Start the engine.
Yes >> Go To 2

O2 Downstream Return circuit.
2/2 Signal circuit.
No >> Go To 3
3. (K904) O2 DOWNSTREAM RETURN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE

the 2/2 O2 Sensor harness connector.
Yes >> Repair the short to battery voltage in the (K904) O2 Down-
stream Return circuit.
No >> Go To 4
4. O2 SENSOR
Connect a jumper wire between the (K243) O2 2/2 Signal circuit and
the (K904) O2 Downstream Return circuit in the 2/2 O2 Sensor harness
connector.
installed?
No >> Go To 5

Measure the resistance of the (K243) O2 2/2 Signal circuit from the O2
#8815.
Yes >> Go To 6
6. (K904) O2 DOWNSTREAM RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (K904) O2 Downstream Return circuit
from the O2 Sensor harness connector to the appropriate terminal of
special tool #8815.
Yes >> Go To 7
No >> Repair the open in the (K904) O2 Downstream Return cir-
cuit.
7. PCM
Ground circuits.

When Monitored:
Coolant greater than 70C (158F). Catalytic Converter Temp greater than 600C (1112F) and EVAP Purge is
active.
Set Condition:
The oxygen sensor signal voltage switches less than 16 times from lean to rich within 20 seconds during mon-
itoring. Two Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes
EXHAUST LEAK
(K904) O2 DOWNSTREAM RETURN CIRCUIT
O2 SENSOR
Diagnostic Test
1. ACTIVE DTC
Yes >> Go To 2
2. EXHAUST LEAK
Start the engine.
UV light.
No >> Go To 3

Yes >> Go To 4

Yes >> Go To 5
5. O2 SENSOR
Repair
Replace the O2 Sensor.

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes

(Z902) O2 2/2 HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT
PCM
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING.
Diagnostic Test

With a scan tool, monitor 2/2 O2 Sensor voltage for at least 2 minutes.
Yes >> Go To 2

Measure the resistance of the 2/2 O2 Heater Element, between the O2 Heater Control terminal and the O2 Heater
ground terminal in the O2 Sensor connector.
Yes >> Go To 3

connector.
Yes >> Go To 4
4. (Z902) O2 2/2 HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT

harness connector.
Yes >> Go To 5
No >> Repair the excessive resistance in the (Z902) O2 Heater ground circuit.
5. PCM
Ground circuits.
P0171-FUEL SYSTEM 1/1 LEAN

When Monitored:
With the engine running in closed loop mode, the ambient/battery temperature above 20. F and altitude below
8500 ft.
Set Condition:
If the PCM multiplies short term compensation by long term adaptive and a certain percentage is exceeded for
two trips, a freeze frame is stored, the MIL illuminates and a trouble code is stored. Two Trip Fault. Three good
trips to turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes
RESTRICTED FUEL SUPPLY LINE

FUEL PUMP INLET STRAINER PLUGGED
FUEL PUMP MODULE
O2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT
O2 RETURN CIRCUIT
O2 SENSOR HEATER OPERATION
O2 SENSOR
MAP SENSOR OPERATION
ECT SENSOR OPERATION
ENGINE MECHANICAL PROBLEM
FUEL FILTER/PRESSURE REGULATOR (HIGH)
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1. ACTIVE DTC
Diagnose all other trouble codes before continuing.
NOTE: Check for contaminants that may have damaged an O2 Sensor: contaminated fuel, unapproved sil-
Yes >> Go To 2
2. CHECKING FUEL PRESSURE

WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before testing or ser-
vicing any fuel system hose, fitting or line, the fuel system pressure must be released. Failure to follow
these instructions can result in personal injury or death.
Install a fuel pressure gauge to the fuel rail.
With a scan tool, actuate the ASD Fuel System test and observe the fuel pressure gauge.
NOTE: Fuel pressure specification is 407 KPa +/- 34 KPa (59 psi +/- 5 psi).
CAUTION: Stop All Actuations.
Choose a conclusion that best matches your fuel pressure reading.
Within Specification
Go To 3
Above Specification
Replace the fuel filter/pressure regulator.
Below Specification
Go To 12
3. O2 SENSOR OPERATION
Start the engine.
NOTE: If one of the O2 Sensors Signal or Return circuit is shorted to ground the scan tool will display all
O2 Sensor voltage readings low. The O2 Sensor that is shorted to ground will display a voltage reading
near or at 0 volts.
NOTE: If one of the O2 Sensor Signal or Return circuits are shorted to voltage, the scan tool will display all
O2 Sensor voltage readings high.
With a scan tool, monitor all of the O2 Sensor voltage readings.
Is the voltage switching between 2.5 and 3.4 volts for all the O2 Sensors?
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Go To 8
4. 1/1 O2 SENSOR HEATER OPERATION

With a scan tool, actuate the 1/1 O2 Heater Test.
No >> Go To 5
5. MAP SENSOR OPERATION

Connect a Vacuum Gauge to a Manifold Vacuum source.
Start the engine.
Allow the engine to idle.
NOTE: If engine will not idle, maintain a constant RPM above idle.
With the scan tool, read the MAP Sensor vacuum value.
Is the scan tool reading within 1( of the Vacuum Gauge reading?
Yes >> Go To 6
No >> Replace the MAP Sensor.

NOTE: For this test to be valid, the thermostat must be operating correctly.
With a scan tool, read the Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor value. If the engine was allowed to sit over-
night (cold soak), the temperature value should be a sensible value that is somewhere close to the ambient tem-
perature.
reached.
Start the Engine.
During engine warm-up, monitor the ECT Sensor value. The temperature value change should be a smooth tran-
sition from start up to normal operating temperature 82C (180F). The value should reach at least 82C (180F).
Did the ECT value increase smoothly and did it reach at least 180F (82C)?
Yes >> Go To 7
7. ENGINE MECHANICAL PROBLEM

Check for any of the following conditions/mechanical problems.
AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM - must be free from leaks.
ENGINE VACUUM - must be at least 13 inches in neutral.
ENGINE VALVE TIMING - must be within specifications.
ENGINE COMPRESSION - must be within specifications.
ENGINE EXHAUST SYSTEM - must be free of any restrictions or leaks.
ENGINE PCV SYSTEM - must flow freely.
TORQUE CONVERTER STALL SPEED - must be within specifications.
POWER BRAKE BOOSTER - no internal vacuum leaks.
FUEL - must be free of contamination.
FUEL INJECTOR - plugged or restricted injector; control wire not connected to correct injector.
Are there any engine mechanical problems?
No >> Go To 11
8. 1/1 O2 SENSOR
O2 Sensor voltage should read 5.0 volts on the scan tool with the con-
nector disconnected.
Connect a jumper wire between the (K41) Signal circuit and the (K902)
O2 Upstream Return circuit in the O2 Sensor harness connector.
NOTE: The voltage should drop from 5.0 volts to 2.5 volts with the
jumper wire in place.
Did the O2 Sensor voltage change from 5.0 volts to 2.5 volts
with the jumper wire installed?
No >> Go To 9

With a scan tool, monitor the 1/1 O2 Sensor voltage reading with the
jumper wire removed.
NOTE: The scan tool will display all O2 Sensor voltage readings
approximately 5.0 volts when only one O2 Sensors Signal circuit
is shorted to voltage.
NOTE: The scan tool will display one O2 Sensor voltage close to
zero and the others will read lower than normal when one O2 Sen-
sor Signal circuit contains excessive resistance.
Yes >> Go To 10
No >> Check the (K41) O2 Sensor 1/1 Signal circuit for a short to
ground, open, or short to voltage. Inspect the O2 Sensor
connector and the PCM harness connector. If OK, replace
and program the Powertrain Control Module per Service
Information.
10. (K902) O2 UPSTREAM RETURN CIRCUIT

Yes >> Go To 11
No >> Check the O2 Return circuit for a short to ground, open, or
short to voltage. Inspect the O2 Sensor connector and the
PCM harness connector. If OK, replace and program the
Powertrain Control Module per Service Information.
11. PCM
Ground circuits.
12. RESTRICTED FUEL SUPPLY LINE

Raise vehicle on hoist, and disconnect the fuel pressure line at the fuel pump module.
Install special 5/16 fuel line adapter tool #6539 between disconnected fuel line and the fuel pump module.
Attach a fuel pressure test gauge to the T fitting on tool #6539.
With a scan tool, actuate the ASD Fuel System test and observe the fuel pressure gauge.
Is the fuel pressure within specification?
Yes >> Repair or replace fuel supply line as necessary.
No >> Go To 13
13. FUEL PUMP INLET STRAINER

vicing any fuel system hose, fitting or line, the fuel system pressure must be released.
Remove the Fuel Pump Module and inspect the Fuel Inlet Strainer.
Is the Fuel Inlet Strainer plugged?
Yes >> Replace the Fuel Pump Inlet Strainer.
No >> Go To 14
14. FUEL PUMP MODULE

Repair
Replace the Fuel Pump Module.
P0172-FUEL SYSTEM 1/1 RICH

When Monitored:
With the engine running in closed loop mode, the ambient/battery temperature above 20. F and altitude below
8500 ft.
Set Condition:
If the PCM multiplies short term compensation by long term adaptive and a purge fuel multiplier and the result
is below a certain value for 30 seconds over two trips, a freeze frame is stored, the MIL illuminates and a
trouble code is stored. Two Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes

EVAP PURGE SOLENOID OPERATION
O2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT
O2 RETURN CIRCUIT
O2 SENSOR
MAP SENSOR
ECT SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1. ACTIVE DTC
NOTE: Check for contaminates that may have damaged an O2 Sensor: contaminated fuel, unapproved sil-
Yes >> Go To 2

With the scan tool, actuate the ASD Fuel System test and observe the fuel pressure gauge.
Go To 3
Above Specification
Start the engine.
NOTE: If one of the O2 Sensors Signal or Return circuit is shorted to ground or voltage, all the other O2
Sensor voltage readings will be affected.
With the scan tool, monitor the 1/1 O2 Sensor voltage reading.
Is the voltage switching between 2.5 and 3.4 volts?
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Go To 9

With the scan tool, perform the 1/1 O2 Heater Test.
With the scan tool, monitor the O2 Sensor voltage while performing the Heater test for at least 2 minutes.
Does the voltage stay above 4.5 volts during the Heater test?
No >> Go To 5

Start the engine.
With a scan tool, read the MAP Sensor vacuum value.
Yes >> Go To 6
NOTE: Remove the vacuum gauge before continuing.

With a scan tool, read the Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor value. If the engine was allowed to sit overnight
(cold soak), the temperature value should be a sensible value that is somewhere close to the ambient temperature.
reached.
Start the Engine.
During engine warm-up, monitor the Engine Coolant Temperature value. The temp value change should be a
smooth transition from start up to normal operating temp 82C (180F). The value should reach at least 82C
(180F).
Did the ECT value increase smoothly and reach at least 180F (82C)?
Yes >> Go To 7
7. EVAP PURGE SOLENOID OPERATION

Disconnect the hoses at the Evap Purge Solenoid.
Using a hand vacuum pump, apply 10 inches of vacuum to the Evap Purge Solenoid vacuum source port on the
component side.
Did the Evap Purge Solenoid hold vacuum?
Yes >> Go To 8
No >> Replace the EVAP Purge Solenoid.
NOTE: Connect the vacuum hoses before continuing.

AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM - must be free from restrictions.
No >> Go To 12
9. 1/1 O2 SENSOR
NOTE: Perform the following test on the O2 Sensors whose volt-
age was not switching properly in the previous step.
Connect a jumper wire between the (K41) O2 Sensor 1/1 Signal circuit
and the (K902) O2 Upstream Return circuit in the O2 Sensor harness
connector.
NOTE: The voltage should drop from 5.0 volts down to 2.5 volts
with the jumper wire connected.
Did the O2 Sensor voltage drop from 5 volts to 2.5 volts when
the jumper wire was installed?
Yes >> Replace the 1/1 O2 Sensor
No >> Go To 10

Start the engine.
Yes >> Check the (K41) O2 Sensor 1/1 Signal circuit for damage,
short to ground, open, or short to voltage. Inspect the O2
Sensor connector and the PCM harness connector. If OK,
replace and program the Powertrain Control Module per
No >> Go To 11
11. (K902) O2 SENSOR UPSTREAM RETURN CIRCUIT

Engine still running.
Yes >> Go To 12
No >> Check the (K902) O2 Upstream Return circuit for damage,
NOTE: Turn the ignition off before continuing.
12. PCM
Ground circuits.
P0174-FUEL SYSTEM 2/1 LEAN

When Monitored:
With the engine running in closed loop mode, the ambient/battery temperature above 20 F and altitude below
8500 ft.
Set Condition:
If the PCM multiplies short term compensation by long term adaptive and a certain percentage is exceeded for
two trips, a freeze frame is stored, the MIL illuminates and a trouble code is stored. Two Trip Fault. Three good
trips to turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes
RESTRICTED FUEL SUPPLY LINE

FUEL PUMP INLET STRAINER PLUGGED
FUEL PUMP MODULE
O2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT
O2 RETURN CIRCUIT
O2 SENSOR
MAP SENSOR OPERATION
ECT SENSOR OPERATION
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1. ACTIVE DTC
Diagnose all other trouble codes before continuing.
NOTE: Check for contaminants that may have damaged an O2 Sensor: contaminated fuel, unapproved sil-
Yes >> Go To 2

Go To 3
Above Specification
Below Specification
Go To 12
Start the engine.
NOTE: If one of the O2 Sensors Signal or Return circuit is shorted to ground the scan tool will display all
O2 Sensor voltage readings low. The O2 Sensor that is shorted to ground will display a voltage reading
near or at 0 volts.
NOTE: If one of the O2 Sensor Signal or Return circuits are shorted to voltage, the scan tool will display all
O2 Sensor voltage readings high.
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Go To 8

NOTE: Perform the following test on all O2 Sensors.
With a scan tool, actuate the 2/1 O2 Heater Test.
No >> Go To 5

Start the engine.
Yes >> Go To 6

With the scan tool, read the Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor value. If the engine was allowed to sit
overnight (cold soak), the temperature value should be a sensible value that is somewhere close to the ambient
temperature.
reached.
Start the Engine.
During engine warm-up, monitor the ECT Sensor value. The temperature value change should be a smooth tran-
sition from start up to normal operating temperature 82C (180F). The value should reach at least 82C (180F).
Did the ECT value increase smoothly and did it reach at least 180F (82C)?
Yes >> Go To 7

AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM - must be free from leaks.
No >> Go To 11
8. O2 SENSOR
With the scan tool, monitor the 2/1 O2 Sensor voltage.
connector.
NOTE: The voltage should drop from 5.0 volts to 2.5 volts with the
jumper wire in place.
Did the O2 Sensor voltage change from 5.0 volts to 2.5 volts
when the jumper wire was installed?
No >> Go To 9
9. O2 SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT

With the scan tool, monitor all the O2 Sensor voltage reading with the
jumper wire removed.
NOTE: The scan tool will display all O2 Sensor voltage readings
approximately 5.0 volts when only one O2 Sensors Signal circuit
is shorted to voltage.
NOTE: The scan tool will display one O2 Sensor voltage close to
zero and the others will read lower than normal when one O2 Sen-
sor Signal circuit contains excessive resistance.
Yes >> Go To 10
No >> Check all the O2 Signal circuits for a short to ground, open,
or short to voltage. Inspect the O2 Sensor connector and
the PCM harness connector. If OK, replace and program
the Powertrain Control Module per Service Information.
10. (K902) O2 UPSTREAM RETURN CIRCUIT

Yes >> Go To 11
No >> Check the (K902) O2 Upstream Return circuit for a short to
ground, open, or short to voltage. Inspect the O2 Sensor
connector and the PCM harness connector. If OK, replace
and program the Powertrain Control Module per Service
Information.
11. PCM
Ground circuits.
12. RESTRICTED FUEL SUPPLY LINE

Raise vehicle on hoist, and disconnect the fuel pressure line at the fuel pump module.
Install special 5/16 fuel line adapter tool #6539 between disconnected fuel line and the fuel pump module.
Attach a fuel pressure test gauge to the T fitting on tool #6539.
Is the fuel pressure within specification?
Yes >> Repair or replace fuel supply line as necessary.
No >> Go To 13
13. FUEL PUMP INLET STRAINER

vicing any fuel system hose, fitting or line, the fuel system pressure must be released.
Remove the Fuel Pump Module and inspect the Fuel Inlet Strainer.
Is the Fuel Inlet Strainer plugged?
Yes >> Replace the Fuel Pump Inlet Strainer.
No >> Go To 14
14. FUEL PUMP MODULE

Repair
Replace the Fuel Pump Module.
P0175-FUEL SYSTEM 2/1 RICH

When Monitored:
With the engine running in closed loop mode, the ambient/battery temperature above 20 F and altitude below
8500 ft.
Set Condition:
If the PCM multiplies short term compensation by long term adaptive and a purge fuel multiplier and the result
is below a certain value for 30 seconds over two trips, a freeze frame is stored, the MIL illuminates and a
trouble code is stored. Two Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes

EVAP PURGE SOLENOID OPERATION
O2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT
O2 RETURN CIRCUIT
O2 SENSOR
MAP SENSOR
ECT SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1. ACTIVE DTC
NOTE: Check for contaminates that may have damaged an O2 Sensor: contaminated fuel, unapproved sil-
Yes >> Go To 2

Go To 3
Above Specification
Start the engine.
NOTE: If one of the O2 Sensors Signal or Return circuit is shorted to ground or voltage, all the other O2
Sensor voltage readings will be affected.
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Go To 9

With the scan tool, perform the 2/1 O2 Heater Test for each O2 Sensor.
With the scan tool, monitor the 2/1 O2 Sensor voltage while performing the Heater test for at least 2 minutes.
Does the voltage stay above 4.5 volts for each Sensor?
No >> Go To 5

Start the engine.
Yes >> Go To 6
NOTE: Remove the vacuum gauge before continuing.

With the scan tool, read the Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor value. If the engine was allowed to sit overnight
(cold soak), the temperature value should be a sensible value that is somewhere close to the ambient temperature.
reached.
Start the Engine.
During engine warm-up, monitor the Engine Coolant Temperature value. The temp value change should be a
smooth transition from start up to normal operating temp 82C (180F). The value should reach at least 82C
(180F).
Did the ECT value increase smoothly and reach at least 180F (82C)?
Yes >> Go To 7
7. EVAP PURGE SOLENOID OPERATION

Disconnect the hoses at the Evap Purge Solenoid.
Using a hand vacuum pump, apply 10 inches of vacuum to the Evap Purge Solenoid vacuum source port on the
component side.
Did the Evap Purge Solenoid hold vacuum?
Yes >> Go To 8
No >> Replace the EVAP Purge Solenoid.
NOTE: Connect the vacuum hoses before continuing.

AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM - must be free from restrictions.
No >> Go To 12
9. 2/1 O2 SENSOR
With the scan tool, monitor the 2/1 O2 Sensor voltage.
connector.
NOTE: The voltage should drop from 5.0 volts down to 2.5 volts
with the jumper wire connected.
Did the O2 Sensor voltage drop from 5 volts to 2.5 volts when
the jumper wire was installed?
Yes >> Replace the O2 Sensor
No >> Go To 10
10. O2 SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT

Start the engine.
Yes >> Check the (K43) O2 Sensor 2/1 Signal circuit for damage,
No >> Go To 11
11. (K902) O2 SENSOR UPSTREAM RETURN CIRCUIT

Engine still running.
Yes >> Go To 12
No >> Check the (K902) O2 Upstream Return circuit for damage,
NOTE: Turn the ignition off before continuing.
12. PCM
Ground circuits.
P0196ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Engine off time is greater than 480 minutes. Ambient temperature is greater than 4C (38 F).
Set Condition:
The PCM detects the Engine Oil Temp value is incorrect by comparing it with the other engine inputs. Three
Possible Causes
(G224) ENGINE OIL TEMP SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE

(G224) ENGINE OIL TEMP SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
(G224) ENGINE OIL TEMP SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(G224) ENGINE OIL TEMP SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (K900) SENSOR GROUND
ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1. ACTIVE DTC
Yes >> Go To 2
2. ENGINE OIL TEMP SIGNAL CIRCUIT

Disconnect the Engine Oil Temp Sensor harness connector.
Measure the voltage on the (G224) Engine Oil Temp Signal circuit in the Engine Oil Temp Sensor harness connec-
tor.
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 4
3. (K900) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT

Measure the resistance between ground and the (K900) Sensor Ground circuit in the Engine Oil Temp Sensor har-
ness connector.
Yes >> Replace the Engine Oil Temperature Sensor.
No >> Go To 8
4. (G224) ENGINE OIL TEMP SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE

NOTE: Visually inspect both the component and the PCM connec-
tors. Look for damaged, partially broken wires, and backed out or
corroded terminals.
Measure the voltage on the (G224) Engine Oil Temp Signal circuit in
the Engine Oil Temp Sensor harness connector.
Is voltage present?
Yes >> Repair the short to battery voltage in the (G224) Engine Oil
Temp Signal circuit.
No >> Go To 5
5. (G224) ENGINE OIL TEMP SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (G224) Engine Oil Temp Signal circuit
from the Engine Oil Temp Sensor harness connector to the appropriate
terminal of special tool #8815.
Yes >> Go To 6
No >> Repair the open in the (G224) Engine Oil Temp Signal cir-
cuit.
6. (G224) ENGINE OIL TEMP SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (G224) Engine Oil
Temp Signal circuit in the Engine Oil Temp Sensor harness connector.
Yes >> Repair the short to ground in the (G224) Engine Oil Temp
Signal circuit.
No >> Go To 7
7. (G224) ENGINE OIL TEMP SIGNAL SHORTED TO THE (K900) SENSOR GROUND
Measure the resistance between the (G224) Engine Oil Temp Signal
circuit and the (K900) Sensor ground circuit in the Engine Oil Temp
Yes >> Repair the short between the (K900) Sensor ground and
the (G224) Engine Oil Temp Signal circuit.
No >> Go To 9

Engine Oil Temp Sensor harness connector to the appropriate terminal
of special tool #8815.
Yes >> Go To 9
9. PCM
Ground circuits.
P0197-ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Engine Oil Temperature sensor circuit voltage at the PCM is less than the calibrated amount. One Trip
Fault. Three good trips to clear the MIL.
Possible Causes
(G224) ENGINE OIL TEMP SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

(G224) ENGINE OIL TEMP SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (K900) SENSOR GROUND
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1. ACTIVE DTC
Yes >> Go To 2
2. ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR

With the scan tool, clear the DTC.
Does the P0198-ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH set?
Yes >> Replace the Engine Oil Temp Sensor.
No >> Go To 3
3. (G224) ENGINE OIL TEMP SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (K900) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
the (G224) Engine Oil Temp Signal circuit in the Engine Oil Temp Sen-
Yes >> Repair the short to between the (K900) Sensor ground cir-
cuit and the (G224) Engine Oil Temp Signal circuit.
No >> Go To 4
4. (G224) ENGINE OIL TEMP SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (G224) Engine Oil
Temp Signal circuit in the Engine Oil Temp Sensor harness connector.
Yes >> Repair the short to ground in the (G224) Engine Oil Temp
Signal circuit.
No >> Go To 5
5. PCM
Ground circuits.
P0198-ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Engine Oil Temperature sensor circuit voltage at the PCM is greater than the calibrated amount. One Trip
Fault. Three good trips to turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes
(G224) ENGINE OIL TEMP SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE

(G224) ENGINE OIL TEMP SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1. ACTIVE DTC
IS the DTC active at this time?
Yes >> Go To 2
2. ENGINE OIL TEMP SENSOR

With the scan tool, clear the DTC.
Connect a jumper wire between the (G224) Engine Oil Temp Signal cir-
cuit and the (K900) Sensor ground circuit in the Engine Oil Temp Sen-
Does the P0197-ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
LOW DTC set?
Yes >> Replace the Engine Oil Temp Sensor.
No >> Go To 3
3. (G224) ENGINE OIL TEMP SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage on the (G224) Engine Oil Temp Signal circuit in
the Engine Oil Temp Sensor harness connector.
Yes >> Repair the short to battery voltage in the (G224) Engine Oil
Temp Signal circuit.
No >> Go To 4
4. (G224) ENGINE OIL TEMP SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (G224) Engine Oil Temp Signal circuit
from the Engine Oil Temp Sensor harness connector to the appropriate
terminal of special tool #8815.
Yes >> Go To 5
No >> Repair the open in the (G224) Engine Oil Temp Signal cir-
cuit.

Engine Oil Temp Sensor harness connector to the appropriate terminal
of special tool #8815.
Yes >> Go To 6
6. PCM
Ground circuits.
P0201-FUEL INJECTOR 1 CIRCUIT

When Monitored:
With battery voltage greater than 10 volts. Auto Shutdown Relay energized. Engine speed less than 3000 rpm.
Set Condition:
No inductive spike is detected after injector turn off.
Possible Causes
(K343) ASD RELAY OUTPUT 2 CIRCUIT

(K11) INJECTOR CONTROL NO.1 CIRCUIT OPEN
(K11) INJECTOR CONTROL NO.1 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
FUEL INJECTOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1. ACTIVE DTC
Yes >> Go To 2
2. (K33) ASD RELAY OUTPUT 2 CIRCUIT

Disconnect the No.1 Fuel Injector harness connector.
With the scan tool, actuate the ASD Relay.
Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, backprobe the (K343)
ASD Relay Output 2 circuit in the Fuel Injector harness connector.
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Repair the excessive resistance or short to ground in the
(K343) ASD Relay Output 2 circuit.
3. FUEL INJECTOR
Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, backprobe the (K11)
Injector Control No.1 circuit.
With the scan tool, actuate the Fuel Injector.
What is the state of the test light during the actuation?
Brightly Blinking.
Replace the Fuel Injector.
ON Constantly.
Go To 4
OFF Constantly.
Go To 5
4. (K11) INJECTOR CONTROL NO.1 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (K11) Injector Control
No.1 circuit in the Injector harness connector.
Yes >> Repair the short to ground in the (K11) Injector Control
No.1 circuit.
No >> Go To 6
5. (K11) INJECTOR CONTROL NO.1 CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (K11) Injector Control No.1 circuit from
the Fuel Injector harness connector to the appropriate terminal of spe-
cial tool #8815.
Yes >> Go To 6
No >> Repair the open in the (K11) Injector Control No.1 circuit.
6. PCM
Ground circuits.

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes

FUEL INJECTOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1. ACTIVE DTC
Yes >> Go To 2

ASD Relay Output 2 circuit in the No.2 Fuel Injector harness connector.
Yes >> Go To 3
(K343) ASD Relay Output 2 circuit.
3. FUEL INJECTOR
Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, backprobe the (K12)
Injector Control No.2 circuit.
With the scan tool, actuate the No.2 Fuel Injector.
Brightly Blinking.
ON Constantly.
Go To 4
OFF Constantly.
Go To 5

No.2 circuit.
No >> Go To 6

cial tool #8815.
Yes >> Go To 6
6. PCM
Ground circuits.

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes

FUEL INJECTOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1. ACTIVE DTC
Yes >> Go To 2

ASD Relay Output 2circuit in the No.3 Fuel Injector harness connector.
Yes >> Go To 3
(K343) ASD Relay Output 2circuit.
3. FUEL INJECTOR
Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, backprobe the (K13) Injector Control No.3 circuit.
With the scan tool, actuate the No.3 Fuel Injector.
Brightly Blinking.
ON Constantly.
Go To 4
OFF Constantly.
Go To 5

No.3 circuit.
No >> Go To 6

cial tool #8815.
Yes >> Go To 6
6. PCM
Ground circuits.

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes

(K14)

Dodge Charger PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Dodge Charger PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GROUP TAB LOCATOR

0 Lubrication & Maintenance

3 Differential & Driveline

4 Vehicle Quick Reference

8E Electronic Control Modules

8Q Vehicle Theft Security

13 Frame & Bumpers

24 Heating & Air Conditioning

Component and System Index

Service Manual Comment Forms (Rear of Manual)

BODY CODE PLATE METRIC SYSTEM

BODY CODE PLATE

The Body Code Plate is located in the engine com-

BODY CODE PLATE

BODY CODE PLATE LINE 3

Interior Trim Code

DIGITS 20, 21, AND 22

BODY CODE PLATE LINE 2

Vehicle Order Number

DIGITS 13, THROUGH 15

Vinyl Roof Code

Vehicle Shell Line

BODY CODE PLATE LINE 1

Vehicle Identification Number

IF TWO BODY CODE PLATES ARE REQUIRED

Bolt Markings 8.8/8.9 10.9 12.9

Bolt Markings and Torques - U. S. Customary

Bolt Markings Grade 5 Grade 8

MULTIPLY BY TO GET MULTIPLY BY TO GET

COMMON METRIC EQUIVALENTS

1 inch = 25 Millimeters 1 Cubic Inch = 16 Cubic Centimeters

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

VIN DECODING INFORMATION

POSITION INTERPRETATION CODE = DESCRIPTION

2 Make B = Dodge (Sedan)

4 = Multipurpose Passenger Vehicle

POSITION INTERPRETATION CODE = DESCRIPTION

H = Restraint System Air bags

J = Restraint System Air Bags Front

E = 3001- 4000 lbs. (1361- 1814)

A = 300 / 300C / SRT-8/ Charger

K = 300 / 300C (AWD) (LWD)

3 = 4 Door Sedan Tall

POSITION INTERPRETATION CODE = DESCRIPTION

D = 3.0L V-6 cyl. Turbo Diesel

G = 3.5L V-6 cyl. High Output 24

9 Check Digit 0 through 9 or X

10 Model Year 6 = 2006

11 Assembly Plant H = Brampton Assembly

Six Digit Number Assigned By

VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL

LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

INTERNATIONAL SYMBOLS FLUID CAPACITIES

PARTS AND LUBRICANT RECOMMENDATIONS

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Component Fluid, Lubricant, and Genuine Part

API QUALITY CLASSIFICATION

Association des Constructeurs Europens d Automobiles (European Automobile Manufacturers Association)

API SERVICE GRADE CERTIFIED

ENERGY CONSERVING OIL

Standard engine oil identification notations have been

SYNTHETIC ENGINE OILS

ENGINE OIL ADDITIVES/SUPPLEMENTS